The Witch of Staten Island

In the time of 1827, there were two soldiers who just came back from a furious war. They were in the Navy, but they ran away because they did not want to get injured, or worse, killed! They needed to find some shelter because there was a terrible storm going on. They found a little cabin in the country, which was the only shelter in sight.

The two soldiers went into the little cabin to spend the night. When they started to settle in the cabin, they heard something moaning in the kitchen cabinet. The two soldiers walked into the kitchen slowly without making any noise. They opened the kitchen cabinet and just like that –

“Ahhh!”

One of the soldiers was gone!

The soldier who was still there looked in the cabinet, and the only thing that he saw was a dead body in the hands of a creepy doll. He went to look out the window to see if the storm was still going on, but the only thing that he saw in the window was a witch. The soldier locked all the doors and all of the windows, locked himself in one room with a window, found a pitch black blanket, and hid under it.

Everything was quiet. The soldier pulled the covers off of him, and the window swung open. The soldier walked up to the window. He watched what he thought was a horse going into the bushes, but then he saw the creepy old witch go into the bushes! He watched the whole scene. The witch jumped into the bushes, and she came out with horse ribs. She put them on the water, and they floated away.

The soldier carefully put the blanket away, quietly walked out of the tiny haunted cabin, and followed the witch into the distance. When the witch reached her destination, it seemed like she was talking to a black shadow that was shaped like a bull, but it seemed like they got into a fight (it got physical).

The shadow dude started stabbing the creepy witch! The creepy witch pulled the shadow’s tongue out and walked away, but the storm was still going on. At the same place that they were, a tree got struck by lightning! The tree fell down and hit both of them. The witch got up and got really angry, and the witch pulled out the shadow’s heart and lungs and ate it.

THE END! HAVE A NICE DAY!  

Election Day

It was Election Day, November 18, 3046, on a Tuesday. Millions of people were entering the building to vote. Security guard George Mudd was standing at the entrance, checking people’s bags and their election passes. He looked at his watch, there were two hours until the election started. An old woman with a childlike look ran towards the door. She was running towards the booths in the next room.

“Hey you, I need to see your pass!” She gave him the pass and was about to walk off until the security guard said, “Hey, don’t think you can fool me. You’re just dressed up as a…”

“I am not a girl!!!” she shouted in her most elderly voice.

“Yes you are,” he shouted back.

“No I’m not,” she shouted again.

“Okay, you can go in, but I’m going to send another guard to supervise.”

As George Mudd sat back into his chair he was doubting his decision. Should I have let her in? Will something go wrong? Who is she? Is she going to hurt the candidates?

Meanwhile, while they were arguing, another man named Bob the Builder, who was an old man, passed through the doors without being seen. He sneaked down the aisle and went into the room where Eve Vil was preparing her speech in front of Camila Higgins.

“I think everyone should learn the English language, people should have unity, and there should be the same human rights for everyone.”

“Great! I’ll be waiting for you in a hour.”

When she left, Eve Vil said to herself, “I don’t care about unity, everybody will worship me, and there will be no human rights. HAHAHA.”

Hearing that, Bob the Builder jumped out of his hiding spot and, with his knife, stabbed Eve Vil multiple times. She dropped to the floor, and blood was splattered everywhere. He dragged her quietly to the closet, quickly put on his costume, and walked through the back door that led to the voting room. He grabbed his walker and opened the doors of the voting room and was about to step out of the building when the security guard said, “The voting hasn’t begun yet.”  

“I know,” he said in his regular voice, forgetting that he was an old man, and walked out. Bob the Builder slowly started walking back to his house.

In the voting room, the two candidates were going to give their speeches.

“Hello, our presidents will be making their speeches. First, Nacho Cheese will speak.”

“I think that all nachos should be half price and nachos should be free to the poor to end hunger. I also think there should be unity and justice for the country.”

Camila Higgins came running over to the interviewer screaming, “Eve Vil is dead!”

George Mudd jumped up out of his seat and ran over to where Eve Vil was preparing. There was a knife in her body. Then, he knew who it probably was: it was the old man who left the voting room before it started. The security guard ran toward the exit. He looked around. He didn’t see anything. He ran down the block and saw the man enter a building. He dashed toward the building. Bob the Builder started running too. Bob the Builder made a sharp turn at the next block and hid in a restaurant. He ended up in a kitchen. No one saw him. After a few minutes, he quietly and quickly walked back to his house, taking another route.

George stopped running. He realized Bob the Builder wasn’t an old man. He was only dressed up as an old man. He had lost him.

He walked back to the election building. Just as he sat down, a girl came out of the voting booths, carried out by the two security guards.

“I knew she was a girl,” he said. “Call her mom and send her home.”

The two security guards grabbed a taxi to drive her home. When she got home she was grounded for two weeks. The guards came back to the voting room, sat on the couch, and fell asleep. George Mudd knew that he failed to do his job. His job was to protect people. He put his head down on the table and next time he knew had to be more vigilant.

In the voting room Nacho Cheese was screaming, “I won! I won! I’m the only candidate! I won!” People around him were miserable. People were booing. He didn’t care. He was just celebrating by shooting Nacho Cheese everywhere.

The End

Quest for the Overworld

Book 1

Jeb was an individual alone on a wheat farm with Rufus, a dog, and Snuggles, a cat. His wheat farm was located in a small village called the Legancine Village, in Minecraft. Jeb had built an iron golem guardian to guard the village, as no one in the village liked attacks by zombies. One day, Jeb wandered into a portal in the forest, built with iron and gold around it. Jeb was very suspicious, as he knew Minecraft: His friend Notch had created Minecraft, and he knew he hadn’t added a portal like this. This was unusual. Suddenly, Jeb felt a tug on his arm, like the force was saying, come with me! The force had pushed him into the portal! Jeb closed his eyes, fearful and curious about what would happen next.

-A few minutes later-

Jeb suddenly woke up in a whole new world. He saw nothing, only black landscapes all around him.

This is strange Jeb thought. I know Notch wouldn’t create something so dangerous like this. He had lost six whole hearts on his fall down to this strange, creepy world. He only had two hearts left, and if something attacked him, he knew he would respawn, which would not be good. He also knew he had to regen, so he waited and ate three pieces of steak out of eight total, which he always kept in his inventory, for an emergency. He also considered EATING his diamond sword, but he decided that diamond would not taste so good. So, instead, he put his diamond sword away in his inventory. Suddenly, two people dressed in leather armour appeared right in front of Jeb. This was very surprising to Jeb, and he fell backward in surprise.

“We need your help,” one said. “I’m Steve, and she’s Lucy.” He pointed to his co-conspirator rudely, and said, “The silver dragons of the Overworld have taken over the overworld! We need your help!” He looked like he was desperate. Looking at the man’s eyes, Jeb couldn’t feel anything but sorry for him.

Finally, he decided. “OK, I’ll help you.” So, Steve, Lucy, and Jeb started off to the QUEST OF THE OVERWORLD. Steve and Lucy led Jeb to their shelter, a small home in the middle of a small forest. It was pretty simple, with a small porch made of wood overlooking a small garden, and the walls of the home, stone. Once everyone was inside, Steve closed the door. Jeb admired it. He adored it. It was a small, cozy house, with two beds in the middle of the home, with a small couch in the corner. Suddenly, a big blast knocked the room violently, back and forth. It felt like an earthquake, except a thousand times bigger. At last, when Jeb and the others could stand up, they found the couch turned upside-down, and the beds knocked to the corner of the room. A small lamp was shattered, on the floor. Jeb was shocked. What just happened? Lucy immediately ran to the computer, which now, lay a small, broken screen, even though she could still use it. She turned on the news.

“OH MY GOSH!” Lucy yelled. She turned the volume up to high.

“Breaking news: The Overworld has crashed into the Underworld! The most dreaded place, the Underworld has intercepted through!” The headline of the news said. Meanwhile, Steve was grabbing binoculars, potions, armour, TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and other stuff. This was bad. This never happened, and it was probably the worst thing to happen.

“What’s going on?” Jeb asked, and Lucy turned her head to say, “Griefers have taken over the Overworld!” she says.

“What are griefers?” Jeb questioned again.

“Oh, griefers are evil people sent from the evil world of the Underworld. They are people with scary outfits, and they like kidnapping people because they’re evil. The Overworld would turn evil with them!” said Lucy.

Just then, Steve called out, “Time to go!” The three friends set off for a quest of the Overworld.

-2 Days Later-

“Shh,” Steve urged Lucy and Jeb, “They’re coming to the Overworld.”

Suddenly, Steve yelled, “The griefers are here!” Steve, Lucy, and Jeb started throwing TNT blocks everywhere, far away, aiming at the marching griefers.

“Probably all of the griefers in the Underworld are here to launch the attack,” Lucy said. Some of the griefers exploded, but, most of the griefers managed to escape because of Steve’s call. The griefers had escaped their first attempt.

“NO!” Steve yelled. The plan was that Steve, Lucy, and Jeb would hide behind a big boulder, and while the griefers were coming, they would throw TNT at them and explode them. But, the problem was Steve had called too early, and that warned the griefers to escape. “We have to try another way. We need to think outside-the-box,” Jeb said thoughtfully. The group journeyed to Steve and Lucy’s house, careful not to let the griefers see them. Thankfully, they were headed in the opposite direction.

“Okay, so, we’re going to go to the Underworld by using the Potion of Invisibility, and we’re going to blow up the main headquarters of the griefers to destroy the people behind this,” Steve says. The group was at Lucy and Steve’s house. Jeb thought this was a relatively good idea, as a make-up, since Steve messed up the first attempt. It was good. So, after the plan, Steve, Lucy, and Jeb set off with TNT and Potions of Invisibility. After a long journey to the border of the Overworld, which was now crushed, they drank Potions of Invisibility to get past the griefers that were guarding the border of the Underworld. It was now also crushed and littered with human bones. But the problem was there was no big gap between the griefers, and there was no way they could get past them. The potion was wearing out. Suddenly, Jeb took out his diamond sword, and with three clear strikes aimed carefully and destroyed two griefers.

Then he whispered to Steve and Lucy, “Run!” And they ran. As fast as they could.

-A Few Hours Later-

“Hmm, I think the headquarters are somewhere here, in this thick forest,” Steve says. They were wandering into a thick forest, with a large mountain at the side and a map with the recorded route to the headquarters. Steve had grabbed it from one of the griefers when they were running away.

“Smart thinking,” Lucy said after they were out of the danger zone. They rounded the corner of a small tree and found a large building, smack right in the middle of the forest. It was huge. The group snuck in with their hands gripped onto their swords, ready for any surprise attack. Suddenly, there was a rustling noise from above. Three silver dragons appeared in front of them, startling them. Their scales were so glittery in the light that the group was almost blinded by them. Their claws were huge; one strike from it could give you a huge cut all the way from your neck to your waist. Jeb immediately started swinging his sword, and with seven clear strikes he destroyed one dragon. Meanwhile, Steve and Lucy were each fighting one dragon, but their swords weren’t powerful enough. They had only iron swords, so Jeb ran in to help them. Steve was fighting this tremendously powerful beast, and with four more strikes killed dragon number two. Then, Steve and Jeb ran to help Lucy, who was losing fast. With three strikes from Jeb’s sword and with five strikes from Steve’s sword, they were able to kill beast number three.   

The group stopped for a breather. Jeb suddenly realized that if the dragons were guarding the entrance, the griefers and the dragons must be together. Suddenly, the group heard a muffling noise and someone shouting, “HELP!” Jeb recognized that voice. He could recognize it anywhere. It was Notch, his long lost friend that had created Minecraft! He was captured! That’s when Jeb began to realize something bad. If Notch was captured… then who was controlling Minecraft? Was it the griefers who made the portal? No. This couldn’t be. Jeb tried to think in a different way, but he wouldn’t stop thinking about this situation. At last, he decided to ask Notch about this.

“Come on! My friend Notch is the creator of Minecraft, and he’s trapped! We have to save him!” Jeb said to Steve and Lucy. As the group sprinted in, Jeb was determined to get out of the moist forest. His face was like an overripe strawberry. He wasn’t used to this kind of pressure. The group sprinted to the jail cells. It was a horrifying sight: the fortress was very dark inside, with only damp lights lighting the halls. Spiderwebs covered the damp walls, making the fortress look like a dungeon. Notch was sitting there, tied and gagged. Jeb immediately opened the door of the jail cell. While Lucy and Steve untied the ropes on the legs, Jeb worked on the tape covering Notch’s mouth.

When he finally got it off of him, Notch yelled, “Oh, Jeb, I am so glad to see you! Jeb, the griefers have a secret weapon! They’re about to launch it on the Overworld!”

“SHHHHH!!!” Steve said, trying not to alert the guards outside the fortress. But it was too late. The yell had alerted the guards. Within seconds, alarms went off and guards started storming the halls.

“WHO’S THERE?” one of the guards yelled loudly, as Jeb, Notch, Steve, and Lucy opened the sewer grate and climbed in. Lucy was the last one to climb down, so she pushed the sewer grate back into position.

-A Few Minutes Later-

How long do we have to be here? Forever? Steve wondered.

Suddenly, Lucy yelled, “Hey, look at the grate above! There’s a helicopter up there! It must be a landing pad. I think that’s our way out of this place!” She looked excited.

The group carefully removed the sewer grate, making sure not to trigger any alarms. If they did, the griefers could hunt them down in seconds. The grate finally cracked, and then it moved. They climbed out. Carefully. Lucy pointed to the helicopter quietly, using only motions, not words. The group sprinted quietly up to the helicopter. They looked inside. Steve opened the door, and led them inside. Notch was in the cockpit, on the wheel. He had created Minecraft, so he knew how to operate these things. The others sat in the passenger seats, and Jeb took the guns. Notch started the engines, and the propellers started spinning. Takeoff!

The helicopter lifted off the ground, and flew higher and higher. Suddenly, six fighter jets appeared from the building, startling Notch. The helicopter flew out of his control, spinning wildly off the ground. The fighter jets opened fire. Jeb knew he only had one chance to push these fighter jets to the ground. The helicopter was spinning, lower and lower. The propellers were stopping. Suddenly, Jeb found all six of the fighter jets in his target. PTOOM! PTOOM! KABOOM! For a second it looked like all the fighter jets were shot. Then two fighter jets flew out of the black smoke, alarming everyone, especially Jeb. Suddenly, the helicopter started up its engines again. Notch grabbed the wheel and put it back on course for the Overworld. The helicopter was back in control. The helicopter steadied itself, and began to gain speed. Yet the two fighter jets were following close behind, firing at them. Two of the bullets made their way to the tail, and blew it up, which made the helicopter lose control again. There was almost no hope now. Jeb was targeting one of the fighter jets, and four of the bullets reached the jet. The jet spun wildly out of control, hit the ground hard, and exploded. Meanwhile, the other jet followed closely behind, opening fire again. The helicopter was just a few feet off the ground.

“Hang on!” Notch yelled, as the helicopter was knocked onto the ground, engines smoking. The group evacuated out the burning helicopter very quickly. Within seconds of their quick escape, the helicopter burst into flames. Notch checked his compass. They were only about a half a mile away from the Overworld. Jeb pulled out his gun and shot the remaining jet which was speeding toward them, opening fire again. It fell to the ground, bursting into flames. Suddenly, there was an earsplitting sound. PERSHOOM! KABOOM!

“What was that?” Jeb questioned, even though everyone heard it. With that, the group sprinted as fast as they could to the Overworld.

-In The Overworld-

“Stop the shield!” The group heard someone yell. A purple mist started reducing. The group ran in, not knowing what was happening at the moment. The group had finally reached the Overworld after a long journey. Jeb looked at the Overworld, terrified of what was unfolding before him. Trees were on fire, and the skyscraper, that was once the tallest building in the city, was now just a pile of burning metal. The other buildings in the city were on fire, too, with nothing to save them. Jeb saw a group of people that must be the people of the Overworld. They ran in, meeting the Overworld.

One of the people from the Overworld was telling Steve and Lucy, “We suffered another attack from the griefers while you were away!” Jeb heard them say, “That’s why we built this laser shield generator to shield us from their attacks!” Suddenly, in the middle of their quick reunion, another HUGE blast.

“Quick, get in!”

The group heard someone yell, “They’re coming!” The group ran in, and the generator started glowing. A purple mist shot out, immune to the shield and the people of the Overworld. A huge blast came; this one was the biggest of all: PERSHOOM KABOOM!!! A fierce blue laser shot through the griefer’s headquarters, then to the Overworld. It was targeting the city of the Overworld! Unfortunately, the shield was not powerful enough to block the laser beam. After ten seconds, the shield flickered and gave way.

“OH, NO!” Someone yelled. The people of the Overworld ran… and ran… and ran…

-A Few Hours Later-

The people of Minecraft teleported them back because they found out the incident of what happened to the Overworld, being taken over by the griefers. The people of the Lagancine Village decided to fix this, so they made the most ultimate weapon of all: The Ultimate Ender Pearl to teleport them to safety. The landscape was a bright, blue sky with healthy trees. The group was teleported to the entrance of the Legancine Village. The bunch of houses, farms, and other things were there at the Legancine Village. The group discussed where Steve and Lucy were going to live now, while Steve, Lucy and the other people of the Overworld, watched in terror as their world collapsed to pieces in the portal.

They gasped and said together, “It’s a nightmare.” The city bursted into flames. Jeb finally decided that Steve and Lucy could live at his house, with six bedrooms and three guest bedrooms open to them. Jeb felt grateful about this.

“Thanks, Jeb,” Steve said. “As a present for saving us, I could tend the crops for you.” Jeb smiled, but it was a smile with an expression that was sad for them. He wasn’t only sad about their home, he was also sad because after this long, intense journey, the group was covered from head to toe with bruises and cuts.  Even their clothes were worn with soot from the crashed helicopter and fortress escape. It was a long, good friendship. They were heroes of the day. Notch returned to making Minecraft and deleted the portal.   

Jungle Story

In a hole in the ground, there lived a hobbit. Everyone feared him. Legends had been told that if you went in that hole, you would never come out. But not all legends are true…

“Hello, Samantha, how are you doing on this fine day?” John asked.

“I am doing very well, thank you,” Samantha replied. “Great day to take a walk. Would you like to come along with me?”

“I would love to go anywhere with you,” John said. “IAN!”

“Yes sir.”

“Do my job here at the front desk of the Italy Hotels here until I come back from taking a walk with my lovely lady, Samantha. You know her, don’t you?”

Ian nodded his head. Ian was a young man nobody cared about. Nobody believed in him. Samantha was the love of his life, and John knew that. John was always bragging that he got girls. Ian thought he was a failure.

So while John and Samantha were out on their little date, Ian had to work. He hated working, and John also knew that! John tortured Ian so much that sometimes he couldn’t even sleep.

John came in the door, with Samantha laughing, and John said, “We had such a great time. Tomorrow calls for good weather. Maybe we can go out again.”

“I would love to,” Samantha replied.  Ian’s heart sank.

***

About a month later, in the middle of June, Samantha and John were out on a walk, when John came running through the door of the hotel.

“HELP!” John shouted.

“What happened?” Ian said, rolling his eyes. He’s probably playing his trick on me again, he thought.

“It’s Samantha! She’s gone!”

“Don’t play your little tricks on me again.”

“I’m serious. Please believe me; it’s for Samantha’s sake. Please help me find her,” John pleaded.

“I’m done with your little tricks. Just stop,” Ian said seriously.

A tear rolled down John’s cheek. “Please.”

John never cries. This must be serious. If he is joking I’m going to get him… Ian thought. “Fine,” Ian agreed. “Let’s go.” John led Ian to the last spot he saw her.

“She was right here!” John said. “I just left to get her a present! I came back, and she was gone!”

“I’ve got a plan. But you need to be serious,” Ian said.

Ian took John to the apartment that he had rented, then got a notepad and pen. He offered John a seat. He made two cups of coffee, put them on the table, then took a sip. He was serious.

“Some of these questions will sound silly, but they have purpose,” Ian said. “Now, what was Samantha wearing at the time?”

What does this have to do with anything? John thought. “Umm, she was wearing a pink sequin dress. And the same colored hat with feathers,” he answered.

“Thank you. Second question. Did she say anything before you left?”

“Not really. She just said: ‘Wow, the moon looks so pretty. You know the jungle well, don’t you? Let’s go into the jungle.’ Then I said: ‘Not yet. I need you to stay here. You’ll be happy.’ Then I left, then she left.”

Ian’s face lit up. “Thank you so much.”

***

The next day, around 8:00 a.m., Ian called John, who was sleeping, and woke him up.

“What do you want?” John said in a drowsy voice. “I’m sleeping.”

“It’s Ian. I’m picking you up in my car. Get ready.”

“Ready for what?” John asked.

“Samantha.”

Ian got to John’s house. Of course, he wasn’t on his porch, waiting for Ian. Ian knew he wouldn’t be there, so he found parking, walked up to his door, and rang his doorbell. Brriinng! That’s how John’s doorbell sounded.

I should really move out of here, John thought. John came out with dark circles under his eyes. Ian looked at John from head to toe.

“You are wearing different shoes on different feet,” Ian said to John. John blushed.

“Well, umm, you know I wake up at 10:30 a.m.,” John said, “If I wake up before that time, I get cranky.”

“You can go back to sleep. I’ll just save Samantha by myself…”

“NOOO!” John shouted. He knew Ian couldn’t do it by himself. But even if he did, he would be lonely and Samantha would fall for Ian. And that couldn’t happen for John. “I’m coming with you.” John led Ian back to the last place he saw Samantha. “It was here. What are you going to do now, smarty-pants?”

Ian hated being called smarty-pants. “Well, look here, I just found a pink sequin trail.” Ian said, trying to outsmart him.

“What does that mean? Just some lousy metaphor again?”

“No, she was wearing a pink sequin dress, right? It’s a trail of her dress!”

“Yeah,” John was embarrassed that he hadn’t seen that. They followed the trail of sequins until it stopped. “Why did it stop?” John exclaimed. “It doesn’t make sense!”

“I remember she had a coat. That probably stopped the trail!” Ian realized. They kept going straight.

We are never going to find her. I wish we could have a real detective find her,and not just some amauter, John thought.

“Look here!” Ian shouted. “I found something!”

“What is it?” he said, groaning. “I am so tired, and hungry, and thirsty, and—”

“Stop complaining and come over here! I found something and it’s important,” Ian said. “I found a notebook. Here’s what it says: ‘In the jungle, always go straight, then two lefts and a right.’ Why would she write that?” Ian asked himself.

“Well, she did tell me that her father knew the jungle and used to take her when she was little, and always told her that in the jungle you always ‘go straight, then two lefts and a right’ and you’ll find something interesting. And we were going to go to the jungle after I came back, but as we know now, she went to the jungle before me.”

“That’s it! All we have to do now is follow what the note says!” They went straight, took two lefts and a right, and then stopped.

They came to a hole.

The hobbit’s hole. The one that everyone feared. Samantha went into that hole, and she would never be coming out. Even John was scared, and he was never scared. But Ian was brave and confident. He was going to go in that hole.

“You’re going to go in?”John said, laughing.

That was the time where the only confidence Ian had died down. The angel on his shoulder told him to stand up for himself, and the devil on his other shoulder told him to give it up. But always follow the angel, and that’s what he did.

“I’ve got a plan. We’ll go back to the—” Ian said. But before he finished that sentence, rain started pouring down on the two men. That meant they couldn’t go back to town. So they had to survive the night in the jungle. Since Ian was the clever one, he had a plan.

Ian created a path from the hole and a cave he found. John and Ian ran down that path, hoping to find food in the cave.

They got to the cave, which was dry and toasty. Sadly for them, there was no food.

Ian wished he had food, umbrellas, and all he needed to survive in the jungle right in front of him.  

“Perfect!” Ian shouted, “I can use an umbrella to get us food!”

“Ian, there aren’t any umbrella shops in the jungle. Don’t act stupid,” John told him.

“I know that! I can make an umbrella!” Ian said with a big smile on his face.

“How are you going to do that? Magic?”

“No! Nature! I can take sticks and a leaf. I will get food.”

“Oh, great, thanks. Now, go make the umbrella. I’ll wait here,” John said, yawning.

He is so lazy. Doesn’t he ever help out? Ian thought. Ian got sticks and a big leaf. He let the leaf dry but then realized something. How could he build an umbrella without glue?

He groaned. “Why didn’t I think about that?”

“What’s wrong, Buddy? Magic didn’t work?” John said, trying torture him.

“No, I don’t have glue. Never mind, there’s no food yet,” Ian replied.

“I wouldn’t do this in any other situation, but you’re getting me food, so I have something you can use. Sticky Glue, the superglue. I’d never do this any other time because I hate you, but you’re getting me food, and I’m really hungry, and —” John went on and on.

“Okay, thank you, but you are getting food soon, so STOP COMPLAINING!” Ian shouted. John rolled his eyes.

Ian put together the umbrella by getting one stick, then making a hole in the leaf, then putting glue around the top of the stick. He put the part of the stick with glue in the hole of the leaf. He broke small sticks and glued them to the bottom of the leaf so it had some structure. He went outside, and the umbrella worked!

“I am getting food,” he said. But just as he was about to step outside into the pouring rain of the Hawaiian rainforests, he realized something. Where was the food? He had to find it! He didn’t know where the food was!  So there was a 54% chance he would get lost. But he had to risk it. He was hungry, and so was John. Especially John. He wouldn’t stop complaining! But something in Ian told him he had to save Samantha. And he wouldn’t stop.

Ian was running, searching for food. He found some berries but wanted to keep looking. Then, Ian heard something growl. He stood behind a bush. It was a bear! Ian opened his mouth to scream, but no sound came out. The bear growled at him again. This is when the sound came out. “AHHHHHH!” he screamed. “HELP!”

That’s when somebody came running to Ian.

“Here, Jenny, girl, come on; go back to your cave. This is a friend.”

And the bear listened to the man!
Ian didn’t know exactly who this man was, but for some reason he recognized that voice.

“Hey, Ian! What are you doing in the jungle?” the man said.

“Dan!” Ian finally recognized him. “What are you doing in the jungle?”

“I go every summer for a week. What are you doing here?” Dan said.

“It’s a long story,” Ian sighed.

Dan was Samantha’s crazy uncle. He always had liked Ian and wanted him to marry Samantha, but he knew about John and how Samantha liked him. He didn’t like John. He thought he was irresponsible and lazy. Dan trusted Ian, and Dan would have liked to have a nephew.

“Why are you out here in the rain?” Ian asked.

“I have to survive here, so I go out in the rain,” he said proudly.

“You can make an umbrella,” Ian told him. “It’s easy. I can make one for you if you’d like.”

“I would like that; thank you,” Dan said.

“I need help finding food. I got a few berries, but I need more. I also need to feed John. And if I don’t bring back food he’s going to bully me again,” Ian told him.

“Oh, John is with you. He is so mean to you. I don’t trust him,” Dan replied with a stern face. “I’ll help you find food. I don’t want John torturing you again. Come with me. We are going hunting.”

As Dan led Ian to a fish pond, they started talking.

“How did you get that bear to listen to you?” Ian asked.

“Oh, that was Jenny, my brown bear friend. She didn’t want to hurt you. She just thought you were an enemy.”

Wow. That’s so cool! I wish I had a friend who couldn’t bully me, Ian thought.

“Where is Samantha? She didn’t come to say goodbye to me yesterday when I came here.” Dan was starting to get worried.

“She went into the hobbit’s hole. I’m are going to get her out.”

“Oh, I know I want you to believe in yourself, but here I can’t tell you that now. She’s never coming out.” Tears rolled down Dan’s cheek. “The last time I saw her…”

“We need to keep going. I am starving, and so is John,” Ian said, trying to keep Dan’s mind off Samantha.

“Okay.”

They got to the pond, and Dan went in. He felt for fish, trying to grab some. He grabbed four pieces of fish. Ian went back to cook the fish.

“FOOD!” John was so happy.

“We have to cook first,” Ian said. John rolled his eyes. They cooked the fish then ate it.

Yum, they thought.

It stopped raining. They needed to get back to town, so they got ready. Ian went to see Dan. He was going to save her!  

It was about an hour walk from town. They were both really tired. John wanted to stop, but Ian wouldn’t stop. He had to complete his mission.

They got back, and Ian drove John back home. Then, went back home. They both collapsed on their beds.

The next day, Ian woke up early, around the same time as the day before. He was about to call John, but thought: Why? Why should I bring him along? He is my enemy, and he is no help. I’ll do this on my own.

He left to go to the hardware store to buy a rope ladder to go into the cave and to come out. He got to the hole. He was really tired, but he wouldn’t give up. He put the ladder down and climbed in. He was scared, but that wouldn’t stop him.

“Samantha!” he called out.

“Ian? Is that you?”

It was her!

“Yes. I’ve come to get you,” Ian was really excited inside.

“Oh, thank you! I want you to meet someone,” she said, smiling. She led him deeper in the hole.  “This is Hayley the hobbit,” she said. “She’s really nice.”

“The hobbit is nice? That’s great!” Ian smiled. “Let’s go.”

They got out, and Ian said one more thing before they left. “Will you marry me?”

“Yes!” she answered. “Thank you for saving me.” They went to tell everyone and then John, who was very jealous. And then they told Dan, who was holding tobacco-filled jars. He got out of the forest earlier because of Samantha.

“I brought Samantha back. And we are getting married,” Ian said, with a big smile on his face.

“Thank goodness!” said Dan, laughing, and handed him a tobacco-filled jar.

THE END

Hawaii Gone Bad

“Do we have to go mom? I really don’t want to go to Hawaii,” I said to my mom. She was taking us to the cruise ship. We were in New York and the pier was full of people. And somewhere in that crowd was my worst enemy, Ali. She was going to Hawaii, too. She was even staying in the same hotel as us. It was going to be horrible. Our parents knew each other from high school. They were in the same classes. They didn’t know that Ali was mean to me.

She would always shout down from her room, “WE’RE OKAY! WE’RE GETTING ALONG AWESOMELY!” when really she was punching me and giving a black eye. Of course my parents noticed the black eye. But they always thought I was the one who deserved the black eye, because she was just defending herself, because I’m a boy so they thought I started it. I wish I wasn’t a boy. Once I even made that wish on a star.

I had packed some books, some clothing, everything I needed. It was going to be horrible. I’d always wanted to go to Hawaii, but now I wanted to go home and eat some chocolate chip cookies. I love chocolate chip cookies. We got on the cruise ship and it was just my luck that Ali’s family was right down the hall. I went to sleep, but it was very hard to. I read for some time, then I got sleepy. But I couldn’t get to sleep. I just kept thinking, Ali could come in and punch me anytime because my parents think she’s nice and I have my own room.

The next day, I went up to the top of the cruise ship. There they had a bunch of pools, ice cream, a buffet, and an arcade. I went to the water slide. I heard the captain’s voice calling over the loudspeaker, “Get on the lifeboats! We’re sinking!!!”

I grabbed some food and hopped onto a boat. (Of course I brought chocolate chip cookies.)

Ali was in the boat.

No one else was.

Help me!!!! I thought.

We called to our parents to toss us a rope, but they couldn’t hear us. None of them could hear us. The boats paddled in the opposite direction. We didn’t have any paddles. We had our hands. And soon they were specks on the horizon.

What felt like a million hours later, we’d finished all the food, even the chocolate chip cookies. We’d finished all the water. We were getting close to land. It wasn’t Hawaii, maybe it was one of those distant islands out there, but still, it was land. We paddled toward it. When we got close enough we jumped out and swam out towards the land. When we finally got there we flopped onto land and just lay there for a while. The island looked like a perfect beach — zero seagulls, zero dead fish, zero pollution, and uninhabited. The water was clear and the sand was speckled with pink. There were pieces of coral and beautiful shells scattered around. There was a big forest of beautiful greens, and we could hear thousands of parakeets and parrots squawking like crazy.

“I wonder why they’re all squawking like crazy,” I said.

Ali was walking towards the forest. Ali said, “Do you hear that rustle?”

I listened closely and said, “Yeah.”

I want my mommy! I thought.

We started running into the forest, which is one of the stupidest decisions I’ve ever made. Suddenly, a giant figure rose above the trees. It was probably ten stories high, maybe more, and it had teeth that were as big as the biggest daggers. It had eyes the size of dinner plates and I don’t want to explain the rest! It started chasing us. We ran through the forest as quickly as we could, but it was too fast for us. I tripped over something. It was a dagger. I stashed it in my pocket hoping the monster was just trying to play tag. It wasn’t. We were the first source of human meat that it had ever seen in thousands of years, and he wasn’t going to let us get away.

“Turn this way,” Ali screamed.

“No, this way!” I responded.

We kept arguing for thirty seconds.

Then I said, “How about we go the middle way?” BIG. MISTAKE.

We were running through the middle path and we tripped over a trip wire and got caught in a trap.

“If I could punch you, I would!” Ali said.

“Jeez Ali, why do you have to be so mean all the time?” I said.

“Why do you have to be such a dweeb all the time?” Ali retorted.

“Bully.”

“Dweeb”

“Bully.”

“Dweeb.”

“… Monster,” I said.

“HEY,” Ali said

“Noooo, really, a monster!” I yelled.

Ali screamed. We struggled and struggled to get out, but it didn’t work. The material was too strong. Then it went dark.

Ali was still screaming. So was I. Then I remembered.

The dagger! I thought.

“ALI, I’ve got a dagger. We can cut our way out.” I made a really big hole in the stomach, big enough for both of us to get out. It started shrinking rapidly.

“Okay Ali, c’mon,” I said.

Ali looked really pale, like a ghost. She fell down and fainted. I tried to drag her through the hole. She summoned enough strength to say, “Go on… without me.”

I said, “NO.”

“Yes.”

“No.”

“Yes.”

“No.”

“YESSS.”

Then she was gone.

Wow Ali’s not such a bad person after all, I thought. I rushed back to the beach part of the the island and I saw a rescue boat. My parents were on it. So were Ali’s. I told them the whole story and to my surprise, they believed me. They said that everyone in Hawaii believed that this island was cursed, so everyone stayed away from it. They guessed because they saw me floating off in that direction, that I was stranded there. After they got to Hawaii, they got a rescue boat and sailed over here. Ali’s parents were very sad, and my parents promised me double dessert for a month for the way that Ali treated me. They mourned with Ali’s parents, though. I went to the funeral. It was very sad, but they didn’t have Ali’s body to bury, so someone made a body in a very similar way, like hers. I placed chocolate chip cookies on the grave afterwards.

THE END.

The Knight Walks Into the Moonlight

          

The knight walks into the moonlight
But when he went everything was alright
The knight had a meteorite
The moonlight shines bright as a twilight

But when he went everything was alright
The sunlight shines so bright at night
The moonlight shines bright as a twilight
The knight got a fright of the night

The sunlight shines so bright at night
The moonlight is always as bright as tonight
The knight got a fright of the night
Every midnight it is a meteorite

The moonlight is always as bright as tonight
The moonlight shines bright on the twelfth night
Every midnight is a meteorite
The dynamite will explode tonight

The moonlight shines bright on the twelfth night
The moonlight makes a wonderful spotlight
The dynamite will explode tonight
But then it was time to say good night
The moonlight makes a wonderful spotlight
The knight had a meteorite
But then it was time to say good night
The knight walks into the moonlight

Fun Times

         

The summer is the time to eat cold food like snowcones
It is not the time to learn
Most of the time it is time to have some popcorn
It is the time to feel the breeze of the seashore
It is not the time to learn
Have pizza night every night
If you have a pillow fight you can get out of sight
It is time to feel the breeze of the seashore
It is flaming weather in the summer
Have pizza every night
It is time to cool off from the flaming weather
It is time to feel the breeze of the seashore

A Different Life

          

“Kayla, dinner’s ready!” My mom says.

“Okay, be there in a sec,” I reply. I love dinner. It’s my favorite meal of the day. After a long and hard day of school and then a walk to my favorite neighbor, Margaret’s house, I get to come home to a yummy plate of mac ’n cheese, or mashed potatoes with some fried chicken, maybe even lasagna!

I race downstairs after finishing my last problem of my algebra homework to find on the table vegetables with potatoes that are not mashed! “Uh, what’s this?!”

“Well, your stepdad told me that the foods we were eating were not the healthiest, and he said we should try something new and healthier.”

“WHAT!?” I say with attitude.

“Be respectful to your mother Kayla,” My stepdad Eric says.

“Uh, great.” I murmur angrily. We sit down at the table. I grab some potatoes and try to mash them with my fork so they would at least look a little like the perfect meals I used to have. I take a bite. “YUCK! What is this? Where’s the salt?!” I say while chewing this disgusting piece of unsalted potato.

“Eric said salt is way too bad for you and can cause life problems when you are older,” my mother says.

“Well, I can’t eat this without salt,” I reply angrily.

“Eric says-”

“Enough with Eric already!” I storm up the stairs and stomp into my room. I slam the door behind me. Tears start to fill my eyes. I can no longer hold them in. I turn to my pillow and let the tears stream down my face and absorb into the pillow.

After my face is completely dry, I think to myself, Everything was fine before Eric. I used to come to dinner with a smile on my face and with a mouth full of delicious food. Everything is changing and I hate it. With those last few words, I get into my pajamas and hop into bed. I dream that my dad is still alive, and Eric never met my mother.

BEEP BEEP! I hear my alarm go off. I get up and change into my uniform, which is a beige shirt with a logo that says, “Williams Charter School” or WCS for short. I also slip on my black skirt with buttons on the side. I run down the stairs and get myself some Chex Mix and milk. I sit down at the shiny brown table and eat my breakfast. When I’m done, I skip to the bathroom and brush my hair and my teeth. Then, I grab my pink bookbag with sparkles on it and walk to the curb to wait for the school bus.

When the bus arrives I am about to step on when I hear Eric scream, “Kayla! You forgot your lunch. I made some sandwiches. Here’s your lunch.” He hands me my lunch bag.

Oh no! He gave me my old lunch bag from first grade that has Barbies on it! I’m now in sixth grade and hate Barbies! When I get on the bus I try to hide my lunchbox but it falls on to the floor and everyone sees the Barbies on it. I get so much laughter. IT WAS HORRIBLE. I walk to the seat I share with my best friend Melanie and sit down.

“You like Barbies?!” she asks.

“No. Eric packed my lunch in the wrong lunchbox. I’m telling you, he’s ruining everything!” I say with anger.

“It’s not that bad. I have a stepdad and once you get to know them, they are fine. Believe me, I was exactly like you when I first met my stepdad. It takes time,” she says.

“I sure hope you’re right, but nothing can replace my old dad. He was PERFECT.”

For an hour and a half people keep on asking me if I like Barbies. I always tell them, “NO!”

But they always say, “OKAY!” or “SURE.”

Finally, we arrive at school. I first have drama with the most annoying teacher in the universe, Ms. Den. All we do is warming up exercises. When I walk into the classroom I see all of the kids have already sat down at their tables and they have their idea journals out. I sit down next to my other friend, not best friend, Layla.

“Now class, today we are going to perform a play for each other. You can do it solo or in pairs of no more than three.” Ms. Den says in her annoying accent.

Everyone pairs up and I turn around to ask Layla if she wants to be my partner and I see Layla has already partnered up with her best friends Alexis, Carly and Kyle, so of course, I am all alone. I decide to go solo.

“Choose a topic to act about now and then start writing your script down.” Ms.Den says.

I write about my life. After twenty minutes, Ms. Den says it’s time to perform. I decide to go first to get it over with.  

“Make sure everything is appropriate and respectful,” she says.

I start to perform. “My life was great. I had amazing meal every night for dinner and I was so happy. But then, an evil monster named Eric came into my life and ruined everything!” I notice Ms. Den’s face goes from a smile to a frown as I keep on performing.

In the middle of one of my sentences, Ms. Den says, “Okay Kayla, that’s enough. I would like to have a talk with you outside please.” We walk outside and chat.

“You wanted to see me,” I say.

“Yes, I said to perform something respectful, and that was not respectful at all! Now I need you to apologize to the class for that disrespectful piece, please.”

“What! I’m not doing that. That is my play, and I’m not apologizing for doing it. I said what I had to say and it’s true. Eric is ruining my life!”

“If you don’t apologize I will have to email your parents.” Ms. Den says.

“Parent,” I remind her. “Eric is not my father and never will be!” With that, I storm back into the class and sit down. As I sit down, I see Ms. Den walk angrily to the principal’s office right across the hallway. I think to myself, Maybe I should have just apologized. But whatever. I said what I had to say.

At the end of the class, I go to lunch. After I have my sandwich, I throw away my Barbie lunch bag. After lunch I have two more classes, which are math and English. At the end of the day, I walk out the door, glad I finally get some peace and quiet while walking home.

“Honk Honk!”

I turn to see my mom and Eric in our car. GREAT! I hop in and put my seatbelt on.

“We got an email from Ms. Den saying you had a disrespectful play in drama about Eric. Would you like to explain?” My mom says impatiently.

“I’ll pass,” I say sarcastically.

“Kayla Rose Smith!” my mom says.

“Fine. All I said was that I hate my life now ever since Eric arrived. That’s it,” I say, annoyed that I have to explain everything I do.

“Well, when you get home you are punished, so no television even though it’s a Friday, and no snacks,” My mom says furiously.

After that, there is silence for the whole ride back home. When we arrive at home, I get out of the car and slam the door. I walk up to the house and unlock the door with my emergency pair of house keys. I stomp upstairs to my room and stand there. While I am up there, I write all about Eric in my diary.

I miss my dad more than anything. It was a year ago. I wish he wouldn’t have smoked. I wish he didn’t get lung cancer. I wish he never had died. After writing about Eric and thinking about my dad, I sit down on my bed and cry. I miss my dad so much, and I can’t believe mom could even try to replace him.

“Kayla, dinner’s ready!” My mom says. I wipe the tears in my face away, walk down the stairs, and sit at the dinner table. I grab a plate and put some of the strawberries from the salad onto my plate. There is silence.

Finally, my mom says, “Listen Kayla, I know getting a new dad is tough, but you at least have to give it a try.” I ignore her and continue eating the strawberries that are sitting in front of me. My mom lets out a sigh. After I finish my strawberries, I put my plate in the sink and walk back upstairs without saying anything.

I start to do my English homework, which is to read chapter ten of A Mango Shaped Space. After ten minutes, I finally finish the eight page chapter. After reading, I get out my algebra homework and finish all of my homework for the weekend.

Tomorrow, I’m getting out of the house to have some alone time and think about what has happened. With that, I hop into my pajamas that have hearts on them and I go to sleep.

The next morning, I wake up and I check the clock. It’s 10:30! I’ve never slept in for that long. I get into a pink top and some jeans, and I run down the stairs. I grab some frozen waffles and put them into the toaster. Then, I grab some syrup and eat my warm, crusty waffles. After I eat, I run down the hall to the bathroom and brush my hair and teeth.

As I am walking out the door my mom says, “Honey,” “Where are you going?”

“For a long walk.” With those words I race down the block and stop at a red light. When the light is green, I walk all around the neighborhood.

Then Margaret, my neighbor, walks up to me and says, “Hi Kayla.”

“Hi Margaret.”

“Last night you looked pretty angry when you slammed your car door and stomped up to your house. I wanted to ask you something.”

“Like?” I say curiously.

“Well, I have a ton of spells and you look like you are unhappy with your life, and I happen to have a potion to change someone’s life. Would you like it?” she asks.

“Sure.”

“Follow me.” We walk down the block and into her house. In her house, she has tons of potions. She grabs one and gives it to me. She tells me to say what I want my life to be like and then, I have to take a sip of the potion.

“I wish my life was all different right now and none of this happened.” I say. As I sip the potion, I see everything disappear.

Then I wake up on the sidewalk. I walk back to the house and walk through the open door.

“Awww look at you! Eric check her out.”

I wonder what they are talking about.

“Adorable! Let’s keep her.” I am so confused. I walk up to my room and it is so weird. It is like I am crawling on the floor. My face was so low to the ground. I also am not feeling so good. I go to the bathroom in my room, and I am smaller than the toilet! Then I walk to the mirror on my room floor and I take peek. I am a Yorkie with a bow! I freak out and scream. But when I scream, all I really do is bark!

I wanted to change my life, but I didn’t mean like this! All I wanted was Eric to not have met my mom and my dad was still alive and we got him cured! I didn’t want to be a dog!

I have to fix this. I run back down the stairs and to the door. I can’t reach the doorknob so I start scratching the door.

“Aww, you want to go out and play? Alright,” my mom says as she opens the door for me.

I sprint out and race to Margaret’s house. I bark at the door until Margaret opens it.

“Oh, hi. I have something to tell you about the spell, Kayla.” She says in her raspy voice.

“Bark! Bark.” I try to say, “Look what you did to me,” but all that comes out is “Bark.”

“Um, I can’t really understand you. How about we play Charades, and I can figure out what you are saying. Okay?”

“Bark! Bark!” I wag my tail, and that’s how she knows I say “Yes.”

We walk to her living room and start to play. I start to act. I pretend I am walking just like yesterday, and I get stopped because of Margaret.

“Oh. You were walking and looking for a place to do your business.” I put my tail down so she knows that she guessed wrong. “Uh, you were walking down the street when, uh..” I wag my tail showing her she is going in the right direction. “Oh, and then you stopped to talk to me yesterday!”

I jump in the air with happiness filling my heart, and I start to bark.

“What’s next?”

I start to pretend we are talking, so I start to bark and wag my tail.

“Um, Oh! That’s us talking, isn’t it?” I bark and wag my tail again. Next I walk all the way to the door and finally pretend like I’m walking inside.

“I get it! You are talking about yesterday and how I gave you the potion. Yeah, um about that, I remembered about three years ago I had a mean friend, so I mixed the dog potion with the life potion so she would turn into a dog forever. I forgot to make a new life potion! I’m sorry.” She says with a frown.

My tail droops down and I whine. “Oh! But I do know how you can become a human again! By tomorrow morning, you have to convince your parents that you are Kayla, or you will turn into a dog forever.” I bark at her to try to tell her that she can tell them.

“Oh, but the trick is, I can’t tell them, only you can. I can help but I can’t directly tell them. Oh Kayla, I’m so sorry.” Magaret says with tears filling her eyes and a frown on her face. My tail goes between my legs and I walk slowly home.

When I get there, I bark at the door until someone opens it, and I walk slowly up to my room. “Where’s Kayla?” I hear Eric say.

“I don’t know, but she should be back by this time. It’s almost dinner.” I hear mom say. She sounds really worried. I walk back down the stairs and go up to my mom and start to bark.

“Quiet, Lily.” My mother says. They already came up with a name for me?! I give up. I slowly walk to a bowl that is lying on the floor, and I pick it up and show it to Eric. He drops some of the chicken that he is cutting up for dinner, and I eat it. After I’m done I go up to my room and lay on my bed.

I think to myself, what will convince my mom that I am Kayla and not Lily? Tomorrow I better come up with a way, or I will be stuck in this short and furry body forever!  After a moment of silence I hear my mom crying in the other room.

“It’s okay, she can handle herself. I bet tomorrow morning she will be here and waiting for breakfast.” Eric says. That doesn’t help.  She keeps on crying. I go into her room and sit beside her and rest my head on her lap. After thirty minutes or so, she finally stops crying and goes to bed. I start to whine but after ten minutes, I go to my bed and go to sleep on my pillow.

In the morning, I wake up and see that my mom inserted a dog door, so I go out of the dog door and go to Margaret’s house.

“Bark, bark.” I scream at the top of my lungs.

“Coming,” Magaret says. When she opens the door she says, “Oh Kayla, it’s so nice to see you. Is there anything I could do for you?”

I try to do Charades. I pretend I am Margaret and I slip Margaret’s business card into my house to give my mom and Eric a note that I’m Kayla. Margaret does not understand. I try twelve more times and she still doesn’t get it.

On my thirteenth time Margaret says, “I can’t understand what you are doing, but I have an idea. How about today in the afternoon, I go by your house and slip in my business card. It says that I can turn people into dogs or change their lives or something like that. They might get the idea that I changed you into a dog!” I drop onto the floor and then get back up and show her I agree by wagging my tail. I walk back home and go to my room and wait for my parents to get a business card. Hours pass, and I am getting worried, but then I hear something.

“What’s this? A business card? It says, ‘Try my potions like a dog, changing life, or love potions. They really do work!’ Oh, it’s from Margaret, our crazy magical neighbor. Kayla always likes to go over there to check out or even try her potions. I can’t believe she’s still not home. What if a bad guy took her or something?” Mom says in a worried voice.

“Wait a sec. You said Kayla likes to try her potions, right? So maybe she tried her potion and now she is something else.” They sit at the dinner table and think for over thirty minutes until Eric says, “Maybe she drank a potion and now something happened to her.” I walk down to grab the card out of mom’s hand and sit it down next to me. I pray that she will notice that Eric’s completely right and that she should listen to him. “No, that’s probably not it.”

“I don’t know, let’s see. If she doesn’t show up by dinner, we will start thinking that idea, okay?” My mom says.

“Alright.” Eric says.

I slowly walk back up to my room with my tail between my legs. Once I get to my room, I sit on my pillow. I think, what could I possibly do to convince mom that I’m Kayla?

It is noon, and my mom gave up. I can’t give up. I run down the stairs and bark at my mom.

“What is it, Lily?” She asks. I grab her sleeve and go out the door. She comes out the real door. Then I race down to Margaret’s house and bark at the door. After five minutes, Magaret comes. She was making tea, she explains. I bark and bark.

“Hi Margaret.” My mom says.

“Hi, is there a reason you came to visit?” Margaret asks.

“Uh,no.” My mom replies. This conversation is not working out, so I run inside, go to the potions, grab the dog potion and put it in front of my mom. Then I grab the life change potion and put it in front of her also.

“Wait a minute,” my mom says. “Lily, are you Kayla? No, that’s crazy. But Eric said something like this could happen, and now I kind of believe it.” Mom says to Margaret.

“Follow what you believe in.” Magaret says. My mom bends down and says.

“Kayla, is that you?” With those words yellow dust starts sparkling around me and before I know it, I am human again!

“Mom!” I say happily.

“Oh Kayla! I missed you so much. Eric was right! Oh my goodness.” My mom says with tears streaming down her face.

We walk home and when I get home, I go to Eric and give him a big hug and say, “Thank you.” My mom joins the hug and we live happily ever after.

THE END!!

Searching for Home, Chapter 1

“Stop, wait!” I screamed. The spaceship door was closing, and I could see the pilot getting ready for takeoff. I saw my mother’s panicked look when she noticed I hadn’t boarded the ship with her. But before she could do anything about it, the spaceship was already hurling through space.

***

I opened my eyes. My shirt was drenched with sweat. I pushed my long brown matted hair out of my eyes.  I always dreaded going to sleep because I’d get dreams, bad dreams. I’d dream of ghosts or vampires, but now I dream of reality, which is much more horrifying than any monster.

I climbed out of my tattered tent to watch the sunrise. As many times as I watched it, it was always breathtaking. The beautiful burst of color in contrast to the dark sky made the forest glow. It was magical. This wasn’t actually a forest; it used to be Central Park.

I stayed away from the city because the White Masks targeted New York City. So I stayed in the woods. The White Masks came out of nowhere. First, they bombed major places all over the world: The Eiffel Tower, The Statue of Liberty, the Great Sphinx, the Big Ben, the Great wall of China, and even Disney World. Then, they, promising safety, rounded up civilians, but those who believed the White Masks were never seen again. I shuddered, thinking about what they had done to those poor people. I didn’t know who these White Masks were, all I knew was that they wore white masks that only revealed their eyes. They wore suits and were tall and skinny.  I didn’t even know if they were human, but they must’ve had a lot of power to bomb and corrupt our world.

I rummaged through my backpack. I realized I only had a small amount of food left. So I decided to go back to the city to get food.

***

I walked to the nearest grocery store: Trader Joe’s. I climbed under a fallen tree and past the burnt playground, always keeping a low profile, even though I was probably the only human left or even living thing left on this planet. The thought of that made me shiver. I, a 13 year-old girl was all alone on a great big planet.

***

It was 2 days before I turned 13. My sister, Octavia, ran ahead of me into the Trader Joe’s. “Kristina, come on! You are so slow!” Octavia teased me.

“Oh, really?” I said, and I started to run but my sister had long legs and she always beat me when we raced. My sister distracted me, making up games and taking me to the sample station, so I wouldn’t realize my dad was buying me a cake. I acted as if I didn’t know but I knew exactly what cake they were getting me. Buttermilk cake with chocolate frosting.

***

I sighed. I didn’t cry anymore. The first month I cried until there were no more tears left. I loved my sister so much, but I couldn’t save her. I shook my head and remembered what I came for. “Water, food. Water, food, water, food, water, food,” I repeated to myself. Sometimes I wondered what kept me from going crazy. Some nights, I’d stay awake until morning, repeating to myself that somebody would come for me.

***

I walked into the Trader Joe’s. It was nearly empty. I grabbed the last protein bar, beans, rice, and Poland Spring water bottles. I started walking out the door when, suddenly, there was a soft thumping. It was faint, but I could hear it. I walked closer. At the back of my head, something was telling me to run for my life. But, curiosity got the best of me. As I followed the sound, I realized it was coming from the men’s bathroom. I wiped my sweaty hands on my brown shorts that used to be pants but that I cut because it was way too hot. I opened the door, ready to fight, but there was nobody there. Instead, in the corner, there was a box. And this box was moving.

I lifted the cardboard box’s lid, my heart thumping, and inside was a brown shepherd puppy almost as big as the box. I was so relieved it wasn’t somebody trying to kill me. But then I put my attention back to the dog. Why was the dog here in the middle of a Trader Joe’s? I touched the dog gingerly. I loved dogs but, hey, you never know. The dog winced in pain. I realized it was covered in blood, but it wasn’t the dog’s blood. Next to the dog was a man, under the sink. I panicked and backed away, but the man didn’t move. I moved closer and realized he was dead; there was a bullet embedded in his chest. I felt nauseous, and, suddenly, I fell to my knees. I mean, sure, I’d seen deaths before, but this was sickening. I grabbed the box with the dog in it and ran. I didn’t know where I was running to, but I kept on running, past a parking lot, and into Central Park. I kept on running until I was as far away as I could be from the dead man. I thought I was the only person left on the planet. Who was that man? Who killed him? And where is this dog from?

I sat down on a rock and looked at the dog. I almost felt like smiling when I looked at him. “Don’t worry; other humans will come and get us like they took my mom and dad. They’ll take us far from here. To another planet where we can start a new life. Where we can live life easily without worrying about surviving.” I lied to the dog, because there was a .0001% chance of that happening.

Now I’d really done it. Now, I was talking to a dog. However, I guessed I’d have to name him. “I’ll name you Argos.” I said.

The Old Man and the Soda

There once was an old, cranky man. He did not enjoy his job where he would sit at the base of Mauna Loa and sell soda. He had learned all the languages of the world, as he met customers that would climb up to the top and look at the volcano. His whole life he spent sitting at the soda stand. He had been sitting there since he was old enough to talk. He never attended school, never had friends, and never had a passport. He never left this area of 10 by 10 feet.

He had a small house at the back of the stand where his entire family lived including his aunts, cousins, and great-grandchildren. They always had water to drink and mush to eat. Never did they eat or drink anything else, for breakfast, lunch, and dinner. They were very poor.  

One day, his family grew rich and moved out into a penthouse in New York. The poor man asked to live with his family and get a share of the money.

The family replied, “Never in a million years. Not if you were the last person alive.”

He was still the old poor man at the soda stand.

One day he felt so sorry for himself, he opened a soda and it made the hissing sound soda always made. The old man never heard this sound, which is why he jumped with fright from the soda. The sound eventually stopped like it always did.

He took a sip of Sprite and it sizzled in his mouth. This was the best minute in the old man’s life. He finally felt happy. With this happiness, he climbed up to the top of the volcano. He was amazed in that moment. He decided to travel the world. To travel the world, he would need a passport. Having no money, he could not buy a passport. He swam over to New York to ask his family to lend him 100 dollars to buy a passport. Of course his family was a little crazy during the move, so he felt he had a good chance.

The family said, “No way!” and told him they did not want anything to do with him.

Sadly the old man walked home kicking a stone along the path. Going through his head was, why would his family be so rude to him? He had supported them till they got all rich, making them food and all.

Once he arrived home, he sat down and counted his money. He had only twenty dollars saved up. He decided to tell the tourists his story and hopefully they would donate extra money. He tried this plan the next day.

The next day he told a French tourist, “Bonjour voulez-vous un soda? Et voulez-vous faire don de l’argent supplémentaire pour moi afin que je puisse voyager dans le monde et obtenir un passeport s’il vous plaît. Je suis allé dans ce domaine toute ma vie entière,” which translates to, “Hello would you like a soda? Would you care to donate extra money to me so I can travel the world and get a passport, please? I have been in this area my whole entire life.”

The tourist replied, “Sûr pourquoi pas et j’espère que vous obtenez de parcourir le monde,” which means, “Sure, why not? I hope you get to travel the world.”

The old man was happy once again. He jumped up as high as his old man legs would let him, which was only like 3 inches high, but it was still a jump of joy. He gave a high pitched squeal like one of a little girl — the first one of his entire life.

The old man continued to ask the tourists, but not all people gave him money, especially not the New Yorkers. They said he was just a regular hobo selling soda. He was just cleaner and had a lot more clothing.

Over a long time, he gained up enough money for a passport and a boat. He traveled all over the world all from North America, South America,  Africa, Europe, Australia, Asia, across the Great Wall of China, and finally, Antarctica. He felt his life was complete. His heart was settled. He thought he would want to do more, but he felt happy. He forgot completely about his awful family. He missed his stand and wanted to go back to his customers, so he went back to his little old soda stand and continued selling soda at the volcano, feeling happy and telling all the customers his story and recommendations of where to go.

He is still at the base of Mauna Loa Volcano. If you go to Hawaii, you can still see him sitting there at the volcano, and he will tell you the story of his life.

An Intruder Mystery

This is what my party is going to look like. Oops, I forgot to introduce myself. My name is Camille, and this will be my tenth birthday party. There will be streamers, costumes, a stage, and all we need is the cake. Okay, now it’s time to get some sleep.

In the morning, I wake up. I go down to check on the party room. I am in shock. The streamers have fallen, the cake is almost eaten (FYI: that was hard!), and the stage has tons of cracks in it. I am very, very mad. Maybe, that’s it! I will call my friends! I call my friends. Mia says, “I’ll help you look for the intruder!”

The next day Mia comes and she says, “Where do we start?”

“Look at this,” I say. It is a card with black ink that says, “Mona.”

“It’s a clue!”

“How about we go through the neighborhood and see if there is anyone named Mona!” says Mia.

We look through the neighborhood. When we get back home, we think about everyone we found in the neighborhood. Nobody’s name is Mona, so we decide to go to the mall. We start looking for Mona there. We go up to random people and say, “What’s your name?”

When we get to the first Mona, she looks like she is in her late twenties. She has long brown hair and is wearing all black. She is frowning. She looks like she is in a grumpy mood all the time. We ask Mona what job she has. She says, “Detective.” Just then, Mia elbows me.

“Look at the black feather with a bottle of ink Mona is holding,” Mia whispers to me.

“Thanks for the catch,” I whisper back.

I get out a little piece of paper from my pocket and ask Mona, “Here, can you please sign this?”  

“Why?” Mona asks.

“It’s just our business,” I say.

“Why?” Mona asks again.

“I think….hmmmm….ummm…um…umm…we have a club!” I say, sweating.

“What kind of club?” Mona asks.

“Girl scouts!” Mia screams. “Our mission is to gather as many Monas as we can and bring them to Camille’s house.”

“Yes, my house,” I say.

“I still do not want to sign,” says Mona.

“Are you thinking what I’m thinking?” Mia whispers to me.

“What are you thinking?” I reply.

“I don’t know if she’s the thief?” Mia whispers.

Both of us start sweating again.

“Just sign it!” Mia screams at Mona.

“I still don’t want to,” Mona says.

“Other people are going to sign it too, we just want you to sign it first,” Mia says. “Last night, did you visit a house?”

“No,” says Mona. She gets up. Her face is bright red. “You children are very, very, very naughty.” She storms away.

***

We go to Mia’s house. I turn Mia’s computer on. I open up a document and type on the top SUSPECTS. I write Mona from the mall. Then I go home.

When I walk in the door I trip over a pair of  scissors on the ground. Writing on the scissors says “Mona Again.” Next to the scissors is one red high heel. I look on the bottom of the shoe and it says “J. Crew”.

The next morning I go to Mia’s and bring the scissors and the red shoe.

***

“Guess what!” I say to Mia.

“What?” says Mia.

“I found these last night!” I show her the scissors and the shoe.

“Another clue! I’m getting really suspicious about this Mona,” says Mia. “But what does the shoe mean?”

“Let’s go to the mall again today and go to J. Crew,” I say.

“Why?” asks Mia.

I show her the shoe and say, “That’s why!”

We go to the mall and find Mona at J. Crew buying some very, very high heels.

Mona tries to stomp away, but Mia gets hold of her hand and says, “Stay!’

Camille shows her the scissors. “Are these yours?”

She says, “Yes,” very, very fast.

Mia whispers to Camille, “Now, are you thinking what I’m thinking?”

“Yep!” I say.

So you’re the person who crashed Camille Clause’s birthday party!” says Mia.

“Okay, let me tell you why. My daughter was not invited to your birthday party,” says Mona.

“So just because your daughter did not get invited you ruined everything!?!” says Mia.

“YEAH!” says Mona.

“I will invite her!” I say.

“MYSTERY SOLVED!” Mia and I say together.

“YAY!” we scream.

“I’m very sorry. I can pay for another place to do a birthday party if you would like,” says Mona. “Maybe we could have it at my house.”

When I get to Mona’s house, it is covered with streamers in my favorite colors, pink and purple and green. Inside, there is a big indoor pool with a bouncy house leading into it. In the next room, there is clay shaping and face painting. In the last room, there is a trampoline and a big pile of presents wrapped in colorful wrapping paper and ribbons. In the kitchen is the cake. It has two little scoops of ice cream and a big candy heart that says, “Happy Birthday Camille.”

“Thank you so, so very much!” I say to Mona. Then, Mona introduces her daughter. Immediately, I recognize her. She was my friend in preschool. Her name is Anya.

“I am sorry I didn’t invite you before when I was writing the invitations,” I say.

A little later, Mona lights the candles and everybody sings “Happy Birthday.”

I blow out the candles.

I hope I always have a birthday party like this!

At the end of the party, as I am about to leave, I say thank you to Mona and ask if I can have every birthday party at her house. She says yes. I feel happy about how the day went and I can’t wait for another mystery.

Jack’s Bakery

Once upon a time, there was a hard-working, ambitious young man named Jack who wanted to open a bakery. Jack loved baking because when he was a little boy, he liked cooking desserts with his mom. He cooked chocolate cakes, chocolate cookies, and lemon cookies. Jack and his mother used special ingredients that made these the best cakes and cookies in his small town in Louisiana.

Jack needed a lot of money to buy the store and ingredients for his bakery.

Jack’s mom said, “You should have a garage sale to earn some money. I have plenty of stuff to sell, like your old bike.”

So Jack cleared out his mother’s garage. Inside, he found lots of books, an old radio,  a toolbox, and his old bike. He had to clean these old things up in order to sell them, and he worked for three hours in the hot sun getting ready. He put up lots of signs. Then, many people came and got what they needed and paid Jack lots of money.

With the money he earned, Jack opened his bakery, which he called “Fun for Everyone.” His mom gave him a cookbook, and she told him to take good care of it because she made all these recipes from her own heart. Jack’s bakery was very successful. He had five bakers who cooked the goodies. They baked incredible chocolate cakes, vanilla lemon cakes, cookies, and delicious, warm, tasty peanut butter cookies. Jack also made ice cream cakes for little kids’ birthdays. Lots of people came, and the line of customers was almost to the street.

Then, one day, Jack looked outside and saw that a new bakery had opened up across the street. The sign said “Goodies.” Jack got really mad and went over to the other bakery. He couldn’t believe it! It was his best friend Alex stealing his customers.

“What are you doing here, Alex?”

“I am doing my business, selling sweets to the customers. Look, they love it!” said Alex.

“Well, I don’t like what’s going on here, Alex,” said Jack. “I thought we were friends. You need to move someplace else.”

“Why do I have to move? Why don’t you move?”

Jack did not want to move because he was there first. It was a good spot, and he had a lot of customers before Alex came.

Jack stomped back to his bakery. He was very mad and also very worried that he couldn’t make enough money to keep his bakery open. Jack decided to visit his mom and talk to her about what was going on.

When Jack got to his house, his mother was making a chocolate cake. This made Jack feel a little bit better because it was his favorite dessert.

“I feel like blowing up Alex’s bakery,” Jack said.

“Don’t be mean. He’s your friend!” said Jack’s mother.

“But if he’s my friend, why would he own a bakery right next to me and steal my customers?”

“Maybe he has some reasons why he opened a bakery there. You need to go talk to him.”

Jack went back to Alex’s bakery. Alex was closing up and counting his money. When he saw Jack walk in, first, he put the money back in the cash register. Then, he said, “What are you doing here, Jack?”

Jack asked Alex, “What was the reason you put a bakery right next to mine?”

“Because my parents don’t have any money, and I need money for their clothes, food and house.” Alex hung his head.

Jack patted Alex on the back. “Now I get why you put a bakery next to mine. Because you want to make some money for your family. I have an idea.”

The next morning, when customers arrived, they saw one bakery instead of two, and Jack and Alex working at the registers together. The new bakery was called “The Friendship Bakery.” There were lots of people coming in for treats such as chocolate cookies, cakes, ice cream cakes, delicious, warm peanut butter cookies, and vanilla cookies and cakes.

They earned more money than before because they worked together. Jack gave some of his money to Alex’s family, and he kept some. Alex bought Jack a segway so he could ride it. He still had $200 left, which he used on clothes, and he got himself a mountain bike.

They both lived happily ever after.

The Contest

Maila Eliss

I was in Ms. Letterman’s classroom for double english (blah) “trying” to learn about the use of pronouns in speech, whatever that means. Honestly, I was more focused on the classrooms big, open windows and high ceilings with big lights. I was completely zoned out when I heard Ms. Letterman say briskly, “Maila, Sara Ann, and Emilia please come up to my desk after class. The rest of you are dismissed.”

Wait, what! Class was over already!? I must have done a better job zoning out than usual. Anyway, I headed up to her desk, along with Sara and Emilia. I thought they were afraid they were going to get in trouble, but not nearly as much as I was.

“Girls, first things first, you are not in trouble. You have been chosen for the district speech writing contest.” Oh great. More English class. Wait a second, this could make people at school respect me. “I have chosen you for a variety of reasons, that I will not get into right now. The team is not only composed of you girls, but of-”

“Well, who are they?” cut in Sara. Sara could be a little sharp around the edges, and really competitive. She’s really tall and blonde, but I might just think that because I’m one of the shortest kids in the grade.

“Sara. I was getting to that.” Ms. Letterman sighed. “The other two are Kalliope Howard, and Emilia’s sister Katlin, but I believe she goes by Katie.”

I had to admit, I was a little surprised by the addition of Kalliope and Katie, but Emilia seemed both highly surprised and completely livid.

“So you too now!” she cried, “Oh, look at the little twins. Let’s put them together for everything.”

Clearly this was not why Ms. Letterman put them both into the project because she sighed and softly replied, “No Emilia. That’s not why I put you together. I put you together because you have gifts that complement each other. My five choices will meet in my room at lunch.”

Katlin “Katie” McQuinn

People say I’m hyper, but I just try to have a positive attitude about life. Like the speech writing contest. Even people’s attitude about the first meeting. We all arrived early, though when Emilia arrived and saw me she started crying, then ran out and didn’t come back until just in time. When she got back she started being Little Miss Teach.

“Does anyone have any topic ideas?” she simpered.

“Basketball!” crowed Sara.

“Cheerleading or gymnastics!” I exclaimed, my thick, curly hair bouncing as I hopped from side to side. Emilia and I looked almost identical, except for one thing; my hair was curly and hers was straight. Okay, fine, I did curl mine and she did straighten hers when we stopped hanging out, but who really cares. Oh, yeah, she was a half inch taller than I was.

Maila was really quiet the whole time. All she said was, “Interactions with nature.” Sara and Kalliope said it was real smart. Maila blushed like crazy. Not to be rude, but it was really unlike Maila to make a suggestion that really hit off. But it was Kalliope who shocked us the most.

“Love and Loss,” was all she said. This was a very sweet statement for a girl who looked like Kalliope. She was fairly tall. But her hair, which pointed straight up, added a couple of inches. So I was like whaaa?? Then she gave a little cough and returned to her usual icy tones, and informed us that she was going to get lunch, so good-bye.

Meanwhile, Miss Teach was saying, “If we alter that a bit, we could use it. I like that theme!”

“Yeah it also applies to a bunch of stuff.” Sara said. Sara also said that she was going to go eat.

“Not yet,” Miss Teach said. “To work together requires some group cooperation. We should talk a little about ourselves.”

“‘Kay” Maila said sweetly, “What’s up with Kalliope?”

The response she got wasn’t pretty.

Kalliope Howard

If you’re wondering about that meeting, don’t. All I can say is my dad is dead. That’s why I was icy towards people, and why my topic idea was love and loss. A couple days later I got a text from Sara. I liked Sara. Sara was cool. Anyway, Sara asked if I wanted to come over to work on the speech because everyone else was already there. I said ok, where. I got her address and went over.

“We are electing officials and positions,” Emilia said. I was like ok.

“Sara’s the writer because she writes the fastest and Maila’s doing format and I’m the captain.”

“Excuse me,” said Katie, “I’m delivering the speech.” Emilia completely ignored Katie. There was something going on between those two. They were twins, but before that project, I had never seen them together.

“You want to be the typist?” Emilia asked.

“Sure, why not” I replied softly. I really hated the way they didn’t know that every moment you don’t spend with someone is a moment wasted. I know that oh-too-well. After the meeting Maila held me back.

“Do you want some chocolate?” How does she know chocolate is my weak spot? “I know where Sara hides it from her parents. I also know you’ve got something hidden.” She said. “Whats wrong?” I wanted to tell her, but I didn’t know why.

Don’t tell her.

She’s a good person.

I barely know her.

She seems to care.

I don’t know what she’ll do.

I wanted to trust her.  

I told her most of it. I still kept a little bit to myself.  Maila just seemed easy to open up to. I didn’t really know why. Maybe it was the way that she didn’t confront you. Or maybe the way that she seemed to care. Or maybe I just needed someone to talk to. Then she took her turn.

It felt good to tell someone.

Sara Ann Jones

Our next meeting was at Maila’s house. I got there early, and guess what! She had an older brother in college who played basketball, and they had a hoop! I asked if I could play. She rolled her eyes and said, “Be my guest.”

So I shot hoops for a bit. I could use all the practice time I could get, with the championships coming up in March, just a month away. Eventually, Maila stuck her head out and called to me, “Emilia just texted me and told me that she and Katie are on their way. You should probably come in now.”

“Okay, fine,” I grumbled. “Where does the ball go?”

“Eh, I don’t care. Just dump it somewhere,” came Maila’s soft response. I couldn’t believe it! Maila, who treats every plant like a like a living thing (yeah, plants are living things, but who’s counting) didn’t care about where a precious basketball went! Apparently I was saying this aloud, because Maila hollered, “You know, not everyone cares about basketball. You’re kind of biased. I already told you. Emilia and Katie are on their way, and Kalliope probably is too.”

Maybe I am biased. Maybe I care too much about a sport.

Emilia McQuinn

I walked over to the meeting at Maila’s place, trailing ten steps behind Katie, because she refused to walk next to me. It was really annoying. I remembered the day she stopped talking to me.

It was the first day of junior high. Katie and I were headed to our new school. Katie started doing cartwheels and backflips. One of the superficial girls on Katie’s gymnastics team, named Cassidy, came over and started animatedly chatting and giggling. Then, the girl looked at me with disdain in her eyes.

“Why are you hanging out with the nerd?” That was what did it. Katie looked really uncomfortable.

“Well it’s be- she’s my sist- I don’t know,” Katie grumbled.

“You’ve come to the right place, girl. We’ll help you out,” Cassidy said. And with that they walked off.

I really miss having her as a sister. I don’t know why. We reached Maila’s house, and just as I turned onto Maila’s driveway, I heard Kalliope yelling.

“Hey, Emilia and Katie! Wait up!” I looked up and saw Kalliope sprinting towards us as fast as she could.

“Let’s go in, I’m frozen.” Katie whined. We all raced in and walked in on Maila and Sara having a little scream fest which they abruptly stopped when they saw us walk in.

“Just because you love something doesn’t mean that everyone does,” said Kalliope in a voice like ice. “I’ve learned that the hard way.” Wow. There was certainly more to Kalliope Howard than met the eye.

We didn’t do much that meeting. Sara jotted down what we said. Partway through, I got an email from Ms. Letterman. Talk about awkward! I read it aloud.

“She says, ‘I received word that the contest is being held at the town hall-’”

“WHAT!” yelled Maila and Sara.

“-at 3 p.m on Sunday, March 3rd. However the rough draft should be ready in about a week.’ Guys, we really need to bust a move.”

It was now a race against time.

Maila Eliss

The next five days were a flurry of activity. We had two hour meetings practically every day. But it still felt as though we wouldn’t be done in time. Sara and Katie both reassured us that no matter what activity you did, you always felt really rushed.

Finally, on the day of Ms. Letterman’s deadline, we finished. Emilia was freaking out. She thought that we didn’t do our best because we kept disagreeing on fairly important topics, but everyone else told her we were fine. Sara insisted throwing a party to celebrate. Emilia and Katie volunteered their house. No one objected. We heard a knock, and the door swung open.

Katie’s friends were here, and not for the party.

Katlin “Katie” McQuinn

I had never been more ashamed of myself. They were my friends. At least the people I called my friends. It was Cassidy and her group. The group that until this project, I hung out with every day. Let me back up a little bit.

In  5th grade gymnastics class, Cassidy was a little snarky, but she was always nice to me. Well, fairly nice. Then in 6th, when she tried to pull me away from Emilia, I let her. It wasn’t all her. Emilia and I had a huge fall-out that day, but we had been slipping for a little while. I had been waiting for a chance to break the chain holding us together. Just because I had a sister didn’t mean I had to spend all my time with her. In fact, Emilia and I had complained together about how people associate us together. So I guess I understood why she was upset. But she never made an effort to talk to me. I regretted it now.

Anyway, Cassidy was here now.

I don’t know what to do.

Sara Ann Jones

We all exchanged glances and nodded towards Katie.

“What are you doing with them?” Cassidy asked Katie snarkily.

“What do you mean, them?” countered Katie. At those words, Emilia stood up and stood with her sister.

“No matter how we’ve been acting towards each other, we are still sisters, and sisters stick together.” she said, softly to Katie. I glanced at Kalliope who had tears running down her cheeks and Maila who was sitting next to Kalliope in silence. I looked at her in surprise, but she didn’t seem to notice. Maila made eye contact and mouthed,

“Let them be.” I nodded. As we walked out of the room, We overheard Katie tell Cassidy off.

“None of my friends talk to me and my sister that way.” Cassidy responded, in mock surprise.

“But Katie, I thought that you were our friend?”

“Maybe you were. This is our house. Go,” Emilia said. And, as surprising as it seems, they did.

We all were hiding something. And I wanted to know why.

Kalliope Howard

We all assembled in Emilia and Katie’s bedroom.

“We’re all hiding something” Sara said sternly, “even me. Somebody, talk.” When nobody responded, Sara drew in a sharp breath.

“Fine. then I’ll start. Maila might know this, but not because I told her. Basketball is my life. With two older brothers, sports are just what you do. The basketball tournament is really important to me.” she finished.

“These past two years all I’ve wanted is to have my sister back. That’s why I joined student government and became active in school. I don’t know how you only children stand it. But now that I have her, I don’t have anything bothering me. Except the fact that the contest is next week and I’m so freaking nervous!” Emilia said the last bit quickly, and we all laughed until Maila took a turn.

“When you’re small like me -I’m 5’1”- you get looked over a lot. Athletically, and uhh… other ways.” she said quietly. “Kalliope, it’s your turn.” I really didn’t want to talk about it but it warmed my heart to see the rest of them open up to each other and me. So I did.

“My father died right before the start of 6th grade,” I began. “That’s why I ice people out sometimes, and act like a snob. Emilia- I admire your ability to cope with something that bothers you without turning on other people. That’s what I’ve been hiding.” Katie was the first to speak.

“And we all thought you were a self-centered brat!” she exclaimed.

“Katieeee,” Sara groaned, softly punching Katie in the shoulder.

For once since dad passed away, I felt good. Like I belonged. It felt good.

The feeling you belong is one of the best feelings ever.

Emilia McQuinn

I had a sister again, and it was more wonderful than I remembered. I told the gang about us, as did Sara, Malia and Kalliope. Kalliope’s story was so sad. We all were sitting there quietly when Sara called,

“Guys, do any of you remember why we were here to begin with!? Let’s party!” We all laughed. Leave it to Sara to think about partying at a time like this. Our party was great. We all hung out and had the time of our lives.

But in the back of my mind I had the constant reminder that in just ten more days until the contest began.

Maila Eliss

The next seven days were like the calm before the storm. Kalliope went back to her group. Sara and I went back to our friends at tables right next to each other. The only change was Katie. She sat with Emilia and the other student government kids.

On the eighth day, the storm hit.

Katlin “Katie” McQuinn

Two days before the contest Ms. Letterman called us in during yard. She told us a lot of stuff about the contest. It pretty much all went over my head, but Emilia claimed that she knew I wouldn’t be paying attention, and took notes for me. Here they were:

  • We all will go out and bow, but only the performer (you/Katie) will deliver the speech.

 

  • DRESS NICELY

 

  • The actual contest is at 3 p.m., but we should get there at 11:30 a.m.
  • There are going to be hundreds of people there

The next day, we got called up to rehearse.

Throughout rehearsal I thought about how I fear tomorrow.

Sara Ann Jones

Kalliope and I arrived first. Her usually colorful hair was black as night. She was wearing tall brown boots and a black dress. Dangling from her ears were long silver chains. She looked even more fearless and intimidating than usual. How could that be?! Me, you ask? I was wearing a denim dress with tiny white polka dots. I actually brushed my hair that morning. Can you believe it! Maila came in next.

“Oh my God! You look amazing, Maila” Kalliope gushed. Maila blushed a little. I completely agreed with Kalliope. Maila looked stunning, and nothing like the shy little girl we began the project with.

“Thank you. You guys look great as well,” Maila replied sweetly. Then Emilia and Katie entered the auditorium. They didn’t dress the same, or do their hair the same, but that was what made them look so at ease. Just as they reached us, Ms. Letterman bustled out of one of the doors.

“Ready, girls?” she said. We all nodded.

“Well then, let’s go.”

I was more terrified that I had ever been, and more thrilled than I had ever been.

Kalliope Howard

We walked into a huge room filled with other teams. I was so scared! Ms. Letterman told us that teams would be called out one at a time to rehearse, and then perform. It all happened so quickly. We sat around for a bit, then until they called Katie. She went in and out quickly. We sat for a little while longer.

“The Stoneybrook Superstars,” called the announcer. This was it. We stood up.

I was so afraid.

Emilia McQuinn

It was our turn. Katie walked to the mic nervously. Her shoulders were hunched and her fists were clenched. She began to read and recite. I hadn’t heard the speech before; only Kalliope and Katie had seen the complete and published thing.

It was beautiful.

Katlin “Katie” McQuinn

“Good afternoon, all. When I was a really little kid, I had a gerbil. I really loved that gerbil. But it being a rodent and all, it died, and I lost it. I was really upset, but life went on and I stopped mourning the loss. But it was hard anyway. My friend Kalliope lost her father and had a hard time with it. I don’t blame her. She was close to her father. She adjusted, and while it was hard, she has done it. She dealt with it bravely. This is something that I hadn’t learned to do then, when I was a little. I wish I had. Thank you.” I said.

We went back to the waiting room after giving our bow. As soon as we got there, Sara took of her shoes, and groaned softly, “These things are medival torture devices” she grumbled.

We sat there for what seemed like hours, but it probably was like 20 minutes. During that time, we all did one of the following;

  • Bit our nails
  • Talked A TON
  • Sat and ignored everyone
  • etc..

Then someone said,

“All teams report to the stage. We are announcing the winner.

What if we weren’t the champions?

Emilia McQuinn

I couldn’t breathe. I was petrified onstage. I wanted to be chosen so badly. I wasn’t listening to the announcers. Until I heard the words, “In third place, the Fairfield Falcons!” There was a loud whoop from the back of the stage. The Falcons went up for their medal.

“In second place, the Hartford Heroes!” More cheering. Why couldn’t they just get to first place. The auditorium felt strangely claustrophobic.

“And in first place, for the gold is……… the Stoneybrook Superstars!” Oh my God. I couldn’t believe it. That was us! We all turned towards each other. Only Sara could speak. She let out an ear-splitting whistle. The rest of us regained ourselves, and started cheering.

“And that’s all for today, folks! Superstars, Heroes, Falcons, see you in Boston!” the announcer hollered into his microphone over the noise.

We were going to Boston for round two!

Epilogue

After the contest, things mostly got back to normal, but the experience changed them all a bit. Obviously, Emilia and Katie were together a lot, but Maila could be found playing basketball with Sara, and not against Maila’s will! Kalliope was a little more relaxed around people, and got rid of her dumb haircut. She was able to recognize that her dad would never come back, and accept it. Sara’s team made it to the championships, but didn’t win them. She took it surprisingly well, at least after cursing at the opposing team loudly for five minutes. After the contest, Maila got the recognition she anticipated. All was well. Until the Boston contest…

The Day That Jack Ran Away

Every day, Jack would look out the window of his room and watch the trains. He also saw something not that common every day. Each day, a man would pass by Jack’s building, get out of his car, and stare for hours at one of Jack’s windows. Jack had three windows in his room. Jack would look out of the opposite window that the man was staring at and watch the man. Jack thought this was a very odd action to perform. But, the man still did it.

Jack had foster parents. He used to live with his grandmother because his parents died in a car crash, but there was a tragic fire in the building that Jack and his grandmother lived in. Only Jack had a chance to escape it.

Jack did not like his foster-parents. They were very mean to him. Every time Jack did not eat his dinner, they would send him to his room and not even say, “Goodnight”. Those nights, Jack was very hungry.

Since he didn’t like his foster parents, this caused him to run away.

Jack’s foster parents’ names were Bob and Claire. Bob and Claire made a lot of money. They let Jack go to school by himself because they had to leave for work very early in the morning. Jack did not like his school. Kids were mean to him and called him names. And his teacher was mean. Jack refused to go to school. He would not get good grades because the rare times he went to school, he did rubbish. Not because he did not know the answers, but because he didn’t want to answer them. Jack was actually very smart. He skipped a grade because he was so smart. He was only ten and in sixth grade.

One day, Jack decided to run away from his foster parents. He made the decision to use all his saved money for a bus trip to San Francisco, California.

It was July 13th when Jack was waiting in the line to the bus for a trip to California. When he stepped on the bus, he felt glory to be free.

The bus was going up a bumpy hill, and Jack was going up and down. He was hungry. He forgot to bring extra money to stop and eat food. While everybody went outside and ate food, Jack had to stay inside the bus and not eat food at all. Even the bus driver was outside. Fortunately, he had packed a sandwich and applesauce in a zip-lock for the trip.

He said, “Wow! Aren’t I smart?” He started to eat his sandwich. It was a ham, cheese, and mayonnaise sandwich. When he finished his sandwich, he ate the applesauce with a spoon. When everybody came back in the bus, the bus finally moved. He fell asleep in the bus because of the good meal.

The next morning, an old lady woke him up. She said, “Little boy! Move! The bus is in danger!”

Jack said, “Wait, my stuff!”

The old lady said, “Your stuff doesn’t matter right now. We’re all gonna die!”

Jack replied, “Yes, it does. I have my special teddy bear in there.”

The old lady answered, “There’s an earthquake coming near!!!” The old lady stopped talking and picked up Jack and his suitcase out of the bus and jumped over a small crack. The bus had fallen in a big crack. She walked quickly to where all the other people were.

Jack said, “Holy cow! There’s been an earthquake and I didn’t know! Why didn’t anybody tell me?”

The old lady said, “Mhhm-hmm.”

Jack saw that there was a whole bunch of wood and sticks on the ground. And not too far away in the distance, everybody could see a hardware store. They spent at least fifteen minutes walking to the hardware store. No one really talked while they were walking. They did not talk because of the situation that they were in. After the old lady saved him, Jack thought they were friends. He was only talking to her.

Everybody asked Jack, “Why are we walking there?”

Jack answered, “Because we could build a wagon to carry everybody to San Francisco. And if no one cooperates, then I will do it all by myself. And you guys will stay here.”

Everybody said, “Ok! We will help.”

This wagon had a hole in it so people could steer with their feet. It was something very old-fashioned, but nobody cared. All everybody wanted to do was get to San Francisco. It took two hours to get to San Francisco.

When they got there, they were all very excited, especially Jack. Jack walked to his grandfather’s apartment at 1950 Val Street Apartment 1B. There were three people who wore beautiful clothes sitting outside his grandfather’s apartment. They were some of the richest people in the apartment. These people recognized Jack as the grandson of the owner of the building, which was Jack’s grandfather, John.

Jack said, “Excuse me,” to those people. They moved quickly. Jack said, “Thank you”. They replied, “You’re welcome.”

Jack did not have to go up any stairs because his Grandpa’s apartment was on the first floor.

He knocked on the door, excited. His grandfather answered the door and said, “Oh… my grandson. Long time no see.”

Jack said, “Grandpa!” and hugged him.

His grandfather asked, “What are you doing here, Jack?”

Jack answered, “Um… I came here to visit. Like you said, long time no see.”

“Oh. I have had no one visit me here. I’m very happy you came to visit.” Jack knew why no one visited his grandfather. It was because he was always grumpy, or he always looked grumpy.

Two days later, Jack and John were watching the news. There were two adults on the news saying that their foster child ran away. And then there was a picture of Jack. John looked at Jack.

“Is that you?” he asked.

Jack replied, “Um… maybe. Actually! No! That’s my twin brother.” (wink, wink).

John said, “Twin brother? Your mom was my daughter. She would have told me if she had two kids.”

Jack knew he was lying but he did not want to go back to New York. And from the stories that his mom used to tell him about his grandfather, he did not want to deal with him. When Jack’s mother went to her friend’s house after school without asking permission, she got in trouble, and was grounded for a week. She tried to talk to him about it, but he was very stubborn and would not listen.

That night, John packed Jack’s things and put them in his car. In the morning, when Jack woke up, John gave him breakfast and told him to get in the car. Jack realized that John was driving out of town.

“What are you doing?” asked Jack.

“I am bringing you to your foster parents,” answered John.

“What? But they’re mean to me! Do you want me to suffer? Or be happy here with you?”

“I want you to be happy with your foster parents. Why would you run away? Now everybody is going to think I stole you, but you, instead of being a responsible ten-year-old, wasted all your saved money to get here on a bus. That was a very dumb thing to do.”

Jack said, “I know it was. But I will never be happy with them. So I do not know what you’re talking about.”

After arguing for the whole ride to New York, they finally got there. John carried Jack out of the car, because Jack refused to get out. John told Jack to stay right there on the sidewalk while John grabbed his suitcase. But Jack did not cooperate. He went back in the car and held on to the seat because John tried to pull him out. After an hour or two, Jack finally got persuaded out of the car. He went up the stairs to Claire and Bob, his foster parents’ house. John knocked on the door just like when Jack knocked on his door in California and lied to him.

When Claire opened the door, she said, “Jack!” and hugged him and kissed him. “Why did you run away?”

Jack answered, “Because you guys were mean to me.”

Claire and Bob both were saying, “We’re sorry. We’ll never be mean again.”

Jack said, “It’s fine. It’s just that I want my mom and dad back.”

That night, they all watched a movie, except for John, because he had to go back home to his job. Claire and Bob let Jack have popcorn and pizza. They had a mini-party. Jack decided to never disobey or leave Claire and Bob again. And he always thought that his mom and dad were happy for him, that he had a family to love and take care of him.

The Stranger

Once someone had figured out what was happening, it was too late. An earthquake hit London at precisely the wrong time. Panic filled the streets as people hurried towards the port, hoping to be lucky enough to be able to sail away on a ship. But Mother Nature said no. Unluckily enough, the earthquake had caused a tsunami, and the tsunami had destroyed all ships but one.

Hurriedly, the Griffiths family ran towards the last remaining ship; they were running their hearts out, but it wasn’t enough. The deadly combo of the earthquake and the tsunami were going to hit and kill them any second now. The last boat was rocking side to side, aggressively in the furious waves. The desperate family had given up all hope; they started their prayers silently to themselves. Then, with no warning, the last ship was hit hard by the waves and was knocked onto the port and fell on top of the Griffiths, enclosing them with no escape. At first, the family thought this would be the end, so they closed their eyes to not see the horror taking place. When they woke up, it was complete silence.

They crept out of the ship and took a step onto the rocky foot path. Janine, who was age eleven and the only girl sibling in the family, immediately pulled her foot back when she discovered that she had been standing on a dead body covered in blood. Jacob, ten, was checking his phone for any tweets or texts (he was addicted to his phone.) Then, as ridiculous as it sounds, he decided to take a selfie. Kevin, thirteen, was a high-achieving, popular person. He had all the “spotlight” according to Jamie, who was only eight. Their mother and father were hard-working people and had earned more money than you can ever imagine. Their mother was named Lucy and was forty-one; their father, Lucas, was two years older than their mother and was a brave and courageous man. Sadly, their grandparents (Lucy’s parents) had gone missing the day before the earthquake, which was also the day they lost the knife.

The knife was a precious item that was one of the major money-earning items their parents had made. It was a razor-sharp weapon combined with some of the strongest materials ever discovered. The knife could easily cut off your hand with no problem at all. It could also slice a door in half as if it were a piece of paper. It was so extraordinary, that someone had even offered the price of three billion dollars (!!) for the knife. But the Griffiths knew that if it belonged in the wrong hands, it could seriously cause some trouble, so they kept it to themselves… until now… The Griffiths were on a holiday in Hawaii, but when they came back, the first thing they did was check on the knife. As they did the secret combination, they opened the safe and found that the knife was missing! Their mother was so mad because of this theft, she refused to talk about it for the rest of the day. Everything was silent.

Now, back to the present. The Griffiths sprinted back to their home to check on all their precious belongings. They were all shattered to pieces in an unusual way; it seemed like it was man-made. A few things were left though, like clothes, food, etc. The family gathered the remaining belongings and went off to find shelter someplace else. On the way, a heavy storm took place. Rain poured from the skies above onto the Griffiths, but they continued on with their journey nevertheless with great courage. Jacob stopped suddenly and requested the whole family to wait for him. He then got out his phone and took a selfie and posted it on Facebook saying, “Check out this storm!” Annoyed, his father pulled Jacob’s hand and made Jacob drop his phone, which broke in the fall.

“Now look what you’ve done!” exclaimed Jacob angrily at his father.

“This is about survival! Not your useless, little phone!” replied Lucas.

With an offended look, Jacob stuttered, “M-my phone is n-not u-useless…”

“Oh, shut up!” shouted Lucas.

Caught off-guard, Jacob was surprised at how angry his father was, so he took a step back, tripped on a stick, and fell on the floor. When he was getting up, the floor formed a sinkhole, and Jacob fell right through and landed on his face. He got a scar from that twenty-feet drop. His face was bleeding, and he was screaming desperately for help, but he could not be heard due to the sound of the pouring rain and the raging storms. Then, out of nowhere, there was a sound of a stick cracking behind the Griffiths. They all turned to where the sound had occurred; there was no one. When they turned back, Jacob was gone, and there was not a soul to be seen.

Frightened, the Griffiths pelted away from the sinkhole and tried to find some shelter. That night, they all sent their prayers to Jacob and hoped he was well. They made a hut out of sticks, wood, and leaves…

Jacob’s eyes burst open, or should I say “eye” since his other eye was bruised and battered and could not be opened. He looked around the room. It was a small-sized cave. The cave was quite cold though, and had mold on the walls.

“Ah, I knew you were awake,” said a rough voice coming from nowhere.

“W-who are you?” squeaked Jacob.

Then, out came a man in an iron suit with scratches and holes in it. “I’m the one who took you away when you fell into that sinkhole. Did you know that sinkhole wasn’t actually a sinkhole? It was a trap I laid for your family. I was hoping that your parents would fall in though, but you fell instead. You’re quite useful actually… You could help me attract your family.”

Jacob shuddered at the thought of his family falling into this trap set up by this despicable villain.

“By the way, remember how your grandparents disappeared the day before the earthquake? Well, here they are…” Then, he stepped aside to reveal Jacob’s grandparents, bruised and covered in blood and locked in a cage. They were whimpering until they saw Jacob.

His grandmother exclaimed, “Oh, dearest Jacob! You’re so big now! Not when you were four, you were tiny back then! You’ve grown so much! I’m so glad to…”

But she was cut off by the villain. “Silence!”

But he was not to be heard. Jacob’s grandparents kept talking to him and ignoring everything else happening around them; they were extremely glad to see Jacob.

“That’s it. Say goodbye, you fossils.” The villain then opened the cage door and whipped out a weapon.

At first, Jacob didn’t recognize the item he was holding, but then he peered a bit closer and noticed the villain was holding the knife! His grandparents seemed to know it as well and were frightened at first. They knew that if they didn’t fight, they were going to die for sure. If they did fight, they might actually survive. No matter how desperate Jacob was to join the fight, he couldn’t do it due to the fact that there were chains holding him back.

The two elderlies jumped from their cage floor and pounced on the villain at high speed. The villain didn’t expect the grandparents to be so quick and was knocked over in surprise. The villain muttered something under his breath and elbowed Grandmother in the solar plexus. She fell down onto the floor in pain. He raised the knife above his head and steadied himself. Then, he swung at Grandmother, but he was disrupted when Grandfather tackled the villain. But the villain was ready for an attack and swung the knife randomly at Grandfather. Sadly, the knife sliced Grandfather and killed him. Grandmother immediately stopped and became very mad due to the death of her husband. She pounced on the villain like a tiger, but missed ever so slightly and accidently dived on the end of the knife. This left the married couple both dead…

At this point, Jacob thought there was no more hope: the despicable man was going to murder him any second now.

“W-who are you?” questioned Jacob while holding back tears.

“Me?” the man asked, then laughed an evil laugh. “I… I am the Stranger…”

“I don’t… I don’t believe you… ” gasped Jacob. The Stranger had been known for over twenty years for some of the worst crimes ever committed, and this one might be one of the worst. And with that, the Stranger stormed out of the room.

***

In the forest, Jamie moaned, “How long more do we have to keep searching?”  

“Until we find Jacob,” replied his father.

The Griffiths were using one of their first inventions, DNA tracker 2000, to find Jacob. The DNA tracker 2000 was a device that could track someone by putting in something like their blood, hair, etc. into the machine. It would beep when you were near the person you were trying to find. They had been searching for hours and hours for Jacob, but they had no result. Then, with no warning, it started beeping.

Beep, beep, beep.

Anyone could hear it. The Stranger mumbled quietly to Jacob, “Move, move. Follow me.” Jacob obeyed. They ran to a different room full of potions and liquids that nobody had ever heard of. “Sit down on this seat,” ordered the Stranger.

“But… ”

“Now.”

So Jacob did. The Stranger got out a jar of gooey, purple liquid and took out a handful. He spread it over Jacob like sunscreen, and then said, “Finished. Now they can’t track us with the DNA tracker.”

Jacob couldn’t believe how stupid he’d been to follow the Stranger and do what he said. He then decided to plan an escape plan to get out of the cave and be in the safe arms of his family.

Meanwhile, the Griffiths noticed the beeping suddenly stopped, and a confused look appeared on their faces. On one hand, they were relieved that Jacob was still alive and was close. On the other hand, they were annoyed that Jacob had disappeared when they had finally tracked him down. They decided to go back to their newly made home and roasted some dead animal body parts, which they had hunted down earlier, on top of a fire. That day, they ate roasted pig and cow meat, which was surprisingly tasty. Afterwards, the Griffiths settled themselves in their own sleeping bags and slept a heavenly sleep.

In the cave, Jacob was thinking up a risky plan. He first thought about stealing the knife from the Stranger while he was sleeping, and then slicing the door to get out (there was a lock on the door), but it was too risky and had a low chance of success. Then, he thought about stealing one of the Stranger’s potions — surely he had an acid potion — then, using it to melt a hole in the wall to climb out because using it on the door would cause too much noise. Finally, Jacob decided the best plan would be to go to the Stranger’s stash of items that he had stolen (he must have had a phone in there), and then he would contact his parents with a quick text about where he was.

So Jacob got up from his rock-hard bed, given to him by the Stranger, and cautiously crept over to a room labeled “Weapons.” Jacob shook his head while thinking, Nope. Wrong room, because he was already too obsessed by the idea of getting another phone. He then crawled over to another room, this time labeled “Storage room.” Jacob thought this must be the right room, so he slowly opened the door. The door creaked a little, so he slowed it down even more. Then, before his eyes, Jacob saw a large room full of precious and important goods and items. Jacob scrambled around the room, hoping for a discovery of a phone. After a few minutes of searching, the desperate child finally found a slightly cracked Apple iPhone. Silently celebrating, Jacob turned on the iPhone to discover it had run out of battery! Cursing under his breath, Jacob continued to seek for a working phone. Sadly, even after an hour of searching, Jacob had no result. Giving up all hope of finding a phone, Jacob walked out of the room with a long face, but tripped over something and fell with a surprise. But luckily, Jacob managed to save himself from the fall by landing in a push-up position. Angry, Jacob tried to find what he fell on and found out he tripped over a phone! Excitedly, Jacob turned on the phone, and to his surprise, it was on! But Jacob’s happiness was quickly interrupted by the footsteps of the Stranger, so he immediately ran to his bed and hid the phone in his shirt.

The next morning, Jacob woke up with a sense of elation. The Stranger was in his secret room, which he basically never came out of, doing God-knows-what while having no idea what Jacob was secretly up to. The ten-year-old got out the phone and pulled the blanket over his head, preventing himself from being seen. He then put in his father’s phone number and sent a text saying, “Hey dad. It’s Jacob. I’m fine. I’m in a cave underground where u found me with the DNA tracker. The Stranger captured me.” Jacob thought they’d understand, so he hid the phone in a specific spot in the storage room where it would be easy to find next time.

Back in the forest, Lucas Griffiths’ phone started rumbling. Mr. Griffiths fished his hand in his pocket and brought out his phone, which had a text from an unknown phone number. But the text was in the style Jacob wrote in, so he knew Jacob was alive and well and hoping for help. Mr. Griffiths then decided it would be best to show every other family member, so he did.

“Well, what are you waiting for?!” exclaimed Mrs. Griffiths. “Let’s go!”

“Hold on,” said Kevin. “Shouldn’t we be prepared when we break into the cave? Isn’t it a bad idea to run into the cave of the Stranger?”

Embarrassed, the mother of the Griffiths family replied, “Oh, yeah… Um… You’re right. We should be prepared… Um…”

***

1 month later…

The Griffiths family were armed and prepared to break into the cave that the stranger was living in. They had weapons and wore armour. They stood in front of the door to the cave with a rock to throw onto the door as a distraction.

Meanwhile, Jacob was lying on his bed while he daydreamed about futuristic computers. Suddenly, something hit the door. The Stranger stomped over and slammed the door open impatiently, but there was no one there. But as the Stranger turned around and was about to walk back in, the Griffiths family ambushed him and knocked him over aggressively.

“Augh!” screamed the Stranger. But he quickly recovered and swiped at Kevin.

Kevin managed to dodge it, swipe back, and scrape the villain’s armor slightly with his knife. The Stranger was annoyed he was losing a sword fight to a thirteen-year-old, but he was impressed. He then moved on to attack Jamie, since he was a small boy who was short for his age. The evil man tried to kick hard at Jamie, but missed due to the size of the boy and slipped on the rocky floor. Then, Janine, who was a shy girl, jumped on top of the Stranger and swung at his face with her fist and hit him hard in the nose. The villain’s nose had started bleeding atrociously and covered his face in blood. His nose was probably broken.

The family celebrated their victory over the greatest villain of all time, and everyone was glad to have Jacob back. As they were leaving, Jacob suddenly said, “Guys. Can you wait here for a second? I need to go to get this phone I stole from the Stranger.”

Everyone sighed except for Mr. Griffiths, who just grinned and said, “Classic Jacob” under his breath so no one would hear. Then, he replied, “Sure.”

Jacob then raced back to the cave. But when he ran into the storage room, he thought for a minute about what would have happened if he wasn’t so obsessed with his phone. All this probably never would have happened, but his thoughts were interrupted by a cold voice from behind him that said, “Ah. There you are.”

Jacob whipped around, and there stood the Stranger alive and (not) well. “H-how did you survive?” questioned Jacob, frightened.

“Did you really think a punch from a puny little girl would kill me?” laughed the Stranger evilly. “Now, say goodbye, Jacob,” whispered the cold-hearted villain.

But as he was about to swipe at Jacob, a dagger went through the villain, and the Stranger screamed, “Nooooooo!! I’ll be baaaaack…” Then, he was gone. When the Stranger fell to the floor, there stood Mr. Griffiths.

***

2 years later…

The Griffiths family moved to New York City shortly after the death of the Stranger. Mr. and Mrs. Griffiths remained the same. Kevin started playing hockey, and Janine became warrior-boy-like. Many thought she’s a tomboy. Last of all, Jacob despised phones and computers; instead, he fell in love with TVs…

But meanwhile, in the streets of London, there was a baby ready to be taken from its mother’s stomach. It was kicking desperately to break out into the free world. Then, once it was finally taken out, it was as joyful as you can imagine. After the married couple and the newborn baby left the hospital, they spent quite some trying to find which name would be most suitable for the child. Finally, when they decided on what name they should give, the mother delivered the news.

“Hey there little guy, you know what your name is?” asked the mother sweetly. “Well, your name will be Jacob. Jacob Griffiths.”

And the little Jacob Griffiths will soon discover his obsession with phones that will nearly end his life…

Bad luck never ends…

The end (Or is it…)

Two Sides of A Coin

 

Prologue – 1936

Introductions

Part 1 – Johan Volkhardt

War… Death… Disappearance… Economy…These are all the difficulties that young Johan Volkhardt faces every day of his life. It’s World War II, a time of great danger for many, but that’s just one of the main worries that Johan faces. Not only has the war started, but he also has lost his father, leaving his family in a poor state. Young Johan has to learn to help his family and cope with this horrible situation. But he has one hope: the war could soon end…

Part 2 – Prison

Far away from the city of Munich where he once lived, Johan’s father is full of despair. He was forcibly taken from his home after he refused to join the war and fight. Now he’s in a concentration camp with no hope of escape… just wishing that his family is alright….

Chapter 1 – 1938

Two Sides of A Coin

Part 1 – Heads

“Johan! Get up from that bed now or you won’t get any breakfast!” called Gertrude Volkhardt, his mother.

It was late into the day and he had overslept after such a hard day’s work the day before. “Coming!” he shouted back. He got off of the creaky bed and went down the thin, narrow staircase. As he got downstairs, he saw his younger sister, Ann, at the table with a bowl of small green vegetables and wearing a look of disgust. Cabbage soup again… he thought. Although he truly didn’t like it, he already knew he had to eat it or he wouldn’t get anything at all for the rest of the day. After eating the disgusting soup, which he thought barely had any flavor, he got to work. He went to the back of the house and got his old, battered bicycle from two years before. People often said that he hadn’t grown much during that time. Maybe it’s the bad nutrition, he thought.

Part 2 – Tails

“Get up you foul beasts! And get to work,” called an officer. Wilhelm Volkhardt opened his eyes just a crack. The room was dark with little air passage through it, and the strong smell of sweat was stagnant. Several others were there, but he could barely see them. Wilhelm tiredly and slowly got up; he was starving. After a while, the sealed door was opened, and all the prisoners came out. In the sunlight, it was a lot easier to see him. He had an appearance similar to that of his son: blond hair, blue eyes, pale skin, and extremely thin.

Chapter 2 -1938

The Usual Routine

Part 1 – Delivery

Johan mounted his old, rusted bicycle and went off. He was off to deliver resources to the church about ten blocks away. Most times he was paid $1 for going on the trip. It wasn’t much, but even in such a poor state, it seemed like a miracle. $1, he thought, each time; every bit helps. He pedaled back home and gave his mother the money, then he went back out to try and help others and to try and earn more money. On his way around, he saw his friend, Olaf Bechtholdt, on the road. He was a blond haired boy, with brown eyes and a thin smile. It seemed like he didn’t want to be bothered: he had his head lowered and a serious expression on his face, but he came up to him anyway. “Hallo, Olaf,” he shouted as he passed by.

He didn’t respond. Just when he was about to round the corner, “Hans, get over here…” he whispered. Johan always hated that nickname, but he knew that it must be something serious.

“What is it, Olaf?” Johan asked.

Part 2 – Horror

Tiredly walking to the eating area, Wilhelm looked around. Several dead bodies were being pulled out of the room where he was just in. Officers quickly pulled them out looking disgusted. He shivered—that has happened many times and he still hadn’t gotten used to it. He slowly made his way to get food. There was barely anything to eat. He would usually only get a piece of bread (approximately weighing 300 grams), and if he was lucky, he would get a bit of cheese and potato skins. The bread was supposed to last for a whole day and the next morning, but that seemed impossible with all the hunger they had. Sometimes, prisoners had to steal pieces of bread from the deceased to live.

Chapter 3 – 1939

WAR!

Part 1 – Departure

Two years have passed since his father was taken away. They hadn’t heard anything from him. It seemed like just yesterday that his father was taken away to Johan. A few days after he refused to join the war, a bunch of Nazi officers came into their home and carried him out forcibly. One year had passed since Olaf had told him that his father died. He expected it would happen at some point. Their family was starving. Then one day, in the middle of the winter season, Johan Volkhardt received news. It wasn’t from his father, but it wasn’t good news either.

To whomever this corresponds,

You have been drafted to the

war. Depart your home in a week and

make your way to the army.

Johan, who turned sixteen years old this year, was being drafted to war.

“Remember, Ann, I’m leaving and you must do your best to help Mama,” Johan reminded his younger sister.

She broke into tears. “Do you… do you really have to leave?” she whimpered. “If I don’t go, the same thing that happened to Papa will happen to me,” he solemnly responded.

Part 2 – A Form of Escape

“Volkhardt!” called the officer. “Get over here!”

“Yes, sir…” Wilhelm groaned. Slowly walking up to him, he thought, What could it be? Am I going to die today? Once he got there, the officer started talking.

“We’ve heard news, Volkhardt…” Please tell me I’m not going to die… “Today, you’re going to be…” Killed? “..drafted to war.” I knew it, I knew…

“What did you say sir?” Wilhelm asked.

“Are you deaf, Volkhardt? I said, you’re going to war!” That’s just as bad…

Chapter 4 – 1939

Struggle

Part 1 – Survival

The next week, Johan left his head lowered, breaking through the wind and snow, wondering what would happen. He didn’t bring much, just the clothes he was wearing. It has a long way to go, so there was plenty of time to ponder over events. It was finally time to leave his home. Now it would be much harder for his family to survive, with only his younger sister and Mama there to earn money. Both men had left. He hoped they’d be ok and he could come back soon…

Part 2 – Into The Unknown

Guess I’ll have to leave now… Wilhelm thought. At least I could escape this horror for a few days, but war is just as bad… Wilhelm left the day after he heard the news. He had nothing so he wouldn’t really need anything to bring.

Silence on the road, away to war…..

What will happen to Johan and his father? Will they die at war? Will they be able to escape?

 

Bonus:

Ann’s Story – A First Person Story

Ann was a minor character in this book, but she has her own story to tell…

I was just 7 years old when my father was taken by the Nazi army. After that, I was only left with my caring older brother and mother. The house was pretty empty without him. It left us all extremely sad. I don’t know what would have happened if I didn’t have a brother like Johan. As soon as Papa was gone, he helped us as much as he could: taking care of me as a brother should and helping Mama earn money to help us survive. Now, 3 years have passed and it’s his turn to leave. I don’t know what we’re going to do, but I sure will miss him….

 

Love for the Amazon

Chapter One

There are a few things you need to know about me before I start the story.

I am Elizabeth Andrews, and I am eleven years old. I do not go to school, and that is because I live in the Amazon Rainforest.

We have lived there ever since our plane ride home from Australia. As we were flying over Venezuela, our plane had a malfunction and crashed. Everyone but my family was killed in the accident. My family is Ma, Pa, Alexander, and me, Elizabeth.

Before we crashed, Ma worked in a South American restaurant, so she knows how to treat and cook the plants and animals we find in the forest. Pa was an architect, so he built our hut out of trees from the forest.

Even Alexander is good for something. He’s great as whittling, so he made things like our silverware, cups, and anything else that can be whittled. He is thirteen, and I think it’s cool that he can whittle so well.

I don’t know what I’m good for. Whenever I think about it, all I can settle on is writing. Whenever I go on a plane trip, I bring a bunch of journals in my suitcase. I document every little thing that I see in the rainforest. If I find a pretty flower or interesting leaf, I usually sketch or close it in my nature journal. I even have a book for drawings, though I’m not a very talented artist.

Our plane crashed when I was only seven, so we have been here for four years.

Miraculously, nothing happened to any of our luggage in the crash. That’s why we have regular clothes in the middle of the Amazon. Ma washes them, so we can wear them over and over again.

I really hope that we don’t go back to civilization, because I most likely would not remember anything about New York City.

We sleep in hammocks that Ma and Pa made out of these huge leaves. They are actually pretty, pretty comfortable!

I actually really like living in the Amazon Rainforest. The only problem about it is that we have to be careful about what we eat. There are lots of poisonous plants, but also we can’t cook a baby animal.  If we did, then Ma would find out and be mad at us.

Sometimes, I have random memories of the crash. When it actually happened, it went by so quickly that I could barely remember it for a while. Once I realized that the only way to remember was to get to work helping my family, my mind was still blank as a piece of paper.

That is almost everything you need to know about me for the story to make sense. When the plane crashed, all of the passengers but me and my family were killed. All of their luggage was really ruined, but ours didn’t even have a single scratch. Also, every member of our family was in different aisles.

Chapter One and a Half

I looked out of the window, seeing the tops of trees. “Ma, how much longer?” I asked.

She looked at her watch, and then at the screen on the back of the seat in front of her. “About twelve hours, Elizabeth.”

All of a sudden, we felt a huge jolt. Out of instinct, I looked out of the window. “Ma?” I asked, my voice shaking. “Either those trees are growing really fast, or… ”

“WE’RE FALLING OUT OF THE SKY!” a man yelled.

Even though I was only a seven-year-old writer and traveler, I was smart enough to know that it was fine to be scared right now.

I heard the pilot yelling very unsettling things, like: “The radio’s down!” “The engine’s busted!” “The controls are stuck!” and “Dang plane!”

I closed my eyes to shut myself out of the chaos and terror.

My whole entire life flashed before my eyes. The first day of kindergarten, I was crying and holding onto Ma. The start of first grade, hugging Ma goodbye. The beginning of second grade, dodging Ma’s kiss and running over to my friends. The end of second grade, posing for pictures. So far, nothing significant had happened to me. I then realized that if I died in the next ten minutes, my life would be a big waste of seven years. Then, I opened my eyes. As far as I could tell, no time had passed since I’d closed them.

Chaos was erupting in that small airplane that seemed like the end of me. All of a sudden, the overhead lights flickered and then went off. Then the overhead bins popped open and a few of the smaller suitcases and bags fell out. All of the people who were in aisle seats now leaned in and lifted their legs.

I put my face in between my knees and when I lifted it up, my knees were wet. I then felt my cheeks and realized tears were rolling down them. I took a deep breath.

Soon, I heard a crash that nearly deafened me. I looked out the window and saw both wings caught on trees on either side. The plane seemed to be too heavy; I saw it gradually sagging.

All of a sudden, the wings snapped off the plane, and we tumbled to the ground.

And then the world went black.

Chapter Two

I dropped down from the tree I was in, and grabbed Ma’s woven basket that I had filled with fresh mangoes from the tree. I hurried back through the trees I had known so well. Once I was only a little ways away from our hut, I stopped and listened to the sounds of the rainforest. A few different birds chirped, a limb on a tree cracked, and I heard Pa yelling for me.

“Come on, Sammy, there’s more over here!” I heard a man yell.

Wait… That’s not Pa or Alexander… I quickly sprinted away from the voices I didn’t recognize. Once the hut was in sight, I dropped the basket of mangoes and ran to Pa.

“Pa!” I yelled.

“Oh, Elizabeth, there you are. Where is that basket of fruit you were going to bring back?” I don’t think he noticed the sweat on my forehead. I tried to slow my fast breathing and panting.

I said, “I heard a man talking to another person named Sammy.”

Pa laughed. “Do not be silly, Elizabeth. There is no one here but us.” Then, he left the hut, grabbing his handmade axe. I stood there, feeling dejected.

***

Later, when I was collecting berries for Ma, I heard a different voice. “Jim, the sun’s going down. Can’t we just camp here?” This time, it was a woman. “This is ridiculous!” I guessed that it was Sammy.

I grabbed the basket of berries I had filled and raced back to the hut. When I arrived, I saw Ma and Pa sitting at the table.

“Ma, Pa!” I exclaimed. “I heard more voices. It was a man and a woman.”

I looked back and forth between them. Ma walked forward and took the basket of berries in my hand.

“Well, Elizabeth, this is a very… interesting matter, but can we eat supper now?” She put her hand on my golden brown cheek. “Nobody is here but us, love. I don’t think you got enough sleep last night.”

She sent me to an early sleep, but instead, I ran away from the hut and far into the trees. I found one that I could easily climb, and I did. I sat atop the highest branch and looked at the sunset. The place where the orange melted into that blue, blue sky was a gorgeous pink. The colors looked like someone had painted strips with lumpy acrylics and smudged it with their finger. I closed my eyes and laid my head against the thick tree trunk.

Images of myself growing up flooded my mind. Baby Elizabeth, toddler Elizabeth, first smile, starting daycare, and everything up until second grade ended.

There was no more to think about. All the other significant events were trapped in a lost, locked box in the back of my mind, and they were never going to be released. Each year that passes, that box is going to get bigger and bigger.

I opened my eyes only to discover more darkness. The sun had gone away completely, and I couldn’t see the hut. I quickly jumped down the tree and ran in the direction I thought I came from. But then I found nothing. I ran in the other direction, but again I found nothing. Then I ran back in the way I thought I would find the tree, but instead I saw a dim light, and I expected it to be coming from the hut. I ran toward the light, and it got brighter as I got closer.

All of a sudden, I came into a clearing that was the source. Instead of our hut, I saw a campfire with two small tents. On a long log, there was a man in a tan shirt and tan shorts. There was also a woman in a matching wardrobe. He stared, seeming as surprised to see me as I was him.

“Jim, it’s a girl!” the woman said.

The man, Jim, said, “I see, Sammy. There must be a whole family of them.”

Sammy and Jim stood up, and then they approached me slowly. “Slow, Jim. We don’t want her to attack. She probably can’t speak.”

Then, Jim slowly said, “Hola. Us, Jim.” He pointed to himself. “And Sammy.” He pointed to Sammy.

“I can talk, but I don’t speak Spanish,” I said.

Both Jim and Sammy flinched and did double takes, fighting hard not to laugh.

Chapter Two and a Half

When I first opened my eyes, I didn’t know where I was. All I could think about was Alexander, only nine at the time. The first thing I did when I woke up was cry out, “Alexander!” Then, I sat up.

The sight that I saw was the most awful thing I had seen. The ruins of the plane were all around me. I couldn’t see any bodies, but I already knew they were all gone. Then, a pile of rubble stirred, and Alexander appeared from under it.

“Hello?” he yelled.

“Alexander,” I called. He looked over.

“Elizabeth, are you hurt?”

“No, are you?” I said.

“My legs are stuck under the seat,” he said.

I stood up and made my way over to him. I helped him lift that blue ripped leather seat. He stood up with me, and we looked around. We held onto each other, and I was trying hard not to sob.

Suddenly, I heard Ma’s voice, muffled. “Hello? Anybody?”

Alexander and I hurried over to the voice. “Mom! It’s Elizabeth and Alexander!” I called.

“Children, let me out please. I am under this pile of clothes,” she said. A suitcase had popped open and spilled on her. All the clothes were dirty and ripped. Once we had moved the clothes, we walked around looking for Pa.

As Ma was stepping on the rubble and trash, Pa’s voice yelled, “Ow! Where are we? What happened?” We dropped to our knees and dug through the mess. Soon, we found him. “Who stepped on my arm?” he said. None of us answered. “Are you guys alright?” We all nodded and fell into a long hug.

I finally broke the silence by saying, “What do we do now?” We all sat there, but the question wasn’t letting me think about my family. Would we ever get home? Would we be stuck here forever?

Chapter Three

Jim and Sammy offered me a piece of meat. I told them about my family in the forest.

“How did you get here?” Sammy finally asked.

So I told them about the crash, that the only survivors were me and my family, and how our luggage escaped without a scratch.

Sammy’s last question was, “How long have you been here?” She looked a bit worried about what the answer would be.

“We’ve been here four years. I was seven when we crashed, and now I am eleven.” Sammy then came forward and embraced me with a hug. “It’s fine, I really like it in the rainforest,” I said. She didn’t seem to believe me. So then I pushed Sammy away gently and told them both, “I have to go. My family is going to be waiting.”

This wasn’t true, because I had snuck out of a window in my sleeping area, but I knew my family wouldn’t bother to have checked on me. Then I ran away, and not long after, I found my hut. I was right, my family didn’t know I had been gone. I decided not to tell Ma and Pa about Jim and Sammy, because they would tell me that I was wrong.

I got into the hammock and fell into a light sleep. My family had never even known I had left.  

***

The next morning, I wrote in my article journal that I keep. In that journal, I pretty much just write every few weeks in a journalism style. It’s fun. Then, I walked over to Ma and Pa.

“Ah, Elizabeth,” Pa said.

Then, Alexander walked in. “Ma, do you need me to do anything for you?”

“No, I do not need you. Alexander, don’t work yourself ragged. Take a break from all of this work,” Ma told him.

“But then, I will have no choice but to think about the airplane crash!” he exclaimed.

“Do you mean that you haven’t thought about it yet?” I asked.

“No, and I really don’t want to.”

“Well, you can’t hide forever. Just go and do some whittling,” I advised.

He grabbed his tools and sat outside of the hut. I shook my head to myself and picked up a piece of fruit Ma had laid out. Then, I hurried out to the river with one of Pa’s fishing nets. The net seemed so much smaller when compared with the rushing water. So I tossed it out over the rough waves and sat down with my journal.

This was my drawing book, so I drew a line down the middle of the page. Then, I added a circle. Then many more shapes, until I had a big structure in the shape of something else. I couldn’t remember what it was, but I knew it would mean something.

Suddenly, as a fish leapt out of the water, I snapped out of my trance. Once I had looked up, I realized it was two fish. Then, they touched each other in the air before falling onto the net. I thought of the shape my design had made. A heart.

I picked up the net and hurried back to the hut. Once Ma had the fish cooking in the oven, I suddenly heard a gruff voice call, “Come on out. We know you are in there.”

I felt my heart start beating a million miles an hour. What’s going on? Who is that? How did he find us? I thought frantically.

We all hurried to stand outside the hut.

“Gather your belongings,” an officer said. His uniform was covered in medals and badges.

“What’s going on?!” I asked.

“Get in that helicopter, you’re coming back to civilization.”

Tooth Fairy Trouble

Tooth Fairy Kate is in her house made out of teeth in the clouds. She is making a car out of teeth. Since she’s tiny, her house is small. It’s white because once the fairies get the teeth, they have to clean them so that they can use them. (They have a little factory where the teeth go on a conveyer belt, and they have little workers that brush the teeth.)

She goes to the store to get glue. Her glue is special because it is magical. Once she finishes getting the glue from the store, she goes to her house to put the last piece on the car: a little canine for the door.

She tries out her new car and drives around, but then, the bell in the cloud rings, and it tells her that there’s a kid named Angelina who lost her tooth. Tooth Fairy Kate needs to get Angelina’s tooth. So Tooth Fairy Kate takes her new car and drives to the child’s house.            

She creaks open the window and goes through and sees the bedroom. She finds a tooth in a cup covered with paper, so she takes the paper off, grabs the tooth, and drops off a five dollar bill. She brings her car and puts it on the desk so that she can take a break, but she needs to go to the bathroom. So she flies to the bathroom. She flushes the toilet, and she leaves to go back to the room. There’s a little paper on the desk that has questions for her.

It says, “What’s your last name?”

She writes that her last name is Daisy.

And then, she sees the next question which says, “How do you know when a kid loses teeth?”

She writes on the paper, “There’s a siren that tells you there’s a person who just lost a tooth. It is the child that you choose.”

There’s a little sign on the paper that says, “Here’s a present for you. It’s a purse.”

There’s a little toy purse there for the tooth fairy.

Kate takes her car and drives out, but it’s raining, and she tries to move her car, but the car isn’t working. She gets out of her car, and she dismantles the car. She takes all the teeth and puts it in her little purse that Angelina gave her, which she tries to use to cover her head, but her wings get wet .

She lands, gets on the ground, and tries walking, but there’s stomping feet everywhere. It’s hard for her because she might get stepped on, and the humans are 100 times her size.

She keeps walking, being cautious, and makes sure that she doesn’t stand right in front of somebody and get stepped on. She hangs onto the bottom of a man’s pants, and then he walks into a car, where it’s dry. Kate stays on his pants until her wings are dry.

She makes sure not to get wet and hides inside the ankle of the man’s pants. He goes into a nice building that’s white and big. And then she hears another man say, “Welcome back, Mr. President.”

In Kate’s head, she’s wondering what a president is. Then, she remembers they have President Toothhead back at home, and she’s thinking that maybe he’s this place’s President Toothhead. So she hops out and finds this nice blanket and stays there to go to sleep.

In the morning, Kate finds herself in a room where a little girl is sleeping on a bed, and she’s on a nightstand under a blanket. She hops out from under that blanket and tries to fix her car, but she still needs glue. She has to go see if there is a place where she could find some. She sees that there’s this furry thing under the bed, and it has a collar that says, “Missy.”

Kate says, “It might be a dog. President Toothhead says to always be careful of those things because they might blow your cover.”

She sees the dog, and she gets her wand and taps its head. Then, the dog starts to float because she put pixie dust on its head. The dog starts barking, and the little girl wakes up and says, “What happened, Missy?”

Then, the girl tries to jump on Missy’s back, but Missy is floating. Kate doesn’t want the dog to bark and let the little girl know she is there. She put the pixie dust on the dog’s head so that the dog would only bark because it is floating, not because she saw Kate. Kate knows that this is her chance to escape, so she tiptoes out of the room. But she is too late. The little girl sees Kate and picks her up!

Meanwhile, at Fairytopia, the other fairies are scared and worried if Kate is okay.

Kate is put in a cage, and the girl stares at her. Kate tries to talk to the girl, but since Kate is so small, all of the noise the girl can hear is ringing. Kate takes some paper to draw out what she means. She draws rain, herself with a frowny face because her wings are getting wet, and a cloud with fairies, and a house which is where she lives. Kate labels that, “Fairytopia.” The girl understands and lets Kate out of the cage.

“Hi, my name is Brittnie,” the girl says.

‘’I was wondering if you could let me out, please’’.

Brittnie leads Kate to the window. “Thank you for coming. You gave me an experience I will never forget,’’ Brittnie says.

Kate is happy, and her wings dry. She flies out the window, but before she does that, she reverses the spell she put on the dog.

When she gets outside, she realizes that she needs glue for her car to put it back together. Her wings are not that strong, and they won’t be able to fly all the way back home. She goes back through the window, but for some reason, the girl’s room is already a mess. She cannot find the glue because the room has toys everywhere.

But then, Kate remembers that the glue is in the dresser. She climbs the dresser and falls into one of the drawers. Then, it closes, and she needs to get out! She remembers that she has powers, so she pushes some of her powers against the front of the drawer, and it opens a little. And since Kate’s tiny, she can fit through. And so, she finds the glue, and she climbs down and starts gluing her car back together.

When she finishes gluing the car back together, she takes a test drive to see if it is working. She drives all the way back to Fairytopia. Everybody in Fairytopia is wondering if she is fine. They are worried about her.

Tooth Fairy Kate tells everybody, “I had a hard time bringing the tooth back! You don’t even want to know what happened.”

The end!

The Bomb in the Building

There are two 14-year-old boys, identical twins named Joe and James, who are complete polar opposites. They hate each other. They fight all day long, nonstop. They gab about each other’s faults to their friends. They both can’t stop making up stupid flaws about each other. These boys are both black-haired and six feet tall. They have black, square glasses. Being so tall, they are extremely clumsy. They trip over things 100 times a day. Being as skinny as sticks, their heads look huge.

They are locked inside a metal room, no place to go, no windows, no light. There is nothing in the room except matches and a piece of paper with a random riddle. They need to work together to find the matches and the paper, and to solve the riddle before ten minutes is up.

Groping through the dark, the two boys don’t find anything on the floor.

“Nothing!” they chorus.

“Hey, don’t bump into me!” cries Joe.

“You bumped into me! That’s your problem,” yells James.

“I don’t have any problems! You’re the one with the problems,” snaps Joe.

“Oh yeah, you bumped into me! Can’t you look where you’re going?!”

“Even if I did bump into you, it’s extremely dark in here. How do you expect me to see where you are? Now, shut up and continue our search for the match and the stupid piece of paper!” shouts Joe.

James is getting red in the face and is feeling around for Joe. He finds him.

“What on earth are you doing?”

Then, it hits him. Joe slaps James back. Soon, it becomes a terrible fight. Punches flying back and forth. They wrestle each other on the ground. The minutes tick by, one minute… two minutes… three minutes. Only four minutes left, and they’re still punching and slapping each other’s face.

They soon are up on their feet. Searching in the dark for the objects, James bumps his head on what he thinks is a wooden cabinet that they hadn’t noticed before. He looks inside. Nothing. He rams into it to see if anything falls off. Instead, it breaks, and he finds a concrete wall instead of metal. Oh, and he also finds the box of matches, which just fell onto his head. He lights one. The riddle is taped on the concrete wall. The wall has a keyboard near it. Joe comes over to the wall where James is standing.

“I guess this door needs a code, the answer to the riddle. Nice work, brother,” applauds Joe as he smiles.

“Thanks, Joe. Now, let’s get to work.”

The riddle says:

My first is often at the front door.

My second is found in the cereal family.

My third is what most people want.

My whole is one of the united states.

What am I?

“I can’t make heads or tails of it, but you’re the dumb one. You wouldn’t get it either,” says Joe.

“Oh really, I’m the dumb one? You were the first one to get an F on a test. In first grade!” erupts James.

They fight once more, now to determine who’s smarter. Only three minutes on the clock. They get up and stop fighting like babies.

“What is often at the front door? Mail? No, that can’t be it. Steps can’t be it either,” ponders James.

Two minutes left.

“A mat, there’s usually a welcome mat at the front door. We have one ourselves,” erupts Joe. “I just don’t get how that matters?”

“We’ll find out soon.”

“When it says ‘the cereal family,’ does it mean the company cereal brand, like Kellogg’s or General Mills, or does it mean the brand from those big companies, like Cheerios, Lucky Charms, Fruit Loops. You get what I mean, right?”

“I get what you mean, but you’re wrong. I think they mean the type of grain that makes the cereal. So it can be rye, barley, or oats. We’ll get back to that,” explains James.

“What most people want is a good education, but you can’t get that without money. Money, that’s what –”

“You’re right, Joe!” interrupts James.

One minute left.

“United States isn’t capitalized, so it can mean uniting together. Could it mean matrimony? Quick, type that in and see if it’s correct.”

James types it in. The door doesn’t open. Instead, written on the screen connected to the keyboard is:

How can you do this?

“What, we need to get married?!”

Second are ticking by. 20 seconds left.

“How on earth are we going to do this? This is the dumbest thing in the world!” erupts James.

Less and less time, ten… nine… eight… seven.

“We’re brothers though, why do we ne — ”

The building goes up in flames.

The flames lick the building to the ground. The fire department gets the warning and rushes to the sight. They warned the fire department that there are two boys stuck inside. The twins’ parents are told about the incident, and they jump in their car and race to the site. They are told that the reason why Joe and James went missing was because a mysterious man grabbed the boys from their rooms to this building. He set a bomb to ten minutes and started it as the boys were dropped in. They needed to find a way out of the building.

The fire department recovers the unconscious bodies from the building and puts them in the ambulance. The ambulance rushes to the hospital with the parents’ 2017 Mercedes E-350 tailing behind.

The boys’ hospital room has white walls with fluorescent lighting, which makes you blind when you first walk in. The boys wake up. They are blinded and can’t see each other. Joe is in agony. The doctor tells him he was fatally injured and might not live for long. They lie in their beds, thinking, thinking.

The last day for Joe has come, and he’s ready for it.

“James, I’ll miss you.”

“No, Joe! Why, Why, Why, Why?!”

James is in tears as Joe leaves the world forever.

M.I.A.

Vinny and I had been best friends ever since kindergarten. We always had playdates, and we’d go together everywhere. Or that’s what I thought. I mean, we’d always be having fun together. Vinny seemed to be having fun. So today, I asked him if he wanted to come over to my house.

He said, “I uh, um — sorry, I can’t.” And then he ran off.

That’s weird, I thought. So I went home, did my homework, and didn’t do much the rest of the day.

The next day, while we were taking a math test, I whispered, “Wanna come over?”

He said he’d talk to me after school. So after school, I went to his locker, but nobody was there. After about ten minutes, I gave up and went home. The same thing happened the next day. I thought maybe his dog or ferret died, and he was just really sad and upset. So I gave it a rest. Later on, I started following him around, and he didn’t seem to mind. But then, I thought that maybe he didn’t like it. He also started to hang out with other kids.

So I figured out that there was some problem with me, at least in Vinny’s eyes. I had no idea what was up. I took some time to think if I had done anything to upset him. I couldn’t think what was going on at ALL. I mean, I couldn’t think of anything bad that I did to Vinny recently. I needed to figure it out. What could I do, you might be asking. Well to me, this is kinda rude, but it was the only way — spying on Vinny. I called it operation “Spying on Vinny!” Good name, huh?!

I started my work on Monday so I could have a good whole week to work it out. If I didn’t figure it out, I would quit the idea of trying to figure out what was going on. I started to watch what he did, who he talked to, and what he said. By Wednesday, I had no information and was getting worried. The day went by, and on Thursday, Vinny was sick. That means I only had Friday to figure out what was going on. When I got home from school, I didn’t know what to do. So I went with the only thing I could think of: Ask Vinny what the problem was. Luckily, Vinny was at school on Friday, so in fourth period, I went for it.

“Vinny,” I said. “What’s wrong?”

“I’m sorry — I just.” Then, he ran off.

I needed to know what was going on. When school ended, I realized that the day wasn’t done yet. I ran up to my room, hopped on my computer (not literally), and opened my email. I then decided that I shouldn’t send an email because he might not respond very quickly. I opened my iMessage and went to Vinny’s contact.

Me: Hey

Vinny: What

Me: R u ok?

Me: Honestly

Vinny: No…

Me: Then what’s up?

Vinny: You know my dad is in the army

Vinny: Well he went MIA

Me: I’m really really really sry

Vinny: It’s ok

Vinny: Dude, i’m sry i was mean to u, i just couldn’t, im sry

Vinny: Can we just be friends again?

Me: yea but who r those othr kids

Vinny: Oh they r my cousins, they r just visiting for a month because it is a hard time 4 our family

Me: Cool

Vinny: There’s someone i want u to meet

To Be Continued…

The Mysterious Box

One scorching, hot day, a little girl named Katie with beautiful, blonde hair, was wearing a blue dress with white polka dots. Her mother was wearing a striped shirt and a black skirt. Her mother took her on a walk to Central Park because they wanted to stretch their legs. On their way they passed an elegant shop that had all different kinds of things from different countries.

They noticed stuff like a chair from India, a chest from France, a vase from China, and a dress from Africa. Everything looked fragile. The door had a dusty, golden doorknob. They continued walking towards Central Park, but at the end of the window, there was a gap… Something was shining.

Katie’s mom stopped and said, “Katie come back.” Katie’s mother wanted to take a look inside because something caught her eye that she thought was really outstanding.

Katie wasn’t sure what it was, so she decided to take a look anyways. Inside the store, Katie’s mother saw a soft, pretty scarf, and on the scarf was a whole lot of animal patterns mixed up with jewelry.  

Katie’s mother decided to buy it, and she brought it to the counter. While she was paying, her daughter heard something calling to her. A whisper was coming from an old, mysterious, familiar box. The box was wooden and had two diamonds on each side. It was right by where the mixed up animal scarf was. She thought in her head that she’d seen it before.

When she was going to open it, the shopkeeper asked politely, “Please don’t open that box,” because he was scared. But Katie just ignored him because she was really curious what was inside. So she opened it…

But nothing was inside. It was 12:30 when they went out of the shop. Owls were hooting loudly. Katie and her mother went back to their fantastic home and went to sleep by themselves quietly. Everyone in the house was asleep except for one person: Katie. She couldn’t sleep because of the box.

She kept on thinking and thinking, What could be inside? She thought, It’s impossible to hear people calling your name when there’s no one there. Katie knew she had to go back to the shop. Katie was awake the whole night.

After that night, Katie asked her mother, “Can we go to that shop again?”

Her mother explained, “The shopkeeper doesn’t want you going there anymore.”

But Katie begged her. And eventually, her mother said, ’’Yes you can go,” because she was getting annoyed by her daughter asking this question every day and every second!      

They went off to the shop, and as soon as they arrived inside, Katie rushed right next to the mysterious box and opened it. This time, she fell inside the old, dusty box and found herself somewhere else. Katie felt really scared. She was trembling.

Katie found herself in a forest with rainbow trees and mixed-up animals where different parts of their bodies were switched. For example, a face of a dog, a body of a snake, hands of an elephant, and legs of an ant. All the animals were really surprised, and the trees looked very excited. The animals were all staring at Katie because the animals had an orb where they could see what was happening in the old, careless shop. The animals had had the orb since they were babies. In the beginning, when they were still babies, they would almost knock the orb down. But their parents caught them every single time. When they were older, they knew that they could see the inside of the shop, so they started to be more careful. Every day, they had looked for Katie. They knew Katie was the person that the king wanted to join their army.

They were all surprised to see Katie, but there was one animal who looked very polite and gentle and kind, who told her, “Go see the king.” The polite, gentle animal told her, “Just follow one path, and you’ll find your way.”

Katie only walked for five minutes, when she found a person who was wearing armor stuck next to a leafy tree. Katie said, “Hello sir?” He did not answer. She said louder, “Hello sir?!” He still did answer. So she decided to investigate the man carefully!

She saw that he had a dangerous knife through his left leg, so she took it out and his eyes lit open as quick as a lightning bolt. A witch had turned the sword into a magic sword that made him fall asleep for one thousand years.

One thousand years earlier, the man had killed the witch’s sister trying to defend himself. Right before the witch had stabbed him, he heard her say, “The only person who will be able to save you is the person who can kill me.” The man had waited one thousand years for Katie to come to save him. Katie had faced loads of hard challenges already in her life. Once, she got in a big fight with her mother and had gotten abandoned at a store. Another time, she got lost at a playground and had to find her own way home. As soon as the man saw her, he knew Katie was ready to kill the witch.

Katie asked the man, “How come you were stuck next to this tree?”

The man replied kindly, “A witch stuck me here, and I’ve been waiting for a thousand years.”

Katie said, “My name is Katie. What’s yours?”

The man happily replied, “Joe.”

Katie asked, “Would you like to go with me to see the king of this land? Maybe he can do something for you, like help you stitch that hole in your leg up.”

Joe replied, “Okay. I’ll go with you to see the king!’’

They walked for two days straight. Joe and Katie found two pitch-dark paths that looked the same. They didn’t know which one to go to. They went past the first one. It led back to where they had started. They tried the other one. It led to the place where they had started as well. They wondered and wondered how two paths could possibly lead back to their beginning. It was 11:20 at night so they decided to go to sleep on the cold, wet grass.

The next morning, they thought, Let’s go straight on the grass and see what happens, and eventually, it worked! Joe could see the castle with his very good eyesight. They decided to have a snack break because of their hard work. They had delicious grapes and crispy pretzels.

After they finished eating happily, they felt very comfortable. They lay on the wet, soft grass for 15 minutes!

Eventually, they continued on their way to the king. After two tiring days, they arrived at the king’s beautiful, gorgeous, outstanding palace. The palace was made out of solid gold. It had glimmering gems on the roof. They couldn’t believe their eyes, so they quickly ran to the door…  but unfortunately, there was a person wearing solid gold armor guarding it. Every person that went past the guard noticed a sword hanging down his belt and his remarkably ugly horse next to him. People decided to keep their thoughts to themselves because they didn’t want to get into a big fight with the guard.

Katie asked him, “Can we go inside the palace?”

The guard answered rudely, “No. You cannot go inside the palace. It’s the king’s orders.”

Katie responded in an angel voice, “Please?” Katie thought it would be easy because she was used to her mother saying yes all the time, and her mother knew she was spoiled little child.

The guard still responded, “NO! JUST GO AWAY!”

Katie knew it wouldn’t work anymore because she could see the desperation on the guard’s face. He didn’t want anyone to go inside. Katie turned back and asked Joe for help. They walked away to a big, shady tree and hid in the branches so the guard couldn’t hear what they were talking about!

Katie whispered to Joe, “Can you help us to get inside?”

Joe suggested, “Let’s find the keys to the castle.”

Katie thought that it was a good idea, but she asked, “How are we going to find the keys?”

“Let’s hide, and hopefully another guard will tell this guard where the keys are. Then, we will follow that person, and then, when he leaves we will get the keys!’’

It was late at night, so they decided to go to sleep on the branches of a big tree. Finally, early in the morning, Katie saw the guard telling the other guard where the keys were. She couldn’t believe her eyes! She woke Joe up and told him the good news. Joe was glad as well. He had a big grin on his face. They quickly followed the man, and the man put the keys at the back door. They hid next to some hay, and then as soon as he went away, they sprinted to the keys.

Katie asked Joe, “Now that we have the keys, how do we get inside with the guard there?”

This time, Joe was really worried. He didn’t know either. They went back to the tree with the keys. They thought about how they could go inside. After one week of thinking, Katie thought of something. On the last day of the week, the guards noticed the keys were missing. The person at the front gate ran away because he was so scared that he would get fired because he didn’t keep the keys. Katie woke up Joe again.

They were so relieved that after one week, they finally did it. When the guard ran home, Katie and Joe rushed inside. Everything inside was green except for the path. The path was greenish blue. It led to a fancy door. Katie and Joe were really nervous because they were afraid maybe it wasn’t the king inside the door. So they stood there thinking about who could possibly be inside. After two minutes, they thought the only person that could be in there would be the king because they heard him talking.

Katie opened the door, and there sat a fancy, clean man, and that man was the king…

***

The king’s face turned pale when he saw Katie. He basically wanted to faint because she was the person he was waiting one hundred and two years for, and finally, she came! At first, Katie thought that the man wasn’t the king; she just thought he was a stupid, drunk stranger because he had a ridiculous response when Katie walked inside.

Katie asked, “Who are you?”

Before he could answer he dropped on the cold, dusty, hard ground!

Katie stared at the filthy king. Katie was so scared. She burst out with tears.

But Joe realized there was a letter lying by the King, and then he shouted, “Katie, Katie look there’s a letter, and it says it’s to you.’’

Katie stopped immediately. She went to the letter and…

Dear Katie,

Go out of the castle, walk ten miles, and then, you will find two trees, and one will have a key hanging down from it. Take it, then, go to the next one, put it through a hole, and it will take you to me!

Yours Sincerely,

The Queen

As soon as Katie got the letter, she rushed out the door. Joe didn’t want to go with her because he was scared, so he hid somewhere. After Katie walked for two minutes, she realized Joe wasn’t there. She was shocked by this sight. She was now alone again. She wanted to go back home and just forget all about this, but she had to keep on going if she wanted to go back home. So she continued on her journey. It was only the afternoon, so she found a nice, cozy space by a tree and fell asleep!

The next morning, it was raining hard, and Katie knew that she couldn’t continue on her journey. She decided to stay by the tree another day, but ants were crawling around the tree, so she had to go to another tree.

After two minutes, she finally arrived at another tree. She put her head down and tried to fall asleep because it was raining hard, but she felt something hitting her on the neck. She wasn’t comfortable anymore, so she looked behind her, and there was a fancy, golden, precious key. She wondered if it was the key somebody sent to her. She went for the risk and took it. She ran to the other tree as quickly as a cheetah, and she found three holes. She tried one hole. It didn’t work. When Katie took the key out, it just had some branches and tree sap stuck on it .

She was disappointed and said, “Why isn’t this working?” She started to try the other ones, but the more she tried putting the key into the holes, the more tree sap and branches got on it. She threw the key into a hole in the ground, but Katie missed. Katie sat down on the cold, wet grass. She meditated because she was annoyed about missing. Her face was as red as an apple. Her face was on fire. But when she meditated, she felt calmer. The anger came out of her body.

She was ready to try again. She picked up the key. She stopped and looked at the key. She noticed writing on the key that said: Dear Katie, Good Luck. From, The Queen. She felt very special. Katie was energetic once again. She threw the key in the cold breeze. It flew as smoothly as a bird! It dropped inside the hole. Katie’s smile showed it all. Tears filled her eyes. After a long time, she finally did it!

She curiously walked to the hole to grab the key that was glimmering in the darkness. Her arm got caught by poison ivy reaching towards her. She didn’t mind because she was brave enough. She went to reach for the glimmering key, but something pushed her. She wobbled, but she was okay. Then, the wind began to blow. She was struggling to survive. When the wind stopped, she lost balance, and all of a sudden, she fell into the pitch black hole…

As she fell through the dusty hole, she screeched. She was trying to reach for the sky. She told herself she was invisible because she was really worried, and she wanted to tell herself positive things. But then, she landed on a soft, bouncy, cozy bed. She looked around…

Katie realized that she was at the queen’s outstanding, dusty palace! When Katie looked outside, it was scorching hot. She was confused because it was raining heavily…

At the beginning, Katie thought she had gone to another country or land. She was getting annoyed. Suddenly, she felt startled! Light shone on the colorful, dusty, red throne. Out of nowhere, the gorgeous queen arrived…

The queen was wearing an old fashioned robe and a glimmering golden gown. She was wearing silver, sparkly shoes, and she had a colorful crown.

Katie couldn’t believe her eyes. She was shocked by the sight. The queen’s face turned as white as a cloud. Her legs were wobbling. She was biting her nails. Suddenly, the wind was blowing hard. Katie didn’t know what to say to the queen. She backed up.

The queen was confused. She asked, “Are you Katie?”

Katie responded with a trembling voice, “Y-y-yes.”

The queen didn’t know if she was Katie because she expected her to be very confident. She asked, “Are you really Katie?” Katie took a deep breath and stepped forward and bowed as politely as could. The queen looked at her, and she confidently said, “Stand up.”

Katie tiptoed towards the gorgeous queen and kindly gave her the letter from her broken pocket. The queen stood there. She was frozen with the letter. Katie asked, “Hello? Hello?” Still no answer. She tried one more time…

All of a sudden Katie woke up in a shock in her own room on her own bed. She was pale from shock! Katie looked around. There was no queen, no Joe, no anyone. She asked, “Is anyone there?” No one answered. She asked louder and rougher, “Is anybody there?!”

Katie realized it was all a dream: the rainbow trees, the mixed up animals. It was all a dream. Katie’s eyes were watery. She sighed and flopped over to the other side of her bed. Katie wanted to continue on her journey to earn the gold! Katie tried to go to sleep again. She closed her eyes. She tucked herself in and thought that she was in the land she was in before. It didn’t work. She tried again and again. The more she did it, the more it didn’t work. Katie gave up. Because of this, everyone in the land got sick. Every night, she tried and tried to get back. But after a year, she forgot all about it.

All the people in the land started to fade away because Katie hadn’t come back again…

The end [or not…]

Aliens At Mars

Long ago, a group of people were assigned to go on a mission in outer space. Their mission was to try to get past Mars’ atmosphere. But what they didn’t know was, they had visitors on Mars.

The group of people were Noemie, Jeany, Nick, and Jack. On their way to space, they saw the beautiful sun. It looked like looking at a thousand stars and flowers all day long!! There was a camera out of the ship where they could see everything out of the computer. Finally, it was time they were getting closer and closer to Mars!!!

Suddenly, Jack said, “We’re losing contact with earth, man!!!”

Everybody started getting busy. All of a sudden, everybody started pressing buttons and switching switches.They were passing Mars’ atmosphere but they didn’t know it.

It sounded like this, “Vrooooooooooommmm. Beeb, Beeeee, beeb, beeb, beeb, beeb,  beeb, beeb, beeb, beeb.”

They smelled smoke. The smoke smelled like dead meat. The a/c caught on fire, but they put it out before it caused real damage to the computers.

Suddenly, they felt a big bump. Then they stopped doing what they were doing. They landed on Mars!

“YEAH!! We did it, man, we did it,” said Jack.

While they were celebrating, there was a big hole in the a/c. The mother alien quickly crawled in the hole, waiting for her prey. The alien mother was bigger than baby aliens. Aliens have big heads. The humans did not know there was was more than one alien. They also had mouths in their mouths!!!

Noemie, the leader, told Jack to fix the hole in the a/c. Jeany went too. They went together.

Jack looked in the big hole in the a/c and saw a big, humongous, ALIEN!! The alien slowly opened its mouth.

“HELP, MAN!” said Jack. “Help,  help, help, man!!!”

“Hey, Jack, I got the tools to fix the a/c. What do you say we get to work? Jack? Jack? Jack?! Are you playing a joke on me?! JACK!” said Jeany.

“Help!” said Jack.

The the alien zoomed into the pipes leaving a trail of blood!

THE NEXT DAY…

“I’m telling you the truth, Noemie!!! One second Jack was there, the other he wasn’t not! And after he said his last word, ‘Help!’ I saw a trail of blood in the pipes!” said Jeany.

“Stop with your lies. He’s probably pulling another trick on you. And ‘help’ was not his last word. He’s my man,” said Noemie.

“At midnight I did not see him in his bed! You do not think it’s a signal from an ALIEN? People who believe in aliens wrote a book about ‘em. In the book, it said the alien would take a person you care about and eat him/her alive,” said Jeany.

“Hey, guys sorry to interrupt, but we found a dude floating in space. His name is Fernando. Should we bring him in?” said Nick.

“Of course,” said Jeany. “Profile his ID.”

“He has no family. Nothing,” said Nick.

“Can’t be! Nothing at all?” said Jeany.

“Nope. He thought if he went on this mission, he’d get more money. His crew abandoned him in space. They went back to earth without him. He said he saw an alien.”

“I told you that aliens are on Mars, Noemi,” said Jeany.

“He’s lying. Aliens are not real. How many times do I have to tell you this?!” said Noemi.

“Until one of us dies, Noemi. Just wait and see,” said Jeany.

“Aaaaaaaaaaaahhhhhhhhhhhh!” yelled Nick. “Something is pulling me into the pipes! HELP!!!”

“Don’t!” yelled Fernando. “If you kill it, it will destroy the ship. It will make a hole in the air container causing us to lose oxygen,” said Fernando.

“Are you crazy?!” said Nick.

“Do you want to kill us all?” said Fernando.

“No,” said Nick.

“The alien has to let go of you at some point. But it will not leave us alone. We have to hurt it once, then it dies by itself. Hit this one ten times. It’s the mom alien,” said Fernando. Then, Fernando shot the mom alien ten times, letting Nick free.

Suddenly, Noemie fell down to the floor. An alien was pulling her in the pipes. Noemi tried to kill the alien, but it was too late. Jeany shot it, but their leader died.

“Who’s going to lead us now?!” said Nick.

“I will!”said Jeany.

“Now let’s let’s go and  kill some aliens!”said Jeany.

“Yeah!!” shouted Fernando and Nick.

So, they ejected into space and went home to earth. The aliens died on Mars. Hooray!!!

COP CHASE!!

Chapter 1

Kateri, Sam, Andrew, and Kasten were watching 3D Zootopia in comfy, leaned back, reserved chairs. Oops, sorry, I almost forgot about Marisa. She is Kateri and Andrew’s mom. She was there too, of course. Sam and Kasten were not part of the Derman family, but Andrew and Kasten were very close and Sam and Kateri had been friends for as long as they could remember.

“That was a good movie,” said Andrew as they walked out of the theater.

“Yep!” said Sam as they crossed the street. Then… vroom! Two cars came rumbling down the street. Thankfully, the group was safe. They had taken a street safety class together. Kateri, Andrew, Sam, and Kasten jumped on one car and Marisa got on the other. The cars kept on rumbling down the road… in different directions! Sam put his face down on the window and stuck his tongue out at the driver.

“What are you doing?!” asked Kateri.

“Distracting the driver,” replied Sam. “Look.” The car veered into an apartment building. The driver called 911. The car stopped and the ambulance came rushing. Kateri, Sam, and Andrew were not hurt, but Kasten had a big scrape on his arm. He burst into tears. Kateri quickly silenced him. “Hide!” yelled Sam. Andrew dove under the car. Kateri jumped behind a nearby trashcan. Kasten sprinted into a hair salon. Sam dove into a trash can.

“Shh,” whispered Andrew to Kateri, who was giggling from behind her trash can. Sam started yelling at Kateri. Andrew caught words like, “nitwit,” “scandal,” and, “stupid.” The police turned their heads.

“They saw us!” said Sam, “On three, run! One, two, three!” They all piled into the car. Then… BAM!

COP CHASE!! The two cars went rumbling down the street!

“I nicked the police belts,” said Andrew. “I’m quite a good pickpocket.”

“Hardy har har,” said Kateri.

“Hey, who asked you?!”

“Myself!”

Sam snatched the police belts from Andrew. He pulled out the police guns. “Nope! I don’t approve of violence,” said Sam.

“Why not?” asked Kateri.

“Because it’s… violence,” said Sam.

“Look, Sam!” said Kasten. “It’s a fortune telling place! Can we go?! Can we go?! Can we go?!”

“Huh. Okay, Kasten. But only very quickly.”

“I want to see if we’ll ever find Kateri and Andrew’s mom,” said Kasten.

They walked into the fortune telling place. It was called The Seeker’s Revelations. Kasten ran into the studio.

“Have fun!” said Kateri.

They closed the door of the studio. A moment later, Kasten ran out of the studio!

“What happened?” asked Andrew.

“You know what she said?! You know what she said?!” said Kasten. “She said she had a revelation. She said that she knew I was a seeker. She knew I was seeking for Kateri and Andrew’s mother. She said, ‘You will find her again, but you might lose her forever.’”

Sam walked out of the store, leading Kasten by his arm. “I don’t ever want to see that hateful woman again!”

Suddenly, a woman walked out of the studio. “Oh, did you call me hateful? Night will come and I will attack when you least expect it!”

Kateri waved her finger by her ear, creating the cuckoo sign.

“Did you hear me? Night will come, and expect attack will— wait, what?”

“Hahahahaha! Let’s go,” laughed Andrew. They jumped back in the car. The cops were getting really close to them.

“Hey,” said Kateri. “It’s my turn to drive!!”

“Okay,” said Sam. “But remember: we’re in a cop chase, so we have to switch quickly. This is not your normal day whatever,” Sam said as Kateri jumped into the driver’s seat.

Kateri started driving. She drove like she was drunk, even though she wasn’t. The cops were getting really close to them; even closer. Then the police crashed into the beat-up Mercedes Benz.

“Aww…” said Kasten. “I liked that car.”

“Hurry up!” yelled Kateri. “We’re gonna have to jump!!” Sam, Kateri, and Andrew jumped out of the car.

“Run for it!” yelled Sam. “Kasten, hurry up!”

Kasten was scared. He had never jumped out of a moving vehicle before. Sam, Andrew, and Kateri had a lot of experience from their car safety class, but Kasten had been too scared to attend the jumping part. The car went into a tunnel, and Kasten had still not jumped.

Change

“Linda?” I whispered. It was late at night and the storm clouds were brewing.

“What is it, Josie?” she said sleepily.

“I’m scared.”

The thunder boomed loudly. I dove for her bed. I snuggled in and she made room for me. That’s how I spent the night: with my sister.

***

The next day, it was a warm, bright, sunny morning. I listened to the birds chirping their merry tunes as if to say, “Spring is here. Rejoice, oh, rejoice in the glory of spring.” I got ready to throw my frisbee, still listening to the merry tunes, listening to the leaves rustle, and smelling the smell of spring.

I threw my frisbee perfectly, letting it glide elegantly through the air. I got the feeling of being on a roller coaster. In my mind, I was with the frisbee; I was on the frisbee sailing over the green of the park, over the river, past people staring and pointing. I flew through the sharp wind, over stores and restaurants, cars and bikes, towers and skyscrapers. I felt like I was on a roller coaster, gliding elegantly through the air. I was zipping over people, high above city life . . . and then I was back, standing very still in the park, with my eyes watching my frisbee sail through the air.

My sister caught the frisbee. She tossed it back to me. I let it glide through the air. I let it glide over my head, skimming my hair. I let it come to a stop on the bright green grass. I ran to pick it up. I threw it to my sister. She threw it back. She laughed. I laughed. I ran over to her and hugged her tight. She hugged me back.  

“Do you wanna go to the pool?” I asked.

“Do you want to get ice cream and then go to the pool?” she replied, still laughing.

We heard the sound of an ice cream truck and we rushed in the direction of the music. I got a chocolate vanilla twirl and she got strawberry. She paid for both of ours with her pocket money and we skipped off to the pool. We had to finish our ice cream before we went into the changing room.

We both laughed when my sister spilled ice cream on her shoes, because the sole of the shoe said Foolproof. I gave her some of mine. We had fun in the pool, splashing each other until an elderly lady told us to stop. Her mouth was like a lemon, swollen and big. We spent the rest of the time laughing about that.

We decided to go back to the park. While we were relaxing on the green, green grass, Linda got a phone call. I studied her face to see what was going on.

After a long pause, my sister said, “Okay.”

I couldn’t read her face.

She put her phone in the bag, and without saying a word, she began to pack our things.

“Linda? What’s wrong?”

She slowly turned to face me.

She burst out laughing.

“I so got you,” she said, still laughing. We both fell on the grass, laughing and laughing. I felt as free as the frisbee, sailing over the park.

“Who was it?” I asked.

“Mom,” she answered. “She said that we have to go walk the dog.”

This produced a fresh bout of giggles.

Linda had a friend named Peggy. I really liked Peggy. When she came over, Linda, Peggy, and I would go and play. Peggy was a lot like Linda, so you can see why I liked her. She would call me Josie-Rosie and spin around, holding my hands, spinning, singing “Ring Around the Rosie.” It was a lot of fun when Peggy would come over.

I had a friend named Finney. Both of us liked Linda and Peggy. When Linda would have a playdate with Peggy, Finney and I would beg our parents if we could could have one too. One such instance, our parents said no. So I crept up the stairs to Linda’s bedroom, where I knew she and Peggy were hanging out.

I knocked.

No one answered.

I put my ear to the door. They were definitely in there. Maybe I hadn’t knocked loud enough.

I knocked again.

No answer.

I turned the handle. The door was locked. My sister’s door never had a lock. Maybe she got one yesterday; maybe that explains the drilling noise. That confused me. Why would she need a lock?

I ran downstairs to tell Mom, but she just sighed and said, “Your sister just wants her privacy. She’s growing up.”

***

One day, Mom sat us down and said, “Your dad and I are leaving for Spain in a week. We are going to leave you here alone because Linda is old enough to take care of you both for a week. Linda, I’m going to leave money on the table for you to use. Buy food for yourself and your sister. You guys know our phone numbers, so in case of an emergency, you can call us. Do not invite anyone into the house. Linda, we’re trusting you. Josie, behave yourself.”

On the second day that Mom and Dad were gone, Linda broke the rules. And she broke the rules big-time. She invited her gang at school over to have a party in the basement. I rushed to the phone. Seeing me, Linda pulled me aside, her eyes strangely bloodshot and her voice slurred. She said, “Listen up, girl: not a word to Mom, or else . . . ” She let the threat hang in the air. She turned slowly and rejoined the party. I stood in shock. That was not my sister.

At the end of the party, the problem of cleaning up occurred. Linda’s friends pointed at me, jeering, their voices slurred, their eyes bloodshot. The stench of tobacco filled the air. I struggled to breathe.

I ran upstairs.

Up another flight.

I ran past my sister’s room

I ran to my room.

I shut the door.

I sat on my bed.

Crying.

Sobbing.

This was not my sister.

***

The rest of the time that Mom and Dad were gone, every day, Linda would invite Peggy over and they would sit and drink. The smoke from their cigarettes billowed out from under the locked door. Sometimes they would emerge for a snack, stumbling down the stairs, their eyes bloodshot, their voices slurred.

The week without Mom and Dad was horrible. When they came back, Linda got in trouble; the remains of her party still covered the basement. Linda was angry for a week after. She hated me. This was not the Linda I knew. Her room was now off-limits to everyone, including Mom and Dad. They respected that and never went in! Why didn’t they care?

One day, when I knew that my sister was in the bathroom, I crept into her room. Everything seemed normal until I looked under her bed. What I saw made me gasp. Under her bed, tons of alcohol and bags of tobacco and cigarettes were crammed.

Half of me wanted to go tell Mom, and half of me knew that I would get Linda in trouble and she would hate me even more. But I didn’t have to decide.

“What the **** are you doing in my room?” my sister thundered from the doorway. I leapt up. My heart was beating so fast, I thought my chest would burst.

“I . . .”

“Shut up. If you mention a word to Mom, I swear I’ll . . . ” she said. “Get out of my room.”

I didn’t need her to tell me twice. I ran out of her room. I tried to put as much distance between us as possible.

I raced down the stairs.

I sprinted down the hallway.

I bounded down the steps.

I was in the basement.

I stared at the remains of the party.

I remembered my sister and her bloodshot eyes, her slurred voice, the gang jeering and pointing.

I shot out of the basement.

I darted up the steps.

I fled down the hallway.

I scrambled up the stairs.

I tore down another hallway.

I rushed into my room.

I slammed the door.

I cried.

***

A week later, Linda ran away. She left a note. On it, the words, “hate you, not coming back,” were scribbled hurriedly. She took her stash of alcohol, tobacco, and cigarettes with her.

I didn’t know how I felt about her being gone. I missed her old self.

I didn’t know about her new self.

Our house was quiet with Linda gone.

I didn’t really miss her.

That’s a terrible thing to say.

***

The next year passed smoothly and quietly.

I got B’s in most of my classes; I’d never gotten anything else.

Things were really quiet without Linda. My parents were devastated. They constantly blamed themselves for her unhappiness. They looked for her all over. They were still upset even though she took a bunch of money from them. I couldn’t recognize Linda’s room without the constant smoke billowing out from under the door. The house smelt strange without the constant stench of tobacco. It was . . . well . . . different, without Linda.

***

Linda came back on Tuesday, March 17th. She looked really different. She was wearing a simple skirt and top, not at all like the tube top she had been wearing when she left. She looked different without the useless makeup that had covered her face. Now, she had a light covering. She looked more grown-up. Mom and Dad took turns hugging her. She approached me slowly.

I had a horrible flashback of the party; of Linda approaching me slowly with her bloodshot eyes and slurred voice.

I turned and ran.

Up to my room.

I shut the door.

I sat on my bed, crying.

I knew that this Linda was different, but I couldn’t forgive her. I just couldn’t.

The door opened quietly.

Linda came in. She sat on my bed.

For a moment, it was silent. I buried my face deeper in the pillows.

“Josie,” she said. “I am so sorry. I really was horrible to you.”

I ignored her. That was easy to do due to my turmoil of thoughts, each pushing to the front of the line, trying to get attention.

“Josie,” she said again. “I really am.”

I still ignored her. But she should’ve gotten an award for persistence.

“Josie . . .” she tried again.

“Get out of my room.” I hadn’t really meant for it to come out rudely, but it did. Linda got off my bed.

She whispered, “I really am.”

Then she left.

My head was aching for the rest of the day, and the day after that, and so on.

***

About a week later, Linda came into my room with a gift. It was wrapped in the most beautiful wrapping paper, which must have cost her a fortune.

She left the present on my bed. On it was pinned a note: I’m really sorry. I opened her present. It was a camera—the expensive kind that I had begged for on every one of my birthdays.

***

A month later, my thoughts were still in turmoil when Linda quietly came into my bedroom.

“Do you want to go to the park?” she asked.

“No.”

“Do you want to get ice cream and then go to the pool?”

“No.”

“Josie, what do you want to do?”

“Leave me alone.” Again, it came out rudely, but I hadn’t meant for it to.

She left the room.

Ever since Linda had come back, my parents had been treating her like a queen. Well, everyone was treating her like a queen, as if she did something great, running away like she did.

***

One day, I was in the kitchen making myself a peanut butter sandwich when I heard Linda and Mom through the wall. I stopped and crept out of the kitchen. I approached the dining room door and put my ear to it. At first, I couldn’t make out what they were saying, then I heard Mom: “Linda, your dad and I are very proud of you for growing up and coming back. We really missed you.”

“But Mom, I’m not proud of myself.”

“If you’re talking about Josie, she’s just in a shock. She’ll get better.”

“No, she won’t. She has reason to hate me. I’ve tried everything. I even got her that camera that she has wanted for so long. Nothing works. I don’t blame her.”

“Sweetie . . .”

I gritted my teeth.

I sat there for a moment.

Not taking it anymore.

I went up to my room.

It’s wasn’t like I didn’t think she had changed. It was that I couldn’t forgive her for who she was. She seemed different since she’d come back; she seemed more grown-up, not playful, not fun, not the Linda she used to be. Not the Linda I used to love.

I banged my head on the bed. This was not helpful.

Ouch. I misjudged the distance between the bed and the wooden part. Ow.

I hung off my bed, my head almost reaching the floor.
All the blood rushed to my head.

I remembered a warm, sunny morning.

***

It was early in the morning, and I went into Linda’s room. She was sleeping on her bunk. Her bed was like a bunk bed, but it had no under bed. Just empty space.

“Come on, Linda. Wake up.” She stirred in her sleep. “Come on, Linda.”

“Okay, okay, I’m up.”

“What should we do?”

She sat up, a twinkle in her eyes.

“Let’s swing.”

“We don’t have swings.”

“Let’s make them.”

“How?”

“Grab a blanket.” I got a blanket.

“You can tie it to my bed, like this.” She showed me how to tie the ends of the blanket together to make a swing. She got in hers. I got in mine. We swung, laughing, giggling. We swung higher and higher, laughing, giggling.

***

That was it. I remembered no more.

Another memory took its place.

***

It was about to rain. Linda dragged me outside.

“Let’s build a fort,” she said.

The twinkle was in her eyes.

We grabbed chairs, raincoats, some food, and umbrellas. We finished our fort just as the rain started to fall. It had a bedroom and a food storage area. It even had a playroom! Our bedroom began to leak.

“Come on,” Linda said, a twinkle in her eyes.

We ran inside, laughing. We grabbed an umbrella and ran back, laughing, getting soaked. We repaired our fort. We ran outside, getting wet. We ran through the rain, laughing, dancing in the rain. We were soaked to the bone.

***

Another memory.

***

It was snowing. We built a snowman together, and an ice wall surrounding him. We went inside and dyed water with food coloring and splashed it all over our snowman and ice wall, laughing.

Linda had a twinkle in her eyes.

We went inside and had hot chocolate with marshmallows.

Linda had a twinkle in her eyes.

***

I missed that twinkle. I missed it a lot.

That was it. No more memories came to me. That was it.

I missed that twinkle.

I wanted to see it again. I needed to see it again. I had to trust Linda; it was the only way. I needed to see that twinkle.

I ran to Linda’s room.

“Come on, Linda. Wake up.”

She was up in an instant.

“What’s wrong? Is everything okay? Is everyone okay?”
“It’s just me, Linda,” I said.

She just looked at me.

“Can we go to the park?” I asked.

Hard Times with Luck, From Sarah’s Diary

October 12, 2015

Dear Diary,

My name is Sarah, and this is my first time writing in a diary. I’m twelve years old, and I live in Malibu, California. I like California a lot, but my parents told me that we’re going to move to Florida. They told me this yesterday. It was the same day I got this diary. When they gave it to me, they told me I might not like the changes, and it might make me feel better to write my feelings and whatever I want in this diary. That still did not make me feel better. Moving to Florida means that I can’t be with my friends anymore or surf the big waves they have here. It also means I’ll have to go to a new school. Anyway, the reason my parents and I are moving is because they invented a new video camera for people’s houses. The video camera is called V.C.A. (Video Camera App). You can check the camera from the app (the app is also called V.C.A.). Wait a minute! Just because they invented a video camera doesn’t mean we need to leave California! Maybe they’re hiding something! I’m going to ask them! I’ll be right back!

***

Okay, so, nothing good happened. They told me no one in California would invest in their product, but a big company in Florida did! Today has not been a good day at all!! Right now, all I want is to read a book and then go to sleep. See you tomorrow, Diary.

October 13, 2015

Dear Diary, today is a Monday morning. (A school morning! Ugh!) Today, I’m going to tell my friends the news. I have two super close friends at school. Their names are Emma and Jessica, and we’re all in sixth grade. Emma’s really funny and athletic, and Jessica is very fashionable and smart. Both of them are also super nice. Oh my gosh!!! It’s 7:47 and school starts at 8:00. Bye! I have to go!

***

I’m back from school, and my friends didn’t like the news either, but they told me we could make a group chat. That’s the same thing as regular texting, but with more than one person — Jessica told me about it. Unfortunately, I have a flip phone, which doesn’t have text, and my friends have the Apple iPhone 5. The only way I can talk to them is over the phone, but I can’t talk to them both at the same time. Emma and Jessica told me that I should beg my parents and if I do something nice for them, maybe I’ll get an iPhone 5. But today, I’m not any happier about the situation, so that will have to wait at least ‘til tomorrow or later today. Give me a minute; I hear a knock at the door.

***

It was my parents. At first, I was hoping they were going to tell me we aren’t going to move. Unfortunately, that was not it. They just told me dinner is ready, and I’m starving!! So I’m gonna go.

October 14, 2015

It’s a Tuesday morning. Last night, I read a lot of my book, so I’m going to write a small part of it down so I don’t forget:

Peyton ran from her house to her grandma’s house every night because she didn’t have her own room, and at her grandma’s house, she did.

I’m still not sure why she didn’t have her own room to sleep in or why she wouldn’t let her parents know. Well, her parents could have gotten into a fight with Peyton, but I’m still not sure.

Wait a minute!! That gives me an idea! Tonight, when my parents fall asleep, I can call the company on my dad’s phone and tell them my parents actually don’t want to create the V.C.A. anymore! I’ll just have to talk in a deep voice, like my dad, and find his contact book. This is risky, but I hope it works, and you know, maybe the companies in California will change their minds and invest in the V.C.A. WOW!! My parents haven’t called to tell me it’s dinner yet, and it’s 7:37, and we usually eat at 6:30. Finally, they are calling me, and I’m starving!! And wow, what great timing that was!!

***

Dinner is finally over!! That took forever!! I don’t know why my mom made so much food, but it was really good!! Twenty-seven more minutes until I sneak into my parents room. It’s 9:42 right now, and everyone must be in bed by 10:00.  I also think I should wait five extra minutes.

***

It’s 10:27. That’s because I was so nervous, so I waited a lot of extra minutes. So, first, I have to find his contact book, and then his phone, call the company, and talk in a deep voice!! I don’t know if this is a good idea now. It’s risky, and I could be in BIG trouble, but on the other hand, I could stay in California and be with my friends! Ummmmmm… I have made my final decision, and it is that I will take the risk! Wish me luck!

***

Wow! It took forever just to get my dad’s contact book and phone. Now, I have to look through the contact book and call the company… found it!! My dad made it easy for me to understand, which is a good thing! My dad named it “INVESTED COMPANY FOR V.C.A.” Okay, it’s time time to call!

***

I called! Wow, that was scary!!! I hope I sounded like my dad! Anyway, here’s how the call went:

Company: Hello, this Marc. How can I help you?

Me: Hi, this is Jack [my dad’s name]. I wanted to cancel my product-making and your investment in it.

Company: Okay, but first I’m going to call your wife, since this is major, and tell her a code. You are going to have to tell me it so I can make sure this is really Jack.

Me: Okay.

I totally freaked out!!! I had no idea what to do, so I just ended the call and hid the phone and the contact book in my laundry bag, right next to my bed. I made sure to hide them both under clothes. Then, I turned off my light and went to sleep.

October 15, 2015

It’s morning, and I really hope my mom never heard the phone ring! I also hope my dad isn’t awake yet and looking for his phone, because if he is, I’m in big trouble, and my mom can call him and find where his phone is!! However, Marc still may have called my mom! I never should have done this, but right now I have to go eat breakfast and my parents always eat with me!! I just need to act like it’s a regular morning. Okay, I’m going. Wish me luck!!

***

That was, like, the longest breakfast of my life!! My parents never brought up anything different; all they said was that they are so excited about the V.C.A. and asked me if I was packed for school. I don’t think they noticed anything that happened. Oh well. It’s off to school for me! I just wonder when I should put my dad’s phone back. I can’t do anything now because he is in his bedroom, getting ready for the day. Wow, I have to go! School starts in twelve minutes. Bye!!

***

Okay, so, school was fine. I just got to my room… I hear a knock at the door. Give me a minute.

***

It took me so long because my parents somehow found out what I had done!!!  Apparently, Marc never called my mom. All that they know so far is that I took my dad’s phone, and it wasn’t because it rang. It was because, apparently, since my parents created a video camera, they have video cameras all over the house, including my room!! So then, my parents forced me into a time-out for thirty minutes and then had a talk with me for ten extra minutes. It’s already so bad, and they don’t even know that I called Marc or anybody!! Today has not been a good day… I hear another knock at the door and I know this time that it’s my parents, not my friends. Whatever they have to say will either take five minutes or five hours.

***

This keeps getting worse!! They asked me why I stole the phone! I’m still not sure why they didn’t ask that the first time they talked to me, but either way, it doesn’t help. Apparently, since my dad has an iPhone 5, he can see who I called, but before I knew that, I told him that I heard it might flood so I needed a phone to call the police in case I needed to know what to do. Now, I realize that was a really bad response. However, my dad asked me if I was telling the truth, and I said yes. And then, he said, “But I thought you had your own phone?”

Then, I said, “I couldn’t find it in the dark.” Then, he asked a good question — for him!!! Well, pretty much all of his questions for him have been good. Anyway, he asked me how I could’ve found his phone in the dark.

Then, I just said, “I don’t know.”

My dad had then said, “Well, it seems to me that you have told many lies.” Then I was thinking, how did he know? I wanted to fight back, not asking how, but I couldn’t. It just burst out of me!

I questioned, “How did you know?”

My parents said that there’s a button called “Recents” to see who you last called. Then, I knew I was so not going to get an iPhone 5 if I asked anytime this month. Anyway, that has nothing to do with this. I only had a few more seconds before I was punished. This is because my parents started to call the company that I called last night. Then, somebody picked up. I was hoping Marc wouldn’t pick up, and he didn’t! I was glad… until his friend told us he had to leave to do some other job he had there, and also said he would leave us with somebody else. And guess who that somebody else was? It was Marc!!! Marc introduced himself and asked for my parents’ names.

They said, “Jack and Paula.”

Marc said, “Oh, yes. Shall I call Paula and tell her the code?”

My parents asked, “What code?”

Marc told them, “The code to close your business and end our investment in it.”

My parents shouted, “What?” Then, they said, “No, no. That was a mistake. Someone else had the phone.”

Marc then just said, “Okay. Goodbye, and have a nice day.”

My parents stared at me and then, said, “Go up to your room.” So, my plan didn’t work out. Not one part of it. If my parents want to talk to me, I’ll either be asleep or almost asleep. I’m so tired from worrying and stressing out about that situation. Bye, Diary.  

October 16, 2015

It’s another school morning, and I can already tell today is not going to be good. Anyway, I have nothing else to write right now. I’m going to go to the kitchen. I hope my parents aren’t going to say anything too bad.

***

It was a regular day at school, except I was even sadder… except for this one gift that Emma gave me. But first, let me tell you about what happened before this. I told Emma and Jessica about what happened. They told me I was determined to try to stay in California and I tried my best. They also said that they hoped I liked the gift that they were giving me. It was a small bag with a red ribbon that tied the handles together, and tissue paper inside. After you lifted all the tissue paper, there was a small box. When you opened that small box, there was an iPhone 5 inside!!! That was the best thing that happened to me all week! Emma told me it was her old one and she didn’t need it anymore because her parents got her the new iPhone 6. I really didn’t care what type of number my iPhone was. Just the fact that I had an Apple iPhone was awesome!! I thanked Emma and Jessica. I mean, even though it’s not really from Jessica, I knew Emma made Jessica a part of the whole thing, so I just went with it. They also told me they already charged it, and Emma’s parents got me my own phone number, so the phone is totally under my control!! Emma told me that Jessica would help me create passwords and show me how to do the basics and make it as easy as possible for me to use to use it. I do already know a few things, since both of my parents have Apple iPhones, but I definitely could use some pointers. So Jessica is meeting me at my house and should be here any minute now… oh! The doorbell literally just rang, but I’m going to let my parents open so they don’t think I planned this whole thing out without telling them. Which I didn’t, because I didn’t know I would get my own iPhone!! Oh, Jessica’s right outside my room with my mom. I’ve got to go.

***

I had no idea learning everything about the iPhone took two hours! Well, really, it only took one and a half hours, but telling my parents about it took thirty minutes. I was so relieved that my parents accepted the gift. For a minute, I thought they would tell me that I cannot accept it. But the minute after that, they were totally fine with it, as long as I didn’t use too much cellular data per month. After Jessica showed me how to use everything on my phone, my parents helped me set up passwords, and then, my Apple iPhone 5 was complete!

October 17, 2015

I can’t believe it! I only have about one more week before we move to Florida, and I’m switching schools in the middle of the school year. Another disappointing thing is that I won’t be able to write in my diary that much, or at all this week because we have a big test on Wednesday, and that is the day before we leave for Florida. Anyway, I know my parents are still really mad at me about the whole me-taking-my-dad’s-phone situation, so I’m going to have to do a lot of nice things for them since they approved Emma giving me her old Apple iPhone. So, I decided even though it’s going to be super hard moving to Florida, I’ll be nice for them and not complain about moving to Florida. Wow! It’s getting late. I’ve got to go to school now.  

October 25, 2015

Oh my gosh!! I cannot believe I’m writing in my diary on the plane! I’m super nervous! I can’t believe I’m going to live in a new house and go to a new school. And yet, all of that is going to happen in a new state!! The plane ride just started. We are in the air and have four and a half hours left, so I have a long time on the plane. I’m sitting in between my mom and my dad, since we are in the same row. When we were in the airport, I was texting Emma and Jessica. At school, I said goodbye to all of my friends and teachers. Then, it was off to the airport. The night before, I packed the last of my things. We are shipping the rest of the stuff. We shipped most of our furniture. The rest of the furniture, we gave to people who don’t have so much money. Anyway, to pass the time, I’m going to watch a few movies.

***

I’m in my new room, which is empty! This room is huge, and I like it! My parents’ bed and my bed should be here by now… and now, the doorbell just rang. I bet my parents are getting the door. Give me a minute. Someone’s knocking on my door.

***

My bed just came, and apparently, my parents already got bedding. My bed is really soft.  Right now, I’m going to check out everything in my new room and what it has in it.  

***

I like my room. It definitely needs some decoration. But all my furniture is coming tomorrow, so I’m going to go to sleep because I’m so tired.  

October 26, 2015

I just remembered that my teacher would e-mail me my grade from the test. I’m going to check it right now.

***

I got a 97! I’m going to tell my parents right now!

***

My parents were proud, and also told me that my furniture and all my stuff came, so they helped me move my furniture up, so now it looks like an actual room. I’m going to spend the rest of my day putting in the extra stuff in my room.

October 28, 2015

I’m super nervous about this new school, so my mom is going to take me early. I have to leave now. Anyway, I hope today is going to be good! By the way, my room is complete and looks nice.

***

Wow! My school is only five minutes away by car! School was good. I made one new good friend named Alexia, who is coming over in five minutes. Anyway, my teacher is a girl and is super nice. Florida isn’t so bad after all. I think all this new stuff is not such a bad thing.

The Enchanted Clock

Where in the World Are We???

I closed my eyes, hoping it was a dream. I opened them again. It was not.

“Zoe, do you know where we are?” I asked, praying that she would not take it badly.

“How should I know?!!! We are stuck in the middle of passing time, and there is no logical way to get out!!!”

I hunched back. She was right. “I’m sorry, just thought I might ask.”

She glared at me. “What’s the big deal?!!! Every time I say something, you get so mad at me!!”

That’s when the argument started. “I did nothing wro –”

“You are saying that!? Are you kidding m — ”

“You are just being sensitive.”

“Am NOT!!”

“ARE TOO!!!”

“UGH!!!”

***

Finally, the argument stopped. We both looked at each other and attempted to walk away. But sadly, since we were still floating in the middle of passing time, we could not. We spun in circles and couldn’t stop after that. We had been there for hours and hours, but it only felt like ten minutes, and by each passing minute, it had been an hour in the real world. I decided to say something to cut the silence.

“Do you, by any chance, know any other spells or sayings that can help us get out of this?”

She glared at me, and I plugged my ears, protecting them from any screaming. All I heard was mumbling, and then she stopped and turned around. I kept my ears plugged just in case, and I saw her close her eyes and hold up the watch to the sky (that is, if there was any sky). All of a sudden, everything was spinning. There were all kinds of clocks spinning around us. All of a sudden, we started falling, faster and faster and faster until we thudded onto rock-hard ground.

“Now do you know where we are?” I asked Zoe, one more time. There was no response.

Back into the tree… or not.

“Zoe,” I called out, hoping there would be a response. She came out of nowhere, just standing there, completely silent.

“Are you okay?” I asked.

“Yes, I’m fine,” she said. “Time for me to ask a question. Do you know where we are?”

I stood there, silent, just as she did before, and I looked around. “I can take an educated guess?”

She once again glared at me. I stepped back, just to make sure nothing was going to happen, and then her eyes went back to neutral.

“Maybe we’re inside the tree?” I guessed.

She looked at me in a confused way, then started thinking about something. “That’s impossible. If we were back inside the tree, that means we must have gone back in time. But the clocks were spinning clockwise, so that means we must be going to the future, so that would make no sense.”

I thought about that theory. She was right once again.

“I guess you’re right,” I said. “But what if they were just tricking us?”

Zoe looked at me in her confused look again. “How can clocks trick us?”

I had no answer.

“Uhhh,” I said. “Not exactly sure.”

She looked at me, and then walked around to make sure there were no traps or creatures lying behind us or in front of us. “Well, this place seems to be completely harmless, so why don’t we take a walk around to see if anyone can tell us where we are?”

I thought about a place where someone might be. That reminded me of something that I saw when we were falling from the sky, or from wherever that white place was.

“I think I may have seen a village while we were dropping from wherever we came from,” I said, trying to see how useful I could be, but Zoe was already one step ahead. She already had a map out, and she was wandering around, looking where to go.

“I think we need to go north and past that river, and I think that village you were talking about might be there.”

I looked over to where she was pointing. “That’s kind of a long walk.”

Zoe turned back and gave me an annoyed look. “Do you want to go home or do you want to stay here? It’s all up to you.”
I felt pressured when she said that, so I didn’t know how to answer it.

“W-well, I think that if we find out that this place is actually just on Earth, and it’s a normal country with villages and towns and cities, I think it would be best to stay here instead of getting into so much fuss about getting home.”

Zoe was surprised at the answer that I just gave her, but she nodded along with me. But I wasn’t done talking. “But if this place isn’t a normal country, then I think it would be best to go home no matter what turns we have to take. I just want to make sure we don’t go too far from the plan that we made.”

Zoe disagreed with that comment. “I think that we should try our best and not worry about how dangerous our plan is. If it means getting home, it means getting home.”

I didn’t want to start another argument, but I knew that if we didn’t we would get into serious trouble.

“You know, Zoe, if we take too many turns, we will get into very dangerous situations, and that is not something that I want to happen right now. All-”

Zoe cut me off. “You have to! It’s our homes. Don’t you want to fight for that?”

She had a good point, but it wasn’t worth getting into trouble. “Please, Zoe, just listen. We can’t get into another argument. We might attract someone here that we don’t want to see right now.”

She completely ignored what had I just said and kept yelling and screaming. We spent about twenty minutes there, just yelling and screaming at each other, and I was right. We did attract someone there. I saw a shadow lurking behind a tree.
“Zoe, look! There’s something there.”
“Is it a unicorn?” she said sarcastically.

“I’m not joking!”

“Sure, sure. Come on, you see shadows all the time, okay? It’s not that big of a deal.”

“If you say so,” I whispered to myself. Sadly, she heard.

“Come on. Let’s just go north, okay? It’s the best thing that we can do right now,” Zoe suggested.

“Fine,” I said, and rolled my eyes in disbelief that it was the best. “But I’m still keeping an eye on that person… or creature.”

“Okay,” Zoe said. “But really, it’s nothing.”

I ignored her comment and kept my eyes peeled for anything on our walk north, but every few moments I could still see him.

“There’s really something following us…”

The Shadow Man (Don Don Don)

We walked as far north as I could remember. We’d been walking for days and the river was still days ahead.

“Can we please stop to take a break, Zoe? I can speak for both of us when I say that our legs are very, very exhausted right now.” Zoe knew that was true but she didn’t admit it.

“NO!! My legs are not tired,” she said.

“Oh, COME ON! I know they are.” She gave me an evil look. I didn’t say anything after that for a long time.

“Are we there yet?” Zoe annoyingly said. I did not answer. We kept walking, no breaks, food or water.

“Zoe, you go on. I really need a break.” She completely ignored me and kept on going.

***

I sat on an old tree stump and waited for a long time. I wasn’t exactly sure what I was waiting for, but I was waiting anyway.

“Zoe!” I called out. She turned around in confusion. “I think I may have seen the man again.”

She rolled her eyes at me. “You didn’t, because he doesn’t exist, and also, come on. We’re gonna be late if you don’t follow me.”

I didn’t listen to her and stood up. I walked the opposite direction, seeing if I could prove to her somehow that this man was actually real. She didn’t even notice me walking the opposite direction, but she didn’t care even if she did. Then I saw him again. This time he was out in the open and walking straight towards me with something sharp in his hands. I screamed, but noticed that right after I did, he vanished into thin air. I turned around and he was standing a little ways away from me. I stepped back and I noticed that there was a tree blocking my path to going any further, so I had to run. I ran past the deep forest and back into a wide meadow so there was no way to hide behind trees there. I just had to keep running. Zoe noticed me gone, and she saw the man chasing after something, so she chased after him. We all ran past the meadow and through a deep hole and up a giant hill and finally, we made it to the ocean. I had no choice but to take one of the boats that I saw out there and sail it across the ocean. I saw Zoe running, and I hid myself under an old tree that had just died with no leaves on it, just branches. I tried my best to keep myself hidden. The shadow man ran right past me and into the boat, thinking that I was already on one. She laughed when she saw the shadow man sailing out.

“Zoe, now do you believe me about the shadow man?” I asked.

She couldn’t lie this time. “Yes. Yes, I do.”

“Thank you,” I replied. “Now let’s go find a village so we can get something to eat. All I’ve been eating is nuts and leaves.”

“Disgusting,” Zoe whispered to herself.

“Come on, let’s go,” I said, pulling her toward the top of the hill. But as we managed to reach the tip, we saw the shadow man standing there, ready to throw something, but we weren’t exactly sure what it was.

A Way Back Home! Yay!!! Let’s Go Home!!

I stood still while I was staring into the blob of air that was standing in front of us.

“I thought you were on the sailboat,” Zoe said, very confused.

“I was,” he said in a raspy voice.

Zoe and I looked at each other, wondering why he spoke in such an awkward tone.

“Do you have a sore throat?” I asked him.

Zoe slapped her forehead. “No, that’s just how ghosts talk!” she said, as if I should have known that by heart.

“Well, how do you expect me to know?” Zoe glared at the ghost and then back at me. The ghost stepped back, knowing that this was not going to end well.

“You should know because everybody knows what ghosts are and how they talk.”

The ghost made a growling noise. We both looked up. He grinned, knowing exactly where to take us. I probably walked behind the ghost as he took us down the forest. On the other hand, Zoe was laying her feet down on the ground and dragging them.

“You need to go faster, Zoe. You’re taking way too long.” Then, I stopped. I looked at her then, and asked her, “Where’s your clock time-freezing thingie?” She gasped. It wasn’t on her neck.

“It must have fallen off when we were in the middle of passing time.” Zoe looked at me strangely. “Whatever happened to trying to find your brother?”

I gasped. “I completely forgot about him. He could be here or there, who knows.”

We ran the other way. The ghost chased both of us down to the same valley we passed earlier.

“Why are you taking us to the same spot?”

“Lyra, this is the same spot that we dropped to when we fell out of the sky.”

I smiled. “Then that means we might be able to get back in the tree and save my brother, and the entire world, if that’s what we’re trying to do.”

Zoe nodded. “That is.”

“Can we find a way to send us to a certain spot in the tree, or do we just get sent anywhere?”

Zoe thought about that. “I think there’s a chance that we can navigate a way to get to a certain place.”

I smiled, trying to keep my hopes up that she was right.

“I think we fell about thirty feet north from here.”

I fell on my back.

“More walking?” I said in a very tired and exhausted voice.

Zoe knew that it would be hard for me, but she couldn’t let my brother down.

“Maybe we can freeze time,” Zoe suggested.

I reminded her that she didn’t have her clock.

“Okay, so maybe freezing time isn’t the best idea, but we have to find some way to do it.”

Zoe held up her watch that looked almost exactly like the clock, and she said the same line that she did earlier, back when we were time travelling. I held onto her and I screamed. Everything turned white again. We were in the same position as before.

“How do we get out of this again?” I asked Zoe.

She remembered how we got out the past time that we did this. “You have to dream about where you want to go, and want it bad enough that you just fall right into that place.”

I looked at her, astonished. “Does that mean that you dreamed to be in the forest with that ghost?”

“No. I dreamed to be at a beach with my Grandma’s ghost, not an evil shadow man person.”

I looked at Zoe sternly. “Dream as hard as you can to get back into the tree.”

Zoe looked glum at me. “You have to do it too, if you actually want this to work. It’ll only teleport one person. Whoever’s believing it will teleport. So that means if we are both believing, then we will both teleport. We just have to try together.”

“You do mean-”

Zoe stopped me,  “I mean both of us. We both have to try, okay?”

I sighed. “Fine, I’ll do it.”

We both dreamed of being in the middle of Candyland inside the tree, and we both dreamed of lying on the whipped cream valley. Then, all of a sudden, everything spun around faster than it had before, and we landed right where we dreamed: smack in the middle of the valley covered in whipped cream and frosting.

“It worked!” I screamed so loudly that a flock of bird flew past us, angry that the noise got louder.

“Sorry!” I yelled to them, but they didn’t even squawk back.

“Isn’t this where I found that weird alive map that one time?” I asked Zoe.

“Yes. Yes, you did. Maybe it’s still here, and maybe it can help us.”

I smiled and looked around. I remember when she held it on her way out, when she was vanishing. It dropped in a puddle of melted chocolate. I stood up and ran south, exactly where she was standing.

“Why are you running over there?” Zoe screamed. Finally she added all the ends together and she realized that that map was the map of the tree, and that my brother was hidden east, and that meant that we had to go to the night time side of the land.

“Lyra, we have to go to the night time.”

I looked back at her, pretty much thinking exactly what she was thinking.

“But what about the map?”

“You dropped it in the puddle, so I’m trying to look for it over here. Can you help?”

“Okay, the truth is, Lyra, I dropped the map on the way there. I made a fake hologram of it to make you jump into the puddle.”

“Why? It’s just a chocolate puddle. I would just lick myself off, like a cat.”

Zoe sighed, because she was afraid to tell me the truth. “Because Max is actually hidden at the bottom of that puddle, and I thought if you would find him… you know what? Never mind.”

“Well, why don’t we start eating a bunch of whipped cream around the puddle, and then it would make a bigger puddle for both of us to jump into?”

I did feel betrayed that Zoe had hidden something so important from me, but I knew that she was just trying to help me, so I decided to let that one pass.

“I didn’t tell you, because there was so much on our minds and I knew that you didn’t trust me very well back then, and I knew that if I told you, it would just hurt your feelings even more than I already have.”

Zoe was right, and it was the right thing for her to do, but now that we both knew where my brother was, we had to get to it faster. We both stuck our fingers in the whipped cream and licked it. It tasted better than we both thought it would.

“Are you ready?” said Zoe.

I smiled the biggest smile that I almost ever had. “Let’s get licking!” I yelled.

We both stuck our faces into the whipped cream and licked as if it was the last thing we would do.
“Keep licking!” I kept yelling, and, “Don’t stop! Don’t stop!”

Zoe was panting. She almost sounded exactly like a puppy, tired from playing catch all day. “We’re almost there! I feel the chocolate on the tip of my tongue.”

I smiled and started helping her with all of my might. We licked and licked until we could only taste whipped cream, no matter what we ate.

“I’m starting to think we made this puddle for a baby shark,” Zoe said jokingly.

“Let’s just jump in no matter what creatures we’ll find! Who doesn’t want to swim in chocolate?”

We both held our noses and jumped in. We opened our eyes to see that we could actually breathe under it, and that our eyes didn’t hurt our get covered in chocolate.

“Look, those are memories of Me and Max riding on my favorite roller coasters in the best theme park.”

Zoe smiled. “Those are some of my memories of my old parents before I found the tree.”

We kept going deeper and deeper. “Come on, let’s try and see if we can swim just a little bit faster.”

I smiled to hear that I heard Max’s voice down below us. Zoe knew I was smiling, and she followed my action.

“Come on, just a few more feet and we’ll be there!”

We swam all our mights down to as far as we could. Soon enough, our heads banged on rock candy ground.

“Max, are you here?” I asked. There was no answer.

“Max!” Zoe yelled. Soon we saw two hands emerge from below us. “Max, is that you?”

We each grabbed one hand and yanked it up. It was Max, and he was covered in dirt and had cuts all over.

“Max, what happened to you?” I asked, while we were all swimming back up.

“I was forced to be locked up down past the rock candy ground, and forced to be there in the dungeon. The good news is, I found a way to escape the executioner.”

“Well, I’m glad you’re safe.”

When I said that, almost all the chocolate drained out, and we were just standing in a giant hole. We were all one foot away from the top.

“What do we do now?” I asked.

Zoe already had an idea. “Let’s grow a lollipop tree!”

I thought she was crazy. “THAT WOULD TAKE FOREVER!!”

Zoe smiled. “You’d be surprised.” She took some seeds from her pocket and planted them in the rock below us. We waited and waited.

“Can we just find a better plan?”

Zoe shook her head. “Keep waiting.”

She stomped on the ground, and a lollipop tree grew beneath, so I grabbed it, and one by one yanked Max and Zoe up out of the hole.

“Well, now that we’re all safe,” Zoe said, “We should get you two back home.”

Zoe’s clock was now hanging on her neck again.

“Come on. I remember the way. I’ll never forget it,” I said, hoping they would actually follow me. They did, and we all got safely back to the same willow tree.

Zoe held up her clock, and it looked like she was scanning it onto a little box next to the bottom of the tree. All of a sudden, a little door opened, and all three of us crawled through. I stood up proudly next to Max to see that our house was in the same state as we left it in, except for the fact that our Mom was frantically looking for us.

“Mom!” Max screamed. She turned around.

“Lyra! Max! Where have you guys been? Some of your friends told me that you were in Tokyo, visiting the emperor.”

“No, we went through more of an adventure than that!”  I smiled, and my mom smiled back.

She turned to Zoe. “Who is this?” she said sternly.

“My name is Zoe Tamal.”

My mom gasped. “My real last name is Tamal! My sister had a child, and then one day she vanished!”

Zoe was shocked.

“Lyra, that means you’re my cousin! Same for you, Max!”

We ran around squealing and laughing.

My mom said something.

“You can move into my house until I find your mom. Lyra, Max, take Zoe up to the bedroom and get her settled into one of the rooms.” We took her upstairs and into our bedroom…

The End

We all got our water and went upstairs to our bedroom, and my mom came and gave us good nights.

“‘Night, Mom,” I said, not even trying to go to sleep.

“‘Night,” Max said, already half asleep.
“Goodnight, Aunt,” Zoe said, getting ready to sleep. We all closed our eyes, except for me. We all were about to go to bed, until I screamed:

“HELP!”

 

The Scary Night

The Scary Night

Day 1. January 23, 2010

I just moved into a new house. The house has three floors, including the one under the house (a.k.a. the basement). But… um… the outside of the house looks creepy. It looks abandoned; it sort of looks haunted, but my mom said that it wasn’t, and I believed her. When I went inside, everything was beautiful. The walls are white, and the floor is made out of shiny wood, and the stairs are made out of crystal. I went on every floor, even the attic. The attic looks okay, except I heard a creepy noise, and the same thing happened in the basement. The basement is interesting because whenever we turn on the light, I always feel wind, even when it is sunny outside. It’s dark now. I have to go to sleep. I’ll write how it was for the first night here.

Day 2. January 24, 2010

OMG, I just noticed that today’s my birthday. I wonder what my parents got me. So, yesterday I slept good, except I heard somebody whisper to me, “Be careful.” I got scared, so I quickly went to sleep. But when I woke up, I saw my dad on the floor. I quickly went upstairs to tell my mom. But my mom was unconscious. I called the ambulance. My parents were taken to the hospital. I was left alone. Then the same thing happened to me when I was about to go to sleep.

I heard someone whisper to me, “Haha… you don’t know what just hit you, little girl.”

I felt dizzy, and I fell on floor. The floor was hard and cold. I felt like I was dying. I felt like I was about to die, but I didn’t die. One hour later, my mom came back from the hospital. She found me on the floor. She carried me to my bed. That was the worst birthday ever.

Day 3, January 25, 2010

Yesterday was weird. I really don’t know why I fell on the floor; I just literally collapsed. I think that ghost got to me. My dad hasn’t come back from the hospital. I hope he’s not badly injured. Anyway, my mom is going to visit him again. So I’m going to stay home alone again.

One hour later

Okay, I’m home alone now, and weird things are happening already, and I’m already creeped out. All the lights went out. And something grabbed my foot and dragged me down the stairs. I ran as fast as I could when it let go. I ran into my room. I felt lightheaded; I felt like I was going to die. I locked the door.

Then, again, I heard someone whisper, “You’re gonna die, little girl.”

I screamed and screamed, but it didn’t go away. My mom is coming back tomorrow, which means I have to stay home alone for the night. My auntie lives nearby, so I’ve decided I’m going to sleep over there for the night…

Okay, I finished packing. I walked out the door… but as soon as I walked out the door,  something grabbed me, and I started getting burned up.

I screamed, “AUNTIE, IT’S ME, KAREN! HELP ME PLEASE!!!”

I started to cry because the ghosts were hurting me. I tripped over a piece of wood. I fell and hurt my head. That’s when I heard my aunt coming. Everything was blurry. The ghosts let go. My auntie took me to my bed. I fell asleep.

Day 4, January 26, 2010

My hands were sore. My head hurt. My mom, auntie, and dad were right beside me. I felt safe, but I really wasn’t. I stood up and looked at them. They told me to rest, but I didn’t want to. I looked at my hands. They looked burned and bruised. I looked at the blood, and everything that I went through came back to me, and I fainted. I woke up again. This time, I didn’t see my family members — I saw a priest. He asked me what happened.

I said, “ I was home alone, and these weird things were happening to me, and I don’t why.”

The priest went outside to talk to my parents, and he told me to try to rest. As soon as he closed the door, I heard someone whisper. After that, I felt something go in me. And my mom told me that I was getting possessed. My eyes were turning black, and my body was getting lifted. The priest and my family came in the room once they heard me hit a wall. The priest commanded the demon to put me down… it did, but when the demon dropped me, blood was coming out of my mouth. The priest said I had to leave the house or things would get even worse. Then, my parents told me to pack up, and I did, but they said it in a frightened way.

 

Cookie Dough’s Adventures in the Bedroom

One day, when Cookie Dough’s owner was at school and his owner’s parents were at work, Cookie Dough wanted to get some exercise, so he ran on his wheel, but he went so fast that he flung out of the cage and flew into his owner’s upstairs bedroom.

He luckily landed on the bed. Everything was light pink, purple, and magenta. Cookie Dough started jumping. He bounced so high, he almost touched the ceiling.

Cookie Dough stopped bouncing. He turned around. There was a huge bear. Cookie Dough backed up. He was confused, but then he realized that it was a teddy bear. He snuggled up with the teddy bear and fell asleep.

When Cookie Dough woke up, he started exploring the room again. There were dolls, and more stuffed animals, and a dollhouse. He went to explore the dollhouse. He went into the living room of the dollhouse, then the kitchen, then the dining room, which had hamster-sized food on the table. Then he went to the bedroom. Cookie Dough loved the little dollhouse. He jumped out the dollhouse window and onto the bedside table.

Cookie Dough was having lots of fun exploring the bedroom. He went onto the bed and bounced again. Then, Cookie Dough heard someone open the door. He hid behind the teddy bear. Then he heard someone walk up the stairs.  “Cookie Dough,’’ called the voice. “Mom, I lost Cookie Dough,’’ said the voice. He heard the person walk down the stairs.

“Don’t worry. We can get another hamster,’’ said another voice.

“But they won’t be as tiny or as fluffy or as cute. I love Cookie Dough,” said the first voice. Then Cookie Dough realized that it was his owner. He jumped off the bed and slowly went down the stairs.

“Cookie Dough!’’ yelled the owner. Cookie Dough’s owner grabbed Cookie Dough and put him in his cage.

Cookie Dough felt happy that his owner found him. Cookie Dough had a long day. He lay down and fell asleep.    

The Adventure of Christian and the Ancient Tour Guide

The Adventure of Christian and the Ancient Tour Guide

Once upon a time, there was a guy named Christian, who was pretending to work at Writopia. Writopia is a camp where kids have fun doing writing activities. Christian was pretending to be a good writer and was pretending to work at Writopia. Christian was a guy who wanted to become a tour guide, like the ancient tour guide in the legend. He had very crazy hair. It was big, curly, blonde hair that went around everywhere, his skin was light, and he really liked Star Wars… or did he? Maybe he was just pretending to the kids that he liked it. But nobody knows that for sure. It’s his mind.

One day, after Writopia camp, he set off to be taught by the ancient tour guide. Legend says that he lives on a very tall mountain above the clouds, and the top of the mountain touches space. It is a secret, invisible, and very tall mountain. The legend says that the ancient tour guide lives there. Christian set off to the mountain. He walked and walked. He walked past Arizona, he walked through Mississippi, and he swam the Atlantic Ocean up to Bulgaria.

There, in the middle of Bulgaria, he found the mountain of the ancient tour guide. He had anti-invisible goggles, so he could see the mountain. So he set off. It was a long journey to the mountain, and Christian had packed a lot of stuff. Sleeping bags, food, a tent, and a walking stick, and a few toys (a big, fluffy teddy bear and toy cars and toy trains) and books (mystery books and legends about the ancient tour guide, of course, and books to log his progress and draw and take pictures), and a computer to send messages to the Writopia camp. But that was so they would not know his secret identity. Secretly, he was trying to turn Writopians into his tourists when he finished with his training.

He walked for many days, and he slept and ate. It was very tiring, and Christian was always complaining and mumbling and whining to himself. Finally, he got to the ancient tour guide. The tour guide was just an old man who was standing straight, very still against the sunset. He looked creepy to Christian, and Christian soon realized that the tour guide was a thousand years old. He realized because he was very good at seeing how old people were using his magical power that he was secretly hiding. He knew how old all the kids and adults were in Writopia, and he wrote that in his log. His log, because he was walking so much, was getting as big as the mountain, and he had to knit a backpack out of grass for it.

But then, a big bear came out. The bear was just going out to pick some blueberries, but then Christian started running, which was very bad. (You shouldn’t run when a bear comes because the bear will think you’re food. You should just walk away slowly, without looking it in the eyes.) Christian started to run, even though he shouldn’t have. The bear thought he was food, so the bear started running after Christian, and Christian was very freaked out, but it was a good thing he was with the ancient tour guide. The bear almost gobbled him up, but the ancient tour guide put a net over the bear, and it made the bear’s mind think that Christian was a predator that was going to eat the bear. The bear was so freaked out, that he ran all the way up the mountain, to the top of space, where he couldn’t breathe, and the bear ran all the way down the mountain.

Then, the ancient tour guide started teaching Christian. But Christian was a very bad student. He was very noisy, and he didn’t pay attention, and when the ancient tour guide said, “You should go slow, not fast,” Christian went really fast and bumped and put his head in a crater. A piece of Mars had dropped down when the moon hit Mars once, a very long time ago, which did not really happen, but in this story I will use it.

Anyway, Christian vowed he would overcome the obstacle. After many years of training, Christian became a very good student. He worked very hard, and he was trained by the ancient tour guide. He went slower because of the bad jokes that he had to tell to become a tour guide, and walking backwards while talking (especially telling bad jokes,) he learned to be slower so his crowd could stay together and focus. Of course, his crowd was Writopia.

He also was trained to know lots of things. He had to know about everything on his tour, so the ancient tour guide helped him memorize everything by taking him on a little tour. The ancient tour guide dropped lots of books on his head once when he didn’t participate, and that’s another reason why he got to be a better student, because it hurt him. Luckily, Christian had very puffy hair, so the books didn’t hurt him that much. But also, for Writopia, he was the tour guide of everywhere in Bulgaria, especially the big, invisible ancient mountain, which lots of people have bumped into because it is invisible.

So, as Christian walked, he stumbled upon a rock, and I’m sorry to say this, but he fell down and broke his leg, and it hurt a lot. But he was carried to a hospital by birds. The birds were Australian ostriches in Bulgaria, and because Christian was very heavy, it took thirty Australian ostriches to carry him.

While he was recovering, all the time he was thinking, No, no, no, I have to get back to Writopia. No, no, no, I have to be taught by the ancient tour guide. I have to keep on going with my life. But, in a few months, he recovered and he went back to Writopia. He got back to Writopia because the thirty ostriches carried him back across the sea. The thirty ostriches could walk on water. The ostriches were gray and brown with very long necks and very, very, very long feet, and their feathers were all puffed up, like a peacock.

When Christian got back to Writopia, his hair had gotten even more wild. He met lots of friends at Writopia, and one of the friends here is telling this story. Anyway, he kept on walking, and when he got there, he pretended to type, but actually it was an invisible bug who typed for him. He just pretended to type the keys, because he didn’t actually know anything about writing or typing. He was just sitting there eating Goldfish.

Then at lunch, a bunch of Christian’s buddies at Writopia went around him and made up nicknames for him. But he actually needed the nicknames to make his tour guide name. His nicknames were Banana, Cucumber, Fried Eggs, Humpty Dumpty, Pineapple, Kiwi, Tidal Wave, Cherry, Pickle, Broccoli Head, Younger Blonde-Haired Billy Joe, and, the best ever, Charles! His tour guide name was CucFriEggHumDumPinKiwTidWavCherPicBrocHeaYouBloHaiBilJoeCha, otherwise known as Charles Brocky. At lunch, he always had to take a carrot, a chip, and a pretzel for the story. He made a story out of fruits. This had to do with his tour guiding, to make up bad joke stories.

Then, after Writopia was done, he started changing the kids’ minds with his magic power that the tour guide gave him, changing all the kids’ and grown-ups’ minds to become tourists. The tour guide gave it to him, actually, by dropping the books on him. He looked like a Hawaiian hula dancer when he was spreading the power.

And those were his years at Writopia. There were actually only two years, and his last week was the week that I’m writing this all. At the end, on Friday, he took us to the mountain. Christian told us all that he was going to take us on a tour, and we couldn’t say no, so all the people at Writopia had to go.

So, at first, everybody was like, “Oh, this going to be a terrible tour! I don’t want to go. This is such a big mountain.”

We all got to the mountain by the thirty ostriches that made babies, so now there are ninety-nine ostriches. There were not that many people at Writopia, but Christian was very heavy. So we started off. We had to pack a lot of stuff, and Christian carried most of our stuff with his magic tour guide powers. He raised his hands in the air, all the bags went into the sky, and he told the bags to follow us as we go, and the bags did it. So that made us all think that Christian was actually very talented.

Christian started walking backwards and looked at his tourists (us, Writopians). He first started with saying bad jokes.

Christian said, “Listen up. You must all call me Charles Brocky!” And we did.

Christian told us about the moon that hit Mars a few years ago, and made a piece of Mars fall down as we passed the giant crater. We (Writopians) thought that Christian was very talented and worked very hard.

As we walked, he talked and gave bad jokes and told us all about the tour and all about his training. But still, we disliked his lack of reading. He couldn’t read very well. All the kids, one day, told him to tell them a story, but he couldn’t read, so he didn’t tell them the right story, and all the kids knew that story, so he got very bad credit. We decided to teach him how to read. But, once the ancient tour guide dropped books on his head, Christian was a very good student.

At night time, at 6:55 PM, we taught him how to read. He learned to read by 7:52 PM. Then, we all woke up at 6:45 AM. We reached the ancient tour guide at 9:56 PM, but we got too tired, so Christian actually told us a good story. The story lasted sixty seconds, because he read it so fast, like a rap, and we enjoyed it and that made us very tired.

Then, Writopians said, “Hey, Charles Brocky, when you go back to Writopia, can you teach us how to read a story that fast?”

“Sure.”

We found Christian cleaning a spill at the camp tent. This made us think he was helpful, and we learned every detail about his life. We learned that he liked to clean up spills, and he liked to spill them too, then clean them up. We looked at the floor. It looked so shiny after that.

Then, the ancient tour guide came in the tent when Writopians were still asleep, but Christian was still awake because tour guides don’t sleep a lot. He said, “Good work, pupil. Or should I say, Charles Brocky?” Then, the ancient tour guide said, “CucFriEggHumDumPinKiwTidWavCherPicBrocHeaYouBloHaiBilJoeCha, good work. Very good work.”

In the morning, Christian took us all to meet the ancient tour guide, and he told us his legend, and he did a whole tour about the ancient tour guide, and we all shook hands with him. We started going back home, very happy and thinking Christian was the best ever and thanking him for letting us go on his tour and giving him lots of money. He gave us another tour on the way down the mountain on the other side. We saw he was very good at walking backwards. He walked backwards down the mountain without bumping, and told lots of bad jokes. His jokes were even worse than last time.

Once, it was dinnertime, and we had soup. There was a fly in one of our soups, so the person from Writopia said, “Christian… I mean, Charles Brocky… what’s this fly doing in my soup?”

Then, Christian said, “Looks like the back stroke.”

Everybody laughed so hard that the soup came out their noses.

When we got to the end of the mountain, Christian was telling so many bad jokes that he slipped on a rock right at the bottom of the mountain. He was a perfect tour guide, but right when the tour ended, he slipped, and we had to all catch him in our tent.

Christian was so embarrassed that he turned all red and he ran all the way up to space in a second (because the top of the mountain touches space, I will tell you again).   Christian was so embarrassed, he jumped off the tip of the mountain and he started flying. He ended up at his house, but he couldn’t fly anymore after that. He got the flying power from too much embarrassment; when you’re so embarrassed, you can do amazing things.

Then, Christian decided, That doesn’t matter. I will do another tour again, but I will never work at Writopia. I am too embarrassed. And they will stop calling me Charles Brocky. That’s it.

What will Christian, or Charles Brocky, do next?

Pointy

Once, there was a piece of paper named Pointy who wanted to go to Italy so he could get his favorite Mozzarella Ice Cream. But somebody kept trying to cut him into pieces, because he was jealous of Pointy, because Pointy could drive. He didn’t know where the airport was, because he was only a piece of paper. He decided to go to the subway station, where he could look at the map. When he got there, everybody was surprised to see a walking paper. The security guard came and took him to the dungeon.

“No live paper allowed!” he said.

“Why not?” Pointy asked.

“Because you will scare people.”

Pointy was very scared. When he got to the dungeon, he had to hold his nose because it smelled like rotten eggs. He was in a very small cage, and his head kept flopping over. Then he realized he was very thin, so he wiggled out of the bars. He went back, and made a friend named Mo. Mo was a turtle.

“I have a map,” Mo said.

Pointy was relieved. He took the map, without the security guard seeing him. He studied it carefully, and went to the airport, by driving in his mini car. He had arms and legs, so he could drive. The thing was, he hadn’t passed the driving test, so he was zig-zagging down the bicycle road. Luckily, nobody saw him except a bicyclist.

“Move out of the way!” he said.

“Why?” Pointy asked.

But the bicyclist already had zoomed ahead. Pointy got to the airport. He suddenly felt scared, because he had to go through security. Instead, he decided to hide in a woman’s  purse. The woman went through security. The purse smelled like dirty coins. He thought the woman should hurry up. When the security guard saw a paper with legs and arms, he threw him away. He heard the woman say, “I didn’t put it in there!”

Pointy made his way out of the garbage can, and snuck into a man’s purse, though he wasn’t sure the man was going to Italy. He noticed a sign that said Italy plane to the left coming in 5 minutes. Pointy walked to the left, and counted to sixty, five times. He followed a bunch of people that were walking on a plane. He sat in a comfy seat in the very back. Unfortunately, the man who wanted to cut him up was there.

“Yay!” the man exclaimed. “Pointy is here to cut up!”

Fortunately, the security guard took away his scissors. Pointy was terrified because he didn’t know. He ran, and buried himself in the pilot’s pocket where he would be safe. When the pilot went on the runway, Pointy folded himself up so nobody would see him. He did not know how long the plane to Italy would be, and he thought it would be about two minutes. When Pointy discovered it was not that long, he was so sad, because he really wanted Mozzarella Ice Cream. When they finally got to Italy, Pointy was so happy, because Mo was there!

“Hi! It was a long trip,” said Pointy.

“I had to sneak to Italy. I didn’t know you would be here,” Mo said.

“I came here to get Mozzarella Ice Cream,” Pointy said.

Pointy was so happy because he didn’t spend any money. Mo was so slow that Pointy felt he was running, when actually he was walking.

“Wait!” Mo said.

Pointy looked back.

“Sorry, I’ve got to go. I have to admit, you are the slowest friend I’ve got,” Pointy said.

“Okay,” Mo said,

And he tried to run up, but was so sad, he hid in his shell. Pointy pushed him up the hill. When Mo got out of his shell, Pointy said, “Sorry, Mo.” And went up the hill.

Mo was very sad, but Pointy didn’t care. He had to get Mozzarella Ice Cream. He did not care about Mo at all, though he could hear him crying behind him. Pointy could not find the Ice Cream Shop. His arms were tired from pushing Mo up the hill, but Mo had already plopped himself into the lake. Pointy saw lots of people with binoculars, but he didn’t hear anyone saying that they were going to an Ice Cream Shop. Pointy felt hopeless, when he remembered he had the map in his pocket. He looked at it, eyeing every word, but he realized there was nothing that said Ice Cream Shop. He felt upset that Mo gave him a map that didn’t mean anything to him. He felt that Mo should have it. Even though it was lighter than a feather, he felt it was as heavy as a sunflower seed. He threw the map in the lake, and hurried on. Pointy saw Mo get out of the lake. Mo looked much happier, and it seemed he forgot about what Pointy said to him because he said, “Hi, Pointy, I am so happy to see you!”

Pointy was sure he had a memory problem.

“Where’s the map? I need it,” Mo asked.

“I threw it in the lake,” Pointy said.

“Why?” Mo asked, but Pointy had already run ahead.

“Wait!” Mo wailed, and he cried all over again.

Pointy thought that he could find a shop by himself, because Mo was too slow. Mo was really trying to catch up to him. Pointy thought it was funny, so he ran so that he couldn’t see Mo, because he didn’t want Mo to have the Mozzarella Ice Cream. Pointy didn’t like him anymore. Mo knew that, so he was asking for somebody to pick him up and bring him to Pointy. Pointy was so mad at him that he ran back down and scared him so much, he went in his shell, and so nobody wanted to pick him up. Pointy saw a place with binoculars. He thought they would help him see an Ice Cream Shop.

“Can I have binoculars?” he asked.

“No,” the man said. “But you can go sightseeing.”

Pointy was disappointed, but he agreed to go with the man, whose name was Bob. Bob took him around some Italian restaurants, and showed him around where he lived. Pointy thought it was fun, watching all the different birds. Bob helped Pointy put Mo in the garbage can, because he was following them.

“Then,” Bob said, “The Ice Cream Shop with Mozzarella Ice Cream is around the corner.”

Pointy nearly swore he heard the garbage can rustle, but he didn’t say so. He was too excited about the Mozzarella Ice Cream. Bob said that sightseeing was over. Bob gave Pointy a map of where everything was that he showed him— including the Ice Cream Shop. Pointy was so happy. He had traveled to Italy to get this Ice Cream. He went around the corner, and saw the shop. He went in. It was cold, and there were so many different flavors, but when he got to the Mozzarella section, he was so angry because Mo was there. He quickly darted in line before him. Mo was speechless, and he started to cry, again. Pointy pointed out that Mo cried three times in his adventure to get Ice Cream. When the shopkeeper heard his story, he agreed to let Pointy skip Mo in line. Mo was heartbroken. He didn’t know what to do.

“I want the last scoop of Mozzarella Ice—”

“Noooooo!” Mo wailed. “I wanted that.”

And he started to cry again.

“I see what you mean,” the shopkeeper said.

Everybody in the Ice Cream Shop turned to look at Mo. Mo’s cheeks turned red, and he burst out of the shop.

“I am not happy!” he said, and ran off without looking back.

Pointy repeated himself for the shopkeeper.

“I want the last scoop of Mozzarella Ice Cream,” he said, and he was very pleased to say it.

The shopkeeper got him Mozzarella Ice Cream, and he was delighted.

The End

The Rise and Fall of Emily Dixons

I hate myself.

Well, I don’t hate myself— I hate the way I dress. I hate the way I look.

The girls at school always make fun of me. They say that my clothes are irrelevant. They try everything to break me. But it won’t work. I love my personality; I just hate the way I look. I get taunted. Tortured. I can’t do anything.

I really want to change. I want to dress well. Nothing looks good on me, though. I just want to have something that I can rely on. I want to look pretty. I really do. The truth is, I’m just scared to look pretty. I’m afraid I’ll still be taunted. I don’t think that I could be pretty if I tried.

All the girls seem so confident. I’m just that shy kid that sits in the back. I have friends. But I’m quiet, and my friends don’t seem to know who I am. They think I’m like them. But I’m not. I’m creative and amazing and I want to be something that I know I’ll never be if I tried. Don’t tell anyone, but I have a burning passion for art. I just want to paint my life on that canvas. But I never will.

I have all these feelings bottled up inside, ever since the first day of eighth grade. I’m a ticking time bomb, counting down the minutes until I burst. The second hand on the clock is ticking. It’s matching the beat of my heart. The time’s about to be noon— when all the kids get up and leave.

11:59.

12:00

Coming from room 301, there is a girl who screams louder than a car honk, going on for one full minute. That girl is me. Emily Dixons.

***

How did I end up here?

How did I end up in the guidance counselor’s office?

Why did you scream?

Why are you angry?

Is something wrong?

I was distraught by her stress ball. I was getting my anger out. I squeezed, and squeezed, and soon, in a matter of time, the stress ball popped open, the white foam oozing out into my hand, onto the floor into a big puddle.

The guidance counselor told me to leave right after that.

***

I saw a therapist a week after that. He gave me pills.

***

I felt the same. Cold-stone Emily Dixons, master of ugly.

After my morning OJ, I felt different.

I picked out my nicest clothes. I organized everything in my backpack.

I got an A-plus on my homework that day.

Best of all, Aviva Goll didn’t torture me that day. I felt confident.

***

When you feel good about yourself, you feel good about others. You trust them. You feel them. I was nice to people. I was getting A’s. Everybody liked me.

Aviva Goll did something that really got on my nerves, though. She stood up on the lunch table, and screamed something so ballistic and wrong into the air.

“Emily Dixons wets the bed! She peed on my backpack last year!”

What?! I didn’t! I got really annoyed. So I gave up. I let her have it all. Why try to be something you can’t be? I tried to be like Aviva. I really did. But she has it all. The friends. The clothes. The social acceptance. Aviva has everything I desire, however, I’m sure she’s not into sharing.

Then I had my second glass of OJ that morning. The world had turned upside down. The OJ tasted a bit different. It had a bit of a bland taste. Oh, well.

Then a third glass of OJ at lunch.

I was a completely different person.

***

I had a smile as long as a piece of gum when you stretch it out.

I was nice. I was starting to dress differently. This kept going. The Magic OJ was working. I always made sure to drink my two glasses of OJ before I went to school.

I was getting comments like these:

“Nice shirt, Em!”

“Love your backpack!”

People were noticing me. I was the exact thing that Aviva said I wouldn’t be. I was the shining star; the whole thing the school looked forward to seeing. The Magic OJ was doing it all. The Magic OJ could do no wrong.

I was finally the person who I wanted to be.

***

My bucket list— yes, I have a bucket list:

Emily Dixons’ Bucket List of Magical Adventures

  • Dress AMAZING
  • Head of Student Council
  • Make the School PURPLE
  • Rule the jazz band

***

This is my chance.

I’m completing my bucket list!

This is Emily Dixons’ Rise to Stardom. This is the day where I start completing my dreams. I’m finally going to rule the school. This was my chance to show everyone that I can do as much as them. I dress nicely. I’m nice. I have totally amazing beliefs. I, Emily Dixons, promise to make the school fabulous in any way that I can.

I started with the student council. I was easily elected in a landslide. It was me versus Snotty Nose Sammy. Nobody wanted a snot-ruled school.

My first order of business was making the school purple, which is my favorite color. I declared the following day Purple Day. I bought purple ribbon, purple streamers, purple construction paper, and just about everything purple that I could find at the craft store.

We did it! We purplefied the school. One by one we made the walls the sweet shade of the most detailed lavender, the bulletin boards displaying mountains of purple construction paper. I don’t think a lot of the kids liked it, though.

“YOU GIRLY-ED UP THE SCHOOL!” I was told by all of the boys. They didn’t think my work was too good.

That got me down. But, when I got home, all I needed was a glass of the magic OJ.

***

I did it myself.

I got home, grabbed the thick plastic bottle of OJ, and poured it into the cup.

I did it myself.

I drank it all in 30 seconds.

I did it myself.

I felt nothing? Why did I feel nothing?

Because I did it myself.

***

My lightning bolt of power did not reach my body.

It didn’t work. I did it all myself. My newly-born motivation. I did that myself, right? No. I didn’t.

“Mom, the Magic OJ didn’t work!” I whined to my mother.

“WHAT! I haven’t given you OJ since yesterday!” My mother yelled, with a burning passion that was still elegant but fierce.

“I poured it myself,” I replied, calmly.

“Oh, honey. It’s time we tell you about the pills.”

That’s what led to the great Emily Dixons Fall of 2013.

***

I could do this myself.

All I needed to do was walk in there and be a leader. I convinced myself I was motivated to do this.

However, I wasn’t motivated until I had the Magic OJ.

I’d just lost my life.

***

Mom gave me Magic OJ this morning. This was the magic stuff. The pill stuff.

I wish I could handle my own battle. I wish I could do this myself. It’s like I’m standing in a black hole and there are steps but I would have to be hoisted up to reach them. I’m standing in a black hole with nowhere to go, nothing to say, nothing to do, just waiting for someone to mystically help me accomplish what I wanted to do myself.

Wishes are complicated things. Even though you know they’ll never come true, you want it so bad to the extent where you would murder someone for it. You still have that little sliver of hope, locked away inside the safe you call your heart where nobody could find it even if they tried.

It’s hard to fight yourself. It’s hard to believe you would ever come to a disagreement with yourself. But you do. Your brain is defying the logic, saying, “I CAN, I CAN, I CAN!” Only to be let down with failure.

Failure is complicated, too. It’s hard to accept the fact that you’re wrong. After all the work you’ve done, your certificate of achievement is that what you did was a waste. A waste of time, a waste of energy. You’re a waste in life. You’re a failure.

Yeah. That’s what you think until you get your kryptonite. Your Magic OJ. The thing that brings you back.

That’s the secret of humanity. Bounce back.

That has me thinking.

***

I walked in there on Monday with a serious face. That could at least make me think that I could handle this.

The band room was right there. Room 435. I made sure that Mom packed me more Magic OJ just for this. I grabbed it out of the side pocket on my backpack and drank it all in 3 gulps.

I grabbed a saxophone and a book. I learned everything in what felt like a minute. In ten minutes, I could play five songs.

I led the jazz band. We played my favorite songs, like Miley Cyrus’ new album, and Katy Perry’s new album.

I don’t think anybody liked it, though. They all said I was doing pop songs and that we needed classic jazz songs, like Louis Armstrong. Who the heck is Louis Armstrong? I had not heard of him before. Was he like Elvis Presley? I think that’s who my parents listened to when they were my age.

People were getting really angry. I had to pull out my secret weapon. Katy Perry’s “Roar.”

So I did. That’s how I ended up being the only one in Room 435, surrounded by instruments screaming to be played.

I spent last period emptying spit valves.

***

I had a secret weapon.

I’ve always wanted a place where I could just scream. I could get all my emotions out with a good ‘ol scream. So I started the Emotion Center. Room 436 was vacant, so I asked the principal, and she said I could transform it.

But people weren’t using it correctly. I wanted it to be a scream center.

They were using it to cry and to whimper. I demonstrated like so: “AHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH!”

I was in the guidance counselor’s office again.

***

Who are you?

***

I thought I could do it.

I could rule the school.

But I didn’t.

People have personalities. People are who they are. People may try to change who they are, but it’ll never work.

I can do things. I can. I may never rule the school, but I’ll always be here. I can do things. I can draw. I can make things with my hands. With my brain. I have a purpose in this world.

You do, too. You have a purpose. You can do something, too. You can. You really can. You have to just go and find out what it is.

Maybe you’re good with animals. Go volunteer at the animal shelter. Do what you need to do to make you happy. Whatever it is. Just do it. That’s what I did.

***

It was so fast.

They welcomed me quickly, while still keeping elegance and class. The Art Club was so nice.

Anias, shy but friendly. She was so talented, making the most intricate patterns.

Jeffrey: his people-drawing skills were flawless. He drew a sketch of me in five minutes and it was incredible. He didn’t miss anything. Even my mini-pimple on my forehead.

Samantha, whose environment paintings were incredible — she could capture every speck of a star in the night sky.

Iggy, who could do no wrong with her detail. She drew my plastic water bottle and I thought for a minute it was a photograph.

And me, Emily Dixons, who was the happiest person on earth. I could finally be who I wanted to be: an artist. I never thought I could, though. I can do anything and everything I wanted.    

I came at the November mural project. Nobody knew what the mural should display. I knew exactly what that mural should state.

Glitter. Markers. Crayons. I was so happy. I was doing what I’ve always wanted to do. It doesn’t matter about looking pretty, or having the newest thing. It matters that you feel good about yourself.

I rose up. I had a bit of stardom.

I fell down. I was something I wasn’t.

Do what makes you happy.

Epilogue

“That was my rise and fall,” I said to Mrs. McKinley, the eleventh grade English teacher.

My final essay was complete. Now everyone knew who I was. The pills I take in the morning. The clothes I wear. When I found out who I was destined to be. An artist. They knew my well-being was artificial — that I was depending on cold stone medication. I’m happy about that.

I got home only to find a nice, fresh glass of Magic OJ sitting on the counter. Eleventh grade was finally over.

The Weird Week

1 – One Fine Day

It was a sunny day. It was time for Ashley to walk her little puppy. She put on her hot pink bow and yellow pants with her best friend. They got some new blue pants. They were rich, so yeah, the dog was pink!                                

2 – Too Rich

Ashley had too much money. She had a whole store with dog toys and pet toys. Now, she had too many toys. So she gave the store and all the toys to the town.

3 – Lunch Time

It was lunch time. Ashley bought all of the food stores because she was going to have a party with the whole world. She stuffed each country in a little bathroom the size of a dog house. It was the not-best party ever!!!

4 – In in in in in in looove

She was 24. She saw a 24-year-old boy who was so so so handsome. She fainted. She woke up in her room. The boy was there, too. He drew “iwhaiuthrthodhdhdwhieR8yuuryueq8989387ry39owu34eywi8ur6” on the walls. But she was still in love.

5 – Wedding Time

Ashley had a wedding, but no flower girl, so they had to throw the flowers. But they got flowers in her hair! It was the worst wedding ever!!!

6 – Kid Time,Ya!!

Yaaa!!! Ashley and Ken’s kids were born in one day and born at age three. They were twins. Wawaaa!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Then, Ashley went to deep sleep. Then, the babies came out.

7 – School Time

It was time for Ashley’s kids to go to school. She put the clock to 1:00 in the morning. But school started at 1:00 pm. She did that because she forgot to get the backpack stuff. They put on their school uniforms, ate, and had to wait one hour. When the school bus got there, they went to school for 30 minutes. San was a boy, Sandy was a girl, and they were going to school together. When they were going to school, Ashley took a 20 minute nap. Zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz. So Ken picked the kids up.

8 – Reading Is Fun

When San was watching TV, Sandy was reading. They read and watched for three weeks. Now they were reading 2,000 more books for homework. They each had a pink and blue birthstone that could give them powers when they read.

9 – Robbing House

When Ashley was asleep, two robbers put them in jail for a replacement. They woke up somewhere very different, and the kids were still at home. Then, they got out their birthstones, and everything went back to normal.

The End!

Dessert Disaster

One morning, I woke up to the dim light shining low on my hot pink curtains. Time for a new summer, I thought. I went to open my porch window. I was happy summer had arrived, so there was no doubt about it. I had plans. My mom and dad weren’t the type of parents who stay at home all summer. They worked at their office all day, so my dad brought me to my friend Sofia’s house.

Sofia waved to me. “Hi, Audrey! C’mon! I have something to show you! C’mon!” Sofia yanked me in. My friends, Leora, Chase, and Alexandra were there. Sofia sat us all down. She held something in a yellow wrapper.

“So, what is it?” I asked, eagerly.

“Yeah, tell us!” Alexandra squealed.

Sofia opened the package. It was a delicate, triple-chocolate fudge cake with a pound of the finest, darkest spoon of vanilla that seemed to make everyone’s mouth agape. Sofia’s cake had a golden shade of too-sweet sugar that could water anyone’s lips constantly. I gasped in awe.

A feeling came over Leora. She grew so envious that her mood seemed to darken. Why should Sofia get that precious cake? Leora kept staring at the cake. She wanted to take the rest. She wanted to go and steal the chocolate cake so she could eat it. However, the multiple times Leora tried to take it, when she had to be thinking up plans to snatch it, run, and hide, her friends kept holding her back. So, Leora could only think of one thing. She planned to trick her friends, especially Sofia, and lie with a good excuse, to finish up her plan once and for all. But how?

Meanwhile, I was giggling with Sofia and laughing at Alexandra’s jokes.

“That’s a funny dance, Alexandra. Show us some more!” I told her sweetly. Alexandra hooted and did some more moves.

I called out, ”Oh. Leora, what are you doing? I hope you’re over that cake because — ha, Alexandra… It’s fun. C’mon. Show us some disco dance moves!” I blubbered in laughter.

Leora shook her head, plastering a fake and sweet expression on her face. I shrugged and turned away. Leora was just about to snatch the cake when — ”Leora!!!”

Oh no. Sofia was glaring at her, crazy mad. ”Grrr… What were you thinking?! You had to think that you should steal the cake?! It’s mine. And I wasn’t about to even think my BFF would steal it,” Sophia shouted. “Stop it. Okay?”

“I’ll stop.” Leora said. But guess what? She had her fingers crossed! Sofia turned away.

I saw the others glare at Leora constantly for what she had done. I frowned. That plan was mean. Why did she want to do that? This was like the “Cake Crime.” OMG, I could see the headlines now: “Girl Robbed a Special Cake,” “Girl Arrested in Jail.” “Brrr…”

I glared back at Leora. This was terrible. Sofia would probably not be friends with Leora anymore! Oh no! I had to fix it.

Apparently, I was right! Sofia refused to be BFF’S anymore with Leora. So Leora started to hesitate about her plan. She didn’t want Sofia to not be her friend! Oh no. No. She had to get her BFF back.

This wasn’t worth it, Leora thought.

Leora went over to Sofia, and she apologized, “Sorry for stealing your cake, Sofia. I don’t know what got into me.” Sofia just glared at her. Leora explained, ”I shouldn’t have tried to trick you into letting me steal it.”

Are you kidding me?! You weren’t even thinking about me, or the other people who do wish they had the cake, did you? Also, why would you stoop that low? You’ve lost the specialty that made me even want to become your BFF in the first place!” Sofia growled.

“But I really, really loved it. And the way it looked, the cake was so sweet and scrumptious… and truly bewitching.” Leora mumbled.

“Stop it! I’m not your friend, okay?” Sofia argued, now furious. Leora stomped away.

***

THE VERY NEXT DAY…

Sofia yawned heavily. Ever since Leora had gone home, she’d been having nightmares! She even unfriended Leora on Facebook.

Cake eater, she thought. Cake stealer. How could she? How? The cake was from the finest bakery, for goodness sake! Golden’s Bakery, a bakery that only the wealthiest people can afford. $123 for a lick of homemade, rich, caramel ice cream, $673 for the greatest taste of pecan pie, $231 for a sip of a pink, apricot, and delicate strawberry smoothie! A cake was $879!!!

Sofia hadn’t even even saved up all her allowance to purchase it! She had to combine all her family’s money and cherished treasure to buy it! Yes! It was that expensive!

“Leora will be sorry when she sees what she missed!” Sofia muttered.

And so, tension rose up between Sofia and Leora as they argued. Sofia’s heart raced. She was trembling. She’d never lost a friend. Not one. She thought miserably, I need help. She sighed. Who can help anyway?

“I can.”

“Huh? Who are you?” Sofia asked.

“I am the Narrator. I help tell all the stories.”

“I can talk to Narrators?!” Sofia asked.

“I guess you can.”

“I don’t get it. Why me?” Sofia asked.

“For one reason: you really need help, and when someone needs help, I have to make my voice visible to people.”

“Oh. Can you help me? I really want Leora to do something with that apology because I know Leora crossed her fingers when she said she wouldn’t do that again. So I didn’t believe her, then she got mad, and I felt worse, and then, I decided to be nice to her even if she’s not my friend,” Sofia blurted out.

I nodded, clearly wise and understanding. “I know. I can’t help at every moment because that’s illegal in the rules of a Narrator, but I suppose I can tell you that Leora may be mad at you only because she wants you to be her bestie again. So, do you want to be her friend again?”

Sofia squeezed her eyes tight, holding back tears. “Not quite. I don’t know what to do. Because she wanted to stab me in the back and steal my cake, I’m not going to be.” Sophia opened her eyes slightly now. “And now I feel horrendous,” Sofia sobbed.

I became invisible. “Sofia, but Leora is just the same way! Think about how sad she’ll be that you don’t want to be her bestie anymore.” Sofia’s eyes darted over to the window.

She sighed and shook her head. “I am not her friend, still. But thanks for your help, Narrator.”

I faded away. Sofia sobbed. Would this be any worse? Could Sofia ever reunite with Leora?

***

Meanwhile, Leora was fuming mad. She tried to say sorry, but how dare Sofia turn her back on her! She cried herself to sleep.

In her dream, a calm voice actually entered and said, “You can’t turn your back on Sofia. She’s your friend. Get her back.”

Leora awoke with a start. Who would dare interfere with her friend issues?

I felt really bad for Sofia and Leora. That storytelling magic is the most powerful magic for a Narrator to achieve. If only I could do it. Okay, here it goes: “The ice cream truck comes toward 22nd Avenue. Just as I said, an ice cream truck comes toward 22nd Avenue. I did it! Now, to save the day.”

I transported myself to Sofia’s room and flew to the top of the writing desk. I whispered, “Sofia and Leora are friends again.” The room whizzed and whirled.

“Did I do it?” I asked, eagerly.

“Okay everyone.” Sofia sat them all down.

“Well, what is it?” Leora asked.

“Yeah, tell us!” Alexandra squealed.

Wait a minute. This is the day Sofia showed her cake. Oh no! I whizzed them back to the past! The beginning of the story has been copied!

I gulped. I was so in trouble. Sofia was going to be sooo angry at me if she found out. I panicked. If anything changes now, then the “future” is going to be altered! Hey, wait a minute. I can still keep them as BFFs! All I have to do is keep them from fighting! Yes!

I watched as Leora began to get envious with pride. I flickered away to the cake and inhaled. Time to do this.

Okay. Sofia and Leora are BFFs permanently. Leora’s mood lightened. I’m doing it! Sofia and Leora then joined Audrey and Alexandra who were laughing again. Looks okay so far… Leora kept on laughing and talking to Sofia. Yes! I fixed the past! I did it!!! The cake isn’t going to be stolen, and everything is fine once again.

It was a great day for Leora and Sofia, as they played in the setting sun. They kept on laughing with Audrey and Alexandra. The leaves were now turning a light shade of orange, and people were smiling delightedly. The sun was shining, and the wind was blowing gently. I was so proud of saving the story, I decided to enjoy it too.

THE END

Lost/The Lucky Quarter

Once upon a time, there was a beautiful, young lady. Her name was Cameron. She lived with her kind sisters, the oldest named Stephanie and the youngest named Jasmine. They all lived in harmony.

One day, Cameron went into the forest to deliver some presents and goods to their sickly grandmother, but on the way back, Cameron forgot her map at Grandmother’s house. She raced back, but got so lost on the way, she couldn’t find her way back home. At night, she was super hungry, but all she had was a few warm blackberries. After she gobbled them up, she fell into a deep sleep amongst a couple of rocks.

Meanwhile, the two sisters were worried.

“Where is our dear sister?” asked Jasmine.

“Just wait, young one. She probably fell into a deep sleep at Grandmother’s again.” said Stephanie. “Don’t fear. She will be home tomorrow. Now you go to sleep. It’s almost midnight, and you know what happens at midnight.”

Cameron woke up on the same rocks as before. She stood up, and a great big yawn escaped her lips. She saw a small brown hut in the distance. She walked towards it. A handsome, young man walked out the door and spotted Cameron.

“Please sir,” said she. “Please help! I am cold and hungry!”

“Don’t worry,” said he. “This will be your new home. I am Mortimer, son of Mister Gagman. Father, we have a new member of the family.”

What Cameron found, after a few years living with the Gagmans, was a quarter on the sidewalk. She picked it up, and it flew her back home to her sisters. But that was not all. She brought Mortimer and Mister Gagman with her, and Mortimer and Cameron got married and they all lived.

Epilogue

It’s the quarter and I’m getting a bath. Don’t look! It’s an ugly sight. Wait, quarters are ALWAYS naked!

Terry the Donut

           

CHAPTER 1

Hello from Donut Land! My name is Terry, and I like to say I’m brave. But I’m not because in Donut Land, we have just been attacked by the vicious popsicles. They stole all of our topping armor. Now, my donut army and I are planning a comeback.

“When should we attack?” asked Frank.

“Tomorrow afternoon,” said Pete.

“Why?” I asked.

“Because I know they are going out to lunch to celebrate their victory,” said Pete.

“Oh,” I said.

“So, we go to castle first. Then, we find. That’s the plan?” asked Thomas

“First, we sneak into the hall for our topping armor. Then, we raid the castle for anything we like. BUT, we have to leave at 5:00 because that’s when they’re coming back. So that gives us five hours.”                                     

CHAPTER 2

After the plan, we all went to bed.

“Terry,Terry! It’s time to wake up!” said a voice.

I slowly opened one eye, and then slowly opened the other eye. I looked at my clock. “12:30!!!!!!!!!!!!” I shouted.

I sprung out of bed, quickly dressed, and went down to the hall to where the others were. Everyone was there except Frank.

“Where’s Frank?” I asked.

“Oh, Frank went up to wake you up,” answered Pete.

“Oh,” I said, embarrassed. “Oh, and here he comes now.” I looked at my watch. It read 12:48. “We better get going now,” I said. “It’s 12:48.”

“Yeah, but it only takes us five minutes to get there,” said Pete.

“But then we’ll have extra time,” I said.

“Yeah, I guess you’re right,” said Pete.

CHAPTER 3

As we all started walking to the castle, I said, “So we take whatever we like?’’

“Yup,” said Pete. “BUT we first need to find our armour.”

When we got to the castle, we snuck around to the back door where Pete knew there was a secret entrance. He’d been to the castle many times before because he helped make it back when he was friends with the popsicles. But first, we had to say a password. The password was “Pop.” The ground started to shake, and a door formed in the side of the castle. As Pete opened the door, it creaked a little. Inside were a few spiderwebs, and as Pete stepped, the floorboard creaked and groaned. It was dark, and there was loads of air conditioning. The donuts shivered a lot.

We passed an old chest and then turned a corner. Pete stepped on something, and the next thing I knew, he was gone. I heard a voice coming from below. It was Pete. He had fallen down the trapdoor. I knew exactly what to do. I turned the corner and looked in the old chest. There was a rope, and there was a potion for night vision inside. I quickly took both of those things. I hurled the rope down to Pete. I threw down the potion of night vision so that he could see. It landed on him with a smash.

He said, “Who threw that at me?”

I said, “I did. It’s potion of night vision. It said so on the bottle.”

Pete said, “Wow. Thanks. It really works. I can see loads of things now.” He grabbed hold of the rope and climbed up. He said to everyone, “Step over the trapdoor. It’s really deep.”
We came up to another chest. This time, Jacob opened it. He said there were some toppings in there. He gave it to Pete, and Pete’s app said it was my armor.

CHAPTER 4

I put my armor back on. It was warm.

“No fair,” said Frank. “I want my armor back as well.”

Pete said, “We’ll find it soon.”

And then, we carried on walking until we came to another chest. There were two chests this time. Inside, they had loads of night vision potions. We all smashed them on ourselves. In the next chest, we found a sword. It was Frank’s sword. The sword was made of gold with an iron handle and diamond on the end.

“Yay!” said Frank.

And then, everyone else said, “No fair. We don’t get a sword.”  

We carried on walking and walking and walking. But no other chests came. We came to another hallway.

Pete said, “We might need to split up now.” He split us into groups. He said, “Terry, Thomas, Zack, and Frank, go right. Jacob, Luke, and I will carry on straight.”

In Pete’s group, Pete said to Jacob, “I wonder where this place goes. I hope it doesn’t lead to another trap door.”

Meanwhile, in my tunnel, I found a chest. Everybody crowded around and looked inside. There was only one type of thing: some swords.

“Let’s see whose swords these are,” said Terry.

“Well, I know who this one belongs to,” I said. “It belongs to me. And this one might belong to Thomas. And this one might belong to Zack.”

So everybody got their swords except for Pete’s group.

CHAPTER 5     

Meanwhile, Pete found a chest. Pete opened it. Everyone crowded around to see what was inside. There were armor and swords. Pete sorted them.

“So this armor’s Jacob’s, and this sword is Jacob’s, this sword is mine, and this sword is Luke’s.” Pete checked his watch. It read 3:35. “Oh, great,” said Pete.

“What is it?” said Luke.

“It’s 3:35,” answered Pete. “So the only thing we can hope for now is the end of this tunnel.”

“And meeting the others,” said Luke.

“And that,” said Pete. “So who doesn’t have their armor?”

And Luke said, “I don’t. And you, Frank, and Thomas don’t have your armor either. We still need to find them.”

Meanwhile, in my group… I kept walking and walking, but nothing came. Our group started to get worried because they thought we were going the wrong way. Then, something came into view. There was not a chest. There was daylight.

I said, “Everybody, we should turn back. This is the wrong way.”

So we all ran back because we needed to find the others. We kept running and running in the same direction. Then, we came up to the hallway split. We turned right. I checked my watch. It read 4:00.

“Oh no!” I said. “The popsicles are coming in one hour.”

So the others and I ran as fast as we could down the hall until we came to a chest.

“Don’t look in that chest,” I said, “because Pete’s group has already been here so it will be empty.” We saw more chests but we didn’t open them.

We kept running until we saw something moving.

CHAPTER 6

I thought, Phew, we caught up to them. But then, I thought, That can’t be them because there’s only one thing moving.

When we came up to it, it was a robot programmed to fight anything that was like a donut. As soon as it saw us, it started kicking, but we ran right past it. When we looked back, it was running after us.

I shouted, “Keep running everybody!” Then, I saw three people in the distance, and they were moving. I knew it had to be Pete and his group. I screamed, “Run! Run! There’s a robot chasing us!”

Thomas screamed, “There’s a robot chasing us!”

Pete looked behind us and saw the robot chasing us all. He started running as fast as he could. We came up to the chest. I didn’t stop running, but looked inside it. I saw a blur of something that looked like a slow potion and a gun.

I said to the others, “Pick up what’s in that chest. Quickly! Trust me, I think there is a gun and some slow motion potion.”

Thomas picked up the gun. It was a machine gun. And Luke picked up the potion. He threw it at the robot. The robot started going really slow. We all slowed down and came to a stop. Then, we started shooting at the robot. The robot’s arm came off. Then, its other arm came off. Then, its legs and head. It died.

We started walking. Everybody was panting because we’d been running really fast.

“I need a break,” said Pete.

But I said, “No, we can’t take a break now. It’s 4:30. They are coming home in half an hour, and we still have armor to find. We also have to find swords.”

CHAPTER 7

We kept walking and walking. Then, we saw a door at the other end of the hallway. I opened it. There were two flights of stairs. So we started walking up them. And we saw a chest. Let’s see what’s inside it?

What we saw is that there was only one thing. A sword. It belonged to Thomas. Then, Thomas said, “Yay! I finally have my sword.”

We walked up the other flight of stairs. It had a marble floor and paintings on the side of the walls. It had a very high ceiling.

Pete said, “We’re inside the main castle now. Now, we really need to try and find the rest of our armor and swords.” “

I checked my watch. It was 4:45. They were coming in fifteen minutes. We had to find our armor and swords now.

“We have to start running. We can’t walk anymore,” I said.

Then, something caught my eye. In the far right corner, there was a chest. I started running towards it. Everyone ran after me in a pack. I opened it. There was all of our armor. We took it all.

CHAPTER 8

I checked my watch. 4:58. “Guys! We have to go now, it’s 4:58!”

“Let’s go!” said Pete.

We ran out the door and to our castle.

As we approached our castle, we heard a voice. I looked behind me. It was a popsicle. “Hey, wait up,” he said.

We stopped. Pete said, “What is it?”

The popsicle said, “We’re sorry for stealing all your armor, we just wanted to protect ourselves from melting.”

“Oh,” said Pete. “Well, I think we can help you.”

“You can!?”

“Follow us.”

We walked back to our castle and walked up to to the top floor. We opened the door. Inside was our armor maker. We asked what armor he and his friends would like. He said, “Gold armor please.”

“Coming right up,” said the computer.

“Can I have twelve gold armors, please?” said the popsicle whose name was Mate.

“Okay,” said the computer.

After all the gold armors were made, Mate said, “Thanks so much for helping me!”

And that’s how the donuts and the popsicles became friends again.

The Weird Potion

In a small town in California, there was an evil man named Dr. Ricker. He looked just like a regular doctor, wearing an all-white outfit. He was making a potion to poison the drinking water of the town. This potion would make everyone very sick — they would throw up and grow weak. He always dreamed of ruling the world, so he started with this town. By making everyone weaker, he would grow stronger and be able to take over all of California. This was his first time trying out a plan like this because he didn’t want the townspeople to know his strengths and weaknesses and be able to defeat him. His biggest strength was how smart he was. His biggest weakness was that he couldn’t run fast, and he wasn’t very good at tricking people.

In his big lab at the town’s hospital, he finished mixing his last batch of the potion. He put paint, red pills, and purple liquid moss into a great mixing pot and mixed it for two hours.

“Okay! Let’s get this into the water supply!” He laughed.

Later, he went to the supermarket where they kept the canned goods that needed tap water to be made, like canned and frozen orange juice that needed hot water. He told everyone who walked by how canned goods were more nutritious these days because doctors had figured out a way to pack them with healthy ingredients. A gigantic crowd swarmed in front of the whole display and began buying all of the canned goods, completely wiping them out. When he came out of the market, he started laughing tremendous, evil laughs and walked back to his lab.

Meanwhile, a poor, homeless man named Chris decided to peek up and watch the television in the house he was hiding under. The little boy who lived there was in his wheelchair in front of the TV. He had big glasses, freckles, and straight, brown hair. Chris had always seen little kids teasing the boy, and Chris really wanted to show him that even with his disability, he could still be a hero. He saw a news reporter talking about this weird color in the water that had come out of nowhere and was harming the townspeople.

Even though Chris was just a poor townsperson, he wanted to destroy what was harming everyone and become known as a hero for the little boy. Because doctors usually gave the information to the scientists at the hospital, he knew he had to go there to begin searching for answers.

He walked down the block and turned right to arrive at a police station. He felt very brave, knowing he was on a mission to save his whole town, and he marched over to a police officer.

“Can you give me a ride to the hospital?” Chris asked.

“Why?” The police officer asked, confused.

Chris told him how he needed to find out more information about why everyone was getting sick, and the police officer agreed. They started driving toward the hospital, and whenever Chris looked out the window, he saw people throwing up and everyone growing weaker and weaker with every footstep. Chris felt sad and sorry for the people. He knew what it was like to feel sick.

Chris and the police officer stopped at the hospital and waved goodbye to each other. Chris walked into the hospital and asked the man at the front desk if he had any information about why everyone was sick.

“Follow me,” the man told him.

Chris followed him down to the basement. On his way, he saw a case full of sharp knives. The front door man led him into a dark, cell-like room with no windows.

“Stay here,” the man said calmly.

“Okay,” Chris agreed, uncertain.

The man shut the door and walked quickly up the stairs to a red button on the wall. He punched the button.

“Ahh!” screamed Chris, when he noticed that he was tied up. He was scared, but then, he realized it was the same type of rope he had used to tie up his belongings every night and every morning to make sure they weren’t stolen. The knots tied in the rope were usually very weak because it was such a cheap rope. Chris had a pocketknife in his pocket, but he couldn’t reach it. He noticed the blade was sticking out a bit. He scrunched himself into a little ball until the blade touched the rope. He squeezed a little bit more and cut the rope that was tying his hands. He cut the rest of the rope and quietly took off the sweaty blindfold. Then, he thought about the case of sharp knives, so he ran down the corridor and opened the glass case.

He thought to himself, Now, no one will overcome me. He took off, searching for someone else to help him. Then, he noticed that he hadn’t gone upstairs yet.

The first room he saw was Dr. Ricker’s lab, where the evil doctor was pouring his second-to-last batch of the potion. He walked into the room and knocked over a bottle of purple liquid by accident. There were bottles of purple liquid going up a tube and into the mixing bowl.

Dr. Ricker turned around. “Whaaat… are you doing here in my lab?“ Dr. Ricker said, hiding his potion behind his back, hoping Chris wouldn’t notice.

“Are you the one who’s been making this liquid that’s been harming the townspeople?” Chris asked him. Dr. Ricker knew this was going to happen, and he was prepared. He told him that no, he wasn’t, and he tried to change the topic.

“Have you heard about the scratch ticket that was worth three trillion dollars? I won! And I’ll give all the money to you.” Dr. Ricker knew Chris was homeless just by looking at his rags.

“Then, what is that purple liquid behind your back?” Chris asked.

“A drink I bought from the store,” Dr. Ricker casually replied.

Chris stuck the knife out from his belt and said, “Are you lying ?” The room seemed to get hotter every time they breathed in air.

Dr. Ricker said in his evil voice, “You really want to fight?” and stuck out a long dagger that glimmered under the light. They took two steps forward, and each started hitting the other’s knife, trying to hit it out of each other’s hand.

Clang! the swords went. One of the doctors outside heard the noise and told the other doctors. They followed the sound and reached Dr. Ricker’s lab. They saw the potion drop out of Dr. Ricker’s hand and decided to call the owner of the hospital.

The man from the front desk had also heard the noise, and he quickly ran up. He saw the fight and took the longest dagger from the case he had walked past earlier. He went back to the lab and started fighting on Dr. Ricker’s side. Chris was nervous, but he stayed brave because he was saving the whole town from the bad guys and their potion. He wouldn’t give up because he wanted to be known as a hero for the little boy and save everyone.

Just as Chris started losing grip on his dagger, the owner of the hospital ran in and yelled, “Stop!”

The other doctors told the chief all about how they saw the same liquid in the tap water. They tested it out on one of the unaffected, and he started throwing up and falling down. The owner of the hospital called the police to take Dr. Ricker and his sidekick to jail.

When the police came, Dr. Ricker shouted, “You’ll still see me here, but in another world.”

Everyone said, “Pff, who cares? You’re going to jail!”

The mayor of California and the President of the United States of America awarded Chris the medal of bravery and had a big celebration in the town square.

The little boy in the wheelchair came up to Chris and told him that he had really taught him a lesson because now he knew that even though he had a disability, he could still be a hero.

Chris said, “This all happened because I saw other kids bullying you. I decided to prove that even if you are different from regular people who have some money, you can still be a hero.”

As for the sick townspeople, the doctors examined the potion and started to think about a pill that could solve their sickness. Then, they finally got an idea for a pill. Finally, they told the messenger boy to bring the packets to all the houses in the town in California.

What Are the Chances?

Luma was lying on her bed, her nose buried in a book and her hair spilling out every which way on the comforter.

“Luma, come, come!” Her mother called from down the hall. “Adam is here!”

Oh, awesome! Luma thought. Adam is my favorite cousin because he’s so reckless. Maybe I can learn something from him. She quickly put a bookmark in her novel and laid it on her bed. She jumped up and ran to the front door to greet her cousin.

“Hey, L!” Adam happily said. “I’m so glad I got to come here.” He unclipped his helmet and hung it on his bike handle just a few feet from their house.

I wish I was more like him. Luma sighed, yearning to be more like the daring Adam. Always going on adventures on his bike, climbing everything in his line of vision.

“So, I was thinking maybe you can show me how to ride a bike?” Luma asked, embarrassed.

Adam laughed. “You? No offense, Luma, but you don’t seem like the type who can ride a bike.” He looked at the slightly hurt expression on her face and quickly added, “But I can teach you. If you want.”

“Jeez, Adam!” Luma sighed. “Just teach me! I want to be….” She trailed off.

“You want to be…?” Adam asked. “Tell me.”

Luma looked down at her shoes. “Okay, I want to be more like you. I mean, you’re so fearless! You go on these explorations! And here I am, reading books and typing words for stories. But you won’t get it. It’s just who you are.” Luma looked at Adam. “There. That’s what I wanted to say.”

Adam looked at her, bewildered. “You want to be like me? Wow.”

Luma looked surprised. Why is he so confused? “Wow, what?”

“I always wanted to be like you!” he laughed. “I’m always wasting my time going out and about but never focusing on my homework or grades. You make it look so effortless to be at the top of your class. How do you do it?”

Now it was Luma’s turn to be confused. Him? Wants to be like me? It was like she was in some alternate universe. She had never thought in a million years that Adam her carefree, crazy cousin would want to be like her.

“Okay, I’ll make a deal with you. I’ll help you with your schoolwork,” Luma explained. “And you will help me be the zany person I’ve always wanted to be.”

Adam thought about it for a while. “Okay! I’m cool with that deal,” he grinned. “Now let’s go to the bike shop and teach you how to ride a bike!”

***

“Ahh!” Luma wobbled unsteadily on a dusty bike from the rental store, going so slow that a turtle could beat her in a race.

“Sit in the center of the seat!” Adam instructed. “Pedal more forcefully!”

“I’m trying! I’m trying!” Luma said, exasperated. “This is harder than I thought!”

“Keep your hands tight on the handlebars!” Adam shouted. “This is only the start of being bold. Get used to it.”

Luma processed this thought. “You’re doing this to be bold,” she mumbled. “To be bold.” With each chant, she gained speed, just a little. Soon, Luma was riding around the park, steering the wrong way a couple of times but, overall, doing very well.

Adam smiled as Luma removed her helmet. “You are doing so well. I’m proud of you.”

“Hello, Mr. Cheesy McCheesy,” Luma playfully teased. But really, Luma was satisfied by how much progress she made.

“Okay, what’s next?” Luma kicked up the kickstand of the bike.

Adam looked around the playground, thinking of what training to give to Luma. Then he smiled. “Obstacle course.”
Adam made up the course as he went. “Okay, so climb up the ladder, but with no hands. And instead of crossing the platform, go along the very edge and crab-walk to the slide. Go down on the rim of the slide, try not to fall down. Then, sprint to the mini-slide and walk up it to the bar over there, climb up there, jump down and you’re done! It might seem overwhelming, but it’s easier than you think it is.” Adam took a breath. “I’ll time you.”

“Okay. I’m ready.” Luma stretched out her hamstrings and rolled her neck around.

Adam set a stopwatch and counted down from five. “Five… four… three… two… one… Go!”

Luma dashed off, jumping and climbing and running and sliding all over the place. She had laser focus and did not think of anything other than finishing the course. When she finished, Adam had a stunned look on his face.

“Fifty-four seconds!” he said a little too loudly. “How?”

Luma laughed and wiped the sweat off her forehead. “Well, I guess the bike ride inspired me.”

“If you keep it up, you’re gonna be way better than me!” He punched Luma playfully.

An ice cream truck chimed nearby. The cousins rushed over to the vehicle, eager to get a cold, sweet treat.

When they got there, the man in the truck greeted them. “What would you like today?” He pointed to the various options on the side of the truck.

“I would like a strawberry ice cream in a medium cone, please,” Luma asked.

When the man handed her the delectable cone, she handed him the money and sat down at a nearby bench. Adam repeated Luma’s transaction, but his flavor was triple fudge.

Adam walked over to the bench and sat next to Luma. He took a few licks of his ice cream and then turned to Luma.

“OK, L. I held up my end of the deal for today now it’s your turn. Once we get home, let’s hit the books!” Adam laughed with Luma.

But secretly, Luma was having a very important discussion inside her head with herself. I’ve never been a “mentor,” per se, she thought. I might teach him the wrong things, or make it too easy or too hard. He might be learning different things in his class, or I might teach him the advanced subjects…. The more Luma thought about it, the more the worries rolled in like big, salty, scary waves.

Luma could not show that anxiety. Adam would be suspicious, and that would be a disaster.

“Yeah. Hit the books,” Luma said weakly.

***

When she got home, Luma hung a sign on her door:

*Attention!*

VERY important study session proceeding inside this room.

If it is an absolute emergency (or it’s dinnertime),

PLEASE KNOCK! DO NOT BARGE RIGHT IN.

Thank you for your cooperation.

Luma & Adam

After hanging the sign, she turned and shut the door. “Okay, Adam, let’s do this. I’m returning the favor. So, I took the time to gather books from my own collection and from the library on numerous subjects.”
Adam was blown away. Stunned. Shocked. Luma had done all of this for him? Really? His heart filled just a bit at how much effort his cousin had put into his tutoring.

“Adam? Is something wrong?”

He looked up, frightened in the slightest, at Luma. I can’t show my gratefulness. I’m the cool one, after all. Despite these thoughts, Adam couldn’t push aside his urge to thank Luma for all her effort. You can’t. You need to look like the “no big deal” kind of guy.

“Ugh. I’ll just do this myself,” Adam angrily said to himself.

“Adam? Are you ready?” Luma tapped his shoulder.

“Oh. Uh, yeah, just, thinking about something…” Adam plastered a fake smile over his face to make it seem all okay.

“What were you thinking about?” Luma cocked her head to the side in curiosity. “You looked very deep in thought.”

“Um…” Adam searched frantically for a topic to say he was “thinking” about. “Um, ice cream.” He looked briefly startled by his sudden outburst. “Yeah. Ice cream: all the flavors… chocolate, vanilla, rocky road, peanut butter chocolate.” He once again faked a smile. “Yum, yum!” He said, too enthusiastically.

“Okay…” Luma said, slowly. “Very, um, interesting, topic. But enough talking. Which one first: algebra or history of Asia?”

“Algebra,” Adam said confidently. Math was the only subject he was decent at.

“Okay, here are all the books. Let’s go through every single one.” Luma put a huge stack of books in front of Adam. He started to sweat. Luma’s words echoed in his head.

Every single one.

Every. Single. One.

Every. Single. One.

“It’s going to be a long, long night,” Adam sighed under his breath so that Luma couldn’t hear. “A very, very, very long one.”

***

By that time, they had gone through countless books of completely boring and long equations and numbers, filling out as Luma had promised every single page. And when he thought he had done all that he could to master math, Luma happily placed in front of him a tower of worksheets.

And then, when Adam had finally thought he was finished, Luma chirped, “Time for history of Asia!” And put a large book in front of Adam’s face.

He just groaned.

Then, when the impossible became possible, the duo finished all the books Luma had in store, plus the worksheets, plus the pop quizzes Luma had somewhat cruelly put in store for him.

“Adam, I am very proud of you. You got algebra down super quickly, and you’re making progress in ancient history of Asia!” she smiled. “I know this is absolute torture for you, but you made it through. For today.”

Adam smacked his forehead. Oy, why did I agree to this? But even he had to admit, it was kind of dare he say fun to learn something new. Plus, Luma told him, this stuff was advanced, and if he could get that down, then the things his class was going over was going to be super easy.

Finally, after what seemed like hours and hours, dinnertime arrived.

Rap tap rap. Luma’s mother was knocking on Luma’s bedroom door. “It’s dinnertime,” she said. “I made chicken pot pie, Adam’s favorite!”

“Ooh, yum, chicken pot pie!” Adam jumped up, all too happy for dinner.

As Luma and Adam walked to the dining room, Luma commented on how he was going to be so ahead in his class.

But Adam, once again, was having an important meeting in his head. The thing is, he worried, I’m really afraid that I’m going to forget everything I learned today. Then I’ll have to do all that studying again, just because I forgot all the work I did. I cannot tolerate the misery I went through today, he thought, exasperated.

When the pair arrived in the dining room, the adults bombarded them with millions of questions.

“Luma, I heard you learned how to ride a bike! That’s great, but why, sweetie?”

“Adam? I saw some heavy books in your backpack. What’s the meaning of that?”

“Adam, you’ve never been interested in studying.”
“And I thought you never cared for going outside, Luma.”

“What is going on?”

And much more.

So, the cousins had no choice but to tell all about their deal: Luma telling about her bike ride, Adam telling about the torturous indulging study session.

The adults laughed and “awww”-ed as the cousins told their somewhat intriguing tale over chicken pot pie.

After dinner, Adam and Luma said goodbye to each other.

“Hey, L… maybe in a week you could come over again? Because that would be great.”

Luma’s mother, standing nearby, happily nodded. “That seems like a great idea! I’ve always been forcing Luma to go outside, but now that she finally has a desire to, I’m more than happy to let her over! I remember when Luma blah blah blah…” Luma’s mother went on about some sort of childhood memory that, personally, no one cared about.

Adam half-listened. Sheesh, he griped internally. When did Luma’s mom get so chatty and annoying? He laughed to himself. And when did I get so sarcastic?

Five long minutes later, Luma’s mother came to the end of her speech.

… and that’s why I will never buy chocolate from the man down the block!” She laughed. “Oh, sorry, Adam, I got a little carried away.” She smiled apologetically.

“Uh-huh,” Adam said, still partly paying attention. But then he realized someone was actually talking to him, and snapped back like a rubber band. “Very nice tale, Auntie Holly!” he said, as if he had actually been paying attention (he’s full of baloney).

“Really? Well, I’m glad you liked it.”

“Yeah, well, I’m going to ask my mom to go home now. I had a great time! Bye!” Adam went off to find his mom.

“Luma,” her mother asked. “I’m just interested why do you want to be more adventurous?”

“I don’t know,” Luma lied. “I just want to.” She started to play with her hair.

“I know you’re lying,” her mom said. “You always fiddle with your hair when you lie. C’mon, tell me.”

“Fine,” Luma sighed, annoyed. “But let’s go to the sunroom.”

“Sure.” As the mother and daughter walked down the hall, Luma noticed that, out of all the pictures of her, there were no pictures of her being active. The pictures looked still and bleak against the mahogany wall with just her sitting there, reading a book or writing on her computer.

The woven-rope carpet seemed to cut against her feet as she thought of her wasted thirteen years of keeping her nose in a book instead of going outside, or playing soccer or even just going on her front lawn.

When they reached the sunroom, Luma took the hanging seat with orange pillows and her mother took the rattan couch with matching orange pillows across from Luma.

“I’d just like to become more adventurous, because everyone at school thinks I’m the smart one. I mean, that’s great and all, but now my best friend Kacee joined the basketball team and, ever since, she’s been drifting away from me. Suddenly, she’s ignoring me.” Luma looked down.

“Oh, hun, it’s great that you treasure your friendship with her. But if you feel that you’ve become more daring and she still ignores you, maybe it’s time to find new friends.”

“Thanks, Mom.” She hugged her mother, and at that instant, as Luma gazed at the infinite night sky, she saw that even through the thunderstorm clouds, the rhythm of life would continue on.

***

“How was the chicken pot pie?” Adam’s mother asked.

“Great, now can we go home? I already said bye to everyone,” Adam asked.

“Sure, just lemme say goodbye to Auntie Holly.”

His mom walked out of the dining room for a couple of minutes and then came back.

“Okay, let’s go.” They opened the door, saying goodbye once more as they walked out, and headed down the path and got in the car. The sky was a beautiful purple and midnight blue, and it seemed to shine triumphantly

“Adam,” his mother said in a tone that Adam knew she was going to ask a question. “Why were you studying with Luma? And why did you have War & Peace: Starter’s Edition in your backpack? You’ve never wanted to study. All you wanted to do was ride on your bike or jump off everything. I’ve been constantly urging you to study because your GPA has dropped over time. But nooo, you always were out and about.” She sighed. “What’s your new and crazy plan now?”

“I’m just… changing my act.” That was partially true. He was changing his act; he was being more studious. But there was always more to the truth.

“Adam, just tell me,” his mother said, tired.

“Okay, okay, I’ll tell you. So a couple of weeks ago, Carter got a glimpse of my math test scores. He had every right to be mad I always made up excuses to not go to his ‘study sessions’… I said my grades were great. But now, since he’s found out, he’s been ignoring me, and it’s so annoying. I just want him to be back to normal. I asked him how I could make it up to him, and he said by raising my grades. He’s being a nice friend, but in the weirdest way. I just want Carter to be my friend again.” Adam hung his head.

Adam’s mother smiled. “Adam, you’re doing the right thing. I get it. And also, you’re making me a very happy mom. This is a win-win situation!” They both laughed, and at that moment, looking at the outstretched road in front of them, they realized that even though there was traffic and confusion and annoyance in their lives, the road of life moved on.

***

A few months later, the hard work Luma and Adam had done paid off.

Luma joined the basketball team, and Kacee apologized for being so exclusive. Now, Luma plays basketball like she’s been doing it since she was born thanks to Adam.

Adam’s grades, after many lessons from Luma, had gone through the roof. His teachers praised him endlessly and Carter returned to normal and atoned for his harshness towards Adam’s GPA. Adam even aced the English exams and said they were “a piece of cake” thanks to Luma.

But, of course, the two had to stay true to their former identities.

Luma still read and wrote like crazy, but not as much, and now she knows when to stop and go outside. Adam, on the other hand, still accomplished ludicrous feats of danger, but never put that before school and academics.

The cousins were glad they were exposed to the other person’s life.

They didn’t know what kind of problems were in store for them, from friends to homework, but they promised they would help each other.

Additionally, if they ever had a dilemma, Adam and Luma would hold a Quadruple C: Cousin Conflict Conference Club for whenever they had an issue.

But, whatever they went through, they knew that life would always go on.

The Great Lunchbox Mystery

Leigh was an ordinary boy. Red hair, green eyes. Every day, his mom packed him a sandwich and water. But when he got to school, he had pasta, sparkling water, and a cheesecake. As the years passed, he got more food from his lunchbox: pizza, cakes, Coca-Cola, and silverware.

Then, lightning sprouted from the air and put a golden crown on his lunchbox, and it started to float. Leigh grabbed his lunchbox and followed it up to the air. Once they were at the top, they were in Lunchbox Land. Lunchbox Land was basically made of lunchboxes: lunchbox houses, lunchbox playgrounds, lunchbox floors, lunchbox everything. Leigh was shocked. He fell onto his back, pretending it was a dream.

Then, his lunchbox grew legs, then arms, and then a head. So you understand me? Even eyes! And then he said, “Hello, Leigh.”

Leigh was confused. He had no idea what was happening. Leigh rolled his eyes and said, “Where did you come from?”

“I am magical,” his lunchbox replied. “My name is Shake Your Booty. How may I help you?”

“I am good. Who are you?”

“I am Shake Your Booty. Oh, then, I will go to my castle.”

“What castle?”

“That castle.”

“Oh! Can I go in?”

They walked and walked until they got to a huge mansion. They opened the lunchbox doors. As Leigh stepped in, he saw a beautiful table, giant golden lunchbox stairs, and best of all, a sculpture! “Is this me?” He asked.

Shake Your Booty cried, “Yes, this is you! You are my boss. I like you being happy. Other kids don’t have the luck that you have.”

As he entered, Shake Your Booty said, “This is your room. Enjoy! You have it for one week.” Shake Your Booty yelled, “Bye!” and shut the door.

Leigh accidentally wobbled and pressed a red button on the floor. The whole room was about to explode. It exploded, all right, but with human stuff. A bed, clothing, a bathroom, and a rug appeared. Leigh ran all the way to the end of the room and tucked himself into a ball. And all of a sudden, he could fly.

“What the lunchbox?” Leigh said and fell asleep.

The next morning, Leigh found a giant cake in his room and Shake Your Booty too. He was singing, “Shake your bootay! Shake your bootay! Na, na! Baby this is how you do it!”

Leigh rolled his eyes. What was happening to him?

Leigh tried to break the floor to get home. It wasn’t possible.

Shake Your Booty said, “Hellooo! Do you want the big cake or not?”

“Oh, no, thank you,” Leigh replied. Then, they tried looking for another lunch box that came from the earth. But they were so hard to get into one of the holes. Then, he went up to the room. He found The Guide Out of Lunchbox World in his drawer. It had appeared with the room.

So, first, he needed a hammer of Lunchbox Zitia. But, it was at the top of the mansion. So he took the elevator and got the hammer. Then, he needed to find out where he came out of. So he went to Headquarters. He asked, “By any chance, do you know where I came out of?”

“Name of your lunchbox?”

“Shake Your Booty.”

“Where do you live?” asked Building, a lunchbox that worked in Headquarters.

“Plastic Street.”

“Okay. Follow me.”

So Leigh followed Building to where he came out of. He crashed to the ground. Then, he jumped in the hole and landed on his roof. The hole closed. He was safe!

Shake Your Booty was ruined! He decided to send his spy to look for Leigh.

Then, he said to his spy Tupperware, “You shall find Leigh. You can use the tools in that box. If not, you are banished from Lunchbox Land.”

So Tupperware set foot. On the way to Leigh’s house, he broke the ground. There was Leigh’s house! He jumped off the floor and onto the roof. And then he slid down and walked through the door. He had a smile on his face, and he was cartwheeling on the floor.

“I don’t know. I just held onto my flying lunch box, and I was in another dimension!” said Leigh.

“Okay. You are grounded. Go to your room!”

“Okay.”

Then, Leigh went into his room. There was his old lunchbox!

“Ha, ha. Get ready to become a lunchbox!”

“No!” Leigh ran to his mom. They both shook in terror.

“So, this is your lunchbox?” said his mom.

“Yes!”

“Run for your life!”

“The bomb.”

“What bomb?”

“The bomb that I hid in the yard this morning. I can make it explode, and my crazy lunchbox will get destroyed.”

“Do it.”

Leigh hit the red button.

BOOOOOM!

The ground shook. Dirt and stone flew up into the air. And in the hole, lay the two dead lunchboxes.  

Nacho Cheese for President

On a place called Tropical Big Island, there was a superhero named Nacho Cheese. He defeated bad guys with his nacho cheese sauce powers. He also had some signature moves such as the Nacho Fist Punch, Nacho Chip Projectiles, the Wet Nacho Willie, and best of all, the Big Nacho Cheese Powder Fart. However, he was now saving the day by running for president!

In the town square, Nacho Cheese crashed into Bob the Builder.

“Who are you?” Nacho Cheese asked.

“I am Bob the Builder,” said Bob.

“I am Nacho Cheese,” said Nacho Cheese.

Bob was old, had gray hair, and couldn’t stand straight. Meanwhile, Nacho Cheese had a Mexican mask and a unique mustache.

“What are you doing here?” Nacho Cheese asked again.

“I am here because I want to know what Eve Vil would do as president,” Bob said.

“Well, if you want to know, go to Eve Vil’s speech,” Nacho Cheese said.

“Well, okay,” said Bob. “Hey, what are you even doing as president?”

“I will create a foundation where I will help the poor and hungry,” Nacho Cheese said.

“Why, thank you, superhero,” Bob said.

“You’re welcome,” said Nacho Cheese.

At the election, Nacho Cheese had met his rival candidates: Eve Vil, Violet Blick, and Camilia Higgins. Violet Blick’s cover as an adult was blown, and she was eliminated. It turned out Blick was a child when her stilts and makeup were gone.

Just because he was a superhero, the voters decided not to vote for Nacho Cheese, and Eve Vil won the election. Nacho Cheese was saddened by this. But then, Eve Vil caused chaos around the island! But don’t worry, Nacho Cheese was here to save the day! He did his Nacho Fist Punch and launched his Cheese Sauce to hold off Eve Vil. He then told the citizens to go on a ship for a little while. Vil freed herself from the cheese sauce and tried to find Nacho Cheese. Nacho Cheese then found her and used all his powers. When he found out they didn’t work, he had to do his most special move yet: the Big Nacho Cheese Powder Fart. Vil couldn’t stand the smell and was defeated. The voters realized they were wrong about Nacho Cheese, and he became president. He repeated his speech and did what he had to do to become president.

“Hello, it is me, Nacho Cheese. I may be your average everyday superhero, but now, I am running for president! I shall now tell you what I will do as president. I will start a foundation that will help the poor and hungry. I want justice for what the bad guys did to me. And finally, I will always save the day, even if i’m president. And now, I will be the president of Tropical Big Island!”

Nacho Cheese and the citizens of Tropical Big Island lived happily ever after.

“Wait a minute!” exclaimed Nacho Cheese, “I forgot about Camilia Higgins!”

“That’s right!” said Higgins herself, “You forgot about me!”

“You know, you’re perfect for the role of the president,” said Nacho Cheese.

“But why?” asked Camilia Higgins.

“All those things I said at the speech, I can also do those things as a superhero,” Nacho Cheese said. “So you can be president.”

Since the voters hated it when Nacho Cheese put his arms up and yelled “Nacho Cheese!” Camilia Higgins was president instead. Even though he didn’t win, Nacho Cheese started his foundation, and everybody lived happily ever after.

THE END

Tales of a Toad

     

Mr. Toad

Gretchen and I do not get along. Gretchen, the dumb “know-it-all” parakeet that lives with Owner and me, is sooo annoying!!! She only cares about herself, and worst of all, Owner only cares about Gretchen! It’s like I don’t exist! Life was perfect until she came along.

“How was life before she came?” you might ask. Well, that’s what I’m here to tell you.

I was sitting in my box when Owner came to me. “Hey, Mr. Toad,” he said. “Wanna play?”

Of course I do, I thought.

“Let’s go!” Owner took me out of my box and put me on the floor.

“Want to have a hopping race?” he asked.  I nodded my head. We started leaping across the floor. Then, I felt my stomach start to rumble, and I realized I was hungry. I hopped back into my box and hopped around in circles. That meant that I was hungry. Owner went into the other room and got my food. I was sitting in my box when Owner came to feed me.

“Today is a big day,” said Owner. “I am getting a bird.”

A bird? I thought. What’s a bird?

“A bird,” said Owner, as if he was reading my mind, “is an animal with big, yellow wings and clawed feet.”

This bird sounds scary, I thought.

Owner gave me a couple of grapes and a snail for breakfast. Then, he went out of the room to eat his breakfast. I liked the snail, but not the grapes. I went to my cave to sleep after breakfast. When I closed my eyes, I heard the door creaking. Owner must have left to get the bird. I fell asleep.

I heard Owner walk into the room holding a big cage with a yellow thing that had wings. That must be the bird, I thought.

“Okay, Gretchen, welcome to your new home.”

Wait, new home? Gretchen’s staying? I thought she was just visiting!

“Squack! New home! Squack!” said the parakeet.  Then, she snapped her beak and flexed her talons. I was a little scared. I ran into the cave in my box and hid. I woke up and realized that it was a dream. I was still scared of a parakeet coming, but at least I hoped it would have a better name than Gretchen.

“Squawk! New home! Squawk!”

I had heard that before. The parakeet must be here. I was scared, really scared. I went back into my cave and hid like I did in my dream. A big, metal cage was set down next to my box.

“This is Mr. Toad,” I heard Owner’s voice say. “He is your new roommate.”

Roommate? I thought. She’s living in here? Oh no!

“Squawk, Mr. Toad, squawk!”

“Ribbit!” I let out a croak.

“Mr. Toad, this is Gretchen,” said Owner.

Oh no, that is her name, I thought. I didn’t like her already.

“Here, Gretchen, have some food,” said Owner.

Gretchen’s food looked tastier than grapes (which I hate,) but definitely not as good as snails (the absolute best food EVER!!) You really should try snails.

Anyway, I decided to try some of the birdseed to see if it tasted anything like snails. So if your Owner gets birdseed, heed my strong advice: DO NOT TRY TO EAT IT!!!  Seriously though, birdseed is even worse than grapes.

Now, back to the story.

Gretchen ate her food.

“Well, Gretchen, Mr. Toad, I have to go to school. See you soon!”

I heard another voice come from another room. “Alexander, you’re gonna be late!”

“Coming, Mom!” yelled Owner.

He walked out the door. I turned to Gretchen in disgust. “Parakeets are not welcome in this house.” I felt kind of guilty for saying that, but I knew that I wouldn’t be the number one pet anymore while she was around.

“That’s a very unfriendly welcome for a very…” She blinked her long eyelashes. “…a very friendly toad.” Gretchen winked. Oooh, how I hate that bird! Gretchen’s pale blue eyes flashed.  

“By the way, your food tastes worse than grapes!” I croaked. “But it fits you perfectly.”

“Oh yeah?” Gretchen squawked. “Watch this.” I gulped. “Squawk! Hungry! Squawk!” She flapped her wings up and down frantically. “Squawk!”

“Oh, here’s some birdseed, dear,” said Owner’s mom as she fed Gretchen.

I hopped around in circles. That meant I was hungry. Nothing. “Hey! Why am I not getting any food?” I asked Gretchen.

But she just shook her head. “Mmm, mmm, mmm.”

“Hey! Not fair! How did you even do that?”

“’Cause parakeets can talk. Toads? Mmm, mmm, mmm.” I just huffed and went to sleep.

But when I woke up the next morning, Owner and Gretchen were already awake. Playing. Having fun.

“Squawk! Fun! Squawk!”

“Yes, Gretchen. Fun.”

“Squawk! Happy!” I couldn’t believe my eyes. They were rolling snails, hopping in circles, doing all the things that Owner and I used to do when I was his. But it got worse. Gretchen kept glaring at me.

Then, Owner said something. I didn’t understand it, but it sounded like, “Okay, Gretchen, I have to use the bathroom.” That’s when Gretchen pushed me out the open window.

Okay, look, I have absolutely no idea what I’m doing, but here goes nothin’!!! Ooh, look at that store over there! I wonder what it sells… Hey! What’s this? Some kind of joke? No, wait, it’s… it’s… a mini snail! Now, let’s do a taste test… Blech!! WAAAAY too sweet! But it’s — delicious! Ooh! Here’s another! And another! Yummmm! All these mini snails!  

What will I ever do? Hey! Stop it! Wait! Aaaaah!

Dark. Lonely. Trapped behind bars. I’m too young to die! What was this place? Nothing there but food, water, and a lot of other animals. There were cats, and dogs, and this fat, pink thing that smelled like Owner’s bacon, and a really creepy red and green parrot that kept yelling, “Squawk! I’m a macaw! Squawk!” He reminded me too much of Gretchen. It was dark, noisy, and moist in there. A dog barked at me. A cat hissed. I shuddered. I ran, but there was no cave to hide in. Just this stupid, empty cage. But at least Gretchen wasn’t there.

Owner’s voice echoed in my head. Welcome to your new home. Your new home. New home. Would I be here to stay? I didn’t want to find out…

Yep, still here. I wonder where I am. I wonder how Owner’s doing, partying all day long with Gretchen. Having fun. I wonder if he misses me, or even notices I’m gone. I miss him. I just hope he misses me…

Gretchen

“Where’s Mr. Toad?” Owner cried. “I miss him!”

What was up with Alexander? He’d been like this all week! I didn’t think he’d miss Toad so much.

“Squawk! Bored! Squawk!” I wanted to cheer him up. But he only kept on moping. I almost felt sorry for him… No. I made a choice. I had to stick to it.

Mr. Toad

The next day was a big day for me at the animal jail. A tall, skinny man with a small beard walked in. He took me out of my cage and held me in his hand. I squirmed and tried to wriggle out. I was scared. Real scared.

“Here you go, ma’am”, he said cheerfully. He gave me to a young, blonde woman.

“Thank you, sir!” she said. “I’ve always wanted a toad.”

“Okay, Mr.  Toad,” the woman said as we went home. “My name’s Annie. I’m yer new owner. I’m 28 years old, and I play the guit-tar and the trom-bone. I ain’t got no husband, but I do got Peter. You’ll meet him.”

When I got to her house, I saw something wrong immediately. Right there, lying on the floor in front of me, was a… a…

I don’t really know what it was, but it had big, scary, yellow eyes, and it was black and white with white whiskers.

“Rrribbiiiit!” I croak when I’m nervous.

I expected it to pounce on me, but instead, it just said, “Whazzzup, brother? Heard you were comin’. The name’s Peter. Whazz ur name?”

“Umm, Mr. Toad. H-hi, P-peter. Yeah. Hi.”  

You’ve probably realized that I’m scared of a lot of things, but this really gave me the heebie-jeebies. Would Peter be my best friend? My worst enemy? Again, I did not want to find out…

Yesterday when I woke up, Peter was staring down at me. “Hey, pal!! Wanna play?”

“Um, okay.”

“Sweet! Whatcha wanna do?”

“Uh, dunno. What do cats do?”

“We play the trombone!” He ran to the other side of the room and got a big yellow thing from its stand. He blew on one end, and a noise came out of the other end. The noise was bad at first, but then, Peter played a song on it.

“Cool, man!”

“I know, right?”

“Hey, can you help me with something?”

“Anything for you, brah.”                     

Gretchen

Toad is running through the woods. He has a big black and white thing running next to him. I am sitting on my windowsill, watching. Toad leaps onto the windowsill, so does the big black thing. I jump back. Toad leaps onto me. I scream in fright! I fly into my cage, but Toad is hanging onto my tail. He’s stuck in my cage with me. He sticks out his long tongue into my face, and my eyes widen as it hits me between the eyes. I let out a long, high wail, like “Ahh!”

I woke up and realized it was just a dream, but I had a hunch that it might be real.

I had to warn Alexander! I flew out of the cage and into the living room. I saw Alexander sitting on his chair, crying.

“Alexander, Alexander! Mr. Toad’s coming back with the giant black and white thing!”

Alexander kept crying. “Yes, I know you’re hungry, Gretchen,” he said. “You have plenty of birdseed.”

“No, I’m not hungry! Mr. Toad’s gonna try to come back to get back at me!”

“Gretchen, go away…” Alexander moaned.

Why is he so upset? He doesn’t play with me anymore, he just sits on his chair and cries.

“Why did Mr. Toad leave me? Everything was perfect until he left.”

Wait, he misses the toad? Naw. I went back to my cage to have a quick rest.

Mr. Toad

“This is the house where Owner lives.”

There had to be a way to get back at Gretchen. And what better way to do it than with a cat on my side. But how?

“We gonna have to jump in there,” said Peter. We had a plan. We’d run across Fifth Avenue and jump through the window.

We ran across the intersection, jumping across cars. Full disclosure, I was terrified. At a red light, a navy blue car stopped right in front of Owner’s bedroom window. Now was the time! I hopped on it and then hopped up to the window.

I just missed the window! The light turned yellow. A few seconds and I drove away on the car!

“Peter!” I yelled, “Help me get up there!”

“Here, climb on my back,” said Peter. I jumped on Peter’s back, and he hooked his claws on the brick wall just as the light turned green, and he started climbing up the wall.  I looked down. We were two stories above Fifth Avenue. If I fell, I would fall into thick traffic.

Peter grabbed the window sill of Owner’s window and pulled himself up. I hopped through the open window and into Gretchen’s cage.  Gretchen was asleep but when she heard me hop in, she let out a loud, long wail, like “Ahh!!!”

“Squawk! My dream came true! Squawk!” Gretchen flew out, leaving the door of her cage open. I hopped out behind her and hopped into the living room, with Peter behind me.  

“Owner! Hello, it’s me. Mr Toad! Hello?” I was surprised to find Owner sitting in his chair, sobbing. “Owner? What’s wrong?”

Owner turned around in his chair.  “M-m-Mr. Toad? I-is that you?”

“Yes! Yes! It’s me!” I wailed, “Why won’t you notice me?”

“Mr. Toad, you came back! I thought you hated me.”

“Squawk! It’s my fault! Squawk!” said a bird-like voice from the bedroom.

“What do you mean, Gretchen?” said Owner.

“Squawk! I pushed Toad out of the window! Squawk! I’m so sorry.”

“Gretchen? You would never do that…” said Owner.

“It’s true, he never wanted to leave you. Squawk.”

Owner scooped me into his hands and hugged me. He said with a tremble in his voice, “Never leave me again.”

“You’re forgiven, Gretchen,” I whispered from Owner’s arms.

THE END

Under the Skin

       

Part 1

“Jake! Wake up! You have to go to school today,” my mom called from the kitchen.

“I don’t want to go to school. No one is going to want to be friends with me. I’m going to be a social outcast,” I moaned, still in bed.

My mom came into my room and opened up the window shades. I moaned and covered my eyes.

“Close the windows.”

“Honey, I told you that’s not going to happen. I’m absolutely positive that you’re going to make good friends. You are going to be completely okay.”

“Mom, I told you to knock before you come in.”

“Okay. I will be downstairs when you are done getting set.”

I took a quick shower and walked to the closet where I took out my burgundy uniform that had a touch of navy blue on it.

Uh-oh, I need to comb my hair, I thought. My hair was long and spiky at the top with gold color in it, like always. I started to think that the one thing I was happy about, which was that I would not be made fun of for being fat, because I was tall and skinny.

I went downstairs to eat the breakfast that my mom had prepared for me. I took my oatmeal and sat on my orange La-Z-Boy couch in the living room.

“Eww, this oatmeal tastes so bad,” I called to my mom.

“Jake, if you go to school looking that depressed, you’re going to start to look like something that you’re not,” my mom called from the kitchen in a voice so annoying that I couldn’t stop myself from saying what I did.

“Mrs. Fiona, or should I say Miss Fiona, can you please stop nagging? You’re going to drive me crazy. This probably why Chris is not here anymore,” I said in the most official voice that I could muster. Chris is my dad who died in a mysterious accident.

“If you mention that name again, you’ll wish that you could not talk at all.” Mom was absolutely pissed at me.

“Okay. Okay, just don’t hit me.” I was scared because when I had called her that before, she didn’t yell at me like she’s doing now. I knew that I should not have mentioned Dad’s name. She was super emotional when someone said his name in disrespect.

“Well Mom, I’m off to school,” I called, slinging my backpack over my shoulder and leaving in a rush before she could drag me back into the kitchen to scold me.

***

Woah, this school is massive, and it’s pretty cool-looking too.

I looked up at a castle-looking building. It had two humongous gates with a brilliant red carpet leading to them. It had two towers that looked like places where people sat to defend the the castle. There was an archway of trees lining the red carpet.

I was told that the school was named Excalibur. That was a pretty weird name. There were also pretty weird characters here. The students were bringing unusual looking animals in through the school gates. All of the students were wearing black robes with white stars on them. One of the male students had a animal that looked like a griffin. Others were bringing in animals like owls, parrots, and more animals that should not be there.

That’s when I saw it. A monster that seemed to be made out of a gas surrounding the other students. I saw it quickly change its direction to face towards me. When I saw it notice me, I started to run, knowing that if that horrifying beast were to catch up to me, I would most likely die. I thought that I was running so fast that I mostly looked like a maniac.

When I got inside the school, I was desperately gasping for my breath. What was that thing? It looked like a demon!

That’s was when I first stepped into the Underworld, but I didn’t know it at the time.

I looked around me and saw another monster around the people in the school. I said in a loud voice, “You guys need to get out of here. There are demon-looking monsters everywhere.”

For a moment, people started to evacuate. Though, when they saw nothing outside, they started to come back. It seemed like only I could see the monster.  

Everyone was annoyed that I wasted their time. They started to push me, yell at me, and punch me. I ran to the library to get away and hide while it calmed down outside.

What’s going on with this school? I said to myself. Now, I have to deal with both making so-called ‘friends’ and trying not to die while doing it!!!

As I walked to take a seat in the library, I saw a book in the library called The Demons Of The Real World. The book was pretty dusty, unlike the other ones in the library. It was a book made out of leather that was fading away.

Huh. Well, it seems like it will be interesting enough, I thought.

In the real world, there many unworldly creatures that could not be seen with the regular human eye. The only ones who can see them are the descendents of the original phoenix family. The monsters feed on the souls of mortals. They normally flock to places with groups of humans. The only time that a mortal can see them is when they’re on their deathbed, or when the person who sees them is a noble warrior of the race. These people are the chosen ones, who can slay them. If you see someone with a pentacle on the back of their hand, they are an ally.  

The rest of the book was completely unreadable. It was like someone did not want the reader to know more. Maybe I would be able to read the rest of the pages over time.

I hid the book in my uniform, so I could take it to read it more. I tried to show the book to some of the other students, but they all thought that I was a crazy man. They all said that there was nothing in my hand.

Shatter!

All the lights went out. That was when I saw it again it, but this time it was not after me. It was one by one eating the unsuspecting students. All of a sudden, I felt my body lift up and go out the window…

“AH! Let me go, Let me go,” I said. I was absolutely terrified at that moment.

“Ha, I knew that we didn’t need this little brat. After all, they have me,” said the person who was taking me away.

“Also, I didn’t know that the prince of our family could scream like such a girl,” he said in a deeper voice than before.

End of Part 1

Days on Pages

      

“Ow!” Owen’s father screeched. He had just banged his head on the ceiling.

Owen was cleaning out the attic with his father when he found a dusty, old box with books in it, which matched the rest of the attic: dusty, creepy, and cobwebby.

“What’s this, Dad?” Owen shouted with satisfaction from across the attic. In his hand, he held hundreds of books with his ancestors’ names, initials, and photos from the present. Some were black and white photos of people, young and old, who looked like him and his father, only they were wearing things that people don’t wear anymore, like top hats!

Owen’s dad walked over from what was, in Owen’s opinion, the “creepy” side of the attic to have a peek. “What’s wha — … Wooo!!!”

CRASH!

“Ow! I found your skateboard!” Owen’s father told him, looking really dizzy. “Now, what do you need?” Owen’s father wobbled over carefully. “Oh, that. Those are all the books that your ancestors wrote.”

Owen looked at the books again, then thought to himself, My ancestors wrote these? How was I unaware of this?

Puzzled, he asked his dad, “So, you’re not the only author in the family?!”

“Oh no, I’m just one of them,” his father replied.

If I hadn’t felt bad enough that I couldn’t write as well as my father, now I’d be the only one in my whole family who couldn’t write a book! Owen thought to himself.

***

So that’s when it all started. It had been a few months since that day, and Owen still hadn’t done any better, if not, he’d done worse. Ever since then, he feared failing his family because he couldn’t write a story like them.

This morning, Owen was eating breakfast when he decided to ask his mom for a good idea for a story.

“Hello, Owen! Did you have a good night’s sleep?” Owen’s mom asked.

“Yeah, it was fine,” Owen groaned.

“I had the best dream last night where I had all the food in the world and — what do you want for breakfast today? Do you want cereal, or some waffles? Oh, I know, how about pancakes? Here, let me start cooking … ”

Owen’s mom rambled on and on about food, until Owen finally asked her, “Do you have any good ideas for a book, Mom?”

“How about a cookbook?!” Owen’s mom immediately replied.

Owen immediately regretted his decision because his mom loved food and cooking so much — heck, she was even flipping 12 pancakes for the family as she spoke! On that note, Owen stood up, grabbed his skateboard, ran for the door, picked up his backpack, and skated off to school, leaving his mom behind with all the food.

“What about your pancakes with extra butter and whipped cream with a cherry on top and a side of waffles with a side of bacon, eggs, and toast with a side of — oh, never mind.”

***

“Today in writing class, we are are going to learn about how to make realistic fiction stories,” Owen’s teacher told the class as she wrote on the chalkboard. “If you don’t have any ideas, then, a good thing to do is to write down everything you’ve done that day, like a journal!”

And there it was! Exactly what Owen had needed, some actually good advice.

A journal, of course! Owen thought to himself.

***

When school was out, Owen couldn’t wait to write in a journal. He ran home and got all the money he had from his piggy bank, ran to Staplers, bought an orange journal with a squiggly line pattern for $7.86, and then ran back home and started to write.

Today, I went to school and learned to write in the journal and I– Owen recited.

Owen suddenly had no idea why he had been so excited. Now that he was doing it, he felt a flash of complete boredom in his mind.

Owen kept on recording stuff over the next few months (boring or not) such as brushing teeth, getting in bed, pulling up the covers, putting his head on the pillow, and writing in this dumb journal.

As weeks passed, things were rough and boring: Dad got tons of fan mail (which, to Owen, felt like it was being shoved down his throat that he couldn’t write). Mom kept talking about food, food, food, while Owen wrote in his journal more and more.

Everything was always the same, and nothing was ever different. That was it.

Until one day, when Owen finally had an idea.

***

“Beat’cha!” Owen shouted. He was playing at his friend Lukas’ house.

“This game blows!” He threw his controller past the flatscreen.

“I might return it back to Games Galore!” Lukas shouted, his face turning the color of Owen’s red shirt.

“You’re the one who bought it and lost the mega power up,” Owen chuckled.

Owen yelled. Lukas’ little brother Benny had just waddled into the living room and ripped out all the pages in Owen’s orange journal.

Riiiiiiiiiiiip!

“Oh God! No, no, nooo!!!” Owen shouted over the pages.

Benny froze and ran away.

Owen tried to put the pages back together, but they wouldn’t go back, and to add to that, he couldn’t find the right order they were supposed to be in.

Suddenly, he looked at all the pages laid out in front of him and thought, This could be my story, the story about trying to find the right story to write!

“Of course!” he yelled. He ran back to his house and got to work.

Owen’s book was about a ten-year-old boy named Nick, who, like Owen, searched for the right story and finally found it!

***

Now, 30 years later, Owen is the most famous author in his family, and he has twins. His story was a hit, a blockbuster book!

“Daddy,” Owen’s son and daughter asked him one day, “do you have any good ideas for a story?”

Owen smiled.

The Big Cat Adventure

One day Justice and her best friend Kimberly were working on their science project about cats, because they loved cats. The only thing that they wanted in the world was a cat.

They were almost done with their project when all of a sudden, a trash can tipped over and fell on Kimberly’s head. Justice stood up to see if anybody was in the classroom, but she did not see anybody. So, they rushed to the bathroom to get all the stuff off of her. The teacher came in the bathroom and told them that they could go home.

As they were walking down the street, they saw the same man that they saw every day in the candy store talking to the merchant. But as they were crossing the street, they saw the same man in neater clothes. They also heard people saying that he was the richest man in the city. Kimberly and Justice were so confused.

They opened  the door to Kimberly’s house and went to her room to get ready for their sleepover. After they ate dinner, they worked on their project. There was good news and bad news. The good news was that they completed their project, and the bad news was everybody in the city was sick with a stomach virus.  But, Kimberly and Justice were not sick.

Kimberly and Justice went for a walk. They noticed that the cat adoption center was closing down. They went inside to see what was going on. They asked the storekeeper why he was closing down. The man said that he was sick and all of the cats were gone.

For two minutes they were staring at eachother. They asked why the cats left. The storekeeper said they did not leave. They were stolen by the most wanted person in the world. His name was The Black Dove.

For a moment it was silent. The storekeeper also said that everywhere The Black Dove went, he would put a curse on the city with his magic wand. Justice told Kimberly that they had to go and find The Black Dove. At first, Kimberly said it would be too dangerous, but after a few minutes, she changed her mind. They went to their houses, packed everything they needed, and went off to find The Black Dove.

As they were walking,  they found out that they were in a swamp. Kimberly said, “OMG, it smells like a  mix of rancid mayo, pickles, and a local dumpster, rotting in a hot garbage bag in July.”

Justice actually liked the smell of the swamp. A few minutes later, they were in the in the deepest part of the swamp. Halfway out of the swamp, there was a note on a strange rock that looked like a plate of cheese. The note said, “BEWARE OF TRAPS PLEASE.”

This could not be true. They took the note with them anyway. As they were crossing a very old, long log, the two girls got caught in a net. It must have been one of the traps to stop them from finding The Black Dove. They looked in their bags to see if they could find anything to get them out of the net.

“This is all your fault, Justice!” said Kimberly.

“My fault? What did I do?” asked Justice.

“If you did not want to come here and get your stupid cats, we would not be stuck here,” Kimberly said.

“STUPID? I thought you loved cats,” said Justice.

They were fighting for fifteen minutes. After they were done fighting, they continued looking for things to get them out of the net. Kimberly decided to turn back and go home but Justice chose to keep on going.

Before they could leave, they had to get out of the net. They found a rope in their bag. They cut the rope in half, cut the top of the net, and wrapped the rope around a tree. They used the other half to slide down the rope.

So, Kimberly went back home and Justice went to find the lost kittens. Justice was really scared and felt bad that she had no one to encourage her. She started to get so scared that she almost thought of turning back. But she had to save those kittens. As she was walking, she found herself in another city. And there she saw the same man in the candy store talking to the merchant. She went inside to get a closer look at him. She noticed that it was The Black Dove, because she remembered that the man in the cat store said that he pretends to be someone he is not. So, she thought that he was pretending to be poor, so he could fool the merchant and steal things.

Justice said to herself that she should just follow him, and maybe it would lead her to the kittens. She followed The Black Dove and he lead her to his hideout. While The Black Dove  was sleeping, she found the cats and took them back home.

Everybody was well,  and it was all because of Justice. She called Kimberly and said that she was sorry. And they became best friends again.

But, all of a sudden, The Black Dove came for the kittens. Kimberly went up to him. She looked at him. She was the first one ever to scare away The Black Dove. He had a black outfit. His face was half white and half black. And he had a curly mustache. Just by looking at him, The Black Dove got scared and ran to his hideout. Justice felt really upset that she did not scare The Black Dove, but she felt happy for her best friend because she helped the city.

Everybody was safe, and Justice and her best friend Kimberly finally got their cats that they wanted. And they lived a happy life.

THE END

The One-Dollar Bill

        

Chapter 1

Hi This is Me

Hi. I’m a dollar bill. I’m here to tell you the story of how many homes I travel to. I travel to at least one hundred homes every week! This is the cycle: I go from the MINT, to the floor, to someone’s pocket, to someone’s house, to the store, to someone’s house, to the floor again, and so on. No one could ever find a way to keep me. That’s when I visited a bank. Oh, somebody finally found a way to keep me, and I couldn’t get out! I heard that person’s mom call her Imali. When Imali put me in the bank, I was so happy I finally didn’t have to get thrown around everywhere! I kept on getting folded so I could fit in someone’s pocket. I feel loose now. When I got folded for the first time, I cried. I was so scared that I was gonna die and I was gonna leave my mom, the ten-dollar bill and leave my dad, the twenty-dollar bill, and my brother, the five-dollar bill. Besides, I was the youngest. The one-dollar bill. It’s the one that gets used the most. It’s the one that gets lost in five seconds. It’s the one that no one cares about — except Imali.

Chapter 2

Wow!

Imali is the one that loves one dollar bills. I have a lot of friends now. I’m with them right now. Their names are Washington, Sasha, and Buck. They are also one dollar bills. We usually play robot with the buttons inside the bank. But we still get moved from time to time because some of those buttons that we push aren’t good. I love the bank, and Imali comes to visit us every month to put more one dollar bills in the bank. She has over 250 dollars in one-dollar bills. Not all of them are nice, but I still play with Washington, Sasha, and Buck.

Sasha is my best friend, but Washington and Buck play with us too. When we play robot Buck’s usually the robot, and we push him against the wall playfully. Buck is always the first one to volunteer to be the robot. Washington is more of a learning type, so whenever he plays robots it’s usually just to see what the buttons do, but at least he’s playing. Whenever Imali comes she doesn’t know that we’re alive, she just thinks we’re little pieces of paper that pay for stuff, but we know the truth. Imali still treats us like we’re alive. We can tell she thinks we’re not alive. From the books we’ve heard her read, we’re aliens to her. I’ve heard that aliens are green, and we’re all green. I heard aliens were from space though, we’re from the MINT.

Chapter 3

Not Fair

For Washington, he didn’t get thrown around, he didn’t do the money cycle. He just got put straight into Imali’s hands. He tells us stories all about it. Once he said that he was given to Imali. None of us believed him though, and he always tells us that the guy that gave him to Imali was named Benjamin, and I told him that Benjamin was Imali’s dad’s name. Right then and there I had a plan. I was going to write a letter to Imali to ask her if her dad worked at the MINT. Then Sasha told me there was no way to get paper or pen.

Then Buck said, “We’re money. We’re paper.”

Then Sasha said, “But, smarty pants, we don’t have a pen.”

Buck said, “Right, we don’t have a pen! How are we gonna get a pen?”

I said, “I have a plan. When Imali comes next month she’ll probably have a pen. All banks have a pen. Then when she puts some more money in I’ll reach into her shirt pocket and take out a pen. Is there any possibility of anything bad happening?”

Washington said, “Let me calculate that.”

Washington thought for five minutes.

Then he said, “Yes. I’ve thought of at least ten things that can happen badly.”

Sasha said, “Okay, then tell me.”

Washington said, “So one, Imali might not have a pocket on her shirt. Two, even if she does have a pocket on her shirt she might not have a pen on her shirt. Three, if she does have a pocket on her shirt still she might not have a pen there, she might have a pen on her jeans pocket. Four, she might not be wearing jeans, she might be wearing shorts. Five, her mom might put the money in the bank.”

Then Sasha said, “Stop. Her mom definitely has a pen in her purse.”

Washington said, “You just interrupted me. Six, her mom might not be wearing a purse. Seven, you don’t know for sure that her mom’s gonna have a pen in her purse. Eight, even if her mom does have a pen in her purse, how are we going to get in her purse? Nine, even if we can get in her purse we don’t know where she would keep a pen. Ten, we don’t know how long it’s gonna take for either to get the money. They might get up too fast, and we might get stuck with them!”

Chapter 4

Why are you so Negative?

I said, “Why are you so negative? All of those have a chance of happening, but that’s because you always say stuff that’s just too worrying.”

“I’m just trying to be safe. You asked if anything wrong could happen, and I told you. Now if you want to do this plan we need to sleep. We’ve stayed up for months.” Washington moaned.

I said, “Okay. Let’s go to sleep. See you next month.”

They slept for months and months even though they meant to sleep for one month they slept for five!

When I woke up I saw Imali and she looked way older than she had before. Her mom was singing happy birthday. And after she finished singing that she said she was 11 years old. The last time I saw her she was only 10 and 7 months. And now she’s 11?!

“We must have been sleeping for more than a month,” I told Washington and Sasha.

Sasha said, “Is Buck still sleeping? He’s usually the first one up to play robot. He must have stayed up for years!”

Then Sasha woke up Buck. She said, “How old are you Buck?”

He said, “The same age as Imali. Ten.”

Washington said, “Actually Imali is eleven.”

“What?!” Buck exclaimed.

Then Sasha said, “Today is Imali’s birthday, and we’ve been sleeping for five months.”

Buck said, “Wait, so Imali is older than me?”

Then I said, “Yeah.”

Washington said, “What’s the longest you’ve stayed up for?”

And Buck said, “Why do you need to know?”

“Because you’re usually the first one up, and you were the last one up,” Sasha said.

Buck said, “Okay. The longest I’ve stayed up was seven years.”

Then Washington said, “Seven years? The longest we’ve stayed up was one year! What have you been doing for seven years at night?”

Buck said, “Playing robot.”

“For seven years straight? That’s crazy!” I said.

“She’s right,” Washington said.

Buck said, “Whatever. We need to take the pen and make the note before Imali and her mom leave!”
“Wait that’s not Imali’s mom! That’s her dad.”

Washington said, “And that’s Benjamin!”

Sasha said, “Yay that’s good! Now we don’t have to struggle to make a letter. We know that Benjamin is Imali’s dad and works at the MINT. And we also know that that’s how you didn’t do the money cycle. If you didn’t go through the money cycle how come we all did?”

Washington said, “Because I was the first piece of money Benjamin touched at the MINT, and he knew that Imali loved one dollar bills, so he gave me to her.”

Sasha said, “If you knew that then how come you didn’t tell us the entire time?”

“Cause you never asked,” Washington replied.

“So exact,” Sasha said.

“Do you think that’s why you’re so smart?” I asked.

“Yeah! Because my brain didn’t have to go through the money cycle it’s fresh.”

Chapter 5

Imali’s Dad

Sasha said, “I’ve been watching Imali and her dad, and they haven’t left yet.”

I said, “I’m the best at hearing humans, let me hear what they’re saying.”

I listened and I hear Benjamin saying, “I need to take the money. My daughter wants a Fisher Price small car.”

The bank manager said, “Oh! One of those cars that kids can drive themselves?”

Imali said, “Yeah except I want one for big kids.”

“Yeah,” Benjamin said. “She wants a convertible. All the kids in her school want them, and now she has a chance to get one. She thinks it’ll bring her lots of playdates.”

The bank manager said, “Yeah it sure will. My daughter wants one of those too.”

“She has $300 in there,” Benjamin said.

The bank manager said, “That sure is a lot of money for a ten year old. Alright I’ll give you the money.”

Imali said, “Yes! I finally get a car!” And she did her victory dance.

Benjamin said, “Hold on, you didn’t get it yet. We’ll go to the store right after this.”

Then I saw the bank manager walk toward us. I told Washington, Buck, and Sasha to hide behind the buttons, and I jumped to the bottom of the pile of money. I saw the bank manager pick up all the bullies and I felt so relieved. I saw him reach for the last bit of money, and I was getting scared.

Chapter 6

The Attack

I jumped out of his reach to where Buck, Washington, and Sasha were. I saw them folding themselves as small as they could and squeezing themselves into the buttons. I was the one that got folded the most and I fit the smallest. The bank manager looked towards the buttons, but he didn’t see us. He just pushed one. That was the one that Buck was in. Buck zoomed back with the button.

Washington asked, “Why is Buck zooming back? And why is the button zooming back with him?”

Then Sasha said, “Finally, something I know and you don’t! Because the bank manager pressed the buttons too hard.”

Then Washington said, “Hey, just because I’m smart and fresh from the mint doesn’t mean I know everything.”

“I know,” Sasha said.

They heard Buck screaming for help. They heard him saying he was in a different bank account with one-hundred-dollar bills. And they were all mean.

He heard them saying, “Why’s a one-dollar bill in here? You don’t belong in here, we’re one-hundred-dollar bills? You’re a one-dollar bill! My owner doesn’t want one-dollar bills! He only wants one-hundred bills! And if he sees a one-dollar bill in here, he’ll be mad!”

Buck said, “Well, I didn’t wanna be in here! The bank manager just put me in here.”

A hundred-dollar bill said, “You don’t even know the bank manager’s name? How about this. I’ll give you a hint. It sounds like Larry. Except with an H. And it ends with an I.”

“So, is it L-A-H-R-I?

The hundred-dollar bill said, “Yes.”

Another hundred-dollar bill asked, “Why did you give him such an easy hint? You practically told him how to spell it!”

Buck said, “Whatever. I don’t care. I just want to get back to my friends, Sasha, Washington, and Sika.”

Then, a one-hundred-dollar bill said, “What kind of name is Sika?”

Buck said, “It’s an African language, Akan.”

A hundred-dollar bill said, “How long have you known this girl Sika?”

“Since I went to the bank for the first time. And that was nine years ago. Since she was two. I’m ten, Sika’s twelve, Washington’s thirteen and Sasha is eleven. And our owner’s name is Imani.”

The hundred-dollar bill said, “Why are so many of you named money?”

“What do you mean?” Buck said.

The hundred-dollar bill replied, “Well, you’re named Buck. Buck is one dollar. Washington is on the one-dollar bill. Imani means money in a European language, and I know her dad, and her dad’s name is Benjamin, and Benjamin means a hundred dollars. And the bank manager’s name is Lahri, and that means money in an African language. And Sika means money in Akan language, like you just told me.”

Buck was stumped. He wanted to know too. So he just said, “My friend Washington would know, he’s the smartest dollar ever.”

The hundred-dollar bill gave him a stern look.

Buck said, “But you’re very smart too. You knew that all of those names meant money.”

The hundred-dollar bill was actually liking this guy and wasn’t being mean anymore. Washington, Sika and Sasha didn’t hear him screaming anymore, but they were still thinking of a plan to get Buck out of the other bank account.

Chapter 7

The Plan

“I’ve got a plan,” I said after a long four hours of  thinking. “One of us can get a rope and one of us can hold the rope while one us gets Buck and then when one of us gets Buck one of us can pull them back.”

“That sounds like a plan,” Sasha said.

“Yeah,” Washington repeated.

“So who wants to get Buck?” I asked.

Sasha screamed “Me!”

“Okay. I guess that means I’ll hold the rope,” I said.

“Where are we gonna get a rope from?” Washington asked. He paused and said, “Ohh yeah! We can get a rope from the back of the bank account. Lahri always keeps a rope in there in case of a robber.”

Before you could say “Let’s go,” Sasha had the rope and was running down the place that Buck went down.

When she got to Buck she yelled “Pull!” and I pulled them back.

Chapter 8

It’s So Scary   

“Yay! They’re back. We missed you so much,” Washington said.

“We’re so so happy you’re back!” I said.

“I’m so happy I’m back too because those hundred-dollar bills are kind of mean.”

Sasha me tooed him. None of us noticed the bank manager talking to angry Benjamin.

Benjamin was saying, “My daughter wants that car and she is going to get it, because it’s her birthday. I still need four more dollars.”

Lahri said “Sir, I tried to get all of the money.” Benjamin gave Lahri a look. “But I’ll check again, sir.”

Lahri saw the last four dollars and he didn’t wait a second to get them. The four friends were getting picked up and and they were scared. Two big hands twice the size of them were squeezing them so hard they could throw up. Lahri hands the dollar bills to Benjamin and Imali screams of joy.

She says, “I’m gonna get a ca-ar! I’m gonna get a ca-ar!” Then, they leave the bank and go to the car shop. While they’re going to the car shop, Sika was saying all the reasons why she wanted to stay at the bank. “Reason one: I want to stay at the bank because I’ll be safe from doing the money cycle. Reason two: because I like playing robot. Reason three: Because I won’t ever be able to see my friends again after we’re in the cash register. Reason four: I won’t be able to ask Buck how old he is. Reason five: Sasha won’t be able to say ‘Smarty Pants’ to Buck.”

Then, Washington said, “Why do you have to be so negative? We don’t know that we’re never going to see each other again.”

Then, Sasha said, “How about we do something to keep our minds off of being spent? How about we play robot in the wallet with credit cards?”

And then Buck said, “I want to be the robot!”

We all said simultaneously, “We know!”

Then Buck said, “I was just making sure.”

When we got there, we knew that we were only getting spent for Imali’s birthday, and we were happy for her. She chose a blue convertible and one of her friends was at the shop, too. Her friend asked her for a ride home and that was it. We were going to go through the money cycle again. We were going to get folded again too, but hopefully someone puts us in a bank again, and hopefully that’s a kid, because kids are the best money owners. They’re the most fun.

The End

A TV Detective

There once was a detective who lived in multiple places, but today he was living in a castle. It was called Hogwarts. He was going to be filmed and questioned about what he did for a living, so he had to be ready. He had a list of questions that they were going to ask. The most exciting part was that if they liked it, they would put it on TV.

When they came, they interviewed him, and he loved it so much that he wanted to be on TV for a living. They thought it was so good that they offered him to be on TV. He made up his mind and went to get a job on the Real Detective Show.

Then, he did his show, but one day, a bunch of clowns invaded as a part of the show. How on Earth was he going to figure out how to solve the mystery? He went to complain that it wasn’t a mystery.

Then, it hit him. It was his job to figure out who the clowns were. He did fingerprints and everything, and finally, he had five suspects. It occurred to him that there were five clowns.

He had cracked the code. That meant more viewers, and more viewers meant more money. He was so excited and screamed so hard, people thought he was crazy.

 

Going

             

Going up, going down, always moving up or down,

then you learned sideways, and then you

learned right and left,

Finally, by then, you learned how to walk.

It was awesome to walk!

 

Speaking loud, speaking low,

speaking fast, speaking slow,

speaking all those things all over the place.

speaking fast, speaking slow!

Then, at the end, I learned how to speak,

first, I learned to say hello, then I

learned how to say other people words like the ones throughout the story.

I am now with my book writing and making new words

I can now teach you how to write!

 

Writing hard, writing light

writing fast, writing slow,

writing hard, writing light

writing words in the book!

Now I learned how to write.

first, I learned how to write the alphabet.

then, I learned how to write the words throughout the book.

And then got the same book that I started to speak with and

I wrote new words!!!

 

My City

             

You rode the F train to work

You walked the streets

Of the city that never sleeps

 

You took a taxi to school

You watched the street light

As trucks zoomed,

Giving off the most sickening

Exhaust fumes

 

But this is your life

No matter what it is

You deal with it all

Every day is a pop quiz

 

You love it

You need it

You wish it could go

You step on the street

Every day is a Broadway show

And the beggar on the train

You gave him money for a burger

Because he’s your family

Your crazy, rude, nice, astonishing family

 

The train leaves the station

The taxi drives away

The bus is approaching

The beauty, the beauty

You don’t know what to say

 

This is my city,

My little golden gem

I protect it with my heart

My little diadem

 

Ah Ha Moment

Hi, I am Will. I am the first male cheerleader at U.C.L.A.

My life was terrible before I decided to be a cheerleader. I got shaken down for lunch money every day. I wanted to be a doctor. I was torn. I liked being a cheerleader, but there were no professional male cheerleaders in the NFL.

Now that the Rams had just moved to L.A. the owner, Stan Kroenke, offered me a spot on the 2017 Rams cheerleading squad.

I was overjoyed. I raced home to tell my mom about the offer. My mom was not happy; she was the one who paid my U.C.L.A. bill because she is a doctor, and she wants me to be a doctor too. My mom said that I better decide to go to medical school.

At midnight, there was an emergency, and my mom was called to the hospital A.S.A.P. My mom made me go because she said it would be a good learning experience. We rushed to the Red Cross Hospital emergency room going 25 miles per hour above the speed limit. It did not matter because nobody was on the roads at this time of night, but still, this was one of the rare times that I was glad that my mom had chosen to be a doctor, not a professional race car driver.

When we got to the hospital, my mom ran into the emergency room, and I pulled out my phone. But the battery was dead, and I needed a charger, so I decided to ask my mom where a charger was. I knocked on the door, and she did not answer, so I walked into the room and saw my mom performing heart surgery!

I screamed, and that was when I decided to be a cheerleader, no matter how hard my mom tried to change my mind.

 

Summer

    

Scorching weather.

I glance at the blue summer sky with cotton candy clouds.

It’s time for a hot day down at the beach.

It’s time for a night in paradise.

It’s time for a pitcher of freshly brewed iced tea.

It’s time for a quick day in the pool.

It’s time for a season of fresh fruits and vegetables.

It’s time for the birds to twitter and the dragonflies to dance.

It’s time for those burgers sizzling on the grill.

It’s time for delicious, cold ice cream.

It’s time for a day in the sun.

It’s time for the fluttering butterflies in your yard.

It’s time for the true colors of sunshine.

It’s time for watermelon.

It’s time for water parks with water slides.

It’s time for the wasps.

It’s time for warmth.

It’s time for some volleyball.

It’s time for a good vacation spot.

It’s time to travel.

It’s time to have fun on trampolines!

It’s time to play tennis.

It’s time to wear tank tops.

It’s time for tan skin, as brown as maple syrup.

It’s time for tall grass.

It’s time for campfires.

It’s time for fun.

It’s time for a sip of summer.

 

Football Players

 

Eli Manning                                                          

He’s horrible at running

He can’t throw a pass

His team is bad all around

 

Ryan Tannehill

He can’t throw a spiral

He’s got a slow pace

He’s got no team around him

 

Russell  Wilson

He is great at getting out of pressure

He makes tricky plays

He can keep possession well

 

Cam Newton

Cam Newton’s a bad player

He’s not consistent

All he’s got is his dabbing

 

Derek Carr

He cannot keep possession
He gets sacked a lot

He plays bad with a good team

 

Ryan Fitzpatrick

His passes have awesome aim

He throws great spirals

He can run the ball quickly

 

The Dead Chicken

   

The chicken lies like a blob alone on the ground

The other chickens don’t bother it because it’s dead

Its legs are pale, no blood runs through them

Crab apples lay on the ground beside it, some hay too

It looks as though the chicken has been run over

By a car.  It is horrible to look at,

Worse than an earthworm in a tomato

With its whole family

 

Super Powers

Athena was always a good kid. She got straight A’s, and she never got in trouble. But that all changed when she went back to school. On her 12th birthday, the day before school, she wished she could have super speed. All of her brothers and sisters laughed.

“How could you possibly get super powers?” asked her eldest brother, George.

“You never know,” said Athena.

She was right. The very next day, she was so excited for school that she slipped on her bathrobe and started to run uncontrollably fast.

“AHHH!” said Athena. She started to slow herself down.

Once she got back inside, she took a shower. She changed into her favorite outfit, her cozy bunny sweater with a jean skirt. She slipped on her favorite sneakers and grabbed her bag. She stole a donut from her sister, Virginia, and took off. She eagerly waited for the school bus, but when it got there, she became speedy again. Athena raced faster than the wind into the bus. The other kids stared and started to whisper. How could things get any worse? Then, Wendy, her best friend, boarded the bus. She sat down next to Athena, and Athena told her everything.

Wendy and Athena both went to their lockers, and when Athena closed hers, she found Beatrice Loop waiting for her. She was one of the fastest kids in school, and the biggest bully as well. She always smelled like tobacco, and she always spat on people when she got angry. Everyone tried to keep cool when Beatrice was around.

“Hey you, Ant! Want to race after school? Meet me at the field after 7th period,” said Beatrice.

Once Athena got to her math class, she started talking to Wendy. “She wants me to race her after school. What if I lose?”

“Then you know you’ll get a wedgie in front of the entire grade, including the boys,” said Wendy.

Athena thought for a moment. What if she used her superpower? Wendy clearly read her mind. She would always believe her friend, no matter what.

“You should totally use your super power.”

***

Finally, the horrid time had come. Beatrice Loop was waiting for her. Athena winced.

“Get ready to lose, sucker!” scoffed Beatrice. “On your mark… get set… go!”

Athena took off like a bullet. Beatrice tried to catch up, but it was no use. She continued to run until she saw the finish line. All the kids gasped. Athena blushed. Beatrice finally came back, red-faced and angry.

As soon as she got home, Athena was attacked by her little brother, Andy. She strode over to her mom.

“Hey Mom, what if I told you that I have the ability to run super fast?” asked Athena.

“Ha ha ha, you must be joking,” said mother. Athena noticed she was starting to sweat.

“I’ll show you.” Athena began to race across the room.

“Oh sweetheart, go up to your room please,” said mother, kissing the top of her head.  She raced to her room. But she heard something from downstairs. She couldn’t help but take a peek from her room. Athena gasped. She saw two things. Her mother smoking, which she had never seen, and calling somebody. She tried to listen, but her mom was too quiet.

The next day, Athena told Wendy the terrible news.

“What? But your mother seems so… so… nice,” said Wendy. They walked to gym class together.

“Today, class, we will be working on running,” Coach Pattie said. About 75 percent of the class groaned. “Hey, listen up! I will have two contestants. You, Charlie, get up here!” Athena knew Charlie was the fastest boy in school. “And you, Athena, see if you can beat Mister Charlie here.”

Athena strode up to him rather confidently. She saw all of Charlie’s friends, like Mario and Felix and Luigi, cheering him on. Then, as if it were a One D concert, all the girls started screaming.

“On your mark… get set… go!”

Just like before, she took off like a bullet, running around the gym two times like Coach Pattie asked.

Coach Pattie hung her mouth open. “WOW. I have never seen someone so fast!”

All the girls and even some of the boys started questioning Athena about how she got so fast. She finally managed to get home with some help from Wendy.

As soon as she got home, her mother asked her to pack her bags. Athena was rather confused. “But why?”

“I’ll tell you on the way there.”

After some time in the car, Athena became restless. “MOM! I need you to tell me where we are going,” she said.

“Here,” said her mom. It was an alleyway in the city.

“Seriously, you’re taking me into a –” Athena was cut off as she was dragged into the wall. “Where are we?”

“We are at the Academy for Special Kids or A.S.K.”

Athena looked around. She saw high-tech gadgets everywhere. Then, a tall man dressed in a fine, white lab coat came toward her.

“Why hello there, young lady! You must be Athena,” said the man. “I am Dr. Bob.”

“Please don’t make this worse,” mumbled Athena.

“I’ll show you where all the other kids are waiting.”

Athena gulped. She was rather nervous. When she stepped inside, Athena saw other kids just like her. She smiled as she sat next to a girl who appeared to have purple hair. Athena was rather surprised.

“Hey, I’m Ivy,” said the purple-haired girl.

Then, Dr. Bob started to speak. “Hello, children! Today, we are going to test your skills and see if you are eligible to become a superhero! Up first, we will have Athena!”

Athena stepped up to the judges. She nervously looked at them and started to run. Faster and faster Athena went, ’til everything was a blur. She finally slowed down a few minutes later.

“Oh my! She will definitely do,” said one judge. Athena she sat back down. As she watched all of the contestants, she went to join Ivy.

“Man, you were sick! You were like a blur.”

“I was?” Athena blushed.

“Yeah, mate. You were pretty much the fastest one here.”

For about a year, Athena learned how to control her super speed. She made many friends, including Ivy. She sometimes missed her old life with Wendy and imagined what she would be doing at that very moment. But Ivy tried to cheer her up, and that usually did the trick. During the summer, Dr. Bob told her that it was time for her to go. She said goodbye to Ivy and promised to text her every day.

***

“Yes!” Athena exclaimed on her first day of school. She felt like today would be better than her last first day of school. Hopefully, Beatrice wouldn’t pick a fight with her. She couldn’t wait to see Wendy. As she waited for the bus, everyone smiled at her. Then, Athena saw Wendy. As if it were in slow motion, she ran to Wendy as fast as she could.

“Oh Wendy, I missed you so much!”

“Me too. Me too.”

They held each other in a tight embrace. They hadn’t seen each other in a year, and were so excited. Then, they were off to school!

Beatrice was nowhere to be seen. Apparently, Athena had already frightened her a year ago, when she beat her in that race after school. Athena was glad. But Athena couldn’t help but be annoyed by the millions and millions of questions her classmates asked. It seemed like Athena was more popular than last year. But when somebody needed help, she was always there. Athena became Super Speedy Girl! Sometimes, things could get pretty out of control.

But on a particular day, a Wednesday in fact, Athena was on her way to art class when Beatrice once again came up to her. This time, she smelled like fresh mint. Perhaps she had stolen a mint from somebody because she smelled pretty bad when she smelled like tobacco.

Is it just me, or did Beatrice get a little taller while I was gone? wondered Athena.

“Well, well, well. If it isn’t Little Miss Show-Off and the cowgirl,” said Beatrice. She had a huge smirk on her face and was towering over her by the second. “Ready to be beaten up?” She was cracking her knuckles.

Oh boy, thought Athena. “Well, if you’d excuse me, I should be on my way,” she said rather boldly.

“You know what? You’re a little baby. You always cry, and you always get what you want. Well –”

Athena started to get angry. She ran as fast as she could around Beatrice, creating a giant vortex. Beatrice was caught in the middle of it. When Athena stopped, she sent Beatrice flying all the way to the field. Just at that moment, Mr. Snickers, the principle, came out in time to see Athena send Beatrice flying.

“Excuse me, Miss Prince! Come to my office immediately!” he exclaimed.

“How dare you blast Miss Loop! Athena, you should know better after you went to A.S.K.” Athena was as still as a statue. Her lips were sealed.

“ I… I didn’t mean to, really. It’s just that (sniffle) she was making fun of me, and I didn’t like that!”

The principal was also still. “Unfortunately, I have to expel you from the school. I know this might be hard, but here at Dragon Academy, we cannot tolerate such behavior. After your last period, collect your things.”

Athena could have cried. But she still sat there, stone faced.

Since that horrid day, Athena had to leave Dragon Academy. She sobbed on that day. Everyone was very sad.  The school made cards for her, and some even bought her presents. All the teachers gave her little presents too. Finally, it was time for her to move on, even though she had to leave her best friend and some of her favorite teachers behind. This school just wasn’t for her anymore.

“Well, Wendy, I will miss you, a lot,” said Athena.

Goodbye Dragon Academy, hello Applewood Junior High, she thought as she drove away from Dragon Academy and would never have to see this school again. She wondered if the people at her new school would be just like her? Would she ever see Wendy again? She had many questions, but she would have to wait and see if they were true.

The Peacock

         

The peacock thinks it rules the world
when it puts its feathers up,
and everybody who walks by
can’t help but turn their eyes.

         
But when it puts its feathers down,
it’s pompous, rude, and mean.
It thinks the other animals
all worship at its feet.

         
But there is one animal more proud,
More pompous, mean, and rude.
It lives on social media.
It has an attitude.

            
The Trumpy thinks it rules the world
when it flips its blond hair up,
and everybody who walks by
can’t help but turn their eyes.

             
But when it flips its blond hair down,
it’s pompous, rude, and mean.
It thinks the other candidates
all worship at its feet.

 

Childhood

                     

Lerici

 

I am two years old.

Inside the car is dark.

My mom turns on the lights.

My dad opens the door.

I finally found the entrance to life.

 

I am four years old.

I woke up to the smell of delicious blueberry and fig pie.

I am trying to sneak up

To grab a handful of candy.

 

I am six years old.

We carpool to the countryside.

Ready to jump into the pool.

I am chubby, in my one-piece.

 

I am eight years old.

Waking up by the sounds of gunshots in the air

Is not very pleasant.

But almost getting attacked by a wild pig

Is frightening,

What an experience to have.

 

I’m ten years old.

Claire is snoring above me

And I hate it.

No sleep, at all.

Yawning all day.  

 

Now I am eleven years old.

Nothing has changed.

My skateboarding teacher was my grandpa.

First attempt: absolute fail.

Second attempt: getting there.

Third attempt: success!

 

Nothing has changed.

The houses are the same.

Some of the names have changed

The names of people and shops.

But the pool hasn’t.

 

I will be 75 years old.

And I will always see myself

Going to Lerici.

 

The Child of Romeo and Juliet

 

I started learning English when I was two.

I’ve lived in Taiwan for my whole life.

I don’t remember the first word I learned.

All my friends speak English.

The languages I know:

It’s easier to speak English

The writing is easier in Italian

Taiwanese is easier when you speak Chinese

Taiwanese is the dialect of Chinese,

What aboriginal people speak in Taiwan.

2 million people in Taiwan

More than half of them are aboriginal people from the mountains

A few people in my grade are from China

And the rest from Vietnam or the other Asian countries

Taiwan used to be called Formosa

Long time ago, I forgot from which country,

They came and called Taiwan “beautiful island.”

But Verona was my Dad’s hometown.

That’s where Juliet’s balcony was

Every night Romeo used to go under her balcony.

Their parents didn’t like each other,

But they were in love.

I know the story but I never read it.

The first time we went to Italy,

I was very tiny.

He’s told the story many times.

To be both Taiwanese and Italian

Is an odd combination

But I think it’s kind of cute.

My dad’s last name is Speciale

And my mom’s last name is Lin

So my friends call me Specialin.

When I come to America,

I get asked a lot: “Do you live in the neighborhood?”

And I say: “No, I live in Taiwan.”

People are surprised I speak such good English.

Whenever I go anywhere,
I already know what’s going to happen.

When I travel, border control

Checks all my passports

People usually have one passport.

It takes those people 2 minutes,

For me it takes 5 minutes

For my two passports Italy and Taiwan.

My Italian passport still has my babyface.

My Taiwanese passport is my 10-year-old face.

So then they double-check that it’s actually me.

People behind me will complain

But it’s not my fault.

My parents were just like Romeo and Juliet

Their parents weren’t fighting

But they came from opposite sides of the world,

Which makes me the child of Romeo and Juliet.

 

Miss Dalmonego.

 

I had just finished sixth grade.

My teacher is Miss Dalmonego

Well, she was my teacher…

Until she left to Nepal

She did not look big, strong and powerful

But believe me

Her strength for teaching is as powerful a

Thousand intelligent nerds marching across  

Our books

She made us wonder

She brought us guests

Who helped us water the flower of knowledge

She brought us from northern Taiwan

To the South

Helping me understand how to ground my roots in my birth country

Her words are as important as petals to a flower

They start small, but as time passes they grow in importance

She encourages us, and holds us up as we grow

Like the stem of a flower

She helps us decorate the structures and vocabulary for our essays

Like leaves on a stem

Once again

I’m so thankful for Miss Dalmonego teaching me and supporting me all this way.

 

Shakespeare Speech

Helena talking to Demetrius in A Midsummer’s Night Dream

 

What flaw do you see in I, Helena?

My complexion is as fair as Hermia,

and my voice as sweet as a nightingale.

Let Hermia be; she holds no place for thee.

She dotes on Lysander, so be mine.

You have deprived me of my senses,

and beguiled me by your visage.

I pray thee, give me a chance to stand by thee,

to undo my woe, cast by thou hate at me,

and then, we shall be happy, I promise thee.

 

The Foxes’ War

One late November morning, after catching a rabbit, Bramble trotted into a hollow log so she could eat it alone. She started to get tired, and fell asleep. When she woke up, she heard a gunshot and a human yelling “Fox!” Bramble dashed out of the log. When she looked back, the log was on fire. She didn’t stop running. She had to find somewhere to hide. Just then, she saw a hole. She crawled inside, and she heard more yelling from outside. Then, a bullet landed right next to her, and she decided to go deeper into the tunnel.

Bramble sniffed the air. It smelled as if another fox, specifically a juvenile male fox, was digging the tunnel. As Bramble went further, she saw another fox lying down in the tunnel. He was weak, and he lifted his head up.

“What are you doing in my tunnel?” he growled.

“Humans are outside,” Bramble barked.

“Who are you?” he growled again.

“I’m Bramble. Who are you?”

“I’m Rufus. The humans chased me so I dug this tunnel.”

Rufus stood up, and slowly walked to the entrance. Then he crouched. Bramble stood up and did the same. There were no humans outside. Bramble placed the rabbit she had caught right outside. They trotted out, and soon they heard another gunshot. The tunnel that Rufus made was destroyed. As soon as Bramble grabbed the little bit of rabbit meat that was left, Bramble and Rufus ran away from the humans that destroyed the tunnel. Soon, they were in a clearing. Rufus looked around. He saw a big grayish green machine that had a star on the side of it. There was a long horizontal tube that was sticking out of the upper front. Then, a bullet came out of the tube, and Rufus realized that it was a gun. Bramble started sprinting for the forest.

“We’re not safe!” Bramble yelped while dodging a bullet.

Rufus followed Bramble, and after a while it started to get dark. They slowed down as they got deeper into the forest. Bramble dug a neat den, unlike the one Rufus built. Then, they ate the little piece of rabbit that was left, and went to sleep. When they woke up, It was raining. Bramble and Rufus were cold and shivering. They huddled against each other for body warmth, but the rain didn’t stop, and after another day of rain, Bramble became sick.

Rufus walked further into the forest. Then, he spotted a few tents. He went back to Bramble and he carried her on his back to the tents. He dropped her off near the tents.

“I’m going to get some food. You dig a den,” Rufus quietly barked.

Rufus poked his nose under the side of the tent. After he sneaked into the tent, he froze. There was a gun lying on the floor, and it was pointing towards him. He moved to the side, and crawled under a little plastic table. Then he smelled something. When he looked at what was on the table, there was a big, brown, non-bloody chunk of meat. He put his paw on it and it was warm. He sniffed it, and he smelled different herbs and spices. He grabbed the piece of meat with his jaws. Then, a large round white platform came crashing down and broke to pieces. Rufus was so startled that he flung the chunk of meat across the tent.

A human with a dark green and gray uniform came storming into the tent. He glared at the cracked platform and then at the lump of meat. He walked back to the entrance of the tent, turned to stare at the meat one more time, and stomped away.

Once the human was out of sight, Rufus grabbed the meat and dashed out of the tent with the meat held firmly in his jaws.

“I got food,” Rufus barked once he got to the entrance of the little den that Bramble dug at the base of a tree.

Just then, Bramble crawled out of the little den and sat up, looking at the proud little den that she had just created. Then, she felt a little vibration, and she lay down on her back and rolled back. A small explosion blew up her den. Bits of dirt went flying all over the place. Bramble growled. She was furious. She started brushing all the dirt around while lying down with her front paws and tail. Soon she uncovered some wires. She bit at the wires a little bit, and sparks came flying out. Rufus lept beside her and nudged her to the side. Rufus grabbed a long branch and put out the little fire that had started.

Rufus carried Bramble slowly walked to another spot near the tents.

“Dig.” Rufus barked.

She started to dig her den there. Rufus dropped the meat off to the side and helped dig the den. Slowly but surely, the two foxes dug a small den, just big enough for both of them to fit along with the meat. As Bramble crawled inside, Rufus used his nose to push the lump of meat into the den. Once they were both inside, Bramble helped herself to a big bite of meat. It did not taste like anything Bramble had eaten before. After they halfway finished it, Rufus brought it outside and buried it. Then Rufus came back into the den and they both fell asleep.

When Rufus woke up, Bramble was coughing. She had inhaled a lot of smoke from the bomb, and from the fire. Rufus trotted outside to get water. Once he found a small pond, he sprinted back to the big mass of tents. He sneaked inside a tent, and sniffed around. Then he found a odd-shaped hollow rubbery object with strings on it. He brought it outside, and suddenly he heard a human say “Where’s my boot?” Then, he ran all the way to the pond. He threw it into the water while still gripping tight onto the string. When he pulled it up, it was full of water. He dragged the water-filled boot right outside of the den. He motioned for Bramble to come out, and when she did, she was still coughing. She thrust her head into the water and spilled some while she was drinking, but she was definitely looking better.

After a few days, Bramble was fully healed and was ready to move on.

“The humans are coming closer,” Bramble slowly growled mysteriously. That convinced Rufus.

After walking for some time, they reached a hole. Bramble cautiously sniffed around it, and it smelled of mouse.

“Copy me,” Bramble quietly ordered.

Bramble lay down next to the hole. Of course, Rufus did the same. Bramble closed one eye, and left her tongue hanging out of her mouth. Rufus followed. After a while, a mouse came out. Thinking that the two foxes around him were sleeping, the mouse slowly tiptoed out. Without warning, Bramble pounced on the mouse and swallowed him whole. Then Bramble stepped to the side, and let Rufus try. When Rufus pounced on the next mouse, it was too fast and dashed back into it’s hole. Rufus tried again, but did not succeed. Soon, Rufus was so busy trying to catch the mouse that he did not notice another bigger, older, oranger fox sneaking up on him. Then, the older fox pounced.

Rufus snarled. He pounced on top of the older fox again, and knocked the older fox onto the ground.

“Who are you?” Rufus growled.

The real question is who are you?” the other fox growled back.

“I’m Rufus,” Rufus growled sounding annoyed.

“Call me Ken,” Ken growled in response.

“Now!” Rufus barked loudly.

Bramble jumped off a small tree and landed directly on Ken holding him to the ground.

“What do you want?” Ken snarled.

“Let us stay here,” Bramble calmly barked.

“Only over there,” Ken barked as he pointed to the space in between nine trees. “No hunting, fishing, trashing, or making noise beyond those trees.

“Fine.” Rufus barked.

They walked to their territory space that they had earned. They sniffed around. It wasn’t too bad, considering that there was some rock, a whole pond, a rabbit hole, mouse holes, and quite a few trees. Rufus decided to mark his new territory. He put scents on the trees all around their territory, and then helped Bramble dig a nice large den. Then they hunted for turkey and when Bramble got tired, she went to eat berries.  

The next day, Rufus woke up to a howling sound. He peeked outside, and there was a coyote. He dashed back into the den. He nudged bramble to wake her up. Bramble peeked outside. There was a coyote. He was prowling around. Then, he sniffed the air. He smelled a strange scent. He started sniffing the ground. He started coming closer and closer to Rufus and Bramble’s den, when a bullet came out of nowhere and knocked the coyote onto the ground, unmoving. A human came running. “Bingo!” he said. As he bent down to pick up the coyote, he turned his head and saw the hole. He picked up his gun and aimed it into the hole, but before he could shoot, Rufus snached the gun from the human’s hands and brought it deep into the hole. The human was confused. He reached into the hole with his arm, but Bramble bit his hand. Then, he screamed and ran away.

For a few days, Rufus’ territory was peaceful, but that didn’t last long. Rufus woke up to a strange noise. He peeked out of the den and he saw a strange bird. It was dark green and gray and it had a thin black wing growing out of it’s head that was spinning around in circles. It had long talons, with only two claws on each talon. It’s tail was long, with a little feather on the end that was also spinning in circles. When it started to get closer to the ground, Rufus realized that a human was sitting on this bird. Then he realized that it was not a bird at all, It was a flying machine. It came closer and closer to the ground. As it came closer, there was more wind. Soon, the entrance of the tunnel was blown away from the wind. Then dust started blowing into the tunnel so much, that the tunnel became very small. Rufus and bramble frantically dug and dug, but there was no success.

“Follow me,” Rufus gently growled.  

Rufus rubbed the dust from the ground onto his back. Then, he rubbed some of the mud right at the entrance of the den on his back. They were the same color as the flying machine. They crept out of the den, Rufus in the lead. The flying machine was not flying now, and the human was busy planting a brown thing connected to wires in the ground.

Rufus and Bramble climbed onto the flying machine. Then, he hopped onto a small ledge that was slightly padded. Bramble hopped onto the other one. On the ledge, he could see a platform with round things that were sticking out. Then he turned. The human was walking back now. When he saw Bramble and Rufus his walk turned into a run. Bramble was so frightened that she lept onto the platform with round things that were sticking out.

Suddenly, the machine started going up. The human was far below on the ground. The machine was going higher and higher. When the machine went above the tallest trees, Bramble got scared. She put her paw on another circle. Then the machine stopped. It was hovering in mid-air. She had to remember that the big red circle was stop. She tried pressing another circle, but a human’s voice appeared. “Copter seven,” the human’s voice said. “Have you set off the bombs yet? I repeat, Have you set off the bombs yet?” then, the voice became unclear. “H-a-v-v-e y-y-o-u s-e-e-t o-o-f-f b-b-o-m-b-s-s y-y-e-t? I re-re-peat ” then, the voice got cut off.

“Don’t step on that one again,” Rufus yelped.

Bramble stepped on a different one. A giant black thing came out of the front of the flying machine. The black thing landed on a tree. Then there was a loud explosion and when the smoke cleared, all that was left of the tree was a big black stump. Bramble decided to press a different one. She stepped on another one, and that made the machine fly forward, and higher. Then she leaped onto the big red one. The machine stopped. Bramble decided to press another one. At least one of them must be down! The one that she stepped on seemed to not do anything. She was impatient. She pressed the same one again, and suddenly the floor slowly opened. Then, the padded ledges that Rufus and Bramble were sitting on changed. Very light puffy things got strapped onto the foxes’ backs. Then the padded ledges tilted. Rufus and Bramble fell off the machine. Above them, the machine flashed red, and it started to fall.

Bramble kicked and pushed, but could not get the puffy thing off of her back. Suddenly the puffy thing exploded, and Bramble started to fall very slowly. Rufus did the same. When Rufus and Bramble looked up, there was a big white flat thing above their heads that made them fall slowly. Those straps were actually helpful. Soon they were near the ground. They smoothly landed on a tree. Rufus pushed off the white flat thing, and climbed out of the basket he made with the straps. As he climbed to Bramble, he realized that not only had she also made a basket with the straps, but she had fallen asleep in her basket. He crawled under the white flat thing and pushed it off Bramble. Then Bramble woke up. She shook herself off, and started to climb down the tree. They stopped at a long branch with a hollow hole in the tree for the night.

The next day, when they woke up, they realized that they were sleeping in the same hole as a squirrel, except the squirrel was deeper into the hole that Rufus and Bramble. Rufus cornered the squirrel, but when the squirrel woke up, it immediately dashed in between Rufus’ legs. Rufus explored deeper, and there were more squirrels deeper in the tree. He managed to catch one, and he greedily ate it up. When he climbed out of the hole, Bramble was there waiting for him. She looked at him, and when she saw that he had eaten a squirrel, she looked at him smartly, looked down, and jumped off the branch into the water. Bramble was so fast she caught a fish when she dove down. Rufus rolled his eyes at her and made his way down the tree. When they got to the bottom, Bramble had caught four fish. Bramble ate one of them, but since she was so hungry, she ate two instead. Bramble and Rufus started wandering around the forest.

It started snowing. As Bramble and Rufus kept walking in the snow, they saw a clearing. It was the same clearing that they had been a month earlier. As they looked around, Rufus saw the giant gray and green machine with long oval tires and the star and the gun. When they walked further, Bramble saw the flying machine that the humans called a “Copter” lying sideways on the ground. After they walked even further, Rufus saw the tents, except some of them had fallen down. Bramble saw the place where her old den that got exploded by the bomb was. Then, they walked past their old territory with the coyote rotting away in the snow. The forest was now peaceful, and this is how the Foxes’ war ended.

 

Epilogue

Soon, Bramble and Rufus got used to the forest. When they were exploring the area around their newly built den, they came to a giant hollow tree. They peeked inside. Inside of the hollow tree there were two little fox pups. They looked scared. Rufus cautiously sniffed them. There were no scents on them. That means they were probably abandoned. Bramble placed her tail around them as a blanket and one of them made a purring sound. Then she tore off a bit of fish and placed it in front of them. The second one ate it up. Bramble gave the whole fish to them. They finished it in no time. Then, Rufus went to go get more food for them, while Bramble stayed to watch them. Once Rufus was back, he had caught a chipmunk. He placed it in front of the fox pups, and they gobbled it up. Then, Bramble came out. She had dug into the tree so the tunnel could be deeper. Then she gently picked up the fox pups and brought them into the deepest part of the den. It was getting dark, and snow was falling, so with the fox pups huddled around them for warmth, they went to sleep.

 

Middle School, My Terrible Luck

Chapter 1: Day #1

I was so not ready for this. Hi, I’m Sophie. Today was my first day of middle school, and if you’re poor, living in the projects, that means it’s the worst day ever. My mom didn’t understand that I, Sophie, plus “poor” and “middle school” equalled “bad.” So here I was, almost literally swimming in a pool of my own sweat.

The bus finally came after what felt like forever. I picked a careful spot in the back. Don’t want to make the first mistake on the bus!!!

I was now at the front of the school. Hashtag so nervous! I closed my eyes and went into the school. I almost immediately felt like I made the wrong choice. I looked down and quickly went to my class. I got a seat in the back, so l wouldn’t get noticed that much.

“Hello, class!” said the teacher. “I’m Ms. Tom. I will be your homeroom teacher. Now, here are your locker numbers that you will be using.”

Everyone went to the lockers. I also went, but I kept my head down. I was walking to my locker and somehow tripped over my own foot. I could hear everyone laughing. I was pretty much the biggest dork in school already. I hurried up and went to my locker.

Then, I ran straight for the bathroom. I took a deep breath to cool down. By the time I got out, the bell had already rung. I had science for second period. I walked down the hall to the science classrooms. I felt pretty happy that it was a few rooms away, cause if it wasn’t, I would have exploded.

Science class was pretty boring. If you want me to show you how boring it was, then here’s exactly what the teacher said, “Blah, blah, science, blah, blah, archaeologists, blah, blah, dinosaurs, blah, blah, listen, blah, blah, pay attention.”

See what I mean? I was pretty excited that science was over, because art class was next. I love to color, and I want to be an artist when I grow up. When it comes to art, I listen to everything the teacher says. Today, we were trying to paint self-portraits of ourselves. I pretty much had the best one. After art class, I was pretty bummed that it was over.

Then, after art, we had lunchtime and recess. And now, here’s another part where I had to be careful where I went, because I could make the second biggest mistake of my life. During lunchtime, I tried to stick to sitting where everyone truly likes art. Tried to stick to my own kind. But as soon as I tried to sit down at the table, other people came crashing down, and I had to sit somewhere else. But then, something caught my eye. I saw three girls who looked like princesses, and they had so much makeup on for some reason. Then, I found someone sitting next to me.

She said, “Hey, I’m Carol. Those girls over there, the one in the front is named Missy, the one on the left is named Brianna, the one on the right is Mia. They’re already basically the most popular girls in school. And Missy’s parents are basically the richest people in the world.”  

“Oh,” I said. As soon as Missy saw me, she immediately came over to talk to me.

“What are you wearing?” she said. “You look like a homeless person who lives in the woods.”

I could not believe she was talking smack about me in front of my face. I was about to say something, but I kept my mouth shut. Missy walked away.

I said, “I immediately hate her, especially the way she walks. She waddles away with her high heels and her diamonds. I especially hate the way that people run after her, admiring her hair and stuff.”

“Right? She is so annoying.”

“Yeah, she’s awful.”

Instead of worrying about Missy, I had to worry about where I was gonna sit for lunch. I found an empty table, so I went straight to it. Carol sat with me too. After lunch and recess, I went straight to writing class. It was so boring, again with the “blah, blah, blah.” I couldn’t wait till school was over.

After that, we had sports. Sports was pretty much the worst thing at school, besides lunch. We played dodgeball, and I can’t tell you how much I hate dodgeball. For some magical reason, I always got hit with the ball. It hurt really bad because we played with bowling balls. Anyway, this was how much it hurt, and this was how much I hate sports. And the warm up was the worst: We had to do fifteen pushups and run a lap five times, and that was just the first course. Then, we had to do pull-ups and hang there as long as we could while they timed it. I honestly only did it for two seconds. After sports was over, it was time to go home. Hallelujah!

 

Chapter 2: Day #2

Basically, it felt like I was having deja vu. The same thing happened, we got the same “blah, blah, blah” science stuff and art. But today, we had music. I have the worst singing voice ever. But this time, I was actually surprised that my voice sounded… better.

After music, I was out of breath, but the bad thing about that, was that after music, I had sports again. Sometimes, I think that teachers and principals like their kids being tortured, so they torture them for a funny show. Well, it’s actually not funny. It’s heartbreaking.

Today, the only good thing that happened was that my mom made breakfast. Her famous pancakes. They were good, but sometimes you have to watch out because they say a message. If there are pancakes, my mom’s in a good mood. If there are pancakes and bacon, my mom got extra tips from the store because she’s usually not able to afford that. If there are pancakes and bacon and strawberries and blueberries, that means something horrible has happened.

“We got some news today. Grandpa Muffin is moving in,” said my mom.

I practically almost spat out my cereal. “Nooooooooooooooo!!!”

I went to school grumpy.

Why do bad things always happen to me? I said in my head. It’s not fair.

I was grumpy until I realized I was going into art. A smile stretched across my face. Just what I needed to cheer me up. After art, I found Carol again, and we went to the cafeteria. Good thing I had brought my own lunch.

“The cafeteria ladies are witches,” Carol said. “They put poison and fart spell in the meatloaf. Never eat the meatloaf!”

“Got it.” I took my grilled cheese sandwich, Oreos, apple juice, fruit snacks, and Fruit Loops. Mmmm.

And then, I saw Missy. I could not believe what Missy was eating. She had a fancy butler serving her steak. Fresh steak!!! I got so mad and jealous!!

“Ugh!! Missy. I have a plan!!”

Worried, Carol said, “What are you up to?!!!”

     

Chapter 3: Day #3

I made a plan to spill pudding on Missy at the right time. First, I convinced my mom to let me bring pudding. When Missy went to the bathroom, I followed her. While she went to the stall and started doing her business, I put all of my pudding in my mouth.

Blargggh!!!” I pretended to throw up.

“AAAAAAAHHHHHH!!!” she screamed in a high-pitched voice.

“Missy?” said Mia and Brianna. They rushed into the stall to help, but as soon as they saw her, they were disgusted. “Eww!!! What is that?!”

Missy passed out on the floor. The pudding covered her whole body except her diamond crown. Mia took the crown.

“Crowns are only for clean and pretty girls. Queen Mia forever!!!”

Missy was mad about earlier. She thought it was me, which was true. After second period, she put a note on my locker that read: Hey loser, I know that you spilled pudding on me. You’re going to regret that. It’s on!!

Missy was so… evil!!!

I tried to avoid Missy, but that’s hard to do when someone threatens you. So I just went to class. After that, it was pretty much a normal day.

After school, I had to go home and meet Grandpa Muffin. I don’t like when he visits  because he’s so bossy and boring and grumpy. He’s always yelling at us to get a cup of root beer and basically everything for him.

Since I was already bad at school, this was gonna make everything even worse. When I came home, thankfully, Grandpa Muffin wasn’t home. I dropped my backpack and found my mom in the kitchen. I started to groan.

“Why does he have to come today?” I didn’t really wanna tell my mom what was happening at school. I just wanted to lay my head down, but I couldn’t do it because somebody was visiting.

Finally, Grandpa Muffin came. I tried to greet him, but he dropped his humongous bags in my arms. What did he even keep in this stuff? Weights? I was about to scream, but then my mom looked at me, so I had to keep all the anger in. When I finished greeting Grandpa Muffin, I went to my room and screamed into my pillow. Why does the bad stuff always happen to me? What did I do? I just lay down on my bed, and to cheer myself up, I finally got a piece of paper and started coloring.

At first I just wanted to scribble, but I knew that wouldn’t help me, so I drew a world where everything happened perfectly, just the way I wanted it. This was a world I wanted to be living in, but instead, I was living in this world, the opposite of that world, where nothing happened perfectly. I kept on groaning in my pillow, but then, I fell asleep because of my anger. I mean, there was nothing better to do.

 

Chapter 4: Day 4

This morning, I hurried up trying to get to school because I did not want to run into Grandpa Muffin. I didn’t even know what happened yesterday, but Grandpa Muffin was NOT sleeping in my room. I got breakfast and started tiptoeing out of the door, when suddenly, Grandpa Muffin screamed at me.

“Where are you going?!” he yelled. I jumped up out of surprise.

“I’m going to school.”

“Before you go to school, get me a root beer.”

“This early in the morning?”

“Just give me the beer, child.”

I went to the fridge and started talking to myself. “Grandpa Muffin is the worst. I have better things to do than give him beers all day.” I gave him the beer and hurried at once to school. Right now, I almost thought that school was way better than Grandpa Muffin. School was basically the same thing every day: I went to science where the teacher “blah blah”d every day, I went to art and made the best drawing, I went to writing where the teacher “blah blah”d again, I went to sports and got hit with dodgeballs, and then, I went home.

But the twist to my new routine was that I had to give Grandpa Muffin beers in the morning and right after school. Grandpa Muffin was like one of the teachers at my school. They thought they were doing us good, but it was actually heartbreaking. Then, I just did my homework, and tried to avoid Grandpa all day. I was so glad when my mom came home, so I asked her the one question I’d been waiting to ask her.

“Where is Grandpa Muffin sleeping?” That’s when it got dark. My mom sighed for a few seconds and took a deep breath.

“Sorry, but Grandpa Muffin is sleeping in your room.” I opened my mouth, but nothing came out.

“Why can’t Grandpa Muffin sleep in the guest room?! It’s not fair!!” Just when I had thought it couldn’t get any worse, it did.

My mom said, “Sorry, but life isn’t fair.” And all I could think was that for me, life was never fair. I stomped into my room, went to my pillow, and screamed approximately 1200 times. At first, I thought that this was my fault. In my head, I wondered why I was such a pushover, why I let everyone control me. But then, I realized it was everyone else’s fault but mine.

 

Chapter 5

One day, the teacher asked if anyone wanted to sign up for a baking session. At first, I wasn’t considering it, but then, the teacher said it would give you extra credit on your progress report. Then, I thought, my progress report is probably just straight Fs, except for art class, so maybe I could earn some extra credit to boost up my progress report. Because if I didn’t get at least a B or C, my mom would be so mad, and I would be sooo grounded. The teacher said that it started tomorrow, so I had to wait a whole day, but that was fine by me. And the baking session might give me some time away from Grandpa.

When I got home, Grandpa Muffin asked me to turn on the TV. The TV was right in front of him, two feet in front of him, but he didn’t want to turn it on. Ughh, old people are so lazy.

I asked my mom for her cookbook and said I had to borrow it for a baking session. She gave it to me because she thought it would keep me from screaming into my pillow because of Grandpa.

“I’m so glad you’re gonna put your screaming behind you and do something different.”

“I mean, I’ll still keep screaming, but I’ll scream less, and it will at least give me some time away from Grandpa.”

“That’s good enough for me.”

I took the cookbook and started looking for a recipe for tomorrow. First, I looked at chocolate chunk cupcakes, but then, I flipped passed them because my teacher was allergic to chocolate. Then, I saw blueberry muffins, but I wasn’t trying to make muffins, because then, Grandpa Muffin would eat them. Then, I saw chocolate chip cookies. I thought about them for a while, but eventually skipped them. Then, I saw butterscotch cookies, and after thinking about them for awhile, I decided to go with butterscotch. I started baking. I had my mom try the first batch, but she said they were too hard. The second try, my mom helped me, and they were just right. I put the cookies in a special place so no one could touch them. It was a good thing that the baking session was first thing in the morning.

 

Chapter 6

I went straight to the baking session the next morning. There was a teacher trying out the cookies. I couldn’t believe people got paid to eat cookies. She must have had her life planned out perfectly. I wanted to be paid to eat cookies!

Turns out, I came in second place, so I’d have to find something better than butterscotch cookies. You would never believe who came in first place… It was Missy! She probably paid some cafe guy like $1,000 to bake something delicious so she’d win.

“Tomorrow,” I told my mom, “we have to bake something perfect, so I can rub it in Missy’s face.”

We looked at the cookbook, and I found a brownie cake. I remembered the teacher who was judging tomorrow was only allergic to peanut butter, so I tried the brownie cake. I baked the cake, and my mom tried a small piece. She said it was perfectly fine, so I decided to use it tomorrow.

The next day, I met up with Carol. She was reading the newspaper. I found out that there was a school dance, but I wasn’t really interested. When I went to class, I heard that I got first place!!! Missy was there, and she was so mad. It was a perfect show for me. I just love when my plans come together. Then, I went to my locker, and something squirted out and landed right on top of me! It was sticky, sticky yogurt. I bet it was Missy; she was probably just jealous I had won something with my own work.

All the parents got a flyer for the dance. My mom got excited because she thought I would go, but I told her I wasn’t going because I wasn’t interested. My mom convinced me to go, but I asked her how she would get the money to buy me a dress. My mom said that we could have a bake sale! I could use my cooking skills and use cakes and cupcakes and cookies to buy a new dress and heels. So my mom and I started baking, and we baked and baked and baked and baked so much, that for the first time ever, I saw Grandpa Muffin turn on the TV himself and get himself a root beer. If my mom wasn’t here though, he’d have made me get him his root beer and turn on the TV for him, even if it was two feet away. See how terrible he is?

My mom and I baked all the cupcakes and cakes and pastries that we needed and started selling. Carol was our first customer, but then, she decided to start helping us sell everything. Soon enough, we had about thirty customers. By nighttime, we had about $180, enough to buy a dress, heels, and maybe some new earrings. The night of the dance was two days away, so I had to start getting ready. We decided to do a bake sale one more time to get some money for a new necklace, and so that I could get my hair done. For the first time ever, it would be untangled. We did the same thing over and over again for two more days until something finally changed.

On the night of the dance, after school, my mom took me to do my hair and get ready. She dropped me off in a taxi, and I walked in. The first thing I saw when I walked in was a disco ball and a red carpet. It turns out the carpet was only for Missy, but I was determined not to let her ruin my night. So I went up to Carol and talked to her. She introduced me to some of her friends, and we all went to the table to get some snacks. Then, Missy was talking into the microphone.

“Hello classmates! Welcome to the dance that I created.”
You created?” I said. “I’m pretty sure that the teachers created it. Just because you’re rich and famous doesn’t mean you have to lie.”

I had already made a plan because I knew Missy would be on stage. I went behind the stage and pulled a rope. There was a big bucket of pudding where she was standing, so I released the rope, and the bucket fell right up on Missy’s head! There was so much pudding. I went back to my seat, everyone was laughing, and I was whistling innocently, but Missy knew it was me.

“You ruined my night!!” she said.

Your night?? It’s everyone else’s night, too! Not everything’s about you.”
Missy ran after me, but then, I tripped her, and she accidentally stepped on the skirt of her dress, and it got ripped off. Everyone was laughing while Missy ran away. What parents would even let her inside of the car? She ended up having to walk home, and I, Sophie, never had to worry about Missy again. I finally realized that if something bad is going on in your life, you can’t just complain, you have to do something about it.

 

Beauty in the Fields

 

Beauty

Lies

In

Fields

Of

Flowers

Shining

In

Sunny

Meadows

 

Walking around the field of flowers, I see the beauty

lies in everything that I don’t see. All the light

in the air. All the effervescent joy I can feel.  

Fields of poppies wave around me, happy in the sun.

I could live forever here, in this noble field of

Flowers. I would die happy. I would rise so grand,

shining like the orange petals I can see all around

in this field, my heaven, my world, everything I want.

Sunny streaks alight my skin, and I lie down in

the grass and the poppies, dreaming of my blissful meadows.

 

Walking the field, I see the beauty

in everything that I see. The light

in the air. Joy I can feel.  

Poppies wave around me in the sun.

I could live here, this field of

Flowers. I die happy, would rise grand,

Like the orange petals I see all

This field, my heaven, everything I want

Streaks alight skin, and lie down in

The poppies, dreaming of my blissful meadows.

 

I see the beauty

in everything I see.

Joy I can feel.  

Poppies wave around me.

could live, field of

Flowers. I die happy,

Like the petals all

This field, I want

Streaks alight, down in

The poppies, blissful meadows

I see the beauty it’s clear.

in everything I see, crystal beauty.

Joy I can feel, in the wind.  

Poppies wave around me, all together.

could live, field of beauty, happiness,

Flowers. I die happy, I blessed.

Like the petals, all falling deaths.

This field, I want thrive forever.

Streaks alight, down in this land.

The poppies, blissful meadows, the end.

 

The One and the Best Girl: Books IV and V

BOOK IV

Boom boom!!!!

“What is that sound? It is loud!’’

Boom boom  

“It’s the volcano. Run!!!! Run RUN,” said Papa.

Papa and Daisy kept on running!!!!

(Pause: Hi! My name is Daisy. If you watched my other stories, I moved to NYC but I wanted to hang with my grandpa (Papa), so my mom and dad said that for the summer I can stay with my papa! Papa lives near Pompeii. Back to the story.)

BOOM BOOM!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! They swam and swam and swam! The lava got closer and closer… It was right behind them. Papa ran out of breath. He stopped for a second, but the lava was right behind him. He didn’t know what to do, so I picked him up and ran! I ran out of breath.

Haaaa haaaa haaaaa haaaaa I did not know what to do… The lava got  closer… my breath got more and more heavy…

I ran as fast as I could but i could not run any more.

“Hot dogs.’’

“who said that?’’ I said. I looked in front of me. There was a island. I ran to the water side and I swam. Me and my papa swam as fast as we could.

We got to the island. We never in 1,00,00,0,00000,0000,0000,000,9999,99999,555,5555,5555,555,44 years knew about this island. We walked around and looked for the hot dog guy. There he was right in front of us. “Free Hot Dogs!” he said.

He looked like an alien. He had five eyes and a small mouth. His eyes were gold and he had a unibrow. He was very short. He was as short as a dog. I went over and asked, “Why do you have a unibrow?”

He said, “Hello to you too. I will tell you a story. Before I tell the story, would you like a free hot dog?”

I said, “No thank you. Tell the story! Tell the story!”

“Here I begin, I was three, my brother was trying to teach me how to do a unibrow. I didn’t know how to. I wanted to prove to people at school that they were wrong and that I could do a unibrow. Everybody laughed and made of me because I was so short, so I went to school the next day and I showed everybody. That night I tried to do it again. I lifted up one eyebrow and I did it. The next day I went to school and I showed my friend who always made fun of me because I was short. Then I showed him my unibrow. I could not re-do it. And that is the end of my story.’’

Papa couldn’t really speak. His eyes were wide open. I think I could see kind of his brain. In my own brain, I saw him doing that exactly.

Then we said “thank you.’’ Then we left. We got a boat and started to sail. We saw this girl. She looked quite like my mom. I called my mom, nobody picked up. So we sailed over to the island that looked familiar to me and we walked through it. “We are home!’’’ We feel so happy to be home.

 

BOOK V

 

5/3/16

Dear diary,

Today at school we got a script for a play. I am so excited. The play is ’’Into the Woods,’’ and I did it in ten minutes. I know it’s crazy, but I am so good at it. I have one sentence memorized. I have one month till the show! I am so excited! I am bad at writing in a diary, but at least I know I am bad. I got you last summer with my grandfather, so I finally decided it was time to starting writing! I love it! My grandfather is here ’cause of Pompeii, but in the end, I loved him here! Each day he picked me up from school and we went to the ice cream store!

The Hair got my prince and at the end we will get married! We talked about it at lunch! I am way more excited than him! But tonight before bed I am going to practice one  or two more times. My dad said to go to sleep when mom or dad turns out the lights I have to go to sleep. But just this once I’m going to practice!

 

5/10/16

Dear diary,

Today at school we got to practice five times, and it was so cool! Tomorrow night I am going to see Hamilton! I am going to wear a glittery dress that has a rose on it. I have a writing class and I do not want to go. But I have to. 🙁

 

5/11/16

Dear diary,

Today I went to Hamilton, and it was…

Cool

Scary

Funny

Fun

Long

Sad

Awesome

And very very sleepy at one part!

 

5/12/16

Dear diary,

Today at school my teacher said we are moving the date of the play to May 27th. I said “NOOO!’’ It was so bad! :0 I stuck out my tongue in my mind. :p So tonight I practiced so many times!

 

5/27/16

Dear diary,

I did the play. It was so fun! I got a trophy! It was so fun!

 

The New Dentist (Part I)

Nina

I’ll code after I do my homework. My mom always says do your homework before you code. Today’s different. I have to go to the dentist. I hate the dentist. It takes so long to get there, even though they only check your teeth for five minutes. My dentist is way too serious. He has this way of “amusing” his patients. He’s not very good at it. His idea of amusing is when he says, “I’m a plane coming through your mouth.”

How babyish! Today I’m relieved I have a new dentist. Her name is Catie. I think it stands for Catherine. I hope she has a sense of humor.

It turns out she’s super nice. She also has a great sense of humour. At first she was a bit crazy but now she’s super fun! She always finds ways to amuse me. Once she even said, “Being a dentist is like being a super smart nerd.”

Sometimes I just don’t get her. When I asked my mom, “What did she mean mom?”

She said, “Ask her yourself.”

I wasn’t trying to be funny but it might have come out that way because I said, “I can’t. I sound like blo blah glab. So mom, what are you going to do?”

“I’ll tell her to make more sense.”

So next time I saw her she said, “My dentist likes pizza.”

“Whatever,” I said. I hate pizza. It’s sooo gross.

Next week mom said, “We have to go to the dentist.”

I answered, “Why do we go to the dentist every month?”

“I thought you liked your new dentist,” Mom said.

“Mom, is there something wrong with my teeth?”

“Darling, stop complaining. She’s just getting to know you.”

So off we went to Catie’s office yet again. Hooray. Mom said we had to. The car smelled like chocolate & grape tylenol. Yuck!

Mom why is there grape Tylenol in the car?” I asked.

“There is no Tylenol in the car,” Mom stated. I did not care. Did she think I would? When we arrived, I saw my friend Lipa coming out of the office.

“Lipa, your dentist is Dr. John,” (my old dentist). “Why are you here?” I asked.

 

Mom

Nina always is complaining about the dentist. She hates Dr. John. She thinks he’s super babyish. Nina doesn’t really understand why he is so serious. It’s because he really cares about his job. Today I took her to the orthodontist. She thinks Catie’s a dentist instead of being an orthodontist. She won’t go to the orthodontist so she may flip out when I tell her Catie’s an orthodontist. In the office Nina finds all the machines overwhelming. She can’t figure out why there are so many machines in the office. I think Catie’s a bit annoyed with us. She gives Nina lots of x-rays. Nina is getting really suspicious. I think I’m going to need some help. I guess we’ll just have to wait for Mike to come home from his business trip. I have no idea what to do.

It’s a disgrace. Nina is driving me crazy. I think she’ll never like me, if not love me. It’s crazy her feelings depend on what I make her do. It’s really annoying she doesn’t understand why braces are so important. I wish she knew what I meant. Sometimes it’s really hard to know she doesn’t always love me like she should. She should think about her actions. I can’t really see in the grown up world. After all, her 13th birthday is coming up.

On the phone with Mike:

“Hi Mike. What should we do for her birthday?” I asked him.

And he answered, “Don’t do anything.” He hung up. I guess I’m not getting much out of this phone call.

“Should I call my mom?” I asked myself. No. Mom may be napping. Shoot, she’s home, I thought. I really was hoping she’d ask for a sleepover and of course she comes straight up to my room.

Whaaaa.

 

Catherine

Jeez, Lily’s crazy. Why do I have to be “a dentist.” I think that Lily should just tell Ninaloo, A.K.A Nina, I hate being the new amusing dentist. It stinks. I’m thinking about quitting because of them. I’m an orthodontist for her best friend who had to wear headgear. She thinks it looks hideous. She’s turning 13. I think she can handle knowing I’m an orthodontist. I also don’t see why Lily made me write an entry in the braces diary.

By the way, Lily is Nina’s mom. Nina complains about having machines in the room she’s in. She’s a scaredy cat. Once I was pricking at a loose tooth and she flipped out. I was an hour behind because of her. Too bad Nina’s mom was at the store. The worst time was when I molded her retainer. I put edible silly putty in her mouth and I said it was an X-ray. She thought I was crazy. What can I say. My one question is why Lily won’t let me be serious? Lily just tells me to be humorous. I really hate Lily. She’s completely crazy. She needs to get more sleep. I don’t know. Not that I care. What’s her problem? I can’t see why she is so outrageous. Sometimes it gets overwhelming. Well, here they are. Today I’m doing a normal tooth check. I don’t do this kind of stuff. It’s not my expertise.

I think Lily has lost reality. Lipa is coming to the orthodontist before Nina. I’m so telling her to tell Nina who I really am. I did, and she didn’t listen to me of course.

 

Dr. John

Why does Nina hate me? It makes no sense. Lily says everything with Catie is going well. I’m losing a lot of money since she stopped coming to my office. Thank goodness she’s coming back today. Last night I was on the phone with Lily.

“What should I tell Nina when she comes here instead of Catie’s office?” I asked, and of course she gave me the worst answer she could probably possibly give.   

“I’ll deal with that. You really don’t have to worry.” I worried anyway. Guess what Nina’s first question was when she walked in? “Why am I at Dr. John’s office and not Catie’s?” I went straight over to Lily.

“You said you’d take care of this!!!” I screamed at Lily. All of a sudden Nina got sort of shy and quiet. I was getting really irritated. Why did I ever want them back? Guess what Lily answered?

“I did. It’s just Nina. Oh, she’s suspicious of you.”

“How do you know that, Lilyann Carlee?!!!” I screamed again.

“I’m her mom. I’ve lived with her her whole life,” she answered quite calmly compared to my tone. I hate Lily. Catie and I have been communicating about Lily. We both agree about her. I wish we were done with them. Too bad Nina has to be 16 to start going to an adult dentist. Too bad she’s only turning 13. I wish I kept my old job. I can’t wait for them to move. Which I don’t think they’re thinking about doing. Too bad. That would be nice though. Catie and I can only wish. When will our lives get any bit easier? It’s hard to go through this drama. Can’t Nina be just a bit more responsible? (sighs)

That night I was on the phone with Catie.

“Hi Catie, how are Nina and Lily doing at your office?” I asked her.

“Annoying, of course. Shouldn’t Nina be old enough to handle braces?” She sounded very annoyed.

“How about I write Lily a letter?” I asked, hoping to cheer her up.

“Let me take care of the letter.” I bet she was smirking. I think we had set a trap. A good one. Hopefully she could pull off her part. I wish I could write our plan but that wouldn’t be appropriate because Lily and Nina both write in this journal. I don’t think Nina cares about what anyone writes, even hers. All I know is she’ll be really mad at me later today when I show up at Catie’s office. I don’t think Lily will either. I’m really worried what will happen. I think Catie and I both have a risk of losing our jobs. I hope that won’t happen. I’m not very good at interrogating. I know Nina is. I hope I can get around it. I have to go now. I’ll ship it to Mike ( Nina’s father ) in Las Vegas. Him, I can tolerate.

 

Mike

Lily may be the worst wife anyone could have. I wish I could be in charge of this family, not that I care. It’s only that Lily didn’t make much money to begin with. Now that she’s fired, she makes no money at all. I have to make all the money for nothing in return. That’s the only reason I was so rude to her that night on the phone. I really care about Nina and I want her to lead a good life. Lily is planning all these stupid braces. I wish she’d pay more attention to being fired. I hate her idea to get Nina braces. Every orthodontist Nina’s been to says she has perfect teeth. I really wish I could be around Nina more. I wish Lily and I could just get a divorce and be done. I love Nina. I want to get a divorce while Lily doesn’t have a job because then I’d  be the only responsible parent.  

Nina

Dad and I have been looking into jobs for dentists in Maine for Mom. Dad’s trying to get a divorce. I hope this all works out for Dad and me. Mom is so mean. I know Dad’s trying his best to handle Mom but it’s not working out too well. I hope Dad solves all these problems.  

 

Gummies in Times

gummy-1

Once upon a time, there was a world full of candy. It was currently a Saturday night, and all the candies were coming together for a party, as they always did on Saturday nights. There were many different types of candies, like gummy bears, jelly beans, gummy worms, and many other types of candies. At the party, there was cake, games, drinks, and many other things to do. Everyone always had so much fun! The gummy bears hosted this one, and everyone always loved when the gummy bears hosted the parties. The party was coming to an end, and everyone was leaving to go home. They were getting ready for the next night where they would be getting together with their own candy.

There was a little gummy bear called Gum-Gum. He loved movies about time travel, and he wanted to show the gummy bears the beauty of time traveling. He’d always been dreaming of time traveling, but he didn’t want to do it alone. He wanted to show them so that he could go with someone or some people, so that he would have an adventure with friends. He would be hosting the gummy bears’ party tomorrow night.

He started to make a list of what he would need for all his friends, and his relatives, and all the other gummy bears. He picked a movie they would watch, made sweets, hung up pretty posters, and set up some games, until he was satisfied with the work he had done. The gummy bears split from their family when they are three years old, because they can take on the world then, so he lived alone.

The next day, it was time for his party. Everybody was having so much fun, then he called everyone to come watch a movie. The movie was called “GUMMY IN TIME” and it was about a gummy bear who went back in time to see many beautiful sights, meet many different people, and have an adventure. At the end of the movie, it was time for dinner. At the dinner table, they were talking about going back in time themselves. In their home they weren’t able to travel anywhere, except for where they were. They didn’t have airplanes or time machines or anything like that, so they wanted to build a time machine so they could go to different places, to different years, to different months, to different days, to different weeks. They then started making plans for where they were going to go.

Monday morning, all the gummy bears were all still at Gum-Gum’s house, yawning because they stayed up so late talking. They started to think about building the machine, and some bears started to go out and get some parts.

“How about we go tell Alaboo, the ruler of Candy World, about our idea?” asked Gum-Gum. Everybody cheered in agreement. Gum-Gum and two of his friends, Gummy and Gumby, went off to tell Alaboo.

“Sir Alaboo,” said Gum-Gum, “We have a message from the Gummy Bear Community.”

“And what is that message you have for me?” asked Alaboo.

gummy-2

“We watched a movie last night at the Gummy Bear party about time travel, and we want to try it!” said Gumby enthusiastically.

“No way! You’re staying right here in Candy World!” yelled Alaboo.

“We shall time travel,” replied Gummy.

“No!” yelled Alaboo.

“Yes!” said Gum-Gum.

“No!” replied Alaboo.

“YES!” screamed Gumby.

“Definitely not! I declare war on the gummy bears!” said Alaboo. “Guards! Send them out!” The bears decided they had to tell the community, so they rushed home, full of fear.

They held a Gummy Bear Community meeting, and decided to put aside the time travel project in favor of preparing for the war. They went to get some weapons, because nobody in the stores knew there was a war yet. They decided to tell some candies about their time travel idea, and they joined their team. Some candies did not like the idea, and went to joined Alaboo’s team. They built shields, and took self-defense classes. They wrote a night guard schedule, and went to sleep with the night guard on duty.

In the middle of the night, all the gummy bears were woken up by a bell. The other team had started to attack. Everybody ran out of their houses, grabbing their shields and weapons. The night guard had already started to fight a gummy worm. It was shot by the night guard, and it fell to the ground. Everybody on the other team looked, because they did not expect to get taken down this early. In this moment, the gummy bears took down two more worms. Alaboo was watching from his castle, and was very disappointed in his team. Gum-Gum accidentally shot a bullet, and took down a jelly bean. They had taken down a good part of Alaboo’s army. Even though Gum-Gum had shot a jelly bean (on accident), he was having quite a hard time holding the gun.

“Gum-Gum!” Gum Gum heard his name being called.

“Gum-Gum, watch out! There’s a bullet coming at you! You’ve got to limbo it.” So Gum Gum limboed the bullet. The other team was trying harder to win. Gum-Gum needed to change this. He picked up his gun (even though it was very heavy) and shot it. He took down a Sour Patch Kid. So the other team was starting to get mad. They were starting to lose. They wanted to try harder. They shot and they took down one gummy bear. But that was only one of them. So Gum-Gum shot three bullets randomly in three different directions and each bullet got down another candy. One of them got down a gummy worm, one of them got down a jelly bean, and the last one took down a gummy bear that went to the other side (because he didn’t want to time travel). People started high-fiving Gum-Gum.

“Get back to work,” he said. “If we want to win, we must stop high-fiving each other and get back to work.” And then everybody started shooting randomly and each one took down five gummy worms except for Gum-Gum, who took down three jelly beans and two gummy worms.

“Watch out, Gum-Gum,” Gum-Gum heard Gumby saying. “There is a gummy worm coming toward you!” Then Gum-Gum jumped into the air and shot his gun towards the ground and killed the gummy worm.

There was another one coming towards him. He jumped up into the air again and killed that one. From the side there was a Sour Patch Kid running towards him. He shot that too. Finally, the other team surrendered. Then all the gummy bears went inside to celebrate winning the war. But then Gum-Gum said, “Why didn’t Alaboo want us to be able to leave candy world? Why doesn’t he like us traveling?”

Then Gumby said, “Yeah, why?”

Then a gummy bear called Gamby said, “None of us know!”

“Then we shall figure it out,” said Gummy. Gamby says, “But first we shall get back to our project.”

“No we shall not. We have to figure this out first,” said Gum-Gum.

“When the war was happening, this is what Alaboo felt like (to the Star Wars theme song) gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum guuuuuuuuum,” sang Gum-Gum!

“Gum-Gum, let’s get back to work on figuring this out. It’s your question,” said Gamby.

Then a gummy bear called Gumby said, “Everyone knows that I used to work for Alaboo, right?”

“Yeah, but it is not time to brag about it,” said Gamby.

“No, that’s not what I am saying! He has a diary!” said Gumby.

“So what!” said Gamby.

“It might say why he didn’t want us to leave candy world!” said Gumby.

“Great idea, Gumby,” said Gum-Gum, “But who will go?”

“We’ll have to figure that out,” said Gumby.

Then a gummy bear called Glamby said “I’ll go.”

“Me too,” said Gum-Gum “but we need one more gummy bear to come with us.” Then a gummy worm slithhhereddd in without any gummy bears noticing…

He shouted “I WANT TO…”

“AAAHHH” screamed all the gummy bears. Then they got their weapons and hid.

Then the gummy worm finished his sentence, “I WANT TO TIME TRAVEL WITH YOU! I killed a Sour Patch Kid, a jelly bean, and a gummy worm. Oh, and by the way, my name is Okoh!”

“Okay Okoh, but before we start making our time machine, we have a question for you: why didn’t Alaboo want to let us leave Candy World?” asked Gum-Gum.

“Oh, that’s because he wants to have the power over you, and if you find a better place that you like more than Candy World then he won’t have the power over you, ‘cause he’ll be here and he’ll have the power here. If you’re somewhere else, he won’t have the power over you.”

“You have to give us a reason why we should trust you, ‘cause you’re a gummy worm,” said Gum-Gum.

“Well I wouldn’t have told you that information, and I wouldn’t have killed those three candies if I wasn’t trustworthy, and I have the candies that I killed to show you that I’m trustworthy so you can believe me that I killed them. So here you go,” said Okoh.

“Okay, we can believe you. And also, you have to put those dead candies into your bag again! It’s a little creepy,” said Gum-Gum. “Okay, now we must show you our time machine we built and start going back in time.”

“Yay!” said Okoh.

So everybody piled into the time machine and Gum-Gum pressed the buttons randomly and it ended up that they went back in time to 1780. (Oh and by the way, the year they were in was 1932). WHOOOSSSHHH went the time machine.

“WELCOME TO 1780,” said the time machine. Finally they landed. Then the time machine said, “You have reached your destination. The time in 1780 right now is three o’clock. So everyone turn your watch to three o’clock.” Everyone did.

“I love this time machine,” said Okoh, “Now how do you open the door?”  

Gum Gum wasn’t close enough to the door to open it, but he said, “There’s a password on the door to open it. Press red, then green, then yellow, then red again, then green three times.” So Okoh did that and the door opened.

“WHOOOAAA!”

“Does 1780 look amazing?” said Gum-Gum.

“That’s not what I’m WHOA-ing about,” said Okoh.

“Then what are you WHOA-ing about?” said Gum-Gum.

“How you open the door!” said Okoh.

“Can’t you just get out already?!” said Gum-Gum.

“It’s a little squishy in here,” said Gumby.”

“C’mon, give him some time to WHOA,” said Gamby.

“Okay Gamby,” said Gumby.

“Does my dress look good for this time period?” said Gamby.

“No” said Okoh.

“Really?” said Gamby.

“Really,” said Okoh.

All the women had their legs and arms covered. The men were wearing very fancy suits, like crazy fancy. Everyone groaned, ‘cause the women gummy bears were wearing very short tank top dresses and the men gummy bears were wearing black tank tops and white pants.

Then Gamby said, “Y’know I said we should give him some time to WHOA — let’s just get out of here already!”

“I need a new dress. We all need new clothes,” said Gum-Gum.  So everybody just pushed by him and ran to stores to buy new clothes. The gummy bear men bought very fancy suits. The gummy bear women bought very fancy dresses that covered their legs and their arms. Everybody met together in the end and planned what they were gonna do in the year 1780, but nobody really knew a lot about 1780 (such as myself).

“How about we go meet George Washington!” said the twins Uku and Bom Bom. They were Sour Patch Kids who came to the gummy bear side. So everybody ran off towards his house, which was very near.

“I heard he had over fifty dogs in his life!” said Uku.

“You don’t have to brag about what you know,” said Bom Bom.

“This is boring,” said Gum-Gum. “I thought time travel was gonna be fun! Let’s just get to George Washington already to make it fun.”

“Yeah!” said Gamby, and so did Gumby. “I heard he never went to college. Maybe we can teach him a little bit about what you learn in college!” said Gamby.

“Stop trying to brag about what you know, Gamby. Let’s just go meet George Washington already!” said Bom Bom.

 

Two days later.

“I thought you said it was gonna be a quick walk to George Washington’s house, Gamby,” said Gum Gum.

“Come on, we’re almost there, I cannot even see it!” said Gamby.

“Well then, can you see it already? You’re the only one who gets to walk without carrying the time machine.”

“Well I can’t even see it already, we’re so close I can’t even see it! And I told you that a million times. Actually I only told you three times. But who cares! I told you millions and threes of times.”

“This is not very fun time travel. Now, I see his house already! Yay!” said Gamby. Then, she started running.

“I’m getting so annoyed! Where’s Okoh?”

“Right here,” said Okoh, sticking his head up from under the time machine.

“Oh no! He’s under the time machine! Everybody pick it up!” And then Okoh came up from under the time machine, and then everybody piled in with him. He closed the door with the password that he loved doing and then they went back to 1932 in Candy World.

“I wonder how much fun Gamby’s having in 1780 with George Washington,” said Gum-Gum.

 

Meanwhile…

Gamby was with George Washington, leading him out to meet her friends, when she saw that everybody had left and the time machine was nowhere.

“Oh no! They went back to 1932! Can you help me build a time machine to go back to Candy World in 1932 with my friends?” said Gamby.

“Only if I can come with you,” said George Washington.

“Okay, you can, but I just need help! I want to get back to my friends.” Gamby and George Washington went to Candy World while Gum-Gum went to Alaboo’s castle and told him that he was right all along, and that time travel wasn’t fun, because it was boring and he liked his cozy bed more than other time periods.

Alaboo revealed that he had stuck a video camera into Gamby and he said he wanted to time travel because Gamby looked like she had so much fun. When they were gone, Alaboo had made his own time machine and he had stepped into the time machine and went off time traveling.  

George Washington and Gamby came back. Everybody hugged Gamby and said hi to George Washington.

“He’s very nice,” said Gum-Gum to Gamby.

Then everybody had a party together because it was Saturday night. Without Alaboo.

 

Zoe

Chapter 1

One day, Zoe asked her parents if she could go see the wizards. They said “Yes” and asked her if they could go along.

“Sure, you can,” said Zoe.
“We’re here!” said Zoe, ten minutes later.

“Hi Richard. Hi Bob. Hi Coco, and hi to seventy six more of you,” Zoe said to the wizards, who all return her greeting.

“This is my mom, and this is my dad. I think you can remember them,” she continued. Her mom tried not to freak out, so she took a deep breath in and out. Her dad shook a wizard’s hand. Zoe’s mom was nervous that the wizards would harm her daughter, but her dad told her to calm down.

“If they try to hurt her,” he muttered, “remember, I used to take karate classes. I still know a few skills.” He tried to do a backflip while kicking, but he fell right on his face.

“Are you okay, sweetie?” said Zoe’s mom. Zoe started to laugh.

“What are you laughing at?” her parents asked simultaneously.


Chapter 2

When they got back home, they ate dinner and got ready for bed. When everyone was in bed, Zoe blew up a balloon and put it on her pillow. Then, she put the covers over the balloon so it would look like she was sleeping under the covers. She snuck out the window went to the wizards.

But, on her way, she heard footsteps behind her. She turned around but didn’t see anything. The footsteps got louder and louder. When she turned around again, she saw someone with a black mask on. He picked her up and put her in a van.


Chapter 3

He put tape all over her except for her hands and arms. When he left the room, she remembered that she had scissors in her pocket. She cut the tape off her and ran home. She slammed the door and put her hands against the wall, panting loudly.

She has a lot of questions in her head, like “Why was he trying to kill me? Why? Does he only kill kids, or adults too?” Then she ran to the wizards.

Fifteen minutes later, she arrived at their dwelling. “Wizards! Can you please give me a potion that makes someone fall asleep?”

“Okay,” the wizards said. And then she asked if they could give her a potion that would make someone change their personality so that they stopped kidnapping and killing people. Soon after, when she found a cup of coffee with a lid (so that it would look like normal coffee), she poured the personality-changing potion into it, because she knew that the guy loved coffee –– she had seen him dancing and bobbing his head while drinking five cups of coffee.


Chapter 4

Zoe knocked on the door of the van and placed the cup of coffee in front of the van door. Then the man opened the door and saw the coffee, but he didn’t know it contained a potion.

She went to the other side of the van so that he wouldn’t see her. That’s when she saw in blood letters the words “BE CAREFUL I’M DANGEROUS.”

Nonetheless, he drank the potion and fell asleep. Then, he woke up and noticed that he was a different person. He felt like a nice guy –– not a killer or a kidnaper. He danced all around and was heading for Zoe.


Chapter 5

Zoe took a few steps back. She was afraid he would try to kidnap her again. However, he came over and gave her a hug, but she was still scared so she ran to her house.
Zoe went to bed and tried to forget about what had happened. She couldn’t fall asleep. She felt very confused. She picked up her phone and called 911, and she told the person on the line that there was a guy who tried to kidnap her.

She saw a timer and realized that it said “five hours left until this potion will expire,” which meant that in five hours he might try to kidnap someone else. She wanted him to go to jail immediately.

Five hours later, the man said to himself, “What am I doing behind bars?!”

Zoe said, “Oh, maybe someone called 911. I wonder who did.”

He replied, “You did it!!!”

 

The New Dentist (Part II)

“Mom, why do we have to get braces?!” I yell at her. I am not happy at all.

“You have to get braces. I don’t,” she answers, as if nothing was wrong. How does she do it?

I’ll look hideous. Headgear stinks. My friend Lipa had to wear it. She looked so bad. I can’t shave all of my big hair. Then, I’ll look like I time traveled.

Mom could have at least told me why I had to switch dentists, or not switch and have two. I should have known Mom’s little plan. I was super suspicious of her. Why didn’t I ask? Because, she knew I was suspicious? Now, I can’t help but feel really mad at not just Mom, but even myself. How could I let her get to me?

“Ninaloo!” I hear her call my name. It may be Ninaloo, but I go by Nina. I’ve told her that a million times.

“CALL ME NINA. NOT NINALOO! I’m not coming,” I say.

That’s when Mom sees how mad I really am! So, is she going to do anything? Of course not. She’s a mom. What’s she going to do, magically make my teeth perfect? Even if she did have those powers, she’d probably still let headgear do the work. Just because we’re rich does not mean we don’t need headgear.

Mom always says that I’m fortunate. Some kids don’t get headgear and have real problems with their jaws and may not be able to eat. Too bad. Mom’s also a dentist. Bleh. I hope when I’m an adult or go to an adult dentist, I don’t have to go to her. By then, I think I can pick my own dentist.

Don’t you readers think so? I mean, it’s just so unfair. Mom does not understand at all. It’s frustrating.

 

Louie

Book One

 

1

Louie, a fluffy, white Maltese with his tongue always sticking out, was having a nice nap in his room on the S.S.L. cruise ship. He liked the beds even though the boat rocked a lot.

“Louie, wake up! It’s breakfast time! We’re gonna go soon!”

He woke up, feeling hungry. “Well,” Louie yawned. “Breakfast, then home.”

Louie ate fast (as usual!), and his owners took him home by plane. The cruise was in Florida. He came in from New York, and he was going to his new home in California. He chased his tail which meant he wanted a walk. He liked chasing his tail better than saying “I want a walk,” even though he could talk.

 

2

The main thing that Louie’s owners had to remember was to make sure Louie did not see water towers. He had a huge fear of them after he heard that a good dog got locked in one for no reason. His owners knew that Louie had a fear of them because he told them. Louie only talked when he wanted to, and he only did it whenever he felt it was necessary or he just wanted to say a little something. His owners bought their new house while they were on S.S.L., so they didn’t know the city too well, and they didn’t know that a water tower was only ten blocks away from their home. Unfortunately, the owners went that way on Louie’s walk.

Louie was in the middle of having a chat with a pug. He was telling the other dog about his fear, when the pug said, “Really? You’re afraid of water towers? There’s one right behind you!”

Louie screamed, “AHHHHHHH! WATER TOWER!!!!” Louie ran so hard, that his collar broke off of him. He ran into a forest that had known many dangers, and no one who went in came out alive.

 

3

Louie’s owners were running behind him shouting, “LOUIE! COME BACK! YOU DON’T KNOW THE DANGERS OF THIS FOREST!”

But Louie was too far ahead, so he really didn’t hear them. As soon as Louie couldn’t see the water tower anymore, he thought, Phew, I’m safe! But what he didn’t know was that there were poisonous plants everywhere, a deadly sea monster in the lake, rattlesnakes, and black widow spiders. Or at least that was what people knew. Louie walked a little bit forward and then, looked down to see what he had just stepped on.

He thought, Hm, a little smooth, but why do I want to chew this? I’m gonna look at what this is. He looked down and he jumped up above the trees. It was a skeleton!

 

4

“AHHHHHHHHHH!!! SKELETON!!!” Louie screamed as he ran farther into the forest. Soon, Louie saw huge spider webs with giant black widows on them! And rattlesnakes! Louie was horrified! He ran back while avoiding poisonous plants.

He thought, Oh yay, I’m almost out, I’m safe! till he saw…

 

5

“A SEA MONSTER!!!” The monster was the most dangerous part of the whole forest. The sea monster was green, with huge claws and five eyes (one on his head, one on each arm and one on each leg). Its teeth were very sharp and were twenty feet tall. Its mouth was so big, it could swallow a whole public bus in one swallow without chewing it. It had four humongous horns on the top of its head that were so sharp, that it was sharper than a spear. Louie trembled in fear, and the monster gave a huge “ROAR!” Louie started to fight the monster for a little bit and realized that his weak spot was his right shoulder — he kept on swallowing when Louie was closer to his right shoulder. Louie realized that if he jumped just the right height at just the right place, he could maybe kill the monster.

Louie delivered a bite into the monster’s shoulder which started to kill him.

The monster said while he was dying, “Oh no! I am what made this forest dangerous, and I loved it when the forest was so dangerous!”

The monster died, and the forest was no longer dangerous. The skeletons became people, and there were no black widows or rattle snakes. Louie ran through a field with plenty of plants that aren’t poisonous by the touch to his owners, like dandelions, wonderful grass, even a little bit of some strawberries, apples, blueberries, raspberries and blackberries, and tomatoes (for some reason there was a lot of food!) His owners saw him running to them, so they had their arms open as he ran towards them.

 

6

They got Louie a new collar and learned where the water towers were. They always kept a blindfold, but he rarely used it.

Louie knew that the forest was now not dangerous anymore, but he still didn’t trust it. He thought that maybe there were some poisonous things left, so his owners never went that way.

They were very nice, and since one was a chef, she brought Louie’s favorite food home. His favorite food was chicken, waffles, eggs, French toast, and for dessert, he loved the biggest ice cream sundae that they made with his favorite flavor, chocolate chocolate chip.

Louie thought, It’s been a long day, and I’m sleeping late tomorrow!

 

7

Ever since he had gone into the forest, Louie was a little bit less scared of water towers and never used the blindfold much. He realized that the forest was much scarier than the water towers. Before, water towers looked like they almost wanted to eat him, but after the forest, he saw that they weren’t that scary looking, and he mostly got over his fear.

Besides, now Louie knew that the water towers had a lot of water in them, and Louie liked to swim. If he did ever get locked in, because he had made it out of the forest, everyone promised that they would give him food for the water tower. After he had gotten out of the forest, he also became a bit of a celebrity because no one had come out alive before, and it was always dangerous. Louie had made it out unharmed, and the forest was no longer dangerous since it was under the curse of the sea monster, which he killed with a bite.

 

Book Two

 

1

It was good that Louie was tiny, so if he thought that people and dogs were getting out of control, he could just squeeze out of the crowd.

After he got fame, he befriended Marnie the Dog.They liked to go on doggy trips three times a month, where they got to go to doggy spas, but they went to the dog spas very rarely, since Louie did not like them, and Marnie only liked it once a month. Louie didn’t like the chances of getting a poodle cut because he thought that he’d look silly with all of that fur, especially with all of the bald spots he’d have. He also thought he had to wear bows if he got one, and he would only wear them if they were bowties, and he only liked to wear them two times a year.

Louie’s owners weren’t always happy about him being famous, especially when his fans came into the house, unless it was only Marnie. When the fans came in, usually they made a mess in the house, and they would usually be there for about an hour. Maybe a little bit less, maybe more. But they liked Marnie because she was small, and she was a very sweet dog. Oh, and she didn’t have the problem of making the house a mess.

Louie was in love with Marnie, but he didn’t want to tell her right away. He waited about a month after they had gotten one doggy spa treatment together, then he told her.

He said, “Marnie, I’m in love with you.”

Marnie replied, “Really? Then let’s get married as soon as this is over!” After that happened, they held paws more, but they didn’t kiss, they nuzzled (they thought it was gonna be too gross if they kissed.)

 

2

Louie still had some fears left of water towers, but it only came up whenever he saw the one near the forest in person. Sometimes he was there at bad times, like when he was getting an interview for Pup Magazine. He was being silly a little bit, by barking instead of answering, which made everyone crack up, and chasing his tail when he was asked how he told his owner when he wanted to go for a walk. The reporter didn’t know what he meant when he chased his tail.

He went slightly crazy because of the water tower. He was jumping up and down and whimpering and shaking. His paws were in front of his chest, and he soon calmed down when the reporter took him to a different place. It was right in front of Louie’s house, which Louie’s owners were not very happy about. Marnie wasn’t happy either, since they were almost trampling her.

It was many hours later when some of Louie’s really big fans came in and yelled at Louie about his fear of water towers.

One said, “You can’t be afraid of water towers!”

Another said, “You can’t because it’s such a weird fear!”

That made Louie feel sad. His tail started to droop, and his head dropped. Even his tongue looked like it had drooped. Marnie got very mad at this, and she started to bark, growl, and scratch, and chased them until they left.

Louie was still feeling upset about what they had said, so his owners and Marnie comforted him. They gave him hugs, Marnie nuzzled him, and they told Louie that it was totally normal to have a fear of anything, and that there were some people who were afraid of knees, and there were some people who were afraid of books (these are fears in real life). After Louie heard this, his tail started wagging again, his head perked up, his tongue didn’t look droopy, and he had a big smile on his face. Soon, it was time for bed. Louie walked to his owner’s bed, Marnie jumped up too. Their owners got in bed, and they all fell asleep.

 

3

That night, Louie had a nightmare about his fans chasing him and then eating him. Louie didn’t get a very good sleep that night because of his nightmare. The next morning, more fans had come to complain about his fear. Louie decided to put his house off-limits to fans. Even so, they climbed up the side of his building, and one even gave him poisoned chicken because he didn’t like the fear so much. Louie then said how he was only scared of them and only afraid of one water tower, and he had to see it in person.

Louie decided that it was time for a doggie trip, but he never told anyone except for his owners and Marnie. Louie didn’t have a private jet or anything, so he used a public airplane to go to Ecuador. Louie knew they thought it wasn’t too obvious that he would go to Ecuador. He knew that his fans thought he would be going to China or Florida. He knew that they weren’t going to think about any other countries or states since Florida was the most likely place, and he was pretty sure people would think he was going to China. But he also thought about how people think about that and assume he’d go to the most obvious place — Florida. He knew that people would never think he’d go to some place like Ecuador.

He stayed there for about a month. By then, he knew that everyone had forgotten about his fear of water towers and realized that he was only afraid of one. Just in case, he took the long way back, which took him another month. Luckily, he made no stops in China or Florida, and none of the planes crossed North America or Asia, until he got back home to California.

 

4

By then, everyone just forgot about him even being afraid of water towers. In fact, no more articles about Louie were involved with water towers anymore. However, Louie had been in Ecuador for too long, and he was required to go back and move there. Otherwise, he would only be allowed to stay in North America. This was a very tough decision for Louie because he didn’t want to go back to Ecuador, but he didn’t want to not be able to leave North America. He and Marnie loved to visit France! Marnie and Louie would be so sad if they couldn’t go together to those places that were outside of North America.

 

5

Louie had just moved into a new home, only three months ago. His owners weren’t even finished unpacking yet. He didn’t want to move again, even farther from Florida. Besides, he knew that where he would stay, there would be a water tower literally in front of his house. This was the biggest water tower in Ecuador, and he knew that some people said that no one would actually give you food, no matter how big of a celebrity you were. No matter what promises you had on you.

Louie checked out the house, and he knew that even though it was an amazing house, no one would allow Marnie in the house, only because she wasn’t hypoallergenic. Most people who lived there were allergic to dogs.

Louie really didn’t want to lose Marnie. Marnie had been with him for almost two months now! He just couldn’t bear being away from her. He knew he was going to have to make the hardest decision of his life. Louie needed to know if that was the only house that was left. Luckily, he was also able to buy a whole hotel. However, they couldn’t let him. They said that hotels were too dirty, and that celebrities only deserved the finest. They probably didn’t understand that Louie was a dog! Louie decided that he would go to Ecuador, but he was sneaky.

 

6

He said he’d lived in the house, but he took Marnie in his suitcase. Of course, Marnie got out when they were doing the bag detection. So all of them went, but as soon as they found out that Marnie was there, they got extremely mad.

The truth was, they didn’t know that Marnie was actually hypoallergenic in secret. But like I said, it was secret. Marnie actually never knew it, but after they had spent about a week with Marnie, Marnie hadn’t even shed a hair on the ground, and none of the people were getting allergies from neither her or Louie. Louie and Marnie knew what that meant when they found out — they could stay together!

 

7

Since they couldn’t live in California anymore, the one owner who was a chef got a new cooking job, and the other one got another new job as a lifeguard on the beach.

Louie and Marnie loved running around on the beach, and they both knew that they had made the right choice to move to Ecuador.

 

Treemania

The pirates were being chased by the Eminadlian army. Eminadle was a terrible country ruled by the terrible king, King Fariton. King Farition was a ruthless King who wanted perfection. Every thing he did was, and had to be, perfect. Eminadle was a big kingdom that also specialized in perfection.

Now, these pirates that I was telling you about were led by the great Captain Madoline. Captain Madoline was a female (surprise, surprise) and led a crew of pirates called the Frustrated Failure. Their ship was called The Last Hope. The pirates spent their time raiding other ships and being chased by the Eminadlian army. Let me introduce you to the crew:  

There were twenty of them, including Captain Madoline. Captain Madoline was the bravest captain that sailed the seven seas. She was daring and adventurous. Bob was the brainiac of the crew and always knew what to do. Joe was the cook and cooked excellent meals. Mary was perky and always happy to help out. Bessie originally came from a ranch before she ran away to join the Frustrated Failure. Kate was mostly below deck and helped the seasick pirates. Billy kept an eye out for dangerous sea creatures. Sally kept an eye out for obstacles and other things the ship might bump into. James was always at the mast and kept an eye out for land, as well as the Eminadlian army. Ruth was the “maid” and made the beds and did the laundry. Dink was the cabin boy and swept the floor and helped the cook. Sam was the best with weapons and helped the other pirates train and exercise.  John was very friendly and came to the Frustrated Failure in search of adventure. Josh was the cook’s assistant and was very mischievous. Sara was the treasure keeper, had blue-streaked hair, and wanted the Vikings to win the Super Bowl. Spencer was the prison guard and was very easy going. Lillie was first mate and was very happy. Alex kept track of all the parrots and was called the Parrotman. Katie was happy and always cheerful. Steven was the shark bait. The pirates tied him up and lowered him in the water every time they wanted to catch a shark (they pulled him up just in time though).

***

One day, Sam said, “I am tired of running away. Why can’t we just stand and fight?”  This comment was met with murmurs of agreement. All of the crew was tired of running and ready for some excitement and fun.  

Bob piped up and said, “I have read in one of my books that there is an island called  Treemania. Why don’t we go there and fight?”  

Then, Captain Madoline came to where they were having their conversation. “What is Treemania?” she inquired.  

“Treemania is a giant treehouse that has all sorts of booby traps. How Treemania works, nobody knows. The treehouse seems to run on a secret power and is basically a giant fortress that protects people. It was made by the great magician, Allen Dor, to protect his family. In the fortress, there are ten levels. Once you pull the lever on the top level, every fifteen minutes, the treehouse will shake, and you must find something marked in blue to hold onto or to go into.”  Bob was a little out of breath after giving an explanation like that.  

“Let’s do it!”  cried Captain Madoline. “A new adventure awaits the Frustrated Failure!”  

“Hooray!” shouted the crew.  

“But be warned,” said Bob. “The treehouse is very hard to find because it is placed on a small, moving island that moves along in a large circle around the Bahamas.”

So the Frustrated Failure set sail for the Bahamas.

Finally, after a week of searching, James yelled, “Land ho!”

***

All the sailors excitedly peered over the edge of the ship. Behold! Before them was an island, and on it was the biggest tree they had ever seen. It took up the whole island!  And perched on top of that tree was a giant treehouse! The treehouse was built of strong wood and stone and was ten stories high, just as Bob had said. On the trunk of the tree to the treehouse was a stone staircase that was finely carved and decorated. The pirates were in awe as they stared at the treehouse. Captain Madoline parked The Last Hope on the island so it would not get left behind when the island started moving again.  

The crew gingerly climbed the staircase and entered Treemania. Treemania was even bigger than it had seemed on the outside. Inside the treehouse was all sorts of stuff. A giant set of monkey bars hung over a large gap. Under the floor, the crew heard sounds of splashing and grunting: crocodiles. The stairs were like the ones that they had used to climb up to Treemania. Each level had a different obstacle.  

The second level’s obstacle was a giant trapeze with platforms high above the ground, and if you fell, it was certain death (and crocodiles.)  

The third level had a maze that had cubbies and random spots colored in blue.  

The fourth was open, and the floor was covered in tiles, some blue and some not.  

The fifth level looked like a giant chess board with massive chess pieces. Some of the squares on the chessboard were blue.  

The sixth floor was just doors, but to confuse people, some of the doors were painted blue.  

The seventh floor was empty except for statues and some blue cubbies.  

The eighth floor was like a giant foosball set. Some of the players were red and had red tiles around them, and some were blue and had blue tiles around them.

The ninth floor was completely barren except for some patches marked in blue.  

The tenth floor was made up entirely of stairs, some of which were blue.

As the crew made their way up the steps, Captain Madoline kept a watchful eye out of each window for the Eminadlian army and King Farition. When they reached the tenth floor, which was helpfully stocked with a spyglass and window, Captain Madoline and the crew started searching for the switch to start the magic when they needed it. Finally, Sara found it beneath the top step, and it took the whole crew to lift the heavy step.

Suddenly, James, who was looking out of the window, exclaimed, “The Eminadlian army is here!” Everyone started panicking.  

“Calm down!” Captain Madoline yelled. “Nobody is going to get anything done by panicking.” The pirates quieted down immediately. “Sara, the minute they get in here, can you and Lillie flip the switch and make sure that the stair is fully covering the switch? We don’t want the pirates to see the switch and turn Treemania off. The rest of you, split up and go to different levels. Don’t waste any time. Let’s go, go, go!”  

The pirates split up and ran in different directions. Captain Madoline rushed downstairs, where the army was already climbing up the steps. King Farition strode in (perfectly of course), and Captain Madoline yelled, “Now!”

All the way upstairs, Sara and Lillie quickly flipped the switch and covered it with the step. The Eminadlian army swarmed into the treehouse. Captain Madoline and Bob fought for their lives while hanging from the monkey bars. After a while, Captain Madoline was dueling eight soldiers, and the rest of the crew were battling four.  

Suddenly, the treehouse gave a mighty shake, and most of the soldiers in the army fell onto their knees. Captain Madoline and Bob were hanging onto the only blue bars.  They sighed in relief as the other bars shook violently, making the soldiers fall into the lake filled with crocodiles.  

Meanwhile, on the second level, Katie and Joe were swinging from the trapeze and knocking down pirates. When the treehouse shook, Katie and Joe almost lost their grip, but they didn’t, and a trapdoor opened up, and all the soldiers fell through into a cage.

On the third floor, Ruth and Mary were running for their lives in the maze. When the treehouse shook, Ruth scrambled into a cubby while Mary ran into a spot covered in blue paint. A second later, logs came tumbling down into the maze, crushing the Eminadlian army.  

At the same time, on the fourth floor, Kate and Alex were fighting back to back, taking care to only step on the blue tiles. Every now and then, a parrot would fly out of Alex’s shirt pocket and bite a soldier’s finger. Later, when the tower shook, huge spikes poked out of all the tiles except the blue ones, poking painful holes in the soldier’s feet and giving Kate and Alex the upper hand in the fight.  

Billy and John were fighting on the fifth floor on top of a giant chessboard, only standing on the blue tiles. It was a good thing that they were doing so, because after the treehouse shook, the chess pieces started playing a very fast game of chess, squishing soldiers on the spot.  

On the sixth level, Sally and Steven were running through doors (only the blue ones, of course.) The soldiers, Sally, and Steven were bumping into one another and dueling every now and then. The pirates who were in white-doored rooms were in trouble because the doors stubbornly refused to open, trapping the pirates inside.  

Meanwhile, on the seventh level, Dink and Bessie were fighting and dodging statues. When Treemania shook, Dink and Bessie dived into a blue cubby as the statues came alive and started shooting the soldiers with laser beams. Dink and Bessie snickered in their sanctuary.  

Spencer and James, on the eighth level, were standing on blue tiles of a foosball set and swiping at the soldiers from behind the metal men. After the treehouse shook, the red men came to life and started kicking the soldiers out of the treehouse.  

On the ninth level, Josh and Sam were battling while trying to stay inside the blue patches. When the treehouse shook, giant bags of rocks came crashing down on top of the people who were not in the blue patches.  

Meanwhile, on top of all that, Lillie and Sara were jumping from step to step, avoiding swords and staying only on the two blue steps. While Treemania shook, the other stairs suddenly grew walls and were lifted out of the roof, where the stairs tipped and the soldiers fell into a lake of toothy eels and piranhas.

But one soldier managed to jump out of the box, and landed hard on the top step, which had not gone up as the rest did. The stone step fell away, and he turned off the switch. Immediately, the steps that were going up and in the process of dumping soldiers out came back to the ground, the wall around it disappeared, and soldiers streamed out. On every level, all the machines and stuff turned off and disappeared. The soldiers chased the pirates to the top level. Captain Madoline made a run for the switch, but was quickly stopped by a wall of soldiers guarding the switch.

“Do you have any last words, pirate?”  King Farition sneered. Suddenly, a ghost stepped out of nowhere.

“No, it can’t be…” Bob whispered.

“Who?” asked Captain Madoline, paralyzed by the funny ghost.

“It’s the ghost of Allen Dor!” exclaimed Bob, smiling. The ghost smiled at them, waved, and then flipped the switch again.

“Any last words, pirate?” King Farition pressed. He seemed to not have seen the ghost.

“Yes,” said Captain Madoline. “In the blue, we are as good as new!”

All of a sudden, Treemania gave another shake. All of the steps boosted up and dumped all of the soldiers in the lake, leaving the Frustrated Failure on the blue steps. After that, the Frustrated Failure made their permanent home on Treemania and lived happily ever after.

 

The Peculiar Elephant

Once, there was a weird elephant. He had a long, smooth nose, which was gray, just like other elephants. But the weird thing was he also had butterfly ears!

He did not like his butterfly ears because they were so embarrassing, and everyone at his jungle elephant school laughed at him. But the elephant doctor, Annie, said there was no way to get rid of them.

He walked past someone’s garden, and then, he saw a butterfly fly away and thought it would be cool to try and fly.

At first, he couldn’t really manage to fly. He jumped off a high roof. He flapped his wings a few times, but he still dropped. It felt painful, and he almost sprained his leg. He asked the butterfly to teach him how to fly.

The elephant followed the butterfly’s instructions thoroughly, and after one time, he could fly. After the second time, he flew for a few minutes, but then, he dropped again. So he realized he could fly, but he needed to learn from the butterfly. But after he practiced, he still didn’t know how to fly for a long time.

First, he told his classmates he could fly. He said, ”I… I can really fly!”

His classmates did not believe him, so they said, ”If you say you can really fly, then prove it!”

He took a deep breath, but he was so nervous that his legs were shaking. And he did not manage to fly! He jumped, even though he was nervous, but then, he forgot to flap his ear wings and dropped. He felt so embarrassed.

His classmates snorted and said, “You liar, ha ha ha!”    

He stayed after school in the playground, and when everyone was gone, he practiced again and again by jumping off a high wall. He put a mattress on the ground so it wouldn’t hurt when he fell, and he kept practicing because he really wanted to prove to his classmates that he could really fly.

When he came home, his parents were very worried. They said, “Where were you this whole time?¨

The elephant said, “If I told you, I am very sure you will not trust me!” Then, he walked away with a sad face. He did not sleep well that night. He had a lot of pressure, and he also kept having nightmares.

The next day, he went to school with a tired face. One of his classmates passed by him, laughed and walked away.

The elephant was getting more nervous than before. When it was recess time, his classmates challenged the elephant to fly again. The elephant thought about what the butterfly had told him, and he jumped. He jumped so high, that the classmates could not see him anymore. The elephant flapped his wings, he soared high up in the sky, and he landed safely on the ground.

His classmates were shocked, and they said sorry for laughing at him. The elephant was very popular now! He also performed to his parents, and they were so proud of him. He lived happily ever after. All because of his wonderful and powerful butterfly ears!

 

Missing

“Last seen at Harry’s All You Can Eat Buffet, sixteen-year-old Julian Splitz, from Daily Makeup Tutorial dot com, has gone missing.”

Those words echo in my head from last night’s news. I need to find my sister, and I am going to do just that. I shake my head to get the sad voices out. I hop out of my bed, change out of my pink pajamas into my nice, red Adidas and my flower dress, and head down the stairs. I go straight to the living room. I grab the rusty, gray remote and turn on channel five, Eyewitness News, to see if they found Julian. Nothing.

It’s up to me to find her. Placing my hand on my heart, I say, “I, twelve-year-old Amelia Splitz will find my sister no matter how hard and how terrifying it gets.”

I race back upstairs to my bedroom and grab my dark green bookbag. I grab a flashlight, extra batteries just in case, a 100 dollar bill, and some scissors. I’m not allowed to use anything sharper than that, even if it means I can’t protect myself from whoever teen-knapped Julian. Before I go downstairs, I walk across the hall to my parents’ room. When I open the door, I see my mom sitting up with red eyes, like she got no sleep and was crying the whole night. I quickly and silently close the door so she does not see or hear me, and I walk down the stairs. Before I leave, I go into the kitchen and pack an apple, some bubble gum, Lay’s potato chips, and Cheetos.

I walk out the door and hail a taxi. “45th and Broadway please,” I say, in the politest way possible.

“You got it,” the taxi driver says. “Hey, have you heard about the missing teenager?” he asks.

“Um,” I think about what to say, and then, I finally find the right words. “I don’t watch the news because it’s way too scary for me,” I say. I don’t want anybody to find out what I’m doing because it’s top secret.

“Oh right, nevermind,” he replies quietly. After a thirty minute drive, he finally says, “Here is your stop. That will be $25.52, please,” sadly expecting more money for that thirty minute drive.

“Here you go,” I hand him a twenty dollar bill and then give him six singles. He gives me forty-eight cents back. “Thank you,” I say, walking out of the green taxi.

I walk down the block to come across Harry’s All You Can Eat Buffet. I walk inside. Nobody is there. As soon as someone sees me, she runs up to me desperately and says, “Welcome to Harry’s, the all you can eat buffet. Can I seat you?”

“Nah, I’m just here for a scavenger hunt.”

“No! Please just eat at least one thing! I need the money or at least a tip! Nobody has come here since the missing sixteen-year-old. Have you heard?”

“Um… no, I’m too young to be hearing violent stuff like that. Anyways, I’m just here on a scavenger hunt with my friends, and I need to find a certain food. I just need to investigate, so bye now.”

I walk around the corner to come across all of the dinner tables. I check for clues on every table. Table one just has some crumpled chips on the seats and chairs. Table two has nothing. As I am checking table three, I find a phone on the red chairs. It is Julian’s phone! I turn it on to see if anything was next on her schedule so I could go to that next place, but her phone is dead! I get so mad, I kick over a chair.

“Excuse me, are you okay?” the same waitress asks.

“Yeah, I just realized I was in the wrong restaurant looking for that certain food, so I will be on my way now. Bye.” I grab my sister’s phone and walk out of the resturant with my head to the ground.

I need to charge her phone. I need to go to see where she went next. Everything she does and everywhere she goes is on that schedule! I run home. I have no time for a taxi. After an hour and a half, I finally reach my house.

I walk in and go to my room. I start to charge the phone. As I am charging the phone, I start to think of places she could have gone after Harry’s. She could have gone to eat dessert at her favorite dessert cart, Waffles and Dinges. But they have dessert at Harry’s, so why would she go there?

After another thirty minutes of thinking of places she might have gone, I hear a buzz. I check the phone, and it says the battery is at one hundred percent!

“Yes!” I say, jumping in the air. After I finish doing my happy dance, I grab the phone and check her schedule. On her schedule, it says, “First go to Harry’s, next go to Sugar, the best candy store ever.”

That’s just where I’m going.

I race back out the door and catch the bus. After ten stops, I get off. I look around for the store Sugar, but there’s no sign of it. After the bus leaves, I realize I need to go another stop. I chase the bus so maybe it would stop so I could get on, but when it finally stops, I have run to the next stop. After I take a five minute break and eat two cookies, I walk over to Sugar.

When I get there, it is really crowded! It is going to be hard trying to find clues. My sister’s favorite snack is ice cream, so I go over to the ice cream section. I check tons of tables and try all of the flavors of ice cream, but there’s no sign of anything but delicious flavors.

After three hours, this guy in a green cap and black suit, who looks about 26 years old, and I are the only two left in the store besides the cashier.  He must have no friends because he keeps on asking me what friends are like. I do not have the time, so after answering five of his questions, I start to pretend I do not hear him.

After another thirty minutes, I see a card in the very corner of the room. I smile and pick it up. As I pick it up, I scream, “Aha!” But it is only a business card for a dry cleaner. As I frown, the guy in the black suit is staring at me.

I say, “Um, I dropped this a few days ago, and I really need someone to help me with my dirty clothes.” I don’t think he believes me because after I say that, he looks down at the floor and walks out the door. I sit down as I realize it is too late to continue tonight because the store is closing. I hail a taxi and go home.

When I finally arrive home, I pay the taxi driver and walk up to my room. I sit on my bed, thinking about how I failed to save my sister. As I keep thinking about my sister, tears start to fill my eyes. I can no longer hold them in. I turn to my pillow and let the tears stream down my face and absorb into my white cushion. That night, I skip dinner and go straight to bed in my outfit.

Before I let my eyes shut, I murmur, “Hang in there Julian, I’m coming.”

The next morning, I wake up and change out of my dress and put on some jeans and a purple tank top. I still have leftover snacks from yesterday, so I do not need anything. I grab my sister’s phone and go to the schedule. When I am on the schedule, I see words being typed in. It deletes her plans from the Cross County Mall to an old, beat-up mall near a dark alley.

Why is someone typing on Julian’s schedule? Who is it? I question  myself. I do not know what is going on, so I turn off the phone and walk downstairs. I pack one more cookie, and then I leave.

I hail a taxi and go to the beat-up mall. When I arrive there, I walk two blocks and finally arrive at the mall. I look around, no sight of anybody. Then, after about ten minutes, two tall guys in all black with black masks walk in front of the mall.

I hear them whisper stuff loudly, like, “Well, is she coming? What time did you put it on her schedule?”

“I put for exactly now, 11:30 sharp!”

“Well, Savannah should be coming soon.”

“Wait, Savannah? I wrote it in that girl Julian’s schedule.” As soon as I hear Julian, I knew I am in the right direction.

“What? We already kidnapped that one. She’s the popular one who will make us a ton of money with her makeup tutorials.”

“Oh well, I will just switch it then.”

“No, it’s too late. Let’s go.” The two men start walking away. I need to find Julian, so I decide to follow them.

They stop at the dark alley I have always been afraid to walk near. They walk to a door that has eight locks on it, and they unlock it. They walk in. I am left behind.

I am deciding if I should get the cops so they could break the door down, and I can save my sister. But then, I see an open window not too high above the door. Before I call the cops, I need evidence. I climb on top of a dumpster and a few cardboard boxes and finally hop into the window. There is a ledge when I hop through the window. I look over the ledge. I see three men in black suits and masks. Then, all the way in a corner, I see my sister tied to a chair with a handkerchief in her mouth, stopping her from talking.

I almost cry out “No!” but I hold it in. I hop back out the window and dial 911. “Hello, police department, what can I help you with?”

“Hi, you know the missing teenager? Well, I found her. She is being held captive in an alley on Blackberry Lane between Eighth and Ninth Street. Hurry!”

“Okay, we are on our way.” With that, I wait for them.

After about ten minutes, tons and tons of blue and red flashing cars appear. All the cops get out of the cars, and I show them where Julian is being held captive.

“The door is locked so you have to climb through the-”

I am cut off by the sound of a door being broken down. The loud bang must have scared me because I scream as loud as I possibly can. All of the cops walk inside holding guns that are loaded and ready to fire.

The guys try to escape, but they are surrounded by cops. “Oh great,” one of them murmurs. They both put their hands in the air and are brought into custody. Before they leave, the officers thank me and untie Julian.

“You are one brave cookie,” one officer named Officer Brown says.

“Well, I had to save my sister. I don’t know what I would do without her.”

“Thank you, you are the best sister ever!”

With that, my sister and I hug and walk home, side by side. It takes over an hour and thirty minutes, but as long as I am next to my sister, I am fine.

 

Untitled

Act One

 

CARLY enters wearing a thick coat shivering like the cold has not left her yet. ADDISON is stage left on stage which is decorated as a school hallway with blue lockers lined on the wall.


CARLY
Addy! Science project after school!! The sugar solution,right?

ADDISON
Yep! My house.

 

Bell rings

ADDISON
Yikes! I gotta go to Latin. Peace!

CARLY
Bye!

Act Two


ADDISON is lounging on a bean bag chair with a bottle full of a transparent liquid in her hands. CARLY is on a black leather couch and both are staring at a table set up with bottles full of bubbling liquid.


CARLY
I’m going to get us some lemonade, kay?

ADDISON
All right. I’ll try to pour the liquid nitrogen in.


CARLY exits stage left, opposite of ADDISON, who takes a step forward and spills the bottle on top of her and a wand skids onto stage and lights up.


ADDISON
Yikes! Woah. So sleepy, I’ll just-


ADDISON faints onto the black couch and the curtains close.

                                                                                                                                 
Act Three


ADDISON wakes up in a tiny bed with seven faces staring at her. The stage is decorated with wooden shelves with a couple of jewels and seven tiny beds, one occupied with ADDISON.


ADDISON
Ahh!

DWARF#1
Who are you? Are you like the other girl who came?

ADDISON
Um, Addison. Who are you?

DWARF#2
We are the dwarfs of Sycamore woods. Hey, she might be like the other girl. What was her name? Rose Red?

DWARF#1
Are you being chased by the Evil Queen? And it was Snow White ya dummy!

ADDISON
Excuse me?

DWARF#3
Yikes! You are! She always brainwashes whoever she’s after!

DWARF#4
You must promise never to open the door for anybody! We don’t want to lose another!

ADDISON
Ok.


The curtains close. The only different item is an apple on the bed. The dwarfs are armed with pickaxes.


DWARF#5
Good bye! Remember, don’t open the door!

ADDISON
Okay.

 


The dwarfs exit stage right.

 


ADDISON
Hmmm, I’m kinda hungry. I’ll just eat this apple.


ADDISON falls to the floor after biting the apple. The curtains close.

 

Act Four


Curtains open. The stage is set with a yellow brick  road and perfectly circle trees. ADDISON is dressed in a blue plaid dress and GLINDA is on stage right.

 


ADDISON
What happened?

GLINDA
I am Glinda the Good Witch. You just popped out of nowhere! Are you a witch too?

ADDISON
Witch? A few seconds ago I was with dwarfs! This is messed up. I need to get home.

GLINDA
Why, then you must meet the Wonderful Wizard of Oz!

ADDISON
Oz? Hmmm, where did I hear that before?

GLINDA
The wizard will answer all your questions. Now shoo! And follow the yellow brick road!

ADDISON
Okay, okay. Talk about split personality


ADDISON exits stage left. Glinda waves and “flies” away. The curtains close. The curtains open. The stage is set to appear normal, with TINMAN laying on the floor frozen with an oil can next to him. ADDISON is entering stage right.


TINMAN
Help! Help!

ADDISON
What do you need?

TINMAN
Please oil my joints! I’ve been stuck here for weeks!

ADDISON
Okay.

 

ADDISON picks up the oil can and pours the can behind his neck and sets it behind him. TINMAN
Is no longer frozen and dances around.


TINMAN
Hurrah! Hurrah! I’m free!

ADDISON
What’s your name?

TINMAN
Tinman’s the name! I was out trying to find the wizard,when-

ADDISON
The wizard! I’m off to see him too! Will you accompany me?

TINMAN
Of course dear. I’m off to ask him for a heart, for since I am made of tin,I have none.

ADDISON
I’m asking him for a trip home to Carly.


ADDISON’S face falls, then bravely smiles.


TINMAN
Then come along!

ADDISON and TINMAN exit skipping together stage left. The curtains close and the stage is set the exactly the same except for LION upstage left. The curtains open to ADDISON and TINMAN entering center stage left.


LION
(cowardly)Rawwr.

ADDISON
Oh, what’s your name?

LION
L-l-lion.

TINMAN
Hello L-l-lion.

LION
Can you take me to the wizard too? I overheard you talking. I want the wizard to give me courage.

ADDISON
Come on Lion! Let’s go!

LION
All right!


The group exits upstage right. The WITCH peeks out and cackles. The curtains close.The stage is set up as a garden scene with a few red poppies strayed around.


ADDISON
What lovely poppies!                                                                              

 


ADDISON and the group promptly collapses after smelling the poppies.
                                                                               

Act Five


ADDISON is alone in a rustic pink bedroom with a spinning wheel in front of her. She is center stage and scared.


ADDISON
Lion! Tinman! Dwarfs! Anyone!
The liquid nitrogen! Is it still on me? What is happening! Carly! I’m coming! Please someone take me home!

 


The same wand from Act Two skids onto the stage and lights up. ADDISON spins around and her elbow grazes the spinning wheel. She falls into a deep sleep.                                                                                   


Act Six


The stage is set as Act Two with ADDISON suddenly center stage and normally dressed with Carly by her side.

ADDISON
Carly! Oh I missed you so, so, so, so, SO much!

CARLY
Wait, what happened? I was in the kitchen getting lemonade, then, I’m here?

ADDISON
Um, yeah when did this happen? Ha ha ha ha ha.


CARLY
Anyway, let’s get to work! Liquid nitrogen?

ADDISON
Um, about that…

 

The End

 

Unordinary

It was another normal day: the blue sky, the scorching sun burning the faces of the people outside, and the sounds of the kids playing. I went into my bedroom closet to get my phone out of my jacket. But then, I noticed a framed photo I’d never noticed before. To get a closer look, I took the picture and looked carefully at the image. I knew something about the picture was weird, but what?

Maybe it’s just my head messing with me, I thought.

I got my phone from my pocket and looked at the text messages that I had received from my friend, Daniel: What are you doing man? I have been waiting all day for you.

My friends and I were going out in an empty field to play with water balloons. When we got there, we cleared out the place and started to play. Each person had 240 water balloons.

When I walked home, I noticed that there were advertisements everywhere, but that was not the only thing that was strange. For the first time ever, I realized I couldn’t read any of them right. The words had shifted into this other language I didn’t understand. I was creeped out, but didn’t show it. When I reached my house, I saw that my stepfather was home. My stepfather was mean, brutal, and lazy. He was the rather lazy and selfish type, and he had no manners.

”Go get me a coke from the fridge,” he yelled.

I took the coke from the fridge and gave it to my stepfather. Then, I went to my room. I looked at the strange picture. I stared and stared until…

“My real father!!!” I shouted.

When my mom came home, I was mad at her.

“Why didn’t you tell me before?” I said angrily.

“Tell you what?” she said.

“About my real father!!!” I shouted. “You haven’t told me this since I was born.”

“I — .” She continued, “He was a very special and unique person.”

“So special, I can’t even know about him?” I yelled.

“I’m sorry, but you are special too. You don’t even know who you are.”

At that moment, I was speechless. I didn’t know what to say.

”Then, why don’t you just tell me?” I said in my calm voice.

“I can’t. You must find out for yourself.”

At that point, I stormed into my room and slammed  the door. I was so tired and exhausted from yelling and screaming, I fell fast asleep. When I woke up, I found what I dreamed about strange. It seemed as if it were a memory or vision. I saw my father leave and never come  back. I was too upset about the whole thing that had happened yesterday night. I slumped into the bathroom to wash my face and brush my teeth. I splashed water on my face, brushed my teeth, and headed to the kitchen. I got a bowl and cereal, and ate my food. I felt awful for screaming at his mother.

“Wait,” I said. “Mom, I’m sorry about yesterday. I just wasn’t myself.”

“It’s okay,” she said. “You were right.” She walked out of the door.

Miles, my other friend, texted: Hey, what are you doing right now?

Not in the mood right now. Text you later.

I lay on my bed thinking about the whole situation. Am I so special she can’t tell me who I am? Who am I? Why can’t she tell me who my father is? I always thought I was another normal, ordinary kid. I thought I was normal. Not this weird, super-powered freak.

I just want to be a normal kid. I’d rather be normal than this unordinary person. I want to be me. Man, I hate my life, I thought. Nothing ever goes my way. My terrible stepfather, my poor family, and now, I have to put up with powers. Accept me for me, not that my life is perfect. My life is already terrible, I don’t want it to get even worse by changing even more.

After a little nap, I felt better. I went outside and walked down the block to where my friends were playing.

“What happened?” asked Miles.

”I’d rather not talk about it,” I said. “What are you guys playing?”

“Oh, we’re playing zombie tag,” answered Daniel. “How are you feeling?”

“Fine,” I lied. We played and played for hours until it was time to go home. I said bye to all of my friends and headed home. When I went home, my mom was waiting for me.

“Jack, there is something I need to tell you.”

I sat down. “Is this about me and my real dad?”

“Yes. I should have told you this a long time ago. You were born like your father who was

a merman. You can breathe underwater like him. I couldn’t tell anyone. I thought they would take him away from me. I know you should have known a long time ago, but I was scared for you to face the truth.”

I was so angry. Why do all the bad things happen to me? I just want to be another normal kid, but what do I get? Fins, a tail, and scales. I can’t believe it. Why did I have to be a merman. I just want to be ordinary, but now, it seems I have to be the opposite. I hate my life. I can’t wait for all of this to end.

The next day, I went to the pool to swim. I love swimmIng, and I am really good at it. The water made me feel calm. It was a place where I can actually think in peace. The water always made me feel peaceful and calm, the one place where I could put all my worries away. I got in the cool water and relaxed.

“Finally, peace,” I said. I lay down in the pool for 15 minutes.

“It’s as if I can breathe in water, or can I?!” I took a deep breath just in case and let it all out in the water. “I can breathe in water!!!”

“This is actually pretty cool,” I said. “Wow, I can also talk in water. This whole mermaid thing isn’t so bad anymore. Man, I wonder where my dad is right now?”

I sat for half an hour now, thinkIng about my real father. When I got out of the pool, I saw Miles and Daniel, and I said, “Hey.”

“What’s up wIth you, man. You are more stubborn than usual, and you don’t talk much.”

“Sorry, I have been upset because of my real dad.”

“Well, tell us when you feel like playing. We will be down the block playing.”

“Okay,” I said. I went to the bathroom to take a shower. I put my clothes on, and watched TV. I looked at my phone, picked it up, headed out, and walked down the block to my friends. They were playing tag at the park.

“Hi,” I said to my friends.

“Hey,” they said back.

I joined my friends in tag. We played for a couple of hours. The next thing I knew, it was six o’clock. I went home before my stepfather noticed. When I tried to creep upstairs, he noticed me.

“Where have you been?” he asked.

I said: “I’ve been out wIth my friends.”

“What friends?”
“Daniel and Miles.” I crept back upstairs and waited in my bed ‘til my mom came home. I told her about my day and asked her to tell a story about my real father.

“He was a good person,” she saId, “Very loyal and brave. When people found out about him, they took him away, and they tried to see how he worked.”
“That’s awful!” I said.

“I know,” she said, “I never saw him again. I don’t even know if he’s still alive.”

When my mom was done telling the story, I went to sleep. I was sad that I never got to see hIm. “What if I could find him?” I asked myself. “All my problems would go away. No rude stepfather. I’ll just have a normal life.”

I woke up the next day, energized and peaceful. I went to the bathroom to wash my face. I saId bye to my mom and headed out to play with my friends. I felt better than usual, energized and healthy. I always hung out wIth my friends. We would play tag or play with water balloons, but tomorrow, I would go hiking wIth my mom in the forest.

The next day, we packed everythIng we needed for the trip. When we got there, we made our tents and hiked through the forest. At night, we made s’mores and went to sleep. The next day, I saw somethIng strange.

There was a sign. It shifted into other words, words I could read. It said: To find your father, follow the river and look for another sign. Then, turn left, then right.

“Mom, I’ll be gone for a while. I will come before dinner.”

“Okay,” she said.

I followed the path. It was hard because it was rocky and rough. I stopped when I saw another sign: Beware, it said. I went left, then right. Then, I saw a lake full of water. There was a sign that said to go inside the lake, so I did just that. Before I knew it, I grew a tail and scaley skin. I swam farther down to find another merman.

“Return the legendary pearls, and you wIll see your father again.”

“What did you do to my father?!!!” I yelled.

“He’s right here, and if you want to see him again, you wIll return the legendary pearls.”

“What pearls? I don’t have them.”

“You can’t fool me, child. The pearls have gone missing, and you took them.”

“I don’t know anything about pearls. I just found out who I really am.”

“Look, child. We could do this the easy way or the hard way.”

“I don’t have them!” I yelled.

“If you give me the pearls, I will give you your father.”

“I don’t have them!” I yelled. I swam back up to shore, but the other merman pulled me down.

“What’s your problem, man?” I said. “I don’t have them!”

“Give them to me!”

I was so frustrated that he didn’t believe me, I pushed him down, and swam up to the surface. As soon as I came up to the surface, my tail shifted into normal legs, and my scaly skin turned smooth.  I thought about everything the other merman said. I was frustrated because people thought I was a thief.

I have to go back in there, I thought. I jumped inside the water. My tail and my fins grew back. I swam all the way down to the bottom of the lake. It was empty. I needed to find the pearls. I read the sign, and it shifted into different words.

It said, To find the pearls, turn left, then turn right, and run to the nearest river.

I turned left, and then, I turned right. I searched around to fInd a river. When I found one, I  jumped inside and swam all the way to the bottom. I saw another merman wIth things that looked like pearls.

“What are those?” I asked.

He turned around and looked at me like he never saw me before. He yelled, “You just fell into my trap!” He gave me the legendary pearls and yelled, “Hey look, everybody, he’s come back with the pearls!”

“I knew he took them!” somebody else yelled.

“I didn’t take them!” I saId. “This guy threw them to me!” I pointed at the guy.

“Who would believe you now?” said the person who gave me the pearls.

These pearls could show what happened in the past, present, and the future. I set the pearls to show the past.

All of a sudden, a video expanded for everybody to see.

“You just fell into my trap!” It played back and showed how the other merman passed me the pearls and shouted to everybody that I was a thief. They all looked at him and stood in shock.

“He’s the thief,” somebody shouted, “get him!” They all chased the guy who gave me the pearls. The merman from earlier apologized for accusing me of stealing the pearls.

”I think there is someone waiting to see you,” he said.

Another merman suddenly appeared right in front of me. “Is this my father?” I yelled.

“Indeed, I am,” saId the merman.

“I can’t believe it’s really you!” I yelled. “My mom has missed you so much.”

We swam back to shore. It was almost nighttime, so I had to hurry up. We walked back to our tent. I told mom that there was someone waiting to see her. She turned around. She didn’t know him at first, but then she gasped in sudden shock.

“Is it really you?” she asked.

“Yes, it is,” he said.

She said, “I can’t believe you’re really here!” They hugged for about two minutes. “Thank you, Jack. I could have never done it by myself.”

Meanwhile, my stepfather had heard we got lost in the woods and only tried to find us because of the money he could get.

I can use the money to leave this place, he had thought.

Like I said, he was a very greedy person. Fortunately, he got lost instead. When we heard he got lost, we were not surprised he had come back.

“Should we help him,” I said.

“No, I think he deserved it.”

I finally realized that this is who I am, and I need to accept myself.

Everybody hugged and lived happily ever after.

THE END!

Awkward Family Reunions

Time after time, day after day, people have family reunions. I don’t think anyone really likes them that much. Well, at least, I don’t. So why do we have them? They’re so awkward. We ask our parents countless times, “Why are they so important? Do we have to go?” and honestly, they don’t give a good enough reason for me. I think that is my parents’ way of saying, “I don’t want to go either.” Back to the point: why are family reunions so awkward, and what can we do make them less awkward?

“What makes family reunions so awkward?” you might ask. Well, here you go. One time, a middle-aged woman who was a stranger came up to me and said, “Oh my, Sey, you’ve grown so much. I remember when you were a little baby.” I was asking myself who she was. I asked my dad, and he didn’t give me an answer, so to this day I still wonder who she was.

Other times, I have no one to talk to, and I’m just at a table with some adults discussing politics. And there is always that aunt or uncle who you just can’t stand, who will ask you so enthusiastically the same boring questions that kids just don’t want to hear, like, “How’s your school year going?” or, “Are you getting good grades?” Seriously? Don’t you remember your childhood? NO kid wants those questions asked. These adults just make everything awkward. Even for my dad; he has that cousin who just talks too much, and when he saw him, he said to the whole family, “Rush by.” I kept on asking why he said it, and finally my mom said, “Daddy doesn’t want to talk to him; Daddy doesn’t want to start a whole conversation.” Then, I realized my dad thought my second cousin was annoying as heck. Honestly, once I met him, I realized I’d been standing there for longer than I meant to. By that point, I ran off to talk to my cousin about how I just had the longest conversation about my school year. Point is, avoid these people, because once you are sucked in, it’s very hard to get out again.  

So now I will give you some tricks for making family reunions less awkward for you (but maybe not for others). One, arrive at least one hour later than you are supposed to. You avoid the awkwardness of standing around making small talk with the other early arrivers (who are the absolute worst), and then, your family reunion is only half as long and half as painful. Secondly, pack your own food. Unless you are lucky enough to have your own private chef, you are going to have to eat that lousy, inexpensive, catered food. Take preventative measures and sneak off into the corner with a bag of num-nums. Do not share, unless you dare. Lastly, lie about your life. Before you head into the batcave, create a fictional story and memorize it. Here’s an example: say you live in some exotic place and have a huge house with a private chef, and that you have to call your private cricket instructor to say that you’ll be missing your appointment. I know these tips might sound overly rude, but really, don’t you want to test them out? Pass these tips on. They are sacred. But choose wisely, or everything could go wrong.

So now you know that family reunions are not only your most horrific moment of existence, but also others feel the same way, so you will never be alone on that note. Although you now know some ways to make family reunions less awkward, family reunions will still be that event that no one can say they had fun afterwards. So don’t feel alone, feel awkward. Just kidding. Let’s make these events less awkward and less painful!

 

The Thief

Part I

One morning, I wake up. I go to get dressed. When I open my closet door, a guy wearing black jumps out of my closet with a gun! I am so surprised. I don’t know why he is in in my room, but I have no time to think of that.

I go and run to my desk and get my gun out of my drawer. He tells me to put my hands on my head, but I don’t listen. He does not shoot me, but I fire one shot, and I miss. He shoots a bunch of bullets. He misses me, but he hits my desk. One of his bullets breaks my light bulb. It shatters all over my desk. Then, one bullet hits my foot, and I yell out in pain.

My parents come into my room. They take my gun and shoot the person in the head, then in the stomach. He has blood pouring out of him from all directions. Then, my parents call 911. The police and an ambulance come. The police puts crime scene tape all over my house.

Then, the ambulance takes me to the hospital. They tell my parents they will be taken in for questioning, and when I’m finished recovering, I will too. Today is a crazy day.

After a month of recovery, they fix up my room, and I am taken in for questioning. But I am innocent.

Part II

Today is the first day of August. Today, I go to be questioned at the police station. When I get there, they tell me to sit down in the waiting room. After about 20 minutes of waiting, they bring me into an office and tell me to sit down. Then, an officer sits down at the desk and tells me his name, but I don’t remember it.

He asks me questions like, “What did the man look like? How old did he seem? Did he take anything of yours? Do you have any other evidence of who he is?”

I tell him what I know. Then, he shows me some pictures of some suspects, and he tells me to pick which I think looks the most like the criminal.

Part III

Today is the day the police call me to the police station because they found the guy that broke into my house. When I get there, I go to the front desk, and the receptionist takes me into the same office that I was in when I was questioned.

In one chair is the guy who broke into my house. He is handcuffed. Then, sitting at the desk is an officer. When I sit down, the officer tells the thief exactly what he did and why he should not have done it. The thief is told to say why he did it.

The thief says it was because he was forced to do it.

Then, the officer goes out of the room, and he tells two officers in the break room to come into the office and arrest the thief. They come in, and one of them puts the thief in handcuffs, and the other one shoves him out of the office and puts him in a police car. The officer tells us that the thief is going to the local jail before he goes to court. The cop tells us we can go home.

Part IV

Today is the day that the thief is going to court to see if he is guilty for breaking into my house. When I get there, the guy is there, wearing an orange prison jumpsuit. I am right on time for the courtroom. The judge calls the case to order. The judge invites the city’s lawyer to present the case to the judge.

The city’s lawyer says, ”This thief robbed the house of the plaintiff. He almost killed the plaintiff.”

Then, the judge tells the defendant’s lawyer to present his side of the case.

The defense says, “That the thief was being blackmailed.”

The judge tells the jury to go into the deliberation room for about an hour and a half. I go to lunch right around the corner from the courthouse. After I am at the lunch place for five minutes, a security guard from the courthouse comes and tells me that the jury came out. I go out of the lunch place and back to the courthouse.

The jury is waiting for me. They have already talked to the judge. Then, the jury announces that they think that the thief is guilty.

Part V

The next day at school, everyone has seen what went on. Either they have read it in the newspaper or saw it on TV. When I get there, all my friends come up to me.

The first one says to me, “Dude, I heard you almost got shot. Are you ok?”

“Sure, yeah. I’m fine,” I say.

“What does it feel like to be in court?” my other friend says.

I say that it is pretty scary.

When I have my first class, the teacher has not heard that I was involved in the case.

So she yells, “Why have you been away for a whole month?”

I show her the CNN article on my phone that says, “Ten-year-old boy attacked.”

My teacher says, “Oh my God! I’m so sorry. I did not know.”

After that, she says that she will give me all A+s for the rest of the month!

 

Zachary and All of His Adventures

Once upon a time, there was Zachary and his little brother, Josh. They had gotten their new house near the beach with their dad and mom. Their mother told them they could go outside, but to stay close to the house.

Zachary and Josh went to the beach, and Josh said “I’m scared of the water.”

So Josh ran away from the water, but Zachary picked up Josh on his back, and they both went down in the water. As they went down in the water, a slimy seaweed hooked around Zachary’s foot, which made Josh tumble off of Zach’s back and made them to go deeper in the water. They tried to get out the water and swim up to the shore, but they noticed their bodies going into this hole.

In the hole, there was a cable that connected to the sand. Zachary and Josh got out the water, and both found themselves in a sand maze. So then, they held each other’s hands really tight and looked around to see if they could get out. But then, they realized it wasn’t a maze. It was ladder, so they climbed out the “maze” and then, went back home.

Zach told Josh to stay in his room until he got back, or they would be in big trouble. So Zach stayed home with Josh, and he heard a crocodile biting on the door!!!

So then, they looked in the kitchen, and they looked for any weapons to attack the crocodile. All they found were knives, forks, and spoons, so what they did was throw them at the crocodile. The crocodile got stunned by all of the knives, forks, and spoons. Then, Josh went into the back of the house, and checked if he could find a stroller to hit the crocodile. After the crocodile heard that Josh was getting a stroller, it went to the back of the house. Zachary pulled the crocodile’s, tail, used the knife to cut off the tail, and grabbed three more knives to stab it. After he stabbed the crocodile, it chased after him. Then Zachary went into the house again, locking every door. Then, he realized the crocodile could have crawled through the hole, but the crocodile was dumb enough that it didn’t crawl through the hole. It jumped on top of the house.

Josh found the stroller, but he didn’t see the crocodile because he was too busy looking for it. He gave the stroller to Zachary because he was older than him, and then Zachary threw the stroller. It knocked the crocodile off the roof. Then, the crocodile opened its mouth, big and wide, and tried to snap at Josh. But then, Zachary threw a plate into its mouth, and then it started choking to death.

After that, Zachary and Josh said, “We need to clean up this mess before Mommy comes back.”

So they picked up all of the pieces and went to the store to buy new pieces and get replacements for what was there. After they replaced them, their mother came back and said, “Good job. You kept the house, clean and nice. I’m proud of you two.”

After she gave the compliment, a big dragon came and breathed fire around their house, so they were surrounded by fire. They had one thing: a big, giant flamethrower gun. They used the flamethrower gun wisely. They burned the dragon’s tail, then used the knife to cut off his tail, then the flamethrower in its mouth until it was dead. After it was dead, they pushed it into the ocean.

Then, they went to the beach and built a sandcastle, jumped in the sprinklers, and had fun. But not a single piece of the house was broken after the dragon breathed its fire. They all got bits and bits of water and splashed it onto the fire, and then the fire was gone and turned into smoke.

While they were getting water, they fell on a boat and washed onto sea, and that was all of them. They looked under the water, and they saw a megalodon’s fin. They swam as fast as they could, and then the megalodon bit onto the boat. Everyone started using the paddles and hitting it in the eyeball. They still had their paddle steamer on, and they broke it so it went into the megalodon’s throat. They still had the flamethrower fully charged, so they burned the megalodon to pieces, and they sailed back to sea. They also took some fish.

Then, they had a good family dinner, and they had ice cream for dessert.

 

 

The Fight

SCENE 1

The classroom

LILY

Hey Emily, I got you some Starbucks. Your favorite: vanilla latte.

(Hands it to EMILY)

EMILY

Good, I am so thirsty!

(Drinking the latte)

LILY

I heard that there is going to be a new girl today who came from another school.

EMILY

Which school?

LILY

I don’t know, I think it was on 81st street. But then they moved here on 25th street.

EMILY

Good, I need a new servant.

LILY

What?

EMILY

Shut up and come with me.

New girl walks in

LILY

Look, I think that is the new girl.

EMILY

Come with me.

Walks to new girl

ALICE

Hello, do you know where room 6 is?

EMILY

OMG, LIKE, I’M GOING TO THAT CLASS TOO.

Everyone looks at them

EMILY

Lily, go and get me another latte, and make it a large.

LILY

Okay.

They walk up to Room 6. They walk up to the teacher.

EMILY

Mrs. Peters, this is my new friend, Alice.

ALICE takes a seat. Class starts.

MRS. PETERS

Okay, kids, take your seat. I’m not getting any younger.

LILY walks in with a vanilla latte.

EMILY

(to Lily)  You’re the best.

Later on….

EMILY passes note to ALICE. EMILY raises her hand.

EMILY

Mrs. Peters, can I use the bathroom?

MRS. PETERS

You need somebody to go with you.

EMILY

I pick Alice.

ALICE and EMILY exit.

SCENE 2

In the bathroom

EMILY

So did you get my note?

ALICE

Yeah.

EMILY

So do you want to be my friend?

ALICE

Sure, I really do need a friend.

EMILY

If you are my friend, it requires getting me whatever I want, which really means getting me Starbucks, and if you do that then that means that you won’t get paid, and if you fail one of those tasks you will NEVER be my friend.

ALICE

Oh uhh, no thank you. Who would ever fall for something that stupid?

ALICE walked out of the bathroom, but EMILY still followed.

EMILY

What about only for one day? I do need the help.

ALICE ignored EMILY and walked back to the classroom.

EMILY

Look Alice, you can get paid if you get me my phone from my locker.

ALICE

How much?

EMILY

15 dollars. Oh, and my locker number is 4,15,6,18.

ALICE

Just come with me then.

EMILY

Do you want the 15 dollars or not?

ALICE

Fine. (Walks to locker)

SCENE 3

The lockers

ALICE

What was the code again? 5,12,3,14? No… Was it 7,86,0,76?

LILY sneaks up behind ALICE

LILY

Hey

ALICE jumps.

ALICE

You scared me.

LILY

Sorry, sometimes Emily can be so rude.

ALICE

I know, she passed me a note saying, “Do you want to come to the bathroom with me :)” And the next thing you know, I am in the bathroom talking about forming a club and doing stuff for her.

LILY

I had it worst. Emily forced me to join this stupid thing.

ALICE

Then why didn’t you stand up to her and tell her “no”?

LILY

I am just scared.

ALICE

Why are you scared? She is a human being, just like you.

LILY

I know that, but she can be scary most of the time.

ALICE

Just give me the code to her locker.

LILY opens up the locker.

ALICE

(Grabs phone out of the locker.) Thank you.

LILY

Wait, let’s just go and explore her locker.

ALICE grabs a piece of paper that fell out of her locker and LILY reads it out loud.

LILY

“The tough kids of the school and I are going to team up on Lily.”

ALICE

(Gasps) I can’t believe she’s going to do that to you.

LILY starts to cry.

ALICE

Don’t worry, we’re going to stand up to Emily.

ALICE puts the paper in her pocket. They go back to class.

ALICE

Here is your phone. (Plops the phone on the table.)

EMILY’s note falls out of ALICE’s pocket. EMILY picks it up and gasps. The bell rings and they walk out of the classroom.

EMILY

Why did you take that note from my locker?

LILY

We didn’t do that.

EMILY

Yes, you did. Why did I see it on the floor when you walked into the classroom?

ALICE

When I gave you your phone, the note was attached to your phone.

EMILY

That’s not true.

LILY

Yes it is.

ALICE

Where’s my 15 bucks?

EMILY

Here you go.

EMILY shoves 15 dollars into ALICE’s hand.

ALICE

Thank you.

SCENE 4

The cafeteria

ALICE turns to LILY.

ALICE

Do you want to sit with me at lunch?

LILY

Uh, okay.

EMILY

What? No! You have to get me another latte!

Everyone looks at EMILY.

LILY

No, I don’t have to do whatever you want.

ALICE, LILY, and EMILY go to the cafeteria.

LILY

Come over here, Alice. Let’s sit at this table.

ALICE

Okay.

EMILY

What about me?

LILY

No.

ALICE and LILY sit at the table.

ALICE

Maybe you took it too far, Lily.

LILY

No I didn’t. Emily’s being rude.

ALICE

I know I’m the new girl and all, but I’m not gonna be rude to somebody.

LILY

Come on, Alice.

ALICE

No.

ALICE walks and sits with EMILY.

ALICE

Sorry about that.

EMILY

It’s okay. I never had a friend turn on me.

ALICE

Well, maybe it’s because you’re getting on people’s nerves.

EMILY

Well, I am so used to being spoiled.

ALICE

Well, this is school, it’s not your home, so you have to be nice to people.

EMILY

I want to be a changed person.

ALICE

I know. Maybe tomorrow you can act a little nicer to people.

The next day

ALICE

Hey, Emily.

EMILY

LOOK I GOT MY OWN LATTE TODAY

ALICE

Hi-five!

ALICE gives EMILY a hi-five.

LILY

Hey, rude much?

ALICE

Lily, stop. You are being rude.

LILY

But Emily was being rude yesterday.

ALICE

Yeah, she WAS being rude.

LILY

Well, I can make my own friends.

ALICE

Then go and do it.

LILY walks away and bumps into MIA. They stare at each not knowing what to do LILY looks shocked.

LILY

What am I doing? Introduce her to the school.  

LILY

Hi.

MIA

Hi.

LILY

Are you new here?

MIA

Yes.

LILY

I can show you around.

ALICE

We did it!

EMILY

Yeah, we did.

ALICE and EMILY hold hands and bow.    

THE END

The Magic Flower

Once upon a time, there lived a girl named Laura. Laura’s favorite thing was chocolate. But her second favorite thing was flowers. Pretty, nice-smelling flowers. She just loved to pick flowers, and to play with flowers. And when they died, she even made a funeral for flowers. Now, enough about what Laura’s favorite things are. Let’s get to the story.

It was a bright Sunday morning, and Laura woke up a lot more early than usual (at 6:00).  She could not watch TV until 8:00. So she thought of what to do. And thought of what to do. And thought of what to do. And finally Laura had he it narrowed down to two things. She could sneak some chocolate, or pick flowers, She realized that she only had one choice, to pick flowers. She could not sneak chocolate, because her mom hides it.

So Laura went downstairs, to the porch, and to the backyard. She decided to try to find a new type of flower. A kind that nobody had ever found before. She looked here. Just a sunflower. She looked over there. Just a rose. She looked almost everywhere. But Laura could not find a new type of flower. She decided to give up after only fifteen minutes passed. Yes folks, I know it’s very short, but do not blame me. Laura is lazy.

Just when she got up, she saw something. It was big. It was beautiful. It was… a new kind of flower. “Wait a second,” she said. “Why would a new flower grow in my backyard and not someone else’s? Well, I’ll just check to be sure.” She googled it ten times, but there was no match. Yippie! It was a new discovery. Laura pinched herself, trying to wake up, but she could not. It was real.

She could not wait to tell all of her friends. But being so happy about flowers made Laura wonder about chocolate. She sighed. I wish I had some chocolate, she thought as she squeezed the flower tightly in her hands. Then suddenly the it started to shake. Its petals moved as if it was doing some kind of dance. Then suddenly… poof. A cloud of dust covered Laura’s sight. When the dust disappeared, she looked inside the flower. There it was. A creamy, hard, light brown bar of chocolate. She pinched herself about 1,115 times. (Laura had pinched herself so many times that it started to really hurt.)

She ate the chocolate. It was delicious. “Wow, this is a perfect combo,” Laura said, “flowers and chocolate.” She ran to her friend Mimi’s house. “Mimi. Mimi. Mimi.” Laura shouted the moment she got to Mimi’s bedroom.

“What do you want?” Mimi said, she was exhausted. “It’s three in the morning.”

“No it is not,” Laura screamed excitedly. “Set your clock to the right time. It’s 7:00. Come to my house now. There is something I reeeaaallyyy want to show you.”

“If I come to your house and you show me what you want to show me will you let me go back to sleep?” said Mimi as she took off her sleeping mask.

“Fine,” Laura said flatly. “But you won’t want to,” she whispered.

“What did you say?” asked Mimi.

“Nothing. Chop chop, come on, let’s go.” Laura yelled as she dragged Mimi out of her house.

“I’m sure what you dragged me out for is not worth losing all the wonderful sleep I was getting,” said Mimi.

“Hold this flower.”

“Why?”

“Because.”

“Fine.”

“Now,” Laura directed, “think of something you really, really want.”

“I want you to leave me alone.” Mimi said.

“Har-dee-har-har,” said Laura.

“Think of an object, like let’s say, a computer.”

“Okay,” Mimi replied.

“Now, close your eyes, think of a computer, and squeeze the flower.” Mimi did as Laura had told her and was amazed at the results. She. Was. Speechless. Mimi even pinched herself sooo many times that she had about a million cuts.  It took Laura three hours before she could cover all of them with band-aids. It also took Laura three hours before she could get Mimi to talk. “You can go home now, Mimi. I showed you it.”

Laura ran to her mom, and was about to tell her about the magic flower when she stopped. If she told her mom about the magic flower, she would use it against Laura. If she broke a window her mom wouldn’t let her use the magic flower and so she wouldn’t get what she wanted. So she decided to keep it secret. She said, “Coming, Mom. One second.”

So then she took the magic flower and she dug a hole next to her favorite tree. Then she ran to her mom yelling, “Coming Mom, wait just one second”

And her mom answered, “Okay Molly, I mean Laura. Heh heh”.

When she got there she yelled, “Hey mom, guess what, I found a magic f

She stopped. She had almost spilled the beans and told her mother about the magic flower.

“ A magic what?” asked her mom.

“A magic…fish pizza, That also includes pepperoni, mushrooms, pineapple, and relish,” answered Laura nervously.

“That’s just in your imagination,” said her mom.

“Yeah.”

“Ummm… okay.”

“Phew, that was a close one,” Laura said to herself.    

Laura’s mom called Laura over for brunch, because she missed breakfast.

“Mmm… this is delicious. I wish we could have this every day,” said Laura.

Then she remembered she could have it every day.

“Ummm, mom? I have to go to the bathroom. May I be excused?” asked Laura, who was proud of herself for not talking nervously.

“Okay,” replied Laura’s mom.

Laura ran to the hole she had made next to her favorite tree, and dug up the magic flower. Then, Laura took out the magic flower and squeezed tightly and wished that she could have brunch every day. The flower shook, and a cloud of dust appeared, but nothing was in the flower. Laura was worried for a moment, but then she realized that she would have brunch every day. Right that moment, Laura remembered that she reeeaaally wanted a pet poodle. So she wished for a poodle, and a cute little puppy appeared inside the magic flower. The puppy started jumping, leaping, playing, and peeing.

“Eeew,” screamed Laura in a disgusted voice. Then, the puppy started licking Laura’s face. “Stop licking me,” she yelled. The puppy started lying on the ground and crying with its sad puppy eyes. She took the puppy and hugged it in her arms. The puppy looked very cold, so she wished for a puppy jacket. The puppy jacket was black leather, and it was very stylish. It had gold buttons and a silver zipper and puppy pockets. The puppy looked very warm and started jumping on Laura’s head.

Laura was about to show her mommy the adorable little puppy that she had named Poppy the poodle, but she couldn’t. If she did her mom would get suspicious, and ask her how she got the poodle. Since Laura is reeeaaally bad at lying, she would have eventually told her mom.

Laura’s tummy grumbled. She buried the magic flower and went back to brunch. Now, there was even more food than before. There was a stack of pancakes that was three feet high, a pile of hot french toast, and a bowl of plump and juicy sausages.

“Mmm, I’m in heaven,” she said sleepily.

Laura ate and ate and ate and ate and ate and ate and ate, until she could eat no more.

“Ohhh… I’m full. I want to go to sleep,” Laura groaned.

Laura’s mom carried Laura to bed. Laura slept for many long hours, and before she knew it, it was morning.

“Time to wake up,” Laura’s mom shouted the next day.

“I don’t wanna go to school,” Laura moaned.

“Okay,” agreed her mom.

“Really?” asked Laura, who was starting to get excited.

“No,” her mom shouted at her. “The only way that could happen is if you found something magical…” said her mom.

At that moment, Laura remembered that she could do it because she did have something magical.

Laura ran to her backyard and dug up the magic flower. She thought of not having school and squeezed the magic flower.

Right after, she wished that she appeared in her cozy, warm, bed. Laura went back to sleep.

“Zzz….” She was snoring.

Laura had slept for three days straight without even noticing. Finally, she woke up. Laura went downstairs and dug up the magic flower. She wished for food for her puppy. She also wished for brunch for herself. Then, she woke up all her friends and told them to come to her backyard.

She said, “Think of something you really want and squeeze this flower, and you will get it.” So they spent the rest of the day wishing for stuff they really, really, really, wanted. When they had finished, she asked her mom if they could have a sleepover and she said no. So she took the magic flower and wished that they could all could have a sleepover and have their very own king-sized beds.

In the morning, Laura wished for breakfast. Then, she told them to go home. Laura wished for a bouncy castle. Then, Laura wished for a pet unicorn. Then, she wished that she had a mansion. Immediately, her tiny house turned into a gigantic mansion. Her friend heard the racket and asked if they could join. Laura said, “Yes.”

They jumped and played and when Laura wished for a pool, they swam in the pool. Laura threw a six months early birthday party. Laura wished for a trumpet dude named Billybobjoepenny to play a song for her everywhere she went. She wished for a butler. A red carpet everywhere she went. And to be famous.

When Laura was about to wish for a 200-inch plasma TV, her mom came in and told her to stop getting all this stuff. “Return all this stuff from where you got it,” said her mom. Then, Laura got so angry that she wished her mom would go away and never come back. Laura finished wishing for a 200-inch plasma TV.

Her friends asked if they could come and play with her, but this time she said no. Laura spent the rest of the day signing autographs and she was sooo famous. Laura wished for a spinny chair. She wished that she could go back in time and be the one to invent the lightbulb. She wished that she had a computer. She wished that she had an iPad, a phone, 365 shoes for every day of the year, all the clothes in the world, brand new socks, a billion dollars, a trillion dollars, and for Jupiter to be named after her, instead of a Roman god. She wished for a musical, a book, a movie, and a CD about her life. She also wished that she could have a video game about herself, and that she could have a puzzle and download every game she wanted for free, and that she got to meet her favorite singer, Taylor Swift. She wished that she owned every single book and movie in the world. She wished to go to the future to watch every movie that would ever be made.

Laura wished for everything you can think of. She wished for a personal trashcan, and that she could meet the Tooth Fairy. She wished that candy was healthy and that she could eat whatever she wanted.

Her friends kept asking to play with her, and she said no every single time. No matter how much they begged and pleaded and gave her gifts. She always said no. Laura wished that she could know everything that she hadn’t wished for. She wished for earplugs, so she wouldn’t have to hear her friends asking her to play all the time. She wished that she had a lifetime’s supply of dumplings and she wished that Billybobjoepenny could play better songs. That was the only wish that made other people happy.

Laura wished for the world’s largest pizza, she wished for a gigantic sandwich.

She wished that she had a cake. She wished that she could eat whenever she wanted, and not get fat.

But soon Laura realized that she was kind of lonely. She wanted to share her stuff with her friends. She went to her friend’s houses, but they did not want to play with her. The next day, the tax letter came. Laura got so many stuff that it was even more money than she had. She wished she had her mom back. Laura’s unicorn started to poop everywhere, and she couldn’t stop it. Laura’s poodle started to get really hot, but, when Laura when took the coat away, it was too cold.

When she tried to wish for her unicorn to be gone, she found out that she had to wish for all of her wishes to be gone. There was some things she wanted to keep, but she decided that having a normal life was better than having everything she wanted. She took the magic flower and screamed, “I wish that all of the wishes were undone!” as loud as she could. Then, everything disappeared and everything was back to normal. Laura took the magic flower and threw it as far as she could. It landed in somebody else’s backyard, and planted itself there.

Laura was happy her life was back to normal. A mile away, in the place she had thrown the magic flower, somebody else had discovered it. Billybobjoepenny was summoned again and the flower was now passed on to someone else….

THE END.

Fred the Penguin

Chapter 1

A baby penguin named Fred wanted to make a nest, but he was too young. Young penguins don’t make nests; they collect rocks. When they’re adults, they make their actual nests. Fred lived in the North Pole. He was the best penguin at ice skating. He loved to ice skate. He ice skated with other penguins, and the other ones kept falling, but Fred didn’t. They were jealous of Fred. But still, he had different kinds of penguin friends, like adult penguin friends. The other penguins were better at catching food.

A seal named Bob always spotted Fred and wanted to eat him, but Fred was too fast. Fred was eating cheese puffs, when suddenly, Bob turned up. Fred swam very fast to the shore. He ran because Bob could bash and break stuff. Fred couldn’t be too close, because if Bob bashed into the ice, Fred could fall, and then, Bob could eat him. So Fred ran to somewhere safe.

Fred ran to other penguins. He called to them to go to Bob. The other penguins scared away Bob. There were too many penguins. The penguins felt excited, so they decided to have their own penguin party and invited their friends.

Chapter 2

Then, more seals came! They bashed and bashed and the ice kept on falling. Then, the other penguins went crazy. But Fred didn’t. He swam underwater, and then, he trapped the seals so they didn’t bash anymore. He was super fast. Then, he grabbed some cheese puffs, and he ate them — and then, shot them out of his mouth into a seal’s face. The seal went down. He crashed into the surface, and then, he died.

Fred swam away fast up to shore. The seals bashed, and he fell down. Fred fell down onto a seal’s back. He rode the seal and bashed into the other seals, and then, they fell down and died. The seal that Fred was on was Bob.

Chapter 3

Bob tried to get him off. Then, when he got Fred off … another penguin came, and his name was Flame. He distracted Bob while Fred swam up to shore. Flame swam very, very fast up to shore. Flame was an adult penguin. Flame liked ice skating. Bob was gone now.

Then, they saw a fin in the water. Flame said, “It’s a shark.”

Fred said, “No, it’s a dolphin.”

Then, they saw a shadow in the water. It looked more like a shark. Flame was right. It was a shark.

All the penguins panicked. They waved their flippers and ran around. They squeaked. Then, Flame swam underwater, and Fred and all of the penguins did too. They tried to kill the shark.

The shark said, “I’m good!”

So then, the penguins swam back to the iceberg.

Then, Flame said, “I see a fin that’s black!”

Fred said, “It’s a killer whale.”

Then, they swam underwater, and they saw two killer whales. One killer whale tried to eat the penguins. The penguins were too fast, and the killer whale swam away. The other one tried to eat them, but they were too fast, and then it swam away.

Then, they had another party. But then, another shark came and bashed into the iceberg, and a big chunk of the iceberg fell.

Chapter 4

The shark attracted other sharks. Five sharks came, and they kept on bashing until it was super small. The penguins swam underwater.

But then, a dolphin came and said, “Hop on!” and the penguins hopped on. The dolphin swam away. The shark followed, and then, more sharks came. There were a billion sharks.

The dolphin said, “Look!” And the other dolphins swam very fast. But they were underwater. Then, the penguins swam on the dolphins, so then, the dolphins went faster.

They went to a bigger iceberg, but then the penguins said, “There’s polar bears in there.” So they went to a different iceberg and they said “That’s good.”

They lived there, and the dolphins said, “Bye!”

Then, the sharks came and chased after the dolphins. Bob came. And then the sharks came, and Fred saved Bob from getting eaten by a shark when the penguins lifted Bob up onto the iceberg. So then, Bob became good.

Fred swam underwater, and then a lot of killer whales came. And then, Bob saved Fred’s life. He swam underwater, picked up Fred on his back, and then jumped onto the iceberg. And then, they became friends.

Since Bob was the leader of the seals, he said to the seals, “We’re friends with the penguins.”

And the seals said, “Okay.”

While Fred and Flame were ice skating, the seals guarded the iceberg because then, no enemy could come and ruin the party. The rest of the penguins were still jealous because they were not really good at ice skating. But Fred didn’t care.

 

Dramatic Fall: The Dramatic Story of When George Washington Went Skiing

It was December 25th, 1776, when George Washington buckled his boots and slid his feet into place on the dreaded wooden skis.

“I can do this,” he said to himself, nervously, before hopping onto the oncoming lift. He closed his eyes as his feet slid off the wooden plank. He took big, long breaths and tried to calm himself down. After he thought he was a good distance off the ground, he opened his eyes. Immediately, the chair lift stopped.

“It’s okay,” he said to himself. “It will start up soon. I will just lean back and…” He had fallen from the chair lift!

“I hold these truths to be self evident, that all men will survive falling to their deaths from chair lifts,” he chanted all the way down to the snow below.

When he hit the snow, he rolled all the way down to the the next flat landing. He stayed there curled up into a ball for at least ten minutes. When he finally had the courage to stand up again, he found his troops standing in front of him.

“Are you ok, General Washington?” they politely asked.

“Yes, I am fine,” George Washington replied.

“Let’s go to my house for tea!” one of the soldiers stated.

“Yes, but the only way there from here is to cross the Delaware river…”

 

The Missing Parrot

On a very beautiful day, Joelle went to the zoo in New York City. She walked around the zoo. She looked around, and there were elephants and rhinos and lions. She found a crowd around a parrot, who was named Chit Chat because it always talked. Chit Chat looked mostly red with blue and green and a little white. Chit Chat could always start a conversation.

Joelle and the zookeeper were very good friends because Joelle usually came  every day. Since Joelle was trusted by the zookeeper, Dave, he opened the parrot cage only for her. He did this so Joelle could play with Chit Chat. They played hide-and-seek, where Chit Chat flew into the sky and tried to find Joelle.

One winter day, Chit Chat disappeared. The zookeeper was so worried that his boss would fire him because Chit Chat was his responsibility. He was the one who got the parrot out of its cage without permission, and he wasn’t allowed to fly it anywhere. He was supposed to keep it safe. He tried to find it as quickly as possible.

“The parrot is lost!” yelled the zookeeper. All the people at the zoo heard the terrible news. Everybody felt bad for him, so they helped him look. Nobody found the parrot.

Then, Joelle remembered that most birds migrate, so she thought the parrot must have unlocked the cage somehow and escaped.

“YES,” she said. “I got it.” She quickly ran to find the zookeeper to tell him that Chit Chat probably migrated to California because it is warm. The zookeeper said she was probably right.

When spring came, the zookeeper still didn’t see Chit Chat come back. When he looked back where the crowd would usually stand, he noticed the cage was not there. He checked the houses of everybody who worked at the zoo. Joelle helped him. There was still one person that they did not check in the whole entire zoo.

“THE BOSS!” the zookeeper and Joelle said at the same time. The zookeeper said the boss probably did not have the parrot and his cage because he did not like Chit Chat.

Joelle went home to go sleep. The zookeeper did the same. The next morning, Joelle ran to the zoo as fast as she could.

The zookeeper asked Joelle, “What happened?”

“Today, we have to go into the boss’s house,” she replied.

“Once again, the boss probably doesn’t have him,” Dave said.

“There’s a chance the boss might have him,” Joelle said.

“Fine, we’ll go tonight,” Dave said.

While they waited for night, they walked around the zoo. Joelle got to feed the lions and the rhinos. She was not scared because she wanted to be a zookeeper when she grew up.

Five hours later, the zoo started to close, and Joelle had to hide behind the rhinos so the boss wouldn’t see her. If he saw her, he would tell her to go home and watch her walk home. Finally, Joelle and Dave were the only people left in the zoo. The zoo was dark except for the security lights. The bats in the cave were awake, and Joelle heard their wings flapping. This was Joelle’s first time at the zoo at night.

Soon, the boss was a mile away. Joelle and the zookeeper left the zoo and locked it behind them. Then, they started running after the boss. Soon, they started walking so they wouldn’t get too close to him. Then, they got to the boss’s house. It was a small cottage because the boss lived alone. Joelle and Dave knocked on the door.

As the boss opened it and said, “Hello,” they barged into the cottage. Immediately, they saw Chit Chat in a cage on the boss’s desk.

Chit Chat said, “Hello, nice to see you again! How was your sunny day?”

Joelle and Dave replied, “Good. How are you?”

“I’m great, thank you for asking,” Chit Chat said.

“How did you know where my house is?” the boss asked Joelle and Dave.

“Easy, we just followed you after you walked out of the zoo,” Dave said.

“But anyway, why do you have the parrot?” asked Joelle.

“One night when I was about to walk out, I saw Chit Chat looked lonely. I said good night and then, the parrot seemed sad. I asked him why he was so sad, and he said, ‘I am the only parrot. No one talks to me that much.’ So I took him to my house, and we started talking for the whole night, and I started liking him,” the boss said. “I felt bad about stealing the parrot, but I didn’t want to tell anyone because I didn’t want them to think I’m a thief.”

“Why didn’t you tell me and Joelle earlier?” asked the zookeeper calmly.

“Well, you would have asked me a bunch of questions, and I don’t like to answer questions. I was also afraid you would take the parrot back,” the boss said.

“We have more questions now that you’ve told us later,” Dave said.

“Everybody was freaked out about Chit Chat going missing!” Joelle said in a very angry way.

“Sorry about that. I’ll return him to the zoo tomorrow morning,” the boss said.

Joelle and Dave went back to their houses. The next morning, Joelle biked all the way to the zoo, and the crowd was back at Chit Chat’s cage. The people in the crowd were really excited. They kept on asking Dave questions like, “Where was the parrot?” or, “How did Chit Chat feel when you found him?” Joelle got closer to the cage and she saw Chit Chat. He looked annoyed by all the noise.

Then, Joelle and Dave went to the pet store. Joelle bought a parrot that looked exactly the same as Chit Chat. He was mostly red with blue, green, and a little white. He said, “Hello, how are you doing?” to Joelle. Dave bought a very similar parrot, but it was a female.

When they got back to the zoo, they left the male parrot with Chit Chat. Chit Chat slowly started to open his beak and say something.

He finally said, “Thank you so much for the parrot. I’m so happy because I got a buddy like me!”

When the boss came back from break, Joelle and Dave ran up to him and said, “We have a surprise for you!”

“Candy?!”

Joelle and Dave looked at each other, confused. “No, but it’s something way better,” they said. “Your very own parrot!”

The boss started jumping up and down and twirling. Joelle, Dave, Chit Chat, and the boss lived happily ever after.

***

Twenty years later, Joelle became the zookeeper of the zoo and cared for every animal.  

                                                         

Emoji Sisters

SCENE 1

MOM, KACEY, ELLA, RUFUS are in the house.

KACEY

Is dinner ready, Mom? Maybe we could go to the backyard and do the tradition that Dad did with us? I haven’t done it since Dad died in the car crash.

Mom is cooking.

MOM

Dinner’s ready, in like, two minutes. Um, I don’t think you should do the tradition without your dad. It’s not really a tradition without your dad.

KACEY

Okay, fine. I just thought that we could go out to the backyard again, just to see the stars to remind me of Dad, and what he did with us.

RUFUS is barking.

MOM

Kacey, sweetie, can you please take Rufus out in the backyard? Also, I bet your father would like to keep the tradition with him.

KACEY

Okay, I get it, I get it. Fine, I’ll take Rufus out to the backyard.

Kacey goes out to the backyard.

ELLA

Mommy! I’m hungry!

KACEY

Um, Mom?? Rufus is running away!

RUFUS accidentally runs away. KACEY and ELLA go after him.

KACEY

Rufus! Come back!!

ELLA

Kacey! Wait for me!!

KACEY stops.

ELLA catches up to KACEY, breathless.

SCENE 2

RUFUS leads them to the woods,  and she finds a piece of paper that was in the mud, all dirty, and stuff.

KACEY

Rufus, why did you go into the woods?

KACEY sees the paper, picks it up, and read it outloud.

YOU MUST GO TO THE EMOJI WORLD AND BECOME EMOJI SISTERS AND SAVE THE EMOJI WORLD FROM THE EMOJI VILLAIN. 🙂 YOU HAVE ONE EMOJI YEAR. COME QUICK. WE NEED YOUR HELP! THERE IS A VIAL. DRINK A DROP AND ONE DROP ONLY.

KACEY then thought of her father. All of her adventures that she had with her father.

KACEY

Ella, we have to tell Mom. Ella? Ella? Ella! Where are you?

ELLA
Kacey, I’m right here. Next to Rufus. Behind you.

KACEY

Oh, thank goodness. Thank goodness. We have to tell Mom that we found a note. We have to ask her if we can go.

ELLA

Kacey, we found Rufus. Now let’s get home. I’m hungry.

KACEY

Okay, fine. But, we have to show this to Mom. We could have dinner once we show this to Mom.

ELLA

Fine. We can show this piece of paper to Mom, but can we go home now? Please?

Kacey and Ella go home with Rufus and the piece of paper.  

Mom was very surprised when she saw it.

MOM

Wow, girls. Um, this is very strange. I think this is a joke, or something. It can’t possibly be real.  

Mom looks at the piece of paper one more time.

MOM

Yeah, I think this is a joke.

KACEY

But Mom, do you want to see? Look look, there’s a vial with this potion that brings you to Emoji World. I just know it.  

ELLA

Mom, I’m tired, can I go to sleep?

MOM

Sure, sweetheart, go get some rest. Now, Kacey, I want to talk to you about this piece of paper. If you can handle it, I will let you go to this EMOJI WORLD thingie, only if you take REALLY good care of Ella, and keep an eye on her always, and make sure you come back alive. For real.

KACEY

Oh, Mom! Thank you so much! I promise, promise promise that we will come back alive, and I promise that I will take SUPER good care of Ella. Thanks, Mom!! I also think you should pack food, clothes, blankets, pillows, etc…

KACEY goes to her room.

KACEY

Oh, Dad (sighs) I really wish you could come and have at least one more adventure with me and Ella. (sighs)

THE NEXT DAY………

KACEY woke up early to help MOM pack their bags.

MOM

Kacey, I need you to get your sleeping bags from the closet. Also, do you want chicken or steak? One more thing, can you get your blankets, pillows, water bottle, clothes, and shoes please? Thank you.

KACEY

Sure, Mom.

KACEY gets the stuff that MOM asked her to get, and brings it to MOM.

KACEY

Here you go!

ELLA comes downstairs.

MOM

Good morning, Ella!! How are you today? This is going to be your last morning here for an EMOJI YEAR.

ELLA

What? We’re going to EMOJI WORLD? But you know that it’s not real.

KACEY

It’s real! And I’ll prove it to you once we get there.

LATER THAT DAY……………………

MOM

Bye girls!! Love you!!! Be safe!!!

KACEY AND ELLA

Bye, Mom! See you soon!!!!!!! Love you!

Ella starts crying.

MOM

Don’t worry, Ella, It will be really short. One EMOJI YEAR is like, two months. You’ll see me very soon.

ELLA

Ok (ELLA sniffles) Bye-bye, Mommy.

KACEY

Bye, Mom!! Ella, don’t worry, you’ll have me!

ELLA

Yeah, but you’re not like Mommy.

KACEY

It’s going to be alright. I’m going to take SUPER good care of you, and we’ll have lots of fun. Plus, we’re going to be saving the EMOJI WORLD, right?

ELLA

Yeah. (sighs) Love you Mom, I’ll miss you.

KACEY

Bye, Mom! I will try to text you!!

KACEY and ELLA leave for EMOJI WORLD.

MOM goes back into the house, while the sisters are transported to EMOJI WORLD.

SCENE 3

ELLA

Whoa, Kacey, look! You’re an Emoji!!

KACEY

Ella, you are, too!!

It was true; KACEY and ELLA had turned into Emojis.

KACEY

Okay, we have to find a hotel or something.

ELLA

Look!! Over there!

ELLA pointed to a castle.

KACEY

Let’s go there.

KACEY and ELLA finally arrive at the palace.

KACEY

Whoa, this palace is huge!!

EMOJI KING

Welcome! It looks like you got our letter that we sent to you. We are SO glad you could make it!! You have to start your mission right away!! We are in a REALLY big hurry, and we need your help to save to Emoji World.

KACEY

Why were we chosen?

EMOJI KING

Your dad said that he wanted you guys to have an adventure when he was gone.

KACEY

What? How did my dad know about this world?

EMOJI KING

Because he’s traveled here. He travels to different worlds a lot and he meets new people so that you can have more adventures.

KACEY

How come he didn’t tell me?

EMOJI KING

That doesn’t really matter right now. I’ll tell you later. We need you to go to the High Emoji Mountains, find the Emoji villain, and kill him with this vial.

EMOJI KING hands KACEY a blue vial and she takes it.

KACEY

But which way? We don’t have directions to get to High Emoji Mountains.

EMOJI QUEEN

We have a map for you of all of Emoji World. You have to go on your quest now, or else it’ll be too late. Now you must go. You won’t be able to defeat him if you don’t go now.

KACEY and ELLA leave for the Emoji Mountains.

SCENE 4

ELLA

Are we there yet? My feet hurt.

KACEY

No, and plus, you don’t have feet!

KACEY and ELLA arrive at the High Emoji Peak, three Emoji hours later.

KACEY

Why don’t we take a rest?

ELLA

Okay, that sounds good to me!

KACEY and ELLA stop on the bottom of the peaks. They fall asleep.

THE NEXT DAY…

KACEY

Ella, wake up! Wake up! We have to kill the Emoji villain!

ELLA

Kacey, I’m so tired, though.

KACEY

Ella, get up!!!

ELLA

Fine!!

ELLA and KACEY find the EMOJI VILLAIN.

EMOJI VILLAIN

What? Who are you? Why are you here? Whatever, it doesn’t matter. I already have my plan to destroy Emoji World! Mwahahahaha! Wait, why are you still here?

KACEY and ELLA stand still, staring at the EMOJI VILLAIN, blankly.

EMOJI VILLAIN

What? Not good enough? Ugh, Fine!

KACEY

We are very hungry. Can we eat with you please?

ELLA

Yeah, we are very hungry. Please?

ELLA did the puppy eyes that she did when she wanted another cookie from MOM.

EMOJI VILLAIN

Okay, fine. Come eat. (whispers to the audience) And then I will destroy them!!

KACEY

I really want to cook. Can I? Please?

EMOJI VILLAIN
Okay, fine, sure, make dinner, and I really like red wine. Thank you very much.

KACEY and ELLA made the food and the wine. KACEY poured the vial of poison into the wine.

EMOJI VILLAIN

Thank you very much, Kacey, and Ella, I’m guessing.

KACEY

I just have one question. Why exactly do you want to destroy Emoji World?

EMOJI VILLAIN

Because I want to be alone. Also, I want my helpers to build a HUGE castle and so I can be the new ruler of EMOJI WORLD, just do whatever I want, by myself and my helpers. So that’s my plan, so yeah! Can we get finished with dinner now?

KACEY

Yeah, sure. Just drink your wine first, so we can get on with the other stuff of the meal.

EMOJI VILLAIN drank the vial of potion/the wine and died. Emoji World was saved!!

KACEY and ELLA went back to Emoji Palace and the EMOJI KING greeted them.

EMOJI KING

Kacey, Ella, you did an amazing job! Now you may go home.

The EMOJI QUEEN hands KACEY and ELLA the vial to go home.

KACEY and ELLA go home.

MOM is waiting for them.

SCENE 5

MOM

Oh, thank goodness you are safe!! Now, let’s go get some lunch.

KACEY
Sounds good to me

ELLA

I’m tired. I’m going to take a nap.

MOM

Ok, sweetie. Goodnight.(smiles)

ELLA leaves to to go to bed.

KACEY

Mom, can I talk to you about something?

MOM

Yeah, sure. What do want to talk about?

KACEY

Did you ever know that Dad knew about the Emoji World?

MOM looks down.

MOM

Um………….. No, what? No.

MOM stammers.

KACEY

Mom, tell the truth.

MOM

Fine. Yes, I knew that Dad had been to Emoji World.

KACEY

Ugh, but then why didn’t you tell me?

MOM
Because it was supposed to be a surprise. He wanted to take you there for your twelfth birthday, Kacey. But he died three years ago, remember? And now, look. You turned 12, two years ago.

Long pause.

KACEY
Ooooohhhhhhhhh. That makes much more sense. I’m glad I got to go, anyways. I still miss him, and I really wish I could go on the adventure with him, though.

MOM

Yeah, me too.

KACEY and MOM hug at the end.

THE END

Butterfly Away

           

It’s the relay carnival and six teams
Are lined up on the side of the pool
The announcer pushes the button
And we’re off
She slices through the water
Each stroke clear
Her purpose obvious as she brings her team
To victory
I’m not as fast as she is but I gotta swim anyway
Adrenaline is coursing through me
Arms up and I dive in
Pushing the water away as I move going
Up
Down
Up
Down
The minute I surface I know I’m ahead of everyone
And I know I’m gonna
Butterfly ‘em all away
Gonna butterfly ‘em all away
The water moves aside as I swing my arms up and breathe
The oxygen to my lungs isn’t enough and I’m tired but
This is my last race of the season
Gotta leave it out on the field
Swinging
Up
Down
Up
Down
As each soggy palm smacks the concrete wall
My team smiles
I smile
Cuz I butterflew ‘em all away
Today

 

Lonely

                               

I run through a forest
Of memories and
I see you there
Crying softly to
Yourself.
I watch as you gently
Reach out for
My hand
I pull away
Running back,
Away from that dark
And dank
Place.
I’m sorry
I left you there
Alone.
In a world
Where humanity buzzes
Around me
I watch as you
Turn away
And leave me
There by myself.
I see you at lunch
Twisting your hair
Laughing with the other kids
Ignoring me.
I don’t care.
I forgot you
Were there.
I apologize.
Maybe next time
You’ll understand why
I did that.
I was not myself.
I came up to you but
Said nothing.
I just walked away.
For now I’ll keep my distance.
The girls at school
Are cliquey.
And I watch
The girls talk,
Run around,
Tease each other
Playfully
And ignore me
As I sit down
Pretending to be happy
But broken
Inside.
I talk to my friends
About kids in our class.
Who’s nice
And who’s not.
I suddenly think about the girl
And change the subject.
The agony of watching
Her makes me
Restless.
Yes, restless.
Her hard,
Unbreakable outside
Only disguises
The truth of
Her soft inner core.
I’m tough now.
I don’t need
That girl, that popular girl.
I’m strong.
I’m not a baby.
I’m tough.
I don’t need you.
I don’t need anyone.
I’m not dumb.
I know you think I am.
Everyone thinks I am.
Just leave me be.
Just leave me
Alone.
I got
A 100%
On the quiz
In Social Studies
Like my friends.
I went over
To the lonely girl
And she said
She had a 99%.
I saw through
The paper though.
She got a 64%.
“Nice!”
I say,
Pretending not to know
Her actual score.
Patting her back,
She gives a weak
Smile
But I see
Her frown.
That girl.
She’s popular
And kind
And smart
And pretty
And funny
And all the teachers
Love her.
She already
Figured out
The square root of 41
In like
5 seconds,
Rounded
Of course
To the nearest tenth.
Everyone loves
Her.
That girl.
That popular girl.
It’s
Christmas Eve,
Tomorrow
Christmas.
Mom says to
Do something kind.
I try.
My friends say I’m perfect.
But am I?
What about that girl?
That lonely girl?
Was I ostracizing her?
I take out my phone.
I dial her number.
Beep. Beep. Beep.
Please respond.
I hear someone calling
My phone.
Who, though?
Oh.
It’s that girl.
That
Popular
Kind
Smart
Pretty
Funny
All the teachers love her girl.
Should I pick up?
Beep. Beep. Beep.
She’s waiting.
Press END CALL.
Don’t call again.
Please.
I walk away.
Eggnog and gingersnaps
Make me feel warm and happy.
Not today.
Why does she hate me?
Why won’t she accept me as a friend?
Questions fill up my head
And I start sobbing.
Why?
I don’t know.
Ellie texts me,
Asks how it’s going today.
I ignore her.
Amanda texts me,
Tells me about some kid
In our class.
I ignore her.
Nadia texts me,
Asks about the math homework.
I ignore her.
I just want one call
Just one stupid call
From that girl.
That lonely girl.
Mom snooped in my phone.
Asks me why I didn’t pick up my “friend’s” call.
I simply respond,
She’s not my friend.
I’m different.
Brother calls me a meanie
For not being friends
With someone who wants to be
My friend.
Brother’s only five.
How come he is popular in his kindergarten class?
How come I can’t be popular?
And kind
And smart
And pretty
And funny
And all the teachers love me girl?
I dial that girl, that popular girl.
Beep. Beep. Beep.
I hear my phone go off.
Probably Nadia.
Once she asks something,
She never stops.
I go up to my room
And pick up the phone.
Incoming call from lonely girl
The phone chants.
Okay, maybe I should change her name.
I pick up, and say
Hello?
Are you there?
This is Taylor.
I’m glad you called.
A little smile creeps up my face
As I cuddle on to my
Sheepskin blanket.
I hear a little voice say
Hello?
Are you there?
This is Taylor.
I’m glad you called.
I pause for a second,
Trying to figure out
If that was fake
Or genuine.
I don’t know.
I can imagine her face
With beautiful bright blue eyes
Glinting in the sunlight reflecting off the snow,
And her hazel hair
With a dark purple streak
And her perfect teeth showing as her lips curve up
Into a perfect smile.
Hi,
I whisper happily.
I’m Mabel.
I’m also glad I called.
I smiled softly.

 

Animal Story

Chapter 1

Once, there was a cat named Lovey Dove. She had a nickname that she hated. All the animals called her Lola Love, her nickname. She had to get rid of it.

One day, she went out in the woods. She found mud and a sleeping pig. She woke it up. She asked if the pig would help her get rid of her nickname.

The pig said she would help, if she told her how to make mud. Lovey Dove said, “How to make mud is dirt and water.” The pig understood.

The pig then said, “We need to know each other’s names.”

Lovey Dove said, “My name is Lovey Dove.”

Then the pig said, “I have no name.”

“Your name can be Nicky,” said Lovey Dove.

“I love it!” said Nicky.

The next day, they went to Atlantis to think. It was a relaxing place. They thought and thought and thought. Then Ally the Alligator came. She went down a slide and got so scared, she forgot about the nickname. Nicky said to get rid of the nickname, they had to get everyone down the slide. They told everyone that the slide was great.

The next day, everyone was lined up in front of the slide. All one hundred people lined up and went down. Two more people (Nicky and Lovey Dove) had to go down.

The messenger bird went on a forty-foot drop tower instead so he wouldn’t get his feathers wet. But he still forgot the nickname.

Chapter 2

Once, there was a dog who only got breakfast and dinner. Her name was Chewie. She was a dark brown labradoodle, and she was very small. She loved to sleep, and the owners hated her for that. She needed lunch, because she was starving.

The next day at lunch, she started barking and barking and barking. The owners thought she was being mean, so they locked her up in her cage. It was a big black cage, and she was really cold. She had to stay in there all night and she was really cold, so she couldn’t go to bed.

In the morning, they let her out. And she ran around outside because they let her outside. She needed to stretch, so she ran around. Then, she met a giant lizard and told the lizard her plan. The giant lizard was pink, as big as a bean bag, and belonged to the family. The giant lizard said, “We need to know each other’s names.”

Chewie said, “My name’s Chewie. What’s yours?”

The giant lizard said, “My name is Liza.”

Chewie said, “The owners are really mean to me. I really need your help.”

Then the giant lizard said, “How can I help?”

Chewie said, “I need you to get the parrot in the house and tell them that I need to have lunch, because I’m starving.”

“I’ll do that at lunch time,” Liza said.

“Got it!” said Chewie.

At lunchtime, the parrot (who was invisible) said, “Liza wants a cracker!” The owners gave Liza a cracker, and she gave it to Chewie. It wasn’t enough, and it wasn’t what the parrot should have said. But Chewie had another plan.

The next day at lunch, she asked the lizard to open the box that the lunch was in and then put her inside so she could eat whenever she wanted. It worked, but the owners found out the next day. They gave her to another family, and Liza snuck away with her. The family took Liza in and they gave them both breakfast, dinner, and lunch.

 

E.V.I.L. Chronicles: The Opponent

              

SCENE 1

Setting: Manhattan, Writopia Lab.

ALEX
Who’s ready for sock-ball?

Rumbling is heard.
EVERYONE
Let’s go see what’s happening!!!

SCENE 2

Setting: Manhattan, Central Park. There is a big crater where the museum used to be. Inside it is a CREEP IN WIZARD COSTUME. He walks out to the benches, where a crowd has been forming.
CREEP IN WIZARD COSTUME
Listen to me, you fools! I am George, the wizard! I am here to take over your pitiful kingdom! Mwahahaha!!!

KID
I think he’s from New Jersey.

GEORGE, THE WIZARD
Where is this “New Jersey?”

OTHER KID
Actually, he’s probably from Fire Island.

GEORGE, THE WIZARD
An island made out of fire! You intrigue me! Where is this burnt kingdom?

SOME OTHER KID
Wait, what?

GEORGE, THE WIZARD
Oh, well. I will explore it later. I must find your king and overthrow him! Power will be mine!!!

Police cars enter. Siren is heard. They march up to him.

COP
What’s going on here?

KID
Just some creep from New Jersey who exploded the museum.

OTHER KID
You’re stupid! It’s easy to see he’s from Fire Island.

GEORGE, THE WIZARD
Who are you? Paid mercenaries? I can take you down with my magic powers!!!

COP
(Laughs.) Okay then, you’re a jokester, eh? Then let me introduce you to my “magic” taser.
COP “tases” GEORGE.

SCENE 3

Setting: Manhattan, in a courtroom.
PROSECUTING ATTORNEY
So, Your Honor… This creep here has exploded one of our best museums, traumatized millions of kids going to a summer camp called “Writopia,” committed serious fashion crimes, and can not decide whether he is from New Jersey or Fire Island!

JUDGE
What does the accused have to say about it?

GEORGE
Excuse me? I am an evil wizard, and I’m going to control the world! Show some respect! And, what do I have to say about it? Well, first, bow down to me. Second, my outfit is way better than yours, and, third, I don’t even know what a “Jersey” is — much less a “new” one!

JUDGE
Do you plead insanity?

GEORGE
Yes, I do! I plead you all insane!

JUDGE
It’s easy to see. He’s gone crazy.

GEORGE
(Crying) All I wanted to do was control the world!!! Wahhh!!!

JUDGE
Fine, you can roam free, as long as you are in the supervision of my friend here, whose name is Fred.

SCENE 4

Setting: Manhattan, outside Pinkberry Fro-Yo Shop.

FRED
I’m hungry, want some fro-yo?

GEORGE
What is this “fro-yo”?

FRED
It’s tasty, you’ll see.

GEORGE
What about taking over the world?

FRED
Uh… we’ll do it later?

GEORGE
Okay then, unpaid underling!

FRED
Underling?!

GEORGE
Would you rather be called “Minion”?

FRED
Let’s just get fro-yo, okay?

SCENE 5

Setting: Manhattan, Inside Pinkberry

GEORGE and FRED are waiting in line for Pinkberry.

GEORGE
Why are we waiting in line? I deserve to be first!!!

FRED
No, you don’t. Maybe if you yell that they’re having a sale on something good they’ll leave.

GEORGE
Very true. I shall try. (Yelling) Dragonhide laser shields on sale in the next kingdom!

No one leaves.

FRED
Seriously, let me try. (Yelling) Starbucks is giving caramel mocha lattes for free!

Everyone leaves.

PINKBERRY GUY
What kind of fro-yo do you want?

GEORGE
Well, that depends. What kind of that do you have?

PINKBERRY GUY
We have original, chocolate, vanilla, strawberry, mango, and super-extreme coffee caramel jumbo mega dumpling extra surprise.

GEORGE
I’ll have that last one.

FRED
I’ll just have chocolate.

PINKBERRY GUY
Do you want toppings?

FRED
Yes.

PINKBERRY GUY
Do you want gummy bears?

GEORGE
What? Why would I ever want to eat a bear?

PINKBERRY GUY
Do you want gummy worms?

GEORGE
Worms? What are you trying to do? Kill me?

PINKBERRY GUY
Do you want chocolate rocks?

GEORGE
Stone? What do you think I am? A gargoyle? What else do you have?

PINKBERRY GUY
Do you want the jumbo coffee choco-latte glaze with banana cherry dumpling sprinkles?

GEORGE
Mmm, that sounds yummy. YES!!!

FRED
I’ll have rainbow sprinkles.

PINKBERRY GUY
That’ll be $8.45 please.

GEORGE
Pff… that’s so cheap.

GEORGE drops nine gold coins on the counter.

GEORGE
Keep the change.

PINKBERRY GUY takes the gold coins, biting them to be sure they’re real. When he sees that they are, he jumps up and starts dancing.

GEORGE and FRED eat their fro-yo.

GEORGE
This is delicious!!!

SCENE 6

Setting: Manhattan, central park

GEORGE AND FRED are sitting on a bench near the ruins of the museum.

GEORGE
Unpaid minion!

FRED
What?

GEORGE
How do I become king of this kingdom?

FRED
Well… there’s an election coming up.

GEORGE
What’s an election?

FRED
It’s when the citizens vote for their president.

GEORGE
Is a president like a king?

FRED
Yeah, except he shares his power.

GEORGE
How do I become president?

FRED
You announce that you are running for president, and then you hope you win.

GEORGE
Where do you announce that you are running for president?

FRED
Points at a crowd of people in front of a presidential candidate.
See them? Set yourself up next to him, and steal those voters!!!

GEORGE
Okay!

George sets himself up near the presidential candidate.

Vote for me!!!

SOMEONE ELSE
And why would I do that?

GEORGE
Because I said so!

KID
Hey! I know you! You’re the creep from New Jersey who blew up the museum! It’s always nice meeting an old friend, isn’t it?

GEORGE
I don’t even have a jersey. I don’t even know what it is!

OTHER KID
Yo! You’re that dude from Fire Island! See ya later, bro!

GEORGE
Where is this island of fire?!

SOMEONE
Kiss these babies!

GEORGE
Why would I kiss a stinkin’ baby!

SOMEONE
Every good politician does it!!

GEORGE
Get out of my space. You disgust me.

DUDE
Are you gonna help us with our problems, and take care of our ecosystem?

GEORGE
No! Take care of your own problems!

DUDETTE
Are you going to take care of our economy?

GEORGE
Why would I do that? I have enough money already.

YOUNG DUDE
Are you going to improve our civil rights?

GEORGE
No –– I’m going to turn this into an absolute monarchy!

YOUNG DUDETTE
Are you going to help the homeless?

GEORGE
How about they help themselves instead?

TEENAGE DUDE
Are you going to improve peaceful relations with other countries?

GEORGE
No! I’m going to start wars everywhere so I can conquer the world!

TEENAGE DUDETTE
Are you going to stop racism, discrimination, anti-Semitism, and sexism?

GEORGE
Nah, I have better stuff to do, like going to Pinkberry and eating dumpling fro-yo.

SOMEONE
Will you improve international security?

GEORGE
No. I think I’ll improve my security instead.

SOMEONE ELSE
Will you improve our prisons?

GEORGE
Good Idea! I’ll let everyone free, and then lock in anyone who opposes me!

SOMEONE
Will we get longer vacations?

GEORGE
You’ll work every day of the year, while I take vacations.

SOMEBODY ELSE
Will you improve schools?

GEORGE
I’ll close schools, and put anyone older than sixteen years old in the army, ten to sixteen years old in hard factories, seven to ten years old in medium factories, five to seven years old in shops, and one to five years old in my future personal mines. Anyone younger than one year old will be shot with a ray that keeps them babies forever, so I can have a baby secret agency.

SOMEONE
Will you kiss them?

GEORGE
For the last time, I will not kiss any stinkin’ babies! With this I end my speech.

FRED faints. Everybody walks off.

SCENE 7

Setting: Manhattan, some room or other.

GEORGE
My speech was awesome! They are so going to vote for me!

FRED
Um… we might have to talk about that…

GEORGE
About how good I am at this, right?

FRED
Let’s turn on the TV.

GEORGE
What’s a “TV”?

FRED
It’s hard to explain. I’ll just turn it on

FRED turns on the TV. GEORGE gasps.

GEORGE
Someone is trapped inside that piece of glass!! He’s gone crazy!

FRED
Actually, it’s all projected because of electricity or something –– no one’s actually trapped.

GEORGE
Electricity? What sort of sorcery is that? Is that what Tasers are powered on?

FRED
Actually, yes, but —

GEORGE
Shh, they are showing the polls.

SCENE 8

Setting: Some room or other, on TV.

TV HOST:
And here are the polls. First I shall introduce the two candidates: Mr. Presidential Candidate, and George the Wizard. Second, I shall give the statistics: Mr. Presidential Candidate: 100%. George the Wizard: 0%.

SCENE 9

Setting: Manhattan, some room or another.

GEORGE
Oh no! I’m last in the polls!

FRED
(Knowingly) Well, what are you gonna do about it?

GEORGE
I’m going to murder Mr. Presidential Candidate.

FRED
That’s not really what I was going for. Are you sure you have to resolve this with violence?

GEORGE
Yes –– where I come from, if you don’t like someone, you murder them.

FRED
Wow, tough neighborhood. Remind me never to go to New Jersey. Or Fire Island.

GEORGE
Gaaah! I was not born on an island of fire! How many times must I repeat this?

FRED
Wow. It must have been a really tough neighborhood if you won’t even acknowledge that you’re from there.

GEORGE
I’m still going to murder him.

FRED
Do you have to?

GEORGE
Yes.

SCENE 10

Setting: Manhattan, Empire State Building

GEORGE and MR. PRESIDENTIAL CANDIDATE are standing on top of the Empire State Building.

GEORGE
From up here we can see future goals, future people, and the future goals of our future people.

MR. PRESIDENTIAL CANDIDATE
Yes, but I wonder, why are you still in the race if I have 100% of voters?

GEORGE
Because of this!!!

GEORGE pushes MR. PRESIDENTIAL CANDIDATE off the Empire State Building.

GEORGE
I won!!!

The Poison Hotdog

Act One

Scene 1

MOLE GIRL

What are you doing Buuck

BUCK

I’m just waiting in line for my hotdog, but now I think it will come up.

MOLE GIRL

What’s that supposed to mean. He yar. Sorry I have he yar ittis, hei.

BUCK

Yeah…

LUNCH LADY

Next in line for a hotdog, oh and just a reminder: one of these hotdogs is poisoned. As if I care, though.

BUCK

That’s mine. Bye!

LUNCH LADY

Here you go, uhgg it’s you.

BUCK

You hate everyone at this school.

LUNCH LADY

Next!

BUCK

Hi guys, guess who I ran into in line for lunch.

JACK

Creepy Mole girl.

JOESF

She has a name!

JACK

Yeah, but no one wants to know it.

BUCK

Ugh. This hotdog tastes horrible!

COOL CLAIR

I over heard some ones hotdog tastes horrid. Rumor says that if your h-dog tastes hor you have the poisoned one.

BUCK

My stomach hurts!

 

Scene 2

SCHOOL NURSE

It looks like you did get the poisoned hotdog. I’m afraid if this hotdog stays in your body you might have to go to the hospital!

BUCK

Do I  have school leave early today?

Joesf:  More importantly, will he be okay?

SCHOOL NURSE

Yes, and I’m sorry but maybe.

BUCK

Should I go and grab my backpack?

SCHOOL NURSE

Yes.

Scene 3

BUCK

Guys I’m really nervous, do you know if I’ll be okay?

JOESF

We don’t know, we know it’s okay to be nervous right now.

JACK

Don’t be a scaredy-cat. Be a cool-cat.

JOESF

Are you insane, or do you have brain problems?

BUCK

Guys we have to tell the teacher that I’m leaving early.

JACK

Don’t be a goodie two-shoes

BUCK

I’m just worried, what if I die. I feel pain within me. Dieing!

Act Two

Scene 4

JOESF

Buck just died from the poisoned hotdog.  

MOLE GIRL

Oh no! Buck is dead. I hate the Lunch Lady.

JACK

Yes, no one panic.

JOESF

Yes panic, Buck is dead.

MOLE GIRL

My highschool sweetheart. The Lunch Lady ruined my life!

Scene 5

PRINCIPAL DANTESI

How come one of your hot dogs are poisoned.

LUNCH LADY

You don’t care about these children as much as I do. I mean we both hate these children as much as I do.

PRINCIPAL DANTESI

True, but I and the school could be sued for a lot of money.

LUNCH LADY

I know, but what’s the biggest harm 1 poisoned hotdog can do.

PRINCIPAL DANTESI

He died! But since I don’t care you’re off the hook. Now let’s call the parents.

MOM

(off stage) Well hello there friend. I don’t mean if this call is to take time from your work. What’s this happy call at the middle of the day about?

PRINCIPAL DANTESI

(on stage)   Your son ate a poison hotdog made by the Lunch Lady and it killed him

MOM

My god. That’s so horrible. I call to have a moment with my husband.

Scene 6

MOM

I just got a call that are son has died from lunch.

POP

My dear Buck, dead. This is horrible.

MOM

The hotdog was made by their Lunch Lady.

POP

Well pardon my words, but we’ve got to sue that Lunch Lady.

MOM

We can’t sue her without going to court.

POP

Then we shall go to court.

MOM

I’ll make the call. Mmhmm.  Mmmhm. Thank you. Be ready for court tomorrow.

Scene 7

MOM

Your honoer, my son was innocently going to school when he had a poisoned hotdog and died all because of that stupid, dumb Lunch Lady.

JUDGE

I’m sorry, we are talking about a kid in this court so please don’t use those words.

LUNCH LADY

I didn’t know he would get the poisoned hotdog that I made, okay I did know he’d get the poisoned one I gave it to him.

JUDGE

Why did you give it to him?

LUNCH LADY

He was always Saying I hate everyone at the school and interrupting me and my thoughts.

JUDGE

I sentence you to 25 years in jail, and instead of you sueing her  she will pay everything for your son’s funeral. Now everybody can be happy (quietly) I hope!

           THE END

The Smartest Gingerbread Man Runs the Marathon

Introduction

You’ve heard the other stories, I bet. Somebody makes a gingerbread man, he runs away, and eventually gets eaten. Well, my story isn’t like that. Maybe it’s the dough I’m made of, or maybe it’s my raisin brain, but I survived.

Chapter One

I was walking along the streets of New York, minding my own business, when I heard the clacking of teeth. The fox! I started running and heard the patter of paws behind me. Up ahead, I saw other running people. Maybe if I ran into that crowd, the fox would lose me. I ran faster into the crowd of running feet. I didn’t realize it then, but I had accidentally entered the New York City Marathon!

I felt the fox’s hot breath on the back of my neck, so I picked up the pace. I burst out of the crowd. Looking behind me, I noticed that the runners had numbers on their chests. Then I saw the fox’s gaping maw coming towards me. I turned my head forward and ran like crazy!

Chapter Two

We had been running for a long time. Ahead I saw a stand with water cups on it. I hurried past so none of it spilled on me, because water is my weakness. Then I looked behind me. The fox had a water cup in his mouth and an evil glint in his eye. To be fair, he always had an evil glint in his eye. I started zig-zagging because puddles of water had started to appear on my left and right. I knew eventually he would run out of water.

Up ahead I saw a black-and-white checkered stripe on the ground. I ran across and suddenly everything started getting really loud. I realized it was people cheering. I had won the New York City Marathon! But the fox was still coming.

Chapter Three

I jumped into the golden cup that was being held out to me and yelled, “Hoist me up!” in my squeaky little voice. The man looked surprised, but did as told.

Then he said, “Why are you a gingerbread man?’

So I said, “I was baked this way, mister.”

Of course he replied, “Mmm. You smell delicious.”

“Don’t you dare!!” 

“Don’t I dare what?”

“Don’t eat me, duh.”

“Don’t worry, I’m gluten free. What are you doing in the cup?”

“That fox is trying to eat me!”

The fox interrupted, saying, “Nyang nyang nyang!” Then he bit the man’s leg.      

Then the man yelled, “owww!!!”

“That’s gotta hurt,” I remarked.

“Get off my leg, you damn vermin!”

“Nyang nyang nyang!” the fox protested, not taking his teeth off the man’s leg. Then something went snap! There was a bright flash, and the fox was startled and let go.

“What was that?”

I didn’t know either, so I chimed in, “I don’t mean to agree, but yeah, what was that?” 

“It must’ve been camera,” the man replied.

“A cam-watzit?”

“Never mind. My name is Octavius, by the way.”

The fox interrupted, “What kind of name is that?”     

Octavius said, “I dunno.”

The fox said fancily, “My name is Cornelius Von Sigment.”

I said, “Wait, what?!” l never knew that!

Octavius said, “Ooh, fancy.”

While the fox and Octavius were talking, l slipped away. I needed to get away from the fox. I figured that the best place to go to get far away from him is the airport. I looked at the maps and decided to take the subway. The turnstiles were no problem for me — that’s one of the advantages of being short.

When l got to the airport, l hopped on the very first plane. I thought it was going to Vermont? I’d always wondered what that place was like. Anyway, l bet the two fancy-pants names (a.k.a. the fox and the man) were still talking. Haha!

Knight of the Chalice

Once upon a time, in the land of Jesteria, a wise king ruled over his country with his daughter, a vain princess. He needed to find a suitable husband for her, but no one dared come near her for her vain nature. Then, one fateful day, the princess fell ill. The king was very sad, but he knew about a way to cure her disease by getting the legendary gold chalice and having her drink from it. So the king set up a contest: whoever could bring the chalice to him could marry his daughter and get a share of the kingdom. However, if you returned empty-handed, you would die.

Many hopeful princes and knights attempted the long journey to the chalice, but all failed and were beheaded. The king had all but given up hope. He was sitting upon his throne, his head in his hands, when suddenly, a man clad in iron armor ran up to the throne and bowed.                                                  

“I am a knight come from the Kingdom of the West, here to attempt to get the golden chalice and your daughter’s hand.”      

“Very well, but you must bring me the chalice by sundown, for that is when my daughter will die.”                                           

So the knight set out on his quest to get the chalice. After traveling for many miles, the knight came upon a large gate. An old woman sat in front of the gate.

“Will you lend me some food, young man?” asked she.                  

“Why, yes, old woman, I shall share my bread with you,” said the knight.

As he did, the gate opened.                                 

After eating the bread, the knight passed through the gate. Many miles later, he came to a river. The river was flowing at an alarming speed. The knight knew he couldn’t get around it, judging from its length, so he doffed his armor and waded across the raging river. There were many moments when the knight thought he wouldn’t make it.

But then, after crossing the river, the knight came face to face with a demon knight. The demon drew his sword and swung at the hopeful knight. He dodged and kicked the demon, knocking him out. The knight then saw, in all its bejeweled majesty, the golden chalice. The wine that poured from the sacred cup could cure any illness.

With the chalice, the knight ran all the way back to the king’s castle, ten minutes before sundown.

The princess drank from the cup and got better, then said, “Is this my new husband? He is a ragged peasant! I shan’t marry him!”  

The knight was so overcome with anger, that he threw the princess from the castle, her bones shattering on the ground below. The knight then took his share of the kingdom, for a promise is a promise. Even if the knight killed the princess, the king still needed to give him some of the kingdom.  And the knight had many more adventures, but those are stories for another day.

                                                     

Linsay the Dragon’s Adventures in Fairyland, Part 1: The Only Dragon Left in the World

A long time ago, before your great-great-great-great-great-grandparents were born, there were millions and millions of dragons on our planet.

Some liked humans; some did not.

Sadly, a young boy hated dragons, even more than witches did, and everybody in Fairytale Land knows how much witches hate dragons. They would boil dragon bones and use parts of them for their horrid spells. And sadly again, there were many witches. You know, like the one in Hansel and Gretel, the one in Snow White, and the one in Rapunzel?

This young boy’s name was Elliot. He would catch dragons with his special dragon net. He would press a button, a huge net would appear, and he wouldn’t have to worry about anything because the net had a special sensor to sense dragons and throw itself. And he would cut the dragons into pieces and put them in the fireplace. Usually, dragons are immortal, but this young boy used a special potion to make them only have one life. That is why dragons would have rather had their bones boiled than visited this horrid boy.

Elliot hated dragons because his siblings told him that dragons always hated humans. The siblings thought that dragons always breathed fire. That is because the siblings did not know any better than to not capture dragons. They wanted revenge because a dragon killed their mother. They didn’t know that the dragon had had a sore throat, and when he had coughed, he had breathed fire, and this fire had accidentally knocked over a tree, which had hit and killed their mother. The dragon had tried to explain it was a mistake, but the poor dragon had already been put in the fireplace.

So, the sublings vowed to kill every single dragon in Fairytale Land. They got very close to succeeding, but they didn’t know that a mother dragon had just given birth to her first child. She’d named the little dragon Linsay. When she heard about the dragon kidnappers, and when she knew that she was close to her death, she put little Linsay in a basket and sent her down the river, hoping that somebody kind enough to take care of her would find her.

***

Many years later, when Linsay was about twelve years old, she suddenly realized that there were other dragons than her!

When she was a little baby, the basket had bumped into a tree. It sent little Linsay flying over to a forest. Luckily, a kind squirrel had found her. Her name was Taylor. She had always wanted to have a child, but she never had. Luckily again, she loved to take care of dragons. In fact, she was a nurse for dragons! So she took little Linsay to her tree and made a small shelter for her next to it.

Little Linsay had realized all those years that her friends and people she lived with were squirrels and deer and birds. But she had never seen a single dragon. When she asked Taylor about this, Taylor said, “Have you ever heard of the dragon killers?” Linsay said no. Taylor told her about the story of how Elliot’s mom got killed.

Linsay secretly felt a teeny bit sorry for Elliot’s family, but she didn’t think that every dragon deserved to be killed just because of one dragon.

Linsay asked, “Who’s my mom and dad?”

Taylor said, “I don’t know. I found you alone. It looked like you had just fallen. However, there was a note on you. I think you belonged to Lillian and Lucas. The note said, ‘Please take care of my Linsay. I believe she is the only dragon left on earth. Please make sure that she doesn’t get killed. Best regards, Lucas and Lillian.’”

Linsay had always wanted to meet her real parents. Even though Taylor said she was her mom, Linsay had never believed her about that, because she was green and red, and Taylor was brown and white.

So Taylor finally told her that she adopted her. She told her this when Linsay was five.

But unfortunately, that very same day, when Linsay was twelve, Taylor went to get food. An old, cranky deer heard about the squirrel adopting the last dragon. This deer, whose name was Derek, worked for Elliot. So, as you may have guessed, he went to Elliot immediately and told him that Taylor had adopted the last dragon. And he also shared the detail that Taylor was alone looking for food.

Elliot asked people in the forest where to find Taylor. He found Taylor collecting some leaves and nuts.

He asked Taylor furiously, “Where is the last dragon?”

Taylor knew immediately by the tone of his voice that he was Elliot. So she refused to tell. So Elliot locked her up in a cage, and kept asking the same question over and over. But every time, Taylor refused to tell him where Linsay was. Some forest animals were eavesdropping on this conversation. They wanted to help Taylor. Knowing Elliot’s character about asking people for help, they decided to trick him.

So when Elliot asked where Linsay was, they said, “Oh, she’s across the mountains. Make three lefts, eighteen rights, and the nearest tree on the left. You’ll find her there.” Elliot thanked the animals and went.

Again, knowing Elliot’s character, they knew that Elliot would soon find out it was a trick. So they went to Linsay’s tree and told Linsay to go somewhere else. The animals explained to Linsay that Elliot had captured Taylor. Linsay was very upset, and she asked, “Is she going to be alright?”

The animals did not want to say this, but they said, “We are not really sure. Elliot can be very harsh sometimes.” Now Linsay started to cry. The animals tried to comfort her.

Meanwhile, Elliot was still bothering Taylor with the same exact question. Every time, again, she refused. Elliot then had an idea. He decided to threaten her.

He said, “If you don’t tell me where she is, I will treat you with the same respect as I do with a dragon.”

Taylor still didn’t want to say anything. Every time she was tempted to tell Elliot, she remembered the note that was on Linsay when she first saw her. She kept remembering the line, “Don’t let her die.” She kept repeating that in her mind. So Elliot decided to throw Taylor in the fireplace.

And, in case if you don’t know, in Fairytale Land, people can communicate with each other by only using their minds. This includes animals, humans, and other fantasy creatures. So Taylor sent a mind message to one of her friends, who was a Blue Jay named Beatrice. First, Taylor asked Beatrice if Linsay was doing fine. Beatrice told her that they had everything under control. Taylor was relieved. And then, she asked if they could send help. She explained the whole conversation to Beatrice and said that she was going to be thrown in the fireplace. So Beatrice promised that they would send deer for help.

Soon, help arrived. They also had foxes with them because they knew that foxes were clever. The foxes helped them with a plan. They said that some deer could distract Elliot, and try to make a lousy attempt to get Taylor back. Then, deer behind Elliot would snatch Taylor and let her free while Elliot was distracted. So, they started this into action.

So the deer went to Elliot and said, “Oh, Taylor! There you are! We’ve been looking for you! Don’t worry, we’ll save you!” As according to plan, Elliot immediately thought that they were going to rescue her right there and then.

So, he put down Taylor’s cage and put both hands up in the air, yelling, “Oh no you don’t! She’s going to be right here with me. See?” But the deer had taken the opportunity to take Taylor, and then, as Elliot turned to look, he realized he had been tricked! Elliot was about to go after them, but they had already gone out of sight.

Elliot was very, very angry. He called for his siblings to bring heavy axes. The siblings agreed. They tried to track the animals down, but the clever foxes, knowing Elliot’s character, dropped a special trail which made it impossible to find them. Elliot was now steaming.

He yelled furiously, “I promise I’ll find you! I promise, I promise, I promise!”

But they were already out of earshot. Elliot was so angry that he threw everything he picked up, including his axe. His siblings had to duck in order to not have their heads chopped off. And, unluckily for the animals, he had picked up some and thrown them high in the air (and sadly, they were not birds). So some of the animals ended up getting sprained ankles and broken bones.

Meanwhile, Linsay was hiding in a den that belonged to a mole.

Linsay the dragon’s adventure in Fairytale Land Part 2:

The ONLY Dragon Left in the WORLD

In the mole’s den, Linsay asked her friends to help her think of a plan. They said, “How about you go on a quest to find them?”

Linsay thought that was a good idea. She asked a few deer, a couple of birds, and some of Taylor’s friends to come with her. The moles warned her to be careful of magical creatures and mischievous ones, too. They told her about the path of evil. They said that once she found it, and if she missed Elliot’s house, then she would never be able to find it again. They told her that the trail was bright, sparkling red.

Linsay started off on her journey. She took a map from the mole’s den to find her way through the fairytale forest. First, to get to Elliot’s house, they had to make five lefts, ten rights, fifteen straights, and pass the tenth tree on the left. After that, they finally encountered a strange creature. It spoke very weirdly.

“H-h-h-ello.”

Linsay asked, “Why do you speak like that?”

“I-I-It’s how I talk sometimes.”

Linsay asked again, “Why do you speak like that? Do you have some speaking problems or something?” Linsay did not mean to be rude. She was just curious. This time, the strange creature didn’t answer.

He had a head that looked like Pacman’s face, his body was like a lion on two legs, and he had paws like a lion’s on his feet, and his hands were like a human’s, but he actually seemed very cute. He had an outfit that was pink and frilly, and on his hind paws, there were torn ballet slippers, and his paws were showing.

Noticing that Linsay and her friends were staring at the strange creature, the strange creature said, “Why are you all looking at me like that? In case you’re wondering, my granny made me put this pink, frilly dress on. She thinks I’m destined for ballet! So she sent me out here to practice.”

Linsay began to giggle a little.

“Don’t you giggle at me! Didn’t your mother ever tell you not to giggle at strangers?” The strange creature’s voice was very high-pitched, as if it were an animal chirping its highest notes.

He said, “My name is Jiggleton the 58th. Yes that’s right, all my family members before me were named Jiggleton. Now, don’t laugh at me!”

Linsay said, “I’m sorry, sir. I didn’t mean to bother you.”

But secretly, Linsay thought he was very funny, odd-looking, hilarious, and everything else that would make you see him like a clown. Linsay bit her lips and cheeks to stop her from laughing again. She did not need any more trouble. Linsay thought that maybe the strange creature would help her.

So she asked him, “Have you ever heard of the trail of evil? We are looking for it right now.”

Jiggleton said, “Why do you want to look for such an evil path? My granny has told me about it, but remember, you always have to be aware of your surroundings. At least, that’s what Granny says.”

Linsay, again, had to stop herself from laughing.

“Okay, come on. If you promise to help me take off these itchy, frilly, pink ballerina clothes, and these tight slippers, I’ll help you.”

So Linsay and her friends took off the ballerina outfit, and the birds, using their beaks, cut the ribbon that was attached to the slipper to make it stay on Jiggleton’s foot.

Jiggleton said, “Come on now, do you ever hurry?”

Linsay replied, “If we hurry, we might not see the trail and we might not ever see it again! Once you find it, you will never find it again!!!”

“Oh! Granny never told me about that! How terrible!” So all of them went looking for the trail.

***

Meanwhile, at Elliot’s house, he and his siblings were catching more dragons. ”Ha ha ha!” they cackled.

The eldest was Tim, who was evil and actually the person who suggested capturing the dragon in the first place. He was very tall and skinny. He had many warts and bruises, and he was bald. His teeth were very crooked, and he had a single gold tooth.

The second, William, was very short and was the kindest of all the siblings. Sometimes, he even spared a few dragons, only to be caught by siblings again. He was fat and had a funny smile. He always grinned when he heard something funny.

The third one, Raymie, was actually very pretty. But she was very cruel and evil. She had encouraged Elliot to help them capture dragons.

The fourth was Elliot. In case you don’t know, Elliot’s face was shaped like a hexagon. He also had many warts, just like Tim.

The fifth was Carrie. She also had crooked teeth, and her face was as round as a circle. She loved to play tricks on her older brothers, especially Elliot.

The last one was tiny, little Tina. She couldn’t do too much (except throw rocks at Elliot’s face).

Back to Linsay and Jiggleton: they were looking for the path of evil. As they were looking, animals that passed by were muttering, “Who’s that strange creature?” Jiggleton was so happy to be out of that tutu.

He was prancing and skipping, and he urged them, “Come on, come on! Let’s not waste any time!” Poor Linsay and her friends had to run so fast to keep up with even Jiggleton walking.

Linsay asked, huffing and puffing, “How many more steps until we reach the path?”

“Oh, here we are. Oh no, no, that’s not it. That’s purple. Silly me,” Jiggleton said to Linsay. Linsay groaned.

“When are we going to be there?”

“Be patient… um… um… what are you?”

“Have you ever heard of a dragon?” said Linsay.

“No, actually I haven’t. I’ve seen so many squirrels and crocodiles and deer and birds, but I’ve never seen a dragon.” Linsay thought to herself, Oh right, I’m the only dragon left. So she told the story of Elliot and his siblings to Jiggleton.

Jiggleton replied, “Oh dear, oh dear, oh dear! That sounds horrid. We must put an end to this horrid beast, once and for all! And his siblings.” Linsay was very unsure about this.

“If I tried to stop him, he’d turn me into dragon toast! I don’t want to have butter on me. Nor do I want to have an evil boy kill me!” Linsay said.

To which Jiggleton replied, “Oh, my. Don’t you know the interest in trying?” Now Linsay was getting kind of angry.

“Then, why don’t you try ballet? Why don’t you try to do what Granny says to?” Jiggleton did not respond. He looked down for a minute, and then he said nothing.

***

Back at Elliot’s place, they were preparing a scheme in case, for some reason, Linsay appeared. He made his siblings stand guarding the area, and they made sure that no dragons got out of their cage. They wanted to have a lure for Linsay, which is why they didn’t kill from the past week’s hunt.

Meanwhile, a young bird (a robin, it was) was eavesdropping on this conversation. As you know, animals can communicate with their minds in this world. This robin knew that one of her friends was with Linsay, so she mind talked to her, saying what Elliot had said. The robin’s friend told Linsay everything. They valued this information. And they were mind talking for this. In case if you don’t know, in animal world, they can also read minds. Linsay was trying to get a signal from Jiggleton’s mind, but couldn’t get too much.

Back at Elliot’s house, his siblings were preparing a trap for Linsay and her friends. They decided to make a deep pit and put a cover over it.

Tim said, “When she comes, she will immediately try to find the dragons we captured. So if we let the dragons come right on top of the pit, she will immediately go to them.”

“How do you know that she even wants to rescue the dragons?” Elliot asked, who had caught the most dragons and knew their character.

“Because I do!” Tim snarled. ”Do you think that Linsay would want to go swooping up and grabbing the dragons and being the heroic hero she is? I think that that would be right, eh?”

Elliot was so scared by Tim’s snarling that he decided to keep quiet and agree with him.

***

Meanwhile, Jiggleton seemed to have forgotten all about their little argument and was happy and skipping again.

“Lalalalala,” Jiggleton sang.

“Jiggleton,” hissed Linsay. “Don’t sing so loud. You might wake the other animals up.”

“Huh?” Jiggleton yelled so loud that everyone had to cover their ears.

Some animals fell from trees, woke up, and started chasing them.

“See? I told you so!” said Linsay, “I’ve been living in the forest my whole life!”

“Oopsie daisy,” said Jiggleton, as he dodged a swooping peregrine falcon who had just woken up from its afternoon nap.

Linsay groaned. This person needed to get used to the forest, and learn better than to wake up baby chicks. Finally, as they ran, they found the rainbow trail. By that time, the animals had given up chasing them, so they were alone. In case you don’t know, the rainbow trail has all the color trails. For example, there’s an orange trail, and a green trail, and a blue fairy trail. So there had to be the evil trail. They kept their eyes wide open for a sparkling, big, red trail.

At last, Jiggleton whispered, “I found it.”

Linsay was delighted. She was about to squeal, but she remembered that there were other animals sleeping.

So instead, she whispered, “That’s awesome! Let’s go! What are we waiting for?”

So they sprinted towards the path.

The path was very wide. Extremely wide. As long as about three football fields. It wasn’t even a path! It was more like a big area, sort of. Indeed, there was a beautiful, red, glittery, sparkling path in the big area. It was more glittery than the rest. Linsay had learned from the moles that everybody in the wicked world had a different letter for their name, and it would spell that letter on its path to lead them to that person. There was an “S” and there was a “T” and there was a “W” and a “V” and there was an “A” and finally they found an “E,” for Elliot. So they took that path. The mole had told them that they could never find the same letter path. If they went down the “E” path, they would never find it again and someone else would, but they might find the “W” path, and then they would never see the “W” path again.

So they went toward the “E” path, being brave, being able to not see it again. If you were behind Linsay watching over, you would have seen them sprint with Jiggleton on their heels. DUN DUN DUUUN…

Linsay the dragon’s adventure in Fairytale Land Part 3:

The ONLY Dragon Left in the WORLD

So, as you know, the others had just sprinted to the path. They noticed that there were compasses everywhere, and maps, and spy cameras. And there were machines that were saying things like, “Three feet away,” and, “Eighty-five feet away.” As they got closer and closer and closer, the number decreased.

Finally, it said, “You are here, you are here, you are here,” in a robotic voice. And they indeed found Elliot’s house. All that time, when Linsay and her friends were trying to find the path, Elliot had a teeny surprise waiting for them.

“Well, well, well. If it isn’t my dear old friend, the last dragon.”

“Um, excuse me, the name is Linsay,” Linsay said.

“Ah, yes, yes, yes. The little Linsay is finally here. We have a little present for you, my dear.”

“Actually, I’m a dragon,” Linsay said. “You said so yourself.”

“I didn’t mean that ‘deer,’” Elliot snapped, “Now, come on. I’ll show you your present.”

Elliot led her to a big, big, humongous room. Linsay was shocked (well, actually, not too shocked) to see dragons hanging from humongous nets, as if they were cocoons, from the ceiling. The dragons were all caught up and tangled in each other’s tails and bodies. Linsay did not know this, but her parents were there in those nets.

A deer who was accompanying Linsay said, “Linsay, are you sure this is a good idea?”

“Linsay?” said one dragon, surprised. “Your name’s not Linsay, is it?”

“Actually, yes ma’am, it is,” Linsay replied.

Lillian turned to Lucas, which was a bit tricky since they were cramped together. Linsay had stopped to listen to this curious conversation.

Lucas said, “I think this might be her.”

Lillian said, “Who do you belong to? Is it Taylor? It can’t possibly be Taylor, is it?”

“If you’re talking about Taylor the squirrel, yes ma’am,” replied Linsay in a very positive and proud tone.

Lillian’s mouth was wide open ever since she had heard the name of her child.

“Wait a minute,” Linsay said curiously and mysteriously. “What are your names again? I didn’t quite hear that.”

Lillian squeaked in a very soft voice, “Lillian and Lucas.”

“Are you my mom and dad?” said Linsay, cocking her head like a cuckoo bird, as if she were trying to remember if she had ever seen those faces before.

They did look like her, but again, didn’t every dragon look like her? But there was something special about their scales. Everyone in fairytale land knows that dragons have different colored scales down their backs. Lillian’s and Lucas’ were red just like Linsay’s, while others were green, and orange, and all those others. Every dragon was green, though.

Lillian answered Linsay’s question, saying, “I believe so. We do have red scales down our backs.”

Linsay was very happy, and she flew up, trying to hug her parents, but it was a bit tricky since they were in that net.

“Don’t worry,” Linsay whispered. “I’ll get you out. I promise.”

Lillian and Lucas’ eyes were wide with concern. They didn’t want to lose Linsay again, but they wanted her to be careful. Finally, Linsay gently stepped into the trap and fell.

“Hahahaha,” Tim cackled. “I knew you would fall for it.”

But Linsay grinned happily. “Oh, but you forgot I have wings.”

Elliot gently kicked his brother in the shin.

“I told you we should have added something!” he exclaimed. “I thought that just a simple pit wasn’t enough. I knew she was going to bring friends. I knew it, I knew it, I knew it!”

“Ughhh,” Tim groaned. His face was big and fiery and purple as he watched Linsay hovering mid-air in front of his face.

“Oh, and you also forgot that I have fire,” she sing-songed.

“Mmmmmmmm…” Every sibling’s face was probably the angriest color it could get as they glared at Tim.

“Hehehehe,” said Tim, trying to calm them down. “Hey, we can always try again… hehehe?” But they were too angry to respond.

The other animals took this opportunity to use their beaks and hooves to cut off the nets and set the dragons free. First, a bird cut a net that was holding Lillian and Lucas. They flew free and hugged Linsay as hard as they could. If you were cramped in the middle of that hug, you would have had a heart attack, but luckily, dragons have a much stronger body than humans do, so the hug didn’t bother them one bit. Finally, Linsay breathed a big, big, big, big fireball with some other dragons helping her, and it was heading straight toward Elliot and his siblings. Unfortunately, all of them were burnt to a crisp.

Linsay yelled, “That’s a taste of your own medicine! Enjoy!”

Before they were burned, everyone was still glaring at Tim, and Tim looked really helpless, actually, but they had no time to examine because they were already burnt.

“I wish your mama had taught you to not burn innocent dragons, and you’re gonna learn your lesson, and I guess you did. I’m looking at your records right now, and you have killed 8,555 dragons, which is basically three quarters of the entire population. Luckily, one quarter of the population is right here. And since they have babies, it’s about half. So haha to you,” Linsay hollered again.

So everyone went back to their dragon homes, and, as you may have guessed, they all lived happily ever after.

 

Sunflowers

Once upon a time, Alexandra planted a sunflower seed in early April. That’s me! She watered me for a long time, but I did not grow. I was so lonely in the garden. There were a bunch of roses in the garden too, but they were already grown! There were also some peppers, daisies, and tulips, but they were all grown up too! When I was first planted, I looked like a little round circle. I was the color brown when I was first planted, but now, I am light brown, and I am an oval.

Today, I am surrounded by dirt, and I got a little bigger!

“You are a really late grower, so you can’t talk to us!” the roses said to me.

“Well, it’s not my fault that I was planted late!” I said.

“It’s okay because we were planted late too! We’ll be your friends!” the peppers yelled. The five peppers were red and shaped like big triangles. At night, the peppers and I gossiped about how mean the roses were.

I said, “Wow, the roses are really, really mean to me.”

“Yeah, I’m glad I was here to help you and talk about it,” said one of the peppers.

The daisies were really friendly; they also said that they would be my friends. Usually, the tulips couldn’t say anything because they were asleep! They were always super tired because they all stayed up late at night talking to each other.

***

Now, I’m about an inch across. I’m still just a seed. It’s late April, and I’m not cold or warm. It’s super sunny out, but I need water to grow! It’s been ten whole days since it last rained.

“I’m dry, and I need water to grow,” I complained one day.

“Oh, you’re too dry, Sunflower? So you can’t play with us? If we touch you, you’ll crack and break into a million pieces!” said the roses meanly.

“Well, you’re not getting any water either! So I could crumple you into pieces too!” I said.

“Well, you’re just a tiny little seed, and we’re already flowers! So you can’t even talk properly!” the roses said.

“It’s no big deal, you’ll just have to wait until you grow up, Sunflower,” said one of the kind daisies.

Another daisy said, “You’re fine little sunflower. You’ll grow up soon!”

When night came, after ten days of no rain, it thunder-stormed over the garden at midnight. This woke up all the people sleeping in the house with rooms close to the garden. Since the rain woke Alexandra up, she looked out the window at her garden, and she saw the mean roses were leaning sideways from the wind. I woke up and saw the mean roses and laughed. I’m glad they’re gone. I don’t have to worry about those mean roses now!

The morning after the big thunderstorm, it was drizzling a little bit. At 10:00 AM it stopped drizzling, and I was almost full-bloomed! I had a big, green stalk, and I was three inches tall!  

“You’ve grown a lot!” the daisies said cheerfully. Alexandra came out and looked at me to see how much I’d grown.

“This sunflower is so beautiful!” Alexandra said. She went inside and went back to sleep because she was tired from being woken up at midnight by the rain.

“You should go back to sleep, because you were up all night. We saw you! You look tired,” the daisies said.

“Ok, I’ll head back to bed. I AM tired!” I said, and I went back to sleep.

***

I woke up to a lot of wind swirling around me! I am only five inches tall! I was scared that I might be pulled out of the ground. I’d never been in a tornado before! I had to see if the daisies and peppers were okay. When I looked to see where the daisies and peppers were, they weren’t in the garden! Then, I looked up and saw the daisies and peppers swirling around in the air. They landed on the ground with a THUMP. I cried when I realized that the peppers and the daisies were dead! I was so sad that I fell asleep.

***

The next morning, I woke up and saw more sunflowers and two tulips. One tulip is purple, the other is blue. Seeds must have dropped from the old sunflower, and new ones grew, and Alexandra must have planted the tulips a couple of days ago. Since they were still covered by dirt, they were protected from the tornado, but received lots of water from the thunderstorm.

“Hi! Can we be your friends?” the sunflowers said.

“Yeah, sure!” I replied.

I made friends with the other sunflowers and the tulips. Then, Alexandra came outside to water me and eat lunch. She ate cheese pizza while sitting on her white porch. Whenever Alexandra is outside, the flowers don’t talk because we don’t want her to notice.

Another day, two green caterpillars came into the garden and crawled on me.

“Hello! Would you like to be my friends?” I asked.

“No! We just want to crawl on you and explore you,” one caterpillar said.

“What do you want to explore about me?” I asked.

“We want to see if you are old or new. If you’re old, we’ll eat you! If you’re new, we won’t eat you,” they said.

Since I am now seven inches tall, when I sway from side to side, I can shake the caterpillars off. They got frustrated with me, and they went to bother the new sunflowers.

“Want to be friends with us?” the new sunflowers asked the caterpillars.

“We want to eat you! Are you new or old?” the caterpillars asked the new sunflowers.

“We’re new! So don’t eat us!” they replied. The caterpillars left and crawled onto the tulips.

“Get off us now! Or we’ll make you flop onto the ground,” the tulips said. The caterpillars finally left and went to another garden.

***

Later that day, I heard something buzzing, and I knew it was a beetle! A beetle came to me and said, “I’m gonna eat your leaves!”

“Well, I’m old, and I don’t wanna lose my leaves!” I said to the beetle.

“Ok, I’ll go to the other sunflowers then,” the beetle said.

“Oh no! A beetle is coming to eat us,” the new sunflowers shouted.

The beetle ate the leaves from the new sunflowers. The new sunflowers bent and died.

Poor new sunflowers.

Now, for the tulips. One tulip was sleeping, so the other one woke him up right before the beetle came.

The beetle said, “Hey tulips, I am going to nibble on your stem.”

The tulips said, “No, do not nibble on us,” but the beetle had already started nibbling the tulips’ stems.

The tulips started to tilt sideways because of the beetle. Suddenly, two ladybugs came flying into the garden and went to help the new tulips.

“Beetle, stop nibbling on our stems,” whined the tulips.

One ladybug piped in and said, “Yeah, stop nibbling on their stems because they are new, and they don’t want to be ruined really soon.”

“I’m not going to listen to you because you aren’t the boss of me,” said the beetle.

“Okay,” said the ladybugs. Then, they flew on top of the beetle and ate him!

“Thank you so much, ladybugs! You are really helpful,” said the tulips. The tulips also said, “You can come back here and visit us whenever you want.”

Then, the ladybugs flew away back to where they came from.

Then, some ants came. I said, “Hi ants! What are you doing here?

They said, “Hi, just exploring this place.”

“Can you go to a different garden?” I asked. Then, the ants left, and that was the end of that.

A couple years later, I died. It was so sad.

Before I died, Alexandra liked to look at me. She smiled at me, and I smiled back.

Rainbow’s Adventure

Chapter 1: Home

Rainbow is a scarlet macaw. He lives in Jungle Island, Florida. A lot of tourists come through it.There’s a bridge where cars can go from the mainland to the island.

On his left claw, two of his nails have come off. He is rainbow colored and has a really pointy beak.

He lives by himself on a stick. He just sits there all day. He interacts with a lot of humans who visit.

Rainbow wants to go back to the real Amazon jungle, but he can’t fly because the keepers of Jungle Island cut his wings so he can’t fly where he wants to. So, he calls his friend who lives in the jungle using his bird telepathy, to come over and pick him up. He wants his friend to come with his other macaw friends and carry him to the Amazon.

His friend responds, “I’m coming with  my friends.”

“There’s a gorilla show right next door to me,” Rainbow says.

They wait for the night to come, and then they fly over from the Amazon to Jungle Island and pick up Rainbow. The zookeepers see that Rainbow is missing on the security cameras.

The zookeepers put the alarms on, and Rainbow gets so scared he says to his friends, “You guys, bring me back to my branch! I have to get back. Or else I’ll be in big trouble.”

They said they would bring him back because they didn’t want him to get in trouble. Once he’s back on his branch, Rainbow pretends to be asleep. The zookeepers come out from where they were hiding and one says, “What’s going on around here?” It is a man with a mustache, brown eyes, and brown hair.

Rainbow pretends to wake up from his pretend sleep and says, “Looking for someone, fellas?” (Rainbow speaks English).

Then they say, “You, young boy, are in big trouble. What were you doing a few minutes ago?”
“I was just sleeping, but then you guys woke me up. You guys are so mean.”

They say, “No we’re not, you’re the mean one. You’re lying to us.” Then, they get into a big, humongous fight. Rainbow starts pecking them with his beak. Both of them say, “Ow ow ow ow ow!” and they faint because of the pain.

Rainbow says, “Come on boys, bring me up! Let’s go to the Amazon and go have fun.”

Then a girl zookeeper says, “Not so fast, little bird. First, you’re coming with me.”

Rainbow says, “Uh oh, you see what I mean?” His friends pretend to be statues while he talks to the zookeepers.

The girl zookeeper suddenly feels sick, but she doesn’t want to get Rainbow sick, so she goes to the bathroom. Another zookeeper walks up to Rainbow and she says, “Little bird, I need to have a talk with you.”

Rainbow starts crying and says, “All I want is to be in the Amazon and be free. Why’d you guys cut my wings so I can’t fly?”

“Rainbow, you can be in the Amazon if you want. But we thought this would be a safer place for you because the Amazon is getting destroyed right now.”

“Oh no!” Rainbow says. “I have to save my friends!”

The nice zookeeper gives Rainbow prosthetic wings so he can fly. She always has an extra pair in the first aid kit, just in case.

Rainbow says, “Thank you so much,” to the zookeeper.

“My pleasure, Rainbow. But please, try and help the Amazon rainforest.”

Rainbow says, “Of course. Why would I want to not protect my home? I love my home.”

The zookeeper says, “Of course you do. Now go out there and give them all you got.”

He says, “I got it,” and he leaves. He tells his friends, “Guys, we have to save the rainforest! It’s being destroyed, and the whole Amazon might be dead by the time we get there. Come on, we have to doubletime.”

They go as fast as they can, and they make it. They call every single macaw, bird, and animal they can find in the rainforest, and they go to the heart of the Amazon, where people are starting to cut down trees. They approach the people who want the wood from the Amazon trees and say, “What are you guys doing? This is our jungle, not your little playhouse that you don’t want anymore.”

Then, the people say, “Well if you want your rainforest, you’re gonna need to get it from us.”
Every single bird in the forest says, “We’re gonna get our rainforest back.” All of the animals start approaching the men, and the men start freaking out.

They finally say, “Okay, you guys can have the rainforest.”

They have a huge celebration in the rainforest. They actually make use of the heart of the rainforest. They make it into a party center. And, they live happily ever after.

 

Chapter 2: Getting a Job

Since Rainbow had so much fun in the party center, he wants to start working there. He thinks, Hey, since no one is working there, I could be the boss and the DJ. He figures he could charge one nut for one hour of partying. He finds a big leaf, some mud, and a stick to draw with. He starts planning for the center – how to make it a fun place where animals would really want to go. But how can I make all of this stuff out of nature? We need somebody to build it, thinks Rainbow.

Rainbow flies back to the city with the leaf he drew his plans on and he goes back to Jungle Island. He asks one of the zookeepers if they could make that happen and he says, “No.” The zookeepers don’t try to get him back, because they’re happy that he saved the Amazon. As a reward, they’re letting him live in the jungle.

He flies back to the Amazon, calls his friends, and says, “Guys, we have to build this in a couple of days, okay? And just out of nature.” Then he adds, “It’s literally impossible!”

“No it’s not. We can still try! It never hurts to try,” his friends say.

Rainbow groans, “Okay, you win.”

One of Rainbow’s friends is a white macaw. Rainbow has two more friends. One friend is a blue macaw and the other one is a scarlet macaw. The blue macaw is named Blue, the white macaw is named Snow, and the scarlet macaw is named Silk.

Rainbow and his friends start building the party center. Rainbow brought supplies for everything, and then, he and his friends start building.

Once they are done, Silk says, “Look at our progress!”

A few hours later, there is an earthquake. Everything that Rainbow and his friends built is destroyed. Then, all of his friends went back to the heart of the rainforest and say, “Uh-oh…”

“What happened here?” says Silk.

“Where’s our party center?” says Snow.

“Who did this?” asks Blue.

“The earthquake did,” says Rainbow in a mad tone.

“We have to fix this!” says Snow.

“But how?” Rainbow says.

Silk says, “Rainbow, get the supplies that you got before. We can build this thing again.”

“Okay…” groans Rainbow.

Rainbow flies out to get the supplies.

“We’ll help,” says Snow.

“Thanks, guys.” Rainbow says.

“Come on,” says Blue. “Let’s get those supplies and build another party center for fun!”

Then, other animals, like the lions and snakes and tigers, the other birds, crocodiles, frogs, and everybody else comes to that part of the rainforest, and says, “What has happened here? It was so nice before!”

“The earthquake happened,” says Rainbow, flying in with the supplies. “Would you guys please move so we can rebuild this place?”

Everybody else says, “No. We’re gonna help you.”

“Thank you so much,” Rainbow and his friends say to the other animals. Rainbow shows everyone the leaf that he wrote on for the plan. Then everybody says, “Whoooooooa.”

“Oh, cool,” says a baby lion. “Look, mama,” but his mom doesn’t not come.

Then Rainbow says, “We’ll take care of you until your mom comes, which will probably be very soon. It won’t take long.”

“I’ll start looking for your mom, okay?” says Snow.

“Okay,” the cub says. “Thank you, Rainbow.”

“Are you gonna help us build?” says Rainbow.

The cub says, “Yes, please!”

“Come on,” Silk says, “We have to start building or else we won’t open on time.”

“Okay, Silk,” the cub says.

Then they start building.

“This is fun!” the cub says. “I can’t wait to tell my mom about this!”

“One problem with that,” Snow says, coming back.

“What’s the problem?” asks the cub.

“It turns out your mom was captured by humans.”

“What?” the cub says with a confused face.

“It looks like we’ll be your new parents,” Rainbow says.

But the cub doesn’t respond. The cub is crying in Rainbow’s wings.

“It’s okay,” Rainbow says. Then, Rainbow whispers to his friends, “You guys continue working. I’ll stay here.”

“What’s your name, little cub?” Rainbow asks.

“Charlie,” the cub says.

“Come on, Charlie, let’s get some popsicles.”

“No, I want to look for my mama!”

“Okay, we can look for your mom,” Rainbow says.

Charlie snaps, “Thank you.”

“Here, let me give you a ride,” Rainbow says, spreading his wings wide. “I will take you to where Snow saw your mother.”

“Here we go!” Rainbow starts to go up.

“Weeeeeeee!” Charlie says.

“Right here,” Rainbow says. He goes down to where Charlie’s mother was. When they get down on the ground, Charlie sees his mom locked up in a cage with poison ivy around her so that the other animals can’t touch her.

“Charlie!” his mother calls.

“Mama!” Charlie calls.

Charlie runs up to his mom.

“Not too close!” says Rainbow. “You don’t want to get poison ivy on you!”

Charlie’s mom says, “Thank goodness you’re okay.”

“We have to get your mom out,” Rainbow says.

“But how?” Charlie and his mom say.

“This is how.” The hunters come out from hiding in a cherry bush. “You two are gonna stay in the same cage and be stuffed and put in the American Museum of Natural History.”

Rainbow starts beating up all the hunters. He uses his beak to peck at them and scratches them with his claws. Then, Charlie starts getting up closer to his mom. Charlie doesn’t care about the poison ivy. He wants his mom back.

“Ouch!” Charlie says. “The poison ivy stung me, Rainbow!” But Rainbow doesn’t answer. He is busy beating up the hunters with his claws, his beak, everything he has. He pokes them with a super-sharp stick he made. Then, the hunters faint from pain.

“Charlie, let me take the poison ivy off while you go get the key from the hunters’ pants.”

“Gotcha,” Charlie says.

“Three… two… one… go!” Rainbow says. Rainbow takes off the poison ivy while Charlie goes to get the key. Then, Rainbow unlocks the cage with the key so that Charlie’s mom can go to Charlie, and Charlie can go to his mom.

“Goodbye,” Rainbow says. “I’m going to go back to the party center.”

At the center, the animals can bowl, play games, chat with friends and have birthday parties. They use oranges and bamboo sticks for bowling. There is a kid’s section where they can play tag, bowl, and play games, just like everything that they have for adults.

Rainbow looks at his claws, and he has big spots on them. He can’t feel the poison ivy, because his claws are rough. It is nighttime, so Rainbow goes to his house and starts to sleep in his bed.

The next morning, he wakes up early to get to his job. When he is getting ready, he sees that his poison ivy is gone. Then, Rainbow decides to put up fliers for animals to work at the party center. He decides to name the party center, “The Heart of the Amazon.” Then, he takes a picture of the Amazon and puts it on the fliers.

 

Chapter 3: Getting to Business

When Rainbow gets to work, all the other animals who want to work start coming. They ask Rainbow if they can work. Rainbow says, “Yeah, of course.”

There are frogs, snakes, tigers, lions and birds. The frog is the greeter. The lion is in charge of the bowling. The tiger is in charge of the kids section. The snake is behind the register. The birds are the cops to check if anything is going wrong.

Rainbow gives everybody a membership and a nametag. The animals get paid with nuts. At seven o’clock, the center opens. Rainbow asks everyone to get in position.

Everyone says, “Yes, Rainbow!”

Then Rainbow screams, “We’re OPEN!!!”

No one comes in for thirty minutes.

The snake says, “Where is everybody? We’re still empty.”

The lion says, “This is a real big emergency! There’s nobody here!”

Then, everybody else screams, “WE know!!”

The tiger says, “How come nobody’s here?”

“I don’t know,” Rainbow says.  “Maybe because we didn’t hang the fliers, so nobody knows about it. You guys, I’ll have my friends hang these fliers, and we can just wait here for customers.”

Rainbow calls all his friends and asks them, “Can you hang these fliers?”

“Of course, Rainbow!” they say.   

“I’ll help you,” Rainbow says.

“Thank you,” Rainbow’s friends say.

“Come on, let’s go,” says Rainbow.

Rainbow and his friends grab the fliers and start hanging them in the jungle. Once they are done, Rainbow and his friends wait five minutes. Customers are coming in to the party center, so they can have fun.

Charlie and his mom come, and they get a membership.

Rainbow says, “I didn’t get your name,” to the mom.

“My name’s Claire,” the mom says.

“Very nice to meet you, Claire.”

“Nice to meet you, too,” Claire says.

“Charlie can go in the kid’s section, if you like.”

Then, Claire asks if Charlie wants to go in the kid’s section.

Charlie says,”Yes, please.”

Rainbow says, “Come on, Charlie, I’ll lead you there.”

Rainbow takes Charlie to the kid’s section, which is next to the grown-up’s bowling alley. Charlie walks in the kid’s center. Later, he says, “I don’t want to go home” when it is time for them to go.

“Here, you guys can have a punch card. If you come here ten times, then you can come one time for free.”

“Thank you, Rainbow!” Charlie says.

“Bye!” Rainbow says.

“Bye!” Claire says.

“Wait!” Rainbow says. “I forgot. Every time a cub leaves, I’m supposed to give them a lollipop. So Charlie, you can choose a lollipop from here.”

“I’ll have this one,” Charlie says.  “Okay,” Rainbow says, “Bye!”

 

A Jail Play

Act One, Scene 1

Setting

In a jail cell. At rise, DEVIL & HOT are sleeping on bunk beds in cell center stage, DEVIL on the top bunk. There’s a tiny sink and a little toilet. There are jail-bar lighting effects on the stage. The cell has tan-colored walls.

DEVIL

Zzzz…

HOT wakes up. HOT looks at DEVIL. DEVIL wakes up.

DEVIL

Where am I ?

HOT  

You’re in a jail cell, and my name is Hot.

GUARD 1 enters on left and walks to the cell. GUARD 2 runs after GUARD 1

GUARD 2

Wait, wait master! It is lunch time. We must take them to lunch.

GUARD 1

They can wait.

GUARD 1 & GUARD 2 stop in front of cell, center stage.

DEVIL  

(shouting) Hey! You! Stupid guard! Why am I here?

GUARD  1

Don’t yell at me! You’re here because you robbed a bank!

HOT is sitting on the bed listening. GUARD 2 is trying to look scary and brave, but he’s not doing a good job at it.

GUARD 2  

(acting tough, to DEVIL) You better behave in here.

DEVIL takes a step forward and GUARD 2 gets scared, and he runs away downstage left. GUARD 1 makes an exasperated face in response to GUARD 2, then exits downstage right.

HOT

I have a plan.

DEVIL  

A plan for what?

HOT  

A plan to break out of jail and rob a bank. Trust me, I’ve done this a thousand times. It will be fine… We won’t get in  trouble.

DEVIL

Fine, I’ll do it .

HOT whispers the plan  in DEVIL’s ear.

Curtain.

 

Act One, Scene 2

Setting

The same jail cell, but the light is lower to indicate that it’s nighttime. HOT and DEVIL are digging a tunnel in the floor of the cell (in a trap-door) with spoons at rise. The tunnel is big enough for them to disappear beneath stage level.  They are digging.

HOT

It’s going to be great when we break out of jail I can’t wait to-

DEVIL

(yelling) Ssssshhh, if you keep talking, a guard is going to come!!!

HOT

No they won’t don’t worry you always wor-

GUARD 1 comes downstage right  and walks to cell.

GUARD 1      

(yelling) WHAT ARE YOU DOING? ALERT ALERT, PRISONERS ESCAPING!

DEVIL and HOT both jump in the hole and start shoveling faster, trying to get away.

GUARD 1 rushes to the side of the cell and presses a button (the audience can’t see it). A siren and a red flashing light come on. GUARD 2 runs in.  He’s a little disoriented and wearing pink bunny pajamas.

GUARD 2

What, what, what happened?

GUARD 1

Unlock the door and go after them!

GUARD 2 shakes his head and hands his keys to GUARD 1, trembling with fear. GUARD 1 grabs the keys, unlocks the door, grabs GUARD 2 by the scruff of the neck, and throws him down the hole, then jumps in after him.

Curtain.

 

Act One, Scene 3

Setting  

Stage is divided in half. Stage left is a courtroom. POLICEMEN 1-4 are there. JUDGE is there, and GUARD 2 is there, still in his pajamas. DEVIL and HOT are there, handcuffed. Stage right is outside the courthouse. There are old-fashioned lamp posts, a shrub, and a parked cop car (it can be a cardboard cutout).

There’s a murmur of commotion at rise. JUDGE bangs her gavel.

JUDGE

Order! Order!

The room gets quiet.

JUDGE

(sounding official) I hereby announce that Devil and Hot have twenty more years of jail! Extra security is needed for these prisoners! We need a police-detail on their cell until we find a more secure facility.

JUDGE bangs her gavel. POLICEMEN take HOT and DEVIL outside (stage right) to go to the cop car so that the cop car can take HOT and DEVIL back to jail.

HOT  

NOW!

HOT and DEVIL take off running from the cops, but they forgot that they were handcuffed together. HOT went to the left side of a lamp-post, and DEVIL went to the right side.The chain of the cuffs wrapped around the post, and so did HOT and DEVIL and they smack heads.

COPs and GUARDs  

Hahaha

Curtain.

 

Act 1 scene 4

Stage split in half. Stage right is the half for the jail indicated by a sign upstage right that reads “County Jail  Visiting Hours 11 – 3, M-F” and a barred window. Center stage is the road, indicated by a jumble of road signs. Stage left is the Courthouse parking lot. Sign upstage left reads “Courthouse parking only.” At rise, GUARDs 1 and 2 are stage right, GUARD 2 is eating a banana next to a giant pile of banana peels.

COP 3

(To other cops) Come on! Let’s get them in the car.

COP 2 and COP 4 pick up HOT and DEVIL and put them in the car. COP 1, 2, 3, and 4 get in the car. COP 1 drives the cardboard cutout of a cop car to the jail, walking in intricate circles and figure-8s around the road signs. They pull up next to the jail.

GUARD 1 and 2 are waiting for them.

COP 1 gets out of the car.

GUARD 2  

Hey, cop! Guess what! I’m trying to set the world record for eating the most bananas!

COP 1

We don’t care.

COP 2 opens the back door for HOT and DEVIL.

DEVIL

NOW!

HOT and DEVIL take off running but GUARD 2 has already started breaking the banana-eating record and HOT and DEVIL slip on his banana peels.

GUARD 2

NNNNOOOO all of my hard work, gone!!!

GUARD 1 rolls his eyes, sighs, and brings HOT and DEVIL to a cell.

Curtain.

 

Act 1 scene 5

HOT and DEVIL are sitting on bed.

DEVIL notices a bandaid on HOT’s elbow. He grabs HOT’s arm to look at it, then holds it up to the wall.

HOT

Hey, what are you doing with my arm?

DEVIL

Don’t you see? These bandaids are the same color as the wall! We could use them as camouflage!!!

HOT

Then we can ask for a box of bandaids and cover ourselves in them. Then, they will think that we’re not here, and they’ll open the door to our cell, and we can run out!

DEVIL

Brilliant! It will be a piece of cake, just like this one I got from the cafeteria.

DEVIL holds up a piece of cake.

HOT  

Okay, but we have to ask that weird guard that doesn’t know anything.

Beat.

Here he comes now!

HOT and DEVIL stand up and GUARD 2 walks in from the left  and to the cell. GUARD 2 is on a cell phone.

GUARD 2

(into phone) Yes, dear, yes, I promise I won’t forget our anniversary dinner tonight.

Beat.

Yes, dear, I won’t forget again. Goodbye.

(Hangs up)

DEVIL

Hey, weirdo! Give us a box of bandaids!

GUARD2

O-okay

GUARD 2 reaches in his pocket and pulled out a box of bandaids.

HOT and DEVIL reach for the box at the same time GUARD 2 gets scared and drops the box, then he  runs off stage right. HOT reaches down and grabs the box and opens it.

DEVIL  

Let’s only do the front of us because we don’t have enough.

DEVIL and HOT reach into the box and start covering themselves with Band-aids. (see Appendix, Fig.1)

Lights fade out. DEVIL and HOT have been wearing orange jumpsuits over Band-aid costumes. They take off the top layer to reveal costumes made to look like they’ve covered themselves in Band-aids- back-side orange jumpsuit. Slip on sleeves (made of pantyhose) that have been painted to look like Band-aids covering the front of their arms and faces. Lights fade back up. They give each other an approving nod. They stand flat against the cell wall, blending in.

 

HOT

(leaning forward, feigning the GUARD’s voice) Prisoners escaped! Prisoners escaped! All guards to the cell block! (leans back against the wall).

GUARD 1 rushes in from stage left, GUARD 2 rushes in from stage right. They look in the cell, which appears to be empty. GUARD 1 presses the button, and the siren and lights start again. All the while, HOT and DEVIL are very still against the wall. COPS 1, 2, and 3 enter from stage left.

GUARD 1

(To COPS, looking at COPS) I thought there was supposed to be extra police-detail security! Where were you? You were supposed to be watching them!!!

COP 2

Sorry, sorry, we won’t let this happen again.

COP 3 opens the door to take a look and HOT and DEVIL run out, but they don’t get far. When they run away, you can see that their backsides are orange-jumpsuits even though they’re band-aid colored in the front. They’re running towards stage right.

DEVIL and HOT are almost off stage when GUARD 2’s WIFE enters right in their path, stage right.

GUARD 2’s WIFE

(Yelling) Why did you forget our anniversary again!?! This is it!

DEVIL and HOT slam right into her and fall down. GUARD 2’s wife faints. COPS handcuff DEVIL and HOT together. GUARD 2 gets scared of what his wife will do, so he runs away, stage left.

Curtain.

 

Act 1 scene 6

Back in the courtroom. GUARD 2 and his WIFE are there with the JUDGE, the four COPS and GUARD 1. The JUDGE is listing the reasons why GUARD 2 should go to jail.

JUDGE bangs her gavel.

JUDGE

(in an official voice) Order! Order! We are here to discuss what this guard has done and why he should be put in jail.

GUARD 2’s WIFE’s arms are crossed and so doesn’t look impressed.

JUDGE

He has robbed four banks. He has gone over the speed limit 2,000 times and has a fee of 9000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 dollars!

GUARD 2

(shaking, worried) I  can explain! I only robbed the banks because I had to make it up to my wife for the fifty anniversary dinners I’ve forgotten. And the speeding tickets… you see, I failed the driver’s test five times when I was a teenager, and I just didn’t think I could ever get a job without a driver’s license, so one of my friends took it for me. So, I’m not really sure what “speed limit” means.

JUDGE

I hereby announce that this guard has fifty years of jail and should be put in the same jail cell as those weird devils.

GUARD2

But- But- But- please, I promise that I won’t do it again!!

JUDGE

No buts now… Off to jail!

Curtain.

 

Act 1 scene 7

Setting: Jail cell.

GUARD 2 is in the same cell as HOT and DEVIL. They are all sitting on the bottom bed, thinking.

GUARD 2

How will we get out of here? It’s impossible!

GUARD 2 puts his hands into his pocket and his face lights up as he stands up.

GUARD 2

Oh! I STILL HAVE THE KEY! And a gun!

DEVIL

WELL, WHAT ARE YOU WAITING FOR? OPEN THE DOOR!!!

GUARD 2 walks to the door and turns the key. The door swings open. An alarm goes off.

HOT

Come on or they will see us!

GUARD 2, HOT, and DEVIL run off right stage as soon as GUARD 1 comes running in from left stage.

Curtain.

 

Act 1 scene 8

Stage split in half. Bank on right stage and parking lot left stage both visible. HOT, DEVIL, and GUARD 2 are at the bank. There are five BANK TELLERS standing behind the counter on the far right side.

HOT

You better give us all your money, or I will blow up the whole bank with you inside it!

BANK TELLER 1

Never!!!

BANK TELLER 3

(in a tough voice) Why should we?

DEVIL takes out a gun from his orange jumpsuit.

DEVIL

If you don’t… I’ll shoot at you!

BANK TELLER 2

O– o– okay.

BANK TELLER 4 and 5 whisper to each other then BANK TELLER 5 goes on the phone with someone, while BANK TELLER 1, 2, and 3 give them the money. Just as HOT, DEVIL, and GUARD 2 turn to leave, they hear a siren. They run out of the bank and run off left stage.

Car enters from left stage license plate reads, “I DID IT”

Cop car pulls up next to the car with the siren on.

COP 1
Get out of that car now!!!

MAN

I don’t understand. I didn’t do anything wrong.

COP

Then why does your license plate say, “I DID IT” when there was just a robbery here!!!

MAN

I customized it! Get it? I DID IT myself!

COP

(in a little voice) Oh.

COP drives away right stage.

Curtain.

 

Act 1 scene 9

In an English mansion. Enter HOT, DEVIL wearing sunglasses and Hawaiian shirts. GUARD 2 wearing bunny pajamas.

DEVIL  

Finally, we made it!

HOT  

So glad we can afford this mansion now!

GUARD 2  

And these stylish clothes!

GUARD 2’s WIFE, GUARD 1, COP 1, 2, 3, and 4  and the MAN in the car come on left stage. JUDGE and BANK TELLERS 1 – 5 enter from right stage. ALL bow at the same time.

 

The Blood Bone

One sunny spring day, I was in my house with my older brother, Kevin, and my mom, Tally. Kevin and I are huge Lego fans. We have a massive Lego room in our basement, and we get Lego sets every week.

I asked Mom, “Can I go in the basement to get a Lego set?”

“Sure,” she replied.

Halfway down, I heard Kevin running down the stairs with me. He grabbed a Lego set and gave me the Legos I wanted. I then saw an old book on a rusty shelf, and the title was Mouse Time, with a painted clock without any hands on the cover. I thought it would be a cool book to read, so I decided to bring that upstairs, too.

***

The Next Day…

I asked Mom,” Can I read this book?”

Mom then replied, “No, because today, you have to finish this All About Alligators book first.”

I put it on a bookshelf at the left corner. I then put on the TV and played a game called “Plants vs. Zombies Garden Warfare 2.”

“Are you playing Minecraft?” asked mom.

“No, I’m playing PvZ Garden Warfare 2,” I responded. Plants vs Zombies Garden Warfare 2 is about this: You can be either a plant or a zombie. If you are a plant, you fight zombies, and if you are a zombie, you fight plants.

Suddenly, in Plants vs Zombies, a robot popped up and asked, “Do you wanna play ‘Mouse Time’?” I then stopped and realized that Mouse Time was the name of that old book that Kevin read! Also, this game is about plants and zombies, not robots! I thought.

The first thing I could think of was to ask Kevin what the book was about.

He then told me, “It was a weird book about a mouse in a strange place made of blue crystals. It was basically a book filled with logic puzzles, and it is over when the mouse solves all fifty of the puzzles.”

I thought, Strange, but not that weird. Also, is that all the book’s about? A mouse surrounded by crystals with a bunch of puzzles?

***

Two Days Later…

I finished my book and decided to read Mouse Time. I read the first five pages, and it said, ”Introducing: the Mouse!” Not exciting at all, so far, I thought.

“The mouse needs… HELP!!! There are puzzles that he can’t solve by his own! That is why he needs… HELP! The mouse needs some $! Why? Because he needs a home! He needs a friend! Then… BANG!! The mouse bumps into a wall, and realizes it is a … MAZE! He then knows that he can get money when he completes the maze!”

“Very… weird.” I said.

I then went downstairs in the basement and put the Mouse Time book where I found it on the same rusty shelf. I then went upstairs and went to bed.

***

In The Morning…

I woke up, ate my breakfast and decided to play a new game on the TV, called “Space Case.” The game was released yesterday. When I started to play, I saw a 2-D screen with a sandwich. Five minutes later, the screen said, “FIGHT!!!”

I then saw a weird guy who looked like a caveman, and he suddenly ran out of the screen and hit me! He somehow grew bigger!

“AHHH! Help! There is a guy in the house!!!” I screamed. He then cut a table in half with a hatchet and got ready to smash the sofa! I dashed to Kevin and Mom.

“Guys, come!!!” I shouted.

“Okay?” said Kevin, approaching the room.

“Look! I said, pointing to the table. It was not cut in half! I then looked at the TV. The sandwich was there, and the weird caveman disappeared!

“Yeah, what?” asked Kevin.

“No! There was a guy right here!” I shouted. Why does nobody believe me? He was standing right here! Also, when he cut the table, how did he not hear the noise? It was so loud, but no one heard it!

***

The Next morning…

I went into the bathroom, looked in the mirror, and started to brush my teeth. When I looked up, there was a reflection of the same guy from the game!!! I looked behind me and saw nothing. I then looked in the mirror again and still saw the weird person! I broke the glass and opened the cabinet, but the weird guy was not there!

I then found Kevin, and he was looking up. “Mom, Mom!” He shouted.

“What?” I asked. Kevin pointed up. Mom was stuck on the ceiling! One minute later, Mom came down, got a fork, and shouted,“RHAAAAAA!!!”, and she stabbed Kevin!

“NOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO!!!” I shouted.

I then woke up and realized that since I went in the bathroom to now, that was all just a dream! However, that weird looking guy could still be strolling around…I went into the room where I saw the guy run out of the TV, and then suddenly, I saw, Mouse Time!

Kevin was right by the book and said, “I saw you put the book in the basement! It somehow came back up!” I looked at the book and saw it disintegrate into thin air! When it was all gone, nothing was left but blood. The blood was in the shape of a bone!

“Kevin, let’s get Mom!” I said.

“Yeah, let’s go,” Kevin responded. We ran to Mom, and I showed Mom the blood bone, but instead, it was a real bone! I then said, “Mom, it’s nothing. Bye! Was my mind playing tricks on me?

***

The Next Day…

I went into the basement and saw a human body’s skeleton with a missing bone! I then bolted upstairs, grabbed the blood bone that turned into a regular bone, and got Kevin. We dashed downstairs, and I took the real blood bone and looked at the skeleton with a missing bone and attached the blood bone to the skeleton! It was an exact match!

“Wow, the blood bone fits into the missing space!” said Kevin.

“Well, duh, where else could it possibly fit?” I asked.

“Umm, not now,“ said Kevin, pointing to the Mouse Time book.

I thought, What? How did the book get down here again???

***

The Next Morning…

I brushed my teeth and decided to play “Space Case” again. Five minutes later, I looked out a window, and saw eight motorcycles, bolting ahead of one another. When I looked back at the TV, the same guy I saw a few days ago jumped out of the TV!

There was not even time to think; I hurried to Kevin, and said, “COME!” Kevin came over, and I realized that the guy wasn’t there! Instead, there was a bone.

“Huh?” asked Kevin.

“I don’t know, I saw that guy again, and… there’s a bone!” I said.

“Well, I guess there is another one!” said Kevin.

***

15 minutes later…

I was playing space case, and I then waited to see if that weird cavemen guy will appear again. I waited and waited and waited for the caveman to come, but he didn’t!

***

In the Morning…

I ate breakfast, brushed my teeth, and went in the basement with the bone that appeared when I saw the cavemen a few days ago and saw Mouse Time. I then thought, This must connect somehow, but how?

I then knew exactly how to connect it! I remembered that the book had a clock on it with no hands! I put the bone on the clock, and thought, The bone could be a hand for the clock, and — I then heard a loud noise, a clock spinning forever and ever, and I saw the giant bone on the little clock spin and spin. I saw the rusty old shelf blow up… and I saw a hole, so I thought, Why not go down?

When I went down, I realized that I was in the game “Space Case,” where the weird caveman guy lived! I realized that I was growing, just like the cavemen did when he was in my house. I went left and saw that there was that “fight” sign. I thought, He appears at this sandwich, so maybe you can go through the sandwich to attack him! I tried to go through the sandwich, and one minute later, I somehow went through the sandwich!

I then saw a spruce wood door, and I opened it. Suddenly, I saw the caveman, sitting right in a chair… I saw his hatchet right by the door, so I grabbed it, ran towards him and cut the chair in half!

He then quickly got out the chair and ran behind a desk. I then found some metal bars, put them around him, got the chair that was cut in half and put it on top of the iron bars.

“Hah, you’re trapped now!” I said. He didn’t respond at all. I then put the hatchet away and exited the sandwich.

***

Back in the House…

I told Kevin, “I went in the new game and defeated that weird guy I saw! That means that Mouse Time will never go anywhere ever again!”

“Also, today we got a new Lego set!” said Kevin.

“YAAAAAAAAAAY!” I shouted.

And that was the story of me and the menacing blood bone.                   

 

 

Baltimore Kitty

The first thing I remember is my mother licking me. I can’t see her, but I know it is her. I can hear voices too. Human voices that, at first, trouble me. But then, my mother somehow reassures me that everything is fine. I listen curiously to what those humans, a whole other species, think and say.

“Emily, we can not keep a whole litter of kittens. There are five kittens from this litter alone! Just think of all the other litters Queen might have with Sebastian.”

I make the decision that my mother is Queen, but who in the world is Sebastian?

“Richard, don’t worry. We are planning on selling the kittens after all.”   

I don’t really understand what that means, so I don’t really pay attention to the words being spoken. Instead, I listen to the strange sounds that come out of their mouths. One human has a light, airy voice, and the other has a more gruff, husky voice that reminds me too much of a dog’s bark. This thinking exhausts me, and I curl up beside my mother and siblings. Comfortable, warm, and very sleepy.

Suddenly, I feel a jolt and wake up in the back of a strange, rolling room. I’m still too weak to stand up and open my eyes, so I nuzzle my mother, who licks me until my oldest brother, Prince, diverts her attention away. There is nothing to do in this strange contraption. So I let myself be lulled asleep by the rolling of the strange thing.

“Hey Mittens!” says Chanel, my youngest sister. I can tell it’s her because she is the sister who constantly wants attention. Especially from mother. Also, she clips her words, even at three days old.

“Chanel, I’m sleeping.”

“Mommy told me what this thing is called.” And pausing for dramatic effect, she declares, “It is called a car!”

I am mad that Chanel knows this before I did, but I do not say so. Instead, I fall asleep wondering what a car does, other than scare little kittens.

***

Three months later

I have grown some lovely, fluffy fur. I can now open my eyes, walk around, and play with my sisters and brothers. The house I live in is a townhouse in South Baltimore. It is a red, brick house with ivy growing up the sides. I’m the cleanest kitty out of my litter, and that makes me very proud. My paws are a proud point of mine, hence my name “Mittens.”

***

One day, I watched Richard, my human, put up a sign I couldn’t read, but I did see the word “kittens” on the sign. I meowed at my mother and my father, the mysterious Sebastian. They immediately jumped up to the window sill. I could tell it was very hard for my parents to read the sign too, although they didn’t want to admit it.

“It looks like Miss Mittens has got herself a mystery,” purred my mother, nuzzling me. She didn’t seem to worry about it though, so neither did I.

Richard walked back inside, whistling as he walked. I rubbed his leg, expecting an answer. He bent down to scratch my head.

“Ohhhh Mittens, if only you knew.” Then, he went into the kitchen.

If only I knew. What does that mean? I wondered all throughout the day. I knew a lot of things. I considered myself a very educated kitty. I knew not to drink from the toilet and where my food was. I knew how to clean myself and many other important things.

While I was pondering in the kitchen, I heard a knock on the door and a sophisticated voice saying, “I heard that you were selling kittens. I only need one who isn’t a lot of work, likes laps, and doesn’t get fur everywhere.”

Who is this strange person at the door?

“Well, I have an idea of one you would love. Her name is Mittens,” said Richard.

Wait, that’s my name! Are Richard and Emily selling me? Before I could fully wrap my head around this terrible fate, Richard was picking me up and saying goodbye. Then, like I never mattered to him, Richard dumped me into the strange woman’s perfectly manicured hands.

I started to cry, “Mama, Daddy?”

They came running over. But it was too late. The woman was already paying my human. I was leaving everything I had: my bed, my humans, my food, my house, but most importantly, my family. I saw all my siblings pawing at the windows and doors. I thought of Prince, Winny, Bent, and Chanel, and how much I would miss them. They drove me crazy most of the time, but they were my pack. Now who would I play with? I curled up in the back of the woman’s car and waited for the drive to be over.

“Kitty, come out. We’re here,” the woman cooed. I looked around at my new surroundings. There was a pale blue townhouse with white shutters and a small porch. I didn’t notice anything pretty about it, because I had made up my mind to hate the place that was to replace my family and old life.

“Kitty — Mittens — whatever your name is, please get out of the car.” I went under a seat, very frightened. Finally, she sighed and picked me up. “Something tells me you’re going to be more trouble than you’re worth, kitty,” she spat at me.

After a week in the ill-decorated house, I was bored out of my mind. No one would play with me — well, except when the mistress (meaning the woman who “stole” me from my old, better life) tried to do fashion shows for me. She put on crazy, flashy, sequined outfits and high, high heels, and strutted down the hallway. I always ran away from her.

On my first day, I thought she wanted to play, so I attacked her legs. That didn’t end well. I  had the house all to myself because Mistress was gone all day for her “job,” which was really just a shopping spree, then treating herself to bubble tea and ice cold margaritas.

By the end of week one, I decided to run away. I couldn’t stand to live there anymore. Run away from hot pink, pleather couches and tacky pink chandeliers in every room. Run away from the worst life yet. So I did. I thought it would’ve been harder to leave a home and a human, but once I started running, I didn’t even look back.

***

It was sad how easily I got away. No one really knew I was gone. I wanted to go back to my old house very badly, but I realized that I would be sent away from them again. I wasn’t wanted at home. Of course, my real cat family would love me back. But to the humans, I was just another mouth to feed. It is terrible to not be wanted anywhere. I cried, realizing that now, not only did I not have any family, but I also had no shelter. I slipped into an alley and hid behind a trash can, waiting out the night.

“Hey Stocky, get up!” hissed an unfamiliar voice.

“Ughhh?” I moaned, not really knowing what was going on.

“Did you hear me? I said, get up. This is my territory.”

“Territory? Are you being protective of a trash can?”

“This is mine, anyway.”

“Fine,” I said, not really making an effort to move.

Just then, the cat attacked me. It scratched my ear. I hissed, startled. I was going to get up. There was no need for violence. But in self defense, I pounced on top of it, my claws digging into the cat’s back. The cat shook me off. I fell to the wet, garbage-covered ground.

“Just stay away. I’ll leave you with a warning this time.” And with that, the cat turned away and took its place in the spot I found. I slunked away, looking for something to eat.

I tried to catch birds, but I only succeeded in catching one. It was rather sad to kill another living thing, but I got used to it, because I was starving. Sometimes, the occasional mouse would wander into the alleyway, and I would be on it in a second. It really wasn’t much food to live by though. The water supply was also very low. There was a leaking water hose in the back of a bakery that made big puddles.

After two weeks of this, I was tired, hungry, and thirsty. This little alleyway had become my home, food source, water source, and protection from other cats. While I was thinking about the alley and how I’d gotten here, I smelled something slightly familiar. The smell made me think of the times when Richard came home with a sack of meat. Sometimes he gave the chicken to me and my family for a big, fancy dinner. Remembering this gave me a heavy heart, making me wish I was still there. I was still a curious kitten, so I followed the scent. I followed the scent all the way to a shop, where a man was hanging up meat on strings. Meat! Glorious, fresh, chewy, tender, yummy meat. I moaned at the man wearing a bloody apron. He turned his head to stare at me.

“Hey pretty kitty, you look a little young to be out on your own. Where’s your mama?”

I moaned again and rubbed his leg.

“Awwwww, are you a loner?” he asked, looking like he felt bad for me.

I sat down at his feet and looked up at him expectantly.

He stared right back at me, then he bent down to rub my head. I hadn’t been pet for a little while, so this felt really good. I licked his hand. There was a lot of salty, sweaty goodness on it because it was April, which is when humans’ hands are very moist.

“I like you, cat,” the man declared. “Wait here,” he told me.

I waited patiently and started looking around the shop. It was covered in meat and iceboxes. There were dirty aprons hanging in a corner. What was this wonderful place called? Just then, the meat man came back with a whole plate of meat.

“Here, kitty. I thought you’d be hungry,” he said, setting the plate down by my paws.

I ate all of the food up. It was delicious. Memories of holidays and “family dinners” came flooding back. It was the best food I’d had in weeks.

“Awwww, you must’ve been hungry,” the meat man said with so much affection in his voice. I went to the man again and rubbed up against him to say thank you.

The next day, I went back to the meat man’s shop. He smiled when he saw me.

“Hello, good to see you again, kitty.”

I meowed at him.

“Hungry?” he asked.

Yet again, I stared up at him expectantly. This made him laugh for some reason. I didn’t find a poor kitten starving funny. But hey, if this man was giving me food, I had nothing against him. Also, his intentions were always kind. After giving me a pat on the head, he strolled into his storeroom to find me something to eat and drink. When he came back, I was practically drooling — that is, if cats could drool. The smell was so tempting, so taunting, I ran at the meat man.

“Please, I haven’t had good water for days, and that meat smells so marvelous,” I begged. But of course in my wild plea, I forgot a key detail. Cats and humans can’t communicate. It’s just how it is. Although it drives us cats crazy.

“Here you go, kitty,” he said. “You know, I got to say that in all my years working as a butcher, I’ve never met such a nice cat.”

I felt proud that I was an exception to the nasty cat stereotype. I was also very happy to know what he was really called, a butcher. Then, I licked his hand to show my thanks and went away to my makeshift home.

I went to the butcher’s store everyday, so much that he just left out a plate of meat and a water bowl just for me! If the butcher didn’t have anything to do, he would watch me eat and talk, but most days he was busy. I loved that the butcher really cared about me as a cat and my needs. But one day, something happened to our relationship.

“Herald, we need to talk,” said the butcher’s wife.

“Yes?” asked the butcher.

“Our son Lewie called. We need to move out to California for a while to help him out.”

“To the other side of the country?” he asked.

“Of course. This is our son we’re talking about.”

“I haven’t heard from him for some time now. I wonder what the matter is.”

“Well then, let’s settle the matter with packing your bags and finding a house in San Diego.”

I walked up to the butcher and rubbed his legs over and over again.

“Oh kitty, someone will need to take care of you!” cried the butcher “But I know the perfect person. She’s a foster cat person, and she should be able to stop by and feed you.” With that, he went to his work room and made a call. I left the store feeling crushed. The butcher, my favorite thing about street life, left. With no warning at all. I was in the same situation that I was always in. I got too attached to someone, and then he left.

The next day, I went to the butcher’s shop to say goodbye. He was closing up the shop, but he snagged some chicken from his storeroom for me. I gobbled it up straight from his hand. He smiled a sad smile and said the last words he would ever say to me.

“Oh kitty, I’ll miss you a whole lot. You are so kind that you deserve anything good that goes your way. Remember that Erin is super nice. She’s the nice lady who is the foster cat person. You’ll be just fine.” I licked him. “Goodbye little kitten.”

I wished he wouldn’t go, but that’s the kind of cat I was. I just got attached and couldn’t let go. I turned my head towards home, not really knowing if I would go back to the butcher’s shop tomorrow to meet Erin.

***

That night, I wandered the city. Baltimore scared people at night, but I was never frightened of a dark night. It gave me time to think about my life and the new events happening in it. I made my decision to meet this Erin.

Who knows? I thought. She might be my second butcher. I’m also a very forgiving kitty. So I’ll go. I know it’s not Erin’s fault that the butcher left. It’s Lewie’s fault.

So the next day, I tentatively walked to the closed butcher shop. There was a young woman with short, brown hair, and a rather plain outfit standing outside. When she saw me, she looked surprised.

“Herald was right! You do come at exactly noon,” she said, as though a cat with a schedule was strange.

I went up to her and started looking for the meat by rubbing each hand, to see if there was something in it. She seemed to know my exact motive for rubbing her hands, because the woman who I assumed was Erin said, “Ooh you’re very smart, but the food’s here,” while pointing at the closed door. There was a cat water bowl and a cat food bowl right in front of it. I raced over and nibbled on the food. It was real cat food specifically made for cats, by humans. It was dry and made me thirsty, but it was good, like fries-for-humans-good. Soon, all the food was gone, and I did the same thank you that I used to do for the butcher. Then, I left to continue my day as a Baltimore street cat.

I decided to come back everyday. Erin seemed nice, like she really understood the whole cat species. Also, that food was really good. I went day after day after day. It was just like having the butcher here, minus the fresh meat.

I noticed that Erin started getting hesitant about letting me go off everyday after I ate my food. I could hardly wonder why though. I could take care of myself. It’s what all cats are made to do.

Erin got so hesitant that while I was eating, she told me, “Cat we got to stop playing these games. I feed you, you leave, and so on. I don’t think that you were born a street cat, and if you take so kindly to good food like this, I’m sure you wouldn’t mind a good roof over your head.”

That sounded amazing, like something you could only get in a young kitten’s fantasy. I then remembered, that life was once my own with yummy food and a roof over my head, but best of all, a family which I couldn’t ever get now. I turned to leave, depressed by this new thought, when Erin picked me up and put me in her car. The car was blue like the mistress’s car. I started to feel sick.

I will not puke in Erin’s car. I like Erin, I thought, trying really hard, knowing that a car was a point of pride for humans. Still, it was rather frightening to be dumped into a car knowing that your life could change dramatically.

When Erin got in, she was wiping dirt from her hands. “Whoo cat, you are filthy.” It was true. I hadn’t really paid attention to it, but I was disgusting. And on that happy note, I decided to take a nap.

When I woke up, Erin had me in her arms and was carrying me into her house, which smelled a lot like cats?! And a dog?! I thought I was going to get attention just for me, not other cats. But from the smell, it seemed like there were ten other cats and one dog. How would I get any attention at all? I was not excited about living anymore. I tried to squirm out of Erin’s hands, but she held tight.

“Kitty, I’m going to call you Tippy, and I’m going to put you in your litter box and show you where your food is.” She did just this. I was surprised by how small her house was. After all, she did have eleven cats now. Erin was rambling on about taking me to the vet. “And of course, I’ll need to get you spayed, and you’ll need to get shots.” I sighed and jumped from her arms. This was going to be hard.

***

I was in the car to go to the vet. It was terrifying. I was going into surgery so that I couldn’t have kittens. There wouldn’t be any mini-me’s running around ever.  I’ll never be proud of my accomplishments as a mother like my mother was, even if she didn’t get to enjoy us for that long. Erin told me that it was for the non-existent kitten’s own good so that people wouldn’t have to sell them.

Like people sold me, I thought. I actually didn’t want kittens, especially my own, to have the same terrible fate that I had. So I’m not to worry.

When we got there, I saw a vet. She gave me a shot after asking Erin some long and boring questions about insurance. I felt calm all of a sudden and sleepy, like I was a newborn kitten again. I couldn’t really remember anything else after that. It was all fuzzy. But when I woke up later, I was in a crate like a cat carrier. It was strange and terrifying. Being a cat, I like to have control of my own body and where I go. I had a weird sensation I couldn’t feel my stomach. It was terrible. I wanted to remember what had happened. I fell asleep again and the next thing I knew, I was on a table with vets all around me, and there was Erin.

“She seems fine, yes. Tippy has been taking this very well,” said one vet.

“Oh good, I hate it when cats take this poorly. It makes me feel bad,” said Erin, looking relieved.

“We studied her all night long. She hasn’t gotten infected, so I think you can take her home.” Was I really there for a night? It seemed like much shorter.

“Alright there, anything special I should know about her? Because you did a full check up, right?”

“Yes, we have her papers right here. Also, we can implant her chip too.”

“Let’s do that in a couple weeks.”

This statement was agreed by all, and before I knew what was happening, I was being shoved into a carrier and walked out of the vet’s office.

“Tippy, it’s almost over,” said Erin while driving.

For the weeks to come, I saw more of Light Street Animal Hospital then I ever thought I would. I was just carted off to that place. The vets knew me by sight, inside and out. But it was finally over.

I spent the days afterwards exploring Erin’s house for the first time. Oh, and having Erin film me in tunnels and walking around. I had been there for three weeks now. But I had been recovering from the treachery that was the vets. (Which meant lying in my own cat bed that Erin got for me and trying to sleep.) There were cat toys everywhere: mice, string, fake trees, scratching posts, and cat playgrounds. It was great.

The problem was other cats. I really didn’t realize how antisocial I’d become in my time on the streets. There were some kittens who were too playful, and others who were too lazy. It was really hard trying to find the perfect cat so after a while I gave up.

Surprisingly, I got along with the dog. He was a pit bull named Buzzer. I had long, meaningful talks with Buzzer. We’d talk about everything from the cats, to Erin and what life was like for Buzzer when there weren’t that many cats. We saw humans come in talk to Erin and look at cats. Soon we watched Wishlet, Embers, and Trouble all leave. With happy humans.

***

One day, I heard Erin talking to someone on the phone.

“Awwww, you saw the video. She is such a sweet cat. Yes, her name is Tippy, and she is two years in human years. Tippy loves humans, and she seems to get along with my dog too. I think you’ll really like her. She’s spayed, and has all of her shots. I don’t think that I should ask you to come over to my house merely because Tippy isn’t a big fan of other cats, and she is in her best light with people. Are you free Saturday at noon? Yes? Great! See you then.”

I stared at Erin and then at Buzzer and then back at Erin.

“Ummm Buzzer, what just happened?” I asked nervously.

“It means that you’re being adopted,” said Buzzer sadly.

“But what does that mean?”

“It means that a nice family wants to have you live with them instead of here.”

“But I wanted to stay forever with you and Erin,” I said. I didn’t want to leave another great home. Whenever I had to leave a home, something bad happened. I felt nauseous. It is the one of the worst feelings to know that you have to leave your home.

“If Erin said yes to them, it means she thinks that you and the family would live well together.”

“Oh,” I said, upset.

The next day was Friday. Friday meant my last day at Erin’s house. I walked around the entire house, saying goodbye to everything.

“Goodbye, Princess, the kitten. You were playful,” I said, trying to think of something good about Princess.

“Goodbye, Tippy, who I never really knew,” said Princess, grumpy because I woke her up from a nap. I didn’t feel bad though.

I said goodbye to the cat playground, the tunnel, and the mice, but the saddest object that I had to say goodbye to was my bed that Erin had specially gotten for me. I wondered who would get the bed when I left.

The hardest goodbye of all was Buzzer, who had been so nice and wise to me. He was the closest thing to a friend that I had here at Erin’s cat house.

“Goodbye, Buzzer,” I said miserably.

“Goodbye, Tippy,” said Buzzer, equally as miserably.

“Thank you for being so nice and interesting.”

“Thank you for being the only cat who would listen to me.”

Then I went over to my bed for one last sleep in that brown little bed.

***

“Come on, Tippy. Time to go into your carrier. It’s time to go,” said Erin. I didn’t want to go. I loved it here. Well, I sort of loved it here. I just didn’t want to move to another home again. But I did want Erin’s last couple memories of me to be good ones. So I went into the carrier, no problems for Erin.

In the car, I thought about the blue house and the blue car that I was in. I thought about my family and how I would never see them again. Then, I thought about the new family that I would be living with. I was getting very anxious. When I get anxious, I get sick.

I won’t puke, I won’t puke. Too late.

The retching started. Then, I puked all over myself. It was utterly embarrassing and disgusting.

“Oh, Tippy, it’s okay. Let’s pull over, and I’ll clean you off.”

I wanted tell her how sorry I was, but kissing or nuzzling her right now would have been utterly disgusting. She got a towel from her trunk and cleaned me off.

“Alright, Tippy. We’re back on the road and going to the Wisers,” said Erin, getting back into the driver’s seat and starting the car back up again.

So that’s what my new humans are called, the Wisers.

An hour later, we left the highway and went on to a back road that led to a small neighborhood. Then, we pulled up to a house with green shutters and a big porch. The house was mainly white, and I was intrigued by the size, since most of the houses in Baltimore are townhouses and apartments. I could hear excitement inside the house.

“They’re here, they’re here!” shouted a young female voice from inside.

“Ready, Tippy?” asked Erin, as if I could answer her in human. Erin picked up my carrier and started walking to the porch. When we got there, Erin rang the doorbell, and the sound was not too welcoming for cats. Immediately, the door was opened by a young, blonde haired girl, who looked nine.

   “Hello, come on in,” she said, bursting with excitement. Erin smiled and entered the house, which was as big on the inside as it was on the outside. The second the door was closed, Erin let me out of the carrier. I raced out and hid. It was scary being around new people in a new house. Erin sat down in a chair across from a big, brown couch. She started saying all the information about me that everyone in the room already knew. I hid behind a printer and watched the little girl and her father talk to Erin. The father looked equally as friendly. He had a big lap, meaning there was somewhere I could sit if I was very scared at this new place.

Before I knew it, Erin was done talking and was waiting for me to come out and meet the two humans. I eventually crawled out slowly and hopped onto the male’s lap. He looked very surprised, but happy.

“I think that Tippy has decided to stay,” said Erin. She seemed proud that I had found a family.

“I’ve always wanted a cat like this,’’ cried the blonde girl, happily.

This is how I got my family that I’ve lived with for years. There’s also a mom and another little girl. They think I’m part of the family, and that’s all I could ever ask for.

 

The Boy Who Discovered Life

Once, there was a boy named Peter. He was a classic seven-year-old who lived in NYC. Peter liked his life, but thought it could be better. And for that, he had a dream. A dream to find a new life not on planet Earth! He was even more determined than his favorite football player, Eli Manning, was when he wanted to win the Super Bowl against the New England Patriots. There was only one problem. Where would he get a vehicle to take him far enough to discover a new life form?

One day, his parents asked him where he would want to go for vacation, since school was over, and it was a great time to go to a museum or something that would be less warm.

Peter told his parents, “I want to go see NASA.” He did this so he could find how rockets were made.

His parents said yes because it was a great idea and something they had never done. It was air-conditioned and had a good amount of tourist attraction. So one day, they set off by renting a car and drove all the way to the base of NASA.

After they had parked, they walked to the nearest hotel and bought a room for a week and a half. Then, they went back to NASA, and they bought a ticket for a tour of what Peter wanted: the making of a rocket.

“It’s good,” said his parents, “because it’s on display and very creative.”

After they got there, a tour guide took them to one rocket with about twenty other people. It was a model of the rocket that took off to the moon that landed Neil Armstrong. The NASA building, from the outside, looked like a big, white dome with a helicopter landing on it. Inside, though, when you went in, you would think it was a tunnel for big worms.  Nobody was scared, because they had a tour guide with them. But if you went one way or any of the others, you would find a room bigger than your apartment. Each room had a different section, but they were all related to discovering more about space in new ways.

One room showed how to launch a rocket. One room had instructions on how to build a rocket. In the room where Peter was, it was like two modern apartment buildings, and if you cut the apartment buildings in half, in one of them, you would find the rocket. The room smelled of gasoline, but otherwise was regular. If you looked in the other half, you would see a lot of big labels on all the parts of the rocket. The tour guide lead them towards the rocket. He took a key, different from all others, that looked like a big “N.” He turned a notch in what looked like the middle of the bottom part of the rocket. Somehow, a little hatch opened, and he told the visitors to come inside. He showed them the different parts, like the airbag compartments and the fuel holders. When they came out, he showed them the other side, where there were the big labels. He asked the visitors if they thought they could label all the parts of the rocket. No one could, except for Peter. When Peter went, he somehow named all of the labels in the right spots. When he did that, he thought he had a special connection with that rocket. He felt so weird that he couldn’t hear the tour guide congratulating him. After he had known, he had thanked the tour guide. It was so fun that they didn’t know that the day was over. So when they came back out, it was exceptionally dark. All they did was go to their hotel and brush their teeth and go to sleep.

The next morning when they woke up, they went right back to the NASA building. They asked for another ticket to another room where they would see how NASA launched rockets. When they were finished, they were amazed at how much work and money it took to launch just one rocket. They came back out to get a snack. They went to the Official NASA Snack Bar. In the Snack Bar, Peter bought a hot dog and gulped it down, and they went back to their hotel room to take a break.

While they were going back, Peter used some of his allowance to buy a little space kit with a rocket launcher and a rocket. It was a little, electric toy rocket with a little figurine space astronaut inside. You could put the astronaut in the rocket and put the rocket on the launcher, and it would go about five feet in the air. Peter thought that this was amazingly awesome, and that’s all he did the rest of the day. They thought this was so fun that they asked the hotel to extend their stay by one day, even though they still had a lot of time left.

When they woke up the next morning, they bought another ticket for NASA, this time to see another section on how scientists invented space suits for astronauts to get air and oxygen while in space. They also saw a mini rover, and Peter was amazed by what special wheels the scientists had to make so the rover could go on the moon. They even got to have a little ride in the mini rover.

When they went back, after the day, they had pizza. After that, they went back to their room and said that was one of the best days they had ever had, and that this was the best vacation they ever had.

When he went the next day, they went to yet another section, where he had fun touching fingerprints when he was not supposed to. He got in a little trouble, but not enough to get him kicked out. When he finally realized that this was not a good idea, he had fun just looking at pictures that scientists had just recovered from the robots on Mars. The fingerprints that he had touched were actually footprints from people that walked on the moon. When they went back, they asked to just see the room that they saw first, because that was where Peter wanted to go. They let him go for free. If you hadn’t known all this time, Peter always had his new favorite toy, the electric rocket launcher and rocket, in his pocket.

They went to the room, and accidentally, the little rocket that stuck out of his pocket touched the model rocket in the room. When this happened, a big red flash burst a hole in the NASA building. There was a big shout as the rocket sprouted from his pocket through the hole in the building. Peter was so amazed when the rocket launcher held up the rocket from his little toy. His toy rocket that sprouted became as big and as real-looking as the Apollo 11 rocket. His rocket launcher had also grown to hold up his rocket. Peter was so amazed and even more excited, because this was his chance to make his new life form. But he didn’t know how he would get into the rocket. Then, he thought of how the tour guide took that key from his pocket to open the model rocket. So Peter reached into his own pocket, and somehow, magically, the same looking key was in his pocket. He opened the door in his rocket, and he went about looking in his own new rocket.

It looked exactly like it had in the model rocket, but brighter, newer, and more real. He called from one of the windows, and he said to anyone, “Who wants to see a new life form with me?”

While this was happening, a big crowd of people had gathered around to see what the little boy did. They were so terrified and confused at what Peter had just shouted, but they were so excited that they just climbed aboard to see what adventure they would get into. Peter pulled his parents along and the crowd also, and ushered them all into the air tanks. He told them all to put on air tanks so they could get going on this miraculous adventure.

Now, Peter thought, all he had to do was see if this rocket actually worked. And he thought to himself his favorite saying by Ms. Frizzle from the Magic School Bus book he used to read: “Make mistakes, get messy, and learn.”

So he did just that. He put an air tank on. He went to the captain’s quarters and fired up the engine. The rocket burst and fired up into the sky. It was the first rocket in history to go into outer space without any investing. But not actually literally, of course — he had spent that five dollar allowance for the toy rocket.

When they got into outer space, all the tourists who had now become the crew held a great party. Peter somehow knew how to drive a rocket by what the tour guide told him. And the rocket soared out into the blackness. They saw stars and went right through the Milky Way. Somehow, this was not an ordinary rocket. It could go way past the moon. Since he was still excited, he drove his rocket all the way to orbit Uranus. They went back towards Earth, and made a figure eight between the sun and the earth. And then, they orbited the moon and saw what looked like another moon. As they got closer, they saw that this was no moon, but the next planet that all the computers had been sighting since 2016.

So as they got closer, they stopped right in front of a big sign, and the tourists started to go to the Captain’s Chamber and tell Peter to go back to Earth. Peter tried to keep on saying and saying and saying that he was going to find a way to get there, and it would be the best thing since nacho chips.

But as this happened, there was a big thunderstorm and a bunch of lightning in his hometown, New York. Suddenly, there was a massive updraft, and a flash of lightning went up, up, up, farther than the eye can see, out into space, and hit Peter’s rocket. There was no stopping the rocket now, as it went faster than the speed of light into the planet. He landed safely in the middle of what seemed to be another New York. It was the same horizon, just tall, tall, buildings. He knew that this was not another New York — that this was the destiny he had been waiting for all of his life.

He was welcomed greatly by a man who seemed to be the president of the whole entire planet. The president said that he had been waiting for Peter his whole entire life to tell him how these two planets could be connected into a great, big, friendly universe. The president looked like all the people there. They were like humans, but they would only be up to your knee. Kind of like Oompa Loompas from Charlie and the Chocolate Factory, but a little more human-like and didn’t always have jackets on. They talked in a very high-pitched voice, but not in a bad way, as friendly as a high-pitched voice could be.

Peter and the rest of his “crew” believed this president, and the president’s idea went on to build a space bridge. It was covered, of course, by unlimited air, so no one would have to wear a spacesuit. Everyone from both planets said it was such a delight to have this great, big planet. If you were wondering, the president named the new land Herat and the city Yorkerneck. The language that these people spoke was English, and the state they were in was Yecen. There were no countries, but only continents because this was a much more friendly planet than our beloved earth.

As they started building the bridge right in between both planets and it reached the side of Earth, they could not make it go downwards because it was way too steep. But the only way to Earth was by going downwards.

They thought and thought, but then, the president said, “You could use your invention of what I think is called a bridge. No, I mean, stairs.”

This time, Peter thought it was the only idea, so he agreed. It was hard for Peter to agree sometimes because he always wanted to be the hero, as you can already see by his discovery of a new life form. The presidents and prime ministers of Earth and the president of Herat both agreed on the idea of the bridge way before this idea. Once the plan for getting to Earth had worked, they started building toward Herat. Once they had reached Herat’s atmosphere, they discovered that they needed to go faster than the speed of light to get into Herat. They thought and thought until Peter came up with an idea, like a hero, yet again.

“Why don’t we use your invention of those ball-like things, kind like odd squad portals, but they can go anywhere?”

“Great idea!” exclaimed the president.

Portals were fast balls that you squatted in that took you through holes and transported you. Once the portals had been built, a great charm shower came down to both worlds. It was totally like magic to Peter.There was a grand election of representatives in both worlds. Peter won for Earth two billion votes to none. (There were only about two billion people in the world, and children were allowed to vote.) In Herat, the president won for their side about three-quarters of their planet to one quarter. The two representatives ran the two planets fairly and were very well respected.

Since Peter was only seven (now soon to turn eight), his mother and father helped him. But it was hard, since Peter wanted him to run himself. This was not a smart choice, since kids could not think like grown-ups about all the problems in the world. With the help of two parents, two grown-ups and one child could deal with a lot of problems, while one person could only deal with about two. Three could deal with about six, which is a lot more than two when you’re dealing with crimes.

When the parents found out, they tried to speak up for themselves, but it was no use. So what they did was go to Herat, across the bridge, and tell them about this problem. The Herat people sent some police to help and say the point. The police told Earth that it would be much better if they allowed the parents to think of one thing to do.

Peter allowed this, and the parents said, “Why don’t we elect some judges for both planets, so in crime cases, we can figure out better ways of punishing people and knowing if they are innocent or guilty?”

Both planets elected a good judge that was skillful and kind to the jury and to the person put on trial. After a long time of training police, one person was finally sent to the judge on trial. The judge finally found, with the help of the jury, that the person was just expressing free speech, telling everyone that it would be better if Peter was helped by his parents.

Once he was released, more and more people thought it would be better if his parents helped him, since they were catching so few criminals and making so little changes to the Earth. This was also happening because they thought that, with the help of the jury, the judge made better decisions, so if the parents helped Peter, Peter would do better in making decisions.

While this was happening, Peter was in his capitol, which happened to be New York now. He was thinking whether he should do a little thing that was bad, just to keep him in control. This bad thing was to not let anyone have free speech of talking about something that has not happened. This was found out by the people. They found out because they were allowed to look through the little windows, and somehow, by eavesdropping with a cop, they heard him talking to himself about this new plan.

They started reporting this, and so Peter had nothing to do, but call a Grand Election to ask if he could do this law or not. A Grand Election is an election that’s not for a person or representative of state, city, or country. It’s for a law, a change to the city, state, or country. (Like if you wanted to make Yellowstone National Park bigger, you would have a Grand Election. People would vote on whether you could do this by taking out more and more buildings, or you could not do that so it would be a beautiful place, but not as big as it could be if they took out buildings.)

After this, people called for a regular election for whether Peter’s parents could help him until he became eligible in American terms for president, which is thirty five years old, and he would have to live in America for fourteen years. The people won yet again, and Peter’s parents went to help Peter with the Earth. This was a major help.

When the parents got to the White House, they asked to privately talk to Peter. They told Peter, “Until you grow up and start thinking as a grown up, we will help you. We’re not challenging you so we can be bossy, we’re not saying that we’ll help you do stuff that you don’t think that we need to do. We’re not saying that you can’t do what you want to do, we’re just saying that we’re going to do extra things that you don’t want to do.”

Peter actually liked this idea, and said, “Yes, I will.”

In his mind right now, he was not that concerned whether they stuck to their word. Out of the years he had been with them, they had never broken a promise.

After a while of this happening, Earth was so much better, that Peter started to realize that you don’t always have to be the hero. You just have to help and make decisions for everyone and be kind, which is what he had been doing for about the last three years. What had changed when his parents helped him was that there were so many other things going on that so much more things could be done and could be caught. The parents were doing things, and he was doing things that all overlapped with each other to make such good ideas, that they were better than what George Washington could do.

One thing that he couldn’t have done without his parents was that now, he had learned more about law and better laws to use. His parents told him to make a law that you couldn’t smoke. He learned more over time. He learned that help was better and better than he could ever imagine before he had ever launched that rocket.

In Herat right now, everything was better because they could use more and more of Earth’s inventions. They could help Earth, and Earth could help them. They had more parks and saw that they could have more fun running around and playing football than sitting at home and watching cartoons. The more and more that Earth and Herat shared help, the more and more inventions could be made. When more inventions are made, more things can be done.

A scanner could be made to scan if anyone anywhere had a fingerprint that they were looking for, because the scanner could go through a portal made by Herat. And the scanner that was in fact made by Earth could scan anyone’s fingerprint without them even knowing. This helped a lot. More crimes could be stopped in both worlds. It was so much more peaceful than it had once been, and finally, all crimes had been stopped. Since Peter had turned thirteen, about seven years ago, there had been no crime since. Everyone had more fun, more peace, more parks, and it was even legal to sleep outside. More and more buildings were torn down, since more and more people started sleeping outside, and all the buildings they needed were supermarkets and toy stores. And more and more parks were being made so that there was so much room for everyone, and it was negotiated so well that there was no need for fighting.

It was also like this in Herat. And more and more people crossed the bridge to see what both Earths were like and how it was so big in Earth that you would have to fly or be shipped around the earth, while in Herat, you could just walk around the planet. This was the most peace you could ever have. Even in my life, when I’m playing my favorite sport, football, I’m not having as much fun as you could ever have in this planet.

 

 

A Tall Disaster

Hi, my name is Jack, and I am the world’s tallest person ever. I am 2,000 feet tall. I live in L.A., and I need magical powers. The world will be awesome if I get these powers. I mean awesome!! Water breathing, flying in outer space, breathing in smoke, strength to pick up 100,000 pounds, and the power to convince people. If I climb Mount Everest, there are plants at the top that will give me those powers. They’re so colorful. Only one person has gotten them before because they’re also on top of a tree. They also only give me those powers if they are over eighty degrees, since they are normally frozen. This is the story of my journey.

First, I climbed San Jacinto. I took a tram up to 8,000 feet. I had to put my head out the window!!! Round valley loop (check!), Wellmans Divide (check!), San Jacinto Peak (nope!) There was a huge gap in the trail. I tried to jump over to get past it, but another one appeared.

“Ugh,” l said, “It will get harder when it’s steep. It stopped happening after that, and it was amazing. I came back on the tram.

Next, I climbed Mount Whitney. I drove to Whitney. Outpost camp (check!), Trail camp (check!), Mt. Whitney summit (nope!) It was the same as San Jacinto peak, except with boulders falling. When I came back, I was relieved. I flew in my super tall, private jet to Mount Mckinley. I climbed it! Whew! Those were a crazy two hours. I had to hop on one foot at one point. I slid down the mountain. There was so much ice! I grabbed the trees to stabilize.              

I ran around the block two gazillion times. I was so sweaty! (Allow me to fly you to Mount Everest, reader). It was crazy!!! There were huge, giant, diamond rocks everywhere!!! Luckily, I could step over them.

Uh-oh, avalanche!!! Quick, step off the mountain, and lets fly in a helicopter to chop off the top of the mountain with an ax, I thought to myself. I ordered a helicopter through my walkie-talkie because the snow had gotten too thick. Maybe I should only chop off the tree with the plants because that’s all I need.

The helicopter flew over the mountain, and I reached out of the helicopter and grabbed the plants with my long arm. Once I had the plants, I warmed them up for ten seconds in the helicopter’s microwave. I smashed them up into tiny pieces and put them into water, and then I drank the water. I felt the same as before, but with a sudden excitement.

I flew down when suddenly, I felt dizzy. I was teleported to another galaxy! I knew I had powers because I could see Pluto far, far away. I floated around in my helicopter in space. I thought that I could use my powers to get back. With my finger, I pushed my new flying powers into a hole in the helicopter, and I zoomed back toward Earth.

When I was about halfway done with the trip, I realized I’d have to face the atmosphere. I knew I needed to stop the helicopter before I reached the atmosphere because I’d burn up. I could breathe underwater and in smoke now, so I didn’t have to worry about not being able to breathe — but I would burn up if the helicopter caught on fire.

I pushed my finger back into the hole and drew my powers back from the helicopter. It stopped. I was glad that it worked! Now, I needed to find special space bricks to build a wall around the helicopter so it didn’t burn up in the atmosphere. I knew about the space bricks because my astronaut friend had told me about them once.

I turned on the regular helicopter propellers and went slowly to the nearest moon. I saw a big gap in the moon and flew inside. Inside were tons of space bricks!! They looked like regular bricks, but they were nice and smooth on the outer layer, and they were fireproof on the inside. I felt super excited that I found them so quickly!

Now, I needed to figure out how to transport all of the bricks. I looked around and saw a lever. I pulled the lever, and it closed up the hatch from the inside! Now, I didn’t need to worry about the helicopter or the space bricks floating away with no gravity. Then, I grabbed the spare Super Glue and nails I kept in the helicopter and used them to build the bricks around the helicopter. From the inside, I put a stick of Clarify-er so I could see through the bricks.

I opened a window for a second and pulled the lever up to open the hatch. I closed the window and put my finger in the hole again to put my powers into the helicopter. Then, I flew back toward Earth. Things got scary in the atmosphere. I could see fire all around, and smoke came in through the cracks in the wall. Luckily, I could breathe in smoke because of my powers.  I was scared that the space bricks might not work — but they did!

I flew back down to the hotel I was staying at in Everest. I landed on top and climbed down the ladder. I was so relieved and tired, that I went back into my room and went to sleep.

The next day, I remembered that the helicopter was rented, so I returned it. I flew back to L.A. to convince every lawbreaker to not break the law because I had superpowers.

I had beaten the lawbreaker Baleee to the peak of Mount Everest to get these powers. He was the baddest lawbreaker, who broke every law. I knew that Baleee was in his submarine trying to escape me, so I picked a random lake and quickly found him. I had brought some space bricks with me to cover the windows so he couldn’t see. I got inside through the top door and finally convinced him to not break the law anymore. I took off the space bricks and returned to the surface!

L.A. was now free of crime, but the rest of the world still needed a persuasive man.

 

Mitten’s Story

Hello, my name is Mittens. I once was a cat who lived in the streets, but somehow I got to live in a house with fancy and delicious cat food. It was just such a miracle for me.

There is one problem — the problem is the big Golden Retriever dog named Billy. My owner’s name is Erica – she likes Billy a lot and plays with him a lot. But why would you even want to do that? Sitting down lazily is fun enough to spend the whole day with me.

I just can’t understand Billy’s perspective of everything. Once, Billy tried to play with me, but I was so annoyed, that I puffed my claws out of my hands and feet within one second and scared Billy away. I continued to do that almost every day. Can’t that dog learn?

One day, I was lying on the couch peacefully. There were no sounds coming out from Erica’s room. It was very unusual, because mostly every day, she turns on her favorite songs very loudly. Even Billy was very quiet. I guessed he was in Erica’s room, playing with her. I was so happy and peaceful until Billy ran down and barked at me like a million times. I just tried to shoo Billy away by scowling at him, but that didn’t work. Billy barked more loudly.

I just wish Billy could speak Cat, or I could speak Dog, so I could tell him to please be quiet and go away. He is such a nightmare! He almost never sleeps! Why, oh why, did I get chosen?! Why not some other cat?   

The next day, it was much, much, much more horrible. Thanks a lot to Billy the dog. Billy made a big mess with Erica’s favorite ingredients for baking chocolate chip cookies. When Erica came down and saw that mess, she blamed me! I do not know why, but Erica and all other  humans think that the dogs are more mature than cats. First of all, who even created dogs in the first place?  

But blaming me was much more than just blaming. She kicked me out of the door into the streets. This was just so mean. Well, it was better than being stuck with Billy the whole day. At least that’s what I thought. It might not have been that friendly in the streets because of my old cat friends who still lived on the streets, and those cats envied me since I had a home with delicious cat food. I had bragged that I was just taken by Erica when I was walking on the streets. That was awkward and not what I thought it was going to be like.

I did meet them in the streets, and I tried to say hi.

They said, “Get lost.” That was mean.

Most of all, I was heartbroken. Now, I had more than one problem that I had to deal with. First, I had to find a way to get back home (Well, I can stay out here, but my wild hunting skills and ways have gone out of my head since I didn’t have to use them for a long time. I think I have lived in Erica’s house about one year… And I just got food for free for a year.) And I had to deal with the street cats. One of which I once was.

I tried to find a place to sleep. The burning sun was now slowly sinking down into the city. I found a bush that looked like something that would make a good bed for me. And it did.

I woke up the next day, surprisingly surrounded by almost all the street cats that I know of. They looked very angry. I tried to tell the leader, Shumurgleburg, that I was kicked out of my home, and I was so sorry that I bragged before. They didn’t care what I thought, though. They only tried to take revenge by scowling and coming closer, step by step.

“Now he’s saying sorry? I don’t even want to believe him now,” one of the cats whispered. “He bragged to us, and now, he doesn’t want to get attacked. Such a betrayer.”
And then, Shumurgleburg said, “Quiet down, cats. We should decide what to do with him after we talk to him and discuss what he did. We will give him the chance to be one of us again.”

After those confusing talks and whispers, they gave me food. Food!!! But after that, I fell asleep.

I didn’t know how long I was asleep, but I surely knew that it was morning. I was in cage-like trees. They were encircling me, and I couldn’t get out. I tried to scratch my way out, but that totally didn’t work. I tried to peek out to see if there were any other cats that were guarding the trees, but I couldn’t.

But I heard one of the guards saying,”It’s until he says sorry. Right?”

And I was NOT okay with that. Unless they gave me food. But I wanted to go back home and sit on the cozy and comfy couch, even though Billy was annoying.

I tried to climb up and jump my way out. I tried a few times, and about the tenth time, I managed to climb to the top, but the problem was the next step. I had to make a plan to avoid the other cats that were guarding me.

Hmm, I thought. I might jump and run as fast as I can, but I don’t think that would work. I only have one chance, so I gotta think.

I had a perfect plan. Since I was already here and met all of the cats, I knew that only one of the cats guarding had good eyesight, but all of them could hear well. So I thought of jumping off to the side where the cat with good eyesight was.

Though I tried, the cat with good eyesight warned, “Catch him! He’s escaping!”

After I heard that, I had to run for my life because, as I knew, they all had sharp and strong claws. If I didn’t run for my life, I would be dead. I ran as fast as I could. I was crying.

They caught up with me real quick. I was scared.

But right then, Shumurgleburg saw me and said to the guards, “Stop chasing him.”

And I was so surprised that he saved my life. After that, he led me to his castle that had a lot of comfy-looking bushes. He asked me to sit down, so I did.

He asked me loudly, “Can you please tell me the truth of why you came to Street Town? Please?”

“Okay. The dog that belongs to my owner made a mess of my owner’s favorite things, but my owner blamed me, and she kicked me out of her house. So that’s why I’m here.”

And so, Shumurgleburg said, “Okay, thank you for telling me. Are you hungry?”

I said, “Oh yes.”

“Okay, I will get you some food. Please wait here.”

After I ate that delicious meal, I couldn’t believe that I fell asleep again. I was in the same place as before: the tree jail. I managed to get up to the top (again.) But this time, I climbed down, even though my claws REALLY hurt. In the last part, I quietly jumped off. I puffed my claws into my hands and feet. It hurt so much. I tried to run, but I couldn’t. So I walked quietly.

I just couldn’t believe it! I walked all the way home. Now, I was in front of my home!!! I went into the new dog door.

While I was going in, Erica grabbed me and said,”Thank goodness, Mittens! I am so sorry. I missed you so much! Are you hungry? Oh my, Mittens! Your paws! Their bloody! Ohhhh, I am so sorry!” She was being dramatic.

I’m okay, I thought.

“I will take you to the vet, sooner or later. Okay?”

She hugged me. It was the best thing that happened to me. I was happy.

After that, I sat on the couch and comforted myself. Billy was quiet, and Erica stroked my head.

I fell asleep.

 

P.S.

To the people who are curious about the Street Town and the street cats: I sent a letter to Mr. Shumurgleburg saying sorry about everything I’d done to them, and they sent a letter back that said, “We forgive you.”

 

Gem Stones

 

           

TURQUOISE  

Green aqua
Turquoise but hard as a rock
Like any old rock
very very hard
So sooo solid it will knock your teeth

 

RUBIES

RED

  RUBY      RIGHTS

  RADIANT         RIGHTS

       RAFFINOSE                    RIGHTS

       RAINBOW             RIGHTS

   RING       RIGHTS  

ALL RIGHTS  

 

EMERALD

Green

Green elegant

Light as a candle burning

Or as dark as can be

So so so

green

Finding the Gray

Maggie Lexing was bursting with excitement as she ran through the front doors of her house. From 3:15 to 4:30, her three younger sisters went to soccer practice, and her father was at work, so Maggie had time with her mother without anyone else at home.

“Hi, Mom!” Maggie said. “I forgot to tell you yesterday that everyone at school is going crazy about seeing their birth certificates! Brianna Curry found hers in the attic, and ever since then, the whole fifth grade has been trying to find their birth certificates. Can I see mine?”

“Well, honey, I don’t think that’s such a good idea. I mean, my parents never showed me my birth certificate, and my friends didn’t say a word about it. It certainly didn’t affect me.” Her mother wore a sad, frightened look on her face, an expression that Maggie rarely saw, especially when she was alone with her.

“Pretty, pretty please with a cherry on top? I want to be the first one out of my friends who finds their birth certificate. You never mentioned it, and I have no idea where it is.” Maggie saw the doubt on her mother’s face. “I don’t need it right now.”

Her mother sighed, as if knowing this would be a battle where she could fight, but she would never win.

“Okay, sweetie. I guess I’ll show you when your dad comes home.”

Maggie ran upstairs with a big smile on her face, waiting for her father to come home. Her mother sat in a wooden stool, dreading the moment Mr. Lexing turned the ebony handle of the front door and walked inside their pastel blue house.

***

Later that night, Maggie and her mom had an early dinner before Maggie’s father came home. Usually, Maggie had dinner with her mother and father. Her mom didn’t tell her why they were having such an early dinner, no matter how much she tried to get it out of her. Even though she was still curious about this, Maggie decided to let it go.

Her dad walked through the front door. As soon as she heard the sound of his shoes clomping on the wooden panels of her house, Maggie, who was up in her bedroom awaiting her father’s arrival, ran downstairs.

Her mom whispered something to him, and as he ran upstairs to get Maggie’s birth certificate, her mom sat her down on the beige couch in the living room. Finally, Maggie saw her father come downstairs with a very fancy paper in his hands. He handed it over to Maggie, and her mom gave her shoulders a tight squeeze.

Maggie took a deep breath and looked down at her birth certificate. It looked like it had been very carefully made. It had a gold border lining the edges of the paper, and everything was written in black, fancy print. It looked so official, and for a moment, Maggie wondered whether she wanted to read it or not. But, as usual, curiosity took over, and she started to read the beige paper. But her excitement quickly changed to confusion. Just as she started to read it, her mother stopped her.

“Sweetie, before you read it, we should tell you something.” Her mother took a deep breath and started explain, “Honey, we’ve been meaning to tell you that you’re, you’re, you’re — ”

“Adopted.” Her dad finished her mother’s sentence, and even though he spoke in a whisper, the word “adopted” still held the same meaning and impact.

“This says that ‘Maria and Carson Salzi’ are my birth parents, not you,” Maggie said, and, in a way, she was sort of agreeing with her parents.

Maggie’s brown eyes shone with confusion, but soon they widened as she realized the truth. “But that means, that means, that means you guys have been lying to me my whole entire life!”

Maggie felt as if her parents had physically punched her. She began to say something else, but stopped mid-sentence at the sight of her sister, Maya, who was coming downstairs. Maya was dressed in her hot pink pjs, hugging a brown stuffed bear in one arm and rubbing her sleepy eyes with the other. Since Maggie’s dad was a doctor, he often came home late from work, and Maggie’s younger sisters went to bed before he came home.

“What’s going on, Mommy? Cassie, Sally, and I can’t sleep, because there’s too much yelling.” Maya twirled her blond hair around one of her tiny fingers.

Maggie had always wondered why she looked so different from her sisters and her parents, comparing her dark hair to their blond hair, or her brown eyes to their blue eyes. But every time she asked the question, her father told her that they all looked alike, and her mother turned very hesitant. Now she knew the answer.

Maya smiled at Maggie sleepily, her blue eyes shining. Maggie avoided her sister’s eyes and looked at the floor, not returning Maya’s small smile.

“Nothing’s going on, sweetie. Go back upstairs and sleep. We’ll be really quiet, okay?” Maggie’s mom’s voice was sweet and caring as she spoke. She saw the little transaction between Maggie and her younger sister, and the fact that Maggie didn’t return Maya’s smile, broke her heart.

“Okay, Mommy,” Maya responded, too tired to argue. She stifled a yawn, said, “goodnight” to everybody, and ran upstairs.

Maggie and her parents continued their conversation quietly.

“We didn’t tell you because we never wanted you to feel any different from the other kids. We felt like we were protecting you by not telling you the truth, but now we know that we were wrong. Then you turned six and started to go to elementary school, and we kept saying we would tell you, but we never had the courage or the heart.” Maggie’s dad looked at the floor as he said this, not having enough bravery to look her in the eyes.

“So lying to me is better?” Maggie looked up at her parents, her eyes full of pain.

“We didn’t want to lie to you. It’s just, certain things got in the way, and we never took the time to tell you. We adopted you from the orphanage when you were two years old, because I got a call from Child Services. I told your mother, and she loved the idea as much as I did. And the next thing we knew, we were signing adoption papers for you. We had your sisters a few years later.” Maggie’s father explained the whole story from the beginning, still looking down at the floor.

“They’re not even my real sisters anymore,” Maggie said, more to herself than to her parents.

“They’ll always be your sisters, and we’ll always be your family. I’ll always be your father, and your mother will always be your mother.” Maggie’s dad looked saddened by her comment, but Maggie didn’t care enough to notice the sorrow and pain in his voice.

Then, her mother spoke in a soft, fragile, and hurt voice. “Honey… we just want you to know that we’re still your parents, and we still love you. We’ll still be a family. This doesn’t change anything between us.”

“This changes everything between us!” Remembering her sisters upstairs who were trying to sleep, Maggie didn’t yell, but raised her voice slightly. She stomped upstairs, fuming that her parents didn’t tell her about this sooner, but she stopped midway up the stairs to say one more thing.

“In case you’re wondering, you don’t have to come and check on me. I want to be alone right now!”

Maggie pounced on her bed, more nervous and unsure of herself than usual. She realized that learning she was adopted made the scary idea that the people with whom she shared all her doubts and secrets with weren’t really her family. Were they? Or were they just people who picked her up from an orphanage eight years ago and acted like her family? They were people who had lied to her her whole entire life. But now she knew the truth.

“Oh, I know you’re upset but — ” Her mother started to say something, but Maggie cut her off.

“I’m not upset, and I don’t care! At all. Did you hear me? I. Don’t. Care,” Maggie screamed at the top of her lungs. She pushed away from the the wooden railing that she was holding onto and ran to her room, slamming the door.

“I’m not going to cry,” Maggie told herself over and over again. “I’m not going to cry, I’m not going to cry, I’m not going to cry.” Repeating those words to herself, Maggie clutched her golden heart necklace that hung around her neck, got down on her knees, and cried her heart out.

Maggie could faintly hear her younger sisters waking up and questioning the reason for her outburst, but she couldn’t care less about them right now. She listened as the sound of her dad’s footsteps continued up the stairs and to her sisters’ rooms. She listened as her mother’s footsteps, which were more soft and humble than her father’s, climbed upstairs and into her room.

Maggie knew that her mom would say something or try and comfort her, but she knew that nothing could comfort her — she needed to sort this out herself. So, with her mother standing in the doorway, with the moon in its peak high in the sky, and with the stars taking their place in the night that would now fall, Maggie got into her bed and cried herself to sleep.

***

That night, Maggie dreamt about a world that was perfect; the clouds were made out of pink, fluffy cotton candy, the houses were made out of gingerbread cookies, and the grass was made up of every single candy in the world dyed green. There was no war and no sicknesses, and best of all, nobody was lied to, like she had been. But as she woke up, with the bright sun shining in her face, she knew that the real world could never be that perfect.

Maggie woke up, got dressed, and ate a piece of toast. Her mom greeted her with a friendly hug and a warm “Good morning,” but Maggie didn’t return her mother’s kindness. Instead, she did nothing, she said nothing, and she went out the door without a single word.     

She raced down the front steps of her big blue house and ran across the freshly cut green lawn, wishing that she could pick up a candy from the grass, like she could in the perfect world she had in her dreams. As Maggie jogged to the stop sign where she met her best friends everyday before going to school with them, she stole a quick glance back at her house. Maggie saw her mother in the window staring at her with a hurt look in her eyes. Maggie continued watching her three sisters get ready for school, and she saw her mother helping her youngest sister, Cassie, put her Sofia the First princess backpack on.

Then Maggie turned around and walked the rest of the way to the stop sign. She didn’t tell her friends about what happened the night before, and Callie, Molly, and Sophie, being true BFFs, didn’t question her silence.

At school, Maggie listened to her teacher, Mrs. Amos, drone on and on about math, and then science, and finally social studies right before the bell rang, indicating the start of recess.

***

During recess, Callie, Molly and Sophie decided to make a move. They had noticed that something wasn’t quite right with Maggie, and they knew that she needed to tell them what was wrong. Normally, she was a chatterbox, talking up a storm, but today, Maggie was way more quiet than usual. Her bright, brown eyes that usually shone with confidence, were dull and dreary instead.

So, her friends asked her what happened to cause her silence, and reluctantly, Maggie told them. Maggie continued on and on, pouring her emotions out to her friends, and her friends kept quiet, absorbing the feelings that she was dumping out. They knew that behind an angry Maggie was another part of her — a part that they seldom saw. They saw a heartbroken Maggie, and at the end, she got pulled into a big group hug by her friends. Then, Molly said something that not only surprised Callie and Sophie, but also Maggie.

“You can’t blame them, you know,” Molly started to say, ending the hug. As Maggie looked at her friend with a questioning look, Molly elaborated.

“I mean your adoptive parents. I mean, I know that you’re not that happy, but you should know that your adoptive family actually helped you. They took you inside their house. They are nice to you. They love you. They treat you like family, even if they aren’t your real family. In a way, you’re lucky to have such caring parents. I know learning that you’re… adopted can be a pretty big shock, but this doesn’t mean your family isn’t your family. They adopted you because they love you — a lot.” Molly finished, looking Maggie straight in the eye.

Maggie looked at her friend in wonder. The thing that surprised her the most was that Molly was right. Suddenly, Maggie realized that there were two separate emotions you feel when you get adopted. One is anger, the way you can feel at your real, biological parents. But the other is love, the way that you could — should — feel about your adoptive parents. Then, Maggie realized something that she hadn’t realized before. She realized that she was just using anger as a mask — she was hiding behind her anger. And she was taking all that anger out on her adoptive parents, when she knew that she really felt this way towards her birth parents. She also realized that what she really wanted was to find out what happened to her birth parents and why they left her at the orphanage.

She gave Molly a hug, and Molly seemed surprised to be receiving one.

“You look surprised,” Maggie said, laughing, for the first time in a pretty long time.

“I just thought you would be more angry at me than thankful to me for saying that.” Molly returned the hug, but she still looked nervous, like Maggie was going to unleash her anger at any moment, but this time on her.

“Actually, I’m really happy you said that. It made me realize that being adopted isn’t such a bad thing after all.” Maggie pulled away from the hug, as Sophie and Callie smiled.

“Well then, what are we doing here? Let’s go play tag with the boys!” Sophie started running away onto the green field of the school lawn, and one by one, Maggie’s friends followed her. As Maggie started to run after her friends, she thought about how she only had one problem left to solve — the problem with her family.

***

When Maggie reached the brick steps in front of her house, she slowly climbed them, one at a time. She walked through the front door and straight up to her room, making one tiny, little stop in between. Her mom was in the kitchen, and she looked surprised about the fact that Maggie smiled at her.

“Hi! I’m back from school!” Maggie seemed like she had had a major attitude adjustment since yesterday. Her mom smiled back at her, and Maggie continued up the stairs.

Even though Maggie still needed to apologize to her parents, she thought she should wait until her dad came home, and until then, she had something she needed to do. She needed to sort out her emotions–right now, they were like a swirling, twisted, tornado inside of her, and she needed to untwist the twister. And Maggie knew exactly how to do that. She needed to realize what she did wrong and fix it.

Maggie plopped down on her purple beanbag chair and started to think. She realized that after she learned that she adopted, she had let anger blind her. She was so mad at her parents for not telling her sooner, she hadn’t been super nice to them. She had been like a little devil, only thinking about herself, completely oblivious to the world around her. Rather than thinking about her family and how hard it must be on them to tell her, she took her anger out on them. She knew that they were just trying to protect her.

As she thought about some things, she realized that there were a lot of things that she had to do, a lot of things that she had to fix, and a lot of mistakes that she made, but there was one thing that she didn’t have to do. She didn’t have to rehearse her apology to her parents because, well, they were her parents, and even if she didn’t do the best with her apology, she knew that they would love her no matter what. She knew that learning that she was adopted made things seem black and white, two colors that everyone could see. But in the middle was gray, and you have to find the gray yourself–with a little help from your friends and family. Molly and her parents had helped her see the gray.  

A tiny hand placed on her lap jolted Maggie back to reality. It was Cassie- her youngest sister. Maggie smiled down at Cassie, picked her up, and sat her down on her lap.

“Can you play outside with me and Maya and Sally? We know that you were upset yesterday, so we want you to come and play with us. To make you happier.” Little Cassie looked up at Maggie, her big, blue eyes shining with hope.

“I can play outside with you,” Maggie responded. Cassie leaped off of her lap and ran across the hall to the bedroom she shared with Maya and Sally.

Maggie smiled as she heard Cassie’s voice, full of excitement, as she told her sisters the good news. Then, Sally and Maya came into her room and started to drag her out of her room and outside. As Maggie put on her purple flip-flops, she caught a glimpse of her mom, smiling at her. Maggie’s dark, curly hair bounced up and down as she ran around in circles with Maya, Sally, and Cassie.

They actually are my sisters, Maggie thought as they began to play hide-and-seek together. She was hiding behind a big evergreen tree as she realized this. And I guess that my parents really are my parents.

“FOUND YOU!” Maggie jumped and screamed as she turned and saw who scared her. Three little girls were on the ground, laughing their heads off, screaming with excitement.

“Oh, I’m going to get you!” Maggie started running after her sisters, feeling joy and love, emotions that she hadn’t felt in a while.

As Cassie, Maya, and Sally screamed, yelled, and laughed as Maggie chased them, Maggie’s mom watched from the window with a smile on her face.

***

After a few hours, Maggie’s dad finally came home. Maggie greeted him with a smile and went up to her room to work up the courage to say sorry to her parents. When she finally gathered enough bravery to talk and apologize for being the horrible monster she had become, Maggie slowly proceeded down the stairs.

Maya, Sally, and Cassie were already asleep in their room, and as she went down the stairs, Maggie thought how lucky she was to have such great sisters. When her foot landed on the bottom step, both of her parents looked up at her, probably expecting some kind of outburst, but Maggie surprised them both. Her eyes dropped to the floor, she took a deep breath, and she began her apology.

“I wanted to say that I’m sorry for being such a horrible daughter for the past day, because even though I know that I’m adopted, I know now that it doesn’t change anything between us because family is forever.” Maggie finished and realized that she hadn’t said such a good apology. Maybe she should’ve practiced her apology.

“We never blamed you — ” Maggie’s father started to say, but then her mother interrupted.

“And you were never a horrible daughter. You were just upset, and we understand. We just want you to know that we love you to the moon and back,” she finished.

Maggie took her eyes off of the floor and looked up at her parents. They came over to her and wrapped her in a hug.That was all they needed to say, and Maggie knew, for sure, that her apology was the best apology ever. But there was one thing she was still very curious about. She untangled herself from her parents’ arms, looked up at them, and asked the one question she was still very curious about.

“Can I meet my biological parents or my biological family?” She held her breath in anticipation and counted the seconds that passed by as her parents looked at each other.    

“Oh, honey, if you really want to, I suppose we could arrange something with them, but it’s really up to you.” Maggie’s mother felt happy that her daughter had used the word “biological” instead of “real.”

Maggie thought about what her mother had just said, and something clicked. In all the confusion of emotions and decisions, she hadn’t really thought about meeting her birth parents. All she really knew was that she wanted to meet them. But now, thinking about what had happened, she realized something.

“You know, I guess some doors are better off unopened.” Maggie had made her decision. She didn’t need to meet her biological family because she had the best family right here.

That night, as she slept in her cozy bedroom, tightly wrapped in her purple and white blanket, her head resting on her purple pillow, she had the same dream of a perfect world.

When she woke up the next day, Maggie put her hand in front of her face, shielding her eyes from the bright sun. Maggie knew that the world could always be as perfect as her dreams. She had found the gray.

 

Forever in My Heart

Jack was a boy living a life all alone on an island. It was so very sad. He was a boy whose parents had been abducted and killed. He had white eyes, red hair, but also chocolatey-black skin. He was tall, but he still needed help getting up from bed every morning. He had his animal friends. One was named Sky. She was a dog who lived with him and kept him company. Kervin, his other friend, was a gorilla who helped Jack reach tall stuff and let Jack ride him sometimes so they could all see the island.   

He lived with Sky in his hut. It was a very poor hut made out of mud and straw. He used to be very rich and also good. He had a perfect life every boy wanted, but now he was mysteriously mysterious. His parents got abducted by aliens, so he was poor now. He didn’t know that his parents were alive. Yet…

The next day, he found a letter in the jungle. Kervin helped him get it, and Jack realized it hadn’t been there before in this place. He knew he had to read it. It said,

Jack,

If you are reading this, we are alive and together. But not as us. We are aliens. Don’t ask why, my child. But we are alive. There isn’t much time. Find us please!

Love,

Mom & Dad

 

The Trials of a Boy
He cried, cried, and never stopped. At the end, he had cried tears, tears of blood, just blood…
He stopped. He knew what he had to do. He had to save his parents, and he had to do it now.

 

The Story You Never Knew
The aliens are a lie
A lie
The lie
They are a lie
They wrote the letter
Evil


The Trials of a Boy 2.0
As days went by, he had to do stuff he had never done before. He jumped in water. He was an idiot. A big one! He forgot he couldn’t swim, and he couldn’t go back. He then drowned in the great blue sea.

 

Forgot It All
He drowned. He could not swim, and he was at the bottom of the sea. It was harsh and cold, and it smelled like chicken wings, and he felt nothing, he heard nothing, he couldn’t see, he wanted to forget it all. He couldn’t. What was happening was, he couldn’t stop it, he was confused and scared. He didn’t know why or how. How could he forget? He never forgot anything. It was now. He couldn’t stop time, or could he?

He then remembered he could stop time, space, and earth. He had to use it, even if his parents warned him about using it. He had to, to find his parents. He had powers, but it was from the aliens, and he didn’t know. He used them, and he found some seaweed and climbed on it.

While this happened, Sky and Kervin were worried and tried to find him. They got very scared.

Meanwhile, Jack was in the ocean and climbed all the seaweed. It was hard, but he still tried, and he went up it, and it was fine. When Sky saw him, she licked his face. Then, Jack unstopped time in the sea, and Sky ran to Kervin. Kervin had been so worried that he immediately hugged Jack and cried a bit because he had thought Jack died or left them.

They went to the hut. They had gotten some more materials so they could build a better hut. They had to because they were getting cold, so they upgraded the materials. They turned the wall into stone and the roof to wood logs. They were proud of themselves.
They went to sleep. While Sky and Kervin slept, Jack heard something very loud. He wondered what it was, so he went out to explore it. He thought it was a bad idea, but it was something that would change his life…

 

The Final Call
While he went to the jungle, he heard louder and louder sounds. He followed these sounds, and he found it said something secret.
                                             Jack…
                                               Jack…
                                                Jack!…

He was scared, yet so very confused. He ran and ran till his heart had no energy. He was scared. He wondered why the voice or something knew his name. He was scared, but he wondered if he could find his parents because that voice might have been them. He had two parents, and there were two voices. He heard the a voice say, “The two of us should leave.”

 

Ending to No Beginning
Nothing
Nothing but black
Nothing but white
Blankness, nothing
The light and the dark
The two, all, the three            


Playing the Game

The real truth is that the people are not real people. We should never trust anyone because they might be people or aliens. Now, I can’t trust myself. I don’t know. Please tell me why. Nothing matters anymore. I feel like nothing, like trash. That cannot be a true life — I can’t understand what to do — Am I the lie? Do I play the game — making all the silly rules — Nothing means nothing — or do I mean something — a new life, a beginning with no end.

 

The Final Showdown
This was the final point. Now that he knew the truth and the lie, it was difficult. But then, he started to sleep. The next day, he was abducted. He felt proud because he could finally meet his parents. He now knew everything of his past and was a bit sad because he left everything, even his memories. When he moved to somewhere else, it felt like he left everything he loved behind to go on to something else. He was  brought back to his parents.

He was one of them, an alien, and he was okay even though he couldn’t go back to play with Kervin and Sky. He tried, but they didn’t allow him because Earthly things were not allowed on the moon, which is where all the aliens lived.

Please tell me where my friends are? Please tell me how to get there? Please tell me who I am?  


Final Thoughts
The final thing he wanted to do was to see his friends, Sky and Kervin, but he could not. He wondered if he could see his friends, and he couldn’t, so he made a choice.

Stay here, never seeing his friends
Or
Try to find his friends

He wanted to see his friends, even if he might go and get in trouble, even if it meant getting ultimate punishment from the aliens and his parents. So at night, he went to the landing stations, and then, he went on a UFO. He didn’t realize that it said: Warning! May Explode!
He didn’t care, and he just went on. It then turned invisible, and he could see in the inside while he was inside. He pressed a button, and then it left.

Zooooooooooooooooooooooooooom.

Then, he landed safely on Earth.

At the mother laaaaaand…

Then, he heard ticking, and he looked behind him and saw that the UFO was going to explode in at least fifteen seconds. He had to get Sky and Kervin and himself out of Earth because it was going to explode! The bomb was only linked to destroy Earth, but he would miss Earth very much because he loved Earth so much. Earth was where he met all his friends and had his own home and did some crazy things.
Sky and Kervin hopped on. They went onto the moon because that was where they lived, and then he could hear that the bomb was ticking. It was already at one second. They flew to the moon to be safe. And then, BOOM!

He didn’t know what he just saw. He just saw his beloved home get destroyed. He cried. Then, his parents showed up and asked, “What’s wrong?”

“A bomb was on the Earth and destroyed it,” he sulked.

He just walked to his hut that they made, and then after another a day had passed, he remained calm about even losing Earth. He froze like ice.

Jack was on the moon with his parents, Sky, and Kervin. He was inside a small hut made of moon dust and moon rocks. Beside him was a black door that led to the outside, where the beds were. Aliens on the moon slept outside. The hut smelled like bacon. Sky and Kervin were sitting beside him.  

Sky said, “Let’s go out and have some fun.”

“No,” said Kervin.

“Why?” asked Sky.                       

“No,” replied Kervin.

“You’re no fun,” said Sky.

Suddenly, a flying hotdog appeared. It looked like a teacher. It had little glasses and a little bun.

Jack felt shocked, but very hungry now. Jack felt sad after all of his adventure because he loved Earth a lot, but had to leave. He could never go back, now that the UFO destroyed Earth. He didn’t feel like he fit in with his parents on the moon because he didn’t know how to behave like the other aliens on the moon.

He was the only person who loved Earth there.

He then went outside. He saw a big present tied with a green bow and blue wrapping paper. The green and blue reminded him of the colors of Earth. Kervin helped him open it while Sky licked it.  After they tore away the wrapping paper, Jack saw a fabulous playground, just like the kind earth used to have. He felt so happy and shocked that he cried tears of joy. His tears flew away into the moon air.

His parents popped out of a little box and yelled, “Surprise!”

“Even though we destroyed Earth, we wanted to give you this. We grabbed this before Earth got destroyed because we knew you would like the souvenir. Now you can remember Earth forever,” said his mom.

Jack hugged his parents. “Oh my God, thank you,” he said.

While Kervin played on the monkey bars, Sky played on the swings. Jack realized that even though Earth was destroyed, he could remember and cherish a piece of it in his heart.

 

The Mysterious Monster

One stormy night, a little, pink hamster named Tiny was looking for berries to eat with her family. Later, when she was sleeping, she got out of her bed to get a glass of water. But then, she saw a shadowy figure out the window. So she went outside in her coat and slippers, and she saw it moving closer to her. She wanted to go back into her house, but the door shut because of the strong wind.

“Oh, no, I am going to die!” she said to herself. Then, she ran as fast as she could like a car, until she stopped to catch her breath. Then, Tiny rushed home and unlocked the front door and went to bed. When she went to bed, she kept on thinking, What was the shadowy figure or monster outside?

The next day, she woke up early and ate breakfast. After breakfast, she went outside to look for the monster, and she left some food out. But when she saw nothing, she went back inside her house.

Then, her mom asked her, “What were you looking for?”

Tiny stood quiet for a moment, and then she told her a lie! Tiny said that she just needed some fresh air. But she was looking for a giant monster or figure.

One afternoon, Tiny was outside playing with her friend, Bun Buns. She was really nice to Tiny, and she was the color blue, and she was also a hamster. She had to leave Tiny’s house to help her mom. Tiny almost forgot about the giant monster outside.

When it was midnight, Tiny went outside in her coat and slippers to look for the monster. But instead of finding the monster, she found a giant cave!!!

“I think that’s where the monster lives!” she said to herself. So she went closer to the cave but she saw nothing. When she turned around to head home, she saw the monster! It was a big, hairy, humongous monster! Then, the monster grabbed her and went to his cave with Tiny!

The next morning, Tiny the hamster woke up and saw the monster still sleeping. She wanted to get out, but when she was so close, the monster grabbed her.

“You are not leaving until you tell me what you are doing in my cave,” the monster said.

“I did not come here, you brought me here,” Tiny added.

“No, I didn’t.”

“Yes, you did.”

“No.”

“Yes.”

“No.”

“Yes.”

“No.”

“Yes.”

“No.”

“Can I just go home?” said Tiny.

“Okay,” said the monster. “But come here at midnight.”

So Tiny went back home, and when it was midnight, Tiny went into the cave and saw the monster.

She asked the monster, “What is your name?”

“My name is German,” German said.

“So why did you ask me to come here?” Tiny asked.

The monster stood quiet for a moment. “Because I need you to stay here with me.”

“What? WHY?”

“Because if you go home, then you will be saying that you have seen a monster, and they will capture me, and I will die,” said the big monster.

Then Tiny realized that her mom and dad were going to go away for the entire year!!! And they had already left! So she agreed that she was going to stay with the  MONSTER!

The next morning, Tiny the hamster woke up and saw the monster eating breakfast. Tiny didn’t have anything to eat for breakfast, so she ran to her house, brought some food from her house, and rushed back to the cave.

“Can you be my friend?” asked Tiny.

“Okay,” said the monster.

So Tiny asked the monster, “What are we going to do?”

“Nothing,” said German.
“I can cook something for lunch. What do you want?”

“Nothing, I can look for something to eat,” said the monster to Tiny.

After eating lunch, Tiny’s mom called her and said, “I’m coming back this week, because the hotel is horrible. Bye!”

“Oh no!” said Tiny the hamster. “If they come here next week, they will see you! But it’s going to be ok.”

The monster was worried, so when it was midnight, the monster woke up Tiny and said, “Are you scared?”

“No?” said Tiny. “Why do you ask?”

“Because people could kill me!” said the monster.

“It’s going to be ok,” said Tiny to the monster. So the monster and Tiny went to bed.

In the morning, Tiny the hamster woke up very early and told the monster what they were going to do, but she heard nothing. She saw that the monster was still sleeping, so Tiny woke up the monster to eat breakfast. After eating their breakfast, Tiny had a call from her mother who said that they were coming home today! In the afternoon!

Tiny the hamster hid the monster in a big closet in the cave. She heard a knock on the door, and it was her mom and dad coming back home from the hotel! Tiny rushed to the back door of her house without letting her mom and dad notice her. Tiny unlocked the backdoor and went in the house and opened the door to her parents. But then, the monster got out of the cave and went to Tiny’s house to look for her. Her dad and mom screamed at the top of their lungs!

“A monster!!!” screamed her mom and dad.

“WAIT!” yelled Tiny.’’Please don’t hurt him! He’s my friend!”

“What?” said the parents.

“He is really nice. He wouldn’t hurt anyone. Please do not kill him!” said Tiny to her parents.

“Okay,” said the parents.

“Yay,” said Tiny. So Tiny and German the monster were both best friends, and they were really happy.

THE END

The Star, the Heart, and the Flag

 

Chapter 1: Expulsion

They didn’t appear to me as bullets anymore. They were worse than the enemy, worse than anything the Kaiser could summon up. They were mindless shards of destruction and death, able to kill a man without remorse or any thought to the matter. But, that is what comes with war.

I am now fifteen, and a proud American Jew, but still cannot kill with the same mechanical intensity. I cannot fathom a time when I could use plastic soldiers and pewter cannons as playthings that could die and regenerate themselves in the span of a few minutes. Sadly, that was my mindset when I entered this war in 1914, and worse, that was my mindset when I volunteered to go on this mission. It is late 1915, and my job, along with three other recruits and a veteran, is to infiltrate the enemy lines in slight discretion. Then we must do as much damage possible before the rest of the advance unit arrived. We are halfway there, and one of us is already dead in a foxhole in no-man’s land. The force now consists of Me, José, Wilber, my closest friend and honorary American, and a weathered veteran known only as Apocalypse’s Fifth Horseman for his chilly demeanor. All of a sudden, the world exploded, or so it seemed.

Shells were everywhere, and that was our cue to attack.

“GO!” Somebody shouted at me to interrupt my reverie, and I hefted my gun into firing position and, according to some crazy unspoken wartime rule, began to bellow like an enraged buffalo.

“Aieee!”

“Hold the position!”

“Charge them!”

“We need a doctor!”

The sounds of battle were everywhere, the sound of death, that everlasting shriek cut short by the worse sound of silence. We charged into a foxhole, but as I got in, I realized how much water there was.

“You okay?” asked Wilber.

“Fine. You?” I said.

“Russell, I’m gushing blood! ” he responded with fervor, blood flowing in a steady stream from his thigh. I suddenly realized that the water in the foxhole wasn’t water, but his blood. I knew that he needed a doctor, but I also knew that the expedition could potentially break the German support lines, a crucial target. My mind was made up when José’s body tumbled into the foxhole, eyes glazed and chest mangled.

“Let’s go,” I said solemnly. The enemy was almost upon us. I had no choice, and I headed back to the trenches only out of necessity. Sadly, that argument did not land well with my superior. As I began to explain to him the hole in his reasoning, that Wilber would have died, and just how wrong he was, his nostrils began to flare and I backed down, causing me and the sergeant to sit in such a silence you could almost taste its bitterness and slime. The tension was unbearable, knowing that botching this procedure might result in the loss of my friend, companion, and fellow warrior. The doctor invited us into the army’s hospital room with a hurried wave of his hand, and, ignoring all discipline, I shoved my sergeant aside. I gave a sigh of relief. Wilber was alive! But my relief didn’t last for very long. As we were reunited, the sergeant spun me around and shoved two pieces of parchment into my chest.

“You’ve been discharged. Now get out before I make you.” he said quietly, but with a rage burning in his eyes.

I tried to make a case for Wilber’s being delirious but no one would listen. We’d been given a dishonourable discharge for running away in the face of the enemy, and were left to wander the scorched landscape. Bodies were strewn carelessly across the line, no respect for their families, and evidently no respect for them. The week had passed. We kept walking, running, walking, running, alternating between the two, an eternal rock and hard place situation. Days passed, we tallied them on our shared canteen. Then finally, we went from the fire into the frying pan one hot morning.

“Hey Russell?” Wilber’s shrill voice called out from the small dirty lake that we’d found, and exploited.

“What?” I called back irritably. “Did you fill the canteens yet?”

“Well, yes,” he called back.

“Then what is it?” I walked over to the lake, which we had renamed the Hope Reservoir. It was definitely unclean, but it was water, and it kept our canteens filled. We had utilized it to its complete fullest, even with the easily perceptible mold and moss at the bottom.. We had decided to use the trees the to make wood canteens with our supplies, so we could walk back to Paris or some other town in France, but we did not have a map and so it was very important that we stay, lest we end up in some German town.

Then I saw what he was talking about. He lay in tears with the rock that we used to tick off the days in his hand. But in his other was a nearly shredded canteen. I was at a loss for words. Then he shook his head, and pointed to the Hope Reservoir. At this I fell to tears. Our food and supplies were disappearing down into the lake. A dim voice kept saying that the canteen was an accident while ticking off days, and in his misery had accidentally kicked the supplies in. That voice turned out to be Wilber. After this incident, we decided to get going, and time became a dim factor in my mind. We trudged onward, and we began to become emaciated. Blood soaked the ground. God, this hurt. Where were we? Probably somewhere in hell. Maybe somewhere in Germany. Pain was the only presence in my mind, my stomach was cramping, and it felt as if it was imploding. My thoughts were everywhere, yet always focused around one objective: home. The sun appeared to be a blazing ball of fire, making me nostalgic, and reminiscent of the war. The light began to fade. Darkness was my home now, enveloping me in its soft folds, tempting me to give in. “Wilber, do you have any ideas to pass the time?” I asked desperately.

Wilber stared at me hard. “There aren’t even any sticks here, we can’t even draw in the dust, because there isn’t any. We don’t even know where we’re going! Haven’t you noticed all the repeating landmarks? We’re going in circles! We have to just pick one direction and then go with whatever we choose.” He paused for breath. “If we’re to survive, you’ve got to be more attentive.” I stared back at him, dumbfounded. What repeating landmarks? I just saw bloodied dirt and randomly strewn bodies, which I didn’t think really qualified as landmarks. We started to walk forwards.

“No, I noticed them,” I said stupidly. Wilber stared quizzically at me.

“Russell–food–war–thirst.”

What was he talking about, I wondered.

“Ilow dathe water canty.”

Now he was just speaking gibberish, but the next part alarmed me.

“Garmy Russol. Garmen spak amy.”

I deciphered this one quite well. What he meant to say was that he wanted to stab me! He must have let that one slip, the cursed traitor. It is all so clear now! He is a thief! I did not drop the food, nor destroy the canteen! All I did was take care of him, and he has turned against me! I must admit, I didn’t see such cruelty in him. But he’s the dark one, telling this darkness to come for us, trying to get me to bend to his will the whole time. I saw right through his plans. He should know better than to mess with me. He is staring at me now, head cocked as if I am some kind of demented specimen. He is German. He must be. No he isn’t. He protects me. He is merely leading me to the slaughter. The psychological battle rages on in my head. I break down in tears. I feel as if I am hit, and I fall right in front of Wilber as he also collapses again. The darkness finally overtakes me, and I surrender to its might.

Chapter 2: Kurt

I look up into the face of a young boy, but he is distorted by some unknown substance. It is the evening, so is it just darkness messing up my vision? No, there’s some gurgling sound as well. Wait. That sound is water! I have never liked the stale army biscuits more than when he forced them down my throat at that moment. They tasted like a species of cardboard, and yes, I mean species. They didn’t taste like normal biscuits, they tasted like crap, but delicious crap that I was eternally grateful for. The water flows across my face, and since my lips are cracked, it gives such incredible relief that was unrivaled by any pleasure I had back home, until I see the Kaiser’s crest on his shoulder. Wilber! Is he okay? What happened? My mind was prepared to burst with questions.

“Where is Wilber?” I asked with a frantic air. Was he dead?

Wait, isn’t Wilber German? Maybe. Keep an eye on him, I guess. I was delirious, so no, he is my friend. Anyway, the real question is, what German would help Allied soldiers? We had the French symbol, and he was definitely German. Something didn’t add up. “Friend awake,” said the boy. “Vision too fuzzy, but I have pistol to your friend and knife that go any moment into stomach.”

So that was the catch, the German was after information. Well, the minute he looked to Wilber, I would take out my knife, and the positions would be flipped. Wilber knew this as well, and smiled briefly at me. He slowly edged out of the boy’s vision, and when his eyes flicked to Wilber, I had already sliced his knife hand and Wilber had preemptively jumped out of the way. The boy screamed and dropped his knife, which I grabbed, and Wilber quickly grabbed the gun, and stood uneasily with the firearm pointed at the boy who lay in a sort of turtle position, with his hands raised in a half-hearted attempt to protect himself.

“Who are you?” Wilber said with a now rightly earned air of superiority. Wilber didn’t really know how to talk to people, a thing that had begun in his childhood when he had lost his whole family to a German shell while he was at home. He was an orphan when I found him in the streets after his immigration from Britain, and we had become friends ever since I ran away and we joined the French Army together.

“Don’t have camp,” the boy stuttered out in his broken English. “Have piles of dirt.” He narrowed his eyes in anger and spat at our campsite. Me and Wilber shared another look. He may be German, but insulting your captors tends to yield worse results than complimenting or praising them does.

“You were trying to extract information from us. The least you can do is grovel,” Wilber retorted, spit flecks flying out of his mouth in rage. In the army, we were known as The Orphan Duo, and our ages had become a carefully guarded secret, and one that we kept with our lives. But this German boy seemed almost fourteen, way too young for an army man, even by our standards.

“I not bow.” He seemed more confident now. “I never betray Kaiser Vilhelm.”

“Then that will be your own demise,” said Wilber, as he leveled the gun towards him.

“Stop!” I shouted as Wilber aimed at the German. Wilber turned to me questioningly.

“Russell, this traitor to the world killed my family. You don’t have a say in this. This is strictly personal between me and him. Don’t you know Germans are the most filthy type of organism on the planet? They are lower than scum, not worth the dirt he says our camp is made of. I have every right on the planet and tens of thousands of grieving families to back me up. What do you have? Some foolhardy chivalrous code will get you nowhere but death by snakes like this one. You cannot blame this choice on lethargy. You have to capitulate to these instincts, Russell, they are there for a reason,” Wilber said heatedly.

I sighed. Wilber did have a point, but he made a mistake in telling me to capitulate. I don’t give in to anything, and I wouldn’t start now. I knew Wilber would let down his guard easily with a well placed stroke, and so I tried to put on an indifferent and apathetic air.

“Look Wilber–” I began, but Wilber cut me off.

“That was a rhetorical comment, you don’t respond to it. We can either waste time arguing over this and then kill him, or take advantage of the cool night to get back to the Hope Reservoir. Your choice.” I glared at him. It was hard to argue with someone who wouldn’t let you finish a sentence.

“Wilber, stop and think for a second. If we went from the trenches, to the Hope Reservoir, which was parallel to the battle lines, we then went in circles, then randomly picked a direction, and now we see a random German strolling–” I was interrupted again, but by someone different.

“Then you are in Deutschland, obviously.” The German boy smirked, resembling a gangster, what with his word choice and fake western accent he put on. I suddenly felt an urge to go with Wilber’s strategy, but I stopped myself quickly.

“As annoying as you are, sadly, we’re going to keep you,” I said to the kneeling teen as he slowly moved forward, now back in his turtle pose. Wilber now appeared resigned to the German’s fate, but still wanted to belittle the German one last time as the boy crawled towards them.

“You know, Napoleon once said that an army moves on its stomach. I’m now sure he was talking about German soldiers.”

I couldn’t help sniggering at that last comment, but immediately reproached myself as Kurt became flushed, got up and dusted himself off. My guess is that we are somewhere near the French city of Somme, but we could be more near to Verdun or Switzerland. “So, what’s your name?” We needed something to pass the time before I could figure out where we were.

“Kurt,” the boy responded. “What do you plan on doing with me?” he said, trying to stop my efforts at enjoyment before anything came of them, his usual strategy. Kurt was really getting on my nerves, but he was our only chance out unless we wanted risk a hit or miss in a random direction, and end up in Berlin. The sun was already pretty low on the horizon, and by the time it became too dark to continue, we had laid down in a cluster of rocks, and I went on guard to watch the camp. I turned around and saw Kurt staring at my back. I turned around to look at him.

“What?” I asked, feeling somewhat unnerved. He kept staring at me until he finally said something.

“Say it again. What you were muttering,” he asked.

“You mean my prayers?” He nodded.

“If that’s what you call them.” Suddenly, I was struck with a thought. What religion did this boy – Kurt – identify with? Wilber was an Atheist, I was a Jew, but what did this new member of our crew believe in?

“Are you a Jew?” I asked tentatively.

“No. And no other religion either,” he said. Ah, so the boy was an Atheist, like Wilber. Darn. I wondered why they hadn’t bonded over the fact yet. Something was wrong. I felt another pair of eyes boring into my back. I turned around, Kurt’s gun in my hand, and prepared to fire as I turned. It turned out just to be Wilber angrily staring at me.

“What?” I asked, in a slightly provocative tone.

“He is not an Atheist.” Wilber stared at me with such intensity it made me flinch.

“How can you be so sure?” I asked him. I wondered if there was some kind of vibe that Atheists give off, but a secret signal that only other Atheists pick up on. I tried to imagine Wilber with a halo, or some kind of invisible radio signal that he radiated from his head or something like that.

“He’s too devoted. He fights for something, I can tell. There is something he hides from us, and he had better come clean.” A small smile appeared on Wilber’s face, but one devoid of real happiness. It looked more like a grimace or a scowl, but really, it was just a smile with no life. I backed away from his menacing smile, so as to make him focus the spotlight on Kurt. His eyes, though, never moved. He remained fixated on Kurt, as if he were some kind of grotesque specimen. Wilber followed his instincts when he ran from the German shell, he followed his heart when he immigrated to Britain from France on his family’s money, and from Britain to America as a stowaway. He’d followed his heart when he gave up monotheism. Wilber had followed his heart his whole life, and he would never take orders from anyone, or for that matter, give them. But most of all, Wilber knew people. Wilber knew when people were lying and what they were hiding from him, but his gaping flaw was that he didn’t know himself nearly as well as he knew other people. WIlber could not, for the life of him, decipher himself, and had really only branded himself an Atheist out of necessity. He liked to say that he was a powerful disciple and devotee to the heart, and I was fully prepared to see this seemingly innocent conversation go up in flames because of him. Kurt gave him a wolfish grin and stood up, fully prepared to meet the obvious challenge of his loyalty. He stood close to Wilber and, without pause, began his comeback with bravo.

“I owe my faith to only Germany. Religion is passing thought, of no real importance. Loyalty to your nation is what counts. Nations will stand, but Atheists are fools, Jews will die out, but Germans will always remain the utmost on the egalitarian chain. We are the true heroes of the war, and all that doubt us will fall. Nationality is the only thing that will persist throughout the ages, where beliefs will fail and religion will fall. And yes, my broken English was a fake. You, Russell, believed me for every moment for your religion, and Wilber here overlooked it, forsaking his true ulterior suspicions for exterior ones. You people are too predictable,” Kurt said.

Wilber and I sat in a stunned silence, too dumbfounded to speak, the grin still inhabiting Kurt’s face, making it look as if he presided over all this. He then went back to bed using his kingly walk, making him look smugly royal, as if he had just expounded the answer to the meaning of life onto peasants who were struggling to comprehend life at its smallest.

Chapter 3: Rats and Rabbits

After the argument the night before, I thought that we really needed to watch more attentively while in the camp. We packed our, well, nothing, as our camp was only really dirt and shrubbery. That day, as we set off to make our way across the French border, a thought suddenly struck me. We had a German prisoner, which we couldn’t take with us across the border. We also couldn’t leave him stranded here, although the minute I told this to Wilber, he raised his eyebrows and muttered, “Why not?” under his breath. We always had the gun ready, so that he wouldn’t call out to the Germans, but we are still worried about him being somehow like a beacon to German troops, that his mere presence, unless somehow guarded by bushes and shrubs, would alert them. Hunger now began to gnaw at me, like a feral animal trying to escape the prison that was my stomach. Finally, our weary sights turned to the abundance of game that seemed to surround us.

Kurt was almost to the point of trying to shoot the both of us, and to the casual observer, he would have no premise to shoot us besides the fact that we had captured him. Crazily, that was not the case with him. When I had first brought up the irony that we had had nothing to eat since Kurt exhausted his rations nursing us to health, yet we were surrounded with game, he looked at me with a somewhat destabilised look of insanity, and started to yell.

“Why are you complaining about hunger when we have my gun, bullets, and rabbits, all around us? You are swimming in a freshwater lake, and you are complaining that there is no water to go around.” He shook his head half in disgust and half, truthfully, in shock. Where he came from, utilizing nature was a part of life, an accepted fact that everyone seemed to understand and did so without hesitation or thought to it. In the matter, I was somewhat influenced by Judaism, not a huge amount, but somewhat, in my wariness against killing and eating in cold blood another living creature. It seemed much more innocent to eat meat that somebody else killed, knowing in some form or another that it wasn’t my fault, that it would be eaten anyway. Now pictures of the rabbit frolicking in a field harassed my mind. When I turned around, Wilber and Kurt were arguing loudly.

“You have no respect for any life!” Kurt screamed.

“I’m not the one who wants to destroy your precious life, you are!” Wilber returned with fury.

“I mean life that COUNTS, you IDIOT!”

“Well, at least I’m not committing regicide!”

“What the hell are you talking about?”

“You’re lower than a rat, I thought he had some authority over you! Frankly, I’d rather have the rat.” Wilber’s tension from the other day had boiled into today. Wilber’s grimace smile again resurfaced, this time in a more sarcastic form.

Suddenly, a bang rocked the ground around us. We were being shot at! Then I saw that Kurt, in a quick maneuver, had grabbed the gun, and shot the rabbit, leaving the rat to run away. Wilber stared at him with such an anger that I had never seen solicited from him before, and charged the few paces between them. He punched him in the jaw, and I watched Kurt crumble before Wilber’s stocky form. Then Wilber let out a cry of pain. Kurt had used a rock to hit him in the shins. He jumped on Kurt, elbow forward, and jabbed him straight in the nose, and I heard a crack. He got on top of Kurt and was immediately toppled off by Kurt’s hit to his right shoulder. He fell over, and as he tried to get up, Kurt slugged him in the stomach. But Kurt didn’t notice that Wilber’s left hand had moved behind him, and only realised the fact when he received a crushing uppercut that almost sent him towards Wilber, but he fell backwards. He then hooked Wilber’s leg and began to pull him downwards, all the while raining punches on his stomach, his mouth, and his cheeks. I suddenly realized that I had just been standing here the whole time, and I moved to intervene. I tried to break them up and received my fair share of punches in the process, but I finally succeeded in stopping them.

“What’s the matter with you!?” I asked heatedly, although I knew both their answer and the real one.

“Here’s the matter,” Kurt said.” You people are–”
“Would you shut up for just one damn second?” I said, then regaining my composure, went on.

“Here’s the reason that you two are squabbling like this: You don’t have any food.” Kurt started to get the gun, but Wilber stiff-armed him.

“Not yet Kurt. If I know my FRIEND…” He paused to slam in the emphasis. “He’ll have more to say on the matter, won’t you Russell?” He stared at me so hard that I flinched, for the second time in the last seventy-two hours.

“No Wilber, I hate to concur with Kurt, but he’s right. We need the food.” The dancing rabbit in my head began to bleed from the numerous bullet holes I now imagined him with.

“The rats will destroy the rabbit then.” He turned to me. “I thought it was the other way around.” It seemed like a very vague statement to anyone else, but to me it made perfect sense to me, and it hurt me to my core. Wilber sat down on one of the rocks in our den in disgust, and went to sulk in a corner. Whenever I came near him, he would show his front teeth, chitter, and turn his back to me angrily to prove his point. What he meant was that he thought that us, as pure creatures were rabbits to Kurt’s alter-ego of a rat. When I had joined with Kurt in their disagreement, I had betrayed him and became a rat alongside Kurt, allied against the rabbit that would allegedly always be Wilber.

Another crack rang through the air. I turned to Kurt, prepared to punch him nearly as hard as Wilber did, when I saw that the gun was lying on the floor near Wilber. My eyebrows creased in questioning, until I fell in pain as I felt my thigh implode on itself, my bone shattering almost instantaneously. The world began to go dark, and through my blurry vision I saw French troops coming in with machine guns from a group of trees, and a German sniper fall from an adjacent patch. Then I understood.

Chapter 4: Loyalty

I woke up in a bunker. Was Kurt just a dream? I feel sick. No, not a dream, because my leg is hurt. Then where is Wilber? Standing next to me. What?! I turn my head feebly toward Wilber. He smiled at me.

“Kurt ran,” he said gently. “You took a bullet to the left thigh, but the doctors say that they got it out, and fixed up your bone. We’re in Verdun, and if you’re better, I’d much rather fight alongside you.”
I smiled in return, and found that I could get up. Before I knew it, they had equipped me with the standard weapons, a Berthier rifle and a few grenades on my belt, and we were off again to the battlefield, with the same mission: maximum damage, minimum discretion. A storm of bullets were all around us, and Wilber and I faced them down together, as friends and allies once more. We were ordered to take down a particular bunker that had been a thorn in the side of the commanders for a while now, and we set off to storm it.

So far, so good. We were in the bunker, and we weren’t met with any resistance. We then went in with our new storming group of seven other men, but as we went through the tunnels and finally found the main one, two of our group immediately dropped dead to awaiting machine guns. There were about twenty Germans in there, but in the firefight that ensued, they lost sixteen, and all our men and reinforcements were dead. I had been shot twice, once grazing my ear, and once in my hand when I stopped a bullet from coming into my heart. Wilber was so far unscathed, but there was no way out of here unless these Germans either surrendered or died protecting the exit hole deep into their lines. Suddenly, two more Germans came from behind us and one used the butt of their gun to hit me in the neck, knocking me down, and Wilber, to avoid being hit in his own turn, fell as well. The Germans blocking the entrance approached us, with one of them walking forward ahead of the group

“Now you die,” the German said, holding a gun to my head. All of a sudden, another German came bursting out of the exit hole towards us, and shot the lead German in the back of his head. The soldier’s messy blond hair was all too recognizable to us. Kurt!

“Go!” he shouted. “There was a reason I didn’t shoot you when I had the chance. Follow your religions no matter how minor they are. I am happy to give my life to let two men realize their potential.”

He shot another German, and Wilber picked me up, slung me over his massive shoulder, and ran. I saw Kurt shoot another before receiving a bullet to the stomach. His face contorted in pain, he shot a soldier running after us. Now bullets peppered his body, and a bayonet appeared from behind him through his chest. He now fell, and the Germans repeatedly bayoneted him and shot him at close range. His eyes became vacant, an empty stare, as Wilber took me farther and farther out of the tunnels. My eyes fluttered rapidly as I started to lose consciousness, and I began to cry. Wilber, hearing my sobbing, knew what happened and also began to cry. I realized that Judaism and Atheism were powerful, but to have the strength and loyalty that Kurt had was beyond the power of any God or man on this earth.

      

Spat’s Big Adventure

Once upon a time, there lived a spatula named Spat. She lived in a fridge because her parents were a head of lettuce and a tomato. She felt like she did not belong in the fridge. She was not fed metal or other things a spatula would eat. She was fed vegetables or fruit.

Spat wanted to be used to make a cake, but before that ever happened, she had to get past the meat warriors. The meat warriors were all different types of meat, like pig, steak, and filet mignon. Something about Spat was telling her that she could never get out of the refrigerator, but she knew that she could, and she was not afraid of the meat warriors.

So one day, she had a plan to escape during the nighttime. She made a fake clone of herself so she could get out of the fridge. She made a fake by getting a cookie for the head with two pieces of black licorice, lettuce for the skirt, and a popsicle stick for the body. The clone was ready, so she went to sleep.

In the morning, she put the clone on the bottom of the fridge so the clone would draw attention and she could get out of the fridge.

Finally, she got out of the fridge onto the counter to be baked with, but she was not going to be baked with. She was going to be cooked with.

“Now I know why Daddy Lettuce and Mommy Tomato would not let me go out. There are so many ways to get hurt,” she said.

She thought it would be the same as in the refrigerator, but not at all. She saw a garlic being squeezed. She thought that it was a garlic squeezer and didn’t like the smell.

“OMG, the garlic is being killed, and ummm, did I see that garic in the fridge the other day?” she said. Spat thought this was terrible, so she hid from the cook.

The next day was not much different, so at the end of the day, she found a schedule for baking. She read that next week, on Sunday at nine o’clock in the morning, the chef would come to bake a cake. So she stayed out all night and all day for a week.

The day finally came, the day she would be used to make a cake. She was so excited that she would be used to bake a cake. She was really excited. When she was being used to bake the cake, she got really sticky, so sticky that it was peeling her skirt. Metal color was coming off. It was the worst thing. She checked the chart to see if it was cake day because she had never been used to make a cake before and didn’t think it would be so sticky.

So this was supposed to be a cake, but then she realized that the bowl the chef used to make chicken was clean. All of the food was off, and then she saw the sink and realized that there was nothing to worry about. At the end of the day, her wish was granted. Everything came off just fine, and Spat lived happily ever after out of the fridge. The End!

                                          

The Middle

Welcome to the life of being in the middle.

I never have one perfect day. Everyone gets in the way of my perfect day. It’s always someone that ruins it. Every day, I think, Today’s the day, but every day, it fails. My mom has five children. I’m the middle child.

***

“Get up, you sleepypants!” Jack screamed.

I woke up in my bedroom with bags under my eyes. I looked out the window. It was still night.

“Help me turn on the computer,” Jack said slowly. That’s my older brother. He mostly texts his friends and does other pre-teen stuff.

I groaned and then walked to the office. I looked at the computer and showed him how to work it. “You just click the power button,” I muttered.

“Oh,” Jack said embarrassed.

Then, I walked out of the office. Down the hall, I saw the family picture that was taken very long ago. I arrived back in my bedroom. Then, I slammed my face onto the pillow.

When I woke up, it was still dark, and everyone was asleep. Everyone had his or her own room. I sneaked past all six bedrooms and into the kitchen. I quickly poured a bowl of cereal. I had a perfect bowl of cereal and a nice, peaceful breakfast.

Click! Clank! I saw my younger brother, Andrew, walk downstairs.

“I can’t sleep,” he whispered.

“Why not?” I asked.

“I had a nightmare,” Andrew whimpered.

“Don’t worry, it’s just a dream. It can’t really hurt you,” I said.

“I guess so,” he said with a worried tone. Then, Andrew went back upstairs.

***

When it reached dawn, everyone was awake. Dad had to take me, Andrew, and Chloe to school. Mom had to take Jack and Mia.

Mornings are chaos. Never in my life have I had a good morning. I wish that the day would come that I could have a perfect day, even if my siblings try to stop me.

In the car, I was talking to Chloe about her first day of kindergarten.

“Kindergarten sounds really scary,” she said, very frightened.

“Chloe, I’m sure you’ll have a blast!” I yelled.

“Really?” she asked.

“Really,” I responded.

Dad dropped her off, and it was just me and Andrew.

It was Andrew’s first day of second grade. Andrew wasn’t scared. He was really happy.

“Y’know, it’s a good thing that you’re excited,” I told Andrew.

Andrew gave me a smile.

When Andrew was dropped off, it was time for me to go to my first day of fourth grade.

But just imagine how scared Jack would be. It was his first day of middle school. And next year, Mia would be going to high school. That must be really, really scary.

Dad dropped me off, and I was scared to death.

I walked into Room 220, and I took a deep breath.

“Good morning, Gabe. May you please take your seat?” the teacher announced.

My seat was towards the back of the room. I walked all the way to the back. I couldn’t see the teacher from where I was sitting. Everything was a blur. I knew already that fourth grade wasn’t going to be my best year.

When school was over, I entered the car and was silent the whole ride home. Try number one for the perfect day was a failure.

When I got home, I wanted to go to bed early. And that’s what I did.

I was on my bed, thinking about whether I would ever get one perfect day. Everyone had a great first day of school except me. It is never fair.

“Gabe, are you okay?” my mom asked.

“I’m fine. I just had a rough day,” I said in a shy kind of voice.

My mom shut the door. I hoped to have a better day tomorrow.

***

  In the morning, I was the last one to wake up. I quickly put on my clothes, got my backpack, and ran into the car. When I got to school, I took my seat. This time, it was a

little easier to see the teacher, and we got to do this cool science experiment.

At recess, I met a kid named Lucas.

“Hi,” Lucas said.

  “Hello?” I whispered, “What’s your name?”

“Lucas,” he replied. “What’s yours?”

“Gabe,” I stammered.

“Goodbye!” Lucas said.

I just met a new friend on the second day of school! Today might finally be the perfect day!

“Back out of the way, kid!” a bully yelled in the hallway. He pushed me to the floor and laughed.

“Ow!” I yelled.

I was left on the floor in the hallway alone. And no one cared.

“Help!” I screamed. No one could hear me.

I had heard of this bully. His name was Tom. I got up and cleaned myself up. I hoped I’d never run into him again. Try number two was a failure. I knew it wasn’t true, that I wasn’t really going to have a perfect day. That day would never come.

Later, our family celebrated our dad’s birthday. We had to get all dressed up since it was a fancy restaurant, and everything they served there was fancy. The name of the restaurant was Astoria. My dad loves Astoria because their food is amazing.

I ordered chicken fingers to eat. I love chicken fingers!

“Cheers to dad,” Jack announced.

“Cheers to dad!” everyone yelled.

Everyone toasted high up in the air. It was an amazing night! It was very, very close to being perfect, but not perfect. Try number three had to be perfect, it had to.

***

I woke up in the morning feeling cranky. I yawned, and then I walked to the porch. I sat on the patio couch, looking at the beautiful sight of my backyard. It was right next to the woods. I had never ever been out there before. There was a river all the way back there, but its water was now polluted, and it was filled with garbage. Just looking down there made me want to go into the woods, but I had heard there were bears back there.

There was no school because it was Saturday. I was the only one up. I continued to look around my backyard. Then, I walked down the stairs and into my backyard. I looked around for a second.

“What are you doing out here?” Mia asked.

“Nothing!” I yelled.

“Are you trying to go out in the woods?!” she screamed.

“No, of course not!” I replied.

Mia gave an “I’m watching you” kind of look. She walked inside and slammed the door behind her.

I sat down and thought about the perfect day. Lucas was coming over that night for a sleepover, and I just hoped everyone didn’t embarrass me. I sat around, waiting for almost three hours. I stood on my head and got a head rush. Finally, when it struck 5:00, he arrived.

“Hey, Lucas,” I sputtered.

“Hey, Gabe,” Lucas replied.

“C’mon outside now!” I yelled.

Lucas followed me outside into the backyard. I walked into the woods.

“Are we supposed to go back there?” Lucas asked.

“It’s fine.” I lied.

We stepped foot into the dangerous woods. I was in a lot of trouble. The woods were very dark. I felt like someone was out to get me. I had goosebumps down my skin.

“Maybe we should go back,” Lucas suggested.

“No,” I said. I was as scared as Lucas, but I was very curious. I kept on walking forward.

“I’m going back,” Lucas sputtered. He went all the way back to the yard.

I stopped. I decided to go back. I turned around and went the other way.

When I came back from the woods, Lucas was gone.

“Lucas!” I yelled. I went inside and saw Lucas. But he was hanging out with Jack.

“Jack, get away from Lucas,” I sputtered.

“No way!” Jack yelled.

“Lucas is my friend,” I scoffed.

Then, Chloe and Andrew came downstairs.

“Oh, why is everyone down here?” I screamed.

Then, Mia came down.

“That’s it!” I yelled. I stomped to the office and slammed the door.

Lucas slowly opened the door.

“Hello?” Lucas echoed.

The lights were turned off. Lucas turned on the lights. I was curled up in a little ball.

“Gabe, I’m still your best friend,” he sputtered.

I didn’t answer.

“Gabe, c’mon let’s play,” Lucas continued.

Then, my head popped out. “You promise you won’t ditch me?” I whispered.

“I promise,” Lucas answered.

When it was 11:00, we started to go to sleep.

“Good night,” I said.

“Good night,” Lucas responded.

By midnight, we were asleep.

***

I stretched and groaned. Lucas woke up a few minutes after I did.

“I had a great sleep!” I yelled.

Lucas stretched his back. “I agree,” he said.

“Breakfast!” Mom yelled.

Chloe and Andrew were the first ones down, then Jack and Mia, and then me and Lucas. Mom made pancakes, scrambled eggs, bacon, and sausages. As we were eating breakfast, Lucas and I talked about our next sleepover.

After breakfast, Lucas’s mom came to pick him up.

“Bye!” I yelled. Lucas waved while he was in the car.

“That was fun,” I said. “Tomorrow, I have to start try number three for the perfect day. Yesterday and today don’t count.”

“Well, good luck,” Andrew whispered.

In my room I made a plan for try number three. If I didn’t follow the plan, I was going to fail again. I couldn’t fail. Try number three had to be perfect.

***

When I got to the classroom, nothing bad happened. So far, so good.

Until Tom came back. “Hey, chump!” Tom yelled.

I tried to ignore him.

“You trying to have a perfect day?” he laughed.

“Yes,” I muttered.

Tom dropped me to the floor. He also stepped on my foot.

“Ow!” I screamed.

“Oops. Sorry, does that hurt?” Tom said sarcastically.

“Yes, it kind of does,” I said.

“Oh, I’m very sorry,” he laughed.

All of the sudden, Lucas came out.

“Back off,” Lucas sputtered.

“I’m not scared of you,” Tom answered.

I was shocked. I didn’t know Lucas was tough.

Lucas grabbed my hand and took me away from Tom.

“You will pay for that, Lucas. You will pay!” Tom yelled.

“You saved me,” I stammered.

“I couldn’t let you get beat up by Tom,” Lucas sputtered.

“Thank you,” I responded.

“No problem,” Lucas said. Then, he was gone.

When I got home, everyone was having pizza and watching a movie.

“Can I have some pizza?” I asked.

“Sorry, but there is nothing left,” Jack sputtered.

“Fine,” I said.

I walked onto the porch. This day was definitely horrible. First, I got attacked by Tom, and now, my family had forgotten about me.

Why does the world hate me so much?! All I’m asking for is one perfect day. Well, I’m done with this. Looking at the damp sky made me wonder, why me?

“Gabe?” a voice said.

It was my dad. “Look, I’m sorry we watched a movie and had pizza without you,” he sputtered.

“It’s not about that, Dad. It’s because I never had a perfect day.” I cried.

“Wait, it’s about that?” Dad asked.

“Yeah,” I stammered.

“None of us ever had a perfect day,” Dad said.

“What?!” I yelled.

“It’s true. With a family of seven, it’s impossible to have a perfect day,” Dad laughed.

“Really? Then, what about the time…uh,” I said cluelessly.

“See? There are no memories of a perfect day,” Dad sputtered.

“Huh. I guess there isn’t?” I laughed.

Then, Dad and I started laughing hysterically.

“What’s so funny?” Mom asked.

“Gabe thinks that everyone has had a perfect day except for him,” Dad laughed.

“Really?” she asked.

“Really,” I said.

Then, everyone was laughing.

All this time, I thought I was the only one who had horrible days. But my whole family never had a perfect day. Who cared about having a perfect day? I had my family. When we got in, we continued watching the movie as a family.

And I went to sleep knowing that there is no such thing as a perfect day.

The Suitcase in the Library

PROLOGUE:

In the middle of the night, the doors of the New York Public Library creaked open. Although it was called “The City That Never Sleeps,” everyone seemed to be asleep. Even the lions at the front doors seemed to be asleep. Except for one man. He stepped out of the doors to the library with an annoyed expression on his face. He was wearing a dark suit almost the color of the night sky. All of a sudden, a long black limousine pulled up. A short man stepped out of the car, whispered something to the man, and they both got back in the car. The car drove away. Two hours later, they were no longer in the city, maybe even the state. The car was driving towards a very, very tall building, almost three times the size of the Empire State Building. The two men stepped out of the car, and walked towards the building. As they walked towards the building, you could swear the car was driving away on its own. The car was taking the same exact route it took to get to the building, except the car was driving in the opposite direction.

***

“Wake up!” Lily’s three year old sister shouted.

“Why?” Lily mumbled.

“Because it’s time for school!” She screamed again.

“Rosie, you know I already have an alarm clock that works perfectly,” Lily said. There was a loud ring. “See?” Lily said with a smile.

Rosie started bawling. “Mommy! Lily wouldn’t let me be her alarm clock!” Rosie sniffled.

“Lily, be nice to your sister, she’s only trying to help” Lily’s mom said.

Lily grunted. “She isn’t as cute as you think. Thanks to her I was up in the middle of the night!” Lily said angrily. Her brown eyes were glaring at her sister.

Rosie started bawling again, and her blue eyes looked like they were made completely of water.

“Lily!” Her mom scolded. “Will you please stop tormenting your sister and get dressed?” Her mom looked like she was about to explode.

“Fine,” Lily said.

Her mom left the room. Lily put on her favorite shirt and threw her pajamas across the room. “Is it impossible for me to have one CALM day?” Lily sighed. In just two weeks Lily would leave for sleepaway camp for the WHOLE summer. No annoying Rosie, just her and her friends in a cabin far away from here. After Lily was done getting dressed, she ran to the kitchen to get breakfast. Out the window of the kitchen, Lily noticed a black car that looked a lot like the black car she saw out her window the night before.

“Lily, hurry up, you’re going to be late for school,” Lily’s mom said.

“Okay, fine.” Lily ran out the door as fast as she could. She got on the elevator and as soon as the elevator got to the lobby, she sprinted out to the bus stop. On the bus ride to school, Lily couldn’t help thinking about what she had seen out the window in the middle of the night. The man stepping out of the black car and the other man getting in. She wondered where the black car was driving. Just then, the bus got to a stop. Lily got off the bus and ran into the building and realized she forgot her backpack on the bus. She ran back to the bus as fast as she could and grabbed her backpack. As she got her backpack off the bus, she saw a man that looked a lot like the man she saw in the middle of the night. She ran back off the bus and back into the school building.

***

Lily sat up in her chair eagerly as she waited for the bell to ring so she could go home. Then the bell rang and Lily ran to her locker to get her backpack. After she got her backpack, she ran out of school and got to the bus stop so she could take the bus home. When Lily got home, she ran to her room so she could do her homework. She said hi to her pet turtle Green Bean and went to get a snack from the kitchen. When she got back she fed Green Bean and ate her snack. Like usual, at that moment Rosie ran into her room and almost knocked over Green Bean’s tank.

“Rosie please be careful with Green Bean,” Lily said.

“I want a turtle too!” Rosie said.

“But making Green Bean die doesn’t make a difference,” Lily replied.

“Lily, look! Long car, long car!” Rosie pointed to the window.

Lily looked over and saw that same black car, although it looked like it was driving on its own this time. Lily put on her shoes and looked like she was about to leave the apartment.

Rosie said, “Lily, where are you going?”

“To see that car.” Lily ran out of the apartment, went downstairs, and saw the black car about to turn the corner. She ran after the car and saw the car pull up in front of the New York Public Library. Lily saw the men step out of the passenger seat and she saw them walk into the library. Lily followed them inside. As they turned the corner into the nonfiction aisle, she noticed a small black suitcase sitting by one of the shelves. She kept following the men, and when she saw one of them about to turn around, Lily ran out the doors of the library and she kept running. She ran until she got to her apartment building and got on the elevator. She wished it could go faster to the eighteenth floor. She felt a little panicky because when she ran past the car, she saw that the car was driving on its own. She ran to her room, squeezed her stuffed teddy bear, and took a moment to calm down. Maybe I should go back to the library and see what was up with that suitcase, she thought.

***

“Did you hear those footsteps behind us in the library?” the shorter man said.

“I heard them thinking about the suitcase,” the taller one said.

“How come you get to be telepathic and I don’t?” the shorter one pouted.

“First of all, I’m telepathic and because I’m a better agent than you are, and second, don’t focus on that, focus on the suitcase,” the taller one said.

“So come on, let’s get the car and drive to the V.V.T.B.,” the shorter one said.

“Ah yes, the Very Very Tall Building. And please stop calling it the V.V.T.B.”

Two hours later

The men walked up to the front desk of the Very Very Tall Building.

“We’re here for the Suitcase Organization,” the tall one said.

“Okay, go up to the 304th floor,” the receptionist said. It was a very, very long elevator ride.

The men got off the elevator and walked towards a door that said Suitcase Organization on it. They opened the door and walked into a very, very big room full of rows of cheap plastic beach chairs filled with uncomfortable looking people. The men sat down on two pink ones with hearts on them.

“And I was expecting an inflatable baby pool,” the shorter one whispered to the taller one.

“Shh,” the taller one said.

A man almost seven feet tall and seven feet wide said, “Today we are here to discuss who the new ‘Suitcase Seer’ is. Does anyone have any questions or comments?” The taller one raised his hand. “Yes, Freddie Bob.”

“I heard the Suitcase Seer thinking about the suitcase in the library followed by thoughts about teddy bears, so I’m suspecting it was an 11-year old girl.”

“And did you see this girl?” the balloon man asked.

“No, she ran away before I saw her.”

The balloon man said, “Pathetic girls, always running away. Does Ricky Dave have anything to say?”

“No,” the shorter one whimpered.

                                                               

***

Making sure that Rosie was still asleep, Lily quietly put on her sneakers (in case she had to run away again) and her sweater. Lily made sure that she had her phone in her pocket (her mom had given it to her for her tenth birthday and she had only had it for a year) and she quietly tiptoed to the door. As Lily walked out of the apartment, she decided to take the stairs, even though it was a very long walk down. Lily looked at her watch. It was 10:30 at night. Lily was thankful that she didn’t live that far away from the library so it would be a short trip. Lily couldn’t see any stars since it was New York. But she did see the moon. It was a half-moon that night. After she was done walking the one block to the library, she was hesitant to go inside.

¨I am going to be in so much trouble for this,” Lily said to herself. She stepped inside the library and closed the door behind her. She walked quickly through the library to the nonfiction section. In that same spot, she saw the suitcase again. Not being able to resist it, she went over towards the suitcase and unzipped to see what was inside. She immediately saw a bright light. Then it was complete darkness.

Fifteen minutes later

“Hello?” Lily heard a voice say. Lily opened her eyes. She saw the figure of a woman over her.

“What happened?” Lily said.

“Honestly, I don’t know. I just heard a sound over here and saw you lying on the floor.” the woman said.

“Who are you?” Lily asked.

“Lily, don’t you know me? I’m the librarian here,” the woman replied.

“How do you know my name?” Lily asked.

“Don’t you have a library card here?” the librarian frowned.

“Oh. Don’t blame me, I was unconscious for- actually I don’t know if I was. Was I? But, you get the point.” Lily said.

“I wasn’t blaming you, and you were unconscious. For fifteen minutes.” the librarian said.

“I was?” Lily said, not sure if she believed the librarian.

“Yes. And may I ask how you became unconscious?” the librarian said curiously.

“Um, I looked in this suitcase-” Lily started to say.

“Suitcase?” the librarian interrupted.

“Yes, suitcase. Here, look,” Lily held up the suitcase to the librarian, unaware that out of the 7 billion people on Earth, only Lily could see it. The librarian, on the other hand, knew Lily was the one, and that the Suitcase Organization would be out to get her. Oh, if only they knew what was inside, it definitely WOULD NOT be worth it. The librarian chuckled to herself.

“What are you laughing ab-”

“Hide!” The librarian whisper-shouted as she heard the door creak open. The only people who would come to the library at 11:00 at night were either the library staff, the person who could see the suitcase, or a member of the Suitcase Organization. The librarian did NOT want it to be the last one.

***

“The wheels of the driverless car go round and round, round and round, round and round, the wheels of the driverless go round and round, to the New York Public Library,” Ricky Dave sang rather tunelessly.

“Will. You. Please. Shut. Up. You’re a  really bad singer,” Freddie Bob said angrily.

“Everyone in the Suitcase Organization is a really bad singer. You know Jeffrey Sam, Balloon man, founder of the Suitcase Organization? He can shatter a glass just by singing one note!” Ricky Dave replied.

“Ricky Dave, I told you to SHUT UP!” Freddie Bob yelled.

“Look, we’re here!” Ricky Dave said.

Freddie Bob took a deep breath… and punched Ricky Dave in the stomach. Ricky Dave threw up on Freddie Bob.  Freddie Bob pushed a button that cleaned his suit. Then he opened the door of the car and pushed Ricky Dave out. Ricky Dave blew a raspberry at Freddie Bob. Then Freddie Bob got out of the car. They both walked into the library and the door opened with a loud creak.

***

“Out of all the people the Suitcase Organization could have sent to steal the suitcase, it had to be Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave,” the librarian said.

“Wait, their names are Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave?” Lily asked.

“Yeah, everyone in the Suitcase Organization has two first names with a total of three syllables,” the librarian said.

“It’s so annoying to look for something that’s invisible,” Ricky Dave said.

“It’s not invisible, we just can’t currently see it,” Freddie Bob said.

“I’m pretty sure that’s the same thing,” Ricky Dave said.

“No it’s not.”
“Yes it is.”

“No.”

“Yes.”

“No!”

“Yes!”

“NO!!!”

“Okay fine, they’re not the same thing,” Ricky Dave said.

“Do you want me to punch you in the stomach again?” Freddie Bob said.
“Do you want me to throw up on you again?” Ricky Dave said.

“Fine.”

“Fine.”

“Let’s just keep looking for the suitcase,” Freddie Bob said.

“They’re weird,” Lily said to the librarian.

“Ricky Dave, I hear voices,” Freddie Bob said.

“Oh come on,” Lily said.

“And they’re coming from over there,” Ricky Dave said.

Freddie Bob looked right at Lily. Lily was so scared she could even smell her fear. “There!” Ricky Dave shouted.

Lily got so scared that she picked up the closest thing to her — which happened to be the suitcase — and threw it at Freddie Bob. Freddie Bob was very confused. He thought that a little girl had just thrown air at him, but surprisingly it hurt.

“Wait a minute,” Freddie Bob said. “That was the suitcase!” Everyone was running around the library looking for the suitcase. The only person not in the commotion was Lily, since she could already see it. When she thought everyone was most involved in the fight for the suitcase, she walked over to where she saw the suitcase and picked it up.

“She has it! She has the suitcase!” Freddie Bob yelled.

“GET HER!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!” Ricky Dave screamed.

“Oh no oh no oh no, IT’S THE END OF THE WORLD!!!” the librarian shouted.

Lily ran into the librarian’s office and locked the door behind her. She heard the closet door swing open and the librarian walked out.

“How did you-” Lily began.

“Secret passage. Be prepared to run, because I’m pretty sure Ricky Bob and Freddie Dave or whatever their names are saw me go into the passage. You still have the suitcase?” the librarian said.

“Yes,” Lily answered.

“Good. You’re going to need it. And not just for throwing it at Bobbie Fred,” the librarian said.

The librarian had her gray hair up in a tight bun, right on top of her head. Her glasses sat on the edge of her nose, like every librarian’s glasses should. Her green eyes were looking directly into Lily’s brown eyes. Lily’s mom often said Lily was lucky to have her dad’s eyes. Lily had never met her dad, apparently something happened to him around when Lily was born, and she had never seen him. She was a little bit jealous of Rosie, because Rosie didn’t need to worry about Lily’s dad, since she was adopted. Lily’s mom really wanted another child, but that was after her dad went missing.

After the emotional memory, Lily and the librarian heard the closet door swing open. “Run!” the librarian shouted. Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave were close behind them. Lily decided to throw the suitcase at them again.

“Ow!” Ricky Dave screamed. “She threw the suitcase at me!”

“Stop being dumb, pick it up,” Freddie Bob yelled.

Lily slid over and tried to get the suitcase before them. Lily had an idea. She ran the other way and ran towards the exit of the library. She ran out of the library and got into the driverless car. She got down and hid until the men came out. When Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave got out of the library, they didn’t see her. They decided they would get into the car and drive to the Very Very Tall Building. When the car started, Lily jumped a little, but she managed to stay hidden.

Two hours later

“Well, Ricky Dave, turns out we managed to get the suitcase after all,” Freddie Bob said.

“Not for long,” Lily whispered to herself.

After Ricky Dave and Freddie Bob got out of the car, Lily made sure they couldn’t see her, and then she got out. She couldn’t help staring at the building in front of her. It was almost three times the size of the Empire State Building. She decided to go into the building. She saw Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave go into the front desk and tell the receptionist that they were here for the Suitcase Organization. Since Lily wanted to follow them, she went up to the receptionist and said the same thing.

“304th floor,” the receptionist said. Lily got into the elevator and pushed the 304th floor button. It took about five minutes for her to get there. When she got there, she saw a door with the words “Suitcase Organization” on it in big print. Lily got down on her knees and opened the door and snuck inside. Lily was surprised to see many rows of broken rocking chairs. Some of them fell over about every two seconds. Lily went into the last row and chose the one that looked the least broken. A man that was seven feet tall and seven feet wide came up to a little stage at the front. He announced that there was some very important news from two of the agents named Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave.

“Please let me carry the suitcase up,” Ricky Dave whispered to Freddie Bob.

“Why should I?” Freddie Bob whispered.

“Because if I carry it up, maybe they’ll let me get telepathy too,” Ricky Dave said.

“Hate to break it to you, but that’s not a good reason,” Freddie Bob said.

“And now, without further ado, the two agents who have managed to get the suitcase,” Balloon Man said. Before Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave were even done getting up to the little stage at the front, Lily ran up to them and grabbed the suitcase.

“Freddie Bob, do you know her?” Balloon Man asked.

“Jeffrey Sam, I can assure you that she does not have good intentions,” Freddie Bob said.  

“Then I say, get her!”

The room was full of chaos. Broken rocking chairs became even more broken. Injured people became even more injured. And Jeffrey Sam accidentally swallowed someone. Lily managed to exit the room, but someone crashed into her.

“HI!!!!!” He shouted.

“Who are you?” Lily asked.

“I’M DANNY PHIL!!!!!!” He yelled.

“Uhh, hi?” Lily said with a confused expression on her face.

“HELLO!!!!!! WHAT’S YOUR NAME?” Danny Phil yelled.

“I’m Lily,” Lily said feeling weirded out.

“OH YEAH, YOU’RE THE PERSON WHO COULD SEE THE SUITCASE!” Danny Phil screamed, “HOW’D YOU GET HERE ANYWAY?”

“I snuck into Freddie Bob’s and Ricky Dave’s driverless car,” Lily said.

“I KNOW FREDDIE BOB AND RICKY DAVE!!!!! FREDDIE BOB IS MY UNCLE! HE DOESN’T LIKE ME THAT MUCH THOUGH!” Danny Phil yelled.

“Why doesn’t he like you?” Lily asked.

“I WAS LIVING WITH UNCLE FREDDIE FOR A LITTLE BIT AND I HAD ALWAYS WANTED TO JOIN A BARBER SHOP QUARTET BUT HE WOULDN’T LET ME AND MADE ME JOIN THIS ORGANIZATION INSTEAD! SO I THEN I STARTED LIVING WITH RICKY DAVE BUT THEN HE JOINED THIS ORGANIZATION TOO!” Danny Phil screamed enthusiastically.

“Wow,” Lily looked at Danny Phil with wide-eyes.

“YOU KNOW THAT GUY WHO JEFFREY SAM SWALLOWED — CUPCAKE BILL?! HE WAS MY BEST FRIEND!”

“Wow, I’m sorry.”

“DO YOU WANT TO HELP ME PLAN HIS FUNERAL?” Danny Phil asked.

“Okay,” Lily said.

“DO YOU WANT ME TO DRIVE YOU BACK IN MY DRIVERLESS CAR?” Danny Phil asked.

“Okay, but can you drive me to the New York Public library?”

“SURE, BUT I’M NOT DRIVING YOU. MR. INVISIBLE IS!”

“You got it!”

Together, Lily and Danny Phil walked to the parking lot of the Very Very Tall Building, and Lily was surprised to see that Danny Phil’s driverless car was really just a punch buggy painted pink. But it did actually drive by itself.

Two hours later.

Lily walked up the steps to the New York Public Library. She couldn’t wait to see the librarian again.

“Hello?” Lily said.

“Hi Lily. How was your trip to the Very, Very Tall Building?” The librarian asked.

“Oh, it was good, and this is Danny Phil,” Lily said.

“HI!!!!!!” Danny Phil said.

“Um.. Hi Danny Phil,” the librarian said.

“I think I might try opening the suitcase again,” Lily said.

“Well, what’re you waiting for?” The librarian asked.

“Okay,” Lily said.

She put the suitcase on the ground and slowly opened it. Inside, she couldn’t have been more surprised to see…………

A LITTLE BABY UNICORN!

Lily’s eyes were about as wide as oranges.

“You also get to be immortal,” the librarian said.

“How do you know all this?” Lily asked.

“Because I was the first person to ever see inside the suitcase…”

EPILOGUE:

“We are gathered here today to mourn the loss of my beloved friend, Cupcake Bill,” Danny Phil said for the first time, not shouting. “He was a very nice friend and he baked amazing cupcakes.”

Unfortunately, they did not have Cupcake Bill’s corpse. Instead, they had some “remnants”  in a coffin (compliments of Jeffrey Sam).

Lily almost started crying at Cupcake Bill’s funeral. Jeffrey Sam was not there, luckily. It was almost time for Lily to speak, “He always knew how much frosting and how many sprinkles to put on every cupcake. Cupcake Bill’s cupcake shop will be left in the care of Danny Phil.”

“Wait, what?!” Danny Phil said.

“Yes you’ll be running Cupcake Bill’s cupcake shop,” Lily said.

“THIS IS THE BEST DAY OF MY LIFE!!!!” Danny Phil shouted.

Everyone at the funeral started staring at him, “I mean besides for Cupcake Bill dying,” Danny Phil looked embarrassed.

“Okay, and now for the crying break,” Danny Phil said and then he started bawling.

Everyone at the funeral was crying. It seemed as though every single tissue box in the world was empty.

“CURSE YOU JEFFREY SAM!” Danny Phil shouted while taking a break to blow his nose. “WE WILL MISS YOU AND LOVE YOU FOREVER, CUPCAKE BILL.”

Then a little girl wearing a little pink dress stepped onto the stage, “I have no idea who Cupcake Bill is, but my sister went to the funeral so I did too.”

“Rosie, I thought you wanted to go to the funeral,” Lily said.

“But I still don’t know who Cupcake Bill is… who is he?” Rosie said.

“Okay Rosie, why don’t you get off the stage now?” Lily said with a fake smile on her face.

EPILOGUE OF THE EPILOGUE:

Lily had to say it was pretty cool to have a pet unicorn. By orders of her mom, Lily was forced to give Green Bean to Rosie, since it wasn’t fair for Lily to have two pets and Rosie not have any. Lily could tell Green Bean hated Rosie, because he went into his shell whenever Rosie came into her room. Whenever Lily came into Rosie’s room, Green Bean came out of his shell and gave Lily a get me out of here look. Sparkly-Boo (Boo for short), as Lily had named her unicorn slept in Lily’s bed and gave Lily big pleading eyes to take her in Lily’s backpack to school. Rosie called Boo Shnoogie (Lily did not know why). For Rosie’s fourth birthday, Lily’s mom decided tell Rosie she was adopted. Rosie wanted to know where her “real mommy” was.

“Hey Lily, we’ve got new next door neighbors! Their names are Mr. Bob and Mr. Dave!” Lily’s mom said enthusiastically. Lily hoped she was kidding about their names.

“Oh, that’s cool mom, but do you know what their first names are?” Lily asked.

“Their names are Freddie and Ricky!” Lily’s mom said.

NOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Lily thought.

“Mom, is it okay if I go to the library?” Lily asked.

“Why not?” Her mom said.

Lily rushed out the door and ran the one block to the New York Public Library. She ran straight into the librarian’s office.

“Freddie Bob- Ricky Dave- Next door neighbors-” Lily panted.

“Okay Lily, what’s going on here?” The librarian asked. Lily took a deep breath… “FreddieBobandRickyDavearemovingintomybuildinginapartment18Cwhichisnextto18D

whichismyapartmentandcouldn’ttheyhavemovedinto17Cor16Cor15Cor14CandIwouldsay13Cbutthere’sno13thfloorinmybuildingbutmaybe12Cor11Cor10Cor9Cor8Cor7Cor6Cor5Cor4Cor3Cor2Cor1C? AndIdidn’tevenknowMr.Smithmovedout.” Lily said in warp speed.

“Slowly?” the librarian said.

“Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave are moving into my building in apartment 18C which is next to 18D which is my apartment, and couldn’t they have moved into 17C or 16C or 15C or 14C and I would say 13C but there’s no 13th floor in my building, but maybe 12C or 11C or 10C or 9C or 8C or 7C or 6C or 5C or 4C or 3C or 2C or 1C? And I didn’t even know Mr. Smith moved out.” Lily said normally this time.

“Well I have a plan. The Suitcase Organization has stolen all sorts of high tech devices from the government to find the suitcase.” the librarian said.

“So if we report them to the police…” Lily said.

“They won’t be your neighbor!”

Emma

SCENE 1

EMMA and KATE are in EMMA’S basement. They are practicing their dance for the competition.

EMMA

The twist! The jump! The step-step split. Go!

KATE starts dancing,

EMMA

You did it! 

KATE

Yay!!! Emma, I’m so excited for the competition. It’s tomorrow. I hope we win.

EMMA

I hope so, too. The Silver Steps have won every single year. And we have lost every single year. We have to win!!

KATE

Do you want to practice it?

EMMA

Sure.

EMMA starts dancing until she falls and starts moaning.

EMMA

Ow, ow, it really hurts, Mom.

KATE runs across the stage, up the stairs, and rushes to EMMA’s MOM’s room.

MOM

What happened?

KATE

Emma hurt herself.

They both run to EMMA and her MOM calls 9-1-1.

MOM

Can you have an ambulance to Street Wood Road, number 236? (Ends the phone call.) Honey, are you okay?

EMMA

I think I’m fine but it really hurts.

SFX of an ambulance. Ambulance comes. They put her in the ambulance, and with MOM and KATE, they go to the hospital.

SCENE 2

DOCTOR, EMMA, KATE, and MOM are in the hospital. DOCTOR treats EMMA.

DOCTOR

She sprained her ankle. And she has to be off it for a week.

EMMA

But I have dance competitions tomorrow! And I can’t miss that.

DOCTOR

Well, you have to be off it or else that ankle of yours will get even worse.

EMMA

Ughhh!

KATE

It’ll be fine. I’ll video tape it for you. And besides, we won’t even win cause The Silver Steps win every single year.

EMMA

I know we’ll win this year. Good luck.

DOCTOR

Here’s medicine for her foot. Feel better.

They walk off, end of scene 2.

SCENE 3

EMMA and MOM are in MOM’S room.

EMMA

Mom, I want to perform. I’ve dreamed about since I was little!

MOM

But, sweetie, you can’t. Your leg is sprained and you can’t dance on it ‘cause you might injure it even more.

EMMA

But, Mom —

MOM

No buts, but we can still go and watch it.

EMMA

Mom, even if my group won, it wouldn’t affect me because I wouldn’t have been in it. Please, Mom.

MOM

No!

EMMA storms out of the room.

SCENE 4

EMMA and KATE are talking on the phone.

EMMA

Hello, Kate.

KATE

Hey, what’s up, Emma?

EMMA

I’m mad at my mom because she’s not letting me perform.

KATE

Well, you can’t because you hurt your leg.

EMMA

Well, it’s not like I broke it or anything. It’s just that I sprained it. But, I can still walk so I can still perform.

KATE

But Emma. Even if you didn’t hurt it that much, you could injure it even more. I can’t let you perform.

EMMA

Well, I’m still going, and you can’t do anything to stop me.

MOM listens in.

MOM

Emma’s still going. I must do something to stop her! But I must not tell Emma that I listened to the phone call, or she’ll get mad at me.

SCENE 5

EMMA is going outside.

EMMA

I’m going outside to talk a walk, Mom!

Mom, Mom where are you?

MOM

Hi honey, where are you going?

EMMA

Oh hi, Mom, what ya doing?

MOM

I’m just going shopping.

EMMA

I’m going to go out now. I am taking my crutches with me.

EMMA walks out and MOM follows

MOM
Where you going?

EMMA
I’m meeting Kate.

MOM

But Kate is at the competition.

EMMA

I know.

MOM

Why do you have a backpack?

EMMA

Because um…

MOM

Tell the truth.

EMMA

I want to go to the competition, because I know this year we’ll win, but if I don’t go, and we still win, I feel like I won’t have done anything because I won’t have participated in it.

MOM

What about if we go home, and I will make mac and cheese with broccoli — your favorite? We can call your dad when we get home. I know you miss Dad since he is away in Paris doing some work.                                                             

SCENE 6

MOM and EMMA are in the dining room eating dinner.

MOM

Sweetie, even if your team won, you would still support them.

EMMA

But Mom, even if they win I would be happy for them, but I wouldn’t feel happy for me because I wouldn’t have been in it.

MOM

But still, even if you weren’t even in the performance, it was still your team that won… You’re still part of your team, even if you weren’t there.

EMMA

I never thought of it like that, I guess you are right.

The phone rings

EMMA

Hi, Kate.

KATE

We won the competition!       

EMMA
You did? I’m so happy for you. I wish I was there, but at least you won, and our team has a trophy.                                                        

THE END

What Happened to the Candy Shop?

Once upon a time, there was a candy shop in Doll Town, France. And every night, all the dolls would wake up and walk to the candy store to buy candy. Until one night, the evil King Evil ordered his guards to destroy the candy store so all dolls could come to shops that only gave money to King Evil. And because of that, no doll would budge from their own yard. And because of that, the king then ordered his men to kill all dolls if they would not buy things from stores that gave money to the king. Finally, a new doll, named Joseph, came and took over the throne. And ever since, King Evil has never been seen and the candy shop got rebuilt.

Yellow Fever

Chapter One: Emma

The year is 1793. On a hot summer day in Philadelphia, my sister and I go to get some fresh food from market. We get some peaches, pickles, and biscuits. My sister is talking a lot, like she always does. I’m not listening. I am thinking about how my father is never around, and how my mother is around too much.

I am the oldest of three siblings, I have a younger sister named Hailey and a younger brother named Peter. When we get home from the market, my puppy meets us at the door. He has white fuzzy hair that makes him look like a baby polar bear. My mother comes in the living room. “You two are late, your French teacher will be here very soon and you haven’t gotten your books yet. Hailey, go upstairs and get all the books.” I watch as my sister heads up the stairs. “Emma go find your brother Peter,” she tells me. I find Peter, he was by the tree in the backyard, the one he and dad had planted four years ago.

My family hasn’t been this way my whole life. When Peter was just a baby, Hailey was  two, and I was three. Dad had gotten a job in town, so he was around the house often. Mom had a job then too. She owned a clothing store. One day dad came home, smiling from cheek to cheek. He told me, Hailey, and Peter to go upstairs so he could talk with mom, but I snuck downstairs to listen. I remember them talking about Dad’s new job (at a sailing company), and how he finally convinced Mom to let him take it. Little did I know that my dad’s decision to own a sailing company would change my life.

Lots of things changed. Dad’s new job allowed him to send more money home for us, though he was always at sea. We moved into a house that had fifteen rooms. That’s when I got a French and Spanish teacher. I also got my own room. I enjoy my new life, but I never get to see my dad, as good things have consequences. My room has a blue bed. At the end of the bed there’s a chest with all my clothes. Next to my bed, on the right side of my room, I have a desk and a bookshelf. I got to choose how my room looks. But poor Hailey. Her room was decorated by mom. It’s all pink, and she doesn’t like it. I don’t know what color Peter’s room is, I don’t even go in there anymore because it’s so messy. “Emma… Emma… Emma…”  I realize that I was daydreaming again. “Come on we’re late for class,” says Peter.

When we walk into class, our teacher says, “Vous êtes en retard.”

“Sorry we’re late but Emma was daydreaming,” Peter says. I like my siblings but when they do stuff like that, I get annoyed.

“It doesn’t matter whose fault it is, you’re both late,” our teacher scolds. I hate French class, it’s so boring. All I hear is talk, talk, talk, homework, talk, talk, talk, talk, and then there is some more talking. I’ll do what I always do, which is copy the homework from Hailey or Peter.

At dinner, mother tells us the latest gossip, “some man died screaming today. They say he was a sailor, and he had yellow skin.” Immediately my siblings and I all ask the same question.

“Was the man dad?” Mom’s face looked like she had been expecting this question.

“No, some guy named William,” she answers. It was a quiet dinner after that. Later we all head upstairs to go to bed.

Chapter Two: Emma

I wake up to screaming and realize that the screams are mine. I remember what I was dreaming about. I was standing in front of my Dad and watching him die, but I couldn’t help him. I open the door a tad to see if I have woken anyone up. All the other doors are closed. I head downstairs to eat breakfast. As I smear butter on my toast, Hailey comes in the kitchen. I didn’t notice she had come in until she tapped my shoulder.

“Hi,” said Hailey.

“Don’t do that,” I said coldly. I never have been a morning person. “I’m going upstairs to read,” I said. As I left the kitchen, I heard my sister mumbling something, probably a rude comment about me.  

That day we got a letter from dad. It said:

Dear family,

I hope this letter finds you in good health. I will be coming home in five days, but by the time you get this letter it will be one day. I can not stay long enough to be there for Emma’s birthday.

Sincerely,

Henry Hunter

After Mom finished reading the letter out loud, I stormed up to my room. I paced across the room. This is what was I thinking about:

-What have I done to deserve this?

-Does dad not like me?

-Is he really sorry about not coming to my birthday?

-What has he been doing? He’s been gone a year…

I go under my sheets and hide. I cry until I drift off to sleep.

Chapter Three: Emma

I awoke when I heard a loud noise. My eyes are burning from the tears, so I go downstairs to get some water. When I walk in the kitchen, I see Dad! I realize the noise was the carriage that Dad had arrived in. He smiles and says, “Happy Birthday!”

“But it’s not my birthday,” I say. I know he’s pretending like it is my birthday so that I will forgive him for missing my actual birthday. This is what I hate about Dad. Even when I’m mad at him, I can’t stay mad. But this time Dad’s plan won’t work. I have made up my mind, and nothing he will do, say, or even buy can change that.

Chapter Four: Hailey

My sister, Emma, gets everything. Emma thinks I don’t know that when I talk she doesn’t listen. She gets what she wants all the time. These are some of the thing that I don’t like about her.

-She is lazy.

-She has a bad mood in the morning.

-She copies my notes.

-She always “borrows” my stuff.

-She comes into my room without asking.

-She always talks about Dad like he is a bad guy.

What usually happens when Dad misses Emma’s birthday.

  1. Dad makes Emma a special breakfast.
  2. He says, “I’m sorry for missing your birthday again.”
  3. Then he gives her $10!
  4. She goes shopping.
  5. Then she comes back with no money, but 15 shopping bags.
  6. She hugs dad and forgives him.

I wait for Emma to come back from her shopping trip, but she doesn’t come back. I start to worry, even though she annoys me. Why is she not home yet? I go downstairs and Emma taps me. Then everything went black.

Chapter 5: Hailey (one week later)

Suddenly, I open my eyes and all I see is the pink ceiling of my room. I hear voices talking, but I can’t figure out who they belong to. “So, she had yellow fever?” One voice says.

“Yes.”

“It’s been a week, so she should be getting better soon.”

“I miss her.”  I try to talk but I can’t. My throat feels dry. I think my sister is the one who said she missed me. My sister has never said anything like that.

“Who has yellow fever?” I call out weakly.

The door opens and someone enters my room. I try to lift my head but it falls back down on the soft pillow. “You do,” says the unidentified voice. I think it’s Emma, but it turns out it’s only Peter. “Can I get you anything?” he asks kindly.

“Yes I would like some water for my sore throat.”

Emma comes into my room with her clothes and some trunks. “Hailey! I’m so glad you’re alive and that you survived the yellow fever. I thought I would never get to talk you again.”

“What’s happening? Why does it look like you’re packing?” I ask feebly.

“You’ve been sick and unconscious for a week! Dad thinks we should leave the country before anyone else gets sick.”

Emma was wearing a cloth that covered everything but her eyes. “Why are you wearing that on your face?”

“Dad wants us to wear these until the doctor says that you are healthy and okay to travel,” she answers. “Also, I’m sorry I’ve been a bad sister,” she says.

Suddenly everything that was on my list of annoying things about Emma disappears. “I missed you too,” I say. Then we hug. I don’t want to let go of my sister, because I love her and realize the value of our relationship. However, a loud shriek interrupts our loving embrace.  

The shriek is coming from my parents room. Emma says, “I will go see what’s happening and report back to you.”

“Yes, ma’am,” I say as I salute my sister and laugh.

While I am waiting for Emma to return, I get worried, since the shriek sounded low like a man’s. I think it was my dad, but that scares me because I have never heard him scream before.

Then Emma comes back, her mouth is dropped and her eyes are wide, like she’s seen a ghost.

She hesitates for a moment, and she says, “the doctor thinks Mom has yellow fever and she won’t live, or be able to go on the trip. Mom’s skin has a tint of yellow and she’s shaking, but she doesn’t realize it.”

Before I can respond, Emma tells me that Mom wants us to leave her behind and go on the trip.

Chapter 6: Mom

I open my eyes and feel the hot sun blinding me as I begin to wake up. I roll over to see if my husband is still asleep, but he isn’t there, so I assume he’s in the bathroom. I call everyone for breakfast, even though I am not that hungry. When no one comes, I decide to go check on the kids. When I go into Peter’s room, he is not there. Then I see myself in the mirror. I have yellow skin and bright red eyes. Then I remember that’s how Hailey looked when she had yellow fever and I have a flashback of me telling my family to leave the country without me.

I don’t want to eat, but I need to for strength. So I grab a peach, but drop it. I am too weak to pick it up. I go back to bed. All of a sudden, I am cold, and then a chill comes over me. I start coughing up blood. I try to scream out, but I can’t even breathe. I feel like I am close to death. I think about my children, my sweet, sweet children. I am ready. Death would be like a nap, I think to myself. Secretly I know that it will not be like a nap, because I will never wake up again. I close my eyes and feel the world darken and fade.

Chapter 7: Peter

We came back to town for the first time in a year where we had left Mom to escape the yellow fever. As we rolled into town, I didn’t recognize anything. It looked like all the buildings had been robbed. There are piles of rotten bodies stacked on top of each other and the smell of them is very strong. As I looked at all the shops and houses, I notice that some have wood covering the windows and doors. When my father, my two sisters and I reach our old house, and we go inside. There is a decomposing peach on the kitchen counter. The kitchen has been destroyed. The drawers have been flung open and our china is gone. It appears as if we have been robbed. When we go upstairs, we look all around for Mom. I feel tears start to trickle down my cheeks. In our parents room, where we expected to find Mom, no one’s there. On the bed, there is blood all over the sheets. Then Emma breaks the silence, “Someone must have collected all the rotting bodies!” As we look at the blood on the sheets, I realize that Mom had died and we were four family members who lost someone important because of Yellow Fever. I don’t think that I will ever forget my mom’s sacrifice.

EPILOGUE (2 years later): Emma

Without Mom, Dad is around a lot more. He makes sure to visit every three months. The days he is not here, our nanny takes care of us. Our nanny’s name is Isabel. Hailey is now fluent in French, and Spanish. She loves to cook too. Peter enjoys spending time with Dad and is starting school next year. And me? Well, I am now fluent in French, Spanish, and Latin. We all miss Mom, but this is what she would have wanted.

 

Butterfly Madness

There once was a boy and his name was Sam. Sam was 10 years old. He had no brothers or sisters. He lived with his mom on a farm. They were poor. Sam was born in 1937. His father was killed in World War II.

Sam had no school. He only could talk to a cow. Cows were the only things living on the farm other than Sam and his mom.

One day, Sam could see a butterfly far away, so he told his mom.

His mom said, “Wow, we never see anything here!”

Sam went to see the butterfly. On the wings of the butterfly, he could see what looked like a map.

Sam said, “It must be some kind of pirates’ gold map!”

So he decided to follow it, and he took his cow and the butterfly. Sam didn’t have transportation, so he used his bike. When he got to his destination, he saw there was a big, dark cave in front of him. When he went inside, he saw there were some objects in there including some lights and digging tools. The butterfly map said walk 13 feet and dig three feet down. Five minutes later, he found a box so he decided to open it. Inside there was a whole lot of gold. He was so excited to show his mom.

When he got home, he showed his mom, so then they both left their farm and relocated. They released the butterfly and kept the cow and got a dog, and Sam got to go to school.

The end!!! (for now)

 

Man’s Best Friend

A bouncing ball of fluff hops your way, and comes to keep company. Although the day has been long and hard; tedious and boring, you feel a surge of energy rush through you, and immediately you feel joyous. Although a human can make your day better, you may have had undesirable memories of that person, and you may feel even more depressed or infuriated. On the contrary, a dog gives you joyous memories, for it respects you as its master. A dog is more suitable as a friend than a human in numerous ways.

Many years ago, dogs proved to be of great help to humankind. One example is a hunting dog. Dogs are said to have been evolved from wolves, so they have very sharp teeth like a predator, and an extraordinary sense of smell. Men soon found it imperative to take dogs hunting with them. If dogs hadn’t been loyal to their owners, meat would be hard to find, and the early humans could have died out. In other words, who knows if we would even be here on this planet if it weren’t for dogs?

Dogs are loyal to their humans today, too. On a cold and stormy night, Max the dog roamed around the house, going about his own business. All of a sudden, he perked up. A pungent smell filled the air. The smell was Carbon Monoxide! He raced to the room where his owners were sleeping, and would not stop barking and whining until everyone safely evacuated*. Carbon Monoxide is tasteless, odorless, and colorless to the human’s senses. However, a dog has an extremely sensitive sense of smell, so they are able to sniff out dangerous chemicals and substances.

Dogs also have very sensitive hearing. According to www.hearingreview.com, Nellie, a four year old dog, lived with her severely deaf owner. One day, Nellie heard quiet footsteps coming toward them, advancing very slowly. Nellie sprinted to her owner, and pawed and scratched at her until she was alerted of the intruder. As Nellie’s owner got him away from the house, Nellie stood between the man and the children, letting no one get to the 10 year-old and 15 month-old baby. Luckily, no one was hurt. I too have a dog; in fact, I have two of them. I sense their loyalty to the family, and they will try to protect the household (even though they are too small to do anything about it.) When I was about seven, one of my dogs jumped off the couch to try to protect us when someone knocked on the door, but ended up spraining his leg instead. This moment in time proved the fact that dogs would go to extreme measures to protect their family, no matter what.

Humans can also be loyal and trusting friends too. Barbara Bush said, “Cherish your human connections – your relationships with friends and family.” It is important to have human relationships too, so that you can connect with other people just like you, and not just shy away from the outside world. Additionally, humans can speak to their friends in an easier way to understand, unlike a dog’s barking and yipping at you. Many people have had the special experience of a friend or a loved one caring for them when they are sick, feel depressed or angry, or just in pain. Even siblings can be a friend (which is a little hard to believe for me.) Recently, I had a severe stomach ache, and each time I tried to walk I would crumple to the floor again. My sister cared for me through the whole thing, staying by my side and comforting me when I would start bawling my eyes out. However, once I healed, she wasn’t as nice to me as before. A dog would never do that, it would love me just the same.

Ultimately, a dog is the best friend that a person can have. In general, a dog is loyal to whomever it loves, and will always try to take extreme measures to protect everyone in its family. Through fear and tumult, pain and suffering, sadness and grieving, a dog is the best “medicine” that you can have. A dog will always remain loyal to its loved ones, and is the best acquaintance that one can have in life, even better than our fellow humans.

*Based on a true story

 

Piano Lessons

Once upon a time, there was a girl who started to have piano lessons. The girl’s name was Lucy. Lucy thought that she was horrible, but she was pretty good.

By the time she was ten years old, she was playing very hard piano pieces. Lucy was very impressed that she was playing hard pieces. Lucy just felt like she was getting better and better, and she became great at playing piano. She enjoyed playing “Jingle Bells” and “Deck the Halls.”

Her piano teacher’s name was Natalia. Lucy had blonde hair and liked to wear dresses. Natalia liked to wear jeans and T-shirts and had red hair.

Natalia always said, “Good job, Lucy.”

And Lucy said, “Thank you. But I think I am horrible.”

Then, Natalia said, “I signed you up for the school orchestra.”

“No, no, no, no, no, no,” Lucy said. “You signed me up?! You signed me up?! How come you didn’t ask me?”

Natalia said, “Because I knew you would be really good, and you are really good. Your first performance is in two weeks. You and the orchestra will be playing ‘Deck the Halls,’ so try to practice every day, okay?”

“Okay,” said Lucy.

Natalia said, “The orchestra needs you, okay?”

“Okay.” When she got backstage, Natalia said, “Congratulations!”

And Lucy said, “Thank you.”

Lucy felt very happy.

The performance was in the school’s auditorium. The auditorium was dark.

After the performance, Lucy and her family went back home. Lucy’s family said, “You did a fabulous job, Lucy.”

“Thank you,” said Lucy.

When Lucy and her family got home, it was eleven o’clock. When Lucy went to bed, the sky was very, very dark. It was past Lucy’s bedtime, and she was very tired. When Lucy got into her bed, she fell fast asleep.

The End.

Author’s Note: Take piano lessons. It is very fun.

One Day 3 Million Trillion People Died

One day, three million trillion people died. It happened when they went to rock climb El Capitan at Yosemite National Park. I was the person who cracked my head open and sliced my knees open. There was so much blood all over the mountain that we could not climb it. I also sliced my whole arm off, so then I went down in the storm with blood pouring. I was so scared when I went down. There was this guy who got his head cut off by a giant avalanche and other body parts sliced open.

Someone jumped off the top of the mountain and died. She was the best friend I ever had. Her name was Jackie, and the mountain had made her cuckoo-cuckoo. It made me the saddest person in the world. When I went to the hospital, I was hurt so badly that the doctor had to give me a robot arm. He told me to take it easy, but Jackie would want me to keep climbing because it was our favorite thing to do.

My next challenge was Mount Everest, so my group and I got on a plane to Asia to climb it. As we climbed the mountain, three people died with no peace, and I saw blood and only blood. Then I got hit by an avalanche and I got tumbled around a lot, but I escaped. When we hit camp, there was blood everywhere on the people and tents. The tents broke out of the snow because of the avalanche and got dragged away into the 30,000-foot-deep cracks. The group started screaming because there was so much blood, and some died. I was hurt badly but I could still climb the mountain.

When we got to the top, we could not breathe without oxygen tanks. I found out too late that the climbers had gone cuckoo-cuckoo and did not bring their tanks, so everyone else died, but not me. All of the people dying did not scare me, because I liked hurting myself. The plan was to go to Devil’s Tower in Wyoming next. So, I got a new group there. When we climbed we had to do the splits and it hurt, then everyone fell down and we just got so many scratches and people broke so many bones.

Then we went to Rushmore. I climbed it, but then fell off one of the faces to the bottom and broke two legs and two arms, covered in blood. I badly wanted to go to the hospital so medics came to bring me to the hospital. When they checked me I also dented my head all the way. Then after that day in the hospital I started to pour blood out of my body, and bones were sticking out of my body. Then the bed was covered in blood everywhere. I was in so much pain that I fainted. Then I got out of bed, still pouring blood out of my body and bones sticking out of my body. So we had to fix them up so I could climb the next mountain, so my doctor fixed them up so I could climb the next mountain.

The next mountain I wanted to climb was Death Wall. It is 5,000 feet above the ground. It was so snowy and we couldn’t climb it with rope. So we went up by bouldering the mountain. It was dangerous because if we fell, we would kill ourselves. There was a giant avalanche, and three million people tumbled down to the bottom of the Death Wall. They were bloody and dead. I felt really sad that everybody had died, but I earned $34,343,434,343,434 for risking my life. The guy who gave us money was a soldier. He gave away his money because he was cuckoo, but he didn’t have any more money so he went back to war and shot a lot of people.

I bought the biggest resort ever with the money. It was the world’s most boring place. I missed climbing mountains, so I decided to go join the soldier in war to help him fight and win the war against Argentina. Our countries were fighting because we hated each other and liked to fight.

In the war against Argentina, the other side had much better weapons. I did not have a gun, and I only had knife. I asked the soldier, “What should we do? Maybe we should not fight and just go.” Just then, the soldier got a rock stuck in his neck and stomach so he died cause he could not breathe.

Now I had to say something else to him. “I hate you!” I hated him because we wouldn’t win the war, and I wouldn’t get enough money.

I went home after the war. I couldn’t climb mountains any more because I got sick. I wanted to die like crazy because my life was so bad since I couldn’t climb anymore. One day I started to bleed when my robot arm fell off, broke, and shattered all over the floor. My bone was sticking out, and blood started to pour out. My bones cracked into pieces and I started to choke like crazy. I was paralyzed and I knew I was dying.

My ghost couldn’t remember anything from my life, so it started saying bad words. But then I saw Jackie and I started to remember when I climbed all my mountains. I finally felt happy.

My Move

   

*Diary! Secret! Mia’s diary!*

Chapter 1: We are Packing

I was sewing in my room. My walls were pink with black and white polka-dots. The curtains in my room were pink with black and white polka-dots too. The covers of my bed were green with orange polka-dots. I was sewing a scarf. I stopped sewing and went to check what Lexi was doing. Lexi was sewing mittens.

“For whom are these mittens?” I asked.

“For me,” Lexi said. “Who did you think I was sewing it for?”

“Don’t know,” I replied.

“Anyway, what were you doing?”

“I was sewing a scarf,” I told Lexi.

“For who?

“For Kira,” I answered.

“Well, okay, get out of my room,” Lexi said. “I’m not mad, but I want my privacy!”

“Don’t be so mean,” I said jokingly as I was going out of Lexi’s room.

I went back to sewing my scarf. My scarf was blue, pink, and yellow. I kept on sewing for half an hour, and finally I was done with the scarf. I went out of the house to give the scarf to Kira. Just then, I remembered that I wanted to wrap it in wrapping paper.

When I went to get wrapping paper, Mom said, “Slow down, girl, where are you going?”

“To get wrapping paper,” I replied.

“For what?” my mom asked.

“For a scarf,” I replied.

“Where did you get a scarf, and who is that scarf for?”

“I sewed a scarf, and the scarf is for Kira.”

“Wait, I want to tell you some news,” my mom said with a smile on her face. “And also call Lexi and Dad to the living room.”

“Fine,” I said.

I was really happy we’d have family news again. Family news was always something good. Like, for example, one time, it was that Grandma Emma was in town, or that we were invited to a birthday party. I skipped happily to Lexi’s room, and told her to go to the living room. Lexi went straight to the living room. I skipped to my dad’s room, and told Dad to go to the living room. Soon, my family was all settled in the living room.

“Lexi and Mia, Dad and I have some news for you,” Mom said.

“What news? What news?” Lexi asked, really happy.

“We… we are going to move!”

“Move? Move… where?” said Lexi. Her voice wasn’t as happy as it had been.

“To New Jersey,” Mom replied.

“Is Kira going to move?” I wondered out loud.

“No, she’s not.”

“Then I’m not going to move!” I yelled.

“Is my best friend going to move?” asked Lexi.

“Did you forget your best friend’s name?”

“No,” Lexi answered. “Her name is Lily. And if Lily’s not going to move, then I’m not going to move.”

“Yes, you are going to move,” said Dad calmly.

“Are we just going to move for fun, or is it because Mom is gonna open a store?” I said.

“Not exactly. Mom’s going to open a new store and my work has a new location,” Dad explained to Lexi and me.

“BUT WE CAN’T MOVE! I’M NOT GOING TO LEAVE KIRA!” I cried.

“Yeah, we can’t move,” Lexi said. I was sure Lexi was on my side.

“But we are going to move,” Mom and Dad said at the same time.

“So I have to give the scarf to Kira right now, right?” I asked Mom.

“Right,” Mom said. “Well, wrong,” Mom corrected herself. “She can visit you and — ”

I interrupted my mom. “It’s a long ride to New Jersey, right?”

“Yes,” my dad answered.

“So, we’re going to end up not visiting each other, right?” I asked.

“We are going to visit Kira, just not so much,” Dad said.

“Is not so much once a week?”
“No,” Dad said. “Not so much means once every two months.”

“No! I have to see her at least once every two weeks!”

“You can use Facetime,” Dad suggested.

“Does she have Facetime?” I asked.

“Yes,” Dad answered.

“Yes,” Mom said, “we Facetimed Kira’s mom.”

“You sure?” I asked.

“I’m sure,” Mom and Dad said at the same time.

“Well, anyway, I got some boxes. Go pack your things,” Mom said. “We leave in two days.”

“Can we leave in three days?” I asked.

“Well… I’ll think about that,” Mom answered, giving Dad a look. “But let me get the boxes first.”

I whispered something to Lexi.

“Lexi, on one two three, let’s chant ‘we’re not moving!’”

Lexi nodded her head.

“One, two, three!”

Lexi and I began chanting, “We’re not moving! We’re not moving! We’re not moving!”

“Yes we are! Yes we are!” Mom began chanting. She motioned for dad to chant with her.

Mom and Dad began to chant, “We are moving! We are moving! We are moving!” Soon the whole family was chanting. Lexi and I were chanting, “We’re not moving! We’re not moving! We’re not moving!” and Mom and Dad were chanting, “We are moving! We are moving! We are moving!”

Soon Mom started chanting:

“Let’s be quiet! Let’s be quiet!”

The Kitaigorodsky family quieted down.

“Start packing already,” Mom suggested to Lexi and me.

“But we don’t have any of the boxes,” Lexi and I complained.

“Oh, I forgot about them. Let me go get some,” Mom said with a sigh. Then she added, “It’s hard to live here with you and Mia screaming that you’re not going to move. We’ll just move, and everything is going to be okay.”

 

Chapter 2: Moving Party

I forgot all about my scarf! I had to tell Kira that I was moving, and I could not move because I could not leave Kira at New York when I’m in New Jersey. I had to think of a way, and fast, to convince my mother and father that we could not move to New Jersey. I had to think fast, but I couldn’t make up at least one lame idea. I went over to Lexi’s room. Maybe she’d have an idea. I asked Lexi, “What are you doing?”

“What do you think?” Lexi answered.

“Doing nothing,” I answered.

“Well, what are you doing?”

“I was thinking of an idea to convince mom that we could not move,” I said.

“That’s exactly what I was doing!” Lexi seemed surprised.

“Have you thought of anything?” I asked Lexi. “Do you even have one lame idea? Why are you so quiet?”

“Nope, nope, and I’m not quiet.”

“Well, now you’re not, but you were.”

“Can we change the subject?” Lexi asked.

“To what?”

“To getting out of my room.”

“Don’t be so mad at me, girl!”

“I’m not mad! I just need my privacy.”

“Girls, are you packing?” Mom called from the kitchen.

“Um, we’re starting to pack,” I said as I was running into my room. But then I added, “I HAVE NO BOXES!”

“Go get some in the kitchen, Mia,” Mom yelled.

“Okay, okay,” I said as I as was rushing from my room to the kitchen to get some boxes. “You think I can pack all my stuff by myself?”

“Yes,” Mom said.

“Well, I need your help.”

“Okay, okay. Just put your boxes in your room, and I’ll pack them when you’re sleeping or tomorrow morning.”

I ran back to my room with boxes and put them right next to my bed.

“Now what should I do?” I called from my room.

“Now you should get your pajamas, brush your teeth and go to sleep,” Mom said.

“What time is it?” I called.

“8:30.”

“But my bedtime is at 10:00.”

“You know how long you brush your teeth.

“Oh fine.” I quickly changed into pajamas and rushed to the bathroom. There was a clock in the bathroom. I looked at it. It was already 8:45. I started brushing my teeth. Brush brush brush. I thought this was the shortest time I had brushed my teeth! But when I was done, I looked at the clock and it was 9:45. I had taken a whole hour to brush my teeth. Usually, I only took half a hour. This was a record for me! Actually, two records. One record was that I brushed my teeth one hour, not half an hour. And I never make such a big mistake like this. That was already two records! I rushed to the bedroom and plopped on my bed. Then I looked at the clock. it was still 9:45. I had a lot, well, not a lot, of time to read in my bed.

When it was 10:00, my mom called from the kitchen, “Turn the light off!”

“Okay, Mom.” I quickly looked at what page I was on, put my bookmark in, put my book away, and turned off the light.

The next morning, when I woke up, I looked at my bedroom. It was empty, except for boxes. I looked in drawers, but in only one of my drawers, I found some clothes. I quickly put the clothes on, and looked around. Boxes, boxes, and boxes. Boxes, boxes, and boxes. It was like I was a robber, and lots of police officers were surrounding me. I quickly stepped over all of the boxes (a.k.a. police officers). I looked in the boxes, and the boxes were actually, well, huge! Bigger than they were yesterday.

Suddenly the phone rang. I dashed to the kitchen with all my might, and right in time I got the phone. It was from Kira. She had already found out that I was moving from her parents. I didn’t know how they found out, so I asked my parents. You know what they answered? They answered that when they were Facetiming Kira’s mom, they told her. And Kira’s mom told Kira. And then Kira suggested a moving party! I was going to a moving party at Kira’s house! It was just going to be, me, Kira, and her mom. And it was going to start now. I went to Kira’s house and knocked on the door. Kira answered it.

“Welcome to your moving party!” she said.

I looked around her house. It was all decorated with pink, with black and white polka dots, just like my room is! I hugged Kira and said, “I DON’T WANT TO MOVE!”

“If I were you, I wouldn’t want to move either,” Kira said, and then added, “and I mean it.”

“Tell that to my parents,” I suggested to Kira.

“What’s your parents phone number?” Kira asked.

“Why are you asking?” I asked Kira.

“‘Cause then I can call them now,” explained Kira.

“Can’t you just walk to my house?” I asked Kira.

“Fine, I’ll tell your parents after your moving party!”

“Oh yeah, let’s start the moving party!”

I walked into Kira’s house and saw all my friends from school. I was surprised that all of them were here! Rachel, Pamela, Mallory, Areile, Kelly, Talia, Tara, and Nancy. I ran to Rachel, Pamela, Mallory, Areile, Kelly, Talia, Tara, and Nancy to hug all of them. After all, they were all my friends. Kira ran to get something. She came back with a blindfold. She tied it around my eyes. She led me into the dining room and then she took my blindfold off. On the dining room table was a big chocolate cake and in the middle it said with icing: We’ll miss you, Mia! All around the cake were ten cupcakes. One for each of us. Also in the middle of the cake it said:

Mia is nice

Inspiring

Amazing

“Thank you so much!” I yelled with all my might.

We all sat down and I found nine presents under the table. The first one I picked up was from Pamela. I unwrapped it, and inside was six sets of nail polish. There were the colors of the rainbow in each set. “Thank you so much!” I said to Pamela. “My nails will always be painted no matter what.” Next I grabbed Kelly’s present. I unwrapped it. Inside were two twin dolls! “I love them. They’re so cute!” I told Kelly. Next, I grabbed Mallory’s present. It was a picture of Rachel, Pamela, Mallory, Ariele, Talia, Nancy, Kira, Tara, Kelly, and a picture of just me. Next, I grabbed Ariele’s present. It was a gift card to Toys R Us. Ariele told me that inside there was $150. “Oh my gosh! That’s a lot of money! Thank you so much,” I told Ariele. “Now my parents won’t have to spend money. Next I took out Nancy’s present. It was a book and a diary with a pen. I tried to open the diary. I could not. “How do you open this diary?” I asked.

“There’s a password,” Nancy answered.

“What’s the password?” I asked.

“Mia,” Nancy answered. I typed the password Mia, and then I tried to open the diary. It opened! And then I could change the password to whatever I wanted. This was amazing! No one could look in my diary. Also, there was a book. it was Wonder by R.J. Palacio. Next, I opened Tara’s present. It was a cookbook, and things for me to sew. The cookbook was called Cookbook of the Year. I looked at  all the recipes. Amazing! There were recipes for cupcakes and cakes and cookies. Suddenly I got an idea! I could start a cupcake club in New Jersey with my new friends. If I got any friends, that is. We could bake cupcakes for people and get paid for that. They could be $5 a cupcake. So if someone wanted five cupcakes from us, they would pay $25.

Next, I saw two presents left. I picked them up at the same time. I unwrapped them at the same time. One of them was from Rachel, and it was a laptop. One of them was from Talia, and it was earrings, necklaces, and bracelets. I ran to Kira’s room to put on the earrings, necklaces, and bracelets. I came back with the earrings on my ears, the necklaces on my neck, and the bracelets on my wrists. Everyone stared at me with OMG eyes. I stared at them.

“What?” I asked them.Their mouths just dropped open. No one said a word.

”What?” I repeated.No one said a word. I ran into Kira’s room and looked at myself. Oh! I laughed. I was just so, so pretty!!! Then I came back and quickly logged into my laptop. I quickly downloaded things on my laptop. We started playing games on my laptop. Then it was time to eat. Kira’s mom came into the room, and sliced the cake into ten parts. She gave a piece to each of us. The cake was awesome. It was chocolate and vanilla cake, and the icing was half chocolate and half vanilla too. It was yummy! Delicious! I could eat this cake forever. I told Kira’s mom that. And then in my new cookbook, she found the recipe for that cake. it was called “Chocolate Vanilla Cake.” That was even better! I could eat that anywhere. Mom could just bake it, and then tada! We could have it. And I could have this cake for my birthday party. Awesome and amazing!

Then parents started to come to pick their children up. Before they even came into the house, I motioned for all of my friends, including Kira, to come into Kira’s room with me. I wanted to tell them something, and that had to be private without anyone sticking their nose into my business. When we were all in the room with the door closed, and I told them all how I felt.

“I feel very sad that I have to leave you, and I feel nervous that I have to go to a new school, and that I won’t get any new friends,” I said. “I don’t want to move. And I want you all to know that –– I will miss you all the same amount.” I motioned to all of them that I was done talking. We all went out of the room.

While we were going out of the room, Tara said, “Everything will be okay and we can Facetime each other, and I’m sure you’ll find new friends because this is your second time moving.”

“But this is different. The first time I moved, it was from Queens to Staten Island. That was just different boroughs. But I’m going to move to a different state. That’s way farther. And we’re gonna end up never ever visiting each other.”

Suddenly Tara’s mom told her that she had to leave this second because her sister had a ballet lesson. Tara hugged me and said, “Don’t worry. We’ll at least Facetime each other, and I think we’re going to visit each other.”

Tara hugged me, and I hugged her again. Then Tara and her mom left. In five minutes, Mallory’s parents appeared. We hugged each other, and Mallory said, “Don’t worry, I’m sure you’ll find friends, and even if you don’t, we can Facetime each other and visit.”

“I don’t know about that visiting part,” I said to Mallory. “It’s a long way from New York to New Jersey, or New Jersey to New York.”

“But anyway we will get to Facetime each other.”

“Are you sure you have Facetime?” I asked Mallory.

“I’m sure.”

“You sure?” I asked Mallory, because maybe she made a mistake.

“I’m sure,” Mallory said to me once again.

“Triple sure?” I asked Mallory.

“Triple sure,” Mallory said.

“Then, bye,” I said and then added, “I’ll miss you sooo much!”

“i’ll miss you even more than you’ll miss me,” Mallory said.

“Nuh-uh. I’ll miss you more, and it’ll be more harder for me because I have to go to a new school find new friends, and I have to leave. You just have to let me leave, and you can just keep playing with our other friends. You don’t have to do anything! You don’t have to worry, there’s no nerves for you!”

“Do we have Facetime, mom?” Mallory asked her mom.

“Of course,” Mallory’s mom answered Mallory.

“Gygygaga” Mallory’s little sister said.

“So cute,” I said to Mallory.

“You think so?” Mallory said. “Spend a week with her. Then you’ll find out.”

“I’m not going for that,” I said.

“There you go. You proved my point,” Mallory said. “You don’t want to live with her.”

“We have to go!” Mallory’s mom said.

“Gygygaga,” Mallory’s little sister said.

“Goodbye,” I said to Mallory. Mallory and I hugged again. Then she left. Everyone but Rachel and Talia left because their parents had the wrong time so we played some games until they left. Then it was just me and Kira. Me and Kira talked a little bit and played some games. Then, I left.

I looked at the time when I came home. It was 3:30 p.m. When I came home, I told Mom that my moving party wasn’t a moving party. it was a amazing moving party. And that was true.

 

Chapter 3: Texting in the Car to New Jersey

I was riding in the car to New Jersey. I didn’t know what to do. I’d already been in the car a half an hour, and the ride to New Jersey was two hours. A whole two hours and I couldn’t do anything! I took out my phone and started texting Kira.

MK: Riding in the car to New Jersey.

KM: What do u see around u?

MK: Nothing. 🙁

KM: What r u doing?

MK: Riding in the car to NJ.

MK: What r u doing?

KM:Texting u.

MK: What were u doing b4 u started texting me?

KM: Homework.

“Uhhh! This so boring! Am going to ride in the car for two hours doing nothing?” Lexi yelled. I ignored her. I kept on texting Kira.

MK: :p  

KM: For what are u sticking out ur tongue?

MK: U still have to do HW, and I’m riding in a car.

KM: I’m giving u a look through the phone. :/

MK: Well I’m giving u a look through the phone!

KM: I see u have less nerves about the move now. 🙂  

MK: No I don’t!

MK: I feel WAY more nervous because I know there’s no chance I’m NOT moving now.

KM: Look I know u’ll find a new friend.

KM: U’ll be happy with ur new school, and it’ll be like u never moved.

KM: U’ll just have no me, and new friends!

KM: The first time u moved here, u told us how nervous u were to move.

KM: But u found us! it’ll be the same adventure like last time.

MK: But this is different!

MK: I was moving from a different borough.

MK: Now I’m moving to a different STATE.

KM: Wait, what’s a borough???

MK: it’s like Manhattan, Queens, Bronx, Brooklyn, and Staten island.

KM: Oh. Wait, then what’s a state??

MK: A state is NY, NJ, illinois, MA, and so on.

KM: Oh. Kk.

MK: So continuing.

MK: I’m moving further than I was this is totally different and it’s a two hour ride and we’re never EVER going to see each other again.

KM: I think we should end texting.

KM: I see ur getting upset, and I have to finish my HW

MK: Maybe we can text again soon? 🙂

“We’re here!” Dad said.

 

Chapter 4: The House

Mom had told me that she was going to unpack for me while I was sleeping. I had agreed, because it was good that I didn’t have to unpack. That would be hard. I wouldn’t had known what to put where, and it would take forever. But Mom seems to take only a minute or five when unpacking the family stuff. I looked in all my new drawers and everything. The room was completely empty. It was kind of like I was in jail, because in jail the person gets barely any stuff, and that’s it. There was nothing on the walls, just plain white. I had to remember to paint my room. Suddenly, I felt so sleepy. I lay on the bed.

That was a good nap. I looked all around my room.The walls were pink with black polka-dots. Everything was like my old room! Just my covers weren’t green and orange with green polka-dots. Wait a sec. This wasn’t my room. This was… Mom and Dad’s room. I went into my room. The walls were pink with white and black polka-dots and so were my curtains! Just like my old room! The covers of my bed were green with orange polka-dots. Mom and Dad and maybe Lexi had carried me from my room to Mom and Dad’s room! I took out my phone. I started texting Kira.This is how it went:

MK: at New Jersey

KM: When did u arrive?

MK: 10 minutes ago.                  

KM: exactly 10 minutes ago?

MK: About 10 minutes ago.

KM: U r a weirdo

MK: meanie!

KM: excuse me

MK: just joking

KM: I knew that

KM: u think that I didn’t know that

MK: I knew u knew that

MK: Whatever

MK: C u soon

KM: I want to keep on texting!

MK: fine we’ll say some more words and then we’re done talking

KM: do u not want to be my best friend anymore?

KM: we used to be twinsies.

MK: I want to be your best friend. Wait. let me correct that. I NEED to be your best friend. NEED.NEED.NEED.NEED.NEED.

KM: doesn’t look like it

MK: looks like it and I know it’s true

KM: o well. having fun in New Jersey?

MK: BORiNG

KM: what’s so boring

MK: well I don’t know a lot about this place. By the way, this looks basically like my old home

KM: o well.doing anything

MK: No

KM: I think it’s time that we should stop texting

MK: I think so to.

 

Hmmm. I think I should probably go out and try to make a new friend.

To be continued…

A Second Chance

 

a second chance pic1
Chapter 1: First Day

On her first day of tryouts, she got her gymnastics suit and her backpack and went on a plane. The plane was two hours. She was at the very back and there wasn’t anyone else next to her. She was feeling shy because it was her first day of gymnastics tryouts. She was wondering if she would get into the Olympics.

The teacher had said to them, “If you guys aren’t friends, I’ll kick you off the team.” Since it was a long time after the teacher said that, Maddie was thinking of Chelsea and maybe her other friends when Chelsea took the bus. Chelsea lived in Florida and Maddie lived in New York. When Maddie got out of the plane she took the bus. When she went to gymnastics, she saw Chelsea. She was shocked because Maddie and Chelsea actually weren’t friends, so she was extra shocked. Then they got teams, and Maddie and Chelsea didn’t have a team to go in, so they had to make their own group. But they barely got along. They kept saying mean things about each other’s ideas for the competition and they both wanted to win for the competition. So, they said sorry for real this time, because the wanted to win to go to the competition.

Then the coach came over and said, “Ready to start?” They both said yes and began. They worked on the floor and did the hardest stuff, because they wanted to go to the hard squad. They were glad that they were friends; it was better than just complaining. The only problem was that the other team was better than their group. They would never ever win, so they were really sad. They wished they would win but that would never happen. Well, maybe, but that would just be a dream.

Chelsea said, “What should we do about it?”

Maddie said, “Let’s both come up with an idea.”

The teacher said, “Come up with an idea, girls, quick! Before time is up and we practice.”

Chelsea said, “Quick, come up with an idea!”

Maddie said, “No, you are the one who comes up ideas. And I do it and you see if it’s right.”

Then Chelsea said, “Okay, I don’t want us to argue again. So, we should do what you say. You should do a handstand and a forward roll.”

Maddie tried to do it, but she kept on falling. They decided to switch places and Maddie had a good idea. She did a cartwheel, two back handsprings, and a fold-twist in the air. Chelsea did it and they both thought that they were going to get into the Olympics, and that they were better than the other teams. So, they kept on doing it over and over again until it was time for them to come up with a new idea and add it together.

Chelsea decided to do her routine from the last time she did gymnastics. They put it together and it worked out really well. Then, it was time for them to go home. Maddie called her mom and said, “Can we please have a sleepover with Chelsea? We need to practice our routine.”

He mom said, “Sure, just meet you tomorrow night.”
a second chance 2
Chelsea and Maddie went to the backyard of Chelsea’s home and practiced. Then they found out that the Olympics were in four days and they wanted to practice; but first they thought about each other and they thought it was nice to be friends. Then they hugged each other and then they went to work. They were really rushed so they both did the routine and they were so happy that they forgot when they were mean to each other. Then it was time for them to go to gymnastics and then they went and kept on practicing. Then it was time to go home and Maddie went home. Then four days later it was the Olympics day and they had to do the routine, and after the teams did theirs they found out that they won. Yay! Then the next day they went and the team was much harder so they worked their butts off. The teacher named Ella was so nice. Then they just found out that Chelsea’s mom is having a baby, so Chelsea had to sleep with the group and Maddie wanted to join. So the next night they went to the cabin and went to sleep. Then in the morning the teacher woke them up, except Chelsea and Maddie, because they were from her group and they needed sleep.

Then the teacher woke them up and they got dressed up and they went to work. Then they did hard things (well, kind of). Then they found out that the country they were in would have the Olympics in five days. So they really needed to get to work.

Then they picked a song called “Shake it Off” for the tryouts .

Chapter 2: Getting Ready for the Olympics

a second chance 3

Then they had lunch and they ate an apple and other great foods. Then it was time to do their gymnastics work. They had a hard time because they got it done and they were bored while they were waiting for others to finish their routines. Then it was time to do gymnastics. They did easy things like cartwheels. Then, it was time for lunch and they forgot their lunch boxes, so the teacher gave them lunch from the restaurant the teacher went to last night. They had pasta but it wasn’t as good as their mom’s. Then they went to sleep.The next morning, they practiced a lot.

Chelsea said, “Let’s do new things!”

Maddie said, “Okay.”

Then it was the day of the Olympics and they were doing the first competition. If Chelsea and Maddie won the competition they would win $1,000 and they would split it, $500 and $500. But, they wouldn’t be in the real Olympics — that happens once in awhile in that country. The next year, the Olympics would come. They almost didn’t win when Maddie was about to fall. Maddie felt disappointed for herself and for Chelsea. She was feeling that no one else would want to be her partner for the next competition. Her knees were shaking, but she didn’t fall and she was imagining her knees were shaking. Then, she hears Chelsea’s baby sister yelling and it wakes up her brain and she’s able to finish her routine. And they did their thing and they were on tv and they won. Yay! Then they got on the final team their moms and dads were watching. Then Chelsea saw her old friend.

Chelsea said, “Hi.”

Her old friend Zoe said, “I thought you did not like Maddie.”

Chelsea said, “Now I am her friend.”

Zoe said, “Well, now I am not your friend anymore.”

Chelsea said, “Why?”

Zoe said, “Well, I hate Maddie.”

But Chelsea did not care because she liked Maddie better than Zoe. The very next day, Chelsea went to Maddie’s house for a sleepover and they were doing their routine. They were doing a back handspring into a split and then a cartwheel. They wanted to go to sleep because it was getting late. The very next day they took a cab to the gymnastics place. They did their routine. Maddie said, “We should add more things to our routine.”

Chelsea said, “Good idea, but what should we add to our routine?”

Maddie said, “We should do bars.”

Chelsea said, “Good idea.”

“Thanks,” said Maddie. And then they tried it out and did a flip on to the bars and swung. But they didn’t like it: it was too short. Instead, they used the beam and did a dismount.

Chapter 3: Working on New Things

It was easy so they did it just fine. Then Chelsea went to Maddie’s house.  And they wanted to practice so they did it and they did it over and over again. Then it was time to go to bed but they could not go to sleep.

The very next day the teacher said, “We will be moving to a new class for the tryout team,” and they did. They got coach Mia. She is so nice; everybody likes her so she must be good.

The coach said to Chelsea and Maddie, “You are on the tryout Olympics.” Then it was time to practice, but they were bored.

They came up with a new idea. They were doing handstands into a roll. It was really fun, so they did that. Then it was time to have lunch, so they had a sandwich and an apple.

They had to eat healthy things because it makes you stronger. Then it was time for them to go home. So they went home together and they worked on a dance that was good. Then they had sweet potatoes for dinner. It was so yummy that they even had seconds. Then they went to bed and they fell right asleep. They were so sleepy. The next day was the competition, so they hurried to the gymnastics place and they hurried to change. They went to their teacher and they practiced. It was related to the Olympics. They forgot the competition was on Sunday and it was Monday, so they had to wait another week. Then they went to practice. And they added more to their routine.

Maddie said, “We should do a back handspring into a flip into a split.” That was the best idea she ever had.

Chelsea said, “Sure.” And they did the whole thing. Then they went home and they did their best to do well in the competition. Then they ate dinner. They had soup; it was yummy (Maddie’s mom is a great cook).

Before they went to bed, Zoe came in and said, “Sorry.”

Chelsea said, “It is okay.”

And then Zoe said, “Sorry,” to Maddie.

She said, “It is okay,” and they all hugged. Then they all practiced and they all went to sleep the very next day.

They all went to the gymnastics place and they said hi to the teacher and they went to work. They had to practice for the show but first they ate some cereal and then they went to work. After they were done they all chatted.

Maddie said, “I’m glad we’re friends,” to Zoe.

Zoe said, “Me too. I was wrong about you; you are nice.”

Chapter 4: Shopping

a second chance 4

Then they went to a shop to buy new phones. Maddie got a blue one, Zoe got a yellow one, and Chelsea had a red one. Then they went to buy some new clothes. They got the same things: green shorts and a black tank top. It looked great! Then they all went to Maddie’s house and they had a chance to go to the Olympics.

In the morning they went in the car and they drove to the gymnastics place: it was the day of the competition.

Then they changed and they did their dance and they went to do the best dance ever. When they were done, they won! They were the best ever. Then they all had treats: they had cupcakes and cookies and other treats.

Then they all did a high five. And they all were the best gymnasts ever. 

second chance 5

The next day they all got their picture taken and they were famous.

 

The End
second chance 6
This is when she is at the play date. The other picture is when Addie asks her mom to go to Chelsea’s house.

Atlas

The storm was raging. My mother and father ran to the lifeboats but they realized something was wrong –– my sister and I weren’t there.

“The children!’ my mother yelled at my father, and he quickly ran below the decks to find us. But we weren’t anywhere near the ship. We were far, far away from the boat, in the ship’s safest lifeboat. A while later my mother had no choice but to leave my father below the decks. But when the ship’s crew was lowering the lifeboat into the water, the ropes snapped in mid air and my mother’s lifeboat hurtled downwards towards the water.

“Mom!” yelled my sister. As the lifeboat went on its journey to find another ship that could bring us to New York my sister and I were crying over the deaths of our parents. A few hours later we safely boarded the Mississippi and heading toward Albany, New York.

Once we landed in New York, the Mississippi’s crew sent my sister and me to the nearest orphanage, but almost everything in it was so so old and dusty –– even the food! The only good part was the kids who lived in the orphanage they were all very very nice. But a few months later my sister and I could not stand the bad conditions of the orphanage so we packed all of our stuff, said goodbye to our friends, and left.

But that was about two years ago. Now we are working as doctors and scientists for the Atlas corporation. When we came to New York, we were wandering around the city until an undercover Atlas spy found us and took us to the main headquarters of Atlas. So far we have made dozens of grenades that unleash a deadly type of poison when they explode. We have also cured thousands of soldiers from wounds, poisons, and a deadly type of illness that will burn you alive. Ten years later, Atlas asked me to join the spies that go around bustling cities trying to find homeless children about at least ten years old, and I said yes. So my sister became a doctor, and I became a spy.

I still remember the first kid that I found on the streets. His name was Edward and he was fourteen years old. He started to live on the streets when he was ten years old because his parents died from a fire. It had started because their neighbor was cooking and he “accidently” lit a napkin on fire and dropped it into the pan that he was cooking with. It just so happened that there was oil in the pan. So yeah, his whole apartment exploded. So I brought Edward back to Atlas headquarters and the commanders trained him to be a soldier.

A few months later, I became a soldier and so did Edward. Now Edward and I are storming into battle at the Vespers main headquarters.

“Charge!” my general yelled at us. So we all charged into battle, thirsty for blood. In the next hour, bullets flew, men fell, and machinery exploded.

When we got back to base, my general quickly changed into his kitty pajamas and went to sleep. A few minutes later a group of Atlas soldiers snuck into the general’s bedroom. Inside the room, there were lots and lots of generals but their general was very conspicuous because of his pink kitty pajamas.

Suddenly all the generals inside the room woke up and started to yell, “!@#$%^&*”

Finally, when the founder of the Atlas calmed all the generals down, he told the soldiers very sternly that they should never ever sneak into the general’s room. Their punishment was to bathe in hot oil every day for every week of every month of every year for the rest of their lives. Edward and I both think the punishment was unfair but the general refused to release them.

A few days later my unit rolled into action at Bunker Hill. The first tent that my unit set up was the arsenal. Inside there were hundreds and hundreds of firearms. The next day, Edward, some of our fellow soldiers, and I boarded a battleship that took off towards the Atlas fleet. When we finally got onto the ship, we all took our positions. I probably got the most exciting job on the boat. I got to fire the gun! When we lost sight of Bunker Hill, we turned on the radar and the navigation device so we could see if any enemy ships were coming and where we were going.

A few hours later, our captain told us some big news. There was a whole fleet of enemy ships headed towards us. He told us to be ready if they suddenly attacked. When we could actually see the enemy fleet, we all opened fire. A few minutes later, we were surrounded by enemy ships and they blew us up. Edward and I were the only two crew members that survived.

By the time we spotted the island we were dead from thirst and water. We boarded the island and right away felt like it was better to die than to live. So right away we got out our army knives and tried to build a shelter so we could a least have a place to live in. By the end of the day, Edward and I had built the most magnificent shelter ever! (It was probably a lot better than Brian Robinson’s shelter.)

I told Edward to go and try to find some food, so he did. When Edward came back, I had already made the fire and was ready to cook the food. But when he came back he had some new cuts and also a huge claw mark on the side of his head. I asked him what happened, and he told me he had angered a huge chicken and it tried to kill him. Edward used his years of military training to kill the huge chicken. So after he told me the whole story he asked me to go with him to where he had killed the chicken so I could help him drag the chicken back to the shelter so we would have something to eat that night.

When we finally got back to the camp, the fire had already gone out so I had to make another fire which was pretty easy to make since I got first place in survival camp when I was fifteen years old. After we finished our magnificent meal, I told Edward to go to sleep while I tried to fix the radio transmitter and tried to call for help.

A few hours later, Edward woke and told me to go to sleep for a while. When I said no, he took the transmitter and started to do what I had done a few hours ago when he went to sleep. After a few minutes, I was so tired, I fell off the rock, hit my head on another rock, and blacked out. When I woke up, it was already morning and Edward was already back from the morning hunt with a bunch of wolves following him. Wait, what? A bunch of wolves!?

I asked Edward why he had adopted a bunch of wolves. Do you guys know what he said? He told me that when he was hunting, he heard the growls of the wolves and he seemed to understand what they were talking about.

In the morning, Edward confessed that the day before he had lied to me about the wolves. (Like I didn’t know that already.) He told me that the wolves had followed him back to camp because he had a hole in his bag of meat and the meat had dropped onto the ground. And then the wolves ate it and they followed him back to camp thinking they would get more food. But they didn’t, so they walked away.

In the morning, Edward’s loud cry woke me from my deep slumber. “Yay, yay, we’re saved, yay!!!”

I sat up and said, “Yo, keep it down, man.”

And he said, “But I need to signal that ship!!!” I took one look at the ship and wondered how Edward could be so stupid.

“It’s one of the Vespers’ ships!!!” I yelled at him. And then I saw her. Grandmama. “Stop it, Edward!!! That’s Grandmama’s ship!!!” I yelled at him. Then Grandmama turned her ship’s cannon toward our island and fired.

“Duck!” I screamed at Edward. He ducked and quickly fired back with one of the many coconut cannons that Edward and I had built. After a few seconds, I recovered from my shock and also started to fire back at Grandmama. Then I told Edward to stop firing because there was so much smoke we couldn’t aim correctly.

Five hours later, I said, “Hey yo, Edward, what do you want for dinner?”

And he said, “I’ll take some coconut water and that’s it.”

“Okay,” I replied.

In the morning old Grandmama ran out of ammo and ran to ask her fat son Samuel to deliver some ammo to her. While she was trying to radio Samuel, Edward and I took advantage of that and started to fire some coconuts at her ship, The Death Bed.

After a few minutes, Edward and I were looking at the ruins of old Grandmama’s ship The Death Bed, but I didn’t see that. With the last bits of her strength, she turned one of the ship’s last working cannons and fired at the island.

The next day, one of the Atlas ships found me and picked me up. When I got back to base, I learned that my sister had died of grief. Grandmama killed Edward when she fired the cannon in the last few moments in her life. My legs had been blown off in the explosion, so I couldn’t walk for the rest of my life. I hope I’ll be able to go for at least one more mission, but until then, Shadow Killer Out.

The Necklace Chase

It was eight o’clock at night when I realized that the necklace was missing, but nobody knew who could have taken it. Then I asked Sadie if she could help me find my necklace. Sadie told me to retrace my steps. That was when I realized a girl was looking at my necklace, so I took it off and gave it to her. I told Aliza that she could hold it but to give it back as soon as I was finished.

Sadie was watching this whole entire thing. Sadie saw Aliza running away with my necklace. In the bathroom, I could hear Sadie telling Aliza to stop running away with my necklace.

When I was finished with my business Sadie said, “Hurry Claire, we have to catch her!” Sadie and I started running after her.

Now we had to find Aliza!

“Where do we start, Claire?” Sadie asked me.

I said, “I was in the bathroom, how should I know?”

I said, “It’s raining. Maybe we can track her with her footsteps in the mud.”

“Good idea,” Sadie said.

“Hurry,” I said, “before her footprints wash away too.”

We were running in the rain hoping that the footprints will not wash away anytime soon.

Five minutes later…

“Sadie, do you see her footsteps?”

“No, I think we lost her!”

Now Sadie and I had to track her a different way. Sadie and I were looking for clues when suddenly we discovered that Aliza was a litterbug (yuck). Now that we knew Aliza was a litterbug, we were going track her with candy wrappers.

30 minutes later…

“Claire, I see Aliza. We’d better stay quiet so we can get her by surprise.” Sadie said.

“Okay, but how are you going to get your necklace back?”

The necklace was in Aliza’s pocket. Sadie’s idea was to throw a piece of candy so Aliza would bend down to pick it up and then the necklace would fall out of her pocket.

“Claire, do you have a piece of candy?” Sadie asked.

“Always!”

“Great can I have it … now?”

“Sadie right now is not a great time to eat candy!”

“It’s not for me. Just trust me, okay?”

“Fine.”

After Sadie threw the piece of candy, everything went as planned. I got my necklace back and found another one on the ground. I decided to keep it.                                                                                                                              

That was the biggest surprise of all. I would never have figured it out without Sadie’s help.

Ice Cream Is Great

   

with milk inside, and the 14 grams of sugar, and the variety of flavors, strawberry, vanilla, mint chocolate chip, chocolate, and superman, plus the taste in your mouth, and how your tongue turns into a glacier when you eat too much at once, also how sometimes the cone is edible, so your parents can’t scold you for wasting anything, and how the edible cones are sometimes made of waffles which are also great and add to the sweet taste of ice cream, and how, with sundaes, there are a bunch of different flavors plus the literal meaning of the phrase “with a cherry on top,” and how you can choose your own toppings like rainbow sprinkles or chocolate sprinkles or pretty-much-whatever, and that is why I love ice cream, what do you think?

sundaes with the fancy glass and how you can combine different flavors and how at some places you get a fancy spoon and you can stuff your face and how you would have a fudge mustache and then your parents get mad but it is still worth it because you have five scoops of ice cream and it’s way better than normal ice cream because it lasts way longer and you get a brain freeze but your tongue is still like antarctica.

at 7g of fat, 29 mg of cholesterol, 53 mg of sodium, 131 mg of potassium, carbohydrates, 16g protein, 2.3g vitamin A, 5% Ben and Jerry’s

And don’t forget Peachwave!

going to Ben and Jerry’s

with my dad

me and him

laughing

marshmallow sauce mustache

strawberry ice cream dribbling down my chin

laughing while licking

with everything everywhere

people looking at us like we’re crazy

I can’t imagine

anything better than that.

Tim and Spud

When Tim looked back on it, he didn’t know when it started. Was it when Spud did the unspeakable, or was it when when his mother Leanne died seven years ago? No, he thought. It had started on his 12th birthday.

Sarah was in for the day. Sarah was his older sister, who was 18 and in college. Even Dad was in a good mood. Sarah had given him a scrapbook, and Dad was just cutting his cake (which was lemon, his favorite), when he paused.

“Dad, what’s wrong?” Tim asked.

“Sarah will you get the present.”

“What?”

“Oh, wait.”

Just then, Sarah walked out with the strangest dog Tim had ever seen. It was brown and gold-specked with a long pink tongue hanging out of its mouth.

“He’s all yours,” Tim’s dad said. Tim looked at the dog and it pounced on him.

 

********************************************************************************************************

Down, Spud!” Tim tried to pull his dog down. He sighed and gave up. Then, the ice cream came. Maggie O’Connor, the kid of the rich couple next door, was nice, but her parents spoiled her. She wasn’t that bratty, but her parents would do anything for her.  

Maggie taunted Spud with her ice cream. Then, he broke free of his leash and jumped on her. Now, Spud was a pouncy dog, but this was too much.

“The blood!” Tim’s dad yelled.

The hospital monitor bleeped. Tim stepped into the room. Maggie was lying on the bed, her blonde curls spread out. Tim wished that she would be okay and that her green eyes would open again.  

Her mother sat with her head in her hands while her father sat reading the Bible. No one looked up.

“Um… ” Tim began. “I’m sorry about Maggie.”

Mr. O’Connor looked up. “That is enough, Timothy,” he said.

“Okay, well, bye,” Tim said awkwardly. He went home.

“Oh no, oh no, oh no,” Dad said.

“What?” asked Tim.

“The O’Connors are filing a lawsuit against us. I don’t want to have to pay for this. We have to get out of the country, Tim.”

 

Chapter 2

 

Dad’s plan:

  • Cross the border to Mexico
  • If anyone finds out, go to Cuba
  • If anyone finds out, go south

 

Tim packed some clothes, a picture of his family, some school supplies, a flashlight, and three tubes of toothpaste.

Then they left with Spud, of course. They climbed into Dad’s gray Porsche, and Tim smelled his old home one last time. Tim clutched the photo and the car drove off.

They drove on into the sunset, never stopping. Dad drove all night, or at least Tim thought he did. He fell asleep against his best efforts at 9:45. When he woke up, the sky was brightening again. It was almost as if the sunset was sinking again. His dad threw something in the backseat.

“Um, what is this?” asked Tim. He read the label:

SUPA-Cinnamon! Cinnamon rolls: three per pack. Microwavable. SUPA_YUMMY!

EW! Tim thought. He tore it open and ate it because he was hungry. It did not taste good — at all. It probably would have tasted even worse when it was heated. He saved one for Dad and gave the other to Spud, who ate it hungrily. He stared ahead and took out his math book. He made a solemn promise in his head to do three hours of schoolwork every day, except for weekends, and got to work on fractions.

A few hours later, Tim said, “Dad, I’m hungry.”

“Wait until dinner. No lunch on the road. We’ve only got 13,489 more miles to go.”

Tim wasn’t very good at math, but he knew this would take a while.

 

The road was dull. It was hot, and Tim was bored. Three weeks had passed, Dad stopping at delis at 6:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Tim had been the proud digger of seven holes because of some bad sandwiches from delis.

Just then, they came to a big gate. A man was standing in front of it, looking bored. Dad drove up to him. To Tim, he hissed, “Say ‘YES!’” Tim had no idea what he was talking about. Dad handed the man two passports.

“Liam McKinley, history professor doing research on the social aspects on Mexicans?” he asked.

“Yes,” said Dad.

“Your son Adam McKinley is coming with you because his mother lives there?”

“Yes… ?” said Tim.

They passed.

“Could you have been more obvious?” Dad asked.

“Dad, what was that all about?”

“We did it. We’re in Mexico!”

They still had a while to go, and Dad stopped in a pub, promising he’d bring Tim back something.

Tim waited. At 1:55 a.m., Dad came.

“Dad!” said Tim, but stopped when he saw his dad. He was as drunk, but Tim did not know.

“Gotta go. Gave it away, stupid,” he slurred.

“Dad, you can’t drive.” Tim grabbed the keys, but his father grabbed them back. He looked at Tim with a fire in his eyes Tim had never seen before.

“GIVE THEM TO ME, YOU USELESS #%$@!” Tim leaned back, tears pricking his eyes.

He doesn’t mean it, Tim thought. But he wasn’t sure.

Dad drove a lurching five miles before he hit a sign and the car flipped over. Dad passed out, so drunk he didn’t even know what was going on. Tim helped flip back the car. No one was hurt. No one saw; no one was around for miles. Spud was in the grass. Tim knew what he had to do. He grabbed his dad’s phone out of his pocket. He went into contacts and saw the name Leanne next to a heart. Leanne was his mother’s name. Tim pressed Sarah, which was next to it. The phone rung. Please pick up, Tim thought. It rung again. Please, Sarah.

She picked it up and said, “Hello?”

“Sarah, it’s Tim. Dad is drunk, we’re in Mexico illegally, and the car is messed up. Come, Sarah, PLEASE come.”

“OH MY GOD, Tim, I had no idea. What town are you in?” Tim looked at the sign.

“El Diablo.”

“Ironic,” she said.

“I love you. Mom would never have wanted this.” The phone went dead. Tim slipped it back into his dad’s pocket and tried to think of a plan.

He didn’t need to. Dad was so hungover, they stayed in the car for two days, and then a taxi drove up. Sarah came out, Tim came out, and they hugged.

“Whassat? Dad said.

“Dad, we need to talk,” said Sarah.

“Tim, get in the car,” said Sarah. Tim got in the car and plugged in his iPod. He could still hear Dad and Sarah shouting at each other.

“HOW DARE YOU COME IN HERE INSULTING MY FAMILY?”
“HOW DARE YOU NOT TELL ME YOU WERE MOVING TO MEXICO?”
And on and on, just like that. Dad stomped off to the pub, and Sarah climbed into the car with Tim. Sarah took Tim’s hand.

“Timmy, how would you like to live with me?”

“You know, Tim, maybe you should, while I… get back on my feet,” TIm’s dad said.

They took a plane to Sarah’s house in California. Tim had convinced Sarah to let Spud come too.

“Well, we’re home,” said Sarah. “Here’s your room.”

Tim loved the blue room, which was perfect for a 12-year-old boy.

The school was also great. The kids were nice and they accepted him and Spud, who had mellowed down after seeing the neighbors’ dog, Felicia.

Maggie was fine, and so was her family. But one night, Tim couldn’t sleep. He went downstairs.

“Sarah,” he said.

She looked up. Her wispy blonde hair was in her face and her glasses were on the end of her nose. “Tim?”

“Is Dad okay?”

The words came tumbling out. It was not what Tim was going to say, but somehow he knew it was right.

“Oh, Tim,” said Sarah, hugging him. He hadn’t realized how stiff his body had been. “Dad is okay, he just needs to get a better life. He’s going somewhere where people will help him. I think he misses Mom.”

“I miss her too,” said Tim, “and I don’t even remember her.”

“I was only 11, but I miss her every day. But I see her in you, Tim, in your smile, in your laugh. Tim, Dad misses her, but it’s going to be ok. For all of us.” The siblings cried together until Sarah said, “I’m going to medical school to cure people with the disease Mom had.

Tim didn’t say anything, for he was asleep, and then Sarah lay down her head and slept with him.

The Banana’s Life Change

Hello, my name is Banana, and this evening I was browsing the web on a website about trains. It is an amazing video game web. After that, I went into the bathroom to brush my banana peels. This was how I looked: I had really fluffy hair.

It was great to be a banana. I looked so beautiful… So I went to bed, and then I woke up. It was a really fast sleep. Bananas sleep really well. I looked in the kitchen to say “Good Banana Day’’ to my parents, but they were GONE!

This is how my parents usually looked:

They were two long bananas with furry lips and long hair they were hugging.

This was how they looked when they were gone:

They looked like NOTHING or ______. I was really sad.

Waaah!

But then a minute later the whole story zoomed right on my HEAD. I said, “Story, don’t zoom on my head!” And then I suddenly thought, I can go on a quest to find my parents.

I was going to have a super powerful spear and hair… hehe, AWESOME! So I took a stick from the garden and started training right away. I was swinging my stick at a wall, but then suddenly a massive lightning beam shot out of my body and vaporized the wall.

“WOW, that was new!” I shouted and vaporized another wall. “I am ready to fight anyone who stole my parents! They will get CHIP-CHOPPED TO A MILLION TINY LITTLE BABY PIECES BY MY SUPA BABY STICK!” I screamed extremely loudly. There was a strange creepy echo.

OH! I forgot to show you my stick. Here it is: it’s tiny and brown and little, and it looks like a baby little tree without the creepy eyes that glare at you and eat your soul. It destroys you and makes you die in less than two tiny little milliseconds. It makes you barf out yesterday’s breakfast (which was really yummy). Isn’t it AMAZING?! A second later I found out that the power wasn’t coming from the stick. It was coming from ME! That’s the last thing I remember before I fell asleep.

                                                              ***                                                                             
I woke up to the sound of grunting outside. It was like “GRAAA, GRAAA, GRAAA.” It was really annoying, ugh. Then I thought, All of that was a dream? But then I quickly flicked my arm, and a bunch of lightning flew right out. “YES, it isn’t a dream,” I said. Then I made my breakfast and ate it. This is how it looked: it had A LOT of amazing eggs and muscular pieces of bacon. Ooh, pretty good. My mom made it better. I was starting to miss her.

Then I went outside to check out the grunting noises. There was a massive donut eating my stick and saying, “BANANA WILL DIE! BANANA WILL DIE!” This is how it looked: it was really hairy and had FANGS!

It was REALLY CREEPY. He was also was holding a MASSIVE club. He was saying “HAHA, YOU HAVE COME TO FIGHT ME AND GET YOUR HEAD RIPPED OFF AND CHOPPED INTO TWO PIECES! I ALSO TOOK YOUR PARENTS!” in a really metallic voice.

I was OUTRAGED! I closed my eyes and then suddenly a plane just flew two meters by me. I looked down, and I noticed that I turned GIANT! And the donut still was pretty big. Then suddenly, the story zoomed right on my head. (Again, ugh.) So I thought, I am UNSTOPPABLE and I am going to get that evil, stupid, big, horrible, terrible, donut brat.

So I swung my big hand, and out flew twelve unstoppable blue lightning bolts. But the monster donut was quicker than he looked! He dodged the bolts and spat out fifty donut holes. I dodged and stepped on the donut monster. I squashed him, and then he turned into a thousand tiny donuts. The donuts jumped on me and bit me!  “MEAN TINY DONUTS!”

I summoned some lightning to take care of them (not in a good way), and they all got vaporized and turned to pink powder. And then I shrunk, and I was small again. “WEEE.” My parents were tied up to a tree. I went to them and broke the ropes. They hugged me, and we lived happily ever after.

Just a Girl, Part 1

Chapter 1: The Mechanic

Creak went the bulky android arm as I screwed it on.

“Here you go,” I said, handing an astounded old man back his newly-fixed android.

“Wow,” he said. “When old Darla broke, I never thought that she’d run again. Really,” he said, looking up at me with true happiness in his eyes. “Thank you, Julia”  

“No problem” I said, smiling.  The old man handed me 50 shonis, highly  overpaying me; but as I looked at him walking away with a bounce in his step, I thought I understood why.  Father had always told me, ever since I was a little girl, that being a mechanic is the best job you could ever have. You get to fix broken things and make people happy. Plus, it pays well. Father always got more than other mechanics even, because he was known throughout Newistonia  as being one of the best mechanics around. Back when Queen Maria still ruled, Dad would apparently sometimes go to the palace. But now that Queen Zarfina is in charge, everything’s different.

I straighten my long brown ponytail and put the CLOSED sign on the door of my small mechanic shop. I catch a glimpse of my bright green eyes in the glass and smile. According to Papa, my eyes are my best feature. I clamber into my hover. I turn it on and hear the familiar creak of the engine starting up. I pull back on the steer lever and slowly rise into the air. I love the feeling of flying above all the passersby without a care in the world. As I’m cruising along a memory floats back to me….

There you go,” Mom says. “Now, just put your arm on the lever.” I try, but let go of the startup drive in the process. The hover drops two feet in the air, but Mom swoops her strong arms behind me.

“You’re doing excellent,” she says, laughing. I smile as she carefully maneuvered our way down.

I frown and shake off the memory. Just after that fine spring day nine years ago when I was just nine, Mom had left to, “pursue her acting career.” Two weeks after that we received a sid link from the Speshona City Hospital, saying that Camilla Roberts had died of mental illness. We didn’t get any further information.

To get my mind off things I decide to send a sid link to Papa telling him I’m almost home. I’d already turned on my edonscreen when a maniac driver cuts me off. “$%&@#” I say and slam on the horn.

“Command unclear, Julia,” my edon, Ida, says.

“It wasn’t a command,” I say, rolling my eyes.

“Okay Julia” she says as I pull into the spot outside of our small town house.

I get out of my hover and lock the door. I walk up the front steps and open the front door.  “I’m home, Papa” I call out.

 

Chapter 2: Home Again

I walk in and go to Papa on the couch. He greets me with his usual “There’s nothing on T.V.”

“I love you too, Dad.” I say, and kiss him on the cheek. Suddenly he starts coughing. I frown. This hacking cough is one of his many ailments. He used to be a fine, healthy, middle-aged man; but when he hit 50 he started, as he put it, “getting old.” I made him stop working. What he mainly does now is watch football on T.V. and go for walks in the park. He doesn’t need to do that, but I want him to. It must seem like I’m being overprotective, but I just want to keep him as healthy as possible. I couldn’t bear to lose him, too.

I’m about to go to the cupboard and grab his medicine, but he says, “I’m fine honey.” I smile weakly. I put my arm down and open the fridge. “Anything good?” he asks.

“If half a slice of pizza and two chicken wings counts as good,” I reply.

“Can we order Italian?” he asks, as if I’m the parent here.

“Sure,” I say and send a sid-link to Bonnie’s Italian for three plates of their delicious steaming hot spaghetti. Our family loves Bonnie’s. My great-great-great grandparents went there all the way back in 5050. Now, 200 years later, Bonnie’s is still our family hangout. I sit on the couch next to dad and smile.

20 minutes later, I hear the buzz meaning weight has been detected near our front door. Our creaky old android Annie rushes to the door. She opens it to reveal the delivery android, Frank. We see a lot of him here.

“That will be 30 shonis,” he says, handing over our spaghetti. I put the money in his built-in cash register and close the door as he’s rolling away. I turn around to face Dad.

“Spaghetti time” I say.

Half an hour later, full with spaghetti we plop down on the couch. We turn on the news. What I see nearly makes me jump out of my skin. BREAKING NEWS: QUEEN ZARFINA, DEAD.

Queen Zarfina, dead??? It can’t be. I pinch myself on the arm and blink. Nope, the headline’s the same. It was no secret that she had killed her sister Maria to be queen. Everybody thought that she would do whatever it takes to stay queen. She has dozens of the best doctors in the world working tirelessly in her research labs. But I guess karma has caught up to her.

I turn to Papa and see he is wearing the same shocked expression as me. “Wow,” we say in unison.

 

Chapter 3: The Surprise

As I climb into my hover the next morning I still can’t believe that Zarfina is actually dead. It seems like she’s still here. Now I wonder who is going to be queen. She never had any kids, but no one ever worried about it, because like I said, we all assumed that she was going to live forever. Curious, I say to Ida, “Turn on newsfeed.”

“All right, Master Julia” she says. I look at the screen and the hover almost skids out of the lane. HONK. An old man glares at me as he passes me.

“Sorry!” I say. But honestly, anyone in my position would have done the same thing. Usually, handsome newscaster Tristan Cooper would cheer me up, but today, I want to punch him on the nose.

“WAR,” he says. Apparently everyone wants to be ruler. The first battle was only 2 miles from here in the rural Commentoy. “It could be coming to Speshona next.” Tristan says, before it cuts to ads.

I curse under my breath. “Ida, send a sid-link to Papa saying that there is a war.”

“I can’t do that, Master.”

“Why not?”

“Adam Roberts’ edonscreen has been disabled due to the fact that he is now a patient at the Speshona City Hospital.”

“WHAT??

 

Chapter 4: At the Hospital

I shriek so loud the old man driving next to me says, “Watch it, kid.” I’m so confused. Papa, in the hospital? He was fine this morning… Or was he? I don’t know.

“Ida, I need the directions to Speshona City Hospital. Now.”

“Turn left on Bridge street….”

“Papa!!” I call out down the long sterile hallway of the hospital.

I see a kiosk on the wall and type in Adam Roberts. Hall 6, Room 4, it says. I rush there and bang open the door. I see Papa lying unconscious on a white hospital bed. It’s my worst nightmare. I see a doctor taking notes in a corner and say, “What-what happened sir?”

“Are you family?”

I nod frantically.

“Adam suffered from an unexpected heart attack. He might not make a full recovery.”

“Not a full recovery?”

“He had been unconscious for 30 minutes before our sensor picked up on his body. Because of that, he was getting sicker and sicker before he received help. But we will try our best. And what is your relation to him?”

“He’s my Dad,” I say weakly.

“We will keep you updated, Miss Roberts,” the doctor who I now see has a name tag saying Dr. Roth says. He briskly walks out of the room.

I collapse into a chair next to Papa’s bed and squeeze his hand tightly. “Please be alright,” I whisper. “Please.”

When I wake up the next morning I’m blinded by the bright white lights of the hospital. At first I’m confused and expect to see my pale blue wallpaper, but then I realize where I actually am. I quickly open my eyes and see Papa on the bed.

“Jules,” I hear him whisper.

“Yes???” I say and jump up out of my seat.

“If I…”

“Don’t say it, Papa, don’t.”

“Well, keep running the shop for me. The month’s rent for the house is 400 shonis. You must have that.” Then he breaks into a hacking cough and I rush to get him a glass of water, tears pouring down my face. I try to hand it to him but he’s too weak to accept it. I anxiously pour it into his mouth.

“Papa…” Than he squeezes my hand. But soon, I no longer feel the pressure of his hand. Tears slosh down my face like big, heavy raindrops as a beeping sound fills the room.

A white medical android rolls into the room. It says, “Mr. Adam Roberts of Speshona, Newistonia has, as of 10:32 a.m., died. I will now take his body to the research labs.”

I stand there, helplessly, as the android takes away Papa, my papa, to some foreign research lab. I rush to the bathroom, sobbing,

 

Chapter 5: Hank’s Message

An hour later, all cried out, I sit in the clean white bathroom stall and think about how alone I really am now. No parents, or even annoying little siblings. I start sobbing again, but pull myself together.

“What should I do?” I mutter. I take a deep breath and take out my edon from my back pocket. In a shaky voice, I say, “Ida, locate my hover.” My voice breaks and tears start flowing again. I wipe them away and follow Ida’s directions to Lot 12, Row 49. I climb into the hover and rise into the air. The wind hits my wet face, making it red and raw. I try to ignore it and think, Just wait until you get home, Julia.

Just then, Ida says, “Incoming sid-video from Hank Brennan.” This lifts my hopes a little bit. I’ve had a crush on Hank since elementary school. Now he’s moved to Acconio, the capital, to work at the palace. But I still get to sometimes talk to him, even if it’s not often. His face appears on the screen and I quickly wipe my tears away.

“Hey Jules,” he says.

“Hey,” I reply.

“Listen, I don’t have much time to talk, but I just wanted to tell you something.” I nod. “So, the other day I heard some royal advisors talking about you in the conference room. They said that ‘Julia should be notified soon, it’s getting late. She needs to be here, now.’ So I just wanted to let you know that you should come here, to the palace, ASAP.” Then the screen goes blank. Hank has hung up.

Great, I think. Just what I need, a 200 kilometer trip to the capital. Although, it does seem like I should be there, but…

I frown and pull into the parking space outside of the townhouse I now live in, alone. I slam the door of the hover and run to the family room, where I fall down onto the couch, hug my knees together and start to cry, my back shaking with sobs.

 

Chapter 6: Getting Ready

I walk to the small chest where we keep the blankets and pull out an old, ragged brown one. It was Papa’s favorite. Wrapping it around me, I walk back to the couch and curl up in a ball, inhaling his scent of the mint gum he’s always chewing mixed with a tinge of Bonnie’s spaghetti sauce, and I am filled with nostalgia for my pop. What do I do, what do I do? I think, rocking back and forth. Well, I’ll pack for Acconio.

I smile shakily, grateful for something to do. I slowly walk to the room I’ve had my whole life, and go to the brown dresser in the corner. I pull out ten t-shirts, one (shudder) skirt, and eight pairs of pants. I go to my closet and take out my blue suitcase. I throw the clothes, as well as sneakers, sandals, a toothbrush, toothpaste, and five big shirts for pajamas into it. I grab an orange waterproof sleeping bag and a small travel pillow and throw that in there too. Then I get the brown blanket from the living room. Satisfied, I zip up the suitcase and call for Annie. “I’m going on a trip,” I tell her. “And I’m bringing you with me.”

20 minutes later, I have put Annie in the seat next to me in the hover, thrown my suitcase in the trunk and given Ida the directions to Acconio palace. I pull into the air and have Annie turn on music. Suddenly I wonder how long it will take to get there. I ask Ida this who replies, “17 hours.”

Not too bad, I think. If I spread that over the course of two days, I could get there by Tuesday. Then I remember when Papa and I used to go on road trips to the ruins of the American cities each year for years. Tears well up in my eyes, sloshing onto the leather seat in big heavy drops. I try not to think about how I’m going somewhere far away solely based on something someone overheard but about Ally Clarkson’s new song, “Rainbows!!” I laugh, and am slightly cheered up.

Later in the day, I’m bored out of my mind. Even though auto-drive has caused many hover crashes, I still set the hover to it. As the wheel turns, I turn on Ida and begin playing Candy Crush. I twirl the candies together and my thoughts begin to drift. To Mama, Papa… I begin to wonder about my mother’s death. When she died, I was too little to really understand. But now I wonder, why didn’t they give us further information. Mental illness??? Sorry, hospital, but that’s not much to go on. But maybe Pop got more information and just didn’t tell me. Poor, fragile nine-year-old me. Now I think I know what happened. Had Papa been hiding something from me? As I pull into a motel that looks like it’s from 2050, I begin to feel upset. My father’s perfect untarnished memory is now being ruined. I settle into a restless sleep in my room with a twin bed that barely fits into the room.

 

Chapter 7: The Storm

I wake up at around six the next morning, used to getting up to go to the shop. I grab my suitcase and walk out of the room. Instead of the transporter usually installed at hotels, there’s just an ugly, hot pink, tiny elevator. Well, this looks like it’s the best I’m gonna get, I think, looking down the empty hallway.

I shove myself in, barely fitting with my suitcase and press LOBBY. When I get there, I see the concierge asleep at the front desk. I slip a 20 shonis bill onto the desk and hurry out. I clamber into the hover and rise into the air. I see some storm clouds ahead and steer away, thinking once again about Mom. Hadn’t I seen the sid-link from the hospital saying Ma was dead? I think. But maybe the hospital was lying to Papa as well. I sigh. Maybe she really did just die of mental illness.

An hour later, I see a storm about  20 feet away. I press the WEATHER PROTECTION button on the front panel as Ida says, “Incoming sid-video from Hank Brennan.” Hank’s face pops up.

“I know why they want you here!” he says in an urgent whisper. I gasp, but then the screen is filled with static. I look out the window and curse when I see that we’ve hit the storm.

“Annie, can you try and fix the receptor?” Although Annie is an old android, she’s still equipped with weather protection. Or so I thought….

As Annie climbs up the side of the hover, a particularly ferocious wind hits it. The water gets in her head cables and I gasp as Annie’s dark brown eyes turn black. She falls down the side of the hover. “No!” I cry out as Annie tumbles down into the raging storm. I yank out the brown blanket and collapse under it, mourning dear old Annie. I peer out of the sides of the blanket and begin to steer. Annie….

 

Chapter 8: Newsfeed, Water, Getting There

Annie. How could she be gone? She’s always been there. The comforting, ever-present friend. She had been Papa’s android ever since he fixed her up when he was a little boy. Even though Papa’s gone, I thought that I’d always have Annie. She was the only connection I had with Papa left. Now….. I cry and wrap the blanket around me. About half an hour later I begin to wonder why they want me at the palace. Wrapped up in grief, I hadn’t had time to really think about that until now. I try to send a sid-video to Hank, but then realize that the internet receptor is now permanently damaged. I could fix it, if only I had the tools. I never had the best forward thinking abilities. Well, I guess I’ll just have to make do with what I have. Which is… nothing.

An hour later, I turn on newsfeed, thinking about the war going on. It seems like ages ago that I was driving to work and my life changed forever. “Now we are deep into war,” Tristan Cooper says. “It is spreading, and the palace guards have yet to do anything about it.”

I think about poor Hank, who is a palace guard. Newistonians are very strong-willed, so he and his co-workers must be getting tons of angry letters this very moment. I tune back in to hear Tristan say, “And the battles are getting closer and closer to our capital each day. In fact, channel nine has exclusive information on the recent battle in our own Speshona.” I gasp and think about all my friends that might have been harmed. As Tristan goes over the list of casualties, I cling to my seat and am relieved when I don’t see Big Joe, who has been like a grandfather to me, or any of my other childhood friends.

When the show ends, I realize that although I changed into a new t-shirt at the hotel, it’s sticking to my chest. I feel like a little kid again as I say “Ewww,” and pull over the hover. I go to the back of the hover and put up the wash partition. I undress and press the WATER button. “Aah,” I say as the warm water pours into my dirty hair. I’m so glad that I installed the shower update two years ago. At the time, I found it unnecessary, but now, I’m so grateful that I did. Thank goodness for dear old Papa, who said, “You never know when you’ll need a shower.” I laugh at the memory. 20 minutes later I’ve wasted hot water and gotten back into the driver’s seat. Then, towering in the distance I see the tall spikes of the Acconio palace.

 

Chapter 9: Arrival at the Palace

When I reach the palace gates, a guard brusquely says, “Identification.”

“Julia Roberts.” I pull out my identification tag, which the guard harshly scans. I remember going with Papa when I turned ten to get registered and be given an I.D tag. By the age of 11, all Newistonians are required to be registered with an I.D tag.

I sigh as the guard opens the gate and I drive through. Unsure of where to park, I pull the hover down on the side of the parking lot and climb out. I take Ida and shove her into my pocket. Sadly, there’s no Annie any more, so I just take my suitcase and walk to the front door. I spot a familiar face and wave at Hank, who smiles and opens the door. Looking left and right, he deserts his post and ushers me inside.

“I’m glad you came,” Hank says. “Where’s your dad? And… where’s Annie?” Right. He doesn’t know. This is going to be hard. I shakily take a deep breath and begin to tell him everything. About Papa’s death, and the storm. In a way, saying it makes me feel better, but it also brings back memories I’ve been trying hard to forget. Hank looks at me, his bright green eyes filled with sympathy.
“I’m so sorry, Jules,” he says, his voice barely more than a whisper. I smile weakly. Just then, his edon, which is clipped to his belt, buzzes.

Startled, I say, “Who’s that?”

He plasters a grin onto his face and says, “My boss, Royal Adviser Evan Patterson. He says to escort Ms. Roberts to her chambers.”

“How does he know I’m here?” I ask, clueless.

He points to the walls and I see that security cameras are on almost every single wall. “Well then, ‘Ms Roberts’ let me bring you to your chambers.”

I laugh, and hold out my hand regally. “Why certainly, Monsieur Brennan.”

He takes my hand and brings me down a long, carpeted (I would say hallway, but that seems too drab, sooo) corridor. He stops at a large, wooden double door. He pushes it open to reveal the most lavish room I’ve ever seen. Shocked, I stare at the queen size bed, large wardrobe and plush white carpet. I walk in, stunned, and plop myself onto the teal comforter. I’m ready to fall asleep, when Hank pulls me up and says, ”You havent even see the bathroom yet.”

“I have my own bathroom?!” I squeal like a kindergartener. Hank laughs at me, and I playfully punch him on the arm. “In my defense, I’ve never had my own bathroom before,” I say. He just keeps laughing, and leads me to the bathroom. A grin breaks across my face. There’s a separate bathtub! This bathroom is as big as my room back home in Speshona. I twirl around, taking in the shower with a thousand different settings on the shower head, the double sink…. I smile and walk back to the main room, noticing a door I hadn’t seen before. I push it open and see a humongous walk in closet, filled with ugly frilly dresses, but also, and I’m shocked to see this, a few plain cargo pants and about ten t-shirts. I happily pull them out. I only packed a few t-shirts, and have been running low on clothes.

Then I hear a buzz behind me. I turn around and hear Hank mumble something into his edon. I turn around and he says, “They want you in the conference room.”

Chapter 10: New Job, New Life

20 minutes later, I’m seated in at a long table with about 15 stern-faced men. They introduce themselves as royal advisers. The one name that I remember is Evan Patterson, Hank’s boss. “Julia,“ he says seriously.

“Hey,” I reply, unsure of how to address a royal adviser.

“We have some very serious matters to attend to….” It seems like he’s about to say something, but refrains. “Well, let’s just say that Zarfina never really was the true queen of Newistonia.”

My eyes widen. I mean, I knew she was never the best queen, but taking over someone’s throne… well that’s just pure evil.

“We unearthed some shocking information that some extremely upset palace doctors gave. We also found some files in her private quarters,” he continues. “We found out not only that she was never really the true queen, but also something more about her past. She was a poor orphan girl who Queen Amanda and King Andrew adopted. They took her in as their own,and raised her along with their daughter Maria.”
“Wait, so Zarfina was adopted?!”

Patterson nods angrily and I can tell he wants to get back to the story.  

“As time passed, most people grew to forget that Zarfina wasn’t their true child. When Amanda and Andrew died, the crown passed to their first-born, Maria. Zarfina became extremely angry at Maria because in her opinion the crown should have been passed to her.”

“Why? Maria was their first-born.”

“Zarfina was a mere month older than Maria, but the royal advisors of that time decided that the royal bloodline must prevail. As you may know, after just five months into her reign as queen, Maria mysteriously died. People have long suspected that Zarfina killed her, but there was never any proof. You probably don’t know that Andrew and Amanda did have another girl, Camilla.”

I gasp. “Like my mom Camilla?” He nods solemnly. “How do I know that you’re not lying? Besides, if that was true, everyone would know about this. Zarfina wouldn’t have become queen.” I say frantically, biting my nails.

Patterson smooths down his bright red and gold robes and sighs, “Alas, there is more to tell.”

I wrap my arms tightly around myself, worried about what Patterson is going to say. I take a deep breath as he continues with his story.

“Zarfina, that clever mastermind, blackmailed the palace doctors into inventing the most powerful brainwashing device that ever existed. She then used it on all of the citizens through parties and meetings. She made everyone believe that she was her parents’ only child, and that Camilla didn’t exist at all. Camilla herself is brainwashed. She now believes that she was the late queen Maria’s hand maiden. Now that Maria is dead, Camilla moves to Speshona and begins a new life.”  Shocked, I sit in the comfortable brown leather chair and begin biting my nails.

I think I know what’s coming.

“15 years later, she called Camilla back into the city. Camilla, having no idea about her true past, thinks that she is being called by the queen for some important business. She unknowingly lies to her family and travels to Acconio. Zarfina then –– ” he stops and says quietly, “I think you know what happens next.” I nod and tears begin to leak out of my eyes. All this time, my mother was the true queen. Which means… Patterson nods.

“You are the true queen of Newistonia.”

~ End of Part 1~

The Titanic

One day Bob woke up. He remembered he was going to go on the Titanic. He was rushing because he was late. He got all of his stuff, grabbed his ticket, and he got some food and materials. He was going to play jacks and some cards with people on the Titanic.

Then he got in a taxi, and he told the driver to go to the Titanic. He got on the Titanic.

He was in room 100. He wanted to look outside to see a nice view. He met somebody outside on the deck. Her name was Scream. So he asked her, “Do you want to play jacks?”

She said, “Yes!” Ten minutes later, the ship crashed into an iceberg, and it was sinking.  They tried to get in a lifeboat, but it was too late. They tried to get in another lifeboat, but it was full. There were no more lifeboats. They were all full except the captain’s, but it was too far away. It had sunk already. It was near the end of the ship, but half of it was already sunken.

It became really cold. They had to get in a lifeboat! They tried to make a lifeboat, but it didn’t work! Bob took his axe and chopped some wood off the Titanic, so they could make a lifeboat. They quickly made it. They got some paddles, and they lifted it off. Then they jumped in it.

They got back to England and went to their houses. Then Bob said, “Do you want to go on another boat, the Titan?”

Scream said, “Sure! What day are you free?”

“Saturdays and Sundays.”

“How about Sunday?” Scream said.

“Sure,” Bob said. So they went back to their houses and they rested. They lived happily ever after!

Star, My Doll

Star is nice.

She looks like and feels like rose petals.  

She makes me feel home.

When I go to sleep I go to sleep

with my little Star

that cuddles me tight with love and joy.  

Sometimes I feel like I’m alone and I remember

she is there.

You might think this is crazy but

I think Star is my Sister and she is my

Superstar

Superhero

Superlove.

 

If people say she looks crazy

I don’t care,

I love her because of the way she is.

 

If I know I’m in danger

I run back to her

and she makes me calm.

If you think she’s just a doll

you should get to know her.

 

You’ll see, she feels like a human.

The Wedding

It all started with my parents’ umpteenth wedding. Yup. My parents have been divorced more times than I can count. They do all of the divorce papers and everything, and then, about two weeks later, they both feel lonely and get back together again.

At first, I got sad when they get divorced. But now it’s just normal. Yesterday, they got divorced. I happened to have my best friend over, Jonny. So when he heard them saying they were getting a divorce, he looked at me with that I’m-so-sorry face. But I said I didn’t care and it was totally fine.  

Back to the wedding. I think this is their 100th wedding, so they made a big deal about it and invited everybody they knew. My mom started to get really anxious, as if she had never been married before, and started ordering me around.

We live in the suburbs of Chicago. I think it’s really boring, but my parents love it. My name is Jones. My mom, Josephine, got divorced with my father for the first time when she went into labor with me. I have brown hair, some freckles, and am five feet tall. I am 11 years old. My dad, Jack, looks exactly like me, except he’s six foot eight.

“Help Aunt Jo Jo in, okay, Jones?” my mom asked me.

Right then my world started ending. Let me tell you that she is not old, and that I don’t need to help her because she is frail. I have to help her by moving things away from the entrance, because she is too fat to fit in. So when I got down, things got embarrassing. It started like this.

“Aw, look at my baby boy! For some reason, you seem smaller!” she bellowed.

Actually, she probably just got bigger.

She then ran to me to hug me. I swear, I could see my life flash before my eyes. She basically tackled me. I fell to the ground.

I stood up, and asked, “Can you maybe be a little less rough?”

“Oh, of course, baby boy!”

So then it was sort of a real hug. It must have looked pretty weird because I was about as big as her finger, and I’m tall for my age.

“Now, be a good boy and remove all the flower pots and anything in my way so I can budge through the door.”

“Yes, Aunt Jo Jo.”

Well, it took, like, 20 minutes to get her in. But besides that, the wedding was good. People were a little cramped, because Aunt Jo Jo took up about twenty seats, but it was mostly okay. Until the vows. Here’s what happened:

The minister said, “Now it’s time for the vows.”

My father said,“Oh, we can skip that. We have done this tons of times, and it doesn’t really matter anymore.”

My mom said, “What do you mean? Is this just an excuse, because you forgot to write yours?!”

My dad said, “It doesn’t matter, Josephine! We have done this millions of times!”

My mom said,“You are always like this! Why would I even think of marrying you?”

I’m just gonna skip a lot of the conversation, because it got pretty ugly.

So ten minutes later, my mom and my dad said:

“We’re getting a divorce!!!”

They both stormed off. Wow. They have been divorced many times, but they have never gotten divorced at their wedding! That’s a new record for them.

Nobody in the audience was surprised. They just left. I left too. I wasn’t gonna help Aunt Jo Jo out. Not again.

………………………………..

My parents were divorced for about a week, and I thought it ended when I heard flirting coming from the backyard of my mom’s house. There are around ten houses on my block, and all of the backyards are attached. My dad’s house is actually right next to my mom’s house, so they were probably the ones flirting.

But when I went outside, my dad wasn’t there. My mom was flirting with the village drunk, Joseph. It was pretty hard to believe. Joseph is a heavy drinker, has a beer belly, and owns five mean pitbulls. And his house is the one that my mom says to always keep my distance from. He’s been married, like, five times before, and every one of the girls that he has married were huge and fat. And he is VERY conservative. My mom is a proud liberal. And guess what. My mom seriously just asked him out. Maybe this divorce is serious.

Apparently, the date went well. Joseph drank five beers, and got really drunk. He was polite and let my mom pay for it, and then they both came to my house. I finally got to meet him.

“So, this is the Jones I’ve heard all about, eh?” he said, not soberly. He then said, “You seem like a pretty good guy!”

I got a closer look at him. He looked like he hadn’t shaved in about six years, and there were tons of food scraps in his beard. I did not like him. Not at all.

He helped himself to a beer in the fridge, and then lay down on the couch with his shoes still on.

“I’m gonna teach you a life lesson,” he said. ”Education doesn’t matter. Just play football and get paid millions of dollars, and that’s all you need.”

My mom would usually be super against that, but she tried to ignore it. I saw her face turn red though, like she wanted to punch Joseph.  

So this was not good. I need to get him out.

……………………………………………………….

I woke up and went to my secret stash of candy and sweets for breakfast. Without sugar, I cannot stay awake, so I always need sugar at every meal. So, I opened the cabinet, unscrewed the loose screw, and opened the secret door.

But here’s the problem: all of the cakes and candy and food were gone. I glanced over at the couch, where Joseph was sleeping. On his shirt were cake crumbs, and by the side of the couch were candy wrappers.

I started to freak out. I would fall asleep in school, even during gym class, without sugar, I thought. I went to the fridge, and looked for some orange juice. At least that had some sugar in it. But when I looked in the fridge, instead of orange juice, there was a note. Here’s what it said:

 

Dear Kid,

Here’s a life lesson. Don’t eat too much sugar. That’s my job. If you are looking for the orange juice, it’s in my stomach and it’s not available. That’s all I have to say.

Signed,

Gosef

 

Wow. He was too drunk to even remember how to write his name.

I searched the whole house, and everything with sugar was gone. I was desperate.

I ran out to the deli, but it was closed, so I was forced to go to school without my morning dose of sugar.

First period, I have gym. We were doing the pacer test, which is basically running from one wall to another, but I was too tired to listen and did the endurance, which is just running. So while everybody was running from one side of the gym to the other side of the gym, I was running in a circle around the gym. The gym teacher shouted at me, and I didn’t hear a word he said.

I finally realized that I was running wrong, so I started the pacer. I ran back and forth about four times, and then I collapsed.

I was fast asleep, so the gym teacher had to carry me to my next class. I slept all the way to the end of lunch. But here’s the worst part. If I had been awake for lunch, I could’ve gotten candy. I missed my chance to not only have sugar, but my chance to eat too! So now, I was an incredibly tired boy, who was also incredibly hungry! I was even more screwed. It was all Joseph’s fault. I need to get him out.

I slept through science, and my classmates were tired of carrying me, so they just left me there. And I slept there until 5:30 p.m. Apparently the teachers had tried, and failed, to wake me up. They were getting pretty desperate, so the custodian punched me really hard in the arm, and I finally woke up. That custodian really can punch! I went home rubbing my arm.

When I got home, my mom was really mad at me for coming home late. I explained everything that had happened that day, and I asked her why Joseph was here and that I hated him. It took her a long time to say something good about him so she could prove me wrong. She ended up saying, “You just have to accept the way he is.”

Wow. We all know that she was dating him to get back at my dad and make him jealous. I went up to my room and went to sleep.

…………………………………………….

That morning, I got up early. I was ready to fight back. I knew the minute Joseph wakes up, he heads straight to a fridge to help himself to a beer. So I decided to pour oil right in front of the fridge. This was an easy, good solid prank – he would slip and fall on his back.

I waited for him to get up. Sure enough, he went straight to the fridge. But it didn’t work. He walked straight over it. He didn’t slip one bit. That was weird.

I tried again the next day, but with a different prank. I replaced one of the beers with maple syrup and cough medicine. But when he opened the fridge, he accidentally dropped that beer, and he just chose another one. Was he prank resistant?

Another day without sugar –– it didn’t go so well. At least I was going to live in my dad’s house for a week. He’s pro-sugar.

When I got home, something wasn’t right. He’s usually chipper.

“Dad?” I called out.

I heard a groan from his room. I ran up. He was lying in bed, miserable.

“Whats wrong?” I asked

He answered with some more groaning. I saw that the pillow was tear stained. Then I figured out why. He was sad because my mom and Joseph were together. He still loved my mom!

“Is it because of Joseph?” I asked.

“Yes.”

“Well, I hate him too. He took all of my sugar!”

My dad sat straight up. He knew that I had to have sugar. He was the same way. “He couldn’t have!”

“He did. You know what, Dad?” I asked him, “We should get him out. Together.”

“How?” he asked.

“I think I have an idea,” I told him

………………………………………….

Joseph came home from a long day at the bar. He had to leave because the barkeeper kicked him out for starting a bar fight. He opened the door of his girlfriend’s house and was ready to pass out on the couch. He sat down on the comfy couch and was happy until…

“YAAA!” The couch popped up!

“AHH,” Joseph screamed.

He ran out of the house and sprinted to the bar to get away from the haunted couch.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

My dad and I high-fived. He had dressed up in a couch suit, and we waited for Joseph to sit down, after which my dad popped up. We scared the crap out of him!

One of the few things Joseph loved in life (his couch) was taken away from him –– at this house, at least. Maybe he would leave now! He did not really love my mom, I don’t think, he just loved our couch and our food. He didn’t like our couch anymore but maybe he would love….

…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Joseph finally built up the courage to go back into his girlfriend’s house. He opened the door and found someone sitting on the couch. She took up the whole couch. Her waist was the size of the couch. Trust me, it was an extra large couch too. Her finger was as big as his arm. There were crumbs all over her face and shirt. To Joseph, she was beautiful.

“Hello,” she bellowed. “My name is Jo Jo.”

“Do you like beer?” he asked her.

“Yes,” she answered

“Do you like food?” he asked.

“Hell yeah!” she said.

“Take me with you!” Joseph pleaded. “You’re perfect for me!”

“Okay, honey bun!” she said. She picked him up and squeezed through the door. They ran away together.

And those two lived happily ever after. They were almost the same people! As for Jones….

Both my dad and my mom watched the whole thing. When Jo Jo and Joseph left, both of my parents started kissing.

“That was horrible, Jack! I hated Joseph so much! All he loved me for was my fridge, my couch, and my food!” my mom said between kisses.

“I missed you so much!” my dad said.

“I never want another situation like this again! Let’s never get divorced again!” my mom said.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

After that, my parents didn’t get divorced any more. They didn’t want to have such a bad situation again.

We all lived happily ever after. As for Jo Jo and Joseph, they were happy too. Everybody was happier.

I was happier to not be around Joseph. My dad was not miserable anymore. My mom didn’t have to deal with Joseph anymore. We were all happier.

THE END

 

Epilogue –– Ten years later

 

We were all sad yesterday. We had to attend the funeral of Joseph John.

Yup. Joseph died. At the age of 73. He was drunk and climbed on Jo Jo’s back. She lost balance and fell out the window. Joseph died, but Aunt Jo Jo was saved by her fat belly. She started bouncing when she fell, but she didn’t get hurt. Aunt Jo Jo was very sad that day. They had been perfect together.

 

The author that inspired me to write this genre was Jeff Kinney, the author of the “Diary of a Wimpy Kid” series. The Genre is Realistic Fiction, but with Comedy in it too. In both my story and his book, Something bad happens to the main character, and they plot many schemes to stop it. None of the schemes work, but in the end, the bad thing goes away and they live happily ever after. Although it is a serious topic, I made it funny, because I like comedy.

The Revolution

“Your home planet, Planet X, was a very peaceful planet until it was invaded by aliens. You were just a baby and you were separated from your birth parents. You cautiously wandered into the town hall. You looked around and slowly started to walk forward, except after two steps you heard a crunch under your feet and you looked down. You saw that you stepped on the broken transporter tile, well, at least you thought it was broken. Slowly, you were enveloped in golden light, and then darkness. Suddenly, you appeared in the middle of a foster home on Earth. That’s when we found you. Being fellow aliens from Planet Y, we immediately understood your predicament and took you in. We brought you home and taught you how to improvise and how to survive. We taught you those things because when you are a survivor of a supposedly destroyed planet, and all of your family, relatives, and friends are dead, you have a target on your back. A big red one. Many monsters out there, or aliens, as you call them, would be rewarded by the Kraken, the one who destroyed your planet and many others, like ours. So we started to train you. We gave you lifelike illusions to teach you how to think on your feet. Then, in the middle of a practice session, when you were a little over thirteen years old, our little TV switched on and reported supernatural behavior and aliens being sighted on Earth. We were worried that they had come to get you, so we went outside to prepare. But we realized that preparing would do nothing when we saw what lurked in the shadows. And there he was. The Kraken. Waiting for us so he could kill us the second we stepped outside. As he crushed our puny little bodies, we shouted out to you, ‘Run, Warren! You don’t deserve the same fate as us!’ Remember, there can always be peace, you just need to find it. And remember Warren, wear your name proud, just as a true Peace would. To remind your enemies that they can never win, tell them your name, Warren Peace.”

Warren wanted revenge. His anger at the Kraken awakened his power to create things with his mind. He was thinking about his parents and what they said when he heard a voice in his head.

“Don’t worry Warren! We will always be in your head.”

Warren recognized that voice. It was the voice of his mother. Then Warren thought, “Is that a good thing or a bad thing?”

Then he heard his father’s voice respond, “You know we can hear you, son.”

“Sorry, but sometimes you can be a bit annoying.”

“Well, I guess every parent has their quirk. Well, back to the point. We believe in you. Now that you’ve discovered your newly-awakened powers, you should be able to build The Destroyer. But, it will take a year of work even with your powers. Once you’re done, you will have to shrink it to the size of a cup so you can put it in your pockets. Otherwise, you wouldn’t be able to move it because it will be the size of this whole house.”

“Ok, bye.”

The vision of them in his head flashed out of view. Warren mumbled to himself, “Ok, now I need to get to work.”

Two months later…

“Finally, I have all the equipment to build it,” he said as he’s walking into his house with the last of his supplies. Then he walked face first into a note that he wrote two months ago.

Remember, you don’t have to get supplies, you can just use your powers.

Then he remembered right after his vision, he had thought, “Wow, I need to take a nap.” But then he remembered that he always forgets things after naps. Therefore, he wrote a note so that he wouldn’t forget about his powers. But then when he woke up, he forgot all about the note. He should have put it in a better spot. And then a phrase that he heard on T.V. flashed through his mind: “Shoulda woulda coulda.” He slapped himself in the face and imagined that there were two hundred million dollars on his credit card. All the money that he just wasted back in an instant. He started feeling woozy and his knees gave way. He face-planted onto the cold wooden floor. It happened in a split second, but for him, it felt like it took an hour. Everything went black.

He woke up to the feeling of a cold washcloth on his head. He saw a kid about his age. He had the picture of Planet X and it’s many stars on his shirt (even though he had been a baby, he could still remember every single moment of terror that he went through on that day). He suddenly jumped up.

He screamed, “Who are you?”

The boy said, “How about a ‘thank you’? I just saved you from The Kraken.”

“Ok, thank you. I guess I was a little rude there. But seriously, who are you?”

“My name is Gagaroth. And I’m also from Planet X. It was very unfortunate what happened there. Now may I know your name?”

“My name is Warren. But how did you find me? And how did you even know that I’m here?”

“Well, our kind has a very special tracking system. All we have to do is envision the type of person, or even better, if that person has a name, and boom! We know the location of that person. You see, I’m looking for other survivors, and just happened to find you. I suppose you’re a little different from the rest of us. I walked in just as you conjured up the money out of thin air, and then you fainted. You realize there has only been one other that possessed the power that you behold.”

“So, what happened? Why did I black out?”

“You know, you need to be more careful. you should start with smaller things, if you use your power too much, then you start to get really sick. And it may cause death. But, with proper training, and it’s not that I’m recommending any specific trainers,” he gestured to himself.

Warren rolled his eyes.

“You can use more of your powers at any time without any consequences. I can help you with your problem if you help me with mine. Unfortunately, I haven’t found out a way to live life on Earth. You see, I just got here. Sometimes teleporting is a bit tricky, I suppose. Well, back to the point, I can’t seem to make a living, and since I don’t have your powers I can’t just make the money. Finding food, water, and housing has been a bit tricky. So the deal I’m offering you is for me to help you learn how to control your powers if I can live in your guest room. And you can spare a little food.”

“Ok. Seems like a good deal to me. But first, can I have some aspirin? I still have a bit of a headache.”

“Sure,” he pulled a bottle of Aspirin out of his supposedly empty pocket and held it out. “Here you go.”

Warren stared in wonder. “How did you do that? I thought you said you didn’t have the power to create?”

“Well, I don’t. But as my parents put me into the teleporter, they gave me this pair of pants. It allows me to pull small items, that would fit into a pocket, out of them. Conveniently everything except for money. Sense the sarcasm? Huh? Huh?”

“Calm down, man. I’ll get you some money. Except first you need to teach me how to do that without half killing myself.”

“Sure I’ll teach you. But I’m pretty sure you have 200 million leftover dollar bills from that incident from before. Doncha?” He held out his hand.

Warren looked around. He realized what Gagaroth was talking about. He saw piles of money everywhere. And when he said everywhere, he meant he couldn’t see the shining floor anymore. “Take what you want.”

“Really?” he responded into his pockets.

“Not a wise move, trust me.”

“Ok, b-”

“Nope, can’t take it back anymore,” he said as he rushed around the room, piling endless amounts of money into his pockets. Clearly, the effect was double sided, if you can pull anything out, then why not put anything in?

“Okay, now can you teach me how to use my powers?”

“Sure, let’s start next morning, 6 a.m. .

“Next morning?” Warren responded, annoyed for having to wait.

“Yes, next morning. Well, whatever and good night.”

He went downstairs to the guest room. Once he was gone, Warren felt a chill go up his spine. His head spun around and he saw what looked like a mix between a shark, octopus, hyena, panther, black mamba and cyborg. Suddenly, he heard a loud booming voice that echoed through his head. It said in a metallic voice, “I will do to you what I did to your planet, and your so-called puny ‘parents.’”

Warren said, “What the—”

The one thing he could see was a giant fist coming at him, and the next thing, darkness. When he woke up, the first thing that he did was rub the grogginess out of his eyes. It was a little blurry, but he could still make out that he was in a dark room with a giant figure looming over him. He heard the same voice that he heard before he was knocked unconscious.

“Good, you’re awake. You see, the reason that I brought you here is because you have something that I need. And if you don’t give it to me willingly, I’ll use force.”

He managed to mumble, “What do you want?”

The monstrous figure chuckled, “Huh. It’s not one thing that I want, it’s many things. The first thing that I’ll need from you is your employment.  And then I’ll tell you more about my plans.”

“What if I refuse?”

“Funny you should ask that. For your answer, why don’t you just look across from you.”

Warren looked to his right, he saw nothing. Then he looked to his left and he saw Gagaroth. He had wide eyes and a frantic expression on his face. There was one problem. He had a gag and his arms and legs were chained to a hospital bed. Just as he saw the chained up legs and arms, he realized that he couldn’t move any of his limbs either. When he looked down, all he saw were ropes and chains and a few red splotches here and there that he assumed were blood. The Kraken roared in rage and shouted, “Well, make up your mind! Are you going to work for me or not?”

The Kraken roared in rage and shouted, “Well, make up your mind! Are you going to work for me or not?”

“And if I don’t work for you?”

“I thought you would have guessed that by now, but I guess you’re even dumber than you look. But, I guess you do have the right to know. You see, if you refuse my offer, then I’ll torture your friend here. And don’t try to use your powers to stop me. I have an electromagnetic field that has momentarily made you helpless.”

Warren stared at him with his mouth hung so wide it looked as though he could swallow the Internet. He finally replied, “Ok. I’ll work for you. What is my first task, ‘Master’?”

“Hey. I’m not deaf. I can hear the sarcasm clearly. Keep it up, if you want your friend to die in front of your eyes.” He stood up and walked away, knowing that he had clearly won.

Now Warren wondered what to do. He was restrained and he couldn’t use his powers. Suddenly he heard, “Warren!”

He looked to his left and he saw that somehow Gagaroth must have gotten the gag off because it was now laying on the floor beside him. Warren said, “What happened? All I remember was his fist and then I was out.”

“Well, once he knocked you out, he came for me downstairs. He was so loud that I could hear your conversation all the way downstairs. But thankfully since I got that head start, I built myself a clone. And all offense to him, he’s stupid. He went after the clone even though it doesn’t look remotely like me.”

Warren suddenly felt embarrassed that he hadn’t realized that it was a clone. Gagaroth continued, “Then he walked into the room just as I put the microphone inside the clones mouth. And then he took the clone and I was just left by myself in the house.”

“So you’re really safe? You’re back at home? Where am I? Can you come get me? How are you able to make the clone so fast? Is this really all true?” He blurted out.

“Whoa there, one question at a time. So for the first question, if that was a clone, of course, I’m safe and at home. Also, you are currently a mile beneath your house. And, or course this is true. Also, I’m right behind you.”

“What! Free me!”

“Hold on, hold on, I’m not finished. I’m not literally behind you, but the little drone carrying an Ipad on Facetime is right behind you, so turn around and say ‘Hi!’”

Warren said, “I understand that you have a clone in here, but the drone…isn’t that a little much?”

“Well you see, I kept the drone in my pocket, well, my clone’s pocket, I mean. So when I noticed that we were clear I just sent it out so you could actually see what happened up here.”

“Well I’ll do that but first you kinda, you know, need to free me from my chains. How bout it, huh?”

“Sure.”

Suddenly the clone of Gagaroth broke free of his chains, took out an Adamant Knife and slashed the chains away from Warren’s body.

“There. Good now?”

“Yes,” Warren said as he hopped off the bed and spun around. He had a picture of what the drone would look like in his mind, but he never expected it would look like a cupcake with frosting.

Gagaroth noticed Warren’s confused look and said, “Well I didn’t really have much time, I only had a few times to pull it out of my pocket. You see sometimes I don’t control what the thing looks like, all I control is what it is.”

“Wow.” That was all he could say. His home looked like a construction crew teamed up with a bombing squad and his house was the target. The furniture was ripped to shreds, and all of his food was on the floor with bites bit into it. There were claw marks on the floor. Warren thought he might be able to fix things, but he would need some serious coaching from Gagaroth first. He wouldn’t want to faint again.

Gagaroth looked at Warren and said in a disappointed voice, “Yeah, I know, it’s bad. But it could be worse, at least we didn’t die.”

“Well, I guess you’re right, it could’ve been much worse. Wait a second! Did he steal the project that I was working on?”

“Yeah, why would you ask?”

“I need an advil,” he mumbled to himself. “Well, you see, that project I was working on? It was a thing that might be able to save our planet and bring it back to the way it used to be. And it would have been able to kill the Kraken.”

Gagaroth screamed, “DUCK!”

“Why is there a duck in my house? And if there is, why are you screaming at the top of your lungs?”

“No! I mean DUCK!”

“Seriously, what are you-” Warren suddenly caught his drift. He ducked his head a second before a boulder the size of his head slammed into the wall behind him. If that boulder hit him, he would be dead by now. It would’ve cracked his skull right open.

He muttered “thanks” to Gagaroth. Then he turned to his attacker. He expected to see the Kraken, but instead he saw a cute little butterfly…that was arming a catapult.

On the catapult, there was a sign that said: Oh you like my new little plaything?

Seriously, I hope you enjoy it.

Sincerely, THE KRAKEN.

 

Warren thought “How is he controlling that butterfly?” As soon as he thought that in his head, the old sign vanished and a new sign appeared.

This one said: So, you’re wondering how I controlled the little butterfly’s mind?

Well, here’s the simple answer. I got pro skillz yo.

Suddenly an image popped up in Warren’s mind. It was the Kraken stomping on this planet and saying “If you don’t become my servant, I will do to this planet what I did to yours.” Suddenly, someone said, “Drumroll, please! The mighty man himself: THE KRA-”

“Edward!” The Kraken roared. “It’s a little late for that.”

Warren said to the vision of the Kraken in his mind, “I’ll leave you two to discuss this. I’ll just go. So yeah, bye!”

He snapped his eyes open only to find another boulder flying at his face. He thought “It was a distraction!” but he didn’t have time to worry about the Kraken’s cleverness. He dodged out of the way and lunged for the catapult. He grabbed the butterfly in his hands, and he was sad to admit, he squashed it. He wiped away the guts and blood on Gagaroth’s clone’s shirt and then walked back to the catapult. He imagined he was holding a sledgehammer and then smashed it to bits.

Suddenly he heard Gagaroth’s voice saying, “Wow. You just imagined a giant sledgehammer the size of your body, and you didn’t even break a sweat. Seriously man, good job.”

Warren realized that for the first time, “Wow, that’s right!” Just as he finished celebrating, he took a step forward and fell on his face. Then everything was black.

When I woke up, I was in a hospital bed. I did not recognize my surroundings, but I did recognize the face that was hovering a few inches from mine. It was the face of Gagaroth, my best friend, and my only friend. He spoke, “Yeah, as you were saying, you didn’t faint at all that time.”

“Quit it with the sarcasm, okay? But really, what happened? I don’t really remember much, you know with the whole being unconscious thing.”

“So once you fainted, I walked towards you, and me and my clone brought you up to the house. Once we got there, we realized we couldn’t leave you there because the house was a wreck. So instead, we brought you to the local hospital.”

“What? How could you? We need to be off the grid! It’s enough that we’re running from monsters, but we can’t have the police knowing who we are! I mean, come on man! We’re probably going to cause some destruction if we destroy the Kraken. And we can’t be arrested after all of that. That would ruin everything.”

“You mean WHEN we defeat the Kraken. When. Have faith my brother, we can do this. We just have to bide our time. Also, you need to rest, you hit your head pretty hard when you collapsed. It was a big bump, and it needs time to heal.”

Warren lifted up his arms and felt his forehead. Instead of feeling his usually smooth skin, he felt a lump the size a tennis ball and instantly starting to panic. But then he remembered about his powers and summoned a Med Kit out of thin air. But this wasn’t just any normal first aid kit. I was the special first aid kit from his planet. He faintly remembered what it looked like so he summoned it from his memory. When he opened it, memories rushed back to him. Learning how to ride a bike, when his father patched up his knee when he scraped it on the sidewalk. And how his mother gave him some medicine when he got sick. No, he couldn’t worry about them now. He had work to do to avenge his parents.

He went back to the present, took out some Grocklack, and applied some to his forehead. In moments, the throbbing stopped and the bump decreased to the size of a little teeny pebble.

“Wow,” Gagaroth said. “Kinda forgot you could do that. But that reminds me. I haven’t fulfilled my promise yet. I have to show you how to use your powers with all your possible energy, without collapsing from the exhaustion of it. Because it would kinda suck if you defeated the Kraken, and then fell off the George Washington Bridge and into the water. You know what I mean? So first thing tomorrow morning, 10 a.m. , you’re going to the training room so I can get you back on your feet and teach you how to use your powers with maximum power.”

“Wow, that was a mouthful. But okay, I guess so. Let’s find a table so I can summon us some food for lunch. I assume it’s time for lunch, right?”

“Actually, it’s time for brunch, so even better. I saw some tables on my way here, let’s go over there.”

“Okay, let’s go.”

They walked over to the seating area and while the employees weren’t looking, Warren summoned some club sandwiches and some Coke. They ate in silence. Once they finished their meal, they went their separate ways to do some daily activities and just have some fun. You know, if you’re going to live on Earth as a teen, you should have some fun doing it. They said goodbye and the first very, very fun activity Warren was going to do was to clean up his house. When he walked in, he officially decided the world was against him, so he blew up the rest of the house with explosives. It was beyond repair. All the furniture was shredded, there were dirt marks and claw marks every few feet. So instead, he just decided to get a new house. He decided the perfect one for him and Gagaroth was a 37 room mansion on a cliff in Florida overlooking the ocean. So he summoned up some money (this time only a little at a time) and bought the house. After he furnished it, he summoned some blank pieces of paper and some pens, and started to draw up a battle plan.

The first step was to map out the Kraken’s hideout so that they didn’t get lost, because that would kind of suck. Once he mapped out the lair, he started thinking of ways to take down the Kraken. So far, the best one was to torture him for ten years and then slaughter him. I know that might sound gross, but trust me, he deserved it. But then he had to figure out how he was going to get the Kraken in a defenseless position. So far, his best idea was this: Gagroth would make some clones of himself and Warren, and then while they were distracted, Warren would slowly be building up weapons and ammunition. And explosives. Finally, once they realized the clones were, well, clones, they would come in and blow the whole thing up, leaving the Kraken and his crew exposed. While they stood there in shock (assuming that the explosion didn’t kill them) Warren and Gagaroth would come in for the kill with the new and improved DESTROYER 2.0.

It was going to be like the rocket slash missile he built before, except Gagaroth would build a smart computer inside of it, and add arms and legs. The missile would launch itself at the Kraken, hopefully killing him, or at least weakening him. If he wasn’t dead by then, a metal shell from the robots midsection would rise and the robot would become a killing machine with two energy chainsaws, the sacred sword, and 37 machine guns and bazookas.

So now that that was over, he summoned himself some early dinner and went to sleep. Later that morning, both Warren and Gagaroth went inside of the local gym. They had talked to the manager, and I’m not saying they bribed the manager to let them have the whole gym to themselves for the day, but they basically bribed the manager. Once they were all ready and warmed up, Gagaroth said, “The first step: always be calm and patient no matter what. Second: always have your goal in mind, and never change want you want to happen halfway through. There will be consequences. Third: never, EVER use your powers for evil. Only for good. Fourth, you have to have complete concentration. Fifth, when you become super famous, always remember how ‘Uncle Gagaroth’ helped you all that time. Ok?”

“Har, har, so funny. And when you said there will be consequences, what did you mean by that?”

“Well, first of all, have you ever wondered how the Kraken became so powerful?”

“Well actually, I never really thought of it. How did he become so powerful?”

“I’m going to tell you a story. It’s a long one but I think that you have the time to hear it. Ok, it all started when the Kraken was born. He was born on a planet like ours except it was all different. You may have heard of it, the legendary planet A. It was like ours in the sense that everyone was trying to make peace, except that it was also different in the sense that they expected so highly of everyone that when the Kraken, aka ‘Johnny’, was playing around with his friends and having some fun, he accidently cracked the portal and it sent a beacon out into space. It attracted all the monsters in that galaxy to the planet, they banished him to the planet of Askard.

At the planet of Askard, he was mutated, turned into a monster. He was stranded there until he came. He taught the Kraken how to have a thirst for revenge, and taught him how to live the life of a criminal. That was when he started his journey. Your planet was the 13th planet that he conquered. If you can’t stop him, then Earth will be the 15th.”

“That just means that we have to take him out soon,” Warren said.

“Agreed.”

To Be Continued.

The Drum Set

Chapter 1

On a nice and sunny day, Stewart, the hero of the book, went to his uncle’s drum store called “Get Your Percussion Here!” So he went in, said hi to his uncle, then saw a drum he really liked. He looked at it every day.  And then finally, it was ten days until his birthday. Ten days later, he came back to the shop.

He asked his uncle, “Can I get a present here for my tenth birthday?”

His uncle said, “Sure, why not?” Then he went with his uncle to the drum he looked at every day. That drum didn’t only have the bass drum and the snare drum and the high-hat, and the low drum and the high drum, it also had the medium drum, cymbal one, two, and three, and the cowbell, and the main cymbal. He went to test the main cymbal. Once he hit it every thing that he saw stopped. Time stopped. Everyone around him stopped, even his uncle. The drums stopped. Something weird happened to his mind. It started to hurt. And he saw a picture.

Then he thought, maybe it could be the future.

He was like, “Why is everything frozen? Wait a second. Everything’s frozen! That’s awesome!”

Then he went outside his shop. Since the boy’s favorite food was candy, he went to Dylan’s Candy Bar and he looked at his watch to see what time it was. All he saw was 12:57 p.m. The seconds were 53 and they didn’t move one inch. Then he took some of his favorite candy bars, finished them, and threw them in the garbage. He went back to his uncle’s shop, went in and said these words: “Abra cadabra. I demand the world to unfreeze!” Then he looked at his watch. It was still 12:57 p.m. and fifty three seconds. Then he got a little bored. So then he wanted to go play the drums. After a while, he hit the main cymbal and then everything as he knew it started to go as if nothing had stopped.

His watch started to go, his uncle said, “Yeah sure,” and he didn’t know about Stewart stealing the candy bars.

Then Stewart said, “Wow!” with excitement. “Uncle,” said Stewart. “Can you please help me carry the drumset home?”

His uncle said, “Yeah sure, why not?” So they moved the drum to his house, said hi to his mom and dad, read a book, and went to bed.

The next morning he went to school. He had the worst day of his life. All his friends weren’t there and there was nothing to do, just him and all the girls in his class. He wondered where all of his friends went. When he came back home he rang the cymbal again. Everything as he knew it stopped. Time stopped. His parents stopped. And when he threw a book it didn’t go down, it just stayed in mid air. He went to his friend’s house and looked to see if they were home. Guess what he saw? He saw all his friends with chicken pox watching a movie, eating popcorn at Neymar’s house. That makes him feel he was just left out and they were not friends with him anymore.

He went back home. On the way, he went to the supermarket and took a snack or two. Then at home, he took his book, moved it back where it was supposed to be, and then rang the cymbal again. He thought, Should I keep this cymbal a secret, should I give to anyone, or should I just throw it away? You know what, I’ll just throw it away. And then he threw it out the window into the trash, read a book for a minute and went to bed.

 

CHAPTER 2

The next morning the first thing he did was look at his drumset outside. Then he was like, What the heck? Where is it? It was in the garbage. Where could it have gone? Then he looked at his room and right in front of him was his drumset.

Stewart said, “What in the world? How is my drumset still here? Didn’t I throw it out last night? This is so confusing. I wonder what happens when I hit them bottom of the main cymbal. I’m gonna do it now.”

Then Stewart hit the bottom of the main cymbal. A giant sized computer came out of the bass drum on the right side.

It said, “Hello Stewart, when would you like to go today?”

Then Stewart said, “I think you mean ‘where’ not ‘when.’ But anyway, how can you talk, Computer?”

The computer answered, “Oh, you programmed me ten years in the future.”

“Future? How do you know all this?” Stewart said.

The computer answered, “Because you made me. Ten years from now.”

“B-b-b-but how did you come from the future? This is just a normal drum set. I think…”

“But Stewart, it’s not. You made this drum set ten years in the future and then you came back here fifteen years ago and put it in your uncle’s drum shop.”

“Computer,” Stewart said in a confident voice, “why did I program you to come here?”

“Because five years from now there will be an alien invasion, and it’s going to destroy all of humanity and all of the world. You’re our only hope.”

“M-m-me? Why me?”

“Five years from now you’re going to survive the invasion, and in the future three years from now you are going to be super smart, but only if I tell you this. And Stewart, the next two years after those three years, you build something that can take you to space. You go there and look for aliens, ‘cause then they will still just be planning to take over Earth. You’re going to need to go to an alien, try to be friends with him and not say anything mean, and ask if you can take one of his hairs on his body. That will be some alien DNA. Go back home and make a machine that can make a forcefield around the earth to stop the aliens and in the next couple of months they can’t invade our planet and we can live our lives in peace. But don’t forget to test it in a little size on your alien friend.”

“But I’m not going to be smart enough to do that!”

“Remember what I said. Study hard for the next three years in school. Raise your hand as much as you want in class, and after school go home and do your homework and research on any device how to be smart. For the next three years. And also if you want to stop time with this drum set, just tap the main symbol and you can study for the next five hours of the day. And don’t forget, if you want to speed up time, which I don’t recommend to do, play the snare drum.”

“Okay, thanks, Computer.”

Now I will go and destroy the aliens that are trying to invade Earth! In the next book called The Drum Set: Alien Invasion!

Alexander Percy Lawrence Peter Henry Winkharp’s Cellar Peddlers (Excerpt)

The girl holding a basket on the street.

Filled with neatly rolled newspapers, plain white rags, and red apples without so much as a speck of yellow or green on them, the woven container is in almost perfect condition, as if someone has worked hard every night to repair its every scuff and scratch. All strange things, considering the fact that she is obviously homeless and extremely poor. There are many other girls much the same as her in looks, except of course for their patched-up baskets filled with newspapers, green apples, or white rags with remains of old stains showing through, but never more than one of these options lies in their contraptions. These children are scattered around quite a lot, almost hiding this strange girl if it were not for the calls advertising her goods. It is also evident that she is better-dressed than all of these forlorn-looking creatures, who are letting their last morsels of hope shine through small cracks in iron barred windows, hoping that the bits of golden warmth will be enough to attract customers on the crisp day. It is not. But she, just this one girl alone, with the blue-gray rag around her head and the simple sweater and skirt that must have once have been red, does not seem to be having any trouble attracting the busy passerby crossing the narrow street to her small walled in corner, surrounded on two sides by solid brick, drenched in a stench of rotten fish and murky fog from the old days. Yet the girl always seems to be standing on, or perhaps next to, a clean sheet something like a welcome mat that she invites her customers to wipe their feet on, perhaps to increase her chances of customers. But is this really the cause of the steady stream of pedestrians hurrying over from the street, not a rushing river, not any real type of river, but a forest stream, a stream just the same? I think not. Perhaps it has something to do with the extra coins dropped at her feet with a quiet whisper, “For your master, dear, blessings to him for all he’s done for our world.” the girl’s quick nod is a gesture of thanks, almost a “The same to you, for all your generosity.” Perhaps this has something to do with the words embroidered, neatly enough, on one of her sweaters:

Alexander Winkharp’s Cellar Peddlers

Chapter  1

It was quite a while ago when the first of what came to be the cellar peddlers sprung up, scattered through the narrowest streets of London, of which there remain many. It was the revolutionary idea of the great Alexander Percy Lawrence Peter Henry Winkharp, though few knew of his middle names. As one of the most generous of his time, Alexander had felt compelled to help those whom he saw every day standing in rags on the street. For a while, he did what one would expect from someone with these motivations: daily he would go out, delivering food and blankets to the poor. But Alexander did not feel satisfied. He wondered, rightly, why, if he happened to spill a bottle of shoe polish at the shoe polish factory where he worked, and had to pay for it out of his salary, and if he couldn’t afford extra food for the day, why should someone else suffer? For days and nights, Alexander wracked his brain for a solution. What he came up with was what would grow to become the Cellar Peddlers.

Alexander saved up enough to buy a few small cots at a junkyard sale. After fixing them up quite a lot, he sold them off again, making a reasonably sized profit; then again, these were cots. This simple process of buying, fixing, and selling once more to make a profit has been titled over our many years of existence as “Flipping,” and is indeed considered a distinguished profession in its own right. Alexander, though he would die before sinking to the level of his day’s low down “Flippers,” discovered that the art came quite naturally to him and made a mental note of doing it some more, secretly, of course, in the future. Now, enough on the subject of flipping, as this is not a matter that should venture to the center of your attention.

With a fraction of his small wages and the profit from the cots, Alexander did the most surprising thing you could imagine: he bought another four tiny, dirt-strewn cots that reeked with a vigorous stench of garbage. Alexander hurried to clean them up as fast as he could, for winter was approaching, and the extreme generosity of this person who challenges that of any other could not possibly permit his less fortunate friends to be forced to bear the harsh conditions of the winter, entirely out of doors and in the snow and slush – especially, with his plan in the workings, they might possibly, for perhaps just a couple of days, have a warm place to sleep and food for a day or two.

This done, on the very next Saturday when Alexander left his respectable shelter for his usual route – on which he often brought food to and dropped coins around the small community of beggar families where that rumor of his kindness had assembled – he stood atop the low rickety stoop of his building, scrutinizing the dusty, rat-ridden landscape beside the Thames, searching for just the right subjects on whom to test out his new plan, namely any groups containing children. He took a deep breath before taking a single step, remembering the long hours he had been up the night before, and thinking of the perfect way to do this. An announcement would not work. The ragamuffin families were not acquainted with him enough, and speaking to them as if he were their king would no doubt be dangerous. Nor would flyers, he knew, as many of the destitute population could not write their own names.

At last, though, in the darkest hours of night, Alexander knew that what he must do was speak to the groups he chose individually, to decipher the slang that made up their distinct tongue, and to convince them that he could indeed brighten their family’s’ futures. That he, though he lived in a tenement, lived throughout the entirety of its three low-ceilinged floors as its owner and was more than willing to share, if it were for the better.

So out and onto the roughly paved streets went he, out went the man with a heart as soft as silk and as big as an elephant. Out as a hero he would go when he was set to save the world, a feat which there is little doubt that Alexander achieved throughout his life. Out with long strides toward the first group he had set his sights on, whilst laying out the usual things he laid out on these trips: piles of food wrapped in thin blankets, dumpster clothes fixed up good as new, rusted trays nobody wanted except those who were sensible enough to know how to fix such a simple thing. But oh, save the sensible, for by the time any one of those poor souls who live in a world that seems so cold and far away from them got ahold of one of those trays, the once fine and shining metal under the rust was scratched and scored, and the crevices that lined the surface were filled with dirt. It was in this sort of moment that Alexander wished dearly that he had prepared much more. Through his head that seemed to be turning on and off repeatedly, he searched for the words he had planned so carefully in the night that seemed to have disappeared, calling to them and begging them to stay.

In vain Alexander tried to delay each placement of a gift, in vain he tried to ignore the ever-nearing lamp post, under which lay a few ratty blankets and tin cans, a home not fit for a hog, nor any living being. But a home it was, for a poor threesome of the human race itself: a man, a woman, and one small girl who had barely a scrap of cloth in her possession. They had lived in the shadow of the same post since before Alexander moved into the neighborhood, and the two groups were something close to friendly neighbors, but never daring to admit it and make the friendship official. However, it was truly because of them that any of the new arrivals had any trust for Alexander whatsoever, and they, of all people, he thought, as the lamp post grew nearer, would help him with his plan even if no one else did. Slowly, Alexander walked closer, comforting himself with the fact that he often stopped to talk with little Nellie and her family, and they would most definitely not be curious if he did so once more.

So Alexander took one last package from the sack he was carrying, and he knelt down to place it down. He recalled wrapping a thick shawl around a stack of warm cakes, then enclosing the package in old rags. Knelt in the same way as all those around him, the most generous man in the entire city lowered his head to exchange a few murmurs with the lamp post family. Nellie tugged at her mother’s dress and the two engaged in even quieter conversation before Mrs. Ledwell raised her head.

“It is true. You do seem to have something on your mind.” Then little Nellie raised her eyes and whispered in her own small voice, light as a feather.

“Relieve us of our curiosity, oh, if you could!” Nellie’s voice had always been subdued, her face always lowered, causing many to believe that her time of dreams and fantasies were over. But day by day, Alexander saw a glint in her eye, and knowing that the flame would hurt its master if extinguished, he liked to replenish it by slipping her a package of her own – a coin wrapped in a rag – which she would slip into the small brown box that the first coin had come in. Alexander often wondered how much she had saved up, for that was the only way a poor child knew how to use money. He believed she must be fit to be rich now, with all the little copper pieces filling her box. Then Alexander saw the faces of Nellie and her mother, and remembered their question. He recalled his thoughts and the plans he had made, just for this moment.

And Alexander spoke.

Ogre and Sophie and Most of All Sophia

Once upon a time… wait! I forgot to introduce myself. My name is Sophocles –– Sophie for short. I love the cool colors; blue, purple, and green. I am a boy. I am a leprechaun who is kind, and NOT full of mischief. I want to make the world better.

All the people in my village were scared of the ogre, but I thought that the ogre was probably actually kind. The ogre was just misunderstood.

One day, I was playing with my best friend Sophia, and we started talking about the ogre.

“Why are they scared of the ogre? I think he’s just nice. What has he done?” I asked.

“I agree with you,” Sophia said.

“Let’s find out, and let’s talk to her.”

“Sophie, why? I’m really glad you want to go see the ogre, but we need to do it in secret.  We can’t tell our parents. They’d be worried. Do you agree?”

“Yeah.”

“But I hate lying to our parents. What should we do?” Sophia was worried.

“Maybe just say ‘Hi’ to the ogre and run away?”

“That’s a good idea. Maybe we should tell them after. Then it’s not really lying.”

“That’s a good idea.”

They walk through the forest.  

“It’s so dark in this wood. Hold my hand, Sophie! I’m scared,” Sophia said.

An owl hooted.

“What’s that?” Sophia screamed.

“It’s just an owl.”

“Oh! Look!” Sophia pointed. “It’s her.”  

The ogre was singing a song about loneliness and love and how she wanted to have friends. She was playing the cello.

“Oh, how I wish I had friends, but I’m so ugly to the end. Oh, how I wish I had love, but I sigh and eat a dove.” She was holding a dove and apologizing for using the rhyme.

“Hello!” The ogre said, noticing us. “Who are you? You’re so cute!”

“I’m Sophie, and this is my friend Sophia! Who are you?”

“Why, I’m Pip Bounce.”

“I just wanted to know why the villagers are afraid of you.”

“I don’t know, maybe because I’m ugly. I was a princess, but a witch turned me into an ugly ogre! The only way to break the curse is if I become friends with the people of the village!”  

“M-maybe you could help the villagers. We’re having a harvest and we could use your height!” Sophia suggested.

“Good idea,” Pip Bounce said.

“Sophie!” My mom entered the clearing. “Where have you been?” She saw the ogre and screamed while running away, “AHH!”  

We all ran after her, and Pip Bounce followed us all the way into town, filling a large basket with apples.

“They’re friends with the ogre!” someone cried. Pip Bounce leaned down and handed apples to the people. With a flash, she transformed back into the princess she was. Everyone now knew she was a trustworthy princess who was actually kind.

Thanksgiving Turkey

This is what I look like. I have big feathers on my back, a big stomach, a red neck, a beak, two legs, and toes on each foot.

I am a turkey living on Farmer Brown’s turkey farm. It is November. So you know what that means, don’t you? I will be roasted and barbecued on the grill the day of Thanksgiving! Then you will see the fat part which is our breast. Then you see two legs. We are usually surrounded by gravy and cranberries.                  

I have to come up with a plan to get out of the farm before the horrible day, Thanksgiving. I spent all night thinking of a plan to get out of the farm. Finally, after a long time I come up with an amazing plan. I will disguise myself as an animal. I will wake up my friends and my mom, but not my dad because he was already roasted last year.

So I wake them up to tell them my plan. They are all really mad that I woke them up, but they agree with me and say that they will escape the farm with me. The only problem is that I don’t know which animal to disguise myself as. Also, Thanksgiving is only two days away. I hear a coyote howl and I know it is midnight.

Suddenly I remember Farmer Brown always shoos away the coyotes. I think that if I became a coyote Farmer Brown would shoo me away and never let me in again. I wake the other turkeys up again but they won’t let me talk, they just yell at me. I go back to bed frustrated.

Finally it is morning and all the turkeys are awake but not because of me. I tell them my disguise and we immediately get to work on finding materials for the disguise. I really hope this works. Nothing can stop us from not escaping. That is, unless we fail, which is probably 50 percent.We also have a 50 percent chance of succeeding.

 

(Only one day until Thanksgiving)

 

We find hay in the shed, for the fur. For the ears we use two feathers that we plucked from our body. The tail will be yarn from our name tags which are wrapped around our necks. Finally, since coyotes walk on all four legs we will need to make fake legs. My mom says that we can use sticks. I think it’s a clever idea. So we find sticks and practice walking with four legs. However, when we finish practicing it is already dinner time.

Farmer Brown comes out of the barn and says, “Eat up because you better be plump so we can roast you and eat you up.

I look at my friends and smile. We won’t be roasted.

Exactly at midnight we put on our costumes and howl. I am so nervous that my plan will work. So I tell the other turkeys, “I am sorry if this doesn’t work but you would’ve been roasted anyway. I enjoyed my time living with you. I was really sad that this might be the last time I ever see them again.”

Farmer Brown runs outside and yells, “Don’t go in my turkey farm.”

We run away and don’t stop until we were off the turkey premises.

 

(The day of Thanksgiving)

 

In the morning I hear Farmer Brown yell to his wife, Mrs. Brown, “The turkeys are gone!”

Mrs. Brown yelled at the top of her lungs, “Thanksgiving without turkey? NOOO!” Her voice echoed throughout the city.

 

SO REMEMBER, NEVER EVER EVER EAT A TURKEY EVER AGAIN BECAUSE NOW YOU KNOW HOW US TURKEYS FEEL ABOUT IT.

Tornado Boy

Hello, I am Emy, the main character of this story. My grandfather died reading a book (I do not know the title) because a tornado came out of the book. Now, let me tell you the story.

So, it was a regular day at school (Friday, if you want to know) and my friend Elvis kept reading this weird book. Because my name is Emy, he calls me Emmanuel.

Back to the book: it was all ripped up, and the title was Bressling. The pages were dark, the words were light. You could tell it was a very old book. One day, during recess, Elvis was reading this book. He said that he liked this book. I sat next to him, reading my own book. Suddenly, a tornado came out of the book and sucked Elvis in. I got so scared that I ran home.

I asked my dad, “What was the name of the book that Grandpa was reading when he got sucked in?”

“Oh, I don’t know… Bressling, I think. Why do you want to know?” asked my Dad.

Without answering my Dad, I ran to school terrified and breathing heavily. When I finally got to school, I took the book from Elvis’s desk. I looked. The title was “Bressling.”

“I knew it!” I said. I looked at the page where Elvis stopped because the book was still open to that page. I knew it was the correct page. Then, I looked at the sentence where he had gotten sucked in: “Then the book took in a man and a boy, Albert Senstein and Elvis Toddler.”

Albert Senstein was my grandfather. Elvis Toddler was my friend. “This book’s haunted!” said my friend, Nate. He was sitting in the room the whole time paying attention to his work until I ran to Elvis’s desk. Then I thought, The only way I get to Elvis is to read the book until a tornado sucks me in.

I started reading the book from the beginning. Then, a tornado came out of the book and sucked me in. The last thing I saw was Nate running out of the room. Next, I was falling from the sky and landed on the floor of a desert. Next to me was Elvis. He pulled me up and started talking.

“Hey! Emmanuel! Look at this old man. This is a character from the book.” He pointed at a white-bearded man. “His name is Zalen.”

“Hi, Zalen, I’m –– ”

“Emmanuel, I know. Hello, Emmanuel,” said Zalen, in an old, old voice that reminded me of my friend’s grandpa. That’s when I realized there was another man who looked about 72 years old.

I didn’t even know him, but he must’ve known me because he came up and hugged me and said, “Emy, I only saw you as a little baby. I always wanted to see you when you were nine years old. Now look at you –– you have grown. I am your grandfather who was sucked in by a tornado from a book.”

Then Nate came plopping on my head and said, “I started reading the book and then a tornado came out and I ended up here!”

I was annoyed. “So not only did I come here, but you did too. Now I have to get all of you out!”

Then my grandfather Albert looked at me. “Hey. Who put you in charge? I’m the oldest… I’m supposed to be in charge.”

Zalen looked at him as if he were blind and said, “I’m the oldest. Look at you. You’re 72. I’m 137!”

Then Albert said, “You’re in the book! You’re supposed to be inside the tornado!”

Zalen said, “Right, yeah. I wish the author of this book had never written it. Now I’m stuck here for the rest of my life!”

“It’s fine,” I said, “but how are we going to get out?”

Then Zalen said, “I know this witch that lives in the north. All we have to do is walk 100 miles to the north and then we’ll find her. She is the author of this book. She’ll know how to get us out.”

“Okay, not helping. 100 miles?!”

Zalen said, “Okay, fine, fine. But it’s better than nothing. What other choice do we have?”

“Good point. Isn’t there any faster way to get there?”

“No, sorry. We could camp. I have tents and food –– a whole lot of food!”

“Ok,” said five-year-old Nate, who did not know what was going on. He was only pretending to know what was going on.

Then, we heard a strange noise. The next thing we knew, Nate was gone.

We looked around for Nate, until Zalen said, “Where could he be? In this desert, there’s nothing but sand. There’s no hiding places.”

Albert said, “I disagree. There are cactuses all over this place.”

He was right: the desert was full of cactuses. I got an idea.

“How about the four of us split around and look for him? He always plays around with jokes,” I said. Then we heard the same noise again.

“It doesn’t sound anything like Nate,” Elvis said. “I think he is making one of his stupid noises.”

Suddenly, a little dwarf came out holding Nate.

Elvis said, “How much do you want for that stupid little boy?”

“Five hundred bucks,” said the dwarf in the same voice they heard earlier.

Zalen said, “You came to exactly the right person! I’m a billionaire!” Then he held up a wallet, which was not exactly a wallet. It was a big bag of money and gold. “I got it from my father!” he exclaimed, pulling out five $100 bills and giving them to the dwarf.

The dwarf said, “Give me another $500, or I’ll kill the boy.”

Then Elvis said, “Oh, whatever… Hey, dwarf, I know dwarves like big hats. Do you want this hat?” He took off his own hat.

The dwarf said, “No!” and pulled out a knife.

Then Elvis said, “I go to karate!” He wrestled the dwarf to the ground, took the knife, and threw it into one of the cactuses.

“I knew it would become useful someday!” said Elvis. He got off the dwarf and grabbed Nate. Then he said, “Don’t mess with me again!” The dwarf ran away.

Zalen took out a compass and said, “Go that way. Let’s go!” He pointed North, and we started walking. After 50 miles (we walked really fast) Zalen said, “Okay. My feet can’t walk anymore. Let’s rest.”

“Okay,” said Albert. “Do you boys agree?”

“Yes!” said Elvis and I.

“What about you, Emmanuel?” asked Elvis.

“I said yes!”

“Oh,” said Elvis.

Zalen pulled out a big tent and sticks from his backpack and started unfolding it. Then he put the sticks up and put up the tent and it was standing.

Zalen said, “Get inside the tent unless you want to stay outside. It’s getting dark.” Albert tried to go inside the tent but Nate pushed him aside and went in first.

Then Albert went in and said, “Nate! That was rude.”

Elvis got in next and asked, “Emmanuel, are you coming in?”

“Yeah,” I said, climbing in.

When I woke up, I was not in the tent….

 

I was not in my tent, and I was not even lying down –– I was in a chair. I looked around. There were other chairs, and Zalin, Elvis, Nate, and Albert were sitting in them. I tried to stand but could not because I was in front of a desk. So were my friends.

A man came into the room. He had dirty blonde hair, brown eyes, yellow teeth, black skin, black glasses, black pants, white t-shirt, and white sneakers.

He said, “Why don’t we take a test? Why are all of you the same? I’m not included.”

Then Nate raised his hand.

“Yes?” said the man. “Oh, by the way, if you cheat on this test, you will be eliminated. Oh, sorry –– did I say eliminated? I meant executed. Now that will calm you down.”

Nate said, “We all have to answer your stupid questions?”

“Um, no,” said the man.

Albert raised his hand.

“Yes?”

“We all have white teeth.”

“No.”

Then I raised my hand. “Yes, we are all captured, but we don’t care.”

“What do you mean?”

“You captured us, but none of us seem to care.”

“OH, now I get it. No. Now I will kill you…. Actually, no. I will spare you and give you one more chance. When I say ‘hey,’ you will race to the end of the room. I will kill the loser.”

We lined against the wall.

Then Albert said, “Hey!” and ran. When he got to the other side of the room, everybody looked at him, surprised.

Then the man said, “Look dude. I didn’t say ‘hey.’ You did. Get back to the other side of the wall. And when I say hey, you run. Is that understood?”

“Yes,” we all said.

Then the man said, “Hey!” and we all ran.

To Elvis’s luck, he got to the wall first. Then I got there and then Albert and then the limping old Zalin. We all looked at Nate, but he wasn’t running –– he was looking at the man.

The man said, “Okay. The little boy in the pajamas will be killed.”

Elvis wrestled the man to the floor and took the man’s gun and pointed at his face.

Then the man said, “Shoot, you stupid idiot.” He smiled a creepy smile that showed his yellow teeth.

Elvis shot. There was a great big sound that sounded like a bomb exploded. We all looked at the man, but the man was laughing. The gun was blank.

So, Elvis punched the man in the face, and the man fainted. Then, we found a bucket of bullets in one of the corners of the room. We loaded the gun and Elvis shot the wall. The gun worked because there was a hole.

“Let’s go,” he said.

We all stepped out and Zalin said, “What? This was the desert we were walking through until we woke up in that stinking room that smelled of rotten poop.” Then, we saw the tent. We all turned around and saw the room. But it wasn’t really a room –– it was a few cactuses built up into a room. We saw the hole we had gone through and then we understood everything: the man had taken cactuses, built up the room, and dragged us in there.

“I am keeping this weapon,” said Elvis.

“Listen, you kept the knife. Now you’re keeping the gun? You gotta be kidding me,” I said.

“Okay, fine, fine. You get the knife. I get to keep the gun.”

“No, I want the gun. You get to keep the knife.”

“No, I do.”

“No, I do.”

“Nope, I do.”

“No, I do.”

“No –– ”

“OK, can I say something?” asked Zalen.

“No!” Elvis and I said in unison.

“Okay,” said Zalen, and he walked away.

“Fine –– you get to keep the gun. I keep the knife,” said Elvis. He put the knife in his belt and handed over the gun. I put the gun in my belt (we both had belts because they were part of the school uniform).

Then we started walking. Soon, we had walked another 50 miles, and Zalen said, “Stop!” If we’d walked one more step, we would’ve crashed into a big hut with a roof that looked like a witch’s hat.

“This is it!” said Zalen. We knocked, and a very old woman opened the door.

She had a hat that looked exactly like the roof.

“Come in, dears,” she said in a very kind voice. Inside the hut there were many pictures. In the middle of the room there was a small black table, with pot of some green liquid on top.

“Can I drink that?” asked Nate.

“If you want to explode, yes,” she said, pausing. “Ah, yes, you don’t know my name and I don’t know yours. I’ll go first: my name is Minerva. What’s yours?”

“Zalen,” said Zalen.

“Albert,” said Albert.

“Emy,” I said.

“Elvis,” said Elvis.

“Poopy Pants!” said Nate.

“His name is Nate,” said Elvis.

“No, my name is Poopy Pants!” cried Nate.

“Alright,” said Minerva. “I believe that your name is Nate… but I am going to call you Poopy Pants.” Then she asked, “Why did you come?”

“We want to get out into the outer world,” I said.

“Who? All of you? And what do you mean by the outer world?”

“The answer to the first question: Nate –– well, Poopy Pants –– me, Elvis, and Albert want to get out. To the second question, we were trapped in a book called Bressling…” And I told the story about Bressling but kept forgetting to say Poopy Pants instead of Nate.

“Ah, yes, Bressling. I wrote it, and I cast a spell on it. And I read it and I got sucked in because I wanted to. And then I forgot something, so I cast a spell to write in the names that got sucked in. Now, all you need to do is drink this little potion that I am going to make right now… Here it is. Hokatee pokatee lokatee pookatee shokatee nokatee sokatee… ah, where was I…?” she interrupted herself. “Oh, right, yes. Noopatee kloopatee crumpatootatee, and, last of all… compoopatee! Oh, how dumb am I? I forgot the bowl, the water, and my wand.” Minerva got the bowl and the wand, and pointed at the bowl and said, “Shoompatee, gloompatee.” And then some water burst out of the wand and flew into the bowl. “Enough! Enough, you stupid spray!” The wand stopped the water and she said, “Now, what was the spell? Hokatee pokatee lokatee pookatee shokatee nokatee sokatee noopatee kloopatee crumpatootatee!” Then the water turned red, then orange, then yellow, then light green, then dark green, then light blue, then dark blue, then pink, and finally purple. And then it turned every color, in a mix. She took four cups and put them on the table. She took the bowl and poured equally into each cup.

“Alright. All of you who want to go back to the outer world, please drink this.” We all drank it except for Zalen. Then Minerva said, “Alright. Now, in ten minutes, you will go back into the outer world, in front of the book in the place where you were reading when you got sucked in. Why don’t you find something that’ll entertain you for the time being?”

Then, she pointed her wand at the table and said, “Shoompatee, loompatee, gloompatee, foompatee!”

A chessboard with chess pieces appeared on the table, and Elvis and I sat down at the table and started playing. “Thanks for the chess board,” I said.

She conjured a magic carpet using some other words I couldn’t hear correctly.

“Here you go, Poopy Pants,” said Minerva. Nate jumped onto the magic carpet and started flying around, and he went out the window and flew around the yard. Nine minutes later, the magic carpet landed. Nate got off. Elvis and I finished the chess game with a stalemate. Elvis was so close to winning –– he had a queen up –– but I drew into a stalemate.

Minerva shouted, “One minute to go!”

Sixty seconds later, we appeared in the classroom where we’d started.

“I miss Minerva and Zalen,” I said.

“I miss them too…. If we want to see them, we have the book.” Elvis pointed at Bressling. Then Nate started crying. We looked at him.

“What’s wrong now?” we asked him.

“I miss my flying carpet!” he cried.

I slapped my head. “He’s so stupid!”

Elvis and I ran home with Albert. We came home (by the way, I forgot to tell you, Elvis was my neighbor. I lived in apartment 5D and He lived in 6D).

My father sat up and said, “I do recognize you, Daddy. How the heck did you get here from that book?” He pointed at Bressling, which I was holding in my armpit.

Then Albert said, “You should’ve met Minerva.” And the three of us laughed.

 

The Adventures of Digger and Scrappy

Chapter 1

“Hi, my name is Scrappy, and this is Digger. We’re in the shelter with all the other dogs. WOOF WOOF,” Scrappy said.

The shelter door opened, and two girls came in with their dad.

“Their dad looks like the president!” said Scrappy.

“He is!” said Digger.

“Wow!” said Scrappy.

The two girls came over to their pen and said, “I want those two!” Digger and Scrappy were so happy. The girls took them out of the pen and picked them up. Then their dad paid for the dogs, and they went to the car. Scrappy wondered if they lived in a house, so he asked Digger. Digger thought that Scrappy had lost his mind.

“Scrappy, they live in a mansion!”

“Oh, yeah,” said Scrappy.

Then they tried to guess the girls’ names.

 

Chapter 2

“Maybe Fuzzy!” said Digger.

“Or maybe Coco!” said Scrappy.

“Wait!” said Digger, “What about human names? We’re saying dog names.”

“Maybe Megan!” said Scrappy.

“Hey, Megan, are you excited that we’re going to Hawaii for Christmas?” said the dad.

“Yeah!” said Megan in an excited voice.

“Score!” said Digger. “Bridget, are you going to go in the pool in Hawaii?”

“Yes!” said Bridget.

“This is going to be great!” said Digger.

 

Chapter 3

They were in the park when Scrappy saw another dog. He wanted to play with the dog. The dog was a golden retriever like Digger. Digger was right next to Scrappy, so Scrappy started to walk over to the other golden retriever. Digger followed. Scrappy asked if they could play with the golden retriever.

The golden retriever said nothing. He couldn’t hear Scrappy because Scrappy was so small. Scrappy felt sad and began to walk away.

Digger asked, “Why are you sad?”

Scrappy said, “I feel tiny… That dog couldn’t hear me, and I wanted to play with him.”

“That’s sad,” said Digger. “I’m going to go talk to the dog and tell him that you want to play with him.”

Digger started to walk over to the big dog. He asked, “Can Scrappy play with you? By the way, my name is Digger, and this is my best friend Scrappy.”

“Hi!” said the big dog.

“Oh, I forgot, what is your name?” Digger asked.

“My name is Whiskers,” the big dog said.

“Good name!” said Digger.

He whispered to Scrappy, “Funny name.”

“Yeah,” said Scrappy, giggling.

A few minutes later the girls called them to leave, so they ran and jumped on them, knocking them down. They started to lick their faces. Then their dad called them from the front porch of the house. The girls stood up, with Scrappy still holding on to Bridget’s leg. Digger told him to get off Bridget’s leg, so he did. They started to run up to the house, and they went through the doggy door upstairs to their room.

Chapter 4

When Digger got up the stairs, he and Scrappy talked about what they were going to do the next day.

The next day, when Digger woke up, he looked around, but Scrappy wasn’t in his bed. He washed his paws in the little doggy sink and went down to have breakfast. When he got down the stairs, Scrappy was there waiting for him.

“Did you hear the news, Digger? They’re going to Hawaii!”

“Who’s going to what the what?” asked Digger

“They’re going to Hawaii!” said Scrappy.

“Who is going to Hawaii?” said Digger.

“Bridget is going and Megan is going and the president is going,” said Scrappy.

“Ohh!” said Digger. “Are we going?”

“No! Of course not. I wouldn’t even want to go. Get stuck in the airplane for, like, 100 hours? I wouldn’t even be able to stay alive for two minutes!”

“What did you say?” said Digger.

“Oh, whatever,” muttered Scrappy.

That night, Digger and Scrappy helped the girls pack their bags. The next day, Digger and Scrappy said goodbye to the girls. They felt sad and confident at the same time because they were going to be left alone.

 

Chapter 5: The Robbers

For the next few hours, Digger and Scrappy slept. The doorbell rang. They started to bark – a package for the president! Digger opened the door. The delivery man ran in, stole everything, (chairs, tables, and the medal that Megan had won) and tried to get out. But, before the robber got out, the dogs already had a plan. They got the rope from the basement, tied it to the staircase, ran across the room, out the door, put the doorstop in, and waited. Then, they took the table and chairs and smashed them into the door. A few minutes later the dogs were fast asleep again while the robbers were taking all the stuff, but they were faking it. The robbers got out the back door by cutting a hole in it with their knife. Digger and Scrappy woke up, and they climbed up the wall and wrapped the rope around the door. As soon as the robbers opened the door, a big punching jack-in-the-box punched them in the face. They fell down and landed on the table.

Digger and Scrappy called the other dogs from the neighborhood. They ran through the door and started licking the robbers’ faces. Finally, Scrappy came out and gave the robbers a supergalactic lick. The robbers got up as soon as they could and left.

 

Chapter 6: The Return of the President

Twenty minutes later, the president parked the car in the driveway. Digger and Scrappy climbed on the heater and started to bark. Bridget and Megan ran to the door, swung it open, and picked Scrappy and Digger up and twirled around.

“My little fluffies!” said Bridget.

They squirmed like worms until they finally put them on the sofa. Digger and Scrappy rolled around amd couldn’t see anything. Then, Digger bumped into Scrappy and he almost fell off, but he caught him with his paws. They ran up the stairs and jumped onto the girls’ bed. They ran after the puppies but went to the wrong room. Then Digger and Scrappy went to another room because they were coming to their room. Eventually, when they found them, the puppies jumped on their legs.

“Arf, arf, arf-dee-arf,” said Digger.

“We can talk, Digger!” said Scrappy.

“Oh yeah!” said Digger.

From that day on, Digger and Scrappy had the best life any dog could wish for.

The Ice Cream Monster

Jack was at the park eating ice cream. He was alone. He was sitting on a bench. He finished his ice cream and decided to play on the swings. He was feeling good. He was joyful. When it was night, he started to become worried because a big ice cream monster tried to attack him. The ice cream monster had a big mouth with goopy ice cream in his mouth. He had an ice cream ninja sword, and threw it at Jack.

Jack ran away. He ran to Manhattan, but the monster followed him. Jack stood up in a big tower, and he told the people, “Help! A monster is coming!”

They said, “We’re going to attack the ice cream monster!” They were getting ready to attack the monster. They used a lot of ice cream with a big pile of ice.

Jack was doing something different. He was trying to get an ice cream shooter. He got it from the ice cream material store. It was near the ice cream shop on Sesame Street.

He went back to the group. He said, “We’re going on the train to find the ice cream monster. He is always in the ice cream store next to Toys R Us.”

All of the police were blocking Jack when he went to the ice cream shop because the store was closed. One of the teammates distracted the police. Jack was distracting the police too. All of the teammates went inside the shop and the ice cream monster was inside. The teammate shoot the ice cream monster with a lot of ice cream and ice. It caused him to vomit ice cream. It caused him to have a broken eye and slime was going over him.

He fought back with a ninja star and one of the teammates fell down. Jack had sleeping potion and put it on the police. The police fell asleep. Jack came in in slow motion. His body is like he’s actually cool. His arms and his legs are moving slow and his arms are in his pockets. The ice cream monster had melted. And all of the teammates were happy and they went back home. Jack went to his mom and he told his mom that a big monster came, but Jack attacked the monster. All of the teammates said bye to Jack and Jack went back to sleep. And the teammates went back to sleep. And it was the next morning, and another monster came. They cooked up a plan. They smashed the monster with a big giant hammer and he was dead. THE END!

Untitled

Chapter 1

I admired the little brown houses as I walked through the quaint village. I stopped at the end of the road and saw a beautiful valley in front of me with a tiny stream. I could smell the jasmine and honeysuckle in the air.

Then a stranger with silvery blond hair approached me and with a welcoming smile. She said, “Welcome to the City of ––

Suddenly, she got shot in the back with an arrow. Slowly her eyes turned black, her skin turned grey, she looked at me with a disturbing smile and ––

I jolted up, banging my head on the wooden headboard of my bed. When, I wondered as I rubbed my throbbing head, are these visions going to stop? Although the beginning of the vision felt safe and slightly familiar, I did not like the end when the lady transformed into a creepy creature. Out of all the visions that I’d had, I felt that this one was the worst. Many questions started popping into my mind. How come these visions only started two months ago? Where was the beautiful valley that I saw? And most importantly, what do the visions mean?

“Kayla, the school bus is here!” yelled my mother.

I groaned. Those six words were the words that I dreaded the most every morning. The thought of walking into a seventh grade classroom full of judgmental kids and strict teachers made me shiver, especially when I could have a vision at any time. I grabbed my schoolbag and headed downstairs. Of course my brother was already waiting for me, tapping his foot impatiently when I walked into the tiny kitchen. Why was he so excited about school? I guess because he still was in first grade, and in first grade all you do is play games and read books. Sometimes I wished I was still a little kid: oblivious, carefree, and vision-free.

“Hurry up, Kayla!” My mother snapped me out of my thoughts.

“Yeah, Kayla, hurry up!” Henry (my brother) mimicked. Rushed, I shoved

a muffin in my mouth, grabbed Henry’s small pudgy hand, and hurried toward the dreaded school bus.

I dragged him into the seats in the front row as fast as I could. The kids in the back could be dangerous. They had bullied Henry before (he is very gullible) and I wanted to keep him as safe as possible. The ride to school seemed to go on for a long time, even though it was actually quite short. As we passed the fountain near the park, I thought about the memories of my father there when I was just a little bit younger than Henry.

In books where the protagonist’s mother or father dies, the character always remembers only a snippet or two about their parents. But I could remember every little detail about my dad. Weirdly, my mother never appeared in these memories, it was just me and my dad. Me and Dad racing down the streets of New York. Me and Dad sliding down the slides in the park. Me and Dad reading a book together. I also remembered the night he left. Before he drove off into the foggy night and left me with my mother he said, Reach deep down into your heart and remember.

Before I knew it, hundreds of children were rushing out of the bus. Grabbing my brother’s hand we pushed our way to the exit.

“Bye Kayla!!! See you after school!” Henry bounced away into the small building on the left side of the field of grass. Sighing, I waved goodbye to him and walked to the huge building on the right side. After putting all my books away, I found the English classroom. It was covered with school projects and decorations that brought back bad memories of the past years: Ms. Gutter’s attempt to make the classroom seem like a ‘happy environment.’ Ms. Gutter finally walked in, wearing her long weird robes (where did she buy those from?) and lipstick. Even though she was very cheerful, she always gave us a quiz every three days.

“Oh no! I forgot the classical music today! Why didn’t you kids remind me?”

… No response.

“I see, aren’t we all tired today!”

… No response. That’s basically how the whole class went.  

The morning flew by and soon it was time for history class. History class was the most boring class ever!! Ms. Rath drones on and on during the whole class, so you would understand my ‘excitement’ for history class. I walked into class and took my usual seat in the middle. Ms. Rath started her lecture about World War II (or something). She started talking about the book we were going to read when I felt a nauseous feeling in my stomach and the desks in front of me started fading to white. The whole world around me changed into diluted colors. I always felt this familiar feeling in my stomach when I was about to have a vision. Panicked, I stumbled out of my seat and trudged to the corner of the faded room, attempting to hide from the other people in the room. I looked out the window and saw…

the same breathtaking valley. But this time a dark, curly-haired little girl pranced through the green grass and spun in circles. Then another figure appeared beside her and lifted her up on his broad shoulders, let out a deep rumbling laugh that vibrated through my chest. I then felt a pang of familiarity that disappeared as fast as it came. When the little girl ran into the small cabin the whole vision flickered into a dark, cloudy scene with demon-like arrows flying into people’s hearts, but then the beautiful landscape came back.

A moment later, the desks materialized again and then the shocked faces of my peers popped out from the fog, and lamely I replied, “I have a stomach ache.”

… Silence.

“Of course you do!” Ms. Rath cut in, “Let’s get you to the nurse. Don’t worry, Kayla!”

Ms. Rath dragged me into the enclosed hallways and once we got to a small corner she stopped and faced me, her cheerful and serene smile twisted into a dark frown. “What were you thinking, going to school without consuming the right medication this morning? You never had a vision before during school, are you running out of the pills?” She scolds, looking down at me. I was shocked.

“Uh, I, um, what?” Ms. Rath’s anger bubbled down to confusion.

“Your medications, the one you take to prevent the visions. Your father gave them to you! You will obviously be getting visions when you are this far away from the City.”

I paused for a second, the shock of finding out that Ms. Rath knew about my visions faded away and was replaced by the realization that the question that had clouded my mind for almost a month had been answered.

“You know why I’m getting these visions? You know?”

“Of course I know! I was assigned as your father’s advisor when he took you and left the City. You grew up there, that’s why you’re getting visions. Why didn’t your father tell you all of this?”

“My father left me and my mom, and from what I remember, he never told me anything about this ‘City’!” After saying this, it felt like ten weights were dropped on my heart; I couldn’t take all this information. “Okay, I think I feel a little — ” I searched for the right words to say to Ms. Rath’s impatient face, “overwhelmed.”

Without saying anything else, I pushed past her to get inside the classroom to grab my stuff, ignoring the weird looks with confidence. Then I called my mom, saying that I had a headache and I wanted to walk home.

I finally took my first full breath of air walking outside onto the bumpy sidewalk; watching the big puff of air dissolve into the cold winter sky. This was how I escaped: I had to be by myself, outside with no walls surrounding me. I started to think about what Ms. Rath had said. She used to be my father’s advisor in this whole different city (that I didn’t remember), why would my father need an advisor? She had also mentioned that I grew up there.

That was why these visions seemed so familiar! There was also a medication I could take to prevent the visions? How come I didn’t remember all of this? By the time I passed the Choo Choo Train Park, where I had fallen and broken my knee a while back (I never played in there ever again), I figured out the answers to my questions, I needed to see my father.

I climbed up the stairs two steps at a time up to my room and flopped face down onto my old worn quilt. My aura of peace quickly faded away once I was inside my room. After a few minutes of silence, I heard the steps of my mother’s soft slippers climbing up the stairs. I sighed ready for her to interrogate me. She walked in and looked at me for a good ten seconds and then walked over to sit beside me. Her blond hair tickled my cheek.

“How was your walk?” She looked at me with kind eyes. I laughed. My mother always asked the smart and unexpected questions, I loved her personality.

“It was relaxing and it cleared my mind,” I told her, smiling. My mom nodded with an understanding face and we just sat there quietly. I then thought about my idea to find my dad. Should I tell her? No, then I’ll have to tell her about my visions and I can’t do that, there must be a reason for why my dad left. I then crawled into my bed to lay down and calm my pounding head. Soon after that, I felt the weight of my mom leaving the bed and walking out of my room.

 

Chapter 2

I loved little children. They were so innocent. Henry was innocent but he was also very smart and educated about the world. Kids were not judgmental at all. That was why I was excited when my mom told me that my baby cousin Maureen was coming over to barbeque with us. Finally, I had somebody to spill my problems to! I felt like telling Henry about our dad might be too overwhelming. I didn’t want him to feel the same way I felt and I didn’t want to frighten him.

After hearing the shrieking of my two little cousins entering our quiet house, I rushed downstairs. Immediately guilt crept over me when I saw Henry realize that he had gotten home on the bus by himself.

“Oh Henry, I’m so sorry I didn’t come down earlier when you came home!” I reached over to ruffle his fluffy blonde hair.

“That’s okay, I know you have a bad headache,” he replied. I felt lonely realizing that he and my mom didn’t know about about the visions, or about this whole other life in this crazy demonized city that our dad potentially lives in. A high-pitched squeal broke mye away from my thoughts ––

“Maureen!” I looked to the doorway and saw my tired but bright-looking Aunt Pearl (I had always loved that name) and Uncle Thomas carrying little two year old Maureen and her brother, Peter, who was two years older than her.

My mother shrieked as she ushered the small group of people into the living room.

“Hi! Come in, come in! I missed you so much.” That was probably true, my mother’s whole family lived in Brighton so having them come to visit us in New York state was only a once-in-awhile type of thing. Aunt Pearl nodded and followed my mom into the cheerful room chattering excitedly and admiring Henry’s artwork from school hanging on the walls. Henry makes a beeline to Peter soon after the family settles down. I think Henry liked to boss him around after being bossed around by me (I tried my best to not tell him what to do, but sometimes the orders just slipped out!) so he chosed to play with Peter. I brought Maureen to the small playroom filled with random toy trucks and cars that Henry played with. I watched her grab and whack a small purple car. I sighed remembering the happy carefree times before I got my visions, two months ago, I didn’t have to take some medication to be able to go to school and there were no gaping holes in my life.

“Maureen, do you know who my father is?” I asked her.  Her little blonde head perked up after hearing her name and she stared at me blankly. “That’s okay, I don’t know who he is myself. I don’t even know where he lives. I mean, is he still alive?” I rambled on and on about my dad not caring about what the little girl next to me was thinking. Suddenly, Maureen pointed at the window behind me, her face pale. Whimpers started to come out of her tiny mouth. I stopped, my mouth seeming to zip up like the jacket hanging on the wooden rack. I turned around slowly, this was probably how the characters in horror movies felt; that rush of panic in your stomach.

The person standing –– no, floating –– was smiling at Maureen with black, empty eyes. His skin was grey, and there was a black arrow that seemed to vibrate stuck in his back. A picture flashed through my mind: the woman who approached me in my vision. I shrieked when I made eye contact with his ghostly eyes. Weirdly, fear appeared in his eyes and the man started to disappear, limb by limb. I looked at Maureen, she stared back at me, and screamed.

My mother rushed into the room. She stopped when she saw my eyes. I looked at her, scared and confused. After she grabbed Maureen she walked toward me slowly and almost cautiously. I followed her gaze to the antique mirror that hung above the small table on the wall. I rushed to it and stared at myself. Frizzy brown hair, pale skin, orange eyes –– WAIT! I do not have orange eyes! I started to panic, I looked down at the scratched wooden floor and then stared at the mirror again. The fiery orange faded into its usual, normal, dull brown color that I saw every time I looked at myself in the mirror. I heard Aunt Pearl and Uncle Tom walk over and turn silent in the back of my mind. I looked to the left and saw Henry staring at me, his mouth wide open. I just stared at the mirror in horror, what am I? What thing did I become?

 

The night went by in a blur, and all I saw was the fear in my mother’s eyes, imprinted in my mutant eyes. Never in my life, had I felt so terrified and uncomfortable. My visions started to come into the world; they were actually real. So that meant that this city was actually real, this whole mess was real. There was a hole in my chest –– you know, that sour feeling that you get when you drown in panic and confusion. The feeling that I got when I was lost in the new gigantic building in the beginning of middle school? That feeling was taking over my heart.

My mother stopped talking to me altogether. I think she was still trying to wrap her head around the idea that I’m a creepy mutant person with wonky eyes. I’m also trying.

I realized that I was the only person in this realistic world who knew about these visions. Except… except for Ms. Rath. Ms. Rath knows about the City. She was my father’s advisor. It seemed like my teacher had more to tell me before I ran away.

 

During the evening, we went out to our well kept lawn to stargaze. I tried to make out each constellation but failed. How are you able to organize so many stars into one constellation?

I sighed when I went under the covers. Another day of potential visions. Another day of fear. Another day of confusion.

 

Chapter 3

My next mission was to find Ms. Rath and make sure that she told me everything she knew about my dad and my eyes. Without going to school. Do you really expect me to be able to go to school the day after having a frightening (and embarrassing) ‘stomach ache’? No you don’t. That was why I was never going back to that history classroom. Fortunately, I didn’t have a vision last night, and I was granted permission miss school. That means I had a whole day to think about my eyes. My weird eyes.

My mom and I were both a little bit rattled after the incident last night and I got a refreshing vision-free night to let the idea of my mutant facial body part sink in. I hoped my mom was as understanding as she always was. I sighed as I walked down the hall to the bathroom. It seemed like I’d been sighing a lot lately. I wondered why. I was stopped by Henry.

“I have been having dreams.” That sentence that came out of my brother’s mouth stopped me on my tracks. “Weird dreams. Weird dreams with big orange eyes staring at me, with Dad telling me to ‘remember’ or something like that.” Henry seemed to get more frightened with each word.
You have been having dreams about my eyes? Since when?” My brother may know more about me than I do.

“The first dream started two months ago, but I have only gotten three in total.” Henry paused, it seemed like he wanted to tell me more, but his emotions were holding him back. A few seconds later Henry whispered in a timid voice “I’m worried, Kayla.” My insides crushed. I was able to deal with my visions but the thought of Henry having to go through them too made me feel horrible.

“It’s ok to be afraid, Henry. I’ve been having visions too. They’re about our dad and a city where demons are invading. I’m trying to find out more about this mess and I think I know someone who might know more about our dad and my abilities,” I told him, trying to help Henry understand.  His eyes lit up, he probably saw this as some sort of adventure in the comic books… Kayla and Henry’s Adventure to Find Their History Teacher to Find Out More About Their Father!!!

I want to read that comic.

“Kayla, you may not think so, but I think your powers are really cool. In my dreams, your eyes have saved lives, actually, they called it Kratos?” Henry said thoughtfully. I saved lives? Me?

“You know what? We are going to find out more about this whole situation. My history teacher, Ms. Rath, knows about our father and ––

“Wait, your history teacher, the one who is friends with Mom? She babysits me while you’re gone!” Henry interrupted me. Ms. Rath babysits Henry? Knowing that she has been inside my home for something not related to school creeped me out. A lot. But that also meant that I could talk to her about everything. Finally, I felt so relieved to talk to someone about my visions.

 

Chapter 4

I stared at the demon towering over me, trying to get into its ugly mind. I snapped my fingers and the demon, with the five demons behind it, disappeared into ashes. I felt a fraction of my energy fade away as I stumbled to the safe house nearest to me. My energy seemed to be dissolving more and more every time I destroyed demons. I moved around the many injured people and went to go find my sister who told me specifically to meet her in the safe house near the Lily River after three in the afternoon. I heard shouts from out of the window and the whistle of an arrow. I wanted to scream in frustration. Why wasn’t General Lucien sending in the city’s powerful troops? Was he only relying on the talents of the Mutatia? The General’s intelligence seemed to be dimming after his advisor left. Our proud and beautiful city cannot be turned into a wasteland of demons.

“ Clairementine! Over here!” I turn my head to my sister sitting on the bench, finishing up wrapping a big bandage around a wounded Mutatia. I sighed at the sound of her childhood nickname for me. “Finally, I was so worried after the General sent the alarm to the Mutatia and you didn’t come back!” Her gentle face was eerily calm as she stared me down. I avoided her look by looking at my small signal panel on my wrist that was buzzing with an alert –– ALL MUTATIA MUST RETURN TO THE SAFEHOUSES BY THE FOURTH HOUR.  –– General Lucien. Oops. That’s why I did not recognize anyone on the battlefield.

“How did you even know about the alert, Grace?” I interrogated my sister. She sheepishly pointed at the wrist of her old Mutatia patient. I sighed and slumped into the dated, out-of-place, armchair. The springs squeaked under the new weight. I ripped of the silver mask that proved my status.

“Claire!” I just closed my eyes, not wanting to deal with anyone at this moment. “Claire! Wake up!” I inwardly groaned and opened my eyes. I see Brendan’s concerned face staring down at me. “Oh, good you’re awake.” I really wanted to laugh but I knew it would be unseemly for this situation.

“The General wanted all the captains to repower in the safehouses.” I nodded and dismissed my messenger. He still lingered. I turned my head and was about to question it when he said, “Most of your Saplings died overusing their power and the general was very angry.”

WHAT!!! Okay, calm down. I’m the leader I have to stay calm. “Oh! That’s awful! I will have to speak to him later to get some advice. Thank you so much for the information.” I said through gritted teeth. Brendan seemed to be disgusted at my lack of sympathy for the young Mutatia who died, but still understood my cue to leave. Even though he was almost a year older than me, it didn’t matter, he would still take my orders –– I was his captain. All of us trained and fought together equally. Anyone could also be your group’s captain, if you worked hard and wanted the responsibility. The responsibility. That was probably the worst part of my job. I was good at battle plans and organizing everyone and I loved being a leader; someone people could respect and look up to you, but I disliked having to always be bothered, always having to discuss things with other leaders, saying the right thing to be a good role model for my Saplings and, of course, making sure that they were trained the right way and using their privileged powers correctly. The young fighters were always so passionate about defending their city, they overused their talents, some were more powerful than others, and didn’t get to recharge in the madness of battle, therefore, they died.

I was used to all these tragedies –– people dying, turning into demons, etc.

I followed the signs of the safehouse to the repowering station, slipping my mask back on, and feeling a bit self conscious, as I do each time I put it on. Once I saw the small enclosed room, I waited on the line of Mutatia. Energy was extremely important to us. No energy? No powers, and no defending our city. Some Mutatia used different types of energy, but most used electricity. The general tried to experiment with other types of energy; water,  fire, wind, and solar. Different Mutatia reacted to different types, so the General decided to just use all of them. I was assigned to do tests on the energies for my project as captain last year. It took maybe about ten million years and ten million pounds of hard work to complete it. But the outcome was useful for my group and my battle friends. I figured out that the most powerful type of energy is electricity, and the least powerful was solar power. The line shuffled forward.

When I finished charging up I set off to find the General to talk about the situation. I tapped my wristband on my arm to to turn on the green light in the corner of the screen, to turn on my tracking device so my leader can know where I am. (You have to turn it off while in the power station). Every time I saw the lime green light flash on, I  felt a vibration between the vertebra of my neck which sent shudders down my spine. I seemed to be the only captain who has not adapted to this feeling, the feeling of people watching you and your every move. Maybe if they had chosen somewhere else to place the device, like my arm, I would not feel the vibrations.

Even though the battles outside my window are ruthless and bloody, the enemies do have some sort of organized plan that we have learned to live around. It goes mostly by hours. Because I have gotten used to the war scene after many years, I had learned the “schedule” and memorized it. I had to, all captains had to. Out of all the inhabitants of this city, the ones I pitied the most were the newborns, the toddlers. They have to grow up and figure out who they were while this war was raging outside their windows. While they took their first steps, and babbled their first words, there would be sounds of battle and demons in the background. Their first memories would be of having to hide in their shelters, and they would not be able to enjoy the amazing landscape of the city. While my childhood was full of oblivious, carefree, and battle-free memories: bounding down the valleys with Grace and spending time with my mother baking goods for our neighbors, (our city prides ourselves on the value of community that all children are being taught in their daily lives). There were little of these precious memories but I kept them close to my heart.

Sometimes I wondered if inhabitants of this city were actually going to experience that kind of life now that it has changed so much. Instead of superiors being the mayor, politicians, educators, the most important leader of our society was the General and people here looked up to the military: the fighters and their captains, and at the moment it was the Mutatia.

I wondered what the change “back to normal” will be like. Hard? Quick? Or will things slowly start to change. How will we ever forget the hours of when the demons will strike or when they rest and we can finally run back home that are lodged into our brain? I would never be able to stroll across town in the middle of the fifth hour (when the demons fight their second to last attack) calmly, weaponless.

Getting rid of these thoughts that came across my mind daily, I readjusted my mask that never seemed to form comfortably over my skin like it did for my fellow leaders. I then took a sharp turn left in a small alley way, ducking my head to avoid eye contact with anyone else.

 

Chapter 5

The General’s office was right in the middle of the city, for easy access. Usually he had many visitors, but at that hour, most inhabitants were “enjoying” their time in their homes. As I walked up the steps, a figure came into view. She had a silver mask on, covering her face the same way mine covers my face. The long dark braid that tumbled gracefully down her back was the only way I recognized the captain. Rayna. Funny how it took so long for me to determine who someone, that I have worked with for many years, was. She rudely bumped into me to acknowledge me.

“Oh, Claire, I did not see you in any of the safehouses. I was worried,” she said in a polite manner (but fake), even though she was obviously trying to embarrass me for not paying attention to the alert. She had always been like this, since we were younger and we just started learning how to be captains. Once, I smuggled in a bag of chips during a training to eat during break and, of course, Rayna was there and saw me take a bite out of a crunchy, greasy potato chip. She immediately told our trainer and he has hated me ever since. I have hated her ever since.

“I did not notice the message,” I replied stiffly. I did not want to give her any satisfaction with my tone.

“I heard what happened to your group,” she smiled. Wow, she just went straight into it. She didn’t even try to be polite this time. She was with me during the lecture about how keeping the fighters in your group safe and by saying that, she reminded me of why I should be ashamed. For once I was glad my mask was over my head because I am not good at hiding the emotions on my face. I roughly shoved past her, and strode up the rest of the stairs.

loser.com

“Donald Trump is a big fat loser because his facial expressions are not good,” said Peaches.

“Well, you need to pee every second,” said Donald Trump.

“Well, actually,” Peaches said, “I only pee every sixty-one seconds.” Peaches hated Donald Trump, because once, Peaches was on loser.com. He loved being on it because he wanted all the media, but Donald Trump took his place. They were enemies.

“You are a peach. You should be ashamed of yourself. And I am a real person.” Donald Trump made fun of Peaches.

“Excuse me? Hold up here. Your face is so ugly that when you wanted to join the ugly contest, they said no pros allowed.” Peaches stood up for himself.

“Donald Trump! Can I take a selfie with you?” a fan of his said.                                                              

“See, Peaches? People love my face so much that they want to take pictures with me,” Donald Trump said.

Peaches grunted, and Donald Trump went to take a selfie with one of his fans.

Donald Trump said, “You’re so fat that when you got locked in Sleepy’s, you had to sleep on the floor.”

Peaches said, “Shut up. Bye.”

Donald Trump said, “I have to go to a party with all of my fans.” Donald Trump threw Peaches in the garbage.

There was a homeless person named Calvin Klein. He was in the military, and he had no legs. He decided to help Peaches, not because he wanted to eat him, but because he wanted to help people who are hurt like him.

Calvin Klein took Peaches out of the garbage can and threw him at Donald Trump. Calvin put padding under Donald Trump just in case Peaches fell. Peaches and Calvin Klein high-fived each other.

Peaches started to have a population of fans walk toward him. The people were making a heart shape.

“Boo, Donald Dump.”

After, Donald Trump said, “I am walking towards my fans’ party anyway, so bye.”

A minute later, Donald Trump saw all of his fans coming toward the heart shape.

Donald Trump and Peaches started a debate.

Donald Trump said, “If anybody wants to marry me, I’m rich.”

And everybody except the man with no legs went to go from a heart shape in front of Donald Trump.

Obama came in, and since he was president, he had the right to put Peaches on loser.com. Now all of Donald Trump’s fans became Peaches fans. Peaches was so happy that he gave each homeless person $500 for food.

“My plan for 2020 is to get every homeless person a home and food.” One thousand people clapped and two people booed. Since the clapping was so loud, no one heard the boos.

So now, it was time to vote, and 90 percent of the whole world voted for Peaches except for Donald Trump’s wives and daughters. (The reason it was 10 percent was because Donald Trump married so many people.)

My Life

Chapter 1

I hear my mother making breakfast. The sun’s warmth is on my face, opening the morning to another wonderful day. I walk out of my room down to the kitchen to get breakfast. I eat my breakfast, nice warm pancakes topped with strawberries.

“Ellie, wake up!” I wake up to my friend Claire lightly shaking me to get me up. All the wishes I’ve ever had were in my dream, disappointing me, waking me up to a day trapped in a building I don’t like. I am in an orphanage with other people, people who wish their lives were better. I get out of bed get dressed in the ragged clothes that the orphanage provided for me. I walk out my room, go downstairs to another disgusting breakfast of cold eggs that haven’t been cooked fully. Staring at the eggs, I get the feeling that I should eat them. I have gotten used to it. I’ve been here since I was five. I am fourteen`now, and still stuck in the orphanage.

I remember the day when I was five, waiting for my parents to pick me up at school. It was rainy and foggy. The only person who picked me up was this creepy woman, named Ms. Kunzier. She told me to come with her. She brought me to my house and told me to pack my bags. Then she drove me to this building covered with vines. “You’re staying here now,” she told me. A burst of pain shot up my back; a tear rolled down from my eyes, making its way down to my cheek. She opened the door and walked me to where I was staying. I remember thinking that I would be home soon. But I never went home. An hour later she came back to my room and told me that my parents had been in a car accident.         

***

I used to play outside in my backyard all the time. Now, I cannot go outside whenever I want. The only outside I have is my imagination. I imagine being outside, running free. No one to tell me what to do and what not to do. A big field of grass, trees swaying, the smell of fresh grass. The wind blowing on me. Running away so that no one can find me. Growing up on my own.

No one ever visits this orphanage. I guess it’s because of how creepy it looks. Only once a while someone comes around and takes a tour. I’m probably going to be in here until I’m 18, and then I’ll start a life of my own.

In the orphanage, my life feels a video game, with someone outside the machine controlling every move I make. When the video game gets too old or out of order, I will get out. The video game of life. Obstacles here and there popping up in my face. I wish I was like someone not in an orphanage, someone who has a perfect life.

***

I go back to my room, get into my bed and lay my head on the pillow. My eyes slowly close into a nice soft sleep. I slowly drift off into a weird dream, where Ms. Kunzier is pulling my arm and taking me to a tiny walk in closet. She ties me up in a chair. I jerk my body away from the chair to brake the rope. but the chair gets up with me and follows me wherever I go. I go to the door of the closet and try to get out, but Ms. Kunzier locked the door to keep me in. My eyes slowly open. It’s just a dream, it’s just a dream, I keep telling myself.

 

Chapter 2

“Hey, people!” Claire says.

“Hey!” Molly, my other friend, replies.

“What’s up?” I say.

“You know, the usual, nothing much,” Claire replies.

“Wait!” Molly shouts.

“Shhh,” Claire and I whisper.

“Sorry, but wait — I have an idea!” Molly says.

“Then what is it?” Claire replies impatiently.

“Um… I forgot,” Molly says.

“Ugh” Claire sighs.

“No, really… what were you going to say?” I ask.

“Well, it was probably a really stupid thought,” Molly hesitated.

“Just tell us,” I reply, ignoring Molly. “We’re your friends.”

“Okay, fine,” Claire says.

“It’s impossible, but it’s sort of about how we can escape from here. I mean, I never wanted to be here in the first place,” Molly blurts out.

“Same,” Claire and I say in unison.

“I’ve just always felt blocked up in a jail cell here.”

“Let’s think about a plan. Meet me in Secret Headquarters after lunch,” I say.

Secret Headquarters is a secret place that no one has discovered yet except for us. There is a little door in the bottom of the wall… actually, it’s not really a door, but a little square shaped hole in the wall that functions like a door. When you go inside, there is a little space where you can sit. When Claire and I met, we found a hiding place, and our friendship began. Six months later Molly came along and joined our little friendship. Claire and I showed her Secret Headquarters, and that is how we all became close friends.

When I get to Secret Headquarters, I find Molly quietly reading. “BOO!” I scream.

“Ahhh!” she screams, but then she sees me and starts laughing.

Shortly after, Claire barges into the room. “The worst thing almost happened… well, one of the worst things.”

“What?” I ask.

“Well, Ms. Kunzier stopped me and asked me where I was going, but I said I was going to the bathroom and she let me go,” Claire explains.

“Good thing she didn’t find out about Secret Headquarters,” I say. “Okay, anyway, let’s get started. First, let’s think of a plan.”

“The only way for us to get out of here is to get the key to unlock the main door,” says Claire.

“Well, I know where the key is kept,” replies Molly.  

“Where? How do you know?” I question.  

“Let’s just say that I went into her room once,” Claire answers.

“Was there actually blood and spider webs in her room?” I ask. Everybody says that Ms. Kunzier’s room is filled with blood marks and spider webs.

“Not at all, surprisingly,” Claire replies.

“That’s good to know,” I mutter. “So, back to the planning… How does tomorrow night sound to you guys for the first attempt of the escape?” I ask.

“Sure, I’m fine with that,” says Claire.

“What do you think, Molly?”

“I’m also fine with that,” says Molly.

“Okay, maybe at 1 in the morning, since Ms. Kunzier is probably going to be asleep… even though people say she sleeps with one eye open,” I add. “So, when she is about to close her door to go to sleep, let’s run up to it and push it a crack open. About one hour later we can get the key to open the front door. Sound good?”

“Yes!” says Molly.

“Sure!” says Claire.

“Okay, remember… tomorrow,” I confirm.

We walk out of secret headquarters, quietly chanting, “Escape attempt number one!”

I go to bed thinking that finally I will get out of here.

 

Chapter 3

The next day, Molly, Claire, and I try to get as much sleep as we can so that we’ll be ready for our big night. We pack what is really special to us. I get an old sack and put my stuffed bunny in it. My stuffed bunny’s name is Bun-Bun. I have had Bun-Bun since I was born. In the sack I also pack a bottle of water and some clothes.

At midnight, Molly, Claire, and I sneak to Secret Headquarters. We discuss what we are going to do, and prepare ourselves for the things coming ahead. At 1:30 in the morning, we hear Ms. Kunzier walking down the hall and going to her room.

”Oh my gosh, she is coming!” Molly blurts out. Luckily, in this case, Secret Headquarters is about a meter away from Ms. Kunzier’s bedroom. We hear Ms. Kunzier approach her bedroom door. We rush out to near the entrance of Secret Headquarters. When she opens the door, we quietly run out and slowly close her door until it is open just a crack. Exactly 45 minutes later we take a peek through Ms. Kunzier’s room and see that she’s snoring.

“Okay, Molly, since you are the quietest and you know where the key is, you are going to get the key,” I whisper. Molly tiptoes down to where the key is. Molly sneezes and Ms. Kunzier turns and moans a bit. Molly runs out of the room.

“That was close!” She whispers, relieved. When we get downstairs to the main door, Molly places the key into the key slot.

“Who is that?” a voice says. Molly, Claire, and I jump up in unison. Ms. Saltine, the orphanage maid, comes into the same room as us. “Found you! Girls, you know you should not be down here at this time of night,” she says.

“Sorry, we didn’t mean to–”

Ms. Kunzier cuts me off by coming into the room. “Girls! Go to your room. All of you will have to wake up extra early tomorrow and help make breakfast. We will be having fresh pancakes, and you girls will have fresh leftovers. And bonus! You will clean up all the dirty dishes!” She walks away and cackles her very annoying cackle. She never gives us orphans fresh food – we always have leftovers.

“Ugh…” We all walk back to our bedrooms.     

***

“Try again on your adventure,” Ms. Saltine says to us the next morning. We are all shocked. We do not understand what just happened. It takes us time to understand what she meant. Even though we just did a lot of work by cooking a meal for 25 orphans and are now eating food scraps, we feel like we just accomplished something. Ms. Saltine is on our side.

Never Betray Someone

Yesterday, my friend betrayed me. The teacher asked her if I was talking. I don’t know why. He must have thought I was talking because my hand was placed over my mouth. I was really uncomfortable in my chair. I didn’t want to get in trouble. I had already had a bad recess, and now I had a headache because my friend was really inappropriate at lunch. I don’t want to say what happened, because it was too gross.

Mr. Monserati asked my friend, “Is Matthew talking?”

My friend hesitated. She laughed and said, “YES.”

I really wasn’t talking. She betrayed me. She was no longer my friend.

Because I am not God, I did not forgive her for getting me in trouble. I felt mad at my friend. God would have felt sad for her because she committed a sin by betraying someone. Judas turned his master in for thirty pieces of gold. Judas saw his sin and hung himself. My friend did not do that – all she did was hang out with other people. Judas had also betrayed him. It is bad to betray. I hope she will apologize. If she does, I will forgive her. Amen.

Lost Kids

Once upon a time, there were two boys who hated school. They went to recess and decided they wanted to run away, so they ran off into the forest and got lost.

 

SCENE 1

ALAN

I don’t want to go to school! I don’t want to go to school!

 

ALAN’S MOM

Too bad, so sad. You. GO.

 

ALAN

I left my homework at school and I don’t want my teacher to be mad at me.

 

ALAN’S MOM

Tell me the truth, I saw your homework at home.

 

ALAN

Fine. The teacher said I have… (takes a deep breath) D-Y-S-L-E-X-I-A.

 

ALAN’S MOM

No, you don’t! When you were three you told me you read the whole series of Harry Potter.

 

ALAN

No, I didn’t, I actually lied to you.

 

MOM

I’ll call your teacher and ask.

 

ALAN

Fine, go ahead.

 

MOM

        She picks up the phone to call, but then puts it down. 

Actually, I believe you. Maybe you do have dyslexia. But you still have to go to school.

 

ALAN

Ugh. Fine.

 

Lights out.

SCENE 2

        In reading class (ELA).

 

TEACHER

Write a whole paragraph on what we just learned.

        The TEACHER turns to write on the board.

 

ALAN

(To himself) Should I try or should I sleep? I’ll just sleep, I don’t need this rubbish.

 

He falls asleep. The TEACHER comes to him and pokes him on the shoulder. Then the recess bell rings. ALAN wakes up.

 

TEACHER

Just keep trying! It’s okay to mess up, just keep trying!

 

Everyone else has gotten up to get their coats and walks out of the classroom, JACK looks at ALAN with understanding and pity. ALAN rolls his eyes at the teacher and leaves, with JACK following behind him.

 

SCENE 3

        ALAN sits on the bench crying at recess.

JACK

Are you okay?

 

ALAN

No. I just went to sleep because I didn’t understand.

 

JACK

You don’t understand what?

 

ALAN

Don’t tell anybody, okay?

 

JACK

Okay, I promise.

 

ALAN

(whispers) I. Have. D-Y-S-L-E-X-I-A.

 

JACK

Let me tell you a secret. I have dyslexia too.

 

ALAN

       ALAN looks at JACK in awe, and then gives him a big hug.

 

JACK

I have always thought of getting lost and not going to school.

 

ALAN

That is a great idea!

 

JACK

Since we’re at recess, let’s do it now!

 

ALAN

Wait, but the teacher wants to talk to me after school.

 

JACK

Oh whatever, forget about it.

 

ALAN

Where should we go?

 

JACK

       He writes down “Bahamas” and shows ALAN.

 

ALAN

What’s Bamahams?

 

JACK

(gently) It’s called the Bahamas.

 

ALAN

That would be too hard, let’s go somewhere else. Oh, I know! The forest!

 

JACK

Uhh, I’m a little scared of bears, and like cats, and like bunnies, and like trees.  But… okay.

 

ALAN

Are you scared of something?

 

JACK

(lying) No, not at all.

 

ALAN

Whatever. Let’s get the heckster out of here.

 

SCENE 4

        In the forest, the sounds of birds and animals can be heard. They’ve just arrived.

JACK

Oh. T-t-trees!

 

ALAN

Okay? Dude, are you scared of something?

 

JACK

Fine, yes. I’m scared of the things I mentioned before we left to go to the forest.

 

ALAN

Dude, why didn’t you tell me this? Before, you said that you were not scared of those things. We could have gone somewhere where you wouldn’t be scared.

 

JACK

I’ll be honest next time.

 

ALAN

Okay.

 

JACK

(looking up at the sky looking at the birds) I wish I was a bird and I could be free and not have dyslexia.

 

ALAN

(standing there in silence with his arms crossed looking up at the sky, talking to himself) That was my dream when I was little, to be a bird.

 

JACK

Oh well.

       JACK walks with his head down, sad. JACK bumps into a tree.

 Ahhh!

 

ALAN

Jeez, Jack! Calm down!

 

The boys see something on the tree.

 

JACK

Oh my gosh! The t-tree said something.

 

ALAN

Let me read it. Hmmm… Pelh pere.

 

JACK

I don’t think that is was it says. Our teacher told me a trick. Let me try it. Hmmm. I think it says, “Help here.” Yes, that must be it.

 

ALAN

Who wants to help us?

 

JACK

Alan, I have one question. Why does it say it on the t-tree and not the mud or something?

 

ALAN

Well, maybe somebody was scared of the trees and they needed to escape very fast because they just can’t handle trees and they said “help’’ because they just can’t find the way out of here.

 

JACK

O-o-okay. How can we help?

 

ALAN

Oh my gosh. Look at the footsteps on the floor that are right next to the tree. Maybe that’s where the man tried to escape.

 

JACK

Should we follow them?

 

ALAN

Okay. I hope these footsteps don’t lead to a dangerous place.

 

JACK

Wait, what do you mean a dangerous place?

 

ALAN

Listen, dude. We are in the middle of a forest. Anything can happen.

 

JACK

I’m starting to think that what we are doing is very bad. I mean, we’ve been in the forest for two days now. Don’t you think our parents will worry? Our parent sent us to school to learn right? If we are struggling we should tell the teacher and learn together. We can learn to read with dyslexia.

 

ALAN

Are you alright, man? But…

        JACK starts crying.

 

ALAN

I forgot about going back home and being in my mom’s arms. And her kissing me good night.

 

JACK

Let’s go back.

 

ALAN

Go back were? We are in the middle of the forest and it’s 3:00. By the time we get to school, it will be tomorrow at 1:00 in the morning.

 

JACK

How do we get out?

 

ALAN

The same way we came in.

 

JACK

Which is…?

 

ALAN

Man. We’ve got to be brave and follow the footsteps.

 

JACK

I don’t know about that.

 

ALAN

Jack… man up you have to face your fears.

 

JACK

I guess.

 

The boys walk more into the forest.

 

ALAN

Looks like the footsteps we saw earlier lead into a cave.

 

JACK shivers.

 

ALAN

Dude, this is the last time I’m telling you to man up and face your fears.

 

JACK

But…

 

Trees make sounds.

 

JACK

Ahhh. T-trees.

       JACK runs straight into the cave.

Uhhh, Alan you here, bro?

 

ALAN

JACK!!! Where are you???

 

JACK

I’m in a cave without t-trees.

 

ALAN

Ummm, is this the cave?

 

JACK

Hurry up! I am suffering in here!

 

JACK

Oh Alan, I see you!

 

ALAN

I see you too! But why are you holding a leaf in your hand from a tree?

 

JACK

Wait… WHAT?! Oh, this isn’t that bad.

 

ALAN

Oh look, there are more footsteps.

 

JACK

Let’s follow them.

 

ALAN

Okay.

 

ALAN and JACK follow the footsteps.

 

JACK

Oh look, there is our school.

 

ALAN’S MOM and JACK’S MOM are looking for them and crying.

 

JACK’S MOM

Jack, where were you? I was worried sick.

 

JACK

Well, we just couldn’t do it anymore.

 

JACK’S MOM

Couldn’t do what?

                

JACK

Well, long story. Well, actually, first thing’s first… I have dyslexia. Let’s talk about what happened at home. Just one thing…. All Alan’s fault.

 

ALAN

Dude, you agreed to it!

 

ALAN’S MOM

Agreed to what?

 

ALAN

Never mind.

 

JACK

Just saying, it’s you who should be blamed.

 

ALAN

Jack, I’m not talking to you anymore if you are going to blame me for it.

 

JACK

Fine.

 

ALAN

Good.

 

JACK

And one more thing: it’s Bahamas, you idiot.

 

ALAN ignores JACK.

 

ALAN

Why are you bringing that up now? Bye.

 

ALAN goes home with his mom.

 

SCENE 5

        The next day.

 

JACK

You know what? I was a huge idiot yesterday for blaming you.

 

JACK looks into ALAN’s eyes and cries and gives him a huge hug.

A Vehicle That Can Fly: The War Against Syria

Chapter 1

We were in a big fight with Syria. One day, when I was flying to Syria to defeat them, I was talking to my pilot, Matthew. Matthew was my first friend.

“Take a left turn and shoot a missile,” said Matthew.

“Roger that,” I said.

Sometimes I would just get bored and talk to my pilot Matthew. We had nothing in common because I am a vehicle and so is he…

Matthew wanted a special army helmet. I wanted to help him by forcing the U.S. Army to give every soldier a helmet. It could save him from dying. It was bulletproof, and when he put it on, it would make the whole suit bulletproof and create a facemask.

I looked down, then up. I saw a whole group of Syrian army planes. They were green with army waves. So I talked to the captain, but he didn’t really agree with me. I said that it would be very good –– we could win everything. He still didn’t believe me. Finally, I convinced him, and he believed me. So he gave me and my pilot a helmet, but not anybody else. I didn’t really care. Everybody else cared. They said, “That’s not fair at all!”

They said, “That’s not fair at all!”

I felt sad. But the captain said, “Hurry up, get in the sky!”

I was too busy daydreaming, so he hit me. I finally stopped daydreaming and took flight. Maybe you don’t understand what that means … neither do I. But what I mean is that I took off. Now, let’s get back to the story.

 

Chapter 2

After that, there were a whole bunch of army planes pointing at me because they thought that I would start daydreaming again. I got mad and told everybody that I would stay focused. Finally, they left.

It was daytime and kind of windy. I started to run low on gas. There was still one plane next to me who didn’t believe that I had stopped daydreaming, so it passed over a tiny bit of its gas to me. I went as high as I could. I became frozen and I couldn’t control what I was doing. I was a little bit curious, especially about how to control myself again. I turned my jets on and was finally able to control myself again. We were all so happy!

 

Chapter 3

Then I started going so high, I almost touched space. I couldn’t go down. I tried and tried.

I asked Matthew to help me, but he was too busy watching TV on his phone. (He thought that I was controlling myself). He was watching CNN news.

I yelled, “Matthew!!!”

I realized that he was asleep and felt disappointed.

He eventually woke up.

“Where am I? Is it already night?” asked Matthew.

“Now we’re in space,” I said.

“What?? Why did we go into space? I thought you would be controlling!” he said.

“No! You never said that.”

“I did, but you were just daydreaming.”

I really was daydreaming. I was in big trouble. I just knew we weren’t going to win the war with Syria.

There were 300 stars all over the place! “Wow! I never thought that was actually true!” I said.

As I got back from space, I heard a reporter say that we had won! I got back and landed. I got pushed back by an airplane.

“Wow,” I thought. “I never knew that would happen.”

“Well, you know, it wasn’t really as bad as I thought it was,” I said to Matthew.

Matthew said, “Seriously, I don’t care.”

He was still watching CNN.

Masters of the Universe (Excerpt)

  

Book 1: The Monsters Army

Chapter 1

A group of three kids named, John, George, and Steve seemed like normal average middle schoolers, but even though they didn’t know it, they would soon become great heroes. One day, they were having a math test that would be fifty percent of their grade. Normally, people would be really freaked out about stuff like that, but these kids were calm; they didn’t really care about tests. After the test was over, they talked in the hall while going over to Reading.

After that, Mr. Goodman, the math teacher, walked over to them, mumbling, “…have to escort them to town, but the army of Cyclop Giants is coming to the school…”

Once the math teacher left, George said, “Well, that was weird.”

Steve and John agreed. They looked out the window, and all three of them jumped back in shock.

“Is it just me, or is there a giant army of Cyclop Giants charging towards the school?” Steve exclaimed.

“No, it’s not just you. This is pretty freaky now. I guess what Mr. Goodman mumbled was right,” George said.

“Does that mean we have to be escorted to some kind of town?” John asked,  startled.

“Yes, it does,” Mr. Goodman said loudly. He suddenly picked up the boys, flew out the window, and into the sky. Of course, the three kids were screaming. Mr. Goodman flew them to a giant city with massive skyscrapers, but it didn’t look like any city the boys had seen before, and since they traveled a lot, they’d seen every single city in the U.S. They highly doubted they had gone out of the U.S. in the last thirty seconds.

When they landed, they were greeted by a bunch of other high schoolers that seemed about fourteen years old. All of them seemed pretty weird. Some had big wings and sick jetpacks, as well as big machine guns and  awesome bazookas.

George was really into those weapons because he was really good with technology. He made a working jetpack when he was five!

John, on the other hand, did very strange things when he was little. He weirdly talked to a wolf when he was seven, and he saw a Giant jump off a building.

Steve seemed to like the fighting aspect of things, considering he was always getting into fights. If it weren’t for John and George, he would’ve broken at least five people’s arms by now.

The trio was pretty freaked out about what just happened and how they just flew to a giant city. Everyone was talking about cabins and who would be in which cabin, when John’s head suddenly started to flicker between a wolf and a human. When it finally stopped, a group of people ran over to him and guided him to a small house that looked like a wolf.

Everyone claimed John was the son of a guy named Hoxarth, the master of wolves and bravery. Right after that, George’s hands were flickering back and forth from sword to normal hands. Just like John, after his flickering finished, another group of people came over to him to bring him to a small place that looked that a workshop. Everyone said he was the son of Foldis, master of Technology and explosives. Finally, armor started flickering around Steve, and a group of people brought him to a house that looked like a battlefield. He was apparently the son of Battlemark, the master of war and strategy.

They were all freaked out, but they agreed that this was pretty epic. Steve’s cabin was filled with armor and weapons just like an armory. George’s cabin was like a workshop with everybody building crazy axes and epic battle ships. John’s cabin was a lot less active than George’s and Steve’s, but it was also interesting because some random people were turning to wolves, and some people were talking about going on adventures.

Adventure sounded great to John since he loved action and traveling. After the trio got a tour of the city and their cabins, they went to a group meeting at 8 p.m.

Godigon, the leader, asked John, George, and Steve to approach the front of the room since they were the newcomers. He also mentioned that the Cyclop Giant’s army was attacking nearby and mentioned if anyone was willing to stand up to an adventure that may cause death. The mission was to scout their base and maybe even stop the army from reaching the city. He also said if they succeeded, they would be rewarded greatly.

John, George, and Steve had the urge to stand up for the city they’d only known about for four hours and help the almost four hundred people, even if they had to risk their lives. This left everyone else whispering about how they were the first newcomers to go on a quest in a century.

Godigon stood up tall and said “It’s settled. These three newcomers will be the ones to go to California, scout the Cyclop Giant’s base, and stop the army from attacking the city by February 1st, six days from now. All I can say is good luck, great heroes.”

The discussion was over. Everyone had dinner and went to sleep. John, George, and Steve were going to have a long day ahead of them when they left for California. All three had very strange dreams. John dreamt about the army of Cyclop Giants sitting by lots of fires in a large military site, which could possibly be their base. George’s dream was less about the quest and more about Happy Party where the show went on fire. And Steve dreamed of the same, but with Wheel of Bad Luck. They were all going to have exciting days tomorrow.

Creme Brulee

Characters:

CAT

SOPHIE

MYRTLE

JAKE

BAKER 1

BAKER 2

Scene 1

In a dark room with trash all over the floor.

JAKE is right outside the window of the dark room. He’s standing protectively outside of the house, so the BAKERS don’t enter.

JAKE

Nothing here, you Bakers. Now get a move on!

The BAKERS don’t move.

Sophie is standing in the dark room. She sneakily looks out the window, so they don’t see.

SOPHIE

The bakers are here. We have to hide!

CAT

Well, maybe you have to, because you stole that magic cinnamon from the spice stand.

SOPHIE

Well, you helped!

CAT

No, I did not!

SOPHIE

The bakers might come in.

CAT

I’m scared.

SOPHIE

I’ll be on the lookout.

SOPHIE looks out the window again.

SOPHIE 

The bakers are probably looking for that creme brulee recipe.

CAT 

Cool.

BAKER 1 is standing outside the window.

BAKER 1

Let us in, farm boy!

JAKE

I’m not a farm boy! Also, I don’t even know how to make toast!

 

BAKER 2

Let’s go. He’s innocent.

BAKER 1

Copy.

In the dark room.

SOPHIE

The bakers are gone.

CAT

I’m going to work.

SOPHIE

Work? I thought there weren’t any jobs to go to. I thought you could only –

CAT walks out of the room with some pep in her steps.

SOPHIE

I need to get to Kimmy’s house.

Scene 2

A cobblestone street. The very few people that are there are looking very scared. CAT is walking down the street.

CAT

Hello!

CAT tips her hat.

CAT

Have a very nice day!

Scene 3

A dusty shop with many old things in it. MS. MYRTLE is standing behind a desk.

 

CAT

Hello, Ms. Myrtle. How are you?

MYRTLE

I am very good, Cat. How are you?

CAT

I’m good.

MYRTLE

There are some new things in the back. Can you please unpack them for me? Take the creme brulee recipe from the pile. Also, can you give a message to the cook and say that I don’t have the recipe?

CAT

Okay.

CAT walks through the piles of junk.

Scene 4

A dusty room with bags of things.

CAT

Where is the new delivery?

Shows a bag that says “New Delivery.”

CAT

Oh. There it is.

CAT opens the bag.

CAT

Whoa! That’s the recipe!

A picture of a creme brulee is on a scrap of paper.

CAT

Whoa! I understand why the cook wants this so much!

One cup of sugar

Four egg whites

One teaspoon of flour

One half cup of cream

Cook for as long as pleases you.

(It will come out perfect only if you cook it as long as your favorite number.)

MYRTLE

(distant sounding) What are you doing back there?

CAT

Just being a good assistant! Hehehe.

MYRTLE

Okay.

CAT

This is gonna rock!

Scene 5

The Bakery. Many sweets are being eaten at pink tables. Happy music is playing through hidden speakers.

COOK

That recipe is mine. Well, I hope it is.

COOK stops waiter.

COOK

I’ll be right back, I just forgot something.

WAITER

Okay.

Scene 6

The street. Same as before. Because of COOK’S huge ego and her huge mansion, people on the street are staring in awe at her.

COOK goes into the old shop

COOK

I want the recipe right now!

MYRTLE

Why would I have it? I’m an innocent old woman! You are acting like some stupid recipe is a matter of life and death!

COOK

It is a matter of life and death. It’s magic. According to legend, it can bring people back to life.

MYRTLE

Why are you relying on a legend?

COOK

Well, legends are sometimes real.

MYRTLE

Okay, but don’t blame me if you go through this entire pursuit of trying to find something that isn’t real.

COOK

It probably is real, but don’t blame me if I become richer from this recipe.

CAT and COOK walk out of the shop at the same time.

Scene 7

CAT and COOK are on the street outside of MS. MYRTLE’S. CAT is standing a few feet away from COOK and muttering to herself.

CAT

(whispering to herself) I can’t let the Cook have the recipe. She already has too much money as it is.

COOK walks up to CAT.

COOK

Are you sure that Ms. Myrtle doesn’t have the recipe?

CAT

Yes, I’m very sure. Hehehe.

Scene 8

SOPHIE and CAT are in their dusty kitchen. On the table, are the special ingredients for the magic creme brulee.

CAT is stirring all of the ingredients in a mixing bowl.

CAT

Come on, Sophie. Let’s try the batter.

SOPHIE

Okay!

They try the batter.

SOPHIE and CAT

It’s so good!

They put in the oven to bake.  

Scene 9

SOPHIE and CAT’s dusty kitchen –– fifteen minutes later.

CAT pulls the creme brulee out of the oven.

CAT

Whoa….

SOPHIE

Let’s try it!

They both take a bite.

COOK opens up the kitchen door and slams it shut.

COOK

I know you have the recipe! Now give it to me!

SOPHIE and CAT are bouncing around, giggling.

SOPHIE and CAT

I think this made me really happy!

COOK

You are stealing something really powerful!

The girls continue to bounce and laugh.

CAT

(to COOK) Really?

SOPHIE shoves a mouthful of creme brulee into COOK’s mouth. COOK starts bouncing around and smiling.

COOK

This is magic!

SOPHIE

Why?

COOK

Because it’s so good! Let’s open a new bakery together and live eating creme brulee forever!

SOPHIE and CAT

Yay!

THE END

Riding A Pug

   

A bat came flying in the room!

(I shouldn’t have lived so close to the dugout.)

The flower was in bloom.

My sister kicked the pug out.

I shouldn’t have lived so close to the dugout

old ruins (that were falling in the sea).

My sister kicked the pug out:

The pug, of course, is me

Old ruins that were falling, don’t you see,

are a good place to ride a horse.

The pug was coarse as me.

The pug named Thor was Norse.

 

Our good place to ride (I’m hoarse —

I swallowed a bug and screamed)

the thug outdoors was north

of here. For days I dreamed

 

I followed a bug and screamed

at the bug, he was so dear,

you hear? For days I dreamed

of standing on the pier.

Bah humbug, he was a deer.

The flour was in the room,

you hear? For days I dreamed

a bat came flying in the room.

Trees

When I think of trees

I think of leaves, bright green.

When I think of the leaves

I think of the branches that hold the leaves

Steady and strong.

When I think of the branches,

I think of the trunk

That holds the tree up

Straight and true.

When I think of the trunk

I think of the tree.

When I think of the tree

I think of the air it gives

Us to breathe.

The One and the Best Girl: Book III

Chapter One: Shopkins

Hi, my name is Daisy and I am ten years old. I have one Shopkins toy. My sister is only a year old and has twenty eight Shopkins. This is not fair – I hate that my sister has twenty eight. I like Shopkins because they’re little, and my dog doesn’t eat little things. I like playing with them with my mom and sister. For Easter or Valentine’s Day I can get more. Valentine’s day is next week!

 

Chapter Two: Valentine’s Day

I woke up with a basket on my bed! Inside the basket were shopkins! I opened them… I got the worst one! I looked at its name without noticing that it was a limited edition. It was called Roxie Ring. My sister came in and screamed, “Ahhh, you have a limited edition?”

That’s when I realized I got a limited edition Shopkins!

I opened the other one that was in the same basket. It was Sally Scent. My sister screamed again, “Ahhh! Sally Scent! That’s not fair!” (That time she knew from the beginning that it was a limited edition. Now, whenever she screams, it means that I have a limited edition.)

I opened the other one, which was –

“Ahhh!” My sister screamed again. “Sunny Screen! That is not fair!”

Before I could stop her, she opened the other one. It Papa Tomato. She hesitated before moaning again.

I went downstairs and found the pups still sleeping. Me and my sis found another present with both of our names on it, so we opened it together. It was from Mom and Dad, and it said that we were going to move to a bigger house because we were going to have four new siblings!

My mom was pregnant with quadruplets!

Crying, I went to my room. I was shocked. I called my best friend, The Hair.

“I am moving to NYC,” I said.

“What? That was what I was going to tell you! I’m actually moving to New Jersey,” he said, “but I’ll be right across the George Washington Bridge!”

 

Chapter Three: Moving Day

I woke to a moving truck outside of my window. I did not know that we were moving today (I thought that we were moving this weekend), but whatever!

We drove to the apartment. My sister had a blue and pink bedroom, and I had a hanging bed. There was even a playroom with a whole collection of Shopkins! I found seventy seven Shopkins outside of the box and forty four inside of another box, and I opened them all. They were limited edition! And, I got all the Shopkins from seasons one and two!

After, we went to the Empire State Building. It was so cool! The Hair came with us!

 

Chapter Four: School

The next day, I discovered that The Hair went to the same school as me. I could not find him, so I went to the principal’s office to see if he knew where he was. The one problem was that the principal was not in his office at the moment. I looked on each floor.

The principal was still not there when I went back to class, so I asked my teacher if he knew where he was. It turns out that the principal was in the classroom the whole time! I asked him if I could transfer to The Hair’s class. He looked scary, but luckily he said, “Yes, of course! Are you new?’’

I told him I was, and then I looked for The Hair next door.

That night I learned that my mom had had her babies when I was at school. Their names were Hayden, Molly, Hudson, and Sarah!

We lived happily in New York.

The One and the Best Girl: Book II

Chapter One

Hi, my name is Daisy. My sister’s name is Chloe. My dog’s name is Olivia. We have a playhouse that we like to hang out in. You need to put a cover on it overnight, or else it will get wet. Last night, I forgot to put the cover on the playset, and it got soggy and wet and nearly fell over. Now we’re going to get a new piece of cardboard to start off our new playhouse. But, I’m torn because I don’t know what color cardboard I should get! I’m thinking of getting blue, but I don’t know… I’m also thinking about getting yellow because that’s my favorite color, and whenever I think of the color yellow I want a banana. I started to get stressed out because I didn’t know what color to get.

I asked my dad, “Surprise me: yellow or blue?” So he ordered the cardboard, and we went home and waited for it to come in the mail. When it arrived, I opened up the package and saw the cardboard – it was awesome. We set up the new playhouse and my sister went in first. It was her first time walking. She walked because she was so excited. And the color was… dun-dun-dun… BLUE!

Meanwhile, it was time for Halloween. We had to get our Halloween costumes, so we went to the Halloween store. I didn’t know if I wanted to be a journal, a pencil, or a playhouse, so, as usual, I asked my dad to surprise me. And, as usual, to get the costume in the mail.

After, we went home, waited for it for ten days, and by then it was already the day before Halloween. We got it, and it was a… dun-dun-dun… a pencil! I tried it on, and it fit me perfectly, so now I had to go and find something for Chloe.

So, we went to the Halloween store again. She seemed to like Elmo but I said, “Nah, not for you!”

I asked if she wanted to be a matching pencil but my dad said, “No, too cute,” but then I had an idea.

“Even better! You can be a piece of paper!” I told my dad, as usual, to mail it to me. We got it that day. We opened it up and it was a piece of paper. Then it was time to find a costume for Olivia. She’s a mini-Golden doodle. We went to the store and looked for different stuff, like Cotton Candy, Robots, People… but nothing seemed to work! Then, me and my dad ran to a different Halloween costume store, and it was the best one ever. It was ice cream with a dog cone!

 

The next day…

 

It’s Halloween! We got all dressed up and started with a nice, simple halloween set-up for the party. Then, at around – hmmm –  two o’clock, we started the party. At around five o’clock we had dinner. Then we went out, all dressed up.

I carried my sister, and we went to one house that had a sign that said “We have a sale!” There was something for Nick Jeff that I wanted to get. If you all don’t know, Nick Jeff is the Hair’s brother. I got it and, as usual, I said, “Ship it to Nick Jeff.” I gave his address and after that I was pretty tired. I went home and went to bed.

While I was lying in bed, I couldn’t stop thinking about how badly I wanted a phone. I’m going to ask her for one for my birthday. If I haven’t told you yet, my mom said that for my birthday – which is around the corner – I can be on the cover a magazine!

The next day, I went to the playhouse with my sister and my dog. My sister helped me with my homework. My mom told us that we could play after I finished my homework, so my sister helped me with it, and soon it was time to play!

 

Chapter Two

It was the morning of my birthday and my sister was awake. She woke me up. She says “Happy Birthday!” in her baby voice, and then she brought me downstairs. There were so many balloons and presents. My mom said I could open up one, so I did. I opened the smallest one, and it was a ring! It had a golden diamond shaped like a heart and a golden band. I was psyched! I ate cake for breakfast. It was my favorite kind of cake: ice cream cake. My sister got it all over her face and her nose. She had ice cream snot all day.

Guests started to come, and I got more and more excited. I like to start opening my gifts before we do all the other fun stuff, so I opened them. I got lots of stuff, but my favorite two were a phone and an interview at an agency to see if I could get on a magazine cover.

Once everybody left, I opened up a small gift. It was a card that said Olivia was pregnant. There were going to be puppies in the house.

 

A few months later…

 

Soon enough the puppies were here! We went back to the old list of names, and decided that the names would be Liz, Hayden, Emi, and Rose.

The pups got big, but not too big! I wanted to get an interview for the puppies for Weekly Magazine because they were so cute, but I couldn’t because it was too much money. The interview cost $15 per hour.

When I finally saved up enough money, I told my parents, “I think today will be the day I go to the interview.”

They said, “No, because you have to practice for next week’s skiing race.”

So I went to the mountain to practice, but the next morning I went to the interview. It was a small room that felt like a lobby. The butler offered me water, and then I went into the room, which smelled like puppies.

The butler hadn’t told me that this week was puppy week, which I discovered when I sat down (in this beautiful hard wood chair) and one of the thirteen writers told me. He also told me that on January 20th next year they are going to feature my pups in the magazine! By the time I left it was dark outside, but I was so excited!

When I got home, I ate dinner and went to bed.

 

The next day…

 

Emi was not in bed with Olivia.

Olivia came in and told me she was missing. We looked and looked but could not find him. It felt like we’d looked all over the world. But then, I remembered that there was one place left to look: the interview room.

The next day we went to the interview room. He was there! I said to him, “Emi, you cannot do that ever again!”

On the way out, I learned that we were to come here next month.

 

Next month…

 

Me and my mom went to the agency, and Olivia and Chloe came a bit later with Dad. They did it – we saw all the magazines the puppies were in!

The One and the Best Girl: Book I

 Chapter One

This is Daisy. She is the best student in the whole class – she wants to go to school every day.

It was the first day in 3rd grade, the best grade, and Daisy was jumping up and down (Daisy loved school). She told her mom that she did not need lunch because she could get it at school.

‘’Ok,” said Mom, “let’s go!”

“Yay!’’ exclaimed Daisy.

 

12 hours later…

 

“I’m performing my first science experiment!” Daisy told her mom. “I’m gonna go upstairs and start.” She worked and worked, and then she worked some more. She skipped dinner and she went to bed at 10 p.m. – which was late for her. She fell asleep on the table while working on her project.

When she woke up, the table, which used to be blue, was gluey and full of red feathers. She cried and cried because she hadn’t finished her project, but then her mom said, “Believe in yourself, you can do it.”

Daisy tried and tried and tried. She went to school with a frown on her face.

“Why are you so sad, Daisy?” asked her friend Sofia.

“Because I didn’t finish my science project,” she moaned. “I’m so disappointed with myself.” Daisy’s stomach hurt.

“Why don’t you just go into the science room? You have half an hour to work, which means that you could probably finish it.”

So Daisy did, and half an hour later she was done with her project.

The next day, she went to get the table. She put it in the van and drove off, and told her mom that she hadn’t been able to finish her project.

Her mom said, “It is what it is,” and dropped her off at school.

Then, the school bell rang, but it turned out that someone was messing around and had rung it accidentally. Daisy was glad it was a joke, because she was counting on getting to school a few minutes early so that she could retrieve her finished project.

Daisy jumped up and down until her stomach didn’t hurt anymore.

“Wow!” exclaimed her teacher.

“I can’t believe I did it!” she said with a big smile on her face.

The first class was science. Daisy went to the science room and shared her project, which was a feather table on which she would see if sugar would dissolve in gatorade. She did it, but the feathers that were going to go on the gatorade to make it look pretty had just been glued. The jar of feathers fell over and stuck to the table. Finally, she put her project on the table and it became fixed to the surface, making her experiment easier to perform (and prettier).  

The next subject was writing. Daisy wrote about her science project.

Five hours later, she came home through the back door and saw a puppy! “Why is there a dog in the back of our house?” she asked her mom.

“Because you did it! You did it – you finished your project! The puppy is my reward to you.”

“Mom, I have something to tell you.” Daisy hesitated. “I wrote it all down and asked my teacher if I could bring it home, and she said yes, so I brought the note home so that I wouldn’t have to explain it to you. Anyway, I’ll be up doing my math homework.”

One hour later, her mom came up, and she didn’t look that mad. “That was the best story ever! I’m not mad that you glued the table, but I didn’t like that table anyway, because your dad picked it out. Now, let’s go out with your puppy, and while I’m looking for a new table, you can think of a name for him.

Daisy made a list of possible names for the puppy:

Rose

Kate

Hudson

Olivia

Jessie

Jess

Hayden

Emmy

Chloe

Liz

Elizabeth

“That’s enough, that’s enough…” her mom said. “Let’s think of less serious names, cuter names, like Dandelion, or Cloudy, or Bubbles, or something like that.”
“Let’s name him Olivia! I love it, I love it! Please, please, please?” Daisy pleaded.

“Okay, fine. Let’s go to the pet store and get a collar for him. What’s his middle name going to be?”

“Let’s make it… Cloudy!”

They went and got him a sparkly pink collar. Then they went to the furniture store and ordered a new table. It would come that afternoon.   

Later that day, the table arrived!!! Daisy and her mom opened the package… and it turned out to be a bed!

“What?” cried her mom. “This is not a table. This is a bed!‘’ Her mom shouted.

 

Chapter Two

The next day was Saturday. They sent back the bed and ordered the right piece of furniture this time. When it got to their house, they opened it up and discovered it was… a… nothing.

’What?’’ exclaimed Daisy.

They gave up on looking for a table. Her mom asked her, “Did you love that table?”

“Yes, I loved that table! But it’s okay if I don’t get it back.”

“You can get it back your own way! What do you want?”

“Let me think about it… let me go to the Hair’s house.”
When Daisy got to the Hair’s house, he said, “You should get a brand new rainbow TV!”

Daisy was about to walk out the door. She had been thinking for a while and did not have the patience for the Hair.

“Wait, what do you want?” the Hair chased after her.

“I want something, but I don’t need it… ” Daisy sighed. “Actually, for a long time I’ve wanted a rainbow shelf that gives me everything I want while lying in bed. But Nick Jeff never gave it to me. My mom says that Christmas is around the corner and I might get one for Christmas, but who knows? I might not.”

She ran back home and asked her mom to buy her a rainbow shelf that would give her anything she wanted while in bed. “And the Hair also said I should get a rainbow TV!”

 

Chapter Three

The next day, a big, big box was delivered to Daisy’s house. The box was almost as big as the house! She opened the package and found the biggest, most ginormous rainbow TV she’d ever seen! That was only the outside. In another box, she found a tiny rainbow TV, which was awesome. Opening the third box, she discovered the rainbow shelf.

Forty six hours later, it was Christmas. Daisy marched downstairs. The Hair came over. They started opening presents. The sad thing was, he wanted to open the rainbow shelf last. Nick Jeff got a new wand, Daisy got clothes for her dog, and then she found a note saying “Go to Mom.”

Daisy went to Mom. Mom said, “Go to Dad.”

Dad said, “Go to Grandma.”

Grandma said, “Go to Grandpa.”

Grandpa said, “Go to Mom.”

So, she went to Mom, who said, “Go get everyone who was in the circle.” When everyone came, she said, “We’re going to have a baby!”

All of them had the best day, and celebrated the coming of a new family member. Daisy’s mom had been hiding this for two weeks!

 

Two Months Later…

 

Daisy went to school, and she told her class that she would have to miss some class in nine months, because of the new baby. She didn’t tell her class that she was going to have a new sibling, but she went to the Hair the next day, who was very excited for her. Two months after that, the Hair began to visit every day to see if the baby had arrived yet. One day, when he asked if the baby had come, Daisy’s family, sick of his questions, groaned, “Nooo.”

 

Chapter Four

Daisy and her mom started thinking of names. They went back to the list of dog names. Then, they went to the doctor to find out if the baby was a boy or a girl, and they found out it was a girl. Her name would be… Chloe! The idea came to Daisy, and her parents loved it. Two months after that, her mom’s belly was as big as two watermelons. It felt like just yesterday Daisy learned that she was pregnant!

Two weeks after that, her mom went to her seven month check-up. The doctor wasn’t sure if it was a girl anymore. Daisy and her mom would find out for sure when the baby was born. Two weeks after that, she went back to school, and finally told her class that she was going to have a sibling.

 

Chapter Five

Two months later, it was time! It was 9:45 A.M. Daisy didn’t go to school – instead, at 10:30, she went to the hospital to visit her new baby sister.

“Hi, Chloe!” she cried. It was a girl. Daisy was so excited.

Chloe’s first birthday was September 12th, 2239. It was the best day ever. Her first word was “Daisy.”

 

Pure Blonde

“TESS! TESS, GET DOWN HERE! SET THE TABLE!” Mother yelled from downstairs.

I groaned. I brushed my long brown hair off my shoulders and face. I sat up on the hardwood floor and pushed my only blanket off. It was the middle of winter, and this was Angelica’s first baby blanket. By now it was worn and faded, torn at all four edges. It didn’t even cover my legs anymore, and came down to about my waist.

If there was one more snowstorm this season, I would most likely get frostbite or even hypothermia.

I climbed out of my faded red nightgown and put on an ugly dark dress the color of a half rotten orange. Then I put a gray apron over it. The apron had been originally white but Mother refused to wash it because it was mine. I now looked like a pilgrim.

I guess this is what you get if you are born a Moreno. A Moreno is someone born with brown hair to a pure blonde family.

A pure blonde family is extremely rare and extremely cherished. If you are pure blonde, you are very rich and every relative in your family is blonde.

I “ruined” our family. Our family wasn’t pure anymore because of me, the Moreno. At first, when I came to understand what I was, I was ashamed and never showed my face to anyone. But now, I was changed. I didn’t really care anymore because I’d adjusted to their cruelty. I was used to it by now.

I rushed down the stairs from the attic. The small, cramped, slanted attic was the room where I slept. I wouldn’t even consider it mine because Annie shared it with me. Annie, the terribly annoying, noisy, clumsy cat.

I kept on going down flights and flights of stairs of our huge house, zigzagging past maids and butlers, who served my family members but did nothing for me, the Moreno.

I sighed. I ran into the dining room to face Mother.

“TESS! You took longer than you should’ve. Now set the table for me and your two sisters,” Mother scolded, and shoved me into the kitchen. Mother and my sisters had never stepped one foot into the kitchen –– they’d never even breathed near the door of it. Only maids and butlers went in there. And me, the Moreno.

I grabbed the fancy and expensive white lace tablecloth and spread it across the table. I started to walk back into the kitchen but Mother stopped me.

“Tess! You know that there aren’t supposed to be wrinkles in the tablecloth!” Mother shouted. So I fixed all the little tiny wrinkles, even the smallest ones that weren’t noticeable at first. Then, I finally set up all the plates, utensils, cups, napkins, food, and drinks. I waited for my sisters to file in.

“Good morning Mother. I thought you were going to get rid of the little Moreno?” my oldest sister, Angelica, said. She was wearing her flowing white dress, and her luxurious, silky hair was tied back in a french braid three-quarters of the way down her back. She scowled at me.

“Mother! I am terribly hungry. May we have breakfast now?” my other older sister, Evangeline, asked.

“Yes, darlings, sit around the table,” Mother said, and they all sat down. I started to sit in a chair but Evangeline stopped me.

“Tess, you have to sit on the ground over there. You don’t deserve to sit with us.” Evangeline gestured to the corner where the kitchen wall meets the dining room.

Angelica handed me a plastic plate with a plastic fork, two strawberries, and a mini waffle. They get more food than I do because they are blonde.

I took the plastic plate. They didn’t want me to make their fine utensils and plates as impure as I am, the Moreno.

I sat down in the corner where Evangeline told me to sit. I looked down at my food. I shoved the two strawberries into my mouth because I was beyond starving. I quickly ate the mini waffle and then threw out the plastic plate, which was now pink from strawberry juice, and took the garbage outside and left it in the bin for the garbage men to collect.

“TESS! GO TO TOWN AND BUY SOME MILK AND EGGS!” Mother yelled, and I made my way through the rocky path without shoes. Mother never bothered to get me shoes; she thinks I’m not worth it.

I saw the town coming closer and closer. My feet hurt. All the little pebbles, sharp stones, and tiny pieces of broken glass were unavoidable and dug into the soles of my feet.

Then the town came full into my sight and was right in front of me.

I ran to the paved road. I sat down and started picking all the sharp things out of my feet because I couldn’t stand it any longer.

I stood up and was relieved. There was no pain at all anymore.

I walked down the road to the farmer, Farmer Greene. He always sells milk and eggs.

“Hello, Mr. Greene. May I please have some milk and eggs for Mother?” I asked.

“How many, Tess?” Farmer Greene asked.

“Five milk cartons and five boxes of eggs,” I responded. If I got fewer than five, Mother would kill me and send me out on that horrible road, and if I got more than that Mother would send me back to return it. Either would involve going back on that horrible, sharp, painful road.

“Here you go, Tess, have a nice day. My wife noticed that whenever you come to town you never have shoes, so she decided to go out and buy you some,” Farmer Greene said thoughtfully.

“Oh, I am sorry, but I can’t accept that. You see, I am a Moreno, and Mother would kill me if I did. I truly appreciate it, but you see, Mother… ” I started to say, but Farmer Greene interrupted.

“It’s okay, take them –– I will escort you home. When you are done shopping, come here when you are done, Tess,” Farmer Greene said. I walked down the street into the heart of town.

I continued walking down the side of the street and came face to face with Mr. Warner.

“Good morning, Mr. Warner,” I greeted him. Mr. Warner was in his 70s and was the sort of man who was very prejudiced against anyone who wasn’t blonde, especially Morenos.

“Shut up, you foolish child! Your mother should have sent you away, little Moreno. She is stupid enough to keep you! You are a disgrace to the Faircastle family name! You are as impure as ever! Get out of my sight!” Mr. Warner screamed, and everyone in town stared. He threw me to the ground and all my groceries flew everywhere around me.

I recovered and knelt down to pick them all up. Then a boy kneeled down and started to help me.

“It’s not fair for Morenos to be treated like this,” the boy said.

“Are you a Moreno?” I asked, and then I looked up to see his perfectly blonde hair with not even one hint of brown in it. He was very tall and had small freckles covering his nose. He was wearing the most expensive pixelgram t-shirt you could get and fancy jeans.

“No, I’m pure, but that shouldn’t make a difference. It is just hair color, people, come on! This is like 20th century discrimination all over again,” the boy said.

“I know!” I agreed, and stuck the last of the groceries back in the bag.

“I am trying to stop all this stuff. It isn’t really working. My father won’t change the law. He just won’t do it. He likes people to be separated,” the boy said.

“Wait, you mean your father is the king?!” I was surprised. I mean, really surprised.

“Yeah. By the way, I’m Brad,” he said. He looked sort of embarrassed at my reaction to him being the prince.

“ I’m Tess. Just Tess. Mother won’t even let me use my last name,” I sighed.

“Oh, I am so sorry. Maybe I can convince my father to change the law and make everyone equal. It’ll be hard but I’ll try. Meet me by that rock tomorrow, same time,” Brad called and turned to go.

I stood up and walked back to Farmer Greene.

“Here you go, Tessie,” Farmer Greene said kindly, as he helped me slip on my new shoes. They were the softest, best-fitting, most soothing things I had ever put on. I had never really felt comfortable being a Moreno and all, but this was great. I guessed this was what normal feels like.

We walked back home together.

“TESS! WHY ARE YOU WEARING SHOES?” Mother yelled furiously. She was like a lion and I was a defenseless lamb.

I quickly ran into the kitchen and put away the groceries. I left Mother to talk this through with Farmer Greene.

I finished up my daily duties. I am never allowed to have lunch.  At most I have two meals a day, if I am lucky.

I did the rest of my chores and was sent up to bed.

I sat down on the creaky floor of the attic and crawled under the blanket. Actually, I couldn’t crawl under it –– it was way too small for that.

I lay down. Annie jumped on the floor from the top of the ancient bedside table Grandma Bessie so “thoughtfully” gave to me (she just wanted to get rid of it), and an antique vase from 2017 was sent into the air and came down with a smash.

“Oh, you clumsy little cat. Annie! Look what you’ve done! I am going to get in trouble with Mother now. Annie, I wish you weren’t so clumsy… move into Angelica’s room and annoy her! I’d like to see that,” I said and shooed Annie away from the mess.

“TESS! You darn Moreno, stop being so clumsy and clean this mess up. When you are done, get into bed,” Mother scolded, and went back down stairs. I swept up the mess and fell asleep.

The next day I was sent to town. I walked there happily in my extremely comfortable shoes.

I met Brad at the rock. He seemed excited.

“TESS! Guess what! Look at this!” Brad squealed happily and showed me a hologram of the show News On The Go.

“Hello, citizens of Carolina! Today the King has changed a law. The law has been changed so Morenos will have equal rights and will be treated the same as Pures. If you are not treating Morenos the same, you will go to prison,” the hologram said.

I was beyond excited. Mother would finally treat me the same as Evangeline and Angelica. I would get new blankets, and I would actually get a bedroom and I wouldn’t have to share with Annie anymore. The best part was that I wouldn’t be a servant or slave anymore.

“That is amazing! Thanks so much, Brad! But, I guess that means I won’t come here much anymore,” I said sadly while looking at the ground. I couldn’t bring myself to look at him.

“You don’t have to be sent here –– you can just come here on your own and sit at the rock, and I’ll be there,” Brad suggested, and that brought my spirits back up.

And that is what I did. I was still despised by my family, who held onto the old prejudices, but outside I was treated as an equal. Life was great. Every morning I would head into town, but instead of looking like a pilgrim, I looked like a normal girl.

That was all I had wished for, and it came true.

I was free.

Song of the Wolves

Tala

I trekked through the damp forest, which had been washed recently from the rain during day. The night air felt damp against my skin. My moccasins made no sound as I walked on the soggy grass. I was quiet, trying not to disturb the newborn fawns and the deer who were sleeping. The wind brushed lightly against the trees, making them move and rock like a crib. The sound of water became louder, which made me know I was going in the right direction.

I finally made it to the clearing of my favorite spot. I sat down on a log as I watched the waterfall blend in with the moon, making the water look like stars coming out of the moon. The creek rushed the stars to a place I don’t know. I sighed, looking at the marvelous picture that was set before me. I love it here. Peace and quiet. It was a full moon, and the moon seemed bigger and brighter here than any other part of the land. It made me feel like I could touch it, even though it was impossible. The rushing of the water soothed my troubles and the view erased all of my thoughts. I sighed as I listened to the water splashing and closed my eyes. I knew that someday I wouldn’t be able to listen to this sound anymore. Something told me that there would be a time when I wouldn’t be able to sing in harmony with the water and the wolves at this place.

The wolves where our tribe is are named the Wolf Clan. I opened my mouth and let out a still note that echoed across the valley. I stopped and heard a wolf let out the same note. I started to sing the stories our ancestral people told us about the wolves, as the elders said. I sang songs of wishing for peace and forever bonding with the magnificent creatures. The wolf accompanied me as we sang a duet that no other Cherokee people can sing. A song so full of harmony that it seemed to be a single language. When we ended, I heard something run on the soggy grass. I turned around and saw a wolf, a young pup. Its eyes were like the moon, glistening and shining. It came close to me and sniffed my hand when I reached out. I walked in circles and it followed me.

“You should be my pet wolf. I will name you Usgiyi, which means ‘Snow Moon.’ You like the ancient songs, and while it is the snow moon, the elders tell stories in the village,” I said.  Usgiyi gave a playful yip and I rubbed its silver fur.

“My name is Tala, and you will be my companion forever,” I whispered. Usgiyi rubbed its face in my arm.  

**********************************

Ama

I was lying in my teepee, listening to the breathing of my sister, who was asleep next to me. I crept from the blanket and pulled on my moccasins. I opened the flap of the teepee slowly, and then crept outside. I almost tripped over my grandmother Tala’s old moccasins. I put them back where they were supposed to be and continued to go out. My moccasins thumped loudly against the dry dirt ground. I ran around the neighbors’ gardens and their huge wagons that they used from the marching, and bumped into a few rocks. I reached the huge lake a little bit away from the camp. I was sweating from the run and the warm, humid air stuck to my arm like flies. I breathed in the freshness of the lake and saw the moon’s reflection on the lake along with the stars, even though there was no waterfall like great-grandmother Tala had described to my mother. She had told me the stars shone brightly around the moon, like it was saying that the moon was special and important.

The mysterious owls hooted around and fluttered here and there, their feathers falling like the moon’s light dropping to the ground. I heard footsteps and turned around. I saw one of the wolves from our tribe. I sighed in relief and reached my hand out. I rubbed the silver coat and hummed the song my mother always sang, saying that Tala started the song with the wolves. The wolf caught on and we sang quietly, the song of the ancestors. The song that brought peace to the clan and helped us be at peace with the wolves who help us when we are in trouble. I knew it wasn’t as good as Tala’s, but I finally knew what it felt like to bond with a wolf like Tala. A bond I knew would last forever.

“I will name you… Svnoyi. I am Ama. I want you to be my partner forever,” I said, like Tala had said to her wolf. It liked that name. I smiled as I rubbed its soft, warm head against my cold arm. I remembered the stories of the old tribal camp and the march that the whites’ government made us march. I was angry at them. Because of them we had to move to new, filthy land with not many trees. A lot of our tribe, the Cherokee, died from the journey. I remembered the stories the elders told, the stories that Tala knew and  named her wolf after. I also remembered what Tala did for the tribe, and I wanted to be like her. To be brave and carry on the tradition of the wolves and our forever bond with them. I gave Svnoyi a necklace I was wearing.

“Here is a necklace I made. I have another one. I will wear it and you will wear yours.  This will show our bond. We will work together to save our people, like what Tala did,” I said.  Svnoyi nodded and jumped up and down, determined to do that.

 

****************************************

Immokalee

I was walking on a frozen path, huddled in a worn, faded jacket, my bracelet jingling from my shivers. I kept scolding myself that I was crazy, being outside in the middle of the night in winter in Alaska, the coldest state, but I kept going. Tonight was a full moon, and I wasn’t going to miss it. It was going to be a beautiful night. The coldness touched my arm, and making it ice cold and giving me goosebumps. The wind flew through the icy bare trees and made a howl against the icicles. Ice crunched under my tight leather shoes, sort of like a moccasin that was way too small for me. I wished that it was warmer, like in Oklahoma where great-grandmother Ama was. I hiked through the woods and finally reached my destination.

I swept away the snow on a stump with my hand, covered by a part of the jacket, before sitting down. I was staring at a river, which froze a few weeks ago. The moon reflected onto the ice, like it was stuck frozen in the river. The stars were twinkling, like they was trying to get out and help the moon to break free from the ice. I breathed, and my breath hung in the air like father’s tobacco smoke. I couldn’t stop myself from going open-eyed at the sight.

I was happy we didn’t have to pay to watch this scene, because our family didn’t have money since the Great Depression. I knew that looking at the moon angled on top of water was a family tradition in my Wolf’s Clan. I remembered stories that my mother used to tell me before she passed away from a disease that my father never told me about. Stories like what my ancestor Tala did when she hiked to Oklahoma on the Trail of Tears and what my great-great grandmother Ama did to save the tribe. I remembered that they all had wolves, and they bonded with them. I also remembered that it was Tala who first sang a song full of peace and forever bonding with the wolves who helped us when we were in trouble.

I sang the song, my voice echoing through the icicles. I sang the stories that were passed down by mouth and of the forgotten people who died while protecting our tribe and those who died while we were forcibly moved to Oklahoma. A howl accompanied me and I stopped, surprised. I looked around and saw a wolf. I sang, looking at the wolf. It sang with me and we continued to sing to the end of the song. I felt a huge bond between me and the wolf. It was a warm feeling, a feeling that someone loved and trusted me. It walked up to me and nuzzled its muzzle onto my leg.

“Hey, I am Imookalee,” I whispered.

It yapped.

“I think I will name you Nvda,” I said.

It nodded.  

“I want you to be my partner forever,” I said.

Nvda nodded.

I took off my cold bracelet and motioned Nvda to lift it’s paw. I put the bracelet on it’s leg. “This will represent our bond,” I said.

It nodded and I wondered how I was going to feed it. Father didn’t have a job and there are no animals in the winter time. But, I figured that Nvda would figure out on its own.

“I will make one like it and we will wear it always,” I concluded. I touched the glossy silver fur and Nvda gave a happy yap.

*****************************************

Amadahy

I stayed still in my bed. I made sure no one was awake when I crept out of my bed. My ancestor Tala’s moccasins, my other ancestor (a few generations younger) Ama’s necklace, and my great-great-grandmother Immokalee’s bracelet were in their special spot on my desk, glimmering from the moon’s light.

I slowly opened my door, little groans coming from the hinges, and crept down the stairs. I tiptoed across the living room and into the kitchen. I made sure not to rattle the pots and pans  on the drying rack. I shoved on my worn-out blue Nike sneakers and opened the back door slowly. I went outside, closed it, and walked to the woods in my backyard. I walked on the trail we made, but swerved to the left around a fourth of it and walked straight ahead. The trees swayed a little from the breeze and the leaves rustled. Fireflies blinked everywhere, making little lights to guide my way through the forest. The wind tickled my arm and my pajama shirt fluttered a little. I finally came upon a waterfall and a creek rushed the water to somewhere else. The moon blended in with the moon in the water, and the water was like stars coming out of the moon and rushing along the creek, like what Tala saw a few centuries ago. I am in the exact place where Tala saw her waterfall and met Usgiyi.

Here is my brief description of my family, Tala, Ama, and Immookalee, and me. I am currently in Tennessee, where the Wolf’s Clan was before. The Wolf Clan was part of a Native American tribe called the Cherokee. Tala lived near the end of the 1700s, around when the European settlers moved west in the United States. A few decades later, in about 1835, they were forced to move to Oklahoma. Ama’s story takes place in Oklahoma, about 20 or more years after the move. Then, Immokalee’s parents moved to Alaska when the Great Depression hit, which was about 1929, by horse and wagon, which took a really long time. All of them were pretty well known in the Cherokee history for their bonding with wolves and what they did with them. Tala and Usgiyi were the most well known out of the three of them, and were very well known for saving the tribe a lot of times. She sang about the stories when the tribe was fighting against the wolves when the wolves were too close to the clan. She sang that it was no use to fight them and that the wolves would help the tribe later. The wolves stayed and they helped the tribe when the ‘evil’ Beaver Clan went into the tribe to take over the land.

The wolves helped and they won the battle by taking the weapons and biting them. Tala also brought the idea of helping animals, which helped the tribe a lot. She gave hope to the Cherokees when they were marching to Oklahoma. She sang the stories and helped the others continue to remember the stories of their ancestors and the myths. Usgiyi had pups, which stayed with the tribe forever. She got the title “Singer of Hope and Peace,” and continued to help the tribe. She had a daughter later on, who later had Ama.  Ama loved Tala and she helped the tribe by also bonding with a wolf.

When the white people came, Tala and Ama stood up for the tribe and helped fight, and later they died together. Ama saved the tribe and the wolf helped too, which gave her the title “Warrior of the Wolves.” She had a girl before she died, who had the grandmother of Immokalee. Immokalee’s father moved to Alaska with her mother because he wanted to see the world, but was at the wrong time. He moved to Alaska, hoping to find leftover gold, which he never found.

After bonding, Immokalee stayed in Alaska, had a few kids, and lived with the wolves. She protected them from harm and poachers. She later moved back to the clan, who were still living in the same spot in Oklaholma. She lived there and inspired a few people to protect the land of the Cherokee. She got the title “The Bringer of Justice and Truth.” One of her kids had my great-grandmother. I came later on and here I am, in the 21st century. I feel proud of them, each facing a difficult time with a fellow wolf, who they trusted and stayed loyal to.

I closed my eyes and breathed in the air. I was sad that I couldn’t sing the song. It had gotten lost someplace in history after Immookalee sang the song with her wolf. Someone didn’t sing the song or didn’t pass it down, so no one knows what the exact words were. Not many people remember the stories the ancestors told of the wolves and the tribe, or even knew there was a song about it at all.

Not many people even know the Wolf Clan; only the people whose ancestors were in our tribe. Most are still in the same spot where Ama was about two centuries ago. I was sort of envious of my ancestors. They got to sing the song, but here I am, a descendent of some of the greatest people in Cherokee history, and I don’t even know half the lyrics of the song my ancestors sang.  

I opened my eyes and sighed. I knew I had to enjoy the view. There isn’t much chance to see it, since there is school on most of the nights there is a full moon.

I sang the beginning unknowingly, singing the first few lines. Then I forgot the rest, like I usually did when I tried to sing the song. I sighed, annoyed at myself. Then, I heard a faint howling in the rhythm of the song. I followed its lead and we sang, without words, of the song that my ancestors sang. I sang the parts I knew, but sang the notes for the places I didn’t. I heard the song echoing in the woods when we finished our duet. I heard something come behind me and I whirled around, my body in defensive mode. You never can be sure if a person might kidnap you, which is sort of common in the 21st century, but not really in Tennessee.

I relaxed my pose when I saw a wolf pup. It whined and put his head onto my lap. I awkwardly pet its head. I don’t have a pet. Its blue, beady eyes looked at me and it started to howl the song. I realized this was the wolf who sang the song with me.

“You are the one who sang it with me?” I asked the wolf, hoping it knew some English.  It nodded and yapped a few times.

“I am Amadahy. Nice to meet you, uh… wolf,” I said.  It sighed at the word “wolf.”

“I guess I will have to name you. I will name you Waya,” I said, thinking of my limited Cherokee language. Waya is basically “wolf” in Cherokee, one of the words my mother told me to memorize. It yapped (I am pretty sure it doesn’t know the meaning) happily. I remembered a story of the bonding, and I held out my bandana I was wearing.

“I want you to be my partner forever,” I said.

It nodded and lifted its paw, like it knew what to do. I wrapped the bandana around the leg and knotted it twice, making sure it couldn’t fall off. When I finished, it jumped into my lap and slept soundly. I smiled as I brushed its fur. I knew that I would pass on the rhythm of the song forever and ever and not make a mistake. I also knew that it was my turn to continue the tradition of the ancient song that brought peace and forever bonding to my clan.

Pete the Pirate Cat and Charlotte

Once upon a time, there was a pirate cat named Pete. Pete had always wanted to marry a cat that wore the most beautiful shoes ever. One day, he decided to go on his ship and search the mysterious islands of Hawaii. The first island he was going to search was Kauai. He held a ball to see who would wear the fanciest shoes. He met at least one thousand cats before a sleek black and white feline walked proudly to him.

“Hello, my name is Charlotte,” she purred.

“Hello,” he replied.

Charlotte was pretty, but Pete couldn’t help noticing her purple shoes decorated with sparkly diamonds. They were so magnificent that he knew that she was the one he should marry.

Pete asked Charlotte if she wanted to dance to the slow song and she said, “Okay.”

After the song Pete asked, “Will you marry me?”

When she first saw Pete, she immediately knew she wanted to marry him. She was very nervous because no one had ever seemed interested enough to ask for her hand, let alone even ask her out on a date. Charlotte was about to say yes, when suddenly a giant bear came out of nowhere.

The bear said to Pete, “I am going to get you, because you sprayed me with green spray paint, and I hate the color green.”

Pete knew exactly what he was talking about. Two years ago, he sprayed the giant bear with green spray paint because the giant bear was trying to steal Pete’s pirate ship.

Then Charlotte said, “Mom, I thought you said you were going to stop stealing boats!”    

“That’s your mom?!” exclaimed Pete.

By then, everybody at the party was staring at them. Shyly, Charlotte nodded. Charlotte’s mom was a bear, but her dad was a cat. They met when Charlotte’s mom was stealing a boat and the owner said, “Stop stealing my boat.” Charlotte’s mother liked that he stood up to her, so she married the cat who owned the boat.

Pete then said, “Why don’t you want your daughter to be happy?”

“I do,” said the giant bear.

“Well, if you want her to be happy, you will let me marry her,” said Pete.  

“I don’t think you deserve my daughter.”

“I do, and I’ll prove it to you by telling you why and spray-painting you blue,” said Pete. “I deserve your daughter because It was always my dream to marry some cat with the most beautiful shoes.”

“Oooh, I like blue, and that story makes sense so I guess you do deserve my daughter,” said the giant bear.

So he sprayed the giant bear with blue spray paint.

Then Charlotte and Pete got married. Their ceremony was amazing. Charlotte wore her shoes that she wore at the party. She also wore a sparkly purple dress with a real diamond on it. There were flowers, a huge cake with Pete and Charlotte on top, and there was also a turquoise arch with white flowers on it.

They lived happily ever after.

 

The End

Sucked In

Chapter 1

I slam the back door of the farmhouse and run over to the barn. I have just gotten home from the last day of school and am ready for a nap (a.k.a. watch a movie on my computer and eat popcorn). My mom is out and my dad is still at work, so I have the house to myself. But I love the barn almost as much as Biscuit (my dog).

A couple years ago, my dad cleaned out the hayloft and said I could have it. It’s now my favorite place in the whole world. I climb up the shaky ladder and plop down in a pile of hay. Woof woof!  My dog comes running over to me.

“Hey, Biscuit!” I yell and he jumps onto my lap, licking my face. “You wanna see a movie?” I ask him, and he licks my face again. I assume that means yes.

I grab my computer from the floor where I keep it and flip it open. A picture of my horse, Dusty, appears on the screen. My parents got him for me for my fifth birthday and now I’m 12, so we’ve been together for a while.

“Sandra! Where are you? I’m home!” my sister’s voice rings out.

I didn’t know she was coming home! I think.

Her name is Arra and she’s perfect, with her straight blond hair and blue eyes. Also, she has pink lips and rosy cheeks. My parents say I’m pretty, and I think so too, but my sister is beautiful. The hard thing to believe is that we’re twins. She takes after my gorgeous mother and I take after my father, with my straight black hair and not-so-pink lips.

“I’m in here!” I yell.

“Be more specific!” My sister likes to correct me at any time possible.

“The barn!” Soon I hear Arra climbing up the ladder. The first thing I can see is the top of her head before the rest of her body climbs up onto the hay loft. I groan. She eyes the movie that’s on the counter.

“Is that really Snow White? Is that what we’re watching?” she asks.

What we’re watching? I think. Oh no, no, no!

Instead, I say, “If it looks like a duck and quacks like a duck, it probably is a duck.”

When she looks puzzled I say, “In other words, yes, that’s Snow White. And yes, that’s what I’m watching.”

She plops down next to me, seemingly not taking the hint. I sigh and put in the disk. There’s a buzzing noise and it gets louder by the minute. Soon, my sister and I are covering our ears. Then everything is silent and I’m falling through darkness.

 

Chapter 2

There’s a zap, then a world forms around me.

“Where are we?” my sister asks.

I look around me and see a cottage. It looks so familiar.

But where have I seen it? I think. Then it hits me. There is only one place I’ve seen a cottage like this. And that’s ––

“I think we’re in the movie!” I yell. “But in the end of it, where I left off.”

“But that means Snow White’s inside the cottage choking!” she says.

“So you have seen the movie!” I tease and her face turns red. My sister and I run toward the cottage.

“Hello!” my sister yells as we enter the small house. I pause in the doorway.

“He –– ” and then there is a strangled scream. We race into a yellow room and find a girl with hair as black as coal and lips as red as blood lying on the floor. It can only be one person. Snow White.

“Ah!” we scream, and race to her aid.

“Quick!” I yell, “I’ll pick her up and you pat her back!” I grab Snow White and Arra grabs a broom. She starts to whack the her back. A apple falls out of her mouth and Snow White opens her eyes.

“Gasp! Wha- what happened?” she asks, touching her forehead.

“You were choking on that apple,” my sister says, sitting down on a chair nearby. I help Snow White onto a sofa and then sit down next to her.

“Oh my! Thank you!” she whispers covering her mouth. My sister yawns.

“You must be exhausted,” Snow White says. “Why don’t you stay with me? We almost never have visitors, let alone girls.”

“We’d love to, but what do you mean by we?” my sister asks.

“The dwarves,” says Snow White standing up.

“Oh right,” my sister mutters.

“What was that? Oh never mind. Follow me, please.” Snow White herds us out of the room and up some wide stairs. At the top she leads us down a long hall and stops beside a oak wood door. “The dwarves are out so there is plenty of room,” she says and opens the door.

I gasp. I can’t help myself. The room is beautiful. The fire place at the end of the room is polished, and there was a large bed with a pink canopy pushed up against the blue wall. My sister smirks and I turn away.

“Hey,” I say. “There’s only one bed. We’ll have to share.” My sister’s smile fades. Now it’s my turn to smirk. I think she’s going to say something, but she doesn’t. I guess she’s too polite.

That night, I can’t sleep. I can’t stop wondering about my parents. I wonder if they’re worried. I lay awake thinking. “Sandra? Are you awake?” my sister’s voice asks from the dark.

“Sandra? Are you awake?” my sister’s voice asks from the dark.

“Yeah.”

“Um, I’ve been thinking –– ”

“Yeah.”

She sighs. “You know how at the end of the movie the prince sees Snow White in the coffin and decides to marry her?”

I’m silent.

She continues, “Well, what happens if he doesn’t see her in the coffin?”

I think. Then I gasp.

“He will never see her or know her, let alone marry her!” I yell, jerking myself upright. “Arra, we might have just made a humongous mistake!”

 

Chapter 3

In the morning Snow White makes us a good breakfast of eggs and bacon. We laugh and talk but then it’s time for Arra and me to get going. We say our goodbyes, get directions for the capital (we stayed up late last night making a plan to visit the prince, you see), she gives us some money, and we head out.

We walk a while then reach a small village. We find an inn with a love bird on its sign and get a small lunch with the little money we have. Then we set out again. By around sunset, we come upon the capital. “Now what?” my sister asks as we enter the large town.

“Now what?” my sister asks as we enter the large town.

“We find an inn,” I say, confidently taking the lead.

“How do we pay?” she asks.

“We have some money left –– ah! Here it is!” We walk up to an oak wood building labeled the Just Right Inn. I open the door and we troop in. Right when we slam the door, it starts raining.

“We’re going to sleep in the inn, right?” Arra stares out the window wearily. I don’t respond. Don’t want to get her hopes up.

We trudge wearily out of the inn and into the pouring rain fifteen minutes later. There are no rooms left thanks to the annoyingly cold rain. A man dressed in royal clothing comes up to us and bows to Arra. “Your Highness,” he says, kissing her hand. “Into the carriage, the prince is worried sick!” He shoos us into a carriage despite our complaints and reasoning. Soon, we’re sitting across from each other on velvet cushioned benches. Then I get an idea.

“Arra!” I exclaim.

“Mmm?” she asks.

“This guy, and the prince too, they think you’re the prince’s bride-to-be. We could use you –– or whoever you’re playing as –– to our advantage.” I lean over and whisper the plan in her ear.

We finally reach the castle at around midnight. The steward rushes us down dank corridors and past suits of armor. We stop at a wooden door and he knocks. Another man in the same clothing answers and lets us in. He leads us into a waiting room and disappears into the room beyond. A second later he appears and beckons to us. By now the first steward had disappeared so we walk through the doors alone. The doors bang behind me and I wince slightly.

“My love,” the prince says standing up and smiling. He stops smiling as soon as he sees me. His brow furrows. “And who’s this?” he asks.

“She’s my cousin. She –– ” I stammer.

“You sure you’re related? You’re beautiful and she’s, well, not,” he interrupts. I jerk back in surprise, but before I can answer, my sister butts in.

“Anyway, she’s been reminding me of our childhood friend, Snow White, and I want you to meet her.”

Wow, Arra’s got this in the bag! I think to myself.

“Anything for you, my love. Tomorrow we will meet her! Now to bed, my beauty!”

He waves us out of the room. So far so good, I think smugly. Now for the hard part.

 

Chapter 4

The next morning the prince, Arra (also known as Lady Sabrina), and I get in a carriage, and are whisked away to Snow White’s.

When we get there, Snow White answers the door. She looks flustered. “Your Highness,” she says and bows deeply. The prince looks dazzled.

“Milady,” he says, and kisses her hand. She looks utterly surprised. “I hear you are friends with my bride-to-be.” Snow White definitely looks disappointed at the mention of the words bride-to-be.

“Please, um, come in,” she says, motioning for us to enter. But Arra holds the prince back.

“I need to talk to you.” The prince’s brow furrows and he resists, but finally gives in.

“Of course.” The “couple” walk around to the back of the house.

“Um, I’m going to pick some berries.” I bluff, then before she can object, I race around to the back of the house and duck behind some bushes just as the “couple” come into view.

“Um, listen,” says Arra. “I asked you to come here for two reasons.”

“And what would those be?”

“One, to see my friend. And two, I needed to talk to you in private.”

“Why?”

“Well, I don’t know if you’re the right person for me, or if I’m the right person for you –– ”

“You mean you do –– ”

“But I do know someone who would be good for you.” The prince was silent. “Snow White.” Arra slips the ring she found in her room last night off her hand and hands it to the prince.

“Well, she is nice, and pretty so I gue –– ”

“Great! I’ll go get her so you can ask her to marry you!” Arra dashes off around the house and I follow her. Snow White is waiting in front of the house for us. “The prince would like to talk to you,” Arra says as we approach Snow White. She turns beet red.

“Um, okay,” she says and runs around to the back of the house.

A few minutes later, (a few minutes that felt like a few hours) the two come back. I notice that Snow White is wearing a ring she wasn’t wearing before. I smile.

I’ve never been more relieved to hear a piece of news as I was to hear this news. “We’re getting married!” she said.

Then there is a loud zap and I’m laying next to Arra on the hayloft like nothing had ever happened.

“What just happened?” I ask, standing up and brushing the hay off my lap.

“All I know is that there’s hay all over me, and I need to take a shower,” she says, standing up.

Some things just never change, I think. Then she does something she hasn’t done since we were five. She hugs me.

Then again, some things do change, I think to myself and smile.

The Secret Case File of Donald Trump

Case file noted by Guy T. Bloom of the paranormal branch of the FBI.

Prologue

Donald Drumpf was an ordinary man… NOT! He is by far, the best candidate that you can vote for…. but there is a dark secret about him that nobody knows…. and this secret is about to destroy the world.

Chapter One: What happened?

Donald Drumpf was sleeping in bed. And he woke straight up. He was having a nightmare about his science test at school tomorrow.

“At least I don’t have the pressure of running for president,” he said to himself, and went back to sleep.

“Yeah, I don’t think so,” said the ghost of a rogue wizard, before using his magic teleportation powers to go into Drumpf’s room. He started chanting a Darke spell while waving his hands over Donald Drumpf. There was a flash of light, and Drumpf woke up to a man in black wizard robes from the fifteen hundreds waving his hands over Drumpf.

“It’s already over,” he said. “YOU WILL AVENGE MY FRIEND!” There was a flash of light, and the wizard disappeared.

“Ah, whatever,” Drumpf said to himself. “I’ll just go back to sleep.”

Chapter Two: The Unknown Effects

That morning, when he woke up, he was worried about his test again. What are all the parts of the Bohr diagram again? he thought to himself. He went to the kitchen and poured himself some milk for his Captain Crunch cereal. When his parents got up and went near their son, strange effects started happening in their head. They wanted their son… to win some sort of election. They weren’t sure that he was going to, yet at the same time they were.

“Hey, son?” Mr. Drumpf asked. “Is there a class president election in your class going on?”

“Yes,” he answered. “But I didn’t tell you…. How did you know?” Now there was even more pressure on him. His parents wanted him to be class president? There were 43 kids in his class… that meant he had a  3.333…  percent chance of winning, because only 30 kids were running. At least he was good at math…

“Well, son, I expect you to win this,” Drumpf’s dad said.

“Look, Dad,” Drumpf started. “I already have a test today, and winning the election is even more pressure.”

“You will be grounded if you don’t get at least second place.”

“GROUNDED?! THAT’S INSANE! THERE ARE 30 KIDS RUNNING!”

“No arguing, Donald,” Mr. Drumpf started. ‘’You will win!” There was now a faint red glow from his father’s eyes.

“Dad? Are you oka –– ?”

“SHUT IT SON! YOU MUST WIN THE ELECTION!” his father said angrily, his eyes glowing a very bright red. Donald looked at his mother, because she would obviously be on his side. To Donald’s surprise, his mother had the same red eyes as his father, and she was pretty much just glaring at Donald for a few seconds.

She broke the silence by saying, “Must have son election win,” in a deep zombie like groan.

“What’s going on?!” Donald screamed, before running out of the house to his schoolbus. On the schoolbus, he met his friend Harry.

“Dude, my parents are going ins –– ” Donald started, before screaming. He saw the same red eyes he saw on his parents.

“Win election Donald must,” his friend groaned like a zombie, no… like his parents.

“Oh, shoot,” Donald said.

Chapter Three: The Deal

When Donald got to school, there was a crowd following him, all groaning like zombies.

“UURGGGH!” the kids repeated. From an aerial view, it looked like Donald was a powerful magnet, while the other students were magnetic sand.

“Win election Donald must,” they all chanted. Donald noticed that they all had red eyes.

“Um…” Donald started. “I gotta use the bathroom.” He dashed to the bathroom, and locked the door. He could still hear their constant groaning.

What is going on!? he asked himself. The ghost of the rogue wizard was right in front of him, yet Donald didn’t see him. The ghost then appeared to Donald. Donald flinched.

“Whoa!” Donald screamed. “Who are you?”

“I am the ghost responsible for everything happening to you.”

“Why did you do this?”

“Donald J. Drumpf,” The ghost started. “Be my apprentice.”

“Okay, rewind,” Drumpf said, confused. “WHY DID YOU NEED TO PUT THIS DUMB CURSE ON ME!?”

The wizard smirked. He then snapped his fingers. The constant groaning stopped. “You see, that’s what you can do to people if you get trained as my apprentice.”

“Why me?”

“Because I saw what a Darke heart you have.”

“Okay, you know what?” Donald started in a ‘smart alec-y’ voice. “I would have been your apprentice, but I was seriously going insane after you put that spell on me. If that was you, because I mean –– ” He was cut off.

“I was the person who put that spell on you, and you didn’t really freak out that much.”

“Well, give me some proof that I didn’t fre –– ” He was cut off by the wizard snapping his fingers. A misty projection of the scene popped up- He started chanting a Darke spell while waving his hands over Donald Drumpf. There was a flash of light, and Drumpf woke up to a man in wizard robes from the fifteen-hundreds waving his hands over Drumpf.

“It’s already over,” he said. “YOU WILL AVENGE MY SON!” There was a flash of light, and the wizard disappeared.

“Ah, whatever,” Drumpf said to himself. “I’ll just go back to sleep.” The projection turned into golden dust and fell to the ground before disappearing.

“Okay, maybe I didn’t freak out that much,” Drumpf said. “But I was really freaked out when the effects started happening.”

“I can’t disprove you that time.” The wizard said. “But will you be my apprentice?”

“Um, I don’t know. Let me think about –– NO,” Drumpf said. “You put my through the most dramatic night and day of my life.” Drumpf started walking toward the bathroom door.

“You know you haven’t suffered all the effects of the spell, right?” the ghost smirked. Donald stopped walking.

“What’s next, you make it so I actually fail everything that I do?”

“No, I made it so every single election you run, you win.” Drumpf thought he saw him mutter something under his breath, but disregarded it.

“And that’s a curse because?” Donald said. He could win EVERYTHING. This was insane.

“If you ever lose an election, the world will come to an end and everyone will be alerted it was you.”

“I mean, that’s kinda –– whatever.” Drumpf walked out of the room. What Drumpf didn’t hear in that conversation were the most important parts.

“No, I made it so every single election you run, you win. But the flaw is, you lose the power for your biggest election,” was what the wizard actually said. His next line? Here’s all the secrets: “If you ever lose an election, the world will come to an end and everyone will be alerted it was you. So be warned about your biggest election.” He was just following the code of conduct: You must state all of the effects of your spell. He started chanting a Darke chant to summon his master. A ghost of an old frail man appeared. He was also wearing robes.

“The deed is done, my master. But Drumpf didn’t accept the offer,” the Rogue Wizard said, bowing down to his master.

“The offer is meaningless now. So you did the deed, huh. Good,” the Wizard’s master began. “Very good.” The master then snapped his fingers. His apprentice began to shrink.

“What… WHAT IS GOING ON?!” the apprentice screamed with a feeling of betrayal, but he was more surprised than anything. “STOP THIS RIGHT nooow!” His voice was drowned out while he shrunk. His master created a bubble with his hands, and pointed his finger at his apprentice. The bubble traveled in the direction of his apprentice. When the bubble got to his mini-apprentice, he was encased in the bubble. The master then used telekinetic Darke powers to lift his apprentice bubble into the air, to eventually land in his hands. The apprentice  repeatedly smacked and punched the inside of the bubble. The master held the bubble in his hands as if it was a valuable vase…. then he crushed it with his bare hands.

“I didn’t need him,” he said to himself. “I looked into his mind… he was going to betray me… side with Drumpf. It’s over now. The world will fall to ashes. And all of it will be Donald Drumpf’s fault.”

Chapter Four: The Meeting

When Drumpf went out of the bathroom, he didn’t have a mob following him. He didn’t have zombies groaning “Election Win Donald Must” with red eyes. All the kids were back to normal. He wasn’t sure he could trust that wizard.

After school, when he got home, he did his homework in his room. Little did he know, the ghost master of the other Rogue Wizard was floating right beside him. He chose to appear to Donald. Donald flinched.

“Why do people keep –– ” Donald began, but was cut off by the Wizard.

“I hear that my apprentice has given you the offer of being his apprentice. Well, he said his apprentice, like he was supposed to.”

“What do you mean?” Drumpf asked.

“I mean you really would have been my apprentice.”

“Okay… you came here just to tell me that? I declined.”

“Well, he told you about the other effects, right?”

“Yes, he did.”

“Well in order for those effects to work, you need to shake my hand. I made a change to the effects.”

“What?”

“They won’t be zombies anymore.”

“Who?”

“The people who are around you, idiot. Everything else he said is still intact.”

“Okay, do I need to sign a paper or anything?”

“Nope, you just need to shake my hand.” He took out his hand for a handshake. Donald took out his. Then he made the biggest mistake of his life: He shook the hand.

Chapter Five: Cause & Effect

Donald then got used to winning everything –– he didn’t have to fit any requirements. He got cocky. He started going under those requirements on purpose. He started having bad debates for the debate club, he brought a stuffed animal for a dog contest, he didn’t even try. And he is being faced with the biggest challenge of his life right now –– becoming president of the United States. Little did he know that the wizard was rubbing his hands together, laughing so hard he fell to the ground. He had almost succeeded in avenging his son who tried to destroy the world himself, DomDaniel. The effects of the spell were going away. In only a few months, the world will be ashes. If only he had accepted the offer as his apprentice. Then they would stay together on the planet Dorghast, the planet of Darke ghosts. You could come in if you are not a ghost, but you needed a Supreme Darke Ghost to escort you. You get there via Darke flying, or using the NoAir spell in space, what he was planning to do after the world explodes, maybe after using a Shield spell for the explosion. The presidential campaign is still going on, so if you don’t want the world to explode, VOTE FOR DONALD DRUMPF!

The Terrrerian

Once upon a time, there was a terrrerian that consumed stars. The terrrerian consumed stars by piling dirt up until he was at the stars. Then, he ate the stars after they fell from the sky. To get down from the dirt mountain, he flew from tree to tree until he found maple syrup. Then, he boiled the maple syrup to make sand. He used the sand in a mixifier with stone, and he got sandstone. He ate the sandstone, and then jumped from the mountain and landed safely.

He used the extra sandstone to greenify the hooligans that were smashing the buzzlight bottles, that were made by the magical buzzlight fairy, who made the buzzlight company. When the terrrerian greenified the hooligans, they turned green and stopped moving. The buzzlight fairy was very happy, so the terrrerian got a bunch of green bobbleheads that yelled at greenery. The bobbleheads were magical, so they could grant wishes. But, when the bobbleheads granted wishes, the bobbleheads yelled even more at the greenery, which would make the greenery sad. The greenery would cry, which made the greenery grow. When the greenery grew the bobbleheads evaporated slowly till there were no bobbleheads left. The greenery somehow had magic powers because the greenery absorbed the bobbleheads.The bobbleheads reproduced because one bobblehead refused to grant wishes, and then there were 100 bobbleheads again.The terrrerian accidentally wished that he had an obsidian skull, and then he got his face stuck in a skull made of sponge marshmallows. The terrrerian wished the skull off his face and wished for a walnut salad, but when he ate the walnut salad he turned blue. Luckily, he had one wish left, so he wished that he was back to normal again.

But then there were no bobbleheads left. He still had some walnut salad left, so he fed it to the stars, and the stars fell all the way down to earth. Then the earth dissolved and became a star planet. He jumped off the star planet and turned it into a huge sponge marshmallow that broke gravity. He made three-dimensional televisions, took them to the sponge marshmallow planet, and ate them.

When he ate the three-dimensional TVs he could travel into the three dimensions. Then he traveled into the world of Potonia and bought a reversal potion. Then he travelled back into his own dimension. He threw the reversal potion at the sponge marshmallow planet, and it turned into a regular planet. He jumped back down to his planet and realized that the hooligans that were smashing the buzzlight bottles. They were still smashing them because they were ungreenified.

The buzzlight fairy was really angry, so she tried to destroy Jupiter, but instead she turned Jupiter into a firecracker. The firecracker exploded into the sun, which sent the whole galaxy hurtling into space.The galaxy crashed into a humongous spiderweb and there was a galaxy-wide spider apocalypse. But the spiders were peace loving creatures, and said that they would forgive the humans if they made it illegal to hurt a spider. Then the humans outlawed hurting a spider and outlawed spider farming. The humans were happy living in a world with spiders. Everyone had no fear because the spiders would protect them.

 

SADLY, TH
you

ERE WAS

want

A MAN

THAT

LIKED TO

to

SUBLIMIN

eat

ALLY

carrots

MESSAGE

People, and he subliminally messaged everyone to eat carrots. When everyone ate the carrots, they had super eyesight. The terrrerian still needed to remove the hooligans that kept smashing the buzzlight bottles, so he ran around the earth really fast, and that turned the earth into a super-friction planet, which only a few creatures would not survive. One of those creatures were the buzzlight-bottle-smashing-hooligans. After that, the buzzlight fairy was happy, so she gave the terrrerian time in a can. When the terrrerian opened the time in a can, there was a potent poultry powered popcorn machine that exploded exactly every elephant Ecuador ever executed. Then there was a worldwide Ecuador-executed elephant deficiency, which started a nuclear fallout. Because of the fallout, the spiders started spewing superheated spasm gas. The gas disabled the nuclear fallout by personifying it and sending it on a trip in its favorite rocket ship.The only side effects of the superheated spasm gas is that baby chickens turned green, and all the spiders shrunk again.

When the terrrerian saw the green chickens he thought he had greenified them by accident. So he fed all the baby chickens his spare walnut salad, and the baby chickens turned yellow again. The unbalance of color was balanced, so everything that was green turned yellow. The terrrerian realized that he didn’t greenify the baby chickens, and they were green before. Then, thanks to the transdimensional televisions, the terrrerian totally consumed, he transported himself into the rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet dimension.

In the rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet dimension, everything was rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet. In the dimension, the terrrerian went into the color utility store and was going to buy a color unbalancer, but when the terrrerian walked in, he saw that a thief stole all the color unbalancers. Then everything in the rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet dimention turned green because color spectrum looked like this: rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet instead of this: rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet. Because green was the same in both spectrums, the rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet dimension turned green. Then the terrrerian bought a cannon and it hit the thief.

The terrrerian then put the color unbalancers back, and then got one for free because he got the color unbalancers back. Then the terrrerian went back home and used the color unbalancer. Then the color was unbalanced again. One side effect of the color unbalancer was that the hooligans were ungreenified, so they were yelllowified. Yellowifing something made it faster, stronger, and greenify resistant. When the terrrerian tried to greenify the hooligans they just smashed the buzzlight bottles faster. So, the terrrerian used a purplify potion to normalify the hooligans, and then the terrrerian greenified the hooligans using a green explosion.Then the terrrerian was hungry again. The terrrerian destroyed all of the stars near earth and destroyed Jupiter, so he visited buyyourownstar.com and bought a star,but the shipping was  $100,000,000,000,000,000. The terrrerian called Subway Steve and asked him to come to the terrrerian. Then Subway Steve came and the terrrerian rode him to planet with a realy confusing name: hfdjmzcnjnbvmcfk,l.kjhnmlkdfgjfkvlijbnndmgjbrn gnkhb5rilkfnghnktuhbnjhutjhutktjnbjknufmjrknvbtmbnhjkvthukbtnjkukidvmnkbktjhbvgrjnvnjxjkrmthn, AKA Planet 9.

The terrrerian went to planet 9 to get the star, but they ran out of stars, so the terrrerian used a crazily confuddled corn cob powered cod liver oil cannon to shoot cod liver oil at a star. Then the star was supercharged and spun to Earth. The terrrerian walked to earth and saw that the hooligans were ungreenified. The terrrerian realized that greenifying the hooligans wouldn’t do anything, so the terrrerian created a giant Buzzlight bottle and sent the hooligans to it. The hooligans stayed there and never bothered the buzzlight fairy again.

 

Or did they…?

The Buzzlight Fairy was just minding her own business, drinking a cup of tea and  watching buzzlight-bottles network. Suddenly she felt a massive pain in her side. She dropped her tea on the floor and the china shattered. This was no ordinary pain. It was as if a thousand knives appeared in her side. Suddenly the pain stopped. The Buzzlight Fairy then envisioned a being with immense capabilities, known as “the terrrerian”, creating a massive buzzlight bottle in place of Jupiter, which had been destroyed. She then saw the being place four hooligans on the planet who started smashing it immediately. The Buzzlight fairy became frustrated. Why would one make such a beautiful thing only to have it destroyed? It was then when the Buzzlight fairy swore she would get revenge against this being.

The terrrerian smiled gleefully as he saw the hooligans smashing the buzzlight bottle,without paying the slightest bit of attention to the buzzlight bottle that the terrrerian was holding. Then the ground started to shake as bits of the buzzlight bottle rose into the air. A blinding ball of light appeared. As the light faded,the terrrerian saw a fairy whose eyes were flaming. The buzzlight fairy.

“The buzzlight bottles you’ve destroyed. That you’ve sacrificed to the void. You must stop destroying them tonight or else your soul will take flight,” the buzzlight fairy said cryptically before disappearing in a ball of light.

The terrrerian then took the hooligans in a net and moved them to MarZ. On MarZ, there was zombies everywhere.When the terrrerian dropped off the hooligans off on MarZ, he expected the hooligans to get zombified, but they turned the zombies into Buzzlight Bottles! It turns out that the hooligans absorbed the magical powers from the bobbleheads, like the greenery, in The Terrrerian. Now the hooligans could turn anything they wanted into buzzlight bottles and smash them! The terrrerian tried to talk to the hooligans and asked them to stop smashing buzzlight bottles. All the hooligans said was “rfgfhtvfdzycuy,” and they walked away. Then the terrrerian felt a pulling force, like a vortex. A ball of light flickered to life and started to expand.Then it faded away and the buzzlight fairy hovered in its place.

“Hello, terrrerian. Now before you say anything, I must ask you; why did you make a giant buzzlight bottle just to have it destroyed?”

“I didn’t know that you existed before. If I knew, I never would have made it. I tried to stop the hooligans, but apparently they can turn anything they want into buzzlight bottles,” the terrrerian telecommunicated

“Can they turn each other into buzzlight bottles?” inquired the buzzlight fairy.

“I don’t know.”

The terrrerian then flew to MarZ. He took the hooligans to the nearest planet that didn’t turn into a firecracker and explode, SaTURN. On SaTURN everyone fell sideways.The terrrerian placed the hooligans in a small room and hoped the hooligans would turn each other into buzzlight bottles. What the terrrerian didn’t know, is that they placed the hooligans above the six percent helium that was on Jupiter. The hooligans turned the room into a buzzlight bottle and escaped. Before the terrrerian could react, the hooligans turned the helium into buzzlight bottles.Then SaTURN, with all the hooligans on it, started falling sideways. The terrrerian and the buzzlight fairy, who was with him, chased SaTURN. Because SaTURN was falling sideways, it crashed into Uranus, Neptune and Pluto. Out of the disproportionate mush of planets the terrrerian and the buzzlight fairy saw the trapped hooligans.

“I got it!” said the buzzlight fairy, racing towards the hooligans.

No, I’ll do it, telecommunicated the terrrerian, speeding up. The terrrerian raced the buzzlight fairy to the hooligans but the terrrerian took them out of the planets first with a net.

I told you I could do it, the terrrerian thought.

“This time, my attempt will work,” said the buzzlight fairy.

The terrrerian and the buzzlight fairy went to MarZ next. There, the buzzlight fairy tried to put a zombie mask on a hooligan, but the hooligan kept resisting. Finally, when the buzzlight fairy was able to put the mask on the hooligan, the other hooligans turned the mask into buzzlight bottles.

See? I told you it wouldn’t work, the terrrerian communicated telepathically.

“Why don’t we work together? It might work, ”said the buzzlight fairy defeatedly.

Fine, the terrrerian transmitted.

The buzzlight fairy and the terrrerian then created a plan. They were going to summon a magical warlock called Asmoth. To summon Asmoth, you place candles around an altar made of stone, place an axe on top of it and chant “htomnomsamusyberehi” three times. The thing about the axe is that it has a buzzlight bottle hidden inside it. When Asmoth is summoned, he will grab the axe and yell, “WHO SUMMONED ME?” When the hooligans see Asmoth pick up the axe, they will start attacking him. Then Asmoth will get angry at the hooligans and destroy them.

It was time to put their plan into action.The terrrerian and the buzzlight fairy set up the altar and brought all the hooligans to it.Then they put the axe on the altar and chanted the word three times. Then they flew away to a safe distance.They saw a tornado of axes which then disappeared, with Asmoth the warlock in its place.

“WHO SUMMONED ME?!” inquired Asmoth. He then picked up the axe. The hooligans attacked him. From the distance that the terrrerian and the buzzlight fairy could only see explosions of dust and massive mushroom clouds. Then they heard Asmoth say “I AM ASMOTH THE WARLOCK,YAS YAS YAS!” before his shape blurred, and disappeared. When they inspected MarZ they saw that the whole planet was no longer there. Another planet had been destroyed. Now the only planets left were Earth,Venus,and MerCUREy.

“Guess my job’s done here,” said the buzzlight fairy.

“See you around,” thought the terrrerian.

“Bye,” said the buzzlight fairy.

Then the buzzlight fairy disappeared in a puff of smoke. The hooligans were gone forever.

Or were they…?

One month after the disintegration of the hooligans, the terrrerian was on a beach walking past a tree. He kicked a rock at it. The rock hit the tree. Unluckily for the terrrerian, that tree was a palm tree. Palm trees have leaves filled with greenify potion, which is what makes them green. Normally, this wouldn’t have any effect on anything, but because of the Earth’s brief moment as a sponge marshmallow planet, the palm trees, which become super absorbent around sponge marshmallows, retain their sponge-marshmallow-like insides. The combination of the vibration of the rock hitting the tree, the sponge marshmallow minerals, and the greenify potion create a silent propulsion system for the palm tree. The palm tree then silently rocketed into the atmosphere, without the terrrerian noticing a thing.

As the tree zoomed past Earth, it passed the previous location of MarZ. The sponge marshmallow, which is a superabsorbent material, absorbed the disintegrated hooligans. The palm tree rocket would have crashed into Venus, but because Venus is made of iron and rock, which boost the effects of greenify potion, the palm tree rocket blasted straight through the center of Venus, leaving a cylindrical hole in the middle of it. Then the rocket, burning through the last of its greenify potion fuel, crashed into MerCUREy. The minerals on MerCUREy started to cure the hooligans of their death, reviving them.The hooligans combined with the palm tree, the sponge marshmallows, and the last of the greenify potion. The hooligans combined into one hooligan who could jump higher, was immune to greenify potion, and was extremely smart. The hooligan didn’t want to smash buzzlight or buzzlight bottles anymore.

The terrrerian, oblivious to the fact that he caused the resurrection of the hooligans, turned around towards the glimmering ocean and saw out of the corner of his eye the empty place where the palm tree should be. Then the terrrerian thought Wasn’t there a tree there? Then the terrrerian kept on walking.                                                                                                    

 

Two days later…

 

For the past two days, the hooligan had been working on a way to escape the nonexistent atmosphere of MerCUREy. The hooligan cooled the small amounts of hydrogen, helium, and oxygen in the air until they became a liquid. Then the hooligan put the liquids in a bowl and mixed it with the merCUREic sand. This created a gigantifier. The hooligan consumed part of the mixture and grew to the size of ten giraffes. Then he jumped to earth (with his super jump ability) and started to smash everything. The hooligan left smashed trees and upturned grass in his wake. Then the hooligan did something terrible. The hooligan combined the nitrogen in earth’s atmosphere with the merCUREic mixture he had, and threw the mixture to the moon. This caused the moon to enter a sped up orbit, making the moon go into a solar eclipse. Because the moon used all of its orbital energy in those five seconds, the moon couldn’t move for the next 100 years. That meant there was a solar eclipse for the next 100 years. MWAHAHAHA!!!

The eclipse was the first thing the terrrerian noticed. Then the terrrerian heard the smashing of trees and grass.

“TERRRERIAN,” said a voice.”I’M COMING FOR YOU!”

The terrrerian saw a massive figure stomping toward him. Then, he saw the figure was a hooligan, combined with greenify potion and palm tree wood. Then the terrrerian realized what he had done. The terrrerian realized that kicking the rock against the palm tree caused it to rocket into space and collect the hooligan dust. The terrrerian realized that the palm tree rocket landed on MerCUREy and revived the hooligans. The terrrerian realized that this was all his fault.

The terrrerian needed to defeat this monstrosity. He teleported to Potiona and back and threw a greenify potion at it, but the hooligan absorbed it and only seemed to grow more powerful. Then the hooligan picked up a star from earth’s sky and smushed it in his hand. He poured the starjuice on another star that he picked up. This made a starbomb that would explode and suck all the air out of earth’s atmosphere.

“I HAVE A STARBOMB,WHICH WILL SUCK OUT ALL THE AIR OF EARTH’S ATMOSPHERE,” the hooligan said. “IT WILL EXPLODE IN three… two… one.”

The bomb exploded and there was a blinding flash of light.Then all the air was sucked out of earth’s atmosphere.The terrrerian saw the plants withering, and turning brown.

Somewhere, somewhen, there was a Star-god. Star-god envisioned the hooligan exploding a starbomb, with the terrrerian standing frightened in the background. I must help this being, the Star-god thought before he teleported to the terrrerian.

The terrrerian turned around and saw a blinding flash of yellow light.

“I am Star-god. I am here to help you,” said the Star-god.

Then the terrrerian and the Star-god started fighting the hooligan. First, the terrrerian built a missile made of maple syrup and shot it at the hooligan, but the hooligan grew stronger and absorbed the maple syrup. Then the sun god tried to ignite a mini star and throw it at the hooligan,but the star couldn’t ignite because there was no oxygen. Then the terrrerian used a return-oxygenizer 5,000 to return the oxygen to earth, but he accidentally returned 5,000 times as much as there was before. Because there was 5,000 times as much oxygen, all the spiders became huge. Then the terrrerian saw his best spider friend Aragag.

“Aragag!” the terrrerian called. ”It’s been so long.”

“Terrrerian!” Aragag greeted. ”How are… BLEEEH!”Aragag said as he barfed on the hooligan’s shoes.

“HEY!” the hooligan said. “THOSE WERE MY NEW SHOES!”

The hooligan, in a fit of rage, lifted his foot to stomp on Aragag, but Aragag was quick. Aragag shot a web at him, but the web wasn’t strong enough. Then the Star-god extracted hydrogen from a star and coated the web with it. Then the Star-god lit the rope on fire, so if the hooligan struggled, he would get burnt. Then Aragag shot the hooligan at the moon. The hooligan flew into the moon, Venus and MurCUREy, sending all three planets hurtling into the sun with the hooligan. When the moon went into the sun, the sun absorbed the moon which caused the sun to send out a radioactive shrinkamatronization asteroid that fell on earth, which caused all the spiders to shrink and caused the oxygen level to return to normal.

The hooligan was never seen again.

Unikitty in Big Letters

   

This line I must rhyme

Unikitties are awesome

They can be good or commit crimes

They smell better than possums

Unikitties are awesome

Meow can be their battle cry

They smell better than possums

Unikitties can also fly

Meow can be their battle cry

They can hide in human form

Unikitties can also fly

You’ll never see one in a storm

 

They can hide in human form

Unikitties can eat robots

You’ll never see one in a storm

They can also eat astronauts

Unikitties can eat robots

They can battle with Batman

They can also eat astronauts

They are mean and tease fat-man

They can battle with Batman

They can be good or commit crimes

They are mean and tease fat-man

This line I must rhyme

 

 

Through the Woods (Excerpt)

Chapter One:  The Encounter of Sorts

Pat stared out of the thickly layered window pane at the flurry of small white flakes of snow that were quickly piling up upon the rough ground. He turned to look at the clock that he had nailed to the wall.  Its thin hands read 4:35. He knew he should be asleep, but something about the snow fascinated him. He thought of what Sam would’ve said. “Not surprised. You’re probably the strangest boy in Arkansas.” He would’ve chortled absent-mindedly in his thick Irish accent while cleaning his bowie knife that everyone in the whole town recognized. That’s what he would’ve said. But Sam was taken by a bear while hiking in Blackwood forest two months ago. Everyone assumed he was dead. Pat had gotten an entire lecture from his father about being safe when hiking alone in the wilderness, but Pat didn’t care. He loved Blackwood forest, and nothing would stop him from hiking there.  

Suddenly, Pat straightened his back. He thought that he must be seeing things because he had been awake for half the night. This species was rare around these regions and should be hibernating, but no. A black bear was trudging through the snow, its thick fur flecked with white.

Pat slung his satchel, with its fat four-hole button he’d found on the wooden table in the tailor shop, over his scrawny shoulder and rushed outside.  The cold immediately shot through his small stature and overcame his body. Still, Pat fought on and pulled forward toward the corner of the town with the big hill.

Once he had gotten there, Pat pulled his binoculars from the bag and raised them to his squinting eyes. The bear wasn’t very far off.  A mere twenty minutes north east. Pat’s hands were shaking.

Suddenly, his bony arms lost grip of the heavy binoculars, which swung down to his chest.  They knocked him backwards and the satchel flew to the bottom of the hill, making a loud clunking sound. He climbed back to the top of the hill and raised the device to his eyes. The gear that focused the vision of the lenses had been pulled far right. Pat saw a blurry black shape rushing toward him. Lowering the lenses, he saw the bear galloping towards him. A bolt of fright shot through Pat’s entire body and, in a wild state of mind, he dropped everything and sprinted toward Blackwood forest. The binoculars bounced against his chest and he turned to see the Bear gaining on him.

Pat caught a glimpse of the treehouse he had made thick in the trees of Blackwood forest one summer. It was constructed from the strong oak in one of it’s famous dark-wooded trees. Pat dashed through the thistles and brambles as they cut against his arms and legs. Finally, the treehouse was straight ahead of him. He struggled and climbed up the thick rope leading to the small cabin. Pat made it and felt the tree shake as the bear clawed against the bark. He sat on the wooden floor and panted breathlessly. He glanced to the corner of the room to see his BB-gun with it’s wooden frame and black markings smudged onto the end of the steel barrel as it glistened in the sunrise. He scooted over to it and reached for it, then propped it up against the balcony overlooking his small town and the barren wasteland of snow riddled with foot prints.

Pat peered down the end of the barrel and at the black bear who was retreating back north. He pulled the trigger and a brief burst of flame and sparks spurted from the gun. This was followed by a sluggish trail of smoke and a whistling sound. The small pellet flew through the air and easily punctured the bear’s thin flesh. It fell on its side, but Pat knew a single BB couldn’t’ve killed a bear of such power as a black bear. He pulled the binoculars to his eyes and squinted to see the bear up close.  It was a female, her thin flesh was dark in places, and her ribs were visible. Now Pat understood. The bear had been hunting for food because it was starved. Even though it had attacked him, Pat felt bad for the animal. He cared for and loved all nature.  

Pat lowered himself down from the tree on the knotted rope, dug into the emergency knapsack he had sewn himself, which was safely nestled in a secret compartment in the wall of the treehouse, to find a small jar full of salted pork. He dropped a juicy piece of the pork in front of the bear.

Afterwards, Pat decided to stay in the forest one night until the snow storm let up. He wasn’t worried about his parents. They were probably relieved he was finally out of their hair. Pat was content as he drifted to sleep on the floor of the cabin suspended in the tree.  

He awoke at sunrise to a horrible sight.

The ground was damp and littered with pine needles. Pat stopped to see it. A Blackwood was on it’s side. The lower half had been splintered by lighting, Pat gathered from the blackened ash-stained wood.  He counted the seemingly endless rings in the tree to see that this “Blackie,” as old countrymen say, was about 27 years old. A tree of that age could be the strongest wood in any market. This tree had fallen and covered hundreds of feet of land –– including Pat’s escape route. Pat muttered a curse, but he knew that he had always been preparing for a situation like this.

He climbed up to the treehouse and reviewed his inventory. He dumped the backpack onto the floor to examine his belongings. A six-inch Kings matchbox with 46 matches. A roll of thread with a pin jabbed into it. A thick hunting knife with a leather cloth wrapped around the blade, and a week’s worth of salted meat and a few onions that had grown deep underground while Pat was treasure hunting. In the treehouse itself, Pat had a 6-48 mosquito BB-gun with it’s signature long and thin barrel. There was also a small shelf with a jam jar of pellets, and 3 books: The Hardy Boys: murder in an alleyway, The Lord of the Rings: Return of the King, and Robinson Crusoe.

By mid-afternoon, Pat was bored and scared. Powerful winds made him shiver and dig his feet deeper into the mossy ground. He was sculpting a rock with his hunting knife. The rock was thin and had a needle-sharp tip. Many curves bore through it because it had been sitting at the bottom of Ratchet creek,  a playful brook that flowed through most of Blackwood. Pat suddenly dropped the rock as he heard a faint growl. He turned to see the black bear awakening, it’s eyelids slowly reaching toward the thick, dirty fur of the forehead.  Pat knew he was supposed to be frightened, but somehow he wasn’t. He edged closer to the bear and picked up the dew-stained piece of pork, then threw it closer to the bear’s mouth. She immediately gobbled it down and slowly pulled herself from the dirt, a swarm of fleas quickly succeeding from her thick fur. For the next few days, the bear would lumber alongside Pat, not making any sort of violent movements, not really interacting with Pat at all. Pat was a bit jittery about the presence of the bear, but thought about all of the incorrect things his father had said to him, and that this was fully indulging in nature. However, he lied awake at night wondering, what his friends would say. Bear boy! You love animals so much you’re practically becoming one! He drifted into an uneven sleep.

Pat sat on a small boulder, motionless.  He didn’t talk much and barely ever tried to socialize with others at school.  At his small school house, there were eleven boys and ten girls.  The two genders broke into separate groups and nobody in the boys group really had specific friends.  To Pat, all of the boys were pretty much the same.  But he was different.  

The bear scratched her paw against her flank to rid herself of what seemed to be a very annoying parasite. Pat found his eyes drooping and climbed to the treehouse to take a nap. Suddenly, his eyes were open again, and the blurred tint of his small wooden life force faded into focus. He peered out the frame of open air to see the sun glint through clumps of leaves. It was about 3:17 in the afternoon, according to his calculations from examining the sun.  

“You drool in your sleep,” said a voice suddenly from behind him. It made the hair on the back of Pat’s neck stand up straight. He immediately jerked his head around to see a girl. She was tall, with brown hair, and was staring at him with penetrating eyes.

Pat ignored any sort of salutations required for a situation like this, and blurted, “Who are you? What the hell are you doing here!?”

She tilted her head to the left and looked at him, unfazed. “Well, you seem very polite. I was out exploring here in Blackwood, when I noticed a Blackie on it’s side. I climbed over it, because I’m not a midget, and saw your treehouse.” She paused for a reaction and then pointed to the corner of  the treehouse. “Nice mosquito, by the way.”  

Pat stared at her in disbelief. “First of all,” he began, “people who can’t climb over 6 ½  feet tall trees aren’t midgets. Second of all, you just barge into someone’s home?  You’re the one who should be working on politeness.”  

She brushed her hair out of her eyes and said matter-of-factly, “I thought you would be an interesting person to meet.” 

Pat rubbed his eyes.  

“My name is Aliza, by the way,” Aliza said, sticking her hand out toward him.  

“Pat,” he said, simply swinging his hand out to join hers.  They sat there together on the wooden plank floor for a few empty minutes before Pat broke the silence by saying, “Well, time for you to go back to your jerk parents. I’m not going to be able to use you for anything.”   

“Excuse me?” Aliza said, raising her eyebrows. “What do you expect?”

Pat almost yelled, “You’re a girl. I’d like to see a girl hunt.”

Aliza huffed with anger and slapped Pat across the face. He was stunned as his cheek stung with pain. Aliza picked up his gun from the corner of the treehouse and said soberly, “Well, then, try and stop me.”

Pat walked behind Aliza uneasily as they stepped along the wet grass and dirt. Aliza raised a finger to her lips and rushed quickly to another, much younger, fallen Blackwood. She stabilized the gun in a ridge of cracked wood. She squinted one eye and steadied the barrel. Pat walked up next to her to see she was aiming at a rabbit, which was nibbling on some beige fungi.  She fired the gun briefly and it released the same flurry of sparks as before. Pat heard the whizzing sound once more, but the rabbits ears perked up and it ran stubbornly into a nearby patch of bushes.  Aliza cursed and Pat laughed, “You’re a good shot, but you don’t know anything about nature. Rabbits have some of the best hearing in the entire animal kingdom. They would be able to hear a BB coming easily.”  

Aliza jerked to attention before letting out a response probably littered with swears. She moved back into her hunting position, but angled the gun upwards and fired it a second time. An ear piercing squawk was heard and a small bird dropped from a branch above to the soft soil below. Aliza turned to face Pat and smirked. She jumped over the tree trunk and snatched the small bird from the ground, then walked back to the treehouse. Pat followed her reluctantly and grabbed some of the few dry sticks lying on the ground near him to start a fire.

“So, sure, you can hunt, but that is my treehouse that I assembled myself. I am not letting you sleep there,” Pat remarked by the fire late at night.

“Fine,”  Aliza responded soberly, “I’ll sleep on the ground.” Pat stomped his foot onto the dying fire, which made a slow hissing noise as it was quenched.  

“I’m turning in,” he said, lowering his voice unnecessarily and then marched off to the treehouse. Aliza patted the sleeping bear besides her whom she had been introduced to by Pat, and it growled in its sleep. She turned to a nearby patch of moss and lay onto it.  

That morning the sun shot through the old wood of the treehouse, spreading slats of masked light across the small room. Pat’s eyes adjusted to the smaller flurries of snow floating lazily down from the sky. He snatched his cracked glasses, which were sprawled on the ground, and fitted them onto his face. Suddenly, as Pat’s foggy vision subsided, he noticed his gun abandoned from the usual spot. Groaning, he looked out the window to see Aliza tanning a deer hide with the rock he had been sharpening the day before.

“Good morning!” she yelled up to him, her voice echoing across the sleepy forest.

“What have you been doing?” bellowed Pat.

“I woke up early, grabbed your rifle, and went out hunting,” she smirked. “The deer like eating the frozen dew. Then I cooked the meat and gave it to your bear.”  

“It’s not my bear,” Pat retorted.  

“Well, she basically lives with you,” countered Aliza.  And, how long have you been here? Who would want to live like this?”  

Pat scampered down the ladder.  “About 2 days, and I’m the one who would want to live here,” he paused. “My parents give me these boundaries –– I feel like I’m just an obstacle to them.”  

Aliza frowned. “Sorry about that.”  

“Well, that’s the real reason I’m out here. I could’ve climbed that tree, but I want to prove to them that I could survive by myself.”

“You can’t just stay out in this forest forever,” she looked Pat in the eyes. “You’re eventually going to have to go back.”

Pat turned away from her and looked up to a tree. “Well, I’m going to stay out here as long as possible. If my father was out here, he wouldn’t survive a month.” Pat chuckled, “He only hunts for sport and doesn’t care at all about the effects it has on this forest. We’re lucky that no one has tried using this forest for lumber.”  

Aliza tilted her head, “But you hunt too!”  

“I only hunt for survival,” Pat responded condescendingly.

“Thanks for telling me, that explains your attitude,” she said.  

Pat should’ve been offended by this, but he ignored the comment.

Aliza looked down and began, “Well, I have the opposite situation. My parents, they don’t care about me. I barely ever go to Blackwood, all I’ve heard about was when Sam went missing. Ever since, I have wanted to go out here and see if they would care. Seems as though they don’t.”

Pat glanced at her and smiled grimly. Suddenly, a noise in the bushes startled the both of them. They swung around to see a swaying light emerging from the clearing. Pat quickly grabbed his gun from the mossy earth and aimed it toward the noise. A figure came into view. He was bulky, had a crippled and grizzled face slashed with a long scar, and had short, darkened hair. It was Pat’s father.  

“What are you doing here, Pat?!”

“Father, I ––”

“You left me in the middle of the night to go to Blackwood?  You’ve been living out here for three days!” Pat opened his mouth to speak, but his father interrupted him, “We are going, right now,” his father gestured to Pat.  

“No,” Pat responded stubbornly.

His father stopped abruptly and turned to face Pat. “What did you just say to me?”  

Gaining confidence, Pat stood and rooted his feet into the ground, “I said no.” He paused. “You have been giving me obstacles and rules for my entire life! Will you for once just leave me alone!?”  The father looked disgruntled, as if this had never occurred.  

“Fine,” Pat’s father said, containing a bloody outburst of anger.  “Do you really want me to just let you die alone in this forest? Fine, then I will.” He looked livid.  “Sooner or later, you’ll come from this retched place and you’ll be begging me for a real home and food.”

A tear trickled down Pats face as he held an indescribable expression of sadness, anger, and hatred.  

The father trekked off into the darkness of the night and soon vanished. Pat sat back down as Aliza stared at him, dumbstruck with her mouth gaping, “What in the world just happened?”  

Pat leaned down towards the ground and said, “That was my father.”

Aliza responded candidly, “Well, yeah, I got that from context, but there is a girl and a sleeping bear right next to you, and he didn’t notice?”  

Pat looked up and said, “That’s because he’s a self-centered ––”  A gust of wind made the trees creak and sway, shielding Aliza from the curse Pat emitted. “He gets very unreceptive of thing that are going on around him when he is involved in certain exchanges.”  

“Okay… ” said Aliza, tilting her head, “but that doesn’t explain why he didn’t notice the bea ––”  

“Listen, Aliza,” Pat snapped, “My father’s an idiot.” Aliza raised her eyebrows and frowned.  “Now, it’s been a long day, so good night.” Pat croaked. Aliza scratched the bear once more in it’s favorite place, behind the ear, and went to sleep.  

To be continued…

Birds

Bluejays chirping at my window,

Waking me up from sleep,

I stay awake because I want to hear them.

 

The sound of their wings fluttering

makes me want to come out,

They turn to stare at me,

Making me feel like I did something wrong.

 

Then I stare back into their beady brown eyes,

And remember that they love their food,

 

So I go back inside,

Finding breadcrumbs from my toast to give them.

 

I sprinkle crumbs all over the yard.

They dive for their food,

Pecking towards those that had bread with their pure black beaks,

I laugh merrily.

 

Their eyes seem to say that they want me to stay,

I say goodbye,

And they seem to do the same,

 

I walk to my mom’s car where she is waiting to drive me to school,

 

And when I come out to see the birds after school I jump and laugh,

I came back through the garden where I found a big worm,

It was as long as my arm!

I picked it up and went back to them,

Where they fought for their food,

I began peeling two birds off of one that were attacking for the bread,

 

I laughed for what seemed the hundredth time,

And I ran towards them for a game of tag,

Where they took off.

 

And I don’t notice that there are houses around me,

I don’t realize where I am,

I just feel like I want to play,

And you know what?

No matter how many times they beg me for food,

Or how many times they woke me up,

I love them.

Haunted House

Once upon a time, there was a haunted house. Inside, there were a lot of monsters. A little girl went inside the house. Then she saw a skeleton, and then the skeleton put a knife in her. She died. The little girl turned into a ghost. Now she was a monster! She had sharp teeth, eight legs, and was purple.

She called all of the monsters. The monsters came, and then they left the haunted house with their powers. They destroyed the EARTH. Then they made a huge time machine!

They all went inside of the time machine. They went to a nice world in the future! It had palm trees, flowers, trees, and bees.

The monsters said, “Ew, I don’t like this world, it’s too nice!”

They went in the time machine again. They went to Evil Place. There was goo and webs and slime everywhere. The monsters loved it. There was a lot of evil, and there was an evil guy who had sharp teeth and a knife! His name was Mr. Killer.

They were all evil too. They all worked together to make the biggest evil potion. Then they ran around in a circle and made a huge EVIL TORNADO!!!

In the evil tornado, they went back into the time machine and took their evilness into the human world. Then the tornado turned the humans into evil humans. They formed an army!

The army took over the world. After that, there were webs, trees were broken, and there were bats and skeletons.

They lived evilly ever after.

Battle of Revenge II: Traitors

Prologue

In the last story, Max, Finton, and Freddy had defeated Lord Robbers and were free of his threat… for a while. They were trying to figure out the medical potion to heal all of the men lost in the last battle. Their fleet needed to be repaired too, so there were lots of repairs that needed to be fulfilled. Meanwhile, Lord Robbers was also preparing his little surprise….

 

Chapter 1: Evil Meeting

Zilbon, Lord Robbers, Quantuo, Xanga, Jumba, Kaka, and Strangehead (members of the Red Strikers) were sitting down on a table back at Larbazako. Lord Robbers was showing them secret plans for some strange secret weapon that they were going to use to crush the Blue Lions and the Squag, which now was named the Blue Squags. The strange secret weapon was a laser, a very powerful laser that could destroy a whole base with one blast. They were going to go to Slankamos to destroy the Squags’ main building. The Squag’s main building was guarded by the Blue Lions’ troopers.

The 105th Legion was very powerful. It was the highest ranking troop squad of the whole Blue Lion space. The 301st Legion was the second highest ranking squad. They were planning to send thousands of Quinns, evil henchmen of Lord Robbers, to attack the place, but Lord Robbers knew that wouldn’t work. He needed more. He told all of his people that they had to lead the Quinns into battle. They all agreed to do it. At the mention of this, every person at the meeting turned on their superswords and stabbed them into their slots, making a blue hologram of their grand master appear in the center with all of the secret information. The only thing that could power this strange source of different blueprints was the super swords from every Red Striker. The master was very happy, but also extremely mad because they hadn’t killed the person the master had said to kill. The master’s name was Extreme.

“You have done well, my apprentices. But that battle we could not afford to lose.”

“Sir, they were outnumbering us,” said Xanga.

“I do not care,” screamed Extreme.

“Many of our troops died out there, master,” said Zilbon.

“We shall win our next battle,” said Jumba.

“Why don’t we discuss our next battle plans?” asked Extreme.

 

Chapter 2: Squad Healing Center

Max was very worried about all the injured soldiers because there were so many of them. Fortunately, a recipe could stop death, but it was far away in another land, guarded by many enemy soldiers. That was their next mission. They needed to pack up for it. Finton and Freddy were also coming. Trevor wanted to help, so he came too. Erin decided to drop them off at the spaceport. This is what Max packed: a gun, extra ammunition, lunch, a lot of food (food from different planets like Sakalato and Yfdghh,kb c), an extra bottle of hydrating juice, and a bottle of lava in which he would cook the actual food. In addition to providing a place to prepare his meals, the bottle of lava would keep the food from cooling, thus preventing rock from forming on it.                                      

Trevor also packed a super sword, a charge plug, two extra charging stations, food that Lulu had cooked for him, a training droid, and an extra robe.

Finton packed a rifle, extra ammunition (like Max had), frozen food, a blender to liquefy it, a bottle to drink to drink it from, some roots from trees you could eat, and vegetables.

Freddy, of course, packed five boxes of trick stuff, a mobile toilet, toilet paper, and a baby seat for the toilet. He liked copying other people, so he bought two packs of frozen food, sixty-five miniature trees, a giant lava bottle, and a twisted gun, bubble gum instead of ammunition packs, an extra pair of dirty socks, two extra underwears, a giant piece of metal, a soldering kit, and a second twisted gun.

Suddenly, Erin came into the room. “What’s going on? Time to leave, people. Rise and shine. We’re leaving,” he said. “The crawler’s here. Hello!?”

Suddenly everyone grabbed their packs and hurried out the door.

“Move it, move it, move it! This no drill!” Erin was obviously not happy.

Trevor followed his mentor out the door. When they got downstairs, the guards opened the door. Like Erin had said, the crawler was waiting outside, along with other Squags, who said said “Good luck“ and “Be safe.” Max and Trevor said goodbye to Lulu and Lucy. When they got on board the crawler, the driver helped them with their luggage.

“To the nearest spaceport,” said Erin. The driver turned the crawler onto the road as fast as it could go and zoomed away.

On the way there, Freddy took out one of his miniature trees and asked Finton, “¿Para qué se usan esos árboles?”

“You use the roots to make smoothies, dummy!”

Freddy suddenly had an idea to lift the humor. “So, waz sup, dude?”

Trevor and Max burst out laughing.

“It’s pronounced What’s up,” Trevor said.

Finton whacked Freddy.

“Waz dat for?”

“Stop fooling around, Freddy! This is real stuff, bud! We’re going all the way to the center of the whole enemy core,” said Finton. “And in your language, daz foi yo foolin’ around.”

 

Chapter 3: Second New Planet

When they arrived, they got a cart and put their luggage inside. Since Freddy was a weakling, Finton had to help him. Max was nervous. Trevor wanted everything he saw.

“Hey, look at that! That’s the new kind of bubble gum that came out precisely three seconds ago,” shouted Trevor.

“We have to walk three platforms,” said Erin. “No fooling around here.”

The stairs were as high as skyscrapers. Max and Freddy had never been to a spaceport, except for the one back at the base.

Suddenly, the stairs started moving. “Look at that! We don’t need to climb it!” said Max. The elevator ride was awesome. You got to see the whole spaceport from up there. There were thousands and thousands of platforms. There were starships floating in midair anchored with chain to keep it on the platform. There were millions of people and different aliens. There were guards keeping order. The restaurants served exotic foods of other planets. There was even a pilot diner.

Unfortunately, the gum Trevor wanted was sold out. There was a giant starship in front of them with big letters on it that said: Destination to Main Government Planet. Thousands of guards were guarding the top level. Erin ignited his super sword and the guards stepped away.

On the side of the platform, a little sign said: “Rating: ★★★★★ Food Served: Every Planet Known to The Government Space Possible: ∞.”

The doors to the ship opened. Trevor, Max, Finton, and Freddy walked through them. Erin said goodbye and the doors closed. The ride was on!

 

Chapter 4: Battle at Fortress Destroy

The juice was delicious, and the space cruise was going smoothly. The ride to the capital of the Government was nearly over, and Finton, Max and Freddy were at the diner eating, while Trevor was discussing how he loved to train. He said the battle was gonna be hard, so they all had to train their best.

“Hey, Finton! Mind passing me the — ”

BOOM!! Erh, erh, erh. The alarm had gone off. The space cruiser was under attack… Outside, thousands of enemy cruisers had just come out of the turbo engine, which was going at the speed of light. They were firing at the cruiser at full blast. Aboard the cruiser was Freddy’s greatest enemy, the dreaded Trick Destroyer — a gun that turned off every trick onboard the spaceship. Two soldiers came out of the hallway.

“Please report to the main deck,” said the soldiers. Trevor, Max, and Freddy rushed up to the top deck. Finton was commanding a huge army of soldiers. Every enemy cruiser was shooting at our cruiser.

“Fire at sector ten!” BABOOM!!! Smoke was coming out of the hole where Finton used to be standing. “Darn, that cannon!” Finton came out of a smoking hole. Two enemy cruisers were on fire. The cruiser had fire all over. Every battle station was smoking. The laser fire rained through the sky like flies at a garbage dump.  As the cruiser returned fire, Max, Finton, and Freddy went under the deck to ignite the turbo engine. Trevor tried to deflect the laser fire with his swinging super sword.

“Hit the turbo engine button, Freddy!”

“¿Cuál es eso?”

BEEP!

“Self destruct engaged.”

“Freddy!!!”

“Incorrecto.”

“Run to the escape pods!” said Max. Everyone was running to their escape pods.

“Where’s Trevor?” asked Finton. Trevor appeared right next to them. Smoke was all around him. His face was black.

“Stupid cruisers,” Trevor muttered. Two guards were standing around the last escape pod available.

“Run for it!” said Trevor. Beep. The escape pod was launched. Chances were lost.

“No!”

“Self destruct in ten… nine… eight, seven, six, five, four, three, two — ”

Finton pushed Max outside. Freddy and Trevor fell into space. Finton jumped out. The explosion pushed them forward, and a great big ball of fire behind them that used to be their cruiser was now debris fluttering around them. Now they were lost in space.

 

Chapter 5: Evil Knows How to Plan

“Success achieved! The boss will be extremely happy!” The members of the Red Strikers were having a giant party.

“They died! Three cheers for the trick destroyer!” There were all types of food at the evil feast.

BAM!

The door burst open. Jumba came in.

“We’re under attack.” Rocks started falling from the ceiling.

“The feast is ruined!” cried Lord Robbers.

“Send all units!” cried Xanga.

Diong, diong, diong.

The battle outside was tremendous. Thousands of wounded Quinns were lying on the ground. Few were left. The other side was looking much better than its evil match — only a few soldiers were down.

“Send more troops!” ordered Kaka. More came rushing out, only to be killed.

Suddenly, sides changed: the Quinns had taken control of the battle. They were forcing the 105th legion back to their ships.

“Retreat!” ordered the 105th general. The troops rushed back, and the Quinns fired the cannons while the 105th legion tried to escape. Many ships fell from the sky.

Despite their heavy losses, the Quinns had won.

“Now we can’t have a feast about anything! We didn’t win or lose!” Strangehead said.

“I wanted more of that candy bread!” cried Lord Robbers.

As they went back inside, a war drum sounded in the distance.

“What the heck was that?” said Zilbon.

“Quinns into battle positions!”

Ten rows of Quinns stood strong. Twenty spearmen were in the front guarding for any close combat intents. Out of nowhere came a band of aliens with swords, guns, and spears. They were green and had eyes like those of a fly, a green snout in the middle of their head, and brown robes.

AAAheee!!! Chang! Blahg, wago dapo boom! Chang wayyyaaagggooo! Tambow!!! Mwakamaka! Dwaga! Traga! Die!!! BOOM! Weheee!!!

“Now we have something to celebrate about,” said Lord Robbers, “I get my candy bread!”

“No, I get it,” said Xanga.

“Don’t fight, guys!” said Jumba

 

Chapter 6: The Continuation of Chapter 4

“Now what?” said Max. The space around them was peaceful. They had been floating for hours.

“¿No crees que va a venir una nave para salvarnos?” asked Freddy. Suddenly, a bright light interrupted their conversation, and Trevor turned on his super sword. A ginormous space cruiser appeared out of nowhere. Its shiny decks looked as beautiful as gold, and its twenty-six engines looked super shiny with flaming blue jets shooting out.  

“It’s a Model 58.73 Code 97597.725.7000. I used to have a bunch of those in my room,” said Max.

“Uh, looks like we’re boarding, people.”

Trevor was right. The airlock on the 27,000 foot-tall, 123,000 foot long, and 29,000 foot wide spaceship was opening, letting out seventy-five spaceships that were ten feet tall and twenty feet long.  

“Now that’s an airlock,” said Finton.

“I guess we board one of these ships!” said Trevor.

Max, Finton, Freddy, and Trevor boarded the nearest ship. There were fifty-seven Quinns  on board. “Ahh! Battle positions!” yelled Finton. He loaded his gun and aimed at the Quinns. That was when they realized the Quinns were all tied up.

¨Greetings, noble Squag Trevor!¨ said the mysterious, double-mysterious, even more mysterious, superbly mysterious, totally mysterious, amazingly mysterious, terribly weird, with a terrible face, weird, antennae-headed weirdo named Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota. “Welcome aboard my spaceship. We shall take you to meet my master.  Meet my loyal assistant, Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta.¨

When they arrived at the spaceport, the first guy they had met led them up the stairs to a door.  And when the door opened, what they saw was unimaginable.

 

Chapter 7: Normal Day for Erin

Erin was pacing through when he bumped into Simon.

¨Want to duel?” said Simon.

“Pleasure,” said Erin.

Erin pulled off his glasses. Simon did, too. They extended their glasses. Then, they burst out laughing!

“Hwahwahwahwa… dueling with glasses! Blahaha,” laughed Erin.

“So funny! So funny!” said Simon.

“This is serious,” said Erin. He turned on his super sword and slashed at Simon’s legs. Simon flipped backwards and extended his super sword in 0.3 seconds. Erin attacked. Simon counterattacked. Erin flipped backwards and lashed the air with his extreme super duo combo, stabbing into the middle of the air where Simon was supposed to be. Simon was actually behind him and Erin sensed him. He arched his blade backward, deflecting the jab. Then Simon and Erin burst into a two-hour laugh. Hahaha! They laughed hard because their swords were only styrofoam training superswords.

Erin waved goodbye to Simon and walked into the library. He loved to study, and he also loved to read. Erin had a lot of favorite series. He remembered that he needed to see how the mission was going. When he turned on his mission tracking computer, the screen turned blurry and his mission tracking computer exploded!

“Something must be going wrong!” thought Erin. He went to the main communications system to speak with Eramag, Sofia, Mateo and Aaron.

“Eramag,” Erin said. “I have lost communication with mission 5.0.2600261000.”

“Find communication with mission 5.0.2600261000 and increase to maximum capacity to see if there is any sign of this mission,” Eramag yelled at nearby communications officers.

“We’ll find ‘em,” said Sofia.

 

Chapter 8: Getting to Zanklazumos

Inside the doors were hundreds of troops of the 576th legion troopers.

“What the…?” said Finton.

“I didn’t know this!” said Trevor.

“Cool!” said Max. “I thought all of you guys perished!”

“Esto es assustador,” said Freddy.

“Welcome to the 576th legion troopers headquarters!” said Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota.

“Let us show you around!” Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta said.

Around them was a large room full of computers. There were three floors to it and probably more because of the elevator. Lots of different troopers were working around the computers. Different things kept on popping up on the screens that they couldn’t even read. The computers were flat touchscreen pieces of transparent glass that showed what you were working on in the center. There was a lot of talking. It sounded like they were on a completely different planet… but they knew they weren’t.

Freddy secretly reached into his pack and pulled out a canister. The canister read “Super Stinky Fart Gas.”

“Esto va a ser bueno,” whispered Freddy.

There was a hissing sound in the air.

“What’s that sound?” said Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota.

“I don’t know, sir,” said a nearby trooper.

Suddenly, the air smelled bad. Freddy pulled a whoopie cushion out of his backpack. Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta said, “Sorry for the stinky smell.”

Freddy placed the whoopie cushion under Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta’s behind. When Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta sat down a loud fart filled the air. Suddenly, another fresh coat of stinky air flew out. Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota says “Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta, how dare you fart in front of our visitors?”

Freddy couldn’t help but laugh.

“Freddy!” yelled Finton, Trevor, and Max.

“How dare you do that in front of our hosts! I am so ashamed of you!” yelled Finton.

Then they turn toward Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota. “Sorry for this misunderstanding. My friend is a joker,” said Max.

“And he won’t do it again,” added Finton, clenching his teeth and staring so hard at Freddy that Freddy started to sweat.

“Quieren prender el aire acondicionado,” said Freddy.

After a bunch of sorrys, the ship started to move.

 

Chapter 9: Mass Invasion

The fleet contained fourteen starships. Each one had one hundred billion troops, small blockade runners, blockade ships, troop deployers, troop transports, crew transfer shuttles, supply carriers, and X-class escorts to make a billionaire die of the zeroes. The fleet was an exquisite combination of different capital ships, frigates, and flagships, and all of them were prepared for a mass invasion of the planet Zanklazumos, one of the outer rim planets of the Red Strikers’ force. It contained the recipe to heal the lives of dead troops. It was guarded, but with strategy you could break in. They were going to use the plan below.Copy of Battle of Revenge II- Traitors (by Diego Gonzalez)

“This is going to be great!” said Finton.

“We’re going to have so much fun invading them!” said Max.

“Esto va a ser excelente!” said Freddy.

“What ship are we boarding?” asked Finton.

“You will be on board the troop transporter,” said Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota. The troop transport descended. It was a steady, low descent. Freddy, Max, and Finton were aboard the troop deployer. There was very little light. The ambience was silent. Everyone was ready to deploy. The suspense was unbearable.

“Suddenly, the troop deployer blew up and everyone died. Even our main characters. Yes, I know you people say we can’t kill our main characters, but this story says otherwise. Yes, people, we killed them, get over it,” read the crew report aboard the troop deployer, named ALADA (which stands for Air Land Action Depositor A-transport).

“Ha, what story? And how could the main characters die?” asked Finton.

“Ja, eso fue lo mas chistoso, no se pueden morir los personajes principales,” said Freddy. The troop deployer safely landed on the planet and deployed the troopers. The air was smoky. Suddenly two Red Strike guards walked up.

“Identify yourselves!” they said. Suddenly, a crew transfer shuttle zoomed into its landing site. A figure dropped right in the middle of the two guards. A super sword extended from its hands and the two guards dropped dead beside him. Max and Finton drew out their blasters and aimed at the unknown figure. Suddenly, the blasters flew out of their hands and the ground erupted in front of them. Dirt flew and then it was all silent. The figure turned around and took off its hood.

“Seriously? You were trying to kill me?” said Trevor. “Not nice!” Trevor’s hand stretched out to reveal the electromagnet. He moved his hand up and Max and Finton instantly rose. He moved his hand to the side and back in the direction of Max and Finton. The blasters dropped into their hands.

“Sorry, Trevor,” said Finton.

“How could you scare us like that?” Max asked.

“It seemed like the right thing to do to save you lives,” said Trevor. They walked a long time til they reached the evil fortress. The door was bolted shut. Trevor placed some detonators and got out of there real quick. The door blew open.

“Aren’t you scared that they’ll find out we’re here?” asked Max.

“It’s not a stealth mission,” said Trevor. “They told us to get in there, get the recipe, and get out.”

“Yeah, but we shouldn’t warn them of our presence,” said Max.

“Of course we should! That way they’ll all come out and get their butts kicked,” said Trevor.

The massive capital ship landed, two turrets dropped out of the front. Trevor screamed at the camera that had also dropped down. “What! I thought you had enough arsenal to blow this planet to shreds!”

“That is understood,” replied the robotic voice. 4,000 other turrets came out of the bottom.

“Fire!” yelled Trevor. The turrets released so much laser fire that all three walls surrounding the base were smashed to splinters — or, more accurately, goo — because they were metal. And then, they walked in.

 

Chapter 10: Kill Them Now!

Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota clicked the walkie-talkie.

“Prepare to destroy those crazy heroes!” said a creepy voice.

 

Chapter 11: Destroy Them

Back at the Red Strikers’ evil base, Lord Robbers was preparing the super weapon for transportation to Slankamos, and the massive weapon looked like a giant needle. It was seventy feet long, forty feet wide, and twenty feet tall. The big needle was being carried by a huge robotic arm into a spaceship that was going to carry it to Slankamos. Then, Lord Robber would look through the little screen, move his little joystick until the little mark was over the right place, and click the button that said FIRE. And then the giant laser beam would melt his enemies and he would defeat them once and for all.

Lord Robbers cackled, “HA HA HA!” before getting his little pad that fired it and testing the weapon by firing randomly into space. Lord Robbers clicked the big button that said fire. Suddenly, the hangar around them exploded in flames.

FIRE, FIRE, FIRE, the alarms blurted.

Lord Robbers cleaned up the mess and tried again, clicking the FIRE button a bunch of times. Water came down from the ceiling and a bunch of fire bots came out looking for the fire. He cleaned up the mess again and tried once more. He clicked the BIG red fire button and the giant green laser beam cut through the sky and KABLAMO — they heard an explosion.

“Was that supposed to happen, Commander?” Lord Robbers asked.

“No. It was not,” said the commander. Suddenly, a little screen popped out of the ceiling. There was a scared Quinn commander on it.

“OUR BRAND NEW SHIP WAS JUST BLOWN UP!” yelled the Quinn commander.

“Wait! Was it that one that I just wasted all my money on?” asked Lord Robbers.

“I think so!” said the Quinn commander.

“No! No! No! How could this happen?!?” said Lord Robbers. Lord Robbers accidentally stepped on the self destruct button and his brand new weapon blew up.

 

Chapter 12: Funny Does Not Mean Good

Every single computer screen on every Government-controlled planet showed a message:

“Haha! I am Lord Robbers and I will eat all your food by using this teleporting device! HAHAHA! I will also blow up your planet for the sheer fun of it! I will also achieve universal domination, and if you astrophysicists down there say that it is impossible because the universe goes on forever, and you quantum physicists thinking about the Schrodinger’s cat say that I have a 50 percent chance of world domination and a 50 percent chance of getting my butt kicked, let us change that principal to having 100 percent of world domination. Shaboom, suckers! So for the big shazam, I will blow up your planet!”

When the Government planet saw what was happening, they immediately reacted by calling forth an entire fleet and prepared to destroy Lord Robbers once and for all.

 

Chapter 13: The Preparation of the Super Weapon

Lord Robbers had decided to demonstrate his super weapon to the rest of the Red Striker leaders, by destroying a random civilian planet. He walked to his live feed media room in his ship, hovering above the main base (the cannon was actually on the planet below him and not on the ship.) He went to his console room and clicked the big red firing button (this was the right button). The green laser bolt flew toward the planet and detonated a whole entire city. The Red Strikers clapped and Lord Robbers said, “This laser is the emblem of our destructive name. We are called the Red Strikers. We strike and destroy! Clunk clunk clunk!” (He is a cyborg, so that is how he laughs.)

 

Chapter 14: The Deep Dark Hallways

Trevor, Max, Finton, and Freddy walked into the base. There was no one. It seemed abandoned. There was no light; the electricity was cut off. You couldn’t even see your hand in front of you. Trevor turned on his supersword. The sword extended from its hilt and started buzzing, glowing green in the darkness. They walked down the steel hallways, their footsteps resonating on the ground. There was a red light glowing in front of them in a circular chamber and a dark figure hovering over a panel. Max, Finton, and Freddy silently drew their guns. They were all holding Maf 2345’s (Maf is short for MFLP, which stands for Multi-Function Laser Pistol). The Maf had a tiny viewscreen in which you could select the good guy or the bad guy. If you accidentally pointed the gun at the good guy, it would lock the trigger and not allow the laser to pass. If you did, for some reason, sweep the gun over the bad guy and not pull the trigger, it would automatically do it for you. It also had a stun mode, a knockout mode, a kill mode, and a melt mode. They selected the dark figure in the chamber on their Mafs as a bad guy, and put it on knockout.

The man turned around and they finally realized who it was. It was Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota.

“Oh, I see you have come to my greetings party. Or garage sale, since I’m selling proton grenades! MWAHAHA.”

“You’re actually evil?” Finton said. “I didn’t know that!”

“No, but I have just told the secret location of your base to Lord Robbers! HAHAHAHAHA! And now that I am done with you guys, I will kill you all with a single proton grenade while I escape, smooching my crazy girlfriend who is dressed in a sports bra, even though it is extremely cold in here and she will probably freeze to death… which is sad. Now you will play your part. Please stand right where you are while I go click the button to deploy my hovercraft.”

Meanwhile, Freddy had gotten distracted. He had gone to the basement and captured the healing potion, which was why they were there in the first place. He went upstairs again and appeared behind Trevor.

“Ya tengo la poción!” said Freddy.

Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota said, “How did you get that? It was covered by the maximum security fence.”

“Creo que fumigue” said Freddy.

“You farted, Freddy?” said Finton.

“Whoa, I didn’t know your farts were so powerful,” said Max.

“Well, it doesn’t matter,” said Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota. “You just stay where you are and let me click the button.”

“Hello, honey pie,” said Yamakazamotamotamotadomanota Xambagotamezinitabedagota, Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota’s girlfriend.

“Ah, hello, sweet pea. I was just about to assassinate these evil people,” Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota said.

“Aw, but that guy looks really cute!” said Yamakazamotamotamotadomanota Xambagotamezinitabedagota.

Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota set the proton grenade to fifteen seconds. He then clicked the button for the escape craft. Fortunately, Max and Finton weren’t stupid. They still had the Mafs, so they pulled the trigger. Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota and Yamakazamotamotamotadomanota Xambagotamezinitabedagota fell to the ground, stunned.

Trevor, Max, Freddy, and Finton ran to the hovercraft and clicked the escape button. The explosion of the proton grenade resonated behind them. Unfortunately, they had to get out of there quickly, and since Yamakazamotamotamotadomanota Xambagotamezinitabedagota, Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota, and his assistant Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta were traitors, and so was the whole fleet. So they decided to escape in the stealthy way, a way which I will not explain right now. They hijacked a capital ship, went out into space, proton torpedoed all the other ships, and hit the megadrive button.

 

Epilogue

Lulu and Lucy were sitting at home for a girls night in when Lord Robbers snuck in. He grabbed them both by the neck and smashed them into his craft. Both of them were knocked unconscious, and Lord Robbers put them into his craft. The iron bars lit up and you could see Lord Robbers creepy cyborg face.

“Clunk clunk clunk!”

The cyborg’s laugh faded into the cool night air.

 

I Can’t Remember the Last Time I Used a Tissue

I can’t remember my college address. I’m 365,422 years old, and I went to college when I was 19. It was 365,403 years ago when I started. It’s been a while now. I live in an apartment above the clouds, in HEAVEN. It’s weirder in Heaven now. I have to remember my college address because I want to go to a movie with my girlfriend, and I have to give my college address to buy the ticket.

I will tell you how I died: All I wanted was a tissue. I had a cold. I was walking to the market to get medicine and a box of tissues, when I saw my neighbor in her yard. She was watering a Venus fly trap. It leapt out, and its head grabbed mine and swallowed me whole.

In my grave last night, I saw a blood curdling, rabbit toothed, polka dotted tissue box boasting pictures of llamas with hats.

“Finally!!!” I shouted. I peeked in.

The tissue box was infested with pencils and beetles. The beetles had already eaten half of the pencils, and it smelled of musty old cheese. My heart split in two. There were no tissues. I died for the second time.     

My Home

What does it mean when you move from one house to another?

For me, it means sadness and a feeling that I will miss my home.

It makes me upset because

 

My home is where I belong,

It is the place where I live,

And where I store everything.

I love my house.

 

My room is there to greet me every morning when I wake up,

The light shining through the windows,

Everything just so…

It makes me feel cozy.

 

My kitchen has my knives and dishes and pots for cooking and eating,

I can cook for hours,

I hear the wind and I bake.

 

My dining room is where I eat,

spend time with my family,

And talk all day with them.

I can play and have fun at the table too.

 

My living room is there to meet me when I want to relax,

The couch is cozy,

The chairs are soft.

 

When it comes time to leave the house to find a new one,

I always feel sad to leave.

Camp River

I could feel the motorboat all throughout me. The vibrations circulated throughout my chest and arms. It was actually kind of uncomfortable, frankly, but the feelings were scaled down from the experience of the motor boat gliding along the black, shining water of the lake. Slight sprinkles of water tread from the back of the boat sprinkled on my back, causing me to get wet. They say you’re supposed to stay two motorboats behind the driver in front of you, but sadly the ocean has the same deal as the Los Angeles freeways-some people just stop in the middle of a ride.

“Move up! Move up!” I scream every time someone stops dead in the middle of the ride. I use the wheel, which really isn’t that sturdy or accurate, to turn left and go around. When I looked around to the driver, it was a teenager with chocolate brown skin whose legs had given up on him, leaving him dead in the middle of the water.

“Goddamn,” I said, and drove right in front of him and kept on going. The time: 5:00 PM. And it was already pitch black outside. But I had multiple things to do. Get back to the cabin, get dressed, get to dinner on time, which was at 6:30, and then try to make an impression on Sophie, the girl I liked at the camp who was going to be dancing at 7:45. But I put all those worries aside and focused on the cool breeze. The air slapping my cheeks as I drove the motorboat.

Josie, a good friend of mine who also goes to this camp, was sleeping right next to me. She was all about this activity. She first drove the boat before we switched in mid-ocean, but the peaceful driving and the serenity of the black sky made her fall right asleep. She didn’t notice how much water was on her, on her brown hair and freckled face. She was also drooling, which added to the stream. But I just let her sleep and kept on driving the motor boat. Looking back behind me, I couldn’t really tell what was back and was ahead. Everything was as black as a dark pearl.

It was that minute later when two unexpected things happened.. The clouds in the sky, black but puffy and thick like cream for Belgian waffles at breakfast, started to rain. I just imagined water flowing from the cream on those waffles as the water poured onto my hair and Josie’s cheek. Thankfully, Josie and I brought hooded sweatshirts on the hike here. The hike to the boat station was intense, and painful. We were both barefoot and the ground was covered in rocks, so it was very painful to walk. And when we got to the station, the wind started to pick up, so we had these sweatshirts. So, I lifted my back off the seat and raised the hood above my head and started to feel splotches of rain clash with the fabric.

Then, I lifted Josie’s back off the seat and lifted the hood over her head. She woke up and screamed, which completely startled me.

“What the hell’s going on?” she asked, and her head turned towards me. “Alex?” Oh, that’s my name.

“I’m just lifting your hood over your head,” I said. “It just started raining. Chill out.” The boat kept gliding along until we heard the boat bump against a sunken buoy in the water.

“Aaah!” Josie exclaimed, but I tried to stay as calm as possible, but I still wondered what the hell just happened.

“Calm down.” I said. But then the boats ahead of us started to speed up, so I put more gas in the tank and the levels on the tiny speedometer started to increase and kept increasing until I was going maximum speed. I didn’t pick up that the boats ahead had turned left, so when I saw the buoy, I actually became a bit scared that we were going to crash into the object and the steel chains holding it across and have a part of the boat damaged. So, I made a sharp left and the boat tipped. None of us were prepared for it. The motor stopped and we both fell into the black, cold water. The taste of the water was disgusting in my mouth and I could feel the koi fish that swam beneath me glide gently against my stomach, but I made my way up into the water and Josie did as well.

“Are you okay?” I asked, still bewildered.

“I’m fine,” she replied. “It just scares the you-know-what out of me.” I couldn’t help but agree. With all our strength, we pushed the boat back up on the surface and made sure the motor was running. Thankfully, no water got in the sensitive parts. We tried activating the flashlight so we could make an effort of trying to find out where we were on the lake. Dammit, out of batteries. And we left our flashlights, which were pretty good, back at the boat station. There was nothing left we could do, so we figured we just drive the boat forward without any way of knowing if we were supposed to go that way, or turn back and head to the station, which seemed impossible because of the blackness. So, we progressed. When we started, the motorboat was a bit bumpy when trying to spew out the gasoline, which worried me every single time. Thankfully, the engine got all the water out and we were back on the water again. Even though I couldn’t see behind me, I kept on looking back if there were any signs of light.

It was 5:30 at this point and my body was just ready to give up and leave me and Josie stranded in the middle of a lake for the night. We had been driving the boat for an hour and it only took us half the time to get lost on a wrong turn. I mean, we could manage to drink some of the lake’s water, even though it was probably infested with marine feces, cuddle up with each other, and use our hooded sweatshirts for warmth. We could wait until the morning when there was light and have a better chance of navigating where we were and how to get back. The thing is, we didn’t have a compass, or even a phone’s compass for God’s sake, and if we slept overnight, the motorboat might float and we would end up in an entirely different location.

But at that very moment, the boat bumped over another sunken buoy, startling me, which seriously had the slimmest chances of happening again. I was afraid we were going to tip over and Josie, who had been trying to stay as calm as possible, let out a small shriek. I was even worried that we were going to tip over again. I pulled to an abrupt stop, just trying to process what had just happened. Then I heard a sound.

A loud scream seeped into my ear, and I thought the voice was screaming hey.

I shuffle Josie. “Did you hear that?” I ask. “Is it them?”

“Let’s find out.” Josie said. So, I put all the gas on the motorboat until it was speeding across the water. And it was them. When we got there, there was a small group of motorboats in a circle. We stopped just near them.

“Camp River?” I asked.

“Camp River,” someone said, but it was too dark to recognize them by face. “One of the kids here went a bit too fast, fast enough that you two were blown off track. And, on top of that, it was pitch black. Give me your names so I know who you are.”

“Alex and Josie.” I confirmed.

“Aaah, it’s Raymond,” he said. The instructor. “You wanna start heading back.”

“Yeah, but I got somewhere to be, so can we go as fast and as spread out as we need?”

“Sure thing,” Raymond said.

“By the way, do you have four nine-volt batteries on you?”

“Why?”

“Our boat’s flashlight rain out of power, and that was the one thing we needed to try and find our way back to you guys.”

“Sure.” Raymond took out a little bag he had kept stored near the gas pedal and pulled out four backup batteries. We pulled our boat a bit closer to him and he opened up the flashlight compartment, which was located in the front of the boat, and replaced the batteries with the new ones. The flashlight worked, and Raymond closed the compartment tight. So, I left the flashlight on and we were off once again into the black of night.

 

 * * *

 

To get to the start of the hike which leads to the motorboat station, you have to get through a forest. This forest takes one hour to walk through and 25 minutes to a half-hour by running. So after I leave Josie, I take off at maximum speed through the forest, trying to avoid as many rocks and bumps as I can, even though it is still pitch black. So, I use my flashlight. I just can’t sacrifice being late to this dinner party and not making an impression while dancing with Sophie.

I don’t care about bumps. Getting up after getting hurt and continuing along is a piece of my psyche. So, after the first two trips, I still keep running, even with the cuts, and start to see faint light coming from a distance, but I still am perplexed that I am not anywhere near this light. That doesn’t mean my feet have stopped, though. Pacing from left to right at an incredible but almost impossible tempo for an ectomorph. Trying to avoid any obstacles nature gives. Rocks and whatnot. This forest, unfortunately, has tons of narrow turns up every way, and with only a teensy bit of clear vision, it is a mind game getting through the trail.

The running becomes painful on my feet after twenty minutes. Josie is screaming now, at me, even though she is probably a mile behind me, and I can’t understand what’s she saying. But I assume she’s lost.

Girls’ camp was a ways away from boys’ camp. The directors didn’t want any hanky-panky. But soon, about after five minutes, I see that my watch says the horrific time of 6:15. Trees leaves sway from left to right in synchrony but frantically. My flashlight is dimming, and my vision is scaled down at night by the need of prescription glasses, which don’t really work at night, but I don’t give a damn. I don’t seem to trip over as many rocks because the rocks that are falling are little pebbles and are tumbling towards me. I don’t care. The wind blows in my face and blows my hair backwards, and my breathing increases.

I’m stressed but brisk, though my arms are going to give out. I feel the tension all throughout. I’m racing and pacing and my mind is going out of the place. Like an Ozzy Osbourne song. I instantly feel like I’m going to lose consciousness, like my mind is going to collapse all over the place and I’m going to fall out dead. Dead. With no sign of rescue for months. That can’t happen, but I’m going completely insane!

 

* * *

 

But I soon exclaim,“Thank God!” because my feet land on the familiar surface of the rocky path the boy cabins are located on. And when I find my cabin, I use the fifteen minutes to quickly take a hot shower and get dressed into nicer clothes. My clothes are wet, dirty, and scrappy. It’s still raining, and my shoes got covered in mud on the run in the forest. And this time around, since there are tons of boys in the cabin, I don’t feel weird being naked around them like I usually do, because I’m that guy.

Their questions protrude my brain and I’m probably not conscious enough to answer them. They’re asking where I’ve been, and what happened? But I don’t have time to answer their questions. In a snap, my dirty clothes are thrown in my over-stuffed dirty laundry bag. And I’m in a black T-shirt with a padded leather jacket and black jeans, and running the same running shoes I was wearing before, no matter the dirtiness. And then it’s all me.

 

  * * *

 

I’m famished from all the previous events, and it’s nice to be in the environment of the crowded tables, water jugs, and overhead music, and the lighting is just the icing on the cake. I’m still flabbergasted that I made it here on time. My watch is 6:32 PM, so I got swiftly on time. It was just a matter of time before the future events of my evening were determined just by probability. I know Sophie’s the girl of my dreams, and I just can’t stand not to be with her, and this is basically the only opportunity. She’s smart, she’s intelligent, she looks hella good, and she loves writing. I need to love somebody that has the same interests and career I mean, if there was any alternative option to spending time with her, it would have to be doing girly activities with the rest of her friends. But she wouldn’t pay any attention to me –– I would just be a third wheel. She’s going to be dancing… I’m going to be dancing. She’s going to be dancing. It would make sense that we dance together. I’ve met her before, and we’re friends. I’ve seen her signals before.

For dinner there are calzones, an option of either beef and cheese or just cheese. I get two, one of both option, and I’m so filled I can’t have dessert, which is the camp’s signature apple pie. I’m digging into my food like a barbarian, so hungry, until I feel a forceful pull on the back of my shirt. I turn around to see Josie, scraped up and arms crossed.

“What’s up?” I ask. “What happened?”

“You’re just really an asshole, Alex,” she said. “I was screaming your name a mile back in that forest. A tick bit me and left a sting that left me in agony. Oh, the human ––”

“You don’t need to be overdramatic,” I reply. “And your scream sounded distorted from where I was. How could I tell? I was running non-stop with nothing else in my mind deserving attention!”

“You hear my voice, you run to help me. Isn’t every guy supposed to do that with every chick?”

“If every guy was supposed to do that with every chick, you’d have a flock of guys around you. Maybe like two billion.” I said.

“You’re such a class act jerk,” Josie said. “Screw you.” And she stomped off into the depths of the dining hall. But I didn’t feel ashamed of myself. She wasn’t really my friend, anyway. Maybe she was my “friend.” Should I feel ashamed? I go back to eating dinner until one of the other boys, Lukas, taps my shoulder.

“What happened back there?” he asked, puzzled.

“Nothing you need to be involved with,” I said. “Just a situation with a friend of mine.”

“A girl?” he asks.

“Yeah. So?” I sassily reply.

“Treating girls like crap won’t get you anywhere here.” he said. Why should I listen to Lukas though? Sure, this isn’t his first year here, but what would he know about my particular situation?

“You’re right, but what does it matter here?” I ask. “This is summer camp, not behavioral school.”

“Well, why won’t you treat people with respect?” he asked. “You’re kind of being a jerk… you don’t want to respect people.”

“Who are you to call me a jerk?” I ask, angrily. “Shut up!” And he turns away and continues to eat, and when I turn to my right to see him, I can see some small tears swelling inside his eyes. He is probably known for being the most sensitive in the bunch, anyway. He has a tendency to get really emotional. What a wimp.

 

  * * *

At 7:30, the dining hall was dramatically different than what it was earlier. A silver, glittery disco ball was hanging from the middle of the ceiling, and there were tons of tables spread all across the room. There was another table with food and soda and a big dance floor in the smack center. In fact, there were already even people on it! And to the corner was a DJ spinning some music on an old-school turn-table, which was pretty cool, I have to admit. The music got louder and more people started to crowd onto the dance floor. There were so many people, in fact, mostly nobody could find their way around.

Luckily, I could see Sophie, in a pink dress, alone in the corner of the dance floor, dancing by herself. Now was the perfect opportunity. I dropped everything and walk to her, weaving in and out of the crowd. I finally made my way over to her. My heart started rapidly thumping, and sweat starts to pump. When I reached her, I held out my hand.

“Would you like to dance?” I said, not sure if I would regret it.

“No” she said, her face turning angry and disappointed, which definitely caused my heart to drop and made me regret the effort I put into running through the forest.

“But why?” I asked, with expectation for a good reason.

“My best friend told me that you weren’t being that nice,” she said, her face angry. “That’s not acceptable. Not in a million years I would dance with you.”

“Who is your friend?”

“Josie.” Shit.

“Oh…” I said, then when she turned her head, I turned off and ran, weaving in and out of the crowd, but then made my way out of the dining hall. When I was far in a corner behind the hall, where nobody could see me, and started to cry. Crying in disbelief, regret, and overall sadness. Why did this happen? Was it me? Why am I asking, of course it was. Girls don’t want to hang out with jerks. It’s all logic. It turns out that my actions really do affect the outcomes of situations. What have I done?

 

 * * *

Later that cold night, I hear a few footsteps and turn to see a kid of no recognition to me but older than me, walking towards me. The cold air brushes against my face. He told me that he had been informed of the situation, but what he said to me that night changed the rest of my life and the rest of the decisions I would make for the rest of my session. “Disrespect does not find you well at Camp River.”

Diary of a Rebel

Chapter One

New Year’s Day

January 1st, 2016

 

Dear diary,

I’m pooped. Pooped, as in tired. Very tired. Last night, I got to stay up until 12:00, (because last night was New Year’s Eve), in Times Square, watching the ball drop. I’m Nola H. Anderson, citizen of Manhattan, New York. The troublemaker of the family. I’m twelve going on thirteen. I have a twin sister. An honest truth about her is that even though I was born after her, she got a bigger name: Grace Isabella Bella Hinder Anderson. She also has sweeping blond hair, perfect teeth, and the softest baby blue eyes I have ever seen. Someone once called her the class model. Me, no way. I have braces, frizzy brown hair, and murky green colored eyes. Someone in third grade called me an elephant mixed with a chicken.

In life, all I want is for people to treat me equally. That will be hard because I’m in middle school, specifically seventh grade. And I’m a trouble maker. Well, my best friends are basically the only friends I have at Homer Middle School: the one and only Ella, a girl I met in the second grade, Kone, a dude on my block, and Mia, my mom’s best friend’s daughter. Those guys stick by my side, although I’m sort of worried about our relationship. Maybe it’s just because we’re getting older, and people change. I’m going camping with them tomorrow night in a suburb of New York. I feel like I’ve known them forever, although it’s only been eight years. Gotta go, I have to pack. Wait, where are my boots?!

 

Chapter Two

The annual camping trip

January 2nd, 2016

 

Dear awesome diary,

 

I’m so excited! Ella, Kone, Mia, Ella’s parents, and I will be at the campgrounds in fifteen minutes! I have out my camera, my card deck, and my travel puzzles to use on the ride there. I can’t believe that today is only the second day of 2016! I’m on winter break, so it makes sense. Ella is making earrings in the way back of the Jeep, Mia and Kone are giving each other massages, and I’m playing solitaire in the way back. My sister had to go to this Girl Scout Camp thingy (with all of her besties) that is supposedly a lot of fun. I’m in Girl Scouts too, but I didn’t want to go. I had plans. Take that, Girl Scout Camp! Anyway, the ride to the campgrounds is two hours, so we spent a third of the time playing “Create a Sentence,” a third of it looking out of the windows and telling jokes, and a third of the time doing what we’re doing now. We are already having tons of fun, and we’re not even there yet!

I had this really weird dream last night that really worried me. It was of a girl who got stuck in a convenience store. It scared me. A figure had just appeared when Mom woke me up. I hope that dream didn’t mean anything.

 

Dear diary,

We get to the campground at 5:00. We unload all of the bags from the trunk. It’s beautiful here! There are grassy hills (perfect for rolling on), a lake, and snow everywhere! There is even a mini stove on the rocky ground where we’ll probably cook!

We pop open our big fold out tents (woof, it’s hard), and I have to bunk with Mia. Ella is bunking with her mom, and Kone is bunking with Ella’s dad. I love all the bugs here (they’re fun to play with), except for the mosquitos. I’m pretty sure I have sweet blood. Every time I go camping, or try to go camping, I get mosquito bites all over my body.

At night, we watch a basketball game. I sit next to Mia and she huddles under the blanket that we share. The Golden State Warriors crush the Houston Rockets. I wear my Stephen Curry jersey and sparkly black leggings. I don’t really care who wins, but I’m cheering for them because I’ve always wanted to tour California. Also, my family cheers for the Rockets, majorly, but I don’t want to be teased if I wear my jersey. Anyway, the game is fantabulous. Everyone is cheering for the Golden State Warriors, because one of the players on the team is Mia’s uncle. The game ends with a whopping score of 121 to 94. We all screamed and yelled when the Warriors won, but I secretly feel weird because my parents will think that I would be cheering for the other team.

We have a glow stick party in the dark while listening to music. We listen to dancing and neon stripes were flying around the grounds, people thinking that we were crazy, but do we care? NO. We fall fast asleep at ten o’clock, after brushing our teeth and putting on our pajamas, and a good pillow fight. My pillow bursts open and the feathers flew everywhere. They cover Ella’s parents, and I have to admit, it is funny. Thank goodness I have an extra pillow.

 

Chapter Three

The next day

January 3rd, 2016

 

Patient diary,

 

I’m tired! This morning, I wake up at 11:00. (I checked my watch.) Mia wakes me up by splashing freezing cold lake water on my face. Rude!

Anyway, the others are already making breakfast, which is pancakes, and they all say “Good morning, konnichiwa,” and Ella calls me bedhead.

We eat breakfast, play lots of board games, swing in the hammock that the McDonald’s has hung up in between two trees, and braided lots of hair. I’m a hair fanatic, so I end up braiding all the hair. As for Kone and Mr. McDonald, they play Uno. Kone wins. After that, we listen to Gwen Stefani and Bruno Mars.

My iPhone rings. Doo-woop! Doo-woop! I pick the phone up and looked at the number: (323) 921-1008. My sister! Doesn’t she know I’m camping?!! I pick it up anyway.

“Hello?” I ask. “I’m camping.”

“I know … ” she says. “I was just wondering how’re you doing. Cut me some slack. At camp, we have been doing crafts. I slept in ‘till 6 a.m. What time did you wake up?”

“Eleven. Oh. We’re making friendship bracelets. Gotta go. Bye.”

“Bye, oh, by the way, a girl secretly said she doesn’t like you. Toodle-oo,” she says, and hangs up disappointedly.

I frown and roll my eyes. I run to the friendship bracelet circle. Mia has saved me a spot behind her. As I’m making my bracelet, I totally forgot that I was still doing half of the stitches wrong. My design is the Chinese staircase, which is purple and blue, and the one Ella is making me a “friendship” special, which was the crow formation, which looks like a V, in red, white, and blue.

I end up getting pushed in the deep end of the lake after lunch. SO cold. I’m even shivering as I write this. Here’s how it happened, we were eating ham and cheese sandwiches, Kool Aid, and popsicles. The afternoon sun was shining on our sunburnt faces as we laughed and talked. I had mentioned that I was really warm, and that the Kool Aid was refreshing. That’s when Ella got the idea. Mia, Ella, and Kone started whispering. Then they laughed. When everyone finished lunch, they lured me to the deep end of the lake. I didn’t know what I was in for. Mia told me a fascinating story about a fish, I got distracted, and they pushed me in. When the cold water hit my face, I stopped daydreaming and screamed. I fell into the water and rushed back up for air. How could they do this to me?! I was so angry I felt like I could rip my head off. My clothes were soggy. I decided to get them back.

That night, at one in the morning, I ruffle through my duffle bag to get whipped cream, syrup, and crushed up toilet paper. (You never know what is in my bag.) I sneak up to Mia and swirl the whipped cream on her face as she slept, hoping that she doesn’t notice. I creep into Ella’s tent and secure a bucket of syrup to the zipper on the door of Ella’s tent. Then, stealthily, I tiptoe into Kone’s tent. He is fast asleep. I sprinkle the toilet paper into the mobile heater and aim the heater toward Kone’s face. I unzip the tent and fly back to my own tent, lay down, and fall straight asleep. I fall asleep knowing that the kids are the first people to get up, and to do the morning routines that my pranks were set up for. Told you I was a troublemaker.

 

Chapter Four

The day when leaving the campgrounds

January 4th, 2016

 

Dear delightful diary,

 

I wake up at 6:00 (not normal for me), and I sit outside of the tents, on the benches next to the unlit fire. Mia is the first to come out of her tent, face splattered in whipped cream. She is cursing under her breath so that I won’t hear her. She is mad, but I don’t care. She knew she would get it anyway. Then Kone comes. His bedhead hair is in knots, with teeny-tiny bits of toilet paper in his hair. He is as mad as he will get, arms crossed and scowling at me. In his ducky pajamas. I laugh. Hysterically. Ella comes out, drenched in syrup, hair soaking and clothes stuck to her sticky body. Ella’s hair is dark, dark, brown, and it has little glittering spots on the tips. Her tiny bunny slippers have been syruped, and her stuffed bear, is mounted on her jutted-out hip, frowning.

“We get it, you got us back. I’m sorry. We didn’t mean to poke fun at you,” Kone said.

All of them frown. They go to the campground’s walk-in closet to get their stuff. Then they go to the restrooms to change. They all come out fresh and new. Ella appears. Ella’s beady brown eyes glitter in the morning sunlight like dew on a freshly mowed field. I am flipping through a Teen 13 magazine while waiting for the people to finish. When Kone comes out, his mohawk is perfectly gelled in place as is if the wave of his hair had never parted. When Mia comes out, she looks so pretty. She has a white dress with pink little flowers and sparkling show-toe sandals. She has on her little silver earring studs and a silver chain that has her initials on it.

We eat breakfast next to the lake, promising not to push each other in. We laugh like normal, not planning to gang up on each other any more. Then the McDonalds get up, tired and stretching from their sleep. They have sleep in their eyes, and are yawning like crazy. I think they don’t have an alarm clock. We check the time, and start to pack.

I load my light, purple duffle bag into the van. I climb into the way back of the blue van, buckle my seatbelt, and flopped back onto my blue pillow that I fluffed up seconds before. I start to doze off when Ella and Mia get into the car. They are talking loudly, but I can barely hear what they were saying. I open my eyes and yawned. That’s when they notice that I am trying to sleep. They quiet down, and I fall right back asleep. Until the motor starts. But after that, I am asleep for the rest of the ride.

When we get home, it’s starting to get dark out. It is dim and gloomy. I am the first to get dropped off. I look at my green one-story house, and to my bedroom window. It is shaded off with my pink curtains. Ella is walking me down my stone path and to my red front door. My mom opens the door and, with her curly brown hair on my shoulders, hugged me with all of her might. I gently pushed her off of me and she grabbed my bags.

I step into my house, in front of the cushioned couch and as soon as I peer into the kitchen, my dad yells, “Nola?!”

My sister hears this and she steps out of her neat, clean, room, and screams the same thing. She runs into my arms like I’m her long-lost twin. But only part of that is true. The twin part. Not the long-lost part. But she still runs into my arms. I push her off too, because she was just mean to me over the phone. I jog into my room hoping not to get hugged by my little brother, but it was hopeless.

He runs out of his room, and he screamed in his four-year-old high-pitched voice, “Nooolllaaa.”

He jumps on my back like he always does, because, in his own mind, he is a monster. I walk into my room and hold my pillow tight. I flop down on my twin-sized bed.

“Freedom. Please. Help me. I just need a little freedom for a day. I know I have already got a lot of it, but that’s not the same. Just a little, by myself. In the big world.”

My sister peeks her head into my room. “Whaddya say?”

“Nothing. Go away.”

“Okay. Sorry.”

She nods and went out. She shuts my door and goes out. I look at my pendant collection and cry. For no stupid reason. I look at the photos of me and her and cry some more. I fall asleep without dinner. I know right then that something creepy is going on.

 

Chapter Five

The convenience store

January 5th, 2016

 

Dear diary,

 

I wake up with a weird feeling in my stomach. It feels something like a stomachache. I eat breakfast slowly. Oatmeal and orange juice. My father is reading the newspaper when he tells me to go to a stupid mall for a few hours to pick out whatever I want. Weird. He gives me some money and off I go. The mall is right down the street from our house, so I take the sidewalks. 

I get to the big mall with its enormous glass doors and its brick building. When I get there I close my eyes and pray that I won’t go crazy. But I do. I go into absolutely every store in the mall until I come up with a list of what I want to buy. And I buy all of the stuff on the list. After I spent hours in there, and when I have a little money left, I come across an old convenience store that is still in shape.

I don’t hear the warning over the loudspeaker that said, “Two minutes till closing. Two minutes till closing.”

I step into the old convenience store and the shopkeeper is nowhere to be found. He probably went to the restroom or is on break. The walls of the store are brick, like in many movies. On the walls there are pictures of comics. All of the stuff from movies. The store is filled with costumes and fantasy outfits that glamour queens like my sister would flip over.

I run through the aisles of costumes, slowly ruffling them. There are hats on top of the costumes, and stilettos, vans, converse, and different types of shoes, of all colors, shapes and sizes are piled under each costume neatly.

Nor do I hear the announcement that says “Closing. We are now closing.”

Busy going through the silver tiaras. Quiet footsteps tiptoe into the room. The shopkeeper’s quiet ding-a-ling of his keys was too quiet for me to hear, but I hear a faint ring. His keys are sticking out of his pocket, I can see it out of the corner of my eye. The footsteps stop and I hear a little slam of a metal door and a turning of keys in a lock.

Five minutes later I jump up from daydreaming and walk out to the front of the tiled shop. I try to open the door, but they look like they are super-glued together! But they aren’t. They were locked! I bang with all of my might but I can’t get out. I bang for five minutes and by the end my hands are throbbing and my ears are ringing. I walk into an aisle and sink down to the hard, concrete floor. I guess I am in here for now. I look at the friendship bracelet Ella made me and sigh. My friends pop into my head and I close my eyes. I think about the fun camping trip we had (other than the pranking part), and I smile.

“Hello.” A voice was heard that sounded like Ella’s. “I suppose you need help.”

I turn around and stare. There is a masked person in black staring at me. I know that Ella can scheme, but I can’t believe that this is happening. She can prank and everything. Planning too. She tricked me.

Kitty Ranchero’s Adventures

Part 1

There lived a kitten named Kitty Ranchero. He had gray fur, black stripes, and dark gray spots on his belly. He lived in a duplex near a rain forest with a nice man and woman. They didn’t have any children, but they did have a dog named Emma and another kitten named Perry, who was Kitty Ranchero’s sister.

 

Part 2

He wanted to find his sister, Perry. He wanted to find her because she ran away. She ran away because a guy named Todd saw Perry outside, thought she was a stray cat, and tried to capture and keep her as a pet.

There was a forest by their house so he thought she would run that way. He started to sneak out of his house and find Perry. When he walked into the forest, he realized that it was a rain forest. As soon as he got there, he realized that he forgot to pack up some stuff. So he ran back and packed up some green gum, tooth paste, some bug spray, and some magazines just in case.

When he finally got back to the rain forest, he started his search for Perry. It was cold and windy in the rain forest.

Part 3

The next day he started looking for Perry. Shortly into his journey — ROAR! Tigers jumped out from behind a bunch of bushes and wouldn’t let Kitty Ranchero go through. He was terrified but managed to pull green gum out of his backpack.

“This green gum is delicious. Would you like a piece?”

While the tigers were chewing Kitty Ranchero ran around them as fast as he could go. When he was safe he stopped to catch his breath at a river. But then he remembered that he hated water, and he couldn’t swim. He saw lily pads and walked across them.

He started to get very concerned about his sister. He was worried that she was alone and scared in the cold. He worried that she didn’t have any food or someplace warm and dry to sleep. It was later and darker. So he curled up in a pile of leaves under a plum tree. He dreamed of finding Perry, and going back home, and living happily ever after. But then he woke up and realized that he was still in the rain forest. He felt sad and cried for a while.

But then he heard a monkey in the distance. He heard the monkey say, “Hello. Are you lost?”

“I’m trying to find my sister, Perry. Have you seen her?” Kitty Ranchero asked.

“Wait. I think I saw a kitty. Is she light grey with blue eyes?”

Kitty Ranchero got excited and said, “You saw her? Can you please take me to her?”

“Okay. Climb up this tree and I’ll take you right to her.”

“But I can’t climb up trees,” he said sadly. “I’m a kitten.”

“How about you stay down there, and I’ll jump from tree to tree, and you can follow me from the ground.”

“Okay. Sounds good,” Kitty replied.

Kitty Ranchero started to follow the monkey through the rain forest. The monkey led him to a pond.

“Wait,” said the monkey. “I thought I saw Perry. Where is she?”

Kitty Ranchero felt angry and said, “Thanks for nothing! I’m just gonna go find Perry myself.”

“Okay,” the monkey said. “I like your snaggletooth.”

“Thank you. Sorry I got frustrated. I know you were just trying to help but I’m so worried about my sister. How about both of us keep trying to find her.”

“Okay. Let’s go.”

After a long day of searching they finally went to sleep on top of a tree. Unfortunately, there were mosquitoes everywhere and they couldn’t sleep. Kitty Ranchero asked the mosquitoes, “Hey, you guys want a bath?”

And the mosquitoes replied, “Sure! We’re pretty stinky!”

“Let’s climb down the tree and I’ll give you a bath in the pond.”

Once they get to the pond Kitty Ranchero pulled the bug spray from his backpack, aimed it at the mosquitoes and said, “You wanna a piece of this?”

And then he sprayed them in the face. The mosquitoes immediately started coughing and they flew away.

“Let’s never come back here again!” the mosquito leader said. 

Then, Kitty Ranchero climbed back up the tree.

“That was a great idea!” the monkey said. “Where’d you get that bug spray?”

“My teacher gave it to me at Kitty-garden,” said Kitty Ranchero.             

“Cool,’’ replied the monkey. Then, they both fell asleep on top of the tree.

The next morning they continued looking for Perry. Then they saw a dark and scary house in the middle of the jungle.

“I see Perry,” said Kitty Ranchero excitedly. There were vines and ripped curtains. Kitty Ranchero saw Perry in a cage with people guarding her.

“Wow, what’s going on?” said the monkey. Then a guy started chasing Kitty Ranchero and the monkey away. While they were running, Kitty Ranchero said, “By the way, I didn’t catch your name.”

“My name is Tails,’’ replied the monkey.

“I like that name,” said Kitty Ranchero. The guy, who had black ripped clothes, stopped chasing them because he was tired.

The people who were guarding Perry took her into the scary house. Before the door closed Kitty Ranchero and Tails ran inside quickly. When he got inside they saw that it was dark. They could barely see a thing. But then they saw a shadow of a man holding a lantern so they hid behind a box that said, “OPEN.” As the man passed by the box he smelled Tails and he almost got close to finding them but luckily, they ran through the hallway where the man came from. In the hallway they saw an open door leading into a room. And to their shock, Perry was locked in a cage right inside the room!

Kitty Ranchero’s eyes popped wide open.

“This is easy. Let’s just walk inside,” Tails said.

“But we don’t have the key to unlock the cage,” Kitty Ranchero said, “And there might be booby-traps!”

“Just come on, Kitty Ranchero.”

As they walked in the room, Kitty Ranchero stepped on a button on the floor and a cage with a gorilla in it dropped down from the ceiling and landed right in front of Kitty Ranchero. He screamed like a little girl.

“Whoa, whoa, whoa. What was that?”

“That was me,” Kitty Ranchero said, embarrassed. But then he remembered that gorillas loved magazines. So he took a magazine from his backpack and handed it to the gorilla through the bars.

“Here. You will love this magazine about a girl gorilla that you might want to go out on a date with.”

“Thanks!” the gorilla replied.

While they were talking, Tails found the key to Perry’s cage in a little box that was sitting on a table. Kitty Ranchero was so happy. Tails opened the cage and then Kitty Ranchero hugged Perry. But then Kitty Ranchero realized… it was a fake Perry! It was a robot!

Fake-Perry said, “Intruder!”

Kitty Ranchero and Tails ran out screaming like women. They were sad when they left, but then, one of the guards saw them. He said, “What are you doing in here?”

They ran out of the scary house. Outside they saw an evil king, who looked really ugly with a weird, small, stinky palm tree growing on his head. He was hovering over Perry, who laid in the grass. The evil king had big muscles and he was holding a knife to Perry’s throat.

Kitty Ranchero saw this and ran over to the evil king. He slapped his butt! The evil king turned around and got really mad.

Kitty Ranchero said, “Who are you looking at?”

“Did you spank my butt?” the evil king said. He was about to cut Kitty Ranchero with the knife, but Kitty Ranchero was so fast, he grabbed Perry and ran away with her.

Tails yelled behind them, “Hey! Wait up!”

They hid behind a tree and Kitty Ranchero said, “Are you okay, Perry?”

Perry started laughing and said, “I can’t believe you didn’t find me!”

Kitty Ranchero was confused. “How could we have found you?” he said. “You were so far away!”

Perry said, “That’s not a king, and those are not guards! Those are just friends, and they’re pulling a prank on you.” She told Kitty Ranchero that they set up all those obstacles themselves.

Kitty Ranchero was so surprised. “What?” he said. “I came all this way for nothing?”

“What’s going on?” Tails said.

“Never mind,” Kitty Ranchero said.

Tails said, “I’m getting out of here.”

Kitty Ranchero and Perry walked back home laughing. Kitty Ranchero felt both mad and happy at the same time.

When they got home, their master asked, “Where were you, dude?”

Kitty Ranchero cocked his head to the side. Emma, the dog, started to laugh and said, “I know all about this.” And the whole family, including the owners, posed for a picture.

The Facts I Learned About Jupiter

Hi! My name is Malia de Pario. I am twelve years old. I have blue eyes and strawberry blond hair because I used to dye my hair, because I thought it was ugly. But it was washed off, and I got tired of dying my hair. A long time ago I thought my hair was ugly, so I dyed it red. One day I went to the beach and while I was surfing I fell in the water and the dye washed out. That is why it is strawberry blond, and not red.

I have a Saturn report I need to accomplish before I go to my gymnastic competition in fifty-five minutes, so I guess I should get to it. I have been doing gymnastics since age three. I love it! It makes me feel all grown up. I am so nervous because anything can go wrong, any second of the competition. I look up facts about Saturn and things popped up about Jupiter! I feel so annoyed and irritated! Anyways, I’m so tired and dizzy (because my practices for gymnastics are so hard) but I decide to read one link anyway, and this is what it says:

Calling All Kids! Here Are Some Facts About Jupiter You Need To Read!

Jupiter is the biggest planet in the Milky Way. Jupiter is the fifth planet from the sun. Jupiter was named after the king of the Roman gods.

 I read on and it’s the best nonfiction story I have ever read. I love it because it is so interesting! And it relates to my life so much because I am a nerd (I love school). Suddenly my mom calls and says I have a gymnastic competition in a few minutes, so we have to go in one minute. I feel so irritated and mad with myself! Argh!  I totally forgot about my Saturn report for school! Help me! OMG!

Trent Pearson: The Lightning Man

“Wake up!” my ten-year-old brother, Sean, squawked as he banged two pans together manically.

You see, my brother can be pretty freakishly annoying. Like when he wakes me up at five o’clock in the morning. My name is Trent Pearson, and I am twelve years old. I want to scream my head off and jump off a building for living in the same room as my brother. Everyday he does the same thing: drive me crazy. Every time he has a nightmare, he gets up off his bed screaming and crying and then he crawls onto my stomach, creaming me.

Well, he’s not too bad – at least he keeps me company when we both get in the school’s idiotic detention.

I looked out the window; it was a very cold day, and a lot darker than usual. But I just assumed it was normal for a New York day. Then I remembered something: the first day of school was today! I sighed and almost walked out the door.

Until a fat bloated man stood in front of me.

“Guys, are you kidding me?” yelled my dad, who was still in his boxers with, thankfully, a shirt on. “Waking me up at four o’clock! You know I need to at least sleep until two o’clock in the afterno-”

He tumbled to the floor, snoring

That was another reason I hate my life. My dad literally hollered at me every day. In fact, he screamed at me so much I’m actually kind of used to it. My mom then came in the room with her hair all messed up and all over her face.

She mumbled, “Go play something for 2 hours, and then get ready for school. When you two get home from school, I’ll make you your favorite cupcakes.”

She fell onto Sean’s bed. My mom had always been my favorite. She was the nicest mom anyone could have. I never realized, but Sean had been silent the whole time – he must’ve been scared of dad. He was hugging (more like squeezing) one of my pillows so tightly that I actually felt bad for it.

***

Two hours passed by and I have done absolutely nothing. I had actually felt relaxed until my brother came screaming out of our room.

“HAVE YOU FORGOTTEN ABOUT SCHOOL!” my brother complained. I was surprised that my brother had actually cared about school today since we had been sent to detention about every day last year.

When we got to school, the teachers gave us morning detention for three hours for being late. I didn’t really care but my brother was scared to death. When we got to the detention room, there was a man who looked like a hobo sitting at a table. He was wearing shaggy tan pants, and a torn blue shirt. Why was he in a detention room? I sat down and looked at my brother.

“I’m gonna go to the bathroom, I’ve been holding it in for the whole day.”

And yet, he was stupid enough to not go during the whole day.

He rushed out the door and so did the hobo. Why did the hobo follow him? I didn’t care.

It had been 20 minutes, and my brother still did not come out of the bathroom.

What’s taking him so long? Is he stuck in the girl’s bathroom again? I thought.

I dashed out of the detention room, ran into a teacher eating a hamburger, took the hamburger, threw it into the detention room, and went into the boy’s bathroom eagerly.

He was gone, and so was the hobo.

The window was open, which meant the hobo had escaped with my brother.

“Wait, why did they add windows in the bathroom?” I asked, shocked.

I panicked and dashed out the door; the hobo was getting away fast, carrying my brother.

“Help! This guy’s armpit smells like when my dad farts, which means it’s really stinky!” Sean bellowed as he kept waving away the armpit stink.

I kept chasing the hobo until something happened that didn’t happen very often. The man lifted his hand up for no reason, and the whole world turned dark. The hobo and Sean disappeared.  I knelt to the ground, crying that I lost my brother. What did this man want, and why did he kidnap Sean? That’s when it happened. A piece of a roof landed next to me.

“Gah! What the?” I questioned and looked up.

There was a fifty-foot dark figure, literally made out of dark stuff, heading towards me.

I gasped and made the mistake of running. Did the hobo send this? The dark figure put his arm out, and a piece of concrete formed in his hands. He threw it and it hit my mom’s apartment.

“Mom! No! Dad! I don’t care about him.” Tears came out of my eyes. Suddenly, I felt anger.

Then the monster put its other arm out. I was floating towards it. No matter what I tried, I kept coming closer and closer to it. It looked like an ordinary man, except for the fact that he was made out of dark clouds and was the biggest thing ever. He opened his palms and grabbed me! Being high in the air had never scared me, but the smell of the monster did. It smelled like a billion skunks had farted directly in my face. I had never known that the monster was solid. Then, something no one could expect happened. A lightning bolt struck the dark evil cloud guy in the chest. The monster was going crazy with electricity emerging out of his body. I fell to the floor, wondering what had just occurred. Then I felt victory – the monster exploded into soft dark clouds in the sky.

“Take that, dark poopy guy,” I said, and I wish I hadn’t, because it reminded me of Sean. We used to prank teachers and feel victorious, just like right now, but a maniac just kidnapped my brother, and he will pay for the destruction of my family.

***

I wandered miserably to, well, nowhere. My mom’s apartment got mashed to smithereens, and I doubted my parents survived that piece of concrete…not that I cared about my dad. But I still had a question: what the heck happened back there and why did a lightning bolt strike the monster out of nowhere on a (kind of) sunny day? Now I was going to rot and die next to the trash can (my new home) like a hobo.

“Hey, you okay?” a voice appeared next to me.

I looked up and saw my old friend Max. He was standing with his jaw open, and with a man that I didn’t recognize. The mysterious new man was wearing an expensive tux with dark glasses that covered his eyes. Under there, I felt like there was darkness.

“What is the meaning of this?” the man barked. “I am the new principal, Mr. Momo, and  because you ran out of school for no reason, you will have a month’s worth of detention!”

I made a choice and I will never regret it.

I ran.

As I ran, I heard footsteps behind me,  I looked back and saw that Mr. Momo and Max were chasing after me. To lose them, I cut around the school corner and grabbed a trash can lid.

As soon as I grabbed the lid, I realized that it was a dead end. Mr. Momo had already caught up to me, but he was breathing like a demented person. Now was my chance.

“Hey, why ya holding a trash can lid?” he asked.

“Uhhh, I’m a trash guy,” I lied.

He charged at me, and there was only one thing to do.

I hit him directly on the head, and then he tumbled to the ground, lying very still. Fear flowed through me – I had just killed a man. Max came running down, gasping for air. When he saw Mr. Momo on the floor, and me holding a trash can lid, I was sure he was going to run. He was wearing a ducky shirt, like he always had, with words that read: Duckies Rock!!!

“Uhhhh, why is Mr. Momo sleeping on the floor,” he said with a stunned expression. He looked up from Mr. Momo, still looking at me still with shock.

“I can explai-”

Kaboom! Blocks of brick from the school flew right next to me and hit Mr. Momo on the head.

“Ughhh oww-”

“Ah!”

“Ah! What, hey, you magical talking lollipops should be in my mouth, come here-” Mr. Momo yelled as he woke up. He wasn’t dead after all.

We were gone in a flash. We ran away and left Mr. Momo yelling like a confused baby. Max and I regretted going in the direction we ran because that was where the blast came from. A forty-foot robot hovered over us, and as we tried to run away screaming like little girls, the robot grabbed us both just like the dark poopy guy did to me. This might’ve been another thing the hobo sent after me!

Max had the good luck of not hanging upside down. Sadly, I was hanging uncomfortably.

“Hey, giant robot dude! Fight me like a man, or man robot, whatever you call a grownup robot,” Max shouted.

He shouldn’t have said that.

The robot let go of us and we were falling out of the sky. I had an urge to strangle him, but something told me that strangling a kid who was also falling out of the sky was useless. That’s it, I was going to die falling out of the sky.

***

Am I dead? I thought.

Everything was black, so I couldn’t see a thing. But something did make me freeze, the groaning of a kid.

Max was alive, and so was I.

He ignorantly struggled to get out of the pile of cement.

“How did we survive? he asked. “And where did that robot thingy majiggy go?”

He was right, that robot was going to regret dropping us like a toy, but where were we and how did we survive? I guess Max read my expression because we both sprinted outside curiously. The mysterious robot left a big trail of footprints to an odd building with all the lights on.

“There must be someone in there, let’s go!” I suggested.

As we approached the bizarre and huge looking building with flags and skulls at the top, guards with spears across their chest randomly appeared. Max’s response was a shriek. They stayed absolutely silent and paid no attention to us as if we weren’t there.

I wonder if they’ll stop me from getting in…. nah. I thought. When I moved just an inch towards the door, the first guard pointed his sword at me. I spoke too soon. My response to that was punching him in the face, kicking the other guard, and moving on. Max looked at me in complete shock.

“Are you going to knock out every person you meet?” he questioned.

When Max put his hand up to knock on the door, I just kicked the door open impolitely, no problem.

“All right, who sent a demented robot out to drop me out of the air a million feet from the ground?!” I said.

No one but one hairy man raised his hand. He was wearing a striped colored turtleneck and striped socks. This guy sure liked stripe stuff.

“That would be me, and no one calls Patty ‘demented!’” he finally answered. “The guards you knocked out there are in fact one of you, and, by the way, my name is Bob!”

We looked at him suspiciously. What did he mean by one of us? I took out the trash can lid I used to knock Mr. Momo out back at the school. Max had just ran outside like a coward to hide from this deadly (not) fight. The hairy man took out a curved stick with a string attached to it, a bow, and an arrow. When I flung my weapon at him, he pulled out a shiny weapon and cut the lid in complete half. When he took his turn, his first arrow nearly hit me in the skull and landed right between cowardly Max and me.

“Wow, you really think––”

KaPooo!

Air ran through my hair, and explosions made my ears ring as I flew into the air. The arrow was explosive, and I probably died.

***

Five hours later, I was laying in a bed that was as hard as steel. Seriously, you could at least give me a comfy place before I die. The room was somber and mysterious, with pictures of people fighting things like the dark poopy guy! As I looked to my right, Max was lying unconscious on the bed with a scar on his head. Quickly, I got up and  slapped him in the face, no biggy.

“Owee!” he said.

“Get up!”

“Okay, jeez louise.”

We dashed silently out the door, when two arms, as fast as cheetahs, grabbed our shoulders. As I was struggling, I heard footsteps behind me. Could that be…

“Well, well, well, I see you guys woke up!” Bob said.

Duh, why do you think we’re standing? I thought.

“Do you know why you’re here?” he asked. “That robot brought you here to be safe, not to be killed. That hobo, well, he’s Mr. Momo. He kidnapped Sean to destroy humanity. This place is called Base Flash. Oh yeah, you are a mon-fighter, a warrior who kills monsters.”

“Wait, how do you know about Sean?” I asked cautiously. “I don’t believe that the hobo is Mr. Momo.”

“I want you to go get Sean and save the – wait, what is it called again? – oh yeah, the world!” he said as he ignored my question.

He took something from behind him. It was a red dagger. I thought he was going to kill us with it since we had tried to run out of the room. Man, he must have been really mad. That doltish man, he lied to us!

“Here, this dagger is from me and your father; he just made it,” he offered.

I was mistaken that he was stupid, but how did my dad just make this? He’s supposed to be dead, unless…

Quick footsteps interrupted me, and I was very surprised to see my dad running down the hall. He was skinnier! He was wearing overalls, with mysterious stains, marked, “Jack Pearson.”

“I’m guessing you’re wondering why I’m not fat…well, that was a disguise so the other side couldn’t kidnap me,” he said. “And that lightning bolt, well, you did that, and that dark stuff the hobo did – that was his potential. I saw through the window.”

“What happened to MOM!” I yelled.

“I tried to warn Mom, but she just slapped me as if I was lying, and she kept slapping me until I was outside. Then, she locked me outside. The apartment blew up as I sat on a bench and thought about my life.”

“Why are you here?” I asked.

“I work as a blacksmith here, so I make weapons.”

He told me that I had used my true potential, which was lightning. My response was a wide open mouth. Max fainted.

“Yeah, all that is great, but Trent and I need to go to save Sean!” Max demanded as he got up.

Bob took out what looked like a stained old paper and showed it to us. A bunch of squiggly lines roamed the page. I realized it was a map.

“Walk down the Trail of Darkness, and you will find your brother,” he said.

***

As we walked down the road, uncanny things stalked us behind tree leaves and branches. I got a feeling we were definitely on the Trail of Darkness. The eyes made me shiver and made my hand tremble. The ground was very moist, and crows kept flying around us, almost like they were tracking me.

“We’ve been expecting you,” a very familiar-looking kid said as he alighted from a tree.

“Sean!” Max yelled, astounded.

As I turned my head to see my brother, a loud blast emerged right next to me.

Oh, shoot! Max!

White smoke emitted from the middle of Max’s shirt. His chest was caked with black stuff I didn’t recognize.

“S-Sean! Why did you do that!” I said.

He just smirked evilly. Had he joined the hobo?

“Ha! I’ve turned your dopey brother against you,” said the hobo, as he came into view.

“Hey! You’re the hobo!”

“You may call me Mr. Momo.”

I had a very confused expression on my face. If he was the hobo who kidnapped Sean, who was the lunatic who pretended to be the new principal?

“Oh! That principal was a robot. We had the old principal kidnapped and sent to the Himalayas for vacation. The robot was meant to kidnap you too,” he said annoyingly as if he read my thoughts. “Now, Sean, your brother has annoyed me – kill him, please.”

His face darkened, so I was pretty sure that he wasn’t kidding about that. I knew I would have to fight my brother unless I could persuade him not to listen to Mr. Momo. So I took out the only  thing I had for defense, my red dagger. He snickered, and before I knew it, he had a pure white sword in his hands. I was doomed for sure.

“Time to end this,” he thundered.

***

He made the first move. I should’ve done some training before I came here because as I tried to block his attack, I missed and the blade of Sean’s sword sliced through my skin. After it slashed, it emitted fire from the tip and sent me forty feet behind. It felt like I had fallen from the Empire State Building, and that’s saying a lot.

“Come on, attack me, even though you suck at combat,” he commented.

I couldn’t attack my brother. He could get hurt, and plus, like he said, I suck at combat. I just needed to convince him, but I’d probably die in the process.

“Dude, why did you join his side? He’s evil, cruel, and selfish. He’ll probably eliminate you after he takes over the world. I think you’re under a spell. He killed mom…think of the happy days we spent together, and when we pranked the lunch aid!” I screeched.

That got him thinking, I slowly marched towards Sean, and the last thing I saw before I blacked out was my brother floating in the air with fire circling him.

That was his true potential.

Fire.

Maybe I’m dead now, finally, some peace, I thought.

Or maybe not. The air smelled of dirt, and my vision blurred. I saw a figure with its hand out.

Dang it, Sean is going to kill me.

Not this time.

I kicked him hard in the chest, and I hit his sword hard with my dagger. The weapon clattered to the floor, leaving Sean rolling across the pavement.

“Hey, I’m on your side now!” he protested.

Part of me didn’t trust him, but I might as well have agreed because Mr. Momo was going to kill both of us anyway. When I looked over his shoulder, Max was (stupidly) sneaking up to Mr. Momo for the kill, but the insane kid got intercepted by a kick in the stomach by the ex-principal. “Stop trying to be the hero!” My brother and I looked at each other. We both had the same thought about what to do.

“Hey, Principal, what time is it?” Sean asked.

“Uhh, it about-”

“It’s kabob time!”

Our two powers collided, and we threw the massive ball of lightning and fire at the hobo. A yellow dome emerged, but after, nothing was left but a hole in the ground. We had finally killed Mr. Momo.

“Listen, Trent, I’m sorry for knocking you out, even though it was funny and I kind of liked it,” my brother apologized. “But is there a way to get Mom back?”

He was right; there had to be a way to get Mom! But I doubted anyone knew how. We picked up poor Max and headed back to the building. On the way, I ran into a pole, but my two friends picked me up.

When we walked in the house, I was sure my dad was going to kill Sean. But as we entered the blacksmith’s area, he was still wearing his overalls and was hammering an ax. I never knew I would see my dad be hardworking.

“Oh. My. God! I’m so glad you’re safe. I’m sorry for being mean…you know I’m grumpy when I’m tired. But Sean, you didn’t do anything stupid, right? Even if you did, I forgive you. Come here, you guys,” my father said as he put his arms out to hug us.

I guess he really did change. We went to the game room and played on the Pac-Man machine.

For once, I felt happy to be with Sean and my dad, but what about Mom?

The End!

Be sure to read Part II in the adventure with Trent, Sean, Max, Bob, and Mr. Pearson.

Immigration

My family is almost all made up of immigrants. My mom is an immigrant, and my dad’s grandma is too. Everyone in my family came here to find a better life. Some people are against immigration and think that immigrants are drug dealers or terrorists, but this is not true. Every family has an ancestor who was once an immigrant, so everyone should respect immigration and realize that immigrants help build community in a positive way.

It started when my great-great-great-great-grandma came from Spain to Colombia. She married a Native American, and they created a home in Colombia. Generations later, my grandma was born and had my mom, who immigrated from Colombia to the United States. My mom went to college in Bogota and got her degree in engineering. After college, my mom was going to move to Germany in order to be an engineer, but my grandma said that Germany was too far from home. So my mom moved to the U.S. instead, in order to be an electrical engineer and get a better job. Her arrival the U.S. was a step toward building our family.

My dad’s great-grandma came from Italy to Ellis Island and then moved to Oregon. For college, my dad moved to New York. He met my mom in New York, but then left for Paris. He came back from Paris to be with my mom in New York. Eventually, I was born in New York with dual citizenship in Colombia and the United States.

My mom and dad are only two of millions of immigrants in the world. Many immigrants come from Mexico to the U.S through the border into El Paso. Some immigrants go through illegally and others legally. The legal immigrants get through the border with a passport.

Illegal immigrants who escape from Mexico to find a better life in the U.S. shouldn’t be kicked out of the country just for crossing the border. The majority of illegal immigrants are not harmful to society; rather, they get jobs and work hard. Some illegal immigrants commit crimes, but so do some citizens of the U.S.

A lot of people are against immigrants coming from Mexico and the Middle East, like Donald Drumpf. Drumpf insults Mexicans and Muslims. However, most Mexicans and Muslims really help the U.S.; some help by working at restaurants, others are painters, doctors, construction workers, etc. Furthermore, a big percentage of the U.S. population is Mexican and Muslim.

All in all, we should think about immigration optimistically, because everyone’s family is made of at least some immigrants. Without immigration, most of our families wouldn’t exist. At their core, everyone is an immigrant –– including myself.

Hummingbird

I look outside my kitchen window,

hoping to see the sun.

The day is beautiful,

kids play tag across the street.

 

The neighbors’ wind chime whistles,

singing melodies.

The breeze is delightful,

swaying all the trees.

 

I look at my garden,

at the hummingbird feeder.

A little hummingbird whizzes past,

seeming to say hi.

 

I watch it fly up,

then fly down.

It sips the sparkling red juice

from the feeder.

 

It shakes its head

from the sweetness,

then comes over to my window,

and gives me a small kiss.

 

It sways,

flies back to the feeder.

It feeds,

and flutters away.

The Town of Randomness

Chapter 1: The Alliance

I crouched under a stone table as a laptop hit the ground. On the back, it had the emblem of my sworn enemy. The Swastika of Hitler and his reckless Nazi party. Then I realized Hitler and all the other terrorists that have ever lived were alive currently, right now. I told you this town was random. Suddenly, my back throbbed and I looked behind me. There he was. I knew what was to be done, and I did it. I jumped on top of the table, and my heart stopped beating. I fell off the table, my head splitting on a rock. I woke up. “It was just a dream.” I thought. But I was wrong. My nightmare had found its way out of my head, and it possessed my world. My roof was on fire. There were holes in my skin with splintered bone sticking out, and I shivered. I looked outside and saw the reason I fell off the table. Mahatma Gandhi was Hitler’s ally.

Chapter 2: The Liquid

Out of the blue, an enormous, blue-green, earsplitting UFO crashed into my house sending metal and Astro-Glass, which is a combination of glass and iron, everywhere. All that was left of it was one wall and a few windows. It turned into the Western Wall like in Jerusalem when Judah and his Maccabee gang ran out from behind it.

I felt a flush of warmth as they attacked with fierce, hostile strikes from their swords and staffs. They did a great job of preventing Hitler and Gandhi from reaching their destination, or point of interest, which was my house. But soon, my warmth turned to stone cold fear as Hitler tied my brother and sister to dynamite, which was tied to a chain, which was being lowered into an unidentified liquid, as the scientists said later on.

I threw a handcrafted diamond tipped drill bit at the iron chain, jumped up, caught my brother, and missed my sister as she was absorbed into a murky, brownish-green liquid that looked as if it were venom. A few chunks of happiness went in and out of my heart because I didn’t like her, but I also lost her. My brother, whom I caught for two reasons. One was because he is three and I wanted to stop his awful wailing. Two was because he is a little kid and I didn’t want him to get hurt.

I plunged into the poison after my sister was sucked into it, and my life changed, starting that day, that minute, that second, that nano-second.

Chapter 3: Arcade Machine

It was dark, with dim pixel-like chandeliers. There were video game machines. One screamed in enormous green letters: DIMENSION TRAVELER.

I bet I came out of that one because this does not look anything like ‘Random Earth.’” I thought.

Then there was a flash of purple light, and my sister was launched out of the DIMENSION TRAVELER game. But before I could say hi, a tremendous force charged me into the wall, and my world went blank. I was sitting on a hospital bed, and a sort of energy was pulsing in my fingertips; a bolt of lightning shot out of them.

“Wow, I did not know you could do that.”

“Neither did I,’’ I replied to my sister, in a panicked way.

All of a sudden, an abominable snowman burst through the wall and tossed a sack over me, and another sack over my sister. I felt a forceful jolt as the “Yeti” threw us over his shoulder and stormed out of the hospital. I felt the pulse again, aimed my fingernails at the side of the bag, and squeezed my eyes shut. I opened them and it looked as though Saint Elmo’s Fire had been launched out of a cannon and shredded the fabric. For a split second, I saw the concrete groundbut it wasn’t concrete. It was some sort of portal, the color of a setting sun in the sky. Just as I went through the portal, I saw my sister fall through another portal the color of a wave collapsing on the ocean floor. My mind was empty, and my body was the only thing that seemed to race with thoughts.

Chapter 4: The Chocolate Dog

I came to my senses and felt my ribs throbbing, and knew that I fell on them after I fell in the portal. I got up and felt in my pocket. Phew! I was so glad I had my cell phone. I called my sister immediately but stopped in my tracks before I dialed her number as I saw that I was in a forest. I was shocked that I was in a forest after I had just been in a hospital, and I wanted to know more about where I was. I climbed up a nearby mountain and at the top, I saw nothing but emerald-green treetops. I pulled a bar of chocolate out of my other pocket. I heard something and listened, straining my ears so hard I thought they would dissolve, and found a dog, thumping its tail on the ground, sitting patiently. It was staring at my hand.

“What do you want?” I asked.

I looked at my hand and saw my Hershey bar, half-eaten. I ripped off a piece, and hesitated, but made my decision quickly. I tossed it to the dog, but it bounced off his nose and tumbled down the cliff.

“YOU WASTED THE LAST PIECE OF MY CHOCOLATE!!! But you would make a gr … ”

Then, the dog was pulled into a bush by a pair of silvery-white gloved hands, and the branches smacked my face. I sputtered dry leaves out of my mouth and pushed them aside.

There, I saw a knife in each eyeball, and half of the dog’s leg was cut off and it sent a fountain of gooey yellow liquid all over the rich dirt, the color of gold.

“Random Earth,” I said disappointedly.

I bent down to touch the dog, and once again, the pulsing energy in my fingertips. ZAPPP!!! The dog turned to ashes and the knives launched into the air. I tried to grab the handles but instead, it ripped my hand off and had a play-date with it above the clouds. I was too busy sobbing over my hand to notice the other knife falling from a hole in the clouds. Luckily, I looked up to the heavens so I could pray for a new hand and moved out of the when I saw the blood-stained blade glistening in the sunlight, spiraling downward. It came down hard on a moss-covered rock and slid into a big hole. Then, the other knife was coming down. It landed (blade down) straight through my neck and out my nose.

Chapter 4 ½: The Castle

As if they read my mind, the angels of God sent me a new head and a new hand. I just had an instinct and threw one on top of the other. They combined and turned into a robot suit the size of Canada. My test subject was a sheep. Apparently, his name was “Creep Sheep the Third,” according to the nametag saying “Hello! My Name Is Creep Sheep The Third, But Call Me Bob.” My new body parts snaked around my legs and my torso, creating the suit that had a built-in pancake-and-coffee breakfast machine in the living room, which was in the brain. I readied the plasma-cannon in the shoulders with 170,000,000 bullet capacity, while picking up the best-selling novel LOL. I shot Creep Sheep and left a crater with burnt wool in it. I walked around the forest for a while when I found a path. It could be dangerous! I thought. I stomped 70 feet per second because of my Israel-sized legs and saw a tower on a mountain far away. I went to the Siri-Bot and asked it what in the name of Baloney and Cheese Sandwiches from Jupiter a castle was doing there and Siri-Bot said it was called Hell’s Elf Nightmare, a castle ruled by the Elven King Mr. Sunshine.

I got out of my suit and walked up the almost infinite stairway to heaven. I opened the surprisingly mouse-hole-shaped door that I crawled through. I was thrown into the jail cell across from my sister for “intruding.”

The next morning I told my sister we had to escape. We escaped by hiding in barrels on the lunch break. Those were from the winery in the hall across from our cell and my sister fell down the waterfall on the opposite side of the mountain, and I was close behind as the elves lobbed us down. As the barrels landed with a psha-splash-boom I heard a curse word from my sister as she landed upside down.

“Hahaha!!!” I yelled at her.

I landed right-side up, crouching on my new converse, which were unreleased, model 27px 2018. Then, my fingertips.  

“Okay,” I sighed and tore open the reinforced wood-and-metal barrel, but the lasers were green and purple this time.

“Huh?” I said, breaking my sister’s barrel too.

But unfortunately, it replaced her shoulder with a pile of ashes, doing the same with three-quarters of her head. All that was left was the corner of her mouth and the right side of her chin. Before I could react to the fact that I cut off my sister’s head, I heard a scream come from nowhere. A button fell from the sky. Without thinking, I pressed it.

A robotic and deep voice said, “You now have a new power to reverse anything you do with your lasers.”

“Okay?” I pointed my hand at her head and shoulder.

Her face was instantly revived. I walked with my sister in the direction of the scream. We found a bloody, dead body in a prairie, and an assassin standing next to it holding a DuMbLeDoRf bow with a CoreVein arrow. The DuMbLeDoRf bow was made of stone instead of wood, so it is more durable. I had read about it in my school library. The CoreVein arrow had human veins in it.                              

Chapter 5: Back Home

The assassin’s name was Rikki Doucornet Sheppard Josh Max DuPeublo Ancadar Sedaka Neandorie Goyashu Monet Edgar Shushan Huluco Czynok Abar Nomwaque Eehopratt Lopandez Jalepeno Fillifar Boqua Twitter Snapchat Facebook  Flickr Vimeo Instagram Youtube Xander Lopez Bryant Triupoa Noijus Dodperea DaVinci Sealone Eedraz Gomez Golem Wockeel Udoe Sushi Burger Fatboy Momma Jin John Jones Bones Smith Jefferson Washington Lincoln Roosevelt Wasabi. Call him Rick Wasabi for short. My sister kicked him in the face and he stumbled. I shot him with his bow and he died. A green glow appeared in front of me. I was sucked in, and I saw my ceiling. It was all a dream. Thank you for letting me tell you my dream. My name is George Melez and I will tell you a story about a boy named Hugo Cabret and a drawing that changed his life.

The End (P.S. if you want to hear the rest, read the book The Invention of Hugo Cabret!)

The Big Crystal

One day there lived a puppy who was three weeks old. Her name was Sugar and she lived on a corner block in the city. She was a black dog with straight, shiny fur. Her tail was long and her ears flopped down. There were six dogs in Sugar’s family. There was her mother and father who also had black, shiny fur, her sister, Chewy, and two brothers. She was the baby of the family and the smallest, and she felt very nervous when her brothers chased her. Sugar always wanted to play with Chewy, but Chewy liked to play at the dog park with her friends, and never invited Sugar to come along. This made Sugar sad. Her mom and dad were always so busy with her brothers and sister that they couldn’t spend much time with Sugar.

What Sugar wanted most in the world was someone to show her attention. She thought and thought about how she could get an owner. It took her a week to come up with a plan, but she needed more information. So one day when Chewy went to the dog park, Sugar snuck out behind her and followed her.

The dog park was a large area of dusty dirt. There were a lot of trees scattered around the park, but strangely, there were more people than dogs. It was a cool day. Sugar didn’t think it was actually a dog park, but Chewy had told her it was. Sugar tried to hide from Chewy by hiding in a bush. She listened to the kids walking by and talking to try and find out where she could get a crystal. She overheard a kid say that there was a very big crystal at the end of the woods. At this, Sugar wagged her tail, and stayed around to see if she could find out more. When she heard nothing else, she went home to prepare to find the crystal.

Sugar packed in a big backpack a pillow, her favorite dog toy (a chewy squirrel that squeaked!), some food (nobody paid attention to her, so this was quite easy), and her food and water bowls. She planned to leave the next morning after Chewy went out to the dog park again. Unfortunately around her there were a lot of woods, so she wasn’t sure which one she had to go in. Despite this, she felt happy because she really wanted someone else to take care of her besides her parents. She was ready for the challenge. The backpack was big enough for her to curl up inside, so she slept on the pillow, excited for the morning.

But Chewy didn’t go to the dog park the next day.

Sugar asked Chewy, “Are you going to go to the dog park later tonight, or are you never going again?”

Chewy said she never planned to go to the dog park again.

Sugar felt sad, but didn’t say anything to Chewy. She just walked away, and came up with plan B: to jump out of the window that night.

Sugar went into the living room while the other dogs received their treats. Out the window there was a rose bush. She knew the rose bush had thorns so she went into the kitchen and opened a window. Outside that window there was nothing but grass. She jumped outside, but she forgot to put her backpack on! She remembered there was a doggy door, so she went back inside. She ran to get her backpack and slipped it on her back. Sugar returned to the kitchen. Chewy was waiting by the entrance of the kitchen.

“What are you doing?” she asked Sugar.

“Going to the dog park,” Sugar said. She felt nervous because she realized that Chewy didn’t know she’d been to the dog park. She thought she might get caught.

“Do you want me to come?” Chewy asked.

“Tomorrow,” Sugar said. With that, she jumped out the already open window.

She worried that when she returned she wouldn’t get any treats because her parents would be so mad at her. She didn’t want her parents to find out she was gone. The night was cold, and she realized she hadn’t packed a blanket. She thought about the blanket that her parents kept outside, but she didn’t know where it was stored. She sniffed around the backyard and found the blanket underneath her favorite tree. She felt sad to leave that tree because she always lay under it no matter the weather. But she had to find that crystal, so she went to the gate. It was locked, and she couldn’t jump over it, so she had to get the key that was placed in a box by the door. There were twenty-three keys on the key-ring, and Sugar tried every single one, until finally the twenty-third key worked! She opened the gate and went on her way.

There were three different ways to get into the woods, but she didn’t know which way to take. There was a piece of paper that told her which path to take, but the paper got ripped, so she didn’t know which path to take. She remembered that she’d been given a sign, so she took it out and read it, and that told her which way to go. She took the middle path.

There was a big, big bridge. The bridge was very low, and mice walked underneath it. Sugar looked around for a rope so that she could climb the bridge and get on top of it, but she couldn’t find one. Sugar barked and howled for someone to help. There was a car on top of the bridge. A person in the car was talking to another. “Are we going to be here for a long time?” said one person.

“Yes,” said the other.

Sugar tried to get their attention but couldn’t, so Sugar decided to wait. The people on the bridge left their car there, and didn’t come back until the next day. Sugar opened her backpack, got out her pillow, and went to sleep for the night.

Sugar woke to the sound of the two people’s voices, and this time got the attention of one of them. The person said, “I think that dog needs help!” But the other person ignored her needs to get up onto the bridge. The two people got back into their car and drove away.

This made Sugar feel frustrated and upset. She thought and thought about how this could’ve happened and then she remembered that the day she got the sign that told her to take the middle path was the day that the signs had changed, and she wasn’t given the right one. But this still didn’t solve her problem. She decided that she had to take the left path instead. It took her a long time to get back to the start of the path, and she was exhausted when she got there, but she knew she had to keep going.

Along the left path she encountered a gigantic bear with three bear cubs. She felt very nervous that the bear was going to eat her alive, but it turned out that all the bear wanted was water to give to her cubs. Sugar took a bottle of water out of her backpack and offered it to the mother bear, who was very grateful to Sugar for helping her babies.

Sugar said goodbye to the bear, and continued on her way down the path. As she walked, Sugar thought about what else she might encounter. Would she run into another bear? Or an owl? Or maybe a less friendly animal, like a fox? For a while, there were no other animals. She was alone and the path began getting darker, and she saw dying trees. She was nervous now. But she continued walking, because she wanted that crystal. And suddenly, she heard a loud thump right behind her. When she turned around, she quickly realized it was a giant tree that had fallen and had barely missed her by three inches. At that moment, she wished she had asked someone to come with her. But she kept moving. Then she got thirsty, so she checked her backpack for a bottle of water. She didn’t have any water, but noticed a cabin nearby. She headed to the cabin and reached the door. Thankfully, the doorbell wasn’t too high up, because she was able to hop and ring it with her nose.

And owl with sharp, sharp claws opened the door and said, “Hello?” But Sugar had run away and hid behind a tree. She was scared of owls, because she knew they were birds of prey. “Hello… anyone out here?” the owl said in a friendly voice.

Sugar began to shiver. Finally, she peeked her head a little, and the owl spotted her.

“Hey there, I see you. It’s okay, I’m not gonna hurt you,” the owl said.

Sugar didn’t respond; she kept shivering.

The owl walked outside. She had a wide wingspan, but her claws were hidden now. She had white feathers and black stripes.

Sugar stepped out and showed herself.

“Want me to bring you inside?” said the owl. “You look scared.”

“I’m a little thirsty.”

“I can get you some water. I’ll be right back.”

When the owl came back with a glass of water, she said to Sugar, “Do you want to come inside and spend the night?”

“No, thank you. I’m just going to drink my water and then I have to continue on my journey.”

“Can I join you on your journey?”

“Sure.”

“Great! I’m Owlette by the way. What’s your name?”

“Sugar.”

“Let me just pack a few things and I’ll be all ready to go.”

“Okay. Don’t take too long.”

So Sugar and Owlette set off to find the big crystal. While Sugar was glad to have the company she was also worried. She didn’t know if she could trust Owlette, because she’d never met an owl before.

It started to get dark so they stopped to have dinner. Fortunately, they found an abandoned tent so they went in it and ate. The next morning, after they woke up, Owlette folded up the tent and realized that she could fit it inside her backpack. Sugar felt happy that they would always have a dry and cozy place to sleep. And after that Sugar started to trust Owlette a little more.

As they headed down the path Sugar started thinking about her parents back home.

“I’m worried that my parents are going to be mad at me for leaving home. I don’t want to get in trouble.”

“Oh well,” Owlette said, thinking that she didn’t want Sugar to be worried, so she was going to change the subject to get Sugar’s parents off her mind. “Are we almost there?” Owlette asked. “I’m getting tired’’

“Yes,” replied Sugar.

“How much further?” Owlette asked.

“Just past that pond over there. Can you see it?”

Owlette squinted and looked into the distance. “Yes, Sugar, I can see it. But just barely.”

“It looks further than it is. We will be there soon.”

Sugar and Owlette set off to the pond. It didn’t take them long to get there; however, they soon realized that they had no way to cross it. Neither of them knew how to swim and it was too deep to walk across.

“Oh, no problem. I can fly across the pond.”

“But I can’t fly,” Sugar said sadly.

“I have an idea. Why don’t I carry you on my back while I fly across?”

“Okay! Let’s try it.”

Owlette ducked down and Sugar jumped on her back, but once Owlette started to take off Sugar got scared.

“I’ve never flown before,” she explained, “I think I’m too scared to do this.”

“I understand. I have an idea. I see that there are big lily pads leading across the pond. Why don’t you hop on each one while I fly across?”

“Okay. I’ll try.”

When Sugar got to the other side of the pond, she said to Owlette, “I’m so glad I made it. I nearly drowned hopping on one of the smaller lilly pads, but I was able to get across.”

“How much further now?” Owlette asked.

“It is behind that tree in the ground.”

Then Owlette said, “But what are we going to use to get in the ground?”

“I can dig really well,” Sugar responded.

Then Owlette said, “But I can’t dig. I don’t have paws like you.”

Sugar looked then in her backpack to see if there were any tools in there that Owlette could use. But there were no tools that Sugar could find for Owlette to use.

Sugar said, “It’s okay. I can dig and you can watch me.” Owlette sat and watched Sugar dig, but it was taking a while. Owlette told Sugar she was going to go back to where she lived because there wasn’t anything for her to do there. Just then, Sugar saw something in a bush and said, “Before you go I want to see if there is something in the bush that you could use.”

When she looked in the bush she found a shovel that was easier to hold. Owlette decided to stay and use that tool. They dug and dug and dug, until finally, they reached the crystal! When they reached the crystal, they figured out it was not that big. It was only the size of Owlette. They were expecting it to be as big as an ostrich. They were happy that they found the crystal, and that there was enough room in the backpack for it to fit. But Owlette and Sugar were sad because they wanted it to be bigger.

“What are we going to use to split up the crystal?” Owlette asked.

“We never planned that we would split it up,” said Sugar.

“I came on this journey because I thought I would get some of the crystal.”

“But you never told me that you would.”

Just then Sugar saw more of the crystal.

“You can get all of the crystal that we found, and I can get all of the one in the ground.” Sugar said.

Owlette agreed. When they got the crystal out of the ground it was much bigger — it was the size of an ostrich!

Owlette said, “Why do you get the bigger crystal and I get the smaller crystal?”

“Because I was the one that was going to get all of the crystal, but I let you have some.” Owlette seemed disappointed, but eventually said it was okay.

They walked back to Owlette’s house and said goodbye. Sugar asked for more water and food for the way. And then, Sugar was alone. When she got back she told her family about her journey. They used the crystal for what they wanted and lived happily ever after.

The Subway Tragedy

CHAPTER 1

I was walking toward the subway station with earbuds ringing with the sound of 50 Cent in my ears to help me walk on. When my tired legs got to sit down on the subway seat…

“Kasye,” Mom said.

I looked up to see Grace (my sister) holding her hand out. I rolled my eyes to Mom. Her green eyes pointed at my hand. I knew what my sister wanted. I stopped the music on my phone, pulled out my earbuds from my ear, and handed everything to Grace. Grace played a game while listening to Justin Bieber. Grace says she’s a “Belieber” (she’s obsessed with Justin Bieber). Then, all of a sudden, the subway lights went out. I heard someone scream, then the subway car stopped. I heard a huge CREAK and then the subway car fell sideways.

 

CHAPTER 2

My head throbbed. I heard my sister cry. People were holding up their phone flashlights for light.

“Listen up!” a man’s voice said, “Point your flashlights at the subway door. We’ll try to open the doors.”

“What will happen after that?” a voice said.

Everybody was silent, shining their flashlights on the door.

“We walk,” he said.

“One… two… three… push!” Creeeak went the door.

“Oh –– ” I covered Grace’s ears.

“It’s open,” the guy said.

The silence broke and everybody started toward the door. I went out into the track and saw more closely the guy who opened the door. He had light, straight, gold hair, sky-colored eyes with a hint of jade. Tall and strong. Right when I walked out of the car, he started to walk with me.

“Hi,” he finally said.

“Hi,” I said back.

“What’s your name?” he asked.

“Should I tell you my name?” I asked.

“I’m Carter,” Carter smiled.

“I’m Kasye.” I said.

“Cute name,” he said.

“I look like a poppy,” I blushed.

“No, you look more like a rose.”

I blushed more.

 

CHAPTER 3

I was scared. It was cold. I squeezed my sister’s hand.

“It’s okay,” Carter said, rubbing my back.

People tried to call 911, family, police, but there was no wifi. The driver was dead and his walkie-talkie was broken.

We were stuck.

We had to walk.

And I wanted to survive.

I put Grace on my shoulders to try to call 911. I shivered. Walked to the right of the tracks where there was a hill in the middle of the tracks going down, so we didn’t get electrified. Mom was helping an old woman whose leg was broken. 

“I’m scared too,” Carter said.

“Can I trust you?” I asked in my serious voice.

“Yes,” he said, not smiling but looking me in the eye.

I put Grace down. Then I hugged Carter and cried on his shoulder. He hugged back. And in that moment I felt safe.

 

CHAPTER 4

Dead mice and trash covered the area, sewage and mud pooled into my shoes, and the worst part, I was in love.

Yes. Carter. My heart thumped in me as he came closer.

“It’s so hot in here!” Grace complained.

“Go ask Mom for water,” I said.

Grace was right. People had bare skin showing right now. Even Carter had his sweater off.

“STOP! Don’t drink that, honey!” a woman’s voice shouted.

I turned to look as a kid found a puddle of swampy, muddy, sandy sewage water. The worst part was the kid put a scoop in his hand and gulped it down. The mom ran over as the kid threw up on the track. This was getting bad. Luckily, there was a doctor with his tools in his bag. The doctor made the kid throw up again. And the problem was that more people got sick. Even Mom did, and Carter said he would wait with us until she got better.

You might think I was crazy, but I met a stranger who was crazy cute and I now was crazy in love with. That’s a lot of crazy.

“Over the past hours,” Carter said, “I feel the need to admit something… I…” he blushed, “lo –– ”

“Love you,” I finished.

“I love you too,” Carter said.

Then I learned up and looked him in the eye and we kissed.

 

Chapter 5

We walked and walked.

And when we saw a bright light behind us, I thought it was heaven. There was screaming. I heard Carter yell, “TRAIN!”

He pushed me right as the train flew over him.

At first, I was confused. But then I saw red. A puddle of red. And then I saw legs, feet, arms, more red.

“NO!” I said as I realized it was Carter’s body.

He was dead.

Mom put her hand on my shoulder. “Let’s keep going,” she tried to sooth my wrinkling heart but like a sharpie it stayed.

We walked three more hours. I was devastated the whole way, crying and barely able to keep my balance. But then we saw another bright light, this time not coming toward us.

 

Chapter 6

“Yes!” people yelled, rushing toward the light. I did too.

Finally, we jumped off the tracks and on the platform.

“Ahh!” people yelled. And then everything went blank.

I woke up to beige walls and curtains. Hospital. I felt rested, calm, but I remembered Carter and his body sucked in a red bloodbath. Mom and Grace walked in and gave me a kiss on the head and a heart-warming hug. I got out of the hospital and looked up at the frostbite sky and thought, Peace, finally, peace.

I walked home, my feet crunching in the snow. Although Grace had crutches, we were fine. And although Mom was in a wheelchair, we were fine. And although my heart had one huge piece missing, we were fine. Fine, or good, or okay, or not too bad. Like a bird flying and soaring… and then falling in an ocean, drowning, and dying, never to see the light again. That’s fine to me.

That night, I met Grace in Mom’s room for nightmares haunting me, reseeing the horrors I saw. And then we all woke up and played Sorry the game.

 

Chapter 7

Three Days Later…

I woke up to the chirping of birds. I put on my robe and grabbed a mug and made coffee. Mom was in the kitchen making blueberry pancakes. I grabbed some and sat on the couch. I watched the news and finally something caught my attention.

The headline: “One More Boy Walks Out From Subway… A Boy Named Carter.”

“Carter!?” I yelled. I ran to the hospital, only to see Carter outside in the snow staring at me.

I ran and threw myself into his arms. We fell in a pile of snow and rolled around, hugging.

“How?! What?” I said.

“You left me there!”

“What? I thought you were dead!”

“Didn’t you want a funeral with MY BODY?”

“We were scared! You would’ve held us behind!” I said, crying. Carter looked at me with a bitter face. The tears burned with flames and then froze in the cold.

“Do you love me?” I asked with the bitter face mask still on.

He didn’t seem to know how to answer.

“I….” But I knew his answer. “Don’t,” he said.

My face softened and turned from surprise to pity.

“What did I do!?” I yelled.

“You left me. I’ll never be able to play football again!”

He walked away.

“Do you… hate me?” I said out of breath.

At first, I thought he didn’t hear me, but he stopped. He turned and he was crying too. Then he walked away.

 

Chapter 8

My legs ached, my head ached, and my heart ached. I went to the hospital and I waited for my appointment. Outside, in the silent waiting room, I heard, “… you know you’ll die soon.”

“I… know,” said a voice I knew was Carter.

Then crying. His mom. And I was tearing up the memories of Carter.

One Week Later…

Carter was dead. Gone. And I was at his funeral.

“We will remember Carter…” I was sick in the belly. Hurt, and dissolved. My life, my heart, gone.

A Day at Work

A Day at Work

8:00 p.m. I just found out tomorrow I’m going to my mom’s job! This is great news because she works as an editor. Her office is a newsroom with people from all over the world and there is a vending machine and free hot chocolate. It sounds so exciting! Tomorrow’s gonna be my lucky day.

10:00 a.m. the following day: I’m here at my mom’s office. The ride was like a roller coaster. I got really sick in the car and almost threw up over my clothes. Now I have some hot chocolate, a bag of Cheetos, a good chair, and I have your company, my ever so precious diary. So everything is great. I’m loving it!

10:05 a.m. I was wrong. Oh my God, I was so wrong. Work is boring. It’s the most boring thing in the universe. Now I’m so glad that I’m still in fourth grade and won’t need to get a job like this for while.

10:10 a.m. Just imagine if I had to come here five days a week. This is eight hours per day, from Monday to Friday. 40 hours per week. Okay, you got it — I’ll just stop making this situation a math problem. The boringness would make me all wrinkly. Look at my hand… it’s getting wrinkly so fast!

10:20 a.m. I’m thinking about good jobs I could get. I’ll definitely never be a website editor. I’d like to have one of the super awesome top ten funnest jobs in the world. I think I’d be a great waterslide tester, or maybe even a professional sleeper. I’m just certain I WON’T TRY THIS JOB HERE, EVER.

10:30 a.m. I have finished the hot chocolate and the Cheetos. I asked my mom how much longer we’re gonna have to stay here. She didn’t say anything, just looked to me. You should have seen her face. I can only say one word: WRINKLED.

10:31 a.m. Okay, you know what? I’m done. It’s not even 10:40, and I can’t do this any more. So BYE!    

I Never Wanted a Coffee Shop

“I never wanted a coffee shop, Dad! Why do I have to work here? It’s not fair. This coffee shop doesn’t even look good, or have my favorite color, pink. Plus, it has weird drawings of coffee, and the tables are made of coffee beans. And I don’t want to work in a weird place without the color pink. Everything is brown! The walls, the cups! I just want to play outside with my friends. Look, they’re all playing out there,” I said with my arms crossed, standing beside the line. We had just opened the coffee shop and there was a huge line outside. We only had three employees and I had to be the fourth. It wasn’t fair.

My dad yelled back, “Well, you have to work here. Plus, you’re embarrassing me in front of the customers. Go to the counter. Look, there’s a HUGE line. And you’ve got to buy everything and make the recipes. And it’s not a joke. So have fun, goodbye.”

Some people in the line were staring at us. Other people were covering their children’s ears and eyes. And other people were just trying to not look, and looking at the walls. I couldn’t believe they were looking at the walls and not at us – the walls were really ugly. I went to the counter and started taking orders. There were a lot of orders.

The only employee who helped me learn all about the coffee making was Serina. I was in charge of buying everything at the supermarket and taking the orders, and she was in charge of making the coffee. She would always make hearts and pretty things on the surface of the coffee if it had milk, like lattes, frappuccinos, cafe con leche, and things like that. She told me that she wanted to be an architect or a painter when she grew up. She had always painted at her home. Now she was painting at the coffee shop. She painted the entire coffee shop and the tables (more like bought them, but don’t tell her I told you that).

At the end of the month, it was payday. We had enough money to pay everyone, but we didn’t win a lot for ourselves –– each one of us had earned only $10. This time, we bought new ingredients, and we knew exactly how our customers liked it. The first time I made a coffee, the customer asked for half the amount of sugar. I put way more than half the amount, and he spit it out and said he thought it was disgusting. But then, when I made the same coffee for another customer, she loved it and said she would come every day. The line eventually got bigger.

Now we had planned out each recipe and made a new menu, with new employees whom we had hired. Their names were Emily and Joey. They were our coffee servers. By the end of that month, each one of us had made at least $40.

Finally, the two months were over, but I had had a lot of fun. I kind of did want to stay in the coffee shop with all my friends; the friends that were always playing outside had all gone to New Jersey. I hate New Jersey. Don’t tell them I told you that. Basically, I hate everything. Don’t tell me secrets –– I’ll spit them out easily, just like I did to you.

So, I decided to stay in the coffee shop. My friends were so happy that they made me a special coffee which, instead of a heart, said “Best Friends Forever.”

The day after, I told them my plan: we could make little cupcakes that said “Best Friends Forever,” and each would come with a note that said: “Give this to your best friend: the person who never treats you badly and whom you also treat nicely.” When we made those cupcakes, everyone was so impressed that about ten people bought them after school. We made a special offer that said if you bought a “Best Friends Forever” cupcake, you would get a “Best Friends Forever” coffee.

Finally, we all got tired of the coffee shop. It showed: when the month ended, we got just $20 each. We had done something wrong, but I didn’t care. I liked the coffee shop a lot more because I had new friends, who all moved closer to the coffee shop.

Every morning we would go get a coffee. We thought about it and, entering as employees, we made friends and got a “Best Friends Forever” cupcake and coffee. We worked in the coffee shop until we were old enough to get another job.

Omar’s Great Adventure

There once was a seven-year-old boy named Omar Winerib. He lived in Lebanon with his dad, his mom, his teenager sister, and his two adult brothers. He went to a school called Barnesjan, which is a special school that teaches students how to not fight and live peacefully. He loved science and sports but most of all he loved to invent things. His goal was to one day invent a machine that made virtual reality real. Omar was a hard worker and he always thought about science and his inventions, even when he was walking home from school late at night in the dark by himself.

One night Omar was at his computer doing research and he came across a website that said, “Syria is dying! Syria is dying!” It made him feel very sad. Many of his friends and his dad’s friends were in Syria and he was very concerned for their safety. He did some more research about what was going on in Syria and he learned that there was a group called Fikke (which meant “powerful” in Arabic) who were killing the Syrian people.

This made him really really upset so he went to his father and said, “Dad! Dad, can we take your plane and go to Syria to try to save the people from Fikke?”  

“Okay,” his dad said. “But just this once.”

“Thank you so much!” Omar said. “Let’s go!”

They went to bed early that night because the plan was to wake up at three in the morning to leave for Syria. Omar’s dad’s plane was named The Cross of the Swords. It was parked in a gigantic garage behind their house. Omar’s dad climbed into the cockpit and Omar strapped himself into the co-pilot’s seat.

Then Omar’s dad said, “Syria, here we go!”

They left Lebanon and went to Syria. The plane ride was very, very, very scary because people tried to shoot them and the engine almost got shot, but they had a safe landing.

“Let’s go see why Fikke is bad,” said Omar’s dad.

Omar said, “How do you know where they are?”

“I went to school with many of them. Most times when I hear about Syria, Fikke is shooting at the president of Syria’s home and trying to kill the president,” Omar’s dad said.

“Where is the president?” Omar asked.

“It’s two miles away from here, so we better take a break.” Omar’s dad said.

So Omar and Omar’s dad stopped to eat two bananas, one jar of cookies, milk, and sausages. Then they walked and finally they found the leader of Fikke. His name was Patrick. He had brown eyes and black hair. He wore army clothes and a machine gun across his chest. He had three small bombs in his pocket.

Omar felt scared but he spoke to Patrick anyway, “Why are you bombing all the buildings and killing the people?”

“They have too much money and they aren’t sharing it with anyone,” Patrick said in a grumpy voice.

“Ask them and maybe they’ll share. If they say no, go to the bank,” Omar said.

“Why should I? What if the banks say ‘no’?” Patrick yelled. “I’ll make you a deal. If the person at the bank says I can have money, I will fix all the buildings with my team. If he says ‘no’ I will kill you, too.”

Omar felt so scared. In his head, he thought, What if the guy at the bank says no? Then he’d die for nothing. He agreed to the deal because he didn’t think he had a choice. Then, Omar ran away.

Omar told his dad: “What if the person at the bank says no?” But his dad reassured him the person at the bank wouldn’t say no.

“I know this place,” his dad said. “I lived here until I was 11, and the people at the bank are very nice.”

“Okay, okay, I get it,” Omar said.

The next day Omar went to the bank and saw Patrick walk in.

He heard the person at the bank say, “Of course you can have money. You can have all the money here! People save their money here for people who don’t have money.”

Patrick took his money and found Omar. He told him he wouldn’t kill him. “I’m going to help rebuild all the buildings,” he said. “I’m going to throw my guns away and throw my bombs away and never do this again. I’ll tell the rest of my team to do that, too.”

With Patrick’s help, Fikke helped to rebuild all of the walls and buildings. They put their weapons in a big chest underground and buried it. Omar and his dad jumped back on their plane and flew home safely. He was happy to be home and back with his family

Moon Shadows

We amble on the sidewalks,

The crevices connecting our hearts.

The brilliant glow of the moon

Lighting our path to destiny.

We think we have it figured out,

Old and polished.

But we realize that we’re wrong

As we stumble blindly through the shadows of the moon

Submerged in blue.

Sometimes we fall asleep under the stars,

Because we are not ready to be ordinary.

We’re extraordinary.

As for the moment, at least.

Darling, we’re adventurers

And there’s definitely not anything wrong with that.

We’re ready to see the world,

So bring it on Planet Earth.

My First Year of Middle School

Jen

“Get up, Honey!!!” my mom calls from downstairs. Today is going to be my first day of Middle School. I should be excited. I bet even Vanessa Chadwick, who hates school (probably because of the homework), is excited. But, the thing is, I bet Vanessa Chadwick’s BFF isn’t leaving for New York for a whole year.

Julie, my best friend, has left for New York for the first year of middle school because of her dad’s job. Yeah, I know she’ll come back next year, but I feel that the first year of middle school is when we’ll need each other the most. And yet, that’s the year that she has to leave.

I don’t get up, so of course my Mom has to climb up the stairs and drag me out of bed. “C’mon, Jen, honey,” she says, stroking my plain brown hair. Nothing compared to her silky blonde hair. Luckily for my older sister, Kylie, she inherited it. Kylie and Mom look a lot a like. Pretty and perfect. I look like my Dad. Average.

“I know that Julie’s gone for the year, but hey –– at least she’s coming back! And you can always FaceTime or Skype!!! You know in my Yoga class they said you should always look at the positive side of things.”

I look at my Mom like she’s crazy. How can I look at the good side of this?! There is no good side?! I sit up in bed. There’s no use of trying to stay at home. My mom and dad are probably gonna drag me out of bed anyways.

I trudge out of bed and walk towards the bathroom to freshen up. I look at myself in the mirror as I brush my teeth. I think about Julie. Our personalities are completely different. She is extremely girly, like the mean girls in our school, Jessica, Cassidy, and Emma. But she isn’t mean like them. She is one of the best friends anyone could have. I am completely different. I’m on the girls soccer team and I absolutely detest anything girly. Except my Mom, Kylie, and Julie. But they’re not exactly things… they’re people. I get dressed and walk into the living room.

“Honey, you’re running late!!!” I hear my mom call from the kitchen. I grab a piece of toast and get onto the bus. I am not looking forward to the first day of school without Julie.

Julie

I can’t wait for the first day of school!!! I miss Jen, but hey, always think positive!!! I get on the bus.

“Hi!” a girl says to me. She has brown silky hair and she seems nice.

“Hi!” I respond back. “May I sit here?”

“Sure!!” she responds cheerfully.

“Hey, are you wearing mascara?” she asks.

“Yaa,” I reply. “Are you wearing lipstick?”

“Mmhmm,” she responds.

We talk and laugh the whole trip. And the best part is that she is in my class!!! Life is amazing!!!

Bringgg! I hear my cellphone ring. Jen is calling from Skype.

“Hi,” I say, pressing the Skype app.

“Hi, Julie!!!” she says. “How was school?”

“AMAZING!” I exclaim. I can’t wait to tell her everything!!! But she looks taken aback.

“Had fun without me?” she asks in a completely different tone –– one that she never spoke to me with.

“Uhhh,” I reply. What had she gotten into?!

“You know, I thought we were best friends!” she says.


“We are!!!” I say, holding up the friendship bracelet on my wrist.

“Ya, sure!!!” Julie says and throws her friendship bracelet into the garbage. And after that, she just disconnects. What did I do wrong?

Then it hit me: I am supposed to say that my first day of school was “horrible” and that “I really missed her.” I do really miss her, and I was gonna say that. That part is true. But she asked me how my first day was, and it was AMAZING! She couldn’t have expected me to lie!!! Or did she? Friendship can be so complicated!

Jen

She should say that she missed me and that her first day of school sucked! Okay, maybe my mom thinks I’m being unreasonable… but I’m not. It’s been a month since that crazy Skype fight and Julie is sending me weird texts like “Are you okay?” Ugh, she annoys me so much!!!

School seemed especially long today because of the math test. But hey! Tomorrow’s Halloween! I’m going to be zombie! Can’t wait!!! I bet Kylie’s going to be a black cat. Whatever, I’m happy because I’ve been invited to Drake’s party!!! He’s the most popular and cutest boy in the whole grade!!! I got invited! That’s a big thing!!! He invited me!!! No need for trick-or-treating this year!!!

Yay!!! Today’s Halloween!!! I’m about to leave for Drake’s party!!

“Honey,” Mom calls before I go, “are you sure you don’t want to dress into something cuter?”

“Nah,” I say and leave the house. I don’t care what she says now.

Julie

This is exhausting. This is stupid. Whatever. I’m having a great time at my school. And for Halloween I’m being a black cat!!! But I still feel that although Jen can be immature at times, she is an amazing friend –– my best friend.

I walk downstairs to the kitchen.

“Mom!” I call.

“Yes, honey!!!” She says while baking her amazing lasagna. It is Saturday. My mom never cooks on weekdays. Never has the time.

“When are we going back home to Minneapolis?” I ask.

“Winter break, honey!” she replies.

“Thanks,” I say.

“Why, honey?” my Mom asks.

“No reason,” I respond. But there is a reason… maybe this fight between me and Jen is stupid. Nevertheless, it’s still a fight. And if there’s a fight with my best friend, it needs to be resolved. Christmas is the best time to get it resolved.

Jen

Why does she have to come for winter break?! Ugh… Mom had to invite her for Christmas Dinner and now I have to buy her a present!!! But she is my best friend and always will be 

I go to the mall with my Mom. I hate the mall, but Julie loves it. I go into the store Claire’s. Julie loves that store. I walk inside. Sooo girly, sooo Julie. Inside the store are flower hairbands, hair chalk, earrings, make-up bags, make-up, and more. And then something catches my eye –– a friendship necklace. Perfect.

Julie

I walk into Nike. Jen really wants new shoes. Her old ones are worn out and dirty. I look and look and then I find the perfect ones. Blue sleek ones. The latest model. Air design. She’ll love this. Christmas has magic in the air. Not because of the presents. It just has magic in the air. It’s the best time for us to become besties. Forever.

Jen

Christmas time is here!!! And so is Julie!!! Well, I mean, she’s not here yet, but –– ding dong! The doorbell rings. She’s here. Yay!!! This time I really mean it. Yay!!! My mom opens the door.

“Hi guys!!!” she says. I sit on the couch. Then I see Julie in the living room.

“Hey,” I say.

“Hey,” she replies.

We sit at the table and have Christmas dinner. We say our prayers.

After our dinner we go to the living room to open the presents. The grownups are all laughing. I hand my present to Julie.

“Sorry,” I say as I had her my present.

“It’s okay,” she says as she hands me hers. True friendship never ends.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  

How Burritos Came To Be

My name is Jerry and I’m a giant. I live in The Forests, which is  a group of (try and guess!) forests that protect different species of fairy. One day, I was visiting my friend Luna in The Pixie Forests, when suddenly I came upon a very interesting cottage that was big enough for me to fit. The door was open and there was smoke coming from the chimney. I decided to have a look. I went inside and found something beautiful! It looked as though it was made of gold and had tiny black speckles on it. I wanted to touch it! I needed to have it! I bent down to touch it, and alarms started to go off! A head with a crown fell from the chimney.

I know, you’re thinking, “ Eww, a head with no body!” But it wasn’t gross. It was the king of the Pixies, King Headless, which is kind of ironic. He had once been a Pixie but lost his body in a battle. He rolled on to his round chin and looked at me with red eyes. (He was a Pixie. They do these things.)

“How dare you try and disturb my marvelous taco shells! You may not touch my taco shells! You may not eat my taco shells! You may not even look at them! Now, shoo! Begone with you!”

I bowed down to the king and got out of there as quickly as I could. When I got to Luna’s yard (I couldn’t fit in her house) I sat down and told her the story.

When I was finished, Luna said, “We can make our own taco shells! We just need to find out what ingredients we need.”

“That’s a bit of a problem since the King won’t let me go back to the cottage.”

“Well, everything we make is made with flour, so there must be some in these.”

I nodded. Luna was smart in these ways.

“What color were the shells?”

“They were a golden shade.”

“Well, I’ll bring all of the yellow plants I grow in my garden, and we’ll see what I can ground into powder.” She came back with a banana, corn, and a pear. “I’ll make six of each using these.”

An hour later, the batch made with banana was ready. It looked flat, nothing like the shells I saw at the cottage. When I sampled it, boy, was it awful! It was as though a unicorn had pooped on them. Believe me, that stuff is memorable, in all the wrong ways! After gargling for five minutes or so, we waited for the next group. Frankly, that wasn’t any better!

“What am I going to do?” I moaned.

“Quit worrying. It’s just food! Geez!”

Easy for her to say! Did she see them? No. Was she attacked by a weird headless dude in a cape and crown? No. Did she feel pulled into the smell of the shells? I rest my case!

“Well, little miss —” I didn’t get the chance to finish my insult because the final six shells were ready. We took them out and were going to sample it, but it was already 20 o’clock, so we decided to save them for (a disgusting) breakfast. Luna invited me to sleep in the backyard, which was the most comfortable yard I had slept in. Grass cutting season must have been moved back a few months! While I was sleeping, I had a dream about the marvelous tacos. They were dancing around me and singing elvish songs.

I was reaching toward one, when they started to bang on each other and shout, “Jerry! Jerry, wake up!”

I did their bidding and woke up to the sound of Luna banging on a frying pan and shouting my name.

“Rise and shine, Sleeping Beauty! We have an emergency here!”

“Ah, Eho, what?”

“My cousin, Francesco Ferdinando is coming, and we have nothing to serve him!”

“You want us to cook something? You saw how badly those tacos worked out!”

“Well, if we serve those to him, he could fix them. He is a farmer, food-seller, and sampler by trade! He’ll have something to fix them.”

Just then, the braying of a donkey interrupted my thoughts drifting back to dancing tacos. Near the horizon, a man was riding a donkey. He was wearing a sombrero and had a mustache even I was jealous of! He shouted something in what sounded like gibberish, with a bunch of “r’s”. To my surprise, Luna answered back.

“You speak Gibberish? I have got to introduce you to the Fuzzball colony elders!”

“It’s Spanish, idiot!” answered an angry Luna with a fake smile.  

Must be some alien language. I ran behind the house, stuck my finger in the window, and was just about to say, “Hi!” when the donkey kicked its legs backward. Apparently, Francesco was carrying his food in baskets attached to his saddle. Everything was flying up!

MI ALIMENTO!!” Francesco shouted in Gibberish.

Luna got so nervous that she cast a slo-mo spell! I dived to save the food, but then realized I forgot to put the tray down! Too late now. I was already diving head first to the ground. Luna snapped her fingers and everything went back to normal time. I fell to the ground and so did the food, causing a five-second earthquake. I’ve got to cut back on weight! Luckily, when the food fell, it fell into the taco shells.

“Here, have your things back!” I said, holding out the tray.

He shook his head and muttered something to Luna.

She told me, “He wants to try his food with the taco shells.”

Francesco formed the taco to hold in the ingredients. He took one bite and instantly smiled, danced around, and sang Gibberish songs!

“He likes it!” laughed Luna.

“That is the one thing you don’t need to translate for me.”  I smiled. “Why don’t we make this official? Like, think of a name for this treat?!” I thought aloud.

Luna liked the idea, and asked Francesco if he agreed.“He likes the idea but wants to name it after his donkey. After all, he was the one that caused the food to fly!” translated Luna.

“What’s the mule’s name?”

“Burrito.”

And that’s how burritos came to be!

Prince Almando

When he reached sixteen, Prince Almando refused to be treated like a child, unlike his siblings, Williant, Sarafina, and Gretona.

The day after his birthday, instead of leaving his pajamas on, he put on his royal robe of red silk. He sat down straight like a king. My, he thought, my sisters and brother look so young compared to me in their silk pajamas.

Gretona sat on Father’s lap. Williant was eleven, and allowed Mother’s arm to be around him. And Serafina was almost ten and still cuddled with her china doll. Almando was so deep in thought that he spilled his porridge on his lap, leaving a gray, gooey stain.

“Almando, my dear, dear boy,” Maid Sylvia cried. “How many times do we have to talk about table manners!?”

“I am not a child,” Almando declared. “I would like to no longer be called ‘my dear boy.’”

“Almando,” his father said sternly, adjusting Gretona on his knee. “Please go change.”

Almando stood up politely and took steps one at a time like a gentlemen. In his room he slid on his horseback riding uniform, blue with gold trimming. Then, he quietly walked down the stairs.

“There’s a nice mud pit outside from that rain,” the children’s ‘playmate’ said, “you just yank on those ol’ mud bathin’ suits and you’ be ready to go.”

“I will not be prancing around with that diaper on!” Almando declared.

“Almando,” Lilika, the Queen, said. “They are not diapers. And I think it was very generous of Harry to offer to take you out. If you continue to have this behavior you will go upstairs.

Almando scowled at his mother. “Ma’am…”

“Almando!” the King thundered, “She is your mother! I appreciate your politeness but it is not needed!”

Angrily, Almando got up. “I’m going horseback riding.”

Two hours later, Almando’s uniform was torn and he was bleeding. The royal horse was running around in circles trying to get the too-small bridle out of his mouth. Almando pulled himself to his feet and stumbled to the castle.

After escaping his father’s scolding, Almando went up to the boys’ room, which used to be a nursery before he was sixteen. Williant sat on his bed, smushing the blue comforter.

“Still trying to be a man?” he asked, sounding almost pitiful. “You’re brave, Almando.”

Pondering the meaning of his little brother’s words, Almando strolled to the bathroom in a would-be casual way, as if he hadn’t been bleeding. Hoping not be caught by a maid, he crept into the crystal bathroom. Finding it empty of people, he wrapped bandages around his bleeding fingers.

He walked back downstairs, wanting to read one of his father’s books just to prove that he could. Almando read quickly, mostly to get to the good part: the end. It was some book about rules and courtesies, and it was very boring. Almando’s father walked in and sat down on the couch next to him. Almando’s father pointed to rule number two hundred and one.

“What does this mean?” his father asked.

“When one reaches the age of eighteen years he will be considered a grown man and shall be treated like one,” Almando read aloud. He frowned. The king smiled wisely.

“Almando, I’ve been meaning to talk to you. You are sixteen. I know this will ruffle your feathers, but you are still a child. Manhood will come, Almando, manhood will come.”

He wrapped his arm around Almando’s shoulders, and, Almando, even though he was sixteen, leaned his head on his father’s shoulder.

The Life Cycle

Chapter  1 : Sisters

Mia was brushing her hair and she just remembered that her friend Matilda was coming over for a playdate. They were best friends. When Matilda arrived, they took turns braiding eachother’s hair. Since they both had the same length hair, they saw what their hair could do, like make scarves out of their hair, and they saw how many times they could wrap their hair around their arm, which was about a thousand.

Matilda had blonde hair and Mia had long dark brown hair. They both had long straight hair to their knees, which was about five feet. They both loved their hair because they didn’t want real scarves, but the only thing that drove them nuts was their mother telling them, “Cut your hair! Cut your hair!” She wanted them to cut it because it was really hard to wash.

They were like, “No! Imagine you don’t need to buy me a scarf! And I’ll brush it more often!”

Since they went to the same school, they spoke about what they should play the next day at school. They thought about maybe playing hide and seek, or tag or, as Mia suggested, “Maybe let’s play cops and robbers!”

Matilda also suggested, “We could also play hide and seek after cops and robbers!” Normally, nobody really asked if they could play with them. Once a month, someone would ask. They actually liked it, just the two of them.

They talked about doing the butterfly one because she thought that they would fight a lot, like very often.

“That’s very sad. I wish we could get a way to get your mom to agree,”  Matilda hoped. “After that we will.”

“Oh, yeah. I think so too. Let’s think of a way to convince my mom to get me a younger sister.”

They started a whole other conversation on how they could get Mia’s mom, named Lauren, to get Mia to have another sister. Mia convinced her why she wanted another sister. Mia told her that why she wanted another sister was because she was a little lonely in playing and her mother used to get very annoyed, because she didn’t have any company.

Matilda explained that she knew how Mia felt. “I know because I’m an only child, and I also want a little sister.”

“We have a mission!”  Mia and Matilda said.

“First, let’s convince your mom,” explained Matilda.

“After that, the next time we have a playdate, I’ll come to your house and we’ll convince your mom!” said Mia. After that they started a whole new conversation, again, on how they were going to conquer their moms. They were sitting on the couch in Mia’s room.

They started their mission that day. They said, “Maybe we could convince my mom by saying, if you get me a little sister, I could start a job and earn a thousand dollars for you.” So they tried that.

So when Mia’s mom was working, they snuck up on her and scared her by saying, “Mom!” in a funky kind of voice tone.

And after that their mom was like, “Hey, you guys! You scared the bejeezus out of me!” She was texting Mia’s dad.

After that, Mia asked, “If you let me have a little sister, I’ll get a job and you could have a thousand dollars!”

And after that Mia’s mom was like, “I don’t need that much money. I’m sorry. And why do you even need someone to fight with?”

Mia thought, Well, that didn’t work. She felt disappointed that it didn’t work, because they weren’t very rich anyway. It was the first time she’d asked her mom for a sister. She felt disappointed and she stomped back to her room with Matilda and started thinking of another plan. She looked in one of her books of the chronicles of How To Convince Your Mom To Get A Little Sister. She did that because she had a lot of books and she knew she could find one book like that. Mia loved the color purple, so her bed was purple. Her walls were purple. The ceiling was purple. The floor color was purple. Everything was purple. Her two bookshelves were also purple.

Mia and Matilda sat on Mia’s bed to think of another little idea to convince Mia’s mom to get Mia a little sister.

“What about if we sneak up on my mom again but only this time, a little less money,” Mia suggested.

Matilda said, “That’s a great idea! Let’s try it.”

So they snuck up on Mia’s mom who was doing work; she worked from home but she used to work at work. Mia’s mom was a doctor.

After that when they snuck up on her they told her, “Mom,” in a friendly tone of voice but Mia’s mom didn’t get startled like last time.

“Oh hi guys, what do you want?” Mia’s mom asked.

“We just want to ask you a question. If you give me a little sister, after that I could get a job and earn you forty dollars.”

And after that Mia’s mom told them, “Yes, but I’m not going to give you a younger sister.”

After that Mia felt the same way as before, and told Matilda, “After this I’m not going to get a job!”

They went back to their bed. “Maybe we could talk to her about how we’re feeling!”

Matilda suggested, “I really think we should tell her because she does not know why we keep asking her and she is probably getting really annoyed because we’ve been doing this for quite a while now.” She was feeling a little nervous.

After that Mia and Matilda walked over to Mia’s mom in her chair near her desk. Mia said, “Mom, the reason why I really want a sister is because I don’t really have any company. You sometimes have work when I want to play, and I don’t like doing homework. And I just feel a little lonely. So can you please get me a little sister as soon as it’s possible?”

Mia’s mom said, “But I thought you guys would fight!”

“Maybe once in awhile, but not often,” said Mia.

After that Mia’s mom told them, “Okay. As soon as possible, I’ll get you one. As long as you don’t ask me so often.”

Nine months later, she got the sister from her mother! Mia’s little sister was named Monsoon. She had frizzy curly hair, it was dark brown to her neck. And now Mia felt so special to have a younger sister.

Mia said, “Yay!”

Later in the afternoon, Mia started playing with Monsoon. Mia taught Monsoon to play chess at such a young age. Monsoon became very good at it by the age of one. Monsoon was learning how to talk from Mia. Mia and Monsoon never fought. Mia’s mom was impressed by how much Mia taught Monsoon.

After that Mia left for a playdate with Matilda, but only this time, it was at Matilda’s house. Matilda was excited to try and get herself a younger sister as well. When Mia got there, Mia was like, “Are you ready to get a younger sister?”

After that Matilda said, “Yeah, I’m very ready! I’ve been waiting for it all week long! And three days more!” in an excited tone. So after that, Matilda said that she loved the color orange. The walls were orange, the ceiling was orange, the floor was orange and her bookshelves were orange. And her bed was orange.

Matilda told Mia why her mom didn’t want her to have a little sister. It was because Matilda’s mom, named Isabella, thought it would be too hard to brush both of their long hair. Both Mia’s and Matilda’s moms had long hair and younger sisters and their mom used to go bonkers brushing their hair.

Mia and Matilda sat on Matilda’s orange bed. It was very smooth, silky and soft.

“If you give me a sister, after that I can make extra special stuff for Thanksgiving, mother’s day, and father’s day for you and Dad and all family members, like presents, pop-up cards, and food, and awesome drinks.”

Matilda’s mom said, “Only if you do all of that every holiday, I’ll get you a sister.”

“I promise I will,” said Matilda. She was excited to have a new sister.

Ten days later, Matilda got her sister. Her name was Malla. Both Matilda and Malla had blue eyes and both of them had blonde hair. Malla had hair to the neck. Matilda felt very joyful that she had a younger sister. Matilda taught Malla how to play checkers at such a young age, at the age of one.

After that Mia came to Matilda’s house and asked how the baby was going. Mia asked, “What did you teach your little sister?”

Mia and Matilda sat on Matilda’s orange bed. And Matilda said, “While I was teaching Malla how to play checkers, she wouldn’t listen. I need her to listen to learn. The reason why I want her to listen is because she might feel more special next year at school.”

“Same with me,” Mia said.

“I feel kind of disappointed in her when she doesn’t listen,” said Matilda.

Since Mia and Matilda’s little sisters knew how to talk, they could talk to them and whenever it came to conversation, they would definitely listen. So they walked over to Malla and said, “If you will listen, maybe I could make you something yummy once a week, like a salad with grapes, tomatoes, cucumbers, and lettuce.”

Malla was like, “Okay. As long as you do that.” She just stopped playing checkers because of the yummy food.

It was Tuesday and the next day was Wednesday. Matilda said just for a test, “If you stand up on your feet for a minute, after that I could give you one of my yummy cookies.”

Malla said,“Ooh! Okay, I’ll stand up on my two feet for a minute. Okay?”

“Well, you better promise!”

So she stood up on her two feet for a minute.

The next day, the first thing in the morning, Matilda made a salad for Malla. After that Matilda said to Malla, “You’ve got to listen to me, and Mom, and Dad when we tell you to do things or stuff. Because it makes us feel disappointed and upset when you don’t listen to us. I want you to listen because if  you work hard you could feel special next year in school if you listen to us. You might even get the highest grades.”

Malla said, “I will listen to you, Mom, and Dad from now on.” After the conversation, she hugged her older sister.

Ten days later, Matilda had another playdate with Mia again. And they sat on Mia’s purple bed and Matilda asked, “How’s your younger sister doing?”

“Again, she’s not listening to me when I teach her how to play chess or other things,” Mia said to Matilda, “I feel upset.”

Matilda said, “That’s terrible! In what way do you think I could help you?”

Mia said, “If you could find a way how to help me in getting my little sister to listen, would be a great help. I don’t want to talk to her because she won’t listen, because she is not listening.”

“That’s a good reason,” said Matilda.

“Thanks,” said Mia.

“What else can we do?” said Matilda.

Since Mia’s cousin was also there, they asked, “How do you think we could get Monsoon to listen?” Mia’s cousin was a girl and her name was Jessica.

Jessica said, “Maybe you should just talk to her!”

Mia said, “But I don’t want to, because she won’t listen!”

“After that maybe you could draw her a picture and maybe she could figure out what it meant, or write her a message or you could write her a story on how to listen to your family,” said Jessica.

“Maybe I’ll go with the book on how to listen to your family members,” said Mia and Matilda. Mia felt very joyful.

So after that Mia and Matilda wrote a story on how to listen to your family members. Matilda was the illustrator; Mia was the writer. Mia wrote first. After that, depending on what Mia wrote, Matilda read Mia’s writing. After that depending on what she wrote, she drew the pictures. The story told little kids how to behave themselves and listen to their older siblings. It said, if your family members told you something, you should respond to them, you shouldn’t just ignore them.

So they gave the story to Monsoon and Monsoon read it. Before Monsoon read it, they said it was by the best writer in the world. They were trying to trick her. Since they didn’t know who that was, they just said that.

After that Monsoon said, “I thought this was going to be by you!” And they were like, “Oh, no no no! It’s by the best writer in the world. But you better take notes.”

She read it and she was like, “Why do I have to take notes?”

“Because this is an important book. We read it before you and we know the truth,” said Mia.

Monsoon was like, “All right. I’ll read it with notes. But do I need to?”

Mia was like, “Yes, you need to. Now just sit on the couch and read it. Bye bye.”

So they went upstairs to Mia’s room and they waited there for five minutes. After that, they peeked and they were like, “She’s not done? It was a very short book!” After that they went upstairs again and waited for five minutes and peeked and said, “She’s not done?” After that they went upstairs for another five minutes and said, “Oh, finally, she’s done!” And after that Mia and Matilda went downstairs and asked, “Can we see your notes?”

“I have the notes in my head, since I don’t know how to write,” said Monsoon.

“Can you explain them to us?” asked Mia and Matilda at the same time.

After that Monsoon was like, “Alright!” Monsoon said that it was all about listening to your family members or whoever, except for strangers. Of course. She was feeling kind of weird because she didn’t realize that she was not listening and stuff. “But I am already listening,” said Monsoon.  

“You think you are, but you’re not,” said Mia.

“Remember chess?” said Mia.

“When did we play chess?” asked Monsoon.

“Well, you were to busy playing with new toy Mom got you,” said Mia.             

“Well I didn’t know you were teaching me how to play chess,” said Monsoon.

“Oh!” said Mia, “I thought you were paying attention and weren’t really doing it.”

Matilda said, “But why? You should listen to people when they’re telling you to do something, even though you’re paying so much attention to your little opening-up dollhouse.”

“That is the truth,” said Mia, feeling kind of disappointed and depressed.

“Well, I was kind of paying attention but when you told me to do something, I think I was looking at something else, so…” said Monsoon.

“But still, you weren’t listening,” said Mia and Matilda at the same time again.

“Now I understand,” said Monsoon. “I will listen.”

“You better,” said Mia.

“I will,” said Monsoon.

The next day at school, somebody asked if they could play with them. But normally that happened only once a month. They were in the same class as her. It was her birthday so she really wanted to play with them. Her name was Andrea.

Andrea asked if she could play with Mia and Matilda because it was her birthday.

“How old are you turning?” asked Matilda.

“Well, I’m turning eight,” said Andrea.

“All right, you can play with us,” they said, because they were also turning eight. Mia was turning eight five days later and Matilda was turning eight ten days later.

They played hide and seek. After that they played tag, and after that they tried playing both of them combined, and after that they played charades. And after that, one wanted to play charades again, another wanted to play hide and seek, and another wanted to play tag. So what they did was they said, “Eenie meenie miney moe,” and it landed on Andrea. And Andrea was voting for hide and seek, but Mia wanted to play charades. So they played hide and seek first, charades second, and tag last.

Andrea was really funny and pretty nice. She normally played with somebody else named Sophia. And whenever Sophia didn’t play with Andrea, she played with Elizabeth. And whenever Elizabeth didn’t play with Sophia, she played with Andrea. And whenever Andrea didn’t play with Sophia, she played with Elizabeth.

When Andrea wasn’t playing with Sophia, Sophia didn’t want to play with Elizabeth because she got bored just playing with her when Andrea wasn’t there. Anyway, Elizabeth wasn’t as very funny as Andrea. Sophia wanted another friend to play with.

But she was always very quiet. She never used to talk. She wanted to get over her shyness, but normally her mother wasn’t there and normally her mother used to introduce her to friends.

So she made a cardboard picture of one of the girls that she saw in her school and she tried talking and saying her name, but she couldn’t, even to the cardboard. She was like, “Oh, man!” She felt kind of weird, because she can’t even talk to a cardboard person that she made!

After that she tried doing it with her cousin, named Kira. Kira was 17. She loved beanie boos. She was very smart and pretty and she liked helping people and she had a beanie boo of happiness.

Sophia told her what had been happening in school and what she needed help with and asked if she could practice on her. Kira said, “Of course you could practice on me! I just have to think of a new name.”

Kira and Sophia went into Sophia’s room. Sophia loved the color blue, light blue. The ceiling was light blue, the walls were light blue, the door was light blue, the floor was light blue, her bed was light blue. Everything was light blue.

So after that Kira stood up and said, “Hello, my name is Melissa.” And after that Kira said, “What’s your name?”

“Hi Melissa, my name is Sophia.” She felt pretty excited that she did it.

Kira said, “What’s your favorite thing to do?”

“My favorite thing to do is… to just sit on the couch and pretend to be bold,” said Sophia. “What’s your favorite thing to do?”

“My favorite thing to do is draw,” said Kira, who was pretending to be Melissa.

Sophia was a little bit shy to start the conversation. She wouldn’t say her name first.

The next day, Sophia went to school and asked two girls named Melissa and another girl named Sophia as well, so there were two Sophia’s and one Melissa.

“Can I play with you?” asked Sophia number 1.

Sophia and Melissa said, “All right!”

“What’s your name?” asked Sophia and Melissa.

“My name is Sophia. What’s your name?” asked Sophia to Sophia.

“My name is Sophia,” said Sophia.

“What’s your name?

“My name is Melissa!” said Melissa.

Five days later, Mia and Matilda saw Sophia playing with Melissa and Sophia number 2. Sophia #1 was Sophia S. and Sophia #2 was Sophia B.

Mia and Matilda walked over to them and asked if they could play. They were playing a game of hide and seek, so after that they asked someone who was seeking so they wouldn’t give it away.

Melissa was the one who was seeking so Melissa shouted, “Pause game!” and everybody ran to Melissa, who was playing hide and seek with them. And Melissa said, “Mia and Matilda and Andrea want to play with us.”

“All right,” said Sophia B.

“What do you want to do? asked Melissa and Sophia S. and Sophia B.

Mia said, “I want to play hide and seek because we were going to play Andrea’s idea, because she’s also the birthday girl.”

They played hide and seek for another five minutes. But right after they were done with hide and seek, recess was over. Andrea really also wanted to play dodgeball. But they didn’t have the money to buy the net.

 

Chapter 2 : Lemonade

The next day at school, they talked about how to get a net, but after that Mia said, “Why don’t we make a lemonade stand?” The net cost 50 dollars.

Andrea got the lemonade, since Mia had a little table she brought her table, Sophia S. brought the lime, Sophia B. brought the lemon, and Melissa brought the sugar and water to make it. Matilda knew how to cook, so she made chocolate chip cookies for whoever had lemonade.

It was Sunday afternoon when they all met at Central Park to serve the lemonade and cookies. Mia and Matilda’s sisters were there. Sophia B.’s cousin was there. The lemonade cost one dollar and the cookies also cost a dollar, so whoever bought any of those would pay one dollar or two.

Before they started, they had to set up everything. So they had the table and they put chairs around it for the kids to sit in. And they put the lemonade bottle onto the right and the lime next to it, the lemon next to the lime, the sugar next to the lemon and in front of the lemon the cookies. And next to the cookies, the water. And next to the water, the cups. It was quite sunny, a little bit breezy, 82 degrees and they were at the edge of Central Park. And whenever people came by, they said, “Lemonade! And cookies! One dollar each!”

Everybody who passed by got lemonade. And before anybody got some, they drank some. And after they got to their third customer, they checked on their sisters and they weren’t there. So everyone went on a sister hunt for the sisters, Malla and Monsoon.

Mia and Matilda felt weird because their sisters never really went anywhere. They felt very scared. And they had to tell their parents, since they knew they had their own phones, they called their mothers and fathers.

“Our sisters are gone!” said Mia and Matilda in a very scared tone of voice.

Everybody helped to find them. They looked for an hour, and after that for another hour inside Central Park, outside Central Park, and in New York City, but they weren’t there! They felt super duper nervous that somebody took them, because they didn’t look in houses.

They didn’t look in any houses because if somebody was doing something, they would have disturbed them. They alerted the police. Somebody must have taken their little sisters!

Mia and Matilda and Sophia B. and Sophia S. and Melissa and Andrea took a plane to South America to go and see if their little sisters were there. They looked in Brazil and then, they looked all over South America. After that they went back to North America, after that they looked all around North America. After that they went to Africa and looked all around Africa, in Uganda they found their little sisters!

A robber named Uganda went to Uganda for the little sisters. He thought they were dolls, and he was on a trip, so he took them home. He was pretending that he thought that.

The police were like, “Why did you steal their little sisters?”

“Because I thought they were dolls!” said the robber named Uganda. Malla and Monsoon said to their older sisters, “If that ever happens again, I will definitely shout help!”

Uganda ran away for the rest of his life and never robbed anybody ever again because he knew what would happen if he did, go to jail. But he anyway went to jail for two years before he ran away.

They went back home to finish their lemonade stand. The search had taken two weeks because they had to search everywhere. They left their sisters home, just in case anything happened. And while they were gone, people gave them money and took the lemonade and cookies. They did all the stuff by themselves. For two weeks! And after that once they got back from Uganda, they saw how much money they got. They got $172! So they spent 50 dollars on the net, and Isabelle, Matilda’s mom, got the net for Andrea. And she also spent two dollars for the ball. After that they shared the money and gave $20 to each of them.

Next year, in seventh grade, they played dodgeball at recess with the net and the ball. Mia, Matilda, Sophia S., Sophia B., Andrea, and Melissa had played dodgeball finally in seventh grade. After that, Melissa wanted a sleepover with all her friends at her house. So, once she got home, she sat on the bed and called each one of her friends that she wanted to have over. She asked them to come over for a desperate, important meeting. So after that, in five minutes they were all there, and Melissa said, “How am I going to convince my mom to let me have a sleepover?”

“How?” Mia asked.

“Maybe if we do all her chores she may let us have a sleepover.”

“That’s a great idea,” said Nicola. That was Melissa’s new friend. She met her last month. Melissa also wanted to have a sleepover with her.

So, they tried doing the chore idea. They finished all of Melissa’s mom’s chores. They had to clean the bathtub, set the table for dinner, and if their mom agreed, put out beds.

“Well… we’ve done all our chores!” said Melissa and her friends, adding Nicola. They checked all the chores. It was all done.

They had so much time left that they thought they’d watch a movie. They all had a vote: Inside Out and Descendants.

“I hate Descendants! I want to watch the great and awesome Inside Out,” said everyone. So they watched Inside Out. So they watched, watched, watched until it was eight p.m. Thankfully, Melissa’s mom came back at nine p.m.

So they watched and watched and watched until Melissa’s mom got back from work. So after that Melissa’s mom said, “Was this what you were doing?”

“No no, Mom. We want a sleepover.”

“Well, what have you done to earn it?”

“Well, I’ll weird. Oooh, I get it. Five hours of TV. Yay! Let’s go.”

They went to watch TV for five hours in Melissa’s mom’s room. They watched it silently other than once in awhile, they would pause and retell an entire movie. They were feeling quite happy because they knew how Melissa’s mom was. She would say “okay” to almost anything. For three hours they watched Inside Out and after that the rest of the two hours they watched Descendants even though they all hated it.

“Okay, it’s time to go to Mom,” said Melissa.

Melissa’s mom was in the kitchen cooking dinner. Everyone was surprised because they thought Melissa’s mom would be on the couch thinking. So after that Melissa and her friends walked up to Melissa’s mom and asked her, “So what is your answer?”

“Okay, as long as you go to bed on time.”

“Okay, I will, I will, Mom.”

“Now come on. Eat your dinner.”

“But what is for dinner?” asked Melissa.

“Your favorite. Pesto pasta,” said Melissa’s mom.

“YAY,” cried Melissa.

After five minutes, everyone was ready to eat dinner.

Everyone liked it so much that they took around two or three helpings.

After that everyone but Melissa ran back home because they needed to get their pajamas and toothbrush and five minutes later they were all ready for the sleepover with all their stuff.

But Mia was really scared to sleep the night because it was so hard for her to wake up the next day because she always gets the worst nightmares. But that’s why she brought her teddy bear and all her other stuffed animals to protect her and took off her prettiest earrings that she wore and let out her hair and puffed her cushion up with it when it was time for the sleepover. But that was like three hours away. So, all she did was watch TV for three hours with the girls. And after that that’s when the terror of the sleepover happened. And also when Mia started getting terrified by the sleepover and sleeping. But she did her normal routine, which was take her fanciest earrings off, let out her hair from her braid, and puff up the pillow with it and go to sleep with a terrible nightmare and thought it would come alive!!! But this time she thought of a plan to not think about it. YAY! But it was good that she had THREE hours until the sleepover started.  

“PHEW!” Mia said in a relieved tone of voice.

She hoped no one heard her. Meanwhile, at Mia’s house, everyone, literally everyone, was so worried that she was gonna get the creeps. “She’s gonna get a nightmare. She’s not gonna wake up! Noooo!!!” they all shouted.

“But if we get there early we could wake her up!” said Simona, Mia’s favorite cousin.

“Ohhh,” everyone said with a grin.

Meanwhile at Melissa’s house, after the last three hours, everyone went to sleep and still Mia did her normal routine and went to sleep.

Unfortunately, she was at the top bunk and whenever she was at the top bunk at a sleepover, more of those bad dreams came to her head. But anyway, she had her big plan, which turned out to be a little plan. And now she went to sleep with all her bad dreams.

 

To be continued…

Mom’s Story Book

Hampton the Hamster

Once there was a hamster named Hampton. He wanted to leave home to go to the fair. He went to the fair, where he saw a movie theater and decided to watch a Star Wars movie. Then he saw an ice cream machine and felt tired. He went home on a magical pony that farted rainbows and feel asleep on his magic carpet. The end.

 

The Gnome.

The gnome was a happy fellow guarding gardens and watering plants. He wore red pants and a navy blue shirt. His eyes changed color and he had a long red hat that was shaped like a street cone. The gnome was short, about the size of a pen, and was a medium weight. He laughed and cried until the day he died. The gnome had a magical life in the garden of heaven’s light.

 

I Need to Go to the Bathroom!

I was in class and I needed to go to the bathroom. So I went to the bathroom and I turned on the light but then… There, standing in the dim light of the light bulb was the Ultimate Toilet Plunger, dun dun dun! The toilet plunger splashed dirty water and wiped toilet paper at me, but I outsmarted the plunger by bribing him to follow the toilet paper. Finally, I went to the bathroom. THE END.

 

Yoda Goes Rocker Mode

A Long Time Ago In A Galaxy Far Far Away… One day, when Yoda was in the temple meditating, he heard a voice say, “Yoda.”  

“Wha…” said Yoda. “Dreaming I must be.”

“Yoda,” the voice said again.

“Dreaming I am not,” said Yoda.

“Yoda, be a rocker.”

“Be a rocker I will,” said Yoda. So he got up from his chakra chair and set out on his journey. Finally, Yoda found a poster that said “Green Tall Guys,” but he thought he was too short. He tried to get in anyway, and said “Join I must,” in rocker mode.

The guys said, “You are too short.”

Then Yoda went ninja Jedi style on the dudes and they said, “Fine, you can join. But first I need to put some stuff on you.” So, till this day, Yoda looks like a green monster with headphones and sunglasses. His hair is the same and he plays drums on his high chair. The end, or, as Yoda would say, the end is now.

 

John Cena Prank Call

One day, John Cena wanted to do a prank call, but he couldn’t decide who to call. He made a list:

  • Luke Skywalker
  • Marine supporter

Two hours later after deciding, John Cena called Luke Skywalker. Beep beep beep.

“Hello, who is this?” Luke said.

“No, Luke, you should know,” said John Cena.

“Are you my mom?” said Luke.

“No, Luke, I am JOHN CENA,” said John Cena.

“NOOO!!!” moaned Luke, for about three hours.

“Well, time for my next prank,” said John Cena. So he called a marine supporter. BEEP BEEP BEEP.

“Hello, who is this?” said the supporter.

“Is this a marine supporter?” said John Cena.

“Yes, who is this?” said the supporter.

“A former marine needs your help and his name is JOHN CENA,” said John Cena.

“What the @#$^?” said the supporter. After the prank calls, John Cena felt good and fell asleep, but not before thinking about what he did. The end.

 

Baby Karate

Once upon a time, there was a child named Jeff, who was two years old and lived in Arizona in a mansion with his mom and dad. His dad and mom went out for dinner and they put an untrained babysitter with him. This babysitter was named Alison. She forgot to bring diapers, so she put little Jeff to sleep and plopped onto  the couch to watch TV. She saw Jeff on a little router. Jeff really, really needed to go to the bathroom, but he didn’t have a diaper.

There is one thing you didn’t know about Jeff: he had ninja moves. So, he flipped out of his bed, but on his way out he saw Mr. Teddy. Mr. Teddy was his very, very freaky teddy bear that was like the Five Nights at Freddy’s guy. He had to go through a lot of fighting, backflips, and rattle-throwing until, finally, to finish Mr. Teddy off, he took the block of wisdom from the mixed block box and struck him down right in the button.

Then, Jeff backflipped into the bathroom, closed the door, and went potty. The journey back to the crib was harsh. It was filled with Mr. Teddy’s babies. They had metal teeth and sharp claws. So, same thing all over again: backflips, hi-ya! Karate chops, hi-ya! Rattle-throwing, and finally, the Block of Building Steps. So, he took out every single one, until there were none left, and once he did that, he realized that he had one extra rattle. He knew what that meant – he had a magical wish from his rattle. He wished to be back in his crib. Then, finally, he got in his crib, but Alison called, “Jeff! Come down!”

Jeff was like, “NOOO!”

The same thing happened. Little Teddy’s babies turned into more Little Teddy’s babies, which meant that he had to make a new block to defeat the little teddies. After he did so, Alison said, “Jeff, I actually don’t need you go to bed.”

“Are you kidding me??” said Jeff.

THE END.

The Fire Prince

“Ohh no you don’t,” Kai argued. “I’m not doing that! You know that Elder John told us to only go in in case of an emergency.”

I gave him the Look. “This is an emergency! The Black Knights are attacking!!!” I whisper-yelled, “Go, go, go, hurry they’re coming, go!!”

“Okay, okay!” he said he climbed up the side of the rock wall and jumped down.

I followed. We ran as fast as we could through all of the shrubbery and trees; we had to get the the other side of the forest as fast as we could. We’re the king’s messengers; that means that when something bad happens, we have to get to the king’s castle as fast as possible to tell the king that his kingdom is under attack. Each village has a boy and a girl messenger. They have to be fast, and they have to be orphans, so they have to be from an orphanage. They have to have a good sense of direction, they need to be smart, athletic, sensible, and have to be a good team.

We had been running through the forest for almost ten minutes and I was starting to get cramps so we came to a stop at a small spring. We put down our stuff. We decided to make camp there, it was about two miles from the village where we lived. It’s called the village of Dragon Burrow. It got its name for all of its dragon nests.

I have an all-elemental dragon that was just born a couple months ago. Kai has a fire-water type dragon that is just a year old. It has already been trained by Elder John. The only reason why his is trained and mine is not is because dragons don’t open their eyes until they are exactly one year old and they won’t be able to understand you if they can’t even see you.

We started a fire and put some stones around it. We got out the food, only enough food for tonight, the breakfast, the next night, and the next breakfast. Well, we ate dinner that night and it was dumplings.

“Ew,” we both said at once. They were all soggy and uncooked dumplings with wet meat inside. Yuck.

Well, we had to make a fire with the help of the few remaining dry sticks left from Kai’s dragon. After we ate dinner, we put out the fire also. Using Pine’s help, we told the story about the Fire Prince. It’s a good story, about a boy who found that he had the power to control the flames and was able to use them to…

After that we went to bed in our tents we set up and fell asleep.

•••

We awoke to the sweltering heat. “Wake up!!! Wake up!!!” I shouted while shaking Kai’s tent.

“What’s going on? Why’s it so hot out there?”

“There’s a fire come on get out of there!!!” Suddenly, the back of Kai’s tent burst into flames.

“Get out of there NOW!!!” I screamed at the top of my lungs. I pulled him out.

“Where are Pine and Evie?” Kai shouted over the the burning trees falling to the ground. My heart literally skipped a beat. Pine, one year old, and Evie, five months, were lost in a monstrous fire. Kai’s eyes nearly bulged out of its sockets, that’s how shocked he was. If he bent over, they would probably fall out. Then we heard the most high-pitched scream ever combined with the average puberty scream of a teenaged boy.

My dragon screaming in the fire sounded like: “AHHH!!!” And then plus the high pitched scream: “EEE!!!”

Suddenly there was a hand on Kai’s foot and a hand on my foot then there were four little stubs on the sides of my head. It also felt like there was a balloon sleeping on my head. Anyway, when I felt the hand on my foot, I screamed, then Kai screamed, then the hand screamed. Then we all stopped, including the fire. Which is weird because it’s a fire. Meh…  so the hand that was on my foot got up and so it was then that I realized that it was a human. Boy. Teenager. Looks. Like. King’s. Lost son. Whoa.

Good hair. Black armour? Bad person. Good hair. Questions go bop.

Bop. Bop. BOP!

“Uh, hi!” he said. He seriously looked like the lost prince, right down to the perfect teeth. Kai looked at him and made a face. “My name’s Ivan.” He held out his armored hand and put the other hand on his sword.

We backed away from him. Pine let out little rings of steam around his body. I felt Evie sink onto my head. I picked her up and held her up to my chest. She nestled in toward me.

“Why are you wearing the Black Knight armor?” I asked the boy. “You’re the lost prince!”

“Says who?” he asked, clearly confused.

“Who are your parents then?” asked Kai

“You mean my dad? Oh, he’s the king of the Black Knights,” the boy said, sounding rather casual.

“Then why aren’t you trying to kill us?” I asked. This was confusing enough with just waking up in a fire that suddenly stops right before your eyes. Then you meet the Lost Prince but he says that he’s not him, and that his dad is the king of the Black Knights.

“Well, I don’t really want to because it’s the world law that you are not allowed to kill any children or women, only men. And since you are both children, I can’t kill you,” he said with an uncertain glance every which way.

“Well, we’re going to the kingdom to see your dad. Do you want to come with us?” Kai asked.

“Sure!” said Ivan. We made our way through the forest to Fairy Way, which is a small city infested with man-sized fairies with giant wings. Next we had to go undercover through the City of Barbarians, which was followed by the Nice City of Everyone. Then on our ninth day, we entered the kingdom of King Edmund the II. We entered the kingdom with tons of guards. We entered the castle, and there were tons of other messengers. Some of which I had never seen, but some we had seen passing by our village for parades. One of the messengers had no shoes, but instead had bandages around blistered feet. Fire blisters. All of the other messengers had some sort of  sign that they had been in some sort of fire… even us. All of our clothes had been singed from the fire that had happened more than a week ago.

Suddenly King Edmund came bursting out of the hall doors muttering something about his evil brother. Two other messengers came out following him with troubled looks on their faces. The king stopped short once he opened the door. There, standing at the door, grinning the evilest, wickedest, grin ever. His dark hair was matted by sweat and revenge, his beard half shaved, and a giant scar running straight down his face. “Nice to see you again… brother!”

At that the wicked man jabbed his “brother” in the jaw, sending him flying back and landing his head on the step up to his office. The man (although he was more of a monster) walked straight up to the king and stomped on his stomach. At that horrid sight everyone in the room cringed and winced as we all grabbed a heavy object from behind us.

This is not going to work out the way we planned, I thought. This is NOT going to work out the way we planned. Now of course, you may be wondering about all this planning. Well, we kids just are special. We are all the same person, just in different bodies. We all have the same minds. It’s fun being a kid for many reasons, one of which I will tell and show you about very soon.

Finally, the horrid thing that called itself the king’s brother bent over the king’s half alive body. “Well, I’m going to take over your kingdom. How about that?” it muttered under its breath. That was when our child anger took over. We charged at the wicked thing, we had our chairs, poles, and parts of the crumbling pillars. In mid-charge, the master of evil made the loudest whistle but we kept running. Suddenly, an army of weirdos busted in to the room. That was when things got real. And I don’t mean like real, I mean like real real, like, real. People started hitting each other on the head! It was every man for himself. By that I mean everyone for themselves. I looked for Kai. When I couldn’t find him standing up I got a pit in my stomach and looked down. There he was, lying unconscious with blood spilling out from his leg. I checked for a pulse. His heart was barely beating.

I ran over to find someone Jack!! His name ran through my mind. Finally, I found him whacking some ugly guy with a chair. I smacked the guy in the head with a piece of wood lying on the ground. He fell flat on his face. He, he. “Kai’s out and we have to get the king to safety. C’mon!” I shouted over the roaring of the war.

We ran over to Kai and I dragged him by his armpits. We dropped him off in the king’s office. Then we went to get the king. I took his upper body and Jack took his lower. We dragged him into the office with Kai. “Jack, grab me that pitcher!” I took the pitcher from Jack and poured the cold water onto Kai’s face. He woke up spewing a fountain of water everywhere!

“What happened?” Kai asked. I passed the pitcher back to Jack and told Kai what happened.

“What happened to your leg?” I asked him, eyeing the gash on his left leg.

“You know, they say that if you don’t look at your own cut then it won’t hurt as much. So now that you reminded me that I will now scream in pain.” And with that he let out an extremely loud roar of pain that made the battle outside sound like a cool breeze.

But something else happened besides everyone in the room losing their hearing, the king woke up. But when I said everyone in the room losing their hearing, I meant everyone in the room. “WHAT IS IT, YAPPERS!!??” the king yelled. He sat straight up with his eyes peeled wide open. I do not know who Yappers is, so I guess that was just a side effect for being nearly killed: going mad. He stood up and with one long stride he reached out to Kai and said, “Take my hand, Marida. And we can ride away to freedom!!” Then he pretended to be a singer. Not good. He took one step forward in slow-mo while pulling up a fist, and then made a face like he had just bit his lip but tried to make it look good. It did not look good. Then he pretended to be a rabid cat. “Heaaasss!!” Then he tried being an evil witch stirring a cauldron but he got it all wrong: “Toilet, toilet, boil and trouble.” Then he was a soldier. “RUN! RUN! RUN! SHE’S GONNA BLOW!! TAKE COVER!!!”

After this went on for a little while more, I realized that the fighting seemed to have stopped. I opened the door to see a giant heap of hideous people and a group of kids brushing themselves off from the previous battle. Although the people in the heap were pretty unconscious the thing that called itself the king’s brother was still get kicked in the gut by some of the other kids. Suddenly, a fire flew up around the people lying on the floor, and a deafening screech filled the room. One moment there were a pile of weirdos. The next, they were gone. Strange. Evie came down from her hiding place and landed on my shoulder while Pine landed on Kai’s.

Now of course you may be wondering about Ivan: well, we hadn’t seen him all day. Oh and here’s the weird part: standing where the heap used to be was… Ivan. This was strange. The fire only appeared when when Ivan came! Like when we were in the woods, the fire came and when it stopped Ivan had appeared! Something rung in the back of my head: the Fire Prince!

The tale of the Fire Prince was a story about a boy who was able to make himself disappear into fire and was able to make others do the same. He could also appear in fire. He never learned how to control his powers until he was in a war and killed everyone in it on both sides. That’s what Elder John told us. But he also said that if the Fire Prince would be able to learn to control his power, no one would get hurt and he would banish the bad to the Horrid Lands. If he really was the Fire Prince, then we needed to teach him how to use his powers the right way. Every day he would become more powerful until the day the war was meant to come.

“Ivan? Is that you? Is it really you?” the king whispered. “After all these years, is it really you?”

“Dad?” Ivan said, getting just a bit teary. Okay, fine, very teary.

After that we all left. It was father-son business, not ours, and anyway, it would have been a bit awkward if we had stayed.

We all huddled out the room and into another room, almost as big as the one before. It was the king’s study. All of his notes were packed into hundreds of notebooks and papers. There was a desk at one end and the big oak door that we had come through. We all looked around in awe. There was a ginormous chandelier hanging by a small chain on the ceiling. After another hour or so, we had found many things such as old maps and other stuff like that. The servants came looking for us and ushered us out the big oak door and up to our rooms. We fell fast asleep, finally being able to feel comfort at last.

The next morning we awoke to the smell of scones and rolls. We went downstairs after getting changed into our new clothes, only to find the king and Ivan laughing and telling each other jokes and Ivan showing off his fire powers. We sat down and had the best meal of our lives: the food was delicious and perfectly cooked over Ivan’s fire that he summoned into the stove. It was a cold morning and no one really wanted be awake. Kai’s leg had been bandaged up but you could still see where it was. The blood had leaked through the cloth.

One of other messengers named Murie had walked over to the big glass window and peered through to reveal about forty giant troops of men lined up about a mile from the castle. It was a terrifying sight to see. “Uh, Your Majesty, th-there seems to  be someone outside,” Murie stuttered. She pointed out to the crowd while the king and Ivan looked out. Ivan looked fine, as he never knew the Black Knights to be evil, while the King looked about as worried as a turkey during hunting season.

“What?! I thought we got rid of him yesterday! When you made him switch places with you! How is he back so soon?” The king groaned. “What does he want now? George! Would you do me the favor of getting me my horse? Oh, and Flynn, go tell the men to get their gear on, and tell the people to go to William’s Church on the countryside. Go! Go! Go! Hurry!!!” he shouted without looking away from the window as the men marched toward the castle.

This wasn’t going to end well. They had obviously way more men than we did. This, we could tell, was not going to be an easy battle against the evilest (by far) person on Earth.

Suddenly, as the king rode out on his horse, five monstrous dragons galloped forward, about the height of the gallows on the other side of the field that were now being trampled by the dragons.

I grabbed Kai and led him outside and onto the steps out front, As soon as the dragons came close enough, Kai muttered, “The Titans.” He stared out onto the field as the king’s horse galloped towards them. Titans. Of course they would be the first choice of the evilest man on Earth. Of course. Why hadn’t we known that he would do this. Kai went back and came back with his sword in his hand. I turned towards Kai only to see him sprinting down the field, chasing after the King, chasing after death itself.

Suddenly, one of the Titans fired a massive fireball the size of a cannonball, and going as fast as one too. Kai took out the sword from the sheath he had been carrying it in and used it to block the fireball. He had already run about a mile from the castle when he jumped up the side of one of the Titans and dragged himself up the beast, it was about forty feet high and wide. It wasn’t long before he reached the top, barely even a minute. The Titan started to buck and kick and finally stood on its two hind legs, forcing Kai to hang on its head armour. The beast stood like that for a long time. Soon Kai began to slip, and he let go.

An amazing thing happened: the Titan caught Kai with one giant palm. The Titan brought Kai up to his face and breathed out, knocking Kai on to his back. The dragon placed Kai on the back of his neck and kept on walking forward. No one dared to move, not even the other Titans. Kai’s Titan walked the rest of the way, and pretty slowly too, until he reached the king. The Titan bent down slowly and plucked Kai from the back of his neck and gently placed him on the ground. The massive beast turned around just as Flynn’s men came onto the battlefield.

Kai had always had a way with dragons. He was always so good with the dragon babies back at home. Elder John used to call him the dragon master, and everyone in the village of Dragon Burrow knew that if anyone would be able to tame a Titan, it would be Kai. So to be honest, it wasn’t much of a surprise to me that he had tamed the Titan.

What did amaze me was how he could have done that with a badly bruised and scraped leg that had a cut about an inch deep. Kai was able to talk to the beast, and it seemed that the Titan could understand him. He directed the beast toward the opposing side, and the beast blew a massive hole in the ground. It sent the front half of the troops flying backward toward the end of the field. That was when the war started, and the remaining soldiers charged forward.

To be honest, it was a pretty hilarious sight because all you saw was a group of five enormous dragons chasing a little person on a gray horse riding as fast as it could with an even smaller boy running next to it while a sixth dragon was trying to bomb about a million people behind the dragons. The dragons stopped when ordered, and the men advanced charging at the opposing side. They fought for fifteen hours, timed until half the men on each side were dead and the other half wounded.

The only ones that remained were the two brothers. They walked toward each other. Once they were close enough, they each picked up a bow from their sides and took their stances. They pulled the arrows back as far as they could, aimed, and the Dark King fired first, shooting a black-silver arrow into King Edward’s chest. It sent him staggering backwards until he finally fell to his knees and fell flat on his chest. A puff of smoke rose from where the arrow had hit him. It was black magic.

From where he stood, Ivan raced about 30 yards before kneeling next to the dead king. The Dark King turned away and walked back to his side. He was halfway there when Ivan stood up and yelled at him, “YOU MONSTER!!!” He ran after him and tackled him to the ground. We were all too stunned to move. We stood there on the steps of the king’s castle. What used to be King Edmund II’s. It wasn’t a good feeling to know that your king gave his life to save the entire kingdom.

No one wanted to do anything. We all stared at our feet, not wanting any part in this madness. Our king was dead, there was nothing good we could do or say. All we could think about was how we failed. We were sent by our village to come to warn the king that the Black Knights were coming so that he could be ready to protect his kingdom and all that surrounded it. Now he was dead, a quarter of the other people with him. It shouldn’t have ended in a battle of the brothers. After all, they were brothers. They suffered through their mother’s death when they were born and had to live alone with their father who later died in a battle when they were five. It was Edmund’s shoulder that his brother cried on. It wasn’t just a sin that the king’s brother, Rith, had made, it was a betrayal, a deception. Broke a brotherly bond between the two.

Suddenly, a beam of light shot up from the middle of King Edmund’s chest. The very top of it turned into an eagle. For ten seconds, it stood there beaming a blue-ish light into the blood-soaked sky. Then, as soon as it came, it vanished, taking his body with it. In its place laid a thin crown made of a worn silver, no longer shiny of the new creation, but dull and scratched from life’s hard work and pain. From a lost mother, a lost mather. And a lost brother. Rith shook the crying Ivan off of him and gently picked up the small crown.

As soon as he touched it, it seemed as if he had been relieved of a pain or a curse. The expression on his face turned from a hard, stern, frightening look, to a gentle, warm, soft look as he held the crown. Then a sudden look of realization and worry come to his face as he whispered, “The old witch at the end of the woods.” He dropped the crown and jumped back. The whole evil king thing was just some weird witch’s fault. It was only a curse. Only a curse. Just a simple spell on a poor man’s mind to make him do evil things for an evil one’s liking. It wasn’t right. But it was over now that the curse was gone. The king was gone too. Rith was left in a haze and we all went to the center of the field where Rith stood staring at the crown.

His eyes weren’t dull like they seemed before. In fact, now they were shining. They were gray with small flecks of gold, like the king’s except his were green. Now Rith only looked like a scared young man, no longer the vengeful demon that had killed his own brother. We walked over to him and we crowded around in a circle around him. We stood there for a long time.

Soon, Rith broke the silence. “Did I kill him?”

I nodded. He turned and cried. He later disappeared with Ivan. Ivan wanted to be with his newfound and good uncle. After all, he had no one else to live with.

We decided to leave. It took almost two weeks to get back and what we saw was amazing, though burnt. The people had begun to rebuild, though it seemed impossible. Evie and Pine had beat us home and left when the war started. It was amazing to get back to help the other people. When they heard the news about the king, we celebrated all through the night. Little pockets of bright green grass came out of ash. Right by the entrance to the village, there was a rose.

The Video Game

Characters:

Adam, Grandpa, Grandma, Mom, Dad, Brother, Viegas 

One day, there was a kid named Adam. Adam was very smart and he loved to do technology and he also loved science. Adam was in fifth grade. One day, Adam wanted to play a video game, so he went to the app Minecraft, and then he saw that someone had hacked into his account. He went to see the village and the village was on fire!

Then he shouted, “Darn!” But, he said, “Oh right, I know how to go back to what I’ve played so far or what happened in Minecraft.” He rewound the game. He sighed and said, “Phew.” But he thought, “Oh, I really want to go into the game and see the experience.”

He knew that he had blueprints that he could use, so he took out a piece of blueprint and started to plan out how to go into a video game. The plan looked like a door with wires connected to it and said “Computer must be needed.” So he biked to the recycling center and got all of his pieces. But, Adam forgot to bring the box with him. But, he found that there was a string on his bike and he thought, Huh, I see some trucks that load things and wrap them with strings. I should try that. That was close, he thought.

He was biking home, but then he found that his grandparents were there. Adam loved his grandparents, but he also wanted to go into a video game. He had to choose one. Since he loved his grandparents he decided to make the videogame teleporter a little later. He found out that his grandpa was a technologist so he whispered in his ear, “Grandpa, come to my room.”  

Since his grandpa couldn’t hear that well, he said, “What?”

So then Adam slowly repeated the sentence loudly, “Grandpa, can you please come to my room?”

Since his grandpa heard the question this time, he stood up, took his cane, and started to slowly walk to Adam’s room.

When his grandpa got to his room, Adam asked, “Grandpa, can you help me make a portal to go into a video game?”

His grandpa asked, “Which video game?”  

Adam replied, “Minecraft! We also need to let our whole family know, because there’s the video gamegoing to be an ice age in a week!”

“Hmm… It appears that our whole family has to go into Minecraft.”

“But why, Grandpa?”

“Because, if we leave the whole family, they’re going to die and not gonna survive,” said Grandpa.

“Then first we need to tell my mom, my dad, my brother, and Grandma, okay?” Adam said.

“Okay,” answered Adam’s grandpa.

They started to build the teleporter. Adam went down to tell his whole family that the ice age was coming in a week. They all got confused.

“Honey,” said Adam’s mom. “It’s the middle of summer.”

“It’s 2032, we need to go.  The ice age is coming in a week, and I know it’s crazy, but we need to go into my favorite video game, Minecraft. I know it seems crazy, but it’s the only way we can survive even though there’s an ice age there. We just get covered in snow and all we need to do is make a house quickly.”

They took all the pieces that Adam got from the junkyard. His grandpa went to the backyard and dragged the pieces to the backyard in a wagon. They got a screwdriver and a drill and a hammer and a lot of nails, and they started to build the machine. They started off with the door and then pieces of metal, and it took them about five days. Max mentioned that there was only one day left until the ice age happened. 

Everybody said, “What?” They all were confused, but they still followed Adam’s lead and they went to the backyard. They found a weird looking door. They shouted, “Woah!” So they quickly ran into the door and opened the door and saw a whole new Minecraft universe.

So they all started to mine wood and get some wood. After a few days, they all got a lot of wood and they built a mansion made out of wood. Since his grandma didn’t know how to build so well, his grandma just made blueprints. Once they finished the mansion completely, they started placing items in their mansion, for example: beds, shelves, crafting tables, chairs, tables, etc. Max’s favorite part about the house was the attic, because the attic was big enough to play football in it.

Then, a few days later, someone hacked into their world and took flint and steel and touched a block of wood on their mansion. The fire spread and the whole mansion was on fire. Adam’s grandpa took a bucket of water and went to the top of the mansion and poured the water on the mansion and the fire vanished immediately. Max crafted a force field on the enchanted crafting table and his grandpa said, “Good job!” The whole family found a big chunk of iron and re-made the mansion. When they made the iron mansion it took about six weeks to make the mansion. But they made the mansion bigger and better. Adam also upgraded the force field he had made before.

A few weeks later his grandma went to the woods with the whole family to to get some fresh air. His grandma opened an unexpected door to see what it was. The whole family shouted “NO!!!” But it was too late. His grandma already opened the door and when the snow came through, it turned into snow blocks. The wind was very strong, and his grandma wasn’t very strong, so she accidentally slipped into the ice age universe.  Two glaciers were quickly coming toward his grandma. They all shouted “RUN!” but the ice was too slippery.  She couldn’t stand up, and the glaciers were going faster each second and unfortunately squashed his grandma.

That day it was the darkest day ever in their life in Minecraft. The family made a graveyard for Adam’s grandma in Minecraft. Suddenly, a shiny colored looking Steve came to his room at night. Adam realized that it was his grandma’s spirit. That night, Adam had a conversation. At the end of the talk, Adam’s grandma told him not to tell his family. Adam didn’t ask why. Instead he asked, “Where are you going to live in the day?” She said that she would hide in his Minecraft picture in his room.

The next day came and the whole family woke up saying, “Oh! It’s a new day!” They were acting as if they didn’t remember that Grandma had died!!! Then Adam’s dad mentioned, “We don’t have food, so why don’t we go out and get some food?”

Adam wondered, Why is everyone acting so happy? The whole family went out to kill a wolf and Adam’s brother suffered, suffered, screamed in pain because the wolf bit his leg off. Blood was all over the place. They had to take his organs and stuff them in his leg. Then they dragged his brother back to the mansion and went to the emergency room. They got stitches and a metal wire. They connected their wire with the blood vein on his thigh and the blood vein on his leg. They sewed the leg to the thigh. Adam’s brother tried to move his leg and … he moved it! He tried to walk on his leg, but he had to learn how to walk for about two weeks. SUCCESSFUL SURGERY!!!

Once Adam got home, he went to his room. He locked the door of his room. He talked to the picture and said, “Grandma, you can come out. I locked the door.” Suddenly his picture began to shine and spin and his grandma’s spirit came out of the picture. She said, “Ahhhh, that was a long sleep. Thanks for waking me up, Adam.”

Adam replied, “It’s nice to see you too. I have to tell you that my brother has to learn how to walk because his leg got chopped off by a wolf.”

His grandma said, “Oh, there’s a knock on your door! I’ll hide back in the picture!”

Adam replied, “Okay.” He opened his door.

His mom said, “There’s a guest who wants to see you. His name is Viegas. He is waiting in the living room. He wants to show something to you.”

Adam said, “Sure, he can come up to my room.”

Five minutes later, Viegas came to Adam’s room and said, “Quickly, lock the doors and pull down the shades.”

Adam said, “Okay, but why?”

“Just quickly do it!” said Viegas.

“Okay, okay, jeez,” replied Adam. So Adam did as Viegas said.

Then Viegas pulled out a paper. He said, “This is a map, a very ancient map. I asked your mom if I could go out with you into the woods. Your mom said it’s fine, but to come back by dinner time. She said that the dinner is wolf stew.”

Adam said, “Okay. Where does this map lead to?”

Viegas replied, “It leads to an ancient castle with treasures.” So they went downstairs and Adam told his mom that he was going out into the woods. So they opened the door and they started to walk into the woods. They ran in the direction of the map and Adam and Viegas had a compass and a clock in their chest just to check the time. So they started running.

They came up into the middle of the woods until Viegas tripped on an old gray brick. Viegas said, “This is the castle! I know that it’s a castle because I’ve been here, but be careful because there are monsters such as creepers, endermen, zombies, and skeletons. But the most dangerous thing of all that we need to kill is Mobzilla. Dun dun dun!”

Adam asked, “Why do we have to kill Mobzilla?”

Viegas replied, “To get the armor and the treasure.”

So they started to head into the castle. Once they got to the castle they found two zombies. Viegas said, “Quickly! Go to the furnace and try to melt the compass and the clock to make a time sword.” They pressed a button on the time sword and went to the time after they killed the zombies and had zombie disguise suits.

Both of them fell silent and started to make zombie sounds. Both of them ended up in a narrow pathway and started to come up to a tunnel where they had to crawl. Then they came to the part of the tunnel where there was a fork in the road. Then Vegas said “We have to split up. We’re close to Mobzilla’s throne.”

“Okay.” said Adam. So they split up.

They ended up right in front of Mobzilla, gladly still in disguise.

Mobzilla was a big and tough guy. He was strong enough to kill one hundred mutant zombies in one punch. He had poisonous spikes and magma hot leather. Just then, he started to moan out something that Adam didn’t understand. Then, Adam and Viegas, out of nowhere, took out a enchanted king-scale battle axe and duplicated the king-scale battle axe. Both of them started hitting Mobzilla. Mobzilla tried to dodge the hits, but he was too big to dodge the hits. Mobzilla eventually died and both of them got the Mobzilla armor. Suddenly, out of nowhere, there was a portal to the Ender World!

Before the two jumped in, they decided to visit their families. Viegas had lost his family because Endermen took his family, so he was kind of glad that the portal was an Enderportal. Anyway, they arrived at Adam’s home and told them that they had defeated Mobzilla. But of course they didn’t believe that they defeated Mobzilla until Viegas took out his Mobzilla helmet.

They talked for a while and decided that Adam and Viegas could go to the Ender World, so Adam’s mom packed their inventory full of food. Then they ran back to the portal and got their armor on and counted down: Three, two, one! They jumped inside the portal with their eyes closed…

The Night of the Pug Banshee

Ahhh! Pug banshee. That is what was in the letter, thought Detective Frank. Now he had to figure out who was the pug banshee.

Meanwhile, across town, a pug was right in front of a computer ordering a black hoodie and a new scythe because his old one had blood on it.

After interviewing every human in town, Frank fell onto his couch. It broke. I will order a new one on Amazon, he thought. Then he realized that the murderer must have ordered something on Amazon Prime. The signal led him to a warehouse. He stepped inside the warehouse. All of a sudden he heard a scream so loud he died. A Pug banshee was standing over him.

“Nice work,” Barney said as he stepped out of the shadows.

 

Leela Levine was crawling down the street at midnight, eating a box of cookies. Sure, she was not allowed to leave the house past her bedtime, or eat too many cookies, but hey, she could just blame the chauffeur. Then she crawled right into a cave in Hastings. The cave of the Pug banshee. He attacked her with his scream. Then she got upset and attacked him with a bazooka. Then they fell in love. All of a sudden they had a baby who they named Petruska.

“Awww, she is so cute,” Barney said. Little did Barney, Barney, and Barney know that she would start a war.

 

Blinky was bored. Sure, he had 765 marriages planned, but still, just because he’d called dibs on 764 pretty singers, and one dib on Heidi Klum, did not mean he wouldn’t be bored sometimes. Plus, he was a three year old, so he was not allowed to marry yet. He missed his adopted sister Leela Levine. It all began when he was walking to preschool on his first day. When he saw a box with a baby inside it, he thought the baby didn’t have such a bad idea and jumped in the box with her. Then a limo pulled up at the sidewalk and a chauffeur stepped out. He picked up the box and put it in the backseat. There sat Adam Levine.

“Hi, Leela, do not ever run away like that again.”

“Sorry, Daddy, but the chauffeur made me do that.”

“I did not.”

“Never mind,” said Adam. “Who is your friend?”

“Blinky! His name is Blinky,” Leela said.

From then on, Blinky had been at Leela’s side, when they destroyed the grand canyon, and when she kidnapped Blake Shelton, and that one time when they were lawyers defending a client and accidentally revealed that they killed Katy Perry. That time, the judge revealed that he was a murderer and the jury were his helpers. It was the first time that everyone in court was sent to jail. They were in jail for 2 months. The point is that he was at Leela’s side all the time, so where was she?

 

“Barney, you are under arrest,” yelled Frederick angrily.

“Never!” Barney yelled.

Just seconds later, Frederick and Tommy had flown into the cave and tried to arrest Barney for murdering detective Frank.

“Feel the pain!” yelled Frederick, as he shot fire at Barney. Just in time Leela jumped right in front of the fire, but the fire hit her and she died. The Pug banshee’s eyes filled with tears.

Petruska crawled up to the Pug banshee and said, “You need a hug,” and hugged him. Blinky and Tommy’s sister, Ms. Mati, ran into the cave.

“Where is Tommy?” asked Ms. Mati.

“Where is Leela?” asked Blinky.

“Tommy?” said Ms. Mati.

“No!!!” said Blinky.

Leela was dead and it was all Frederick’s fault.

 

One hour later:

The world was in mass destruction. All of them were fighting like crazy. Then Leela came out of nowhere except this time she was a ghost.

“What are you guys doing? You should be destroying Blake’s house,” the ghost of Leela said.

Everyone agreed that was a good idea. They destroyed Blake’s house, then went out for ice cream and vowed never to ALMOST destroy the world again.*

 

THE END.

 

*The Pug banshee lived happily ever after.

The Lonely Glimmer of the Moon

The stars on navy black nights

wink at humans who stare up at the lonely glimmer of the moon.

The mystery girl sits on the dusty pewter gray surface

her lanky legs hanging down, dangling above the world she knew so well.

She hums a lullaby for the people to drift off to sleep,

into the world of dreams.

Where the world’s sins and rainy days are forgotten,

where there is a new glimmer of hope for each and every one of us.

The map in the center sets us on our path to destiny,

and at the end of the day,

the mystery girl dances among the stars.

Becky’s Diary

Chapter 1: A Bad Start

Becky got ready to go home from her frustrating day at school. Her fist was soaked from all the sweat dripping between her fingers. She grabbed her backpack. She was still sad that her friend deserted her. She’d been excited to go to Sarah’s party, but suddenly she was uninvited. Becky was Sarah’s friend since kindergarten, but when Sarah met other people she forgot about Becky. When Becky got home, she grabbed the peanut butter and jelly sandwich her mom made for her. The jelly was squished out of the side of the bread, but Becky didn’t mind the mess. She licked her fingers as she climbed the stairs and closed herself inside her bedroom. Even from inside, she smelled the moist air from the rainy day.

The front door swung open, and her mom shouted up the stairs. “I’m home! Where are you?”

Becky felt dreadful now. She couldn’t have a nice, peaceful day with Mom’s endless questions. She tiptoed to her little brother’s room to retrieve the telephone charger he’d swiped from her. She plugged it in and belly flopped onto her bed. Starring up at the ceiling, kicking her legs in the air, Becky typed in Sarah’s phone number. She pressed “send” and waited a long time for Sarah to respond, but after what seemed like a hundred rings, she gave up hoping Sarah would answer the phone.

Becky wasn’t surprised. It had been a long time since Sarah was a real friend to Becky –– at least eight years. Becky was eleven now, and she wished Sarah would be her friend again.

She jumped out of bed when her mom called her for dinner: grilled brussel sprouts with mashed potatoes. Afterward, she brushed her teeth with super bubble gum pop ice cream flavored toothpaste, and then crept into the family room without her mother hearing her. She sunk into the soft purple velvet couch and started watching The Big Bang Theory, one of her favorite shows. After her eyelids started drooping, she returned to her room and fell asleep in her cozy pink bed, dreamily clutching her kitten-patterned comforter.

The next morning, Becky slipped out of bed and changed into the flowered dress her Aunt Nelson had given her for her birthday. Becky pranced to the door and down the stairs. It was Book Fair day, and she was so excited. She’d been waiting so long to get more books and participate in the drawing contest. Too bad she had to suffer through the boring parts of school first.

In homeroom, number 234, she tried to pay attention to her teacher.

”Okay, students, open your math notebooks to page 225,” he said. “We will be reading page 225-230, and also, do not forget to answer all of the problems. Remember, there are 24 problems on one page.”

Becky didn’t want to answer any amount of problems. She sneakily removed her diary from her bookbag, opened it on her desk, and wrote:

 

Dear Diary,

Ahh man, I wish I could make the teacher disappear, and then he could be a torturer for my little brother, but not me. But Torture Class is almost over and it’ll be time for social studies with… Oh, I can’t remember all my teachers’ names because I have seven teachers. That’s way too many teachers. Yesterday in social studies we learned how much trash has been dumped on earth, so we talked about how we can stop having so much trash. My idea was to get a machine that helps cancer but eats trash so then kids will be helped and there will be less trash. But the teacher said  impossible things can not be included, but then I told her it’s not impossible. Then the teacher gave us worksheets, but I just ripped it slowly and then started to cut it into tiny squares that were nicely ripped.

 

Becky went into the cafeteria and had her favorite lunch: a salad from the salad bar and fried chicken. The salad bar had almost all the toppings you could want: tomatoes, croutons, olives, and lots more. Becky chose tomato salad with olives. After lunch Becky went to recess. It was indoors because it was lightly raining outside. She picked up her diary.

 

I really hate this school. It’s really boring. If somebody talks, the whole class has to put their heads down for the whole recess. Another really bad thing is that whenever a teacher needs a substitute, it’s my mom. One time a teacher here needed a sub and my mom came it. She told other kids really embarrassing things about me!

 

Sarah went over. “What’s this?” she shrieked. She bent over and threw Becky’s diary across the room; it almost went into the trash can. Behind Sarah, Becky could hear Sarah’s friends. The boys roared. They were weird, and Becky rushed over to get her diary, but then one of the friends came and ripped the page out.

“Here’s your stupid diary,” he said.

Sarah and her friends walked away.

When recess was over the teacher came in and said, ”We’re going to do a pop quiz.”

Everyone moaned, “NOOO!”

 

Dear Diary,

Everyone in our classroom hates test and work. I’m stuck on the question 32 x 5. Ooh! I’ll pull out my calculator!

 

The teacher saw Becky reach for her calculator and glared across the room. “Becky, please sit at the back table. I’ll see you after class.”

Becky grumbled as she walked through the rows to the back of the classroom. As she stomped, she saw Sarah was halfway through her test already. That was when she saw Sarah’s arm covered with the answers for the test. Becky was about to tell on Sarah, but the teacher called her name. Becky walked to the front of the classroom.

“Tell everyone what you were doing.”

Becky hesitated, and then she told everyone. “I was getting a calculator.”

“I will give you a reflection. Tell your parents to sign it and bring it in,” the teacher said.

 

Dear Diary,

I got in big trouble from my parents today. At dinner, they called me down to ask what happened. I told them I needed the calculator. I told them I was stuck on the question. I told them about Sarah being mean and how she had the answers written on her arms. And Mom and Dad said they didn’t care about Sarah. They only cared about me. They told me if Sarah’s doing that, that’s her problem, not ours. That I should focus on my own business. But Sarah is my business, because I want to be friends with her.

 

For dinner, Becky had salmon and mushrooms. Becky quickly ate the salmon, but she didn’t like the mushrooms, so she made a big pile.  

“Becky, eat those mushrooms, or you won’t get ice cream for dessert,” her mom said.

But Becky knew they didn’t have ice cream, so she knew her mom was lying. Becky ate it anyway, though, because she didn’t want to get in more trouble.  She went to bed and put on her favorite fluffy pajamas with pictures of hamsters from head to toe. She went to the bathroom and started brushing her teeth with blueberry mint toothpaste and her puppy-patterned toothbrush. She yawned and her eyelids drooped. She was ready for bed! She slipped under her covers and fell into a dream.  

She dreamed about her friends. She dreamed about the girl in her class, Olivia, and dreamed about how she could be her friend. But then Sarah entered the dream and was really mean to her.

Why would she want to be Sarah’s friend? Becky thought. She abandoned her, she took her diary, she made fun of her, and in the last few years, she mocked Becky’s last name with her gang of meanies. Olivia was there again, happy and sweet and welcoming. Maybe Becky should be friends with Olivia instead. But, despite how nice she was, no one wanted to be Olivia’s friend, and Becky wondered why. Then she remembered that Sarah had told everybody not to be Olivia’s friend because if you played with her she’d steal all of your stuff.

Becky woke up, confused. The next day, she quickly ate her banana chocolate cereal with fresh milk from the cows in her dad’s farm for breakfast and went to school. During attendance, Sarah went over to Olivia and pushed her out of her chair.

“Oopsie,” Sarah said insincerely, and the class laughed at Olivia.

Becky stood, her hands on her hips and said, “Stop. I’m tired of people saying and doing mean things to Olivia.”

Olivia eyes welled with tears as she stood and approached Becky. “Wow. You’re so brave. Do you want to sit together at lunch?”

“Yes!”

So they sat together at lunch. Olivia had a salami sandwich her mom made, and Becky bought a Philly cheesesteak from the cafeteria. They shared bites with each other, just like best friends, but they were so distracted that Becky didn’t notice Sarah creep up and grab her backpack.

“Ha! Look what I’ve got!” Sarah said. “After I got it the last time, I thought you would’ve stopped carrying around your dumb diary.”

Sarah opened the diary again and began reading aloud:

 

Dear Diary,

What’s wrong with Sarah?

 

The girl stopped and looked at Becky with wide eyes. She cleared her throat and continued reading, but it wasn’t what Becky had actually written!

 

I hate Sarah. She is so mean, and nobody likes her. I bet she’s bad at school, too.

 

“Hey!” Becky exclaimed. “I didn’t write that!”

“So you just talk about people behind their backs. You’re the real mean one, Becky.”

The cafeteria buzzed with conversations, and several kids fired mean looks at Becky. Even Olivia looked concerned. Sarah looked like Queen of the World as she shook Becky’s diary in the air. She pouted her bottom lip like her heart had been broken, but Becky knew the truth. She hadn’t written those things about Sarah. She’d written nice things.

At recess, everyone in the class appeared to hate Becky. No one would talk to her or play with her. She had to get her diary back. She had to show them the truth.

Sarah was on the playground, flipping through the diary pages, when Becky stomped up to her.

“Can I please have my diary back?”

“So you can write more lies about me?” Sarah asked. Her voice boomed across the playground, and kids gathered around them.

“You’re the liar!” Becky said. “I didn’t write those things, and I can prove it.”

Becky ripped the diary out of Sarah’s hands and flipped it open to the page Sarah had lied about.

 

Dear Diary,

I think Sarah and I could be really good friends. The only thing is that Sarah is mean to me sometimes. She says we can hang out, but then she deserts me. She even invited me to a party, but then said I couldn’t come because it’s only for “cool girls.” I think I’m pretty cool. I wonder why Sarah doesn’t think so. I wish Sarah would be my friend and be at least a little nicer to me. Then she’d have a lot more friends, and I think people would like her instead of being scared of her. Sometimes I think that’s the only reason people hang out with her. She’s popular and everyone says she’s the best person, but I think that’s because she’d be mean to them if they don’t say they like her.

I could like her. I could be her real friend. We could all be her real friends.

 

Becky showed the kids the diary, and they gasped.

“She was telling the truth!” Olivia said. “And Sarah was lying.”

Sarah’s cheeks turned bright red, and her face crumpled in sorrow. She looked like she wanted to crawl into a hole and hide forever like a meerkat.

“Why did you lie to us?” a girl asked Sarah.

“And why did you trip me the other day?” a boy added.

“And why do you keep stealing Becky’s diary?” Olivia asked.

Sarah lowered her head. “I don’t know. I guess I just thought being tough would make me more popular and cooler. I thought people would like me more.”

“People like other people when they’re nice,” Becky said. “When they share and are fair and have fun jokes. You should treat people they way you want to be treated. Like your favorite pet, or your family, or ––”

“Like a best friend!” Olivia interjected. She wrapped her arm around Becky and smiled.  

Sarah stood there, mouth hanging open in shock. But Olivia and Becky reached out to her and smiled as they said, “Join us, Sarah. You can be our friend.”

Sarah was hesitant. No one had offered her kindness and friendship like this before, and she didn’t know if she could trust it.

But the girls and the other kids on the playground encouraged her to take their hands, to stop being mean, and to be friends with Becky.

Becky was so happy. She was still a little mad at Sarah for being mean to her, but now that Sarah was going to change her ways and be a good person, Becky could overlook her remaining anger.

She threw one arm around Sarah, one arm around Olivia, and as the bell rang to signal the end of recess, Becky wasn’t upset about having to go back inside.

At her locker, she pulled out her diary and pressed it against the locker to write.

 

Dear Diary,

This was a really hard year. But Sarah has finally become my friend and will stop bullying everybody. Olivia and I are best friends now. Even Mom has stopped asking me so many questions, and I can finally have a peaceful day.

 

The Turning Point

It was one of those days when Cameron woke up and was all alone. A few days ago, there was a person coming to babysit Cameron’s little sister and when Cameron came back home, she was gone.

The first few days, Cameron’s family had no idea who took her, but the day after, they saw a video of their babysitter putting a fist at his five-year-old sister.

Today Cameron was going to get her back. He still had no idea where she was, but he had a clue. In the video, he saw she was in a little cottage deep inside the woods. So that’s where he was headed.

After he finished gathering the stuff he needed, he set out into the woods. When he got into the woods, he couldn’t see any cottages in plain view, but he knew it was further into the woods.

* * *

“Please don’t hurt me,” Cameron’s younger sister, Emma, pleaded to her babysitter.

“I will, you moron,” the babysitter said with a malicious grin.

BANG!

They heard a noise outside. After that, the babysitter took out his machete and headed for the door.

Two minutes later the babysitter hadn’t come back, but her brother did. “Cameron! You came to save me,” Emma whispered.

“Or try,” the babysitter said as he entered the room.

The babysitter took out two little daggers.

“I will kill you!” Cameron yelled at the babysitter.

“But you won’t.”

Then Cameron took out two katanas. Then they started to duel.

Cameron then lunged at the babysitter and tried to get a good shot at the arm. But the babysitter used the daggers and pushed both katanas to the side and badly hurt Cameron’s arms, which led to death.

“NOOO!” Emma yelled at the top of her lungs. Then the babysitter took both daggers and chopped off the ropes. “I’ll let you live, on one condition. You kill your dad.”

Emma nodded glumly. She stared at the babysitter and asked, “Why do you want me to do that?”

“I want you to hurt and/or kill your parents.”

“But why do you want to do that.”

“Let me tell you a story. When I was in high school, I had a huge crush on your mom, but your mom married some other kid. So I’m getting revenge for her marrying the kid which was Joe right, yeah. So you are going to get your dad to divorce your mom.”

“Why would you want to do such horrible things. And I wouldn’t do such a thing.”

“Because I just do. Now go do what I said.”

Emma didn’t have a choice and walked right out of the cabin. But instead of doing what the babysitter said, whose name Emma found out was was Mike, she ran to her house and told her mom as fast as she could, but while Emma was talking, her mom was crying from joy.

“So that’s where you were all this time,” Emma’s mom said with more tears in her eyes. “But where’s Cameron?” Emma’s mom asked worriedly.

“Um, let’s just say he’s not alive,” Emma said hesitantly.

Emma’s mom picked up the phone with a face like she has seen a ghost and rapidly dialed 911. After she finished talking to the police she ran upstairs and started to cry hysterically for hours.

Emma then started to run to the cottage to find Mike and lie to him. She said, “I did it.” She entered and called for Mike but there was no answer.

* * *

After Mike heard the police sirens outside of his “secret” hideout, he ran out of his emergency door and ran to his parents’ house for the first time in his whole life. When he was right at the door, he hesitantly knocked.

The door opened and a middle-aged woman appeared. “Is that you, Mike?” the middle-aged woman asked.

“Yes, it’s me,” Mike replied childishly and sheepishly. Then then middle-aged woman grabbed Mike and pulled him inside her house. “Mike, you came back, but why?”

Mike knew the middle-aged woman was his mom, Margaret. At first, Mike had no clue who this woman was because he thought he could ask one of his neighbors where his family moved. But apparently they just moved to a different town two minutes away from the their old one. Now he found his parents and had a happy, sad, angry feeling inside him. His mom hugged him and let him stay for the night. But Mike didn’t feel like he deserved that, and a sliver of guilt ran down his back. Then his old childhood memories came flooding back

* * *

I was sitting in the living room watching TV (as usual) on a Saturday, and then out of the blue, my mom came in and said,” Pack up your things! We’re moving out of here.” That sentence turned my brain into mush. “No, NO! Dad, you can’t do that to me. We’ve lived in this town for 12 years and I have made a bunch of new friends and I won’t abandon them and go somewhere else,” I yelled with tears on the verge. “I’m sorry, but we can’t afford to live here anymore.”

“But I’m not going anywhere.”

“Excuse me, young man, you are my son and you do as I say.”

“Make me.”

“Mike, I won’t take any of this foolishness. Go and pack up.”

“I said I’m not going anywhere, you hear that?”

“MIKE HAMILTON, YOU GO UPSTAIRS AND PACK YOUR THINGS UP! YOU HEAR THAT? OR ELSE YOU ARE GROUNDED FOREVER,” boomed my father.

“No, I won’t leave.”

Then my dad took me by the ear and dragged me to my room. He yelled at me to start  packing. So I did, but when they were busy talking, I slipped out the door with my belongings and ran away from my home. When I got far enough, I chopped down some wood and  built a little cottage that I learned in Boy Scouts. After that, I went to get more wood and made a little fire in the house. Unfortunately, I had no furniture at all so I had to sit on the hard wooden floor. I decided to carve some furniture out of the spare wood. Now I have completed my mission. But 5 years later I saw a newspaper that said that the search for me was “over.” I was half happy and half sad. My parents don’t care about me now. Seriously they stopped caring for me? So I decided to get revenge later on in their life to pay back for canceling the search for me.

* * *

“So… can I stay for a while? Five days max.”

“Sure, anything for my son. But why?”

“Oh, because I haven’t seen you in 12 years.”

“O-kay…”

Mike felt very guilty because of how his mother was acting to him. Part of him was very happy because now he could finally get revenge. However, at this point, his guilt was taking control over his other feelings, so he couldn’t get revenge, not yet.

It was 10:00 o’clock already, so everyone was getting ready for bed. Mike already had the best dinner in his life and watched TV shows he wasn’t allowed to before. After what just happened, Mike couldn’t get any revenge again.

CREAK, CREAK!

Mike was walking very slowly down the stairs of his parents house because he didn’t want to stay another night, otherwise all his secrets would spill out and his parents would hate him for life. When he got down to the stairs, he secretly installed a little camera in all the rooms that can go 360 degrees around so he could see his parents. He still didn’t want to abandon them, at least not yet.

* * *

Go to mom and dad and tell them about everything and then you throw yourself into a cell. No, just leave and forget about everything. Yes, because they have been too nice to me. Okay, if I just forget about this and go they’re going to think somethings up. And if I throw myself into jail by confessing the things to my mom, she would be unpredictable.

* * *

Not wanting to disappoint his mom by lying, he put his hand on the doorknob, but his mind was processing totally different. His mind was taking him back up to his mom and dad’s room and confessing. And that’s what he did. “Mom, Dad, wake up. I need to tell you something very important.”

His mom shot up first and then a few seconds later his dad shot up later very groggily. “What do you want to tell us?”

“You know how I used to be a babysitter?”

“Yeah, you were babysitting, ummm… a girl named Emma, right?”

“Yeah, I killed her brother.”

Mike’s dad fainted.

“YOU WHAT?”

“I wasn’t in the right mind, Mom.”

Now her face was the color of a fresh tomato and her eyes were giving Mike an angry regretful expression, wishing she had a different son. And her hands were clenched into a strong hardy fist.

“No, excuses! I am ashamed to be your mom!”

“Mom, I’m really, really sorry. And I’ll show you by turning myself in.”

After that he ran downstairs, threw open the door and ran outside towards the police station.

When Mike got to the police station, he ran up to the counter and said, “I found the suspect to the murder of Cameron.”

“Yes, yes, who was it?”

“You might find this hard to believe…” I can’t believe that I’m doing this. But I shouldn’t do this. No, just do it  for mom. No, I would never do this. No, but I have to. “It was… me.”

The police’s face was very angry and shocked at the same time.

“Sir, you are going to go into one of those cells right now!!”

And after the police yelled that, another officer came running out of nowhere and threw handcuffs over his hands. He didn’t fight against it. He learned that paying his wrongdoings by throwing himself into jail was the least he could do. But he knew one thing, he would never be able to get his mom’s trust back. But he thought it was the right result to his actions.

 

Five Years Later

 

Now Mike and his parents, were at a facility in Trenton, New Jersey. Ready for Mike’s execution.

“Mike you know I always love you, but you must pay for your wrongdoings,” Mike’s mom said, holding back dramatic tears. “And I would always regret this, but the government has asked to do this.”

“Yes, I know and I always wanted to say that.”

After that, the police put the gun up to Mike’s face, but then Emma burst through the room and said, “Wait, he deserves to live because everyone needs another chance to change. He can’t die. Mike deserves to have another chance to have a new improved family and have a fresh start to a new improved life. And he’s already paid for five years.”

“Ma’am do you know who this man is?”

“Yes I do. He was my babysitter, so he’s not that evil.”

Mike and his mom were in shock. A little girl about ten years old just burst into the room and stopped an execution. Mike was in so much shock that you could blow a bull horn at his face and he wouldn’t notice at all.

“I’m sorry, but we already signed the papers.”

Then the other two police held him up by the arms. And then there was the sound of a gun fire.

 

Epilogue: Mom

 

At that time when my son was about to get executed I was so, so sad. I thought about the time when I yelled at him harshly and said those things I never should have said. And now I never got to apologize to him. I also had wished we had given him more love and appreciation. After he got executed, I cried so hard and my face was so hot you can cook an egg on it. My husband, he cried with me. That little girl, Emma, came to my house and told me the times where Mike babysat her. Those stories reminded me of him. But his debt to society was paid off.

 

The end

Rose Red

The rain compacts with the light,

the colors shine in my face.

Rose red,

ripe peach orange.

Sunset yellow,

mint leaf green.

Ocean blue,

and plump grape purple.

 

The window shades are pulled back,

and all eyes are staring out.

Rose red,

ripe peach orange.

Sunset yellow,

mint leaf green.

Ocean blue,

and plump grape purple.

 

And as soon as it arrives,

it disappears just like that.

Rose red…

is the last to leave.

 

A Rough Current

“We’re going that way.”

My friend, Billy, sounded so sure of himself when he announced the route we would take across the river. Our kayak was bobbing in the current, and we were running out of time to decide which way to take. “But that direction is the one with the stronger rapids,” I told Billy impatiently. “We’re just beginners. Do you really think you can go that way?”

Billy snickered and leaned into my face. “You scared?” he taunted.

I shook my head. “Come on, Billy, let’s just go that way, okay?” I begged.

“Okay, scaredy,” Billy sneered. “We’ll go the baby path.”

I felt both offended, but relieved. I never really expected for this trip to turn out well, but I didn’t think that I would have to go through such a rough current, either. None of the trips that my mom planned really worked out well. I was not exactly eager when she told me about her idea for me to go kayaking with Billy, especially after seeing him act slightly strange for a few days.

“Why don’t you go kayaking with Billy?” she had asked me. “He hasn’t hung out with you for a while. It’ll help your relationship.”

We kayaked over to the right just as we reached the area where the river split into two. The left path had a very rapid current, and the other way was way more appropriate for beginner kayakers. At least, I thought so. We paddled silently for a while. Then, the rapids started to get rougher. We bumped up and down quickly along the river.

“Um, Billy?” I asked nervously. “Uh, why is this so… rough?”

Billy did not respond. The farther we went, the stronger the rapids grew. Soon, when I felt like I was about to fall right out of the kayak, I saw a very frightening sight right ahead of my eyes.

It was a waterfall.

I panicked, and I started kayaking away from it.

“Billy! It’s a waterfall!” I shrieked to him. He glared at me without a word. We were both wearing life jackets, but the water was freezing cold. Billy, however, had an idea. He began steering towards a log floating in the river. Once we were close enough, he pushed me off the boat and onto the log. He climbed on after me, and grabbed the boat out of the water. We walked across the log and onto land, Billy still carrying the boat. He had just saved our lives.  

I had to thank him. “Billy?” I began. He turned to me and glared. A lump formed in my throat. “Um, never mind,” I told him nervously. I decided not to thank him. If he was going to treat me that way, he did not deserve to be thanked.

We walked back in silence. Billy had been my friend since I was 4 years old. Now, were we just going to break that friendship because of an accident? Of course not! He’s still my friend! I thought. But as we walked in silence, I didn’t feel so sure.

Soon, we reached the area where our parents were waiting for our return.

“Back already?” my mom asked when she saw us.

I nodded.

“What happened?” she urged. I shook my head. I was not in the mood to explain, and she didn’t make me, either. “I want to go home,” I told her. She didn’t object so I waved good-bye to Billy, and I headed home.

The entire car ride home was silent, but once we got home, my mom asked the question.

“Bob,” she asked me. “What happened at the river? You don’t have to tell me if you don’t want to, but I would appreciate it if you did.”

I sighed as I shook my head. Somehow, I found myself spilling the whole story to my mother. She deserves the truth, I thought. But that was my biggest mistake. I guess I should have told her that this story was personal, because in less than 3 minutes, the story of my relationship with Billy was posted all over Twitter, Instagram, and Facebook.

The next morning was Monday, which meant going to school–with Billy. I hoped that Billy didn’t have an Instagram, Twitter, or Facebook account. That would be a nightmare, I thought. But it was nothing compared to what actually happened.

At lunchtime, Billy, who had always sat at the “losers’” table with me, didn’t make it over without a bunch of popular kids crowding in his face.

“Yo, Billy!” one of the kids called out. “You going around kayaking waterfalls?”

Billy looked shocked. “What are you talking about?” he asked.

The kid stared. “My friend told me everything that happened in the river. He told me that you kayaked down a waterfall! At least, that’s what I heard. He told me that his friend’s father saw something about that on Instagram,” he explained.

The other kids nodded. “Well, hey, that’s cool! Wanna join us here?” another kid asked.

I was so shocked. I had no idea about all these rumors going on about the river incident.  

“Billy, no! Don’t go with them! You’re my friend…. right?” I pleaded. But Billy didn’t hear me. He smiled, nodded, and sat down at the popular kids’ table, deserting me.

I couldn’t believe what I just saw. Billy… a popular kid?! I thought. No way! He’ll be a friend of mine again in no time. But still, I was desperate to prove to myself that Billy was still my friend. It was hard to believe, though, seeing Billy hang around and talking with the popular kids, as if they were old friends. I felt left out and alone.

By the time school ended, I had a plan. If the plan succeeded, then Billy was truly my friend. However, if the plan failed, Billy was so totally over me.

On the bus, I sat at the seat reserved for the popular kids. I knew that when they came over and found out that I had taken one of the reserved seats, they would be angry. Then, what happened next would decide if Billy was still my friend.

I had to wait a while for the kids to come. When they finally arrived, I could see that Billy was among them. “Get out of my seat, loser,” one of the popular kids sneered. I looked over at Billy, waiting to see his reaction. He remained emotionless, just standing there.

“I said, GET OUT!” the kid shouted once again. I held my breath, waiting.

“Whatever, let him stay,” I heard Billy say. Relief flowed through me. He was my friend! “We can choose some other seats.”

As they walked away, Billy leaned over and whispered, “You owe me one, remember that.”

When he rejoined the popular kids, I heard one of them whisper to him with a frown, “Meet me this afternoon at the schoolyard. We need to talk.”

When I got home, I immediately went on to Twitter. I wanted to see what my mom posted about me, and I really wanted to see where the popular kids had gotten the information. What I saw completely shocked me. In front of my eyes was an article, an article so fake that I just couldn’t believe that my own mother had written it:

My poor son, Bob! His mean friend, Billy, went kayaking with him, and he didn’t know that Bob was only a beginner! He chose to kayak the route down the waterfall! Poor Bob was scared to death, and I felt so bad for my son. He could have died from that kayaking trip! What was Billy thinking?

At first I did not know how to react. Then, the reality began to sink in.

“Mom!” I shouted. “What have you been posting on Twitter?!” I ran out into the kitchen, holding the laptop.

My mom was busy making dinner. “What is it, honey?” she asked, surprised.

I held the laptop up for her to see. “What – why -” I was so mad, that if I had been in one of those cartoons, smoke would be coming out of my ears.

“How could you have posted something like this about me on Twitter, where everyone could see it?” I demanded.

She looked shocked for a moment. “Relax! Calm down, and show me.” She sat down on one of the dining room chairs, and I handed her the laptop. Slowly, she read the article.

“I… I’m not sure what’s wrong with what I posted,” she told me finally when she was finished. I glared at her.

“How can you not see?! Don’t you know that people at my school can read this stuff?!” I yelled in response. “Besides, this information isn’t even accurate! You just assumed most of this stuff!” I stomped off to my room and slammed the door.

“Young man!” my mom shouted. “Come back here, right now!” I stayed where I was, but I heard her footsteps coming towards my room. The door opened, and my mom was standing in my doorway. From the look on her face, I knew that I was about to get busted.

“Come over here,” she told me, beckoning me towards her. I stood up and followed her into the living room.

We sat down on the couch, and she calmed down immediately. “Go ride your bike,” she instructed me. “Ride a few laps around the schoolyard. When you feel calmed down, come back home, and we’ll talk.”

I followed her instructions and rode my bike out of the garage. Suddenly, I remembered what the popular kids had told Billy.

Meet me this afternoon on the schoolyard. We need to talk.

Something important was going to happen. I couldn’t miss it. I peddled as fast as I could, and when I reached the schoolyard, I could see figures standing on the basketball court. One of them was unmistakably Billy. I parked my bike and ran over, anxious to see what was happening.

Billy was standing on one side of the court, and all the popular kids were on the other side. I could hear them arguing. It didn’t sound so good.

“I take back what I said at lunchtime. You aren’t loyal to us. Why did you defend that loser when we were on the bus? If you want to be one of us, you can’t be loyal to anyone else.”

Billy looked scared, but I couldn’t blame him. The kid was taller than him, and looked very tough. I recognized him–John, a kid in my English class. He could be so intimidating that even the teachers didn’t dare to mess with him.

Billy sighed, and didn’t say anything. Then, he looked up and saw me, standing there. His eyes suddenly grew hopeful. None of the popular kids noticed.

“Just a few minutes ago, when we were pushing the little kids, what were you doing? You just stood there, watching. You can’t be one of us. You’re… a loser.”

John nodded to his gang, and they charged at him. They lifted him up, and threw him onto the ground. I couldn’t watch. I ran towards them, even though they were all taller and heavier than me, and I had no chance of beating them in a fight. Even so, I tried to push them off Billy, but they were too heavy. Now, the entire gang was focused on me, so Billy stood up. I wasn’t so fortunate, though. They pushed me down to the ground, and I couldn’t get up. Just as I felt as if I was suffocating, Billy came to the rescue. He grabbed one of the kids off of me and pulled me out of the human pile. Then, he pulled me up, helping me to my feet. I stood up and ran off.

I thought I was safe as I ran towards the edge of the basketball court. However, I didn’t expect that one of the kids–Ben–was standing there at the edge. He tripped me over as I ran, and I struggled to get up. Then Ben leaped on top of me.

“Help!” I yelled. Billy, however, was running over to save me.

It was just that look in his eye, that look of concern, that told me that he was my friend again. It all seemed to happen in slow motion, the way he took each long stride over, coming to save me. He was no longer mad at me, and now, he was going to save me. I couldn’t thank him enough.

Billy shoved Ben off of me from behind, and grabbed my arm. He pulled me towards the edge of the schoolyard. “Run!” he shouted to me.

I began to run out of the schoolyard, with Billy following me. I looked back, expecting to see Ben following us. I saw him sitting on the basketball court, looking surprised and shocked. He won’t be chasing us anytime soon, I thought. As I ran out of the schoolyard, I grabbed my bike and began riding with Billy running after me. I didn’t know where we were going, but it felt good to be going somewhere with Billy again. I realized that I was heading home, and I looked back at Billy. He nodded, telling me to keep going. So I biked on.

Once I was at my house, I hopped off my bike and turned to Billy. “You were quite impressive,” he told me with a smile. “That was really cool, the way you took them out.” I nodded. Did this mean he was my friend again? I decided to find out.

“Hey, Billy, wanna come inside my house and hang out?” I asked. To my relief, he nodded. When we headed inside, I found my mom hanging out on the laptop. Uh oh, I thought. My mom doesn’t mix well with computers. I walked over to her.

“Uh, mom?” I asked nervously. Billy, seeing that this was between me and my mom, took a step back. “Have you been posting… other stuff?” I walked over and looked at the screen of my mom’s laptop. Twitter. That wasn’t a good sign.

My mom smiled at me. “Bob, I’m really sorry if I had been posting offensive things about you and Billy. I promise that I’ll try to control myself better on social media.” She turned the laptop over to me. “Here, I wrote an article to make it up to you.”

Nervously, I read the article.

I’m sorry about the article that I last posted. Turns out, it isn’t so true, and Bob’s friend Billy is far from mean. And Bob is way more capable than I thought. He survived the trip down the waterfall, and that was way more than I expected. So, Bob, please understand that I am sorry for what I posted.  You are braver than I thought you would be, and I am proud of you.

For a moment, I was silent. Well, close enough. I sat up and embraced my mom, not at all embarrassed. “Thanks, Mom,” I said. “Thanks for posting this.” My mom smiled back, hugging me tighter.

“I’m very proud of you, Bob. You acted very wisely, and I am glad that you survived, and I’m sorry for posting the offensive material. Now, why don’t you go hang out with Billy for a while? I don’t want to distract you guys,” she told me, letting me go. I nodded to her, and walked over to where Billy was standing. Suddenly, an idea popped into my mind.

“Hey, Billy, I just wanted to ask you something,” I told him. He turned to me, and nodded. I felt so happy that we were speaking to each other again now. I couldn’t resist smiling.

“Yeah?”

“Well, I wanted to ask… would you like to go on another kayaking trip with me?”

Slowly, a smile formed across Billy’s face. “Yeah, sure… I guess so.” He was practically grinning by now. “Hey, by the way, I wanted to tell you… I’m really sorry about the whole kayaking thing in the first place. I shouldn’t have called you a scaredy, and I’ll admit that I had a really bad temper.” He sighed. “I guess you deserve to know what happened.”

I nodded. Billy went on.

“Well, the popular kids–they wanted to be my friends, and I wanted to have them as friends, too. I cared so much about popularity at that time. But then, when they found out that I often hung out with you, they rejected me. They told me you were a dork, and that you weren’t “cool” enough. So for me, the only clear solution at that time was to get rid of you. Of course, that wasn’t the right solution. You may be a dork, but you are a loyal friend, unlike the popular kids. When I found out the truth about the popular kids, I couldn’t believe it. They weren’t my friends. You are, and you always will be.”

It was hard to believe that Billy could be so foolish, or that he thought I was dorky, but I didn’t mention that. I nodded, and smiled. “Hey, it’s fine,” I told him. “Wanna go find the kayak in the garage? Maybe we can go tomorrow.”

He nodded, and we walked side by side into the garage, the way we had since we were 4 years old. Because we were friends, and we always will be.

And, like Billy said, nothing could ever change that.

The End

 

The Ultimate Paintball Match

Patrick Kane and Jonathan Toews need to beat Roman Reigns, Brock Lesnar, and Roman Atwood in a paintball match to win one billion dollars. Let me tell you how this started.

Patrick Kane and Jonathan Toews were at a WWE match and Brock missed a punch and hit Kane in the face. Without missing a beat, John Cena, Randy Orton, and Sting came up to beat up Brock Lesnar. Then Roman Reigns came out and tried to get everyone off of Brock, but he failed and he got hurt. Then Patrick Kane made a bet for 1 billion dollars on a paintball match. He had beat Brock Lesnar, Reigns, and Atwood. However, although Atwood said he was on one team, he was actually on the other: the team with Kane and Toews.

Why did he do that? Because Lesnar used to be Atwood’s best friend, but when he let Lesnar borrow his car, Lesnar blew it up accidentally.

They were playing at the Richmond Hunt Club Paintball fields. They started at 9 a.m., and the referee was to be MATT SAMPSON. The name of the game was Team Death Match.

 

It was 9 a.m… 5-4-3-2-1… go, go, go!

Right off the bat, Toews was shot. Then Atwood shot Raines.  

“Oh, I knew you didn’t like me,” Lesnar said angrily to Atwood.

It was just down to three. Then, Kane was shot. Lesnar took a shot, and it hit Atwood.

“You are out!” said Lesnar.

But the referee yelled, “No good, no good! Play on.”

Atwood got on top of a barrier, jumped, did a 360, shot, and hit Lesnar.

“You are out, that’s game,” said the ref as he pointed to the winners.

“Why did you change teams?” asked Lesner.

Boom!

A mushroom cloud came from the parking lot where only Lesnar had parked his car.

“That’s my new car!” said Lesnar. “Did you blow up my car because I blew up yours?” he asked.

All of the people on the winning team got one billion dollars and split the cost to buy the Willis Tower, which they made into a ski mountain so that they could play paintball. Lesnar tried to steal the money back, but Atwood caught him.

Now Lesnar is facing life in prison.

Star Gazer (Excerpt)

  

Chapter Two

“Day One, complete. Over,” I said into the radio. I was about to lay down in bed when Ainsley came over. I bet it wasn’t to wish me goodnight.

“You’re looking… lovely,” she said with distaste.

I was looking terrible, my eyes tired and my usually stick-straight auburn hair jutting up in odd places.

Of course she, the queen of beauty, was looking as magnificent as ever. Her silky hair was combed to perfection and her face was bright, despite the hour and condition of the living space in the ship.

“I just wanted you to know that just because your daddy is a great astronaut, does not mean you are too. So stop trying to pretend you know everything,” Ainsley snapped.

I expected this from a brat like her, so I had something to say back.

“Well, I just want you to know, that I have no intention of being like my ‘daddy’ at all, but I’m sure that you’ll turn out to be the exact same jerk he was.”

I was very proud with my response; I had always planned to say something like that in case someone insulted me. I lay down and turned to the other side of the bed, hiding my smirk from her boiling face. When I heard the sound of her retreating footsteps, I turned back to watch her hobbling body strained with muscle pains.

I groaned. She even managed to make that look graceful.

. . .

In my dreams, I saw my father. He was living another life, with his new wife and kids. I already knew this, but for some reason, I felt like I was seeing it for the first time. I was feeling the weight of his betrayal all over again.

When I was little, I was my father’s favorite. He was convinced that I would turn out just like him. I guess he didn’t know how he would turn out.

He faced me, unsurprised, almost as if he was the one who summoned me in the first place.

“I-”

“Don’t start, Alex,” my father said.

His voice had gotten lighter since the last time I saw him, like he didn’t have the burden he had when he was with our family.

I don’t know why I listened to him. I shouldn’t have listened to him, but something made me stop myself from grabbing him and screaming in his face.

His face had also changed since the last time. He had lines near his eyes, not worry lines, but lines you get when you smile a lot.

I knew that this was what he looked like. One summer, I did an internship at NASA, and they had a reunion with all their former astronauts. My dad was there. I saw him. But before he could see me, I ran and hid in the bathroom until the party was over. I wasn’t brave enough to face him yet.

He took a deep breath and started to talk. “I-I can’t think of any way to say this but, I’m leaving.”

This was his confrontation to me all over again. This was the exact same way he told me that he was leaving my mother. That he was leaving our family.

Of course this wasn’t what had really happened. He didn’t have his new wife and kids by then.

“I know,” I said solemnly. “I know.” This wasn’t even that emotional for me because I had experienced this before, and I didn’t care much for my father now.

I finally decided to ask him why he left, even though he wasn’t real.

“Why?”

He opened his mouth to answer, but before he could make a sound, I was shaken awake.

Guess who it was. Ainsley.

“It’s your turn to man the controls, and you might want to brush your teeth while you’re at it,” she said curtly.

I moaned. “Can’t we just put it on autopilot?”

“It is, but we need to keep watch so everything goes smoothly. I thought you knew everything.”

I got up so she could sleep and asked, “Butch is going after me, right?”

”Yeah,” she answered through a yawn.

I wobbled to the main area of the ship and sat at the main control desk watching the autopilot steer us on course.

It would take another two hundred and ninety-nine days to reach our Martian destination. After spending four hundred Earth-days there, we would go back to Earth within three hundred days.

Again.

The only thing besides Ainsley I wasn’t compatible with on this journey was being away from my family for so long. With what little money we had left, they could easily starve or go bankrupt while I was in space. But when SCAT told me they would pay my family monthly during my mission, I decided that no harm could be done.

The autopilot showed no signs of malfunction, so I decided to doze off a little. After all, we had the most advanced technology for this trip than any other organization on Earth.

A beeping alarm informed me that the gas pipe down in the engines was loose. Apparently the engineers didn’t connect it tight enough to the boiler in all their rush to finish the ship.

I went down to the chilly engine room after grabbing a hoodie from my living space.

I took a gas mask from a  hook on the wall and strung it over my head while floating (due to the zero gravity below the main spaces in the ship) to the leaking gas pipe.

I took a look at the cracked metal of the pipe and turned away from the spraying fuel. There had to be a toolbox somewhere. Searching, I found it under a table in the middle of the maze-like engine room with a half-finished project on top.

When I found my way back to the leaking pipe (after getting lost) I managed to make a somewhat convincing plaster to patch the pipe until I could get Butch to look at it.

On my way back up I noticed that a few drops of gasoline had managed to get on my hoodie before I had patched up the crack in the pipe, but I ignored it as I made my way to the library of the ship, which was by far, the warmest room, thanks to the fireplace.

While the fire dried the gasoline off my sweatshirt, I decided to take a book or two back to the controls with me in case I got bored.

After roaming the endless shelves I went back to the controls with two of my favorite novels in hand. Before I knew it, Butch was coming to take his turn on watch. He was always prepared.

“You might want to take those back to your room,” he said as he swaggered over to the control panel and sat down at the other seat.

“Oh, I was, umm… just about to leave,” I explained. I dog-eared my page, closed my novel, and hurriedly got up from the seat.

“Knowing you, I bet you were planning to stay in that book world of yours,” he said jokingly.

The Boy, the Woman, and the Forest

Today was an average spring day. Even though (here in Alabama) spring days like those happen to pop up a lot here, it was still brilliant. The sky was more than blue. It was full of shadows and highlights and so many hues. The air out here in the country filled my lungs, heart, and soul. It was that fresh. And out there in the wilderness, there was the constant circulation of life. And that life was as much in the air, as the oxygen and carbon dioxide.

Today, however, I heard something other than the slow breeze. In the brush, there was a small boy. He had short hair that was so blond it was almost white. The poor boy had a mixture of dirt and tears on his face, with puffy eyes, that under normal circumstances, would be a brilliant blue. But today, his eyes were red, with small amounts of blue shining through. He had a torn red shirt with splotches of red and brown. His tearstreaked face screamed “innocence,” so I guessed that he might be from 10 to 11 years old. It pained me to imagine what or who would do this to this poor boy.

I watched the boy tear through the trees, like he was being chased by death itself. In his insane and desperate panic, he didn’t notice me. The boy started to slow. Now that his face wasn’t as blurred, I could clearly see how afraid he was. I wanted to call out to him. So I did.

“Hello?” I cried.

The boy jumped a foot off the ground at hearing my call. He looked around wildly for the source of the sound, and soon found me. I can’t say he grinned at the sight of my face, but he did seem to be a tiny bit relieved to find that I was not his pursuer.

“Hey. Are you okay?” I said. I knew it was a stupid question, it was important to know if he trusted me. I hoped he did.

He sniffed, “No.”

In an instant, feelings for this boy exploded in my soul. All in one moment, I wanted to track down whoever hurt this boy, hurt them, kill them maybe, all while being the mother of this boy, and giving him everything I have. I don’t know where this sympathy came from, but I wasn’t quick to stop thinking these thoughts. I inched toward the boy. I could protect him, and he could be the son I never could have. On a day like this, in a time like this, a miracle like this needs to be accepted.

Somewhere in my desperate brain, someone said, He still has family. And besides, he doesn’t even know you. For all you know, he still has love for his home and would be heartbroken to be torn away from his normal life. Or not. Or yes. It’s worth my time to see if this isn’t or is the case.

“Come here,” I said softly. I was not sure how I will come across as. Supportive? Nosy? Motherly even?

The boy walked towards me slowly, cracking and disrupting the silence.

“Where do you you come from?” I asked

“What do you mean?” He whispered, his voice barely audible.

“Where’s your family? What happened to you?” I asked.

The boy burst into tears, and collapsed on the ground, defeat weighing down on his shoulders. I rushed to his side, and wrapped my arms around him, feining sorrow. But inside, I was really rejoicing! This boy, this child, his suffering was caused by his family, and I doubt he’ll want to go back to that! This boy can be mine! I can protect him, and he will be my son. The son I could never have.

Far Past Is An Unknown Thing

An experience is either forgotten immediately, or never forgotten. Even when there are years between it, there is always something brought with you, and sometimes, even you don’t notice it. It’s always there, haunting you to your core, and you don’t notice until you break. Then nobody knows what will happen. You decide between the two choices, the two changes and chances to survive. You change your way of life. You change yourself. You discover things nobody has seen before.

That’s what happened to me. I stare into the distance not knowing what I’m looking at and not caring. The only thing that matters is that I escape. It’s getting to me. It’s the future. I can’t stop it. I don’t try, knowing that it’s no use. There was change again. I stopped running through the woods and sat down to write something. In case my village survives. In case someone, as curious as I am, reads it, so they know what I know. I hid the letter, and it told of all I knew, all I discovered. I hid it. I hid it somewhere only the curious ones can find it. This will be gone from eyes until that one person finds it. I know they are going to keep it a secret. That nothing goes wrong. I know of things nobody else does. I’ve seen things that others will gape at. I never dared to tell a soul, and I hope that the chosen one who finds it will not. There is something among us, good and bad, just like us humans, but so unlike all the same. I’ll leave the letter and run into the flames, the light of hope reflecting in my eyes. I looked back to the stream, and the fallen tree. I hope someone finds it far into the future. I hope that it won’t fall into the wrong hands. I took a deep breath and said a silent goodbye.

As soon as I turned around, I see them surrounding me. I was thrown into the flames with everyone else. I didn’t care that I was dying. I had hope. Someone will find it.

I will probably be just the far past to them.

Odysseus and the Cyclops

  

NARRATOR

For many days Odysseus and his ships wandered the empty seas for sanctuary. The Trojan war had ended and Odysseus and his men were returning home to the island of Ithaca. There his wife Penelope and his son Telemachus were waiting for him. Ten years had passed since he had laid eyes on them. Finally, they washed up on the shore of a mysterious island.

 

ODYSSEUS

Men, the gods have blessed us with refuge from the vigorous sea. (Stands tall, looks at men proudly.) Let’s explore the island.

(MEN nod in agreement.)

 

NARRATOR

As the men wander the island, they come across something unexpected.

MAN 3

Um, you might want to see this. (Looks at cave in astonishment.)

MAN 1

It looks like a giant cave!

MAN 2

Let’s explore it!

(MEN walk into cave.)

(Gasp in astonishment.)

NARRATOR

The walls were lined with jugs of milk and cheese as tall as a man. The men ate and ate until they couldn’t eat anymore.

(MEN slouch moan and hold stomachs.)

MAN 4

(Groans.) I’m so full.

MAN 1

So am I. I’ve never been any fuller in my entire life!

NARRATOR

Suddenly the cave shook.

MAN 3

Ahhh! Is this an earthquake?!

(MEN lie down, scared.)

NARRATOR

No. It wasn’t an earthquake, but a gigantic, hairy, one-eyed freak of nature, the Cyclops!

(Leads sheep into cave, sheep bleat, CYCLOPS looks at men with anger.)

CYCLOPS

You ate my food! You will be punished!

[Picks up two MEN (2&3) eats them, burps loudly. MEN look at CYCLOPS terrified.]

ODYSSEUS

Now that you have eaten, you must drink.

(Hands CYCLOPS giant wine jug.)

CYCLOPS

(Drinks wine, wipes mouth.) (Contented sigh.) Thank you for the Trojan wine. What is your name?

ODYSSEUS

My name is Nobody.

CYCLOPS

Nice name. My gift for you is that you will be eaten last. (Falls asleep, snores loudly)

MAN 4

Stab him with your sword, Odysseus!

ODYSSEUS

My sword is useless. He is huge. Instead, we can sharpen that log into a spear and set it on fire!  We can poke the Cyclops’s eye out with it.

(Men start working on spear.)

NARRATOR

The Cyclops started to stir.

(CYCLOPS stretches, yawns.)

ODYSSEUS

Set the log on fire!

(MEN charge into CYCLOPS’s eye.)

CYCLOPS

Aaargh! What have you done?!

OTHER CYCLOPS

(Walks over.) What happened?!

CYCLOPS

Nobody has blinded me!

OTHER CYCLOPS

You must have been dreaming. (Walks away.)

CYCLOPS

Nobody, you will pay for this!

(He lets sheep out.)

ODYSSEUS

Tie two sheep together then tie yourself to the sheep.

(Men tie themselves to sheep. Sheep walk out with men tied to them.)

CYCLOPS

I won’t let you escape! (Touches the tops of sheep looking for men.)

NARRATOR

Odysseus and his men were free! They rejoiced for having escaped the Cyclops, but mourned for their friends that had been eaten. They continued on their voyage back to Ithaca.

Fawn

Chapter One: Humans

 

It was a late summer evening in the forest. The sun was shining through the leaves of the birch trees, the ones near Fawn’s home. The early autumn leaves were just beginning to change colors, a sort of disco lighting of red, orange, and yellow. The streak of colors across the sky matched the leaves. Fawn, a young deer, was playing with his deer friend Abigail.

“Fawn, I ever tell you of humans?” she said sweetly.

“No,” said Fawn. “But my mom has.”

Abigail’s head tilted slightly to the right. She looked up at the sky as if she was looking for something… no not something, some story!

“Here we go again!” Fawn mumbled. Just then, the ground began to tremble. I guess the ground is shaking because it is trying to plug its ears, he thought.

“Well I know a story that I bet your mo — ”

But as Abigail said that there was a faint rumble and the ground shook more.

“Abigail, did you hear that?” Fawn interrupted.

“No,” Abigail said, frustrated that Fawn was interrupting her. “So one day my mom was wal

“Listen! There it is again!” Fawn said.

In the distance, Abigail and Fawn heard a loud rumble. It sounded dangerously close and the sky turned dark gray as a huge gust of wind blew in their direction, scattering leaves on the forest floor.

“I do hear it!” Abigail agreed. “And it’s getting louder!”

“The louder, the closer!” Fawn warned. “Let’s get out of here. It’s too dangerous! You can tell me the story when we’re safe in our den.”

“Come on, it’s not too loud. Now, let me tell the story!”

But before Abigail could say anything, a huge, tall, green monster-looking thing was tearing down the beautiful birch trees and charging straight towards them. All the bushes that formed a barrier around them were being uprooted; Abigail’s and Fawn’s hideout was destroyed. Mulch, bark, and twigs flew everywhere and smoke that made Fawn and Abigail cough filled the air. Fawn looked to see where it was coming from: out of the back of the monster. He felt an anger smolder inside of him. His face scrunched up in frustration and his big, soft, brown eyes became watery. This was his home! As much as he wanted to fight the monster, he needed to get Abigail to safety first. She was staring at the monster in awe, and looked as if she were paralyzed.

“AAAHHH!” Abigail screamed when she finally came back up to life.

“Hurry, Abigail. Follow me!” Fawn hastily instructed.

Fawn started dashing towards the other side of the woods where his home was, but when looked back he saw the monster right behind Abigail.

“HELP!” Abigail said frantically.

“I’m coming!” Fawn yelled, charging towards the monster, but he was not in time. The monster trampled over her back leg.

“Owww,” Abigail screeched in pain.

Without thinking, Fawn rammed into Abigail, knocking her into a bush out of the monster’s path. After that, he sprinted towards the bush to help Abigail.

 

Chapter 2: What is Going On?

 

“Ow, it hurts!” Abigail cried.

“Don’t worry, it will be over soon,” Fawn’s mother, Rebecca, said, while tending to Abigail’s wounds.

“Fawn, dear, since you are not hurt, can you go get Abigail’s mother and bring her to our den?” Rebecca said.

“Sure,” Fawn said reluctantly, for he didn’t want to leave Abigail’s side. But before Fawn could step out of the den, Lemo, Fawn’s family friend, rushed to the den, his front leg limping.

“Humans, smoke, death!” he panted.

“Lemo, calm down, and where is Juniper?” Rebecca was suddenly worried about her husband. She paused to look at Lemo’s leg. It was bleeding from a huge gash.

“Fawn, continue with what I asked you to do,” she said with urgency.

Fawn dashed with his remaining strength to fetch Abigail’s mom. He came back to the den with Abigail’s mom. When he got there, many animals, excluding their enemies, had arrived. Most were wounded and some couldn’t even budge. Abigail’s mom looked at Abigail. Her eyes started to water, but she wiped away her tears and she agreed to help the other animals.

“My daughter, Abigail,” she said. “That must’ve been very scary for you. And Fawn, thank you for saving her. That was so brave! I didn’t know you had that in you!”

Fawn blushed.

It really wasn’t much. I wasn’t even able to save her from getting hurt! he thought.

More animals arrived. There was still no sign of Fawn’s father, and it began to get very crowded. Thankfully, Abigail’s mother had gone out for more help and come back with several animals who wanted to help.

 

Chapter 3: Sad Times

 

Lemo lifted up his head and opened his mouth to say something, but he had no strength. He laid his head back down to rest. Many deaths had occurred in those last two hours. Some of Fawn’s other friend’s parents, brothers, aunts, uncles and cousins had died. No animal in the forest had escaped losing someone. But some of the other animals had gotten better. They still couldn’t speak, but they sat up and looked around, including Lemo, who started looking around wide-eyed. Some of the younger ones even started getting up and playing. It would have been a happy place, if it weren’t for the deaths. More volunteers came to help. Most of them had just been informed about a loved one’s death.

Lemo started limping towards Fawn and his mother. Once Rebecca had made him comfy, he explain what happened.

“Your father and I were on our way home when we saw a human. He was holding a sort of stick, a cane-looking shape,” Lemo paused. “Then before we knew it, the man was holding up that stick to your father. The next thing we saw was smoke everywhere.”

Fawn opened his mouth in fascination, for he didn’t know what Lemo was about to tell him. Rebecca looked very scared. Lemo looked down ashamed.

“Then the man aimed it at me,” he continued. “I managed to escape, but after the man had gone I saw that your father had completely collapsed. I rested my muzzle on him, but it was too late, his heartbeat had gone.

“Juniper,” Lemo paused, “is dead!”

Then the trio all burst into tears.

 

Chapter four: Aftermath

 

A week after the incident, on a dark and stormy morning, Abigail and Fawn went back to their hideout to play. As they arrived, they saw all the uprooted bushes, scattered leaves and fallen logs everywhere. In frustration, Fawn kicked a rock only to find that it landed just two feet away.

“Stupid humans!” he yelled.

Abigail shook her head and walked to where the rock was. She placed it at Fawn’s feet, where it had originally been. “Even though they destroyed our hideout, they are living creatures like us. We must respect them,” Abigail said cautiously.

“Yeah, we must respect that they hurt you and KILLED my dad,” Fawn said sarcastically, his voice spilling with anger. “We should fight back! That will show them not to mess with us again!”

Abigail rolled her eyes. Typical boy, she thought. “Well, how are you supposed to do that? Plus, you saw what the humans did. How are you going to fight back against that?” She stuck out her right hoof, just missing his chest.

”Easy,” Fawn said. “With the help of all the forest animals! I bet humans are more scared of bears and wolves than us!’

”Well, don’t expect me to help.” Abigail walked off slowly. She didn’t know exactly where she was going, but she needed to show Fawn that he needed to walk away from what he was planning to do.

“But you’re my friend,” Fawn said, devastated at Abigail’s actions. “We have to help each other!”

“No, I am not going to help you. I’ve already said that, and I am not changing my mind. Besides, how are you going to get the bears and wolves on our — your side?” With that, Abigail ran off.

As Fawn watched Abigail flee into the forest, he dropped onto the ground and bowed his head.

Yeah, how? Fawn thought, with his head still bent.

He trudged home thinking about what Abigail had said.

She can’t just walk off like that — she’s my friend! Fawn thought. And I guess she forgot that I saved her life! If another monster comes her way, it serves her right if she becomes a monster’s lunch! Fawn thought, then sank his head low, a tear escaping his eye. “I guess she’s not my friend anymore.” Fawn cried as he dashed home.

 

Chapter Five: Plan A and B (and C)

 

On the way to his home, Fawn bumped into the chief bear. Fawn had heard of the chief bear and had seen him at forest gatherings from time to time, but he had never been this close to him. He jumped back in surprise that he, a young deer, was meeting the chief bear. Fawn had to crane his neck to see him. He was huge with thick, matted, brown, shaggy fur. He had a broad snout and a large face with small eyes, which Fawn thought didn’t go with the rest of his body.

“We have heard of your plan and we agree to help you for revenge on the humans,” the chief bear said in a voice deep from his belly. “We will do everything we can to stop them.” The bear stomped his foot, which made Fawn shake.

“Okay?” Fawn said awkwardly. He was recovering from the shock of the shake and the fact that he was meeting the chief bear. And not only that, the bear was going to help him.

The bear turned around and lumbered toward a rocky mountainside. Then, he rolled away a rock and disappeared into a dark cave.

One burden off, another one to go, Fawn thought. As soon as he arrived home, he started to think about how to get the wolves to cooperate.

Hmmm, what to do? Fawn lowered his ears as he thought. Maybe I could lower them pieces of food? His ears perked up. Nah, how about reasoning with them? His ears went back down. I doubt that will workwolves like action agreements, not verbal agreements but I’ll put it down as plan A. Then Fawn wrote it down in clay on the wall.

Now for plan B. How about I lie and say I saw humans kill eighteen wolves and… four pups? That will make them really angry and they will agree to help in order to get revenge on the humans. Fawn dipped his hoof into the wet clay.

Last, but not least, plan C. You never know, wolves are not the easiest creatures to persuade. I think we will fight fire with fire: force them to help with bear influence. Fawn smiled at himself.

As he was writing the last letters of his idea, he heard a voice.

“Those are some nice plans, Fawn.”

Fawn jumped up in surprise.

“You sure wouldn’t want the wolves to know?”

Fawn saw a ghostly shadow from his window, but he was too afraid to even investigate.

“Of course I want them to know, because my goal is to stop you.”

 

Chapter Six: The Challenge

 

Fawn’s blood froze when he saw who spoke the threat: Abigail.

She fixed her amber eyes on him while she stood like a statue and stared at him coldly.

“I saved your life,” Fawn managed to say.

“Yes, you did, which means you can spare the humans’ as well,” Abigail replied.

“Never!” Fawn said through gritted teeth. He resisted the urge to tackle her.

“Then you are not worthy of being the one who saved my life.”

There was a slight pang in Fawn’s heart. That was the very thing everyone was praising him aboutsaving Abigail. It’s only worth praising about if the person he saved thinks it’s still worth praising. All of those praises meant nothing now.

Abigail turned around to leave.

“Be careful,” she said. “I just might do what I said.” Then she bounded away so quietly you’d think she was never there.

“Okay,” Fawn said aloud as if to call after her. “Fine. If you want a battle, I’ll take it.” Then he quickly added, “And win!” I’d better go to the wolves tomorrow, he thought, before Abigail spills my plan. But not today. I don’t think I am ready yet.

The next day went smoothly. Fawn had gotten most of the animals to help, discussed his plans and did some practice runs on ambushing and destroying humans. But then came the time that he had dreaded and wished would never come. The time to consult the wolves.

 

Chapter 7: Wolf Forest

 

Fawn trudged toward the forbidden part of the forest. Why was it forbidden? You could guess. The wolves lived there, bathed there, and hunted there most of the time, and nobody wanted to go near them.

As Fawn drew closer and closer, his legs began to shake, his head started to droop, and his hair stood up on one end. He tried to tell himself to be brave, but that made it worse. By this time, he wanted to run to the safety of his mother and never set hoof near the forbidden forest again. Then Fawn heard something that made him jump. A wolf’s howl. Although it was distant, it made Fawn more discouraged to go in. Just as he was about to enter, he decided to give himself a pep talk, which went well on the first sentence….

“Okay, Fawn. You know what you’re about to do is for a good cause.”

But the last sentence made him even more discouraged.

“… Even if the wolves make you lunch.”

When Fawn finally got his act together, he started making his way through the forbidden forest to where the wolves lived. Once Fawn stepped in, it was like walking into an endless night. He could barely see his own legs. There were large, ink-black oak trees, which blended into the darkness and made it harder to figure out what was a tree and what wasn’t. Fawn guessed that there had been a rainstorm because the ground was very moist with damp-looking leaves scattered across the forest floor.

Just then, Fawn passed a bloodstained tree with pieces of fur at its roots. This gave him the creeps. He passed more of them, each more bloody than before, with animal bones or fur scattered around the trees. He remembered his dad telling him that if you follow the fur and the bone markings, you will reach the wolves’ den. Fawn could see the pattern – every five trees there was another marking.

As he approached the last marking to the wolves’ den, there lay one of the scariest sights Fawn had ever seen: a dead wolf with an arrow sticking out of its head! Fawn screamed.

After what had felt like forever, he had reached the den.

“Who’s there?!” the leader of the pack’s voice boomed from the cave.

Fawn gulped, then cleared his throat and said, “I am Fawn… from the other side of the for” The leader of the pack appeared, and Fawn stared in awe at the wolf leader.

His usually beautiful, grey shaggy fur was drenched in blood, his muzzle covered in it, and his leg was limping. The pack leader, Kay, tried to put on his wolf stare to shadow his weakness, but failed.

“We do not want you here.”

“I came to help,” Fawn replied.

“We don’t need it,” Kay said, looking as if it hurt to even say that, emotionally and physically.

Fawn gave Kay an observant look, from his head to this claws. “You look like you do.”

“Well….” Kay tilted his head to the side. Then straightened it and narrowed his eyes. “No,” he said firmly. Then he turned around to return to his cave.

“Wait!” Fawn called after him.

“We do not want you here, and I wish not to repeat that ONE MORE TIME,” Kay said through clenched teeth.

Fawn was very tempted to go home, but resisted the urge and gathered up his remaining courage and hope.

“You must help me then…” Fawn’s voice trailed off, unable to speak. His nerves had gotten the best of him. Fawn was always the good boy. He never was rebellious like the others. When the others went to the field, where the mothers didn’t want them to go, he would stay. This was the first time he had ever talked back to or challenged an adult. He had never even disobeyed a mother ladybug!

“Help you!” Kay chuckled. “A little deer wants help from me, the wolf! I can’t believe my ears!”

Fawn felt his cheeks get hot with anger and embarrassment.

“Shouldn’t this baby deer go back to Mommy? He will be safer there. He is too small to do anything.”

For a moment, that reminded Fawn of running back to his mother. No, he thought. I cannot do that. Fawn could not hold it in anymore. He burst with anger.

“Well, I am not as small as you think I am,” he said angrily. “I came up with the plan to destroy the humans. I have set up defense forces against the humans and my forest was destroyed by humans…” Fawn paused to take a few breaths.

“AND THAT IS WHY I AM HERE! TO ASK YOU TO HELP ME TO DESTROY THE HUMANS TO SAVE MY FOREST!” Fawn shouted. He had never been this angrynot since the humans had attacked.

“Okay, okay,” Kay said stepping backwards. “Calm down, kid, we will…”

“CALM DOWN?! CALM DOWN?! OUR FOREST HAS BEEN DESTROYED! HOW CAN YOU “CALM DOWN,” WOLF?”

“Ahem,” Kay cleared his throat. “We will cooperate… if there is something in it for us, which is?”

“The assurance of security against the humans,” Fawn said in relief.

Kay tilted his head.

“Which will make your job as a pack leader easier,” Fawn added.

“Okay, but there has be something. Everyone is getting security! We want something in addition to that,” Kay said.

“Which is… ?” Fawn questioned him, annoyed.

“That we have fresh meat ready for us everyday, meaning four animal sacrifices each day for us to kill,”Kay said with a hint of excitement.

Fawn gave him a “you’re crazy” look and knew what the other forest animals would say if he said yes. Traitor!

I think he turned into a wolf over night! Who does he think he is?! He thinks he is so great he can sacrifice any of us!

Fawn tried to shake the thought out of his head, but it was still lingering in there.

“So is it a yes or a no? If no, deals off,” Kay said impatiently. “We don’t have all day!”

“I – I need some time to think about it,” Fawn stammered.

Kay sighed. “I need an answer in the next three days. If not, the deal’s off.” Then he turned around and disappeared into the den’s deep, damp, and dark entrance.

 

Chapter 8: Troubling Choices

 

This probably will be the most challenging decision I will ever make, thought Fawn. He sat on the clover patch under a tree and frowned. He didn’t expect the wolves to have such a ridiculous request. Maybe in the back of his mind he expected it. Wolves are quite vicious and sly. There always has to be something in it for them.

He sighed. He started nibbling at the grass. That was what he always did when he was either anxious or really hungry. He got up and made his final decisionto ask the Animal Council for help. He knew what they would say, but at least he would get some kind of consult. Or get an idea to help him make his decision.

Fawn walked off in the direction of the Animal Oak Tree. It was a huge oak, almost as thick as 50 bears. It was home to a wise old owl, the head of the Animal Council, along with Mr. Rabbit, Fred the Frog and a few other animals. They had a wolf and a bear as part of the council, but they didn’t attend the meetings very often. You’d see bears once in awhile, but it would be a very critical circumstance when the wolves would attend such as when the humans attacked. With a lot of persuading, they finally attended.

Finally, Fawn had arrived at the large oak. As usual, Mr. Badger was at the entrance. He was used to this place. He knew almost everyone on the council because his dad had been part of it. Coming back to the place made Fawn a bit sad. Abigail’s father also used to attend. So did Lemo, who quit, because Fawn’s father was no longer there. Fawn and Abigail used to always hide behind a bush near the window where they held the council meetings, eavesdropping in on what was going on. Then they would inform all of their friends, and their friends would inform their friends. But the one person they never told was Bobby, the mole. One time they told him something, and he dashed down into the ground, buried a hole, and dug a tunnel straight to his parents. He was so desperate to tell his parents because he loved telling others’ secrets.

Fawn approached Mr. Badger.

“Good day, Fawn. I’m very sorry your father passed. The council has not been the same without him.” He put his paw on Fawn’s shoulder. “So,” he continued. “What made you pop by here today?”

“I would like to see Wise Old Owl.”

“Why is that?” Badger asked.

“Oh. It’s just a little something that’s been bothering me.”

“You can come inside and wait in the lobby. I’ll tell him that you want a consult. And by the way, what is it?”

“Don’t worry,” said Fawn. “You’ll find out soon.”

Before Fawn knew it, he was sitting in Wise Old Owl’s office. It was at the very top of the oak so Wise Owl could see the whole forest (or most of it.) Fawn had been here twice before. The first time was when his father was touring him around the place. The second time was when he, Abigail, and a few of their friends played a big trick, and the whole forest got so scared. All of the animals were very angry, and they took it to the council. Fawn remembered very well sitting there, waiting for the Owl to sentence his punishment. They were not allowed to go to the meadow where all of the animals played for three days. Some of the animals thought that was too weak of a punishment, but the rest of the animals knew they were just kids and the punishment should not have been more harsh.

The door behind him opened. Fawn was brought back from his daze.

“Well, hello, Fawn. Badger has told me that you wish to have a consult. What is your problem?”

 

Chapter 9: Truth and Mistakes

 

“G-good Afternoon, Mr. Owl,” Fawn stammered. He stared in awe. Mr. Owl looked much different than when he last saw him. His white feathers were now grey. The brown feathers were now dark brown, and the tufts on his head had gone white.You could see rings under his eyes and they were very dark. Mr. Owl approached Fawn very slowly, for he was walking with a stick, something he never had before.”

“Oh,” Mr. Owl said happily. “It’s such a pleasure seeing you again, Fawn. You will definitely grow to be as kind and handsome as your father! Hmmm,” he continued. “Ah, yes, so what was the thing you wanted to share with me?”

“Er…” Fawn hesitated. “You must have heard of my plans to stop the humans.”

Mr. Owl chuckled. “Yes, go on.”

Then Fawn began to tell Mr. Owl about the past morning. How they got through the forest, what it was like, all the way to the part when Kay had struck as Fawn said “a ridiculous deal.”

“Which was?” Mr. Owl urged on.

Fawn took a deep breath then said, “He said they will only participate if,” he paused, “there are four animal sacrifices ready for them every day!” Fawn exhaled. Now it was time to find out the answer.

Mr. Owl closed his eyes in deep thought.

Fawn continued. “I wish there was a way I did not have to choose!”

There was a long silence. Mr. Owl opened his eyes and gazed up at the ceiling

“You know, your friend Abigail came to me not too long ago.”

“Oh, really!” Fawn said surprised. What does she want?! he thought.

“She came to talk to me about you and your plans,” Mr. Owl said as if he read Fawn’s mind. “She told me not only that she thinks that your plans are wrong, but that it is dangerous for the rest of the animals participating and you.”

Yeah, right, Fawn thought. Like she cares.

Mr. Owl looked at Fawn and sighed. “Children never understand,” Fawn heard him say under his breath.

“You know what? She also complained about missing you and how she was really worried about you.”

Fawn just rolled his eyes.

“Fawn, listen to me. Even if you don’t take Abigail as your friend at least think about doing what she thinks you should do. And I’ll tell you here and now that that’s the answer. Don’t say yes. Don’t say no. Refresh, restart, try again.”

 

Chapter 10: Unfortunately

   

Fawn stepped back into the endless night. He made his way to the wolves’ den faster this time. He knew his way better through the forest now. He arrived at the wolves’ den. A sudden feeling of regret and nerves washed over him.

“Kay!” Fawn called nervously.

A booming voice from the cave came in return.”Who’s there?”

Fawn swallowed. “It’s Fawn. I’ve come with an answer.”

Kay emerged out of the shadows of the cave. He sniffed the air then looked down at Fawn. The look of triumph on his face was replaced with a petrifying stare.

“You’re late!” He snarled.

“Sorry,” Fawn mumbled.

“So,” Kay circled around him. “What’s the decision?”

This is it. Fawn thought. He lifted up his head and narrowed his eyes.

“No,” he said firmly.

Kay’s mouth hung open, but when he saw Fawn look at him he scowled.

“So be it!” Kay snarled.

Fawn saw the look of defeat in Kay’s eyes, but the rest of his body remained as stiff as stone. Suddenly Kay looked up and a sudden smirk appeared on his face. Two wolves dropped down behind Fawn, then two others dropped down beside Kay, and then two more appeared! Fawn was cornered! The wolves were snarling, and their hungry gaze was fixed on Fawn.

Kay chuckled. “I knew that you were too much of a softie to let all your fellow animals die for your sake. So I brought influences. My pack is starving. We haven’t had fresh meat for days, and look what we have here a big, plump, juicy piece of fresh meat! I should’ve done this long ago!”

The wolves were closing in on him. Fawn tried to figure out what to do. His mind was racing, he couldn’t think straight anymore. One thing Fawn never thought of was dying. Of course, he knew that he would die someday, but he definitely didn’t seriously think about it.

Slash!

Fawn was knocked to the ground. Blood was pouring down his chest. He was struggling to keep his eyes open. He could barely see the wolves crowding around him. Then he heard a voice.

“Fawn!” It was Abigail!

“Help me!” he moaned.

“I’m coming! Just hold on! I’ve got to get you home!” she replied.

Fawn knew that would be impossible. He closed his eyes for the last time and took one last deep breath. As he exhaled he knew no one could stop death.

 

Epilogue

 

It had been two weeks since Fawn’s death but no one was as stricken as Abigail. The little voice in her head kept saying over and over You failed Fawn, you failed him, you failed him… and it never stopped. Abigail walked to their old hideout; it felt weird to be there again, especially without Fawn. She had not been there since… she and Fawn had that fight.

“I wish I never fought with Fawn. That started this whole thing!” she whispered to herself. She could faintly hear Fawn jumping and saying, “Abigail, come play, come play, come and play!”

A tear trickled down her cheek, then she burst into tears.

“You had so much ahead of you Fawn! Why did you have to do this? You shouldn’t have gone to the wolves’ den. It was a trap!” she shouted to the air. Abigail sighed. “It’s just not the same without you!” she whispered.

That night as Abigail laid down to sleep she began to talk to herself. “You’ve got to stop grieving. You can’t be crying and feeling bad about yourself your whole life!”

Yeah right! another voice popped up in the conversation. How can I stop when it is technically all my fault! You failed him and you deserve to feel this way!

Well, I for one believe that you tried your hardest and now all you have to do is….” By that time, Abigail was drifting off to sleep.

As Abigail looked around, she saw the hideout that she and Fawn used to have. The birch trees that surrounded her had beautiful, new, green leaves. She felt the fresh, spring breeze rustle through her fur. The sunlight danced around her and the newly grown blades of grass felt as soft as cotton.

“Wait!” she said in confusion. “This isn’t right. It’s supposed to be winter, not spring! It’s cold out and there are no leaves. In fact there is supposed to be snow outside!”

Then she heard a voice: “Yes, that is true. It is winter, but not in this memory.”

Abigail spun around to see who said that. Tears began to fill her eyes. It was… no, it couldn’t be… Fawn!

“Fawn, is that really you?” she croaked.

“Yes,” he replied.

“How the heck am I seeing you and feeling youand you’re supposed to be DEAD!” Abigail screamed in outrage. “This is impossible!” Then she burst into tears.

“Abigail! Don’t cry!” Fawn said, annoyed. “You have to stop wasting your time grieving for me and get on with your life!”

Abigail looked up and smiled. It felt great to hear that familiar, annoying, playful voice again.

“But how?” she asked.

“That, you already know. Think deeply about it, the one thing that made this how it is now.”

Abigail stared at him blankly. Fawn just chuckled.

“Goodbye, Abigail. And remember what I said. Oh, and say hello to my mother for me.”

“Bye Fawn! It’ll never be the same without you!” Then she gave Fawn a hug. Abigail’s vision began to get hazy then…

Plick.

Abigail awoke to a drop of snow on her nose. Last night’s conversation was still quite vivid in her memory, but the warm feel of the sun disappeared and was replaced with the harsh, cold, biting feeling of snow. She got up out of her sleeping spot and trudged through the knee-high snow to the Animal Oak Tree to get shelter from the falling snow, that was starting to turn into a blizzard. She entered the oak to the sound of constant chatter. The noise was so deafening

Abigail had to plug her ears, while she pushed through the crowd to get to Wise Old Owl’s office.

She groaned. The line in front of Mr. Owl’s office was so long she couldn’t even see his office door. The hallway was crowded. Animals here. Animals there. Abigail could hear the fast chit chatter of the rabbits, the hollow voice of the toads, and the high pitched squeaks from the mice scurrying to get more food.

She sighed. And all I wanted was to have a simple conversation with Mr. Owl! She thought angrily. Abigail shot out the hallway as fast as she could, chatter flew behind her, animals turned to stare as she whizzed by. She knew what Fawn would say: “Abigail, stop overreacting!” Overreacting! I’m not overreacting.

She forced back tears, but before she knew it, streams of tears flooded her face and the cold wind made it sting. Abigail ran. She ran like she had never run before. Then silence. Abigail sighed in relief. Finally somewhere quiet where I can think.

She slumped against the wall and began to wonder what Fawn meant. How am I supposed to know? Okay, Fawn thinks I am pretty smart, but that doesn’t mean I know everything! What did he mean by “the one thing that made this how it is now.”

Abigail grunted in frustration, then it hit her. She was supposed to finish what he started — without the wolves’ help. How could this be! That killed Fawn. A sudden memory flashed in her mind. It was when Fawn said, “But you’re my friend, we have to help each other!”

Abigail smiled, “Well, Fawn, if that’s what you want!” She exclaimed as she left the room.

Abigail looked back at the spot where she had rested and vaguely saw Fawn lying down, beaming at her.

Fawn smiled in contentment as Abigail left the room.  My work here is done, he thought. As Fawn closed his eyes for the very last time, a rainbow showered over the entire forest.

Marker the Marker

Once upon a time, there was a marker named Marker. Marker really wanted to draw on a piece of paper, but there was a rock in the way. Marker called for all of his friends to come and help him.

All of his friends got in a car to come and help him. All of his friends pushed the rock, and it moved out of the way. Unfortunately, there were bugs all over the paper. Marker and all his friends decided to try to kill the bugs so Marker could draw on the paper. It worked!

Marker drew on his paper and he was very happy.

THE  END

Flight Adventure

In the inside of the shop, the room was still. No one was inside, so why would I need any more spare parts anyway? After all, I was looking forward to finally pursuing my dream and being assigned the best things to fix. Inside, one of the other late night mechanics was there. He didn’t look mad, but at the same time, he didn’t look happy.

At my desk was the parts needed to fix Jenk’s car. Jenk was a customer who had come into the shop one morning and asked the mechanic to fix his car. Today was my last day at the mechanics shop before I went to the derby race, enjoyed my first race, quit my job as a fixer, and moved on to greater things.

I packed a secret box with pieces and went in my car. The cars that we had now were too old and rusty. Wow, if it were the 2000s it would be awesome. I wasn’t surprised to find the perfect spot at the race.

You could say I never went to school much. My dad owned a mechanics shop and fixed cars. Everyday, I would sneak up and take parts for my super secret project.  Sneaking up made me laugh. Anyways, I had always dreamed of one day flying my super secret plane. And today was my time to shine. I took out the plane pieces and put them together. The other racers looked mean and tough, as well as prepared. I hadn’t even practiced and didn’t know how to fly the plane. Either way, I was sure I would win, even though it would be stupid if I did. The announcer was ready for the countdown, and I hopped in. I didn’t even look that great for a race like this.

The countdown went to 0, and I pressed the button and immediately went up in the air. I pressed random buttons and tried steering the plane. The wheel broke, and I taped it back but it didn’t even work. The plane was twisting and turning and I freaking crashed near the finish line while the other racers flew through it.

And His Name is John Cena

This is John Cena. He looks like a cool kid, with a bald head, a Blackhawks hat, a Patrick Kane T-shirt, a Jonathan Toews jersey, and red shorts.

His house is a mansion with 500 rooms and a huge man cave. If he would sell his house it would cost $1,000,000,000 at least. He has great kitchens, bathrooms, bedrooms, and a huge backyard. His lot is 50 miles long and 100 miles wide. It is on a hill overlooking the ocean. He has 20 boats at his private harbor.

John Cena wants the Stanley Cup. He wants to RKO Sidney Crosby. He wants to play on the best with all the legend players when they played, like Wayne Gretsky. He wants to meet Chuck Norris because he wants to RKO Chuck Norris and Gwen Stefani and Justin Bieber. He has a snake named John Cena Jr. He stinks at hockey. He can’t skate. He is a fail. He thinks he can throw pucks in the goal. He made his wrestling place into a hockey rink. He practiced skating and wants to try out for the Ice Hogs. He sees Blackhawks players like Panarin, Anisimov, and Bickell.

He gets eaten by a tissue box. He punches it though. He gets captured by Steph Curry with Kevin Durant. Their mastermind is Michael Jordan and Scottie Pippen. Then he RKOs everybody and then gets captured by J.J. Watt and Luke Keekly and Cam Newton. The masterminds are Jerry Rice and Steve Young.

He thinks he is going to miss the tryouts. He is in his Ferrari. The tryouts started at 5:00 p.m. and it was 4:40 p.m., and he was in Evanston and the tryouts are near the Bean. He gets there right on time at 5:00 p.m. and gets on the ice at 5:15 and he sees Coach Q. Coach Q says he is not good enough to be on the Ice Hogs, but he says that if they don’t have enough players that he will play. He is so sad that he makes himself get every animal in the world and a dragon named Bob Cena. He gets a call from Randy Orton and Brock Lessner saying they hope he makes the team. That doesn’t make him feel any better so he goes to skate outside in his rink with his penguins and polar bears and all the other Arctic animals. He gets a call, and he makes the team. He is so happy, he gets his jersey and goes to the first camp against the AHL team, the Texas Stars. He is bummed. He is on the second line up, but also happy he got to play. He scores five goals that game and moves up to the Blackhawks to replace Teuvo Teravinan. He is on the line with Kane and Toews and is left wing.

The Hawks get loads of good players from trading and unfortunately he has a low salary cap — three million a year. He is on the best team, but they have not won the Stanley Cup yet. It is the last game. If they lose they will not be in the playoffs, and if they win they will be in the playoffs. It is 2-2 with two minutes left in the game. The other team scores. They are winning and there are two minutes left. Five, four, three, two, John Cena scores! It is tied, one second left, beeeep! It’s going to overtime, then if no one scores then it will go to a shoot out. Thirty seconds into overtime the other team scores! But the play is challenged by Coach Q. They review it and the call is no goal, goaltender interference. They score 15 seconds later — they are going to the playoffs.  


The first team they play in the playoffs is the St. Louis Blues. They crush them in the series 4-0 Next they have to play the Capitals. They win the first three games in the best of seven but then they win three so it will go to game 7. If they win they will go to the Stanley Cup finals and go against the New York Rangers. They will get the home advantage. The first game is at Madison Square Garden where the New York Knicks play. The Hawks beat the Capitals so they will play the Rangers. The first game is sold out. John Cena is the top scorer and leads in everything so he will get more than the Stanley Cup. He will have playoffs MVP, postseason MVP, most power play goals, most goals, and most points, so he will get five trophies. It is game 7, three seconds to go in the game, 3-2 Rangers. Three, two, one, goal John Cena. It is going to overtime and then another overtime and so on until someone scores. It is the seventh overtime, the longest game in history. They say that if he wants a Stanley Cup ring that he can’t play the rest of the game but he will get to hold the Stanley Cup and it will go to his house for a week. He gets the Stanley Cup and gets lots of stuff. John Cena still is on the Blackhawks team right now, and he is in the Hall of Fame.

The Trip

Eavesdropping

I woke up with a start! Mom was flipping the pancakes in the frying pan while scrambling her eggs at the same time. The sweet smell of maple syrup and batter filled my room.

I overheard my parents talking about going to D.C.

“No, David. She can’t go!!! She needs to stay-” I couldn’t make out the next words, only a name: Aunt Riannon.

“But, Rachel,” Dad said. I still couldn’t make out a lot of words. I tried to strain my neck to hear better.  I wasn’t going on the trip, I thought. That was all I heard.

I felt like screaming, but I didn’t want my parents to know that I was listening to what they were saying. I felt my cheeks get as hot as a frying pan. They knew that I hated my nanny. My nanny’s name was Aunt Riannon. She was a stubby woman with some really sharp, white teeth. I was just an 11-year-old girl. Why so much torture for me, I thought. I got out of bed and went to the bathroom to quickly brush my teeth and take a shower. While I dressed, all I thought was Why, why sooo much torture!!!

At breakfast, my parents looked like nothing had happened. I gave them a suspicious look, but they just smiled back. So I drooped around doing the casual routine (making the sandwiches for lunch, feeding the cat, eating my breakfast, packing my bag, going to school, sooo boring) the rest of the morning.

 

School

I couldn’t think of anything, except what I heard Mom and Dad say. Then suddenly I heard Mrs. Mitchell’s voice. I had been daydreaming!

“Uhumm, Taylor, please be focused. You are now a 6th grader!” she said in a confused but stern voice. When Mrs. Mitchell passed out the math tests, all I kept thinking was, Taylor, it’s all right. You might have misunderstood, BUT you know you can’t go on the trip, so don’t waste your time thinking that you can go. I stared at the math test Mrs. Mitchell had passed out. I couldn’t even see straight with all the stress I was having. I couldn’t even think what 1+1 was.

Mrs. Mitchell called “Time!” and I felt my tension go up. I was still just staring at the first problem. Mrs. Mitchell picked up my paper and saw that it was completely blank.

“You alright, Taylor? You haven’t been acting like you usually do.”

I stared into Mrs. Mitchell’s light blue eyes and then looked myself in the  classroom mirror. I saw a stupid little girl who wanted to tell her teacher everything, but couldn’t. I knew that Mrs. Mitchell was the nicest teacher ever and I could tell her anything. Should I just say a plain, old lie or tell the truth?!

I just blabbed everything out.

“I heard my parents say that I can’t go to D.C and that I have to stay with the meanest, ugliest, stupidest nanny in the whole world!” I lowered my voice. “I’m pretty sure, anyway.”

“Okay, just calm down and come with me,” Mrs. Mitchell said in a concerned and curious voice.

I knew I was going to get into trouble, so I didn’t make a sound. I felt like a maniac. Why didn’t I just say a plain, old lie? But I felt sooo good saying the truth – as good as it would feel to go on the trip to D.C.

Mrs. Mitchell took me to her office. “Tell me everything right now.”

I took a deep breath and started talking. “I woke up in the morning and–” I could feel a burning sensation in the corner of my eyes. “I can’t take it anymore. I am just a horrible kid and I am so stupid.”

“Now, now, you are the best kid in 6th grade. You always follow directions and get good grades. You’re also a very great friend. So tell me again everything that you had said.”

I cleared my throat. I was about to tell her everything about this morning’s incident. Then Mrs. Mitchell said something that I was hoping nobody would ask me. “How did you hear that?” she asked.

“Uhhh, um may I use the bathroom?”

“Fine,” Mrs. Mitchell said.

I ran up to the bathroom, locked myself into a stall and burst out into tears. This was the worst day ever! I thought. But it felt good to let my emotions out. I came back to my senses. What was I going to tell Mrs. Mitchell when she asks me again the question? The same question I had in mind a few minutes ago came to me again: Should I just say a plain old lie or tell the truth? Mrs. Mitchell is a very trustworthy teacher!

I heard Mrs. Mitchell’s voice calling for me. So I took a quick glimpse at the mirror and wiped my tears away and left. I met Mrs. Mitchell back in her office.

“I was getting worried about you,” she said. Then she asked me the question that I hate so much. “How did you hear what your parents were saying?”

“Well, I kind of ish was listening to what my parents were saying without them knowing that I was doing that, but it was a mistake,” I said.

“So you were basically eavesdropping,” said Mrs. Mitchell.

“Well not really,” I replied. There was a long silence and then Mrs. Mitchell said that it was getting late and we better get going to the classroom. I looked at her clock. It was about to strike one and we had to go to back to the classroom for lunch. When we came back to the classroom everyone was reading their books and they all had their lunch cards with them.

 

Friends Go On The Wrong Side

In the lunch line to get my lunch, I wondered if my friends would ask me why I left the classroom or if they would talk about the stupid field trip that I’m not going to!

I sat down with my friends. We all were silent for a few minutes.

“Are you guys going on the D.C field trip?”  Katie said.  

Everyone replied, “Of course!” in harmony.

“What about you, Taylor?” Katie asked me.

“Well, I haven’t asked my parents yet, but I’m pretty sure they’ll say, ‘uhh, no.’” Just after I said that I regretted it. I sounded so stupid.

“Okay, just please ask your parents when you go home,” Katie said. All of my other friends agreed.  

I couldn’t believe it — I had disappointed my friends!!! I felt so awful. What had I done? I hadn’t completely told the truth, but I somewhat did.

At recess it was even worse. My friends kept asking me why I think my parents won’t let me go on the D.C trip with them, when they usually would allow me to do anything like that. My response to all of them except Mia was, “I’m not sure, because sometimes they don’t want me around.”

But to Mia it was different. Mia is the trustworthiest, worthiest, and best friend I’ve ever had in my whole life. She won’t tell any of my secrets to anyone else. She always does nice things for me. She helps me with my work when I’m struggling and so much more.

I took a deep breath, but no words came out.

“You know you can tell me anything, you know that right?” Mia said. I was quiet for a few seconds.

I told Mia EVERYTHING I had heard my parents say word for word. “I was partly eavesdropping and I had heard my parents say that I was going to be stuck with Aunt Riannon.” Mia knew how Aunt Riannon was because I’ve spoken a lot about her. It’s almost like she was there with me at Aunt Riannon’s house.

“Wow, that sounds nothing like your parents,” Mia said.

I guess, I thought.

Mia looked at me and saw that I had a really depressed face. “So, let’s talk about something else now,” she said.

“Sure,” I said, relieved. So we talked about school and art and we didn’t bring up the D.C. trip again for the rest of recess.

When it was time to go back to class, my friends kept giving me “Are you okay?” looks. We started packing up because it would be time to go home soon. Today, Mrs. Mitchell didn’t tell us to pack our bags as usual, but I thought maybe she forgot and she still wanted us to. So I went to get my book bag.

Just then I heard Mrs. Mitchell’s voice. “Don’t get your book bag, I have something to say about the D.C trip.”

That’s when I got a really frustrated feeling and burst out, “IF YOU CARE SOOO MUCH ABOUT THE FIELD TRIP, WHY DON’T  YOU TEACH A WHOLE ENTIRE LESSON ON IT. YOU KNOW SOME KIDS REALLY WANT TO GO, BUT THEY CAN’T!!!”

I took a deep breath and said, “I’m going to put my head down and close my ears while you talk about the stupid field trip!” I had lost my voice but let out a few words.

“I — don’t care, uhhhmm, if I — don’t go in the, uhhhmm, field trip.”

“May I talk to you, Taylor?” Mrs. Mitchell said in a worried and mad voice. She took me into the hallway.

“We’re going into my office now, please.” Before I could reply we were walking down the hall. The last time I had gone this way I was going to repeat the stupid eavesdropping dilemma, but this time I was sure I was in big trouble.

 

Magic Has Taken Over My Body!

WHO IN THE WORLD WOULD SCREAM AT THEIR TEACHER AND SAY SOME NONSENSE STUFF ABOUT THEM, I thought.

We arrived at Mrs. Mitchell’s office. But Mrs. Mitchell didn’t sit down or ask me to. So I just stood.

“This way,” Mrs. Mitchell said. She walked up straight into a brick wall and said the word Operiano, then the brick wall magically opened. I just stared at Mrs. Mitchell.

“Come on, we don’t have forever.”

This has to be a dream, I thought. I pinched myself. Ouch, well, it isn’t a dream. Mrs. Mitchell led me down a dark hallway. I swore I saw a teddy bear wearing a hat run into a closet.

Then I finally saw a little bit of light.

“Race you,” Mrs. Mitchell said. I looked at her confused, but she started running as fast as a cheetah. Wow, I thought.

I tried to catch up to her, but by the time I took my first step, Mrs. Mitchell was already outside. When I got out, I was panting SO hard, while Mrs. Mitchell looked completely fine.

“Wow you’re fast,” I said with my hands on my knees.

“Ran the Boston Marathon in a 1½ hours and other marathons in usually 30 minutes.” I looked at my teacher as if this was the first time I had ever seen her.

“No, no no, that can’t be true because when the kids were playing tag outside you were the slowest person and you kept getting tagged.”

“I did that on purpose because I didn’t want anyone thinking that I was fast, so they won’t want to race me or ask me questions about my life.” I just looked dumbfoundedly at Mrs. Mitchell.

“Come on, I really want to show you this.” Suddenly, Mrs. Mitchell looked like a teenager to me.

“How old are you?”

“Why?” she asked.

“Just curiosity.”

“25.”

“Are you a Mrs.?”

“No.” Mrs. Mitchell laughed.

“Oh, then why do you not say anything when all the kids in class call you Mrs.?”

“I wanted you guys to think that I wasn’t that young.”

I saw a lot of candies flying through the sky.

“We better get going,” Mrs. Mitchell said. “It’s about to rain.”

As we continued toward the city, I wanted to talk with her more.

“What’s your whole name?”

“Taylor Caroline Mitchell.”

“We have the same first name!”

“Yeah… We gotta get going.”

“WHERE?” After all of the weird things I had seen, I wondered if everything I was seeing was fake or real.

“It’s a surprise.”

What a weird conversation I was having with Mrs. Mitchell, or should I say Ms. Mitchell or maybe Ms. Taylor, wait is it Ms. Caroline? My life just got so confusing in the last 30 minutes. AAAAAAAHHHHHH!!!

Ms. Mitchell and I were walking on a yellow brick road. I saw gingerbread houses, signs made out of lollipops, little fairies nibbling on gingerbread houses, and then gingerbread men screaming at the fairies as they broke down part of the gingerbread houses. Sad!

Then out of nowhere it started raining candy corn, Skittles, Mike and Ike’s, Hot tamales, M&M’s, 3 Musketeers, Air Head bits, Reeses Pieces, and more sweet treats.

“Oh dear, it’s raining,” Ms. Mitchell said.

I was running like a maniac to get candy in an old and rusty bucket that I had found on the floor.

“Oh my,” Ms. Mitchell mumbled under her breath.

But then she was right next to me.

“See who gets the most candy!”  

A few minutes later Ms. Mitchell said it was time to go and then in a really fast motion, I couldn’t breath, I was really dizzy and then I fell PLOP into the chair in Ms. Mitchell’s office. I was breathing SO hard.

“So how was that?” Ms. Mitchell asked.

“Great,” I wheezed. “Why’d you take me there?”

“I wanted to show you that you are not a stupid little girl and you’re really fun to be with. I wanted to show you that you can go up to your parent and ask them if that’s really what you heard.”

“You don’t understand, they’ll ask me a question that I hate.”

“I know exactly how you feel because I was in the same problem as you.”

Mrs. Mitchell took a breath.

“When I was young I had been awoken one morning and I heard my parents say that I was going to be stuck with my stupid aunt and I couldn’t go to the D.C. trip. Or at least that’s what I thought. All my friends would ask me about it. And, like you, any time my teacher was about to talk about the trip, I started to scream things. WHY DON’T YOU JUST TEACH A WHOLE LESSON ABOUT IT!”

I suddenly felt really ashamed about myself and also really, really, REALLY happy that Ms. Mitchell knew exactly how I felt.

“Why did you do that?”

“That is for you to figure out.”

“Uuuuuhhhhh…”

“Come on, it’s time to go,” said Ms. Mitchell.

When I was walking, I was thinking about what Ms. Mitchell had said. Then all of a sudden I heard Ms. Mitchell’s voice.

“Watch out!”

I saw a big bowling ball flying toward me, a bat that was about to smack me in the face, and a lasso that was coming toward my neck. I felt confused, but I didn’t have much time. The rope was around my neck and I started choking. Then I felt the bowling ball hit me on the chest and the bat smacking my face. Then everything went blank.

***

I woke up in a soft, comfy bed. Ms. Mitchell was screaming at the kid who had hurt me. Then she became quiet and came toward me.

“Who was that you were screaming at?” I asked.

“It’s nothing. Just a kid who was horseplaying at school.”

I tried to get up, but halfway through everything got blurry and I gave up.

“I have some good news and bad news,” she said. “Let’s start with the bad news.”

“Is it about me?”

“Kind of, but not exactly. Your parents had to go on an emergency business trip and they told Aunt Riannon to take care of you.”

Before I could say anything, Ms. Mitchell continued.

“But the good news is, I refused to let Aunt Riannon take care of you because of all the bad stuff you said she had done to you and now you’re going to spend the weekend at my house, which means you’re going to have to stay with me after school and even help me grade papers. Lastly you can finish that math quiz I gave you this morning so you don’t get an F.”

Wait. Mom and Dad went on a business trip and didn’t tell me? They haven’t been acting at all like their normal selves today.

“Now that I told you the news,” Mrs. Mitchell said. “Just close your eyes for a minute and relax.” I did as told and then I heard Ms. Mitchell’s voice say, “Healoria.” All of a sudden I felt back to normal and I saw that the time was 4:55, which meant school finished 25 minutes ago.

“Come on, let’s go,” Ms. Mitchell said. I followed her to the classroom and there I saw MIA!!

 

D.C Trip Yes? or No?

“AHHH!!!” Mia screamed. I began screaming, too. I have no idea why. Then Mia and I stopped and laughed at the same time.

“Why were you screaming?” I asked. “Well, I was scared the principal had come in.”

Mia and I just stared at each other in an awkward silence for what seemed like  forever. Finally, Ms. Mitchell came in and said, “Girls, I need to tell you something very important.”

“Sure,” we replied in unison.

We were sitting near Ms. Mitchell’s desk.

“Okay,” she said. “Just take a deep breath and relax.

“Well, your parents have gone on a business trip-”

“Not Aunt Riannon,” I said.

“Please don’t interrupt, Taylor,” said Ms. Mitchell. “Where was a I? Oh yeah, well your parents have gone on a business trip to Poland and they can’t take care of you while they’re halfway across the world so I want you to fill out a form.”

Mia and I just shook our head. Ms. Mitchell gave us the form and it said:

House location: 5421 Broadway Street, Los Angeles, 54634

School: Brooks Global Studies

Parent Phone Number: (573) 374-5479

Person to contact in an emergency (other than your parents): Lia Mitchell

Their phone number: (573) 934-2043

Closest relative: Parents – Dad and Mom – David Jackson and Rachel Jackson

Teacher’s name: Taylor Caroline Mitchell

Grade: 6th

                             Signature:

Taylor Caroline Mitchell and Taylor Jackson 

 

“Well, am I right with all the information? And please fill out your signatures. I know it’s not fair if I do it for you,” said Ms.Mitchell.

“You are right with all my information,” Mia said. “But how do you know that because none of the teachers in this school ask for your personal information?” I wasn’t listening to the next few words since I was trying to see what Mia’s form said, but this was all I saw was the house location, L.A.

“Well what do you think, Tay,” I heard Mia say.

“About what?” I was confused.

“Well, duh! DO YOU WANT TO STAY AT MS. MITCHELL’S HOUSE THIS WHOLE WEEK WITH ME?” Mia took a big breath and finished her sentence. “Since our parents have gone to a business trip to Poland.”

“Wait, explain,” I said.

“Well you see, like I just told you, our parents are in Poland.”

“But-”

“Wait, can I continue?” said Mia.


“Yes,” I sighed.

“Where was I? Oh yeah. Well our parents went to Poland for a business trip and they were really worried about how we could go to the D.C. trip, so they asked Ms. Mitchell if she would take care of us.”

“Wait can you repeat the line about the trip?” I said, curiously.

“Our parents were really worried how we could go to D.C. trip,” said Mia impatiently.

“Wait so, am I going on the D.C. trip or not? I’m really confused right now. But that can’t be possible because I know. I heard my parents say I couldn’t go. (I might have misunderstood, but there’s only a 20 percent chance, well fine 70 percent, but what’s the big difference?)

I put the things together and thought back to the conversation I heard Mom and Dad having this morning:

“No, David, she can’t go with Aunt Riannon. She needs to stay with us, never Aunt Riannon.”

“But Rachel, she could maybe go on the trip with Ms. Mitchell.”

“We’ll think about it,” Mom had responded.

I can’t believe that it all made sense now.

“Oh my gosh, this is awesome. I really need to go,” I told Mia and Ms. Mitchell. “See you in a sec.”

I got the school phone and called my mom.

“Hello, who is this?” I heard this woman say.

“It is Taylor Jackson. Can you please give the phone to Rachel Jackson?

“Hellooooo,” I heard my mom talking in her fake accent.

“It’s me, your daughter, Taylor Lee Jackson,” I replied.  

“Oh hey honey,” Mom said in her normal accent. “What’s the matter?”

“Well the matter is that you’re in Poland and you left me with Ms. Mitchell and you didn’t even tell me. The problem is actually that you never told me that you were going to travel halfway across the world!” I replied.

“Honey, I was going to tell you the problem this morning.”

I had totally forgot that Mom and Dad had had the talk this morning. I was thinking that it was yesterday or the day before.

“But you looked sad and down,” Mom continued. “So we decided that it would be best to not tell you, so yeah.”

“Wow,” I thought. “Well bye,” I said.

I hung up. That was the most unusual talk I had with Mom. I returned to the classroom.

“Ready for the trip?” Mrs. Mitchell asked.

“Of course,” I replied.

Pink Is Pretty

Pink is pretty. She likes pink and the letters P and I and N and K, and her favorite thing to paint is her name. She does not like the color purple. She doesn’t like the color purple because in high school she had a best friend named Purple, but then Purple took her boyfriend. Her boyfriend’s name was Red. At high school prom, Pink wanted to go with Red, but Red said he was busy. So Pink went to prom with Blue. At the prom, she looked over to see what Purple was doing. Purple walked over to Red and started dancing. Red had said he was busy just so he could go to prom with Purple. Pink went over to Red and Purple and said to Red, “Oh, Red, I thought you were so busy you couldn’t even come to prom, and you’re here with Purple?” Pink and Purple got into a fist fight.

When colors fight, it’s a crayon with little arms, legs, a face, and a wrapper. First, Purple swung at Pink, but she ducked. Then she went down to the floor. She kicked Purple in the foot and then she fell. Yellow ran over to break it up. He went in the middle of them. He pushed Pink back, and then he pushed Purple back. Blue ran up to help Yellow. Yellow took Purple to the side and Blue took Pink to the side and told them to calm down.

So Pink went home and called Red. She told him that they were done. Then Red met up with White and he high-fived White. Pink saw that and punched Red in the face so hard she broke his tip. Then she walked White home and she said, “White, okay. I’m gonna warn you. Whenever Red tries to touch you, move. Because I’m done with him.”

Then she went back home. She told her mother what happened and then she cried. She called up Purple and she said, “Purple, meet me at the park.”

Pink tried to run Purple over with her car. Purple jumped out of the way. Then Red was there to catch her. So Pink went home to her dad’s garage and got his motorcycle. She went to Red’s house and she brought the motorcycle into his room. She closed the door and locked it. She started chasing Red around in the room with her dad’s motorcycle. She was chasing Red in circles. He was running and screaming.

Then she got a hammer.

She went to his game room. She started smashing up everything. They both had a picture of them on Christmas and she smashed it up a hundred times. And then she called up Orange, her new best friend, and she said, “Go to my house in five minutes. I’ll meet you.” She chased Red around his room once more and then she left him alone. She went and chased his parents around. Then she went back home.        

Orange was at her door. She let her in. They started talking about what happened. Orange thought that she should dump Red for good and find another boyfriend. Orange called up her boyfriend, Black and he called up his friends Gray, Dark Blue, Turquoise, Brown and Magenta. He said, “I’m giving you the option to get to know these guys and figure out which one you want to be your new boyfriend.” At first she examined Brown.

He said, “How ya doin’?” He had a French accent. Even though he was French, he talked a little slang.

And then she said, “Umm-mm.” She didn’t like the slang.

And then she went up to Gray and he said, “Hey, good looking.”

She said, “I’ll keep you in mind.”

And then she went to Magenta. He said, “Whatcha’ up to?” and she said,

“Keep you in mind, too.”

And then she went to Dark Blue and he said, “Hi. How was your day?”

And she said, “I’m gonna have to re-look over Gray and Magenta.”

Then after she went to Turquoise and Turquoise said, “What’s your name?”

In the end, she chose Dark Blue because he was nice and everybody else wasn’t really like him. They went out on a date at Coo Coo for Color. It was a fancy restaurant. They went to dinner. He paid for it all. And then the next day they talked to each other on the phone, and he came to  her house and gave her some flowers. He surprised her with a cake and he said, “Happy first date.”

On the way to school she ran into Red. Red said, “I’m sorry, I’m sorry,” on his knees. She called up Dark Blue. Dark Blue beat him up. He punched him in the face. He kicked him in his legs. And then he elbowed him in his stomach. And then she called up Purple.

She said, “Purple, come get your little boyfriend, Red.”

Purple went to Red and said, “What happened to you, boy?” And then she called an ambulance. Purple went with Red.

Dark Blue walked Pink to school and they went into a classroom. Orange sat at the window. Pink was in the second row. And Blue was in the third. Pink was in the middle of Orange and Dark Blue. Dark Blue and Pink kissed. Red tried to kiss Purple, but Purple said, “Pink was my best friend, I’m done with this.” Pink went over to Purple after class and Purple said, “I’m sorry that I went out with Red.”

Pink said, “If he came on to you, you should’ve known better not to go out with him in the first place. If you knew I was being lied to, why would you even do it?”

Purple said, “I know. But can you please give me another chance?”

Then Pink called over Dark Blue and then they went over to Red. And she said, “Dark Bluebeat up Red.”

“Glad to,” Dark blue said and he beat up Red. Pink called the principal and told the principal that Red tried to touch all the girls butts in the school. He got in trouble and he got expelled. Pink got her revenge. She and Purple became friends and since Pink found a boyfriend from Black, Pink called Black and told him to call his friends so Purple can choose a boyfriend from his friends just like Pink. Her boyfriend was Gray.

Pink said, “Just don’t ever do that again,” and gave Purple a hug.

Purple said, “Okay.”

Pink, Purple, Dark Blue and Gray all went out on a double date. Then Gray and Dark Blue ganged up on Red and then took his house and put him a shelter. And then Red never bothered any of them again.

 

THE END

The Art Thief

 

Chapter 1

 

May 17th, 2014, 2:47 p.m.

Art Museum

Albany, New York

 

A great piece of art called, “The Finch,” was about to be revealed today at 2:50. Crowds gathered all around to see this masterpiece.

The clock ticked slowly. Each tick filled with anticipation and wonder. Finally the clock read 2:50, and the curtains dropped. Their mouths agape when they saw it. Nothing. Behind the curtains was pitch black. Nothing to be seen.

“Robbery! Robbery!” a voice screamed from the hallway. “Someone has stolen my masterpiece!” De’Livito yelled, worry on his face. “How will I ever find it?”

Thankfully, a security guard turned around to find a person in a dark cloak running. A painting next to him.

“Thief!” the guard yelled. The chase was on.

The  owner, Se’delava, quickly ushered his guards to chase the thief. The guards quickly took off.

“I hope they catch this fool. That painting cost a fortune.”

Crashing through paintings and exquisite pottery, the thief seemed determined.

He knocked over another beautiful sculpture made out of glass, creating an ear splitting shatter, as glass covered the ground.

Defeat hovered over the guards heads as they turned back. The art thief had won that day.

  

 

Chapter 2

 

May 18th, 2014, 6:22 p.m.

Joplin Family Residence

Albany, New York:

 

Lucas threw the football to Van. It sailed through the air, and Van surprisingly managed to catch it. He threw it back to Lucas, and Lucas got hit in the face with the football and fell to the ground.

“You alright?” Van asked Lucas, giving him a hand.

“Yeah I’m fine. Just surprised me, that’s all.”

“Lucas and Van Joplin! Come into the house this instant!” a voice sounded from the inside.

“Okay, Mom!” Lucas and Van said in unison, and started to walk to their house.

“What did you do this time?” Lucas said pushing Van, a smile on his face.

Van gave him a shove too as they walked inside.

“Dinner time!” Van and Lucas’s Mom yelled from the kitchen.

“Don’t scare us like that, Mom.” Lucas said. “We thought you found Dad’s bowling ball that we scratched.

“What?!” their mom yelled without thinking.

“Oh, nothing…” Van said as he pushed Lucas away from their Mom.

“Anyway boys, check this out,” their mom said as she turned the TV on to show a reporter was talking.

“I am standing outside the Metropolitan Museum of Art in New York. There has been a robbery where a new painting called, “The Finch” has been stolen. Mr. De’Livito is devastated. If you see the painting or someone acting suspicious, please call 9-1-1.”

Lucas and Van’s Mom shut off the TV.

“De’Livito!” Lucas exclaimed.

“Who?” Van asked.

“Our neighbors next door. You know crazy Maggie?”

“Yes,” Van said.

“She’s Maggie De’Livito.”

“Maggie is NOT crazy,” their Mom said. “You’ve just never met her. In fact, you’re going to go over there and say sorry that her father lost his painting.”

“Aw, Mom! But…” Lucas didn’t even finish his sentence.

“No buts. You’ll go in the morning.”

  

Chapter 3

 

May 19th, 2014, 9:33 a.m.

De’Livito Residence

Albany, New York

 

Maggie groggily got out of bed. She put on her glasses, went downstairs, poured herself a bowl of cereal, and waited for her parents to get back from New York.

The doorbell rang, and Maggie rushed to the door. Had her parents really come back so early? But it wasn’t her parents. She opened the door to find her next door neighbor, Lucas, standing there.

“Um…hey,” Lucas said. His eyes wide like he expected no one to open the door.

“Hi? What do you want?” Maggie inquired.

“I just wanted to say sorry for your dad losing his art to the jerk thief,” Lucas started. “Can I come in?”

“Sure,” Maggie said and opened the door a little bit wider for him.

“Wow…” Lucas said, eyeing all the paintings. “Your dad definitely does a lot of painting in his free time.

“Yeah I always come home from school to find three new paintings hanging up in my room,” Maggie chuckled.

“What does your mom do?”

“Oh, she’s the owner of De’Livito Tech,” Maggie said.

“I would have never guessed…” Lucas said, rolling his eyes.

“Oh, this is one he did recently,” Maggie said starting up the conversation again. She pointed to one of the attacks of 9/11 her father had done five days ago, showing planes hitting the twin towers and people running everywhere, flooding the streets. Grief hit Lucas in the face hard.

“What’s wrong?” Maggie asked.

“My dad was killed during 9/11.” Lucas said. Shock hit Maggie even harder. “He was on the 84th floor when the planes hit,” Lucas said, choking on his words. “He didn’t make it.”

“I’m so sorry.” Maggie said, not knowing what it was like to lose a family member. “At least they didn’t PLAN to kill your father.” 

“Plan! That’s it!” Lucas said. “Maggie. We’re going to catch the art thief!”

                    

 

Chapter 4

                    

May 19th, 2014, 12:39 p.m.

De’Livito Residence Backyard

Albany, New York

 

Maggie and Lucas strategized their plan. “So where do you think the art thief is going to break into next?” Lucas asked.

“Stop playing dumb! You SAW my house! It was like World War Two was going on with paintings in there!” Maggie yelled.

“Okay. So if everything goes according to plan, then the art thief will strike at 2:45, like before, and we can catch and unmask him.

“Alright.” Maggie said. “Now we wait.”

              

May 19th, 2014, 2:39 p.m.

 

The thief hid under the bushes. Using a paper clip, he picked at the De’Livitos’ door and opened it. Inside were paintings galore. “I could make a fortune out of this,” he said under his breath.

Quickly he began stuffing all the paintings that he could fit into his big duffel bag. He was about to walk out the door when his foot hit something. It was a little string, almost like a tripwire.

“Oh no…” the art thief said. He had barely any time to ponder when a net fell on him, trapping him securely to the ground.

“Ha! We got you,” a voice yelled from the kitchen. Maggie stepped into the light and grabbed a phone. “Hello? 9-1-1. Yes, this is Maggie at the De’Livito residence. We have the thief.” Then she hung up.

Lucas stepped out from the other corner and pointed a flashlight at the robber’s face. “Let’s see who this jerk is.” Lucas said, pulling off the mask. His eyes widened. His voice choked. “D… d… da… dad?”

 

Chapter 5

 

May 19th, 2014, 2:53 p.m.

De’Livito Residence

Albany, New York

 

“But…you’re dead!” Lucas said, his eyes wide in fear and disbelief.

“Your dad!” Maggie said, rushing over.

“No, son, I was not dead. I’m sorry, Lucas. I’m sorry,” Lucas’s father began to speak. “I had crawled out the back door just as the towers exploded, burying everyone in the rubble. The rescuers couldn’t find my body, so they thought I must have been buried under the rubble. So I ran. I began stealing and selling paintings to make a living now that your mom wasn’t there to help me. I had to let the whole world believe I was dead so that none of these thefts would get traced back to me. ”

“You lied to me…” Lucas said, his eyes dark. Fear and disbelief now washed out with anger and pure hatred. “You lied to our family! You lied to the entire world! I thought I could look up to you as a business man. But you’re no better than those rat thieves. I called you a jerk, Dad. A JERK! I’m not going to tell anyone this! But you mark my words: I will now always hate you.” His words had a piercing sting. And, just then, officers barged in, knocking down the door.

 

2 Days Later…

 

“Lucas! Van! Look!” their mother said, turning up the TV.

 

“The art thief has been captured but refuses to be named,” the reporter said. “This is a happy day for the De’Livitos but a dark day for the thief.”

“Thankfully that man is now in jail,” their mom said. “How could anyone love him for what he’s done?”

“Wouldn’t you like to know…” Lucas muttered under his breath.

THE END

Buzzer’s Adventure

“Buzz!” said the bee, “I’m awful thirsty for some nectar.”

He looked at the garden next door, and wondered about how beautiful the flowers looked and if he could find some nectar there. He flew over, and he was almost there. His wings grew tired, and just when he was about to reach the garden, a giant planet crashed directly in the middle of his path! The bee tried to fly over it, but his wings were still too tired. Then, the bee tried to walk around it. But, the bee wasn’t quite used to walking.

Suddenly, the bee felt sleepy from trying to fly and walk. So, he decided to take a nap, but, while he was sleeping, the planet snatched him! When the bee woke up, he felt dizzy and confused. After all, he was inside a planet. The bee was worried, and desperately wanted to get out. He noticed that the creatures surrounding him were not bees at all. They were big, scary, and slimy monsters!

“Now I’ll never get my nectar,” wondered the bee aloud.

Soon after, a monster came forward, screaming. The words didn’t make much sense at first. Then, the bee heard his name.

“Buzzer! Buzzer! Is that you?” The monster kept screaming. The bee grew very scared and did not respond.

“Buzzer? Are you asleep? Talk to me or something!” yelled the monster, still thinking Buzzer was asleep.

“Who are you? And why do you know my name?” asked Buzzer.

“Don’t you know that everybody knows everybody’s name on this planet?” roared the monster as though it were obvious.

The bee shook his head.

“Nevermind. Anyway, what are you doing on the floor?” Asked the monster, changing the subject.

“I felt dizzy, so I fell down,” said the bee. The conversation grew friendlier. The bee and the monster weren’t so scared of each other anymore.

“Do you know a way out of here?” inquired the bee.

“No, but I’ll help you find a way out,” responded the monster.

The two began to walk, only to hear a deep voice. The voice was rough like a rock: all hard and edgy. Buzzer and Mr. Monster froze.

“Who are you?” boomed the voice. The pair looked around, only to find an orange and purple polka-dotted troll.

“ It is I, Buzzer and Mr. Monster,” stuttered the bee.

The bee points to a wobbly and unsturdy bridge, indicating that he and Mr. Monster want to cross it.

“You may not pass unless you answer my riddle.”

“Ok, what is your riddle?” asked the bee.

If you know what ‘beep bop boop’ means,” questioned the troll.

“Ummm. Not really,” exclaimed Buzzer.

But Mr. Monster knew what it meant. Those strange words translate to “cheeseburger.”

Finally, the pair walked across the rickety bridge. Once on solid ground, Buzzer asked a question.

“What is a cheeseburger?” inquired Buzzer.

“You don’t know what a cheeseburger is?! Well, I guess we’re going to have to stop for lunch,” said Mr. Monster, who didn’t seem so much like a monster anymore.

They all cheered. They walked and walked until their legs couldn’t carry them. They saw the lunch place, first. Next, they thought they saw a slimey monster, but really, it was an alien from Jotsifooja, a planet tucked in a far away galaxy. lt looked brown, scrawny, and was very short.

Buzzer exclaimed, “I didn’t know how many monsters were on this planet!”

“That’s not a monster from this planet! That’s an intruder!” screams Mr. Monster, scaring the rest of his friends.

“Woah, woah. There’s no need to scream. I’m Sapphire, a visitor from Jotsifooja. All I wanted was a cup of coffee and a cheeseburger,” Sapphire calmly explained.

“Again with the cheeseburgers! When am I going to have one?” joked Buzzer.

The restaurant was a narrow, tall building with a pointy top. Inside, the walls were grey and chipped. It looked as though someone had smeared slime all over it. The tables were unsturdy and rusty.

They went to get a cheeseburger. Still, they ran into more problems. A silly waiter told the crew that cheeseburgers were scarce because another employee kept eating them. Buzzer didn’t mind, though. He was a little scared to try new foods. What if it wasn’t good for him? However, Mr. Monster reacted differently. He had a total meltdown. He wanted Buzzer to try a cheeseburger. In fact, he wanted everyone to try a cheeseburger.

Mr. Monster ran out the door without a word. He kept running until he reached the edge of the planet.

“Wait up!” Buzzer yelled, flying as fast as his wings could carry him.

“A cheeseburger would have solved all the planet’s problems! World peace and everything! There’s no point in staying now,” Mr. Monster weeped.

“So I’m going home?” Buzzer asked.

“No. We’re both going home,” Mr. Monster said.

But before they could make the final jump, a trail of smoke wrapped around the pair. The air was black. Then, a witch appeared! Now, you would expect a witch to be green, but this was no regular witch. She was blue, purple, and orange all over. Her hair was messy, long with short pieces sticking out. It was brown, a very ugly color. She hopped off the burning vacuum cleaner, which was her favorite way to get around. Also, it caused all the smoke.

“Nobody leaves this planet without my permission! Unless they have a license, of course,” the witch said, her voice becoming lighter at the end.

“But, I got sucked into the planet. I don’t have a license,” said Buzzer, while Mr. Monster tried to shake a license out of his ball of goo.

“Here! Here’s our license,” Mr. Monster said, handing the witch his license.

“Oh, yes. You may go, “said the witch without even looking at it.

“Yes, oh yes! We’re out! You know, I can’t believe I wanted nectar. Now I have something even better: a friend,” Buzzer said aloud, hugging Mr. Monster as they jumped.

The Scary Mystery: Chapter One

The boys were sitting on the couch in the family room playing video games. It was, ya know, just a calm environment with the exception of everybody screaming.

The video game was not the reason they were screaming. A man had just broken in with a gun. They were definitely terrorists that had just escaped from jail because of the prison conviction tags attached to their wrist.

Matt said, “RUN EVERYBODY!!!” but it was too late. The terrorists had already taken his friends hostage and fled. From that day he vowed to himself to get them back. Matt used his jetpack, which he had made in 2600 to stop the savages, but the terrorists were already lightyears ahead of him… literally.

He found out they’d been taken to Jupiter with his intergalactic navigator. Suddenly, five missiles flew at him at once, and then it was time to use his wits. He pushed the jetpack to its max and dove back to earth, where he landed on a national monument. He saw the terrorists without his friends so as he flew to get them, but he hit an invisible forcefield.

The terrorists screamed, “You fool! You will not be able to cross, as the key is with Ragor the Dragon on Saturn.”

Matt said, “It doesn’t matter. Wherever you have hidden my friends, I will slay the dragon and get them back.”

He flew to Saturn expecting to find a big dragon but found a tiny toddler sized one instead. He laughed and said, “You have the key… ha ha ha!”

However, his thoughts were suddenly interrupted by an earth-shattering roar. An enormous beast towered over Matt, and he gulped, “Why do I even bother?”

After that, he decided he would need a weapon. As Matt already had previous encounters with dragons, he knew how to make the baby dragon retaliate against its father. A baby dragon’s fire breath has a lot more damage than an adult dragon’s fire breath, so he harnessed the baby dragon and made the father get severely burned from his son until it fled.

Matt wasn’t expecting that kind of reaction from a huge dragon but it did happen. Now Matt’s sole objective was to get the key, save his friends, and go home before he was grounded for life.

The key was embedded in a rock that was shaped like dodecahedron. It was very hard to get it out. Mostly because the rock was hard and it had so many sides. After nearly an hour of chiseling, Matt got the key. The only difficult part now was reaching his friends. He passed through a wall when he suddenly heard something so earth shattering that he almost went deaf.

His navigator told him his friends were in the planet Neptune, so he rushed there.

But it was all a trap.

There was no one except monsters and savages that had been waiting there to get him… It hit him like a rock that those terrorists had hacked his navigator into thinking his friends were at Neptune.

 

Press One at the Tone

BRIIINNNGGGGG! BRRRIINNNNGGGG!! BRIIINNNNNGGGGG!!! The brick rang endlessly, piercing the silence that permeated the dust covered bedroom. The noise annoyed me to no end. Groggily, I picked up the phone and answered. As soon as I picked up the brick, the noise stopped. On the other end, someone was using sound bytes from various old sci-fi films I knew (like, The Last Starfighter, 2001: A  Space Odyssey, and The Day The Earth Stood Still). “Klaatu barada nikto,” it repeated. “Open the pod bay doors, HAL,” pelted my ears at an increasingly higher pitch and tone, until it sounded like, “Greetings, starfighter, you have been recruited to defend the frontier against Xur and the ko dan armada.” Then the fabled “DUH DAH DEE, your call has been forwarded to an automated voice message system, to record a message, please press one at the tone.”

I wasn’t in a particularly good mood that morning because of my jarring wake up call. So I pressed one and gave the caller a piece of my mind, but the battery on my overclocked brick died at that moment, so I couldn’t do anything about the mysterious caller. I thus proceeded to my morning ritual, which consisted of a strict diet of granola bars and milk, plus the luxury of one small piece of canned fruit. My personal assistant tallied the calories to my daily calorie intake. Then I was repeatedly subjected to electrical muscular stimulation, which in effect meant shocking myself with electrically charged needles, replacing the need for exercise.

“HAL, any new messages?” I said to the open air.

“Affirmative, you’ve got five new emails,” replied my custom virtual assistant.

After checking my emails and strapping on my gear, I went to work. Work consisted of scavenging through the junkyard I called home and repairing and stripping down old electronics for resale to others. This was no ordinary junkyard scavenging job, however, it was surviving in one of the biggest tech wastes in the world the size of New York state. I had to compete with fellow scavengers, who were not above stealing from each other if necessary. During the War, the elitists bribed countless military officials to use non-nuclear warheads and avoid the giant scrap yards, as they had built luxurious bunkers underneath the yards. These yards were protected from harm by the barrier, which both kept things in and out. Sixty years after the war, the elite began rebuilding above ground, creating the Domes, megacities protected by 50 foot thick walls and a spherical force field that protected from all angles of attack, hence the nickname “the dome.”

The other 90% of earth’s population had also survived, but most were still underground. The reason scavengers were around was because, sometime around sixty years ago, there was a coalition of multiple rebel factions in several local bunkers who were then discovered by the overseers of their bunkers and forced into exile out into the wasteland, where they eventually became the scavengers. I sensed a disturbance in the force. I felt as if I was degrading from the story at hand. Anyways, back to my point of view.

“HAL, full lockdown while I’m gone, okay?” I said, initiating a series of actions in my hideout. I opened the hatch that led to a tunnel and to another hatch that led to the outside scraps. Before opening the final hatch, I remembered to grab my combo staff and my cycle baton. Then I stepped out into the waste that lay ahead of me.

 

Your Call Cannot Be Completed

 

The receiver hung limply from its wire, dangling from its cradle, the audio port shattered beyond repair. The stranger had been careless. Too careless. He had fled from the phone booth, fearing the chance of being hunted by Sentries. He was hidden in a dark crevice in the underground of the Citadel, a Dome known for it’s extensive black market. He listened keenly for the hum of the sentry engines. There was a patrol coming, nearly two blocks away. In an instant, the stranger took out a baton and ran, separating the halves of the baton. As he did so the halves transformed into a light cycle. He fled, making sure to turn off his lights, effectively becoming invisible in the darkness of the neglected streets. The stranger, intent on getting to his destination, entered a series of tunnels that led to a breach in the dome. Years ago he had discovered the breach while evading another patrol. He flew through the breach, and out into the scraps for half a mile. Then he stopped for a break. The stranger shook his canteen, trying to coax out the last drops of water that stubbornly clung to the interior of his canteen. After the water was gone, he took out a circular disc that he set on the floor. It began to glow as he did so, and after, he spoke into a small bracelet on his wrist that glowed softly as he whispered to it, “Transport me to the scavenger’s residence.”

Then he stepped onto the disk and there was a flash of bright light. Suddenly he was standing next to a circular hatch set into the ground. “Subject isn’t home, must be out scavenging,” he commented. He opened the hatch and into the darkness beyond. He dropped a messenger probe, its’ sleek glossy black shell humming with energy. The stranger promptly proceeded to erase all evidence he’d been at the scavenger’s residence, using a micro disinfector and his walkman to block out the annoying noise the disinfector made when in use. As the next song cued up on his walkman, he fled on his cycle, mouthing along to the lyrics currently blasting in his ears, “and another one gone, and another one gone, another one bites the dust,” silently on his cycle.

An hour later, he arrived at his destination. To the passing observer, it would have seemed like a weary traveler stopping for a rest on a rock. In reality this was a beacon that was used to signal rebel forces, but that was not what he was there for. The beacon was also an entrance to his “office” as he liked to call it. It was more than his office, it was his home. Then he waited for the scavenger to come. With him, the stranger’s dream team would be complete.

A Strange Day at Writopia

A normal Monday quickly became an abnormal Monday at Writopia, when a phantom snuck into room 4-3.

[Duh, duh, duh]

But no one knew how badly it would curse the class.

[Duh, duh, duh]

Cake pops must have lured the phantom in.

[Duh, duh, duh]

Duh, duh, duh…

[Duh, duh, duh]

Even the teacher was a little hyper.

[Duh, duh, duh]

For example, she was on the ceiling and she was bouncing off the walls, literally.

[Duh, duh, duh]

“Great idea for getting us cake pops, Abby!” (They said sarcastically.)

[Duh, duh, duh]

Hyperactivity is never good in a class that should be calm.

[Duh, duh, duh]

“I forgot what I was going to say to him,” said Max.

[Duh, duh, duh]

“Jokes on you!” he also said.

[Duh, duh, duh]

“Kake?” he also said.

[Duh, duh, duh]

“Let’s go over the work we did today,” said Abby.

[Duh, duh, duh]

Madeline said,  “Nicki Minaj’s laugh is scary.” (Everyone laughed at that.)

[Duh, duh, duh]

Nobody knew that Madeline was gonna be right.

[Duh, duh, duh]

“Oh my god!” Everyone said when they heard her laugh.

[Duh, duh, duh]

“Phantom, phantom, come out, come out wherever you are. Please leave us alone. We just want to write,” said Abby.

[Duh, duh, duh]

“Quit it!” said Max, Izy, and Madeline, having different ideas of how to stop the phantom.

[Duh, duh, duh]

“RICKY WANTS CAKE POP!” said the phantom, whose name was obviously Ricky.

[Duh, duh, duh]

So Madeline brought out her pokeball and said, “Go Nicki Minaj! Use hysterical laughter to make the phantom scared.”

[Duh, duh, duh]

“Tut, tut, tut,” Queen Elizabeth said coming into the room without any warning.

[Duh, duh, duh]

Umbrellas started to rain from the ceiling and out of nowhere, Queen Elizabeth jumped into the air and instead of floating down slowly like Mary Poppins, she fell down and hit her head on a chair.

[Duh, duh, duh]

Ventilation was unheard of at the time, and some poison gas filled the room.

[Duh, duh, duh]

“Writers! Writers! Quick! Everyone evacuate. We must escape this spooky mess of a room,” pleaded Abby.

[Duh, duh, duh]

Xylophones kept Madeline, Izy, and Max in the room. It was the alarm to say that they had forgotten their devices!

[Duh, duh, duh]

“Young people could never live without their devices,” said Madeline.

[Duh, duh, duh]

Zoe Lusk came into the room and rescued everyone but the phantom. He died a very unpeaceful death.

The End

Pandora the Detective: How It All Began

One day when ten-year-old Pandora got home from gymnastics, her favorite activity, she ran into her sister Maria’s room and saw that she was crying.

“Why are you crying?” Pandora asked.

After blowing her nose, she told her, “I lost my necklace.”

“We will find your necklace, okay?” said Pandora.

“Okay,” said Maria.

Before they started looking, Pandora asked some questions like, “What were you doing?” or “When was the last time you saw it?”

“Well, I was in the kitchen helping Mom cut the onions and prepare dinner,” Maria said.

“Now we know that Mom was in the room, but was there anybody else?” said Pandora.

“Nope, there was nobody else,” Maria said.

“Okay, this is going to be harder than I thought. Did Mom pull on your necklace while you were putting the onions in the pot?” said Pandora, hoping that it did not happen.

“Yes,” said Maria, not knowing what Pandora was going to do.

“Oh no.” Pandora grabbed Maria’s hand.

“Where are we going? Let go of me,” Maria said.

“Didn’t you say Mom pulled on your necklace while you put the onions in the pot?”

“Yeah,” said Maria, while Pandora dragged her.

“Then it must have fallen into or around the pot. It must be boiling by now,” mumbled Pandora.

“What,” said Maria.

“Nothing you need to know,” said Pandora, rushing down the stairs and sighing.

After Maria answered the questions, Pandora said, “If you lose anything else or your necklace again, think of these questions and then retrace your steps.”

When they got down, they looked around the pot, but they couldn’t find the necklace.

“I think it fell into the pot, Maria,” Pandora said after searching everywhere and not knowing what Maria’s reaction was going to be.

“Wait, what?!” said Maria in shock.

“You have to ask mom if you could get it out,” said Maria with a worried look on her face.

Their mother was at another stove cooking.

“Hey Mom, I was wondering if you would let me turn off the gas and stick my hand in the pot to see if Maria’s necklace was in there,” said Pandora hoping that she would say yes.

“Yes,” said Pandora’s mom, distracted by cooking. After saying yes to the question Pandora said, “Quick, till she figures out what I really said.”

After Pandora’s mom figured out what Pandora said, Pandora’s mom said, “What?” while turning around to make sure they were not sticking their hands into the pot, but when she turned around Pandora’s hand was already in it. Pandora didn’t even realize that her mom was coming.

“Oh no, you should’ve told me to help you, Pandora. Now take your hand out of the pot so I can make sure you didn’t burn your hand.”

“Sorry I wrecked dinner,” Pandora whispered into her mom’s ear so no one else heard.

“Don’t worry. It’s okay. This time we’ll make dinner as a family,” Pandora’s mom said.

“Wait, one other thing, have you seen Maria’s necklace,” said Pandora hoping that she did.

“No, sweetheart. I’m sorry,” said Pandora’s mom. “Oh, by the way sweetie, can you go check on your brother to make sure that he’s doing his homework?”

“Sure,” Pandora said. She went up the stairs to go check on her brother. When she got up there she asked her brother, Peter, “Did you do all your homework?”

“Yeah,” said Peter thinking about something else.

“Are you sure? ‘Cause it seems like you lost something,” Pandora said.

“Um, Pandora can I tell you something? I think I lost my iPhone,” Peter said, whispering the word “iPhone.”

“I never heard the last word. What was it?”

“iPhone,” Peter said a little bit louder.

“Did you say iPhone?” Pandora said, confused.

“Yeah,” said Peter, hoping that Pandora wouldn’t be mad.

“It’s okay. We’ll find your iPhone, but first let’s go downstairs to get dinner and greet our guests. And we’ll have to tell mom,” said Pandora.

“Okay,” said Peter.

They walked down the stairs to find Mom, Dad and Maria sitting with their next-door neighbors, Kevin and Vincent, who were in their forties. Ever since Pandora’s family had moved to the Poconos, they only knew these neighbors, but not very well.

“Sweethearts,” their mother said, “come say hi to our neighbors.”

The guys got up and shook her hand, saying hello, and shook Peter’s hand too.

“Mom, Peter lost his phone by accident and we can’t find it, just like we can’t find Maria’s necklace!” Pandora said.

Her mother frowned. “Kids, take your food and go upstairs. We have to talk about something important and we’ll call you when you guys can come back down. And it’s okay, you don’t have to be upset, you will eventually find your phone and necklace.”

Wow, Pandora thought. It must be pretty serious if we kids need to leave.

After Pandora, Maria, and Peter ran up the stairs, their mother said to the neighbors, “Pandora is trying to help them find their things and doing a great job.”

Without anyone noticing, Pandora stayed on the stairs.

But their dad seemed worried. “I wonder if our credit cards and money will also go missing. It seems weird that one thing goes missing and then the other on the same day.”

“That is very odd. Did your kids check everywhere?” said Kevin.

“Like five times,” said Pandora’s father like a know-it-all.

“Then tell Pandora to keep up the good work,” said Vincent, complimenting her.

“You should go check on your bank account, and if you want we’ll stay behind and make sure that the kids are not up to any mischief,” they offered.

The parents thought that it was a good idea, so they quickly went to the bank.

As soon as they left the house, the neighbors started sneaking around.

Pandora followed Kevin and Vincent all around the house until they stopped. Pandora didn’t even notice what they were doing because she was focused on making sure her brother and sister didn’t come out of their rooms.

When she turned her head she was about to bump into Kevin and Vincent. But she was lucky that she didn’t. After a little while, she noticed that they were in front of her parents’ room. She thought to herself, Why would they want to go inside my parents’ room? Once they walked Pandora watched what they were both doing very closely. She saw that they were trying to steal her parents’ wedding rings, which were on their dresser.

Pandora quickly came out of hiding. Kevin and Vincent saw Pandora and said, “You’d better not tell your parents,” they gasped.

“Oh really? You both aren’t in charge of me. A matter of fact, I can call the police if you would like,” said Pandora.

Vincent and Kevin cupped their hands around Pandora’s mouth. They grabbed her arms and legs. Vincent gave Kevin Pandora’s arms. Vincent quickly got the sleeping spray. They sprayed and then stuffed her into a bag. Pandora shut her eyes and fell asleep.

When Pandora woke up, she had no idea where she was. She was still in a bag. Then she realized that she had been kidnapped. The bag was very dark, but there was a tiny hole that showed a speck of sunlight. She stayed calm, even though she felt like she was about to scream.

But then she felt something sharp. It was a broken part of a knife. It was in the bag. She started ripping her way out. Pandora could see Vincent and Kevin sleeping on the couch. Before she did anything else, she found the sleeping spray that they sprayed her with, and then sprayed them. Then she stuffed the bag with two beanbag chairs so that they would think she was still in there.

After she got out, she sewed the bag so they wouldn’t be suspicious when they woke up. The room was dark and empty. The couch and a small round desk were the only pieces of furniture. It was not welcoming. On the desk was her sister’s necklace, her brother’s iPhone, and her parents’ rings. She felt so happy that she found the stuff and hadn’t failed them. She grabbed them and put them in her pocket, while also putting on the rings.

Then she saw rusty pipes going up the wall and across the ceiling that looked like ladders and monkey bars. The last set of ladders was at the end and beginning, leading somewhere out of the room and outside.

After she got up she noticed that she could climb up the pipes. She was afraid that if she climbed them she’d be too heavy and the pipes would fall down. She decided that she should jump down from the rusty pipes and tiptoe the rest of the way. But she saw another set of pipes that weren’t as rusty so instead she started jumping up. She was almost out.

She climbed her way out of the stairs, pushed open a floor door that entered a real house, and got out. She realized that she was in her neighbor’s house next door, and needed to go home right away, so she ran there.

When she got home, she saw her parents looking around for her, very worried. They looked like they were about to cry until they saw her face.

“Where were you?” said Pandora’s parents.

“I was trying to get your wedding rings that were on the dresser,” said Pandora. “And now I can call the police.”

“Wow, that must have been hard.”

Before Pandora could even answer, her mom said, “But where did you go specifically?”

I don’t want to tell them the truth so they don’t freak out, but I also want to tell them, Pandora thought.

“Not to worry, I’m home safely, no scars or anything,” she said, “but I got kidnapped by the neighbors. I saw that they were stealing, so yeah. They didn’t want me to tell you. I threatened to call the police, and then they kidnapped me. I used a piece of a knife to get myself out and did some gymnastics to get here.”

Her mom’s jaw dropped open and she could barely move, but at the same time, she was handing Pandora her phone to call the police.

Pandora told the police everything. About five minutes later, she saw the police show up in front of her house. She went running outside to show them where the neighbors were underground in their secret lair. Then she went down the ladder with them to find Kevin and Vincent. They were still sleeping. They tiptoed around them. The police quickly handcuffed them before the two men got up. After they finished handcuffing them they felt uncomfortable and woke up.

“You called the police on us!” they both said at the same time.

“Well,” Pandora snapped her finger, “I told you that I would call the police.”

Then the police brought Vincent and Kevin to their car.

“Would you like to celebrate with a party at my house after you take them to the police station?” Pandora asked.

“Yeah, sounds fun,” said the police. They smiled. “You did an amazing job.”

“You did a horrible job,” said Vincent.

When the police came, they had a badge for a new detective coat and a leotard that had a badge on it. The police asked her, “Would you like to work with us?”

Her parents and her siblings stood around her, waiting to see what she would say.

Pandora exclaimed, “Yes!“ and the rest of the night they partied and stayed safe.

Caribbean Adventure

It all started one ordinary day in the morning. I spent the early morning flipping through a book on geography to study for my test. I read for a few hours then slid down the staircase for breakfast. After breakfast, I started helping my Dad clean up our inn. The Whisky River Inn is usually busy and full of drunk men, but today was Sunday and the inn was closed. After finishing all the chores and church service, Mum and I took a short walk from the community baptist church to the lobster bay to catch some seafood for the inn. Mum had just started rowing back when disaster struck.

“AAAHHH ROW! IT’S A GIANT WHALE!” screamed another fisherman.

The great white whale splashed water and sent a huge harbor wave that engulfed me and Mum. Mum made it to the dock, but some force was pulling me out to sea.

“HELP! HELP! HELP!” I cried and screamed, but no one came to my rescue.

My mum screamed, “Lancelot!”

After what felt like ten hours, when I lay on my back to try and do the backstroke, I found an abandoned row boat in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean.

“HUZZAH!” I cried for joy. I jumped on and began rowing back.

Night fell quickly and I had no bed, no food, no shelter and no water!

SPLASH! SPLASH!

It was a ship! It was a huge galleon and I started jumping up and down on the rowboat.

I was saved. But I was wrong.

There was an explosion. I felt the boat disintegrate under my back and I passed out. That was the last thing I heard that night.

I woke up in a bed made out of linen cloth and a pillow with feathers of a turtle dove. At first, I thought I was home on the island of Key West, but then I saw a shark head on the wall and then it hit me. I was on that ship. I jumped out of bed, but a strange clunk followed. I looked down at my feet and almost screamed. There, on my left leg, there was a wooden leg, one that a pirate wears. I freaked out like crazy. I almost screamed and my stomach dropped all the way down to Tartarus. Look, if you woke up to a wooden leg, you would freak out too.

Then footsteps made me jump into bed, pull the covers back on and pretend to sleep. Out of the corner of my eye, I saw a pirate coming in and adding a strange gadget to my wooden foot. Curiosity overtook me and I found myself blurting, “Who are you???”

“Ah me! I’m Captain of the Hispaniola, the galleon you’re on right now,” answered the Captain coolly.  “You all right? A foreign pirate ship holding the famous Blackbeard fired a cannon at you.”  

I looked around again and felt a weird sensation like the room was bobbing up and down. I got up and followed the Captain on the ship deck.

Wow! I thought. The deck itself was HUGE. When we got to the other side the Captain told me to stay on guard at the tallest post on the 50-foot mast. I climbed up and immediately I saw something suspicious. Three ships with pirate flags were firing cannons at each other and one was bearing the British flag. I rushed down to the deck and burst into the captain’s office.

“Captain! Pirates and British ships!” I panted. The captain jumped up and rushed on deck. He immediately started barking orders.

“You! Turn and sail to those ships! You! get a group of your friends and go on the mast decks to search the landscape of the  battle. Hey, Lancelot! Go down and get the cannons ready and fire when I signal!”  

“Aye-yah  Captain!” I yelled back. I rushed below deck and got a few barrels of gunpowder and loaded the cannons. A few other ship members came to join me later and ducked under the cannons. I heard a whistle and fired my cannon at the nearing ship.

BOOM!

The cannon blasted me backward and the other ship caught fire and started sinking. At the second whistle, I fired and ran backward so I couldn’t get hit again by the force. I made it back just in time to see the ship sink away.  I rushed up the deck and greeted the British captain who happened to be a whaler. Our captain was arguing with another sailor and we heard he was convincing (threatening) him to stop sleeping late in the morning. Then the British captain left and we sailed on.

The next few days were like normal days. I did chores and ate and talked to my fellow sailors. All was well until…

BOOM!

“WE’RE UNDER ATTACK!” I rushed down below decks and kept lighting and firing the cannons. The attacker was a ginormous pirate ship and they had cannons on every square inch of the ship. Soon, all the gunpowder was used and the ship still wasn’t damaged, not even a blackened area of smoke!

BOOM!

The ship’s mast swayed and fell onto our ship! The pirates stormed across and I grabbed a silver sword to prepare for the attack. I fired the cannons one last time and rushed upstairs and started dueling the nearest pirate.

The pirate was quick, but I was strong. I pushed him back and into the waters below. I grabbed a nearby pike and pushed mast into the water so the pirates couldn’t climb here anymore. After the last pirate had fallen off the boat, the ship sped off. Every few days, we were attacked by pirates, but always we were able to fend off. After five months of this, we saw a shiny substance at the bottom of the ocean. GOLD AND JEWELS!     

The captain ordered me to lower a boat and to dive for the riches. I did this silently. I came up with pounds of gold, emeralds, diamonds, lapis lazuli, and amethyst. The captain was thrilled and agreed to give me a pound of all the rare stones once I arrived at Key West Island.

The next day, I woke up to the sounds of a rainy day. I grabbed my leather coat and rushed on deck. The rain pounded on the deck and the thunder broke the silence immediately. The captain was the only other soul on deck and he greeted me warmly.

Flash! Boom!

The wind howled as I rushed off the deck and joined my friends at the bar. Days past, the wind howled and the rain splattered the deck days on end. After the raining season, disaster struck.  

A pirate ship attacked us and the ship sank.

“GO! GO! GO! GO!” the captain screamed and yelled out orders. For no exact reason, I grabbed a handful of  salted meat and ran for the cannons.

Suddenly, a huge blast and the ship blew to bits. I found myself stranded on an island.

I tried to get up but I felt as if I weighed a million pounds. I dragged myself onto a stone and fell asleep.

I didn’t know how long I had been out, but when I woke up, it was dawn and the sun streaked red and orange lines across the sky. I stared and stared until a sudden sound snapped me out of the staring contest. A huge coconut had fallen off  a nearby tree and started rolling down the hill. I was suddenly full of energy and I started sprinting toward the coconut like the time I was ten feet from the finish line and first place. Just before it rolled into the waves, I pounced and grabbed the coconut. After I got my breath back, I found a sharp and jagged rock and cracked it open. It split in two and inside was delicious coconut milk. After I was done, a yellow cluster of fruits caught my eye and I had only one thought: Bananas. I ran and jumped just in time to grab the bananas and tumbled into something furry and soft.

Wait, furry!? I slowly turned around and I came face to face with a full-grown leopard. It growled and started sliding toward me. Frightened, I gave the leopard a bit of the salted meat I grabbed before the ship was blown to bits. The leopard tilted its head and bit the piece of meat. It chewed it and purred like a cat.

I had tamed it, I realized. I started to walk back to the beach, but the cat wouldn’t leave me.

I spent the rest of that day playing with the leopard. Even though I got covered in sand and I smelled like rotten meat, I had the greatest day of my life. Soon, night fell and I curled up on a bed of moss with the leopard which I had named Leonardo after my great great grandfather, who founded the inn which had been in a great financial state at that moment.

I woke up to the sound of a whimpering leopard (Leonardo). He was obviously  hungry so I gave him a bit of  the same piece of that strip of meat. I had a strip too but I was missing too many calories so I had some more coconut milk (same tree, different coconut) and another banana.

Once I got used to being alone, I took the time to realize what had happened in the last two days. The ship had been blown up, I had landed on this island and tamed a leopard. The days went by, then weeks, then months. The meat was gone by the second month but the island was huge and there seemed to be an unlimited supply of coconuts and bananas. By the end of the fourth month, I had lost almost all hopes that someone would save me.

But you have all the freedom anyone had ever wanted! echoed the small voice in my head. You have no chores, no bullies to worry about, and no parents to scold you. I pushed that voice out of my head and left and went to play with Leonardo. Every few days I made an occasional discovery, but the biggest was a tall cave that went straight into a huge cavern that was covered with shining gems. Every few days a wild animal would charge through the beach and jump into the water but I was always in a tree or in a lake or on the other side of the island. I felt like this island was the safest island in the world. Boy, was I wrong.

On the 134th day, a huge buffalo came charging out of the jungle and reared its hind legs and came smashing down onto the sand. I jumped up and started sprinting into the jungle. I pushed past a tapir when I came face to face with another buffalo, twice the size. I swam through a lake and jumped over a crevice. I ran up a tree, grabbed a leaf and started fanning all the parrots and colorful birds out of the way. I must have made a beacon with all those birds because a stampede of buffaloes came crashing through the jungle. My wooden leg was slowing me down so I decided to take a slimmer route. Bad idea!

The buffaloes charged in a horizontal line and head-butted all the trees so I had to dodge all the falling trees. My wooden leg was seriously slowing me down. I was ready to run. I was ready to hide. But was I ready to fall a million feet into the earth? I tripped over a big root and landed face down onto the dirt. The dirt gave way and I found myself tumbling to my death.

The fall went by in slow motion, but I blinked and I found myself in an underground stream. I was so happy I fainted. I came to right before I was going to burn up in lava. I hopped off the stream and saw only five buffaloes on the chase. I saw one on the ledge, two burning up and all the rest were stuck in a tight spot. I found the cave I found and started climbing.

The cave was sloping slightly and long stalactites and wide stalagmites forced me to lodge myself into weird and unbelievably uncomfortable. I climbed for what seemed like ages before I found myself in the brilliant sunshine. Leonardo was licking his paws and I saw my moss bed. I was back on the beach. The cave blew up when five buffaloes charged and head-butted the cave entrance. I stumbled, grabbed Leo, and sprinted away. I was saved when Leonardo jumped out of my grasp and bit one of the buffalo on its head.

He must have bit the leader because after that the buffalo ran away bleeding, all the others followed swiftly. I was just resting when the beach started to shake. Earthquake! The earthquake stopped as suddenly as it started. But I had no time to rest. A tsunami was pushing right to us. I grabbed Leo and ran toward the jungle. I hid behind the tree and closed my eyes.

The tsunami crashed onto the island. Water sprayed everywhere and I held Leo and prayed that this tree wouldn’t fall on me. Sand, coral, wood, stone, moss, smashed bananas, crushed coconuts, and a dead shark pushed their way through the dense forest. Dead animals were flying through the air. It was so gruesome I turned so I faced the wet and cracking tree. After the water retreated, I ran to the beach, spraying wet sand everywhere.

Leonardo growled which probably meant, “You covered me in water and squeezed me so hard and smashed my face into a mushed up banana so you don’t deserve my respect.”

Then the island shook and I heard an explosion before I passed out. I came to on a rock, with flowing lava surrounding me. The island was a volcano!

Suddenly one of the buffalo that survived the chase came pelting out of the burning jungle with a burning tail. The buffalo slammed down on the rock and laid spread-eagle on the rock, on top of Leonardo! I saw Leonardo kicking the buffalo but the buffalo was too heavy. Leonardo gave way. I kicked the buffalo five times and managed to push the buffalo into the lava and off Leonardo. I knelt down beside Leonardo. He felt cold and he wasn’t breathing! No! Then his head rolled and his eyes became glassy. I hugged him and cried tears of sadness that no one else would ever hear. I had a feeling that was a cross between hatred, sadness, and misery. I felt so bad I didn’t eat anything that day but everything changed.

“Lancelot!” The familiar voice lifted my spirits 1,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 times. The captain! I saw a huge galleon in front of me with the captain we saved on the ship, waving his cap around his head. I couldn’t help but laugh. He lowered a boat and I scrambled onto the boat and the British captain reeled us in. Captain and I laughed at the sight of me. I was blackened by the smoke and there was mud, leaves, feathers and bits of rock all over me. The captain said I looked like Christopher Columbus when he landed on Cuba and we both laughed.

That night I had a nightmare. Mum was screaming for me and Dad was trying to put out the fire in the bar. Soldiers were running in every direction. Fire burned all over the island. In the distance, a volcano erupted and ash and smoke filled the streets.

“Noo. Nooo, NOO!” I woke up panting. The captain was sitting on the bed stuffing herb water into my mouth. I blinked and went back to sleep. I woke up to screams. The ship had fissures springing all over the place and water poured and splashed into the ship. We were in a whirlpool and the ship’s mast was ripped. There was a terrifying sound of wood cracking and breaking and the exploding of nails. The entire ship was breaking apart. Then there was a huge explosion and sawdust dusted the bed from top to bottom. I looked up, stunned. The bed was floating and the captain was on a single piece of wood! I called his name but he had passed out. The whirlpool swirled us around. A swarm of sharks was circling the bottom for dead bodies. Then the bed tipped me into the freezing waters.

“Lancelot!” The captain awoke and paddled toward me and lowered himself into the waters. “Stay on this as a last favor!”

“ No,” I answered flatly, tears in my eyes, “I’ve had enough grief the past days. I cannot take another loss like this. You did all those things to help me and it’s time to do a favor back.” Tears were pouring down my face and my whole body was trembling but the captain jumped into the water and lifted me onto the board. I tried to pull him up but he disappeared into the howling whirlpool.

“NOOO!” I screamed and hollered until my voice got hoarse. I had just suffered the biggest loss in my life. Both Leo the leopard and the captain had died to save me. I swore if I survived this, I would write a book about this adventure and about Leonardo and the Captain.

My heart was permanently damaged. Emotions swirled around my head. All my positive feelings gushed out of my brain.

I managed to paddle out of the swirling water and into the calm waves. I had studied the captain’s map and I seemed to be on the north equatorial current which hit a monsoon current and the path I would take would lead me to Africa. I wasn’t pleased. Even if I were heading home on this little board, I would die of thirst and hunger and even if I managed to not die of those, I would go straight into a five-month period monsoon. The chances of me surviving were slimmer than outrunning a cheetah.

I drank salt water that burned my throat to keep me going but by the sixth week I couldn’t even sit down. I ended up lying down with my feet in the water. By the time I made it to the first month, I could just lie down and turn my head to drink water. My body was pushing my brain and urging my heart and forcing my lungs to stay awake.

I spent an unknown amount of time on that board before I saw a ship. It was drifting out of the clouds and lightning looking as if it just returned from the trojan war. Its masts were ripped, there were fissures in the wood, and the bronze mermaid on its tip had no head. I had no energy to stand up and yell and wave my arms. The only thing I could do was mutter “Help!” and try not to die. I felt like the biggest miracle happened. A group of thunder clouds was blocking the way they were going and were forced to turn my way! I just lay there smiling weakly.  I heard them shout, “There! A kid!” And I saw them lower a raft for me. A few sailors were paddling and the rest were craning their heads to look at me. When they got there, a sailor pulled me up and asked, “What do you want?”

“Water,” I groaned, and one other sailor pulled a flask out of his pocket. I gulped down the water in one sip.

“Where are we going?” I groaned.  The head sailor said, “Home lad, we are going home.”

The End   

***

Acknowledgments

Thank you, Mom, Dad, and my writing teacher Kira for supporting me throughout this writing semester and my everyday life. I gained lots of knowledge, experience and a universe full of imagination.

Another Peculiar Predicament

My eyes fluttered open like the wings of a butterfly about to take flight, peering up at the faint balls of light plastered onto the heavens. I swung back and forth on my hammock, each swing prompting bliss, until my body was engulfed in ecstasy. I looked around me at the vast, sweet grassy lawns surrounding me, each tendril of grass twirling around faster than the most talented dancer could ever wish to accomplish.

The mansion that I lived in, stood towering behind me with the most exquisite gold engravings on its edifice. The walls made out of the finest stainless steel, and then coated with a thin sheet of gold that made the windows seem like they were splashed on the walls like paint on a blank canvas. My house had approximately 300 rooms, with about 10 servants on each floor, which left our family of 3 with a multitude servants. These servants were paid, but a rather minute amount, for each servant got just a cent for every hour of labor.

The blankets that covered the hammock in my garden were made of the most extraordinary linen, forged from the heart of the Middle East where hundreds of workers labored for months to create every square inch. I was submerged in layers of these covers, each one so incredibly soft, I felt like I was one with my hammock. I slowly lifted my hand and brushed the linen apart, eager to meet with my parents. I treaded carefully onto the meadow (that over 50 servants tended to and kept perfect) and walked into the gilded doorway that lead to my house. The lawns were over 50 acres long, and had almost every type of exquisite flower growing in it except for some poisonous varieties.

I opened the golden metal encrusted door, which seemed to spellbind anyone who walked through it except me. I could not understand why so many people were awed by our family’s wealth. Some said that it was lavish, others simply shouted at my parents telling them that they should not parent me in this manner. For me however, it was a normal life, and I liked to think that anyone who was poor had not done enough labor to achieve the incomprehensible beauty and wealth that our family had achieved.

The interior of my house was a marvel, again, to anybody but me. It had a large silver ball hanging from a long, threadbare rope attached to a ceiling so high that you could barely see the top of it. The silver globe was one of our family’s masterpieces, for it took over six years to create. Slits, crevices, and crannies had been cleverly placed along the globe so that it reflected light to the adequate astonishment of the visitor. My house and I lived in quiet harmony with one another, and it was so perpetually luxurious that my mind often did not have the capacity to process it all.  Beneath the ball lay a large table, over 20 feet wide. It caused a plateau in the impeccably smooth polished floor beneath, and was one of the favorite places where my family united to partake our gorgeous meals. The floors were covered with a fluffy, white carpet that was as soft and silky as the fur of a beaver, which is actually what it was created from. Over 1,000 beavers were slaughtered for it. Some people might have thought that we were an unforgiving family, but I disagreed. I thought of beavers as a resource, just like every other animal, plant, and thing. If it was easy to harvest, it should be used until the source has been diminished to naught and it was time to find a new one. Some people call this cruel extinction. I simply called it the depletion of resources.

Since it was breakfast-time, I could hear my parents descending in their own glass elevator, getting ready to enjoy our meal. My parents were tall looming figures, at about 60 years old and in very good shape. Their faces were of a pale, opaque color and their bodies were very lithe and well kept, each inch scoured by the best plastic surgeons and cosmetologists. I was always astonished and very respectful when I met my parents, as they were the stars and heroes of my life. They had many burdens when they were younger, such as a small loan of 10 million dollars when they started (Some people say that 10 million dollars is a lot but I disagree!). They were able to build up from there to a worth of over a billion dollars through hard work.

We sat down to eat our meal consisting of 5 courses, composed entirely from organic produce from our own farm. My parents started to talk about the day as usual. “So Tom, now that you are 12 years old, you have to think of your future plans, are you going to continue to improve in your studies, so that you can be independent when you grow up? ”

“Of course,” I replied. “This home was a part of me since I first started walking and I am not about to give it up. I do not have a job yet, but I thought that I would just inherit your wealth when you die.”  

My dad’s face turned stern, “I know that, Tom, but you know that you cannot just rely on money to survive. After all, skills are very important too. Why did we go through all of the effort in sending you to the best school in the world? For nothing?”

“Ok, I understand,” I said, “I will try to study hard and be as successful as you.” After the meal that I had consumed, my family departed and I ran off to hang out with my friends.

Our estate had a forest with thousands of trees. My friends and I chased each other, racing through corn stalks, each fiber gleaming a crisp golden pigment. The kernels inside were like snails hiding inside of their shells. As we raced through the stalks, we left a thin wake in our path, which dozens of gardeners scuttled immediately to fix, making it seem like nothing had ever happened. As the forest approached us, the leaves merged together to create a thick blanket, draped over the millions of boughs that protruded out from the trunks. I never liked the trunks of these trees, as they are always in stark contrast to the beauty that my eyes had adjusted to living in. The tree trunks, with their drab, brown hue and dilapidated barks were a monstrosity to my eyes, that I had to shield my eyes with my hands although there was not the faintest trace of sunlight to be found.

As I ran through the forest, I surveyed my surroundings and realized that I had been stranded deep within it, with my friends, or my house, nowhere to be found. I ran faster and faster, but they were still nowhere to be found. The forest that I feared was like a cage, trapped me behind its thick brown bars. I instantly produced a wad of 100 dollar bills from my pocket, trying desperately to find a store so that I could pay them to lead me home (which was the way that I had been solving all my problems for years), but unfortunately, there was no such store or human to be found. Even though I knew that I was hopeless, I kept looking for one, for that was the only method that I had even known or used to solve my problems.

I wandered and wandered until I found a small hut made of wood harvested from our forest. It was so small I could barely see how someone could fit inside of the door. The hut was like a tent, except a bit larger, with large boughs strung together to create a triangular shape. Suddenly, my pent up rage increased, and I was about to demolish the hut when I heard a faint weeping coming from inside. I saw a small baby, about the age of 2 writhing inside, crying, probably because its parents had gone somewhere. I tried to console the baby, but again since I did not know what to do, I started to throw hundreds of dollars on the baby, thinking that it would stop the sorrow. Unfortunately, this idea did not work, and since I did not have any other remedy, I left the crying baby, thinking that there was nothing that I could have done to help.

I continued my trek through the forest, and as I walked, I felt strange feelings of shame and anger (as I had been taught they were called). “What is the magic remedy that can be used to solve all these problems that I have encountered. I must know now!” I muttered under my breath to myself. But as I walked, I encountered another problem, I had brought no food with me. I was about to draw more money from my pocket, when I realized that I had no way of spending it. I pondered about the ways that I had gotten food before, each time involving money and some person to give it to me, but this time I had no one to rely on to supply me with food. Instead, I had to use my own skills to get it.

I looked around thinking what I could do, and then I found a small bush growing in a neglected area of the forest floor. I looked more closely at the bush and found small red triangles sprouting on it. At close inspection, I realized that what I was looking at were actually strawberries. Picking one from the bush, my hunger got the better of me, and I ate them without thinking too much about what it was. The berry had a miraculously sweet and sour taste, much more appetizing than the strawberries that my money had given me.

With my pocket filled to the brim with these fruits, I continued on my adventure through the forest, completely losing the intent of getting back home. Wandering on, I bumped back into the hut that I was inspecting before. As I peeked inside, I saw the baby’s parent carefully cradling the baby and rocking it back and forth. I felt, for some reason, much happier just looking at this phenomenon, than any money had ever made me feel before. I thought that this must be the magical power that I was always looking for to solve my crisis, and it seemed to work, because in an instant the crying baby turned into a content one, without any money involved. My parents never did that to me and for the first time I thought that my parents had done something wrong.

 

PART II

 

Many hours seemed to have passed. I finally found myself at the back of the forest’s edge with my mansion at the end of the vast lawns. As I walked to the forest’s edge, I saw a tall, looming figure appearing before me. This figure actually happened to be a tree-like object so drab and dilapidated, that my eyes were repelled from the sight. The tree had hundreds of crooked boughs that were completely devoid of leaves, the branches so utterly twisted that I felt like they could break off at any moment. The tree took on a pigment of pitch black, and had the unostentatious stench of burnt wood struck by lightning. The putrid sight induced nausea in my body, and I shouted for my servants to come and eliminate it from my forest.

Unfortunately, there were no servants around, but after a few more shouts, my father’s workmen came with heavy lumbering axes. They tried to repeatedly strike it down, but each hit had no effect on it. The tree stood tall and refused to break. “Continue, you blithering fools. You were paid to work for me and you do almost nothing,” I screamed. “But sir, the tree might hit your house!” one servant cried. “Just do your work and do not question me. It is impossible that the tree will hit my house!” I screamed infuriated.

After a few more hours of relentless chopping, my servants finally cut it down, and released a cry of joy into the air. I too was delighted by the sight, but the large limp log on the ground started to roll even though there was no hill. The log rolled through the forest, taking lots of the beautiful vegetation with it. I followed, and saw that its width was rapidly increasing. Soon, it would be half the size of my house. The tree trunk continued to roll until it exited the forest, and appeared to be headed straight for my hammock. Instantly, hundreds of servants appeared around it, but it kept rolling on and on, and soon smashed right into the bottom of my mansion. My beautiful home folded in half like a floppy pancake, smoke and debris spewing out of the crash site. The steel, which seemed so thick, was now flattened by a piece of wood. My once wonderful home now looked like a garbage dump, with broken furniture, glass shards, and silver ball strewn all over large estate. Everything I had vanished in an instant.

I started to weep uncontrollably, a thing that I would have never done before. The house was a treasure that had connected my entire life, and now a very strange feeling of loss, almost like pain from a wound crept over me. I had always thought that my money would solve every problem that I had, but now here I was, standing on a field just after my home was destroyed, with nothing. I tried to find my parents, but they were nowhere to be found.

I looked around at the area surrounding me. I had depended on wealth and superiority for so long, but now that it was destroyed, I was lost. My parents were not there to support me, and now that my servants were no longer under the control of my family, they were running loose like a pack of random mice dashing about. I tried beckoning the servants to escort me into the ruins of the house, but they refused, as they had already long ran away from the house that they resented so much.

 

PART III

 

Exhausted, knowing that my whole life had been ruined by this catastrophe, I lay on the grass closed my eyes and fell asleep, thinking that I would never recover. When I awoke I saw that I was lying on a hard bench directly underneath a dark rugged wooden ceiling with not the faintest appearance of air or stars. My instincts kicked in, and I immediately jumped up and went to punish the person who put me in that position. But I found something oddly peculiar. Instead of me being in one room by myself which was bad enough, there were many such beds stacked in every part of the room imaginable. There were even beds atop other beds! Enraged by the preposterous view, I jumped out of the bed, and commanded forth the servant who did this at once. Unfortunately, there was no such person in the room, and as I opened the door in front of me, I was confronted by a warden wielding a large baton, his face a deep crimson red.

“So you are the new kid who is all over the news eh? They say that your parents were the richest in the world eh? Well now THEY ARE GONE!! Welcome to the real world kid. No matter how rich you are, you are getting the same beating nonetheless.” That final word being said, the man took his baton and started to smash it across my back. My parents had never done this to me before, and I was infuriated beyond belief, but I realized that my days of absolute wealth were over.

After the beating, I slumped back into the bed and had a look at my clothing. My brilliant robes were stripped off me and replaced with a handful of rags stitched together. After a couple of minutes, all of the other children started to wake up and walk out of the room. After that incident I was too frightened to go anywhere near that door, and had time to recollect myself. I was still shuddering from the shock that my house was destroyed and my parents were dead. It was very strange, for my parents were with me for my whole life, guiding me every step of the way, and now they’re gone. It seemed like a hole had bored into my heart and would remain. It was another strange feeling that I was not used to.

Cupping my hands into my head I started to rage about the turn that my life had taken, but then I realized that hundreds of other people around the world go through this sort of treachery since the day that day were born. I started to feel some compassion for my servants, even though every other day of my life I had taken them for granted. Looking up, though, I saw the clock ticking toward the better part of 11am. I was wondering who would deliver my breakfast, but then realized that since I was in the “new” world I had to think differently.

“That must be where they go for breakfast!” I exclaimed, and leapt out of the door in the room, thankful that I was leaving the putrid place for hopefully a long time. Unfortunately, the area outside of my room was even more appalling than I had expected.

It was a long hallway which expanded to either side of the room. Cautiously I stepped out of the room and started to walk down the left side of the hallway. I was trying to find the cafeteria and could not find it anywhere. Suddenly I heard a faint scream coming from a room and a bunch of screams following that. I peeked through the small glass window implanted in the door and saw hundreds of children lined up, sitting at tables finishing up their meals. I walked in and took a seat at one of the tables. If this was how I had to eat all of my meals than I did not think that I would last here that long.

I was presented with a glob of black slime. Everyone started to dive into their meals except for me who stared at the meal in confusion wondering if it was even edible. As I was doing this, a kid about the same age as me walked up to me. I hopped off my chair and started to saunter around the house, trying to lose this kid that was following my path, but he persisted until we ended up walking down the hallway to a little grassy yard.

I sat on a wooden bench to one corner, and the kid sat on another one across from me. “Hello,” the kid said to me.” I had no choice but to reply with a, “Hi.”

“So, how did you end up here?” he started again. I started to talk about my wealth and the kid alongside me listened in awe. He started to talk back to me and within an hour we were both playing together, laughing about our past stories and experiences.

We continued to play in the field, even after the sun had long set, and I started to reflect on my experiences. It was a peculiar feeling that I experienced, talking to this kid. It was much more gratifying than any wealth could have given me.

As I started to bond with my new friend I felt this surging feeling once more, but more importantly I realized that other humans were also of the same level as me.  As my friend went more in depth with his experiences. I started to understand that the attitude that I was imposing toward wealth and other human beings was all wrong, and my vanity was taking control of my mind. He talked about how he was at first very poor, and was a worker at a very rich man’s house, just like mine. He was treated so cruelly that he ran away and ended up here.

Days after that experience happened, my worries started to fade away, for I had discovered the one thing that was greater than money…Compassion. I vowed that if I were to ever become wealthy again, I would make sure to remain compassionate, something I would have never thought before!

Madison and Mousey

Madison and Mousey

By: Mousey O. Cheddar

…by the hand of Rachel Alcazar…

 

Madison was a great hero. She saved me. Okay, please, if you wait a second, I will tell you the story.

My name is Mousey O. Cheddar. I call a big glass box my home. Well, it’s a bunch of boxes connected with tubes. It includes a school and a house for me, and my friends Brie Brie Stilton, Audrey Stilton, and Shawn Gouda. It also provides a house for my teacher, Ms. Alison Parmesan. The roof is a latex folder with two flaps. My awesome owner is Madison Crystal Sullivan. She is nine years old.

First of all, I had just gotten home from De Afficial Scool Fr Mousys and I rummaged through my backpack to look for my homework, when I realized I had lost it!   

So, I looked and looked and looked and still didn’t find it. I looked in Chef Garbanzo B. Bean’s stinky yet good trash soup. Nothing. Behind the TV? Nothing. In the underwear drawer? STILL nothing. Cereal box? NOTHING!!! Oh no!

Losing one’s homework has a horrible consequence, because if mouseys don’t have their assignment, they would get my teacher Ms. Alison’s (A.K.A. Ms. Grouchypants) detention. That’s when she takes away snack. We always have yummy creamy brie on crackers. But for detention she makes us stand in her closet upside down while eating broccoli! YUCK, I hate that leafy, greeny, gross stuff!

The next morning, I went to school. Before I left I tried to tell Madison, “Please get my homework.” But it sounded more like squeaks because humans do not understand mice, but mice can understand humans.

The school looks like a room with a clock, whiteboard, and some desks. I was getting worried. Ms. Grouchypants was walking toward me with broccoli in her hands. Thump. Thump. Thump. My heart raced like it was running a marathon. Just then, Madison lifted up the roof and she looked surprised that I was chewing on a big fat piece of broccoli. She screamed, “You are allergic to broccoli!”

When she spotted my homework sticking out of the pocket of the roof folder, she screamed again! She got it out and gave it to me. I sighed a sigh of relief and threw up that leafy, greeny, gross stuff!

That is how Madison saved me.

 

THE END

My Life as a Dog

Sitting on the porch with my favorite human beside me, I can’t help but think about how much older she looks now. Not too long ago, she was the little girl of the family who tried to make me eat flowers because she hated me! I ran away that time. Now, I can’t run so well anymore. I get up and try to get my beat-up monkey that I named Robert. Seeing me struggle, Jess puts down her book and grabs Robert.

“Good dog, Buddy,” she praises me as she sticks Robert in my drooling mouth.

I will forever be loyal to Jess. She may not have always liked me, but she is my favorite person in the world. My name is Buddy. I’m a black lab who is ten years old. You must know that I am nearing the end of my life. That is why I am here to tell you the story of my life.

So as it was, I was the last of my brothers and sisters to be adopted. I didn’t know why, but I was all alone in a rusty pen. That’s when it happened. A man came in alone. Guy said some stuff and the big man that was in charge picked me up.

“Will this little guy do?” he gruffly asked.

“He’s perfect!” Guy smiled.

I didn’t understand a single thing they were saying, but I went along and that’s how I wound up in a machine thing. He stuck me in the back and went in the front.

After a while we pulled up in front of a white house. Guy got out of the machine. I struggled to jump out. All of a sudden, a boy came running and he hugged me so tight I was choking! Lady came out and gave me a collar.

“Jess, come see your birthday present!” Guy called into the house.

“What is it?” a girl’s voice called.

“Come and see!” Guy yelled back.

A little girl came running out of the house.

“A-a-a-a dog?” she timidly asked.

I could smell the scent of unwillingness and sadness steaming off of her.

“It’s to replace Riley, your old dog!” Guy beamed.

Jess bolted back into the house and I was very confused. Was there another dog here called Riley?

“She’s not ready to forget Riley, Mike, don’t push it,” Lady patted Guy on the back.

“Well, maybe in time she’ll accept Buddy,” Guy trudged inside and I followed him.

Apparently the house was all set. There was a bed, two bowls, a cage, and a pen like the one I had been in for so many months. The odd thing was that it faintly smelled like another dog. I decided to ignore this thought and check out what the family was doing.

“Buddy!” Boy called holding out a ball.

“Go get the ball!” Dad (as I heard the boy call him) Guy chanted.

I was confused! Who was Buddy? What was a ball?

Boy threw the round thing. My instincts took over and I ran to it. After all, I was a Labrador Retriever. Gingerly, I sniffed it and picked it up. I was starting to like this ball thingy! I ran to Boy who yanked it out of my mouth.

“Good boy, Buddy!” he praised.

Ohh, so I was Buddy. Now things were starting to make sense. This house would be my home for the rest of my life. No more rusty pen. I was going to enjoy it here.

After a few days, Jess still wouldn’t pet or talk to me. I was highly offended. What did I do wrong? Dad and Mom tried talking to her, but she wouldn’t listen. I knew if I wanted her to like me, I would have to prove myself worthy by doing something, but what would that something be?

That evening, Jess, Dad, Mom, and Boy (whose name I found out was Mason) took me to the lake. I meandered along the path going from Jess to Mason. Finally, we sat on a bench on the shore of the lake. Jess kicked a stick into the lake. My instincts took over and I leaped into the lake to get the stick. A few minutes later, I came back soaked and wet, the stick in my mouth. I proudly dropped it at Jess’s feet and expected her to finally like me. Contrary to my prediction, she scowled and pushed me away while holding her nose. Sorrowfully, I walked away and went to Mason.

“Jess!” Mason exclaimed, “Buddy just dove into a freezing cold lake and retrieved you a stick, be thankful,” he scolded.

“He’s just a stupid dog,” Jess muttered and trudged away.

Mom, Dad, and Mason looked at each other and sighed.

It seemed like I would have to do something other than retrieve a stick from a lake to get Jess’s appreciation.

The next day, the house became empty except for the girl who went to her room and slept. Basically, I was stuck in the house on my own. The night before, I had learned that I had a “dog door.” There was a flap that I could walk right through! Then I would be outside and the fresh air would blast at me. I walked around the empty house sniffing here and there. It was strange with nobody home.

All of a sudden, I smelled something weird. Like a burning of heat. I was confused, but my instincts told me I had to get out. That’s when it started; black smoke poured into the kitchen. It stung my eyes as I struggled to find my “dog door.”

Safely, I ran out of the house. The girl! Even though she hadn’t been very nice to me, it was my job to be loyal and protect my owner no matter how much she liked me. What was I going to do? I was safe and alive. Sirens blared up the driveway as men in red suits ran in the house. I wanted to warn them not to go in.

Another man in a navy blue uniform patted my head and tried to comfort me. Nothing could help me especially since I knew my girl was in there! Nudging the man in the navy blue uniform, I started to bark and whimper.

“What’s the matter, boy?” he asked, concerned.

I pointed my nose in the direction of the house. Then, I ran to the house. A man in a red suit outside stopped me.

“Where are you going?” he asked.

I ran inside without looking back. The men followed me, unsure of what I was doing. I bolted to the stairs and was about to go up when one man said, “Hey, maybe someone is up there!” Soon, I was dressed in a suit thing and a mask on my face. I charged into the house again with the men in red suits close behind. I expected the smoke to sting my eyes but to my surprise, I was fine! I quickly led the way up the stairs into Jess’s room. Jess was crying on the bed. The men carried her downstairs into a white truck that drove her away. Where were they taking her? I barked and barked but it was useless. The men in red suits were still spraying the house with the hose.

Finally, I believed my girl was safe so I let my instincts take over and ran to the house. Playfully, I jumped around and chased the hose. I was soaked when a man in a suit dragged me away. After a few hours, the house stopped secreting gray air that stung my eyes and made them water. I was still high on alert, straining to see if there was any scent of Jess or her family. Suddenly, a women stood above me. She was Jess’s mom!

“Oh Buddy, you must be worried!” she cooed as she stroked my head.

Heck, I was worried sick!

“Let’s go, we’re gonna go visit Jess!” She swept me in and stuck me in her machine.

A few minutes later, which seemed like an eon, I walked into a white building that smelled clean too clean! I was tempted to release waste all over the place. I quickly trotted behind Jess’s mom into a room. Jess was lying on the bed, sleeping. Seeing her there reassured me, and I went over and licked her. A second later, Jess’s eyes shot open and she screamed.

“What is that dog doing here!”

Startled, I jumped back.

“Relax, honey, Buddy is just trying to say hi,” Mom’s voice calmed her.

“And, Jess, Buddy here saved your life,” Dad informed Jess.

“Oh really, huh? Like I can believe that,” she sourly announced.

“Well, believe what you want, but that dog saved your life,” Mason pointed at me.

I felt proud and dejected at the same time. I had worked so hard to help Jess and now she didn’t even believing that I had saved her life! To think that I thought Jess would like me after she was told that I saved her life.

A few days later, everything was back to normal. Neighbors still came over with disgusting homemade dog treats for me, which I buried in the backyard for when I was  desperate for food. On this particular day, I decided to go wait for Jess at the bus stop because one of the neighbors had dropped off another batch of despicable dog treats, and I was starting to get tired of making holes in the yard to bury them in. I trotted to the bus stop and sat there ignoring the twitch of squirrels in the grass and focusing on the gasoline scent of the bus. After a century, the bus screeched to a stop in front of my face. Jess came off, followed by some blonde girls who were none other than Mia, Katy, Amanda, Sophie, and Summer. They were the popular girls Jess had always longed to be friends with. The ones she ranted about 24/7 and the ones that glared at her.

“So, Jess, I heard your dog is a life saver,” Amanda, the queen bee, motioned towards me.

It was like everything from then on was a movie. I couldn’t wait to hear Jess’s response.

“Uhhh, yeah, he saved me from a fire,” she replied.

I couldn’t believe it. First she was saying that she didn’t believe I saved her life. Then I knew, she was doing it for popularity. She was using me! Before I could decide whether I was proud or mad, Amanda said something very interesting.

“So, you wanna come to my house tonight, we can have a sleepover with Mia, Katy, Sophie, and Summer?” Amanda coolly asked. “Oh, and bring your awesome dog! I have a Yellow lab named Marley.” She sashayed away with her group following her, gushing and chattering. Before I could react, Jess was halfway down the path and I bolted to catch her.

Out of breath, Jess rushed in with the good news, me tagging behind her.

“Mom, dad!” she panted, “I was invited to a sleep over at Amanda’s!” she finished.

“Woah, hold on,” Dad said.

“Amanda Williams, the one who is the big popular one?” Mom raised her eyebrows.

“Yes, Amanda Williams and her friends have invited me with Buddy to her house for a sleepover,” Jess boasted.

Buddy!?” Mom and Dad yelled.

Say what? Did Jess just bail me out and tell them that I did my business in her mom’s flower garden?  Which I did, by the way.

“Yes, and Amanda has a yellow lab named Marley,” she reassured them.

Jess explained the whole story from beginning to end. When she was finished, everybody was gaping. I knew everyone was happy for her, not only because they reeked of the scent of cupcakes, but the fact that they were all smiling.

“Of course you can go!” Dad proclaimed.

“We are so happy for you!” Mom stated the obvious.

That night, Jess packed her bag and got into the machine. I bounded in behind her, and we were off. In what seemed like a month, we were finally there. Amanda’s house was HUGE. We stepped out of the machine and ran up the front path. Jess excitedly rang the doorbell and waited. Amanda answered the door with a smile on her face. Hmm, I thought I smelled a scent on her, an unusual scent, scared? Sad? Then it hit me, it was nervous. What was Amanda so nervous about?

As I sat down, all the girls started to pet me. I wasn’t so sure I cared that Jess used me anymore. I had never gotten this much attention in my whole life.

“Nice PJs,” Amanda complimented sarcastically to Jess.

Jess didn’t hear any sarcasm and glanced down at her dog pjs. I always thought they were cute.

“Thanks,” Jess gushed.

I watched as Amanda rolled her eyes at Mia secretly.

“Let’s paint our nails,” Katy suggested, breaking the silence.

Soon, the girls took out bottles of stuff and slathered it on their nails. The scent almost ruined my nose!

“I’m gonna go use the bathroom,” Jess got up and left the room, closing the door behind her.

“Girls!” Amanda whispered, “Let’s play a prank on that loser!”

Prank? Prank? Wait a minute, I trotted over to get a better listen.

“Oooh, let’s put itching powder in her sleeping bag!” Sophie jumped up.

“I brought some just in case,” Summer held up a can.

“WHAT?” All the others girls turned to face her.

“What?” Summer repeated, wanting to squirm out of the question.

“Perfect,” Amanda agreed.

Just in time, Jess came in.

“So, it’s lights out time!” Amanda cheerfully said, “you go brush your teeth first,” she told Jess.

I nudged Jess as if to say, No! Oblivious to my clues, she went into the bathroom again.

***

I watched as the girls hatched their plan. They moved fast, dumping bits of Itching Powder in Jess’s sleeping bag. I whimpered and whimpered, but the girls ignored me. Just mean. At last, Jess came in and everybody acted normal. Jess got into her sleeping bag. Then, the itching started.

“Uh, I think I might have gotten a rash,” Jess nervously announced.

“EWWW,” all the girls screamed.

“Go home,” Amanda advised.

Crying, Jess pulled out her phone and called her mom. A few minutes later, she pulled up. Amanda’s mom comfortingly assisted Jess outside. Once in the car, Jess started to cry again.

“I-I-I got a r-r-rash,” Jess cried, “and then the other girls started to glare at me and Amanda told me to go home,” Jess finished.

Jess sat there in silence as we pulled into the long gray path in front of the house that a machine always parked on. When we got inside, Jess’s mom started to wash her sleeping bag; Jess’s mom was a neat freak.

“Wait a minute! Jess, is there powder, itching powder, in your sleeping bag?” Jess’s mom asked suspiciously.

“Wha-a-t?” Jess sniffled.

“Jess, I think those girls played a cruel trick on you, they did the classic putting-itching powder-in-sleeping bag trick,” Jess’s mom frowned.

“Huh, maybe that’s why Buddy nudged me, he knew all along they would play a prank on me!” If Jess was in a comic, there would be a yellow lightbulb above her head.

“Now I know, those girls aren’t my true friends, Buddy is,” Jess ran up and hugged me.

“I’m so sorry I rejected you, you’re the best dog I ever had,” she almost suffocated me.

Now, many years later, I am still Jess’s best friend. As I shift my position, I accidentally drop Robert, my monkey, on the green, lush grass. Whimpering, I try to jump onto the patch of green but fail. Seeing me, Jess drops her book. Grunting, she gently lifts me onto the grass. I am grateful to her. It is hard to believe that a few years ago, she disliked me and pushed me away. Jess has changed a lot, and so have I. Jess used to be a carefree little girl. Today, she is a high schooler applying for what is called “College.” She will be leaving me soon and I will soon be leaving her. I wonder if she still remembered that phase when she rejected me. Leaning over, I gaze at Jess absorbed in her book, and she starts to stroke my head. Even though dogs hate it when humans pat them on the head, I lie still next to her without protest. Closing my eyes, I let the warm sun swallow me.

The End

The Mermaid Who Stole a Diamond

The moment Pearl saw the diamond, she wanted it, but the diamond was being guarded very securely. There were two guards, four bars, and an alarm. If Pearl tried to get the diamond, she would be caught for sure. Pearl had to think of a plan. She knew that if she didn’t have a plan, a police submarine would come after her. She thought and thought all afternoon.

Pearl swam into her small, cramped home. Her home was shaped as a circle. There were six doors leading off the main room. Three doors lead to bedrooms: Hers, her mom’s, and her brother’s. One door lead to the bathroom. The last door lead to their kitchen. Pearl swam down the hall that lead to her room. Pearl flopped down on her tiny, but comfortable bed.

Pearl’s room was decorated with a lot of posters. The posters had pictures of  very valuable items. There was even a small piece of gold in the corner of the room! She had gotten the gold when she won the lottery. Pearl had never wanted anything so much. She was a collector of valuables. Pearl was obsessed with diamonds and gold. She became obsessed when she first saw a block of gold. She was six. Now at twelve years she still loved valuables. Pearl got out a roll of parchment and a bottle of ink.

Pearl was going to make a plan. She dipped her quill into the ink and wrote a list. The list was of what Pearl was going to bring on her expedition. The list included a rock, a pair of large pliers, and an invisibility potion. The rock was to make a distraction. Pearl would throw the rock away from her to cause a distraction. Pearl would use the pliers to pry open the bars. She would drink the invisibility potion so that the guards won’t see her. As for the alarm, well, the rock would set the alarm off anyway.

Pearl went to the kitchen and got a pack of sea snacks. Since Pearl was going to get the diamond at midnight she knew that she had to rest. Pearl sat down on her bed and opened her snack. She found herself dreaming about the diamond. She dreamt about the way it glistened…

Before Pearl knew it, the time was 11:59. Pearl swam to the museum with the sack slung over her shoulder. Pearl thought of the way the diamond would feel if it was in her hands. Pearl was breathing heavily as she threw the rock through the bars. The rock landed right by the guards. Perfect. The guards looked around stupidly as the alarm went off. They walked to the entrance of the museum and shone their flashlights into the night. One of the guards pointed their flashlight at the other one. The two guards started tackling each other out of the museum. This gave Pearl the perfect chance to pry open the bars. Suddenly, the alarm stopped ringing. She couldn’t help but smile.

Pearl took out the pliers and pried open the bars. She had her hands on the diamond. Just as Pearl was about to take the diamond and go home, she stopped in her tracks. One of the museum guards had spotted her. Pearl dropped her bag and swam for her house as fast as she could. Pearl was breathing heavily as she entered her house. Pearl sank down onto her bed and started to cry.

The next morning Pearl was surprised to see her Dad standing over her. She barely ever saw her dad.

“Pearl, somebody tried to steal the diamond at the museum last night.” Pearl’s heart skipped a beat. Did he know? “The museum decided that the diamond wasn’t safe. So, they gave it to me. I’ve decided to give it to you.” Pearl smiled at her Dad as he handed her the diamond. Pearl had gotten the diamond and she didn’t even have to do a thing.   

 

Element of Silver (Excerpt)

Chapter 1

I didn’t expect to wake to the warmth of silk sheets. Nor did I expect the gigantic room decorated with champagne-colored furniture, or the soft bed covered with thick layers of blankets. I was used to the comfort of hard pavement beneath me, and unwanted newspapers.     

I didn’t remember who brought me here. All I remembered was walking back to my usual spot in a gloomy alley when something approached me. I couldn’t make out the object because my vision started getting blurry… until it was pitch black.

A knock on the door woke me from the trance cast by a magnificent room. I answered in a hurry and found a maid carrying freshly washed sheets. The maid had her hair up in a tight bun, and a french maid’s uniform like in a movie.

“Good morning Ms. Philips,” the maid said in a quiet voice.

Philips? My name was Maggie Archer. Where did she get Philips from?  I thought.

“Umm, excuse me, but my last name is Archer, not Philips,” I said.

“No, no, no, your name is Clara Philips,” she replied matter-of-factly.

I was utterly confused, but I didn’t show it. After all, Clara Philips was a good name, if not a bit sophisticated for a girl from the streets.

Once the maid left, a short and stern woman came in wearing a black topcoat, a pencil skirt, and high heels that didn’t make her look any taller. She also wore her hair in a tight bun, which pulled her facial skin taut as a drum.

“Here’s your schedule for the day,” she said in a businesslike manner. “Be on time for everything. I will be checking on you after lunch and before dinner.”

“Who are you?” I said before she could go.

“I am your assistant. I make sure you get your schedules. By all means, Clara, you should now who I am by now. I’ve been here for about a week. It isn’t my fault you go through assistants every ten days.”

After my assistant left in an annoyed huff, I looked through the schedule, eager to see what awaited me.

 

Schedule for the month of January

(Everyday Schedule)

10:00- 11:00am Breakfast

11:00-12:00pm History

12:00-1:00pm Arithmetic

1:00 -2:00pm Combat Training

2:00-3:00pm Lunch

3:00-4:00pm Chemistry

4:00 -5:00pm Supper

5:00 -6:00pm Piano Lessons

6:00-8:00pm Dinner

8:00 -9:00pm Dance Lessons

9:30pm Bedtime  

 

Chapter 2 

I decided to roll with my new life. After all, it was better than living on the streets. After an hour of deliberating over what to wear, I went with a pair of simple jeans and a blouse.

I raced down to what I assumed was the dining hall. It had several long dining tables set for about fifteen guests, just like the ones in Harry Potter. The room was full of teenagers happily munching away on breakfast food.

I quietly entered and sat down at the end of the table, closest to the door. A few minutes later, a maid approached me with a plate in her hand.

“Here’s your breakfast, Miss,” she said hurriedly.

When she left, I looked down at my plate neatly stacked with three pancakes and a swirl of whipped cream on top, next to a pile of scrambled eggs.

History was next, according to the schedule. When I finish breakfast and entered room 255, no one was there except a short man with streaks of silver in his chocolate brown hair.

What’s with short people here? I thought.

The man was too busy reading a book to notice me, so I politely sat down. I guess he could sense the presence of someone in his room, so he lifted his head and stared straight at me.

“Hi,” I said weakly.

“Good morning, Clara,” he said.

“My name is Maggie Archer. I don’t know why people keep calling me Clara Philips, much less why I’m here,” I said, on the verge of yelling.

“Maggie Archer? No wonder. You do look like them, even after all these years,” the man muttered.

“Who do I look like? What do you mean?”

“We’ll explain everything soon, I promise,” he said dismissively. “By the way, my name is Marcus Stepler. You can call me Mr. Stepler.”

With that, he raced out the door, leaving me to stare into oblivion.   

An Amber Story

PLOP. Hi, I’m Amber. When I grow up I want to be a writer! Amber Doller, the world’s best author, will be receiving her tenth golden medal for her new book, I thought. Well, I might as well show you my favorite book I’ve ever written.

It was a long time ago. A year ago, to be exact. Well, a year and a half. And my friend and I were shelving books. An hour later, I needed to get a book from one shelf to another, but it was really high up, so I couldn’t exactly reach it. I jumped as high as I could and then at the same time, my friend did, but on the other book shelf. All of a sudden I started floating. And weird enough, so did my friend.

We both screamed at the top of our lungs. Bump.

“What in the world just happened?” I asked.

“Ahhh,” said my friend, flying up and tumbling out of the window, catching herself a foot from the ground. She crossed her fingers and she floated back up using a bubble. Bubbles were coming out of her fingers. “Amber!” my friend yelled. “Why am I shooting bubbles out of my fingers?”

I tried that, but it didn’t work. Then for the oddest of reasons, I made a sad wolf with my hand and then bubbles came out. “It can’t be,” said her mother. Dun, dun, dunnn!

 

I finished writing. Until the next book, brb. I needed to go shelf my books with my bff, my reading room was long overdue for a reorganize sesh. I started pacing around the room, except all of a sudden, I was flying. I felt more airy on my face and I just felt a lot less lazy, like I didn’t have to do as much work. I also didn’t hear my own footsteps or hear anything.  

I looked down at my feet and I said, “Oh my god. Why meee?” because I was flying! My friend crossed her fingers that it wasn’t some weird disease that would make me die. And then, my friend shot bubbles out of her fingers. Real, actual bubbles.

“AAAaaa!” We both started screaming like we’ve never screamed before.

My friend was on the other side of the room, and she was still screaming into a pillow. I have powers. I have real actual powers. But it didn’t make any sense. I wrote about this. Writing stuff can’t really make it come true, can it? Or at least not fantasy.

Then a cartoon lightbulb popped above my head. Literally. My friend left when this idea popped into my head. She was so freaked out that my friend left to go to her house and scream in her pillows. (Then she flew to Mexico with her family.) But maybe, if I write something else down, it will come true. Let me give it a try: I just found out I own a gown of silk and gems. “I wish I could I wish I co –– ”

“Hun, a package is waiting for you,” my dad yelled.

“Yes!” I got the package and ran up to my room. Then, I got my specialist scissors and opened the package very, very carefully. And you know what was in there? And I’m not talking about talking to myself. Riiight? Na. It was a silk gown with beautiful gems on it. I showed it to my parents and they screamed in delight. I asked them if they wanted anything and then they said, “What now? Where did you even get this gown?”

And I said, “It’s something special.”

They said that they didn’t believe me, but they wanted a million dollars. So, I went upstairs and wrote down: My parents just got a million dollars. So then, something started raining through the house. It was green. It was money! It was a million dollars! I ran to the steps and my parents were jumping up and down and screaming and squealing. Then, we decided to have a ginormous party soon. School was starting so I wrote up a new backpack with everything I needed. My plan was to come to school in a limo with a butler. Then being me, I went to the deli to get Oreos.

The next morning, when I woke up, I got out of bed and went to collect my backpack from my desk. It gets a little annoying having a desk like mine because I have to pull out the bookshelf and I have to pull out the mini desk. Then, I went into my “walk-in” closet, a closet that was pretty big, five yards long and two yards wide. I got dressed in something that could be mistaken as a school uniform, so I changed it. I ended up wearing jeggings, a white t-shirt with a pink leopard print scarf, and black boots. Then, I took one of my books from the bookshelf, except it was a binder full of my plans for school. I was ready.

 

Chapter 2

 

“Dat’ll be $1.50,” the counter man said.

“Okay,” I said.

Grabbing the Oreos, I raced to the bench and found out I was in Ms. Peepee’s class, a.k.a. the meanest teacher ever. I took one look at my locker and almost barfed at the rusty walls. I started by putting a plain sheet of paper in my locker. Then I wrote down, I wish I had a perfectly decorated locker. In my locker was a little pink rug and on top of it, was a tiny table with a little drawer (the drawers for makeup, duh!), a mirror, a mini chandelier, an emergency outfit that was a bit over fancy –– it was a shirt that was purple with a bit of black lace over the belly and then the same color purple skirt with cowgirl boots –– then, there was hot pink winter coat and a beige sweater. There was also a pouch for my pencils and a little mini shelf for all my folders and notebooks. Then, I put up two more sheets of paper just in case. After that, I realized I may be late to Ms. Peepee’s class.

So then, I walked because it was right next to my locker, kind of wishing I was in Miss Lulu’s class. I went into the very back corner just when Ms. Peepee came into the class. She was wearing a purple dress with a blue sweater. She had her gray hair in a bun and she wore glasses on a chain. Who does that? Her heels clicked and clacked on the floor. She gave us an essay without even saying “Hello, new class.” And then, she said we had to write an essay on Africa and its animals and then for the week we had to write four essays about different animals that lived there. So then we had to start, and without thinking about what I was doing, I just started writing, I wish I was in Miss Lulu’s class.

Then, I teleported in front of the door and walked in.

Miss Lulu said, “You should be very ashamed. You are late, but since it’s the first day, some confusion must have happened with your teacher, so I will not mark you late.”

There was a seat in the very front, so I happily took the seat. Her voice was literally a sooong. We all wrote half a poem, then we had to finish for homework. But then, it was time for attendance…

“Kate.”

”Here.”

“Mark.”

“Godzilla!”

“Gareth?”

“Hi.”

“Adam.”

“Here.”  

“Amy.”

Uh stop that.”

“Alex.”

“Yo.”

“Alexandra

Hi.

“Josh.”

“Is better than.”

“Okay, anyone not called?”

Oh no! I raised my hand and I got called on.

Then, Miss Lily said, “Okay, I’ll make sure to add you.” And that was before the principal called.

 

Chapter 3

 

One of the students got the phone because it was one of the phones that was on the wall.

The kid said, “It’s for you, Miss Lily.”

Miss Lily got the phone and said, “Oh, really?” And then she came to

my desk and she said, “I am truly sorry, but someone who did not pay for the school is not allowed to be in the school.” So, I got sent to the principal’s office.

I got out a sticky note and a pencil on my way out. Then, I wrote down, I wish that I was on the attendance in Miss Lily’s class and didn’t have to go to the principal’s. Nothing happened. Miss Lily didn’t come calling back and say that it was an accident. I got very worried. Then, I wrote down, I wish that I had a pair of hoop earrings in my hand. Nothing happened. My face was getting scrunched up. It was my worried face. I knew I had to be incredibly specific on this, but I didn’t know I had to be that specific. I wrote down, I wish I had a gigantic pair of hoop earrings that are gold. Why was this happening? I was entering the principal’s office, holding my breath. I was writing faster than I’d ever wrote. I even wrote, I wish that my parents had a crown and a castle instead of a house, but I didn’t get a call from my parents. Now I was sweating as I sat down. Mr. Lightning started yelling what I should do with my attitude.

Blah, blah, blah about me trespassing on school property. Then I did something very stupid. I pulled out my phone and said, “Call my parents. They know that I belong in this school. They wasted a thousand dollars on it!”

So, Mr. Lightning banged his fist and said, “You are not supposed to have a phone in this school! You will be sent to detention dungeon.” Then five teachers with axes took me away to a dungeon with desks. The metal bars that surrounded the desk were rusty and had chains. Some had what I call peasants. I don’t know why, but I just decided to call them that. They all had these brownish, tannish gowns on that looked like a poor person owned, but somewhat a little more like mine.

Wait a second! I was wearing a pink gown?! It was sparkly and sleeveless. In the middle was a ribbon that was a couple of inches thick. I was locked up in the fanciest of dungeons. Unlike the others, was pink and purple and next to it was something that was blue and green. The pink one was marked “Princess” and the blue one was marked “Prince.” The pink one had an elegant bunk bed with pink polka dot covers and lighter pink fringe, it had a make up table and barely even looked like a dungeon. And on top of that, there was a hoity-toity closet and a beautiful tiara. Then the iron door slammed shut!

I started pacing and someone said “Will ya stop?”

There was a girl in a black dress. It had a bit of navy blue in some places, it was like a very dreary princess dress. I asked, “Who are you?”

“I’m Andy, and I guess we’re roommates. Sadly,” she said, while rolling her eyes.

I think she was looking at my pink dress, but whatever it was, I was not happy. I reached into the pocket of my dress, which I didn’t even know that I had, and pulled out a really sharp diamond and I have no idea why I had a diamond in my pocket, but somehow I have a lot of things in my pocket that I don’t know about.

“Now what’s your name?” she asked me.

I may have groaned a little, but I said, “Amber.”

And then she replied, “Princess Amber from Cristalandia? I bet you’re actually happy to be in this room. I so wish I was in the Prince’s room. I mean, it’s perfect. It’s green and blue, my two favorite colors. And, instead of a two bunker, it has three bunkers with really cool designs on them, not just frilliness and pink dots. What’s up with that? And their crowns are gold, while all we get are silver. No one even wants to wear purple dresses they provide, no offense.”

“What do you mean by ‘they’?” I asked.

And she replied, “Don’t you know? The stupid people who run the place. The Queen of Schoolandia, who’s the principal’s mother and the king of Schoolandia, her husband. But, actually, technically, they just provide the clothes. The principal of Schoolandia and his wife, Alicia, the Princess of Knowledge, are going to be crowned the King and Queen of Schoolandia soon. And the only thing I’m happy about is that when that does happen, they will take all of the stupid peasants out of the school.”

“Why do you call them stupid?” I asked with curiosity.

She said, “Where have you been? peasants are stupid. We are princesses. Princesses are good, and get to marry overly stuck-up princes,” the odd princess, Andy, got up. Then she took the blue dust, sprinkled it on me and walked out of/into the wall.

I woke up. I sat up. I looked both ways and saw no portal like I did before. But what I did see is a black, shiny pony tail with a black crop top and a leather skirt attached to it.

“Andy, what in the world did you do?”

“What do you mean?” asked Andy in a very sarcastic, questioning, guilty voice. “I only put blue fairy dust on you that makes you go to sleep for, I’d say, ten hours. Be glad I didn’t put the death black one on you. I don’t even have that one. My mom took it away from me. Anyway, you might want to forget what you saw or else maybe I’ll use the purple on you. And then, once I do that, I’ll erase your memory from the pink and I’ll go off into the portal again to get a new outfit.”

“Oh yeah, that’s toootally what you were doing,” I said.

In return, she mumbled, “Wish the dust could help me ‘scape this misery.

I gave her a few mean looks.

She answered by taking her ponytail down, brushing her hair, and putting on odd (but fashionable) gloves. Ten minutes later, a guard came to take us to “reform” school, a place where they attempt to teach us to behave by yelling and misbehaving themselves.

An hour later, we had to go to set up for the next class, which was how to sew. They made us take a cloth and chains that were from the other class and make our chains pretty so we could wear them. But everyone knew that the only reason that they were making us make a cover for chains was one: we wouldn’t realize that we were wearing chains, and two: they needed an extra class. My chains had a fabric that matched my dress –– a pink with purple gems on the handcuffs. I tried not to smell through my nose because if I did I would smell peasants, who did smell pretty bad.

It was finally break time for an hour. I decided to change into my nightgown and sleep for the hour, but Andy kept asking me if she should wear the blue glitter or the blue and black glitter on her gloves, which were handcuffs. After break, I got changed and went to history of torture, sometimes they need volunteers. Next class was cooking. We had 20 minutes to cook a meal then we had to eat what we made. I personally loved bacon and rice, even if the bacon was a bit chewy. Everyone barfed except for like three people who just said, Ew.

Then, as an extra little challenge, we were forced to save a couple of bites for the teacher who was cooking the class and whoever won got one percent off of their time in the dungeon. He barfed five out of 15 times. He said, “Ew!” for everyone except one person, who was the baker’s daughter. I was the last person to get my food tasted and he said mine was definitely the best. So, I only had 14 more years in the dungeon (who knew having a cell phone in school could do that much?). Everyone was oohing and ahhing at me like I just won the gold medal for the Olympics.

After that, we got a half an hour break to eat lunch. I did not get the apples because there’s a saying: bad teachers get bad worms in their apples, so why don’t bad students? But the carrots were amazing and I asked for two cucumbers to put on my eyes. Of course they said five minutes because apparently, if you were a winner of one of the challenges, you are a celebrity for the day. So then, when I walked over to the closest table, they oohed and ahhed for no apparent reason. So, I went to a table and sat all by myself. The carrots were good and the pizza was okay, but my favorite thing to eat was the baguette that they always made daily for the person that won one of the contests. It tasted like donuts and cookies and chocolate and everything yummy and rainbows. After that we have P.E., a.k.a. Pain Ed taught by Mr. Peapee.

The class went by pretty fast, blah blah, blah, pain volunteer and etc. I was so bored I thought I might die. But I wish I did not say that because the teacher said I must go into a me-sized pencil sharpener and try to reach the other side before I die. But as a proper princess I couldn’t die, only get hurt.

As I went through, I missed my old life, my mom Rosa, and my dad Sasha, and my twin sister Sage. It was too much. I pulled out a pen. It was a bad time but I did it anyway. I felt like I needed to. I did it, wrote what I was going through like a story. My wrist felt so normal. It just felt like I found the joy in what I was doing. What I should be doing. And I saw a light. It was blurry from my tears, but I saw it. Anything. I just needed to go home. The paper got wetter and wetter, but I still felt good. I was still writing.

She cried and wept.

The light was bigger, brighter. The more I wrote, the closer it got. All of a sudden, I stopped. It was dangerous because I was in an enormous pencil sharpener, but I kept on writing.

She felt a bright light

The hole got closer, even though I wasn’t running. So I kept on writing even more. I leaped in. There were bright lights and cars. No horses, no icky smells. I knew where I was. I was home.

 

“Sooo,” I sigh, “that’s my story. I hope you liked it!”

“Free hats for the cold weather,” someone says to our Writopia group as we are packing up. “Maya and Morgan, time to go.”

“I like your story,” I say to Morgan.

“Thanks.”

20 minutes later, I’m doing ELA creative writing about anything, and this is my story, just look up: Learn to love life as it is, for only you can change it.

When I Went Down the Rabbit Hole

Dedicated to:

Isabella for being the coolest writing buddy

Maddie  for ALWAYS commenting on my stories

Amanda S. for always knowing the coolest video to share

Amanda C. for all of your awesome help

Lena I have known you for only a few months but I feel like I have known you for a few years.

Emily S. for having the coolest quirkiest stories to share

—-

When I went down the rabbit hole,

I saw the sky come to a hold.

The echo of the Cheshire Cat

wearing the Mad Hatter’s hat.

As my blue dress flows in the wind,

my head feels like it’s in mid-spin.

I hear the rabbit!

“Late, so late.”

As he runs through a flying gate,

I duck with hands over my head

because I saw a flying bed.

“When will I get out of here?”

I scream and I scream with fear.

Until I hit into a wall

and on my back a baby crawls.

A glass shard that is oh so tall

reads the words

“Eat me.”

I climb on top a table top

and brace myself for the big hop

to land on top the mystery liquid,

and get ready for lots of sippin’.

I hear the noise of my own slurp,

and then I hear a birdy chirp.

It’s body was all big and fat,

and it pecks on the wall with a rat a tat tat.

When I went down the rabbit hole

I saw the sky come to a hold.

Seasonal Haikus

 

Spring

Colorful blossoms

Easter eggs are all around

Soft bunnies hopping

 

Summer

Delicious ice cream

Riding my bike down the hill

Splashing in the pool

 

Fall

I eat pumpkin pie

Colorful leafs are falling

Halloween is near

 

Winter

Snow is falling down

White snowmen are everywhere

I will stay inside

 

Seasonal

Lots of holidays

Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter

This was a great year

A Halloween Story: Series 2

When Jeremy and the ghost and vampires met they started to hang out with each other. Every day they liked to be with each other all the time. Jeremy didn’t even have time to do his homework. When his mom got tired, she said that he could only play when he was done with his homework. But the school homework was super easy so that she had to give even more homework. Jeremy was sooo upset that when he came home he ran to his room and said he’d never come out. But soon he was hungry.  

His mom said, “We have pork for lunch.”

That was Jeremy’s worst food EVER. It always had spices in it. It always tasted bad because it had spices in it.

Jeremy said, “Nooo. Just not pork! I will do anything, just don’t make me eat the pork.”

Jeremy’s mom said, “Okay. First do homework, and then I will set you free without pork.”

Jeremy said, “Double nooo. I would rather eat pork than do my bunch of homework.”

Jeremy’s mother said, “Oh wait, I forgot you need to do your homework first and then eat.”

Jeremy said, “Triple noooooooooooo!” Then Jeremy said to himself, Tonight, when everyone is asleep, I will run away to Spooksville!

After he did his homework, he wrote out his plan on a piece of paper and then called the ghosts and vampires to say that he was going to move to Spooksville, to move in with the ghosts and vampires.

The ghosts and vampires said, “Okay, we have a free house for you to move into.”

When Jeremy hung up the phone, he went to him mom and said, “Okay, Mom, I’ll do my homework.”

When he was done with his homework, it was night and it was time for him to go to bed. When his mom and dad fell asleep, Jeremy carefully went out of bed, opened his door quietly, and changed his clothes and packed his pajamas and whatever stuff he needed, and wrote a note to his parents:

 

Dear Mom and Dad,

I ran away from home because Mom made me do too much homework. Write me a note to Spooksville because that is my new home and if you write that you’ll never make me do so many piles of homework, I will come back home.

Sincerely,

Jeremy

 

Then he left and closed the door carefully. He ran all the way to Spooksville, but it was too long a way and too dark to go by foot. He would have to go in the morning. So he got his phone out that he always kept in his pockets and called to Spooksville.

“Hello, ghosts and vampires. I need a taxi from Spooksville, please, and I’m sorry that I called at night to bother you.”

The ghosts and vampires said, “Okay, we’ll get a taxi right over to where you are. We have a location for you. Bye.”

“Bye.”

When the taxi came to where Jeremy was, it gave him a ride to Spooksville. It took around an hour for the taxi to get to Spooksville. The ghosts and vampires were waiting for the taxi. They were all so happy to see Jeremy at night because they never hang out at night.

Jeremy yawned and said, “Where is my house? I want to go to bed now. I’ve traveled all this way to Spooksville. It’s time for me to go to bed.”

The ghosts and vampires pointed Jeremy the way and gave Jeremy the key to the house.

Jeremy went to bed and was exhausted.

In the morning, when Jeremy’s old parents saw the note, they were surprised and shocked.

Jeremy’s mom said, “Oh man, this is all my fault. We have to write a note to say sorry–”

“No,” Jeremy’s dad said, “You need to write a note, not me.”

Jeremy’s old mom got a piece of paper and wrote:

 

Dear Jeremy,

I am sorry I made you do all that homework. I just wanted you to hang out less with the ghosts and vampires and I want you to get a little more smarter. Please come home. Me and your dad miss you.

Sincerely,

Mom and Dad

 

Then Dad said, “Why me? It’s not my fault. You better erase ‘Dad.’”

“Fine, I’ll erase ‘Dad’ but this is the last time I’ll erase it for being all my fault.”

Then they mailed it to Spooksville. When it reached Jeremy’s house in Spooksville, he read the letter and after he read it he said, “Fine, I will visit them for only one day.”

Then he got a piece of paper and pencil and started writing.

 

Dear Mom & Dad,

Fine, I will visit you for only one day, but I am warning you, Mom, if you give me soooooo much homework I will move for good, and I am saying that there is a chance I can move back in.

Sincerely,

Jeremy

 

When Jeremy got to his old house where he and his parents lived, his parents were so happy to see him.

Jeremy said, “This is my last warning for you guys to make me do less homework. I will only do my class homework and that is it. Do you understand me?!”

And so his parents went, “Fine. We’ll let you do your class homework only, but then you have to move in. Deal?”

Jeremy said, “We have ourselves a deal!”

Then Jeremy went back to Spooksville, collected all his stuff again, and moved back in the house.

His parents said, “Yay! You moved back in!”

Then the next day, when Jeremy got back from school and did his class homework, he was just about to leave through the doorway, when his mom said, “Wait! Stop! Hahahaha. I tricked you. Now do all the homework I make you do!”

Jeremy went to his room rushing and got all his bags again and quickly went through the door and called the taxi to Spooksville.

When the taxi arrived, Jeremy went in the taxi and rode all the way to Spooksville. When he got to Spooksville he moved into his new house and wrote a letter to his mom.

 

Dear Mom,

I am so so so mad at you. I trusted you and you didn’t make that trust all the way. You had it good last night and a little bit in the morning, but I must say I will not trust you ever again and I won’t go to your house ever again. 🙁  

Sincerely,

Jeremy

 

Then he mailed it to his old house and when his parents got the letter and read it, his mom got another piece of paper and wrote:

 

Dear Jeremy,

I am sorry but give me ONE MORE CHANCE and I promise you, I mean it, I promise you that I will keep that promise for ever and ever and ever. Just please, pleasey please, you don’t have to bring your stuff, just visit us for one night. Just bring your pajamas.

Sincerely,

Mom

 

Then they mailed it back to Spooksville, and when Jeremy got it and read it he wrote a letter to his parents saying:

 

Dear Mom,

Fine I will give you ONE, and I mean it ONE last chance for moving back in. And I’ll bring my underwear, just in case I wet them.

P.S. And I mean it. One last chance. I’ll never trust you again if you blow it.

 

He mailed it to his parents and then grabbed his underwear and went in the taxi.

When Jeremy arrived at his old house his parents were waiting for him. “I promise I won’t make you do a lot of homework.”

Jeremy said to his mom, “And remember, if you make me do a lot of homework and blow it, I’ll move away for good. I’m only trusting you this once.”

When they went inside the house they got some dinner and went to bed. In the morning, after school, Jeremy did his class homework and called the ghosts and vampires. “Hello, ghosts and vampires? How ya doin’?”

“We’re feeling good. How are you?”

“I’m doing well, too. My parents are now so nice to me, I bet I can come to Spooksville.”

“You can, but it’s just that our friends are coming over for a sleepover. But you can meet them if you want,” said the ghosts and vampires.

Then Jeremy said, “Of course, absolutely. I love meeting new friends. Plus I can get their number on my phone you guys got me.”

“Okay,” said the ghosts and vampires. “See you at six o’clock.”

“See ya!” said Jeremy.

When it was six o’clock, he said to his parents, “I’m going to Spooksville for a sleepover.”

“Okay,” said his parents.

When he got to Spooksville, he was amazed because there were other monsters, and he found out that they liked this place so much that they wanted to move into Spooksville.

Jeremy said, “Can I have your phone number, because you guys look nice.”

They said, “Ughhhhhhhhh.”

Jeremy said, “Sorry, I did not understand that. Say that again?”

“UGHHHHHHHH.”’

“Ohhhhh,” Jeremy said, “I get it! You guys speak Zombie!”

“UGHGHGHGHGHHHHH.”

“I guess that means I’m correct, right?”

“Uggghhhhh.”

“Vampires and ghosts, can you tell me what they’re saying, please?”

“They’re saying that, yes, you can get their phone number.”

“Thank you,” said Jeremy.

“Ugghhhhh.”

“That means ‘you’re welcome,’” said the ghosts and vampires.

The zombies gave their number to Jeremy and went to their house to get some sleep.

When it was morning, Jeremy said goodbye to the ghosts and vampires and zombies and went home. And Jeremy lived happily ever after.

THE END

The Living Fart

Part I: The Living Fart

The living fart is evil. It has a big nozzle where it sprays extremely toxic fart gas on people.

It all started one warm summer day, when a new restaurant opened up in town. It was called Pepper Paradise. One day, my friend and I decided to go there. We burst through the door. Wow! The whole restaurant was literally COVERED in peppers.

“Holy cow!” said my friend.

A waiter came over to us. He gave us both menus. I looked at the menu. I settled on an all-pepper pepperburger… BRAPPPPP!!!

“What was that?” I asked.

“It was you,” my friend said. We had now finished our pepperburgers.

“It must be all that peppers,” I said.

A shadow loomed over us.

“What’s that smell? Is it you?” my friend said.

We both had a desperate feeling that something was wrong.

GRRRR… I broke into a cold sweat… GRRRR…

A HUGE fart floated over us. “SAY HELLO TO MY STINKY FRIENDS!’’ It raised its arms, showing some quite crusty armpit, and he sprayed gas from nozzles in his pits.

I escaped from the putrid gas, but my friend got encased in the brown fog the giant fart produced… I had to save my friend… The fart was coming for me…

“Run!” my friend cried, still conscious.

And so I ran… and ran… I dashed down Main Street and down an alley and into a building and oops, that building was the haunted blacksmith shop.

 

Part II: The Ghosts of Blacksmith Shop

“Hello,” a soft, smooth voice said.

I whirled around. A silhouette greeted me. I saw that it was a ghost of a woman. She looked green-tinted, and I could see right through her.

“Aaggghhh!” I shouted.

Now that was embarrassing because something in the darkness moved. A ghost of a man!

“We will take care of you until that evil fart is brought to justice or something,” the ghost of the man said.

I was getting hungry. ‘’What about dinner?’’

“Ah, yes, dinner,” the woman ghost said to the ghost man. “I forgot that people had to eat. Go whip up something to eat.’’

The man ghost disappeared into somewhere I don’t know of and came back with a HEAPING PLATTER FULL of “food.” Stuff like fish bones and frog liver.

I groaned and stared at it with dismay. “Humans don’t eat this kind of stuff,” I said.

“Don’t speak to your elder that way, or you’ll get the whipping of your life,” the man ghost said.

“Don’t you know that laws have changed since 2,660 years ago?” I said. “That’s illegal now.”

But the man ghost tied me to the wall (with a dead monkey’s tail), opened my mouth, and shoved the food in.

The sweet stuff on there was probably fruit, and it made me drowsy. I fought to keep awake. I glanced out the window. A brownish haze covered the city. I could see the giant fart who sprayed its fart gas everywhere, and people died left and right.

“Must save earth,” I moaned, because I was drowsy. I ran outside. I tore across Main Street again. I skidded to a stop in front of Pepper Paradise and saw the restaurant owner laughing maniacally. I faced him and said, “You’ve got to make this stop.”

But all he said was, “No way, little boy.”

He grabbed the front of my shirt. Then my stomach started to feel queasy. The restaurant owner held me way up to his face. Just when his mouth was about to spit out some cutting insults, when it was wide open, I blew my cookies. And you want to know where it went? Bet you don’t. Well here it is… his mouth!

I was so happy that I defeated one bad guy that I forgot about the “other’’ until I nearly got stepped on by it.

“HOW DARE YOU!!!” the living fart screamed.

“I hear you,” I said.

Then the fart broke out in uncontrollable tears. “WAAAAAAA!”

This was the most emotional fart I had ever seen. I ran to my own house where I grabbed our battery-operated vacuum cleaner. I heaved it to where the fart was still crying. Then I pushed the “on’’ button. The vacuum began sucking up the fart.

“BWAAAAAAAHHHHH!!!”

Now that the fart was taken care of, I needed to deal with the restaurant owner, who had fainted. Now I don’t know if this is legal, so don’t blame me for doing it. I picked up the restaurant owner and threw him in the air. Then, when he came down, I raised my knee against his back. I did this a couple times until I was sure he was dead. Then I went down the alley and had a party with the ghosts.

Epilogue

After our party was done, I remembered I had to rebuild the city. But first I decided to check out the restaurant. There was just something phony about it that I couldn’t shake out of my mind. I noticed a small door near the back of the restaurant. I kicked open the door and went inside.

WOW!”  I gasped when I saw inside. There were shelves and shelves and shelves of all different kinds of liquids. One was labeled ultimate super power juice. I drank it.

I started flying around. “Wheeee!’’

Then I flew out of the restaurant. Once I was outside, I realized that all the people lying around weren’t dead; they were just unconscious. So I decided to wake them. Then I realized something: if I appeared flying, they would faint again. So I had to wake them up standing.

I walked over to a construction guy. “Get up, bub,” I said.

“Eerrrggghhh,” said the construction guy.

I grabbed a stick from the ground and hit the construction guy. “Go rebuild the city.”

He moaned, “Isn’t that a hard order from just a kid?’’ But he started building a house anyway.

Once all the builders were woken up, I began waking up all the other people. Once all the people were woken up, I walked to my family’s house. It was untouched, so I relaxed for the first time in days. And in just a few weeks, the neighborhood was rebuilt. Then a year later, the whole town was rebuilt, and everything was all normal.

 

The End!!!

The Electric Masterpiece

Chapter 1: A Remarkable Discovery

Dr. Dupont was fixing his latest and greatest machine. The machine was so revolutionary that no one could make a machine similar. The machine was – get ready for it – a Time Machine!!! A time machine was believed to be science fiction. No one really thought it could be done. But with lots of patience and time, Dr. Dupont managed to construct a prototype time machine, and he was planning to turn it into a real time machine. But like all inventors, Dr. Dupont needed to test out his time machine. He went inside and set the coordinates to random. The time machine started with a big shake, but then it acted a bit more normal. The time machine had made it into the time and space realm. The time and space realm was basically a big timeline where the time machine would go, based on the coordinates. It was thought to have been destroyed for years but this was one of the first times it was ever found.

 

Chapter 2: The Big Mistake

The time machine was going through a big speed process and was moving super fast. Dr. Dupont was pretty sure the time machine wasn’t supposed to move that fast. Dr. Dupont didn’t realize what was actually going on, but he rolled with it. The time machine was now in a full activation process, ready to reach its destination. However, guess what the machine said? It said… JOHN CENA!!! Just kidding, it said “Error: code of deactivation activated, self-destructions protocols in action.” Suddenly, the whole time machine started to shake. The parts were falling off, the red emergency light was on, and the time machine was rocking super hard. Dr. Dupont realized what was going on, but he had no time. With no time to spare, Dr. Dupont got on his security armor in order to protect himself from the explosion. But once he put on the armor, the armor started falling off him. He tried to get the armor back on, but then he saw that the self-destruction was about to activate. The countdown was on: 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, 15- Dr. Dupont quickly grabbed the armor. The countdown was now on 10. The countdown was moving fast, and the door of the time machine flew off. Dr. Dupont knew that he would be stuck in time and space so he decided to grab whatever was left of the time machine and he would find a safe place to stay. But it was too late. The countdown was ending in: 3, 2, 1, BLAM!!!

 

Chapter 3: An Unexpected Landing

Dr. Dupont woke up very tired and weary. When he woke up, the time machine was broken and he was stranded in the middle of nowhere. Dr. Dupont wasn’t even on grass. He was on this cool looking metal. In fact, there was no grass. There was a big city with cool-looking cars. He decided to look around and see what was there. Dr. Dupont needed a way to fix his time machine. But first, he needed money. While Dr. Dupont was looking around, he saw a billboard that said:

 

Enter in a friendly game of…

EXTREME GO-KARTING!!!

For just $10 bucks, you can enter in

Extreme Go-Karting.

And you get one million dollars and a gold

trophy if you win!

 

Warning: Do not enter if you have lots of

diseases and pregnancy. If you have

Alcohol Problems, DON’T ENTER!!!

 

What was weird was that the billboard had arms and hands and it moved. It also flew. Dr. Dupont concluded that he was in the future. He checked his pocket to see if he had any money. All he had was his wallet which had his credit cards and some $10, some $20, $1, and $5 bills. Without hesitation, Dr. Dupont paid his money and signed up. He realized he was going to be injured. He even thought that he might die. Right after he signed up, he decided to find a place to live. He found a place called Robot Apartments. He went in and decided to look around. He noticed the whole place looked futuristic. There were robots instead of maids and there were teleporters instead of elevators. Dr. Dupont decided to buy a room.

“What can I help you with sir?” said the receptionist lady at the apartment place.

“I would like to buy a room please,” said Dr. Dupont.

“Your credit card is expired,” said the receptionist. “You should go to the bank and get a current one. I’ll tell you what. Because I’m nice, I’ll rent you a free room for a week. You can either take the moving stairs or you can take the teleporter. You are on floor number 4.”

Dr. Dupont was at least grateful that he got a free room. When he went inside, the room looked so cool. He had a king-sized bed where he could change the softness, and he had a Virtual Reality Television, as well as a robot maid. Dr. Dupont felt that he needed a good night’s sleep. So, he decided to go in his bed and watch some TV. The only good thing other than cartoons and dramas was the live Extreme Go-Karting match going on. Extreme Go-Karting was a lot more dangerous that Dr. Dupont had thought. First of all, it wasn’t a family-friendly car race. Instead, it was this game of bumper cars where you and the other people had lives and had to bump other people and knock them out of the race. You even had laser guns that would remove the person from existence for a few minutes. One person in the race got shot by the laser and was literally disintegrated into pieces. Whoever lost all their lives was out. In order to win, you had to be the last person standing. After the Extreme Go-Karting match on TV, Dr. Dupont went to sleep.

 

Chapter 4: Practice and Preparation

Before going to the Extreme Go-Karting Stadium to practice, Dr. Dupont needed to go to the bank to get his recent/future credit card. After getting the credit card, Dr. Dupont went around to see what he could buy with the credit card. There was one thing that everyone wanted to buy. It was the Speedster 2000, the newest Go-Kart for Extreme Go-Karting. Dr. Dupont went to the stadium. He chose one of the sample go-karts and started his practice. At first, he saw that the go-kart was a lot cooler than he thought it was. The steering wheel had buttons that could do various things such as giving a direction. Dr. Dupont was trying to bump into the other cars but he was so confused about the controls. He even tried the laser gun but he kept missing. After a while, Dr. Dupont started getting the hang of it. He even shot some people with the laser guns. Every day he started doing better in the Extreme Go-Karting Practice races. Right after the final practice, Dr. Dupont was feeling tired. He felt that he needed to prepare for the next day, which was the competition. He also needed a Go-Kart in the competition. The person at the stadium gave him a list of good karts. Suddenly, Dr. Dupont remembered about the Speedster 2000. He quickly bought it. The person at the store told him that they would deliver the kart to the stadium and in his booth. Dr. Dupont went to his apartment and went to sleep. He needed to be prepared for tomorrow. He felt something terrible was coming.

 

Chapter 5: Another Discovery?

Meanwhile, somewhere away from where Dr. Dupont was, a big secret was about to be revealed. There was a big event going on in a military base. Trucks were carrying large debris that came from a crash. The military officials were going to scan the pieces. They believed they had come from some kind of machine that came from space. The scan was going to start. Everyone was prepared to see the results.

Once the pieces were scanned, a robot voice said “Original Location: Old Den located in New Jersey. Destination: Unknown. Believed to have come from 2015.”

The General said, “Wait, it couldn’t have come from 2015. It’s 2203. Do you all know what this means?”

 The soldiers shook their heads. The General decided to host a feast/meeting to tell everyone. At the feast, The General said, “You are all wondering what the mysterious debris came from. Well, there are lots of conclusions such as comets, a meteorite, and even an alien ship. But the answer I’m thinking of may surprise you. I think that the debris came from a time machine.” Everyone was shocked, but not in the way you think. The General said, “I know what you’re all thinking. That’s impossible. Well, then I’ll tell you the story that concludes why this is a time machine. So most of you know about the big bang, which was a huge explosion that created the universe. Well, rumor has it that after the big bang, chunks of debris from the explosion formed up into a big piece of matter. Eventually, as the matter grew, it didn’t become matter anymore. It instead formed up into one big part of space, the time zone. Now, all of you know about the secret government project where the government experimented on time travel. But you all know the result: it failed. Well, someone else from 2015 experimented with time travel. The results are not going to be pretty, maybe even life threatening.”

 

Chapter 6: The Big Competition

Dr. Dupont was in his booth at the stadium the next day. The Speedster 2000 was getting repairs and Dr. Dupont was also test driving it. Dr. Dupont was prepared to take the challenge of winning the Extreme Go-Karting Competition. It was a longshot, but Dr. Dupont couldn’t lose. He needed the money to fix the time machine. The race was about to begin. But first, the announcer was announcing the contestants. He said, “Our first contestant is the fast but sneaky PURE POUNDER!!! And our second contestant is the slow but deadly STEALTH FIGHTER!!! The next contestant a new entry, the SUPER SPEEDER!!!” That was Dr. Dupont. The announcer continued, saying, “And last but definitely not least is the champion known as the RAGE MAKER!!! Now the match will begin in 3, 2, 1, GO!” The match had begun. Dr. Dupont quickly got over and went to hit the weak targets. “Looks like Stealth Fighter has been weakened. He loses one life and has only 2 lives,” said the announcer. In order to buy some time, Dr. Dupont decided to try and shoot the harder targets with some lasers. That way, he would have time to take out the weaker targets. But he kept missing. Stealth Fighter was hit twice by the other racers so therefore he could start on Pure Pounder. He first shot Pure Pounder and then he went to hit Rage Maker from behind. But Rage Maker hit him. So now, he had 2 lives. Using the place he shot the laser beam, he was able to hit Pure Pounder after he came back from existence. So Pure Pounder had only 2 lives. Dr. Dupont was now being chased by Pure Pounder and Rage Maker. They were on his tail. Eventually, Dr. Dupont escaped and it caused Pure Pounder and Rage Maker to lose one life. Dr. Dupont hit Pure Pounder in the back and now Pure Pounder was defeated. At the same time, Rage Maker had hit him. Now, Dr. Dupont had one life. He remembered that the rules change when there are 2 people left. If someone shoots the other with a laser, they win. Dr. Dupont decided to grab his laser gun and start shooting Rage Maker. Rage Maker was also trying to shoot him. One shot almost hit Dr. Dupont, which gave him the advantage to shoot Rage Maker while he was distracted. Dr. Dupont was so tired and he was so surprised that he managed to win. The announcer said, “And it looks like our winner is… The SUPER SPEEDER!!!” Everyone was cheering in the crowd as Dr. Dupont was handed his gold trophy and money. But under all the excitement, something dangerous was about to happen.

He said, “Our first contestant is the fast but sneaky PURE POUNDER!!! And our second contestant is the slow but deadly STEALTH FIGHTER!!! The next contestant a new entry, the SUPER SPEEDER!!!” That was Dr. Dupont. The announcer continued, saying, “And last but definitely not least is the champion known as the RAGE MAKER!!! Now the match will begin in 3, 2, 1, GO!” The match had begun. Dr. Dupont quickly got over and went to hit the weak targets. “Looks like Stealth Fighter has been weakened. He loses one life and has only 2 lives,” said the announcer. In order to buy some time, Dr. Dupont decided to try and shoot the harder targets with some lasers. That way, he would have time to take out the weaker targets. But he kept missing. Stealth Fighter was hit twice by the other racers so therefore he could start on Pure Pounder. He first shot Pure Pounder and then he went to hit Rage Maker from behind. But Rage Maker hit him. So now, he had 2 lives. Using the place he shot the laser beam, he was able to hit Pure Pounder after he came back from existence. So Pure Pounder had only 2 lives. Dr. Dupont was now being chased by Pure Pounder and Rage Maker. They were on his tail. Eventually, Dr. Dupont escaped and it caused Pure Pounder and Rage Maker to lose one life. Dr. Dupont hit Pure Pounder in the back and now Pure Pounder was defeated. At the same time, Rage Maker had hit him. Now, Dr. Dupont had one life. He remembered that the rules change when there are 2 people left. If someone shoots the other with a laser, they win. Dr. Dupont decided to grab his laser gun and start shooting Rage Maker. Rage Maker was also trying to shoot him. One shot almost hit Dr. Dupont, which gave him the advantage to shoot Rage Maker while he was distracted. Dr. Dupont was so tired and he was so surprised that he managed to win. The announcer said, “And it looks like our winner is… The SUPER SPEEDER!!!” Everyone was cheering in the crowd as Dr. Dupont was handed his gold trophy and money. But under all the excitement, something dangerous was about to happen.

That was Dr. Dupont. The announcer continued, saying, “And last but definitely not least is the champion known as the RAGE MAKER!!! Now the match will begin in 3, 2, 1, GO!” The match had begun. Dr. Dupont quickly got over and went to hit the weak targets. “Looks like Stealth Fighter has been weakened. He loses one life and has only 2 lives,” said the announcer. In order to buy some time, Dr. Dupont decided to try and shoot the harder targets with some lasers. That way, he would have time to take out the weaker targets. But he kept missing. Stealth Fighter was hit twice by the other racers so therefore he could start on Pure Pounder. He first shot Pure Pounder and then he went to hit Rage Maker from behind. But Rage Maker hit him. So now, he had 2 lives. Using the place he shot the laser beam, he was able to hit Pure Pounder after he came back from existence. So Pure Pounder had only 2 lives. Dr. Dupont was now being chased by Pure Pounder and Rage Maker. They were on his tail. Eventually, Dr. Dupont escaped and it caused Pure Pounder and Rage Maker to lose one life. Dr. Dupont hit Pure Pounder in the back and now Pure Pounder was defeated. At the same time, Rage Maker had hit him. Now, Dr. Dupont had one life. He remembered that the rules change when there are 2 people left. If someone shoots the other with a laser, they win. Dr. Dupont decided to grab his laser gun and start shooting Rage Maker. Rage Maker was also trying to shoot him. One shot almost hit Dr. Dupont, which gave him the advantage to shoot Rage Maker while he was distracted. Dr. Dupont was so tired and he was so surprised that he managed to win. The announcer said, “And it looks like our winner is… The SUPER SPEEDER!!!” Everyone was cheering in the crowd as Dr. Dupont was handed his gold trophy and money. But under all the excitement, something dangerous was about to happen.

The match had begun. Dr. Dupont quickly got over and went to hit the weak targets. “Looks like Stealth Fighter has been weakened. He loses one life and has only 2 lives,” said the announcer. In order to buy some time, Dr. Dupont decided to try and shoot the harder targets with some lasers. That way, he would have time to take out the weaker targets. But he kept missing. Stealth Fighter was hit twice by the other racers so therefore he could start on Pure Pounder. He first shot Pure Pounder and then he went to hit Rage Maker from behind. But Rage Maker hit him. So now, he had 2 lives. Using the place he shot the laser beam, he was able to hit Pure Pounder after he came back from existence. So Pure Pounder had only 2 lives. Dr. Dupont was now being chased by Pure Pounder and Rage Maker. They were on his tail. Eventually, Dr. Dupont escaped and it caused Pure Pounder and Rage Maker to lose one life. Dr. Dupont hit Pure Pounder in the back and now Pure Pounder was defeated. At the same time, Rage Maker had hit him. Now, Dr. Dupont had one life. He remembered that the rules change when there are 2 people left. If someone shoots the other with a laser, they win. Dr. Dupont decided to grab his laser gun and start shooting Rage Maker. Rage Maker was also trying to shoot him. One shot almost hit Dr. Dupont, which gave him the advantage to shoot Rage Maker while he was distracted. Dr. Dupont was so tired and he was so surprised that he managed to win. The announcer said, “And it looks like our winner is… The SUPER SPEEDER!!!” Everyone was cheering in the crowd as Dr. Dupont was handed his gold trophy and money. But under all the excitement, something dangerous was about to happen.

In order to buy some time, Dr. Dupont decided to try and shoot the harder targets with some lasers. That way, he would have time to take out the weaker targets. But he kept missing. Stealth Fighter was hit twice by the other racers so therefore he could start on Pure Pounder. He first shot Pure Pounder and then he went to hit Rage Maker from behind. But Rage Maker hit him. So now, he had 2 lives. Using the place he shot the laser beam, he was able to hit Pure Pounder after he came back from existence. So Pure Pounder had only 2 lives. Dr. Dupont was now being chased by Pure Pounder and Rage Maker. They were on his tail. Eventually, Dr. Dupont escaped and it caused Pure Pounder and Rage Maker to lose one life. Dr. Dupont hit Pure Pounder in the back and now Pure Pounder was defeated. At the same time, Rage Maker had hit him. Now, Dr. Dupont had one life. He remembered that the rules change when there are 2 people left. If someone shoots the other with a laser, they win. Dr. Dupont decided to grab his laser gun and start shooting Rage Maker. Rage Maker was also trying to shoot him. One shot almost hit Dr. Dupont, which gave him the advantage to shoot Rage Maker while he was distracted. Dr. Dupont was so tired and he was so surprised that he managed to win. The announcer said, “And it looks like our winner is… The SUPER SPEEDER!!!” Everyone was cheering in the crowd as Dr. Dupont was handed his gold trophy and money. But under all the excitement, something dangerous was about to happen.

The announcer said, “And it looks like our winner is… The SUPER SPEEDER!!!” Everyone was cheering in the crowd as Dr. Dupont was handed his gold trophy and money. But under all the excitement, something dangerous was about to happen.

 

Chapter 7: A Dangerous Threat

While Dr. Dupont was happy with winning the Extreme Go-Karting match, a spectator was moving out of the bleachers and disappeared. Once Dr. Dupont got his trophy and money, he put them in the Speedster 2000 so that he would use its camouflage to act like it was a real car. Right after he put the trophy and money in the car, something unexpected happened. There was a quick flash of lightning and then a weird-looking person popped up. Dr. Dupont had suddenly recognized it and everyone else did too. It was Pure Pounder. Pure Pounder was carrying lots of potions, a cauldron, and a mysterious bottle. He put the cauldron down and then poured the stuff from the potions and bottle. Once he did that, he mixed them up and then, there was a cloud of smoke and Pure Pounder disappeared. A mysterious wizard appeared.

“I am The Wizard of Time and Space. I am one of the Evil Destroyers,” he said. Then, he pointed to Dr. Dupont and said, “You destroyed my chance to rule time and space by using that blasted machine of yours to go to the future, which ruined my chance to conjure a big spell that would alter the universe. The spell picked up your machine and tore it apart and somehow you survived. If you were in the future, then what would happen is we would have no control of the events because they wouldn’t be balanced. So I hunted you down.” The Wizard of Time and Space shot a bolt that would remove Dr. Dupont from existence for, you guessed it, a few minutes. But Dr. Dupont dodged the blast. He went and tried to shoot the wizard but the wizard blocked the attacks with his shield. With little time in his hands, Dr. Dupont went in his Go-Kart and tried to smash the wizard. The wizard used his shield and tried hard to block the attack while Dr. Dupont tried to break the shield. Then, Dr. Dupont decided to shoot a laser blast while breaking the shield. The combination broke the shield and it blasted the wizard far away. Even if he came back, he would be weakened. After the big battle, Dr. Dupont went and he decided to find an old abandoned shed so that he could rebuild the time machine.

***

Dr. Dupont had finished his second time machine which would bring him back to present day. He crossed his fingers and hoped that the time machine would not break apart. He went into the time machine and set the coordinates to present day 2015. The machine started from 3, 2, 1, blast off!!! The machine had a slow start, but then it sped far far away, to where no human had gone before.

 

Epilogue

Back in the time and space realm, The Space and Time Wizard was badly injured, with a lot of wounds. He was definitely not in a good mood.

“Curse that scientist,” he said. Right after he said that, he saw a big flash of light speed past him. He decided to go to the events and years where he would visit, and he realized how much he had to explore. He also noticed the Extreme Go-Karting match and the significance it had. Meanwhile, back in the military base, people were doing research on the time machine parts.

One researcher said, “Sir, we’ve found an identification on the material for this machine.”

The General walked over. “What did you find?” he asked.

“I took a closer look at the material. There is a label that says ‘Dupont Industries Inc.’ I also found that the machine did not come from space, sort of. It came from a mysterious place which we are currently naming the X spot. I used the space telescope and I looked at a whole map of our solar system. I found nothing. Then, I took a look at the places beyond space. All I found was a wave with lots of colors. Currently, I would say that this is the X spot,” said the researcher.

The general replied, “I don’t believe it. It can’t be, it just can’t.” The general had a shocked expression. Back in the time and space realm, the wizard was amazed by what he saw in the events. It was different from before. The wizard, The Time and Space Wizard, had seen so much more. It was revolutionary. Without this big chunk of space, he wouldn’t be powerful.

The wizard said, “Now I know just what I was missing.”

Saving Dad

Once upon a time, there was a girl named Emily. Emily was looking at her grandfather’s book in the basement. Emily found a crystal in her old book where her grandfather kept stuff.

All of a sudden, the crystal said, “I am magical and I will use my power to protect you from evil.” Then the crystal said, “Go to help your father. He is in a car and about to fall off a high cliff.”

Emily ran to the cliff as fast as she could go, but when she got there she saw she was too late. She ran to tell the bad news to a wizard.

The wizard said that there was a cure to make her dad alive again. He said, “You need to cross obstacles, like fighting and going through a castle to find the position. Then you have a secret tunnel somewhere in your house.”

Emily ran to her house. She ran to the basement. Then she saw books. She pushed one book, and a secret door appeared in the basement. Emily took a step closer and she fell down in the tunnel.

Emily said, “AHHH!”

  

CHAPTER 2

IN THE SECRET ROOM WITH GOO

                                                                                               

Finally, Emily landed in the secret tunnel with goo. Emily could barely stand up. Emily saw some bats and some snakes. Emily was walking in the goo until she fell down a slide. When she went down, some kind of animal bit her, and she fainted. When she woke up, she appeared in a different world with some fairies and ogres.

Some fairies went to Emily and carried her to the queen of the ogres and fairies.

The queen said, “Drop her in the ocean!”

The ogres put a chain on her foot and dropped her in the ocean. Emily was sinking, and she was losing her breath. She luckily found a knife and cut the chain. She swam toward the shore until the shore disappeared, so she had to swim to the palace of the Mermaids. When she went underwater, she saw lots of mermaids.

The mermaids grabbed Emily, and they poked her, and then she fainted. They threw her in a jungle, and the crystal said, “You are near the position.”

Then a bug whispered, “You need to get up, lazy head!”

Emily ran up a cliff, but before she was at the top, she found a key. She unlocked the door and saved Dad!

How Humans Were Made

A long time ago, when only animals roamed the earth, there was a frog that wondered and wondered the same thing over and over again. What if there was an animal who walked?

A day later, the frog was wondering the same questions he asked himself every day. Just then, the great god Father Sky exclaimed, “I will make your wonder come true for a day, and if you like the animals this world will have them forever. If you don’t like them, I’ll banish them from this earth. All for free.”

“Deal,” the frog told him.

The next day, rocks turned into the new species the frog called humans. The only one that came close to the frog was a young girl who whispered something the frog will never say aloud. She said it to him by a sparkly blue pond. It was the best day of the frog’s life. What the girl had said to the frog was so meaningful that he thought all the new animals must be as nice.

“I loved the new animals! I named them humans,” the frog told the great god Father Sky.

That is how humans were made.

 

Author’s Note/Afterword:

We all want to know what the girl said to the frog. What she said was: “You don’t look beautiful, but your insides are.”

Choose Your Own Adventure, Sort Of

I went to sleep as a normal 15-year-old and I woke up this morning as a professional adventurer. Well, not exactly.

All I remember is my parents saying goodbye to me and my little sister, sitting down on the padded airplane seats, closing my eyes, and falling asleep.                                                                                                        

I woke up to Scarlett whispering in my ear and doing anything to wake me up.

“Lila, there’s a little kid next to me. She looks about three years old and she’s crying. Right after you fell asleep some lady came by and dropped this kid off. She said that we had to take care of this kid, Elizabeth. I don’t know what’s wrong!!!”

“Hi, sweetie,” I said. “What’s wrong?”

“I want to go see Mommy.” Elizabeth said.

“You just saw your mom.”

“That’s not my mommy.”

“Then you’re going to see your mom after the plane ride.”

“Okay,” she said and just like that she went to sleep. She was obviously very tired.

* * *

When the plane landed, Elizabeth was still asleep. I unfolded her stroller and strapped  her in. I pushed her out and saw her mom holding a sign that said Elizabeth on it.

“Mommy!” she said.

“Hi, honey,” her mom answered.

Her mom thanked us for our help and left the airport. Scarlett and I started looking for the sign that would take us to our destination, The Hawi Trails.  Soon we saw a sign that said “Partner Backpacking On The Hawi Trails.”

“Hello girls, you must be Scarlett and Lila,” said a man who clearly thought we were hot girly girls.

“Um, are you pretty ladies single?”

“Of course… not,” I said, trying to sound nonchalant. “Ryan’s so adorable. I keep a picture of him in my locker at school. Every single girl at school liked him until he asked me to the dance. My enemy, Ashley Von Bullymeyer, practically had steam coming out of her ears when she heard the news. On the other hand, I was smiling so hard my cheeks hurt, because for once, I got better privileges than my enemy!

“Oh, okay.” He said, looking disappointed, “How about you Scarlett, single?”

“Nope,” she said giving him the same impression I gave him. He looked like he had lost a family member as he let us by.

“The bus is outside. You’ll be able to tell it’s our bus by all the teenagers inside it.”

When we piled onto the bus, all the teens looked at us as if we were aliens. We were soon stopped by the man whose name turned out to be Jack Fost, the bus driver. “Why are you kids on this bus? You don’t  look like teenagers to me!”

“Well,” I replied, “that’s because you’re like, seven feet tall!”

We walked to the back of the bus and sat down. Suddenly, the bus lurched into motion, I felt a kick, and Jack started speaking. “This is going to be a long ride, so make yourselves as comfortable as possible,” he said. We sat down and managed to get through the ride by eating and sleeping and reading.

I woke up to the sound of Jack holding a megaphone in front of my face and screaming, “Get up!” I guess he thought I was like any other teenager who sleeps too long. I got off the bus, dazed, and the noise of the megaphone was still ringing in my ears. We had arrived at the safety house. It was green and brown and all the camouflage colors, so that the wild animals couldn’t get us. We thought about running away and going on our own, but then Jack said, “First, before you go, we have to go over safety tips and drills so you all know what to do if anything happens to you. The first safety drill is going to be swinging on ropes over lethal waters.” We climbed up a ladder above a tank of water with snakes springing up to try to bite us. Jack held onto the rope and swung. He almost got bitten by the snakes but he managed to avoid them. “Everybody, if you were watching, you would have seen how I did that.” He pointed to Scarlett. “How did I do that?” he asked her.

“You jumped onto the higher part of the rope and the snakes were too short to bite you so you were able to land on the platform on the other side.” I thought about it for a second and realized that Scarlett was right. He had jumped off the higher part of the rope. Then Jack pointed to Scarlett and said, “You try.” We all froze.

“Uh… ok…?” Scarlett questioned. She slowly climbed up the ladder and grabbed the rope. She shimmied up to the top like a monkey.

“Three… two… one… Go!” we all shouted.

She let go and hung on for dear life like she was a bull rider. She slowly started sliding to the bottom of the rope and at the very last second when the snakes were about to bite her, she landed on the platform with a smooth finish. And then everyone clapped and cheered.

“Who wants to go next?” asked Jack. Everyone was jumping and yelling saying, “Me! Me! Me!”

Jack said, “I’ll let Scarlett pick.”

She pointed to me.

“Okay,” I said. I stepped out onto the platform and I felt like everyone’s eyes were burning holes in my back. Here I go, I thought. I jumped down and started shimmying up to the top. A snake bit my sneaker but I tore away. I couldn’t believe I had avoided that snake. I landed on the other side and the whole place erupted in cheers once again. Everyone was eager to go and by the time we were done, we were practically professionals. By the time we had finished all the safety drills we had learned how to beat up gorillas, how to cook dead bat, and how to figure out which herbs were poisonous and which weren’t.

“Now it’s time for bed everyone,” said Jack. “But tomorrow morning we’ll get you up bright and early so that we can grab our supplies and get going.”

As we headed unto the bunks, one girl came up and asked us, “Do you two want to join a group with me and my buddy?”

“Um, I guess, why?” I said.

“See, we wanted to do this because it sounded fun but we know nothing about adventuring and survival, so we saw you were really good and we wanted you to help us.”

“Sure,” said Scarlett, always eager to help others.

After we spoke to the girl we went to bed. Right when I was falling asleep, I heard (a wail) Scarlett say something. “What did you say?” I asked.

“How are we going to survive?”

“We’ll make it,” I said, calmly.

Scarlett sounded scared. “You think when we go home, we’ll be professional adventurers.”

“Yeah, definitely,” I said, just as I was drifting off to sleep.

* * *

The next morning the girl we met the other night, who we had found out was named Sarah, met us at the trail that said, “If you are a professional, go on this trail.”

“Are you sure you want to do this one?” I asked Sarah and her buddy, Delilah.

“Yeah, we’re sure,” they said. “We knew you were good and we want a challenge.”

“Okay,” said Scarlett, looking nervously towards me. “Let’s go!”

But as soon as we stepped on the trail, we all came to halt and we heard someone’s phone ringing. I looked into my backpack and picked up my phone and checked it. It was my best friend, Emily. “Hi, Em,” I said. “How are you?”

“Good,” she answered.

Then I said, “I wish I could talk to you, but we’re about to start going on the adventure, so I can’t. I’ll be able to call you in a couple weeks when we get back to the safety house.”

“Sure,” she said. “I’ll say hi to everybody at home for you.”

“Okay, thanks! Bye!”

I got off the phone. “Ok, everybody! Let’s do this thing!” I said. And everyone cheered, “Yay!”

As we stepped into the woods, I saw our first obstacle. It was a pile of dead bats; it had a sign taped onto it. “Take these dead bats and cook them when you need it.” And at the bottom it said, “Bat Jack.”

So we picked up a pile of smelly, dead bats and stuffed them into plastic bags that were next to the pile. As we continued along, I heard Sarah say, “Look! There’s a lake full of rattlesnakes and a vine hanging down!”

We walked over there and decided we would go two at a time. First Scarlett and I went and shimmied up to the top, and she shimmied right below me. We started swinging and almost landed in the water but luckily we just avoided it. Then, when Delilah and Sarah went, Delilah’s shoe got bitten off by a snake, so we had to take turns giving her piggyback rides until we got to the campsite.

They had all of the supplies a professional adventurer would need. They had extra clothes, extra shoes and extra food. I took out the pot so we could make bat stew for dinner, and saw a slip of paper sticking out from under the cookbook. I assumed it was another note from Jack and opened it up. It said,

 

Dear Delilah, Sarah, Scarlett, and Lila,

I know you don’t think you’re good enough to do the professional trail, but you are.

Jack

 

Under the note there was another note but it was sealed with a wax sealer and it obviously wasn’t from Jack. I opened it and the first sentence I saw was, “If you don’t leave this trail I will kill you.”

“What’s that?” asked Sarah

“It’s some stupid note from Jack.” I said, trying to change the subject. After all I was basically the caretaker of these girls. I was 15 and Sarah, Delilah and Scarlett were 13.

As I went to bed that night I picked up the letter and studied it. I opened it up and started reading.

 

Dear Lila,

This trail belongs to me not you. If you do not leave this trail, I will kill you. In order to avoid me you must

 

  • complete every task twice,
  • take the long way every time,
  • use every material you get ten times.

 

Love,

The Trapper

 

Wow, I thought, feeling more scared than a 15-year-old should.

“Mommy, is it already time for school? I don’t want to go.”

I blinked and opened my eyes to see Sarah moaning like it was Monday morning. I crawled over to Sarah and shook her awake.

“ Wake up, sleepy head it’s time for —

“School?” cried Sarah, sitting up straight. “I don’t wanna go to school!”

“No. I was going to say wake up, sleepy head. It’s time to go.”

“Oh, okay.”

As we walked away from the campsite we came to a fork in the road. There were two signs. The first one said, “Long Way to treetop course.” The second one said, “Short Way to treetop course.”

“Guys, let’s take the long way there,” I said.

“Why?” asked Delilah.

I decided to tell all of them right away.

“So, this guy sent me a letter that said we had to take the long way every time, do each task twice, and use every material ten times. I don’t know who this is but the letter was signed The Trapper…”

I noticed Delilah standing away from us, reading a book.  

“Wow. That’s really freaky!” said Scarlett, “How do you think he knows your name?”

“I don’t know. Maybe he’s been watching us from above. Who cares? Let’s go to the treetop course!” I said, changing the subject.

“Okay,” said Sarah, rolling her eyes. I could tell that she was annoyed that we had to go the long way.

As we climbed up the tree, I noticed a rustling in the bushes and stopped. Is that The Trapper? I thought.

“Move it, Lila. We’re waiting.” Delilah’s harsh words interrupted my fantasy. She was right under me and Sarah and Scarlett were right under her.

“Sorry. I was spacing out. I’ll move.” I climbed up to the top of the tree and was past the tree wire, when I heard a scream. I turned around and saw Scarlett hanging on to the tree wire by just her hands.

“Help! Somebody!” shrieked Scarlett. “I don’t want to die young!”

Suddenly, someone scurried up the tree and pulled Scarlett to safety. I breathed a sigh of relief, not realizing I was holding my breath and stared at the man who had saved my younger sister. I heard my sister gasp and when he turned his head I gasped too.

It was Jack Fost! The man I had underestimated two days ago was so much braver and stronger than I would’ve believed!

“Jack, it’s you!” my sister breathed, “You’re my hero!”

“Thank you Scarlett. I would stay for the party but I must go spy on the other teams.” We all giggled.

“Come on Scarlett, let’s finish the treetop course.”

“I don’t want to. It’s too scary. You help me,” Scarlett said to Sarah.

“Umm, okay?” Sarah said as if she was talking to a little kid who was very needy.

As Sarah and Scarlett worked their way across the course, I shouted back to them, “Since two of us have to do the course again, Delilah and I will do it because you both look exhausted and a little freaked out.”

“I definitely am,” said Scarlett. “I don’t know about you, but you look freaked too.”

“Yup,” said Sarah.

When Delilah and I went up for a second time we looked down to see Scarlett and Sarah cheering for us. I liked it but it was getting annoying so I called down to them, “Please stop cheering. I can’t concentrate when you cheer, but thanks.”

“Okay!” they shouted. They continued to cheer for us but silently.

As I ziplined down to the bottom of the course, I heard a voice coming from the bushes and listened closely and heard bits and pieces of their conversation.

“That goody two shoes… I’m gonna get her… totally, she’s such an idiot…”

I froze. I never thought it was possible to freeze in midair but I guess it was. Maybe they were talking about Delilah (she was a goody two shoes). Sarah had told me when Delilah was told she couldn’t bring her suitcase filled with makeup and shoes, she cried for 30 minutes straight.

I snapped out of my vision just to hear a breaking noise and a crash. I opened my eyes to see the platform in front of me crashing down to the ground. Suddenly, I felt a lurch. I fell a few feet and landed safely on the ground.

“Tada!” I shouted, smiling at everyone’s worried faces. “What’s wrong?”

“Look up,” said Scarlett. I looked up and screamed. Quick as a flash we got into our formation and caught Delilah safely.

“Are you okay? Are you hurt? Where does it hurt?” We were firing questions at her like speeding bullets.

“I’m okay, I’m okay!” said Delilah, clearly exasperated by our continuous questioning, “Leave me alone you guys. I’m okay! And you know, YOU GUYS DON’T EVEN CARE ABOUT ME!!! YOU ALWAYS LEAVE ME OUT OF YOUR CONVERSATIONS!! I DON’T EVEN WANT TO BE WITH YOU!! GOODBYE!!!”

I stared as Delilah stomped out of the clearing. She walked back towards the campsite before turning around and yelling, “I DON’T WANT TO BE YOUR SISTER ANYMORE, SARAH KATE ANDERSSON!!!

Sarah turned and started crying in my arms. She started blubbering about how she was the best big sister ever and how she wanted Delilah back.

I turned to Scarlett and she understood the look in my eyes. She started towards the path and turned around just to smile at Sarah with a sad but hopeful look in her eyes. Sarah smiled slightly but just when I thought she was going stop crying, she burst into tears once again.

“Come on, Sarah,” I said. “Let’s go sit down and we can talk.”

After a half-hour long conversation, Scarlett came back, covered in bristles and leaves but pulling a grumbling Delilah behind her.

“She tried to run away from me so I had to tie some rope around her hands.”

After we untied the ropes from her hands, I noticed two more letters on the ground, covered with leaves.

“Guys, I’m a little tired so I’m gonna go inside and read a little bit.”

I picked up the letters, brought them inside, and opened them up. The first one said,

Dear Sarah, Delilah, Scarlett, and Lila,

You guys are doing really well so far. I heard about the pole that fell and we’re going to get it fixed.

Jack

 

I noticed the other letter had a wax sealer on it. I opened it up to see another letter from the Trapper. It read:

 

Dear Lila,

Hello my name is Jack Fost and I hate you.

The Trapper

 

I gasped. Could Jack, the hero I used to know, be evil? All those thoughts whirled around in my head until I couldn’t stand it anymore and the whole world went black.

When I came to, all my friends were standing over me.

“Lila, are you OK? You look like you’ve seen a ghost,” said Scarlett.

“I‘m okay. I just heard the craziest news. Jack is The Trapper!”

“OMG!!! Omg, omg, omg! Is it really true? No, it can’t be. I don’t know. AAHHH!” shouted Sarah.

“Listen, guys. I have a new plan. Our new goal is to go off the path and live in the wild to avoid Jack, and we’ll do the obstacles if they end up in our path,” said Delilah, finally in on the conversation.

“Good idea,” I said, and smiled happily at my friends. “But still, we should try to destroy him or kill him so we can get home safely instead of being killed by the person who once cared about my sister and life.” I heard a laugh and it sounded like Nicki Minaj from Anaconda. I said to my friends, “Does anyone hear a Nicki Minaj laugh?”

“Huh?” said Scarlett.

“What are you talking about? Don’t you understand what I’m saying about Jack?”

“You said, ‘Does anyone hear a Nicki Minaj laugh?’”

Then it was my turn to say, “Huh?”  

I sat down and started to cry. Sitting there, pouring out all my feelings to my friends, I could feel their warmth inside of me, running through my veins.

Suddenly, I felt heat, not caring heat but real heat like something was on fire. I looked down to see the fire that had been cracking moments ago form a circle around us as if it was made by a human, not nature. On the other side of the clearing, written in a  scrawled handwriting, words started to appear in fire! Suddenly, a man in black rushed through the bushes and then disappeared.

“Guys!!! Look, there’s some words over there!!! I’m going to read them. ‘Hello. It’s me. I’m going to kill you if it’s the last thing I do before you kill me. Hahahahaha!!!’”

“Oh god,” said Scarlett, shuddering. “That’s creepy.”

“It’s not the time to think about that! We have to get out of here!” shouted Sarah. Delilah and I nodded our heads.

“I got an idea,” said Delilah. “Let’s have Lila jump out and then we’ll throw everyone else over and she can catch them.”

“Okay,” I said, a little nervously. I jumped over and had just turned around, when Sarah came flying in my arms. I teetered a little bit and almost fell into the flames. Luckily, I kept my balance and held Sarah for a second. She felt as light as Mia, my sister way back home in Maine, where I wanted to be right now.

Maine was my home for my whole life. I had always wanted a sister and when Scarlett came along I acted as if it was the happiest thing that had ever happened to me. But after I realized what it was like to have a little sister, another one came along. That time I was unhappy to have another sister but realized, being 13 made it better. I got to play with her and put her to bed. It was amazing for me.

Suddenly, Scarlett connected with my arms and we went toppling to the ground. I stood up and helped Scarlett up, staring at her knotted ponytail.

Delilah jumped over the fire and we continued on our way. I stopped for a second, realizing something.

“Where’s Delilah?” I asked.

“She was just here a minu — ”

Suddenly, there was a piercing scream coming from the fire, a platform was lowering Delilah underground!!! We ran over to the platform and jumped in just as the door closed.

We ended up in a white chamber so bright it burned my eyes. Everything went white, then black, then white again. Finally, it went pitch black and I fainted.

* * *

I woke up and tried to stand but I toppled for the fact that I was tied up. I managed to turn around and saw my sister and two friends tied up next to me. Suddenly, I heard a booming voice that woke them up and Delilah screamed and started to cry.

I noticed Jack standing in a corner of the room. He noticed me and walked over.

“So, you thought you could fool me, eh?”

“I did. But I think you don’t know what’s going on,” I said, my voice as cold and hard as ice. I stared into his eyes. That gray color in his eyes staring at me coldly, like a popsicle on a winter day.

I tried to stand again, but my feet and hands were tied with a metal rope. I remembered the steel nail file I had in my pocket and slowly reached in, being careful not to get a rope burn. I transfered it from my right hand to my left hand and started filing the rope down.

After about twenty minutes of filing, both my hands and feet were free. I could see that Jack was just going up to his room and assumed it was nighttime. The girls noticed me and sat up. I first went over to Sarah, then Scarlett, then Delilah, filing their ropes down to the point that they could just pull them apart.

We ran to the circular elevator in the middle of the room and shut the doors, setting off an alarm. Luckily the elevator was quick and we made it up to earth, managing to jump into the bushes as Jack and his troops jumped out of the elevator. They looked around the area expecting us to have not gone far.

Not knowing where we had gone, they retreated. I climbed out of the bushes and Elizabeth was sitting there, crying!!

“Hi, Elizabeth. Are you OK!?!”

“No. I want Lila now!” she said.

“I’m Lila, silly,” I said, with a little giggle to go along with my words.

Elizabeth grinned and jumped into my arms.

“I missed you.”

I stared at my friends in bewilderment. How could she have gotten here!?! I guess Delilah was thinking the same thing because she said, “How’d she get here!?!”

“No idea.”

After I put her down I heard sudden little whimper, like a miserable puppy. I turned to see Elizabeth crying in the corner of our tent, comforted by Scarlett. I could tell that she was asking for me even though I was listening to music.

“Hi, Elizabeth. You okay?”

“No.”

“Do you want to tell me what’s wrong?”

“Okay… Mommy is going with Jack and they put me here because I was in time out and they said that I had to lure (I was surprised she knew what the word meant) you in and make him kidnap you but I want to stay with you and I stole a paper with the the stuff about me when I was born. Here.”

I looked at the names of her parents and gasped. Her parents’ names were my parents’ names!!! I had just realized that Elizabeth was my sister when Delilah dived into the tent and started screaming,

“Jack is here and he says he’s here to pick up his daughter, Elizabeth!!”

“I have an idea. Go find Sarah and then you guys can distract Jack and his henchmen. Elizabeth and I will run away and you can call us when they leave so I can tell you where we are,” I said, trying to sound calm.

“Good idea,” said Sarah, just appearing as if out of nowhere.

“Okay,” I said, grinning at my friends happily. “Let’s blow this popsicle stick!”

“Elizabeth, honey. Are you okay going in a backpack?” I questioned. As she nodded I lifted her in, zipped the backpack up, and opened it a little bit for air.

As we ran through the woods, I sat down and said to Elizabeth,

“Let’s go home.”

Suddenly, I heard a rumble. “Is that an earthquake?” I asked. I heard another rumble and then a shrill voice.

“We’re going to California in five minutes,” squealed Scarlett as the plane prepared for the runway.

“I’m going to sleep in two seconds,” I answered sarcastically, and fell asleep.

I woke up to Scarlett shaking me awake.

“Lila, there’s a three-year-old next to me and her mom dropped her off and said to take care of her girl, Elizabeth, and that she’ll be picked up after the flight.”

Suddenly, I knew what this was about. I said, “Oh no…”

How Lego Was Created: A Series

  

Story One

A long time ago in a far away galaxy, I was an alien kid who was bored. I wanted to build something, but the only things to build with was space dirt. Boring old space dirt. I decided I would ask the humans on Earth. Humans always hated aliens, but I would make a difference.

It took three hours to teleport to the humans. Every alien had a teleporter in their house. To teleport, you press the big red button on the teleporter, then you fly through space and go to Earth. It’s only possible to teleport to Earth. During the three hours you can only see black, but that doesn’t matter.

“Hi humans!” Why are they screaming and running away? Wait a minute, what are they saying?

“Look at its green face, look at its wrinkled face, it’s so weird,” screamed the humans!

Humans are so unpredictable. Uh-oh. There is the SWAT team. That’s a giant SWAT team everywhere. Ahh, they’re shooting me with guns. I’ll teleport back home. I guess I will need to design my own toy. It will be called Lego. There will be bricks that you can build into anything. They will be every single color. There will also be small mini humans called minifigures. I wished I could play with them. Finally, I finished designing it. Darn it! I’m not bored anymore. I will just send it to Earth.

***

Story Two 

A long time ago, before Lego was created, there was a nice ice dragon who was the head of the world. His name was Frederick. Frederick lived in a big, freezing cave in Antarctica. Back then, nobody had toys, so Frederick thought he should make some. He thought a long time of what his biggest fan, Tommy, would like because he would get it first. Finally, he thought of something. He would make a toy that people could build into anything. He worked day and night to design them. He used other toys, and put them together to build Lego. It was a slow process. All of a sudden, the sky turned red, and millions of Lego pieces fell onto Frederick. He jumped up and down, and yelled “Yay,” because he didn’t need to build any more Lego pieces.

The next day Frederick handed Lego sets out to every kid in the world, and Tommy got the most Lego! He felt amazing to see his first fan happy.

***

Story Three

A long time ago, before Lego was created, there were three babies in a trenchcoat that wanted to take over the world. They look like a tall man in a trench coat, but they were really cute, but mean babies. Their names were Barney, Barney, and Barney which equals the ultimate name of Barney! Did I say that Barney wanted to take over the world? All of a sudden, smoke covered Barney, and he turned into a ghost. Then the same thing randomly turned into a Lego piece.

One year later: Someone finds the Lego piece and turns it into a world famous toy.

***

Story Four

A long time ago, before Lego was created, there was a giant monster named Bobby. Bobby hated humans. Bobby was bright green and had one million eyes. He wanted to kill all humans. All of a sudden, he had an idea. He would make a toy that human kids would love, but he would load them with bombs. Whenever he wanted, he could have set off all of the bombs at once, but first every kid needed to have the toy. Bobby gave it to the biggest selling toy company in the world called Lego.

One Year Later: Every kid had Lego and Bobby was about to set off the bombs. Then, someone cut the wire and Bobby couldn’t set off the bombs. Bobby was really annoyed. He stomped his feet and yelled. He was so annoyed that he died!

Now the kids are happier because they got a new toy.

***

Story Five

A long time ago, before Lego was created, there was a famous prince called Fat Joe. He was very mean and very fat (as the name says). He wanted all of the toys in the world. After that, he asked the king to make a toy that was perfect. The king thought day and night to think of something perfect. Finally, he thought of something. He would make a toy that the prince could build into any toy. The king thought it should be called Lego. That night the king snuck the Lego into the prince’s room.

That morning, the prince loved the toy, and when the prince was a king and he was nice, and he gave the Lego to all the other kids.

***

Story Six

A long time ago, before Lego was created, there was a monkey name Berserk. He was really stupid and thought he was a human. All of a sudden, there was an alien invasion. The aliens were bright blue and had ugly faces. The aliens told Berserk to design a new toy for the humans. Berserk said yes, so he worked day and night to design a toy. Finally, he designed a toy called Lego, and gave it to every kid in the world, including himself.

EXCERPT

“Okay,” I said to Eden.

I raced through the pile of splinters and jumped onto the panel on top of the cockpit, swiftly typing rings of code into the system. The cockpit was a spiraling vault, with buttons running along every inch. The sight was incomprehensibly dramatic, the clouds outside like fluffs of cotton poised over a landscape that only nature, the most skilled artist, could paint. As I typed into the generator panel, I glanced over at Eden with her twisted grin, I never liked her at the circus, and was very suspicious of her now. She was always causing a wreck, and had been known for her betrayals in the past.

Suddenly, I heard a faint stomp approaching the cockpit and realized that something had gone terribly wrong. The passengers were starting to understand what was happening. I typed faster and faster until my hands became overwhelmed from exhaustion. Hundreds of passengers outside the door hurled shouts, demanding to know what was going on, each shout exhausting me until I was reduced to nothing but a limp carcass in a puddle of my own sweat. Barely able to move, I tried to make one last attempt at hacking into the system, but the passengers were just too much for me, and my hands turned as limp as stone, making it impossible for me to move them no matter how hard I tried. Then the door slammed open and I looked up and saw a large head peering down at me, his hair a thin clump of dirt on the top of his gleaming head. He took a punch at me and struck me right in the stomach, over and over until my shirt seeped with scarlet red.

“Tell me what you are doing you wretched animal” he garbled at me. “TELL ME!”

He then withdrew a thin silver object from his pocket and seemed to stab it into my stomach. More passengers started to crowd around me until my body became paralyzed with pain. My mind started to whirl around, and I was just able to mutter something to one of my companions before my mind plunged into darkness.

“Help me Eden, the passengers are killing me!”

Annie’s Time Machine

“Annie, it’s time for breakfast,” said my mom from the kitchen.

“Ah, not now,” I said as I fell off my bed and landed on my rug. I threw my blanket onto my bed. I took off my sleep mask and threw it onto the floor next to me. I threw my head back and let out a big sigh. And a groan. I was always really cranky in the morning, especially when someone woke me up at the wrong time. It was 6:30! I usually wake up at 7 :00 or 7:30. My dalmatian, Spot, ran up to me and looked at me in the face. Spot tilted his head to the side. I knew that this meant my mom finally was going to be home for breakfast. (By the way, I know how to read faces–people’s and animals’.) “For once, an interesting breakfast with Mom.” I opened my bedroom door and walked down the hall to the kitchen like a person in a marching band.

“Annie, you’re actually wearing the sunflower pajamas I gave you for Christmas last year!” said my mom as she flipped a pancake, which landed on the ceiling and didn’t come down. “Would you mind getting me some more pancake powder? This is like the fifth pancake that’s landed on the ceiling this morning. I don’t know why this keeps on happening.”

I thought in my head, How come she just noticed my pajamas? Every morning when she leaves, she never even smiles or waves or looks at me. Even though I didn’t understand what was going on with my mom because she’s usually really strict, I was happy that she was finally home for breakfast. I opened the cupboard. My little brother’s stuffed dog came falling out and landed on the kitchen floor. Oh Charlie. He always puts his dog stuffed animal in the cupboards–and this was the one today, apparently. My brother, who’s three years old, always hides his stuffed animals all around the house.

“Annie, can you please put Charlie’s stuffed animal back in his room? Also, tell him to come for breakfast.”

I saluted. “Yes, sir, Mrs. Bossy Pants.”

“Annie, that’s not an appropriate joke right now.” My mom sounded frustrated as she reached one hand up to the now dog-less cupboard to try to get more pancake powder.

I ran to Charlie’s room and burst in. “There’s a monster invasion! Go into the kitchen now!”

“A monstuh invagun?” Charlie whined.

“We have to help Mom with the pancakes to feed the monsters!”

Charlie waved his arms and made a sound that was like a cry and happiness at the same time. He shook his curly dirty-blonde hair. It looked like there was a big, cute spider sitting on top of his little head. I picked him up by his arms and carried him into the kitchen. I set him down on the kitchen floor before running back down the hall. Mom was pretty strict, and she always got mad at me when I played jokes on Charlie. I heard Charlie say, “Mama, dey a monstuh invagun? I wan to hep you make a pancakey for da monstuhs.”

“Was Annie playing around with you again?” my mom said sternly, loud enough for me to hear.

After I heard my mom finished her sentence, I slammed my door.

“I dunho.” I heard Charlie banging on the counter with his fists and slapping his legs.

I grabbed a Sharpie from my art cabinet, and I found a piece of paper under my dresser. (I’m kind of an artist, so I have paper all over my bedroom floor.) I wrote, “MONSTER INVASION IN HERE. KEEP OUT.”  I wrote much neater than usual, so that my mom would think it was my older sister, Clara. Clara was nine years older than me. For a nineteen-year-old, she was fun and joyful like a seven- or eight-year-old. She went to college in San Francisco, where we lived, but she lived at home so she could see us more. She had tried living in a dorm, but she came home because she said she missed us all day, every day. Like I said, she’s basically a kid.

I heard Clara’s footsteps coming down the hall. I realized that I must escape the scene. I quickly taped the note to Charlie’s door so that my mom wouldn’t think I’d done it. I saw Clara’s shadow coming down the hall. Oh no, she’s coming faster than I thought she would–she’s usually pretty slow. I imagined myself running in slow motion back to the kitchen, just like in one of those cool action movies. I ran to my chair and sat down as quickly as I could. The chair shook. I held my hands to the sides of the chair to make it stop wobbling, and then I let go. I tried to make a face that said, I didn’t do anything. It’s not like I taped something to Charlie’s door and am going to blame you for it. I smiled.

Clara walked in holding her favorite vampire book. Her hair looked all knotty as usual, and she had black circles under her eyes from reading all night. She was wearing the Christmas pajamas she’d gotten three years ago. I couldn’t believe they still fit her. She sat down in her favorite chair. She was going to set down her book, until she dropped it in the maple syrup. “Ugh! Not again. Every single morning I have pancakes, I always drop a book or something into the maple syrup,” Clara said, frustrated.

Charlie waddled over like a penguin and tried with all his might to pull Clara’s chair back. “Charlie, please get your hands off my chair.”

Charlie pointed at Clara and said, “Noddy woman.”

“Ha!” I laughed. “He always tries to pull your chair back on pancake mornings. And maybe he should hit you with a frying pan next time.” Another cranky morning. I really should take back all the words that I’ve said. Oh! I could build a time machine. But that’s going to be hard.

“Annie! If you don’t behave, I’m gonna hit YOU with a frying pan,” my mom said.

“Well, I’ll hit you with one of these pancakes. How about that?!”

“Go to your room!”

“But I need a frying pan,” I whined, “so I can give it to Charlie to hit Clara.”

“Go to your room! No breakfast for you.” My mom’s face looked like she really meant it.

“Well, uh, can I just have a–” I didn’t get to finish my sentence.

“Go. To. Your. Room. NOW!” my mom said even more loudly.

Clara said, “I’ll hit you with a frying pan.”

“Why is everyone saying they’re going to hit me with a frying pan?” I asked.

“Fwying pan hit you!” I looked and saw Charlie holding the frying pan, looking like he was just about to throw it at me.

I ran to Charlie and we had a little tug of war over the frying pan for one or two minutes. After I finally got the frying pan, I ran back to my room and slammed the door. Then I almost kicked Spot in the face while jumping onto the bed. I held the frying pan in my arms like it was my little baby, and I whispered to it, “You’re home now. You’re home.”

I knew I was acting really crazy about the frying pan. Wow. Now I should reconsider the time machine thing. I threw the frying pan onto the floor. Spot jumped. He landed on my toy chest. “Oh, Spot, it’s just a frying pan…that hit the floor really loudly. You don’t need to be scared. It’s juuuust a frying pan.” I rolled my eyes.

Spot walked onto my bed, sat right in front of me, and stared into my eyes. I could tell he was scared of the frying pan. I pushed him off the bed and said, “That’s really creepy. Don’t look at me like that. It freaks me out, okay?”

I walked over to my dresser and opened it up. I pulled out a plaid shirt that had a little pocket on the right side. I pulled out a pair of jeans that had two pockets in the front and two pockets in the back. I got dressed and put a $20 bill in the back pocket of my jeans. I walked into the kitchen. I saw Charlie holding his favorite blanket. He smashed it into his pancake and said, “Tha’s what you get because you so dewishus.”

“Charlie, this will be your last pancake, because it is literally the twentieth time you’ve smashed your blanket into your pancake.” I could tell by Mom’s face that she wished that she hadn’t stayed home for breakfast today. Usually Clara cooked our breakfast, or Dad–but he’d been too busy at his job. He was a real estate agent for a woman who lived Amsterdam.

“Sorry, Mom, I’m getting really hungry. Can I pleeease have a pancake?” I asked.

“Fine, because you asked so nicely.” My mom handed me a very tiny pancake. It was probably the size of my fingernail. “This was one I messed up on. I accidentally poured too little batter.”

I plopped the pancake in my mouth and opened the fridge to get an apple. “Thank you.” Not. I walked back into my bedroom and put on my red sneakers. I grabbed my bike helmet, walked down the hall, took a left turn and then a right turn, and went out the back door. I went to wait for my friend Jessica. My mom knew where I was going; I’d told her I was going to the donut shop last night. I waited thirty minutes before I grabbed my bike and rode over to Jessica’s house.

On the way there, Jessica rode right past me. I knew it was her because her blonde hair was in a ponytail, one strip hanging down in front just like always. I turned my bike around and tried to catch her. “Jessica, wait! I’m trying to catch up with you!”

Jessica stopped her bike. “What?”

I couldn’t stop my bike, so I ran right into her. “Ughh,” we both said at the same time. Jessica pulled me up. “Are you okay?” she asked.

“No, are you okay?” I said.

“Nope. I scraped my knee and scratched my arm.” Jessica pointed to her elbow and then to her knee. She was wearing a short-sleeved shirt and short overalls. We were both really tomboys.

I said, “Well, I’m kind of okay.” Then I looked at my hand. “Oh, I scraped it,” I sighed.

“Well, let’s get riding so we can go to the donut shop early and get two free donuts.”

“Did you bring your $20? I brought mine!”

Jessica said, “Oh, all I got was a $5 bill. Sorry, maybe next time.”

“Well, I guess we can only buy–oh, wait, the donuts are only about a buck. And also, if we get there at nine o’clock right when they open, we get two free ones.”

We got back onto our bikes and started riding down the street. At about halfway to the shop, I was surprised to see my friend Betty walking her dog, which was a golden retriever. Usually she walked her dog at ten o’clock. I waved. Betty wasn’t really a tomboy. She was wearing a blue shirt with a white skirt and some white hi-tops.

“Hiiii!” Betty said. She tried to run as fast as our bikes, until she got too tired.

We would’ve stopped to talk, but we just really wanted those free delicious donuts. They were calling our name. It was our duty to get those donuts.

We turned on Dockman Street and took a left onto Parallel Road. I realized why it was called Parallel Road; it was in the middle of five streets that were all parallel to one another. When we saw Bobby’s Donut Shop, we immediately stopped our bikes. The front wheel of my bike touched Jessica’s back wheel. Jessica said, “Why you touchin’ my bike, huh? You gonna have to pay for the damages that you do to it!”

“Okay, okay.” I giggled. “Wait, are you actually being serious?”

Jessica raised an eyebrow. “I’m actually serious.”

“Good to know. But what about those free donuts?”

“Are you trying to be sassy? All you care about are those donuts, huh?”

My bike started to go forward. I pulled it back.

“Good thing you stopped your bike from hitting mine. Or else you’d have to pay for the damages, like I said.”

Jessica and I walked into the donut shop. There was a guy in the corner drinking coffee. He was there every morning. We walked up to the counter to ask for a donut, like we were adults. “Ah, Annie and Jessica, how are you? If you’re wondering if you can have a donut, sorry, you can’t–there’re no more left,” Bobby said with a little frown.

I dropped to my knees and screamed, “NOOOOOOO! THE HUMANITY!”

Jessica patted me on the back. “It’s okay, it’s just a donut.”

“It is NOT JUST A DONUT! It’s a creamy, delicious donut that was brought to the world by magic.”

“I think you care about that dumb donut more than friends. Maybe you should just go and live with donuts instead of playing with your friends!” Jessica walked out of the donut shop and slammed the door behind her. I saw her get back onto her bike and start riding home. I stood there on my knees and looked at the door that was now closed. I got up, opened the door, walked back out, looked back into the donut shop, and got onto my bike to ride home and probably cry in my room. I had just lost a friend. I think. And definitely I just lost my donuts. My delicious donuts.

I got back onto my bike and rode home. I turned onto Backey Street, stopped in front of my house, leaned my bike in the front lawn, and opened the front door. I walked in and slammed it behind me. Clara was standing right in front of me with a mad face, holding the note I had taped to Charlie’s door. “How do you explain this, Annie?” Clara said as she shoved the paper in my face.

“Oh, so you found the note that you wrote? Cooool. Now, can you let me into my room, please? I need to work on something–something that will blow your little mind.” I walked down the hall, took a left, opened my bedroom door, and closed it very carefully. I had a plan: a plan that really was gonna blow Clara’s little mind right out of her little head of nothingness.

I was going to make a time machine out of things I could find in my room. I took paint cans, rubber bands, paint, copper wire, and glue. Pretty convenient, huh? After ten or twenty minutes, I finally got it done. All I had to do was go inside, go back in time, and change what I’d said to everybody that morning. I knew I was being kind of a brat. I hope this works, I thought. I went into the time machine. I had to squat because it was so cramped in there. I turned the switch made of wire, glue, and paint, and everything started shaking. I could hear my mom from the kitchen yelling, “EARTHQUAKE!” But it wasn’t really an earthquake. Then everything turned all rainbow, right in front of my eyes.

I landed on my bed. Did it work? I thought. Since my door was open, I decided to take a look. Oh. My. Cheeseballs. I saw myself walking down the hall to Charlie’s room. I really didn’t think this through that well. Clearly this was a bad idea. I needed to get out of here. I looked around. My time machine wasn’t there, so I decided to build another one with the same materials. Everything happened that had happened before: rainbows. Mom yelling “Earthquake!” I wondered, How come I didn’t feel hear all this earlier this morning?

This time, I landed on my rug. I looked around my room for Spot. I thought everything had just stayed the same. “Spot?” I yelled. My mom came into the room.

“Annie, who’s Spot?”

I looked at my mom. “Mom, remember Spot? My dog? My dalmatian dog I got for Christmas when he was a puppy? Remember?”

“I don’t remember having any dogs. Charlie is allergic.”

“But Charlie was never allergic. He’s three. He’s not allergic to anything. I think you’re going crazy. You need to lie down.”

“Honey, your brother is twenty-three.”

“He’s WHAT? I don’t think I’m hearing you correctly, Mom.”

“You don’t remember Charlie being twenty-three? Honey, you probably hit your head. You should lie down in your bed.”

“Mom, I’m not going crazy!” I ran out of my room and bumped into Charlie. I looked up. His face looked the same, but he was way taller than me. “Hi…Charlie…how’s it going? You look…different…”

“Oh, Annie, like Mom said, you probably hit your head. I don’t look different. Well, I did get a haircut yesterday, but Mom doesn’t know. I don’t really tell her much anymore. I’m too old for permission.” He winked at me.

I ran into Clara’s room, thinking she could help me. But instead of seeing Clara’s bright pink room, I saw an office. A grey office. It looked like Dad’s office in the garage, but it was here inside instead. I ran back into my room. I looked under my bed, and I found a time machine! Wow, this must’ve been from when I came here–or something. I hopped in. The whole thing happened again.

Except instead of having everything be normal, I ended up in the future. The future. This time I landed in the middle of the street, and a car driven by robots passed me. This is just great, I thought. I looked around me. People were wearing clothes made of robotic parts. One guy had an arm coming out of the back of his shirt, and it was feeding him a big sandwich. Boy, that looked like George Clothman from my school. He always eats those sandwiches. I walked up to him. “Hi, I’m Annie. What’s your name?”


“Hey, Annie, you look different. You look like a young kid again. I thought you were thirty.”

“I was never thirty! Oh, yeah, um, I did…something…to make myself look different. Yeah, byyyye.” I ran away.

A person riding a mechanical bike almost slammed into me. “Hey! Look where you’re going!” he screamed.

I walked across the street. I looked around and saw my house, so of course I walked to my house and opened the door. Right in front of me was future me and Charlie–except Charlie’s hair was long and curly, and he was wearing a long, pink dress. It looked like a ball gown from Cinderella. Future Annie looked me in the face. “What are you doing in here, kid?” she said. “I should pull a prank on you and taze you with this pack of gum. Here, you want a piece?”

“No, I don’t want a piece of gum. You just told me you were going to play a prank on me.” Wow, I looked like a person who would prank someone. I was kind of shocked to see that this was how I would turn out in the future. It was kind of exciting, but it worried me a lot. I didn’t want to end up like this–a person who would prank someone and end up in jail or something.

Charlie spoke up in a very girly voice. “Hey, kid, get out of here. I’m going to a fancy prom for my school.”

I looked at Charlie. “Wow, cool. By the way, Charlie (I did little quotes with my hands)–”


“My name isn’t Charlie. That was my old name. My name is Charabella.”


I giggled. “Charabella? That’s your name? That’s dumb. You’re not a girl. Why do you want to be one? I thought you were a boy.”

I turned my head to him–ahem, I mean, her. Or whatever. I asked my future self, “Where’s Clara?”

“How do you know who Clara is? And why are you wearing those clothes? You look like you’re a last century girl. And Clara moved to Palm Springs. And why do you even wanna know things about her? You don’t even know who Clara is.” My future self looked very, very surprised. She squinted her eyebrows and looked at me like a person who had a chicken hat on. “Hey, what’s your name?” my future self said as she pointed at me.

“Um, my name is Annie,” I said as I took one step back.

“What’s your last name?” said my future self as she walked one step closer to me.

“It’s Thompson,” I said as I took another step back. I was getting ready to run.

“Wait, that’s my name. Wait! I remember this. I made a time machine when I was ten years old, and I traveled to the future. But then when I came back…”


After future me said that, Charlie shoved her back and slammed the door in my face. Clara moved away? I thought in my head. How could this be? I guessed it was kind of good for my future self, and me, but I eventually would get back to where I was supposed to be, and everything would be normal again. I hoped…

I looked around, hoping I would see Spot. Then I realized he had probably passed away by now, since it was twenty years in the future.

I decided to build another time machine. This was like the fourth one, but after this, I wasn’t going to be messing with time anymore. I knew what I’d done, and it was pretty bad. I felt guilty because I wanted to be back home with my family and Spot. Now I was just stuck in the future, where I didn’t want to be. I knew this was basically all my fault.

I slouched over and started walking, my hands at my sides and my head looking down at the sidewalk. I decided that I would go to the craft store because they probably had what I needed there. Oh! I still had the $20 in my pocket. That would be enough to buy the things that I needed. I started running–but then I stopped. I didn’t even know where the craft store was. I saw a bike in front of someone’s house. I knew it kind of seemed bad, but I hopped on it and started riding. I planned to return it (like, never), but I didn’t even know this person. I was a criminal, stealing something, but it was totally worth it. I needed to get back home and put things back to normal. Like I said–I hoped…

So I was riding down the street, until I passed a store that said “CRAFTS AND MORE.” I jumped off my bike, which went rolling down a hill and hit a trash can. A cat jumped out of the trash can and started running as fast as it could. Then it tripped and started tumbling. I thought to myself, Poor cat, but I had no time to think about adorable things. I opened the door to the store.

Everything looked so different. There were no real people, only robots! I got paint cans and all that stuff. There was one tiny, tiny problem. I only had $1 left after I bought everything. Okay, I guess I was overreacting, but I was wasting money here!

I got a shopping bag and just dragged it down the street until I came across a fence. On the other side of the fence was nothing–just pavement–so I decided to go there to build my time machine. Even though it smelled like butt and fish, it wasn’t a big deal. I jumped over the fence and gave myself a wedgie. The fence caught hold of my underwear, and I was just hanging there, hanging out by myself–until I fell face first onto the pavement. “Owwwwwww!” as I said as I shut my eyes really tightly and stood up. Where is my bag? Oh, right in front of me. I grabbed it and did the same things I did to build all the other time machines. I went inside. Rainbows. Unicorns–wait, this time there were unicorns. How weird was that? Okay, nevermind the beautiful unicorns that were pooping rainbows. I had to go back! It was my duty. They were calling me–well, no one was really calling me, but you know what I mean.

I landed on the roof of my house. “OW!” Again. “That hurt more than last time.” There were bricks and bricks and nothing but bricks–so many that I couldn’t count. Then I fell off into the front lawn and landed on a flower pot. How am I not dead? I stood up, walked to the front door, and opened it. Then I walked to my room. Instead of there being one bed, there were two. “Hello? Is anybody home? Who put this extra bed in my room? If this does any damages to my floor, they’re gonna have to pay!”

Wait! Jessica! I should make up to her. Right then, I ran out the front door. I had no time to look for my bike, even though it was right in front of my house. I was just running and running and running. When I got to the door, I knocked and stood there breathing really hard. I was so tired.

Jessica opened the door. “Oh. Hi, Annie. What are you doing here? Want a donut? Well, sorry, we don’t have any.” She didn’t look surprised, but she did look mad. She crossed her arms.

“Jessica, I’m sorry for what I did. Donuts are not brought to this world by magic. That’s just silly. I’m sorry. Please forgive me,” I said. I started to hug Jessica, and she hugged me back.

“No, I’m sorry,” she said.

And that went back and forth until I said, “Enough. We’re both sorry.”

She walked me back to my house, and before I went in, we hugged. “Oh, I’m having a playdate with Sagey tomorrow. Is that okay with you?”

“Uh, who’s Sagey? I don’t know who Sagey is. Do you mean my cousin, Sage?”

“No, I mean, Sagey. Your nine-year-old sister. The one who likes dinosaurs?”

I shook my head No.

Jessica rolled her eyes and started to walk back home. Then she turned and smiled at me, and I waved.

I looked back at my door and opened it. I saw Clara, Charlie, and… three other kids. One looked nine, one looked thirteen, and one looked about five. Oh. My. Cheeseballs. The door slammed behind me. “Who are these people?” I asked Clara.

“Sagey, Elizabeth, and Ruby? Your sisters? Come on, you should remember this stuff. You have brain damage, I think, Annie. Or are you just kidding? I think you are.” Clara crossed her arms, and Charlie did the same.

“You awe bein so cwazy. You awe like a ducky,” said Charlie as he started to dance in the hallway.

I figured Ruby was the five year old, because she ran after Charlie, and Clara yelled, “Ruby! Get back here now. We’ve been at the mud market all day, jumping in puddles of mud, and everyone is so dirty. Mom will get mad if you get mud marks on the floor!”

Elizabeth, who had to be the thirteen year old, ran after Charlie and Ruby, picked them up, and walked into the bathroom to start a nice, steamy bath. Sagey walked to the bathroom to help with the bath.

I squinted my face up. I was about to throw a temper tantrum. I didn’t want three other siblings! That was way too much for me. FIVE siblings? I’d be the sixth! I really did not like that. I could feel myself about to burst out crying and shove everyone out of the way.

But I didn’t want to be a person who would scream a lot. I didn’t want to end up someone who pulled pranks. I decided to let it go. I took a deep breath and unballed my fists. I closed my eyes, then opened them.

“Your head should be made out of bird food, because birds want to bite it right off,” I said to Clara. I walked into my room, smiling and squinting my eyes. I could still say little mean things now and then.

“Annie’s back to normal,” Clara said.

“I heard that!” I screamed. I lay back on my bed, and Spot jumped on my stomach. “Oof!” I shouted. I pet Spot on the head.

Hamsterly Ever After

Isabella was sitting on the large couch in the living room of her house. Even though the couch was long enough for her to lay down on, she was sitting in the middle with her dark-blue-eyed puppy, Fluffy, on her lap. Isabella was thinking how she really wanted a pet hamster for her birthday, which was a week away, on July 28th. Isabella wasn’t sure if her parents would let her get a hamster, because she had to take care of her puppy, Fluffy. Isabella loved Fluffy, but as she pet his fluffy white fur on her lap, Isabella knew that if she didn’t get a hamster on her birthday, she would be so upset and disappointed. Her face would get red, and she would cross her arms and stomp her foot and spill a glass of milk on purpose.

Isabella felt bored just thinking of all this stuff (and about getting into trouble), so she went into the backyard and jumped on the trampoline. She did backflips and flips for fifteen minutes when she heard her mom call, “Isbelllllllaaaa!” Isabella didn’t know what her mom was calling her for, but when she rushed into the house and saw Fluffy throwing up, she knew what happened.

Her mom said, “I thought I gave you a job. I said to take care of Fluffy. But he’s thrown up again and again and again.” Fluffy stood up on his four feet close to Isabella’s mom wagging his tail. “Look! Fluffy threw up on my foot!”

“Mom, please don’t get mad at me. I accidentally forgot about Fluffy.” Isabella looked at the floor.

“I think your dad is right. I’m not sure if we should get you a hamster. You haven’t even been taking care of Fluffy.”

Isabella wanted to whine, but she knew she’d get in trouble if she did, and if she got in trouble, she wouldn’t get the pet hamster. She walked upstairs to her room and picked a random book off the floor and started to read on her bed. At the end of the book, Isabella was tired. She decided to take an afternoon nap.

The week flew by very fast, so it was right before Isabella’s birthday when a message came to Isabella’s iPhone. “Happy birthday, Isabella! You’re going to like this, spend time with this, and might even bring it to share at your school! Love, Aunt Livi.”

Isabella crossed her fingers and hoped it was going to be her hamster. She felt like it would be a hamster because her aunt knew that she’d wanted a hamster all her life since she was about two years old. Isabella couldn’t wait for her birthday party the next day. Her whole family would be there–her grandparents, her parents, and her aunt.

The next morning, Isabella’s mom woke her up at eight o’clock. Isabella went downstairs into the dining room in her pjs. Her grandma was knitting a scarf, her grandpa was emailing his friend, and her aunt Livi was watching baseball on TV. Fluffy was still in bed because he smelled the dumplings. Fluffy got a dog bone instead of a dumpling.

Isabella smelled a half-sweet, half-doughy smell that she knew because she’d smelled it so many times in her life–it was her favorite smell! Isabella was so surprised because her mom and dad were making dumplings for breakfast! Isabella smiled a happy smile and jumped up and down. There was chocolate milk poured into her favorite koala cup, fancy cloth napkins, party hats with their initials, and sparkly balloons with their initials. All of the party hats had different kinds of patterns like diamonds and stripes, and Isabella put on a yellow one with shooting star and planet pattern. There was an arts and crafts table where you could make pictures, party hats, or balloons. There was also a woman who could do facepaint. Also, in the very center of Isabella’s house was a disco ball with a dance party. Isabella’s mom played Taylor Swift, Katy Perry, and all of Isabella’s other favorites on her iPhone. For eight hours, Isabella ate five dumplings, got her face painted with a koala and her hands painted as paws, and drank eight cups of chocolate milk. She danced and did cartwheels and backflips on the trampoline in the backyard.

When it was time to open her presents, Isabella got a tattoo set, a face paint set with a mirror on the inside, and a makeup set from her grandmother. She got a marker set from her parents. Isabella also got a paint set from the lady who had been painting faces at her party. She also got a box full of dog treats for Fluffy. Fluffy jumped right in! Isabella was happy because her parents had gotten her presents that she liked, but she was sad, and a little mad, that she hadn’t gotten what she really wanted — her hamster. Isabella didn’t want to be rude on her birthday because she knew she wouldn’t get her hamster, so she kept her disappointment inside and stayed on her best behavior.

In the evening after dinner, Isabella’s aunt came into her bedroom. She was hiding something behind her back. Isabella felt nervous. I hope I get the hamster!

Her aunt smiled. “You have one more present left.” She gave Isabella a box wrapped in smiley-face paper.

Isabella’s fingers started unwrapping the present. She saw a peanut butter-colored hamster in a colorful cage. The cage was red, white, and blue with white stars on it. Inside, the hamster was playing with a pink ball with green polka dots. Isabella took the hamster out of the cage and hugged it. “Thank you very much!” Isabella squeaked.

Isabella’s mom and dad stood in the corner of Isabella’s room listening. Her mom said, “You should take good care of the hamster, Isabella. Make sure you leave him on the bookshelf so that Fluffy doesn’t scare him.”

Isabella said, “I promise, Mommy. Can I name him Peanut?”

Isabella’s mom smiled, and Isabella gave her a big hug.

Lilly the Cat

Once upon a time, there was a princess who had a pet kitty, and the kitty’s name was Lilly.

MEOW!

As you can see, Lilly is the real star of this show, not the princess.

Lilly wanted to fly. Unfortunately, there was a villain, named Bobette, who tried to stop Lilly from learning how to fly.

Lilly would not let Mr. Bobette — who was a flying pig — get in her way, and the tools that Lilly needed were a trampoline, feathers, and a cannon. She asked her mother, the princess Rebecka, for the supplies, using the special collar that Rebecka had given her that allowed Lilly to speak English. Rebecka brought a cannon into the trampoline and stuffed Lilly in the it. After covering her with feathers, she instructed Lilly to move her arms up and down like a bird. Rebecka then made sure that Lilly popped out of the cannon. Luckily, Lilly was not hurt, and soon she was getting the hang of flying.

Then Mr. Bobette caming flying at Lilly and said, “Oh no you don’t! Now you’re going to go back down.”

Lilly said, “Oh I won’t let you get in my way, I’m just going to keep flying.”

Mr. Bobette started fighting with Lilly. Their argument went on for two hours while they were both still in the air. Then, all of a sudden, Lilly began to feel like she was falling down into a black hole, but it turned out she was actually falling back down onto the trampoline. When she landed she realized it wasn’t the trampoline she started on, but the neighbor’s trampoline. That was what she got for forgetting to flap her arms. Now she needed a way to bring Mr. Bobbette down as well.

Lilly went to go find Rebecka, because the princess had a set of a bow and arrows that her parents had given her when she turned five. With that bow and arrow, Lilly would be able to shoot at Mr. Bobbette and bring him down to the ground.

Rebecka was worried that Lilly would hurt herself with the bow and arrow — both because Lilly was a cat and because Lilly didn’t have any training — so Rebecka offered to shoot Mr. Bobbette.

Luckily for them, Mr. Bobbette was still flying exactly where Lilly had left him. He was so used to flying he just kept going around and around in the same place for hours. However, when he saw Rebecka and Lilly with the bow and arrows, he said, “Just because you’re trying to shoot me, doesn’t mean I’ll let that stop me from being evil, and keeping Lilly out of the sky!”

What Lilly and Rebecka didn’t know, however, was that Mr. Bobbette was actually worried about Lilly getting hurt. Even though he was evil, that was why he refused to allow her to fly. Mr. Bobbette cared about Lilly, just like he cared about everyone else who tried to fly. He didn’t want anyone getting hurt, so wanted to keep everyone else out of the skies, unless they had been flying all of their life. Without telling Rebecka and Lilly all of that, he just said, “I’m warning you, Lilly! If you get in the sky again, you’re going to be in big trouble!”

Rebecka got ready to shoot Mr. Bobbette, but Lilly was actually psychic and was able to hear all of Mr. Bobbette’s thoughts about how he was trying to protect her. She pressed the button on her collar to speak, and whispered to Rebecka, “He actually cares about me! That’s why he doesn’t want me to fly! But you’re my owner and you actually care about me more than Mr. Bobbette does, so I’m going to keep flying, even if he doesn’t want me to.”

Rebecka dropped the bow and said, “I’m sorry, Mr. Bobbette. We were going to shoot you because you were mean to Lilly, but we know you actually care about Lilly, so we won’t shoot you.”

Mr. Bobbette started to cry, upset that someone had found out his secret. While still crying, he said to Rebecka and Lilly, “Just because you know my secret doesn’t mean anyone else will know my secret. And I have magical powers that will keep you from ever being able to tell anyone!” He oinked three times then dropped to the ground, casting his spell. “There, now you are still able to speak, but you will never be able to tell anyone my secret!”

“Well,” Lilly said. “Rebecka is a princess, and her father has a way to undo the magic of you and other people. And that means once she tells him that she’s been cursed, he will be able to help us, and then we’ll be able to tell other people!”

Mr. Bobbette started to laugh while crying, and milk came flying out of his nose — from where, Lilly didn’t know. “It’s not like anyone else would even care about me anyway.”

But it turned out that other people actually did care about him, and soon, every other person on the planet would know about Mr. Bobbette and his secret.

When that happened, Mr. Bobbette became very impatient and angry. He decided that he was going to freeze the whole world to make everyone forget about it. But Mr. Bobbette had found out that the king could take away his magic. Mr. Bobbette decided that he would have to make it so the king lost his magic.

So Mr. Bobbette flew to the the castle where the king, queen, Rebecka, and Lilly lived. It was a huge castle with six bedrooms, three kitchens, two dining rooms, seven bathrooms, and a playground outside for little kids to play in. And all of the royal family had very big wardrobes. Mr. Bobbette was jealous when he saw it because all he lived in was a well with his pet frogs. More determined than ever to steal the king’s powers, Mr. Bobbette snuck inside to find the king’s magic crystal ball to take away the king’s powers. Unfortunately, that crystal ball knew when there was an intruder and started flashing a deep red over and over again.

In the throne room, the king noticed his crystal ball flash, red and then black, which meant the intruder was getting very close to the king, just not close enough to see. “Oh no!” he said. “There’s an intruder! Lock up the gates!”

The guards weren’t listening though, and so they didn’t lock the gates. But then a troll came. The troll chased away Mr. Bobbette, but then went after the king.

“Shut the gates!” the king screamed, and then when no one did, he said, “You’re all fired. Except you, because you’re new.” He pointed to the new guard.

But little did he know that the new guard was Mr. Bobbette.

Mr. Bobbette took off his disguise and tried to take the jewel.

“Bobbette!” the king screamed. “I’m going to take all of your magic.”

“No! I will never let you do that,” Mr. Bobbette said.

“Never? I can do it to you if I want. I’m the King!!!” the king yelled, his eyebrows making an angry heart shape as his eyes crossed and he snarled. Then he screamed and chased Bobbette. He would not let Bobbette get away with it.

After that, Bobbette tried to say, “I love you king! Please don’t take away my magic. If you take it away I’m going to die.”

The king still took it away.

“Noooo, I’m dying, I’m dying…” Mr. Bobbette started choking and fell to the ground and died, so the kingdom could all be safe once and for all.

“Yay, yay!” everyone cheered.

But Lilly still didn’t know how to fly, so instead she ran into the bushes, because she was trying to get thorns in her to go to the vet, because the vet could give her wings, but it didn’t work. She would have to find another way there. Lilly went to go get a fake archery kit to make it look like an arrow was stuck through her head even though it was just a hat. Rebecka saw and took Lilly to the vet because she was very worried that Lilly had been shot.

The vet saw that it was a fake arrow and took off the hat, but agreed to give Lilly wings. Happy to have her wings, Lilly went home to celebrate.

Atlas

The storm was raging. My mother and father ran to the lifeboats, but they realized something was wrong: my sister and I weren’t there.

“The children!” my mother yelled at my father, and he quickly ran below deck to find us. But we weren’t anywhere near the ship. We were far, far away from the boat in the ship’s safest lifeboat. A while later, my mother had no choice, but to leave my father below the decks. When the ship’s crew was lowering the lifeboat into the water, the ropes snapped in mid air and my mother’s lifeboat hurtled downwards towards the water

“Mom!” yelled my sister. As the lifeboat went on its journey to find another ship that could bring us to New York, my sister and I were crying over the deaths of our parents. A few hours later we were safely aboard the Mississippi and heading towards Albany, New York.

 

Once we landed in New York, the Mississippi’s crew sent my sister and I to the nearest orphanage, but almost everything in it was so so old and dusty, even the food! The only good part was the kids that lived in the orphanage. They were all very, very nice. A few months later my sister and I could not stand the bad conditions of the orphanage, so we packed all of our stuff, said goodbye to our friends, and left.

That was about two years ago. Now we are working as doctors and scientists for the Atlas Corporation. When we came to New York we were wandering around the city until a undercover Atlas spy found us and took us to the main headquarters. So far, we have made dozens of grenades that unleash a deadly type of poison when it explodes. We have also cured thousands of soldiers from wounds, poisons, and a deadly type of illness that will burn you alive. Ten years later, Atlas asked me to join the spies that go around bustling cities to try to find homeless children about at least ten years old. And I said yes. So my sister became a doctor, and I became a spy.

I still remember the first kid that I found on the streets. His name was Edward and he was fourteen years old. He started to live on the streets when he was ten years old because his parents had died from a fire. The fire had started because their neighbor was cooking, and  “accidently” lit a napkin on fire. The napkin then dropped into the pan that he was cooking with, and it just so happened that there was oil in the pan. So the whole apartment exploded. I brought Edward back to Atlas headquarters, and the commanders trained him to be a soldier.

A few months later I became a soldier along with Edward. Now Edward and I are storming into battle at the Vespers main HQ. “Charge!” my General yelled and we all charged into battle, thirsty for blood. In the next hour, bullets flew, men fell, and machinery exploded.

When we got back to base, my General quickly changed into his kitty pajamas and went to sleep. A few minutes later a group of Atlas soldiers snuck into the general’s bedroom.  Inside the room there were lots and lots of Generals, but their General was very conspicuous because of his pink kitty pajamas. Suddenly all the Generals inside the room woke up and started to yell, “!@#$%^&*.” Finally, when the founder of Atlas calmed all the Generals down, he spoke very sternly to the soldiers. He told them that they should never ever sneak into the General’s room, and their punishment was that they must bathe in hot oil every day for every week for every month for every year for the rest of their lives. Edward and I both thought the punishment was unfair, but the general refused to release them.

A few days later my unit rolled into action at Bunker Hill. The first tent that my unit set up was the arsenal. Inside was hundreds and hundreds of firearms. The next day, Edward and I, along with some of our fellow soldiers, boarded a battleship and took off towards the Atlas fleet. When we finally got onto the ship we all took our positions. I probably got the most exciting job on the boat. It was firing the gun! When we lost sight of Bunker Hill we turned on the radar and the navigation device, so we could see if any enemy ships were coming and where we were going.

A few hours later, our Captain told us some big news. There was a whole fleet of enemy ships headed towards us he told us to be ready if they suddenly attacked. When we could actually see the enemy fleet, we all opened fire. A few minutes later we were surrounded by enemy ships and they blew us up. Edward and I were the only two crew members that survived.

By the time we spotted the island we were practically dead from thirst and and hunger. We boarded the island and right away felt like it was better to die than to live. That wasn’t an option, so right away we got out our army knives and tried to build a shelter so we could at least have a place to live in. By the end of the day, Edward and I had built the most magnificent shelter ever! (It was probably a lot better than Brian Robinson’s shelter). I told Edward to go and try to find some food, so he did. When Edward came back I had already  made the fire and was ready to cook the food.

When he came back he had some new cuts and a huge claw mark on the side of his head. I asked him what happened and he told me he had angered a huge chicken and it tried to kill him. Edward used his years of military training and killed the huge chicken. After he told me the whole story he asked me to go with him to where he had killed the chicken so I could help him drag it back to the shelter so we would have something to eat tonight.

When we finally got back to the camp, the fire had already gone out. I had to make another fire which was pretty easy since I got first place in survival camp when I was fifteen years old. After we finished our magnificent meal, I told Edward to go to sleep while I tried to fix the radio transmitter and call for help.

A few hours later, Edward woke and told me to go to sleep for a while. When I said no, he took the transmitter and started to do what I had done a few hours ago when he went to sleep. After a few minutes I was so tired I fell off the rock hit my head on another rock and blacked out. When I woke up it was morning, and Edward was already back from the morning hunt with a bunch of wolves following him. Wait, with a bunch of wolves!? I asked Edward why he had adopted a bunch of wolves and do you guys know what he said? He told me that while he was hunting he heard the growls of the wolves and seemed to understand what they were talking about.

In the morning Edward confessed that yesterday he had lied to me about the wolves (like I didn’t know that already). He told me that the wolves had followed him back to camp because he had a hole in his bag of meat and the meat had dropped onto the ground and then the wolves ate it all. They followed him back to camp thinking they would get more food. But they didn’t so they walked away. In the morning Edwards loud cry woke me from my deep slumber. ”Yay. Yay, were saved, Yay!!!”

I sat up and said, “Yo keep it down man.”

He said, “But I need to signal that ship!!!”

I took one look at the ship and wondered how Edward could be so stupid. “It’s one of the Vespers ship!!!” I yelled at him. And then I saw her Grandmama. “Stop it Edward!!! That’s Grandmama’s ship!!!” I yelled at him.

Then Grandmama turned her ship’s cannon towards our island and fired.

“Duck!” I screamed at Edward. He ducked and quickly fired back with the one of the many coconut cannons that Edward and I had built. After a few seconds I recovered from my shock and also started to fire back at Grandmama. After a few minutes I told Edward to stop firing because there was so much smoke we couldn’t aim correctly. Five hours passed. “Hey, yo Edward what do you want for dinner?” I said.

He said, “I’ll take some coconut water and that’s it.”

“Okay,” I replied.

In the morning, old Grandmama ran out of ammo and ran to ask her fat son Samuel to deliver some ammo to her. While she was trying to radio Samuel, Edward and I took advantage of that and started to fire some coconuts at her ship “The Death Bed.”

After a few minutes, Edward and I were looking at the ruins of old Grandmama’s ship “The Death Bed,” but I didn’t see that with the last bits of her strength she turned one of the ship’s last working cannon and fired at the island.

The next day one of the Atlas Ships found and picked me up.

When I got back to base I learned that my sister had died of grief and Grandmama killed Edward when she fired the cannon in the last few moments in her life. My legs had been blown off in the explosion, so I couldn’t walk for the rest of my life. I hope I’ll be able to go for at least one more mission, but until then, Shadow Killer Out.  

The Unbelievable Man

A man swirling around like a fish

The grass follows the man

The sky as blue as the ocean with the red yellow and pink following

He says something very faint like a cricket playing their music in the water

His clothes are like oceans on a body

His face, as pale as white, but as yellow as a sun

He is special unlike the other people

He stays there like a statue but moving in 3D

As the people walk he slows down

He then stops

Everything stops

They are under his command

I am always still so I am free

He moves once more

So does the earth

As he finishes the earth finishes except for me

 

*Inspired by “The Scream” by Edvard Munch

 

The Lady Sings

I’m jumping so high but it’s not me

She’s jumping so high her boots can’t touch the ground

No color, no touch, no smell, nothing in such sort

Still, there’s laughter and joy

Black and white all over

Now i can see the picture

1945, the year has come

‘Hooray,’ the lady sings.

Everything is coming to come together

The light is coming

The darkness will fall

I’m coming together

Now I am here

The lady will cheer

As the sun comes up

 

*Inspired by “Cut” by Kara Walker

The Man

The people are still. Their mouths are open, but I can’t hear a thing. Behind them a man comes marching in. He is holding a gun.

Bang!

One of them is dead.

I wish I could do something, but my feet are stuck to the ground. I can’t watch this.

I try to lift my hands to cover my eyes, but my whole body is frozen. Instead I just try to think of good thoughts.

I remember my dad. Is he dead? I don’t see him in the line. I remember one thing. My dad said that, “I am the luckiest man on earth because I have you.” The thoughts aren’t strong enough, so there is nothing I can do but watch these people die one by one.

One person looks at me and makes eye contact. I can see fear in the person’s eyes and I feel as if these people can hear me. The man turns around, but then turns back and kills the person who looked at me.

I search through all the people and I find my sister in the end of the line. It isn’t really a line. Just a big blob of people. She looks like she is trying to find me in the line. “She can’t see me,” I think. What if she thinks I’m dead? The man looks back at me and he points the gun at me like he sees me, his face is covered, his hand on the trigger.

Bang!

Everything goes blank. I’m in a room and my sister is there. “The man is our father,” she says. I sink down to my knees and cry out, “HELP!”

No one answers.

Switching Sides

HOPE

HI!

I am shy.

There is one syllable in my name.

My favorite type of ice cream is vanilla.

Now you know something about me, so let’s get this story started.

 

Chapter 1

The locker wouldn’t budge.

“Rats!” I said. Why did this always have to happen to me? I looked down the long hallway, teeming with other kids.

Pause — wait! I didn’t get to know you yet — so, I’m Hope, if you didn’t know already, like everybody else. There are groups of people at my school. Like, there are popular kids, sporty kids, music kids, and me and the geeks. My friends and I are tech geeks [I actually like soccer]. Is it like that at your school?

Anyway. There I was, struggling with my locker for the tenth time since school started (and we had only been back from summer vacation for three days!), when I heard the Principal say my name!

“Hope Solo! I hope that you’re settling alright,” she said to me. I knew that my face was turning red. The last thing I needed was attention from Ms. Monroe. Yeah, that’s correct, our principal was Marilyn Monroe.

Because no normal kid likes going to the principal’s office, when you leave you get a chocolate bar with her face on it. The picture is always updated. All the other teachers are mean, but not in front of Ms. Monroe.

 

Chapter 2

If I told Ms. Monroe that kids were gluing my locker shut, then that would make her cry, and I didn’t want that to happen, and I didn’t want anyone to get in trouble or else they would do worse things to me.

So I looked at Ms.Monroe and said, “I have to get to lunch. I’ll talk to you later. Bye.”

“What about your locker?” she asked kindly. She put her fingers around the lock and it magically unclasped.

“Thanks, Ms. Monroe!”

“I think that you need a new lock, Hope. This one is very sticky.” She smiled at me. Maybe kids weren’t gluing my locker.

 

Chapter 3

After lunch I had gym.

Our gym teacher was Dwayne “The Rock” Johnson. You probably don’t understand.

I just got moved to a new school and  it’s a school for famous children. So who am I? People think I am  Albert Einstein’s niece, but in reality, I am the daughter of world-famous soccer player, Abby Wambach. My mom is training me to follow in her footsteps. You might think I’m smart and all, but I play travel soccer. It isn’t my real dream.

I always wanted to dance, but I guess I will never accomplish that dream…  

After school in LA, I went to New York in a helicopter to play soccer.

It was so much work. I also watched my mom play soccer. That part was fun because she’s so good at it, while I’m only pretty good.  I feel underestimated compared to how good her team is at soccer.

 

Chapter 4

“Hi, I am your coach for gym today,” The Rock barked. “So lay down and do 50 pushups, stat!”

I pretended I was suffering, but actually I could do it in 30 sec.

After gym, I had biology with Alex.

If you didn’t know, I like Alex. He’s the cutest boy in school.

I walked into biology and my seat was next to his. Alex is the son of David Beckham, and he was the only one who was nice to me when I first came to the school. Even though his father is famous, he isn’t shallow like the rest of the kids.

The bell rung. Everyone filed into their classes except for me. I had to go straight to New York to practice.

I wasn’t in the mood. I wish I could’ve gone to art class because soccer is so boring. When we got to New York, my mom was ready to coach us.

My team started off doing sprints down the field.

After, we went straight to push ups and sit ups.

We started doing all kinds of dribbling techniques after that, and then we went right into scrimmage.

My team won.

After, we all went home, and flew back to LA.

 

Chapter 5

I did my homework on the helicopter ride home.

By the time I got back, school was over.

So now I had to go train for soccer, otherwise my parents would get angry at me.

So I practiced till Georgia, my nanny, called for dinner. I had mashed potatoes for dinner with mac and cheese.

It was so good.

After, I got to go into my room to have some computer time.

I went on my laptop and went on Youtube and watched “The End of Time Target Dance,” by Todrick Hall.

I went to bed at  10:00pm.

 

Chapter 6

In the morning, I woke up excited for dance class.

Why dance you ask?

I booked a dance class every Thursday afternoon because I don’t have soccer practice on Thursdays.

Before I knew it, I was at the dance class.

I realized Alex was there. My face started to burn up.

The teacher made partners.

Guess who she partnered me with? You guessed it. Alex and I had to make up a 30 second dance to “Uptown Funk” by Bruno Mars.

“So, what do you want to do?” I asked shyly.

“I was thinking a hip hop cross, move side to side, jump to the left, rollercoaster, clap, pose,” said Alex.

“Okay,” I said, trying to remember it all.

We practiced the dance a couple times.

They finally called our name.

It went very smoothly.

We got a grade on our dance because they were trying to improve us. I got an A+. It made me feel good.

I was so happy. I had a great time. It was much more fun than soccer.

But now I have to make an excuse up.

Oh! I could just say I was at the library to keep up my cover.

I walked into my room and I flopped on my bed. I was so tired I could have fallen asleep.

 

Chapter 7

The next morning, I woke up and ran to the bus. I made it right on time.

I sat in the back right seat next to Alex.

It was the only seat left.

We didn’t talk the whole time.

When the bus ride was over, I went to my first class, Spanish.

I didn’t pay attention. I was all in my own brain thinking of dance class. It was the best class ever.

I had to end my daydream, because the teacher called on me. I stood up in my chair, like I was a princess.

The question she asked was, “What does ‘muchas gracias’ mean?”

I answer with an incorrect answer. I said, “Merry Christmas,” and shrugged my shoulders.

“You failed,” the teacher said in disappointment.

After school I went to dance class.

My mom was there.

I couldn’t believe it. I was doomed.

“You, little Missy, why didn’t you tell me you were taking dance class?” Mom said in disappointment.

“I am so sorry.” I said bursting out in tears, “I couldn’t help it. Dance is my real dream! I didn’t want you to be angry at me, so I kept it a secret from you!”

“Oh Honey, all I want to do is what makes you happy. Parents like me just want to know what you like. I can help you pursue your dreams! I wouldn’t get angry. You’re so sweet,” Mom said, confused.

I hugged mom as tight as I could! I felt like I was loved.

Mourning in its own Light

Mourning in its own light

Attention to those unweak

Tenders do not belong here to criticize

Terrains filled with beautiful sounds

 

Hissing the snake like words of the haters

Craning at my thoughts

Everything to love crumbling down

Whatever they say

Antonyms for happy is how I explain them

 

Never ending comments

Deadly words killing many and leaving shrapnel to pierce me

 

Justifying the odds they will try again

Bringing darkness not light

Everything dying

Slithering along my flaws

 

Striking me with pressure

Everlasting hell

Elimination

It was large,

Wooden,

Bright,

And it smelled of all nature.

Fragile leaves nesting on the ground.

Crunch, crunch, crunch, I hear.

Footsteps following me.

I jump up the damp tree trunk to hide.

But it wasn’t a human-

No, a small robin scrounging for food under the thick layer of leaves.

I jump down into a freshly fallen pile of leaves,

and they spew everywhere.

I see a small grey squirrel trying to gather the nuts fallen from the giving tree.

This tree was different:

Colorful,

Mysterious.

Happy,

Frightened.

This is why I love fall.

This is why,

                        This

                                  Tree

                                             Is

                                                   Mine

Camp

I put the suitcase on the bed. I had just gotten home from sleepaway camp. I never wanted to go back to Camp Lakota. It was awful! I stayed for one week. On the first day I fell into a mud puddle, bumped into a tree (I still have a bump on my forehead), and got stung by eight bees. On the second day, my iPod fell in the lake, I fell in the lake, and I tripped over a rock and my phone cracked. At least I still had my iPad. That night my dorm buddies put on relaxing whale sounds to help them go to sleep, but it kept me up all night. All I heard was demented cow sounds. I didn’t know how that was supposed to sound like a whale, or get them to sleep, but oh well.

On the third day, I was so tired that I fell asleep on a tree, and when I woke up I couldn’t see my group. It took me an hour to get back to the dining hall to get lunch, but lunch was already over. It was time for the afternoon classes. I went to look for my bridge building class when, out of nowhere, it started to rain. I found my class, and by the time it was over I was soaked. I went to to my room and decided to skip dinner. The day was finally over. I could sleep tonight because the whale sounds were off.  

I woke up and went to breakfast and there was no more food. I dropped my iPad in an ancient well, and at the end of the day, I fell into a bush of roses. I was scraped up from head to toe.  Finally, it was the last night. I didn’t sleep because I was so excited to go home. The last day was also horrible. I woke up and went to breakfast. They were serving scrambled eggs, my least favorite breakfast ever. I just hoped that the rest of the day would be good but it wasn’t.

In the morning we went to explore the woods and I brought my watch. It was the only thing I had. You think I would have learned to not bring anything in the woods, but I didn’t. While I was busy running away from wasps (I got stung by 2), I fell into poison ivy. My watch probably got loose and fell off, because it wasn’t on my wrist anymore. So we kept walking and when we came back to the rooms I realized I had ticks. It was awful. I went to the nurse and got them removed.  It was finally lunch and after lunch we were leaving.  We had sandwiches for lunch, and this girl sitting at my table wanted mayo on her sandwich. She couldn’t get the mayo out so she was trying to squirt it and the bottle was aiming at my face so when the mayo came out, it came out on my face.  

It was finally time to go home. I was so happy! We got on the bus. I was so happy to go home. I finally arrived at my house, so I put the suitcase on the bed and here we are again. I was just sitting by my window, reading, when my mom came in and told me, “Your friend wants to go to Camp Lakota with you, so you are going again in two weeks.” I almost died. Now to pack again.  

The Coat of Nature

Chestnut is from the bark of the towering trees, in the forest yet to be explored.

Bay is from the rich soil on the ground in that forest, dark and wild, not yet trodden on by foot or hoof.

Palomino is from the golden rays of sunlight peeking through the leaves of the trees

and buckskin from the light dancing across and illuminating the shadow underneath the branches.

Paint is from the splotchy patterns of the leaves and the sky, the light and the shadow, the trees and the ground

as you spin around and around in the forest, the colors mix together like an elaborate painting.

Roan is from the earth and the water, the ripe wild berries growing in small clusters, and the river reflecting the bright blue sky.

Black is from the darkness of the night as the sun sets under the horizon, the moon and stars decorating the night sky as shadows embrace the forest.

The color of all the forest at peace, blending together into the darkness, to be awoken again by the rising sun to show the coat of nature once more.   

Greek Gods

It all started with Chaos. Chaos was the universe. He born a daughter named Gaea. Gaea was Mother Earth. She had brown hair and dark skin like dirt. Chaos also developed a big pit at the bottom of the Earth. It was called Tartarus. The pit developed a godly form. The sea developed and the sea god was Pontus.

After a while, Gaea got bored. She asked Chaos for a husband. Chaos gave her Ouranos, the sky. Ouranos’ skin changed color from blue and black. In the morning his skin was blue with clouds on it and in the night it was black with stars. Gaea married Ouranos. Then a bunch of primordial gods popped up. Chaos and Tartarus had a kid named Nyx, who was the embodiment of Night. Then Nyx all by herself had Hemera, who was Day. Chaos also created Eros the god of procreation. Other stories said Eros was the son of Aphrodite. We’ll get to them later. Gaea and Ouranos had kids named the Titans who were huge. There female  names were Mnemosyne, Tethys, Theia, Phoebe, Rhea, and Themis and the males were Oceanus, Hyperion, Coeus, Cronus, Crius, and Iapetus. Ouranos kept getting angry at the Titans and yelling at them. Gaea and Ouranos had triplets. They were called the Cyclopes and they were UGLY. Each kid had one eye in the middle of their forehead. Gaea loved these guys. She named them the Elder Cyclopes. Eventually they would make another race of Cyclopes. When Ouranos saw the kids he bound them in chains and threw them into Tartarus.  

“How dare you! They’re your children!” shrieked Gaea

“They’re ugly!’ said Ouranos. She decided to give another chance. Gaea gave birth to another set of triplets.They were the Hundred-handed ones. They had one hundred arms and fifty faces. Gaea also loved them. Ouranos also hated them. He bounded them in chains and, again, threw them into Tartarus. Finally Gaea asked the Titans to destroy their father. All the Titans backed off, except one, Cronus. Cronus was the youngest Titan.

“I love you, wait what is your name again?”

“Cronus.”

“I love you Cronus. Do you need anything?”

“Uh… Yeah. I need four of the Titans to hold Ouranos. You will tell Ouranos that you want to get back together. Also I need a weapon. The four people who help me will be the rulers of the north, east, west, and south,” said Cronus. The girls were too wise to get involved in murder. That left Oceanus, Hyperion, Coeus, Iapetus, and Crius. Oceanus chewed his thumb nervously.

“Uh… actually I need to do some stuff.” said Oceanus. He scurried away. That left Hyperion, Coeus, Crius, and Iapetus.”

Iapetus cleared his throat. “Um, actually–”

“Great!” interrupted Cronous. That night Gaea asked Ouranos if they could get back together

“Um, really?” asked Ouranos.

“Really,” said Gaea. Ouranos came down.

“Hey,” said Ouranos. Right then Hyperion, Coeus, Iapetus, and Crius jumped out and pinned him down. Cronus came.

“Hahaha. Now you will die and I will be the ruler of the universe!” said Cronus. He took his scythe and sliced Ouranos apart. His golden ichor (the blood of immortals) spilled out into crevices and fields. It created animals. Cronus became king of the universe. He made a huge palace on Mount Othrys. Gaea didn’t have to worry anymore. She went to sleep for a few millenia. Cronus married Rhea. She was the substitute Earth goddess. One day Cronus went the the Oracle in the Temple of Delphi. The oracle named Pythia sat on a three-legged stool. Cronus approached Pythia. Green mist poured from her mouth.

“Your kids will overthrow you.” said Pythia. Cronus fled to Mount Othrys where Rhea was giving birth. She had Hestia, Hades, Demeter, Poseidon, Hera, and Zeus. Since Cronus knew his kids were going to overthrow him he swallowed all of them whole, except for Zeus. Rhea had a tantrum for five days straight. When Rhea had Zeus, she hid him on the island of Crete. She put a tree nymph, a goat named Amalthea, and a bee named Melissa. There were two guards that banged their spears on their shields when baby Zeus was crying. Finally Zeus grew up. Mother Rhea came up to Zeus.

“Hello Zeus, I am your mother. I have been protecting you from the evil Cronus. Now it’s time for you to go and overthrow him. Change into a Titan. Go and be his cupbearer and entertainer. Feed him poisonous nectar (the food of the gods) and feed the other Titans sleepy nectar. Good luck,” said Mother Rhea. Zeus concentrated on being tall, strong, and bold. He felt himself get taller. Then he went to Mount Othrys. He fed the other Titans sleepy nectar. Then he fed Cronus poisonous nectar. Cronus barfed Zeus’ siblings up. They were covered in bones and slime.

“Ewwwwwwwwww!” they all groaned.

“What should we do?” asked Hestia

“Well I’m your leader,” said Zeus

“What, who said that! I should be the leader,” yelled Hera

“Well, Mother Rhea appointed me,” said Zeus.

“Fine. But if you be bad, Hestia will be the leader cause she is the oldest,” said Hera

“Well the plan is that we climb Mount Olympus–”

“We need weapons first,” said Hera.

“We will go the the prison in Tartarus and rescue the Hundred-Handed ones and the Elder Cyclopes. They will make us weapons,” said Zeus. They went to Tartarus and rescued Gaea’s children from the prison. The sons of Gaea made weapons for some of the gods. They made lightning bolts for Zeus, a three-pronged trident for Poseidon, a helmet that makes the wearer invisible for Hades, a magical torch for Hestia, a magical peacock feather that could spy on people for Hera, and a scythe that was said to be the exact replica of Cronus’s for Demeter. They freed the Elder Cyclopes and the Hundred-Handed Ones. Then they climbed to the top of Mount Olympus. Meanwhile, the titans were busy too. Hyperion married and had Helios, Selene, and Eos. Coeus married and had Lelantos, Leto, and Asteria. Lapetus’s sons are Atlas, Prometheus, Epimetheus, and Menoetius. Oceanus daughter Metis. Crius’ sons Astraeus, Pallas. Prometheus and Epimetheus joined the gods. At Mount Olympus Zeus and the other gods were planning out the plan to raid Mount Othrys.

“We will turn into eagles and fly to Mount Othrys. The Elder Cyclopes and Hundred-Handed Ones will help us battle,” said Zeus.  They flew to Mount Othrys and battled. The battle raged on for 10 years. One time Atlas threw basilisks at the gods and the gods turned into weasels and spit at them. Finally the battle ended and the gods won. Zeus had Ares, Athena, Apollo, Artemis, Hermes, and Dionysus. Since Hera was the god of marriage she had Hephaestus. With Ouranos’ blood Aphrodite was born.

 

 

 

The End

Bluemoon

I rested my head on a log. The moon came five times since the wolves left. I was beginning to worry.

The baby chipmunk who lived in a burrow near the rock fence, Chip, claimed that they will return soon, but the snowy owl, Hoot, said they will never come. Today, I overheard the foxes talk about my mom, Bluemoon. They said that she probably died from old age, or was badly hurt. I didn’t believe a word of it. The foxes were usually known for not always telling the truth anyway. I looked up at the stars, and wished that the wolf pack will come back soon. I listened to the empty sound of the forest at night. Chip crawled out of his burrow, and scampered next to me. Chip was basically my best friend, not counting my mom.

Right then, I heard howling, and running from afar. I sat up a little, and Chip’s ears perked up. The sound didn’t get any closer. It seemed the wolves weren’t trying to come home.  I tried to listen better. It sounded like they needed help! I stood up fully, and let Chip run up my arm onto my shoulder. We walked over to the sound. It was dark, but I could see the outline of a couple wolves. I ran over to them. Goose bumps filled my arms.  

When I reached them, I saw they were all crowded over something. I pushed aside two wolves to get the spot in the circle.

Mom.

She was lying on the ground; dead. There was blood gushing out of a hole in her beautiful body. I looked away. I could not bear to look at her any longer. I felt the tears run down my cheeks. She was gone.

 

Rusty

My dog is really important to me. He smells really bad sometimes though. He is a Tibetan Terrier. He is white with a big brown spot in the middle. He is very cute. I can’t imagine my life without my dog. He is a bad dog sometimes too though. He is sooo cute that mom says, “it’s okay Rusty” (Rusty is his name).

 

I first saw Rusty in a parking lot with his breeders. We took him to our house for a trial. The trial was supposed to be for 1 week, but on wednesday (the trial started on Sunday) my sister and I found out that mommy had already called to say that it was working out really well, and that we were going to keep him. I couldn’t believe it. I was so happy that I sat down with Rusty and sat talking to mom for at least 30 minutes.

 

Rusty is really important to me because he’s the only dog that didn’t die or had to be given away. My sister says that he’s important because he listens when you talk to him and he’s really cute. My mommy says that he is important to her because he is around for us to snuggle with when we are feeling down. My daddy says that he is important to him because he makes us happy. Rusty is also very important to me because he makes me laugh and I love him more every day.

Saving Santa

The other elves rush into the room. We watch the newly updated YouTube video. I see a woman on the screen with a scratchy voice, a plasticky face, and green-tinted hair speaking.

“Yeah, I so wish Santa was real! Shame he’s not…”

I scowl and clench my fists. Nasty Grinches spreading lies! I watch underneath as the video accumulates dislikes and comments like:

“You ruined my childhood!”

“I wish there was a warning! Grrr!”

“Santa’s not real?”

“OMG! I’m so sad! My childhood is a lie!”

The Grinches have been doing this a couple years after Santa started delivering presents. They are trying to whittle down Christmas cheer until Santa’s sleigh can’t get an inch off the ground.

Then I know what will happen.

The other elves desperately try to comment, “She’s lying!” but the bunch of YouTube-goers don’t believe them.

“This is a disgrace. Santa is real. This is outrageous!” says an old elf.

“I am very sad people are forever spreading stupid rumors like this. Every time someone says ‘Santa isn’t real,’  a baby elf dies. 90,000 elves have died this year! It is too bad.” I open another video.

“Santa is not REAL!!!! He is a lie. All you people who believe in Santa are living under a ROCK!!! SANTA ISN’T REAL. SANTA ISN’T REAL. SANTA ISN’T REAL!!!!” the video says.

I shake my head in disgust. Santa is obviously real… how can nobody tell? Who else did they think put the presents under the tree? Parents just pretend it’s them at a certain age so that the kids don’t get laughed at for knowing the truth.

I type a comment. “Santa is real. Also, because you said ‘Santa isn’t real’ four times, you just killed four baby elves. No wonder the elf population is going down. You monster.”

I get a reply a few minutes later. “Obvious troll.” How dare they say this! Isn’t it obvious that I’m an elf, not a troll? Uncultured swines. I bet they’ve never seen an elf in their life.

I tell this to that person in a reply, but then I turn off my computer. I need to do something about this Grinch menace. I can’t take their Christmas-ruining any longer! It’s absolute madness — something must happen.

I think of a plan, but it’ll be difficult. What I’ll need to do is climb into the house of the Head Grinch and punch him in the face. The reason why this will work is that Grinches believe that elves are weaker than them: this is why they say that Santa isn’t real, because they’re not scared of our retaliation. If I punch the head grinch in the face, they’ll all realize that elves aren’t weak. And slowly, they’ll stop mocking Christmas and ruining the spirit.

I get into my car and drive away from my house. I don’t know his address, but I’ll know it when I see it.

Finally, after hours of driving, I recognize a cave. This is it!

The Head Grinch will lose today.

As It Floats Down

As I walk around, I stare and see. The many leaves of the autumn tree. No two are identical. Like snowflakes. As it gets colder, winter time settles down. The tree loses its leaves. As the birds and bears gather around. To see and stare as the leaves fall to the ground. They know it’s coming. One of the chilliest times of the year. The autumn tree whispers.

The Young and the Youth

I can see it

Living its way up

Over the hills of mind

Venus and Mars colliding

Echoing in my head

Minding itself

Years of loving the thoughts

Moving parts

Over the mountains

Mind blowing

So important

Over times

My thoughts blasted into light

Under the stars

Coming out of the dark

Hiding feelings

Inner love

Like marching through stars

Yelling across light

Telling itself to fly to the moon

Teaching the sun to dance

Making memories

Attending to the clouds

Bringing brightness to you

Taking life

Imagination living

Amongst us

Before special love

The Quest to stop the monsters

“AAAHHH!!!”

George rushed up the stairs at the ear-piercing scream and swung open the double doors. There lay his Dad on the ground with blood trickling down his forehead.

“ DAD!!!” screamed Lily, George’s little sister.

 But George had no intention of screaming like his sister, sobbing like his mother, or begging for mercy like his grandmother.

He was staring in fright at the zombies, skeletons, witches, wizards, and dragons the size of dining room tables. He was shocked to learn that these mobs existed. They were staring at his Dad with sneers glued on their faces. George stared at the advancing monsters.

“You horrendous monsters!” cursed George. ”I’ll get you BACK#$%&@!!!”

This seemed to anger the creatures, so they started lumbering toward them with swift slides. This frightened the lot, and they panicked immediately.

“Everyone listen up, these monsters are from the games Minecraft and COC (Clash of Clans). I know how to fight these mobs. But first, we all have to evacuate this building, and fast,” George explained. “Women, elders and children first!” he added.

George, Mom, Lily, Nonni, Granny, Pop and Aunt Maria went out the house first followed by Uncle Bob, Uncle Nick, and Jerry, who just graduated Stanford University and  started working for apple, came out last.

“Run for the hills!” yelled Pop. The whole city of San Diego was running down Main Street, because the train to Los Angeles was leaving soon. So many people squeezed into the train that Lily couldn’t see the light above her.

”Everyone stay calm,” directed George.

“We will arrive at Los Angeles shortly,” said the conductor. During the train ride George reassured everyone that he would put an end to these mobs.

Two hours later, TOOT! TOOT! TOOT!

The train screeched to a stop. People poured out of the train, including the family. But what they saw was not what they were expecting. The whole city was overrun by Ghasts, Blazes, and Lava Hounds. Ghasts look like big white squares with red mouths, Blazes look like a yellow head with yellow arms circling around them, and Lava Hounds look like pigs that are on fire that fly.

All the woman and the girls on the train screamed, and all men and boys groaned and moaned.

Everyone pushed their way back into the train, all of them except George, he went into the city to see what was going on. “Bye! See you in Sacramento!” Lily yelled.

“The next and final stop will be Sacramento!” said the conductor.

George sneaked into the city on tippy toes and made sure that he was not followed. The whole city was up in flames, and there was wreckage spilling into the streets.

BOOM!!! A fireball from a Ghast burst into smithereens inches from Georges feet, causing George to fall back and crash into a broken food trailer. BANG!!! CRASH!!! This caused sooo much noise it was as loud as an exploding atomic bomb. Soon the whole army of fire-type mobs started chasing George through the wrecked Los Angeles streets.

The angry mobs chased him for so long, that they dropped lower every second. Soon the mobs were so low, George could slice them.Then, he took out a bucket of water and dumped it on the mobs. HISS! The mobs started to disintegrate. Then poof! They vanished into thin air. So far, this was a major victory for George. But now he had to find a way to travel back to San Diego to fight off the mobs in his hometown.

“WOOF! WOOF! WOOF! ARF!” A handsome Golden Retriever bounded toward him. “AWWWWW!!! You’re such a cutie!!!” George cooed.

“TOOT! TOOT! TOOT! TOOT!” The train pulled into the train station at 12 o’clock sharp midnight.

“HOORAY!” yelled George happily. “WOOF!” barked the Golden Retriever.

“I’ll name you Sparky,” murmured George as they climbed up the stairs to the dormitories in the bus.

“TOOT! TOOT! TOOT! TOOT!“  The train pulled into the deserted San Diego downtown train station at 2:30 a.m.

“Bye,” the train driver gloomingly responded.

“Thank You!!!” replied George cheerfully, but still, he worried about his family. Where were they now? He rushed down Main Street as fast as a Ferrari with Sparky right at his heels. Little did they know that the troublemaker was at the other end of the city.

* * * * * *

“HA! HA! HA! That clever little George does not know that I’m going to ruin his life!” thought Pop. Pop had spent half of the year hacking, programming and making these video games spill out monsters that were programmed to target George, because he absolutely hated George’s Dad. Six months ago, when they were on the Mississippi river, George’s father chose to save Pop’s daughter over Pop when the kayak flipped over. Pop was gravely injured.

Pop hated that George and his Dad got all the attention. Like that time at the Holiday event and all the attention was focused on showering George with compliments.

The most popular games on the planet will now be named the most treacherous game on the planet! thought Pop. “Clomp! CLomp! CLOmp! CLOMp! CLOMP! CLOMP!”

It was footsteps that were approaching him quickly! He cautiously climbed over a fence and ran into a construction hole and hid in there for 3 hours until the footsteps had disappeared completely. He carefully lifted himself out of the pit and snuck to the fence and listened for any more footsteps before he climbed over it and…

“AHA! SO it was YOU that did all this!

* * * * * *

“ CLOMP! CLOMP! CLOMP!”George’s footsteps echoed through the isolated city. RATTLE! SHAKE! BANG! Mysterious sounds echoed through the empty city that made George jump. Then George hid behind a fence and waited for the person to climb over the fence again.

“Pant pant pant!” The suspect waited inside the construction site panting so that meant that the suspect was running away from George and did not want to show his face to him so he/she could be the troublemaker. Then what George wanted to happen, happened. The Suspect climbed over the fence and George got a heart attack. It was Pop!

George should have known, he directed the family to leave then he disappeared! George jumped on Pop.

“AHA SO it was YOU that did this! I should have known that it was you … ” George trailed off because Pop was no longer in his arms and a trail of black dots was going down main street! That probably meant that Pop’s trail was heading that way!

George slowly followed the black dots, but then started to run because he spotted Pop at the train station! George got there just in time, but nobody was there!? Splat! George stepped into a puddle of red goo.

“AEII!” screamed George in the shrillest sound anyone could imagine. It look like blood, but it really just was a distraction made by Pop. Then George spotted Pop standing over the train driver holding a kitchen knife! “STOP!” George screamed.     

Pop was startled and fled to the train and took over and started the train to Sacramento.  

“NOOOOOOOO!” yelled George.

The train to Sacramento took off flying down the tracks and speeding away from San Diego.

After a while, George gave up waiting and started wandering around the city to find anything he could salvage from the wreckage. There was wreckage spilling into the streets like Los Angeles and it was isolated. At least, he thought it was empty. Then he went to check on his house to see its shape. When he got there, he was horrified to see that the house was covered in black stains, like something exploded. He rushed inside and saw the Monsters were eating all the furniture, so he rushed out in fright. The city was full of lumbering mobs and they hadn’t been there two minutes ago!

He remembered that Pop had a lab in the basement and George could find some Interesting documents that could be useful. It would give George a head start on the chase. Now, the objective was to capture Pop and get some Information out of him.

On Pop’s desk, George found a binder of “To Do” lists. The last list was today’s entry, which said:

 

  • start massive mob army
  • continue search of George
  • Start entire continent takeover
  • kill ALL family members in Sacramento              

  

George burned the entry in fright and disgust. Pop had betrayed us all! George thought angrily.

George went on to Pop’s computer and went to Minecraft and started decoding. After that, he hacked and got all the mobs in to the game again and sent them out. Only this time, they were programmed to target Pop. But George made a mistake. He had typed capital C instead of capital V, so he made it all temporary. George commanded Sparky to sniff out Pop.

What a brilliant idea! thought George.

“Sparky, I need you to track the scent of this pen, OK?”

“Arf!” replied Sparky.

Sparky took off, running through the San Diego streets with George behind enthusiastically, mostly because he was nearing the truth of Pop and the end of this violent era.

* * * * * *

Clickety, clackety, clack. The train putted down the old rusty train track into Sacramento station at 10 p.m. sharp.

“HA HA HA!” cackled Pop. Soon Pop will be killing all the family members by midnight! “A month’s research and tracking has finally paid off!” When they left the mansion, Pop got tracking devices on everybody.

* * * * * *

George hopped on to the first class train that rolled into the station at 10:15 p.m. George rolled up his sleeves and said, “Please bring me to Sacramento.” George was thinking  Pop MUST be in Sacramento because in the computer, there was another list that said “ family in Sacramento.”

* * * * * *

Bang!!! The moment Pop pushed the door of the train, the gears jammed and Pop was locked inside.

“OPEN!!! You stupid door!! What horrible luck! @#$%^&!” cursed Pop. The door was shut closed but who did it!? Who who who?  It was a conundrum.

Bam!

A monster was pushing against the door.  

“So that’s what happened!” exclaimed Pop angrily. “George must have reversed it! But that means he discovered the to-do list I left on the table a few hours ago!” Pop became very worried.

* * * * * *

The train clacked down the track toward Sacramento. The tension was building and even George was scared, but it was the right thing to do and someone had to stop Pop.

* * * * * *

BAM!!! The door burst open and Pop charged out and …

“What!? NO!!” The monsters started charging at Pop and Pop saw that a bunch of civilians that looked completely defeated started picking up ruins of the buildings and start throwing the pieces of metal and glass at Pop.

“GO! GO!” The WHOLE POLICE department charged at Pop and tackled him. But for some reason, George’s programming wore off and now, ALL the monsters from every single square inch of the world showed up at the train station and they started attacking police and the civilians!

“YEAH MULE YEAH!” screamed Pop. “GO KICK THEIR BUTTS!” The train station was totally overwhelmed with hollering police, groaning monsters and screaming citizens. Clouds of dust formed around the bystanders, making it hard to see and breathe.

* * * * * *

George heard the racket a mile away and the train conductor looked worried. When the train station came in view, George was shocked to see Pop punching a policeman.  They drove in and George took a spare tire from the back and threw it at Pop. Pop swayed and fell to the ground, he was knocked out. Mission accomplished!

“Good job lad!” A policeman shouted after Pop was taken away and suddenly, the monsters one-by-one exploded into puffs of smoke. George smiled. He had accomplished his quest. He had saved the world from mortal peril. He had sent Pop to jail. An era had ended.  GEORGE! GEORGE! The crowd started chanting. “GEORGE! GEORGE! GEORGE!”

In the crowd, he glimpsed mom and Lily crying with happiness and Jerry yelling, “MY VERY OWN BROTHER! GET PAST A MAD GENIUS AND THE MONSTERS OF THE VIDEO GAMES!!!”

His whole family (except his dad and Pop) rushed toward him and hugged him, but it was more like a tackle.  The chanting and cheering went on. Soon, right when the chanting died down a little bit, the PRESIDENT came and gave a speech. In his speech, he said thank you to George, said he was happy that George had dealt with the monsters without the army and, for the finale, he rewarded George with ONE MILLION dollars as well as the Nobel Peace Prize.

CLAP! CLAP! CLAP! CLAP! CLAP! George was crying! There he was! Standing on the stage shaking hands with the President, getting his autograph, and having the President give him a trophy! He fell into the crowd and had hands pushing him along like he was a rock star. He went to the end, got up, bowed, waved and sat in the limo the president had given him and sped home.

 

Epilogue

The next day, however, was normal. Unless you include all the teen girls asking him to go out to dates at school today. The newsboy was yelling, the neighbor’s dog was barking and George was trying to concentrate on his homework (Detecting Commutative Permeability in Physics and Algebra). The biggest difference is that he had given out 220 autographs and had been interviewed for the Daily News. It was the best life ever for George. After all the homework was finished, the whole family (except Pop) went to the traditional Italian restaurant to celebrate. While they were there, George signed 40 autographs and personal items and got a free lamb chop for his linguini with alfredo sauce and thyme. Back at home, George rested on the couch reading, A Single Shard, by Linda Sue Park. All was well.

Nameless the Blameless & Congress

Bully Bob was bullying people when Farmer Rick caught him and brought him to the slaughtering room. Farmer Rick hung Bully Bob up by his legs and slit his throat and they made hamburgers, while Nameless the Blameless was watching.

Nameless could talk and had a cell phone. He banged his big cow cell phone, BANG BANG BANG and called Congress since he didn’t want any other cows to get slaughtered.

“Hey this is Congress,” his friend Congressman Daniel said.

“We need to stop slaughtering cows,” Nameless said.

“I’ll talk about it with other congressmen.”

They talked about it with Congress and they said YES. But the President said no and it was vetoed. So then, Nameless offered the President a limousine. And the President agreed.

But they needed another meat because people still wanted meat. Nameless told Congress to start slaughtering pigs, since everybody likes bacon. So they decided to have all of the pigs slaughtered.

But one smart pig, Jack, called his Congressman Daisy. They had a conversation about why Pigs shouldn’t get slaughtered. Daisy was a vegetarian, so she didn’t care about meat. But she cared about her friend Jack, so she decided to change it to start slaughtering chickens.

Everybody agreed, except the President who gave them another veto. They gave him a golf cart, because he liked golf carts. And it just kept on going on and on, until all of the animals except the smart animals, like Nameless the Blameless and Jack. They let all the cows go and didn’t keep them in cages anymore. It became a disaster, so Nameless said, “Why don’t we just have meat banned.”

So they banned meat.

The people started to protest that they wanted to eat meat. And then, the cows started to protest for everyone to be vegetarians. They were at the Capitol protesting and the guards came out and tried to stop everybody. They kept on going until everyone got tired. They forgot about meat. They barbecued vegetables instead and had tofu steak.

Nameless the Blameless, now free, started wandering everywhere, and people pet him. He was fine since he was smart, but all of the stupid animals caused traffic or got run over.

T.G.I.F

Chapter 1

 

“JANET! WHAT DO YOU THINK YOU ARE DOING? THIS IS NOT NAP TIME!”

What?

My eyes slowly slid open. Ugh. It was still Monday, and I was still in English class.

“Mmmm… Sorry Ms. Brown. As you see, I had a hard time falling asleep last…”

“I DON’T CARE ABOUT THAT! NOW, CAN YOU TELL ME THE ANSWER TO MY QUESTION?”

I looked at the board. Uh-oh. It read: x-y=n (3/8+ 5/0.)=n. Ok, I admit, I fall asleep in class a lot. But I mean, hey! I missed half the lesson! A kid can’t just do that from the top of their head!

I said weakly, “Zero?”

My teacher’s voice softened. “I understand that you were most likely up late last night doing your homework, although I highly doubt that you really had that much. Anyway,  you did have that project–”

Then, Ms. Brown raised her voice.

“–THAT WAS DUE LAST MONTH! ANYHOW, YOU STILL HAVE TO MAKE UP FOR THAT HOMEWORK THAT YOU ‘MISSED’ LAST WEEK, AND…”

My face turned a bright shade of red, and I probably looked like a tomato. By the time my teacher had finished her lecture, it was time for lunch, my favorite period. I grabbed my lunch and raced down to sit on my favorite bench in the school yard.  It was the place to be if you just wanted some peace. For some reason, no one ever bothered to sit there and talk to their friends. Since I’m the new kid, I only have one friend and she was absent that day. Sprawling out on the bench and closing my eyes for a nap, I probably looked like a hobo. Before I knew it, the bell went off and I had to wake up, and walk to the school like a zombie. The next two periods were art class, which was my favorite too. I did not have to do everything perfect, and the teacher did not blab on and on and on about Freida Colo, and other famous artists*. I got to art class, and made one of those really good pictures that the teacher always brags about to the class.  

After that, I decided to sculpt the same horse that I painted, and that was the rest of the period. I set my horse on a piece of paper to dry, got my book bag from the locker room that I was keeping it in, and left the school.

I was about one block away from my house, and I saw a dog on a park bench. I knew that it was Ms. Henderson’s. Ms. Henderson is a old lady who is our grumpy old neighbor, and she can barely hear anybody when they speak. She treats her dogs like she would a soccer ball. Now, I don’t want to offend anyone here, but she is super slow. She walks, like, not even one mile an hour. Here’s the bad part about all of this. She has tons of little puppies, and they need to run around, right? And Ms. Henderson is a really slow walker, right? Squish this information together, and you get that she pushes her puppies with her cane every so often to get them to wait up for her, even when the pups are not even moving a muscle, waiting for her. So, when I saw this little puppy, I thought, why in the world would Ms. Henderson let her puppy go around free? Ms. Henderson would NEVER let her dogs run free.

The puppy was brown, and her fur was nice and soft. Her eyes were big, and her nose was big and wet. The ears were so cute and dainty, so I couldn’t help but love her. I’m not Miss Little Perfect, but I do have a weakness for dogs. Since my neighbor does not give her dogs a good, fresh meal, I decided to take the dog in for a little while, you know. Maybe, just maybe, dad would let me keep her. While I was walking home, I tried to think of a name for her. Princess? No way. FluffBall? Nah, not really. Cutie Pie? Nuh uh. It had to be a real name… not a cutie poopsy name. Hmm… Hope. That was a perfect name.

Hope was following me, and I was glad. I’m not the type of person who wants to pick up a dog. I tested the name out. “How’s it goin’, Hope?”

She responded by rubbing her head on my leg, which I took to be a sign that she liked the name.

Finally, we reached my house. I entered. My dad was sitting at the table, doing his work. “Janet!” he said. “Hi.”

I looked at my dad. Something was troubling him, I could tell.

“What is it, dad?” I asked.

“Come here, Janet,” he said in his no-joking voice.

“What?” I knew that there was nothing to be afraid of, because dad always made a little molehill into a big mountain.

I put the dog under the table, and it was really easy, since she was really small. “Your grades.”

I groaned. Then, I plopped down in a chair. “You need to stop not paying attention.”

“Okay,” I said. Usually, he just tells me something and I say okay, and then it’s done. Not today.

“Listen. You need to get your grades up or else you are going to flunk out.”

I tried again, “Okay, dad.”

He sighed. “Honey, I really need you to focus.” That was the end of the conversation. I took a deep breath, ready to introduce Hope.

“Dad, this is Hope. I want to know if she can stay here for the night, because Ms. Henderson is so harsh.”

The immediate answer was, “No. Honey, you know that… um… it’s a school night…”

I picked the dog up from under the table. “Look at her, won’t you? She is adorable, and I just know that mom and the kids will love her.”

Dad sighed again. “Okay, fine. Just for today. Now make Timmy’s lunch, prepare Susie’s backpack, and clean out the dishwasher. Oh, also, remember Mark’s going to dance class tomorrow–”

I said it even before he did, “and I’m in charge of him. I know, I know, Dad.”

Being the oldest in the family, I had the most responsibilities. Mark was four, Timmy was three, and Sue was six, but she acted like the was ten.

“Here, Hope!” I said. Then, I walked up my stairs. They were carpeted, so I had to help Hope get her claws un-stuck from it. I tucked her in my bed, like a little kid would do to her dolly.

 Now, as I said before, I had only one friend. She was my one and only single friend, but she was also the best friend one could have. In the worst times, she would do anything to save me, even if it meant that she had to get some cuts and bruises. One time, I climbed all the way up to the top of a tree (yes, I love to get myself stuck in trees). Well, it was nine in the night, and my parents and siblings had gone out to our country house for a night. They had insisted that I stay home to work on a month’s work of missed homework. And the moment I got up to the very top branch, I knew that I was stuck. Well, you can imagine how I felt, at nine in the night, with no one to get me down from the tree. But, with knowing that Claire had excellent hearing and lived right next door to me, I felt just a little bit better. Then, when I completely understood that I could not get down from the tree without help, I screamed at the top of my lungs, “CLAIRE! CLAIRE!” My friend stayed up until midnight, so of course she came out to help me. Since it was dark, we both got a couple scratches, but ended up fine.

I absentmindedly did the chores that I was asked to do, took a shower, put on my pajamas, brushed my teeth, and got in bed. I’m not the type of person who washes their hands, don’t ask me why. I picked Hope up, and plopped her down at the bottom of my bed. I would do anything for that dog, even if it meant giving up some of my meals for her lunch and dinner. I heard Mark crying for my mom to read him a story, Timmy whining for a snack, Susie complaining that she felt like she was going to puke because her pillow was not fluffy enough for her or something, and my parents scolding all if them.

“You kids have to just go to sleep! Janet is already in bed!” I knew that my mom was just using me as an example, I knew that she was not really that happy that I was in bed. That’s only because one time she caught me drawing when she thought that I was asleep. I thought that it was a pretty good time to fall asleep, just in case my mom said anything else about me.

 

Chapter 2

 

The week whizzed by, and by the time I knew it, it was Saturday. The very first thing I did was walk over to Claire’s house, and left a note on the counter that said where I went. Claire was an only child, and she woke up at, like, 6. I wake up at, like, 9. Hope was following me, and that was fine because I needed to show her to Claire.

But of course, getting into Claire’s house with a dog was not going to be that easy. No, they do not have a cat. And no, no one is allergic to dogs. BUT, Carmina, Claire’s mom, HATES dogs. And when I say HATES, I mean HATES, HATES, HATES dogs. She, like, has a thing for cats. I have a thing for dogs. I have always wanted a dog. Claire says that me and her mom are total opposites. This is how she put it: “You are mellow. My mom is super strict. You love dogs, she hates dogs. You hate cats, she loves cats.”

She is Mark’s teacher, and believe me, I know what goes on in his classroom. So, I decided to go back to my house and grab a bag to put Hope in. It worked really well. Well, kind of. I walked in, and zipped up the bag to that Hope’s head was not showing. Then, Carmina lifted her head up and said, “Hello. put the bag on the table.” Then, Hope snorted, and sneezed. Yep, I had to pretend that it was me.

“Uh… I have a… cold. Sorry.” I sniffled to add to my act.

Carmina sighed and said, “Mhmm. I said, PLEASE PUT THE BAG ON THE TABLE, sweetie.”

“Um… yes, I know that. But umm… me and Claire–”

Carmina interrupted, “Claire and I, sweets.”

“Okay, okay. Claire and I are going to play with something in this bag, so I probably should take it upstairs with me.”

“ALRIGHT, I get it, sweets. Go upstairs and play whatever stupid thing you are going to play with. BYE, sweets. Go along now swee-”

Suddenly, Hope started to move. Carmina said, “What stupid toy do you have in there, sweets? Could it be a DOG that you are trying to hide from me, sweetie?”

It really gets on my nerves how she calls everyone sweetie or sweets, and she calls everything that. She doesn’t know that it’s stupid. “No, I’m just showing her my new… um… cat.”

Carmina looked delighted. “Why, I thought you would never learn! Good for you, hon!”

Arrh! I hate it when people call me hon! I ran up the stairs, glad that I could get away from Carmina, and got to Claire. I burst into Claire’s room. It had a green bed, green curtains, a green closet, and a green rug. Claire was writing in her diary.

“Hey, girl!” she said the moment I walked in.

“Hi, sweets! How are you doing, sweetie! What is that stupid thing that you are writing in?” I said, mimicking her mother.

“Hey, hon! What is that stupid thing in your bag, sweetie?” Claire replied. We do this quite often, because it really gets on both of our nerves. Claire’s dad works all the time. His shifts are 6:00 a.m to 11:00 p.m.  He only gets two days off in the whole year, so Claire barely gets to see him unless he is sick and can not go into work. Even though I have never seen him, I can tell that he is the opposite of Carmina. I showed Claire Hope, and went home. My family just got home, and they were already unpacking. My mom stopped when I walked in the door, and said in a very stern voice, “Janet Eliza Mcnamara, come here this instant. I need to talk to you.” I slowly approached, trying to act like nothing strange was in my bag. “I got a call yesterday.”

“ Umm… That’s great. W-who was it from?” I said. My mother’s voice dropped dangerously low. She sure knows how to scare a kid.

“Well, who do you think?” Hope chose that moment to wiggle and sneeze. My mother prodded my bag. Then she said again, “Who do you think?”

Suddenly, it made sense. Ms. Henderson called, told my mother that one of her dogs were loose, said she was almost sure who had it, and that she was going to give that child such a beating. I couldn’t think about it anymore.

“I’m so sorry, don’t do anything. I was just trying to help her please,” I said in a voice that you just simply have to go, “Oh, honey, I’m so sorry, please don’t cry. Come, give me a hug.” And of course, that is just what my mother said, but without the give me a hug part. Just then, the doorbell rang, and Ms. Henderson walked in. Then, everything went black.               

 

Chapter three

 

I woke up to the sound of Ms. Henderson saying that she loves her dogs so much, and she would do anything for them. She was wearing a purple dress and a big frown.

“There, she’s awake now! Oh! And the dog is in that bag! Hi, Ms. Sugar Bunch!” Ms. Henderson said in her crackly voice. My mother was sitting at the table, and my father was sitting next to her. Timmy and Mark were playing with dolls, and Susie was setting the table for dinner. She always loves to please mom and dad.

“What are you doing here? And her name is HOPE, not Ms. Sugar Bunch.” I said, as  boldly as I could.

“Who are you to tell me what MY dogs name is?” Ms. Henderson snapped. My mother shot me a look saying, “I am so going to kill you,” but I honestly didn’t care.

Even though I knew that Hope was really Ms. Henderson’s dog, I said, “She is my dog now. Do you really think that she liked it with you? I mean, who in their right mind kicks their dogs for no reason?”

Ms. Henderson gasped. Hope now had gotten out of the bag, and was whimpering. She leaned on me, and her big sad eyes said it all. Don’t let me go with her, please!  I’ll never pee on your bed again! Yes, last night Hope peed on my bed, but I was able to spray Febreeze and wipe the pee up, and my room was as good as new. Timmy and Mark stopped playing, and were staring, open mouthed at us. Susie finished setting the table, and was now filling glasses, totally oblivious to what was happening. I knew that I was going to get grounded, but I would do whatever it took to help my dog.

“I think you should go to your room for a couple minutes,” my mom said quietly. Even though she said it calmly, I could see the anger in her eyes. I walked upstairs, and took Hope with me. The truth was, I did not go upstairs, but I kind of stomped in place, so that mom thought that I was going up. I crouched down, so they could not see me. Hope ran upstairs and hid under my bed, and I was fine with that. My mother and Mrs. Henderson were talking in hushed tones, so I couldn’t hear them. Mark, who is my favorite sibling (don’t ask me why), ran up the stairs, and sat down next to me. He was only four, and was adorable. He opened his mouth, probably to ask me why I was there, but before he said anything, I clamped my hand over his mouth. He was very loud, and I did not want to be in more trouble than I was already in.

“I’m eavesdropping. Either sit down, or go to your room,” I whispered. He sat down.

“What’s evedropping?” he whispered.

“Its eavesdropping, stupid. It means to listen in when you are not supposed to.” I picked Mark up and put him on my lap. Okay, I admit it, I was nervous.

I overheard Mrs. Henderson say, “Yes, but there would be a price to pay.” And then I think my mom might have asked if it would be money or chores? Really, I just heard little snippets of the conversation, but it seemed that I would be paying quite a bit of money for Hope. At one point, Mark went back down to play with Timmy. Then, mom yelled up the stairs, “JANET! COME BACK DOWN HERE! WE NEED TO TALK TO YOU!”

I wished myself good luck, and walked down the stairs. As soon as I got halfway downstairs, I noticed that Hope was right behind me, and I was glad. I can always count on that dog.

Right then and there, I promised myself that whatever it took to win Hope, I would do it. I would do it for two reasons. The first one was that I really did not want to give Mrs. Henderson the pleasure of keeping her dog just to kick it around, when it was the sweetest dog in the world. The other is that all of my siblings have pets. Timmy has a fish, and Mark has a frog. Sue had a cat, but only because she got all A’s on her report card, and she spent one month working on an extra credit project for school. I was the only one without a pet, even though I was the oldest. I reached the bottom of the stairs, and saw a very perplexing sight. Mrs. Henderson looked as if she just just lost a war, but got $1,000,000 out of it. We were all quiet, and it was really awkward.

Mrs. Henderson finally broke the silence and said, “Sugar Bunch, come here! I know that stupid girl…” Mrs. Henderson turned to me and glared. Finally, she took her gaze off of me and continued to talk to Hope, “I know that stupid girl has taken terrible care of you.” Then, in a whisper, she said, “Don’t worry. I’ll get us out of here soon enough.”

Even though she said it so she thought that only Hope could hear, I heard every word of it. I guess mom did also, because she looked at Mrs. Henderson in a funny way, and then started to speak. “Well, Janet, we thought that if you could maybe give Mrs. Henderson some of your own money, because she needs it for her health, and her other dogs. Also, maybe you could do some chores around her house. We still have to talk about how much money it would be and how many hours you would be working for, but–”

Mrs. Henderson interrupted, “I think that she should work for at least 100 hours in all, and maybe 500 dollars. This dog was worth a million dollars, you know. You’re getting a big discount.”

“Well, Janet, does that seem fair to you?” My mom asked me. No, I said in my head, but out loud, I said, “Okay, sure.”

Mrs. Henderson sighed, like she thought that this big ordeal was just too much for her old bones. She was 81, and she was a hunchback. I think she had Parkinson’s also, but you can never be too sure. She slowly got up, and I shook her hand. She hugged a happy Hope, and left without another word. Mark, Tommy, Sue, and I celebrated by calling Claire and  baking brownies.

 

EPILOGUE

 

I finally paid off the 500 dollars!!! Tomorrow I can finally stop working for old Mrs. Henderson! She is going to a nursing home in one month, and a girl who was my age is moving into her old house! YAY! Hope is in good health, and she found some doggie friends that lived across the street. Sue transferred to my school and I helped her with her homework, and it turns out that she is not so perfect after all! Timmy did everything he can to help out with Hope, and Mark decided that he would be a big boy, and do almost everything by himself. My life is good after all!!!

 

—————————————————————————————–

*Last year, my art teacher did that and I fell asleep in class half the time. Also, I got nightmares from all of the things she told us about the artists. She was probably the worst art teacher that I ever had!

 

I NEED TO GO TO THE BATHROOM!

One day, a kid named Ben went to school, and he had a great time until lunch came. At lunch there was only orange juice. Everyone had to drink 50 glasses of orange juice, because they didn’t have any food that day. Then everybody had to go to the bathroom. Ben went to the boy’s bathroom, but this time there was sign and it said: Please wait in line for one hour. Then he looked at the girl’s bathroom. The girl’s bathroom sign said: Please wait thirty minutes.

Ben started shouting out loud, “I hate today’s lunch!”

“Yeah, Ben’s right,” said everyone. Everyone started whispering to each other. He was waiting thirty minutes, and the girl’s bathroom line was gone. He was about to pee in his pants. He didn’t want to do it, but he did. He ran into the girl’s bathroom and started used it. He was glad no girls were in there. When he came out of the girl’s bathroom, everybody was crowded around the girl’s bathroom door.

A bunch of girls said, “Uh ooh!” and started hitting him. He got sent to the Principal’s office.

P.S. The Principal was very strict.

The Principal shouted, “WHY DID YOU GO TO THE GIRLS BATHROOM?”

I said, “Can you not spit on me please.”

The principal madly shouted again, “DON’T EVER TALK BACK TO THE PRINCIPAL, BEN HUCKLEBERRY!”

I said, “You have bad breath.”

The principal yelled out loud, “IF YOU TALK BACK TO ME ONE MORE TIME, YOU’RE GONNA BE KICKED OUT OF THIS SCHOOL AND BE KICKED IN THE BUTT!”

Ben was standing in front of the principal’s desk and was staring at the principal. Ben said, “Bye.”

The principal shouted again, “WAIT, DON’T GO YET. You cannot play on the playground for 1 week, and I will email your teacher.”

He said for the last time, “Fine.”  He quickly walked away, but the principal was so shocked.

After school, Ben went home. He did all his homework and played a video game. He saw his parents at 3:00 p.m. Ben was so tired he went to sleep at 6:00 p.m. When he woke up, he looked at his clock. It was 6:00 a.m., but the lights in the living room were on. It was very strange for Ben. He went downstairs and saw his parents, and his parents were making a frown on their face. Ben said, “Why do you have a frown on your face?”

His parents answered, “We heard that you were in trouble.”

So he was grounded, and that ground was about not playing video games and not watching TV and eating no desserts for one week. Ben was frustrated and thought in his mind, Why did I go in the girls’ bathroom?

He thought hard of an idea to make a time-traveler before one week. He went to the junkyard and got some things that he wanted to make a time-traveler with. He got an engine out of a car, a tire off a car, a window off a boat, etc. He quickly went back home and went into his room. He decided to make the time traveler on his mirror. He started putting those pieces together. He quickly turned on the button and the lights went off the house. Ben’s parents were like, “Ben?! What did you just do?”

He quickly hid his mirror under the bed. When the parents came in they didn’t notice. Then, when the parents went out, he started to make the time traveler again. The mirror started wiggling and he put his hand on it. His hand went through it. When he went inside the mirror, it was 1966. He could tell because he asked a stranger what the date was, and the stranger told him that it was 1966. So he went back in the mirror and came back to his room. After, he looked at his homework and saw that he needed to do science homework on a computer and it was due on Monday. So, he held the homework packet and showed his mom and his mom was like, “Ugh, fine.”

So Ben was like, “Yes!” He went upstairs with the laptop and started to get the USB’s in his room and connected his computer to the time traveler. He quickly typed in the date: 2014, Friday, September 2nd, 1 o’clock. After, the time traveler started to light up. This time, he went in and he was on the line of the boys bathroom, and he said, “Yes!”

So he waited one hour on the line and finally went to the bathroom. Then, he went into the mirror and back to his room. He went downstairs with his mom. His mom wasn’t mad at him and said, “Hi Ben, did you do all your homework?”

And Ben said, “Sort of.”

She said, “What do you mean by sort of?”

Ben said, “I only did my science homework.”

“Then go upstairs and do the rest of your homework and come downstairs. I have a big surprise for you.”

He did all his homework which took about an hour. He went downstairs and his mom was holding a big present, and he didn’t realize that it was his birthday today. So Ben ripped open the present. He was so surprised: he got his own laptop. He was finally waiting for that present, and a wish came true. He was so excited that he decided to put it in his room and his mom came up with him. Ben went quicker, so he hid the mirror under his bed, and he deleted the program on the computer. He placed his own computer on the place where his parents’ computer was. So he made a promise with his mom to say “I will never do bad stuff on this computer or inappropriate stuff,” and his mom said, “You make this promise, and if you break it, you lose your laptop.”

Ben said, “Okay Mom,” and his mom went downstairs. He went down too, and he ate cookies with his family, and it ends with a happy ending here.

How Evil Came to Be

Many years ago, the Earth was divided in half. The left half was known as the majestic side. Everything was joyous and merry. People feasted and celebrated every day. It was a dream come true. The right side of Earth was a place of misery and despair. People wailed as they were tortured by hideous creatures. It was always night time. A thought that never came to anyone’s mind was crossing the border.

 

Chapter I

 

The king of evil was lethargic from overlooking his beasts rip off the limbs of his helpless human victims. A insignificant thought crossed his mind. Maybe, just for a test, he should cross the border. He called a ghoul with wrinkly green skin and red, bulging eyes and commanded him to cross. A young soldier looked over from the majestic side, for the beast’s blood-stained claws precariously inched closer to the gleaming wall of white light. With some hesitation, the monster placed his jagged claw into the glow.  

The light spiraled around the monster as it separated into small glowing balls. Faster and faster it span as it slowly consumed the beast in its whirling tornado. Everyone from both sides jerked their heads to the light and either had a face of awe or fear. When the swirling light had finally consumed the beast, it formed a huge ball and exploded! The sound was deafening. The explosion was so bright that everyone from miles around could see it. When the phenomenon was over, the glowing wall was gone and in the place of the ghoul there was only a pile of ashes and singed bones.

 

Chapter II

 

For a few brief moments, everything was silent, and then:

“WAR!” the King of Evil shouted.

The evil side immediately raced over with long, jagged teeth and claws exposed. The only thing you could hear amongst the chaos was the hollars and growls of ravenous beasts as they destroyed temples and buildings as far as the eye could see. Clouds of dust blew in every direction, as if they were a raging hurricane.  

“They’ve destroyed everything but the kitchen sink!” said an onlooker, and then he saw an ogre and goblin lugging a kitchen sink out of a house and smashing it to smithereens.  “Scratch that, everything and the kitchen sink!”

A beast that had monstrous bull-like horns and deep mahogany fur lunged for the young soldier. The soldier grabbed his spear and stabbed the beast, but it tugged the spear out of his body as if the weapon were only a splinter. The gaping hole in its chest healed before the soldier’s eyes. The monster leaped up and impaled the soldier with his gigantic horns. The soldier’s blood ran down the street and into the sewer like a stream. His body lay lifeless on the shattered cobblestone street.

 

Chapter III                 

 

From the ruins of a temple, an old woman with a hunch sauntered over with arms trembling from arthritis. Her fists were clenched together as if they harbored a dark secret.  Suddenly, without warning, she opened her fists. A ball of the same white light as the enchanted wall hovered over her head. Everyone stopped fighting to get a glimpse of the mesmerizing ball.

“Long ago,” she started. “I created the wall to protect the majestic side. I assumed that all beings would fear it. Clearly, I was wrong. This is hope. It will always be with you and guarantee that the worst will be over.”

With that she released the glowing ball and dropped dead.      

 

THE END

December 13 1972

Today is December 13, 1972. I made an oil rig to give me oil, but on my way home, I dropped some oil on a lit match. The oil caught on fire and the smoke was so black that the fire department came to put out the fire. Ten fire departments came. Suddenly, everyone was 10 million hours away so I said, “Who cares, I suppose I’ll just take a lamp and see what happens.”

And so, for some reason, this strange thing appeared. It looked like a water spout. But I said, “It can’t be that because it’s blue.” So I looked at that and said, “I wonder what this button does.” And so I went down into this room with steaming hot vats of liquid below them. Green, red, and blue vials. And a vase that seemed filled with water. I took the vase and said, “Hopefully this will put out the fire.” I went back and I realized when I looked in, there was nothing in the vase. So I decided, “I’ll push the button again to see if I get the green liquid one.” I pressed the button again, but this time, it took me to another planet. I decided, “Isn’t there a back button? Maybe it’ll take me back to my original time.” No luck. I realized, “Well, there it is. Home planet Earth.” I looked at it. I realized how small it was, compared to this planet. This planet was much bigger. So I just decided to press this button and stepped on it with my foot because I was walking.

I went into this room—the exact same room. I said, “Well, maybe this button is different, but maybe this room went underground and teleported me here. But maybe the fuse is broken and it only took me halfway there, to this other bigger planet.” I looked around the room and said, “Man, this is more misty than I thought.” When the mist cleared, it revealed pure water that was moving. It was pouring out, not onto the floor, but once it left the vase it disappeared. I realized that this place was haunted.

“Sssssching!”

I heard the noise, two times. I said, “Boy, this place is creepin’ me out.” Then, this person appeared on the table. I realized, no wonder that vase was high in the air. I decided, well, maybe it’s not so impressive. Instead, there’s got to be more people, because I heard it as many times as there were tables and there were vases filled with water.

“Can I get a drink of water?”  I said. I decided, maybe this water has some of this green stuff in it, so I went in the next room and tried to get a water bottle. I found one, but I thought, “Maybe it is old. I’ll just stick with the one I found in the hallway yesterday.” But I thought, “That wasn’t what I wanted, but I guess I’ll just drink out of this water fountain.” For some reason, I started having to compete with this other kid. So I said to myself, “I’m not going to compete with this guy when all I want is a drink of water and he wants that cooler.” So I said, “Why do you want that cooler?” And I thought, “This is really interesting. I’m going through a lot of conflict here.” So I just pushed him into the pool.

After he was in the water, I looked in and saw it was evaporated completely. “Can you pause right there?”

And the whole thing stopped moving. “BLINK!” Then I stopped moving. I stopped talking. I even stopped narrating the situation. I said to myself, “So, I can’t even think straight. What is that giant skyplane doing out there tilted at a 70° angle—in real life and in the story?”

“Burp burp burp burp,” I said to myself. And you know something? The story is glass? And I said to myself, “If the story’s made of glass, I must be in a slideshow, not a book.” But I realized that the screen is made of glass, and I’m in a TV, being typed right now by a teacher named Megan. And there’s a law school being built right now across the street, and around the corner, I saw Panera. And I said to the myself, and the audience, and to Megan, and to Collin the writer, “I’m going to Panera and taking a break, and getting a cinnamon bun and a Diet Coke. See you next time in Book Two of December 13, 1972.”

 

The End

Elliot’s Adventure

“Elliot,” my mother yells, “Time for bed!”

I groan. “Do I have to?” I ask, yelling back. My mom (I call her Ma) comes to my room where I’m playing with Legos.

She puts her hands on her hips.

“Elliot Robert James! You go to bed right now!” Ma yells.

“Fine,” I grumble, and get up and go to the bathroom. Moments later, I come out all dressed in my PJ’s. I mumble a hasty “Goodnight” to Ma and she grunts to me in return. I go to my bed. While I get into my bed, I think of my father, who is away on a business trip. I don’t have any brothers or sisters, but I wish I had some. And on top of that, I don’t have any friends because everyone thinks I’m weird. No friends at school, no nice mom, not seeing dad, NO NOTHING! Dad is almost always away. I sigh. My father really is a good laugh. Then I think of Ma, who DOESN’T let me stay up past 7:45, even though I’m 8 years old!!!! Ugh. I’m lonely. I don’t have any freedom at all. But, enough of that. Here I am, crawling into bed.

I snuggle under the covers and I drift off into a deep sleep….

BANG! BANG! BONG! BONG!

I wake up. I am in a strange place, full of funny people.

They look a lot like us, but with SUPER LONG, and LARGE noses, kind of like Proboscis Monkeys. (Search it up on the web.)

One of these “people” comes up to me and says, “Hello, my name is Kate.” She looks about my age. She then follows my strange look and says, “We are called Sefs, and this is our land, Sef’s Land.”

My head whirls with millions of questions I would like to ask Kate, but all that comes out is, “Will you show me around? The name’s Elliot, by the way.”  

Kate looks surprised. I think I even might like her, or be falling in love with her. To me she is beautiful.

“Why, of course I can show you around,” She pauses for a moment, and then continues, “Elliot.”

Then she beckons me to begin my tour.

“This is the tower of Mr. Leman,” Kate says, pointing to a SUPER tall tower. “He’s the smartest of us all. Whenever we need help, we go to him. He always knows exactly what to do.”

We continue. “This,” she shows me a beautiful house, “is the orphanage. I myself live here, with many others. Shall we proceed?” She asks. I nod.

We come to the village square. There is a huge Town Hall, towering over us.

“Whoa,” I whisper.

“Yes.” She nods. “It’s where all us villagers gather when we all need to talk.”

After that, she shows me some other people’s houses, Auntie Marta’s, Tommy and Poppy, two 6-year-old twins, and some others. Poppy and Tommy decide to come with us on our tour. Poppy looks at me and says, “Who are you? Where did you come from?”

All eyes are now on me. I stare at her.

“Like I told you earlier, my name is Elliot. I come from a planet called Earth. What planet is this?”

Poppy narrows her eyes. “This is the planet Laseford. Like Kate already told you, this particular part is called Sef’s Land.”

I must look worried as Poppy says this, so Kate quickly cuts in. “I hear that there is a market and a play at the village square. Shall we?”

Everybody nods yes, but Poppy is still peering at me. When we get to the market, we all get some ice cream, and watch a play. I don’t pay much attention though. I’m thinking of ways to get out of Sef’s Land and take Kate with me.

Or I could stay here.

Hmm, it’s a toughie. How would I stay? I miss my parents. A lot. But leaving Kate…

No, I have to get out of this world with Kate and without anyone else knowing, especially Poppy. I know now that I love Kate.  

“Elliot?” Kate’s voice interrupts my thoughts. I jerk around to face her.

“Yes?” I ask.

She looks at me suspiciously too. “Did you like the show?” She asks slowly.

I put on what I hope looks like a confused face. Then I say, “Like it? Of course!”

Kate looks relieved. “Would you like to go to the orphanage with me and spend the night there?”

I nod yes. We say goodbye to Tommy and Poppy and set off. It’s nearly dusk. As soon as we’re alone, I ask, “Kate?”

Kate looks at me, “Yes?”

My face turns red. “Um, how can I get out of Sef’s Land, and go back to Earth? Also, if you know how,” I cough, “will you like to come with me?”

She is completely taken aback.  “Actually no, I don’t know how to get out of Sef’s Land, but if I did, I actually would go with you.” Now she is the one with the red face.

But then her face lights up. “I’ve heard from folk tales, that if you walk to the Sef’s wizard’s cave, he can tell you how to get to a portal that takes you to Earth.”

I whoop for joy. Then I yell “Wahoo! Let’s go to the wizard and get to the portal!”

Kate laughs. “First we sleep, and then in the morning we pack and go.”

“Okay” I reply, And we set off to the orphanage.

***

The next morning, when I wake up, Kate is already up and packed. Wordlessly, she hands me a bowl of cereal and goes out of the room. As soon as I’m finished with my cereal and dressed, we set off to the wizard.

Along the way, Kate suddenly says, “Morning. Sorry I didn’t say it before, it’s just hard on me leaving Poppy, Tommy, and…. Sef’s Land.”

I nod. I’ve already gotten to love Sef’s Land. Kate sighs, and shakes her head sadly.  After a half an hour of walking, we turn into an alleyway and Kate points at a door. Then she turns to me. “This is the place,” she says.

I raise my eyebrows. “Really?” In reply, Kate opens the door. I gasp.

As Kate closes the door, I see that this is actually a cave. It’s a muddy place, but there are tables of potions and other magical things everywhere. In the very center of the cave, there is a cauldron with a wizard stirring it. Kate walks up to him.

“Mr. Wizard?” she says.

The wizard looks up. “I know why you are here. Do not waste time explaining, Elliot,” he says. “If you jump into this cauldron, it will transfer you to the portal. Then you will be on Earth.”

“Thank you Mr. Wizard!” Kate shouts as we jump into the cauldron. We’re going back to Earth! That is all I can think at this happy time.

“Elliot!” Ma yells. “Get up or you will be late to school.”

I look at her with a puzzled face. “Where’s Kate?” I ask.

Ma raises her eyebrows. “You know already?”

“What?” I say.

“A girl just moved into the house next door. And her name is Kate.” I fling open the door and run to our porch. There is Kate, without a long nose, waving at me.

“Hello Elliot!” she yells.

“Hello!” I yell back, and wave like mad back. Life is going to be good, I think, as I wave to Kate. Yes, it will be.

 

The End

The Bullying Lily

Chapter 1:

 

Once upon a time, there lived a girl named Lily. Lily liked to show off to other people, and to her friends! Her friends did not like her anymore. She went to recess, but she bullied other kids. When she was done, all of the kids were hurt. Then she went to music. All of the kids were singing beautifully until Lily sang so bad and loud the kids covered their ears! Next, it was reading time. Lily was talking so loud the, teacher sent her to the principal’s office.

The principal told her to stop bullying and to stop showing off!

Lily said, “Okay.” Then she acted nice, but it made her stomach hurt. Everything went back to normal, and the best thing was that everyone liked her so she kept trying really hard to be nice! The next day Lily went to school. She did not see anyone in her classroom so she went to the all-purpose room, then she heard a loud noise.

The whole school shouted, “CONGRATULATIONS!!!”

Lily was so surprised she wanted to faint on stage! Everyone gave her a high five that lasted fifteen minutes. Her day at school was the best day ever!!!

 

Chapter 2: SOMETHING WEIRD IS GOING ON   

    

After that, all the fuses were cut and all the lights were shut off. Everybody was worried. Mrs. Slingy ran in the room.

“Somebody locked the doors!” she said. “We will need to stay in school for two days because the doors are locked. I will contact your parents.”

“HOORAY! No homework!”

Everybody heard a drilling sound from under the floor. It was Dr. Slingy! He dug a hole from outside to the school. Everybody whined because they’d have to do homework again, but they climbed out and went home.

“This is still the best day ever,” said Lily.

When she got home she told her mom what happened when she stopped bullying and showing off.

“How did you feel when you stopped?” her mother asked.

Lily said, “I feel better stopping.”

 

The End

A Halloween Story

Chapter 1

 

It was Halloween, Jeremy’s favorite holiday ever. When it got dark, he changed into his zombie costume and got out his Halloween treat bag. When he got outside, he saw strange creatures standing on Main Street in the town of Spooksburg. Some of the creatures had sharp teeth like real vampires, and some were see-through just like real ghosts! Jeremy was really creeped out, and so were his parents. The entire town, actually. They all ran back inside and stayed in there for the rest of Halloween night.

The next day of school, Jeremy couldn’t concentrate on his work. He couldn’t stop wondering why there were vampires and ghosts. That was when Jeremy had a brilliant idea. Next Halloween, while the rest of the town fled, he would stay in Spooksburg.

 

Chapter 2

 

The vampires and ghosts were lost and they needed help. On Halloween night the following year, they drifted into Spooksburg again. The town was silent and still. The houses were empty, and the streets didn’t have a single car or pedestrian. Except for a young boy named Jeremy.

The seven-year-old boy looked older than he was. But maybe that was because he was all alone in an abandoned town.

He approached cautiously. “Hello. So you’re some scary looking fellas. I’ve been waiting for you.”

“Waiting?” a vampire said. “But we didn’t know we’d be here.”

“Everyone in town knew. You came last year. That’s why they left. But I wanted to stay behind because I wanted to see if it was true. So what are you doing here?”

“We’re lost,” one of the ghosts said. “We’ve been wandering for ages, looking for our home.”

The boy squinted at them. “This definitely isn’t your home. Maybe I can help you find it.”

The ghosts and vampires were happy and cheered for Jeremy. He just had one question in his head: How am I going to lead the ghosts and vampires where they are supposed to be?

 

Chapter 3

 

Jeremy of Spooksburg led the ghosts and vampires for hours. Though the creatures had spent ages unable to find their real homes, they felt something new with Jeremy alongside them. They felt drawn to a crumbling village just up the road. It was scary, and the wind howled like an angry werewolf.

Then one of the ghosts said, “Whenever you need help, we will come by. We’ll know because we gave you a special whistle only ghosts and vampires can hear.”

“Thank you. But I have to ask: how did you get lost?”

The vampires and ghosts glanced at each other, their heads bowed.

“We go on a vacation every Halloween,” a ghost said. “But a few years ago we went out and couldn’t find our way back. We followed the same path as usual, but it was like the town had disappeared.

“That’s why we came to your town,” a vampire added. “Thank you so much for bringing us home, Jeremy.”

Jeremy had quite a busy Halloween and felt good that he helped the lost ghosts and vampires. But he couldn’t help wondering how the ghosts and vampires could lose their way. And why did it look like their town disappeared? Jeremy wanted to find out.

 

Chapter 4

 

At school later that year, when kids were being mean to Jeremy, he would call the ghosts and vampires to come at night and scare the mean kids. That way he could focus on investigating who’d made the town disappear. But he had homework to do. So he blew the whistle, and the ghosts and vampires appeared. The ghosts did his math homework, and the vampires did his reading assignment. Vampires didn’t have the best vocabulary, but Jeremy was glad for the help.

He thanked his undead friends and walked them home. After spending a few minutes hanging out in the creepy town, he went home to finish his investigation.

 

Chapter 5

 

Jeremy took his whistle everywhere — even on a field trip to a pumpkin patch — which was where he was convinced he lost it. He searched under pumpkins and dug through the dirt, but he couldn’t find it. How could he solve the mystery without his special whistle?

Jeremy ran to the ghost and vampire village.

“Hello, Jeremy? What are you doing here?”

“I lost my whistle. Can I have another?”

“Sorry,” said a vampire, “but that was the last one.”

“But we do have a cellphone you could use.”  The vampires and ghosts gave him a little phone.

“Don’t lose this because then you won’t be able to call us,” said one of the vampires.

When Jeremy got back home, he was happy because he did not have his very own phone before. He was only seven, so that made sense.

He didn’t really have a lot of trouble, but one day, his father’s phone broke and he bought a new one and gave the old one to Jeremy. But then Jeremy forgot all about the phone that the vampires and ghosts gave him.

When it was Halloween, Jeremy called the ghost and vampires over to collect candy, and people said, “Good costume. That looks real.”

The vampires and ghosts said, “Thanks, this is our first time going to trick or treating.”

When the ghosts and vampires went to one of Jeremy’s friends, the ghost and vampires said that they have a secret, which Jeremy knew. They weren’t in costumes after all. They were real! But he’d keep that to himself.

 

Chapter 6

 

The ghosts and vampires were so grateful Jeremy didn’t reveal their secret to any of his friends, that they decided to tell him how their town disappeared. It was actually a zombie with a potion. The zombie thought he had a different potion, but he was wrong. He wanted the village to be bigger, so he thought he’d add more buildings with that potion, but it was really an invisibility potion.

The vampires and ghosts discovered this because the zombie emailed them an apology. But the ghosts and vampires got really mad, so mad that they punished him to go to the potion room and study his potions more so he didn’t turn any more towns invisible.

Every Halloween from that year on, Jeremy invited the ghosts and vampires to his town, then he went to their village to trick or treat because they had a ton of candy.

They ate candy, stayed best friends, and always had the best Halloween ever.

 

THE END

 

SAM’S BIG ADVENTURE [ + the mailman ]

There was an alien named Sam. He was purple, had stringy arms, had two eyes, his face was a circle, and last but not least, he always had a smiley mouth. He was watching TV.  He watched until there was a commercial about things that were called “Pets” on Earth.

“Ghtjdtyuuiikjdcbnmamagtrdhhhjhtrefggnjndsjkhevtye,” he said, which meant, “I want to see that really badly!” Then the commercial on TV said that the humans on earth are going to make a show about pets.

“lkjdkad;kadjf.” That meant, “Super, I want to see it.” But, he noticed it could only be bought in the pet shop! But it was on Earth!

I have to build a spaceship, he thought.

Two weeks later:

“Okay, it’s ready to try out! Okay, ready, set, blast off!! Ahhhhh, that didn’t work.”

A week later after a bunch of testing and fixing:

“Finally, I know it works because I tried it. But wait, I don’t have a map to know where the planet called Earth is!” He said in alien language, “Aljdflkaj;dlfaslaljfdadk hdakfja jdklfajsi.”

Suddenly, there was a mail delivery from the mailman. He was lime yellow. He had a tie-dye shirt. He was holding a magenta letter. He was wearing a pair of homemade shorts and he had purple shoes. His face was a weird shape and he had a little bit of lime green hair.

The mailman had been spying on Sam the whole time.  He actually traveled all the way to Earth to look for the pet shop and write where it is.  The letter said it was a map to go to Earth and the certain pet shop.

“Akdjljfldf,” or “Thank you. Thank you. Thank you. Thank you,” Sam said. But then Sam said, “Akj,” which meant “Uh.”

“Skafjkfk jkdj kajiwjf,” said the mailman, which meant, “I’ve been spying on you the whole time!”

Sam was a little bit confused and happy. He was happy because now he knew he could go there and knew where to go.

“Can I go with you?” asked the mailman, which in alien language meant, “Askah djkc poona cada.”

“Oosa,” Sam said, which meant, “Yes.”

The trip to Earth was fun. On the trip, they ate asteroid pieces and comet nibbles. The trip was fun until…THERE WAS A FORCE FIELD!!!

“REALLY???!!!” Sam said. That means, “TFRGTF!!!”

Then the mailman said, “There’s a certain black hole that you have to go into to get to the other side, and inside that black hole are four other black holes, and you have to pick the right one.” That meant, in alien language, “kjhaiuhwe;fkjna.skjhiueh.”

Then Sam said, “dtfgfgfgffggffttfgffgghhgfdsdfdgfggggfd,” and that meant,  “But where is the black hole???”  

“Gythghgfhtfghgghghghhghggffgfddet,” said the Mailman. That meant, “Well that is what we are going to have to find out.” Done done DONE!!!!!

16 minutes later, there were two black holes.

“Which one is right?” said the mailman, which in alien language was, “uh;khkjhkjhjk.”

“Well, one black hole is black and one is brownish, and this one is a special black hole, so it’s not supposed to be like an actual black hole,” said the mailman.
“Okay, so we take the brownish hole,” said Sam, which in alien language meant, “lkuhkuhiuhui.”  So they took the brownish hole.  

Meanwhile… ECHO echo… QUACK quack.

Sam said, “WHAT DID YOU SAY?!” That means, “bdcbhfdbhfdxdfjh!!!”         

“NO WHAT DID YOU SAY?” said the mailman. That means, “DFGFGHHGGGFHYTFTYHGT???”

Then they saw a duck before their eyes.

“AHHHHHHH!” they screamed. The mailman’s lime green hair shot up like a rocket.

Suddenly, this guy appeared in the black hole. He had the body of a genie but he was not actually a genie. He said, in a strange voice, “The duck is a creature from earth. It is a pet — sometimes. They were trying to make teleporters, but then instead they accidentally sent a duck into this black hole. So don’t worry.”

Then he disappeared in a cloud of smoke. Poof!

Then four black holes were in front of them each a different color.

“WAIT!!!!” said the mailman. “Don’t say anything. Because each of them means danger, but the yellow ones lead to quicksand, the blue one leads to really big waterfalls with alligators and mean fish in it, the red one leads to lava, the purple ones leads to an army of alive eggplants. So also, the walls are purple, so we should take the purple one. Anyway that’s the only one where there’s a possibility that we won’t die. All the other ones we’ll definitely die. Ready, set, hold your breath! We’re going in!”

They held their breaths and went inside. When they came out, they saw a giant army of eggplants with at least one yellow tooth sticking out of their mouths.

“Okay, did you bring the lava?” said the mailman.

They heard the eggplant say, “Okay, did you bring the boxing gloves?”

Then all said at the same time, including Sam and the mailman, “Yes! Ready, charge!”

Sam said to the mailman, “You know, just boxing, there’s a possibility we won’t die, but if the lava gun doesn’t kill the eggplants, then the red hole might be safe! But we have to first test the lava gun. And if the lava gun kills all the eggplants, then we know the red hole isn’t safe.”

“Ready, set, chaaaaaaarge!”

The eggplants all got blown away in the lava except one. The master of the eggplants. He was the size of a country house. He had the stinkiest breath ever and he had an an Alaskan headband that he stole from Alaska on Earth. He put it on his thumb because he was so big.

“Are you ready? Give it to him!”

They squirted lava in his eyes which were as big as a chandelier. They were bloodshot and bloody. The eyes fell out so he started thrashing about like crazy, so they spilled the lava on his heart and he died. But what the mailman forgot to say is, “Be aware, there also are live grapes everywhere.”

So then there were these little mini grapes who were like grape bombs. They look like grapes with little faces on them. But you had to go across them without getting hit by one, because they were explosive. So they carefully tiptoed across. Suddenly, Sam said, “Hurry, hop in the ship!”

That was because there was the end of the path in the purple black hole and if you stepped off, it would be like falling off a cliff. So, they rode in the spaceship and that black hole was meant to shoot you onto Earth so they shot up onto Earth.

The trip took two hours because of all the battling.

When they got to Earth they ALMOST forgot to put a human costume on! When they put the costumes on, they went to the pet store. At the pet store, Sam pointed at the TV so the pet store guy gave them the tickets to watch the show and then he watched it. It was the best! It was exciting and funny and awesome and cute and everything it could possibly be. Then he decided to go out on Earth and play an alien game on the grass before they left. The game is called Houhknoijij. When they went back to the spaceship, they took the video with them so they could watch it again.

It was a very long and exciting trip, especially when they made an eggplant shooter from the dead eggplants.

 

THE END

The Witch Books

Dear whatever I’m supposed to call you,

 

I can’t believe my parents have been holding this secret from me all my life. I’m a witch!!! Not those fictional ones from the movies or books, but an actual witch. They told me on my sixteenth birthday, but to me I think they should have told me this when I was younger. They gave me this book because they want me to write all my feelings in it, which is stupid because I’m not eleven anymore, I don’t need a diary. Well, my mom is calling for me. I guess she’s going to tell me more things I didn’t know my whole life up until now. I wonder if they are even my actual parents.

Nope, turns out they are my actual parents. They said I need to go to a “witch academy” and learn more about who I am. This day sucks. If only I could go to the froyo store and gets some yogurt with my friends. But my life isn’t normal anymore thanks to my parents. Uh, I guess I’m not a human anymore. I’m a witch, a witch. I STILL CAN’T BELIEVE THIS! UGGGHHH! I feel like I’m two years old and my mom’s saying, “Darling you’re gonna be a witch for halloween,” but this is real. Like, I said it about a thousand times already and it still doesn’t feel right. While I’m here in my room reading witch books — roll eyes — my friends are hanging out without me. Could my life get any worse? Yep it can. My “parents’’ are calling me for a family meeting, which usually means, “I talk, you listen, and you better not argue with me young lady.”

“Darling I’m so worried about you,” said my mother. “You shouldn’t be up in your room. Jeez louise, it’s the summer. Go have fun.”

Great, I’m still treated like a baby. Why don’t they put me in a diaper, put a bib around my neck, and get me a play pen? Then I might actually look like one.

“Venesa, you are going to have to stop babying her. She going to study all day, everyday, for this whole summer till she knows everything she needs to know to become an amazing witch. I had to give that up because I married you. I want her not to give up her chance to learn all of this,” my dad says, starting to get emotional. Great, I have a mom who babies me and a dad who is over emotional. What else does life have to bring me? Well no point in having dinner, I lost my appetite already.

As I get in bed I imagine all the fun things my friends are doing without me. THIS LIFE SUUUUUUUCCCCKKKKKKSSSSSSS (again).

 

Why should I bother tittling you,

 

Here is another day of me spending in this house, ugh. My dad keeps on telling me ‘stop your attitude,’ but I really don’t care what anyone says anymore. As I open the book of wisdom, I notice all these amazing spells. One turns you into a duck, and another makes things come alive. As I flip through more pages I come up to one that can make you invisible. Maybe I can turn myself invisible to sneak out the house and have fun with my friends while my parents think I am learning these spells. I’m a genius. I’m totally getting the hang of this witch thingy. If only I knew what potions I need to make this spell.

I go into my parents bedroom to see if there was any potions there. As I was about to leave I noticed a pair of my mom’s high heels, but they didn’t look like any of her regular pair. There seemed to be letters and numbers all around. It was unusual and strange. I come closer to see and investigate more deeply.

As I touch the numbers and letters, I come upon a letter that looked different from the rest and I noticed it had ancient words around it. As I touch the surface of that weird looking number, a door opened out of nowhere. I peer inside and there were tons of witch books and spells, potions, and a pot that you could use to try out the potion. It seems as if someone was in there recently before I came. Maybe mom was in there because when I was walking by after I got a glass of water, I saw her go inside a door that I didn’t see before in their room. I didn’t pay much mind before because I was so mad. Every color you could ever imagine was in bottles that are used to make spells. WOOOOOOOOWWW. I never thought being a witch could be so cool! OMG, why did I just say that? This is getting weird.

As I look at the pair of pumps again, I notice a number that looked very strange. As I touch it, the door automatically shuts and turns into a wall again. I run out of their room just to see my parents outside. “Why were you in our room,” asks Dad.

“I was just looking for a pencil and I couldn’t find one,” I say. Just to tell, I’m a terrible liar, but I think they believed me. Wow, they’re so gullible. I better go before my dad sees me not looking at that stupid book.                    

I may be writing this stuff, but I still don’t like this journal idea.

 

Uhh you know what I am not even going to bother,

 

My mind keeps on wondering to that spells and potion room, but I keep telling myself to stop thinking about it. I made up this thing so every time I think about that room I have to pinch myself. You know what, I’m not going to do THAT. Maybe I could just sneak up and get the potions —

NO!!! I can’t do that.

But —

NOOOO!

Ugh. It’s just so tempting, soooo tempting, but I know I would get caught. It’s like water. I can’t live without going into that room.

Earlier that day my friend called me saying, “Come over to my house. My mom is not here and I’m throwing an awesome party.”

“I can’t,” I told her, which made her like, mad. So like, she said, “We aren’t, like, friends any more, like, dUUUHHHH!”

She’s there for, like, a good two minutes saying that. I think her “likes” are contagious. I can’t, like, stop saying/using them. I’m probably not popular anymore. Ugh. From one to ten, I used to be a ten and now I’m like a nine. WAAAHHH! I’M A NIIINNNE! Not even a ten, a nine. I might as well just stay in my room foooreeevvveeerrr!

It is not like they’re gonna let me out till school starts anyway.

 

Fine I’ll title you: Dear Diarrhea,

 

I have really bad stomach aches all the time. That is why I always need to do it… Ooops wrong story.

 

Dear Dairy,

You know dairy makes me gassy. That is why in class I am always farting and blaming it on other peop… Whoops, wrong again!

 

Dear Thingy majiggy I don’t want to use,

 

Sorry you got the wrong page. If you ever tell anyone I will find you, then kill you. Anyways, now that we are off that subject, I decided that I am like, (Sorry, the ‘likes’ are fading, but by time) gonna go since they’ve been so like, mean. Gosh, why can’t they be like grandma and wake up in the morning, then fall asleep on the couch listening to the radio. So here’s the plan (you better not like, tell my parents): I’m gonna wait till they go to sleep, then I will go into their room quietly, and take the stuff I need to make the invisibility spell, so I can sneak off whenever I like, want. I know, I am brilliant. You can scream it if you would like to now…

Sorry I couldn’t finish it, my mom and dad almost caught me not studying. Good thing I had this book in the spell book. My mom and dad are are asleep now, so I just have wait a few minutes till I hear their loud snores.

I finally heard their snores going through the walls, so I got up and opened the door quietly. I heard a creak (ugh, what a stupid door). I walk down the hallway carefully trying not to make any more noises. As soon as I opened the door I was greeted by my mother. She knew.

“Oh Oh,” I said aloud.

“Don’t worry sweetie, I didn’t tell your father. Hehehe,” she cackled. Then something changed. She looked like Medusa! No it couldn’t be. I blinked again just to make sure I was seeing correctly. She, or this thing, was still there. Suddenly my mom was back to normal.

“Go to sleep darling. We’ll talk about this in the morning.” I walk down the hall still confused, as I lay in my bed. I wonder if my imagination was playing tricks on me as I drift off to sleep.

 

Hello thingy,

 

As I slowly drifted back to the real world and out of my dream, I got up from bed. That was a strange dream. Something about my mom being Medusa. The smell of pancakes drifted up my nose. As I sat down with my mom and dad, I told them about my dream. My mom’s grin suddenly widened mysteriously, almost like the way Medusa did. Dad on the other hand looked like I smacked him in the face (which I wouldn’t mind doing) and told me never to speak of that again because Medusa killed his parents. He also told me she was the most powerful witch and she has been searching for him forever. Ugh, why do parents have to be overactive? But if Medusa killed me that would be a reason to cry like, come on. My mom’s grin quickly disappeared as a sorrow look appeared on her face. I was so flabbergasted that I didn’t know what to think. Ugghhh, why can’t my brain just get smarter. Life is just so hard.

 

Omg Diary,

 

I just saw my mother change into Medusa! I knew it all along. Of course, now her reaction to me dream this morning makes sense. Wait, she is probably trying to kill me and my dad. NOOO! This can’t possibly happen, then she is gonna be after me. I can’t die I am way too beautiful to die, like, I have to become a ten again and I can’t do that with Medusa on my back. You know what, I am telling my mo- Medusa to leave me alone.

As I walk up to Medusa I tell her, “You should leave, because like, you are way too bad to live here and my dad is gonna freak.”

“Sweetie, it’s ok. Besides, I was hoping that we could unite and have power over everyone. Mwaahaha” My mom- I mean, Medusa says savagely.

“NO, NEVER!” I say loudly, trying to get my dad to hear me.

“Fine, we’ll just have to do it the hard way. Guards!” My mother voice screeched and her snakes hissed. I felt my dad’s arms around me.

“Where should I take her?” He was hypnotized. That’s when I started screaming.

 

Dear Diary,

 

I am in a dark room. Wait I see a sliver of light. I touch the doorknob. It’s open! I escape quickly past the guards. I don’t know how.

 

Dear Diary,

 

These are my last pages. I want you to know that I am safe. I remember hearing the loud scream of Medusa as she finds me not in that place she locked me in. Wait, I remember the door being locked a few seconds and then when I woke up again it was unlocked. Somehow I knew Medusa didn’t open it. I don’t have anyone, but I am safe, that’s all I can tell. She, Medusa will be after be after me. I just know it.

 

Dear Diary,

 

NO! She is here! Medusa is here! I don’t know how she found me. I could feel her breath on my back. I won’t look into her eyes. Only I can defeat her.

I can feel my anger rising inside me. I screamed and light was all around me. I pushed it towards Medusa’s heart. That is when I noticed a wand in my hand. WHAT THE HECK? Is this Harry Potter or something?

I say some words in Latin. Wait, how did I speak Latin? That is why in school I knew all the Italian words and everything! They came so easily in my head.

Medusa vanished as quickly as she came. My dad suddenly came in the room confused. “What happened?” my dad says  dizzily as he sat at the edge of my bed. I quickly tell him.

I see tears emerge from his eyes as he snatched me into a deep hug. “I am so sorry sweetheart.” Ugh he is getting snot on my sweater.

“I won’t stay here for long. I know there are more monsters out their dad.”

“Fine but be safe.”

“I am still gonna finish high school.”

“Ok.”

Ugh, why can’t my family just pull itself together?

 

5 Years Later

 

Dear last page of my diary,

 

You know I found you in an old box in my attic? I’ve killed many other monsters:  Dracula, Darth Vader (yeah he is real), and many sirens.

I am in college, but don’t worry, I still fight the monsters.

Dad just died because he got cancer. I wish I spent more time with him instead of just being a teenager.

But I have bigger things to worry about. There’s a new monster in town, but they don’t know what they’re dealing with.

The End of Time

Prologue

Grandpa lay down and went to sleep for a long time. I thought that Grandpa was just taking a long nap. Verena thought so too. But now, Claire, Vanessa, and I know that he died. Verena took a little more time to grow up than the rest of us. Claire, the oldest, called herself ten years young. Me, the middle, wanted to stay four forever. Vanessa, the second middle sister, had made me sing happy birthday to her 100 times when she turned eight because she was still young. Verena, well, who knows?

Claire’s birthday came and passed by like a car on the highway. Then mine, then Verena’s, then Vanessa’s. We were all so close in age but we started to separate and separate and separate. What ages were we when Grandpa died? Claire was sixteen, I was twelve, Vanessa was ten, and Verena was eight. When I say we all separated, I mean that Claire went off to use some big study tubes and do her science smart stuff (I like to call it S.S.S.). I went to volleyball practice six times a week, and Vanessa went to hip hop team practice. Verena goes to an after school for kids, ages 8-10, who have trouble reading.

Volleyball was my life, and I never missed a game.

Except for Friday, October 13th 2013.

 

Chapter 1

“Riley, are you OK?” My best friend Sophie Moon said.

“Of course I’m fine. Why wouldn’t I be fine? Are you fine? You’re not fine!” I said like Derek Jeter throwing a ball to first base. If you didn’t know, that meant I was zoom-talking.

“You know, tomorrow is Friday the 13th and it’s October. This is the third year that this has happened in our short lifetimes,” Sophie said.

“So?” I said.

“Haven’t you seen the movie? Friday the 13th? Well, it’s about… no wait. I’m not telling you.”

“Why?”

“You have to watch it yourself.”

“Is it scary?”

“Yes. Very.”

I got home and ran to my room. I typed my password into my computer. 675902. I searched Friday the 13th. It came up on my computer. A two-hour movie. I had three hours until volleyball.

Two hours later…

I’m scared for my life.

Volleyball was a flunk. We lost our game ten to zero. I was to nervous to hit the ball, so I just let it pass me every time. All I could think about was the movie. Tomorrow is going to be the worst day of my life.

Friday the 13th…

I walked into school looking like a mess. On my way to school, I had slipped on a banana peel, walked into a door, and fell on the back of my head.

“Make it stop! Make it stop!” I yelled at Sophie.

“So you saw the movie,” she said.

“Yep. Horrific and tragic,” I said.

“Totally,” she said.

First period was Science. I was making up random science mixtures when the class phone rang. Mr. Klein answered it.

“Of course. Mmhh. Yep, I’ll get her now. Oh, no problem. Were just reviewing things.” He hung up and stared at me.

“Riley, pack up and go down to the main office. You’re getting picked up early.”

“Ok?” I said confused. I was relieved because I had no clue what to do.

I walked down to the office and sat down on one of the uncomfortable seats. The main secretary, Mrs. Greenday, smiled at me.

“Sweetie, your mom should be here any minute.”

“Ok,” I said.

My mom walked into the school wearing a purple dress with blue flowers on it. She was holding a pink skirt with a white shirt for me to wear.

“Go to the bathroom and change,” she said.

I went to the bathroom and changed.

“Where are we going?” I asked.

“Grandpa isn’t with us anymore.” She shoved the doors open.

“His funeral is today?” I said.

“Yes,” she said.

Hold the phone. Let’s recount what happened to me so far today? It’s now only 6:00 a.m and this is what happened: I slipped on a banana peel, fell on the back of my head, walked into a door, a volleyball hit my head, and my Grandpa just died.

When I got into the car I saw all my sisters already together. Claire was in the passenger’s seat, Verena was in the middle, Vanessa was on the right side, and I was on the left side.

“Move over!” Vanessa said.

“No you move over!” Verena said.

“You!”

“You!”

“You!”

“Fine, I will,” they said at the same time.

“I will!”

“I will!”

“I will!”

Could this day get any worse?

 

Chapter 2

We walked into the church and saw our Grandpa lying dead in a coffin. But then he woke up. As a ghost.

“Help me! Help me!” he yelled at Claire, Vanessa, Verena and I.

We all ran out to the graveyard. After a couple minutes we went inside. We found everyone… dead! Our mom was lying on the ground with her arm split in half. Aunt Alex was next to her and she had her eyes open, but she was dead too. It was quiet. The only person alive besides all of my sisters and I was my Uncle Mike.

“Girls! Thank God you’re alive. You guys are going to live with me now,” Uncle Mike said.

We got into his car and we drove to his house. We got to his house and we started to set up our new rooms. Claire and I slept in a room on the second floor. The wallpaper was white with leaves on it. Vanessa and Verena slept on the pull out couch on the first floor. Uncle Mike was a firefighter, so he knew what he was doing.

Verena                                                ________________    October 23rd 2019

 

Why did Uncle Mike give Claire and Riley the better room? Because we’re better than you -R                                                                                   

And we are older! -C I agree with Claire and Riley -V______                 

Stop writing in my notebook! -other V____________________________

Back to what I was saying. We are going to have to go to a new school. This school goes from ages 8-18 and it’s called Kimberley Kingsdale High.______________________________   ______                      

We have to wear a denim skirt and a pink shirt with knee high socks.________                                                                                               

It’s a school for only girls. That’s a bad example for our outfit -R       

Hey! -Other V_                                                                                                      

Riley is right. -C    Can we please get back to the story. I don’t like Verena’s Notebook! -V                                                                                         

Hey! -Other V                                                                                                       

Ok fine! -R_____________________________________________________    

 

Chapter 3

It was the first day of school. I got on my phone and started to text Sophie.

Me: Friday the 13th is over!
Sophie: Actually it lasts all weekend.

Me: What?

Sophie: Do you have school on the weekends?

Me: Yes.

Sophie: Good luck!

Me: Thanks! Can I text you all day?

Sophie: Sure.

I needed to get to school on time, so I stopped texting Sophie. I got dressed in our uniform and went downstairs to grab a granola bar and go.

“Hi, Uncle Mike!” I said.

“Hi, Chicken. What do you want for breakfast?” my uncle said.

“I got to go so I’m just going to get a chocolate chip granola bar,” I said.

I got the granola bar and went down stairs to the garage. I rode my scooter to school because the school was so close. I had a weird talent with the scooter. I could unwrap my granola bar and eat it while riding it.

I parked my scooter at the gate of our school. There was a password to our school. 1029. The gate opened and I walked in.  I looked at my schedule and saw that the whole school had an assembly before first period. Before we walked into the big cafetorium, we got name tags. I walked over to a seat that was open and had no one next to it. I saw all my sisters had made friends already.

“Is this seat taken?” a girl asked, pointing at the seat next to me. She had long blond hair with blue eyes.

“No. No one is sitting there,” I said back.

She was the total opposite of me. I had brown hair with green eyes and freckles all over my face. Some people in my old school called me freckle face.

She sat down.

“What’s your name?” she said.

“My name is Riley Larson. What’s yours?” I said back. I had a little more confidence.

“My name is Rosie Rowan,” Rosie said.

Kimberley is our principal’s name. She walked into the cafetorium. She held a red megaphone. She talked into it.

“You little tiny peasants get on my nerves.”

“She’s mean,” I whispered to Rosie.

“This is my first year here,” she said.

“Me too,” I said.

 

***

 

Monday

Friday the 13th was finally over! It was Monday morning and everything was going perfectly! Even better than perfect. I did the password to the gate of our school and walked in. And then I slipped on a banana peel, bumped into a wall, and then the ghost took my soul. I drifted into the clouds.

 

The End

When You Kiss Me Goodnight

Autumn

Oh, that soft little kiss goodnight when I was young. Daddy was taller than that mobile of butterflies that hung above my crib. He used to kiss me goodnight. Something so long ago, yet so dear to my heart. That soft, sour kiss. Lips pressed against my tiny cheek. But, we all know, that is taken away. Fast forward to today, sitting in my room, staring at that mobile.  Now hanging over nothing. My bed moved to the other side of the room, a distant memory, easily remembered.

 

Dad

My sweet daughter, Autumn Starlight. One remarkable girl. Ever since Autumn was born, we knew she was special. She had turqouise-blue eyes with tints of green that turned gray when she was sad, and brown hair with auburn highlights. She never cried. When she came into this world, not a tear in sight. My dear Autumn crawled on the floor, pounding on the door until I let her out. But Autumn had a problem. As she got older and older, she never talked. She wouldn’t say a word. This was until she was 8 years old.  Her mother and I prayed every night for our sweet girl, Autumn Starlight, until her mother died when our dear Autumn was 6.

 

Autumn

When daddy and I were younger, I could fly. He lifted me up into the sorrowful air and swayed me around. Like a baby duck experimenting his swimming abilities. Daddy called me cupcake when I was little because I was a little angel. Tiny pink dresses and cute light brown curls, a mini angel for my daddy. Just he and I and the world to take on. The mobile, what brought us together. I smiled when he hit his head on the mobile and hiccuped when he tickled me. Me, his sweet daughter, Autumn Starlight.

 

Dad

Our sweet girl, Autumn, was sad one day. I patted her on the back and cradled her perfect, fragile body in our arms. She did not cry, not a peep. I pondered what was wrong.  She turned over, and I noticed that she had stapled a perfect star onto her leg. We rushed her to the hospital. When we got there, she was gushing blood, and she was paler than usual. It just made her more of our little angel. The nurses took out the staples and gave her a few bandaids on her leg. They said that she was one special little girl because she didn’t cry. They said she was a beautiful little angel, and I agreed. They said she was put on this Earth for a reason. 4 pulled muscles, 12 stitches, and a sprained ankle.  The sweet smell of cherry blossoms wafting from her tiny body. So perfect, yes, so perfect, our sweet daughter. Yes, she was put on this Earth for a reason, and if she was not here today, there would be a missing piece every day. She took my breath away. Autumn Starlight.

 

Autumn

When I was a little girl, I hated fairies. I hated princesses. I was always drawn to the beautiful stars.  An extravagant party for the night sky. The stars. I never had a big backyard.  It felt like I lived in a neighborhood where the houses are very close together. That old, rugged fence, seeming hundreds of years old, falling down, breaking, chipping, and swinging.  Me and daddy use the yard as our little star lab.  Our secret, what has brought us together.  Tonight, we lay on the grass, watch the sun escape underground to prepare for it’s welcoming the next day. The moon arrives to the star’s party and made its way to the center of all of them.  A beautiful, long, thin crescent moon. We keep our telescope on the edge of the porch and stargaze on the most beautiful nights. But the most beautiful thing that I have ever seen through that little breath-taking object, was Saturn. I almost cried that night, for the first time. But I didn’t cry. As the stars move east with late night clouds, I see my butterfly mobile.  The stars, twinkling like that dear butterfly mobile.

 

Dad

When we left the hospital that day, her cast was tightly wrapped around her leg. One of the nurses wrote, “Most beautiful child I have ever seen.” Another wrote, “Do me a favor, and call her star chaser. One remarkable, but mysterious girl.” Autumn’s smile lit up a room, in fact, better lighting then a 2,000 watt light bulb. And that tiny bundle of joy came with many unexpected problems. Autumn and I have a small secret that we have never told anyone. When she was born, she had a beautiful birthmark shaped like a star. It was on her back, almost at her shoulder, but as her beautiful brown hair grew out, our little Autumn’s beautiful birthmark was not seen.  It was what made her different, what separated her from the rest of us. Autumn realized at one point in her life that it was okay to be different and that different people were special. We all knew that Autumn was not going to be the popular kid when she was born, but we knew she was going to be one special little girl. I cried for my dear Autumn, the only person that has ever made me cry. That salty discharge, for a beautiful, blossoming little girl.

 

Autumn

I never had any siblings. I begged and begged. But at one point, something changed.  When I first saw the stars and understood what they were in 5th grade, my whole perspective of life was completely blown away. The stars felt like my family, a distant relationship. I threw that sibling thing out the window in the snap of a finger. The stars were my siblings. When I started to see some of the same stars each night, I named them, like my mother would have. One was June, another was August, and the last was Summer.  Summer always felt like my closest sister. She seemed to be around my age, loved the stars, was a fangirl of Echosmith.  Echosmith’s music blew me away when I first heard it on the radio. I tapped to the rhythm onto the railing of the deck as daddy and I star gazed.  

 

Dad

Autumn always surprised us, something new each and every day. She broke my heart into a million pieces and then mended it again. Today. Here I am. Sitting at my desk, staring into space and remembering those times when I would stand up in front of the crib and kiss Autumn goodnight, and when I came up, I hit my head, and Autumn and I would have a laughing fit. I tickled her around in her crib, wrestling her tiny body. Today, Autumn tells me to leave her alone. Although Autumn is still my beautiful little girl, she is 5 foot 4 inches and not a baby anymore. I miss those times. I knock on the door to her room. She yells at me, but I proceed to open the door. One big Echosmith posters hangs above her bed, and she is sitting in her beanbag chair, listening to music through headphones. I look up above me, and I see something that I have never seen before.

 

Autumn

Sitting in my room today, I lift up the bottom of my ripped jeans and stare at the scar in my leg that I had when I was little. I think about my daddy and how lonely he must feel without my love. I let that thought drain out of my brain, like extra water from a shower.  As I lift my head up to stretch my back, my head turns to the mobile. I walk over from my beanbag chair, which settles back into it’s normal shape. I touch that beautiful mobile, and it takes a small spin. The butterflies whirl around in a circle, chasing each other. This is when my dad knocks on the door. Sigh. I was remembering those times with the mobile.  I get back to my beanbag chair and put the headphones in my ears, still staring at the beautiful piece that brought us together.

 

Dad

That very ceiling was one to remember. My dear Autumn has colored the ceiling navy blue and had drawn yellow-white stars. It was breath-taking. A very touching and unforgettable moment in my life. I could not remember something as remarkable as this. As soon as I looked down from the masterpiece, she rolled her eyes at me. The next day, I drove dear Autumn to school, and dropped her off in the staff parking lot, as always. She hung out with the physics teacher for an hour before school each day and drank coffee. They talk about the stars, and the different patterns that are coming. Mr. Edelman.  He was my daughter’s happiness. Her heart and soul. The end of her heart.

 

Autumn

Dad drops me off in the staff parking lot. I always get dropped off in the staff parking lot to talk with Mr. Edelman. I walked out to the middle of the parking lot. All of a sudden, it starts to rain. I am far from the school. Not just a small rain, pouring. I look, and that’s when it comes down. It’s bright, and yellow. Weirdly shaped. It’s coming down fast. I pull my head down and take a jump, but it does not save me. It zigs and hits me. That is all that I remember before it was all black. I can hear the buzzing of their voices in the back of my head and it gives me a headache.  Buzz.  Buzz.

 

Dad

As soon as I am down the road from the school, rain starts to pour down really hard. I get to the house and sit down at the kitchen table. I begin to drink coffee. The warmth of the brown liquid fogs on my face. I lean forwards for a sip. Before a droplet of coffee hits my tongue, the phone starts ringing. I don’t even listen to the caller ID, I just run for the phone. I pick it up.  

“Hello? Who is this?” I ask, sipping coffee and running upstairs at the same time to put on my pajamas. Have I mentioned that I love rainy days? They make me feel so comfortable and cozy.

“This is the school, calling about your daughter, Autumn Starlight. Unfortunately, We think that she is dead. Mr. Edelman was waiting in the staff lounge, that looks over the staff parking lot, and watched her come in. He said she was struck by lightning,” the woman on the other side of the phone said.  Nicely, but I don’t know how you can just say something like this to someone.  It dawned on me: I needed to get her.

“I will be there right now!” I say, my voice teary with anger and sadness combined.  I call 911 while I am in the car. In all of this action, I find a way to calm down.  I think about our memories. But, that just makes me cry even more.

 

Autumn

I had no idea what was going on. All that I knew was that I was dead. I felt as if I was floating. I was looking down below me, my body sitting in the middle of that parking lot. All of a sudden, stuff starts falling down from the sky in slow motion. My cat, Scribbles is falling, waving goodbye to me. When it gets to the ground—there is no ground, it just keeps going on and on for forever. My stuffed bear named Lovely falls next to my journal from sixth grade. I turn around to see what is falling on the other side of me. That butterfly mobile is falling. Everything is still in it’s place in real life, but a photocopy is falling for me. All, except that butterfly mobile. The paint is chipped in the same places.  And one tiny star, falling below. A real one.

 

Dad

The ambulance comes and picks her up and puts her in the back of the truck. They drive at the speed of lighting, like that terrible lightning bolt that hit my now dead daughter. I follow them close behind in my VW bug. Autumn loves it because she thinks that it is so old-fashioned compared to the fancy cars they have today. The siren sounds as I but down the road, seeming like I’m on a car chase, chasing the ambulance. I come to a stop at the hospital. Two middle-aged women run out of the door holding a stretcher. Four men pull her from out of the back of the truck. The doctor checks her heart rate as everyone runs inside, holding the stretcher. I follow them up to room 437. Weird, it was the same as the beginning of Autumn’s locker combination. She lays in a bed, machines hooked up to her body. IV’s are stuck into her arm, taking blood, and doctor’s mumbling words back and forth to each other. They will not even let me into the room to check in on her. I take peeks while the doctor’s are out seeing other patients. It pains me to see my daughter in pain. The doctor’s walk out of the room, some wearing scrubs, and some wearing white coats. They come over to the chair that I am sitting in.

“Well, we have some news.” A doctor grits his teeth.

 

Autumn

In this weird world that I am in, I do not wake up. No reality checks, no wake up calls.  What a dumbo I am. I’m dead! How did I not know.  My body still lies in the parking lot of Glenville High. In Little, California. Where am I now? Am I in Oklahoma? My heart will always stay with Little. Are my intestines in Waco, Texas? Is my fifth rib in Knoxing, Oklahoma? Is my ankle bone in New York City, NY? Is my gold specked eye in Orlando, Florida? The questions can go on and on forever. But, I will always know where my heart and soul is, in Little, California, my sleepy town, beautiful victorian homes, and lovely from sunrise to sunset.  

 

Dad

“Your daughter is dead. I am so sorry for your loss. We tried our best to save her, sir,”  the doctors reported, sadly.

This brought me to my knees. I wept on a black leather jacket. Oh, well, for the second time in my life? The first, my wife. Why was I alive now? Somebody else should have to experience this death. Why me? Why me, God? My sweet daughter cannot be dead! Autumn Starlight, up in the sky, I say to you right now, I love you like you could never imagine. You have always been there for me in my dark times, and helped me through hard places. We have had so many memories together, laughs, cries, nights in, laughing fits, renovating our house, and many more times that I may never forget for my the rest of my life, and when I am dead, too. When I die, we will be together again. I hope that you and your mom have reunited up there. I miss you more than to the moon, to the stars, back, and back to the moon 50 million times. You have truly amazed me. I walk into the room where Autumn lies dead.  Her eyelashes drooping below her under-eye.  Machines beeping and buzzing.  No sign of life.

 

Autumn

Here in heaven, I look for mom. There are no shops, though I secretly wish that is was a mall. A butterfly mobile hangs above my head everywhere that I walk. All I can see for miles and miles is treeless plains with road signs. The song “Home” by Phillip Phillips plays over and over in my head. No cars pass, no noise. That is when I see a lady. She is petite, but cute. She had long brown hair with auburn highlights, and turqouise-blue eyes with tints of green, just like mine. She held her head up high, wearing a salmon-colored tunic and khaki pants. She had salmon colored Ked’s, and finished it off with a pair of diamond earrings. Mom. It just felt like a relationship from long ago. Something that I could just feel, felt right.

“What’s your name?” I casually strolled over to this mother-option. If she was really my mom, her name would be Summer Starlight.

“Summer Starlight.  Some people call me Sum.” I almost died. Again.

“I think I might be your daughter. I’m Autumn Starlight, and I recently died,” I say to her. Her cheeks turn bright red.

“Y-you can speak! You’re my daughter! The missing piece of me.” She grabbed me in for a hug. I never wanted to stop. I tried to let go once, but she just kept hugging, so I put my arms back around her.

 

Dad

Today was the funeral. I put a copy of the butterfly mobile into her coffin. Everybody wore black, her friends, her family, her closest teachers. Everyone sat there, sad. This was in fact, the biggest loss that I have ever had in my life. The priest said many words. It was time to let people come up and say what they would never forget about her. First was her group of friends, Evangelia, MIchelle, Adaline, Elle.  

“We will never forget Autumn.  She was a one in a million girl.  She was funny, sweet, and held us together like glue when we were falling apart. Thank you.” They began to cry. Many more came up, saying wonderful things about her that she would love to hear. When it was my turn to come up to the microphone, I wiped away my tears and began to speak.

“Autumn Starlight was one amazing girl, she took my breath away and then brought it back to me. She broke my heart into a million pieces and then mended it again. I cannot be any more proud of one person the I am of my very own daughter. I love her so much, and she is one girl to never forget. She was hilarious, beautiful, kind and was drawn to the stars, her siblings. Thank you.” There are many gasps in the crowd. People blowing their noses, some just crying into other’s shoulders.

 

Autumn

I could not believe that this was my mother. But after that, she just walked away.  Walked down the street, passed lampposts, passed a wishing fountain and tossed a few coins in. I called her name, yelled and yelled until she was not insight. My mother had just left me.  I just felt so overwhelmed. I looked above my head where the butterfly mobile hang. I sit down on a big rock at the top of a hill. It sits under a prematurely blossomed cherry tree,  I flashback to a happy time.

I hear my dad calling my name from inside the house. I yell back happily that we need more time. My friend, Maple is over, and we are on my slip n’ slide. We’re taking turns sliding down that mysteriously fun object. We dump buckets full of ice water on each others head, and then laugh so hard that our stomachs hurt. We run inside, shivering like innocent mice. My dad wraps pink towels around us, and we drink some of his freshly squeezed lemonade. Delicious. Fresh. Tears drip from my eyes and make a pile of mud beneath my feet. I wish that I was still on the earth’s surface.  

 

Dad

The funeral was over. A kind elderly woman named Olga played the Organ as everyone walked out of the church. Three strong men came in wearing black sunglasses and black tuxedos. They grabbed the coffin, and brought it into the parking lot. They loaded it into the back of a big truck. I kissed it before they drove away. I waved goodbye to my now dead daughter. I thought that she would never have to depart from me. I planned on keeping her home from college. She got accepted into the Georgia Institute of Tech and never showed me the signing papers. She just signed them all by herself. Like my Autumn would do. I drove home. Scared to leave again. I could not go anywhere. A hole this big in my heart could not be fixed. This time, she broke my heart into a million pieces and never mended it again. Not this time. I went out to the store. Trying to fill the hole in my heart, like a cavity. I went to Heather Williams General store. I bought the local newspaper, The Little Ledger.  I opened up to the first page when I got home. I lie on the couch, sipping my hot coffee, looking through ads. It catches my eyes like an entomologist capturing a butterfly in their cruel nets.

 

Obituaries For This Week

Name: Autumn Elle Starlight

Birthday: 5/21/98

Age: 17

Family: Summer Angel Starlight, David Jason Starlight-Cooper

 

“This 17 year old amazing girl recently died in the parking lot of Glenville High. She has lived a long and healthy life, until she was unexpectedly hit by a bolt of lightning at 6:30 in the morning. Everyone was devastated. Physics teacher, Clay Edelman, 34, watched the scene go down. We are all sad about this loss.  Autumn was a special girl, she had many hobbies, such as: listening to Echosmith, playing guitar, and dancing in the style of Jazz. Many have been hit with a stroke of reality, some scarred for life. She is definitely one to never forget.”

 

Autumn

I tip toe across railroad tracks, no trains passing. Abandoned. The sky darkens to a navy blue-pitch black. The stars are brighter than usual, making northern lights. The colors are beautiful. No lights making the natural color turn artificial. I stargaze like I did back on Earth.  I soon get tired and go to sleep for the night. The stars stare back at me. My eyes tightly shut.  No dreams this time. I wake up for real. I am in a dark hole. Wood outside is around me. I start to bang on it. Nobody opens it. I scream, loud. A piercing noise that you could mistake for coming from a six year old girl’s body.

 

Dad

That newspaper made my find what I had been looking for my whole life. What my daughter was. Who she was. Broken out of her shell that separated her from the world.  Someone who realized that being different is cool, and that not everyone is born the same way. I love her for that. If she is listening to me right now, then I love you, and tell mom that I love her, too. I go back to reading the newspaper and everything is the same as it is every day: oil spills and wars in Afghanistan. Our world may never change. We must all have peace.  I walk to the fridge, and take out the milk. I drink right from the carton, since there is no one to share it with. No one in the world. I definitely hate having to go through 15 deaths, of all of my relatives, except for Autumn’s cousins, who are in foster families.

 

Autumn

A man opens the coffin, and then they drop me and run. I am wearing what I was wearing when I died.  A white shirt that says, “Cool it.” It has an ice cream cone under the words. I am also wearing cropped jean shorts.  My hair is messy, and puffy. But I decide that I can fix it later. When I stand up, I am unsteady, but I don’t fall down. I walk home. On the long walk, I find a tiny plastic butterfly mobile in the garbage, and take it out.  It’s not mine, but I will take great care of it. As I turn into our driveway, I see a tiny leaf that has caterpillar chews that form a perfect A. A for Autumn. I twirl the butterfly mobile, and watch it spin and dance in the wind. As perfect as could be. I walk up the stairs to the house.

Knock…

 

The End

 

The Big Fright

“So, you’re planning to stay over Mr. Moore?”

Mr. Moore and his companions were desperate to make sure this wouldn’t go wrong. Staying at the house, and the only place while in their travels, surely wouldn’t be that bad. I mean, what could go wrong? It was better than staying at a hotel.

“Sure,” said Mr. Moore.

But what they did not know was that the house was haunted.

The owner directed everyone to their rooms, including Mr. Moore. His room was perfect, as usual. It was complete with a king size bed, decorative walls, and large work tables. Mr. Moore put on his pajamas and went to sleep.

At night, Mr. Moore was rocking back and forth on his bed. He could hear knocking noises and strange sounds from other guests’ rooms. He noticed that someone was coming up to his room. He got so scared that he jumped up and realized it was morning. It was all just a dream.

When Mr. Moore woke up, he hadn’t noticed anything unusual, other than the light bulb was on the floor, broken, but that may have just been from him waking up so violently. Mr. Moore went to the dining room, where he went over for breakfast. Mr. Moore moved to drink his cup of coffee when the owner went and made an announcement.

He said, “Listen up, I know most of you witnessed or heard of the violent break in last night. I am trying my best to find what is going on. But you must be patient.”

Mr. Moore continued with his coffee while looking suspicious.

That night, Mr. Moore went to his room. One of the main differences was that there were guards at his room. He went to bed to look out for anything going wrong. That night, Mr. Moore had more violent dreams. He spent most of the night rocking. When he woke up, he noticed the guards were missing. He also noticed that one of the guests was missing.

During the next night, Mr. Moore decided to try something different. He decided to get his friends and go find some clues. He looked around the house, and he couldn’t find anything. Just when Mr. Moore was about to lose hope, he suddenly stopped. One of his friends noticed a hidden code in one of the walls. In the wall right next to the piano, if you shined your flashlight, you found some secret writing on the walls. The secret writing was a weird language he couldn’t understand.

Mr. Moore then touched the symbols and it opened a secret passage. Inside, Mr. Moore found lots of cobwebs. He also thought he could see a shadowy figure. He then continued moving until he found a box of decaying skulls. When he shined his flashlight at the box, he saw the shadowy figure. He then decided to walk along the corridors of the alley. Everything was dark and deserted and seemed to be remnants of an old area, almost like an extra room in the house. Mr. Moore could find beds, broken table lamps, and he even found blueprints of the rooms, including a map of the area. He found a door and when he opened it, He was terrified. He found a decaying body, and it was moving like a zombie. Mr. Moore immediately went out and closed the door. He started running away, only to realize he didn’t know how to get out. Panicking, he quickly decided that if he wanted to get out, he had to stay alive. He quickly went over and looked around, shining his flashlight to look for clues. As he was looking around, his flashlight lost battery. He quickly ran to the entrance, and he heard a mysterious sound. Once he turned around, he was grabbed by the shadowy figure.

When he woke up, Mr. Moore found himself in bed with his usual cup of coffee.

“We mysteriously found you last night,” said the owner. “You would have died. We haven’t found any of the others. Out of all the guests who disappeared, you’re the only we found,” he added.

Mr. Moore, despite being in perfect condition, still wanted to find out what was going on. Why was there a secret area? What was it for? These questions would remain a mystery. Mr. Moore decided to pass off the investigation. Mr. Moore felt that everyone was in danger and decided to get the police.

When he told the police, they didn’t believe him. They forced Mr. Moore into a court trial to prove what he was saying was correct.

“What is this, Stephen King!?” said the police chief. He also added, “Get me the best judge.”

***

It was the day of the court trial. Mr. Moore was on one side with his lawyer, while the disagreeing side went to one of the top attorney. The court trial began. The judge smashed his gavel, and the jury was watching.

“This man is lying,” said the top attorney.

“Why?” said the judge.

“Who would believe a story like that? I can prove it to you,” said the top attorney.

The judge said, “Why don’t we have the other side deal with it?”

Mr. Moore’s lawyer said, “It is true. I can prove it to you. Bring me a witness.”

The first witness was Timmy, who was visiting out of the country and staying at the house. Timmy said, “I don’t know anything.”

Mr. Moore’s lawyer decided to get another witness.

The next witness was Jake, who had come over because the owner was his friend. Jake said, “I’ve heard about the attacks. I don’t know much.”

No one, not even the jury, would believe him.

Mr. Moore finally decided to get one more witness, who was the owner. The owner first presented a picture. The jury thought it was fake. Then a video. They thought it was fake. Then, the owner decided to do one last presentation.

He told Mr. Moore to get out because it was something personal of his.

Mr. Moore could hear in the waiting room. The owner showed them the blueprints. The attorneys didn’t understand and sent police to check it out. Mr. Moore was very suspicious.

Meanwhile, the police were with the owner and saw the secret room. They noticed everything and started believing him. Before they could say a word, they were grabbed by the shadowy figure.

The judge was shocked that it was midnight and the police hadn’t come. Mr. Moore left, concluding his suspicions. He finalized his thoughts, and came to the conclusion that the owner was causing all the mishap in the house. Quickly, Mr. Moore did something no one else would do. It turned out that the people who disappeared were stuck in a vault, all crammed together. Before they could do anything, a tank blew up the back of the vault. It was Mr. Moore in the tank. He was contacting a local boat crew on a ship. He blew up the other parts of the room, including the skulls and hallways. It was only then that he noticed that the owner of the house was fixing the area.

“You are a traitor,” said Mr. Moore. “You made the guests disappear. You are bad,” he added.

The owner said, “No I’m not. I noticed the accidents going on and felt that there was something I needed to do. You were strolling around and I went and saved you.”

Mr. Moore said, “So you were the shadowy figure.”

The owner said, “Yes, I was.”

Mr. Moore answered, “But what happened to the police.”

The owner said, “I don’t get it, the police disappeared?”

Mr. Moore said, “Yeah, you didn’t hear? The shadowy figure took them. You were the shadowy figure I saw multiple times.”

The owner said, “I was only there once.”

Mr. Moore said, “Wait, wasn’t one of the guests your twin? He should know about the secret room. But if it wasn’t you, was it him?” Mr. Moore was watching in horror as he noticed something terribly wrong. Something very terribly wrong.

 

The End?

Best Friends

In a small apartment in the heart of New York City, lived a girl named Amanda. Amanda wasn’t fond of living in a cramped apartment with six other siblings anymore.  She hated living with three stinky boys and three bratty girls. It was torture – she got no privacy. She had to help her siblings get ready for school and as a result sometimes had to run out the door wearing her pajamas. That was really embarrassing. The only person she liked was her little sister named Eleanor.

 

 * * *

 

I didn’t even get breakfast. All our “Mom” cares about is the little ones. Sometimes I think that I was adopted just so that I could be the maid/ babysitter.  But in other ways, I  was treated like a baby. I couldn’t drive because of city traffic, and I also couldn’t move out because I was too young. However, “Mom” hardly knew anything about me.

One morning in the kitchen, she announced that she was pregnant with twins! That was the scariest day of my life. We had to take care of six kids already – four of whom were adopted, like me – and now there were going to be screaming babies?

We were all stunned. Nobody had any words, but the dogs were barking, the cats were meowing, and then the kids were screaming. I just wanted to leave that infested apartment. Only Eleanor was silent. I loved Eleanor – she was civilized, and the only one who really understood me. I loved the mornings when no one cried or screamed.

Things really got crazy when mom called another family meeting. “We are moving!” she announced.

Later that night Mom told us we were moving in with grandpa and grandma. They lived in Florida and we lived in New York! Then she told us we were driving. I looked around the room and saw a wave of frowns flood the room. If we were taking Mom’s Honda I would die. There would be no room for anyone. And what about the bags?

The next day we all packed a carry-on bag and headed outside. There was a big yellow school bus. We all piled in. When all the kids sat down, finally the bus started moving. But then Olivia screamed, “I have to go pee!” The bus came to a stop and we all got out and went into the sketchiest gas station that was rumored to have been robbed 12 times. Oh boy…

Olivia walked through the door and was in there for two minutes and then ran out. She said there was poop on the floor. After a minute into the bus ride Ginger said, “Are we there yet?”

“WE ARE NOT! DO YOU SEE PALM TREES? DID THE BUS STOP NO. WAIT 20 HOURS, AND WE WILL BE THERE!”

20 hours didn’t go by quickly. There was a lot of screaming and fighting. I think the bus driver wanted to leave us on the side of the road.

20 hours later…

Finally, we arrived at my grandparents house. We got off the bus one by one. Grandma kissed all of our cheeks and grandpa high fived us. Their new house was so big every one of us got our own room, but Eleanor and I shared a room. Our room had a fresh smell of paint. The color of the wall was purple on her side of the room, and yellow on my side. Grandma also made cupcakes. Hers were the best of all time. They tasted like heaven bundled up in a small form. Heaven was much bigger though.

After I took a long nap it was time for dinner. To be honest I got lost on my way to dinner. I could smell the pasta sauce from the kitchen.

The food was delicious. Whenever we are at our grandparents’ house it’s a treat.

Later that night we all went into the movie theater. Tonight we were going to watch Finding Nemo. I could smell freshly popped popcorn and soda. 10 minutes into the movie I heard snoring. All the little kids got carried upstairs into their snuggly beds. I changed the movie to a rated R movie called Finding Knife. It was extremely scary so I ran upstairs into my bed.

I had a hard time sleeping. I kept thinking about how I was going to go to school here. Also, I was dreading the birth of the twins. Around midnight, I ran into my Mom’s room. She was awake too and she sent me back to my room. She wasn’t quite understanding. After, I fell into a deep.

In the early morning I was woken up by my grandpa. It was Sunday, so that meant we had to go to church. My grandparents were really serious about church – I mean really. Mom said that we always went, but the truth was that we hardly ever went. We had to get dressed in dresses and heels.

After church we went to brunch. I insisted on going to Luises. It was my favorite restaurant, ever. We were definitely going to go there plenty of more times. There are always the nicest servers there, and the best food – even better than grandma’s if that’s possible.

When we got back from brunch, I went swimming in the pool. After I got out of the pool, I tanned for a little while. Then I heard Eleanor scream help from the pool. I looked over and saw Marco pushing her down. She was drowning. I dived into the pool and pulled her out. I touched her heart. It wasn’t beating. I screamed for my Mom and told her to call 911. I dragged Eleanor out of the pool and did CPR on her. In five minutes the ambulance showed up and they rushed her to the hospital.

“Honey, Grandpa, Grandma, and I will go to the hospital – you’ll watch the kids.” Mom explained to me.

“No. I have to come. I have to be there. I’ve been with her since her beginning and I will be there for her end.”

“Honey, but you have to stay with the kids.”

“No, you can! I am coming – I understand her, she’ll want me there.”

“Fine…”

My grandpa and I went into the Jeep and my grandma went in the Toyota. They have like six cars. We rushed over to the hospital and we ran into the ER and saw Eleanor laying still in her bed. Her eyes were squinted. I sat beside her and held her hand. She had all types of IVs in her arm so when I squeezed her she squirmed.

“I love you so much, Ele…” It took her a little bit to gather her thoughts.

“I love you too,” she whispered.

The nurses came in with a turkey and cheese sandwich and orange juice – her favorite. They said we had to leave, but I insisted that I should stay. A police officer gestured to the waiting room so I followed. When I walked into the hallway, I heard crying around the corner. I slowly walked around the corner and I saw a girl crying. I thought it was me.

“What’s wrong?”

“Nothing…” she said

“There has to be something wrong. You’re crying in a hospital.”

“My Mom and Dad died in a car crash. They died just a few minutes ago.”

Then she ran off and I heard the slam of a door.

I decided that I wanted to stay the night at the hospital. I woke up to the monitor beeping. A doctor rushed in and turned off the machine and left so I could say my last goodbyes. When she was taken out of the hospital I picked up her blanket off the floor and hugged it.

When we got home I went straight up to what once was our room. When I walked into our room I saw her bed; where her soul slept. I first smiled and then it turned into a frown. I couldn’t believe she was gone. She left me in the blink of an eye.

That night I couldn’t sleep. My mind kept drifting off, but then getting pulled back into the thought of Eleanor being gone.

When I woke up I felt bare without Eleanor next to me. She’d usually be scared in the night so she would sleep with me.

I walked downstairs and into the kitchen. My whole family was eating cereal. My grandma was too sad to cook. All I wanted was Eleanor to come back alive.

After lunch the hospital called and asked my mom and I to come back. When we showed up the nurse was holding a sweater. Then I realized it was that girl’s in the hallway. “Is this your sister’s?” said the nurse.

“No. That’s, uh, my friend’s sweater.”

“Oh. What is your friend’s name, darling?”

“I don’t know…”

“Honey are you okay? It’s your friend. You should know her name.”

“I don’t know… her name could be anything. I only saw her in the hall for a minute. Then she ran away.”

“Whatever. I will put it in lost and found.”

“No, I will find her,” I insisted

The nurse handed me the sweater and I searched for the girl. My mom left because she knew I was going to be a long time. I first looked where I found her the day before but she wasn’t there, so I walked down wing-123 — that was the extreme illness hall. I walked around there for a little bit. But then a man threw up in the hallway so, I left.

I walked to the bathroom and when I opened the door the girl was there. She was crying.

“Are you going to tell on me?” she asked

“What?”

“I’m not supposed to be here. I am supposed to be in the mental center.”

“Oh.”

“Yeah… please don’t tell.”

“It’s our secret. My name is Amanda. What’s yours?”

“My name is Alexa.”

“I saw you in the hall the other day.”

She had a nervous face and then ran. All I saw was her back running away. I forgot to give her the sweater. I saw a black object in the pocket of the cream colored wool sweater. I peered in the pocket and saw a black key. I saw writing on it: Gary.

I wondered what that meant.

 

* * *

 

When I got home from the hospital, everyone was in a bustle around the house. The boys were hopping around trying to get on their old shoes. Grandma said the place was muddy. We all got into the cars and headed to the park. It took 15 minutes to get to the park. When we got there, all the little kids ran towards the playground.

I started to walk towards the other kids but then someone tapped me. It was Marco. My heart sunk down to my feet. He had no reason to talk to me. He had done enough damage to my soul. I felt dead without Ele next to me every step I took, but she wasn’t there anymore. Marco and I hadn’t talked since the accident. I looked at him and then I trudged away. The scent of fall leaves drifted towards me from the wind’s gentle breeze.

When I entered the playground area, I saw Ginger run up the steps and into a tunnel. I followed her. When I got out of the tunnel it was dark. Where was Ginger?  I took my phone out of my pocket and put my flashlight on. I saw a several slides and I saw a little light pouring in from inside one of slides. I crawled in and pushed off. But then my feet hit something. And that something said, “Oww!”

I looked down at my feet and saw Alexa. She had the wool sweater on that I had earlier. How did she get the sweater back? Did she go inside my house? Then Alexa rammed into me and ran up the slide. When looked back I saw nothing. Just darkness. I slid down the slide. It was just me going round and round a million times until everything stopped. The squeak of my skin stopped. The sound of kids screaming stopped. The sound of my breathing stopped. Except for my heartbeat. I closed my eyes and everything started again.

I came to the end of the long slide. When I came out my mom smiled at me. I ran towards her and she wrapped her arms around my neck and squeezed. Her hugs were the best. Her warm hands felt like hot chocolate wrapping my heart with marshmallows.

We walked back to the cars and drove home. I headed towards the stairs, but then my mom called my name. She was crying. I ran to the kitchen and saw my mom laying on the floor. There was no one home; my grandparents went out to dinner. And all the other kids in the house were at the beach with a babysitter. She was saying something I couldn’t understand.

“I can’t understand you, Mom. What’s wrong?”

“H-e-l-p-p-p.”

“Do you need to go to the hospital?”

She nodded. I helped her up and then led her outside. I helped her into the car and then we headed to the hospital. I got out of the car and got her into a wheelchair and rushed her inside. The nurses helped her to the delivery room. I called my grandparents and told them to come to the hospital.

As soon as my grandparents came, my grandma hugged me so tight. We didn’t have to say anything – our bodies were words to our hearts. We sat in the waiting room, eager to know what was going on. The nurse came out of the room and told us to come in.

When we walked in the room, I saw my mom. She was in a facemask but there were two little baby girls in a cradle. They had matching pink cotton hats and matching pink socks. I saw on a poster it said Mikayla and Tiara Scott. Born April 16th weighing 5.5 pounds and 5.6 pounds. My mom had the same smile that she had earlier today. The one that warms your heart more than anything can.

My mom closed her eyes and fell asleep. My grandma was crying and my grandpa was smiling that same smile. The nurses told us to leave, because they all needed rest. We walked down the hallway and out the door. From a distance I saw a girl running. I ran after her. I grabbed onto her and she stopped. I turned her around. She looked like she was just beat up – she had a black eye. She gave me the black key that said Gary on it. I saw that she was wearing a heart shaped necklace that said Rebecca on it. It looked very familiar. Then she ran away.

I got into the car and my grandpa drove me back home. The street light glared off the car window. I started to drift into a sleep. We pulled into the driveway and I woke up and walked upstairs. I looked at the other side of the room and saw an empty bed. One gone and two born. In less than a month. My heart was aching.

I looked into my jewelry box and saw the same heart shaped necklace that Alexa was wearing. My necklace said Rebecca – my birth mother’s name.

 

* * *

 

4 days later…

It was April 22nd – the day the twins came home. Everyone was preparing the house. I had been through a lot of these days when the new children came into the house. Usually mom brings two kids into the house at the same time if they’re adopted. But sometimes if only one is born then only one is brought in.

Everyone was putting banners up and making Mom’s favorite meals and snacks. I smelled the muddy buddies cookies and cream being made. I smelled Grandma’s cheese pizza rising in the oven.

Then I heard my terrace doorway being knocked on. I walked over to the door, opened the curtain, and saw Alexa. I slid the sliding door all the way over to make an opening for Alexa’s slim body. It looked like she hadn’t eaten for days. She was wet and dirty.

I gave her a fresh change of clothes and got her a warm blanket. Then I helped her into my bed and went to get her soup. My grandma started to make the chicken noodle soup and I walked back upstairs. I turned on the television and gave her a glass of milk. She needed to be taken care of. And I was willing to. She started to watch Disney Channel.

I hadn’t turned on the TV since Eleanor left the world. She loved to watch Disney Channel. My grandma called me down to the kitchen and gave me the soup. I walked back upstairs carefully and handed it to Alexa. I sat on the bed beside her and she eventually fell asleep. I stared at her for a long time. Then I noticed she was wearing the same heart shaped necklace from a few days ago at the hospital. I took the key off my dresser and walked over to my bed.

I unlocked her locket and there was a picture. The women had dark brown hair. She had a big smile and a lot of makeup. She was very pretty. It was the same picture that I had in my locket. I locked the locket back up and then put the key in my jewelry box.  

I put the blanket back on her because it was slipping off. I went over to my desk and got out my Macbook. I was looking up a question that I’d been thinking for a long time: who was Alexa London?

There was nothing about her, nothing at all. She was anonymous! But why did we have the same picture? Did we have the same parents?

Then Alexa woke up. She looked around for a little bit, but didn’t say anything. “Do you want to go downstairs and have some breakfast?” I asked. She nodded. I told her to get on my back. I carried her over to the elevator.

“Why are you taking care of me?” Alexa asked.

“Because you’re my sister…” and at that moment I knew we were not only friends, we were sisters.

“What?”

“Before I was adopted I remember Mom and Dad gave us lockets and a key to remember them.”

“I remember that too.”

“We are twins!”

Rusted tin cottage

Rusted tin cottage

filled with happiness

in the middle of a dark,

scary rainstorm.

The rain pours down,

slowly soaking the happiness up,

but the vast amount of contentment

fights back with joy and glee,

bliss and delight.

But the jubilation

goes out.

The world loses

its light.

The storm slows,

being replaced with

light and peace.

Gone, the Eraser

Chapter One 

: (    My Job is Way Too Impossible    ):

 

Hi. I’m Gone, the Eraser. I hate my owner, Rafael. He is destroying my job! And his pencil leaves disgusting marks all over the place whenever he walks somewhere. My job is a lot harder because of him. His pencil is a pain in the butt. Literally. I try to grab the shark eraser to scare him and make him run away, but I don’t have arms. I try to talk to him but he has no ears.

I have not eaten any black marks since Saturday. My owner, Rafael, is a rude student. Really, HE is making MY job harder. He is so dumb. He uses numbers to write. So I go into his folders and try to erase everything before the class starts. He was held back three times by me erasing all his stuff. He thought it was so mysterious. When his class gets in with all their ugly people, I hide in my desk and start fake sleeping. At night I get tired, so I try sleeping, but he has a teacher who is never cold and leaves the AC on all the time, so it is so hard to sleep. In word study, the teacher tells people what to write (a lame word) and do VCV or CVC (Vowel-Consonant-Vowel or Consonant-Vowel-Consonant). So basically it is the teacher’s fault that she’s making people do all the work and I have to erase it. Rafael says the teacher is an evil mind. She actually is a really ugly head. The teacher is really the only bad one, because if Rafael doesn’t do his assignments he gets detention. He says detention is boring.

Maybe Rafael isn’t so bad after all… Notice I said “maybe.”

 

Chapter Two

Nights

 

Every night I go inside his folders and erase until I die. I could erase all his stuff easily, but the thing is that there are only 15 days of school left! And don’t forget I still have to erase notebooks. Today I am erasing and suddenly a bat comes in. His eyes gaze at mine, so I go in my pencilcase and lock it.

I don’t come out until somebody catches the bat. This guy named Wilson catches the

bat. He is the custodian. He is bald with a big beard. Rafael is very messy, so Wilson yells at him a lot. He comes at night. He leaves notes on top of his desk like, “WHY ARE YOU SO MESSY!?”or “BE NEAT!” It is actually a little funny. This night, I finish the final notebook. I erase the name on the front and I creep out of the building. I put the stack of notebooks in  the garbage can down the street. I’ve gotta go back quickly. The first student comes in. I run back to class 782. I have to stop erasing.

 

Chapter Three

All About Rafael

 

Rafael Luttmann has brown hair, brown eyes, and is always wearing a yellow and orange sweater. He likes the weird thing with numbers and reading. He is more of a troublemaker. This because he’s already been held back three times, so luckily I doesn’t have AS much to erase. Still a lot, though. He goes to the principal a lot when he gets in trouble.

Chapter Four  

The Final Countdown!

 

I have erased all Rafael’s notebooks and am left with the thing with numbers on the last day of school. Still, they have to do a worksheet. I have an amazing idea! I put the pencil inside the fast moving fan. And… CHOP! When it is worksheet time, Rafael has nothing to write with! He doesn’t do it, and the teacher doesn’t notice! I have erased Rafael’s 4th grade!

Yay!

Chapter Five

Report Card

 

Today I went to Rafael’s house. He gets all mad when he gets all F’s. He gets mad at me for erasing all his work, including tests.

He almost throws me in a big black thing. It is Mount Everest! It is very fun but stinky. There are yellow slides (I think he calls them banana peels) but that is the only good thing it had in there. There are orange peels and a couple glass bottles. But then his mom says, “No.” I am a very expensive eraser.

So I won’t erase needlessly anymore, ever. I turned a bad habit into a good one! Rafael will probably be happy with me. Future school days will be bright as Rafael’s cheeks!

THE END!

Boo-Goo Land

PROLOGUE

 

Lillian snuggled up in her covers. It was winter and she was under the heaviest blanket  she could find in her house. She was waiting until her father came back from his weekly shopping. Lillian was nodding, slowly asleep, then wide awake. When was he coming back to tuck her in and give her a gentle kiss goodnight?

 

CHAPTER ONE

 

Lillian crept up the stairs as the door closed. Her father had just went out to go shopping for groceries. One of the stairs creaked. Lillian froze. She got up and ran up the stairs. She didn’t know where she was going until she burst into her father’s lab. Since her parent’s divorce, nothing had gone right in her life. She barely saw her mom and when she did, her mom knew nothing of how her father had tried to do everything to keep her out of his laboratory. She walked around, inspecting every little piece of material she saw. After feeling a piece of felt, she suddenly saw a shiny, glowing object in the corner. She crept over and, picking it up, saw that it was pure gold. After that, she saw another piece: it was a diamond. All around in that little corner was everything that she had asked for for when she was younger. Just for old times sake, Lillian grabbed a piece of gold and stuffed it deep into her pocket.  

Suddenly, she heard the door open. She looked around frantically. Where can I hide? She dove into a large tube just as her father walked into the room. He looked around and picked up something that looked like a baby bottle. He opened the cap and took the tiniest sip. He started to shake and wiggle. He went out of focus. There was a bright light and when Lillian looked back at where her father had been standing, he was gone. Now I know why he’s been keeping me out, Lillian thought. She rested her arm, for she thought that she didn’t have anything to worry about. She thought that she was in just a regular tube. But, boy was she wrong. Her elbow touched a little button and in a gust of wind she flew up the tube.

 

CHAPTER TWO

 

She landed in rainbow grass. She got up, rubbing her sore leg. She looked around. This place was just what she had imagined when she read the book Alice in Wonderland. She heard a rustling in the bushes. She thought it would be a horrible creature so she ducked down to hide. As the creature emerged from the pink bushes, she only realized it was her cousin, Tom, who died two years ago. When he saw her, he smiled.

“I thought you would never come,” Tom said.

How did he know I was gonna be here? Is he alive again? It’s possible. She was about to ask those questions, but her mind was about to burst with more important questions, “WhereamiWhyamIhereWhatAmIDoingHere….”

“Wooooah! Calm down,” said Tom. “I can only answer one question at a time.

Lillian sighed. If she couldn’t ask all of her questions then why ask any? “Where are we?”

“That, only Time can answer.” And with that, Tom disappeared in a flash.

Lillian stared at the space where Tom had been standing. Who is Time? Lillian wondered. She walked around, very curiously. Suddenly, an animal with 400 legs and no arms crawled out from the hollow trunk of a large tree. She walked around trying to find where and how that animal had just walked out from that tree. There was no exit or entrance. Then, as if out of nowhere, a butterfly flew by and disappeared into the tree. More and more animals left and entered the tree, but Lillian still couldn’t understand how they got in. A tiny creature ran under Lillian’s feet and tripped her, making her fall toward the tree. Instead of bumping into the tree, she simply fell through it.

 

CHAPTER THREE

 

She woke up in a large fluffy bed. She couldn’t lift herself from the bed. It took her a long time to get her eyes even a millimeter open. When she did, she saw three strange creatures.

“This thing is trying to communicate. But nothing is happening!”  

Lillian then heard the familiar voice of Tom speaking.

“She is trying to communicate but she uses the same language as me,” said Tom.

“Let’s go wake her up. She has slept for three days already.” Lillian jumped to attention but she couldn’t open her eyes any wider than they already were. Have I slept for three days?! I must have been unconscious for a long time. At that moment, she heard a mix of suction cups walking towards her and some slimy gooey substance slinking towards her. A creature spooned a medicine that tasted like mangos into her mouth. Her eyes popped open and she was able to get up and walk around the new strange room. There were three interesting looking chairs in the corner. They each had one leg. There were shelves with bottles of peaches. It was very dark in the room.

“Where is the light here? I can’t see.”

“I don’t know what you’re talking about. what is this thing called ‘light’? I’ve never heard of it.”

“The more important question is, what is this creature’s species?” said a very tiny alien that had four legs and four arms.

“I’m Lillian!” Lillian cried. The tiny alien seemed to understand.

Lillian picked up a little piece of gold that had fallen onto the floor. It was the piece of gold she had stuffed in her pocket when she was in her father’s lab.  While wandering around the room, she fell over one of the chairs in the alien’s abode. The one legged chair fell over with Lillian. She stood up slowly, and saw she had a large scrape on her knee that was going to puss up. Lillian grimaced and muttered, with the piece of gold held tightly in her hand, “I wish my knee would heal up,” and it instantly healed up. Tom, Lillian, and the aliens were astonished. Lillian gasped, and let the thought of having a wishing piece of gold register in her mind. When she understood, she grumbled, “I wish I would know where I am.” A few seconds passed, and she still didn’t know. Suddenly a thought popped in her head. You are in boogoo land, otherwise known as tropical 956132.

Lillian smiled. With this little piece of gold, she realized she could get Tom to tell her everything.

“I wish that Tom would tell me what he remembers from being at home.”

“I do not remember very much. You are very lucky that I remember you,” Tom murmured without moving his lips. Lillian was shocked. She ran outside.

 

CHAPTER 4

 

Outside, Lillian ran and ran and ran and ran, until she came to the strange tree she had gone through. She walked to it but something stopped her. In the corner of her eye, she saw a lady, but she was a mix between a possum and a regular human.

“Call me Miss. Possum,” the possum lady said. “What are you doing here?” Before Lillian could say anything, Miss Possum took her hand and led her into a little cottage she had.

Tom picked up the piece of gold that Lillian didn’t realize she had dropped when she ran out. He could only remember that it granted him wishes, and he wished to be next to Lillian.

Tom appeared in Miss Possums cottage. She was pouring some herbal tea for Lillian in a delicate china tea cup.  

“Hello,” said Miss Possum. “Who might you be?”

“Sincerely, I don’t know,” said Tom.

“Do you remember anything about yourself?” asked Miss Possum.

“I don’t know.”

“Has this boy taken a magical potion before?” Miss Possum questioned Lillian.

“No. Not that I know of, and he wouldn’t be able to know.”

“Oh dear, oh dear. This will never work.”

“Huh?” Lillian wondered aloud.

“Well, I was thinking that maybe if we give him one of my potions, he will be able to get his memory back.”

“But why is that bad?” said Lillian

“Because since he’s never taken a potion, he won’t be used to it and we won’t know the results. But maybe……..”

Lillian said, “Just try!”

“I will.”

 

CHAPTER 5

 

Lillian screamed. The potion was put in a needle, and had been injected into Tom. He immediately fell to the floor. Lillian looked down at him, breathing hard. What is his name again? I think it’s Jon. No! She thought. Why can’t I remember? Lillian staggered back. She wondered for a split second if what happened to Tom was starting to happen to her. When the possum woman spoke she jumped, startled.

“I think he’ll be alright. He is just undergoing the side effects.” Tom sprung up, looking cheery.

Miss Possum leaned over and whispered, “He will give you all of the information he has gathered.

“Hey again, guys! Guess what? We have two more days until Lillian loses her memory! Isn’t that superb?” Tom exclaimed, jumping up and down.

Lillian gasped, looked around and fainted into Miss Possum’s arms.

 

CHAPTER 6

 

When Lillian came to, she realized she was back in bed. Her dad was shaking her awake. “Sweetie,” he was whispering. “Wake up!”

Lillian struggled to sit up in bed. “Dad? You’re not invisible anymore! Where are Miss Possum and Tom? Wait. I think I am losing my mind already!”

Her father looked at her as if she was out of her mind. “Honey, I just came back from the grocery store. Did you have a bad dream?”

Lillian looked at her dad and asked, “So… why don’t you let me go in your lab?”

Lillian’s father sighed, shaking his head. “I work with chemicals, chemicals that are too dangerous for you to come in contact with. I have nothing against you, dear. I never meant to offend you or anything of the sort. Just go to sleep, alright?” He kissed Lillian’s head and went out of the room. Lillian settled down to fall asleep.

 

THE END

                Or not…….

 

Epilogue:  Lillian, for the next couple of days, thought only about the crazy dream that had spawned unexpectedly in her brain, in her sleep. Maybe, she thought. Maybe it means something. I guess whoever controls all of the dreams wanted me to think about something.

 

THE real  END

Qwercle’s Journey

Qwercle is the size of a human’s stomach. He has thorns at the end of him, and has three long pink things in between and next to his two top thorns. He uses his long pink thingies to eat and drink. Although he has a mouth and two fangs for teeth, he uses his two fangs to drink blood out of people. Qwercle lives in a human-free territory, but everyday he goes out of his human-free house into the world where it is full of humans.

Everyone tries to hurt him, but he ends up sucking the blood out of them before he can get to them. He was known as the bravest of all the Kilafricks. The Kilafricks are known for the bravest of all vampire animals and vampires.

Qwercle has always wanted to get lukewarm Kile-Human Cake. But, there is a big rainbow fence blocking him from his delicious cake. He imagined the cake tastes like one million humans with flesh roasted and grinded bones. Qwercle imagined the cake would have one hundred humans in it, which would be the most amazing thing to taste in the entire world. If a human ever tasted something as amazing, it would have to be one million pieces of candy of your choice every second.

When he couldn’t bear another second, he decides to take the journey.

He decides to go out of his yard with his spatula and frying pan and pogo stick, (to jump over the fence.) He starts jumping through the woods, all the way through the village, and finally, after going a million miles, he arrives at his friends’ Gary, Harry, and Arry’s house. Their house is the complete opposite of a mansion. Everything is thrown around. Their house only has one room. There’s no bed, there’s no sink, there’s no bathtub. There’s no kitchen and the most important thing that they don’t have is a toilet! But Qwercle doesn’t care. He says goodbye to his friends. He was about to leave when Harry says, “Take me with you!”

Qwercle is so surprised and says, “No way! This is my journey to get my treat!” When Arry and Gary argue too, Qwercle says, “Alright you can come, it’s three versus one.”

They start their journey. The first thing they see was a marshmallow-breathing dragon. When the dragon sees them, it starts breathing marshmallows at them. Qwercle takes out his frying pan and they all lie perfectly in it. The marshmallows are magnetized to the frying pan. Qwercle knew this would happen and that’s why he brought the frying pan. The good thing is they have something to eat. Once they got past the dragon they start to eat.

They are amazed when they see Zilaons. A Zilaon can be very dangerous to a Kilafricks. A Zilaon looks like two million hundred kilafricks all put together. And they are big blobby things that say, “Bleh, bleh, bleh.” They are red from all the blood they eat from the Kilafricks. They have ten hundred million big teeth that they use to drink the blood out of the Kilafricks. Kilafricks taste like the perfect piece of candy that any human has ever tasted, and they get to eat that candy whenever they want without getting sick.

The Kilafricks have feared the Zilaons for 999,999,999 years. The Kilafricks made a deal with the Zilaons that they would stay on their side of the valley if the Zilaons stay on their side of the valley. The Zilaons accepted the deal so that they could have their own part of the valley.      

Qwercle is trying to avoid the Zilaons from seeing him, because he doesn’t want to break their deal with the Zilaons. Qwercle doesn’t want to endanger the rest of the Kilafricks and have his species go extinct.

Right then, a big Zilaon says, “Hey, is that a Kilafrick in our part of the valley? I thought we made a deal.” He shouts to all his knights in frying pan armor, “Get them!”

Then Qwercel says, “Don’t you dare! Or I will throw this marshmallow at you!” And he holds his fist high above him with a marshmallow the size of a fly in his fingertips.      

Everybody else laughs at him, even his friends. They said, “And what are you going to do with that marshmallow?”

His face turns pale. He says, “Um…um…it will turn you into frogs?”

“I don’t believe you. As a matter of fact, I don’t think your marshmallow can do anything. Guards attack!” the leader of the Zilaons yells.

The guard says, “But, but, what if his marshmallow can turn us into frogs? What if we have to live in an icky pond and eat flies for the rest of our lives?!?”

The leader of the Zilaons says, “There’s no such thing as magic, you silly fools! I should just fire you, get someone else to do a better job, and have you pay me one million Kilafricks along with your lives!”

The guard says, “But Sire, we have nothing we can pay you. We don’t even have a single drop of blood!”

Meanwhile, Qwercle is frozen with his friends thinking, Are we going to die? Are we going to survive?

All the stress was on the leader and the guards, but the Kilafricks didn’t realize that they could just run away because of all the arguing going around near them.

Next, the leader of Zilaons says, “You fools! Must I do everything myself? Now I shall raise my sword above you and you shall suffer death!” He runs to his workshop, gets his sword, ties them up and raises his sword above.

“But, but, but,” say the Zilaons. “Who will be your soldiers? Who will protect our tradition? We are the only ones. Please don’t sacrifice us!”

“You fools! Why do you think I would believe you. Of course there are others and I will just sacrifice the others if they say no. But of course they won’t because they would rather live than die. Especially live to be my slaves.”

“You are right master. We have made that up, but please don’t sacrifice us. ”  

“Oh, all right, but if it happens again, you are toast,” says the leader Zilon.

When Qwerkle and his friends realize that they could make an escape, they start to tip toe off. They didn’t get far when they run into a trap. “Barnacles,” Qwerkle says softly. The other Kilafricks keep their mouths quiet. The Leader Zilaon turns around and he sees them and says, “Ha ha ha! Did you really think that you could get away! You lousy Kilafricks, you’ll never defeat me! Wahahahaha!”

The Zilaon have dinner and eat Qwercle. The rest are scared. But they are able to escape before they are eaten. They make a run for it and see this big wall. They see a pole and use it to jump over. When they get over, they see what they’ve always been wanting. A lukewarm Kile-Human Cake. The lukewarm Kile Human cake is as tall as ten-thousand ten-foot tall men. They eat it all and then throw up. They are so happy they got the treat. But they are so sad that they lost Qwercle. Meanwhile, the Zilaons invade the Kilafricks and very few survive. The very few that survive are very lucky, but they got injured. While Qwercle was sitting in the Zilaon’s stomach, he was thinking about how he was disappointing everyone. And he was also thinking about how the Zilaons could have invaded the Kilafricks and how everyone could have died because of his wants and decisions.

He felt remorse.

THE END

The Legend of Games

Chapter 1

Once upon a time there was a game called The Legend of Games. It was like Minecraft, but cooler. The person who created The Legend of Games was named Calli. She added a new update for lightning, a health, a food bar, and a drink bar. She added potions and a portal. She added one more cool update, a dragon with green eyes, and black scales.

In The Legend of Games, you can find ice-breathing dragons. There is Goo Land, it was very gooey, like jello. If you stepped into the pool and stayed there for two seconds you’d die. In Goo Land there are goo monsters and they drop poisonous goo potions.

There are diamond doors, and they lead to your house. There are security beams and security cameras for your house in the regular world. There are security beams and cameras cause the monsters are too hard to beat. There are magical keys that can open anything under the doormat.

 

Chapter 2

The main character in the game was a boy called Harry. He has ten health points, and ten food bars. Health points are how much more lives you have, and they always grow back. Food bars are how many times you need to eat your food, because if there is one food bar left, you die. Harry wants a ten-story house. He has to make the build all by himself.

He has to go to Mega Security Block to get supplies. Harry has ten thousand dollars because he’s been saving up. He has to walk five medium blocks. On his way to the store, Harry encounters an ice-breathing dragon. He felt afraid because he thought the dragon was going to eat him. He saw the dragon and he dug a hole in the ground and the dragon couldn’t go through because it was too small.

He knew where to go because he had a compass. As he was digging, he encountered a drill lion. He tried to go back and dig different holes. When he tried going towards the store, he tried going into one of the holes, dig more, and go to the building store. Harry got ten hundred blocks of mega block security. He bought things for his house, like: sofas, beds, flower pots, flowers, bushes, ladders, tables, torches, chairs, and swords.

 

Chapter 3

On his way back home, some slime got in his way. He tried to go back to his house five blocks in front of him. Five minutes later he made it through with his sword that he bought. He killed the slime with his sword, and after killing it he got poisonous slime potions.

He finally made it to his old house, and then he started building his ten story house. It was night time. It was hard to see, so he put a torch on the floor and tried to build. Then he put his bed next to the torch so he could see and then he went to sleep.

Morning came and Harry made his house two stories tall. There was a pool of sharks that can walk on land, and they were in the middle of his building.  He flew and tried to kill them on his building. When the sharks died, he got free shark teeth for potions. After twenty minutes, he made two more stories. Then it was night time again, so Harry got to sleep. Harry needed to eat five pieces of food before he died.

 

Chapter 4

He needed to kill some animals, like foxes. The plan was to get some food. When the foxes were drinking water he would kill them and he would get raw meat, and fox tails. He cooked the raw meat on his stove, but before that he has to go mining for coal. He goes mining underground. He gets the coal. He goes back home and cooks the meat. But a second later he realized he needed more food. He only got two pieces of food, so he decided to get more and put it in his chest with the food he doesn’t need. He goes to get gummies from the factory, but he got it on top of a tree. But first, he wanted to go back to the shop to get the gummy factory material, so he could make it himself, so he doesn’t have to go out in the morning or night. He gets the materials for the gummy factory.

 

Chapter 5

He goes to his house and he builds his gummy factory. He forgot one ingredient though, the magic milk that comes from the magical cow that lives on top of the cloud. But to get that, he needed to fly. When he was flying he found the magical cow, but he needed to find a magical bucket, so he went to his inventory and found his bucket. He only had one more bucket left for his factory, but he used it anyway. He could always make more buckets, from mining underground again. He tried to get milk from the magical cow, but the cow flew away. He kept following it until the night and he placed a torch on the cloud and then got the milk from the magical cow. After, he flew to his house and made the gummy factory. He used the gummy factory, so that he didn’t die. The factory made gummies that he could eat. He found people and put them in his house to fight off monsters. And then it was snowing. He was destroying snow for a magical snow potion so he could use it to go really fast.

 

Chapter 6

It was night again, so Harry went to his house and went to sleep. There was a lever for his house to turn the block invisible, so he could see if it’s night or day. Five seconds later, it was morning. Harry started his gummy factory because he knew there would be monsters that want to kill him and he switched the lever to see. He saw his pen of chickens, a lot of foxes, five small fire-breathing dragons, and he saw five magical cows. When all of the monsters disappeared from the sunlight, he went to get more milk because he needed it for anything. It can turn into things he wanted. He wants to turn the milk into a meat factory, a veggie factory, and a sweet factory.

Harry saw Ryan, his friend from his school. Ryan has five hundred coins and two dollars. Ryan likes to play volleyball in the summer with Harry. Ryan likes to read books with potions. They shared the house, so they went inside and got some more milk. He worked on her ten story building and built two more stories. Now there were six stories.

It was turning into fall and he needed a warm coat from the magical kitty. The bad thing about winter was the dangerous animals that come out. Dangerous animals like extremely mad polar bears and if you cracked the ice too deep there are sharks that are really strong.

 

Chapter 7

Harry and Ryan tried to get ice for their own ice-skating rink to ice-skate, but first they need some ice from the building store so they could get some ice skates and ice. It’s magic ice, so it doesn’t melt. They went to the store and got the ice and ice skates. They got some blocks to make the outside of the ice-skating rink. In winter, and before they made the ice skating rink, they went to sleep, because it was night. Five seconds later it was morning, and they made the ice skating rink. After they finished the ice skating rink they skated on the ice rink until it was night and they wanted to sleep again. They were excited for spring, so the ice would melt. It was morning and they went to the ice skating rink to skate, but first they got some gummies so they don’t die. After they skated, they went to their veggie factory and the meat factory and stored it in their buckets. After they got the veggie factory they realized they had to eat unless they would die, so they shared the bucket of food and got four health points.

After that, they went to the shop and they got food, cages, a bag of water, some gravel, some lights, and rocks.  When they were setting up the chickens cage and the dogs cage, the dogs were much easier than the chickens because the chickens need the litter box. There was a flame throwing fan because every time the wind blows the fire will come out.

They saw two of the flame throwers surrounding them and they got their ice breathing dragon that they tamed. They put the ice on the fire so it turned into water and then they made a river. It was getting darker. Tonight that was particularly bad because there was going to be a full moon. That meant there would be an eclipse. This caused every monster to come out and attack everything tall.

They were really worried, but they were really glad that they got an extra security block. It was night and they were right, all the monsters were outside. They saw ten thousand poisonous snakes with horns. When you touch the horns you get poisoned forever. They weren’t scared because they were monster killing experts and they knew a lot about the monsters because their pets are a lot like the monsters.

They had their own secret weapon that was a stone sword with special powers. With the sword, if you think of something it will happen. It was not only snakes outside, there were ten thousand million googleplex evil gummy bears. The only way to kill them is to burn them because if you get killed they will combine into any body.

The monsters start to attack their house, but Harry and his friends made the house clear with their switch, so the monsters didn’t know where to go. Harry and his friend knew they had saved their fight until morning because if it’s in morning then the monsters will burn to pieces. There was one reason for each one, the evil gummy bears will burn down, the snakes will be blind so they’ll poke into each other and they’ll die.

 

The End

Part Two Coming Soon

Circus Monkeys

Boar Chase

Travis stood at the edge of the bushes. His orange and white fur glistened in the afternoon sun, and his black stripes shone. Travis was a Siberian tiger, and he was doing the one thing all tigers have on their minds: hunting.

Travis was not very good at hunting. He was peeking through the bushes, spotting a boar. Travis never hunted a boar before, but he was curious. The boar looked good, fat in flesh, with babies in her belly — it was a sow. The winter was coming, and it was harder for any tiger now to get the more frequent meals needed to cope with the cold.

Travis knew he could not step any closer, otherwise the sow would hear him. So he waited in ambush for her to come closer. The sow was grazing, and she found some grass near the bushes where Travis was hiding. As she shuffled over, Travis thought, it was now or never.

Before Travis could think any further, his hungry paws and claws opened wide and he sprang out onto the sow. She yelped, and then turned into a furious beast. Travis wanted to kick himself for not being able to pounce farther.

Travis then looked at the sow, and wondered why she was not running away. But then he realized he should be the one running away. The sow stamped her foot, and grunted, a cold smoke like puff coming out of her nostrils. She acted and looked like a mini-bull. I-I’ll go now, Travis thought meekly, backing away. But the boar did not answer his thought, nor did she turn her back. She furiously opened her mouth, revealing her ugly and crooked yellow teeth. Travis slowly stepped back, but the sow lost it and charged straight at Travis.

Travis sprinted away from the sow chasing after him. She was slower, given that she was pregnant. As he was fleeing away from her, Travis then saw something ahead of him. A building! Travis thought, Awesome! He dashed toward the building, which was actually a circus tent, smack-dab in the middle of the forest. Travis rushed and leaped. He lost his balance, and plunged right into the tent, landing on the middle of the arena all hurt. The audience went wild, while Travis had red and yellow stars circling around his head.

 

Who Is Jay?

At first, Travis did not know what happened. His pain and confusion went away, but before he could stand up, a giraffe’s brown eyes met his green eyes. Travis almost jumped back in fear.

“Who is this?!” The giraffe asked, as she bent her slinky neck towards Travis.

“Austin, listen to this,” the giraffe started, but a green anaconda, Austin, crept up to Travis.

“Well, what isss it that we have here?” Austin made the letter S sound like a hissing sound, “Isss it … Jay! No way! It’sss Jay!” The giraffe looked at Travis.

“Welcome back, Jay!” The giraffe hollered. The audience clapped. Travis was very confused. Who was Jay? It was certainly a mistake on their part, but Travis decided to play along.

“Gissselle!” Austin exclaimed, “he’sss returned!”

Travis chuckled.

“Yep, on one of my adventures!”

“We know you got kidnapped, Jay,” Giselle said, slightly suspicious, “And we heard that you had escaped.”

“Yes, I did,” Travis said. He was an excellent liar and seized the opportunity, “I escaped and ran into the Siberian wilderness. It’s hard living out there, I’m so glad I finally found you guys again.”

Suddenly, a man stepped into the arena. He looked like a circus magician, with his suit, magic wand, and red striped black top old fashioned cylinder hat.

“Ah, Jay,” he said, stepping up to Travis.

Awkward, Travis thought, but stood still.

“Jay,” Austin said, “Remember Brandon, the Magician?”

“Y-yeah,” Travis answered. Brandon turned his hat over, and a macaw popped out of it. Travis wondered how come Magician Brandon had a macaw and not a white rabbit or a dove like all magicians do.

“You remember Randy, right?” Brandon asked, “Oh, I remember when you were just a cub, you used to play with Randy all the time.”

“You almost bit off my tail once,” the old macaw grumbled.

Then Brandon looked at the audience.

“Show’s over,” Brandon said, “We found Jay!”

 

Pretending

Travis stayed on with the circus train. He accompanied Giselle and Austin, while Brandon was informing all the possible newspaper, writers, and editors about the return of Jay, the Siberian tiger.

“So,” Travis said, “Giselle the giraffe and Austin the snake,”

“Anaconda,” Austin corrected, somewhat insulted.

“Yep,” Giselle said, “And Jay the tiger.”

“Y-yeah,” Travis said. He hated the name, but kept on playing the game.

They were all silent for a moment, and then Austin spoke up.

“Ssso, Jay?” He asked, “Can you tell usss about your adventuresss?” Travis was sitting on the other side of the train, and looked at the giraffe and the anaconda waiting for his answer.

“S-sure,” Travis said thinking what story to invent for them. “Well, I went on many adventures before coming back home!” Travis scratched his chin, pretending to try to remember the details of his story, “I ran into a white tiger in the wild, it was big, and it was hungry,” Travis said, putting a spooky tone in his voice. “It lunged itself at me, and I ducked,” Travis said, starting to like his own invented story, “So, the tiger jumped right into the air, and hit a tree.”

“Do you know what I would have done?” Austin said, “I would have opened my mouth, and bit the tiger, right on the face. I have poissson, you know.”

“Really?” Travis replied, “I mean, oh yeah, now I remember.” Giselle and Austin looked at each other, asking a silent question: “What happened to Jay?”

“I know I may act weird,” Travis explained, “I-I just haven’t been myself since I got kidnapped.” The three animals were silent for a minute.

“We have a long ride,” Giselle explained, “We’re taking the train to St. Petersburg in Russia, about 19 hours away from here, so we should get some sleep.”

“I’m ssso glad we found you, Jay,” Austin said. Travis curled up and sighed with relief.

Giselle was the first to fall asleep, but Austin was scanning the train for rodents, a “perfect” treat for an evening snack. Travis thought that he should leave Austin alone in his rodent hunt and go to sleep. As Travis was drifting off, right before he fell asleep, he heard Austin swallow some food.

 

Show Time

Travis woke up suddenly. The train rattled on its tracks. Travis sat up. Giselle and Austin were both looking out of the window, bored. Giselle sighed.

“Hey,” Travis exclaimed, sitting between them, “So … what’s going on?”

“Nothing much,” Giselle grumbled. Shortly after, Travis started to feel bored as well.

“You know what,” Travis said, “I’m going back to sleep!”

“Good idea,” Austin said, “We ssstill have a long way.” The three fell asleep in no time.

At night, the train finally arrived in St. Petersburg. Travis, Giselle, and Austin had been awake for a while, and talked about the circus. Travis was getting used to his new role of being Jay the tiger.

“YES!” Giselle shouted answering some question Austin asked her. She stretched her neck. “YE…” she started saying again, but her head hit the train’s roof.

“Ouch!” She yelled and sat back down.

“Maybe you were a little too excited, huh?” Travis asked. Giselle just shook her head, smiling. “It’s not easy being so tall, you know?” she said.

The next day, Austin started explaining, “Ssso, thisss isss backssstage.”

“Backstage?” Travis asked.

“Yeah,” Giselle said, “props, acts. Jay, remember your act?” Travis swallowed.

“The tightrope walker,” Giselle answered.

“Yeah,” Travis said, getting goosebumps. He didn’t know what a tightrope was, but either way it did not sound very good.

“Ssso, we’re gonna practiccce,” Austin said. Austin, Giselle, and Travis pulled back the curtains and stepped into the arena.

“Here’s the tightrope,” Giselle said.

“Where is it?” Travis asked, looking around.

“Uh, up there,” Giselle said, pointing her long snout to the sky above. Travis looked up and saw a stretched rope, high above the ground. He swallowed again.

Maybe I could just run off, Travis thought to himself. But no, a tiger in the city, I’ll get in trouble, probably even killed.

“My act is the Teleporter,” Giselle said. “Watch!” She grabbed some dust, and threw it all around her. When the dust settled onto the ground, Giselle was gone.

“Ta-da!” She exclaimed, and peeked out of the curtains on the other side of the arena.

“That’s not teleporting,” Travis said.

“Well,” Giselle said, “I guess not. Disappearing act is probably a better word, anyway. Austin, please perform your act for Jay!” Austin slithered up a ladder and pounced onto a trapeze. He coiled his tail and he swung. Then he jumped onto another trapeze and coiled his tail again. He went back and forth, and then suddenly let go of the trapeze, and started falling toward the ground. Travis gasped.

“He’s gonna…” he yelled, but Giselle quickly pulled out a mini-trampoline, and Austin bounced right off and back into the air.

“For the show,” explained Giselle. “We have a trampoline ready for Austin.”

“Oh,” Travis said. “Oops. I overreacted.”

Austin jumped around, and soon enough, he was back, head high, coiling next to them.

“Your turn, Jay,” Austin declared. Travis wanted to tell them the truth, but his body was urging him not to, at least not until they’d be back in Siberia, where he could run off into the woods and disappear.

 

Randy To The Rescue

Travis climbed the ladder. He was nervous he had to swallow the lump that wsforming in his throat. He then reached the top. It was so high, Giselle and Austin looked like toys to him. Travis swallowed again, and then began to pant. He saw the thin rope ahead of him, and shuddered. He slowly put his front paw on the rope, and the whole rope wiggled.

How was this ‘Jay’ even supposed to walk on this thing? Travis thought sourly. He carefully put his other front paw on the rope, and almost fell. Travis sighed and moved forward. He was wiggling. Suddenly, Randy flew towards Travis. Travis stared at the macaw with confusion and excitement.

“Randy,” Travis whispered, “What are you doing here?”

“Shhh!” The macaw whispered mysteriously, “I know your secret… You are NOT Jay!” Travis was puzzled and did not know what to say, but he listened anyway.

“I’ll help you cross.” Randy sat on Travis’s head, and from thereon, Travis kept his balance. Austin and Giselle could not see the tiny macaw from far below.

“GO JAY!” Austin cheered. Giselle whistled. Travis smiled. He got out of trouble this time. He walked the rope, with Randy on top of him. He even performed a bonus act: he was able to stand on his two hind legs and hold the front one in the air. He walked faster, even ran, and reached the end.

“Bye!” said Randy and flew away just as Travis climbed down the ladder. The others did not see Randy at all.

As Travis was climbing down the ladder, Giselle dashed to him, Austin behind her. “OH MY GOD JAY!!!” She yelled and licked him in a friendly way, “YOU ROCK!!! You really are the old Jay! And you were awesome up there!” Travis blushed as Austin slinked over.

“That wasss excellent!” Austin complimented, coiling around Travis, which was his way of giving him a hug.

“Too … tight … ” Travis squealed.

Austin uncurled and smiled warmly. He held the top of his tail and Travis high-tailed-pawed Austin.

“Now” said Austin, “you are ready for the ssshow tonight!” Travis wasn’t worried; he counted on Randy to come to his rescue again.

“Yeah,” Travis said proudly, “Tightrope act, here I come!”

“I’ll do my disappearing act,” Giselle said, “Austin will do his trapeze act, Jay will do the tightrope act, and Randy will do the juggling act!”

“Wait,” Travis exclaimed, “Randy has an act?”

“Yeah,” said Austin. “What do you think he doesss? Sssit on Brandon’sss ssshoulder all day?”

Oh no! Travis thought, Randy won’t be with me during the show! What do I do now?!

 

Night Flower

Later that afternoon, Travis decided it was time. He had to tell Giselle and Austin the truth.

He crept towards them while they were buzzing excitedly about the show. When Travis entered, they gave him a warm hello. Travis sighed and sat between them.

“Why the long face?” Austin asked. Travis sighed, and the words spilled out of his mouth like water from a broken jar. He told them about the sow, about landing onto the middle of the circus arena by chance, and then how he pretended to be the circus tiger he was not.

By the time he was done, Giselle and Austin were stumped and silent. He could not look at them in the eyes.

“But,” Austin said, “We sssaw you walk the tightrope!”

“No, Austin,” Travis said, “That was Randy sitting on my head. He helped me keep my balance.”

“Isss your name even Jay?” Austin asked.

“No,” Travis shook his head sadly, “My name is Travis.”

“Get out of here!” said Giselle coldly, breaking her silence. “Yet your tightrope act is already on today’s show. You’ll flunk your act, and once the show is over, we’ll drop you off at the next stop!”

“You pretended to be my friend,” Austin said sadly. “You made usss think you were our friend.” Travis just looked down at the ground, ashamed.

Travis’ act was the show’s opener, and was called the Night Flower. It had been performed by Jay the tiger before he got kidnapped. Travis stepped into the same arena where he had earlier ‘performed’ the tightrope act. Now, I am really going to fall, he thought. Even if Randy came to his rescue, 430 pairs of eyes would be watching him and would know he was cheating … He could not do it. Travis was scared of falling, scared of going back alone to the Siberian wilderness…

 

Travis=Jay?

When Travis made his entrance, the audience clapped and shouted “JAY! JAY! JAY!” Travis frowned sadly and shook his head. Brandon sat in the front row, watching the show, feeling a little nervous, wondering if Jay would be able to perform his entire act. Travis looked up and saw the tightrope smirking at him. He trotted toward the ladder, and started climbing up towards the tightrope. Giselle, Austin, and Randy were staring at him. Travis got to the top of the ladder, and looked at the thin rope ahead. He sighed deeply, and slowly put his front paw on the rope. The rope jolted. Travis felt his heart beating so loud that he was wondering if everyone could hear. The audience was silent even the drummer stopped his exited beat. Travis carefully put his other front paw on the rope, and almost lost his balance. The audience sighed.

Thank god I have a tail, Travis thought as his tail helped him keep balance. Some young children started shouting “GO JAY! GO JAY!”

Travis stepped forward, putting his third paw on the rope.

Three paws, Travis thought, next one, I’m falling. He carefully put his fourth paw on the rope and closed his eyes for a moment. He opened his eyes and started wondering how come he had not fallen already. Travis looked around. Giselle’s and Austin’s eyes were wide open, but Randy was smiling mysteriously. Travis went on carefully on the rope and then sped up without much effort. It felt as if he had been doing this his whole life.

This is easy, Travis thought. The audience cheered.

“GO JAY! GO JAY!!!”

Wait, Travis thought as he kept on stepping forward, Randy was right. I must be Jay. I am Jay! And…Randy never sat on my head, I just imagined it. I did it all by myself! But Randy, he knew all along!

Confidently, Travis performed his bonus act, standing on two legs and holding the other legs high in the air. The audience clapped and cheered. Travis ran and jumped on the tightrope, his paws scurrying along the rope.

The other animals joined in. Giselle started performing her disappearing act, while Austin performed his trapeze act, and Randy his juggling act. Brandon was clapping excitedly. The audience was euphoric.

Travis smiled. He was happy. He grew more confident, and was now able to perform his Night Flower act with assurance. Travis knew that he was now with his old friends and that he had gotten his old life back. And then, Travis-Jay remembered how he was kidnapped, how he escaped, and how he found himself in the Siberian wilderness. But now, he was back home, and that was all that mattered.

The End

Leila’s story

I love to sing. My name is Kila, and I am two. I have a big sister who is 12. My other sister is six. The 12 year old sister‘s name is Mila, and my six year old sister’s name is Nila. It is a summer evening in California, where we live. We go to California Elementary School, but we are at home now.

“A, B, C, D, E, F, G!” I sing. While I am singing, my two sisters, Mila and Nila, cover their ears. I sing a lot of songs, but my favorite song is the ABC’s.

“STOP SINGING!” Nila and Mila shout at the same time.

Then, our mom says, “Okay, okay, she loves to sing.”

I stick my tongue out at Nila and Mila and start skipping around them and say, “Ha ha.”

Then they stick their tongue out back at me. I cross my arms and stomp to my room. I pick up my dog and start saying, “I love to sing!” I start singing the ABC’s again and say, “Come on Lila, start singing with me!” but she just barks.

I ignore Lila and walk away. I go down the stairs to get to the living room. My mom says, “Where have you been?”

I respond, “I was singing in my room with Lila.”

Then I say, “What’s for dinner?”

My mom responds, “There is mac and cheese and chicken.”

I jump all around. I feel excited because macaroni and cheese with chicken is my favorite food.

I walk to Mila and Nila, and I say, “Mommy only made me mac and cheese with chicken, and I’m gonna finish it all.”

Mila and Nila put their fists up in an angry way, besides their chests and in front of their chins.

Then I giggle behind my back. They heard me so they start chasing me, but Mom catches them. They roll their eyes at Mom, and Mom sees them so she says, “Go do your homework!” They race up the stairs to go to their room and then she says to them, “You cannot have mac and cheese and chicken.” She blinks at me, so I know she is joking. Then I giggle again behind my back.   

I sing the ABC’s song and now Mommy giggles.

Mom calls upstairs and says, “Dinner is in four minutes!” in a loud voice.

I say, “That’s gonna take for-ever!” Mom giggles again. Then I giggle back.

Four minutes later, “Dinner time!” Mom yells. Nila and Mila zoom down the stairs. I stand in the way and say, “Stop! You have to pay $5 before you pass me.”

Then, they just go under my arms and say, “Ha ha.” I put my hands on my hips and stomp to the table. I sit down on my high chair. It takes a long time for me to climb up on my high chair.

Mom puts a plate of mac and cheese with chicken and a spoon on my high chair’s tray. I start gulping my food up, and then I take the bone of my chicken and start eating it.

Mila and Nila say, “Ew!”

Then I say, “It’s not ew!”

And they respond, “Yes it is!”

And my mom said, “When you’re done eating, Mila and Nila, go to your room.”

Mila and Nila roll there eyes and say, “Ok,” in a rude way. (Actually in a really rude way.)  Later when Mila and Nila finish their food, they go upstairs to their rooms and do their homework. Later, Mila and Nila finish their homework. When they are done, they walk up to me. Nila and Mila whisper to each other and say, “Should we say sorry to Kila, for not letting her sing what she wants to?” And they agree that they should.

They tell me, “We’re sorry for not letting you sing whatever you want to.”

Then I say, “It’s okay”. And we all got along and lived happily ever after!

THE END!!!

SPACE ADVENTURE!

Jack Lumber was desperate to find lava. He was with his chief. He brought 7 buckets, and one rope. He was in a space station waiting to get lava for fuel for his rocket. He really needed to save this other astronaut named Eli who was lost on the moon.

Suddenly he saw a figure walking toward him. It was his chief!

“I got buckets of lava!” Jack cried.

“Dump it in quick!” called his chief. The lava was bubbling hot. It was orange and a slimy red. Jack was rushing to the aircraft with lava squirting out of the buckets. Jack finally managed to dump the hot orange lava into the fuel tank.

“Thank goodness you came quickly, Jack,” the chief told him.

“It’s okay chief, you reminded me,” replied Jack.

After that, Jack boarded the aircraft and took a deep breath. After an half an hour, he started the countdown.

“3, 2, 1, blast off!’’ he announced into the microphone.

The rocket ship zoomed off of the ground, 300 miles per hour.  Soon, Jack fell asleep.  Once he woke up, the aircraft started to rumble.

What’s happening? Did I kick a lever when I was sleeping? I hope I won’t get kicked out of the space station when I get back! Jack thought to himself.

Jack ran to the escape button and… KABAM! The aircraft exploded. He got in the escape pod just in time.

He stared out of the lava-proof window and looked at the striped red and yellow iron rocket ship pieces floating in space.  Jack thought for a moment.

I think I put too much lava in! I have to tell my chief!

Beep! Beep! Beep! Beep! Beeep! Beeeep!  Jack pulled every lever and pressed every button to try to find a way to get to the moon.  He saw the last lever and thought, I hope that lever can make this escape pod move.  Jack floated to the lever and pulled.

Beeeeeeeeeeeep!  

Next a screen rose up from a hole and said in a robotic voice: “He-llo Jack Lum-ber. What pla-net would you like to go to?”

“I would like to go to the moon, hopefully you can get me there, it’s not a planet,” Jack replied.

Jack was more confident because he could pilot the escape pod better and couldn’t get in trouble that easily.

He thought about why he was sent to go to the moon and remembered that he was there to save another astronaut.  Jack reached into a zippered pocket and a picture of the astronaut Jack was trying to save floated out.

He had bright blond hair, a spacesuit just like Jack’s and was 20 years old.

That was when Jack noticed that the escape pod was floating. Jack could see the moon! He mashed the speed button to get to the moon faster. In 30 seconds, Jack landed on the moon! He was so happy.

He raced up to the telescope room and looked through the telescope and found the man! He was west of the escape pod. Jack raced toward him. When he got there, he asked the man, “What is your name?”

The man replied, “My name is Eli.”

Jack excitedly said, “I am here to get you back to the space station!”

Jack led Eli back to his escape pod. Between five steps, Eli jumped up and down grinning ear to ear. Jack let Eli use the telescope to find his missing rocket.

He found it! The missing rocket was east of the escape pod.

Jack told Eli to get a rope. Eli got it in exactly five seconds! They tied one end of the rope to the escape pod. They pulled as hard as they could. Finally they managed to get it into Eli’s rocket. Jack pulled out two buckets of lava from the toolbox in his escape pod.

“Hey, use this for fuel, Eli,” Jack suggested. They poured both buckets of lava into the fuel tank. Jack hoped that the rocket would not explode.

Jack and Eli climbed aboard the spaceship and took off. Jack gazed out the window staring at asteroids and comets. They passed Mars and Venus. Jack stared at them too. The spaceship finally flew into earth.

Jack’s chief saw a dot. He knew it was Eli’s spaceship! He jumped up and down waving even though he couldn’t see Jack and Eli. In ten minutes, Eli landed the ship safely.

The chief congratulated Jack for being such a responsible person on his first mission.

“Jack you were awesome! You escaped that big explosion!”

Jack replied, “Thanks Chief.”

He gave Jack a one month break. After that, Jack invited his children to see him train.  Since Jack did such a great job, Jack’s children could live in the space station with Jack, Eli and the chief.

 

THE END!!!

A Great Basketball Season

One day, a boy, who was 22-years-old, named Jasper, set up a goal to become a famous, rich basketball player. Suddenly, his dad saw him set up the goal and said, “You can get a serious injury.”

Jasper said, “I’ll make sure I won’t get a serious injury because I’ll do a lot of crossovers and break their ankles.”

His dad said, “Ok.”

Jasper was very excited. His mom heard him and his dad talking.

She said, “What if you get in an argument and get ejected?”

Jasper said, “I won’t argue. Instead, I’ll stop people from arguing.”

Jasper’s mom said, “Ok.”                                

Then, Jasper’s parents signed Jasper up for the NBA. He was going to be an undrafted player, so his parents took him to a stadium. Once they arrived there, they met a referee. The referee said, “You signed up to be an undrafted player, right?”

Jasper answered, “Yes.”

The referee said, “If you want to be in one of the NBA teams, I have to see if you play well and have a lot of experience.”

Jasper answered, “Ok.”                          

Jasper and the referee played 1-on-1, knockout, a 3-point contest, and HORSE. Jasper won 1-on-1, 30-28. Jasper won 5 games and the referee won 3 games of knockout. In the 3-point contest, Jasper scored 28 points and the referee scored 24. In HORSE, Jasper had HOR when the referee had HORSE.

The referee yelled, “Wow! You’re so good!”

Jasper replied, “Thanks!”

The referee said, “Well, all I’m going to say is I will go talk to the NBA commissioner about this.”

Jasper screamed loudly, “YES! Thank you so much, sir!”                                         

A few weeks later, Jasper got an email from the NBA commissioner. It said: “Congratulations, Jasper! Based on your skill level, the NBA has decided to allow you to be part of a team. You may pick any team in this list.”

There were only two teams available: Miami Heat and Cleveland Cavaliers. This was a hard decision for Jasper because his favorite teams were the Cleveland Cavaliers and the Miami Heat. The Cavaliers were 2nd in the East last year. They made it all the way to the Finals, but lost to the Warriors. They also had a really good player that won 4 MVPs, named LeBron James. The Heat were the 10th seed last year, so they didn’t even make it to the playoffs.

After thinking for a long time, he chose the Miami Heat because his favorite player, Dwyane Wade, was on the Heat. Jasper also wanted to help them win a championship again. After a couple months, Jasper played in his first game! Jasper was prepared to play his 1st ever game in the NBA. The 1st game was easy. The final score was 118-100.

Five months went by quickly. Jasper had helped the Heat make it to the NBA Finals against the defending champions, Golden State Warriors. It was the last game in the finals and the series was tied 3 wins to 3 wins. Whoever won this game would be the champions. The game started.

Jasper wasn’t in the starting lineup. In the 1st quarter, Jasper’s team was getting crushed. The score was 31-19.

Jasper asked, “Why am I not in the starting lineup?”

The coach said, “You’re one of our newest players and I think it’d be better to have players with more experience to be starting.”

Jasper said, “I’m better than some of these players, and I can prove it.”

The coach said, “Alright, let’s see what you can do, but I’m going to wait until third quarter.”

They were losing by 30 points. The score was 60-30, so the other team has 2x more points than their team. At halftime, Jasper’s team was losing by 40 points: 90-50! He was worried that the players on the court now were going to make his team lose.

The 3rd quarter started. The coach put Jasper in the game. When Jasper entered as a small forward, the Heats were losing by 30 points, 100-70. They kept on shooting three-pointers but missed a lot. When the 4th quarter began, the score was 110-85. Jasper decided to call for the ball a lot so he could swish every three he took.

The game continued. Jasper shot 15 threes and made all of them! The score was 130-130! Jasper and his team made a tremendous comeback!

There were 5 seconds left in the game, and Jasper had the ball. 5, 4, 3, 2, Jasper shot a three. The whole stadium became silent. 1, it swished in right when the buzzer sounded! The final score was… 133-130 and Jasper’s team were the champs!!

Jasper yelled, “YEAHH!” Everyone got a trophy. As they celebrated, confetti fell from the stadium’s ceiling! When the confetti stopped dropping, they announced the Finals MVP award to… Jasper!!

Everyone was so proud of him, especially the coach.

“Good job,” the coach said. “You really proved that you are really good at basketball, and better than your other teammates. Next time, for the first game in the next season, I’ll put you in the starting lineup.”

When Jasper got home, his mom and dad were very proud and happy for Jasper. They started hugging him and crying happy tears.

“I told you I wouldn’t get hurt,” Jasper said.

“You’re really good at basketball,” his mom said. “I can tell you worked a lot and it was worth it.”

This is the best day of my life, Jasper thought. He couldn’t wait to start another season.

The Machine

Prologue

“So how did you get here?” I said.

I was at my house, talking to the technology genius, Xethen, who was an alien who had kept his designs secret to everyone before. I had tracked him down, spying on him for some time and the only way that I would agree to stop spying on him was if I got five minutes of his time to ask whatever I wanted. Since I was 16 years old and needed money for college, I thought I could make money off of this.

He looked at me like, ‘why did you ask that question?’ Finally he said that he obviously teleported and why I didn’t think of that idea. I told him that we don’t have that technology yet, but we might be close to inventing one.

I asked him a few more questions about how he created his machine that could create anything, but he doesn’t give me the full answer.

He’s hiding something, I thought.

Then I thought of a really good question: “Can I see this creating machine?” I needed to see if this machine was real, so that I wasn’t wasting my time. He happily pressed a few buttons and then the machine appeared.

I was sort of surprised that the machine wasn’t fake. It seemed impossible that this was real. He showed me the machine and a bit about how it worked. He also showed me that it worked.

The machine looked complicated. Nothing about it looked like our technology. There were many parts to the huge machine and it must have taken years to invent and create.

He asked me, “You like it?’’

“Of course I do,” I replied.

I was amazed. I couldn’t wait to try this myself. The problem was, my five minutes were almost up. I quickly asked for ways I could contact him. He told me that I could telepathically talk to him.

A few days later, he showed me the design…

 

Chapter 1

The Machine

“Almost done!” I said looking in awe at the machine.

“Once I finish this, I will make millions!” Now I thank myself for asking him for ways I could contact him. Otherwise I wouldn’t get this great opportunity.

Finally it was finished. After years of work, it was done. It was the gateway to fame and money. Its bright lights illuminated, signalling everything was working, well, that was the theory. The only way to test the machine for real was to test it out.

First I tried making something simple, not wanting something destructive to happen. I typed “an apple” into the newly made keyboard. After a few minutes, the apple formed. I tasted the apple. Just because something looks right, doesnt mean its perfect. It was sour and very juicy. The machine did its job! My hands touched the ceiling and I almost banged my head as I jumped for joy.

 

Chapter 2

My Plan

If I wanted to sell this, people needed to know about this. Maybe I had to give people a demo. In case it broke down, I also had to make a spare one or if for some reason someone stole it, I had to make a spare copy of the machine. Afterwards, I would leave selling for tomorrow.

 

Chapter 3

The Tragedy

The next day, I went to check on my machine. It was still there, like I expected. Then I went to the bathroom to brush my teeth, and when I came back IT WAS GONE! “How could this happen!?” I asked myself. “It was here a minute ago!”

Then I heard a clang sound. It sounded metallic as metal hit metal. The machine was heavy, so the person had to still be in the building. Also this building was big so it would not be as easy to get out.

Finally, I found the machine, but not the person that stole it. He must have run away once he made the noise. It was carelessly left in the middle of the hallway. I did, however, find a piece of paper with a 10 digit number and a note. It said:

 

This is my phone number. Call me after you steal it.

555-706-2693

gdqho fkrqj

 

I looked at the note with confusion. The last two words were strange. They were not words. They must be in code, I thought.

The phone number wasn’t in code, so I could call it if I wanted to.

 

Chapter 4

More Tragedy

Today was the first day that people could try out the machine. A long line of people was forming. I felt so happy that this was happening. If I charged everyone who tried the machine, I could make lots of money.

It was the evening now. The line had dispersed, but there were still hundreds of people. The next person in line looked strange. He created something that I could not tell what, but it looked dangerous.

There was a beeping noise,” BEEP BEEP BEEP”

It was rapidly getting faster. Then to my surprise, the person ran away. There was a click. Then a huge explosion.

A giant force pushed me back and it looked like I was going in slow motion. Everything went black and white as I hit the wall. I felt all the pain. I fell and sat there for a minute. I saw everything, everything that happened in the explosion. I tried to scream, but nothing came out. Then, everything went black.

 

Chapter 5

Confrontation

I woke up in the hospital. At first, I thought this was all a dream. It would be good if it was a dream. If it was, I wouldn’t be blown up. I soon realized that it was real because I saw the alien that showed me the designs, Xethan. He was waiting for me.

He said, “You have messed with my machine which I patented on my planet. The consequence of copywriting is death. So I will kill you!”

I said, “But I’m not on your planet! So the same laws do not apply!”

“I don’t care. You still messed with my machine. You were careless about the machine and let the wrong hands take your illegal copy, and now it’s caused a lot of deaths.”

Then Xethan used the original machine to create a dagger. I tried to get out but I couldn’t move. Once he created it, he quickly threw it and it went through my heart.

“But — but — ” I said. “I won’t ever do it again!”

And those were the last words I ever said.

 

THE END!

Jessie

A 12-year-old girl named Katie Daniels was staring out the window with her White Shepherd Bolt and Eskimo Snowflake, who previously ran across the streets of London (Bolt had stolen hot dogs from a hot dog stand, running away from Snowflake).

 

7 kittens were in a cardboard box next to a pet shop, and when Katie decided to walk with her 2 white canines, she saw the kittens. “Hey, kitty” whispered Katie. She took one of the kittens from the box and continued, “I’ll name you Jessie.”

 

When Jessie, Katie, Bolt and Snowflake got home, Katie told her mother and father that Jessie didn’t have rabies, and she was spayed by her previous owners. In just 2 hours, Jessie had a collar with a tag that said: “Jessie. 50th St. Between 8th and 9th Av.”, a food/water bowl, a bed, and toys– perfect for a kitten only 10 weeks old.

 

That night, Bolt and Snowflake tried to make nighttime the best time for Jessie. “Jessica” Snowflake said in a sing-song voice “You gotta get in the nighttime spirit!”

 

“Yeah!” Bolt sang, “Come on. Sing! Why Should I Worry? Why Should I Care? I may not have a dime, but I got street savior-”

 

“Okay, okay, I get it. But there are times you can get into the night time spirit and there are some times you need to sleep!” Jessie sleepily said. Snowflake’s jaws dropped. “How did you know?” she began. “I just do!” cried Jessie angrily. And she slept. And then the dogs slept.

 

The next morning, Jessie, Bolt and Snowflake were all singing “Why Should I Worry?” When Katie left, Jessie went crazy, finally going under the sitting room sofa, whimpering in fear. “Come on, Jess-Jess! Me and Snowflake had gone over it before. We are fine once Katie leaves for school!” But Jessie’s fear turned into anger as she went out the flap Bolt and Snowflake use. “Jessica! Wanna read Chapter 1 through 9 of The Kids From DISCO?” She followed Jessie as she (Jessie) ran into the London streets. “That’s easy for you to say!” cried Jessie, again angrily. Jessie lied down in front of a fence, guarding herself. When Katie got back from school, she found Jessie missing. “JESSIE! JESSICA! JESS-JESS! Where are you, Jessie?”

 

Jessie heard the yells of Katie, and ran across the streets, only to find a pack of dogs that belonged to Katie’s 9-year old friend, Alex. They were going to Regent’s Park.

 

Back at Katie’s house, Katie texted all her friends on her phone if they knew where Jessie was. Finally she got a call from Alex. Katie wanted to go to Regent’s Park before she needed to take a shower. “MUSH, BOLT! RUN LIKE A TRAIN, SNOWFLAKE!” yelled Katie. Off they went, faster than the wind carrying them. When they reached Regent’s Park, Alex gave Katie, Jessie. She still had her cute red and white collar, her Dalmatian-like spots and her big blue eyes.

 

Snowflake was very tired after getting Jessie home. Bolt told Snowflake she was amazing.  But Jessie responded “Screw you, man, I’d do what I want!” Buzz Mccallister, a cat that belonged to Ryder Adams, Katie’s classmate, jumped on Bolt, Snowflake and Jessie’s room window and heard everything. Snowflake was about to say ‘I want the pizza…NOW.’ when she saw Buzz Mccallister. “AHEM, Buzz Mccallister, but I was going to say ‘I want the pizza…NOW’ so I can get my wish for pizza…NOW. But because of you, nothing happened.” yelled Snowflake, not amused. Buzz Mccallister teased “It doesn’t happen because you are in the real world, not a EXTRAORDINARY world, you need to go read your mind, you need to get lost into it, you need to lose your mind and you need…you need…” Buzz Mccallister was very talkative. “You need a good kick in the butt, Buzz Mccallister.” finished Bolt.

 

But Jessie didn’t say anything. She wasn’t as brave as Bolt and Snowflake. Finally, she ordered the two dogs to throw Buzz Mccallister out the window, which had no bars. Bolt and Snowflake, who OBVIOUSLY had Buzz Mccallister as a pet peeve, started barking for Katie. Katie ran into the bedroom shouting “WHAT IN THE MILKY WAY GALAXY ARE YOU THREE DOING AT 2:15 IN THE MORNING!” Bolt and Snowflake growled at Buzz Mccallister. Jessie was almost fully under her bed covers, even the sheet. She lashed her tail FAST at Buzz Mccallister. “Oh. I see you got your pet peeve, Buzz Mccallister, but I don’t want to blame him. He belongs to one of my friends, Ryder Adams.” Buzz Mccallister rolled his eyes at Katie. “Oh, WHATEVER!” yelled Katie “I will drop you on the count of three: THREE!” and down. Went. Buzz Mccallister. Nobody said anything for the rest of the night.

 

The next day, Katie went to school. Katie’s parents went to work. Everyone left the pets locked in their room. Of course, the dogs had a newspaper and Jessie had a litter box as a bathroom, the pets have 3 beds, 1 for each, each had a bowl of food and a bowl of water, all filled up to the brim, and toys to play with. But the three wanted to go outside. Finally, an idea came to Bolt’s brain. “I KNOW! LET’S CAUSE SOME MISCHIEF ON THE PASSENGER TRAIN!”

“Oh no” replied Jessie, who wasn’t very adventurous.

 

At the train station, you can guess who was there, but just in case, it was BUZZ MCCALLISTER. Bolt found a hot dog stand and grabbed all his mouth could carry. Snowflake bet Jessie if she could grab a rat from the train tracks without getting hit by a train. Jessie responded “Easy.” She grabbed a rat and hid under the train tracks as a train passed by. Bolt had the hot dogs wrapped around his waist, instead of around his chest. Misty, the alpha dog of Alex’s dog pack, smiled and said “Come on. I will show you the real life train station. “

 

Actually, the real ‘train station’ was an airport. “Great!” happily cried Bolt. “Let’s cause some mischief! Come on, Page! Come on, Molly! Come on, everybody!” Page was a mixed breed dog. Molly was a beagle. The other dogs were called: Pongo the Dalmatian, Perdita the Dalmatian, Domino the German Shepherd, and Polly the Beagle. All dogs were happy to meet Ryder’s dog pack, all Huskies: Wink, Addison, Basil, Tucker, Everest, Noah, Droplet and Splat. The Bark Park Adoption Center was closed for the day, so the not-adopted dogs got to go to the ‘real train station’ as well. Jessie was scared of a CROWD, so she ran away, all the way back to the train station.

 

Bolt could not cause mischief. Snowflake was speechless. Everyone was speechless, even BOLT! But then Misty knew what to say. “We are going to have to go back to the train station. MUSH! RUN LIKE A TRAIN! And off they went, to get Jessie. “I knew I shouldn’t have thought of mischief in the first place!” cried Bolt. “Just forget it! FORGET IT!” yelled Snowflake “Katie could come home in any minute!” Misty wasn’t listening. All she wanted was to get Jessie, and get Jessie ALIVE.

 

At the train station, Jessie was actually still alive. But she was being carried away in a cardboard box. The box was going to the caboose car of a passenger train. Misty gasped as Jessie was carried away on the train. The train was going into a tunnel. A very, very, VERY dark tunnel. “Who’s gonna get Jessie?” cried Misty in fear. She ran in little circles, which means she thought she was going to explode.

“I will!” shouted Snowflake. She was very brave.

“Alright?” responded Bolt. “But we will go with you.”

Snowflake hopped on the fast-moving train, and went in the little door of the caboose car. Bolt and Misty were running after the train. Wink found Buzz Mccallister. He talked to himself on Ryder’s phone: “Ryder, this is Buzz Mccallister. I’ve concluded the train prank on the Orient Express station.”

“Buzz Mccallister” said Wink.

“I’ve got a trophy. Put it with all my other trophies when I come home. And bring me a coffee when you get back.”

“Buzz Mccallister” said Wink.

Buzz Mccallister stopped texting and said “What is it? This is a very important call!”

Wink groaned “Ugh. My times have to go over this. ARE YOU AT THE BOTTOM OF THIS?! I THINK YOU NEED TO LEARN ABOUT ‘PRANKS’!” “You just want Ryder to pluck all my whiskers out! They’re pretty nifty, aren’t they?” Wink almost tied Buzz Mccallister to the train tracks when he saw everyone GONE. Wink shouted “Buzz Mccallister, stand aside!” But Buzz Mccallister was running away from the station, all the way to Ryder’s bedroom. “UGH” Wink once again groaned.

 

Snowflake only made things worse: She and Jessie hung from the train. Now EVERYONE, excluding Wink was running after the train. Snowflake had her left paw grabbing a wire. Bolt saw how close the caboose car was from the tunnel. “It’s still running 60 mph. Snowflake, LET GO OF THE WIRE!” cried Bolt. Half a second later, everyone (excluding Wink, of course) was chanting “LET GO! LET GO! LET GO!” to Snowflake. Finally, she yelled “I. Will. Let. Go.” Snowflake let go of the wire. She and Jessie fell to the train tracks and got up. Everyone-even Wink-watched as the caboose train went in the tunnel. “Yes! WE DID IT!” shouted Jessie in relief. Everyone helped each other off the train tracks. “WOW! That was amazing, Jessica!” shouted Bolt. “How?” asked Jessie, bewildered. “You made us go on a big adventure. I love big adventures. You really deserve those words, Jess-Jess.” answered Bolt. Just then, another train passed by. “Let’s go home.” Snowflake giggled.

 

That night, everyone was back at home. All the owners were afraid that they would be lost forever. How they got home? They found recycling trucks and tried to find their owner’s face (whenever a pet was lost, Katie, Alex, and Ryder  looked out their bedroom windows). The not-adopted dogs went back to the Bark Park Adoption Center. Katie put Jessie, Bolt and Snowflake to bed. Katie whispered “Good night, Bolt. Good night, Snowflake. Good night, Jessie.” She went to her bedroom. Bolt licked Jessie’s ears. Snowflake licked Jessie’s tail. “Now I know that Jessie’s not cowardly at ALL.” said Bolt. “Me neither.” said Snowflake. Pretty soon, everyone was asleep.

 

THE END

A Dogs Story

Chapter 1 Neve

Woof, woof! Who abandoned me in this blizzard? I don’t even have my toy or my bone!

Oops, I forgot to introduce myself. I’m Neve. I’m a German Shepard. I used to live with an old man, but he must have abandoned me in a blizzard and now here I am. My top fear is blizzards! One time I got buried inside a snowman when one of my friends was playing with snowballs, and I got trapped inside.

Long, long ago, I lived with a girl. The girl who raised me, her name was Evelyn, and she loved animals. Her husband kicked me out because he didn’t like dogs.

Oh! I smell a girl. She smells like Evelyn! I wag my tail. I’ll go find her.

 

Chapter 2 Cana

Wow! I see a dog in my backyard! She is black and white, and really big. My dream is to have a pet dog! By the way, my name is Cana and I am 5 years old. My mom’s name is Evelyn. I always wanted a pet dog and my mom did too. She would still have one if the one she got for Christmas was not kicked out by my dad. I have to get this dog to stay still so I can tell my mom.

“STAY!” I yell.

Ugh! She won’t listen! Yes! I have dog treats in my pockets!

“Here puppy, here!” She’s staying! “Mom! Mom! There’s a puppy here!” Great! My mom’s hurrying outside.

 

Chapter 3 Neve

This is awesome!

After I walked through a forest to find a clearing where I could find somewhere to sleep, I saw a row of houses and a big hill. I followed the scent of Evelyn to a backyard.

Evelyn’s here! Wow! She jumps up and down, and I bark and wag my tail.

“Remember, Cana? When you got a dog for Christmas?” said Evelyn. “The dog we got was her. She found her way back to us. Let’s go to bed Cana.”

Evelyn brings me into the garage. I’m scared of the dad.

He comes into the garage to go to work, because he’s in his job uniform.

“Humph!” he says. “Those girls got a dog again! Leave now! Leave now!”

I run out of the garage into the next house.

 

Chapter 4 Neve

Help! Help! Never mind I smell human. Oh, I know Katherine and Jane. When Cana was two they were classmates!

Anyway I’m tired! Let me sleep in their bed tonight.

They drag me into the house and put me on their bed to sleep.

ZZZ.

“Help! Help!” The next morning, another dad comes into the room to get Katherine and Jane up for breakfast.

Uh oh! Yikes! He sneezed! I don’t like sneezing dads.

Quick! I have to escape before he catches me! Oh, no! This guy must be allergic!

I dash out of the house into the backyard, go up a hill, and go to a random house.

Oh no! I’m lost again! Another blizzard has started! I have to go to another house as quickly as possible.

I wish I could have learned Hannah’s address! She was in Cana’s preschool class. Oh, well, I’ll just go to a random house.

First I’ll go to the next door and scratch the door. Shz! shhhhz! Yes! I see Hannah! I’ll spend the day at her house.

Nooo! Her two seventeen-year-old sisters, Sophia and Lorelei, are here! They like to pull at my tail! Double nooo! Ouch! Hannah’s mom drags me inside.

They’re not only pulling on my tail, Hannah’s baby sister Alicia is here. Last time three years ago, she squeezed me so hard, I almost threw up!

I’m leaving now. “Bye Bye!” I say to them, but they only hear barks.

I go back to Cana’s house.

 

Chapter 5 Cana

I see my best friend, Neve again! “Hi, cute puppy!”

 

Chapter 6 Neve

Yes! Now I can take the leash from Cana’s pocket. I know she always keeps one in her pocket. I bite the zipper and pull her pocket open and steal the leash before she notices. Phew! Now I have to put the leash on quickly.

Ow! Ugh! Yes! Mmm! This leash smells like creamy peanut butter! Oh, Cana has her hand on my leash! Hooray! I can drag Cana over to Katherine’s and Jane’s house!

Ooff! Yes! I lead her out of her house and she picks up Katherine and Jane!

Ow! Yikes! I have to drag all three of them and my back is tired. Also Hannah lives up a hill and and I don’t like going up hills. Oof! Ouch! Heeelp! There! Woof! Woof!  Hannah knows what I’m up to!

 

Chapter 7: Neve Sleepover.

I walk into the house with all 4 girls following.

“We’re going to a sleepover tonight to make plans about Neve,” Hannah said.

They bring me up into Hannah’s room, give me a really special dinner of steak and the best dog food in the world, and then we went to bed.

ZZZZ!

Wow! These people kick in their sleep.

What a restless sleep I had. Oh at least I had somewhere to rest.

Breakfast time! Oooh waffles! This is the second time I’ve ever eaten human food! Uh-oh! I hear footsteps!

“Sorry! Too late!” said Peter. To get me to leave, Peter started kicking and hitting me.

 

Chapter 8: Together!

Ok, I will leave. Sniff, sniff! I smell Evelyn!

“Puppy pass around club!” Evelyn cried! Every day, they go to the clearing in the wood to give food to me and also pass me to the next person, unless it was Cana and Evelyn, or Katherine or Jane. I will sleep over at a new house each time.

Soon she found me and the other girls, so they could sneak me in their beds. They all took turns. Cana and Evelyn got 2 days since they were the bosses. Hannah got one day because no one else in her family was in the club and Katherine and Jane got two days because there was one day for Jane and one for Katherine. Now everything is good and the fathers still don’t know about it.

 

The End

Forgotten Words

Forgotten books, when the pages have not been turned for years. With forgotten books come forgotten times. Parts of history plucked away from our knowledge. We move on. “Things of the past” we call them. Kindles and ebooks have replaced the thousand-year-old paper. But even more so forgotten books take with them forgotten words. With no words means no stories, no simple thoughts to fill your once-empty mind. Words make the sentences that will change your life forever.

“Will you marry me?”

“It’s a girl!”

“I got the job!”

If there is one thing we take for granted, it’s words. We use them more and more, yet, we say less and less. We use them for mindless, selfish, and exaggerated things. The once beautiful words have collapsed. They have not lost power, no, the power is just lost.

But what if every single word was completely forgotten?

A girl with fiery red hair, and eyes that are like the color of a restless sea. But the thing that got the most attention was her skin so pale it looked almost white. She was pointing to the last slice of pizza, sitting there untouched on her frail kitchen table. Thankfully for humanity simple things like pointing were still known. A woman in her mid-forties nodded. With a slip of the hand the pizza was gone.

If you came in this future world today you would cry. You would cry for all those who never get to hear I love you, you would cry for all those who want to yell, but they can’t for they are forced to be quiet. And you would sob for the human race, waiting in silence for a single word.

In and out, in and out. The red-haired girl breathed hard against the cold night air. Every night she did this, walked along her old village, looking. Not looking for a lost cat, and not looking for herself, for what could she find without words?

She did not know what she was looking for. She was just hoping to find it. She was in her old green dress that was so worn out that it made the brass buttons look like gold amongst the faded silk. This was her favorite dress, not because of the way it looked when she turned around, nor the way it felt smooth against her skin. It was because of those buttons, buttons just big enough for a scribble on them. Everyday she looked at them, and everyday she set out looking, she did not know for what, and she did not know why, but she looked. If you came to this bright, pale girl, and you looked at her dress, you would see in the moonlight that her buttons, they each had a single word. A word as clear as day, but for this little girl it was no more than a scribble on a button: “Look.”

A small hand creaked the door open, letting in a breath of the still night air. She pointed out, waiting for the nod to step down into the quiet village.

As soon as her mother nodded she was out the door, letting the winds fill her soundless soul. She was just getting into the rhythm of breathing when a single rock saved humanity by tripping a 10-year-old girl.

As she stumbled down a deep hill, with pieces of glass from abandoned times, and paper from times before that. As she fell she felt an energy rush through her, liveness going through her veins, a feeling that she could say anything. She opened her mouth and she made noise, she grunted, she screamed, and she yelled gibberish. For the first times in hundreds of years, a world unexpressed, a world where crying is silent, and life is mute.  But now they heard, they heard a noise that slowly walked away from them years before, now it came back with every grunt, squeal and wail coming from this petite 10-year-old girl.

When at last she rolled down into a weed-invaded meadow, for the first time in her life nothing forced her to be quiet, but she stayed quiet, and still unable to think. So because there was no word for safe, home, mother, or love, she kept walking.

She walked through the leaves, at last able to notice the satisfying sound of the crunch beneath the soles of her frail boots, and when she finally jerked her head up she noticed small furry animals scrambling around, for they were not used to a creature bigger than them walking amongst them. She ran toward them, forgetting the dirt path she left behind. This pale little girl at last laughed, she laughed with all her might, with all her power, with all of her voice.

Nearby, music played, a rhythm so soothing that she moved toward it with every step matching the beat. Music was one of the many things she had never heard before. It filled her, wanting her to know more. She stepped forward letting the bush prick her thin skin. She stood there, watching the bright colors dancing in front of her, laughing and smiling people dancing around one another. With their fans clapping along to the beat, each one pale and plump with wrinkles around their eyes. They were all in their mid-60s, there was not one child. Yet this undersized little girl fit in though the crowd, mesmerized by the music. She clapped her hands off-beat, and squealed loudly, wanting them to do it faster. Everything in this village was so loud and colourful it just made her scream with joy.

Even the houses were painted the colors of the fading rainbow, and lanterns hung over each doors changing colors every so often, but just enough so this place seemed as magical as it was for the little girl.

She ran up and down the street giggling with delight, it was not much of a surprise when she finally caught the eye of one of the dancers. This heavy, jolly, middle-aged little man was so surprised when he saw her that he did not yell, or go up to her like he usually would have. He went straight to the mayor yelling words that the older man seemed to respond to.

This caught the frail little girl by surprise, and she peered out through the crowd only to see a huge, curly-haired, 50-year-old man talking to a bald, thin, elderly man that looked like if the wind blew harder it would blow him into a pile of ash. They made noises that the little girl did not understand, they moved their hands, and made gruff complex sounds. But they understood each other with no pointing or nodding.

The two men walked along the cracks of the sidewalk speaking and speaking, but to this little girl it was no more than making gibberish with their mouths. When the dancing got so loud and colorful that the little girl could not focus on two old men speaking words she did not understand, suddenly a single word was spoken, a word she saw every day of her life. We do not know who spoke it or why, but this one word was spoken. The word “look” clicked inside her, and she started running up to the men. Curious how they did that, spoke and meant what they said. Not guessing what people meant and not pointing, she eagerly tugged on the thin man’s orange shirt. He turned around and kneeled down so his balding head sparkled in the moonlight.

“So you must be the little one who desires to speak,” he said in a such a soft voice it  was no more than a whisper. She didn’t know what this meant but she nodded. She already trusted this man with all of her heart. He gently pushed her into a big, faded blue house and into a room.  The room was the one thing in the village that was old, brown, and fading.  He ushered her into the small room, speaking to her the whole way.

“I had a feeling that you would come soon,” he said as he opened the door for her. “Now where is it?” he asked himself. Following a satisfied sigh.

He pulled out a rusted key. She had seen it before when her Mother unlocked her box full of old jewels. For the first time ever this red-haired girl felt desire. She felt that she wanted to be home, home with her Mother, home with the woman she loved.

She knew that her mother felt the same way, for you didn’t need words to describe a Mother’s love. But nonetheless, she sat there, also feeling the desire to stay, feeling the need that she had to be here, wait with them, speak with them. So she sat there, watching the man’s every move. With his frail hands he locked the key into place, and turned it slowly. A click was heard throughout the quiet room, one of the only in the this small village. He plopped down a large rectangular obliged, two in fact, with the neatest wood carvings she had ever seen. She was staring at it, at those scribbles, those beautiful scribbles that were on her beloved buttons that laid across her chest at the very moment, moving up and down as she breathed.

“Ahh, young one, you like this, yes? For all we know this is the last book around. Now we know all letters, we ca…” The man was cut short.

As the girl slowly opened the book, she started speaking gibberish. Pointing and yelling as if saying I want to read, I want to speak, I want a voice. All the man could do was nod along. For this man knew how to express his path through life, the color, the laughter, the joy of words.

He could not understand how such a girl could not absorb such a simple thing, but he sighed and moved on, forgetting all of the men and women who had to live in silence, for him they were just people in a far away land not daring to come near. He could not realize, no matter how much he tried, the meaningless of being together, of being in the lifeless world without knowing the love of language. As the sun kissed the lush green hills leaving tints of orange in pale blue sky, the old man sat on the same chair, next to the same book. Annoyance took over soft voice.

“Why don’t you understand? You don’t know the treasure of language, you refuse to learn it!” He bellowed, but the girl did not flinch, she did not move, she just stared into the man’s eyes. The ticking clock gabbed away for the last few hours yet the girl stayed silent, only here and there copying a sound or a movement. The old man stayed as patient as he could but soon his smile changed, it became forced, and his eyes became watery.   

“I-I thought you could learn,” his voice went soft again. “Never mind, but the hope in you, I will bring you home,” The man decided. “Let me fetch my cloak.”

He sighed as his frail body struggled to get up from the faded velvet chair. The girl sat there watching him struggle against his own thin body, a war between himself and his thoughts were displayed on his face. He hoped she realised, he hoped for her, he hoped that she could laugh and play, dance and speak amongst them. He hoped that she could do what they already know, he hoped that she could speak. As the silent room became nothing more but the ticking of the clock, the man kept struggling. He struggled watching the girl who in his eyes refused to learn anything, and she struggled watching the man try to get up.

There was nothing she knew how to do, how to help. So she stood up, the sound of her heels against the floorboard echoing along the room. The man watched in deep thought as the pale little girl put both hands on his shoulder and push him back down to the fading silk chair, and sit in her seat just as quickly.  

“So you do want to learn,” the old man said breathlessly. “Well then, you need a name.

“My name just so happens to be Brouhaha,” the man went on, much more cheerfully now. Opening up the book he continued not even looking at the girl, “It means to bring an uproar, but we don’t know what uproar means,” he sighed. “That page got lost. Many pages in fact got lost,” he stated simply. He opened to the first page of the book, the girl stared at the first word. He pointed his long slim finger at a scribble. The girl’s frail voice grunted, pointing at the beautiful glass window, now showing only darkness.

“Yes, yes … I suppose you’re right.” Brouhaha settled. He stood up, fighting gravity, only to soon surrender.

“Wait,” Brouhaha called, not ready to admit failure, “You still need a name.” This caught the little girl by surprise, a “name” felt important, like it represented something. She nodded fast, she wanted a word.

“Yes, yes we got off subject didn’t we?” he joked. He expected no emotion, just blank stairs from the little red-haired girl. But instead the pail little girl erupted with laughter, her pale face uncertain no more. When she laughed she spoke, she stated that she was one of them. She could express herself.

“My, you found that funny. Laughter … laughter! How do like that name? You can bring laughter and joy to your people. Teach them how to laugh, to love, to speak!” Brouhaha exclaimed. He wanted to go on, tell the the girl all about laughter, about her name. But he was interrupted, interrupted by a small, squeaky voice that sounded like it never been used before.

“Laughter.” Then the girl stood up, and walked out the chipped door without another word.

The next day the girl was back, back in the dusty old room with the shades pulled up for some sort of light. She waited for the man, she waited for the man to come to teach her more words. More names, more colors, more ways of life. So the little girl sat on the old velvet chair.

“Laughter, laughter, laughter!” she giggled over and over again to herself. She kept doing this until her frail voice could not stand it, and her hoarse voice could not produce more than a whisper. So soon she just sat there, speechless, waiting for Brouhaha. He never came.

The next day Laughter was back, her smile not defeated. She sat at her old chair, not worried. So this went on day after day. Every night when the stars were at their brightest, she went to sleep under the same tree at the edge of the colorful village. When the sun came every morning she searched the streets for food, but she was not worried. To her it was normal, she had no deep understanding of what she did. One day after hours of sitting in her chair, she burst into tears. With each tear came something so fragile, so pure, yet so sad. With each little tear came an understanding of who she is, and who her people were. She understood that the people of the village she came from did not know her, they did not know anything. Not even themselves. She then understood, with tears trickling down her face like a cold wash of reality, the meaning of the timeless word, word.

“I knew it, I knew it!” A familiar voice called behind the dying bush. Brouhaha stood up with a great struggle. The girl kept crying, giving no sign that the Brouhaha was there.

“What is wrong?” the old man asked as he brushed dirt off his clothes. His only intention was to break the barrier of the feelings for Laughter to understand herself, he thought that she was crying for her. Nothing more, nothing less.

“You’re not hopeless, you cry, you have feelings. The people will love you, Laughter,” Brouhaha said soothingly, as if it fixed everything.

“People hopeless.” Laughter gasped between harsh breathing. She stared at Brouhaha with large, sad eyes. He realized that she said her first real words, words with meaning. It killed him to know that her first words came from the harshness of humanity.  

“We will fix it. I promise,” he yelled out. He did not say it for the girl, he said it for himself.

 

One Year Later

 

“Are you sure you are ready to go?” Brouhaha asked holding back tears, as he helped Laughter get up on a horse.

“I have waited long enough, my people need me. Besides, you taught me well,” Laughter said confidently. With that she galloped out of the colorful village, and into the world waiting for life, without another word.

 

Dear Brouhaha,

The world lost its beautiful voice gradually, like a dying mind, until it was nothing but a shadow of its past self. I am lucky enough to help it gain back its power.

You once asked me how I came to your village, but then I was incapable of words. I found it my duty to write the story to you.

The people of my village are doing very well, quite a few people are saying a few words. I miss talking to you though.

At night it is more silent than when I left it, for now I know the joy of noise.

I beg of you Brouhaha to never forget what words do in your life, and how they changed mine.

I miss you dearly,

Laughter

 

Jack-o-lantern

Chapter One

I’m a Jack-O-Lantern apparently. That’s what the pumpkins next door said.

“Your name is Squash,” they said. And one said its name was Gourd!

“The candle humans put inside of us lights us to life,” Gourd said, which is also pretty cool.

The world was awesome. One time a human accidentally kicked me down the staircase! Sure, I got a few scrapes, but for the most part, it was fun! I loved it! I couldn’t explain it, but I wished it would happen again.

But I soon realized that life wasn’t pure happiness. When I tried to visit my neighbors, I couldn’t move! That, I think, was the worst discovery of a lifetime. Even worse, I was only in the world for one day! Apparently, we only existed because of some stupid holiday called Halloween!

So I thought and thought. I could make them kick me down the staircase then become a stowaway. No, I couldn’t get into the car. I could make a big sign that said, “Long live jack-o-lanterns!” No, I couldn’t make the sign. I could tell the humans nicely to stop? NO! I doubted they understood Pumpkin. All my ideas wouldn’t work because we couldn’t move! So annoying!

 

Chapter Two

That afternoon, I saw a mouse. He looked so sad, so I asked him, “What’s wrong?” The mouse looked startled. “Sorry if I scared you,” I tried to reassure the mouse.

“No, no, it’s just not many people speak to me, much less a pumpkin,” the mouse said to me in a squeaky voice.

“What is your name? My name is Squash,” I said to the mouse.

“My name is Pippi.” Pippy looked around warily.

“I don’t want you to take offense, but what are you afraid of?” I asked Pippi.

“Well, I- Shh, come quick!”  Pippi whispered urgently.

“I can’t move!” I said, trying to figure out why I should hide.

All of a sudden a nest of mice came running towards me.

“Hey, you, pumpkin! Have you seen a little mouse named Pippi?” I didn’t know what to say — these mice were strangers. But still, Pippi had been a stranger.

“Um, actually yes, in fact she’s-” Pippi shook her head at me. She was hiding in the flowers that were on the porch.

“Um, Pippi went that way.” I pointed to the right.

“Thank you,” the mice sped down the street.

“Who were they?” I asked Pippi.

“NYPM,” Pippi responded.

“NY what?” I said, confused.

“New York Police Mice,” said Pippi.

 

Chapter Three

“What? Are New York Police Mice police for mice?” I asked Pippi.

“Look, I don’t want to talk about being in legal trouble for talking to people that are not mice,” Pippi said.

“Wait, what?” I asked, confused.

Pippi sighed and said, “This might take a while.”

“What?”

“Mice have unfair laws.”

“What does that have to do with it?”

“The law says you may not talk to anything unless it is a mouse.”

I gasped. So Pippi was breaking the law. She was a criminal because of me.

“I‘m sorry,” I said, still unable to believe Pippi was a criminal.

Then, I had an, um, idea! I could show the police and the mice who make the laws, whoever they are, that they were wrong! And be able to live in the world for more than one day! “Pippi, I’ve got it! You can find a way to tell the people who own me that I should be in the world for more than one day! Which would probably be able to prove to the other mice that you can be friends with anyone!”

“Yes, that ought to do it. YEEEEEEEEESSS!!!”

“So, tomorrow, you will write a note and put it on the table inside the house. Sign it Anonymous.”

“Aahh, but in the mouse laws that’s called poison pen. We’re not allowed to do that.”

“OK, sign it Pippi Mouselington.”

“Tomorrow, deal.”

 

Chapter Four

The next day, Pippi and I woke up early to start. Pippi showed me a crumpled sheet of paper that said:

Your pumpkin is alive. He doesn’t like being in the world for only a day! He made friends with me and because he can’t write. I am writing this to you for you to find a way to keep Squash (that is your jack-o-lantern’s name).  -Pippi Mouselington.

“Great! Now go and slide under the door. Leave it somewhere they’ll find it. Then come back before the clock says 6:00. That is going to be when Mr. Ziernan comes for breakfast. So are you ready to begin your mission?”

“Yes, I am. My running and hiding days are over.”

I watched Pippi disappear under the door. I couldn’t help worrying about all the things that could happen to Pippi. I’m a fast speaker — what if Pippi missed something? And how could I help if something went wrong? I stopped myself. Pippi was going to be okay. How long did it take for someone to put something on a counter? It was 5:00. Fifteen minutes later, 5:15.  Another fifteen minutes later, 5:30. Hurry up Pippi, I thought. Mr. Ziernan comes down in half an hour! Twenty-five minutes later.

I heard footsteps. And not little mouse footsteps. Human footsteps. “Come Pippi, now!” I said out loud, even though it wasn’t going to help.

All of a sudden, I had an idea. I could move! Not really, but what could let Pippi know that she should send a note, and what could let Pippi know that I needed help? My voice!!! I took a deep breath, and let out the loudest, squealiest scream I could scream, “AAAAAAHHHHHH!”

All the people in the house opened their windows, rushed outside, and didn’t even glance at Pippi.

“Who was it?” asked Mrs. Ziernan.

“What was it?” asked Mr. Ziernan.

“Is it Santa Claus?” asked Sally, their four-year-old daughter.

I signaled to Pippi to go out the back door, now.

She scrambled for the door. They saw another crying little girl with her mother. Mr. and Mrs. Ziernan glared at the girl with her mother, and walked, well, more like stomped, back into the house.

 

Epilogue

That noon, I saw Mrs. Ziernan pick up a piece of paper on the counter. She read it, then stared wonderingly at me.

 

The End

The Adventures of Taco Dog

Once upon a time there was a half dog, half taco, who tried to fit in but never could. To get a friend he wanted a pink, fluffy unicorn dancing on a rainbow for a pet. The problem was the pink, fluffy unicorn dancing on a rainbow shop just closed down. So Taco Dog wanted to go through the Enchanted Potato Woods. Everyone told him, “Don’t do that. It’s too dangerous.” But he never could fit in so he was determined to get someone who could share similarities with him. They were both different and lonely, and that’s why he wanted the pink, fluffy unicorn. If he was going to go into the woods he needed some gear. He went to the armory shop and got a marshmallow machine gun, a lightsaber, an old lady costume (hey, it was almost Halloween), and some banana armor. He also got some Pokemon that weren’t in the show that were never mentioned before, like Narwhalia and Farkillababajejaba.

He proceeded into the Enchanted Potato Woods and heard the sound of a rabbit. It was most terrifying. He started to walk into the Enchanted Potato Woods and he got goosebumps all over him, then geese started to pop out of the goosebumps. He found something that seemed like a shapeshifter. It was strangely shifting into all of the things that he saw in the last movie he watched. He was mad that he watched a horror movie. He watched the new Goosebumps movie. He saw a dummy named “Slappy.” He shot marshmallows out of his machine gun but Slappy started eating the marshmallows on the floor, so he got away from him. He took the banana caller out of Slappy’s pocket. After the encounter with Slappy, he started throwing up rainbows because he was scared. He scooped up those rainbows into his pocket for the pink, fluffy unicorn to dance on. In the Enchanted Potato Woods, he met his arch nemesis, Pizza Cat. They both put Jawa hoods on and drew out their light sabers. Strangely floating around their light sabers were tacos and pizza, since they were battling each other.

The pizza cats were sworn enemies with the taco dogs ever since the taco dogs were created. The taco dogs were created when a dog who really liked food walked up to a taco that fell on the floor. Just before he started to eat it, when he touched it, lightning struck and that fused the taco and the dog together. The same thing happened to someone else, and those two taco dogs started to make a taco dog civilization. The same thing happened with Pizza Cats. A cat got fused together with pizza. The pizza cats were very, very, very, very boastful. They thought that they should be the only race of food-animal mixes so they declared war on the Penguin Hot Dogs, the Lemon Mice and finally, they declared war on the Taco Dogs. The Taco Dogs were very, very wealthy so it was a very hard war to fight. The thing that triggered off the war with the taco dogs was that they were allies with both the Penguin Hot Dogs and the Lemon Mice, so the Pizza Cats threw an atomic marshmallow bomb at them. They created a Taco Dome, very much like the Iron Dome in Israel but to block the atomic marshmallow bombs they shot taco happiness and quesadillas from Taco Bell (Taco Bell was their national monument). They wiped out every single taco dog and pizza cat other than the two food animal mixes that were fighting right now with the lightsabers.

Taco Dog was having troubles with his lightsaber, so he called out to his Pokemon Narwhalia. Pizza Cat was stunned and called out his never before seen Pokemon called Munchcahn.

Then Taco Dog said, “Use cute tackle.”

A bunch of cute anime animals started to dance around. Munchcahn said “Awwwww!” Then they all got mini-lightsabers and stabbed Pizza Cat.     

   Munchcahn summoned “big mac.” A giant hamburger fell out of the sky and landed on Narwhalia, covering him completely. Then one million french fries stabbed Narwhalia. Then he started singing annoying jingle that went super fast saying, “Two all beef patties special sauce, cheese, lettuce, pickles, onion on a sesame seed bun.” Narwhalia fainted to the ground.

Taco Dog took out his Farkillababajejaba which summoned a banana bomb. A banana full of bombs exploded. It smelled like chocolate covered bananas when it exploded. Munchcahn flew away into the middle of nowhere. But Pizza Cat had returned his Munchan into his pizza-cat-customized pokeball. Taco dog said, “Why are you even here?”

Pepperoni tears fell down his cheek. He choked back his tears and said, “I’m lonely so I’m looking for a friend on the other side of the woods.”

Taco Dog said, “Me too.”

At the same second he remembered the unicorn! Both Taco Dog and Pizza Cat realized that they were both lonely so the similarity could bring them together and they could have a great relationship. Pizza Cat told him all about his journey so he could know what to watch out for, and Taco Dog did the same. They both agreed that when they got to their destination they would come back and conduct experiments to make more of their kinds. Then they left each other and continued on with their own journeys.

Taco Dog started to get hungry so he took out his banana caller from his pocket and pressed a button. Suddenly a big plane flew out of the sky that looked futuristic and dropped a giant box of bananas. He opened the banana box and took one out and started to unpeel it, but then a bunch of tiny garden gnomes that were only an inch high hopped out of the banana peel and started stabbing him. Then a bunch more tiny gnomes rolled out of the bushes.

Then they all held hands in a circle and screamed at the top of their lungs, “Boo baa boo baa boo baa boo baa.” Then they all sung together “Two all beef patties, special sauce, cheese, lettuce, pickles, onion on a sesame seed bun.”

And then one of the oldest garden gnomes walked and climbed up Taco Dog’s paw and said, “Greetings. I see that you are the last of the ancient species called the Taco Dogs.”

Taco Dog was at first a little confused, but then his eyes were wide open. Stumbling upon his own words, he asked, “Are you the gnomes who were allies to the Taco Dogs of the past in the Food War?”  

They said, “How did you know?” in a high squeaky voice.

“I learned about the war in the most evil place of all,” said Taco Dog. “History class.”

It gave the elder gnome the shivers. Then the elder gnome said, “Why are you here?”

Taco Dog answered, “I’m trying to find a friend.”

The elder gnome jumped up and said, “Would you like some of my warriors to protect you while going through the forest? They’re practically indestructible. Here, stomp on them as hard as you can.”

All of the gnomes were squished to the ground, but in five seconds – pop! – they came back up.

Taco Dog said, “Yes.” He walked forwards while the warrior garden gnomes followed him excitedly. He tripped on tripwire and then a bunch of evil, purple monkey-marshmallows heard an alarm. They got really mad and started spitting grapes at them. The grapes were sharpened. The garden gnome warriors kicked the grapes, redirecting them back to the apes, protecting Taco Dog. Then he used his banana caler and put the bananas a million thousand feet away. He called for the bananas to be extra banana-y. The scent slowly followed into the monkeys’ noses while they ran into the box of bananas.

“That was close,” said Taco Dog. He must have jinxed himself because then a bunch of really, really small narwhals started dancing around. It was the narwhal battle dance. Then they climbed on each other, forming a giant narwhal with a peculiar horn that spelt out “Narwhals Rule.” It was following Taco Dog. Taco Dog was cut. Meat was pouring out of his taco shell. He then got so aggravated that he summoned lightning to strike him to become a charged super Taco Dog. He held the garden gnomes hands and span in a circle at the center of the narwhal, constructed by narwhals. The narwhal construction blasted into one million, thousand pieces, and the narwhals then scrambled into spelling, “Ouch!” Then, they ran back into their little narwhal houses.

The Taco Dog collapsed on the floor, because he was tired and injured. The garden gnomes scrambled up a tree, picked up a leaf, and used some honey to paste it on the Taco Dog’s wound. The Taco Dog held out his paw while the garden gnomes climbed on, and he clutched them to his chest in an empathetic way. In this sky, he saw Flicklebickletown, where his pink fluffy unicorn dancing on a rainbow was waiting. He rushed over, passing the exploding pineapples and the evil sixty-eyed, one-foot, seventy-hundred-eared, twenty-headed, seven-hearted blowfish. The blowfish called out, “Hey, I was supposed to fight you on your journey!”

Taco Dog called out behind him, “Shut up! This is making the story more happy.” He frolicked into the Pink, Fluffy Unicorn Dancing on a Rainbow Shop, took out his glass eye (that was the currency in Flicklebickletown). The unicorn leapt into his arms, the garden gnomes blew their noses on mini tissues, since the sight was so happy. He took out the rainbows and the unicorn joyfully, with big round, bright eyes, jumped up and started endlessly jumping on the rainbow.

Then Taco Dog said, “I made so many friends in the forest I didn’t need to get the narwhal!”

Taco Dog wiped his tongue off with his paws. “Bleh,” he said. “I hate when the author puts these sappy words into my mouth. But it’s true.”

Then, Taco Dog brought them all back through the Enchanted Potato Woods, where the monsters were celebrating Taco Dog’s achievement. He invited all of his friends to dinner, and they all had ham bologna nugget biscuit chicken flying rainbow M&M whipped cream hot chocolate dancing sheep sandwich with one million calories, two percent trans fat, 32 percent carb, 99 percent sugar, and twenty percent sodium, with gravy. They all sang songs from the Wizard of Oz: “Ding dong, the witch is dead! Which old witch? The wicked witch! Ding dong, the wicked witch is dead!”        

They all then became the most popular people in Taco Dog’s school, because they went through the Enchanted Potato Woods and lived. But in the end, Taco Dog would have been fine even if he wasn’t the most popular. He just was glad he had friends.

 

THE END

Gabriel’s story

I want to play, but I broke my leg and I tried to play. I tripped on a tree and I crashed in a old lady’s house. She hit me with her bat in the head and I started crying like a baby. My Mom came and threw me in the ocean and my Dad came and had to save me. I was about to dry and I went home and cried. My Mom lied. Ha ha! It rhymes!

I kept crying until I died. Then, I got flushed down the toilet. I went to the sewer and then I drowned, so I drank the yucky green water. I saw this little place I could go in and then there were these guards that smacked me in the face. I started crying again, and they pushed me back in the water and I had to go somewhere else. I got out and hit my head on the pole.  

I got past the guards and then there was a magic guy who put a power on me and he turned me into a frog. I said, “Blah blah blah,” to the man.  I drank the yucky water to turn back into a boy. It worked! I felt excited. Now I have to get past the guards, because they pushed me back into the water after the magic guy put a spell on me. I went to the side of the white and black poles that were around water, and then I tried to walk on top of the poles. Up high, the guards couldn’t see me. I felt really happy. The poles were connected to the hospital I needed to get to in order to fix my leg. I hopped from pole to pole. The guards didn’t see me. I made it to the nurse’s office. It had a lot of tools to fix people’s bodies.

And then, the guards went inside the nurse’s office because they knew I was missing. They picked me up and threw me into the water. Then someone flushed their toilet. The water squeezed me through the drain, and I ended up in an old man’s toilet. He had white hair. He was shocked that there was a boy inside of his toilet. All I wanted at that moment was to get home and play. I ran outside of the old man’s house. I saw a bus coming by. I knew it went to my house. There was a wet dollar bill in my pocket. I gave it to the bus driver and hopped on.

I told the bus driver to stop at 61st St, so I could get off, so I could go to my house and play with my dog. I was happy, and really wanted to take a shower because I had dirty water on me.

When the bus stopped, I walked down the front stairs and got off. I walked to my house. The outside was red and blue. When I walked in the door, I took a shower. Then I went outside to play on the grass with my dog, Macho. I was happy that I got home so I could play.

 

THE END!

The Change

Htrae

One day, when Seth was throwing snowballs at a rock, a bluish-green light caught his eye. He shuffled towards some bushes (partly from nervous excitement and partly from the cold), and saw a multi-colored, kind of transparent sphere-shaped crystal that was the size of a medium sized stone.

“Dang! I need to get that rock!”

He lunged for the bushes, stuck his head inside, and that’s how he found it. The moment he touched it, he instantly appeared in another dimension. When he let go of the crystal, he was back in his yard next to the rock. Since he was only in the other dimension for one split of a second he didn’t get to see what the other dimension looked like, but he didn’t really care at the moment because his first priority was to go and tell his friends.

“WOW!!!” he exclaimed. “I’ve got to tell Jason and Xavier about this!”

When he found them, they were having a snowball fight against a couple of other kids.

Seth said, “Guys, come over here! I need to tell you something!”

Jason said to the team they were playing against, “Maybe sometime tomorrow, 11, 11:30? Remember AM, not PM!” They trudged through the slush over to Seth, soon to be amazed by what he had to tell them.

 

Seth told them that he was going to bring them through a portal, but then he realized something: the portal was too small to hold all of them at the same time. The second that he thought that, the portal split into three pieces and each piece grew back to its normal size.

The reason that the portals reacted to Seth’s thoughts was because the portals can read the thoughts of their true owners. They contain a lot of magic, but the magic only works if the owner really wants it to happen. If anybody except the true owner of the portal wishes the portal to do magic, it won’t work and the person that stole the portal can’t go anywhere.

Seth told them each to hold the portal and then put it in their pocket once they noticed a change. So they all touched their portal, and got transferred to the dimension. Now Seth and the others had time to explore. They all put the portals in their pockets and then Xavier and Jason said to Seth, “Man, we thought you were kidding! We never expected you to find a portal. There’s only seven in the world!” When they looked around, the sky was purplish blue and it looked as though the ground was a large mirror. They saw a bunch of floating objects in the air with stairs leading up to them and it looked like they were made out of diamonds. They decided to travel to a building that was the closest to the ground. When they knocked they heard a voice say, “Come in!”

So they did. And they were very surprised because the people that they found inside looked like themselves. Their duplicates said, “Ah, we were expecting you. We saw in our crystal orb that you have found our portal. We were hoping that you did because our world is in grave danger!”  

“Quick question, what world are we supposed to save? And also we need to see the threat we are up against.”

Seth 2 said, “The planet is called Htrae, and for the second question, your answer’s outside. But before I take you out, be warned: not all human eyeballs can handle it. So if your eyeballs burn out, don’t blame me cuz technically I did warn you.”

“Sure sounds cool or something, take us there!”

“Come on, I’ll show you.” Seth 2 led them outside and brought them around the corner to the street. When they got there they saw the High King commanding his Legionnaires to kill everybody and then steal their money. Then, once the High King had their money, he created some spell and the people came back to life, but as his slaves. Seth couldn’t believe what he saw. How could the people let this happen? Why didn’t they start a rebellion or something? In the rush to leave, Seth, Jason, and Xavier dropped their portals and just at that moment that they realized it, they also noticed that the High King was holding the portals. Seth went and then started running toward the High King, but then Xavier 2 grabbed his ankle and dragged him back inside.

“Man, what were you thinking?!”

“Sorry, I was really mad. That portal was the one thing that made me special.”

“Then let’s get it back, but we need a plan first.”

Seth just realized something. “Hey Jason, Xavier, how did you know that any portals existed?” Both of them looked ashamed.

Finally, Jason said, ”You know how we always get A’s on our tests?”

“Yeah.”

“Well we have a portal that when we open it, it tells us all the answers. Oh and it said that if we share it with anyone else it will vanish from existence and show up on another planet.”

Seth said, “Okay, but now we need to come up with a plan.”

Jason 2 raised his hand and said, “The high king has a bunch of workers to help him in his scheme. Maybe, just maybe, if we pretend to be a few of his workers, then we might be able to slip through his defenses and take the portal, but that would take a really long time because in order to become his guards you have to work for him for at least five years. So that plan won’t work, but I know that there are a bunch of caverns that connect to one of the rooms of the palace. But we will need to wear white everything so we can blend in with the walls because the wallpaper is of a bunch spies wearing white so we’ll fit right in.”  

They were almost to the king’s chambers when it happened: Seth 2 tripped on his boots and fell to floor, but he got up in time and the guard didn’t notice him, but the guard did notice when Seth 2 banged into Seth on his way up then he fell again because he was paying closer attention. They had two options: run or fight. Obviously they chose fight.

Seth 2 reached for his grenades. The guards were faster. They took their laser guns out of the straps on their backs and pointed them at the kids faces. “RUN!!!” they all shouted in unison. As they ran down the hallway they heard the muffled sound of an explosion and shouts and kicks. As the smoke cleared the guards realized that the children had ran away.

The kids knew that there was no time to waste. They needed all the time that they could get, so they kept on running. As they started to think that they were lost and the hallway was never going to end, they walked into a giant ballroom. There were tables circling a stage in the center, and there were red cotton curtains that were hanging over stained glass windows describing how good the king was. They didn’t care about any of that. All they cared about was the polished oak staircase at the back of the room.

Before they went on, they knew they needed to change out of their white clothes. Seth motioned them with his hands and used Sign language to tell them that they needed to quickly take off their supply bags, go into different corners of the room and change into their black clothes. Once they finished changing, they made sure to take their grenades this time and put on better shoes so they can never be surprised again.

As they slowly tiptoed up the staircase they were annoyed at how creaky it was. One would think a new polished staircase wouldn’t creak so much. Must have been used a lot. They thought that would have been a good sign, but it was a bad sign.

Suddenly, the staircase ended and immediately opened up to a dark and dull hallway. There were messages smudged on the walls, but they were barely legible in the faint light. They slowly tiptoed toward the main attraction: an iron door that had smears on it that looked suspiciously like blood. By now they knew something was up, and that this probably wasn’t the king’s chamber. They also knew that there was probably a hint, or at least something that would help them face their upcoming obstacle: the king’s pet. (The king’s pet was a giant golem that could spit fire, and could poison you just by touching you. And sometimes, if you looked it in the eye, than it would make you feel nauseous. And it’s breath was poison also. They knew this because before they decided to go on this quest, they studied the maps of the kingdom – one, so they could make a hasty escape. Two, so that they could know what they were up against. On the original map, there was no sign of the golem, and no sign of the hallway that they were slowly making progress through. They knew that they were going to be tricked. So they took the map, and used Jason and Xavier’s portal to summon the same person who told them everything they knew, and asked him to reveal the actual structure of the kingdom. The strange man casted a spell, and then in a flash of light, and a three second silence, a new map appeared. It was a papyrus scroll, so they treated it with great care. It was very old, so they were not sure that things might have changed. They knew this because when they touched it, their fingers almost went through the piece of paper. When they took their fingers off of it, it was covered in dust. So they decided to just leave it where it was, and that’s how they knew of the golem.)

Jason 2, always the brave one of the group, reached out and knocked. They couldn’t just open the door because it was bolted, and they couldn’t turn the doorknob because there was none. Once they started to give up hope, they heard a raspy voice behind the door.

“Who’s there?”

They each one took turns saying their names, and where they came from. When it was Seth’s turn, and he said he was from Chicago, the man opened the door, and through a mass of tangled hair, he spoke, “I am the oracle of the newcomers. I am not on the king’s side, but I am not on yours. I used to give prophecies for everyone, but the king banished me to live my immortal life in this prison.”

“Prison!” The kids said. We thought this might be a secret entrance into the king’s chambers, or at least it would give us a hint –” They suddenly clamped their hands over their mouths, and they whispered to each other, “Maybe we could get this guy to help us. He said he is an oracle after all, maybe that’s why the king put him here.” Because he was helping people too much, and giving away secrets, they were over a googleplex reasons that he might kill them, or might help them. They decided to go with the risk, and they turned to the man, and said, “We will let you come along with us, and we could free you, but at a price. And that price is information.”

The man said, “Eh best hope I’ve had in over a millenia, and I’m immortal so nothing to lose, so why not.”

 

A preview of the next book!

 

Success and Failure

 

Earth

Back on Earth it was 1:30 and their parents expected the kids to meet them at the park on 59th for a picnic. One of the mothers was a pessimist and said, “They’re probably dead.”

“I highly doubt it, they’re in another dimension called Htrae.” She looks down at her phone, a little beep came from it. “Seth just texted me that they’re chasing down a bad king and trying to kill him. And that–”

“And what? Did they die?”

“What is it with you being all pessimistic?” said the optimist.

“No they didn’t die it’s just…”

“It’s just what?”

“Well…it’s just that, well I think that our kids just made the worst choice of their lives. They made a deal with the Oracle of Newcomers.”

“Ooh that is bad!”

“What can we do about it? Let them die!”

By now you should know who said that, so let’s just all say it on three. One, two, three. The pessimist.

“We have to go warn them!”

“But first, we need to prepare for what comes ahead, and we need to visit the Oracle of Oldcomers.”

“That’s far too dangerous to go without the Map of Vzifs.”

“Then we will do that first. It will be a long journey, and if you don’t see yourself fit for accompanying us, you can stay behind. We will send you pictures and you can like it on Instagram so that we can get more followers.”

So they went back to their houses and did the combination lock of the certain light switches in a certain order. They all dropped down and met in their emergency bunkers under their houses. They started to gather all of the things that they would need – a laser gun, a portal gun, a teleportation gun, baloney sandwiches, pepper spray, grenades, the kids’ favorite blankets, and a lot of other things including some fruit punch, pizza, disco ball, laser pens, and confetti.

 

A Strange New World

Chapter 1

One day after school, a shy girl named Sam was curled up in a chair at the library reading a book. While listening to the soft pitter-patter of rain, Sam stood up. She had just finished her book and walked to the back where they kept the children books. She saw a soft glow. She walked over towards the glow and saw it was a book that was making the light. She slid the book off the shelf and opened it. Her eyes lit up with excitement! The people were moving on the page.

The librarian came walking behind her. Sam tried to run, but she fell and went in the book. Everything started to spin. Sam screamed but nobody could hear her. She found herself a brick road and walked around the small shabby town. It had a dark and gloomy feel. Sam came across a small hut where she heard angry yelling. A moment later, a young women dressed in all black ran out the shack. Sam slowly crept towards the run down building to find an old lady sitting by the fire in a rocking chair. Sam walked in shivering from cold.

The old lady stood up and threw a blanket over the shivering girl. She sat her down in a chair by the fire. The old lady said her name was Agatha. Sam spilled all her fears and worries to this kind gentle old lady.

Agatha said, “Why don’t you stay for the night?”

Sam thanked the old lady gratefully. Agatha led Sam up the steps to a bedroom.

She said, “Why don’t you sleep here for the night?”

As Sam went to bed, she worried. Would she ever see her family again or her beloved home? She tossed and turned in her sleep.

The next morning when she woke up, she quietly tip toed out into the kitchen to find Agatha sharpening a knife, saying, “That girl will be delicious.”

Sam hid in the closet just before the old creep walked up the stairs into her room saying, “Wake up child, wake up.” But as she entered the room, Sam was nowhere to be found. The old woman howled with rage and ran down stairs, looking around desperately for her.

Sam sighed in relief as the witch ran past the the closet. As Agatha ran out, Sam sprinted out the back door and into the forest.

 

Chapter 2    

Sam did not stop running for hours. She finally broke down by a tree and began to cry. After a while she got up, dried her tears, and wondered if she would ever see her family again.

I am going to have to do something, she thought. She stood up and started to walk around the forest, trying to find something to eat. She found a patch of berries. Sam was so hungry that she began to wolf down the berries, but when she stopped to breath all of the sudden everything went black and Sam fell to the ground.

 

Chapter 3  

When Sam woke up, she was lying on a bed in a small cluttered room. She felt as if she was on fire. She rolled over, moaning in pain. Then a young woman stepped inside. She wore long black robes and a beautiful golden ring on on her left ring finger. Sam wondered if this strange lady was married. But then Sam said to herself, “I am getting ahead of myself. First let’s find out why I am here.”

The lady was busy making something in a glass. Sam sat up in bed and asked the lady, “Why am I here? What happened? Who are you?”

The lady said, “Well, my name is Gertrude, and I am a white witch.”

Sam said, “But what is a white witch?”  

Gertrude said, “A white witch is a good witch. A black witch is a bad witch. Some people call a white witch a healer. I found you in the woods passed out by a poisonous berry bush, so I brought you into my home and nursed you back to health.”

Sam said, “Oh, thank you.” Then she said, “Well, am I all better now?”

Gertrude said, “Yes. Well, almost, just a few more weeks.”

Sam jumped in surprise and said, “So how many hours have I been here for? Wait did you say weeks? Weeks? But- but I will never get home.”

Gertrude said, ”Relax, it will not take you so long for you to get home. Remember this planet is not very big.”

Sam said, “But I am not from this planet. I fell through an enchanted book in a old library.”

Suddenly Gertrude jumped up and she said, “OH NO! He is back.”

 

To be continued…

West Poo

One day, Ulysses S. Eisenhower gets a notice in the mail saying that he has a scholarship to West Point. Happily, he applied a few months ago and got in. Only nine percent of people get accepted to the academy every year, so he is very proud. His parents, though, are too busy being federal lawyers — who make a ridiculous amount of money from the government for sitting around in their office all day — to care. Still, they agree to go with Ulysses to move in when he starts.

A bus comes by and Ulysses and his parents all get on and ride up to New York. When they arrive a few days later, tons of parents are weeping and saying goodbye to their sons and daughters. But the parents do know something good will be happening here.

When Ulysses sees the campus’s Norman buildings, he notices they are made of grey and black granite. Ulysses has a background in geology, because his grandfather is a geologist. Whenever Ulysses visits his grandfather, he goes on expeditions with him. Doing all of that hard work helped Ulysses get the good grades needed to get into West Point.

Part of the West Point Academy deal is that your parents stay with you for the first few weeks and see how things are working. His parents see how the students have to practice running across the field without getting hit by paintball guns. They also see how fast the students can disable a fake bomb that has the same wiring as a real one but doesn’t explode. After two weeks, Ulysses’s parents are satisfied he is learning good things at West Point. They give him their last hugs and kisses and the bus takes them back home. Ulysses is happy that his parents agree that he can stay there because he wouldn’t want to get into a fight with them.

In the first few months he’s there, Ulysses learns basic military training, such as learning how to hit a target with a sniper rifle from five hundred yards, and disarming a real bomb. He has to do sports such as rugby, sailing, football, soccer, baseball, be a jockey, learn how to fly a plane, hike, and push heavy wheels. Ulysses thinks that his parents should be working as hard as he is, because it isn’t fair they get paid to sit around while he’s so busy.

***

A few months later, Ulysses finally decides that his parents shouldn’t be able to sit around and do nothing all day, so he reports them to a government official by getting special permission to call them from West Point. His parents get in big doo-doo, and they get fired and they have to go to a regular lawyer’s job, which doesn’t give them as many hours work, they have to work harder, and they don’t get paid much. They still get to keep their luxurious mountain where they live, which has giant pools and a waterfall, but only under two conditions: they work hard and their boss has to be able to get pancakes from them every Sunday.

After his parents start working for their new boss, Ulysses begins to feel bad that he reported them and wants to say sorry. He calls them, his heart beating really quickly in his chest because he doesn’t know what his parents will say.

They finally answer and he says, “Hi, Mom and Dad, I’m sorry you got fired. I just didn’t think it was fair to have you guys be sitting around all day. This should be better for all of us.”

He’s lucky that his parents understand, and they say, “We’re sorry, too. We should have worked harder. Keep doing what you’re doing, and we’ll talk later.”

Ulysses hangs up, and is happy he can still stay at West Point and that his parents are happy and making progress.

***

The next day, he aces his bomb disabling, hits a target from five hundred feet, and sprints across a hundred-foot field without getting hit by a paintball. On his break he decides to see what there is at West Point now that he can take a break. He decides to take a boat ride on the Hudson and see a pasture on the river a mile down that has lush green grass and tons of sheep and goats.

After riding down the river, Ulysses goes to the Atomic Museum and sees a replica of the atomic bomb dropped on Nagasaki. The very next week, he receives a uniform and becomes a private at West Point.

Now that he’s a private, Ulysses decides to do something fun, so he signs up for the parachuting squad. He learns how to jump out of an airplane and release a parachute at the right time. Parachuting gives him a sense of inspiration, for he enjoys slowly falling to the ground. He does well in parachuting and wants to run for parachute captain. He gets together a group of people that like him and get them to vote for him. He is running against ROBERT E. LEE. When the West Point electoral college comes back, he beat ROBERT E. LEE by five points: 247-242. ROBERT E. LEE wanted to be captain because he thinks he is the best at parachuting in the academy, but he lost because people think Ulysses is better than him because Ulysses does perfect releases and landings.

Since Ulysses is new at the academy, he becomes a rookie captain. He gets a medal, a trophy, and a picture. As the new parachuting captain, he decides to make a special Fourth of July celebration. He gets American flag parachutes and special smoke for the airplanes to release that is red, white, and blue.

On the Fourth of July’s grand final, everybody sees the Blue Angels release red, white, and blue smoke, then a chinook military helicopter drop fifty parachuters to the ground with American flags. Last but not least, an airplane drops “candy bombs,” which are tiny versions of fake bombs that have candy inside them. Everybody cheers and throws their hats in the air. After that people head inside to eat. They grill burgers and hotdogs and talk about how awesome Ulysses is the entire time, which makes ROBERT E. LEE upset. After everyone eats, they have an hour and thirty minute firework show, which leaves everybody laughing and cheering, even though ROBERT E. LEE tries to stop it by pouring water all over the fireworks. Ulysses catches him before the show could begin and saves the show.

The very next morning, after people slept in after going to bed at about midnight, everybody wakes up to pancakes cooked by Ulysses, to commemorate all of his hard work.

***

The next day, Ulysses decides to visit the older historical buildings that look like mini castles. Ulysses thinks the buildings are very interesting, and he decides to spend more time there. While there, Ulysses makes a friend named Henry. Henry really enjoys the buildings too. The next morning, Henry and Ulysses play tennis in the military school tennis court. Since Ulysses is having such a great time with Henry, he invites Henry to go parachuting with him. The two men go on a parachuting test over the New York Hudson River and land on a boat to go downstream. Downstream they visit a nice hill that has tons of flowers and a shepherd walking with a flock of sheep. Ulysses thinks that the flock of sheep is very nice, so he decides to go and try to buy one from the very nice shepherd. Of course, since the shepherd was as nice as he thought, the shepherd gives him three sheep.

With the sheep, Ulysses decides he and Henry should try to get into the Army Rangers and turn the sheep into K-9 officers. They go back to campus to try to join. To join the Army Rangers, they have to do forty-nine pushups, fifty-nine situps, and run five miles in under forty minutes. Ulysses and Henry both pass the tests easily.

The second stage is called “crawl.” They have to train for twenty hours and sleep for four hours and do that for about a month, go to survival training for twenty-four days, and then practice jumping out of a helicopter. By the end, Ulysses needed to do one more practice jump to be able to join the Army Rangers, but he is so good that the Army doesn’t want him to just jump out of helicopter. They tell him he should jump out of planes. As the captain of the parachuting squad, that is very easy for him. Ulysses took his three sheep, who are now K-9 officers, on the plane with him to make the jumps. The sheep are surprisingly good at parachuting themselves.

The army is so impressed they want Ulysses to train the sheep at Firebase Cobra with the green berets. Firebase Cobra is in the Oruzgan territory. The third special forces group, the Afghan Army, and the Afghan National Police work there to fight the Taliban.

Ulysses’s sheep sniff bombs for a year, and they all receive the Medal of Honor for searching for IEDs. IED stands for Improvised Explosive Device. The President later has lunch with the sheep and Ulysses. Ulysses is very happy since he was able to have lunch with the President! The president is very happy since Ulysses had saved the whole regiment and infantry from danger. Ulysses and the sheep become national heroes and are thrown a parade in New York that also airs on the big screen in Times Square. The sheep tour the country and have fun in various places with Ulysses. They go to the Empire State Building. They go to Vancouver and Montreal. They also happen to visit the Golden Gate Bridge in San Francisco, live in Carson City, saw Las Vegas, go to the Strip, and they go to casinos all over the country.

Then one time they go to Mexico. They go see Alaska and then go on a resort boat in Hawaii. Henry thinks it’s a very stupid idea to go from a very cold place to a warm place, but Ulysses always gets his way, so they go to the cruise company in Hawaii. Sadly, the cruise they want to go on leaves in one month so they plan to go to California instead and go skiing in the mountains in Sacramento.

The next day they arrive at the ski shop and order their skis. There is a very shady man standing in the corner who is talking to another shady man in an alleyway. The shady guys rob the shop and all of a sudden there are police everywhere, and FBI and snowmobiles. The shady people are national criminals and Henry and Ulysses tackle them onto the ground. They get the Bronze Star for bravery, so they get to have lunch with the President once again. The president is so impressed, he invites them to his Christmas party. Henry is good enough to know how to play the violin by memory so he plays the violin at the party.

Then a magical lion and bird pop up and start to fight each other.They soon disappear into a glass mirror. Everyone is in a panic and the President is so scared that he is rocking back and forth in the corner, sucking his thumb and yelling, “I want my mommy!”

Henry and Ulysses try to snap the President out of it, but then an Iraqi platoon invades the White House. The Iraqi platoon has AK-47s and anti-aircraft guns. Henry’s cousin is in the SAS, so Henry calls him and the SAS invades and imprisons everyone other than a few who try to kidnap the President.

Henry and Ulysses bring the President into the Oval Office to escape. Of course the White House has some gadgets, so they press the president’s coffee mug, and a helicopter on a train — that goes underground — pops up after a metro car. They get into the helicopter and fly away, claiming every single anti-aircraft gun and regular gun left there for the US Army which saves the US four years of production for those weapons.

They continue down the tunnel, and the train stops suddenly. All the lights go black. Then they hear the crack of gunfire in their ears, and they know they are being ambushed. Henry and Ulysses do something they aren’t too proud of — jump into a sewer tunnel. The Iraqi invaders follow them. Henry’s and Ulysses’s noses crinkle up at the smell, and they decide they are going to have to swim to avoid both the invaders and the smell. The invaders shoot at them, but the bullets slow down by the nasty sewage around them. They end up at the sewage plant, and the workers there don’t have a very nice surprise when they see armed forces guys with machine guns.

Meanwhile, the President and the FBI make it to the President’s luxurious car and drive away like it is the end of a James Bond movie.

Henry and Ulysses decide that they should use the big crane that they have at the sewage plant to knock out the Iraqi invaders. Once the invaders are knocked out, Henry and Ulysses zip tie the invaders hands and make the US government pay the sewage company for all the time wasted and things destroyed. Of all the things that the President loves about Henry and Ulysses, he doesn’t love the fact that he has to pay several million dollars to the sewage company.

Two years later, Henry and Ulysses are both awarded another Medal of Honor and are brought into Delta Force. The two are very happy and agree to be friends for the rest of their lives.

 

The End

The Black Hole

Once upon a time, a swimming team went to a celebratory party for winning a grand swimming competition. The parents were watching us have fun, since we were having many stations like games. We were swimming, eating pizza, and drinking soda. We were having so much fun, but for some reason the lights went out.

“What happened, Jordan,” I said.

“I don’t know, it’s pitch black,” said Jordan.

“Let’s make sure everybody is okay,” I said. “Jordan, Sean, Nicole, Ashley…” Five minutes later, “…Ms. Eileen.”

“Where are you, Ms. Eileen!” Jordan said.

“Maybe she went to fix the the lights,” said Sean.

“But I saw her sitting in the chair,” I said.

“What if she is a ghost,” said Sean.

“Ooh, please Sean!”

The lights went back on, but there was a small flicker with the lights. It would go on and off each time there would be a scary voice.

“Ms. Eileen, are you there?” I said.

Of course I’m here, I’m sitting right next you,” said Ms. Eileen.

“But I don’t see you,” I said.

‘Because I am right next to Sean,” the voice said.

“No you’re not,” said Sean.

I am your greatest nightmare. I used to be talented like all you swimmers, but then I got into a horrible car accident, actually it was a team bus, but there is no difference! I was the only one that died because I was standing with no railing or seat belt. Those mean swimmers didn’t give me a seat. I would get bullied and teased and I would feel so lonely. Now I have come for revenge,” said the Voice.

“Why us? We don’t even know you?” I said.

Or do you?” said the mystery voice.

It was actually young Ms. Eileen. So this means that our coach was actually dead.

“But I don’t understand how are you still alive,” Jordan said.

“I’m not, I just needed to give my soul to my twin sister,” she said.

“Can’t your sister act like you?” Sean said.

“Stop asking questions!!!!”

Everyone was trying to get Ms. Eileen’s soul out of her twin sister’s body.

War began with 15 young swimmers and the fake coach. The fight was in the pool: we got water guns, freeze guns, water nurf guns, and also water balloons. The war was crazy! People were diving into the pool. Water was spurting out of the pool, the floor was wet. It was a falling madness. It felt like someone really, really heavy was on top of you with lot of water. Nightmare, I tell you, nightmare!

Everyone was dizzy and confused about what had happened. That specific scary night was a night to NOT remember.  

“What happened?”

“I don’t know, let’s see if we saved our coach.”

Help, help… wait just a second… HELP!”

“Jeez, we’re coming, we’re coming!”

“I am at the edge of the diving board!” Ms. Eileen’s twin sister was yelling about. When we came to save her, we saw a bright light with the real Ms. Eileen, but then a red bright light appeared. She was very evil. She told us her plan.

“I will dominate your small world and destroy every person that stands in my way. Literally if you stand in front of me, you got to move, brah.”

“Why are you going to do that? I thought we were the only ones you were going to get revenge on.”

“It started growing on me,” she said. “Quiet, all of you! You young swimmers aren’t leaving. You are going to start training to be my slaves. Of course once I dominate the world today, I will destroy the life supply of water and oreos that everyone in the world loves a lot!”

My friend Jordan said, “That’s not possible, because she’s already dead!”

“I don’t care, we should just have a war between all people and her,” said Ava, who had medium-length hair with glasses, freckles, and cool shoes.

That’s when I supplied everybody with their weapons, put posters up so everybody would join, and went to my house and got my weapons and joined the war. Then all my friends got heavy water guns, life supplies of water balloons, protection (shields, swords), and also cannonballs. That was when they told what’s her name (the evil teacher) that they were going to meet at this all-girls school.

When the time came, it was about 7:30 and it was getting super dark. At that time it was a lunar eclipse and that’s when the moon started getting redder and redder. The war started happening and the only thing you could see was a big blur of water and darts everywhere. Each time somebody would come hit the teacher to destroy her, the lunar eclipse moon would get redder and redder. Once it got super red another monster came. It was one of the evil spirits that came from the underworld. One person threw a water balloon at the evil teacher and she fell. It was six feet. She started choking from the water, “Ekekekek!”

The evil spirit wanted revenge and we found out from the records that he was a little boy that was friends with the teacher when they were kids, and he was also bullied like her, and he died in the same car crash that she was in, but they never met each other and were so lonely. He wanted to get revenge for every person who got bullied in the world, every person who suffered the tragedy of losing someone in their life because they got bullied. He wanted to avenge her in a big way. He said, “This war will never end and it will come soon enough, once I meet my full potential. This is not over. I will come back in approximately two years. Don’t underestimate what I will do to this world at that time.”

 

2 years later…

 

“That little boy is never coming back. We showed him that night that he will suffer if he comes back,” Jordan said.

“Wait, didn’t you hear what he said? He will come back in two years and he will reach full potential. Don’t you ever listen to anybody? What if he can really come back, but stronger than anybody else in the world?”

“Remember me? I told you I will come back. You thought I will never come back, didn’t you? But I did! I will destroy anyone in my path but not grandma and grandpa. Oh also not my parents, I love them too much.”

“You thought we would weaken but we still have the power to destroy you. We are always a team, even if sometimes it’s kind of hard, you know, caring for these people.”

“Really? So this war is going to end in a snap.”

Then he was completely gone, like a cloud disappearing.

“We need to always be ready. We don’t know when he can attack,” I said.

Just 30 minutes later, he said, “I’m here!”

The war started. Everyone was screaming and fighting and all you could see was the water for the weapons. At the end it was a blur, just a blur! But luckily we won. He was moaning and just arose.

“Thank you for everything,” he said.

“My pleasure,” I said.

My teammates then made a plan to congratulate me.

“We want you to be our swim coach,” they said.

“Seriously? Thank you!” I said.

“You are a really good leader ever since the beginning of the war and even before the war.”

My friends and I kept swimming and winning, especially when there were many fans. It was really great.

Andrew’s Story

Ring Ring Ring! I looked through the security camera at the front door. I saw someone in a suit and they had an ear piece. I heard him say, “Mr. President, I’m investigating 98 Elm Street. If he is suspicious I’ll send him to court.” I opened the door and asked him if he actually worked for the President.

He replied, “Of course I do.”

I said, “How come you’re not wearing an american flag pin?”

“How do you know that?” he replied.

I replied, “I was the President’s security guard for five years. What are you doing at my door? Go annoy my other neighbors.”

BANG! I slammed the door in his face, looked at him through the window and saw he was out cold, so I went to the couch and took a nap.

***

Knock! Knock! I got off the couch and opened the door and it was the same guy that I knocked out.

“Fine what do you want?” I said.

He replied, “Are you, or do you know who stole $1,000,000,000 from a bank?”

“No and No,” I replied.

“I’ll take you to a warehouse and connect you to a lie detector and test you. If you’re lying I’ll send you to court. If you’re guilty, you’ll just have life in Alcatraz.”

Ring! Ring! I picked up the phone.

“Hey, Captain.” I recognized the voice of Officer Joe, who was one of the officers in my police department where I was Captain. “We have a case. Someone stole $1,000,000,000 from TD bank. You need to come over here right now. We need to go there and get clues.”

“Sorry, Joe, I’m having a day off. Also a ‘security’ guard of the President is at my door asking me if I robbed a bank and now he is taking me to a warehouse to connect me to a lie detector. Even though I don’t want to go, since I have nothing else to do today, I’m going. I’ll put on our high tech GPS tracking system. And I’ll record the whole thing. If I call, you drive to where I am and bring some back up. If I think he’s suspicious I’ll go to the Police Office and check his documents, but I’ll tell you before hand if I do.” I checked his badge. But I couldn’t really check it thoroughly because I didn’t have a U.V light.

He walked me out of my house. I was starting to get suspicious because if he was a security guard for the President, why wouldn’t he wear an american flag pin? Since he was suspicious, I brought a taser gun and a pair of handcuffs. Then I saw a huge black SUV limo.

“Put your hands up!” he yelled. I put my hands up and he pushed my body on to the car. He cuffed me and yelled, “Get in the car!” I could tell he was getting frustrated because he kept on yelling. He opened the car door and I jumped in.

An hour passed and I saw a medium-sized shack. I jumped out of the car and sprinted into to the shack. It smelled like 10 year old dirty socks. Then there was a massive black box with suction cups connected to wires. He caught up with me shut the door and locked it behind him. It was pitch black and it was so silent you could hear a mouse running on the floor. KKKRRR! A lamp turned on and the security guard pushed me down into a chair and strapped me into the chair. He attached me to the machine with the suction cups.

“Did you steal $1,000,000,000 from TD Bank?”

“NO,” I answered and nothing happened.

“Well I guess you’re not lying, I’ll send you back home.”

When we got back, I luckily had my car keys in my pocket and the car was outside of the garage. I got out and the security guard did so too. I ran behind him, tasered him with my taser gun and handcuffed him. Since he passed out from my taser gun, I put him in the back seat of my car and started it. First, I called Officer Joe and told him, “Drive all the police officers into my neighborhood and have reinforcements. I’m going to the office to check his records. But, leave a route open. When I get into the neighborhood, get closer to the house, and when I get to the driveway, make a circle around my house and block off all the exits and entrances.” Then I started to drive to the police station.

When we got there I left him in the car. I ran into the office and looked through a cabinet with recent crime evidence and there was a folder with the TD bank robbing. There were test results and the criminal looked like the guy who came to my house. I grabbed the piece of paper and bolted towards my car. I drove back to my house. Once I drove through the entrance, in my rear mirror I saw a few police cars from my department drive by to block the entrance. That’s when the security guard woke up.

“Where am I?” he asked.

“You’re somewhere,” I replied. I pulled into the driveway and we got out of the car. I saw almost everyone from my police department in a circle surrounding my house. I asked for one of our officers to put him in the car and Officer Joe and I will look at his records.

“He has already been convicted for bank robbery,” said Joe.

“We have to have a jury to see if he is guilty though. We can’t just throw him in jail,” I replied. I took out my phone and dialed the Supreme Court.

“Please hold, we’ll get a judge on the line as soon as we can,” the phone replied. ”Hello, would you like to have a court case sir?”

“Actually, that’s what I was going to ask. What time can we have it?”

“June 4th, 2:46 p.m, which is in three days.”

“That will be fine. Bye.”

“If you’re guilty just say it.”

“I’m not guilty,” he replied.

***

Two days later we drove to Midway airport in Chicago. I cuffed the criminal again. We waited in the ticket line. Then waited in the security check line. Finally, we got onto the plane.

EEEERRRR! The plane landed in Washington D.C. “Welcome to Washington D.C, the capital of the United States. It’s sunny and it’s 85 degrees.” We got off the crowded jumbo jet and walked out the airport. I kept on holding onto the criminal, so he couldn’t run away. Otherwise, there would be a loose criminal in Washington. We walked to the taxi stop and waited and waited and waited. Then a broken down shabby Buick came in front of us. Since there weren’t any other taxis we hopped in.

“How you doin’ today folks. Where do you want to go,” the driver said.

“ Where doing fine. Can you take us to the Supreme Court.”

“Why are you going there?”

“This person with me is a criminal that just robbed money from TD Bank.”

“No I didn’t. You don’t have enough evidence,” the criminal replied.

“Just drive already.”

“Only if you pay, ha! Get it.”

“No, I don’t, now drive us.”

Vroom! Vroom! We zoomed off into the streets of Washington D.C.

When we got there, I saw the huge white Supreme Court building. I grabbed out my wallet and paid him $20. We walked up the steps and started session.

“What is your case?” the judge said.

“He robbed TD Bank,” I replied.

“What’s your defence, criminal.”

“If you confess you might have a lighter sentence.”

“ I plead the fifth.”

“Show me your evidence, Captain.”

“We have a glove that was found in the bank he robbed, that has his dna.”

One hour later after waiting in the courtroom the judge said, “The case is closed, the criminal is guilty and he will have to do life in prison.” We walked out of the Supreme Court building and got a taxi to the airport.

When we got there we ran through security, and got on our plane to Chicago to send him to jail.

***

Finally, when we landed, we drove to the jail that I was Captain of and put him in a cell.

“Hi, Joe. Did you find any information on him?”
“Yes I did, his name is Garrett and his brother is football superstar, John Elway. He probably committed the crime because his brother is so famous and rich. Let’s leave him for the night since it’s already 10 p.m.” I snuck in his jail cell and snuck a GPS tracker in his pocket so if he escapes I’ll know where he is. Luckily, he was asleep. Officer Joe and I walked out the door, said goodbye, and got in our cars and drove back home.

* * *

Garret, think how to get out of this prison cell. Think. Think. Think. I’ve got it! I can take my shoelaces off and tie them together. Then I could whip it and get the key on the hook, it’ll be just like a rodeo. He grabbed his shoelaces and whipped it and got the key. He dragged the shoelace back and grabbed the key. Then he stuck his hand through the cell and opened it. He ran out the door and decided to run to Montreal, Canada.

* * * .

“AHHHH!!!!” I screamed like a train running on its tracks in the police office, “Where did Garett go, how am I supposed to find him now. Wait, yesterday I put a GPS tracker in his pocket.” I called Officer Joe to get him to the police office.

“Hi, Joe, Garrett escaped from his jail. Luckily, I put a GPS tracker on him, but I need someone to go with me to capture him.”

After waiting twenty minutes, Joe finally got to the police office.

“Joe, the GPS says he is still in Chicago, but he is heading towards Canada. Let’s get in your car and go.”

Officer Joe and I grabbed a taser, handgun and pepper spray. We decided not to wear our uniforms, so he wouldn’t see us. Then we left the police office, got in his car, and zoomed off into the streets of Chicago.

“Where are we?” I asked.

“We are at Illinois Central railroad. To get a train towards Canada.” I took out my GPS tracker and it showed that Garrett was really close to us. Joe and I got out of the car with our weapons and ran into the train station. We ran towards the ticket station and got our tickets. We also found our train number and it was 23. I ran towards the map and found out where our train was.

“What time is it?” I questioned Joe.

“5:00 p.m.”

“What! We only have one minute to get there.” We sprinted through the train station and then we saw someone familiar. It was Garrett! He was getting onto the train and the doors were closing. I sprinted, but the doors were closing even more. I made one last burst of speed and was one foot away from him. He put one foot on the train and I jumped to try to tackle him. I grabbed onto him and brought him down to the ground, then he got up and started running and we followed after him. We raced out of the the train station and into the streets. Garrett found out that he was being tracked with a GPS and ripped it off and threw it on the floor and kept on running. I kept on sprinting after Garrett. Joe was following behind and he tripped on a rock. Then I saw two Chicago police officers leaning on their car. I ran over towards them and I asked, “Can I use your car? I am chasing a robber who robbed a bank and escaped from jail.”

“Sure,” the officer said.

“I’ll trap him one way and you trap him on another way,” I said to them. I got in the police car and they got in the other. We continued after him and luckily, he took a break and he was only a few feet away from us. I stomped onto the pedal and he started darting to get away from the officers.

He went in a circle. I was 2 feet away from him. I stomped on the brakes and my car turned and blocked the whole road and then the officers came to block the only escape route. I looked through the car and found a pair of handcuffs and a Frisbee. I grabbed them both and got out of the car and walked towards him to cuff Garret, then he got up and jumped over the car.

I thought about what to do, then lifted up my hand and chucked the Frisbee and it hit his leg and he tripped. I sprinted to him and cuffed him before he could get up. The other officers ran towards each other and high-fived each other. “Nice job guys. What are your names?”

“David and Donald,” David said.

“Thank you for your help,” I said. I took a taxi cab back to the office and I put him in a van for federal prisons so he couldn’t escape. Then, reporters walked me to a stage with many people in an audience. I saw the President.

“Hey, weren’t you my security guard?”

“Yeah, for five years.” The President made a speech then he gave me a medal of honor.
“What, is this mine?” I asked.

“Yeah,” the President said.

“Why?”

“You captured a criminal. You chased him with all your might.”

I hugged the President and took the medal of honor.

The Minecraft Cheater

In the world of Minecraft, it was a beautiful day. It was nice. It was a warm blue sunny day. Then it started raining. Thunder boomed and lightning crackled. Then it became a dark and stormy night.

I’m just joking.

It was a sunny day, Steve came outside the door. It was April Fools day. Someone set a trap in front of Steve’s door. Steve took a step outside and plop. He stepped on the pressure plates and fell into lava.

Once Steve hit the lava he was saying, “Ow, ow, owww!”

Then he died.

“Nooo!!! I died!

So what, I’ll just respawn.”

And Steve respawned.

Now I’m gonna go check at school to see if I can find who did this. That way, I can troll him/her for the rest of his/her life. It’s gonna be so much fun mwahahahaha!

When I got to school, I asked all my friends, “Did you play Minecraft yesterday?” They all said, “Yes.”

That didn’t narrow things down. Who could it be? Maybe it was my brother or sister. This is gonna be a big mystery.

Maybe it was the school bully, but if you ever talk to him, people say he throws you in the garbage dumpster head first. He throws kids so hard hard that it hurts them. A lot of them end up crying. I heard that the bully caused some kids to break their arms, and damage their brains after crashing into the cold metal of the dumpster. Some kids forgot things because of the damage. The only good thing about being attacked by the bully was a guaranteed “get out of school” card. That sounded fun, but who wants to stay home all day?

I tried to find out the bully’s email, so I could text him and not end up like the other kids. When I realized I couldn’t find the email I knew I had to come up with a different plan.

The next day I decided I was going to spy on him at school. All I had to do was not get in trouble with the school, and not get caught by the bully. The sun was shining and the birds were singing when I woke up. I grabbed my hearing gear that allowed me to hear things that were far away without me having to be near it. If i got caught with this I’ll get detention for five days. The gear was red and black, and hid perfectly. It was the perfect gear for the situation.

I went to school and began my mission. The bully put his phone down long enough for me to quickly grab it.

No password! Yes!

I read his phone and saw how he was bragging to his friends about the prank he pulled on Steve. It really was the bully all along!

Time for phase two of the mission. It was time to sneak out of the school yard, get to the bully’s house, troll him, and all will be fine.

When I got to his house, I jumped over the back fence, climbed the wall and went in through his open window. Once I was inside, I heard the bully’s mom coming up the stairs. I quickly hid. I didn’t want to risk getting caught by the mom so I held onto the window ledge and dangled outside.

I was worried. If I fell, the bully’s mom would hear him. She would look out the window, see me and I’ll be busted. I heard her open the bully’s room door and she complained about the mess that was on the floor. She began collecting the bully’s laundry.

I heard the door click and pulled myself up enough to see that she left. I went back into the room, went to the bully’s laptop, opened it and turned on Minecraft. I went into all of his worlds and put TNT in them and watched them blow up one by one. I put his Minecraft character in a random world so he would be lost and the bully wouldn’t be able to find him.

No, that wasn’t good enough.

I changed the character’s skin to a super girly one.

Still not good enough.

I deleted the blown up worlds.

Still not satisfied.

I finally just deleted his whole Minecraft game together.

After I was satisfied, I climbed out of the bully’s room. Once my feet were on the ground I ran as fast as i could until I was back at school. I felt really good that I got back at the bully since he was really mean to everyone in school.

 

The End

The Girl Who Went To Ecuador

Chapter 1

“Willa, I have a surprise for you, ” Willa’s mom said, otherwise known as Kelly.

Willa looked shocked because she never got surprises. At least they weren’t good enough.

“What is the surprise, mom?” Willa said in an excited voice running down the stairs.

Willa’s mom just said, “Go pack your bags.” She thought that her mom really wanted it to be a surprise, and Willa really did. Willa went to pack her bags. When she was done, there was a taxi out there waiting for her.

Her mom said, “Willa, you are going to Ecuador to your grandparents.” Willa never knew her grandparents, so she was curious to learn who they were. Willa also did not know how to speak Spanish and her parents were not going with her. She got in the taxi and the taxi driver spoke Spanish, only Spanish.

Willa said,“The airport? The airport … airport?” The man seemed to understand what she was talking about, unfortunately he drove her to the cafe. Willa was like, “No … Airport! Airport!” In her head she was like, why doesn’t he understand what I tell him? Willa just decided to get off the taxi and get another taxi, but Willa forgot to pay.

The taxi driver yelled, “Tienes que pagar!”

Willa just said, “Si … I’m getting off.”

The driver yelled again, “Paga! Tienes que pagar!”

Willa sort of understood what he was doing with his hands. She thought to herself, Si…Am I forgetting something? Oh my god! Yes, I forgot to pay. My mom would be so mad if she knew. I am not a thief! Because of that Willa had to pay thirty dollars, which wasn’t even worth it because the taxi driver did not even take her to the right place. Then Willa went to get a cab, but there were no cabs around because the taxi driver took her to Brooklyn. But she has never been to Brooklyn and didn’t know that the cabs were green. But then there was this friendly guy.

He said, “The taxis are green here madam,” and Willa thought that this guy was French.

That meant, “hello.”  

But the guy was French so he started a conversation in French. “Bonjour, Je m’appelle Jayden, je suis quarante cinq ans.” Willa was there just snoring, she had fallen asleep. Then she startled awake because her head went back. She forgot all about the French guy. She still remembered the part about the green taxis, and she got in one. The guy that was in the cab spoke English, thank god.

She said, “To the airport please!” The man brought her to the airport, but she forgot to say which gate she was going to. It ended up being like about three miles away. She thought to herself, I am not paying a cab. She chose to walk. Finally, she got there, but the bad thing was that she was late for her boarding pass and the airplane left without her. She was furious at herself, “why didn’t I just pay a cab?” she said. But there was this nice girl there, in fact, she was a little girl. She was three years old, had a British accent, and she also had blond hair and blue eyes.

The girl said, “I lost my family.” She lost them in the airport. “And nobody would ever help me, I would ask them and beg them, but I didn’t even know how to speak. But one time, this little boy came, and he taught me how to speak. The little boy wanted to keep me as a pet and he said to his mom and daddy, “Can I have this doggy?”

And for some reason, the parents said “No, you cannot have a pet until you’re eighteen years old.”

“I was left here alone and I talked and I talked and no one seemed to listen.  I thought I was invisible and I stole some food. But, I got caught by a policeman and he thought I was cute, and he gave me a lollipop.”

Willa felt horrible for the little girl and she said, “Would you like to go to Ecuador?” The little girl was surprised that she was jumping up and down and crying out of happiness.

“Yes! Yes! Yes! Are you really going to take me to Ecuador?”

Willa pretended to think and then said, “Of course.” She grabbed her hand and brought her to the front desk and asked for two tickets.

 

Chapter 2

Because the little British girl was cute, they gave them two tickets for free. Normally they would cost a billion dollars. The little girl was super happy to know that she wasn’t invisible after all.

The little girl really wanted to know how to read, and she told Willa, “Willa, do you know how to read?”

Willa said, “Of course!”

The little girl said, “Can you teach me how to read?”

Willa said, “Of course, but I need a little tiny favor.” The little girl was worried for a second.

But then Willa said, “Can you please tell me your name?”

The little British girl said, “My name is Mia, what’s yours?”

“My name is Willa, and by the way, I love your name.”

“Willa, I need to tell you something, it’s very private. I think the people that left the airport robbed me and kidnapped me because there was a stack of money in the bag and my mom’s jewelry and they were dressed in black.” Mia began to cry.

Willa gave Mia a really big hug and said “Don’t worry, you have a friend now, and you’re never going to get rid of me, even if you try to.” That was when Will noticed Mia’s clothes. They were raggy, and had pee and poop on them. She also noticed Mia was really thin. She didn’t even think of giving her food.

 

Chapter 3

Willa said, “Oh, I am really sorry, do you want me to buy clothes for you? If you want me to buy clothes for you I can totally do it since you have been so nice to me. I want to pay you back for all that you have done, plus you are cute. What do I lose?”

Mia was surprised. She said, “I have never really wondered what is inside my pants. But there is this mushy, squishy stuff in my pants. It is really comfy. Do you have any idea what it is?”

Willa was in shock and told her, “Actually, that is poop. It is what comes out of your butt.”

Mia said, “Never mind, are you going to buy me clothes, or not?”

Willa said, “Oh, let’s go to that one right up there, it’s called Chanel.” They went inside the store and Willa the saw most cutest outfit for Mia’s age. It was called a “onesie” and it had pink flowers on it. Willa said “how about the onesies right there?”

“Oh, you mean the giant underwear?” Mia laughed.

Willa said, “oh no, it’s a onesie! And we also have to get you new underwear.” Willa said “First before you put on the clean clothes, we have to teach you how to go to the bathroom.” Mia and Willa got the bathroom, but Mia was really confused about what they were going to do. “Every Time you feel something coming out, go to this bowl, sit on it, do your thing, and wipe, and then flush, and then wipe your hands.”

Mia said, “I feel a thingy there, can I go use the bowl?”

Willa said, “Of course you can use it. But don’t forget to use the tips.” When Mia got out, Willa went to the bowl to look if she did okay, but when she looked in the stall, poop and pee was all over the stall. Willa thought to herself, maybe I should have explained it to her a little more clearly. Willa said, “Did you remember how to sit on the bowl?”

Mia said, “I followed your instructions, it’s not my fault.” Willa thought to herself, maybe I should buy her diapers, not underwear.

 

Chapter 4

Willa and Mia went to the store that sold diapers. Willa was surprised that this diaper said, “after the baby does their thing, it changes automatically.”

But when Willa saw the price, she said, “That is so cheap!” It only costs a diamond ring! And she had her mother’s diamond ring. She gave the man the diamond ring.

The man said, “Yay, now I have a diamond ring to give to my girlfriend.”

Willa was shocked, she said “What if your girlfriend says, where did you get the ring from?”

“Oh you know, I will just say, I got it from the store,” said the man like it was no biggy.

“That will be a lie,” Willa said.

The man yelled, “You, get out of my business!”

Mia said, “You don’t talk to my friend like that? You hear me?”

The man yelled “I’m calling the police!”

Willa said, “Okay, I have a plan. Since you’re really cute, like really cute, you can make the cutest face and the police will say, ‘Maybe you should go to jail old man.’”

When the police came, her name was Katie, and she said, “Who’s the robber?” She was holding up a gun.

The man said, “That little tiny little girl that is in front of your face.” The man was looking, and he put his head down like this.

“That little tiny girl? I think you’re drunk. Maybe you should go to jail,” said the nice police officer.

Mia whispered in Willa’s ear, “Willa? I think that’s the police officer that gave me the lollipop.” Katie put her hand in her pocket and took out a lollipop. The old man dropped the diamond ring, Willa picked it up and put it in her pocket.

 

Chapter 5

Willa and Mia went to the bathroom one more time and Willa took out the diapers. She pulled down Mia’s pants, took off her underwear, and saw poop, pee, smushed in her underwear. It looked like the poop and pee actually belonged in the underwear. But Willa, didn’t argue, she just took it off, put it in the garbage, and took out the diaper. She put it on and she saw an “off” and “on “ button and thought that the “on” button was when she pooped and peed and had to take the diaper off.  She turned the “on” button and it changed the diaper.  She thought she’d only pressed the “on” button when she needed to change the diaper, plus, after she peed and pooped the diaper automatically got perfume and sprayed it, so it won’t smell bad, and it also wipes your butt.

Mia loved her diaper and said, “Willa you are the nicest person on earth.”

 

Chapter 6

They didn’t have to worry about the pee and poop anymore. After that, they got ready to go to the plane. Since the lady that gave them their tickets thought that Mia was cute, she gave them business class in the middle, they were both facing each other.

They got in the plane and Mia yelled, “This is the best day of my life!” And then the poop fell.  She yelled proudly, “Oh, that felt good.” It smelled delicious because the perfume sprayed. Willa showed Mia the seats that they had. It was one, and two, the best seats in the airplane.

The TV was bigger. Mia and Willa sat on the bed. Mia heard an announcement that said, “Please turn off all electronic devices before takeoff.”

Willa said, “You can’t turn on the TV until the airplane gets in the sky.”

Mia asked, “What’s a TV?”

Willa said, “I’m just going to tell you all the electronics until you ask me all the questions in the whole entire world.”

Willa named the iPhone, the iPad, the TV, and so on and so forth and explained all of them and what they do. By the time she was done, their airplane was already in the sky. Willa showed her how to use the TV. She chose the movie for her. She chose Cinderella.

By the time Mia was done, Mia asked “Why does the princess never pee and poop?”

Willa didn’t answer the question very good, she said, “I don’t think they ever pee and poop.” Mia stopped talking for a moment and wondered, what if I never pee and poop?

 

Chapter 7

The announcement came on and it said that the airplane was about to land. When Willa looked outside, she saw mountains and one mountain was covered with snow. She looked in the magazine and saw that that mountain was called Cotopaxi.  

In the magazine, the mountain had snow and there was the moon and the sky and it was dark out.

When the airplane landed, Willa got up and went to tell Mia that it was time to get off the plane. When Willa went to see Mia, she found Mia asleep. Willa took a picture of her and said, “Awww”.

And then all the people in the airplane said, “Shhhh!” But then they saw Mia and said “Awwww.” Mia, while all of this was happening, was holding her pee and poo because she wanted to be a princess.

Mia woke up, the first thing that she saw, were the faces of the people that had kidnapped her.

 

Chapter 8

Mia whispered to Willa, “Pssstt. Willa, those are the people that kidnapped me.”

“Don’t worry, I’ll protect you,” Willa said.

The kidnappers came up to Mia and said, “My darling! I cannot believe I found you. I was searching everywhere for you! The day I left you at the airport, and I couldn’t find you, I fell to ground and my eyes filled with tears. And now that I found you, I’m going to take you and hug you (until you die),” she whispered.

“Woah, woah, woah, first of all, you’re not even her parent. Mia just told me you were the people that kidnapped her!”

“What are you talking about why would our beautiful Mia say that. I mean if it was true which it isn’t she wouldn’t even remember what we look like or even that we robbed her!” the robber hesitated.

 The very dumb robber said like he knew it all, “By the way, my name is Toto and my friend’s name- I mean my wife’s name is Lala. Lala, you said that we did rob Mia.”

“Great, now we have proof. Oh and by the way, I am going to tell the police. I filmed every word you said!” Willa said

Lala yelled at Toto and said, “My plan would’ve been fantastic if you hadn’t been in it!!!”  

“I’m sorry boss, but when we kidnapped Mia you told me to always lie after we did our business, but our boss always likes us not to lie. He told me never to lie again. I am never going to stop telling the truth unless you say to keep on lying,” said Toto in a sad voice.

“Well maybe we shouldn’t be friends anymore,” said Lala in a mad voice.

Toto said in a very sad voice, “Fine, but don’t you dare come and ask me for help. You never know when I can call the cops. Plus, I can lie as much as I want now that you are not my boss anymore!!!”

“Well that was awkward!” Willa said in a weird voice. “Now let’s get out of here while we have a chance.” Willa and Mia skipped to the other side of the aisle of the plane and quickly, but quietly, ran to the taxi station, got into the cab. She forgot that she couldn’t speak Spanish. So, she said the directions in English and it sounded like the direction in Spanish was the museum of Agua Blanca Museum. They got out and Willa wanted to cry, but she didn’t want to in front of Mia. She had no idea of what she could do.“I wish there was a app that you speak in English and that the app will repeat what you said but just speaking in Spanish. Well, we must just go in the sdcsdcoiIU or whatever it is called!!!” Willa said in so much frustration that her face was bright red.

 

Chapter 9

When they went into the aquarium, Willa took a deep breath and saw Mia was amazed. Her mouth was wide open. Her eyes were as big as a light bulb. All of sudden, she was happy too. Willa heard a squeaky sound and she heard water splashing all around. Willa pulled Mia’s arm and dragged her to the dolphins. She saw the dolphins jumping all around through hula hoops. They were the first ones watching and then it started getting crowded. When they wanted to leave to see another exhibit, they couldn’t get out. They just stayed to see the end of the show.

“Willa, I … I have never seen monkeys, but I heard people talking about them in the airplane. I saw a picture of one and they look really cute. Can we go visit them?”

“As soon as the show finishes, cause it looks like we can’t move.” Willa said laughing. She was in a much better mood. 

 

Chapter 10

Meanwhile Toto and Lala were trying to come up with a plan to make Willa and Mia come with them to make their secret plan to work. By the way they were in the museum. All of a sudden Lala came up with a very good idea.

“Toto, I know! We will pretend to be staff at the museum. We will go into a closet and we will grab some of the uniforms that the staff has. We will ask Willa and Mia if they need help.”

Toto responds, “That is the greatest idea that I ever heard!!”

“Let’s do it, pal!” They go to the exit of the dolphin show.

 

Chapter 11

Finally, the show ended and the people started leaving. Mia and Willa saw the staff. They went up to them and said, “Um can you please tell me where the monkey exhibit is?” Willa said very politely and slowly so they would understand.

“Please, no need to speak slowly. We very well understand English. Trust us, we’ve had a lot of tourists who speak English. Come with us and we will show you where the monkeys are,” Lala said like he knew everything.

They were weirded out because no one had ever said it like that, that he knew everything. They followed him, but when Willa began to walk, Mia realized that the “Staff” had the same mole that Lala had. It was right on top of the mouth. Mia said to Willa, “Willa, those are not the Staff, they are Toto and Lala.”

Willa was shocked. She just said, “Let’s follow and see where they are going to take us, so we can find out what their plan is going to be.”

Mia said to Willa, “You really don’t know what they could do. Just go away and ask a real staff!”

Willa just ignored Mia and just kept on walking. Mia kept on walking, but she was trembling. Willa held Mia’s hand just in case. They started realizing that it kept on getting darker and darker and darker until they came to this door that said something in Spanish that Willa did not understand. She kept on walking. She started to tremble too and she was positive that nothing was going to happen too.

Toto said to Willa and Mia, “These are the monkeys. We’re gonna enter this door and I’m gonna take Mia’s hand so she doesn’t get scared.”

Willa held Mia back and said, “I don’t know your name, but whoever you are, I am not gonna let Mia go. She’s gonna take my hand and show me where the monkeys are. Period.”

Lala didn’t care. She grabbed Mia and ran away and Willa ran where they were heading.

 

Chapter 12

Mia was screaming her head off. Willa felt bad for not listening to Mia. Now what was she going to do. Mia was all that mattered to her right now, but she had no time to be ashamed. She had to find Mia and go to her grandma and grandpa’s house.

She saw them getting into a taxi. Willa quickly got a piece of paper and wrote down the taxi’s number. The number was 3B51. She got into a taxi herself and tried to communicate with the driver and pointed to the taxi 3B51. Fortunately, the driver taxi understood her and followed the taxi.

Lala was in the front row with the taxi and he was looking in the side mirror and saw that the taxi holding Willa was chasing them. He told the taxi driver to go faster. Somehow he knew Spanish. The taxi driver went super fast and passed the red light. A police officer saw them beat the red light and chased Lala and Toto. All of a sudden, the police car was blocking Toto and Lala’s car and Willa couldn’t see them and was terribly worried about Mia.

 

Chapter 13

When the police had enough he got out the loudspeaker and said in English, “If you don’t pull over right now I will have to do my job and get my gun out” said police officer Tom.

Once Lala heard that she had no choice but to pull over. Lala pulled over and whispered, “Shoot.” She was so mad that her brain was about to explode.

Willa pointed at the car and said, “Stop.” Thankfully the taxi driver understood and stopped where the officer was. Willa got out of the car and headed to where Toto and Lala were.

 

Chapter 14

Then Willa was super mad and quickly ran and pulled Mia away from Toto. Toto didn’t even notice. He was too busy crying.

The police officer said, “Hi my name is Tom and you just made a very big mistake.”

Lala said very annoyed, “Ugh, like, do you think we care?”

Tom said very calmly, “The way you said it, I guess not. Can you tell me why you beat the red light.”

“Um, excuse me, I can explain. Me and Mia were at the Aquarium and Zoo. Mia wanted to go see the monkeys. We asked the ‘Staff’ where the monkeys were. The ‘Staff’ were Toto and Lala, the ones that beat the red light. They led us somewhere and then very quickly, grabbed Mia. They got into a car and I quickly got a taxi. Then you came in.”

Tom said, “Let me get this straight, you are Mia’s parents?”

Lala said, “Of course.”

Toto said confused, “I thought we were kidnapping Mia.”

Lala said so angry that she couldn’t even say it, “I told you to keep quiet.”

Tom said, “You are under arrest.”

          

Chapter 15

Tom said happily to Willa, “Thanks for helping. You were a really big help.”

Willa said even happier, “Thank you if it wasn’t for you I wouldn’t have my Mia here.” Willa hugged Mia and Mia hugged her back. They were really happy to see each other. Willa said very glad, “I found out this very cool app that will save us. It is an app that you can say something in English and it will translate to any language in this case it will be Spanish. My grandma gave me her address. I know exactly where to go.”

Mia said very excited, “Really? We can go home?”

Willa said, “Really.”

Willa got a cab and went to her grandma and grandpa’s house. Thankfully her grandma and grandpa thought that her plane was going to arrive at that time and that same day. Her Grandparents were relaxing on their chairs.

All they did was get up and give them a big hug.

The Attack of the Slender Men

One hot summer day in the year 3000, a 12-year-old boy named Justin was watching the news on his big-screen TV. He heard that a few days ago an alien spaceship had crashed into planet Earth. They said that the people in the spaceship were not aliens but they were slender men.

Slender men are basically people who are in a black suit with no face! Justin always thought that slender men weren’t real, but now even though they said it on the news, he still didn’t really believe them. Then he thought that this news happened coincidentally after his dad went on his business trip (and had not come home since). He wanted to see if maybe those two things were connected? He thought that the people were lying so he decided to go and prove that slender men aren’t real.

“Hey mom, can I go on a 10-day-trip by myself on a train to see if slender men are real?” asked Justin.

“Sure, but you need to be safe and show me how you can be safe and be back in two weeks,” replied his mom.

“So I can build a robot to go along with me.”

“Yes, but where do you get the robot or the pieces?” questioned his mom.

“ I could make one myself.”

“And where are you going to get all this material?”

“At the shop next to our house.”

“And where do you get your money.”

“From my allowance, Duh.”

“ Okay, okay you can build it.”

“Yes, finally.”

So then he took his hoverboard and he rode it all the way to the shop of spare parts. He went inside and asked the man at the counter, “Hey do you have any spare parts that I can use?”

“Sure, got tons of parts, what do you need?”

“I would need a motherboard and some screws, wires, lasers, titanium, metal, and some LED lights?”

While the man took the materials, Justin thought, Why am I able to build a robot? It seems like it just appeared in my mind how to do it.

“Okay that would be $100 please.”

“Okay.”

After that he went back home, took the things into his room, and started working on his amazing robot. After like 5 hours of working he wanted to take a break. So then he took a 10-minute break and then he went back to work.

He worked on the robot for 3 days and on the 4th day he finally finished the world’s amazing robot. Then with the permission from his mom again he was allowed to buy the train ticket and got his robot and his laser pen. The next day he got on the train and he started his journey to prove that they were not right. About 59 minutes into the ride on the train the lights blacked out and the train stopped.

Justin was confused. His train was not supposed to stop right here. It was supposed to stop at San Francisco. Justin told his robot to take out his laser guns and the robot did and Justin took out his little laser pen. The two of them walked towards the front of the train looking for clues about why the train stopped and blacked out.

They were almost at the front of the train when they heard some sounds in front of them. Justin told his robot to turn on the LED lights to see what that was. Then they saw a black squid-looking thing. The robots started shooting the lasers’ guns but it didn’t work so they broke the nearest window and jumped out of the train.

When they got out they started to run away as fast as possible. Justin started to get tired so he told his robot to transform into an automatic skateboard. So now Justin wouldn’t get tired. About 1 hour later the sky started to get darker and darker so both of them decided to stop and take a break and travel the next day. His robot turned into a bed with covers and they both fell asleep.

The next day Justin woke up really late, about 10:50. After they ate breakfast which was some cookies and a bottle of milk and for the robot it was basically a refill in the battery system, luckily Justin brought extras. After that Justin turned his robot into a segway so he wouldn’t get tired. He also turned on the GPS so he could know which direction he would go. Then spontaneously his robot stopped working. Justin was puzzled. He refilled the battery just like 20 minutes ago and the battery was supposed to last like 23 hours each so he should stop working 3 days later.

Justin was furious. Now he had to walk plus drag the segway with him! So he picked up the segway and dragged it along with him. Two hours later Justin arrived in front of a disheveled house that maybe his dad had gone to because it looked like the house where his dad went on his business trip. It was the same address. Then a shadow came out. Boom, boom someone came out.

It was a guy with a black suit with no face at all. It took a minute for Justin to process what he was looking at. Then he realized that he was a slender man! For all his life he thought that slender men weren’t real but now at this very moment he thought that slender men were very real.

He was going to run but he was too shocked to do anything. But then he snapped out of it and then started to run but he was too slow. The slender man was really fast. It only took a few steps and it caught up with him. The slender man took ahold of Justin’s neck and then it put a sack on top of his head.

Justin felt like he was being carried back to the house. When he heard the door close behind him he knew there was no way out. Then he was put on a chair and strapped him on a bed-thingy. After that the slender men took off the sack on Justin’s head and he realized he was in a room with other people and one of the people was his dad! He was now more shocked.

When Justin first looked at his dad he thought that he was dreaming because it was too good to be true. A week ago, his dad had gone on a business trip to San Francisco and never came home. But then he realized that it was real because at that same moment his dad noticed him and said, “Son, you finally found me but you can’t free me.”

“Why did you get kidnapped?”

“Because the slender men want people who have special abilities. Son, I have a confession to make about you or should I say part of your life. Do you wonder why you are always so smart like at the school you always got straight A’s?”

“Actually I thought that I had that naturally.”

“I actually made a mind thing Justin that I can set so you can know certain stuff without learning it in real life.”

“Okay let me get this straight, you built that machine because you wanted me to know how to build things like a robot so in situation like this I could build a robot so I can be safe?”

“That’s about right, you built a robot to go along with you. Where is it now I want to see it?”

“Actually it’s outside and broken down for some reason.”

“Okay I’ll see it when you get us out of this situation.”

Justin noticed that his dad said “you” so that meant Justin had to get them out of this situation. Justin was now aggravated. This was ridiculous. He didn’t want to do this all by himself. He wanted help especially from his father. If he wanted to get out of this he should help him. Justin tried to reach in his pocket and got out his laser pen but the straps were too tight. Then he tried to take out his remote control for his robot but it was still too far for him to reach it. Justin tried to wiggle out but still no luck so then he tried to sleep and get enough energy for later.

Justin dreamed that he got free and he and his dad got home and the next day the news people came to interview him for his such brave doings and the day when he got to school everybody congratulated him and he would be the most popular kid in the whole grade.

Justin woke up with a startle, it was a sound of a gunshot. Justin looked at where the sound had come from. He looked towards the right of him and he saw one slender man had shot a tranquilizer dart at one of the people.

Justin was very scared because after that they injected the person with some kind of shot! Justin then quickly and quietly asked his dad why they tranquilized the person and then shot them with a shot. Then his dad said, “They tranquilize them because the shot they give them really hurts so they could turn them into slender men too.”

Justin was stunned. He couldn’t believe what he was hearing. First he heard that there were slender men and now he was hearing that he had to become a slender man and that meant he couldn’t do things regular people do!
“Attention,” someone was speaking into a high tech megaphone, “Attention fellow people, we are here to take over the world and I’m giving you a heads up that after we finish turning you into slender men we will go attack the rest of the world starting with Los Angeles.”

That got Justin to start thinking. He couldn’t let his beloved mother be attacked by slender men too so he was determined to get his father and the rest of the people out.

Then he realized something. He was wearing a magnetic watch so then he turned it on and slowly the laser pen got out. Then he grasped the laser pen and slowly and carefully cut the ropes and when he was done he quietly got down and slowly made his way to the door. When he reached the door he realized that they replaced it with titanium metal but that didn’t seem right to him. No one could ever cut through titanium. Needless to say that no one could polish it this shiny.

Justin tried to use his laser and tried to cut the titanium but after two minutes of cutting he didn’t even make a dent so then he tried to look around the room for something else he could use to cut the titanium. Then he walked toward the back of the room.

The slender man popped out and put a knife to Justin’s neck. The slender man picked him up and said, “You move, you die.”

He needed to go back to the bed place. The slender man wrapped the strap even more than last time, probably so he couldn’t get out.

Five hours later, there were only 10 people left in the room, including Justin and his dad. “Oh no there’s only 10 more people left to go get the shot and then it’s me.”

Justin was really worried and again scared. Then he thought if I could just touch the magnet button on my watch, I could get my laser pen out again and I could cut the ropes to me and my dad this time so we both can get out and also help my dad.

Yes! I finally cut the ropes in five minutes he thought. Then he jumped down quietly and then tapped his father’s shoulder because again he was sleeping.

“Huh?” Justin’s dad muttered as he finally refocused and looked at Justin. “What are you doing here and how did you get out?”

“I used my laser pen to cut the ropes.”

“Good that’s really good now could you do me a favor and um cut the ropes for me and we could get out of here?”

After Justin cut the rope, Justin’s dad jumped down quietly and both ran to the door while the slender men weren’t looking.

“Justin I think I know where they put a humongous minigun that has bullets that could break through titanium.”

“NO WAY dad, that’s physically impossible.”

“Oh it’s possible all right I’ve seen them putting it away in the closet.”

“Ok fine just go get it while they’re still not looking.”

“Ok but I might need your laser pen to gut the door so I can make no noise.”

“Fine, fine take it but wait I don’t want to leave everybody here and let them suffer. I want to free everyone else too.”

After all that long conversation, they never got noticed just like t-rexes, when you don’t move they can’t see you. They were hiding crouched behind the door.

Then the dad got up and quietly snuck away with a smirk on his face.

Ok it’s been one minute my dad hasn’t come back with a very small gun he is so slow and weak Justin thought.

Finally he came back with the minigun. You should’ve seen the look on Justin’s face, his eyes were wide open, his mouth was big as an oval and he yelled, “OH MY GOSH!”

The slender man turned around so fast you couldn’t even say “I.” “What was that?” the slender man growled deeply.

Then Justin’s dad took the minigun and shot the slender man. Boom! The slender man landed with a big thud. “What did you just do?”

“I killed a slender man with a minigun.”

At this time, all of the slender men were coming out of a room that Justin never realized was there. So now Justin’s dad was shooting the minigun wildly while Justin noticed a little remote control in one of the slender men and Justin thought maybe that’s the remote control that they used to shut down my robot and then he realized, that is a remote control that shuts down any electronics within a few miles. That’s why the train had shut down too.

Then Justin rushed through the crowd trying to avoid the bullets that were shot by his dad. “Yes, finally. I got the remote control.”

Now with the remote control he could activate his robot. Justin ran out of the crowd and tried to find a window, then he spotted one a few feet from the door. Then Justin ran as fast as he could. He slammed into the window and it shattered and Justin tumbled out. He ran to his robot and pressed a button that probably activated the electronics.

“Beep!” the robot activated.

Justin said, “Go through the window and help my dad kill the slender men with your ray and laser gun.”

“Yes sir and I’ll use my laser pen.”

They charged into the room, lined up in a row and started shooting the slender men until they all fell on the ground.

“WE WON!” Justin, his dad, and his robot all defeated the slender men. Then they went home with no fear in their minds and hearts.

When they got home, his mom almost fainted of happiness because she was so happy to see her husband and her son in one piece. Now everybody could live a happy life with the slender men out of the world. Even the robot started to become part of the family. So from this point on everyone lived a happy life.

 

.

The Glass Slipper

Dear Diary,

At first, everything was perfect. I was young and my mother and father loved me. Every Friday in the summer we would have a picnic in the castle garden. Now, my mother was dead and my father remarried to a mean lady called Aditha. She has two daughters. One is named Belle and the other is named Stephanie. They are both four years younger than me. They are much nicer than their evil mom. I wish my mother was still alive.

 

“Elle!” my father, King Hunter, calls.

“Coming!” I sigh as I slam my diary shut and slip it onto my wooden antique bookshelf.

“Hurry up, tonight is the ball!” my father reminds me.

Then I remember; tonight is the ball! The prince is looking for a wife. I hope that he will pick me. I race downstairs to find the servants preparing my step-mom and my step-sister’s hairs. I watch a servant struggle with hairspray to put up my stepmother’s tangled brown dyed hair. I swear, my stepmother has gone through 10 bottles of hairspray this week!

“Hi Elle,” Stephanie and Belle chorus happily.

“Hi,” I mutter as a servant ushers me into a silk chair. I admire my natural golden hair and my blue eyes in a golden-crusted mirror.

“Elle, you’re finally here!” my father booms.

“Yeah,” I mutter.

“I should be off, the kingdom that is hosting the ball is the next village or two away.” He heads for the door.

“Have fun, sweetie,” Aditha coyly farewells to him as she glares at me.

“Bye,” I smile at him.

I don’t know why Aditha hates me so much. Her daughters are so nice. Once my father leaves, she narrows her eyes at me and commands, “Before you go, you have to mop all the floors so they’re as shiny as the top of the Eiffel Tower, clean the windows, sweep the porch, and all the other chores.”

I stare at her with my mouth open and glance outside at the Eiffel Tower in the distance. The servants usually do all that stuff. Also, my father will be expecting me at the ball.

“Mom, she’s never going to finish that!” Belle cries.

“Just let her go.” Stephanie knows what her mom is up to.

“What do you know?” Aditha shoots at her daughters.

Stephanie withdraws and sits helplessly.

“Well, get a move on,” Aditha barks at me.

My heart broken, I grab the gray-headed mop and prepare a fresh bucket of warm water and soap as my stepmother and stepsisters stride out of the door — well, only Aditha strides. My stepsisters mouth “I’m sorry” as they shuffle out the door to meet the royal carriage. I start to mop and mop. Hot tears fill my eyes but I blink them back. My stepmother is horrible.

* * *

I have been mopping for an hour now. I stand back to admire my work. Better than anything I’ve ever done. Then, my eyes fill with tears as I remember how I should be at the ball but I am stuck doing chores. Before I can blink back my tears, they pour out like water from a faucet. Down and down they come as I race outside to the courtyard garden. I lay on the bench staring at the stars.

“I wish to go to the ball,” I whisper.

As if somebody can hear me, a tornado of sparkles form in front of me. I shield my eyes from the bright light. From the bright light tunnel emerges a lady wearing a clown costume?!

“Oops, wrong appearance,” she apologizes.

“Wow,” I stutter, finding my voice.

“Hello dear, I have come to grant your wish,” she promises.

“You mean you’re real?” I stare, forgetting my manners.

“Yes dear, you can call me Annabelle, your fairy godmother,” she laughs.

“MY WHAT?!” Now I’m confused.

Annabelle doesn’t respond. Instead, she flicks her wand and suddenly, I’m standing in a long white gown, a tiara, a lot of makeup, and glass slippers. All I can do is stare at myself. My golden hair is curled and down. I can’t even recognize myself!

“Now, I need your help,” Annabelle approves of me. “Gather a watermelon.”

I skip to the watermelon patch. Groaning, I gingerly lift the watermelon up. It’s so heavy that I drop it with a thump. Seeing that I clearly can’t carry the fat watermelon, Annabelle gives me a hand. She waves her hand and the watermelon levitates, then zips through the air. After Annabelle sets it down I ask, “What else shall I do?”

“Just watch.” Annabelle smiles mysteriously.

She gracefully whisks her hand. Then a swirl of dust gathers. Abruptly, I’m standing in front of a gold carriage with elegant white horses and an attractively handsome usher. I feel a slight pang of guilt that Stephanie and Belle can’t ride with me.

“Have fun!” Annabelle’s lips creep into a smile.

“Oh, I will,” I grin and head for the carriage.

The usher ushers me into a cozy carriage. There is a blanket and pillows. It looks like a bed! I plop down. The carriage lurches to a start. The ride takes forever, but finally, the carriage pulls up in front of the huge grand palace. It has golden pillars and carefully carved stone statues. It is much grander than our castle. I stand up as the usher takes my hand. I step down. After taking a deep breath I head for the grand entrance.

When I get in, my senses are confused. It smells like lamb and pork. There are so many sounds of people laughing and people crying because the prince declined them. My eyes immediately land on the prince. He is wearing a silk suit and a midnight black top hat. He looks around 17. The sight of my stepsisters catch my eye. They are hanging around the food table looking miserable. Their mom is nowhere in sight. I rush over to them.

“Psst, Belle, Stephanie,” I whisper.

“Is that you Elle?” Stephanie looks hopeful.

“You look extraordinary,” Belle is amazed.

“Yes, it is,” I surprise them.

“How did you manage to get here?” Belle is confused.

Before I can reply, the prince comes over!

“Umm, would you like to dance?” he asks awkwardly.

“Yes, yes yes yes!” I exclaim jumping up and down. “I mean, yes.” I calm down and smooth my dress, embarrassed.

He takes my hand and leads me to the dance floor. We start to dance a slow dance. I blush when I step on his feet a few times. I am enjoying myself so much until Aditha interrupts us. She bats her eyelashes and smiles an innocent smile.

“Would you care to dance?” She glares at me. Aditha doesn’t know who I am, but she knows that the prince likes me. I figure that she will probably find out who I am so I race for the door. The prince chases after me. Some people hurriedly move out of the way. Other people swoon over the prince slowing him down. I take advantage of this and hurry down the palace stairs. Midway, I trip and one of my glass slippers slide off my foot. The prince is right behind me so I don’t bother to pick it up. Tripping over my own feet, I climb into the carriage.

“GO, GO, GO!” I holler at the driver at the top of my lungs.

Startled, he slaps the reigns and we are off at the speed of wind. I gasp for breath as I watch a disappointed prince pick up the glass slipper I dropped.

Soon enough, we pull up in front of the palace. As soon as I leap off, the carriage disappears in a poof and in its place is a watermelon? I’m so tired from all the drama from tonight that I collapse on my bed and fall asleep almost instantly.

The next morning, I wake up to find a black-haired girl shaking me. I groggily sit up. Turns out, the black-haired girl is Belle, and Stephanie is pacing back and forth my room.

“Hi,” I stretch.

“About last night,”Belle starts.

I gulp.

“We need to talk,” Stephanie finishes.

“I’m sorry if you wanted to dance with him, it’s just that I was so excited,” I blurt out.

“No, it’s not that,” Belle smiles kindly.

“The thing is, the prince is having every maiden in the kingdom try on the glass slipper that you left behind last night,” Stephanie tells me the truth.

“Well, what’s so bad about that?” I ask.

“Mom is NOT going to let you try on that glass slipper,” Belle warns.

“We just wanted to give you a heads up,” Stephanie and Belle turn around and leave.

As if on cue, the banging of the gold door knocker echos through the castle. Father went to run some errands. Is it possible that he’s back? Aditha rushes to the door and peeks through the window. It’s the prince! Aditha grins wickedly and comes in my direction. Obviously, she does not want me to see the prince. She pulls me up the stairs and shoves me in the attic. She smiles her evil smile as she closes the door and locks it. I sit on the ground and start to cry. I cry and cry until I can cry no more. I plop down on the old ripped sofa, grab a random notebook and start writing.

 

Dear Diary,

Right now I am locked up in the dusty old attic. Aditha locked me in here so the prince couldn’t get to me. I plan on getting revenge on her later. Maybe I will swap her hairspray with a chemical that makes her hair fall out. Or, I could razor her hair off while she’s sleeping. I wish she would disappear.

 

Abruptly, a swirl of dust starts. Then it grows bigger and bigger until Annabelle steps out.

“Oh dear,” she muses, “what has happened here?” she singsongs.

“Aditha locked me up here so I wouldn’t be able to see the prince,” I explain.

“Well, let’s get you out of here,” she pulls her wand out.

“Wait, can you make Aditha nicer?” I plead.

“I guess, but you have to do your part,” Annabelle considers this.

“What’s my part?” I am eager to know.

“You have to be extra nice to Aditha for a day,” she informs me.

“WHAT? I am already nice to her every second I see her.” There must be a mistake.

“Observe carefully,” she waves her wand and disappears.

I sit in silence until I am disturbed by the sound of a lock clicking. Is it possible? Is father home? Stephanie’s head pops in the doorway grinning and holding up a shining silver key.

“Did you really do it for me?” I gape.

“Yeah, now hurry up,” Stephanie’s eyes twinkle.

I race down the stairs just in time to see my stepmother struggle to fit her foot in the petite glass slipper. Her eyes become wide open as she sees me. The prince’s face lights up as he escorts me into a chair and slips the glass slipper onto my foot. It fits! All of a sudden, I am standing in the creamy white dress from the night before. Aditha’s mouth hangs open and my sisters just smile. The prince whisks me away.

I can’t believe this is happening. I am finally meeting Prince Oliver’s family. King Royce is very kind and Prince Oliver is very polite. The townsfolk show much favor towards their King and Queen. Queen Rose cares much about them.

Then, I think of my mother, Queen Alice. The people of our kingdom loved her. She gave the poor money. That is why the news of her death shocked everybody. I will never forget our last walk before she got sick. None of us realized that she would get sick all of a sudden. By the time we found out she had been hiding this secret, she had already passed away.

If I accepted Aditha wouldn’t I be betraying my real mother? Besides, nobody could replace her. She knew how to cheer me up when I was sad. No one else made me feel the same way. Aditha’s coronation day was scheduled to be next Friday. I can’t do anything to stop it. I have tried talking to father but he says to give her a chance. My thoughts are interrupted by Prince Oliver.

“Could Princess Elle and I have some time alone?”

“Why of course dear,” his mother winks at me.

“I don’t see why not,” his father agrees.

“Sure,” I shrug.

The prince and I walk up to his room. It is almost an exact replica of my room except it is blue instead of pink. We plop down on two chairs.

“That stepmother of yours is really … interesting,” he smiles.

“Oh yeah, try living with her,” I laugh.

“How do you deal with her?” Prince Oliver asks.

“Ugh, she’s so annoying,” I roll my eyes.

“So, shall we start planning the wedding?” he offers.

“Sure,” I am pleased.

I lay on my bed full from my delicious dinner. Father was very proud and Aditha kept on glaring at me. It will be super hard to be nice to her for a whole day. I wonder why I even agreed to do it. My work better pay off. Well, I’d better go to bed, I have to be nice to Aditha for a whole day. However will I do that.

I yawn as I get out of my comfy bed. I check my golden clock. It’s ten past eight. Only my step sisters will be up. Should I tell them about my fairy godmother? I pull on a sky blue dress and comb through my silky blonde hair. Then I head downstairs.

Sunlight pours through the silver-encrusted windows. It shines on the royal red carpet. I skip to the den, full of energy. I expect Stephanie and Belle to be sitting on the leather couch playing with dolls or something. To my surprise, the den is empty. It seems spooky almost. I plop down and sit. Now I’m wondering what to do. Possibly take a walk? I get up and trudge to the main hall. I push open the glass door. The fresh spring air welcomes me. The puffy white clouds and the perfect blue sky notified me that it would be a warm day. Maybe I could invite Aditha on a walk around the castle. I make my way around the castle and back inside the main hall. Waken up by my exercise, I zip to the den expecting to see Stephanie and Belle. Sure enough, they are sitting on the couch playing cards.

“Hey,” I casually sit down besides Stephanie.

“You’re early,” Belle jokes.

“Haha, very funny,” I sarcastically laugh.

Just then, father comes in.

“Hate to ruin your party, girls, but breakfast is in the dining hall,” he points his thumb towards the dining hall. We all get up and shuffle to the dining hall.

“Hey, umm Aditha?” I stutter.

“What,” she snaps.

“Uhh, I was wondering if you wanted to go shopping with me at the Central Market today?” I ask.

“If you’re up to something…” she warns.

“No, I’m not, I was just wondering if you wanted to go shopping,” I lie.

“Fine,” she agrees sullenly.

I stare at myself in the mirror. I look fabulous. I’m wearing a white and blue dress. It’s quite simple, but beautiful. I skip down the stairs to meet Aditha so we can go shopping. Soon enough, Aditha comes gliding down the marble staircase in her red velvety dress.

“You look pretty,” I fib just so I seem nice.

Aditha’s expression softens and she smiles.

“You look pretty good yourself,” she remarks.

“Let’s go,” I lead her to the big carriage.

“First stop, the Central Marketplace!” the driver, Trevor, jokes.

I jump off and wait for Aditha.

“Where do you want to go first?” I ask her.

“How about we go to Fashion 101?” she replies.

“Sure,” I head for the brick store which has a huge sign saying: Fashion 101.

“How does this look?” Aditha strikes a pose in a blue strapless flowy dress.

“You look perfect!” I smile.

Aditha has became nicer, so I think maybe Anabelle’s spell worked. I’ve been nice to Aditha for a WHOLE day. Aditha has been nice and she has a pretty good sense of fashion. Usually, I don’t pay much attention to what she wears. I’m beginning to think that maybe Aditha has a good side.

“Do these shoes match?” she stands up straight. On her feet there are a pair of silver high heels.

“Definitely.”  She actually looks good. “Umm, Aditha, can we leave?” I am getting so impatient.

“Sure, let me check out first.” She goes into the dressing room to take off her outfit.

We have been shopping all day and I got a few outfits. I’m starting to think she is nice. Aditha comes out. She goes to the cashier and pays. Then, we stride to the carriage.

“Thanks for helping me pick out some clothes; I really like your fashion sense,” Aditha surprises me.

 

Dear diary,

Today was interesting. I was nice to Aditha for a WHOLE DAY!!!! You wouldn’t believe this but she’s actually nice!!  I hate to admit it, but I’m starting to like her.

 

Suddenly, my fairy godmother pops out behind my dresser. She smiles.

“So, how’s it going?” she casually asks.

“Great! Your spell worked!” I slam my diary shut and grin.

“No, actually I didn’t cast any spell,” she informs me.

“WHAT?” I’m so confused.

“I tricked you into thinking that I had casted a spell,” her eyes twinkle.

I finally realize. The only reason Aditha was mean to me was because of MY actions, not hers. I didn’t even realize it! Abruptly I recall: flipping my hair, admiring my blue eyes, glancing warily at Aditha’s hair; I was the one who had problems. Of course, she could have been nicer, but still, it was me all along! I look at Annabelle with my mouth wide open. She gives one more of her sly smiles and disappears into thin air. I rethink all of this. From now on, I will be nice to Aditha. I pledge to myself as I lay down on my soft bed.

Suddenly, my head lands on a hard box. I sit straight up. There is a fancy box. On it, there is a card that says:

From, Aditha

I open it and find a pair of delicate glass slippers. They gleam in the moonlight that floods in from the huge window by my bed. It’s like a truce. Even though I’m not ready to forget my real mom, I will make an effort to be nice to Aditha. I have learned an important lesson: look at yourself before you pick out other people’s problems. I carefully slip on my glass slippers and I smile.

 

The End

Zombie Attack!

Kids vs. Zombi

 

Thump!

“I hate homework!” said Tyler, an 11-year-old boy who lived in Manville Town. Ding, Dong!  

“I’ll get it!” Tyler mumbled.

The door creaked open by itself. He was about to get a broom for defense when a nerf dart came charging at Tyler’s face. Bam! A red dot was marked on his face.

“Heeeee Llll Oooo!” someone shouted. It sounded so familiar, wait … was it- “Hi Tyler, wanna go to the zombie convention?” said Austin. “I heard they’re doing a science experiment.”

Two blue-colored strips of paper were stuffed in his fist. His golden doodle, also known as Mike, the talking flying robot dog, stood next to him.

“Sure, but what’s with the wacky, hurtful, and dramatic entrance!” Tyler screamed. “Let’s go!”

They dashed to the path in the dark woods. While they were walking, a zombie leaked from the zombie convention. His name was Steve, and he would do anything to survive. Be careful, Tyler and friends.

Swish! Swoosh!

“Huh?” said Tyler. “Someone there?” Austin looked at him suspiciously.

“Um … I think my super hearing hears a groaning sound,” said Mike.

“Well, your hearing is broken,” complained Austin.

Rarrrrrrrrrrrrrrr! Tyler stood there frozen looking at the ugly creature. He stood about 15-feet tall with blood dripping from his body. O … M … G! They all dashed away from the zombie and straight into a building. Bam!

“Ow, that hurt,” said Austin. Crash! Steve had just thrown a piece of concrete that cracked the wall of the building. The three friends sprinted with a screech into another path in the woods as Tyler grabbed a heavy tree branch.

“This might come in handy, especially when we’re being chased by a zombie,” said Tyler.

Ahhhhhhhhh! The zombie grabbed Austin with a wicked laugh.

“Ah, ha, ha!” yelled the Zombie. “You fellow creatures with flesh and brains may call me Steve.”

Tyler tried to stab Steve with the branch, but Steve just knocked him out with a flick!

“HEY!” screamed Mike as he started to fly and charge at Steve. “Give back my Owner!”

Flick! Tyler was shocked as he saw a dead flying dog rolling next to him.

“Tyler, here’s a wand! Turn it on!” screamed Austin as he threw a wand at Tyler. Tyler caught the wand, looking at it with a constipated face.

“IT’S THE MOST STRONGEST WEAPON IN THE UNIVERSE!” said Austin with a very red face. Boom! Yellow, disgusting liquid drooled from Steve’s hands to Tyler’s feet. Then he put it in a jar.         

“NOOOOOOOO!” said Tyler as he turned on the wand. It started to grow shinier and shinier until it was a bright shiny metal wand! Tyler set a cutting-arm-off spell on Steve’s arm until he only had one arm left.

“Arghhhhhhhhhh!” screamed Steve in pain. His arm had come clean off.

As Tyler fainted on the grass with exhaustion, Steve was busy running away trying to put back on his arm. “You will pay for this, literally, I need your money for the surgery!” said Steve. Steve started stomping down the path to the convention.

At sunset Tyler finally woke up, then groaned with anger as he remembered that Austin was dead. When he started to lie down again, he heard an electrical shock on the ground.

“Gahhhh!” Tyler yelled. “Oh, it’s just Mike, oh he’s dead. Hmm … what’s this?” Tyler took a look at Mike’s mouth and saw a letter hanging from it. He took it out and read it.

“Dear fellow stupid flesh creature, I have your friend here and am planning to reform him and torture him to death. Come now and try to kill me or you can just sit there and act like a total weirdo and I’ll send a hoard of zombies with magic proof armour in about an hour, no worries. By the way I’m in the zombie convention.”

Tyler grumbled then said: “Fix Mike, magic wand.” The wires in Mike’s butt started to rewire and stopped smoking and spitting brown stuff. In a half-second Mike was standing on the grass with brand new wings spreading out.

“Ahhhh, robot heaven was not very pleasant or fun at all,” commented Mike, like he was not excited to be alive again.

 

In the Zombie Convention

When Steve got his arm stitched on, he brought the jar of Austin to a big tank in the Zombie convention. It read:

“Put yellow liquid in here to reform body, and put clothes in to prevent shattering eyes, beware of horror.”

Steve dumped the disgusting yellow liquid into the big container with clothes, then Austin started to reform.

KABOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOM! Austin was screaming in horror, and was kicking the glass like a maniac.

“Relax, you can’t break the glass, and I can’t hear you because the glass is bulletproof so it’s very hard. You should know, your weird species invented it. For once, your species isn’t worthless,” said Steve. Austin tried to yell, then started to wiggle in pain like he was doing the Harlem Shake. Steve grumbled something about him still reforming, then walked out the door.

Tyler, please hurry and save me so we can defeat Steve, HURRY! thought Austin, as he groaned with pain.

 

 

Tyler and Mike

“I hope Austin is okay. Steve said something about torturing him to death, so he could experience pain,” said Tyler.

Tyler started to train Mike. His flying abilities were a little stupid. He kept flying in circles and running into trees with a shock noise.

“Judging from your super duper new wings, this has something to do with your skills of flying,” explained Tyler.

“Well, okay, but Austin is still in trouble, let’s use the GPS installed in my brain to get to the zombie convention,” said Mike.

Two hours later, Mike spotted a large triangle shaped building that stood right in front of Tyler and the doggy. RARRRRRRRRRRRRRR!

Standing in front of Mike stood Steve. Swish! A hoard of zombies suddenly appeared in the bushes.

“Explosion spell!” yelled Tyler. Burning dynamite spread into the air and to the hoard. The explosion was as loud as a tiger roaring. Gray smoke from the explosion made Tyler’s nose sting.

“Mike! Go and use your weapons from your stomach!” screamed Tyler.

Mike started to open up its majestic wings and an iron sword stuck out of his belly. Then he started to charge at Steve, but he must’ve lost balance because he spun around in circles and cut a tree into two equal pieces then crashed into the building making a giant hole. Well, that must’ve been really funny because the zombies started cracking up with weird noises like, harr! Pla! Wa! All except Steve was laughing.

“What is wrong with you brainless maniacs! You’re embarrassing you and I! CHARGE!” yelled Steve in anger. Tyler yelled an invisible spell and disappeared in a flash.

“Kill spell!” Tyler said. Green smoke swirled around the zombies (including Steve) then disappeared with sparkles.

Tyler mouthed, What the sparkles?

“If you read my letter all the way, it said my zombies had magic proof armour. Now, zombies, use laser eyes,” demanded Steve. Zipppp! Mike came speeding down with the iron sword, fling! He had reflected the laser hit!

The laser hit had exploded 30 of the zombies. But there were still a hundred more.

“Ahhhhhhhhh! How dare you kill any of my zombie friends, only I do that, you will pay!” screamed Steve.

Yellow mass formed in his hands, then he let it go in the air, with one single flick! The mass headed toward Mike and Tyler.

“Protection spell!” yelled Tyler. A pink bubble formed around Mike and Tyler. KABOOOOOOOM! They flew about 100 feet backwards from Steve and flew in mid-air then landed with a CRASH in a tree.  

“Yes! He’s dead!” Steve yelled with joy. “Now I can go eat him, I’m hungry for meat.”

 

Austin

POW! Austin had kicked the glass with all his might.

“ENOUGH ALREADY!” yelled the zombie who guarded the exit.

The zombie startled Austin so much, when he kicked the glass one last time, it cracked. The zombie looked back, then he took out his walkie talkie.

“The flesh creature cracked the glass, we need to do something quick,” he said.

Three zombies came in the room looking proud like they won the olympics.

The one in the middle lost his head. The one on the left had a knife stuck in his or her head, and the one on the right was perfectly fine, in fact he looked kind of human.

Oh my god, maybe he just got turned into a zombie, if that’s how Steve makes a zombie, thought Austin.

Pop! The three zombies took off the glass, and the water from Austin’s tank spilled onto the zombies and Austin fell face first on the marble floor. “Oww, that hurt,” Austin said as blood rolled down his face from his nose.

The three zombies shoved Austin hard out the door, then they handcuffed him. That made Austin think he was the world’s worst criminal.

“We are taking you to be tortured in the Doom of Terror room, but first I need to go to the bathroom,” said one zombie.

A little of what looked like orange mass formed in Austin’s hand.

“What the — ”

“Hey, move along!” one zombie interrupted.

This time, the explosion was louder than a plane crashing.

All of the zombies that held Austin prisoner had been blown up by something, and now the alarm was ringing. It was now that Austin realized that there was a bright orange mass in his hands.

WHAT KIND OF LIQUID WAS IN THE TANK? he thought.

He ran back to the room he had been reformed from, the tank had a sticker that was partly torn off that read: “This will give life-forms awesome powers, it can be use to blow up stuff, CAUTION.”

“There he is! Rarr!” a zombie said as he smiled confidently like Austin had no chance of killing him.

Austin quickly formed orange mass and blew the zombie up, arms and legs were all over the place.

“Well, that zombie was ignorant, probably because they don’t have brains,” Austin said.

He ran outside to see that Steve was leading a zombie army to a place with smoke. Austin thought maybe it was Tyler and Mike that got defeated by Steve’s army. He had to help them quickly. Austin had tried to grab Steve’s attention by blasting a few zombies away easily.

“HOW DARE YOU!” Steve thundered.

Austin formed another circle of mass and threw it at Steve.

Boom! Part of Steve’s shirt burned up into ashes when he fell down.

“Oh, you wanna play?” Steve muttered as he got back up.

Yellow light glowed in his eyes, green dust lifted him up. He lifted his hand up, and suddenly Steve stood there holding a bright sword in his hands.  

 

 

Mike

Tyler woke up just to see that Mike was standing on his leg trying to wake him up.

Explosion booms were ringing in his ears and his vision was blurry.

Tyler looked in the direction of the zombie convention and saw a mysterious figure that was fighting Steve. It looked a lot like Austin. As Tyler got his vision back, he could see that the figure was really Austin!

When Mike saw that Tyler was awake, he flew to Austin just to reflect a laser from a zombie.

“Boy, blasting me with your powers is useless, unless you also have a wand, you can’t kill me,” Steve explained. “You see, you need to use a wand and your powers to kill me, and your friend is dead. Once I eat you, I will be the most powerful being in the WORLD!”

WHAM! A laser came from out of nowhere and hit Steve. Tyler had saved him!

Austin had wondered why he came back to save him. He could’ve just snuck home. Just then, he remembered that he had saved Tyler from falling over a cliff when they both went skiing together.

This made up for that, they were definitely good friends.  When they tried combining their powers to defeat Steve, he slashed his sword at them. But they dodged as fast as lightning, and when their powers were fully combined, an electric ball formed and they threw it at Steve as he folded his arms to defend himself.

BOOOOOOOOOOOOOM! Dust flooded the area, and Austin and Tyler coughed maniacally. Mike stood there like the dust was the fresh air on a bright sunny day.

“Mike!” Austin snapped, “Use your fan!”

Large fans spread out from Mike’s head, his eyes glowed as the fans blew the dust away. As the dust cleared, the zombies and Steve were nowhere to be seen.

Steve had exploded, so the zombies disappeared and went into the spirit world.

They cheered happily as they rolled on the grass.

On the way home, Tyler and Mike thought they had forgotten something.

“Tyler, thanks for saving my life, I wouldn’t have been here if it wasn’t for you,”

Austin thanked him.

Tyler blushed as he looked the other way. He was obviously shy.

They walked about three miles and still, their house was nowhere to be seen.

They soon passed a sign that said, Right path = Manville Town, Straight path = Zombie convention = 5 miles long. OH NO! They forgot to go to the Zombie convention!

“Mike, open up your wings, we’re riding on you to go back to the zombie convention to learn how to defeat them. Giddy up!” Tyler yelled.

 

The End

 

Don’t go into the dark

Chapter #1                         

Let me tell you a story where everyone has a shadow, and only I knew they were there.

My mom said, “Emily, come down and eat breakfast. You’re an adult, you need to send applications for colleges. Just because it’s spring break, doesn’t mean you actually have a break.”

I heard her walk up the stairs. One second later, I find my mother dead on the carpet of my room and a bloody knife in my hand. I just stood there, my insides melting, and my one tear trickling down my left cheek. I thought, Did I kill her? No I couldn’t have, I would remember, and that was the most I could cry.

At that moment I ran downstairs screaming, “How come I hadn’t heard her scream? She would always be there when I needed her, where is she when I need her now? She’s dead. If I would have come down sooner my shadow wouldn’t have murdered my mom.’’  I felt like I had killed her but I knew it was my shadow.

I took a delicate glass vase and smashed it on my head. When I woke up people in white bodysuits were dragging me into the vehicle for the mental institution. The neighbors must have called them; they must think I’m being paranoid by something supernatural. My instincts kicked in and I fought so hard so the men in the white suits couldn’t check my pockets and take my cellphone away.

 

Chapter #2

The next morning I woke up in a mental hospital. The room was grey because of the dimmed lights, like in World War Z. The bed was a steel bed set with a worn out mattress. I walked over into the bathroom that had no door. It had a mirror that was permanently foggy and a rusty bathtub, there was a faucet that only dripped.

I ran and peered into the hallway from the window and screamed to the doctor and guards, “You can’t lock me in here, my shadow will kill me like it did my mom. It follows me everywhere I go! Shadows aren’t supernatural, at least not the ones I’m talking about. They are the ones that need to be in this jail cell, they are the mental ones. They are smart, I don’t know why, and I don’t know why they like murdering people!”

The doctor came with two different types of poison, as I like to call them. They say it will help me, but it will blind some of my vision to see the shadows, then I will just have 20/20 vision, like the average person. Then I can’t see my shadow coming. They are dark and stay in corners, but when you look at them they leave out of sight.

Bing bing.

I got a text saying “you never can” and every whiteness goes into the dark.

Who texted me? Who’s there? And why am I in a mental hospital? Then I remember it’s those drugs, they’re making me forget everything and I’m so close. I get a text saying, “You were never so but never so close to what.”

 

Chapter #3

The next morning they let me go. But I didn’t know why my mom would let them take me. She and I needed to have a discussion.

Bing bing.

I get a text saying, “can’t wait to get into the dark again, it’s going to be killer.”

 

Chapter #4

I walk out of the car and go in my house to see the police pulling out a stretcher with a cover over it. It falls away and I see it’s my mother. I stand there in a state of shock.

The next morning I got dressed, ate breakfast, and had a morning of tears and emptiness. I decided I was going to investigate to see if my neighbor’s had any info on my mother’s death. I walk over to my neighbor Sarah’s house and she said she thought I had killed my mom, she claims to have seen me stab her and then run out my room screaming. That’s all she said before slamming the door in my face, acting like I was some sort of monster. I felt all alone and there was no one to comfort me.

Bing bing.

“Don’t be sad for long, your next victim will arrive. Guess who.”

 

Chapter#5

The next morning it’s back to school and I’m already ready to get my school on. I sent applications for Columbia University. I couldn’t stop thinking about that text I got last night.

Bing bing.

I get a text saying, “Thinking about me? So touching. Oh and don’t plan too far ahead, there’s going to be a bump in the road.”

One minute later I get a voicemail singing, “Look both ways before you cross the street.” As I listen to the voicemail, I go to the fridge to get some milk.

A toy car pops up on the kitchen table. I drop the milk, stare at the car and run up the stairs. Once I get upstairs I prepare for the shower, but when I got in the shower the car was there and I was half dry.

“Why is this car following me? Wait, why am I half dry?” I said in frustration.

“Is it…”

My head starts to ache and I yell, “Make it stop! Make it stop!”

But it wouldn’t, so I started pounding on my head so the aching would stop. After that I don’t remember much, but the car appeared on the sink in the bathroom, with a doll strapped to the bottom of the car. When it appeared I was out of the shower with my phone in my hand with a text that had not been sent, and that left me asking unanswered questions.

I was so freaked out I started babbling questions like, ”What just happened? Why aren’t I in the shower? Huh? I’m so confused. Why am I so confused?” I say frustratedly. I look at my phone to see the text.  

The text says, “You killed her.”

I say to myself, “Who?” I call the mental institution and see if I can get the footage of me in the hospital room . No one is going to believe I am the killer, I wouldn’t hurt a fly. When I ask him to see the footage of me, they say that it’s private information and then he hung up on me.

I say to myself, “Well he’s a jerk.”

I thought to myself, I’ll just have to sneak in. Then I yelled, ”Yes!” and then said sorry to the neighbors.

I dress up in a black shirt, stretchy leather leggings, boots, and a black beanie. I get in my car and drive to the hospital. When I get there, I remember I took a climbing class. I took a rock and aimed it,  making sure I wasn’t facing the security camera and so the alarm wouldn’t go off, before I threw it at the window. Then I climbed up the brick wall and climbed in the window.

I ran to the general office. When I got there I took a bobby pin from my hair and picked the lock. When I got in, the footage of me was left on the screen, so played it. I stood there in shock. I got a headache again and a few minutes later I got a text saying, “It was you? Let’s get back into the dark.”

Every day I look at that stupid text trying to convince myself it was probably just one of my friends pranking me. But I had all the evidence. It was me. I didn’t want to believe it.

From then on, I cried myself to sleep. Some nights I would sleep in my mom’s bed because it made me feel safe. The next morning was my birthday and I called my dad to celebrate it with him, because he’s the only family I’ve got. The call goes right to voicemail. So I decide to walk over to his house.

Since my mom and him were divorced they wanted seeing me to be very convenient for them. When I get there I knock on the door. He opened it and gave me a hug and said, ”Watch it, I have a garden knife in my hand.’’

I got a migraine. I howled, ”Make it stop! Make it stop, please‘’!

The next thing I knew was my dad was on the ground. His throat had been slit. ”He bled to death,’’ I said in shock. “What? Oh my gosh, what?’’ I screamed and ran.

When I got in the house I fell and cried with no one to hold me up. The next morning I went into my bright blue bathroom with a large marble white circular bathtub with a curtain and shower head. When I looked in the mirror, I saw something in myself.

I saw a murderer.

Even though I wasn’t certain, I had a feeling. I mean all those times my mom looked at me like I was a monster when I even mentioned a sleepover, or when I told my mom about me and my friends playing army. I wonder if she was thinking I am the enemy and not the hero. But the only thing that doesn’t add up is how would she know about my situation and not tell me. My mom was my best friend.

The next morning I awoke to a sudden loud alarm. I walk out of my room. As I walk down the stairs, I remembered I have school today. So I ran upstairs to take a shower, and get dressed in my crop top, donut leggings, and combat boots. I grab my black hoodie and backpack and ran out of the house.

I got in my car and drove very swiftly. I arrived and checked the time. The parking lot was half empty and the whole world became blurry.

“Brr,” I shake my head and run inside.

This girl had the nerve to walk up to me and say, “You know my dad’s a cop right?”

“So?”

“So I heard you killed your mom.”

“What did you just say? You don’t know me! You can’t just walk up to me and say that! If you ever mention that I will — ”

“What? You’re gonna kill me?”

After that a sudden spark of rage and fire controlled my body and mentality. The next thing I knew was that I … I attacked her and people had to hold me back.

“Get off of me!!!” I screamed.

I walked away with fire in my eyes and wiped the waterfall of hurt, agony, and ferocity. My friend came to comfort me.

“No. Just stay away from me, please. I always drive people away, so why not now. Bye.” I walked away rapidly, weeping silently.

 

Chapter #6

I get in my car, turn on the radio, and unexpectedly the song “All by Myself’’ by Celine Dion plays. I was right up to the part “All by myself, don’t wanna be all by myself anymore.’’

When I got home I saw my stepmom. She screamed when she saw my Dad. I got out of the car and ran to the house. I observed my dad’s body. He was rotting. Quickly, I turned my head and walked inside. My baby step sister was crying. I walked up the stairs and into her room. I saw her screaming. I said, “It’s ok. No one is going to hurt — Aaah my head!” I screamed. This time I knew and saw what I was doing.

“No I won’t kill this innocent child!”

I feel like I was straining my neck I could hardly breath, then I collapsed. Officers, that’s all I remember, “Now let me out of this interrogation room, please.”

“Ma’am, we are not authorized to do that,” they replied.

“Fine.”

I stabbed myself in the stomach. If you’re wondering how I snuck in the knife, just remember, always think dark and maybe you will figure it out. Everyone deserves a chance to go into the dark.         

Max’s Story

Messi, the best soccer player, was shining in the light. The game was Barcelona VS Real Madrid. Ronaldo said hi to Messi. Messi said hi to Ronaldo. They were feeling good. But then Messi got hurt by trying to pass Ronaldo. But when he was doing that, he, by accident, tripped on his own foot. Before Messi got injured, Messi scored 99 goals. Ronaldo was impressed but felt sorry for him. Then, the GIANT RACCOON came in and killed everyone. He was a scientific experiment. What the GIANT RACCOON was trying to do was make all the raccoons in the world giant so he and his friends could take over the world, make all of humanity be his slave, and take over the entire galaxy.

“Muahahahaha,” said the GIANT RACCOON.

But one person said, “A raccoon is gonna make me a slave for the rest of my life? Just because he’s big and strong with a lazer gun? Okay that is pretty scary, but back to the story.”

“Blah blah blah, I won the World Cup,” said one of the slaves. The GIANT RACCOON was angry like an angry bird, and his face was as red as the red Angry Bird because from up there it sounded like “blah blah blah.” It was funny to the other racoons, but then the GIANT RACCOON got angry at them for laughing. But in that time, the GIANT RACCOON forgot all about the “blah blah blah” so he didn’t mind. Then the GIANT RACCOON hit one of the little racoons in the face.

“Haha,” said the GIANT RACCOON. “I hit you.”

Then it was a big argument, but in the meanwhile, the people were running for their lives. Once the argument finished, all the people were hiding far far away.

Now the racoons were arguing about that.

“It was your fault that they ran away.”

“No it was your fault that they ran away.”

In the meantime, all the people told the scientist with white lightning hair pointing up, a white scientist jacket, black shoes, and white pants to match with his shirt, to make some thing to destroy the raccoons for ever. So the scientist started to work in the lab, on his computer, and made pieces for the weapon that will destroy the raccoons. Meanwhile, the other people were getting their pitchforks and torches to kill the GIANT RACOON. Now the people want to test if forces can destroy the GIANT RACCOON, so they tried to hurt the GIANT RACCOON, but it didn’t work.

The GIANT RACCOON said, “Hahaha that tickles so much!” So the people went back to the lab to see if the scientist finished.

Once the people came the scientist said, “Done.”

Everybody cheered, “Hooray!” So then the scientist carried the gun to show the raccoon.

The raccoon said, “Haha, you think you will defeat me with that? How about you get the taste of your own medicine?”  Then he shot the gun and it hit the raccoon in the belly.

BOOOOOOOM!  The GIANT RACCOON was destroyed. Everyone cheered. The little raccoons even cheered. They didn’t like the GIANT RACCOON. So they shrunk themselves to be smaller again, and they all lived happily ever after.

“But wait!” cried L. Messi and C. Ronaldo. “We are still here and same as Neymar and James Rodriguez and Suarez.”

“But what about the soccer game?” cried someone.

”Yeah!” said someone else.